Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}553|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Misalignment: Even if IT builds the capabilities to pursue digital channels, the channels will underperform in realizing organizational goals if the channels and the goals are misaligned.
  • Ineffective analytics: Failure to integrate and analyze new data will undermine organizational success in influencer and sentiment identification.
  • Missed opportunity: If IT does not develop the capabilities to support these channels, then lead generation, brand promotion, and engagement opportunities will be lost.
  • Lack of control: Marketing is developing and depending on internal power users and agencies. This practice can isolate IT from digital marketing technology decision making.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Identify and understand the digital marketing channels that can benefit your organization.
  • Get stakeholder buy-in to facilitate collaboration between IT and product marketing groups to identify necessary IT capabilities.
  • Build IT capability by purchasing software, outsourcing, and training or hiring individuals with necessary skillsets.
  • Become transformational: use IT capabilities to support analytics that identify new customer segments, key influencers, and other invaluable insights.
  • Time is of the essence! It is easier to begin strengthening the relationship between marketing and IT today then it will be at any point in the future.
  • Being transformational means more than just enabling the channels marketing wants to pursue; IT must assist in identifying new segments and digital marketing opportunities, such as enabling influencer management.

Impact and Result

  • IT is involved in decision making and has a complete understanding of the digital channels the organization is going to migrate to or phase out if unused.
  • IT has the necessary capabilities to support and enable success in all relevant digital channel management technologies.
  • IT is a key player in ensuring that all relevant data from new digital channels is managed and analyzed in order to maintain a 360 degree view of customers and feed real-time campaigns.
  • This enables the organization to not only target existing segments effectively, but also to identify and pursue new opportunities not presented before.
  • These opportunities include: identifying new segments among social networks, identifying key influencers as a new target, identifying proactive service and marketing opportunities from the public social cloud, and conducting new competitive analyses on the public social cloud.

Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Make the case for building IT capabilities

Identify the symptoms of inadequate IT support of digital marketing to diagnose the problems in your organization.

  • Storyboard: Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success

2. Identify digital marketing opportunities to understand the need for action in your organization

Identify the untapped digital marketing value in your organization to understand where your organization needs to improve.

  • Digital Marketing Capability Builder Tool

3. Mobilize for action: get stakeholder buy-in

Develop a plan for communicating with stakeholders to ensure buy-in to the digital marketing capability building project.

  • Digital Marketing Communication Deck

4. Identify the product/segment-specific digital marketing landscape to identify required IT capabilities

Assess how well each digital channel reaches target segments. Identify the capabilities that must be built to enable digital channels.

5. Create a roadmap for building capabilities to enable digital marketing

Assess the people, processes, and technologies required to build required capabilities and determine the best fit with your organization.

[infographic]

Workshop: Build IT Capabilities to Enable Digital Marketing Success

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Identify Digital Marketing Opportunities

The Purpose

Determine the fit of each digital channel with your organizational goals.

Determine the fit of digital channels with your organizational structure and business model.

Compare the fit of digital channels with your organization’s current levels of use to:Identify missed opportunities your organization should capitalize on.Identify digital channels that your organization is wasting resources on.

Identify missed opportunities your organization should capitalize on.

Identify digital channels that your organization is wasting resources on.

Key Benefits Achieved

IT department achieves consensus around which opportunities need to be pursued.

Understanding that continuing to pursue excellent-fit digital channels that your organization is currently active on is a priority.

Identification of the channels that stopping activity on could free up resources for.

Activities

1.1 Define and prioritize organizational goals.

1.2 Assess digital channel fit with goals and organizational characteristics.

1.3 Identify missed opportunities and wasted resources in your digital channel mix.

1.4 Brainstorm creative ways to pursue untapped digital channels.

Outputs

Prioritized list of organizational goals.

Assigned level of fit to digital channels.

List of digital channels that represent missed opportunities or wasted resources.

List of brainstormed ideas for pursuing digital channels.

2 Identify Your Product-Specific Digital Marketing Landscape

The Purpose

Identify the digital channels that will be used for specific products and segments.

Identify the IT capabilities that must be built to enable digital channels.

Prioritize the list of IT capabilities.

Key Benefits Achieved

IT and marketing achieve consensus around which digital channels will be pursued for specific product-segment pairings.

Identification of the capabilities that IT must build.

Activities

2.1 Assess digital channel fit with specific products.

2.2 Identify the digital usage patterns of target segments.

2.3 Decide precisely which digital channels you will use to sell specific products to specific segments.

2.4 Identify and prioritize the IT capabilities that need to be built to succeed on each digital channel.

Outputs

Documented channel fit with products.

Documented channel usage by target segments.

Listed digital channels that will be used for each product-segment pairing.

Listed and prioritized capabilities that must be built to enable success on necessary digital channels.

3 Enable Digital Marketing Capabilities and Leverage Analytics

The Purpose

Identification of the best possible way to build IT capabilities for all channels.

Creation of a plan for leveraging transformational analytics to supercharge your digital marketing strategy.

Key Benefits Achieved

IT understanding of the costs and benefits of capability building options (people, process, and technology).

Information about how specific technology vendors could fit with your organization.

IT identification of opportunities to leverage transformational analytics in your organization.

Activities

3.1 Identify the gaps in your IT capabilities.

3.2 Evaluate options for building capabilities.

3.3 Identify opportunities for transformational analytics.

Outputs

A list of IT capability gaps.

An action plan for capability building.

A plan for leveraging transformational analytics.

Drive Technology Adoption

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}111|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
  • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

The project isn’t over if the new product or system isn’t being used. How do you ensure that what you’ve put in place isn’t going to be ignored or only partially adopted? People are more complicated than any new system and managing them through the change needs careful planning.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Cultivating a herd mentality, where people adopt new technology merely because everyone else is, is an important goal in getting the bulk of users using the new product or system. The herd needs to gather momentum though and this can be done by using the more tech-able and enthused to lead the rest on the journey. Identifying and engaging these key resources early in the process will greatly assist in starting the flow.

Impact and Result

While communication is key throughout, involving staff in proof-of-concept activities and contests and using the train-the-trainer techniques and technology champions will all start the momentum toward technology adoption. Group activities will address the bulk of users, but laggards may need special attention.

Drive Technology Adoption Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Drive Technology Adoption – A brief deck describing how to encourage users to adopt newly implemented technology.

This document will help you to ensure that newly implemented systems and technologies are correctly adopted by the intended recipients.

  • Drive Technology Adoption Storyboard
[infographic]

Further reading

Drive Technology Adoption

The project is over. The new technology is implemented. Now how do we make sure it's used?

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Technology endlessly changes and evolves. Similarly, business directions and requirements change, and these changes need to be supported by technology. Improved functionality and evolvement of systems, along with systems becoming redundant or unsupported, means that maintaining a static environment is virtually impossible.

Enormous amounts of IT budget are allocated to these changes each year. But once the project is over, how do you manage that change and ensure the systems are being used? Planning your technology adoption is vital.

Common Obstacles

The obstacles to technology adoption can be many and various, covering a broad spectrum of areas including:

  • Reluctance of staff to let go of familiar processes and procedures.
  • Perception that any change will add complications but not add value, thereby hampering enthusiasm to adopt.
  • Lack of awareness of the change.
  • General fear of change.
  • Lack of personal confidence.

Info-Tech’s Approach

Start by identifying, understanding, categorizing, and defining barriers and put in place a system to:

  • Gain an early understanding of the different types of users and their attitudes to technology and change.
  • Review different adoption techniques and analyze which are most appropriate for your user types.
  • Use a “Follow the Leader” approach, by having technical enthusiasts and champions to show the way.
  • Prevent access to old systems and methods.

Info-Tech Insight

For every IT initiative that will be directly used by users, consider the question, “Will the final product be readily accepted by those who are going to use it?” There is no point in implementing a product that no one is prepared to use. Gaining user acceptance is much more than just ticking a box in a project plan once UAT is complete.

The way change should happen is clear

Prosci specializes in change. Its ADKAR model outlines what’s required to bring individuals along on the change journey.

AWARENESS

  • Awareness means more than just knowing there’s a change occurring,
  • it means understanding the need for change.

DESIRE

  • To achieve desire, there needs to be motivation, whether it be from an
  • organizational perspective or personal.

KNOWLEDGE

  • Both knowledge on how to train during the transition and knowledge
  • on being effective after the change are required. This can only be done
  • once awareness and desire are achieved.

ABILITY

  • Ability is not knowledge. Knowing how to do something doesn’t necessarily translate to having the skills to do it.

REINFORCEMENT

  • Without reinforcement there can be a tendency to revert.

When things go wrong

New technology is not being used

The project is seen as complete. Significant investments have been made, but the technology either isn’t being used or is only partially in use.

Duplicate systems are now in place

Even worse. The failure to adopt the new technology by some means that the older systems are still being used. There are now two systems that fail to interact; business processes are being affected and there is widespread confusion.

Benefits not being realized

Benefits promised to the business are not being realized. Projected revenue increases, savings, or efficiencies that were forecast are now starting to be seen as under threat.

There is project blowout

The project should be over, but the fact that the technology is not being used has created a perception that the implementation is not complete and the project needs to continue.

Info-Tech Insight

People are far more complicated than any technology being implemented.

Consider carefully your approach.

Why does it happen?

POOR COMMUNICATION

There isn’t always adequate communications about what’s changing in the workplace.

FEAR

Fear of change is natural and often not rational. Whether the fear is about job loss or not being able to adapt to change; it needs to be managed.

TRAINING

Training can be insufficient or ineffective and when this happens people are left feeling like they don’t have the skills to make the change.

LACK OF EXECUTIVE SUPPORT

A lack of executive support for change means the change is seen as less important.

CONFLICTING VIEWS OF CHANGE

The excitement the project team and business feels about the change is not necessarily shared throughout the business. Some may just see the change as more work, changing something that already works, or a reason to reduce staff levels.

LACK OF CONFIDENCE

Whether it’s a lack of confidence generally with technology or concern about a new or changing tool, a lack of confidence is a huge barrier.

BUDGETARY CONSTRAINTS

There is a cost with managing people during a change, and budget must be allocated to allow for it.

Communications

Info-Tech Insight

Since Sigmund Freud there has been endless work to understand people’s minds.
Don’t underestimate the effect that people’s reactions to change can have on your project.

This is a Kubler-ross change curve graph, plotting the following Strategies: Create Alignment; Maximize Communication; Spark Motivation; Develop Capability; Share Knowledge

Communication plans are designed to properly manage change. Managing change can be easier when we have the right tools and information to adapt to new circumstances. The Kubler-Ross change curve illustrates the expected steps on the path to acceptance of change. With the proper communications strategy, each can be managed appropriately

Analyst perspective

Paul Binns – Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech

The rapidly changing technology landscape in our world has always meant that an enthusiasm or willingness to embrace change has been advantageous. Many of us have seen how the older generation has struggled with that change and been left behind.

In the work environment, the events of the past two years have increased pressure on those slow to adopt as in many cases they couldn't perform their tasks without new tools. Previously, for example, those who may have been reluctant to use digital tools and would instead opt for face-to-face meetings, suddenly found themselves without an option as physical meetings were no longer possible. Similarly, digital collaboration tools that had been present in the market for some time were suddenly more heavily used so everyone could continue to work together in the “online world.”

At this stage no one is sure what the "new normal" will be in the post-pandemic world, but what has been clearly revealed is that people are prepared to change given the right motivation.

“Technology adoption is about the psychology of change.”
Bryan Tutor – Executive Counsellor, Info-Tech

The Fix

  • Categorize Users
    • Gain a clear understanding of your user types.
  • Identify Adoption Techniques
    • Understand the range of different tools and techniques available.
  • Match Techniques To Categories
    • Determine the most appropriate techniques for your user base.
  • Follow-the-Leader
    • Be aware of the different skills in your environment and use them to your advantage.
  • Refresh, Retrain, Restrain
    • Prevent reversion to old methods or systems.

Categories

Client-Driven Insight

Consider your staff and industry when looking at the Everett Rogers curve. A technology organization may have less laggards than a traditional manufacturing one.

In Everett Rogers’ book Diffusion of Innovations 5th Edition (Free Press, 2005), Rogers places adopters of innovations into five different categories.

This is an image of an Innovation Adoption Curve from Everett Rogers' book Diffusion of Innovations 5th Edition

Category 1: The Innovator – 2.5%

Innovators are technology enthusiasts. Technology is a central interest of theirs, either at work, at home, or both. They tend to aggressively pursue new products and technologies and are likely to want to be involved in any new technology being implemented as soon as possible, even before the product is ready to be released.

For people like this the completeness of the new technology or the performance can often be secondary because of their drive to get new technology as soon as possible. They are trailblazers and are not only happy to step out of their comfort zone but also actively seek to do so.

Although they only make up about 2.5% of the total, their enthusiasm, and hopefully endorsement of new technology, offers reassurance to others.

Info-Tech Insight

Innovators can be very useful for testing before implementation but are generally more interested in the technology itself rather than the value the technology will add to the business.

Category 2: The Early Adopter – 13.5%

Whereas Innovators tend to be technologists, Early Adopters are visionaries that like to be on board with new technologies very early in the lifecycle. Because they are visionaries, they tend to be looking for more than just improvement – a revolutionary breakthrough. They are prepared to take high risks to try something new and although they are very demanding as far as product features and performance are concerned, they are less price-sensitive than other groups.

Early Adopters are often motivated by personal success. They are willing to serve as references to other adopter groups. They are influential, seen as trendsetters, and are of utmost importance to win over.

Info-Tech Insight

Early adopters are key. Their enthusiasm for technology, personal drive, and influence make them a powerful tool in driving adoption.

Category 3: The Early Majority – 34%

This group is comprised of pragmatists. The first two adopter groups belong to early adoption, but for a product to be fully adopted the mainstream needs to be won over, starting with the Early Majority.

The Early Majority share some of the Early Adopters’ ability to relate to technology. However, they are driven by a strong sense of practicality. They know that new products aren’t always successful. Consequently, they are content to wait and see how others fare with the technology before investing in it themselves. They want to see well-established references before adopting the technology and to be shown there is no risk.

Because there are so many people in this segment (roughly 34%), winning these people over is essential for the technology to be adopted.

Category 4: The Late Majority – 34%

The Late Majority are the conservatives. This group is generally about the same size as the Early Majority. They share all the concerns of the Early Majority; however, they are more resistant to change and are more content with the status quo than eager to progress to new technology. People in the Early Majority group are comfortable with their ability to handle new technology. People in the Late Majority are not.

As a result, these conservatives prefer to wait until something has become an established standard and take part only at the end of the adoption period. Even then, they want to see lots of support and ensure that there is proof there is no risk in them adopting it.

Category 5: The Laggard – 16%

This group is made up of the skeptics and constitutes 16% of the total. These people want nothing to do with new technology and are generally only content with technological change when it is invisible to them. These skeptics have a strong belief that disruptive new technologies rarely deliver the value promised and are almost always worried about unintended consequences.

Laggards need to be dealt with carefully as their criticism can be damaging and without them it is difficult for a product to become fully adopted. Unfortunately, the effort required for this to happen is often disproportional to the size of the group.

Info-Tech Insight

People aren’t born laggards. Technology projects that have failed in the past can alter people’s attitudes, especially if there was a negative impact on their working lives. Use empathy when dealing with people and respect their hesitancy.

Adoption Techniques

Different strokes for different folks

Technology adoption is all about people; and therefore, the techniques required to drive that adoption need to be people oriented.

The following techniques are carefully selected with the intention of being impactful on all the different categories described previously.

Technology Adoption: Herd Mentality; Champions; Force; Group Training; One-on-One; Contests; Marketing; Proof of Concept; Train the Trainer

There are multitudes of different methods to get people to adopt new technology, but which is the most appropriate for your situation? Generally, it’s a combination.

Technology Adoption: Herd Mentality; Champions; Force; Group Training; One-on-One; Contests; Marketing; Proof of Concept; Train the Trainer

Train the Trainer

Use your staff to get your message across.

Abstract

This technique involves training key members of staff so they can train others. It is important that those selected are strong communicators, are well respected by others, and have some expertise in technology.

Advantages

  • Cost effective
  • Efficient dissemination of information
  • Trusted internal staff

Disadvantages

  • Chance of inconsistent delivery
  • May feel threatened by co-worker

Best to worst candidates

  • Early Adopter: Influential trendsetters. Others receptive of their lead.
  • Innovator: Comfortable and enthusiastic about new technology, but not necessarily a trainer.
  • Early Majority: Tendency to take others’ lead.
  • Late Majority: Risk averse and tend to follow others, only after success is proven.
  • Laggard: Last to adopt usually. Unsuitable as Trainer.

Marketing

Marketing should be continuous throughout the change to encourage familiarity.

Abstract

Communication is key as people are comfortable with what is familiar to them. Marketing is an important tool for convincing adopters that the new product is mainstream, widely adopted and successful.

Advantages

  • Wide communication
  • Makes technology appear commonplace
  • Promotes effectiveness of new technology

Disadvantages

  • Reliant on staff interest
  • Can be expensive

Best to worst candidates

  • Early Majority: Pragmatic about change. Marketing is effective encouragement.
  • Early Adopter: Receptive and interested in change. Marketing is supplemental.
  • Innovator: Actively seeks new technology. Does not need extensive encouragement.
  • Late Majority: Requires more personal approach.
  • Laggard: Resistant to most enticements.

One-on-One

Tailored for individuals.

Abstract

One-on-one training sometimes is the only way to train if you have staff with special needs or who are performing unique tasks.
It is generally highly effective but inefficient as it only addresses individuals.

Advantages

  • Tailored to specific need(s)
  • Only relevant information addressed
  • Low stress environment

Disadvantages

  • Expensive
  • Possibility of inconsistent delivery
  • Personal conflict may render it ineffective

Best to worst candidates

  • Laggard: Encouragement and cajoling can be used during training.
  • Late Majority: Proof can be given of effectiveness of new product.
  • Early Majority: Effective, but not cost efficient.
  • Early Adopter: Effective, but not cost-efficient.
  • Innovator: Effective, but not cost-efficient.

Group Training

Similar roles, attitudes, and abilities.

Abstract

Group training is one of the most common methods to start people on their journey toward new technology. Its effectiveness with the two largest groups, Early Majority and Late Majority, make it a primary tool in technology adoption.

Advantages

  • Cost effective
  • Time effective
  • Good for team building

Disadvantages

  • Single method may not work for all
  • Difficult to create single learning pace for all

Best to worst candidates

  • Early Majority: Receptive. The formality of group training will give confidence.
  • Late Majority: Conservative attitude will be receptive to traditional training.
  • Early Adopter: Receptive and attentive. Excited about the change.
  • Innovator: Will tend to want to be ahead or want to move ahead of group.
  • Laggard: Laggards in group training may have a negative impact.

Force

The last resort.

Abstract

The transition can’t go on forever.

At some point the new technology needs to be fully adopted and if necessary, force may have to be used.

Advantages

  • Immediate full transition
  • Fixed delivery timeline

Disadvantages

  • Alienation of some staff
  • Loss of faith in product if there are issues

Best to worst candidates

  • Laggard: No choice but to adopt. Forces the issue.
  • Late Majority: Removes issue of reluctance to change.
  • Early Majority: Content, but worried about possible problems.
  • Early Adopter: Feel less personal involvement in change process.
  • Innovator: Feel less personal involvement in change process.

Contests

Abstract

Contests can generate excitement and create an explorative approach to new technology. People should not feel pressured. It should be enjoyable and not compulsory.

Advantages

  • Rapid improvement of skills
  • Bring excitement to the new technology
  • Good for team building

Disadvantages

  • Those less competitive or with lower skills may feel alienated
  • May discourage collaboration

Best to worst candidates

  • Early Adopter: Seeks personal success. Risk taker. Effective.
  • Innovator: Enthusiastic to explore limits of technology.
  • Early Majority: Less enthusiastic. Pragmatic. Less competitive.
  • Late Majority: Conservative. Not enthusiastic about new technology.
  • Laggard: Reluctant to get involved.

Incentives

Incentives don’t have to be large.

Abstract

For some staff, merely taking management’s lead is not enough. Using “Nudge” techniques to give that extra incentive is quite effective. Incentivizing staff either financially or through rewards, recognition, or promotion is a successful adoption technique for some.

Advantages

Encouragement to adopt from receiving tangible benefit

Draws more attention to the new technology

Disadvantages

Additional expense to business or project

Possible poor precedent for subsequent changes

Best to worst candidates

Early Adopter: Desire for personal success makes incentives enticing.

Early Majority: Prepared to change, but extra incentive will assist.

Late Majority: Conservative attitude means incentive may need to be larger.

Innovator: Enthusiasm for new technology means incentive not necessary.

Laggard: Sceptical about change. Only a large incentive likely to make a difference.

Champions

Strong internal advocates for your new technology are very powerful.

Abstract

Champions take on new technology and then use their influence to promote it in the organization. Using managers as champions to actively and vigorously promote the change is particularly effective.

Advantages

  • Infectious enthusiasm encourages those who tend to be reluctant
  • Use of trusted internal staff

Disadvantages

  • Removes internal staff from regular duties
  • Ineffective if champion not respected

Best to worst candidates

  • Early Majority: Champions as references of success provide encouragement.
  • Late Majority: Management champions in particular are effective.
  • Laggard: Close contact with champions may be effective.
  • Early Adopter: Receptive of technology, less effective.
  • Innovator: No encouragement or promotion required.

Herd Mentality

Follow the crowd.

Abstract

Herd behavior is when people discount their own information and follow others. Ideally all adopters would understand the reason and advantages in adopting new technology, but practically, the result is most important.

Advantages

  • New technology is adopted without question
  • Increase in velocity of adoption

Disadvantages

  • Staff may not have clear understanding of the reason for change and resent it later
  • Some may adopt the change before they are ready to do so

Best to worst candidates

  • Early Majority: Follow others’ success.
  • Late Majority: Likely follow an established proven standard.
  • Early Adopter: Less effective as they prefer to set trends rather than follow.
  • Innovator: Seeks new technology rather than following others.
  • Laggard: Suspicious and reluctant to change.

Proof of Concepts

Gain early input and encourage buy-in.

Abstract

Proof of concept projects give early indications of the viability of a new initiative. Involving the end users in these projects can be beneficial in gaining their support

Advantages

Involve adopters early on

Valuable feedback and indications of future issues

Disadvantages

If POC isn’t fully successful, it may leave lingering negativity

Usually, involvement from small selection of staff

Best to worst candidates

  • Innovator: Strong interest in getting involved in new products.
  • Early Adopter: Comfortable with new technology and are influencers.
  • Early Majority: Less interest. Prefer others to try first.
  • Late Majority: Conservative attitude makes this an unlikely option.
  • Laggard: Highly unlikely to get involved.

Match techniques to categories

What works for who?

This clustered column chart categorizes techniques by category

Follow the leader

Engage your technology enthusiasts early to help refine your product, train other staff, and act as champions. A combination of marketing and group training will develop a herd mentality. Finally, don’t neglect the laggards as they can prevent project completion.

This is an inverted funnel chart with the output of: Change Destination.  The inputs are: 16% Laggards; 34% Late Majority; 34% Early Majority; 13.3% Early Adopters; 2% Innovators

Info-Tech Insight

Although there are different size categories, none can be ignored. Consider your budget when dealing with smaller groups, but also consider their impact.

Refresh, retrain, restrain

We don’t want people to revert.

Don’t assume that because your staff have been trained and have access to the new technology that they will keep using it in the way they were trained. Or that they won’t revert back to their old methods or system.

Put in place methods to remove completely or remove access to old systems. Schedule refresh training or skill enhancement sessions and stay vigilant.

Research Authors

Paul Binns

Paul Binns

Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

With over 30 years in the IT industry, Paul brings to his work his experience as a Strategic Planner, Consultant, Enterprise Architect, IT Business Owner, Technologist, and Manager. Paul has worked with both small and large companies, local and international, and has had senior roles in government and the finance industry.

Scott Young

Scott Young

Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

Scott Young is a Director of Infrastructure Research at Info-Tech Research Group. Scott has worked in the technology field for over 17 years, with a strong focus on telecommunications and enterprise infrastructure architecture. He brings extensive practical experience in these areas of specialization, including IP networks, server hardware and OS, storage, and virtualization.

Related Info-Tech Research

User Group Analysis Workbook

Use Info-Tech’s workbook to gather information about user groups, business processes, and day-to-day tasks to gain familiarity with your adopters.

Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

Use our research to engage users and receive timely feedback through demonstrations. Our iterative methodology with a task list focused on the business’ must-have functionality allows staff to return to their daily work sooner.

Quality Management User Satisfaction Survey

This IT satisfaction survey will assist you with early information to use for categorizing your users.

Master Organizational Change Management Practices

Using a soft, empathetic approach to change management is something that all PMOs should understand. Use our research to ensure you have an effective OCM plan that will ensure project success.

Bibliography

Beylis, Guillermo. “COVID-19 accelerates technology adoption and deepens inequality among workers in Latin America and the Caribbean.” World Bank Blogs, 4 March 2021. Web.

Cleland, Kelley. “Successful User Adoption Strategies.” Insight Voices, 25 Apr. 2017. Web.

Hiatt, Jeff. “The Prosci ADKAR ® Model.” PROSCI, 1994. Web.

Malik, Priyanka. “The Kübler Ross Change Curve in the Workplace.” whatfix, 24 Feb. 2022. Web.

Medhaugir, Tore. “6 Ways to Encourage Software Adoption.” XAIT, 9 March 2021. Web.

Narayanan, Vishy. “What PwC Australia learned about fast tracking tech adoption during COVID-19” PWC, 13 Oct. 2020. Web.

Sridharan, Mithun. “Crossing the Chasm: Technology Adoption Lifecycle.” Think Insights, 28 Jun 2022. Web.

Portfolio Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}47|cart{/j2store}
  • Related Products: {j2store}47|crosssells{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
  • member rating average dollars saved: $40,234
  • member rating average days saved: 30
  • Parent Category Name: Applications
  • Parent Category Link: /applications

The challenge

  • Typically your business wants much more than your IT development organization can deliver with the available resources at the requested quality levels.
  • Over-damnd has a negative influence on delivery throughput. IT starts many projects (or features) but has trouble delivering most of them within the set parameters of scope, time, budget, and quality. Some requested deliverables may even be of questionable value to the business.
  • You may not have the right project portfolio management (PPM) strategy to bring order in IT's delivery activities and to maximize business value.

Our advice

Insight

  • Many in IT mix PPM and project management. Your project management playbook does not equate to the holistic view a real PPM practice gives you.
  • Some organizations also mistake PPM for a set of processes. Processes are needed, but a real strategy works towards tangible goals.
  • PPM works at the strategic level of the company; hence executive buy-in is critical. Without executive support, any effort to reconcile supply and demand will be tough to achieve.

Impact and results 

  • PPM is a coherent business-aligned strategy that maximizes business value creation across the entire portfolio, rather than in each project.
  • Our methodology tackles the most pressing challenge upfront: get executive buy-in before you start defining your goals. With senior management behind the plan, implementation will become easier.
  • Create PPM processes that are a cultural fit for your company. Define your short and long-term goals for your strategy and support them with fully embedded portfolio management processes.

The roadmap

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

Get started.

Read our executive brief to understand why you should develop a PPM strategy and understand how our methodology can help you. We show you how we can support you.

Obtain executive buy-in for your strategy

Ensure your strategy is a cultural fit or cultural-add for your company.

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 1: Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy (ppt)
  • PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator (xls)
  • PPM Strategic Plan Template (ppt)
  • PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template (xls)

Align the PPM processes to your company's strategic goals

Use the advice and tools in this stage to align the PPM processes.

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 2: Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals (ppt)
  • PPM Strategy Development Tool (xls)

Refine and complete your plan

Use the inputs from the previous stages and add a cost-benefit analysis and tool recommendation.

  • Streamline Application Maintenance – Phase 3: Optimize Maintenance Capabilities (ppt)

Streamline your maintenance delivery

Define quality standards in maintenance practices. Enforce these in alignment with the governance you have set up. Show a high degree of transparency and open discussions on development challenges.

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 3: Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan (ppt)
  • Project Portfolio Analyst / PMO Analyst (doc)

 

 

Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
  • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
  • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
  • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
  • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
  • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

Impact and Result

  • Define roles and responsibilities.
  • Establish visibility.
  • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Build a cost accountability framework

Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

  • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
  • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
  • Cloud Cost Management Policy
  • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

2. Establish visibility

Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

  • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

3. Define processes and procedures

Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

  • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
  • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
  • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
  • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

4. Build an implementation plan

Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

  • Cloud Cost Management Task List
[infographic]

Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

The Purpose

Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

Activities

1.1 Assess current state

1.2 Determine cloud cost model

1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

Outputs

Cloud cost management capability assessment

Cloud cost model

Roles & responsibilities

2 Establish Visibility

The Purpose

Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

Key Benefits Achieved

Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

Activities

2.1 Develop architectural patterns

2.2 Define dashboards and reports

2.3 Define account structure

2.4 Document tagging requirements

Outputs

Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

Dashboards and reports

Account structure

Tagging scheme

3 Define Processes & Procedures

The Purpose

Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

Key Benefits Achieved

Improved capability of reducing costs.

Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

Activities

3.1 Establish governance for tagging

3.2 Establish governance for costs

3.3 Define right-sizing process

3.4 Define purchasing process

3.5 Define notification and alerts

Outputs

Tagging policy

Cost control policy

Right-sizing process

Commitment purchasing process

Notifications and alerts

4 Build an Implementation Plan

The Purpose

Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

Activities

4.1 Document process interaction changes

4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

4.3 Build implementation roadmap

4.4 Build communication plan

Outputs

Changes to process interactions

Cloud cost program KPIs

Implementation roadmap

Communication plan

Automate Testing to Get More Done

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}285|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $29,139 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
  • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
  • Today’s rapidly changing software products and operational processes create mounting pressure on software delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly while meeting high and demanding quality standards.
  • Most organizations see automated testing as a solution to meet this demand alongside their continuous delivery pipeline. However, they often lack the critical foundations, skills, and practices that are imperative for success.
  • The technology is available to enable automated testing for many scenarios and systems, but industry noise and an expansive tooling marketplace create confusion for those interested in adopting this technology.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Good automated testing improves development throughput. No matter how quickly you put changes into production, end users will not accept them if they do not meet quality standards. Escaped defects, refactoring, and technical debt can significantly hinder your team’s ability to deliver software on time and on budget. In fact, 65% of organizations saw a reduction of test cycle time and 62% saw reductions in test costs with automated testing (Sogeti, World Quality Report 2020–21).
  • Start automation with unit and functional tests. Automated testing has a sharp learning curve, due to either the technical skills to implement and operate it or the test cases you are asked to automate. Unit tests and functional tests are ideal starting points in your automation journey because of the available tools and knowledge in the industry, the contained nature of the tests you are asked to execute, and the repeated use of the artifacts in more complicated tests (such as performance and integration tests). After all, you want to make sure the application works before stressing it.
  • Automated testing is a cross-functional practice, not a silo. A core component of successful software delivery throughput is recognizing and addressing defects, bugs, and other system issues early and throughout the software development lifecycle (SDLC). This involves having all software delivery roles collaborate on and participate in automated test case design, configure and orchestrate testing tools with other delivery tools, and proactively prepare the necessary test data and environments for test types.

Impact and Result

  • Bring the right people to the table. Automated testing involves significant people, process and technology changes across multiple software delivery roles. These roles will help guide how automated testing will compliment and enhance their responsibilities.
  • Build a foundation. Review your current circumstances to understand the challenges blocking automated testing. Establish a strong base of good practices to support the gradually adoption of automated testing across all test types.
  • Start with one application. Verify and validate the automated testing practices used in one application and their fit for other applications and systems. Develop a reference guide to assist new teams.

Automate Testing to Get More Done Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should automate testing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

2. Adopt good automated testing practices

Develop and implement practices that mature your automated testing capabilities.

  • Automated Testing Quick Reference Template

Infographic

Workshop: Automate Testing to Get More Done

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Adopt Good Automated Testing Practices

The Purpose

Understand the goals of and your vision for your automated testing practice.

Develop your automated testing foundational practices.

Adopt good practices for each test type.

Key Benefits Achieved

Level set automated testing expectations and objectives.

Learn the key practices needed to mature and streamline your automated testing across all test types.

Activities

1.1 Build a foundation.

1.2 Automate your test types.

Outputs

Automated testing vision, expectations, and metrics

Current state of your automated testing practice

Ownership of the implementation and execution of automated testing foundations

List of practices to introduce automation to for each test type

Develop a Use Case for Smart Contracts

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}92|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Innovation
  • Parent Category Link: /innovation
  • Organizations today continue to use traditional and often archaic methods of manual processing with physical paper documents.
  • These error-prone methods introduce cumbersome administrative work, causing businesses to struggle with payments and contract disputes.
  • The increasing scale and complexity of business processes has led to many third parties, middlemen, and paper hand-offs.
  • Companies remain bogged down by expensive and inefficient processes while losing sight of their ultimate stakeholder: the customer. A failure to focus on the customer is a failure to do business.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Simplify, automate, secure. Smart contracts enable businesses to simplify, automate, and secure traditionally complex transactions.
  • Focus on the customer. Smart contracts provide a frictionless experience for customers by removing unnecessary middlemen and increasing the speed of transactions.
  • New business models. Smart contracts enable the redesign of your organization and business-to-business relationships and transactions.

Impact and Result

  • Simplify and optimize your business processes by using Info-Tech’s methodology to select processes with inefficient transactions, unnecessary middlemen, and excessive manual paperwork.
  • Use Info-Tech’s template to generate a smart contract use case customized for your business.
  • Customize Info-Tech’s stakeholder presentation template to articulate the goals and benefits of the project and get buy-in from business executives.

Develop a Use Case for Smart Contracts Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should leverage smart contracts in your business, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Develop a Use Case for Smart Contracts – Phases 1-2

1. Understand smart contracts

Understand the fundamental concepts of smart contract technology and get buy-in from stakeholders.

  • Develop a Use Case for Smart Contracts – Phase 1: Understand Smart Contracts
  • Smart Contracts Executive Buy-in Presentation Template

2. Develop a smart contract use case

Select a business process, create a smart contract logic diagram, and complete a smart contract use-case deliverable.

  • Develop a Use Case for Smart Contracts – Phase 2: Develop the Smart Contract Use Case
  • Smart Contracts Use-Case Template

[infographic]

Workshop: Develop a Use Case for Smart Contracts

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Understand Smart Contracts

The Purpose

Review blockchain basics.

Understand the fundamental concepts of smart contracts.

Develop smart contract use-case executive buy-in presentation.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of blockchain basics.

Understanding the fundamentals of smart contracts.

Development of an executive buy-in presentation.

Activities

1.1 Review blockchain basics.

1.2 Understand smart contract fundamentals.

1.3 Identify business challenges and smart contract benefits.

1.4 Create executive buy-in presentation.

Outputs

Executive buy-in presentation

2 Smart Contract Logic Diagram

The Purpose

Brainstorm and select a business process to develop a smart contract use case around.

Generate a smart contract logic diagram.

Key Benefits Achieved

Selected a business process.

Developed a smart contract logic diagram for the selected business process.

Activities

2.1 Brainstorm candidate business processes.

2.2 Select a business process.

2.3 Identify phases, actors, events, and transactions.

2.4 Create the smart contract logic diagram.

Outputs

Smart contract logic diagram

3 Smart Contract Use Case

The Purpose

Develop smart contract use-case diagrams for each business process phase.

Complete a smart contract use-case deliverable.

Key Benefits Achieved

Smart contract use-case diagrams.

Smart contract use-case deliverable.

Activities

3.1 Build smart contract use-case diagrams for each phase of the business process.

3.2 Create a smart contract use-case summary diagram.

3.3 Complete smart contract use-case deliverable.

Outputs

Smart contract use case

4 Next Steps and Action Plan

The Purpose

Review workshop week and lessons learned.

Develop an action plan to follow through with next steps for the project.

Key Benefits Achieved

Reviewed workshop week with common understanding of lessons learned.

Completed an action plan for the project.

Activities

4.1 Review workshop deliverables.

4.2 Create action plan.

Outputs

Smart contract action plan

 

IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}517|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Engage
  • Parent Category Link: /engage
  • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
  • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Realize the benefits of a diverse workforce by embedding inclusion into work practices, behaviors, and values, ensuring accountability throughout the department.

Impact and Result

Understand what it means to be inclusive: reassess work practices and learn how to apply leadership behaviors to create an inclusive environment

IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Mobilize inclusion efforts

Learn, evaluate, and understand what it means to be inclusive, examine biases, and apply inclusive leadership behaviors.

  • Diversity & Inclusion Initiatives Catalog
  • Inclusive IT Work Practices Examples
  • Inclusive Work Practices Template
  • Equip Managers to Adopt Inclusive Leadership Behaviors
  • Workbook: Equip Managers to Adopt Inclusive Leadership Behaviors
  • Standard Focus Group Guide
[infographic]

Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}423|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
  • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

Having shifted operations almost overnight to a remote work environment, and with the crisis management phase of the COVID-19 pandemic winding down, IT leaders and organizations are faced with the following issues:

  • A reduced degree of control with respect to the organization’s assets.
  • Increased presence of unapproved workaround methods, including applications and devices not secured by the organization.
  • Pressure to resume operations at pre-pandemic cadence while still operating in recovery mode.
  • An anticipated game plan for restarting the organization’s project activities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

An organization’s shift back toward the pre-pandemic state cannot be carried out in isolation. Things have changed. Budgets, resource availability, priorities, etc., will not be the same as they were in early March. Organizations must ensure that all departments work collaboratively to support office repatriation. IT must quickly identify the must-dos to allow safe return to the office, while prioritizing tasks relating to the repopulation of employees, technical assets, and operational workloads via an informed and streamlined roadmap.

As employees return to the office, PMO and portfolio leaders must sift through unclear requirements and come up with a game plan to resume project activities mid-pandemic. You need to develop an approach, and fast.

Impact and Result

Responsibly resume IT operations in the office:

  • Evaluate risk tolerance
  • Prepare to repatriate people to the office
  • Prepare to repatriate assets to the office
  • Prepare to repatriate workloads to the office
  • Prioritize your tasks and build your roadmap

Quickly restart the engine of your PPM:

  • Restarting the engine of the project portfolio won’t be as simple as turning a key and hitting the gas. The right path forward will differ for every project portfolio practice.
  • Therefore, in this publication we put forth a multi-pass approach that PMO and portfolio managers can follow depending on their unique situations and needs.
  • Each approach is accompanied by a checklist and recommendations for next steps to get you on right path fast.

Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

As the post-pandemic landscape begins to take shape, ensure that IT can effectively prepare and support your employees as they move back to the office.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Evaluate your new risk tolerance

Identify the new risk landscape and risk tolerance for your organization post-pandemic. Determine how this may impact the second wave of pandemic transition tasks.

  • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 1: Evaluate Your New Risk Tolerance
  • Resume Operations Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

2. Repatriate people to the office

Prepare to return your employees to the office. Ensure that IT takes into account the health and safety of employees, while creating an efficient and sustainable working environment

  • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 2: Repatriate People to the Office
  • Mid-Pandemic IT Prioritization Tool

3. Repatriate assets to the office

Prepare the organization's assets for return to the office. Ensure that IT takes into account the off-license purchases and new additions to the hardware family that took place during the pandemic response and facilitates a secure reintegration to the workplace.

  • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 3: Repatriate Assets to the Office

4. Repatriate workloads to the office

Prepare and position IT to support workloads in order to streamline office reintegration. This may include leveraging pre-existing solutions in different ways and providing additional workstreams to support employee processes.

  • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 4: Repatriate Workloads to the Office

5. Prioritize your tasks and build the roadmap

Once you've identified IT's supporting tasks, it's time to prioritize. This phase walks through the activity of prioritizing based on cost/effort, alignment to business, and security risk reduction weightings. The result is an operational action plan for resuming office life.

  • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 5: Prioritize Your Tasks and Build the Roadmap

6. Restart the engine of your project portfolio

Restarting the engine of the project portfolio mid-pandemic won’t be as simple as turning a key and hitting the gas. Use this concise research to find the right path forward for your organization.

  • Restart the Engine of Your Project Portfolio
[infographic]

Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}110|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
  • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

In many cases, the answer is to develop a cloud brokerage to manage the complexity. But what should your cloud broker be delivering, and how?

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • To avoid failure, you need to provide security and compliance, but basic user satisfaction means becoming a frictionless intermediary.
  • Enabling brokers provide knowledge and guidance for the best usage of cloud.
  • While GCBs fill a critical role as a control point for IT consumption, they can easily turn into a friction point for IT projects. It’s important to find the right balance between enabling compliance and providing frictionless usability.

Impact and Result

  • Avoid disintermediation.
  • Maintain compliance.
  • Leverage economies of scale.
  • Ensure architecture discipline.

Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Build a Cloud Brokerage Deck – A guide to help you start designing a cloud brokerage that delivers value beyond gatekeeping.

Define the value, ecosystem, and metrics required to add value as a brokerage. Develop a brokerage value proposition that aligns with your audience and capabilities. Define and rationalize the ecosystem of partners and value-add activities for your brokerage. Define KPIs that allow you to maximize and balance both usability and compliance.

  • Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable Storyboard
[infographic]

Further reading

Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable

Considerations for implementing an institutional-focused cloud brokerage.

Your Challenge

Increasingly, large institutions and governments are adopting cloud-first postures for delivering IT resources. Combined with the growth of cloud offerings that are able to meet the certifications and requirements of this segment that has been driven by federal initiatives like Cloud-First in Canada and Cloud Smart in the United States, these two factors have left institutions (and the businesses that serve them) with the challenge of delivering cloud services to their users while maintaining compliance, control, and IT sanity.

In many cases, the answer is to develop a cloud brokerage to manage the complexity. But what should your cloud broker be delivering and how?

Navigating the Problem

Not all cloud brokerages are the same. And while they can be an answer to cloud complexity, an ineffective brokerage can drain value and complicate operations even further. Cloud brokerages need to be designed:

  1. To deliver the right type of value to its users.
  2. To strike the balance between effective governance & security and flexibility & ease of use.

Info-Tech’s Approach

By defining your end goals, framing solutions based on the type of value and rigor your brokerage needs to deliver, and focusing on the right balance of security and flexibility, you can deliver a brokerage that delivers the best of all worlds.

  1. Define the brokerage value you want to deliver.
  2. Build the catalog and partner ecosystem.
  3. Understand how to maximize adoption and minimize disintermediation while maintaining architectural discipline and compliance.

Info-Tech Insight

Sometimes a brokerage delivery model makes sense, sometimes it doesn’t! Understanding the value addition you want your brokerage to provide before creating it allows you to not only avoid pitfalls and maximize benefits but also understand when a brokerage model does and doesn’t make sense in the first place.

Project Overview

Understand what value you want your brokerage to deliver

Different institutions want brokerage delivery for different reasons. It’s important to define up front why your users need to work through a brokerage and what value that brokerage needs to deliver.

What’s in the catalog? Is it there to consolidate and simplify billing and consumption? Or does it add value further up the technology stack or value chain? If so, how does that change the capabilities you need internally and from partners?

Security and compliance are usually the highest priority

Among institutions adopting cloud, a broker that can help deliver their defined security and compliance standards is an almost universal requirement. Especially in government institutions, this can mean the need to meet a high standard in both implementation and validation.

The good news is that even if you lack the complete set of skills in-house, the high certification levels available from hyperscale providers combined with a growing ecosystem of service providers working on these platforms means you can usually find the right partner(s) to make it possible.

The real goal: frictionless intermediation and enablement

Ultimately, if end users can’t get what they need from you, they will go around you to get it. This challenge, which has always existed in IT, is further amplified in a cloud service world that offers users a cornucopia of options outside the brokerage. Furthermore, cloud users expect to be able to consume IT seamlessly. Without frictionless satisfaction of user demand your brokerage will become disintermediated, which risks your highest priorities of security and compliance.

Understand the evolution: Info-Tech thought model

While initial adoption of cloud brokerages in institutions was focused on ensuring the ability of IT to extend its traditional role as gatekeeper to the realm of cloud services, the focus has now shifted upstream to enabling ease of use and smart adoption of cloud services. This is evidenced clearly in examples like the US government’s renaming of its digital strategy from “Cloud First” to “Cloud Smart” and has been mirrored in other regions and institutions.

Info-Tech Insights

To avoid failure, you need to provide security and compliance.

Basic user satisfaction means becoming a frictionless intermediary.

Exceed expectations! Enabling brokers provide knowledge and guidance for the best usage of cloud.

  • Security & Compliance
  • Frictionless Intermediation
  • Cloud-Enabling Brokerage

Define the role of a cloud broker

Where do brokers fit in the cloud model?

  • NIST Definition: An entity that manages the use, performance, and delivery of cloud services and negotiates relationships between cloud providers and cloud consumers.
  • Similar to a telecom master agent, a cloud broker acts as the middle-person and end-user point of contact, consolidating the management of underlying providers.
  • A government or institutional cloud broker (GCB) is responsible for the delivery of all cloud services consumed by the departments or agencies it supports or that are mandated to use it.

Balancing governance and agility

Info-Tech Insight

While GCBs fill a critical role as a control point for IT consumption, they can easily turn into a friction point for IT projects. It’s important to find the right balance between enabling compliance and providing frictionless usability.

Model brokerage drivers and benefits

Reduced costs: Security through standardization: Frictionless consumption: Avoid disinter-mediation; Maintain compliance; Leverage economies of scale; Ensure architecture discipline

Maintain compliance and ensure architecture discipline: Brokerages can be an effective gating point for ensuring properly governed and managed IT consumption that meets the specific regulations and compliances required for an institution. It can also be a strong catalyst and enabler for moving to even more effective cloud consumption through automation.

Avoid disintermediation: Especially in institutions, cloud brokers are a key tool in the fight against disintermediation – that is, end users circumventing your IT department’s procurement and governance by consuming an ad hoc cloud service.

Leverage economies of scale: Simply put, consolidation of your cloud consumption drives effectiveness by making the most of your buying power.

Info-Tech Insights

Understanding the importance of each benefit type to your brokerage audience will help you define the type of brokerage you need to build and what skills and partners will be required to deliver the right value.

The brokerage landscape

The past ten years have seen governments and institutions evolve from basic acceptance of cloud services to the usage of cloud as the core of most IT initiatives.

  • As part of this evolution, many organizations now have well-defined standards and guidance for the implementation, procurement, and regulation of cloud services for their use.
  • Both Canada (Strategic Plan for Information Management and Information Technology) and the United States (Cloud Smart – formerly known as Cloud First) have recently updated their guidance on adoption of cloud services. The Australian Government has also recently updated its Cloud Computing Policy.
  • AWS and Azure both now claim Full FedRAMP (Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program) certification.
  • This has not only enabled easy adoption of these core hyperscale cloud service by government but also driven the proliferation of a large ecosystem of FedRAMP-authorized cloud service providers.
  • This trend started with government at the federal level but has cascaded downstream to provincial and municipal governments globally, and the same model seems likely to be adopted by other governments and other institution types over time.

Info-Tech Insight

The ecosystem of platforms and tools has grown significantly and examples of best practices, especially in government, are readily available. Once you’ve defined your brokerage’s value stance, the building blocks you need to deliver often don’t need to be built from scratch.

Address the unique challenges of business-led IT in institutions

With the business taking more accountability and management of their own technology, brokers must learn how to evolve from being gatekeepers to enablers.

This image This lists the Cons of IT acting as a gatekeeper providing oversight, and the Pros of IT acting as an Enabler in an IT Partnership.  the Cons are: Restrict System Access; Deliver & Monitor Applications; Own Organizational Risk; Train the Business.  The Pros are: Manage Role-Based Access; Deliver & Monitor Platforms; Share Organizational Risk; Coach & Mentor the Business

Turn brokerage pitfalls into opportunities

The greatest risks in using a cloud broker come from its nature as a single point of distribution for service and support. Without resources (or automation) to enable scale, as well as responsive processes for supporting users in finding the right services and making those services available through the brokerage, you will lose alignment with your users’ needs, which inevitably leads to disintermediation, loss of IT control, and broken compliance

Info-Tech Insights

Standardization and automation are your friend when building a cloud brokerage! Sometimes this means having a flexible catalog of options and configurations, but great brokerages can deliver value by helping their users redefine and evolve their workloads to work more effectively in the cloud. This means providing guidance and facilitating the landing/transformation of users’ workloads in the cloud, the right way.

Challenges Impact
  • Single point of failure
  • Managing capacity
  • Alignment of brokerage with underlying agencies
  • Additional layer of complexity
  • Inability to deliver service
  • Disintermediation
  • Broken security/compliance
  • Loss of cost control/purchasing power

Validate your cloud brokerage strategy using Info-Tech’s approach

Value Definition

  • Define your brokerage type and value addition

Capabilities Mapping

  • Understand the partners and capabilities you need to be able to deliver

Measuring Value

  • Define KPIs for both compliant delivery and frictionless intermediation

Provide Cloud Excellence

  • Move from intermediation to enablement and help users land on the cloud the right way

Define the categories for your brokerage’s benefit and value

Depending on the type of brokerage, the value delivered may be as simple as billing consolidation, but many brokerages go much deeper in their value proposition.

This image depicts a funnel, where the following inputs make up the Broker Value: Integration, Interface and Management Enhancement; User Identity and Risk Management/ Security & Compliance; Cost & Workload Efficiency, Service Aggregation

Define the categories of brokerage value to add

  • Purchasing Agents save the purchaser time by researching services from different vendors and providing the customer with information about how to use cloud computing to support business goals.
  • Contract Managers may also be assigned power to negotiate contracts with cloud providers on behalf of the customer. In this scenario, the broker may distribute services across multiple vendors to achieve cost-effectiveness, while managing the technical and procurement complexity of dealing with multiple vendors.
    • The broker may provide users with an application program interface (API) and user interface (UI) that hides any complexity and allows the customer to work with their cloud services as if they were being purchased from a single vendor. This type of broker is sometimes referred to as a cloud aggregator.
  • Cloud Enablers can also provide the customer with additional services, such as managing the deduplication, encryption, and cloud data transfer and assisting with data lifecycle management and other activities.
  • Cloud Customizers integrate various underlying cloud services for customers to provide a custom offering under a white label or its own brand.
  • Cloud Agents are essentially the software version of a Contract Manager and act by automating and facilitating the distribution of work between different cloud service providers.

Info-Tech Insights

Remember that these categories are general guidelines! Depending on the requirements and value a brokerage needs to deliver, it may fit more than one category of broker type.

Brokerage types and value addition

Info-Tech Insights

Each value addition your brokerage invests in delivering should tie to reinforcing efficiency, compliance, frictionlessness, or enablement.

Value Addition Purchasing Agent Contract Manager Cloud Enabler Cloud Customizer Cloud Agent
Underlying service selection

Standard Activity

Standard Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity Common Activity
Support and info Standard Activity

Common Activity

Standard Activity Standard Activity Common Activity
Contract lifecycle (pricing/negotiation) Standard Activity Common Activity Standard Activity
Workload distribution (to underlying services) (aggregation) Common Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity
Value-add or layered on services Standard Activity Common Activity
Customization/integration of underlying services Standard Activity
Automated workload distribution (i.e. software) Standard Activity

Start by delivering value in these common brokerage service categories

Security & Compliance

  • Reporting & Auditing
  • SIEM & SOC Services
  • Patching & Monitoring

Cost Management

  • Right-Sizing
  • Billing Analysis
  • Anomaly Detection & Change Recommendations

Data Management

  • Data Tiering
  • Localization Management
  • Data Warehouse/Lake Services

Resilience & Reliability

  • Backup & Archive
  • Replication & Sync
  • DR & HA Management
  • Ransomware Prevention/Mitigation

Cloud-Native & DevOps Enablement

  • Infrastructure as Code (IaC)
  • DevOps Tools & Processes
  • SDLC Automation Tools

Design, Transformation, and Integration

  • CDN Integration
  • AI Tools Integration
  • SaaS Customizations

Activity: Brokerage value design

Who are you and who are you building this for?

  • Internal brokerage (i.e. you are a department in an organization that is tasked with providing IT resources to other internal groups)
    • No profit motivation
    • Primary goal is to maintain compliance and avoid disintermediation
  • Third-party brokerage (i.e. you are an MSP that needs to build a brokerage to provide a variety of downstream services and act as the single point of consumption for an organization)
    • Focus on value-addition to the downstream services you facilitate for your client
    • Increased requirement to quickly add new partners/services from downstream as required by your client

What requirements and pains do you need to address?

  • Remember that in the world of cloud, users ultimately can go around IT to find the resources and tools they want to use. In short, if you don’t provide ease and value, they will get it somewhere else.
  • Assess the different types of cloud brokerages out there as a guide to what sort of value you want to deliver.

Why are you creating a brokerage? There are several categories of driver and more than one may apply.

  • Compliance and security gating/validation
  • Cost consolidation and governance
  • Value-add or feature enhancement of raw/downstream services being consumed

It’s important to clearly understand how best you can deliver unique value to ensure that they want to consume from you.

This is an image of a Venn diagram between the following: Who are you trying to serve?; Why and how are you uniquely positioned to deliver?; What requirements do they have and what pain points can you help solve?.  Where all three circles overlap is the Brokerage Value Proposition.

Understand the ecosystem you’ll require to deliver value

GCB

  • Enabling Effectiveness
  • Cost Governance
  • Adoption and User Satisfaction
  • Security & Compliance

Whatever value proposition and associated services your brokerage has defined, either internal resources or additional partners will be required to run the platform and processes you want to offer on top of the defined base cloud platforms.

Info-Tech Insights

Remember to always align your value adds and activities to the four key themes:

  • Efficiency
  • Compliance
  • Frictionlessness
  • Cloud Enablement

Delivering value may require an ecosystem

The additional value your broker delivers will depend on the tools and services you can layer on top of the base cloud platform(s) you support.

In many cases, you may require different partners to fulfil similar functions across different base platforms. Although this increases complexity for the brokerage, it’s also a place where additional value can be delivered to end users by your role as a frictionless intermediary.

Base Partner/Platform

  • Third-party software & platforms
  • Third-party automations & integrations
  • Third-party service partners
  • Internal value-add functions

Build the ecosystem you need for your value proposition

Leverage partners and automation to bake compliance in.

Different value-add types (based on the category/categories of broker you’re targeting) require different additional platforms and partners to augment the base cloud service you’re brokering.

Security & Config

  • IaC Tools
  • Cloud Resource Configuration Validation
  • Templating Tools
  • Security Platforms
  • SDN and Networking Platforms
  • Resilience (Backup/Replication/DR/HA) Platforms
  • Data & Storage Management
  • Compliance and Validation Platforms & Partners

Cost Management

  • Subscription Hierarchy Management
  • Showback and Chargeback Logic
  • Cost Dashboarding and Thresholding
  • Governance and Intervention

Adoption & User Satisfaction

  • Service Delivery SLAs
  • Support Process & Tools
  • Capacity/Availability Management
  • Portal Usability/UX

Speed of Evolution

  • Partner and Catalog/Service Additions
  • Broker Catalog Roadmapping
  • User Request Capture (new services)
  • User Request Capture (exceptions)

Build your features and services lists

Incorporate your end user, business, and IT perspectives in defining the list of mandatory and desired features of your target solution.

See our Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint for information on procurement practices, including RFP templates.

End User

  • Visual, drag-and-drop models to define data models, business logic, and user interfaces
  • One-click deployment
  • Self-healing application
  • Vendor-managed infrastructure
  • Active community and marketplace
  • Prebuilt templates and libraries
  • Optical character recognition and natural language processing

Business

  • Audit and change logs
  • Theme and template builder
  • Template management
  • Knowledgebase and document management
  • Role-based access
  • Business value, operational costs, and other KPI monitoring
  • Regulatory compliance
  • Consistent design and user experience across applications
  • Business workflow automation

IT

  • Application and system performance monitoring
  • Versioning and code management
  • Automatic application and system refactoring and recovery
  • Exception and error handling
  • Scalability (e.g. load balancing) and infrastructure management
  • Real-time debugging
  • Testing capabilities
  • Security management
  • Application integration management

Understand the stakeholders

Hyperscale Platform/Base Platform: Security; Compliance and Validation;Portal/Front-End; Cost Governance; Broker Value Add(s)

Depending on the value-add(s) you are trying to deliver, as well as the requirements from your institution(s), you will have a different delineation of responsibilities for each of the value-add dimensions. Typically, there will be at least three stakeholders whose role needs to be considered for each dimension:

  • Base Cloud Provider
  • Third-Party Platforms/Service Providers
  • Internal Resources

Info-Tech Insights

It’s important to remember that the ecosystem of third-party options available to you in each case will likely be dependent on if a given partner operates or supports your chosen base provider.

Define the value added by each stakeholder in your value chain

Value Addition Cost Governance Security & Compliance Adoption and User Satisfaction New Service Addition Speed End-User Cloud Effectiveness
Base platform(s)
Third party
Internal

A basic table of the stakeholders and platforms involved in your value stream is a critical tool for aligning activities and partners with brokerage value.

Remember to tie each value-add category you’re embarking on to at least one of the key themes!

Cost Governance → Efficiency

Security & Compliance → Compliance

Adoption & User Satisfaction → Frictionlessness

New Service Addition Responsiveness → Frictionlessness, Enablement

End-User Cloud Effectiveness → Enablement

Info-Tech Insights

The expectations for how applications are consumed and what a user experience should look like is increasingly being guided by the business and by the disintermediating power of the cloud-app ecosystem.

“Enabling brokers” help embrace business-led IT

In environments where compliance and security are a must, the challenges of handing off application management to the business are even more complex. Great brokers learn to act not just as a gatekeeper but an enabler of business-led IT.

Business Empowerment

Organizations are looking to enhance their Agile and BizDevOps practices by shifting traditional IT practices left and toward the business.

Changing Business Needs

Organizational priorities are constantly changing. Cost reduction opportunities and competitive advantages are lost because of delayed delivery of features.

Low Barrier to Entry

Low- and no-code development tools, full-stack solutions, and plug-and-play architectures allow non-technical users to easily build and implement applications without significant internal technical support or expertise.

Democratization of IT

A wide range of digital applications, services, and information are readily available and continuously updated through vendor and public marketplaces and open-source communities.

Technology-Savvy Business

The business is motivated to learn more about the technology they use so that they can better integrate it into their processes.

Balance usability and compliance: accelerate cloud effectiveness

Move to being an accelerator and an enabler! Rather than creating an additional layer of complexity, we can use the abstraction of a cloud brokerage to bring a wide variety of value-adds and partners into the ecosystem without increasing complexity for end users.

Manage the user experience

  • Your portal is a great source of data for optimizing user adoption and satisfaction.
  • Understand the KPIs that matter to your clients or client groups from both a technical and a service perspective.

Be proactive and responsive in meeting changing needs

  • Determine dashboard consumption by partner view.
  • Regularly review and address the gaps in your catalog.
  • Provide an easy mechanism for adding user-demanded services.

Think like a service provider

  • You do need to be able to communicate and even market internally new services and capabilities as you add them or people won't know to come to you to use them.
  • It's also critical in helping people move along the path to enablement and knowing what might be possible that they hadn't considered.

Provide cloud excellence functions

Enablement Broker

  • Mentorship & Training
    • Build the skills, knowledge, and experiences of application owners and managers with internal and external expertise.
  • Organizational Change Leadership
    • Facilitate cultural, governance, and other organizational changes through strong relationships with business and IT leadership.
  • Good Delivery Practices & Thinking
    • Develop, share, and maintain a toolkit of good software development lifecycle (SDLC) practices and techniques.
  • Knowledge Sharing
    • Centralize a knowledgebase of up-to-date and accurate documentation and develop community forums to facilitate knowledge transfer.
  • Technology Governance & Leadership
    • Implement the organizational standards, policies, and rules for all applications and platforms and coordinate growth and sprawl.
  • Shared Services & Integrations
    • Provide critical services and integrations to support end users with internal resources or approved third-party providers and partners.

Gauge value with the right metrics

Focus your effort on measuring key metrics.

Category

Purpose

Examples

Business Value – The amount of value and benefits delivered. Justify the investment and impact of the brokerage and its optimization to business operations. ROI, user productivity, end-user satisfaction, business operational costs, error rate
Application Quality – Satisfaction of application quality standards. Evaluate organizational effort to address and maximize user satisfaction and adoption rates. Adoption rate, usage friction metrics, user satisfaction metrics
Delivery Effectiveness – The delivery efficiency of changes. Enable members to increase their speed to effective deployment, operation, and innovation on cloud platforms. Speed of deployment, landing/migration success metrics

Determine measures that demonstrate the value of your brokerage by aligning it with your quality definition, value drivers, and users’ goals and objectives. Recognize that your journey will require constant monitoring and refinement to adjust to situations that may arise as you adopt new products, standards, strategies, tactics, processes, and tools.

Activity Output

Ultimately, the goal is designing a brokerage that can evolve from gatekeeping to frictionless intermediation to cloud enablement.

Maintain focus on the value proposition, your brokerage ecosystem, and the metrics that represent enablement for your users and avoid pitfalls and challenges from the beginning.

Activity: Define your brokerage type and value addition; Understand the partners and capabilities you need to be able to deliver; Define KPIs for both delivery (compliance) and adoption (frictionlessness); Output: GCB Strategy Plan; Addresses: Why and when you should build a GCB; How to avoid pitfalls; How to maximize benefits; How to maximize responsiveness and user satisfaction; How to roadmap and add services with agility.

Appendix

Related blueprints and tools

Document Your Cloud Strategy

This blueprint covers aligning your value proposition with general cloud requirements.

Define Your Digital Business Strategy

Phase 1 of this research covers identifying value chains to be transformed.

Embrace Business-Managed Applications

Phase 1 of this research covers understanding the business-managed applications as a factor in developing a frictionless intermediary model.

Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process

This blueprint provides information on partner selection and procurement practices, including RFP templates.

Bibliography

“3 Types of Cloud Brokers That Can Save the Cloud.” Cloud Computing Topics, n.d. Web.

Australian Government Cloud Computing Policy. Government of Australia, October 2014. Web.

“Cloud Smart Policy Overview.” CIO.gov, n.d. Web.

“From Cloud First to Cloud Smart.” CIO.gov, n.d. Web.

Gardner, Dana. “Cloud brokering: Building a cloud of clouds.” ZDNet, 22 April 2011. Web.

Narcisi, Gina. “Cloud, Next-Gen Services Help Master Agents Grow Quickly And Beat 'The Squeeze' “As Connectivity Commissions Decline.” CRN, 14 June 2017. Web.

Smith, Spencer. “Asigra calls out the perils of cloud brokerage model.” TechTarget, 28 June 2019. Web.

Tan, Aaron. “Australia issues new cloud computing guidelines.” TechTarget, 27 July 2020. Web.

The European Commission Cloud Strategy. ec.europa.eu, 16 May 2019. Web.

“TrustRadius Review: Cloud Brokers 2022.” TrustRadius, 2022. Web.

Yedlin, Debbie. “Pros and Cons of Using a Cloud Broker.” Technology & Business Integrators, 17 April 2015. Web.

How to build a Service Desk Chatbot POC

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}16|cart{/j2store}
  • Related Products: {j2store}16|crosssells{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
  • member rating average dollars saved: 11,197
  • member rating average days saved: 8
  • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
  • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

The challenge

Build a chatbot that creates value for your business

 

  • Ensure your chatbot meets your business needs.
  • Bring scalability to your customer service delivery in a cost-effective manner.
  • Measure your chatbot objectives with clear metrics.
  • Pre-determine your ticket categories to use during the proof of concept.

Our advice

Insight

  • Build your chatbot to create business value. Whether increasing service or resource efficiency, keep value creation in mind when making decisions with your proof of concept.

Impact and results 

  • When implemented effectively, chatbots can help save costs, generate new revenue, and ultimately increase customer satisfaction for external and internal-facing customers.

The roadmap

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you building a chatbot proof of concept is a good idea, review our methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you to successfully complete this project. Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

Start here

Form your chatbot strategy.

Build the right metrics to measure the success of your chatbot POC

  • Chatbot ROI Calculator (xls)
  • Chatbot POC Metrics Tool (xls)

Build the foundation for your chatbot.

Architect the chatbot to maximize business value

  • Chatbot Conversation Tree Library

Continue to improve your chatbot.

Now take your chatbot proof of concept to production

  • Chatbot POC RACI (doc)
  • Chatbot POC Implementation Roadmap (xls)
  • Chatbot POC Communication Plan (doc)Chatbot ROI Calculator (xls)

Modernize Your SDLC

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}148|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $30,263 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Development
  • Parent Category Link: /development
  • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
  • Many organizations lack the critical capabilities and resources needed to satisfy their growing backlog, jeopardizing product success.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Delivery quality and throughput go hand in hand. Focus on meeting minimum process and product quality standards first. Improved throughput will eventually follow.
  • Business integration is not optional. The business must be involved in guiding delivery efforts, and ongoing validation and verification product changes.
  • The software development lifecycle (SDLC) must deliver more than software. Business value is generated through the products and services delivered by your SDLC. Teams must provide the required product support and stakeholders must be willing to participate in the product’s delivery.

Impact and Result

  • Standardize your definition of a successful product. Come to an organizational agreement of what defines a high-quality and successful product. Accommodate both business and IT perspectives in your definition.
  • Clarify the roles, processes, and tools to support business value delivery and satisfy stakeholder expectations. Indicate where and how key roles are involved throughout product delivery to validate and verify work items and artifacts. Describe how specific techniques and tools are employed to meet stakeholder requirements.
  • Focus optimization efforts on most affected stages. Reveal the health of your SDLC from the value delivery, business and technical practice quality standards, discipline, throughput, and governance perspectives with a diagnostic. Identify and roadmap the solutions to overcome the root causes of your diagnostic results.

Modernize Your SDLC Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your SDLC, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Set your SDLC context

State the success criteria of your SDLC practice through the definition of product quality and organizational priorities. Define your SDLC current state.

  • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 1: Set Your SDLC Context
  • SDLC Strategy Template

2. Diagnose your SDLC

Build your SDLC diagnostic framework based on your practice’s product and process objectives. Root cause your improvement opportunities.

  • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 2: Diagnose Your SDLC
  • SDLC Diagnostic Tool

3. Modernize your SDLC

Learn of today’s good SDLC practices and use them to address the root causes revealed in your SDLC diagnostic results.

  • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 3: Modernize Your SDLC
[infographic]

Workshop: Modernize Your SDLC

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Set Your SDLC Context

The Purpose

Discuss your quality and product definitions and how quality is interpreted from both business and IT perspectives.

Review your case for strengthening your SDLC practice.

Review the current state of your roles, processes, and tools in your organization.

Key Benefits Achieved

Grounded understanding of products and quality that is accepted across the organization.

Clear business and IT objectives and metrics that dictate your SDLC practice’s success.

Defined SDLC current state people, process, and technologies.

Activities

1.1 Define your products and quality.

1.2 Define your SDLC objectives.

1.3 Measure your SDLC effectiveness.

1.4 Define your current SDLC state.

Outputs

Product and quality definitions.

SDLC business and technical objectives and vision.

SDLC metrics.

SDLC capabilities, processes, roles and responsibilities, resourcing model, and tools and technologies.

2 Diagnose Your SDLC

The Purpose

Discuss the components of your diagnostic framework.

Review the results of your SDLC diagnostic.

Key Benefits Achieved

SDLC diagnostic framework tied to your SDLC objectives and definitions.

Root causes to your SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

Activities

2.1 Build your diagnostic framework.

2.2 Diagnose your SDLC.

Outputs

SDLC diagnostic framework.

Root causes to SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

3 Modernize Your SDLC

The Purpose

Discuss the SDLC practices used in the industry.

Review the scope and achievability of your SDLC optimization initiatives.

Key Benefits Achieved

Knowledge of good practices that can improve the effectiveness and efficiency of your SDLC.

Realistic and achievable SDLC optimization roadmap.

Activities

3.1 Learn and adopt SDLC good practices.

3.2 Build your optimization roadmap.

Outputs

Optimization initiatives and target state SDLC practice.

SDLC optimization roadmap, risks and mitigations, and stakeholder communication flow.

Make the Case for Product Delivery

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}184|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $41,674 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
  • Organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery practices. This form of delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
  • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
  • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

Impact and Result

  • We will help you build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
  • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
    • A common definition of product.
    • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
    • Key challenges and benefits.
    • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
    • What you are asking of stakeholders.
    • A roadmap of how to get started.

Make the Case for Product Delivery Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Make the Case for Product Delivery Deck – A guide to help align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

This project will help you define “product” for your organization, define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery, understand the role of product ownership, lay out the case to your stakeholders, and communicate what comes next for your transition to product.

  • Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard

2. Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template – A template to help you capture and detail your case for product delivery.

Build a proposal deck to help make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.

  • Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template

3. Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook – A tool to capture the results of exercises to build your case to change your product delivery method.

This workbook is designed to capture the results of the exercises in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds to an exercise in the storyboard. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

  • Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook
[infographic]

Further reading

Make the Case for Product Delivery

Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

Table of Contents

Define product

Define your drivers and goals

Understand the role of product ownership

Communicate what comes next

Make the case to your stakeholders

Appendix: Additional research

Appendix: Product delivery strategy communication

Appendix: Manage stakeholder influence

Appendix: Product owner capability details

Executive Summary

Your Challenge
  • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They deliver the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, internal users, and stakeholders.
  • Organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide with the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
  • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of your product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
Common Obstacles
  • IT organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery.
  • Product delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
  • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
  • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.
Info-Tech’s Approach
  • Info-Tech will enable you to build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
  • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
    • A common definition of product.
    • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
    • Key challenges and benefits.
    • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
    • What you are asking of stakeholders.
    • A roadmap of how to get started.

Info-Tech Insight

Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

Many executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business objectives

Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT initiatives in supporting the business in achieving its strategic goals.

However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (2021; N=58) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals.

Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, 2021 (N=58)

40% Of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

34% Of business stakeholders are supporters of their IT departments (n=334).

40% Of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

Info-Tech Insight

Great technical solutions are not the primary driver of IT success. Focusing on delivery of digital products that align with organizational goals will produce improved outcomes and will foster an improved relationship between business and IT.

Increase product success by involving IT, business, and customers in your product roadmaps, planning, and delivery

Product management and delivery seek to promote improved relationships among IT, business, and customers, a critical driver for business satisfaction.

IT

Stock image of an IT professional.

1

Collaboration

IT, business, and customers work together through all stages of the product lifecycle, from market research through the roadmapping and delivery processes and into maintenance and retirement. The goal is to ensure the risks and dependencies are realized before work is committed.

Stakeholders, Customers, and Business

Stock image of a business professional.

2

Communication

Prioritize high-value modes of communication to break down existing silos and create common understanding and alignment across functions. This approach increases transparency and visibility across the entire product lifecycle.

3

Integration

Explore methods to integrate the workflows, decision making, and toolsets among the business, IT, and customers. The goal is to become more reactive to changes in business and customer expectations and more proactive about market trends.

Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

Do not expect a universal definition of products.
Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

“A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business.

This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

“There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.” (Chad Beier, “How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org)

Products enable the long-term and continuous delivery of value

Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum.

Phase 1

Build the case for product-centric delivery

Phase 1
1.1 Define product
1.2 Define your drivers and goals
1.3 Understand the role of product ownership
1.4 Communicate what comes next
1.5 Make the case to your stakeholders

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Define product in your context.
  • Define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery.
  • Understand the role of product ownership.
  • Communicate what comes next for your transition to product.
  • Lay out the case to your stakeholders.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Business analysts

Step 1.1

Define product

Activities
  • 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context
  • 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization
  • 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

This step involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Business analysts

Outcomes of this step

  • A clear definition of product in your organization’s context.

Make the Case for Product Delivery

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

Exercise 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context

30-60 minutes

Output: Your enterprise/organizational definition of products and services

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Discuss what “product” means in your organization.
  2. Create a common, enterprise-wide definition for “product.”
“A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product-Centric Delivery Workbook.

Example: What is a product?

Not all organizations will define products in the same way. Take this as a general example:

“A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

Info-Tech Insight

A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

  1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
  2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
  3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.
Stock image of an open human head with gears and a city for a brain.

How do we know what is a product?

What isn’t a product:
  • Features (on their own)
  • Transactions
  • Unstructured data
  • One-time solutions
  • Non-repeatable processes
  • Solutions that have no users or consumers
  • People or teams
You have a product if the given item...
  • Has end users or consumers
  • Delivers quantifiable value
  • Evolves or changes over time
  • Has predictable delivery
  • Has definable boundaries
  • Has a cost to produce and operate

Exercise 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization

15 minutes

Output: Examples of what is and isn’t a product in your specific context.

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Leverage the definition you created in exercise 1.1.1 and the explanation on the slide What is a product?
  2. Pick examples that effectively show the difference between products and non-products and facilitate a conversation on the ones that seem to be on the line. Specific server instances, or instances of providing a service, are worthwhile examples to consider.
  3. From the list you come up with, take the top three examples and put them into the Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template.
Example:
What isn’t a product?
  • Month-end SQL scripts to close the books
  • Support Engineer doing a password reset
  • Latest research project in R&D
What is a product?
  • Self-service password reset portal
  • Oracle ERP installation
  • Microsoft Office 365

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Product delivery practices should consider everything required to support it, not just what users see.

Cross-section of an iceberg above and below water with visible product delivery practices like 'Funding', 'External Relationships', and 'Stakeholder Management' above water and internal product delivery practices like 'Product Governance', 'Business Functionality', and 'R&D' under water. There are far more processes below the water.

Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

Product = Service

“Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:
  • External products
  • Internal products
  • External services
  • Internal services
  • Products as a service (PaaS)
  • Productizing services (SaaS)

Exercise 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

30-60 minutes

Output: List of differences between project and product delivery

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Consider project delivery and product delivery.
  2. Discuss what some differences are between the two.
    Note: This exercise is not about identifying the advantages and disadvantages of each style of delivery. This is to identify the variation between the two.
Theme Project Delivery (Current) Product Delivery (Future)
Timing Defined start and end Does not end until the product is no longer needed
Funding Funding projects Funding products and teams
Prioritization LoB sponsors Product owner
Capacity Management Project management Managed by product team

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

Project Product
Fund projects — Funding –› Fund products or teams
Line of business sponsor — Prioritization –› Product owner
Makes specific changes to a product —Product management –› Improves product maturity and support
Assignment of people to work — Work allocation –› Assignment of work to product teams
Project manager manages — Capacity management –› Team manages capacity

Info-Tech Insights

  • Product ownership should be one of your first areas of focus when transitioning from project to product delivery.
  • Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum. Projects within products

Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

Step 1.2

Define your drivers and goals

Activities
  • 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery
  • 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

This step involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Business analysts

Outcomes of this step

  • A clear understanding of your motivations and desired outcomes for moving to product delivery.

Make the Case for Product Delivery

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

Exercise 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

30-60 minutes

Output: Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery.

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Identify your pain points in the current delivery model.
  2. What is the root cause of these pain points?
  3. How will a product-centric delivery model fix the root cause (drivers)?
Pain Points
  • Lack of ownership
Root Causes
  • Siloed departments
Drivers
  • Accountability

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Exercise 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

30 minutes

Output: Goals for product-centric delivery

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Review the differences between project and product delivery from exercise 1.1.3 and the list of drivers from exercise 1.2.1.
  2. Define your goals for achieving a product-centric organization.
    Note: Your drivers may have already covered the goals. If so, review if you would like to change the drivers based on your renewed understanding of the differences between project and product delivery.
Pain Points
  • Lack of ownership
Root Causes
  • Siloed departments
Drivers
  • Accountability
Goals
  • End-to-end ownership

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Step 1.3

Understand the role of product ownership

Activities
  • 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

This step involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Business analysts

Outcomes of this step

  • Product owner capabilities that you agree are critical to start your product transformation.

Make the Case for Product Delivery

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

Accountability for the delivery of value through product ownership is not optional

Tree of 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities' leading to 'Product' through a 'Product Family'.

Info-Tech Insight

People treat the assignment of accountability for products (aka product ownership) as optional. Without assigning accountability up front, your transition to product delivery will stall. Accountable individuals will be focused on the core outcome for product delivery, which is the delivery of the right value, at the right time, to the right people.

Description of the tree levels shown in the diagram on the left. First is 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities', led by 'Executive Leadership' using the 'Enterprise Strategic Roadmap'. Second is 'Product Family', led by 'Product Manager' using the 'Product Family Roadmap'. Last is 'Product', led by the 'Product Owner' using the 'Product Roadmap' and 'Backlog' on the strategic end, and 'Releases' on the Tactical end. In the holistic context, 'Product Family is considered 'Strategic' while 'Product' is 'Tactical'.

Recognize the different product owner perspectives

Business
  • Customer facing, revenue generating
Technical
  • IT systems and tools
Operations
  • Keep the lights on processes

Info-Tech Best Practice

Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

Info-Tech Insight

Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

“A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.” (Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”)

Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

As discussed in Build a Better Product Owner, most product owners operate with an incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization. 'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.
Vision
  • Market Analysis
  • Business Alignment
  • Product Roadmap
Leadership
  • Soft Skills
  • Collaboration
  • Decision Making
Product Lifecycle Management
  • Plan
  • Build
  • Run
Value Realization
  • KPIs
  • Financial Management
  • Business Model

Details on product ownership capabilities can be found in the appendix.

Exercise 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

60 minutes

Output: Product owner capability mapping

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Write down the capabilities product owners need to perform their duties (one per sticky note) in order to describe product ownership in your organization. Consider people, processes, and tools.
  2. Mark each capability with a plus (current capability), circle (some proficiency), or dash (missing capability).
  3. Discuss each capability and place on the appropriate quadrant.

'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Differentiate between product owners and product managers

Product Owner (Tactical Focus)
  • Backlog management and prioritization
  • Epic/story definition, refinement in conjunction with business stakeholders
  • Sprint planning with Scrum Master
  • Working with Scrum Master to minimize disruption to team velocity
  • Ensuring alignment between business and Scrum teams during sprints
  • Profit and loss (P&L) product analysis and monitoring
Product Manager (Strategic Focus)
  • Product strategy, positioning, and messaging
  • Product vision and product roadmap
  • Competitive analysis and positioning
  • New product innovation/definition
  • Release timing and focus (release themes)
  • Ongoing optimization of product-related marketing and sales activities
  • P&L product analysis and monitoring

Info-Tech Insight

“Product owner” and “product manager” are terms that should be adapted to fit your culture and product hierarchy. These are not management relationships but rather a way to structure related products and services that touch the same end users.

Step 1.4

Communicate what comes next

Activities
  • 1.4.1 How do we get started?

This step involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Business analysts

Outcomes of this step

  • A now, next, later roadmap indicating your overall next steps.

Make the Case for Product Delivery

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

Make a plan in order to make a plan!

Consider some of the techniques you can use to validate your strategy.

Cyclical diagram of the 'Continuous Delivery of Value' within 'Business Value'. Surrounding attributes are 'User Centric', 'Adaptable', 'Accessible', 'Private & Secured', 'Informative & Insightful', 'Seamless Application Connection', 'Relationship & Network Building', 'Fit for Purpose'.

Go to your backlog and prioritize the elements that need to be answered sooner rather than later.

Possible areas of focus:

  • Regulatory requirements or questions to answer around accessibility, security, privacy.
  • Stress testing any new processes against situations that may occur.
Learning Milestones

The completion of a set of artifacts dedicated to validating business opportunities and hypotheses.

Possible areas of focus:

  • Align teams on product strategy prior to build
  • Market research and analysis
  • Dedicated feedback sessions
  • Provide information on feature requirements
Stock image of people learning.
Sprint Zero (AKA Project-before-the-project)

The completion of a set of key planning activities, typically the first sprint.

Possible areas of focus:

  • Focus on technical verification to enable product development alignment
  • Sign off on architectural questions or concerns
Stock photo of a person writing on a board of sticky notes.

The “Now, Next, Later” roadmap

Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

  • Now
    What are you going to do now?
  • Next
    What are you going to do very soon?
  • Later
    What are you going to do in the future?
A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
(Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

Exercise 1.4.1 How do we get started?

30-60 minutes

Output: Product transformation critical steps and basic roadmap

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace product-centric delivery.
  2. Group each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
    • Now: Let’s do this ASAP.
    • Next: Sometime very soon, let’s do these things.
    • Later: Much further off in the distance, let’s consider these things.
A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
(Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Example

Example table for listing tasks to complete Now, Next, or Later

Step 1.5

Make the case to your stakeholders

Activities
  • 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders
  • 1.5.2 Build your pitch for product delivery

This step involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Business analysts

Outcomes of this step

  • A deliverable that helps make the case for product delivery.

Make the Case for Product Delivery

Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

Develop a stakeholder strategy to define your product owner landscape

Stakeholder Influence

Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

Product teams operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

See the appendix for activities and guidance on how to devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

Exercise 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders

30 minutes

Output: Clear understanding of stakeholders, what they need from you, and what you need from them.

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. If you don’t yet know who your stakeholders are, consider completing one or more of the stakeholder management exercises in the appendix.
  2. Identify your key stakeholders who have an interest in solution delivery.
  3. Consider their perspective on product-centric delivery. (For example: For head of support, what does solution delivery mean to them?)
  4. Identify what role each stakeholder would play in the transformation.
    • This role represents what you need from them for this transformation to product-centric delivery.
Stakeholder
What does solution delivery mean to them?
What do you need from them in order to be successful?

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Exercise 1.5.2 Build your pitch deck

30 minutes (and up)

Output: A completed presentation to help you make the case for product delivery.

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Take the results from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook and transfer them into the presentation template.
  2. Follow the instructions on each page listed in the instruction bubbles to know what results to place where.
  3. This is meant to be a template; you are welcome to add and remove slides as needed to suit your audience!

Sample of slides from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook with instruction bubbles overlaid.

Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

Appendix

Additional research to start your journey

Related Info-Tech Research

Product Delivery

Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

  • Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

Build a Better Product Owner

  • Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

  • Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

Implement Agile Practices That Work

  • Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

Implement DevOps Practices That Work

  • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

Deliver Digital Products at Scale

  • Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

  • Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

  • Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

  • Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

  • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

Related Info-Tech Research

Application Portfolio Management

Application Portfolio Management (APM) Research Center

  • See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

Application Portfolio Management for Small Enterprises

  • There is no one-size-fits-all rationalization. Tailor your framework to meet your goals.

Streamline Application Maintenance

  • Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

Build an Application Rationalization Framework

  • Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

Modernize Your Applications

  • Justify modernizing your application portfolio from both business and technical perspectives.

Review Your Application Strategy

  • Ensure your applications enable your business strategy.

Application Portfolio Management Foundations

  • Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

Streamline Application Management

  • Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

Optimize Applications Release Management

  • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

Embrace Business-Managed Applications

  • Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

Related Info-Tech Research

Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

Build a Value Measurement Framework

  • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

  • Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

  • Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

  • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

  • Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

  • Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations

Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

  • Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

  • Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

  • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

Related Info-Tech Research

Org Design and Performance

Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

  • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

  • Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

  • Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

  • Measure employee sentiment to drive IT performance

Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

  • Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

Master Organizational Change Management Practices

  • PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

Appendix

Product delivery strategy communication

Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

Diagram on how to get from product owner capabilities to 'Business Value Realization' through 'Product Roadmap' with a 'Tiered Backlog', 'Delivery Capacity and Throughput' via a 'Product Delivery Pipeline'.
(Adapted from: Pichler, “What Is Product Management?”)

Info-Tech Insight

The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver.
Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

Two-part diagram showing the 'Product Backlog' segmented into '1. Current: Features/ Stories', '2. Near-term: Capabilities', and '3. Future: Epics', and then the 'Product Roadmap' with the same segments placed into a timeline.

Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

Product managers and product owners have many responsibilities, and a roadmap can be a useful tool to complete those objectives through communication or organization of tasks.

However, not all roadmaps address the correct audience and achieve those objectives. Care must be taken to align the view to the given audience.

Pie Chart showing the surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap. From largest to smallest are 'Communicate a strategy', 'Plan and prioritize', 'Communicate milestones and releases', 'Get consensus on product direction', and 'Manage product backlog'.
Surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap (Source: ProductPlan, 2018)

Audience
Business/ IT leaders Users/Customers Delivery teams
Roadmap View
Portfolio Product Technology
Objectives
To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority apps To visualize and validate product strategy To coordinate and manage teams and show dev. progress
Artifacts
Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual apps, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level. Artifacts are generally grouped by various product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals. Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of features and technical enablers that support those features.

Appendix

Managing stakeholder influence

From Build a Better Product Owner

Step 1.3 (from Build a Better Product Owner)

Manage Stakeholder Influence

Activities
  • 1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers
  • 1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories
  • 1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders
  • 1.3.4 Delegation Poker: Reach better decisions

This step will walk you through the following activities:

To be successful, product owners need to identify and manage all stakeholders for their products. This step will build a stakeholder map and strategy.

This step involves the following participants:

  • Product owners
  • Product managers
  • Development team leads
  • Portfolio managers
  • Delivery managers
  • Business analysts

Outcomes of this step

  • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers
  • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers
  • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization
  • Better understanding of decision-making approaches and delegation
Product Owner Foundations
Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

Stakeholder Influence

Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

Product owners operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

Without accomplishing these missing pieces, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

Legend
Black arrow with a solid line and single direction. Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
Green arrow with a dashed line and bi-directional. Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

Info-Tech Insight

Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

Use “connectors” to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers

60 minutes

Input: List of product stakeholders

Output: Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
  2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
  3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
  4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
    1. Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
    2. Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.
  5. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

A stakeholder prioritization map helps product owners categorize their stakeholders by their level or influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

Stakeholder prioritization map split into four quadrants along two axes, 'Influence', and 'Ownership/Interest': 'Players' (high influence, high interest); 'Mediators' (high influence, low interest); 'Noisemakers' (low influence, high interest); 'Spectators' (low influence, low interest). Source: Info-Tech Research Group

There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.
  • Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
  • Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
  • Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
  • Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories

30 minutes

Input: Stakeholder map

Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Identify your stakeholder’s interest in and influence on your Agile implementation as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
  2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
  3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
Same stakeholder prioritization map as before but with example positions mapped onto it.
Level of Influence
  • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
  • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
  • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
  • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
  • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
Level of Interest

How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

Prioritize your stakeholders

There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

Stakeholder prioritization table with 'Stakeholder Category' as row headers ('Player', 'Mediator', 'Noisemaker', 'Spectator') and 'Level of Support' as column headers ('Supporter', 'Evangelist', 'Neutral', 'Blocker'). Importance ratings are 'Critical', 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Irrelevant'.

Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by rating the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend your product? These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive the focus of your attention. The table to the right indicates how stakeholders are ranked.

1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

30 minutes

Input: Stakeholder matrix, Stakeholder prioritization

Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

  1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would endorse your product?
  2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.
  3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
Stakeholder Category Level of Support Prioritization
CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
CIO Player Supporter Critical

Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

Stakeholder strategy map assigning stakeholder strategies to stakeholder categories, as described in the adjacent table.

Info-Tech Insight

Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers, while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

Type Quadrant Actions
Players High influence; high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
Mediators High influence; low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
Noisemakers Low influence; high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
Spectators Low influence; low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

Appendix

Product owner capability details

From Build a Better Product Owner

Develop product owner capabilities

Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

Each capability has three components needed for successful product ownership.

Definitions are on the following slides.

Central diagram title 'Product Owner Capabilities'.

Define the skills and activities in each component that are directly related to your product and culture.

Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.
Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'. Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

Capabilities: Vision

Market Analysis

  • Unique solution: Identify the target users and unique value your product provides that is not currently being met.
  • Market size: Define the size of your user base, segmentation, and potential growth.
  • Competitive analysis: Determine alternative solutions, products, or threats that affect adoption, usage, and retention.

Business Alignment

  • SWOT analysis: Complete a SWOT analysis for your end-to-end product lifecycle. Use Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template.
  • Enterprise alignment: Align product to enterprise goals, strategies, and constraints.
  • Delivery strategy: Develop a delivery strategy to achieve value quickly and adapt to internal and external changes.

Product Roadmap

  • Roadmap strategy: Determine the duration, detail, and structure of your roadmap to accurately communicate your vision.
  • Value prioritization: Define criteria used to evaluate and sequence demand.
  • Go to market strategy: Create organizational change management, communications, and a user implementation approach.

Info-Tech Insight

Data comes from many places and may still not tell the complete story.

Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

“Customers are best heard through many ears.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

Capabilities: Leadership

Soft Skills

  • Communication: Maintain consistent, concise, and appropriate communication using SMART guidelines (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely).
  • Integrity: Stick to your values, principles, and decision criteria for the product to build and maintain trust with your users and teams.
  • Influence: Manage stakeholders using influence and collaboration over contract negotiation.

Collaboration

  • Stakeholder management: Build a communications strategy for each stakeholder group, tailored to individual stakeholders.
  • Relationship management: Use every interaction point to strengthen relationships, build trust, and empower teams.
  • Team development: Promote development through stretch goals and controlled risks to build team capabilities and performance.

Decision Making

  • Prioritized criteria: Remove personal bias by basing decisions off data analysis and criteria.
  • Continuous improvement: Balance new features with the need to ensure quality and create an environment of continuous improvement.
  • Team empowerment/negotiation: Push decisions to teams closest to the problem and solution, using Delegation Poker to guide you.

Info-Tech Insight

Product owners cannot be just a proxy for stakeholder decisions. The product owner owns product decisions and management of all stakeholders.

Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.

“Everything walks the walk. Everything talks the talk.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

Capabilities: Product lifecycle management

Plan

  • Product backlog: Follow a schedule for backlog intake, refinement, updates, and prioritization.
  • Journey map: Create an end-user journey map to guide adoption and loyalty.
  • Fit for purpose: Define expected value and intended use to ensure the product meets your end user’s needs.

Build

  • Capacity management: Work with operations and delivery teams to ensure consistent and stable outcomes.
  • Release strategy: Build learning, release, and critical milestones into a repeatable release plan.
  • Compliance: Build policy compliance into delivery practices to ensure alignment and reduce avoidable risk (privacy, security).

Run

  • Adoption: Focus attention on end-user adoption and proficiency to accelerate value and maximize retention.
  • Support: Build operational support and business continuity into every team.
  • Measure: Measure KPIs and validate expected value to ensure product alignment to goals and consistent product quality.

Info-Tech Insight

Product owners must actively manage the full lifecycle of the product.

Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'.

“Pay fantastic attention to detail. Reward, recognize, celebrate.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

Capabilities: Value realization

Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

  • Usability and user satisfaction: Assess satisfaction through usage monitoring and end-user feedback.
  • Value validation: Directly measure performance against defined value proposition, goals, and predicted ROI.
  • Fit for purpose: Verify the product addresses the intended purpose better than other options.

Financial Management

  • P&L: Manage each product as if it were its own business with profit and loss statements.
  • Acquisition cost/market growth: Define the cost of acquiring a new consumer, onboarding internal users, and increasing product usage.
  • User retention/market share: Verify product usage continues after adoption and solution reaches new user groups to increase value.

Business Model

  • Defines value proposition: Dedicate your primary focus to understanding and defining the value your product will deliver.
  • Market strategy and goals: Define your acquisition, adoption, and retention plan for users.
  • Financial model: Build an end-to-end financial model and plan for the product and all related operational support.

Info-Tech Insight

Most organizations stop with on-time and on-budget. True financial alignment needs to define and manage the full lifecycle P&L.

Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

“The competition is anyone the customer compares you with.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

Avoid common capability gaps

Vision

  • Focusing solely on backlog refining (tactical only)
  • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
  • Operational support and execution
  • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
  • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

Leadership

  • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
  • Using a command-and-control approach
  • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
  • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
  • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

Product Lifecycle Management

  • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
  • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
  • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
  • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
  • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

Value Realization

  • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
  • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
  • Skipping business plans and financial models
  • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
  • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

Bibliography – Product Ownership

A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Medium, Product Management Insider, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance, n.d. Web.

Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint, 2012. Web.

Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, 2015. Web.

Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group, 2005. Web.

Cohn, Mike “What is a product?” Mountain Goat Software, 16 Sept. 2016, Web

Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom. Bard Press, 1997. Print.

Curphey, Mark, “Product Definition.” slideshare.net, 25 Feb. 2007. Web

Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” Medium.com, 6 March 2017. Web.

Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile Alliance, Agile2016, 2016. Web.

Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” Medium.com, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Medium.com, 23 July 2018. Web.

Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

Management 3.0. “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

Bibliography – Product Ownership

McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web.

Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams: Rich Mironov's Product Bytes.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 April 2014 . Web.

Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 March 2017. Web.

Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

Radigan, Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

Bibliography – Product Ownership

Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin VOP #50, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

“The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group, 2015. Web.

Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium.com, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

VersionOne. “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” Medium.com, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

“How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 April 2017, Web.

“Product Definition.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web

Bibliography – Product Roadmap

Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012, Herzlia, Israel, 2012 IEEE International Conference on Software Science, Technology and Engineering, 12 June 2012. Web.

Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

“How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, Inc., 2017. Web.

Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP)?” LEANSTACK, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

“Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 Oct. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Emily Archer, Lead Business Analyst, Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency.

Emily Archer
Lead Business Analyst,
Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

Photo of David Berg, Founder & CTO, Strainprint Technologies Inc.

David Berg
Founder & CTO
Strainprint Technologies Inc.

David Berg is a product commercialization expert that has spent the last 20 years of his career delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world with the goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

Research Contributors and Experts

Blank photo template.

Kathy Borneman
Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

Photo of Charlie Campbell, Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions.

Charlie Campbell
Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Yarrow Diamond, Sr. Director, Business Architecture, Financial Services.

Yarrow Diamond
Sr. Director, Business Architecture
Financial Services

Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

Photo of Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA, Enterprise Business Systems Analyst, Vertex, Inc.

Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA
Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,
Vertex, Inc.

Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Kieran Gobey, Senior Consultant Professional Services, Blueprint Software Systems.

Kieran Gobey
Senior Consultant Professional Services
Blueprint Software Systems

Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations.

Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

Photo of Rupert Kainzbauer, VP Product, Digital Wallets, Paysafe Group.

Rupert Kainzbauer
VP Product, Digital Wallets
Paysafe Group

Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. Together with a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Saeed Khan, Founder, Transformation Labs.

Saeed Khan
Founder,
Transformation Labs

Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in both Canada and the US and has held a number of leadership roles in Product Management over that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005.

Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders, the only global community of senior-level product executives.

Photo of Hoi Kun Lo, Product Owner, Nielsen.

Hoi Kun Lo
Product Owner
Nielsen

Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL, and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Abhishek Mathur, Sr Director, Product Management, Kasisto, Inc.

Abhishek Mathur
Sr Director, Product Management
Kasisto, Inc.

Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

Photo of Jeff Meister, Technology Advisor and Product Leader.

Jeff Meister
Technology Advisor and Product Leader

Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations.

Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements.

Jeff holds a Bachelor of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Vincent Mirabelli, Principal, Global Project Synergy Group.

Vincent Mirabelli
Principal,
Global Project Synergy Group

With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

Photo of Oz Nazili, VP, Product & Growth, TWG.

Oz Nazili
VP, Product & Growth
TWG

Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Mark Pearson, Principal IT Architect, First Data Corporation.

Mark Pearson
Principal IT Architect
First Data Corporation

Mark Pearson is an executive business leader grounded in the process, data, technology, and operations of software-driven business. He knows the enterprise software landscape and is skilled in product, technology, and operations design and delivery within information technology organizations, outsourcing firms, and software product companies.

Photo of Brenda Peshak, Product Owner, Widget Industries, LLC.

Brenda Peshak
Product Owner,
Widget Industries, LLC

Brenda Peshak is skilled in business process, analytical skills, Microsoft Office Suite, communication, and customer relationship management (CRM). She is a strong product management professional with a Master’s focused in Business Leadership (MBL) from William Penn University.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Mike Starkey, Director of Engineering, W.W. Grainger.

Mike Starkey
Director of Engineering
W.W. Grainger

Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

Photo of Anant Tailor, Cofounder & Head of Product, Dream Payments Corp.

Anant Tailor
Cofounder & Head of Product
Dream Payments Corp.

Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes.

Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries.

Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

Research Contributors and Experts

Photo of Angela Weller, Scrum Master, Businessolver.

Angela Weller
Scrum Master, Businessolver

Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}229|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
  • Each year, SMB IT organizations spend more money “outsourcing” tasks, activities, applications, functions, and other items.
  • Many SMBs lack the affordability of implementing a sophisticated vendor management initiative or office.
  • The increased spend and associated outsourcing leads to less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. There are commonalities among vendor management initiatives, but the key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs, not the other way around.
  • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.
  • Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally”, starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

Impact and Result

  • Build and implement a vendor management initiative tailored to your environment.
  • Create a solid foundation to sustain your vendor management initiative as it evolves and matures.
  • Leverage vendor management-specific tools and templates to manage vendors more proactively and improve communication.
  • Concentrate your vendor management resources on the right vendors.
  • Build a roadmap and project plan for your vendor management journey to ensure you reach your destination.
  • Build collaborative relationships with critical vendors.

Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read this Executive Brief to understand how changes in the vendor landscape and customer reliance on vendors have made a vendor management initiative indispensible.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Plan

This phase helps you organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

  • Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business – Phase 1: Plan
  • Phase 1 Small Business Tools and Templates Compendium

2. Build

This phase helps you configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

  • Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business – Phase 2: Build
  • Phase 2 Small Business Vendor Classification Tool
  • Phase 2 Small Business Risk Assessment Tool
  • Phase 2 Small Business Tools and Templates Compendium

3. Run

This phase helps you begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

  • Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business – Phase 3: Run

4. Review

This phase helps the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

  • Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business – Phase 4: Review
[infographic]

Further reading

Essentials of Vendor Management for Small Business

Create and implement a vendor management framework to begin obtaining measurable results in 90 days.


EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

Vendor Management Challenge

Small businesses are often challenged by the growth and complexity of their vendor ecosystem, including the degree to which the vendors control them. Vendors are increasing, obtaining more and more budget dollars, while funding for staff or headcount is decreasing as a result of cloud-based applications and an increase in our reliance on Managed Service Providers. Initiating a vendor management initiative (VMI) vs. creating a fully staffed vendor management office will get you started on the path of proactively controlling your vendors instead of consistently operating in a reactionary mode. This blueprint is designed with that very thought: to assist small businesses in creating the essentials of a vendor management initiative.

This is a picture of Steve Jeffery

Steve Jeffery
Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Each year, IT organizations "outsource" tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

  • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
  • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
  • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

Common Obstacles

As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Oftentimes, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don't have a VMI to help:

  • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
  • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
  • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

Info-Tech's Approach

Vendor Management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

  • Plan
  • Build
  • Run
  • Review

The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you quickly establish your VMI and sets a solid foundation for its growth and maturity.

Info-Tech Insight

Vendor management is not a one-size-fits-all initiative. It must be configured:

  • For your environment, culture, and goals.
  • To leverage the strengths of your organization and personnel.
  • To focus your energy and resources on your critical vendors.

Executive Summary

Your challenge

Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape.

38%

2021

16%

2021

47%

2021

Spend on as-a-service providers

Spend on managed services providers

IT services merger & acquisition growth (transactions)

Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

Executive Summary

Common obstacles

When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an "expected value" associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

A contract's realized value with and without a vendor management initiative

This is an image of a bar graph showing the difference in value between those with and without a VMI, with and for those with a VMI, with Vendor Collaboration and with Vendor Performance Management. The data for those with a VMI have substantially more value.

Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

Executive Summary

Info-Tech's approach

A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help you create a VMI that meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and grow).

This is an image of the 4 Step Vendor Management Process. The four steps are: 1. Plan; 2. Build; 3. Run; 4. Review.

Info-Tech's methodology for creating and operating your vmi

Phase 1 - Plan Phase 2 - Build Phase 3 - Run Phase 4 - Review
Phase Steps

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

2.1 Classification Model

2.2 Risk Assessment Tool

2.3 Scorecards and Feedback

2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

2.5 Relationship Alignment Document

2.6 Vendor Orientation

2.7 3-Year Roadmap

2.8 90-Day Plan

2.9 Quick Wins2.10 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors

3.2 Compile Scorecards

3.3 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings

3.4 Work the 90-Day Plan

3.5 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap

3.6 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships

4.1 Incorporate Leading Practices

4.2 Leverage Lessons Learned

4.3 Maintain Internal Alignment

Phase Outcomes This phase helps you organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI. This phase helps you configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan. This phase helps you begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI. This phase helps the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

Insight Summary

Insight 1

Vendor management is not "plug and play" – each organization's vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. While there are commonalities and leading practices associated with vendor management, your initiative won't look exactly like another organization's. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs.

Insight 2

All vendors are not of equal importance to your organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization's investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

Insight 3

Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI's ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates "informally", starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

Blueprint benefits

IT benefits

  • Identify and manage risk proactively.
  • Reduce costs and maximize value.
  • Increase visibility with your critical vendors.
  • Improve vendor performance.
  • Create a collaborative environment with key vendors.
  • Segment vendors to allocate resources more effectively and more efficiently.

Business benefits

  • Improve vendor accountability.
  • Increase collaboration between departments.
  • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
  • Create a feedback loop to address vendor/customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
  • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

Phase 1 - Plan

Phase 1

Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

2.1 Classification Model

2.2 Risk Assessment Tool

2.3 Scorecards and Feedback

2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

2.5 Relationship Alignment Document

2.6 Vendor Orientation

2.7 3-Year Roadmap

2.8 90-Day Plan

2.9 Quick Wins

2.10 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors

3.2 Compile Scorecards

3.3 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings

3.4 Work the 90-Day Plan

3.5 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap

3.6 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships

4.1 Incorporate Leading Practices

4.2 Leverage Lessons Learned

4.3 Maintain Internal Alignment

This phase will walk you through the following activity:

  • Organizing your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, and a desired future state for the VMI.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Procurement/Sourcing
  • IT
  • Others as needed

Vendor Management Initiative Basics for the Small/Medium Businesses

Phase 1 – Plan

Get Organized

Phase 1 – Plan focuses on getting organized. Foundational elements (Mission Statement, Goals, Scope, Strengths and Obstacles, Roles and Responsibilities, and Process Mapping) will help you define your VMI. These and the other elements of this Phase will follow you throughout the process of starting up your VMI and running it.

Spending time up front to ensure that everyone is on the same page will help avoid headaches down the road. The tendency is to skimp (or even skip) on these steps to get to "the good stuff." To a certain extent, the process provided here is like building a house. You wouldn't start building your dream home without having a solid blueprint. The same is true with vendor management. Leveraging vendor management tools and techniques without the proper foundation may provide some benefit in the short term, but in the long term it will ultimately be a house of cards waiting to collapse.

Step 1.1 – Mission statement and goals

Identify why the VMI exists and what it will achieve

Whether you are starting your vendor management journey or are already down the path, it is important to know why the vendor management initiative exists and what it hopes to achieve. The easiest way to document this is with a written declaration in the form of a Mission Statement and Goals. Although this is the easiest way to proceed, it is far from easy.

The Mission Statement should identify at a high level the nature of the services provided by the VMI, who it will serve, and some of the expected outcomes or achievements. The Mission Statement should be no longer than one or two sentences.

The complement to the Mission Statement is the list of goals for the VMI. Your goals should not be a reassertion of your Mission Statement in bullet format. At this stage it may not be possible to make them SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based), but consider making them as SMART as possible. Without some of the SMART parameters attached, your goals are more like dreams and wishes. At a minimum, you should be able to determine the level of success achieved for each of the VMI goals.

Although the VMI's Mission Statement will stay static over time (other than for significant changes to the VMI or organization as a whole), the goals should be reevaluated periodically using a SMART filter, and adjusted as needed.

1.1.1 – Mission statement and goals

20 – 40 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list, on a whiteboard or flip chart, the reasons why the VMI will exist.
  2. Review external mission statements for inspiration.
  3. Review internal mission statements from other areas to ensure consistency.
  4. Draft and document your Mission Statement in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
  5. Continue brainstorming and identify the high-level goals for the VMI.
  6. Review the list of goals and make them as SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based) as possible.
  7. Document your goals in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium– Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
  8. Obtain signoff on the Mission Statement and goals from stakeholders and executives as required.

Input

  • Brainstorming results
  • Mission statements from other internal and external sources

Output

  • Completed Mission Statement and Goals

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 1.2 – Scope

Determine what is in scope and out of scope for the VMI

Regardless of where your VMI resides or how it operates, it will be working with other areas within your organization. Some of the activities performed by the VMI will be new and not currently handled by other groups or individuals internally; at the same time, some of the activities performed by the VMI may be currently handled by other groups or individuals internally. In addition, executives, stakeholders, and other internal personnel may have expectations or make assumptions about the VMI. As a result, there can be a lot of confusion about what the VMI does and doesn't do, and the answers cannot always be found in the VMI's Mission Statement and Goals.

One component of helping others understand the VMI landscape is formalizing the VMI Scope. The Scope will define boundaries for the VMI. The intent is not to fence itself off and keep others out but provide guidance on where the VMI's territory begins and ends. Ultimately, this will help clarify the VMI's roles and responsibilities, improve workflow, and reduce errant assumptions.

When drafting your VMI scoping document, make sure you look at both sides of the equation (similar to what you would do when following best practices for a statement of work). Identify what is in scope and what is out of scope. Be specific when describing the individual components of the VMI Scope, and make sure executives and stakeholders are onboard with the final version.

1.2.1 – Scope

20 - 40 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list, on a whiteboard or flip chart, the activities and functions in scope and out of scope for the VMI.
    1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
    2. Go back and forth between in scope and out of scope as needed; it is not necessary to list all the in-scope items and then turn your attention to the out-of-scope items.
  2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity. An item may be in scope or out of scope, but not both.
  3. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.2 Scope to document the results.
  4. Obtain signoff on the Scope from stakeholders and executives as required.

Input

  • Brainstorming results
  • Mission Statement and Goals

Output

  • Completed list of items in and out of scope for the VMI

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.2 Scope

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 1.3 – Strengths and obstacles

Pinpoint the VMI's strengths and obstacles

A SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) is a valuable tool, but it is overkill for your VMI at this point. However, using a modified and simplified form of this tool (strengths and obstacles) will yield significant results and benefit the VMI as it grows and matures.

Your output will be two lists: the strengths associated with the VMI and the obstacles the VMI is facing. For example, strengths could include items such as smart people working within the VMI and executive support. Obstacles could include items such as limited headcount and training required for VMI staff.

The goals are 1) to harness the strengths to help the VMI be successful and 2) to understand the impact of the obstacles and plan accordingly. The output can also be used to enlighten executives and stakeholders about the challenges associated with their directives or requests (e.g. human bandwidth may not be sufficient to accomplish some of the vendor management activities and there is a moratorium on hiring until the next budget year).

For each strength identified, determine how you will or can leverage it when things are going well or when the VMI is in a bind. For each obstacle, list the potential impact on the VMI (e.g. scope, growth rate, and number of vendors that can actively be part of the VMI).

As you do your brainstorming, be as specific as possible and validate your lists with stakeholders and executives as needed.

1.3.1 – Strengths and obstacles

20 - 40 Minutes

Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list, on a whiteboard or flip chart, the VMI's strengths and obstacles.

Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.

Go back and forth between strengths and obstacles as needed; it is not necessary to list all the strengths first and then all the obstacles.

It is possible for an item to be a strength and an obstacle; when this happens, add details to distinguish the situations.

Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity.

Determine how you will leverage each strength and how you will manage each obstacle.

Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles to document the results.

Obtain signoff on the strengths and obstacles from stakeholders and executives as required.

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Mission Statement and Goals
  • Scope

Output

  • Completed list of items impacting the VMI's ability to be successful: strengths the VMI can leverage and obstacles the VMI must manage

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 1.4 – Roles and responsibilities

Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what

One crucial success factor for VMIs is gaining and maintaining internal alignment. There are many moving parts to an organization, and a VMI must be clear on the various roles and responsibilities related to the relevant processes. Some of this information can be found in the VMI's Scope referenced in Step 1.2, but additional information is required to avoid stepping on each other's toes; many of the processes require internal departments to work together. (For example, obtaining requirements for a request for proposal takes more than one person or department). While it is not necessary to get too granular, it is imperative that you have a clear understanding of how the VMI activities will fit within the larger vendor management lifecycle (which is comprised of many sub processes) and who will be doing what.

As we have learned through our workshops and guided implementations, a traditional RACI* or RASCI* Chart does not work well for this purpose. These charts are not intuitive, and they lack the specificity required to be effective. For vendor management purposes, a higher-level view and a slightly different approach provide much better results.

This step will lead your through the creation of an OIC* Chart to determine vendor management lifecycle roles and responsibilities. Afterward, you'll be able to say, "Oh, I see clearly who is involved in each part of the process and what their role is."

*RACI – Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed

*RASCI – Responsible, Accountable, Support, Consulted, Informed

*OIC – Owner, Informed, Contributor

This is an image of a table, where the row headings are: Role 1-5, and the Column Headings are: Step 1-5.

Step 1.4 – Roles and responsibilities (cont'd)

Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what

To start, define the vendor management lifecycle steps or process applicable to your VMI. Next, determine who participates in the vendor management lifecycle. There is no need to get too granular – think along the lines of departments, subdepartments, divisions, agencies, or however you categorize internal operational units. Avoid naming individuals other than by title; this typically happens when a person oversees a large group (e.g. the CIO [chief information officer] or the CPO [chief procurement officer]). Be thorough, but don't let the chart get out of hand. For each role and step of the lifecycle, ask whether the entry is necessary; does it add value to the clarity of understanding the responsibilities associated with the vendor management lifecycle? Consider two examples, one for roles and one for lifecycle steps. 1) Is IT sufficient or do you need IT Operations and IT Development? 2) Is "negotiate contract documents" sufficient or do you need negotiate the contract and negotiate the renewal? The answer will depend on your culture and environment but be wary of creating a spreadsheet that requires an 85-inch monitor to view it.

After defining the roles (departments, divisions, agencies) and the vendor management lifecycle steps or process, assign one of three letters to each box in your chart:

  • O – Owner – who owns the process; they may also contribute to it.
  • I – Informed – who is informed about the progress or results of the process.
  • C – Contributor – who contributes or works on the process; it can be tangible or intangible contributions.

This activity can be started by the VMI or done as a group with representatives from each of the named roles. If the VMI starts the activity, the resulting chart should be validated by the each of the named roles.

1.4.1 – Roles and responsibilities

1 – 6 hours

  1. Meet with the participants and configure the OIC Chart in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.4 OIC Chart.
    1. Review the steps or activities across the top of the chart and modify as needed.
    2. Review the roles listed along the left side of the chart and modify as needed.
  2. For each activity or step across the top of the chart, assign each role a letter – O for owner of that activity or step, I for informed, or C for contributor. Use only one letter per cell.
  3. Work your way across the chart. Every cell should have an entry or be left blank if it is not applicable.
  4. Review the results and validate that every activity or step has an O assigned to it; there must be an owner for every activity or step.
  5. Obtain signoff on the OIC Chart from stakeholders and executives as required.

Input

  • A list of activities or steps to complete a project starting with requirements gathering and ending with ongoing risk management.
  • A list of internal areas (departments, divisions, agencies, etc.) and stakeholders that contribute to completing a project.

Output

  • Completed OCI chart indicating roles and responsibilities for the VMI and other internal areas.

Materials

  • Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.4 OIC Chart

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Procurement/Sourcing
  • IT
  • Representatives from other areas as needed
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Phase 2 - Build

Create and configure tools, templates, and processes

Phase 1

Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

2.1 Classification Model

2.2 Risk Assessment Tool

2.3 Scorecards and Feedback

2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

2.5 Relationship Alignment Document

2.6 Vendor Orientation

2.7 3-Year Roadmap

2.8 90-Day Plan

2.9 Quick Wins

2.10 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors

3.2 Compile Scorecards

3.3 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings

3.4 Work the 90-Day Plan

3.5 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap

3.6 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships

4.1 Incorporate Leading Practices

4.2 Leverage Lessons Learned

4.3 Maintain Internal Alignment

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Configuring and creating the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Human Resources
  • Legal
  • Others as needed

Vendor Management Initiative Basics for the Small/Medium Businesses

Phase 2 – Build

Create and configure tools, templates, and processes

Phase 2 – Build focuses on creating and configuring the tools and templates that will help you run your VMI. Vendor management is not a plug and play environment, and unless noted otherwise, the tools and templates included with this blueprint require your input and thought. The tools and templates must work in concert with your culture, values, and goals. That will require teamwork, insights, contemplation, and deliberation.

During this Phase you'll leverage the various templates and tools included with this blueprint and adapt them for your specific needs and use. In some instances, you'll be starting with mostly a blank slate; while in others, only a small modification may be required to make it fit your circumstances. However, it is possible that a document or spreadsheet may need heavy customization to fit your situation. As you create your VMI, use the included materials for inspiration and guidance purposes rather than as absolute dictates.

Step 2.1 – Classification model

Configure the COST vendor classification tool

One of the functions of a VMI is to allocate the appropriate level of vendor management resources to each vendor since not all vendors are of equal importance to your organization. While some people may be able intuitively to sort their vendors into vendor management categories, a more objective, consistent, and reliable model works best. Info-Tech's COST model helps you assign your vendors to the appropriate vendor management category so that you can focus your vendor management resources where they will do the most good.

COST is an acronym for Commodity, Operational, Strategic, and Tactical. Your vendors will occupy one of these vendor management categories, and each category helps you determine the nature of the resources allocated to that vendor, the characteristics of the relationship desired by the VMI, and the governance level used.

The easiest way to think of the COST model is as a 2 x 2 matrix or graph. The model should be configured for your environment so that the criteria used for determining a vendor's classification align with what is important to you and your organization. However, at this point in your VMI's maturation, a simple approach works best. The Classification Model included with this blueprint requires minimal configuration to get your started, and that is discussed on the activity slide associated with this Step 2.1.

This is an image of the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

Step 2.1 – Classification model (cont'd)

Configure the COST vendor classification tool

Common characteristics by vendor management category

Operational

Strategic
  • Low to moderate risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
  • Product or service used by more than one area
  • Price is a key negotiation point
  • Product or service is valued by the organization
  • Quality or the perception of quality is a differentiator (i.e. brand awareness)
  • Moderate to high risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
  • Few competitors and differentiated products and services
  • Product or service significantly advances the organization's vision, mission, and success
  • Well-established in their core industry

Commodity

Tactical
  • Low risk and criticality; low spend and switching costs
  • Product or service is readily available from many sources
  • Market has many competitors and options
  • Relationship is transactional
  • Price is the main differentiator
  • Moderate to high risk and criticality; low to moderate spend and switching costs
  • Vendor offerings align with or support one or more strategic objectives
  • Often IT vendors "outside" of IT (i.e. controlled and paid for by other areas)
  • Often niche or new vendors

Source: Compiled in part from Guth, Stephen. "Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More)." 2015.

2.1.1 – Classification model

15 – 30 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants to configure the spend ranges in Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 1. Configuration for your environment.
  2. Collect your vendors and their annual spend to sort by largest to lowest.
  3. Update cells F14-J14 in the Classification Model based on your actual data.
    1. Cell F14 – Set the boundary at a point between the spend for your 10th and 11th ranked vendors. For example, if the 10th vendor by spend is $1,009, 850 and the 11th vendor by spend is $980,763, the range for F14 would be $1,000,00+.
    2. Cell G14 – Set the bottom of the range at a point between the spend for your 30th and 31st ranked vendors; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in F14.
    3. Cell H14 – Set the bottom of the range slightly below the spend for your 50th ranked vendor; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in G14.
    4. Cells I14 and J14 – Divide the remaining range in half and split it between the two cells; for J14 the range will be $0 to $1 less than the bottom range in I14.
  4. Ignore the other variables at this time.

Input

  • Phase 1 List of Vendors by Annual Spend

Output

  • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

Materials

  • Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 1. Configuration

Participants

  • VMI team

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool

Step 2.2 – Risk assessment tool

Identify risks to measure, monitor, and report on

One of the typical drivers of a VMI is risk management. Organizations want to get a better handle on the various risks their vendors pose. Vendor risks originate from many areas: financial, performance, security, legal, and others. However, security risk is the high-profile risk, and the one organizations often focus on almost exclusively, which leaves the organization vulnerable in other areas.

Risk management is a program, not a project; there is no completion date. A proactive approach works best and requires continual monitoring, identification, and assessment. Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and have other detrimental effects on the organization. Any risk that adversely affects IT will adversely affect the entire organization.

While the VMI won't necessarily be quantifying or calculating the risk directly, it generally is the aggregator of risk information across the risk categories, which it then includes in its reporting function (see Steps 2.12 and 3.8).

At a minimum, your risk management strategy should involve:

  • Identifying the risks you want to measure and monitor.
  • Identifying your risk appetite (the amount of risk you are willing to live with).
  • Measuring, monitoring, and reporting on the applicable risks.
  • Developing and deploying a risk management plan to minimize potential risk impact.

Vendor risk is a fact of life, but you do have options for how to handle it. Be proactive and thoughtful in your approach, and focus your resources on what is important.

2.2.1 – Risk assessment tool

30 - 90 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants to configure the risk indicators in Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool – Tab 1. Set parameters for your environment.
  2. Review the risk categories and determine which ones you will be measuring and monitoring.
  3. Review the risk indicators under each risk category and determine whether the indicator is acceptable as written, is acceptable with modifications, should be replaced, or should be deleted.
  4. Make the necessary changes to the risk indicators; these changes will cascade to each of the vendor tabs. Limit the number of risk indicators to no more than seven per risk category.
  5. Gain input and approval as needed from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required.

Input

  • Scope
  • OIC Chart
  • Process Maps
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Configured Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

Materials

  • Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool – Tab 1. Set Parameters

Participants

  • VMI team

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool

Step 2.3 – Scorecards and feedback

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

A vendor management scorecard is a great tool for measuring, monitoring, and improving relationship alignment. In addition, it is perfect for improving communication between you and the vendor.

Conceptually, a scorecard is similar to a school report card. At the end of a learning cycle, you receive feedback on how well you do in each of your classes. For vendor management, the scorecard is also used to provide periodic feedback, but there are some nuances and additional benefits and objectives when compared to a report card.

Although scorecards can be used in a variety of ways, the focus here will be on vendor management scorecards – contract management, project management, and other types of scorecards will not be included in the materials covered in this Step 2.3 or in Step 3.4.

This image contains a table with the score for objectives A-D. The scores are: A4, B3, C5, D4.

Step 2.3 – Scorecards and feedback (cont'd)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

Anatomy

The Info-Tech scorecard includes five areas:

  • Measurement categories. Measurement categories help organize the scorecard. Limit the number of measurement categories to three to five; this allows the parties to stay focused on what's important. Too many measurement categories make it difficult for the vendor to understand the expectations.
  • Criteria. The criteria describe what is being measured. Create criteria with sufficient detail to allow the reviewers to fully understand what is being measured and to evaluate it. Criteria can be objective or subjective. Use three to five criteria per measurement category.
  • Measurement category weights. Not all your measurement categories may be of equal importance to you; this area allows you to give greater weight to a measurement category when compiling the overall score.
  • Rating. Reviewers will be asked to assign a score to each criteria using a 1 to 5 scale.
  • Comments. A good scorecard will include a place for reviewers to provide additional information regarding the rating, or other items that are relevant to the scorecard.

An overall score is calculated based on the rating for each criteria and the measurement category weights.

Step 2.3 – Scorecards and feedback (cont'd)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

Goals and objectives

Scorecards can be used for a variety of reasons. Some of the common ones are:

  • Improving vendor performance.
  • Conveying expectations to the vendor.
  • Identifying and recognizing top vendors.
  • Increasing alignment between the parties.
  • Improving communication with the vendor.
  • Comparing vendors across the same criteria.
  • Measuring items not included in contract metrics.
  • Identifying vendors for "strategic alliance" consideration.
  • Helping the organization achieve specific goals and objectives.

Identifying and resolving issues before they impact performance or the relationship.

Identifying your scorecard drivers first will help you craft a suitable scorecard.

Step 2.3 – Scorecards and feedback (cont'd)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

Info-Tech recommends starting with simple scorecards to allow you and the vendors to acclimate to the new process and information. As you build your scorecards, keep in mind that internal personnel will be scoring the vendors and the vendors will be reviewing the scorecard. Make your scorecard easy for your personnel to fill out, and containing meaningful content to drive the vendor in the right direction. You can always make the scorecard more complex in the future.

Our recommendation of five categories is provided below. Choose three to five of the categories that help you accomplish your scorecard goals and objectives:

  1. Timeliness – Responses, resolutions, fixes, submissions, completions, milestones, deliverables, invoices, etc.
  2. Cost – Total cost of ownership, value, price stability, price increases/decreases, pricing models, etc.
  3. Quality – Accuracy, completeness, mean time to failure, bugs, number of failures, etc.
  4. Personnel – Skilled, experienced, knowledgeable, certified, friendly, trustworthy, flexible, accommodating, etc.
  5. Risk – Adequate contractual protections, security breaches, lawsuits, finances, audit findings, etc.

Some criteria may be applicable in more than one category. The categories above should cover at least 80% of the items that are important to your organization. The general criteria listed for each category is not an exhaustive list, but most things break down into time, money, quality, people, and risk issues.

Step 2.3 – Scorecards and feedback (cont'd)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

Additional Considerations

  • Even a good rating system can be confusing. Make sure you provide some examples or a way for reviewers to discern the differences between a 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Don't assume your "rating key" will be intuitive.
  • When assigning weights, don't go lower than 10% for any measurement category. If the weight is too low, it won't be relevant enough to have an impact on the total score. If it doesn't "move the needle", don't include it.
  • Final sign-off on the scorecard template should occur outside the VMI. The heavy lifting can be done by the VMI to create it, but the scorecard is for the benefit of the organization overall, and those impacted by the vendors specifically. You may end up playing arbiter or referee, but the scorecard is not the exclusive property of the VMI. Try to reach consensus on your final template whenever possible.
  • You should notice improved ratings and total scores over time for your vendors. One explanation for this is the Pygmalion Effect: "The Pygmalion [E]ffect describes situations where someone's high expectations improves our behavior and therefore our performance in a given area. It suggests that we do better when more is expected of us."* Convey your expectations and let the vendors' competitive juices take over.
  • While creating your scorecard and materials to explain the process to internal personnel, identify those pieces that will help you explain it to your vendors during vendor orientation (see Steps 2.6 and 3.4). Leveraging pre-existing materials is a great shortcut.

*Source: The Decision Lab, n.d.

Step 2.3 – Scorecards and feedback (cont'd)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

Vendor Feedback

After you've built your scorecard, turn your attention to the second half of the equation – feedback from the vendor. A communication loop cannot be successful without dialogue flowing both ways. While this can happen with just a scorecard, a mechanism specifically geared toward the vendor providing you with feedback improves communication, alignment, and satisfaction.

You may be tempted to create a formal scorecard for the vendor to use; avoid that temptation until later in your maturity or development of the VMI. You'll be implementing a lot of new processes, deploying new tools and templates, and getting people to work together in new ways. Work on those things first.

For now, implement an informal process for obtaining information from the vendor. Start by identifying information that you will find useful – information that will allow you to improve overall, to reduce waste or time, to improve processes, to identify gaps in skills. Incorporate these items into your business alignment meetings (see Steps 2.4 and 3.5). Create three to five good questions to ask the vendor and include these in the business alignment meeting agenda. The goal is to get meaningful feedback, and that starts with asking good questions.

Keep it simple at first. When the time is right, you can build a more formal feedback form or scorecard. Don't be in a rush; as long as the informal method works, keep using it.

2.3.1 – Scorecards and feedback

30 – 60 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for your scorecard measurement categories:
    1. What makes a vendor valuable to your organization?
    2. What differentiates a "good" vendor from a "bad" vendor?
    3. What items would you like to measure and provide feedback on to the vendor to improve performance, the relationship, risk, and other areas?
  2. Select three, but no more than five, of the following measure categories: timeliness, cost, quality, personnel, and risk.
  3. Within each measurement category, list two or three criteria that you want to measure and track for your vendors. Choose items that are as universal as possible rather than being applicable to one vendor or one vendor type.
  4. Assign a weight to each measurement category, ensuring that the total weight is 100% for all measurement categories.
  5. Document your results as you go in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3 Scorecard.

Input

  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Configured Scorecard template

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3 Scorecard

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

2.3.2 – Scorecards and feedback

15 to 30 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for feedback to seek from your vendors during your business alignment meetings. During the brainstorming, identify questions to ask the vendor about your organization that will:
    1. Help you improve the relationship.
    2. Help you improve your processes or performance.
    3. Help you improve ongoing communication.
    4. Help you evaluate your personnel.
  2. Identify the top five questions you want to include in your business alignment meeting agenda. (Note: you may need to refine the actual questions from the brainstorming activity before they are ready to include in your business alignment meeting agenda.)
  3. Document both your brainstorming activity and your final results in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3 Feedback. The brainstorming questions can be used in the future as your VMI matures and your feedback transforms from informal to formal. The results will be used in Steps 2.4 and 3.5.

Input

  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Feedback questions to include with the business alignment meeting agenda

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3 Feedback

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 2.4 – Business alignment meeting agenda

Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI

A business alignment meeting (BAM) is a multi-faceted tool to ensure the customer and the vendor stay focused on what is important to the customer at a high level. BAMs are not traditional operational meetings where the parties get into the details of the contracts, deal with installation problems, address project management issues, or discuss specific cost overruns. The focus of the BAM is the scorecard (see Step 2.3), but other topics are discussed, and other purposes are served. For example:

  • You can use the BAM to develop the relationship with the vendor's leadership team so that if escalation is ever needed, your organization is more than just a name on a spreadsheet or customer list.
  • You can learn about innovations the vendor is working on (without the meeting turning into a sales call).
  • You can address high-level performance trends and request corrective action as needed.
  • You can clarify your expectations.
  • You can educate the vendor about your industry, culture, and organization.
  • You can learn more about the vendor.

As you build your BAM Agenda, someone in your organization may say, "Oh, that's just a quarterly business review (QBR) or top-to-top meeting." In most instances, an existing QBRs or top-to-top meeting is not the same as a BAM. Using the term QBR or top-to-top meeting instead of BAM can lead to confusion internally. The VMI may say to the business unit, procurement, or another department, "We're going to start running some QBRs for our strategic vendors." The typical response is, "There's no need; we already run QBRs/top-to-top meetings with our important vendors." This may be accompanied by an invitation to join their meeting, where you may be an afterthought, have no influence, and get five minutes at the end to talk about your agenda items. Keep your BAM separate so that it meets your needs.

Step 2.4 – Business alignment meeting agenda (cont'd)

Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI

As previously noted, using the term BAM more accurately depicts the nature of the VMI meeting and prevents confusion internally with other meetings already occurring. In addition, hosting the BAM yourself rather than piggybacking onto another meeting ensures that the VMI's needs are met. The VMI will set and control the BAM agenda and determine the invite list for internal personnel and vendor personnel. As you may have figured out by now, having the right customer and vendor personnel attend will be essential.

BAMs are conducted at the vendor level, not the contract level. As a result, the frequency of the BAMs will depend on the vendor's classification category (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1). General frequency guidelines are provided below, but they can be modified to meet your goals:

  • Commodity vendors – Not applicable
  • Operational vendors – Biannually or annually
  • Strategic vendors – Quarterly
  • Tactical vendors – Quarterly or biannually

BAMs can help you achieve some additional benefits not previously mentioned:

  • Foster a collaborative relationship with the vendor.
  • Avoid erroneous assumptions by the parties.
  • Capture and provide a record of the relationship (and other items) over time.

Step 2.4 – Business alignment meeting agenda (cont'd)

Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI

As with any meeting, building the proper agenda will be one of the keys to an effective and efficient meeting. A high-level BAM agenda with sample topics is set out below:

BAM Agenda

  • Opening remarks
    • Welcome and introductions
    • Review of previous minutes
  • Active discussion
    • Review of open issues
    • Scorecard and feedback
    • Current status of projects to ensure situational awareness by the vendor
    • Roadmap/strategy/future projects
    • Accomplishments
  • Closing remarks
    • Reinforce positives (good behavior, results, and performance, value added, and expectations exceeded)
    • Recap
  • Adjourn

2.4.1 – Business alignment meeting agenda

20 – 45 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review the sample agenda in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.
  2. Using the sample agenda as inspiration and brainstorming activities as needed, create a BAM agenda tailored to your needs.
    1. Select the items from the sample agenda applicable to your situation.
    2. Add any items required based on your brainstorming.
    3. Add the feedback questions identified during Activity 2.3.2 and documented in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3 Feedback.
  3. Gain input and approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required or appropriate.
  4. Document the final BAM agenda in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium –Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3 Feedback

Output

  • Configured BAM agenda

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab2 .4 BAM Agenda

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 2.5 – Relationship alignment document

Draft a document to convey important VMI information to your vendors

Throughout this blueprint, alignment is mentioned directly (e.g. business alignment meetings [Steps 2.4 and 3.3]) or indirectly implied. Ensuring you and your vendors are on the same page, have clear and transparent communication, and understand each other's expectations is critical to fostering strong relationships. One component of gaining and maintaining alignment with your vendors is the Relationship Alignment Document (RAD). Depending upon the Scope of your VMI and what your organization already has in place, your RAD will fill in the gaps on various topics.

Early in the VMI's maturation, the easiest approach is to develop a short document (1 one page) or a pamphlet (i.e. the classic trifold) describing the rules of engagement when doing business with your organization. The RAD can convey expectations, policies, guidelines, and other items. The scope of the document will depend on:

  1. What you believe is important for the vendors to understand.
  2. Any other similar information already provided to the vendors.

The first step to drafting a RAD is to identify what information vendors need to know to stay on your good side. You may want vendors to know about your gift policy (e.g. employees may not accept vendor gifts above a nominal value, such as a pen or mousepad). Next, compare your list of what vendors need to know and determine if the content is covered in other vendor-facing documents such as a vendor code of conduct or your website's vendor portal. Lastly, create your RAD to bridge the gap between what you want and what is already in place. In some instances, you may want to include items from other documents to reemphasize them with the vendor community.

Info-Tech Insight

The RAD can be used with all vendors regardless of classification category. It can be sent directly to the vendors or given to them during vendor orientation (see Step 3.3)

2.5.1 – Relationship alignment document

1 to 4 Hours

  1. Meet with the participants and review the RAD sample and checklist in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc.
  2. Determine:
    1. Whether you will create one RAD for all vendors or one RAD for strategic vendors and another RAD for tactical and operational vendors; whether you will create a RAD for commodity vendors.
    2. The concepts you want to include in your RAD(s).
    3. The format for your RAD(s) – traditional, pamphlet, or other.
    4. Whether signoff or acknowledgement will be required by the vendors.
  3. Draft your RAD(s) and work with other internal areas, such as Marketing to create a consistent brand for the RADS, and Legal to ensure consistent use and preservation of trademarks or other intellectual property rights and other legal issues.
  4. Review other vendor-facing documents (e.g. supplier code of conduct, onsite safety and security protocols) for consistencies between them and the RAD(s).
  5. Obtain signoff on the RAD(s) from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Marketing, and others as needed.

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Vendor-facing documents, policies, and procedures

Output

  • Completed Relationship Alignment Document(s)

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Marketing, as needed
  • Legal, as needed

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 2.6 – Vendor orientation

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors

Your organization is unique. It may have many similarities with other organizations, but your culture, risk tolerance, mission, vision, and goals, finances, employees, and "customers" (those that depend on you) make it different. The same is true of your VMI. It may have similar principles, objectives, and processes to other organizations' VMIs, but yours is still unique. As a result, your vendors may not fully understand your organization and what vendor management means to you.

Vendor orientation is another means to helping you gain and maintain alignment with your important vendors, educate them on what is important to you, and provide closure when/if the relationship with the vendor ends. Vendor orientation is comprised of three components, each with a different function:

  • Orientation
  • Reorientation
  • Debrief

Vendor orientation focuses on the vendor management pieces of the puzzle (e.g. the scorecard process) rather than the operational pieces (e.g. setting up a new vendor in the system to ensure invoices are processed smoothly).

Step 2.6 – Vendor orientation (cont'd)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors

Reorientation

  • Reorientation is either identical or similar to orientation, depending upon the circumstances. Reorientation occurs for several reasons, and each reason will impact the nature and detail of the reorientation content. Reorientation occurs whenever:
  • There is a significant change in the vendor's products or services.
  • The vendor has been through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.
  • A significant contract renewal/renegotiation has recently occurred.
  • Sufficient time has passed from orientation; commonly 2 to 3 years.
  • The vendor has been placed in a "performance improvement plan" or "relationship improvement plan" protocol.
  • Significant turnover has occurred within your organization (executives, key stakeholders, and/or VMI personnel).
  • Substantial turnover has occurred at the vendor at the executive or account management level.
  • The vendor has changed vendor classification categories after the most current classification.
  • As the name implies, the goal is to refamiliarize the vendor with your current VMI situation, governances, protocols, and expectations. The drivers for reorientation will help you determine the reorientation's scope, scale, and frequency.

Step 2.6 – Vendor orientation (cont'd)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors

Debrief

To continue the analogy from orientation, debrief is like an exit interview for an employee when their employment is terminated. In this case, debrief occurs when the vendor is no longer an active vendor with your organization - all contracts have terminated or expired, and no new business with the vendor is anticipated within the next three months.

Similar to orientation and reorientation, debrief activities will be based on the vendor's classification category within the COST model. Strategic vendors don't go away very often; usually, they transition to operational or tactical vendors first. However, if a strategic vendor is no longer providing products or services to you, dig a little deeper into their experiences and allocate extra time for the debrief meeting.

The debrief should provide you with feedback on the vendor's experience with your organization and their participation in your VMI. Additionally, it can provide closure for both parties since the relationship is ending. Be careful that the debrief does not turn into a finger-pointing meeting or therapy session for the vendor. It should be professional and productive; if it is going off the rails, terminate the meeting before more damage can occur.

End the debrief on a high note if possible. Thank the vendor, highlight its key contributions, and single out any personnel who went above and beyond. You never know when you will be doing business with this vendor again – don't burn bridges!

Step 2.6 – Vendor orientation (cont'd)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors

As you create your vendor orientation materials, focus on the message you want to convey.

  • For orientation and reorientation:
    • What is important to you that vendors need to know?
    • What will help the vendors understand more about your organization and your VMI?
    • What and how are you different from other organizations overall, and in your "industry"?
    • What will help them understand your expectations?
    • What will help them be more successful?
    • What will help you build the relationship?
  • For debrief:
    • What information or feedback do you want to obtain?
    • What information or feedback to you want to give?

The level of detail you provide strategic vendors during orientation and reorientation may be different from the information you provide tactical and operational vendors. Commodity vendors are not typically involved in the vendor orientation process. The orientation meetings can be conducted on a one-to-one basis for strategic vendors and a one-to-many basis for operational and tactical vendors; reorientation and debrief are best conducted on a one-to-one basis. Lastly, face-to-face or video meetings work best for vendor orientation; voice-only meetings, recorded videos, or distributing only written materials seldom hit their mark or achieve the desired results.

Step 2.7 – Three-year roadmap

Plot your path at a high level

  1. The VMI exists in many planes concurrently:
  2. It operates both tactically and strategically.

It focuses on different timelines or horizons (e.g., the past, the present, and the future). Creating a three-year roadmap facilitates the VMI's ability to function effectively across these multiple landscapes.

The VMI roadmap will be influenced by many factors. The work product from Phase 1 – Plan, input from executives, stakeholders, and internal clients, and the direction of the organization are great sources of information as you begin to build your roadmap.

To start, identify what you would like to accomplish in year 1. This is arguably the easiest year to complete: budgets are set (or you have a good idea what the budget will look like), personnel decisions have been made, resources have been allocated, and other issues impacting the VMI are known with a higher degree of certainty than any other year. This does not mean things won't change during the first year of the VMI, but expectations are usually lower, and the short event horizon makes things more predictable during the year-1 ramp-up period.

Years 2 and 3 are more tenuous, but the process is the same: identify what you would like to accomplish or roll out in each year. Typically, the VMI maintains the year-1 plan into subsequent years and adds to the scope or maturity. For example, you may start year 1 with BAMs and scorecards for three of your strategic vendors; during year 2, you may increase that to five vendors; and during year 3, you may increase that to nine vendors. Or, you may not conduct any market research during year 1, waiting to add it to your roadmap in year 2 or 3 as you mature.

Breaking things down by year helps you identify what is important and the timing associated with your priorities. A conservative approach is recommended. It is easy to overcommit, but the results can be disastrous and painful.

2.7.1 – Three-year roadmap

45 – 90 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate year 1 of your three-year roadmap with your existing fiscal year or reporting year. Year 1 may be shorter or longer than a calendar year.
  2. Review the VMI activities listed in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.7 Three-year roadmap. Use brainstorming and your prior work product from Phase 1 and Phase 2 to identify additional items for the roadmap and add them at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
  3. Starting with the first activity, determine when that activity will begin and put an X in the corresponding column; if the activity is not applicable, leave it blank or insert N/A.
  4. Go back to the top of the list and add information as needed.
    1. For any year-1 or year-2 activities, add an X in the corresponding columns if the activity will be expanded/continued in subsequent periods (e.g., if a Year 2 activity will continue in year 3, put an X in year 3 as well).
    2. Use the comments column to provide clarifying remarks or additional insights related to your plans or "X's". For example, "Scorecards begin in year 1 with three vendors and will roll out to five vendors in year 2 and nine vendors in year 3."
  5. Obtain signoff from stakeholders, sponsors, and executives as needed.

Input

  • Phase 1 work product
  • Steps 2.1 – 2.6 work product
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • High level three-year roadmap for the VMI

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.7 Three-Year Roadmap

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 2.8 – 90-day plan

Pave your short-term path with a series of detailed quarterly plans

Now that you have prepared a three-year roadmap, it's time to take the most significant elements from the first year and create action plans for each three-month period. Your first 90-day plan may be longer or shorter if you want to sync to your fiscal or calendar quarters. Aligning with your fiscal year can make it easier for tracking and reporting purposes; however, the more critical item is to make sure you have a rolling series of four 90-day plans to keep you focused on the important activities and tasks throughout the year.

The 90-day plan is a simple project plan that will help you measure, monitor, and report your progress. Use the Info-Tech tool to help you track:

Activities.

  • Tasks comprising each activity.
  • Who will be performing the tasks.
  • An estimate of the time required per person per task.
  • An estimate of the total time to achieve the activity.
  • A due date for the activity.
  • A priority of the activity.

The first 90-day plan will have the greatest level of detail and should be as thorough as possible; the remaining three 90-day plans will each have less detail for now. As you approach the middle of the first 90-day plan, start adding details to the next 90-day plan; toward the end of the first quarter add a high-level 90-day plan to the end of the chain. Continue repeating this cycle each quarter and consult the three-year roadmap and the leadership team, as necessary.

2.8.1 – 90-day plan

45 – 90 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate the first "90-day" plan with your existing fiscal year or reporting cycles. Your first plan may be shorter or longer than 90 days.
  2. Looking at the year-1 section of the three-year roadmap, identify the activities that will be started during the next 90 days.
  3. Using the Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8 90-Day Plan, enter the following information into the spreadsheet for each activity to be accomplished during the next 90 days:
    1. Activity description.
    2. Tasks required to complete the activity (be specific and descriptive).
    3. The people who will be performing each task.
    4. The estimated number of hours required to complete each task.
    5. The start date and due date for each task or the activity.
  4. Validate the tasks are a complete list for each activity and the people performing the tasks have adequate time to complete the tasks by the due date(s).
  5. Assign a priority to each Activity.

Input

  • Three-Year Roadmap
  • Phase 1 work product
  • Steps 2.1 – 2.7 work product
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Detailed plan for the VMI for the next quarter or "90" days

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8 90-Day Plan

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 2.9 – Quick wins

Identify potential short-term successes to gain momentum and show value immediately

As the final step in the timeline trilogy, you are ready to identify some quick wins for the VMI. Using the first 90-day plan and a brainstorming activity, create a list of things you can do in 15 to 30 days that add value to your initiative and build momentum.

As you evaluate your list of potential candidates, look for things that:

  • Are achievable within the stated timeline.
  • Don't require a lot of effort.
  • Involve stopping a certain process, activity, or task; this is sometimes known as a "stop doing stupid stuff" approach.
  • Will reduce or eliminate inefficiencies; this is sometimes known as the war on waste.
  • Have a moderate to high impact or bolster the VMI's reputation.

As you look for quick wins, you may find that everything you identify does not meet the criteria. That's okay; don't force the issue. Return your focus to the 90-day plan and three-year roadmap and update those documents if the brainstorming activity associated with Step 2.9 identified anything new.

2.9.1 – Quick wins

15 - 30 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review the three-year roadmap and 90-day plan. Determine if any item on either document can be completed:
    1. Quickly (30 days or less).
    2. With minimal effort.
    3. To provide or show moderate to high levels of value or provide the VMI with momentum.
  2. Brainstorm to identify any other items that meet the criteria in step 1 above.
  3. Compile a comprehensive list of these items and select up to five to pursue.
  4. Document the list in the Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.9 Quick Wins.
  5. Manage the quick wins list and share the results with the VMI team and applicable stakeholders and executives.

Input

  • Three-Year Roadmap
  • 90-Day Plan
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • A list of activities that require low levels of effort to achieve moderate to high levels of value in a short period

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.9 Quick Wins

Participants

  • VMI team

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 2.10 – Reports

Construct your reports to resonate with your audience

Issuing reports is a critical piece of the VMI since the VMI is a conduit of information for the organization. It may be aggregating risk data from internal areas, conducting vendor research, compiling performance data, reviewing market intelligence, or obtaining relevant statistics, feedback, comments, facts, and figures from other sources. Holding onto this information minimizes the impact a VMI can have on the organization; however, the VMI's internal clients, stakeholders, and executives can drown in raw data and ignore it completely if it is not transformed into meaningful, easily-digested information.

Before building a report, think about your intended audience:

  • What information are they looking for? What will help them understand the big picture?
  • What level of detail is appropriate, keeping in mind the audience may not be like-minded?
  • What items are universal to all the readers and what items are of interest to one or two readers?
  • How easy or hard will it be to collect the data? Who will be providing it, and how time consuming will it be?
  • How accurate, valid, and timely will the data be?
  • How frequently will each report need to be issued?

Step 2.10 – Reports (cont'd)

Construct your reports to resonate with your audience

Use the following guidelines to create reports that will resonate with your audience:

  • Value information over data, but sometimes data does have a place in your report.
  • Use pictures, graphics, and other representations more than words, but words are often necessary in small, concise doses.
  • Segregate your report by user; for example, general information up top, CIO information below that on the right, CFO information to the left of CIO information, etc.
  • Send a draft report to the internal audience and seek feedback, keeping in mind you won't be able to cater to or please everyone.

2.10.1 – Reports

15 – 45 Minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review the applicable work product from Phase 1 and Phase 2; identify qualitative and quantitative items the VMI measures, monitors, tracks, or aggregates.
  2. Determine which items will be reported and to whom (by category):
    1. Internally to personnel within the VMI.
    2. Internally to personnel outside the VMI.
    3. Externally to vendors.
  3. Within each category above, determine your intended audiences/recipients. For example, you may have a different list of recipients for a risk report than you do a scorecard summary report. This will help you identify the number of reports required.
  4. Create a draft structure for each report based on the audience and the information being conveyed. Determine the frequency of each report and person responsible for creating for each report.
  5. Document your final choices in Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.10 Reports.

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Phase 1 work product
  • Steps 2.1 – 2.11 work product

Output

  • A list of reports used by the VMI
  • For each report
    • The conceptual content
    • A list of who will receive or have access
    • A creation/distribution frequency

Materials

  • Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.10 Reports

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Download the Info-Tech Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Phase 3 - Run

Implement your processes and leverage your tools and templates

Phase 1

Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

2.1 Classification Model

2.2 Risk Assessment Tool

2.3 Scorecards and Feedback

2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

2.5 Relationship Alignment Document

2.6 Vendor Orientation

2.7 3-Year Roadmap

2.8 90-Day Plan

2.9 Quick Wins

2.10 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors

3.2 Compile Scorecards

3.3 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings

3.4 Work the 90-Day Plan

3.5 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap

3.6 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships

4.1 Incorporate Leading Practices

4.2 Leverage Lessons Learned

4.3 Maintain Internal Alignment

This phase will walk you through the following activity:

  • Beginning to operate the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to initiate your VMI.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Others as needed

Vendor Management Initiative Basics for the Small/Medium Businesses

Phase 3 – Run

Implement your processes and leverage your tools and templates

All the hard work invested in Phase 1 – Plan and Phase 2 – Build begins to pay off in Phase 3 – Run. It's time to stand up your VMI and ensure that the proper level of resources is devoted to your vendors and the VMI itself. There's more hard work ahead, but the foundational elements are in place. This doesn't mean there won't be adjustments and modifications along the way, but you are ready to use the tools and templates in the real world; you are ready to begin reaping the fruits of your labor.

Phase 3 – Run guides you through the process of collecting data, monitoring trends, issuing reports, and conducting effective meetings to:

  • Manage risk better.
  • Improve vendor performance.
  • Improve vendor relationships.
  • Identify areas where the parties can improve.
  • Improve communication between the parties.
  • Increase the value proposition with your vendors.

Step 3.1 – Classify vendors

Begin classifying your top 25 vendors by spend

Step 3.1 sets the table for many of the subsequent steps in Phase 3 – Run. The results of your classification process will determine which vendors go through the scorecarding process (Step 3.2); which vendors participate in BAMs (Step 3.3), and which vendors you will devote relationship-building resources to (Step 3.6).

As you begin classifying your vendors, Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the classification model you configured in Step 2.1.

  1. Identify your top 25 vendors by spend.
  2. Run your top 10 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results.
    1. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, go to 3. on the next page.
    2. If the results are not what you expected or do contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (Tab 1) and adjust the weights or the spend categories slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page - some legitimate results are unexpected, or are surprises based on bias. If you modify the weighting, review the new results and repeat your evaluation. If you modify the spend categories, review the answers on the vendor tabs to ensure that the answers are still accurate; review the new results and repeat your evaluation.

Step 3.1 – Classify vendors (cont'd)

Review your results and adjust the classification tool as needed

  1. Run your top 11-through-25 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results. Identify any unexpected results. Determine if further configuration makes sense and repeat the process outlined in 2.b., previous page, as necessary. If no further modifications are required, continue to 4., below.
  2. Share the preliminary results with the leadership team, executives, and stakeholders to obtain their approval or adjustments to the results.
    1. They may have questions and want to understand the process before approving the results.
    2. They may request that you move a vendor from one quadrant to another based on your organization's roadmap, the vendor's roadmap, or other information not available to you.
  3. Identify the vendors that will be part of the VMI at this stage – how many and which ones. Based on this number and the VMI's scope (Step 1.2), make sure you have the resources necessary to accommodate the number of vendors participating in the VMI. Proceed cautiously and gradually increase the number of vendors participating in the VMI.

Step 3.1 – Classify vendors (cont'd)

Finalize the results and update VMI tools and templates

  1. Update the vendor inventory tool (Step 1.7) to indicate the current classification status for the top 25 vendors by spend. Once your vendors have been classified, you can sort the vendor inventory tool by classification status to see all the vendors in that category at once.
  2. Review your three-year roadmap (Step 2.9) and 90-day plans (Step 2.6) to determine if any modifications are needed to the activities and timelines.

Additional classification considerations:

  • You should only have a few vendors that fit in the strategic category. As a rough guideline, no more than 5% to 10% of your IT vendors should end up in the strategic category. If you have many vendors, even 5% may be too many. the classification model is an objective start to the classification process, but common sense must prevail over the "math" at the end of the day.
  • At this point, there is no need to go beyond the top 25 by spend. Most VMIs starting out can't handle more than three to five strategic vendors initially. Allow the VMI to run a pilot program with a small sample size, work out any bugs, make adjustments, and then ramp up the VMI's rollout in waves. Vendors can be added quarterly, biannually, or annually, depending upon the desired goals and available resources.

Step 3.1 – Classify vendors (cont'd)

Align your vendor strategy to your classification results

As your VMI matures, additional vendors will be part of the VMI. Review the table below and incorporate the applicable strategies into your deployment of vendor management principles over time. Stay true to your mission, goals, and scope, and remember that not all your vendors are of equal importance.

Operational

Strategic
  • Focus on spend containment
  • Concentrate on lowering total cost of ownership
  • Invest moderately in cultivating the relationship
  • Conduct BAMs biannually or annually
  • Compile scorecards quarterly or biannually
  • Identify areas for performance and cost improvement
  • Focus on value, collaboration, and alignment
  • Review market intelligence for the vendor's industry
  • Invest significantly in cultivating the relationship
  • Initiate executive-to-executive relationships
  • Conduct BAMs quarterly
  • Compile scorecards quarterly
  • Understand how the vendors view your organization

Commodity

Tactical
  • Investigate vendor rationalization and consolidation
  • Negotiate for the best-possible price
  • Leverage competition during negotiations
  • Streamline the purchasing and payment process
  • Allocate minimal VMI resources
  • Assign the lowest priority for vendor management metrics
  • Conduct risk assessments biannually or annually
  • Cultivate a collaborative relationship based on future growth plans or potential with the vendor
  • Conduct BAMs quarterly or biannually
  • Compile scorecards quarterly
  • Identify areas of performance improvement
  • Leverage innovation and creative problem solving

Step 3.1 – Classify vendors (cont'd)

Be careful when using the word "partner" with your strategic and other vendors

For decades, vendors have used the term "partner" to refer to the relationship they have with their clients and customers. This is often an emotional ploy used by the vendors to get the upper hand. To fully understand the terms "partner" and "partnership", let's evaluate them through two more objective, less cynical lenses.

If you were to talk to your in-house or outside legal counsel, you may be told that partners share in profits and losses, and they have a fiduciary obligation to each other. Unless there is a joint venture between the parties, you are unlikely to have a partnership with a vendor from this perspective.

What about a "business" partnership — one that doesn't involve sharing profits and losses? What would that look like? Here are some indicators of a business partnership (or preferably a strategic alliance):

  • Trust and transparent communication exist.
  • You have input into the vendor's roadmap for products and services.
  • The vendor is aligned with your desired outcomes and helps you achieve success.
  • You and the vendor are accountable for actions and inactions, with both parties being at risk.
  • There is parity in the peer-to-peer relationships between the organizations (e.g. C-Level to C-Level).
  • The vendor provides transparency in pricing models and proactively suggests ways for you to reduce costs.
  • You and the vendor work together to make each party better, providing constructive feedback on a regular basis.
  • The vendor provides innovative suggestions for you to improve your processes, performance, the bottom line, etc.
  • Negotiations are not one-sided; they are meaningful and productive, resulting in an equitable distribution of money and risk.

Step 3.1 – Classify vendors (cont'd)

Understand the implications and how to leverage the words "partner" and "partnership"

By now you might be thinking, "What's all the fuss? Why does it matter?" At Info-Tech, we've seen firsthand how referring to the vendor as a partner can have the following impact:

  • Confidences are disclosed unnecessarily.
  • Negotiation opportunities and leverage are lost.
  • Vendors no longer have to earn the customer's business.
  • Vendor accountability is missing due to shared responsibilities.
  • Competent skilled vendor resources are assigned to other accounts.
  • Value erodes over time since contracts are renewed without being competitively sourced.
  • One-sided relationships are established, and false assurances are provided at the highest levels within the customer organization.

Proceed with caution when using partner or partnership with your vendors. Understand how your organization benefits from using these terms and mitigate the negatives outlined above by raising awareness internally to ensure people understand the psychology behind the terms. Finally, use the term to your advantage when warranted by referring to the vendor as a partner when you want or need something that the vendor is reluctant to provide. Bottom line: be strategic in how you refer to vendors and know the risks.

Step 3.2 – Compile scorecards

Begin scoring your top vendors

The scorecard process typically is owned and operated by the VMI, but the actual rating of the criteria within the measurement categories is conducted by those with day-to-day interactions with the vendors, those using or impacted by the services and products provided by the vendors, and those with the skills to research other information on the scorecard (e.g. risk). Chances are one person will not be able to complete an entire scorecard by themselves. As a result, the scorecard process is a team sport comprised of sub-teams where necessary.

The VMI will compile the scores, calculate the final results, and aggregate all the comments into one scorecard. There are two common ways to approach this task:

  1. Send out the scorecard template to those who will be scoring the vendor and ask them to return it when completed, providing them with a due date a few days before you need it; you'll need time to compile, calculate, and aggregate.
  2. Invite those who will be scoring the vendor to a meeting and let the contributors use that time to score the vendors; make VMI team members available to answer questions and facilitate the process.

Step 3.2 – Compile scorecards (cont'd)

Gather input from stakeholders and others impacted by the vendors

Since multiple people will be involved in the scorecarding process or have information to contribute, the VMI will have to work with the reviewers to ensure he right mix of data is provided. For example:

  • If you are tracking lawsuits filed by or against the vendor, one person from Legal may be able to provide that, but they may not be able to evaluate any other criteria on the scorecard.
  • If you are tracking salesperson competencies, multiple people from multiple areas may have valuable insights.
  • If you are tracking deliverable timeliness, several project managers may want to contribute across several projects.

Where one person is contributing exclusively to limited criteria, make it easy for them to identify the criteria they are to evaluate. When multiple people from the same functional area will provide insights, they can contribute individually (and the VMI will average their responses) or they can respond collectively after reaching consensus as a group.

After the VMI has compiled, calculated, and aggregated, share the results with executives, impacted stakeholders, and others who will be attending the BAM for that vendor. Depending upon the comments provided by internal personnel, you may need to create a sanitized version of the scorecard for the vendor.

Make sure your process timeline has a buffer built in. You'll be sending the final scorecard to the vendor three to five days before the BAM, and you'll need some time to assemble the results. The scorecarding process can be perceived as a low-priority activity for people outside of the VMI, and other "priorities" will arise for them. Without a timeline buffer, the VMI may find itself behind schedule and unprepared, due to things beyond its control.

Step 3.3 – Conduct business alignment meetings

Determine which vendors will participate and how long the meetings will last

At their core, BAMs aren't that different from any other meeting. The basics of running a meeting still apply, but there are a few nuances that apply to BAMs. Set out below are leading practices for conducing your BAMs; adapt them to meet your needs and suit your environment.

Who

Initially, BAMs are conducted with the strategic vendors in your pilot program. Over time you'll add vendors until all your strategic vendors are meeting with you quarterly. After that, roll out the BAMs to those tactical and operational vendors located close to the strategic quadrant in the classification model (Steps 2.1 and 3.1) and as VMI resources allow. It may take several years before you are holding regular BAMs with all your strategic, tactical, and operational vendors.

Duration

Keep the length of your meetings reasonable. The first few with a vendor may need to be 60 to 90 minutes long. After that, you should be able to trim them to 45 minutes to 60 minutes. The BAM does not have to fill the entire time. When you are done, you are done.

Step 3.3 – Conduct business alignment meetings (cont'd)

Identify who will be invited and send out invitations

Invitations

Set up a recurring meeting whenever possible. Changes will be inevitable but keeping the timeline regular works to your advantage. Also, the vendors included in your initial BAMs won't change for twelve months. For the first BAM with a vendor, provide adequate notice; four weeks is usually sufficient, but calendars will fill up quickly for the main attendees from the vendor. Treat the meeting as significant and make sure your invitation reflects this. A simple meeting request will often be rejected, treated as optional, or ignored completely by the vendor's leadership team (and maybe yours as well!).

Invitees

Internal invitees should include those with a vested interest in the vendor's performance and the relationship. Other functional areas may be invited based on need or interest. Be careful the attendee list doesn't get too big. Based on this, internal BAM attendees often include representatives from IT, Sourcing/Procurement, and the applicable business units. At times, Finance and Legal are included.

From the vendor's side, strive to have decision makers and key leaders attend. The salesperson/account manager is often included for continuity, but a director or vice president of sales will have more insights and influence. The project manager is not needed at this meeting due to the nature of the meeting and its agenda; however, a director or vice president from the product or service delivery area is a good choice. Bottom line: get as high into the vendor's organization as possible whenever possible; look at the types of contracts you have with that vendor to provide guidance on the type of people to invite.

Step 3.3 – Conduct business alignment meetings (cont'd)

Prepare for the Meetings and Maintain Control

Preparation

Send the scorecard and agenda to the vendor five days prior to the BAM. The vendor should provide you with any information you require for the meeting five days prior, as well.

Decide who will run the meeting. Some customers like to lead, and others let the vendor present. How you craft the agenda and your preferences will dictate who runs the show.

Make sure the vendor knows what materials they should bring to the meeting or have access to. This will relate to the agenda and any specific requests listed under the discussion points. You don't want the vendor to be caught off guard and unable to discuss a matter of importance to you.

Running the BAM

Regardless of which party leads, make sure you manage the agenda to stay on topic. This is your meeting – not the vendor's, not IT's, not Procurement's or Sourcing's. Don't let anyone hijack it.

Make sure someone is taking notes. If you are running this virtually, consider recording the meeting. Check with your legal department first for any concerns, notices, or prohibitions that may impact your recording the session.

Remember, this is not a sales call, and it is not a social activity. Innovation discussions are allowed and encouraged, but that can quickly devolve into a sales presentation. People can be friendly toward one another, but the relationship building should not overwhelm the other purposes.

Step 3.3 – Conduct business alignment meetings (cont'd)

Follow these additional guidelines to maximize your meetings

More leading practices

  • Remind everyone that the conversation may include items covered by various confidentiality provisions or agreements.
  • Publish the meeting minutes on a timely basis (within 48 hours).
  • Focus on the bigger picture by looking at trends over time; get into the details only when warranted.
  • Meet internally immediately beforehand to prepare – don't go in cold. Review the agenda and the roles and responsibilities for the attendees.
  • Physical meetings are better than virtual meetings, but travel constraints, budgets, and pandemics may not allow for physical meetings.

Final thoughts

  • When performance or the relationship is suffering, be constructive in your feedback and conversations rather than trying to assign blame; lead with the carrot rather than the stick.
  • Look for collaborative solutions whenever possible and avoid referencing the contract if possible. Communicate your willingness to help resolve outstanding issues.
  • Use inclusive language and avoid language that puts the vendor on the defensive.
  • Make sure that your meetings are not focused exclusively on the negative, but don't paint a rosy picture where one doesn't exist.
  • A vendor that is doing well should be commended. This is an important part of relationship building.

Step 3.4 – Work the 90-day plan

Monitor your progress and share your results

Having a 90-day plan is a good start, but assuming the tasks on the plan will be accomplished magically or without any oversight can lead to failure. While it won't take a lot of time to work the plan, following a few basic guidelines will help ensure the 90-day plan gets results and wasn't created in vain.

  1. Measure and track your progress against the initial/current 90-day plan at least weekly; with a short timeline, any delay can have a huge impact.
  2. If adjustments are needed to any elements of the plan, understand the cause and the impact of those adjustments before making them.
  3. Make adjustments ONLY when warranted. The temptation will be to push activities and tasks further out on the timeline (or to the next 90-day plan!) when there is any sort of hiccup along the way, especially when personnel outside the VMI are involved. Hold true to the timeline whenever possible; once you start slipping, it often becomes a habit.
  4. Report on progress every week and hold people accountable for their assignments and contributions.
  5. Take the 90-day plan seriously and treat it as you would any significant project. This is part of the VMI's branding and image.

Step 3.5 – Manage the three-year roadmap

Keep an eye on the future since it will feed the present

The three-year roadmap is a great planning tool, but it is not 100% reliable. There are inherent flaws and challenges. Essentially, the roadmap is a set of three "crystal balls" attempting to tell you what the future holds. The vision for year 1 may be clear, but for each subsequent year, the crystal ball becomes foggier. In addition, the timeline is constantly changing; before you know it, tomorrow becomes today and year 2 becomes year 1.

To help navigate through the roadmap and maximize its potential, follow these principles:

  • Manage each year of the roadmap differently.
    • Review the year-1 map each quarter to update your 90-day plans (See steps 2.10 and 3.4).
    • Review the year-2 map every six months to determine if any changes are necessary. As you cycle through this, your vantage point of year 2 will be 6 months or 12 months away from the beginning of year 2, and time moves quickly.
    • Review the year-3 map annually, and determine what needs to be added, changed, or deleted. Each time you review year 3, it will be a "new" year 3 that needs to be built.
  • Analyze the impact on the proposed modifications from two perspectives: 1) What is the impact if a requested modification is made? 2) What is the impact if a requested modification is not made?
  • Validate all modifications with leadership and stakeholders before updating the three-year roadmap to ensure internal alignment.

Step 3.6 – Develop/improve vendor relationships

Drive better performance through better relationships

One of the key components of a VMI is relationship management. Good relationships with your vendors provide many benefits for both parties, but they don't happen by accident. Do not assume the relationship will be good or is good merely because your organization is buying products and services from a vendor.

In many respects, the VMI should mirror a vendor's sales organization by establishing relationships at multiple levels within the vendor organizations, not just with the salesperson or account manager. Building and maintaining relationships is hard work, but the return on investment makes it worthwhile.

Business relationships are comprised of many components, not all of which must be present to have a great relationship. However, there are some essential components. Whether you are trying to develop, improve, or maintain a relationship with a vendor, make sure you are conscious of the following:

  • Focusing your energies on strategic vendors first and then tactical and operational vendors.
  • Being transparent and honest in your communications.
  • Continuously building trust by being responsive and honoring commitments (timely).
  • Creating a collaborative environment and build upon common ground.
  • Thanking the vendor when appropriate.
  • Resolving disputes early, avoiding the "blame game", and being objective when there are disagreements.

Phase 4 - Review

Keep your VMI up to date and running smoothly

Phase 1

Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

2.1 Classification Model

2.2 Risk Assessment Tool

2.3 Scorecards and Feedback

2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

2.5 Relationship Alignment Document

2.6 Vendor Orientation

2.7 3-Year Roadmap

2.8 90-Day Plan

2.9 Quick Wins

2.10 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors

3.2 Compile Scorecards

3.3 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings

3.4 Work the 90-Day Plan

3.5 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap

3.6 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships

4.1 Incorporate Leading Practices

4.2 Leverage Lessons Learned

4.3 Maintain Internal Alignment

This phase will walk you through the following activity:

  • Helping the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Others as needed

Vendor Management Initiative Basics for the Small/Medium Businesses

Phase 4 – Review

Keep your VMI up to date and running smoothly

As the adage says, "The only thing constant in life is change." This is particularly true for your VMI. It will continue to mature, people inside and outside of the VMI will change, resources will expand or contract from year to year, your vendor base will change. As a result, your VMI needs the equivalent of a physical every year. In place of bloodwork, x-rays, and the other paces your physician may put you through, you'll assess compliance with your policies and procedures, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

Be thorough in your actions during this Phase to get the most out of it. It requires more than the equivalent of gauging a person's health by taking their temperature, measuring their blood pressure, and determining their body mass index. Keeping your VMI up-to-date and running smoothly takes hard work.

Some of the items presented in this Phase require an annual review; others may require quarterly review or timely review (i.e. when things are top of mind and current). For example, collecting lessons learned should happen on a timely basis rather than annually, and classifying your vendors should occur annually rather than every time a new vendor enters the fold.

Ultimately, the goal is to improve over time and stay aligned with other areas internally. This won't happen by accident. Being proactive in the review of your VMI further reinforces the nature of the VMI itself – proactive vendor management, not reactive!

Step 4.1 – Incorporate leading practices

Identify and evaluate what external VMIs are doing

The VMI's world is constantly shifting and evolving. Some changes will take place slowly, while others will occur quickly. Think about how quickly the cloud environment has changed over the past five years versus the 15 years before that; or think about issues that have popped up and instantly altered the landscape (we're looking at you COVID and ransomware). As a result, the VMI needs to keep pace, and one of the best ways to do that is to incorporate leading practices.

At a high level, a leading practice is a way of doing something that is better at producing a particular outcome or result or performing a task or activity than other ways of proceeding. The leading practice can be based on methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, and other items. Leading practices change periodically due to innovation, new ways of thinking, research, and other factors. Consequently, a leading practice is to identify and evaluate leading practices each year.

Step 4.1 – Incorporate leading practices (cont'd)

Update your VMI based on your research

  • A simple approach for incorporating leading practices into your regular review process is set out below:
  • Research:
    • What other VMIs in your industry are doing.
    • What other VMIs outside your industry are doing.
    • Vendor management in general.
  • Based on your results, list specific leading practices others are doing that would improve your VMI (be specific – e.g. other VMIs are incorporating risk into their classification process).
  • Evaluate your list to determine which of these potential changes fit or could be modified to fit your culture and environment.
  • Recommend the proposed changes to leadership (with a short business case or explanation/justification, as needed) and gain approval.

Remember: Leading practices or best practices may not be what is best for you. In some instances, you will have to modify them to fit in your culture and environment; in other instances, you will elect not to implement them at all (in any form).

Step 4.2 – Leverage lessons learned

Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members

There are many ways to keep your VMI running smoothly, and creating a lessons learned library is a great complement to the other ways covered in this Phase 4 - Review. By tapping into the collective wisdom of the team and creating a safe feedback loop, the VMI gains the following benefits:

  • Documented institutional wisdom and knowledge normally found only in the team members' brains.
  • The ability for one team member to gain insights and avoid mistakes without having to duplicate the events leading to the insights or mistakes.
  • Improved methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, skills, and relationships.

Many of the processes raised in this Phase can be performed annually, but a lessons learned library works best when the information is deposited in a timely manner. How you choose to set up your lessons learned process will depend on the tools you select and your culture. You may want to have regular input meetings to share the lessons as they are being deposited, or you may require team members to deposit lessons learned on a regular basis (within a week after they happen, monthly, or quarterly). Waiting too long can lead to vague or lost memories and specifics; timeliness of the deposits is a crucial element.

Step 4.2 – Leverage lessons learned (cont'd)

Create a library to share valuable information across the team

Lessons learned are not confined to identifying mistakes or dissecting bad outcomes. You want to reinforce good outcomes, as well. When an opportunity for a lessons-learned deposit arises, identify the following basic elements:

  • A brief description of the situation and outcome.
  • What went well (if anything) and why did it go well?
  • What didn't go well (if anything) and why didn't it go well?
  • What would/could you do differently next time?
  • A synopsis of the lesson(s) learned.

Info-Tech Insights

The lessons learned library needs to be maintained. Irrelevant material needs to be culled periodically, and older or duplicate material may need to be archived.

the lessons learned process should be blameless. The goal is to share insightful information, not to reward or punish people based on outcomes or results.

Step 4.3 – Maintain internal alignment

Review the plans of other internal areas to stay in sync

Maintaining internal alignment is essential for the ongoing success of the VMI. Over time, it is easy to lose sight of the fact that the VMI does not operate in a vacuum; it is an integral component of a larger organization whose parts must work well together to function optimally. Focusing annually on the VMI's alignment within the enterprise helps reduce any breakdowns that could derail the organization.

To ensure internal alignment:

  • Review the key components of the applicable materials from Phase 1 - Plan and Phase 2 - Build with the appropriate members of the leadership team (e.g. executives, sponsors, and stakeholders). Not every item from those Phases and Steps needs to be reviewed but err on the side of caution for the first set of alignment discussions, and be prepared to review each item. You can gauge the audience's interest on each topic and move quickly when necessary or dive deeper when needed. Identify potential changes required to maintain alignment.
  • Review the strategic plans (e.g. 1-, 3-, and 5- year plans) for various portions of the organization if you have access to them or gather insights if you don't have access.
    • If the VMI is under the IT umbrella, review the strategic plans for IT and its departments.
    • Review the strategic plans for the areas the VMI works with (e.g. Procurement, Business Units).
    • The organization itself.
  • Create and vet a list of modifications to the VMI and obtain approval.
  • Develop a plan for making the necessary changes.

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem solved

Vendor management is a broad, often overwhelming, comprehensive spectrum that encompasses many disciplines. By now, you should have a great idea of what vendor management can or will look like in your organization. Focus on the basics first: Why does the VMI exist and what does it hope to achieve? What is it's scope? What are the strengths you can leverage, and what obstacles must you manage? How will the VMI work with others? From there, the spectrum of vendor management will begin to clarify and narrow.

Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your needs. They will help you concentrate your energies in the right areas and on the right vendors to maximize the return on your organization's investment in the VMI of time, money, personnel, and other resources. You may have to lead by example internally and with your vendors at first, but they will eventually join you on your path if you stay true to your course.

At the heart of a good VMI is the relationship component. Don't overlook its value in helping you achieve your vendor management goals. The VMI does not operate in a vacuum, and relationships (internal and external) will be critical.

Lastly, seek continual improvement from the VMI and from your vendors. Both parties should be held accountable, and both parties should work together to get better. Be proactive in your efforts, and you, the VMI, and the organization will be rewarded.

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

Contact your account representative for more information

workshops@infotech.com
1-888-670-8889

Related Info-Tech Research

Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively
Don't leave negotiation preparations and outcomes to chance. Learn how to prepare for negotiations more effectively and improve your results.

Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively
Info-Tech's guidance and insights will help you navigate the complex process of contract review and identify the key details necessary to maximize the protections for your organization.

Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO
Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech's tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

Bibliography

Slide 5 – ISG Index 4Q 2021, Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

Slide 6 – ISG Index 4Q 2021, Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

Slide 7 – Geller & Company. "World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality." Spend Matters. 2003. Web. Accessed 4 Mar. 2019.

Slide 26 – Guth, Stephen. The Vendor Management Office: Unleashing the Power of Strategic Sourcing. Lulu.com, 2007. Print. Protiviti. Enterprise Risk Management. Web. 16 Feb. 2017.

Slide 34 – "Why Do We Perform Better When Someone Has High Expectations of Us?" The Decision Lab. Accessed January 31, 2022.

Slide 56 - Top 10 Tips for Creating Compelling Reports," October 11, 2019, Design Eclectic. Accessed March 29, 2022.

Slide 56 – "Six Tips for Making a Quality Report Appealing and Easy To Skim," Agency for Health Research and Quality. Accessed March 29, 2022.

Slide 56 –Tucker, Davis. Marketing Reporting: Tips to Create Compelling Reports, March 28, 2020, 60 Second Marketer. Accessed March 29, 2022.

Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}237|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Optimization
  • Parent Category Link: /optimization
  • Your organization has many business processes that rely on repetitive, routine manual data collection and processing work, and there is high stakeholder interest in automating them.
  • You’re investigating whether robotic process automation (RPA) is a suitable technological enabler for automating such processes.
  • Being a trending technology, especially with its association with artificial intelligence (AI), there is much marketing fluff, hype, and misunderstanding about RPA.
  • Estimating the potential impact of RPA on business is difficult, as the relevant industry statistics often conflict each other and you aren’t sure how applicable it is to your business.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • There are no physical robots in RPA. RPA is about software “bots” that interact with applications as if they were human users to perform routine, repetitive work in your place. It’s for any business in any industry, not just for manufacturing.
  • RPA is lightweight IT; it reduces the cost of entry, maintenance, and teardown of automation as well as the technological requirement of resources that maintain it, as it complements existing automation solutions in your toolkit.
  • RPA is rules-based. While AI promises to relax the rigidity of rules, it adds business risks that are poorly understood by both businesses and subject-matter experts. Rules-based “RPA 1.0” is mature and may pose a stronger business case than AI-enabled RPA.
  • RPA’s sweet spot is “swivel chair automation”: processes that require human workers to act as a conduit between several systems, moving between applications, manually keying, re-keying, copying, and pasting information. A bot can take their place.

Impact and Result

  • Discover RPA and how it differentiates from other automation solutions.
  • Understand the benefits and risks of complementing RPA with AI.
  • Identify existing business processes best suited for automation with RPA.
  • Communicate RPA’s potential business benefits to stakeholders.

Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should use RPA to automate routine, repetitive data collection and processing work, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Discover robotic process automation

Learn about RPA, including how it compares to IT-led automation rooted in business process management practices and the role of AI.

  • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 1: Discover Robotic Process Automation
  • Robotic Process Automation Communication Template

2. Identify processes best suited for robotic process automation

Identify and prioritize candidate processes for RPA.

  • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 2: Identify Processes Best Suited for Robotic Process Automation
  • Process Evaluation Tool for Robotic Process Automation
  • Minimum Viable Business Case Document
[infographic]

Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}262|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
  • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
  • There is a disconnect between security leaders and executive stakeholders on what information is important to present.
  • Security leaders find it challenging to convey the necessary information to obtain support for security objectives.
  • Changes to the threat landscape and shifts in organizational goals exacerbate the issue, as they impact security leaders' ability to prioritize topics to be communicated.
  • Security leaders struggle to communicate the importance of security to a non-technical audience.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Security presentations are not a one-way street. The key to a successful executive security presentation is having a goal for the presentation and ensuring that you have met your goal.

Impact and Result

  • Developing a thorough understanding of the security communication goals.
  • Understanding the importance of leveraging highly relevant and understandable data.
  • Developing and delivering presentations that will keep your audience engaged and build trust with your executive stakeholders.

Present Security to Executive Stakeholders Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Present Security to Executive Stakeholders – A step-by-step guide to communicating security effectively to obtain support from decision makers.

Use this as a guideline to assist you in presenting security to executive stakeholders.

  • Present Security to Executive Stakeholders Storyboard

2. Security Presentation Templates – A set of security presentation templates to assist you in communicating security to executive stakeholders.

The security presentation templates are a set of customizable templates for various types of security presentation including:

  • Present Security to Executive Stakeholders Templates

Infographic

Further reading

Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

Learn how to communicate security effectively to obtain support from decision makers.

Analyst Perspective

Build and deliver an effective security communication to your executive stakeholders.

Ahmad Jowhar

As a security leader, you’re tasked with various responsibilities to ensure your organization can achieve its goals while its most important assets are being protected.

However, when communicating security to executive stakeholders, challenges can arise in determining what topics are pertinent to present. Changes in the security threat landscape coupled with different business goals make identifying how to present security more challenging.

Having a communication framework for presenting security to executive stakeholders will enable you to effectively identify, develop, and deliver your communication goals while obtaining the support you need to achieve your objectives.

Ahmad Jowhar
Research Specialist, Security & Privacy

Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

Info-Tech’s Approach

  • Many security leaders struggle to decide what to present and how to present security to executive stakeholders.
  • Constant changes in the security threat landscape impacts a security leader’s ability to prioritize topics to be communicated.
  • There is a disconnect between security leaders and executive stakeholders on what information is important to present.
  • Security leaders struggle to communicate the importance of security to a non-technical audience.
  • Developing a thorough understanding of security communication goals.
  • Understanding the importance of leveraging highly relevant and understandable data.
  • Developing and delivering presentations that will keep your audience engaged and build trust with your executive stakeholders.

Info-Tech Insight

Security presentations are not a one-way street. The key to a successful executive security presentation is having a goal for the presentation and verifying that you have met your goal.

Your challenge

As a security leader, you need to communicate security effectively to executive stakeholders in order to obtain support for your security objectives.

  • When it comes to presenting security to executive stakeholders, many security leaders find it challenging to convey the necessary information in order to obtain support for security objectives.
  • This is attributed to various factors, such as an increase in the threat landscape, changes to industry regulations and standards, and new organizational goals that security has to align with.
  • Furthermore, with the limited time to communicate with executive stakeholders, both in frequency and duration, identifying the most important information to address can be challenging.

76% of security leaders struggle in conveying the effectiveness of a cybersecurity program.

62% find it difficult to balance the risk of too much detail and need-to-know information.

41% find it challenging to communicate effectively with a mixed technical and non-technical audience.

Source: Deloitte, 2022

Common obstacles

There is a disconnect between security leaders and executive stakeholders when it comes to the security posture of the organization:

  • Executive stakeholders are not confident that their security leaders are doing enough to mitigate security risks.
  • The issue has been amplified, with security threats constantly increasing across all industries.
  • However, security leaders don’t feel that they are in a position to make themselves heard.
  • The lack of organizational security awareness and support from cross-functional departments has made it difficult to achieve security objectives (e.g. education, investments).
  • Defining an approach to remove that disconnect with executive stakeholders is of utmost importance for security leaders, in order to improve their organization’s security posture.

9% of boards are extremely confident in their organization’s cybersecurity risk mitigation measures.

77% of organizations have seen an increase in the number of attacks in 2021.

56% of security leaders claimed their team is not involved when leadership makes urgent security decisions.

Source: EY, 2021
The image contains a screenshot of an Info-Tech Thoughtmodel titled: Presenting Security to Executive Stakeholders.

Info-Tech’s methodology for presenting security to executive stakeholders

1. Identify communication goals

2. Collect information to support goals

3. Develop communication

4. Deliver communication

Phase steps

  1. Identify drivers for communicating to executives
  2. Define your goals for communicating to executives
  1. Identify data to collect
  2. Plan how to retrieve data
  1. Plan communication
  2. Build a compelling communication document
  1. Deliver a captivating presentation
  2. Obtain/verify goals

Phase outcomes

A defined list of drivers and goals to help you develop your security presentations

A list of data sources to include in your communication

A completed communication template

A solidified understanding of how to effectively communicate security to your stakeholders

Develop a structured process for communicating security to your stakeholders

Security presentations are not a one-way street
The key to a successful executive security presentation is having a goal for the presentation and verifying that you have met your goal.

Identifying your goals is the foundation of an effective presentation
Defining your drivers and goals for communicating security will enable you to better prepare and deliver your presentation, which will help you obtain your desired outcome.

Harness the power of data
Leveraging data and analytics will help you provide quantitative-based communication, which will result in a more meaningful and effective presentation.

Take your audience on a journey
Developing a storytelling approach will help engage with your audience.

Win your audience by building a rapport
Establishing credibility and trust with executive stakeholders will enable you to obtain their support for security objectives.

Tactical insight
Conduct background research on audience members (i.e. professional background) to help understand how best to communicate with them and overcome potential objections.

Tactical insight
Verifying your objectives at the end of the communication is important, as it ensures you have successfully communicated to executive stakeholders.

Project deliverables

This blueprint is accompanied by a supporting deliverable which includes five security presentation templates.

Report on Security Initiatives
Template showing how to inform executive stakeholders of security initiatives.

Report on Security Initiatives.

Security Metrics
Template showing how to inform executive stakeholders of current security metrics that would help drive future initiatives.

Security Metrics.

Security Incident Response & Recovery
Template showing how to inform executive stakeholders of security incidents, their impact, and the response plan.

Security Incident Response & Recovery

Security Funding Request
Template showing how to inform executive stakeholders of security incidents, their impact, and the response plan.

Security Funding Request

Key template:

Security and Risk Update

Template showing how to inform executive stakeholders of proactive security and risk initiatives.

Blueprint benefits

IT/InfoSec benefits

Business benefits

  • Reduce effort and time spent preparing cybersecurity presentations for executive stakeholders by having templates to use.
  • Enable security leaders to better prepare what to present and how to present it to their executive stakeholders, as well as driving the required outcomes from those presentations.
  • Establish a best practice for communicating security and IT to executive stakeholders.
  • Gain increased awareness of cybersecurity and the impact executive stakeholders can have on improving an organization’s security posture.
  • Understand how security’s alignment with the business will enable the strategic growth of the organization.
  • Gain a better understanding of how security and IT objectives are developed and justified.

Measure the value of this blueprint

Phase

Measured Value (Yearly)

Phase 1: Identify communication goals

Cost to define drivers and goals for communicating security to executives:

16 FTE hours @ $233K* =$1,940

Phase 2: Collect information to support goals

Cost to collect and synthesize necessary data to support communication goals:

16 FTE hours @ $233K = $1,940

Phase 3: Develop communication

Cost to develop communication material that will contextualize information being shown:

16 FTE hours @ $233K = $1,940

Phase 4: Deliver communication

Potential Savings:

Total estimated effort = $5,820

Our blueprint will help you save $5,820 and over 40 FTE hours

* The financial figure depicts the annual salary of a CISO in 2022

Source: Chief Information Security Officer Salary.” Salary.com, 2022

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Phase 1

Identify communication goals

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

1.1 Identify drivers for communicating to executives

1.2 Define your goals for communicating to executives

2.1 Identify data to collect

2.2 Plan how to retrieve data

3.1 Plan communication

3.2 Build a compelling communication document

4.1 Deliver a captivating presentation

4.2 Obtain/verify support for security goals

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understanding the different drivers for communicating security to executive stakeholders
  • Identifying different communication goals

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Security leader

1.1. Identify drivers for communicating to executive stakeholders

As a security leader, you meet with executives and stakeholders with diverse backgrounds, and you aim to showcase your organization’s security posture along with its alignment with the business’ goals.

However, with the constant changes in the security threat landscape, demands and drivers for security could change. Thus, understanding potential drivers that will influence your communication will assist you in developing and delivering an effective security presentation.

39% of organizations had cybersecurity on the agenda of their board’s quarterly meeting.

Source: EY, 2021.

Info-Tech Insight

Not all security presentations are the same. Keep your communication strategy and processes agile.

Know your drivers for security presentations

By understanding the influences for your security presentations, you will be able to better plan what to present to executive stakeholders.

  • These meetings, which are usually held once per quarter, provide you with less than one hour of presentation time.
  • Hence, it is crucial to know why you need to present security and whether these drivers are similar across the other presentations.

Understanding drivers will also help you understand how to present security to executive stakeholders.

  • These drivers will shape the structure of your presentation and help determine your approach to communicating your goals.
  • For example, financial-based presentations that are driven by budget requests might create a sense of urgency or assurance about investment in a security initiative.

Identify your communication drivers, which can stem from various initiatives and programs, including:

  • Results from internal or external audit reports.
  • Upcoming budget meetings.
  • Briefing newly elected executive stakeholders on security.

When it comes to identifying your communication drivers, you can collaborate with subject matter experts, like your corporate secretary or steering committees, to ensure the material being communicated will align with some of the organizational goals.

Examples of drivers for security presentations

Audit
Upcoming internal or external audits might require updates on the organization’s compliance

Organizational restructuring
Restructuring within an organization could require security updates

Merger & Acquisition
An M&A would trigger presentations on organization’s current and future security posture

Cyber incident
A cyberattack would require an immediate presentation on its impact and the incident response plan

Ad hoc
Provide security information requested by stakeholders

1.2. Define your goals for communicating to executives

After identifying drivers for your communication, it’s important to determine what your goals are for the presentation.

  • Communication drivers are mainly triggers for why you want to present security.
  • Communication goals are the potential outcomes you are hoping to obtain from the presentation.
  • Your communication goals would help identify what data and metrics to include in your presentation, the structure of your communication deck, and how you deliver your communication to executive stakeholders.

Identifying your communication goals could require the participation of the security team, IT leadership, and other business stakeholders.

  • As a group, brainstorm the security goals that align with your business goals for the coming year.
    • Aim to have at least two business goals that align with each security goal.
  • Identify what benefits and value the executive stakeholders will gain from the security goal being presented.
    • E.g. Increased security awareness, updates on organization's security posture.
  • Identify what the ask is for this presentation.
    • E.g. Approval for increasing budget to support security initiatives, executive support to implement internal security programs.

Info-Tech Insight

There can be different reasons to communicate security to executive stakeholders. You need to understand what you want to get out of your presentation.

Examples of security presentation goals

Educate
Educate the board on security trends and/or latest risks in the industry

Update
Provide updates on security initiatives, relevant security metrics, and compliance posture

Inform
Provide an incident response plan due to a security incident or deliver updates on current threats and risks

Investment
Request funding for security investments or financial updates on past security initiatives

Ad hoc
Provide security information requested by stakeholders

Phase 2

Collect information to support goals

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

1.1 Identify drivers for communicating to executives

1.2 Define your goals for communicating to executives

2.1 Identify data to collect

2.2 Plan how to retrieve data

3.1 Plan communication

3.2 Build a compelling communication document

4.1 Deliver a captivating presentation

4.2 Obtain/verify support for security goals

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understanding what types of data to include in your security presentations
  • Defining where and how to retrieve data

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Security leader
  • Network/security analyst

2.1 Identify data to collect

After identifying drivers and goals for your communication, it’s important to include the necessary data to justify the information being communicated.

  • Leveraging data and analytics will assist in providing quantitative-based communication, which will result in a more meaningful and effective presentation.
  • The data presented will showcase the visibility of an organization’s security posture along with potential risks and figures on how to mitigate those risks.
  • Providing analysis of the quantitative data presented will also showcase further insights on the figures, allow the audience to better understand the data, and show its relevance to the communication goals.

Identifying data to collect doesn’t need to be a rigorous task; you can follow these steps to help you get started:

  • Work with your security team to identify the main type of data applicable to the communication goals.
    • E.g. Financial data would be meaningful to use when communicating a budget presentation.
  • Identify supporting data linked to the main data defined.
    • E.g. If a financial investment is made to implement a security initiative, then metrics on improvements to the security posture will be relevant.
  • Show how both the main and supporting data align with the communication goals.
    • E.g. Improvement in security posture would increase alignment with regulation standards, which would result in additional contracts being awarded and increased revenue.

Info-Tech Insight

Understand how to present your information in a way that will be meaningful to your audience, for instance by quantifying security risks in financial terms.

Examples of data to present

Educate
Number of organizations in industry impacted by data breaches during past year; top threats and risks affecting the industries

Update
Degree of compliance with standards (e.g. ISO-27001); metrics on improvement of security posture due to security initiatives

Inform
Percentage of impacted clients and disrupted business functions; downtime; security risk likelihood and financial impact

Investment
Capital and operating expenditure for investment; ROI on past and future security initiatives

Ad hoc
Number of security initiatives that went over budget; phishing test campaign results

2.2 Plan how to retrieve the data

Once the data that is going to be used for the presentation has been identified, it is important to plan how the data can be retrieved, processed, and shared.

  • Most of the data leveraged for security presentations are structured data, which are highly organized data that are often stored in a relational and easily searchable database.
    • This includes security log reports or expenditures for ongoing and future security investments.
  • Retrieving the data, however, would require collaboration and cooperation from different team members.
  • You would need to work with the security team and other appropriate stakeholders to identify where the data is stored and who the data owner is.

Once the data source and owner has been identified, you need to plan how the data would be processed and leveraged for your presentation

  • This could include using queries to retrieve the relevant information needed (e.g. SQL, Microsoft Excel).
  • Verify the accuracy and relevance of the data with other stakeholders to ensure it is the most appropriate data to be presented to the executive stakeholders.

Info-Tech Insight

Using a data-driven approach to help support your objectives is key to engaging with your audience.

Plan where to retrieve the data

Identifying the relevant data sources to retrieve your data and the appropriate data owner enables efficient collaboration between departments collecting, processing, and communicating the data and graphics to the audience.

Examples of where to retrieve your data

Data Source

Data

Data Owner

Communication Goal

Audit & Compliance Reports

Percentage of controls completed to be certified with ISO 27001; Number of security threats & risks identified.

Audit Manager;

Compliance Manager;

Security Leader

Ad hoc, Educate, Inform

Identity & Access Management (IAM) Applications

Number of privileged accounts/department; Percentage of user accounts with MFA applied

Network/Security Analyst

Ad hoc, Inform, Update

Security Information & Event Management (SIEM)

Number of attacks detected and blocked before & after implementing endpoint security; Percentage of firewall rules that triggered a false positive

Network/Security Analyst

Ad hoc, Inform, Update

Vulnerability Management Applications

Percentage of critical vulnerabilities patched; Number of endpoints encrypted

Network/Security Analyst

Ad hoc, Inform, Update

Financial & Accounting Software

Capital & operating expenditure for future security investments; Return on investment (ROI) on past and current security investments

Financial and/or Accounting Manager

Ad hoc, Educate, Investments

Phase 3

Develop communication

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

1.1 Identify drivers for communicating to executives

1.2 Define your goals for communicating to executives

2.1 Identify data to collect

2.2 Plan how to retrieve data

3.1 Plan communication

3.2 Build a compelling communication document

4.1 Deliver a captivating presentation

4.2 Obtain/verify support for security goals

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identifying a communication strategy for presenting security
  • Identifying security templates that are applicable to your presentation

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Security leader

3.1 Plan communication: Know who your audience is

  • When preparing your communication, it's important to understand who your target audience is and to conduct background research on them.
  • This will help develop your communication style and ensure your presentation caters to the expected audience in the room.

Examples of two profiles in a boardroom

Formal board of directors

The executive team

  • In the private sector, this will include an appointed board of shareholders and subcommittees external to the organization.
  • In the public sector, this can include councils, commissions, or the executive team itself.
  • In government, this can include mayors, ministers, and governors.
  • The board’s overall responsibility is governance.
  • This audience will include your boss and your peers internal to the organization.
  • This category is primarily involved in the day-to-day operations of the organization and is responsible for carrying out the strategic direction set by the board.
  • The executive team’s overall responsibility is operations.

3.1.1 Know what your audience cares about

  • Understanding what your executive stakeholders value will equip you with the right information to include in your presentations.
  • Ensure you conduct background research on your audience to assist you in knowing what their potential interests are.
  • Your background research could include:
    • Researching the audience’s professional background through LinkedIn.
    • Reviewing their comments from past executive meetings.
    • Researching current security trends that align with organizational goals.
  • Once the values and risks have been identified, you can document them in notes and share the notes with subject matter experts to verify if these values and risks should be shared in the coming meetings.

A board’s purpose can include the following:

  • Sustaining and expanding the organization’s purpose and ability to execute in a competitive market.
  • Determining and funding the organization’s future and direction.
  • Protecting and increasing shareholder value.
  • Protecting the company’s exposure to risks.

Examples of potential values and risks

  • Business impact
  • Financial impact
  • Security and incidents

Info-Tech Insight
Conduct background research on audience members (e.g. professional background on LinkedIn) to help understand how best to communicate to them and overcome potential objections.

Understand your audience’s concerns

  • Along with knowing what your audience values and cares about, understanding their main concerns will allow you to address those items or align them with your communication.
  • By treating your executive stakeholders as your project sponsors, you would build a level of trust and confidence with your peers as the first step to tackling their concerns.
  • These concerns can be derived from past stakeholder meetings, recent trends in the industry, or strategic business alignments.
  • After capturing their concerns, you’ll be equipped with the necessary understanding on what material to include and prioritize during your presentations.

Examples of potential concerns for each profile of executive stakeholders

Formal board of directors

The executive team

  • Business impact (What is the impact of IT in solving business challenges?)
  • Investments (How will it impact organization’s finances and efficiency?)
  • Cybersecurity and risk (What are the top cybersecurity risks, and how is IT mitigating those risks to the business?)
  • Business alignment (How do IT priorities align to the business strategy and goals?)
  • IT operational efficiency (How is IT set up for success with foundational elements of IT’s operational strategy?)
  • Innovation & transformation priorities (How is IT enabling the organization’s competitive advantage and supporting transformation efforts as a strategic business partner?)

Build your presentation to tackle their main concerns

Your presentation should be well-rounded and compelling when it addresses the board’s main concerns about security.

Checklist:

  • Research your target audience (their backgrounds, board composition, dynamics, executive team vs. external group).
  • Include value and risk language in your presentation to appeal to your audience.
  • Ensure your content focuses on one or more of the board’s main concerns with security (e.g. business impact, investments, or risk).
  • Include information about what is in it for them and the organization.
  • Research your board’s composition and skillsets to determine their level of technical knowledge and expertise. This helps craft your presentation with the right amount of technology vs. business-facing information.

Info-Tech Insight
The executive stakeholder’s main concerns will always boil down to one important outcome: providing a level of confidence to do business through IT products, services, and systems – including security.

3.1.2 Take your audience through a security journey

  • Once you have defined your intended target and their potential concerns, developing the communication through a storytelling approach will be the next step to help build a compelling presentation.
  • You need to help your executive stakeholders make sense of the information being conveyed and allow them to understand the importance of cybersecurity.
  • Taking your audience through a story will allow them to see the value of the information being presented and better resonate with its message.
  • You can derive insights for your storytelling presentation by doing the following:
    • Provide a business case scenario on the topic you are presenting.
    • Identify and communicate the business problem up front and answer the three questions (why, what, how).
    • Quantify the problems in terms of business impact (money, risk, value).

Info-Tech Insight
Developing a storytelling approach will help keep your audience engaged and allow the information to resonate with them, which will add further value to the communication.

Identify the purpose of your presentation

You should be clear about your bottom line and the intent behind your presentation. However, regardless of your bottom line, your presentation must focus on what business problems you are solving and why security can assist in solving the problem.

Examples of communication goals

To inform or educate

To reach a decision

  • In this presentation type, it is easy for IT leaders to overwhelm a board with excessive or irrelevant information.
  • Focus your content on the business problem and the solution proposed.
  • Refrain from too much detail about the technology – focus on business impact and risk mitigated. Ask for feedback if applicable.
  • In this presentation type, there is a clear ask and an action required from the board of directors.
  • Be clear about what this decision is. Once again, don’t lead with the technology solution: Start with the business problem you are solving, and only talk about technology as the solution if time permits.
  • Ensure you know who votes and how to garner their support.

Info-Tech Insight
Nobody likes surprises. Communicate early and often. The board should be pre-briefed, especially if it is a difficult subject. This also ensures you have support when you deliver a difficult message.

Gather the right information to include in your boardroom presentation

Once you understand your target audience, it’s important to tailor your presentation material to what they will care about.

Typical IT boardroom presentations include:

  • Communicating the value of ongoing business technology initiatives.
  • Requesting funds or approval for a business initiative that IT is spearheading.
  • Security incident response/Risk/DRP.
  • Developing a business program or an investment update for an ongoing program.
  • Business technology strategy highlights and impacts.
  • Digital transformation initiatives (value, ROI, risk).

Info-Tech Insight
You must always have a clear goal or objective for delivering a presentation in front of your board of directors. What is the purpose of your board presentation? Identify your objective and outcome up front and tailor your presentation’s story and contents to fit this purpose.

Info-Tech Insight
Telling a good story is not about the message you want to deliver but the one the executive stakeholders want to hear. Articulate what you want them to think and what you want them to take away, and be explicit about it in your presentation. Make your story logically flow by identifying the business problem, complication, the solution, and how to close the gap. Most importantly, communicate the business impacts the board will care about.

Structure your presentation to tell a logical story

To build a strong story for your presentation, ensure you answer these three questions:

WHY

Why is this a business issue, or why should the executive stakeholders care?

WHAT

What is the impact of solving the problem and driving value for the company?

HOW

How will we leverage our resources (technology, finances) to solve the problem?

Examples:

Scenario 1: The company has experienced a security incident.

Intent: To inform/educate the board about the security incident.

WHY

The data breach has resulted in a loss of customer confidence, negative brand impact, and a reduction in revenue of 30%.

WHAT

Financial, legal, and reputational risks identified, and mitigation strategies implemented. IT is working with the PR team on communications. Incident management playbook executed.

HOW

An analysis of vulnerabilities was conducted and steps to address are in effect. Recovery steps are 90% completed. Incident management program reviewed for future incidents.

Scenario 2: Security is recommending investments based on strategic priorities.

Intent: To reach a decision with the board – approve investment proposal.

WHY

The new security strategy outlines two key initiatives to improve an organization’s security culture and overall risk posture.

WHAT

Security proposed an investment to implement a security training & phishing test campaign, which will assist in reducing data breach risks.

HOW

Use 5% of security’s budget to implement security training and phishing test campaigns.

Time plays a key role in delivering an effective presentation

What you include in your story will often depend on how much time you have available to deliver the message.

Consider the following:

  • Presenting to executive stakeholders often means you have a short window of time to deliver your message. The average executive stakeholder presentation is 15 minutes, and this could be cut short due to other unexpected factors.
  • If your presentation is too long, you risk overwhelming or losing your audience. You must factor in the time constraints when building your board presentation.
  • Your executive stakeholders have a wealth of experience and knowledge, which means they could jump to conclusions quickly based on their own experiences. Ensure you give them plenty of background information in advance. Provide your presentation material, a brief, or any other supporting documentation before the meeting to show you are well prepared.
  • Be prepared to have deep conversations about the topic, but respect that the executive stakeholders might not be interested in hearing the tactical information. Build an elevator pitch, a one-pager, back-up slides that support your ask and the story, and be prepared to answer questions within your allotted presentation time to dive deeper.

Navigating through Q&A

Use the Q&A portion to build credibility with the board.

  • It is always better to say, “I’m not certain about the answer but will follow up,” than to provide false or inaccurate information on the spot.
  • When asked challenging or irrelevant questions, ensure you have an approach to deflect them. Questions can often be out of scope or difficult to answer in a group. Find what works for you to successfully navigate through these questions:
    • “Let’s work with the sub-committee to find you an answer.”
    • “Let’s take that offline to address in more detail.”
    • “I have some follow-up material I can provide you to discuss that further after our meeting.”
  • And ensure you follow up! Make sure to follow through on your promise to provide information or answers after the meeting. This helps build trust and credibility with the board.

Info-Tech Insight
The average board presentation is 15 minutes long. Build no more than three or four slides of content to identify the business problem, the business impacts, and the solution. Leave five minutes for questions at the end, and be prepared with back-up slides to support your answers.

Storytelling checklist

Checklist:

  • Tailor your presentation based on how much time you have.
  • Find out ahead of time how much time you have.
  • Identify if your presentation is to inform/educate or reach a decision.
  • Identify and communicate the business problem up front and answer the three questions (why, what, how).
  • Express the problem in terms of business impact (risk, value, money).
  • Prepare and send pre-meeting collateral to the members of the board and executive team.
  • Include no more than 5-6 slides for your presentation.
  • Factor in Q&A time at the end of your presentation window.
  • Articulate what you want them to think and what you want them to take away – put it right up front and remind them at the end.
  • Have an elevator speech handy – one or two sentences and a one-pager version of your story.
  • Consider how you will build your relationship with the members outside the boardroom.

3.1.3 Build a compelling communication document

Once you’ve identified your communication goals, data, and plan to present to your stakeholders, it’s important to build the compelling communication document that will attract all audiences.

A good slide design increases the likelihood that the audience will read the content carefully.

  • Bad slide structure (flow) = Audience loses focus
    • You can have great content on a slide, but if a busy audience gets confused, they’ll just close the file or lose focus. Structure encompasses horizontal and vertical logic.
  • Good visual design = Audience might read more
    • Readers will probably skim the slides first. If the slides look ugly, they will already have a negative impression. If the slides are visually appealing, they will be more inclined to read carefully. They may even use some slides to show others.
  • Good content + Good structure + Visual appeal = Good presentation
    • A presentation is like a house. Good content is the foundation of the house. Good structure keeps the house strong. Visual appeal differentiates houses.

Slide design best practices

Leverage these slide design best practices to assist you in developing eye-catching presentations.

  • Easy to read: Assume reader is tight on time. If a slide looks overwhelming, the reader will close the document.
  • Concise and clear: Fewer words = more skim-able.
  • Memorable: Use graphics and visuals or pithy quotes whenever you can do so appropriately.
  • Horizontal logic: Good horizontal logic will have slide titles that cascade into a story with no holes or gaps.
  • Vertical logic: People usually read from left to right, top to bottom, or in a Z pattern. Make sure your slide has an intuitive flow of content.
  • Aesthetics: People like looking at visually appealing slides, but make sure your attempts to create visual appeal do not detract from the content.

Your presentation must have a logical flow

Horizontal logic

Vertical logic

  • Horizontal logic should tell a story.
  • When slide titles are read in a cascading manner, they will tell a logical and smooth story.
  • Title & tagline = thesis (best insight).
  • Vertical logic should be intuitive.
  • Each step must support the title.
  • The content you intend to include within each slide is directly applicable to the slide title.
  • One main point per slide.

Vertical logic should be intuitive

The image contains a screenshot example of a bad design layout for a slide. The image contains a screenshot example of a good design layout for a slide.

The audience is unsure where to look and in what order.

The audience knows to read the heading first. Then look within the pie chart. Then look within the white boxes to the right.

Horizontal and vertical logic checklists

Horizontal logic

Vertical logic

  • List your slide titles in order and read through them.
  • Good horizontal logic should feel like a story. Incomplete horizontal logic will make you pause or frown.
  • After a self-test, get someone else to do the same exercise with you observing them.
  • Note at which points they pause or frown. Discuss how those points can be improved.
  • Now consider each slide title proposed and the content within it.
  • Identify if there is a disconnect in title vs. content.
  • If there is a disconnect, consider changing the title of the slide to appropriately reflect the content within it, or consider changing the content if the slide title is an intended path in the story.

Make it easy to read

The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates an uneasy to read slide. The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates an easy to read slide.
  • Unnecessary coloring makes it hard on the eyes
  • Margins for title at top is too small
  • Content is not skim-able (best to break up the slide)

Increase skim-ability:

  • Emphasize the subheadings
  • Bold important words

Make it easier on the eyes:

  • Declutter and add sections
  • Have more white space

Be concise and clear

  1. Write your thoughts down
    • This gets your content documented.
    • Don’t worry about clarity or concision yet.
  2. Edit for clarity
    • Make sure the key message is very clear.
    • Find your thesis statement.
  3. Edit for concision
    • Remove unnecessary words.
    • Use the active voice, not passive voice (see below for examples).

Passive voice

Active voice

“There are three things to look out for” (8 words)

“Network security was compromised by hackers” (6 words)

“Look for these three things” (5 words)

“Hackers compromised network security” (4 words)

Be memorable

The image contains a screenshot of an example that demonstrates a bad example of how to be memorable. The image contains a screenshot of an example that demonstrates a good example of how to be memorable.

Easy to read, but hard to remember the stats.

The visuals make it easier to see the size of the problem and make it much more memorable.

Remember to:

  • Have some kind of visual (e.g. graphs, icons, tables).
  • Divide the content into sections.
  • Have a bit of color on the page.

Aesthetics

The image contains a screenshot of an example of bad aesthetics. The image contains a screenshot of an example of good aesthetics.

This draft slide is just content from the outline document on a slide with no design applied yet.

  • Have some kind of visual (e.g. graphs, icons, tables) as long as it’s appropriate.
  • Divide the content into sections.
  • Have a bit of color on the page.
  • Bold or italicize important text.

Why use visuals?

How graphics affect us

Cognitively

  • Engage our imagination
  • Stimulate the brain
  • Heighten creative thinking
  • Enhance or affect emotions

Emotionally

  • Enhance comprehension
  • Increase recollection
  • Elevate communication
  • Improve retention

Visual clues

  • Help decode text
  • Attract attention
  • Increase memory

Persuasion

  • 43% more effective than text alone
Source: Management Information Systems Research Center

Presentation format

Often stakeholders prefer to receive content in a specific format. Make sure you know what you require so that you are not scrambling at the last minute.

  • Is there a standard presentation template?
  • Is a hard-copy handout required?
  • Is there a deadline for draft submission?
  • Is there a deadline for final submission?
  • Will the presentation be circulated ahead of time?
  • Do you know what technology you will be using?
  • Have you done a dry run in the meeting room?
  • Do you know the meeting organizer?

Checklist to build compelling visuals in your presentation

Leverage this checklist to ensure you are creating the perfect visuals and graphs for your presentation.

Checklist:

  • Do the visuals grab the audience’s attention?
  • Will the visuals mislead the audience/confuse them?
  • Do the visuals facilitate data comparison or highlight trends and differences in a more effective manner than words?
  • Do the visuals present information simply, cleanly, and accurately?
  • Do the visuals display the information/data in a concentrated way?
  • Do the visuals illustrate messages and themes from the accompanying text?

3.2 Security communication templates

Once you have identified your communication goals and plans for building your communication document, you can start building your presentation deck.

These presentation templates highlight different security topics depending on your communication drivers, goals, and available data.

Info-Tech has created five security templates to assist you in building a compelling presentation.

These templates provide support for presentations on the following five topics:

  • Security Initiatives
  • Security & Risk Update
  • Security Metrics
  • Security Incident Response & Recovery
  • Security Funding Request

Each template provides instructions on how to use it and tips on ensuring the right information is being presented.

All the templates are customizable, which enables you to leverage the sections you need while also editing any sections to your liking.

The image contains screenshots of the Security Presentation Templates.

Download the Security Presentation Templates

Security template example

It’s important to know that not all security presentations for an organization are alike. However, these templates would provide a guideline on what the best practices are when communicating security to executive stakeholders.

Below is an example of instructions to complete the “Security Risk & Update” template. Please note that the security template will have instructions to complete each of its sections.

The image contains a screenshot of the Executive Summary slide. The image contains a screenshot of the Security Goals & Objectives slide.

The first slide following the title slide includes a brief executive summary on what would be discussed in the presentation. This includes the main security threats that would be addressed and the associated risk mitigation strategies.

This slide depicts a holistic overview of the organization’s security posture in different areas along with the main business goals that security is aligning with. Ensure visualizations you include align with the goals highlighted.

Security template example (continued)

The image contains a screenshot example of the Top Threats & Risks. The image contains a screenshot example of the Top Threats & Risks.

This slide displays any top threats and risks an organization is facing. Each threat consists of 2-3 risks and is prioritized based on the negative impact it could have on the organization (i.e. red bar = high priority; green bar = low priority). Include risks that have been addressed in the past quarter, and showcase any prioritization changes to those risks.

This slide follows the “Top Threats & Risks” slide and focuses on the risks that had medium or high priority. You will need to work with subject matter experts to identify risk figures (likelihood, financial impact) that will enable you to quantify the risks (Likelihood x Financial Impact). Develop a threshold for each of the three columns to identify which risks require further prioritization, and apply color coding to group the risks.

Security template example (continued)

The image contains a screenshot example of the slide, Risk Analysis. The image contains a screenshot example of the slide, Risk Mitigation Strategies & Roadmap.

This slide showcases further details on the top risks along with their business impact. Be sure to include recommendations for the risks and indicate whether further action is required from the executive stakeholders.

The last slide of the “Security Risk & Update” template presents a timeline of when the different initiatives to mitigate security risks would begin. It depicts what initiatives will be completed within each fiscal year and the total number of months required. As there could be many factors to a project’s timeline, ensure you communicate to your executive stakeholders any changes to the project.

Phase 4

Deliver communication

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

1.1 Identify drivers for communicating to executives

1.2 Define your goals for communicating to executives

2.1 Identify data to collect

2.2 Plan how to retrieve data

3.1 Plan communication

3.2 Build a compelling communication document

4.1 Deliver a captivating presentation

4.2 Obtain/verify support for security goals

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identifying a strategy to deliver compelling presentations
  • Ensuring you follow best practices for communicating and obtaining your security goals

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Security leader

4.1 Deliver a captivating presentation

You’ve gathered all your data, you understand what your audience is expecting, and you are clear on the outcomes you require. Now, it’s time to deliver a presentation that both engages and builds confidence.

Follow these tips to assist you in developing an engaging presentation:

  • Start strong: Give your audience confidence that this will be a good investment of their time. Establish a clear direction for what’s going to be covered and what the desired outcome is.
  • Use your time wisely: Odds are, your audience is busy, and they have many other things on their minds. Be prepared to cover your content in the time allotted and leave sufficient time for discussion and questions.
  • Be flexible while presenting: Do not expect that your presentation will follow the path you have laid out. Anticipate jumping around and spending more or less time than you had planned on a given slide.

Keep your audience engaged with these steps

  • Be ready with supporting data. Don’t make the mistake of not knowing your content intimately. Be prepared to answer questions on any part of it. Senior executives are experts at finding holes in your data.
  • Know your audience. Who are you presenting to? What are their specific expectations? Are there sensitive topics to be avoided? You can’t be too prepared when it comes to understanding your audience.
  • Keep it simple. Don’t assume that your audience wants to learn the details of your content. Most just want to understand the bottom line, the impact on them, and how they can help. More is not always better.
  • Focus on solving issues. Your audience members have many of their own problems and issues to worry about. If you show them how you can help make their lives easier, you’ll win them over.

Info-Tech Insight
Establishing credibility and trust with executive stakeholders is important to obtaining their support for security objectives.

Be honest and straightforward with your communication

  • Be prepared. Being properly prepared means not only that your update will deliver the value that you expect, but also that you will have confidence and the flexibility you require when you’re taken off track.
  • Don’t sugarcoat it. These are smart, driven people that you are presenting to. It is neither beneficial nor wise to try to fool them. Be open and transparent about problems and issues. Ask for help.
  • No surprises. An executive stakeholder presentation is not the time or the place for a surprise. Issues seen as unexpected or contentious should always be dealt with prior to the meeting with those most impacted.

Hone presentation skills before meeting with the executive stakeholders

Know your environment

Be professional but not boring

Connect with your audience

  • Your organization has standards for how people are expected to dress at work. Make sure that your attire meets this standard – don’t be underdressed.
  • Think about your audience – would they appreciate you starting with a joke, or do they want you to get to the point as quickly as possible?
  • State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.
  • Present with lots of energy, smile, and use hand gestures to support your speech.
  • Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention on you.
  • Never read from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

Checklist for presentation logistics

Optimize the timing of your presentation:

  • Less is more: Long presentations are detrimental to your cause – they lead to your main points being diluted. Keep your presentation short and concise.
  • Keep information relevant: Only present information that is important to your audience. This includes the information that they are expecting to see and information that connects to the business.
  • Expect delays: Your audience will likely have questions. While it is important to answer each question fully, it will take away from the precious time given to you for your presentation. Expect that you will not get through all the information you have to present.

Script your presentation:

  • Use a script to stay on track: Script your presentation before the meeting. A script will help you present your information in a concise and structured manner.
  • Develop a second script: Create a script that is about half the length of the first script but still contains the most important points. This will help you prepare for any delays that may arise during the presentation.
  • Prepare for questions: Consider questions that may be asked and script clear and concise answers to each.
  • Practice, practice, practice: Practice your presentation until you no longer need the script in front of you.

Checklist for presentation logistics (continued)

Other considerations:

  • After the introduction of your presentation, clearly state the objective – don’t keep people guessing and consequently lose focus on your message.
  • After the presentation is over, document important information that came up. Write it down or you may forget it soon after.
  • Rather than create a long presentation deck full of detailed slides that you plan to skip over during the presentation, create a second, compact deck that contains only the slides you plan to present. Send out the longer deck after the presentation.

Checklist for delivering a captivating presentation

Leverage this checklist to ensure you are prepared to develop and deliver an engaging presentation.

Checklist:

  • Start with a story or something memorable to break the ice.
  • Go in with the end state in mind (focus on the outcome/end goal and work back from there) – What’s your call to action?
  • Content must compliment your end goal, filter out any content that doesn’t compliment the end goal.
  • Be prepared to have less time to speak. Be prepared with shorter versions of your presentation.
  • Include an appendix with supporting data, but don’t be data heavy in your presentation. Integrate the data into a story. The story should be your focus.

Checklist for delivering a captivating presentation (continued)

  • Be deliberate in what you want to show your audience.
  • Ensure you have clean slides so the audience can focus on what you’re saying.
  • Practice delivering your content multiple times alone and in front of team members or your Info-Tech counselor, who can provide feedback.
  • How will you handle being derailed? Be prepared with a way to get back on track if you are derailed.
  • Ask for feedback.
  • Record yourself presenting.

4.2 Obtain and verify support on security goals

Once you’ve delivered your captivating presentation, it’s imperative to communicate with your executive stakeholders.

  • This is your opportunity to open the floor for questions and clarify any information that was conveyed to your audience.
  • Leverage your appendix and other supporting documents to justify your goals.
  • Different approaches to obtaining and verifying your goals could include:
    • Acknowledgment from the audience that information communicated aligns with the business’s goals.
    • Approval of funding requests for security initiatives.
    • Written and verbal support for implementation of security initiatives.
    • Identifying next steps for information to communicate at the next executive stakeholder meeting.

Info-Tech Insight
Verifying your objectives at the end of the presentation is important, as it ensures you have successfully communicated to executive stakeholders.

Checklist for obtaining and verify support on security goals

Follow this checklist to assist you in obtaining and verifying your communication goals.

Checklist:

  • Be clear about follow-up and next steps if applicable.
  • Present before you present: Meet with your executive stakeholders before the meeting to review and discuss your presentation and other supporting material and ensure you have executive/CEO buy-in.
  • “Be humble, but don’t crumble” – demonstrate to the executive stakeholders that you are an expert while admitting you don’t know everything. However, don’t be afraid to provide your POV and defend it if need be. Strike the right balance to ensure the board has confidence in you while building a strong relationship.
  • Prioritize a discussion over a formal presentation. Create an environment where they feel like they are part of the solution.

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem Solved

A better understanding of security communication drivers and goals

  • Understanding the difference between communication drivers and goals
  • Identifying your drivers and goals for security presentation

A developed a plan for how and where to retrieve data for communication

  • Insights on what type of data can be leveraged to support your communication goals
  • Understanding who you can collaborate with and potential data sources to retrieve data from

A solidified communication plan with security templates to assist in better presenting to your audience

  • A guideline on how to prepare security presentations to executive stakeholders
  • A list of security templates that can be customized and used for various security presentations

A defined guideline on how to deliver a captivating presentation to achieve your desired objectives

  • Clear message on best practices for delivering security presentations to executive stakeholders
  • Understanding how to verify your communication goals have been obtained

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

Contact your account representative for more information.

workshops@infotech.com

1-888-670-8889

Related Info-Tech Research

Build an Information Security Strategy
This blueprint will walk you through the steps of tailoring best practices to effectively manage information security.

Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity
This blueprint will assist you in identifying security metrics that can tie to your organizational goals and build those metrics to achieve your desired maturity level.

Bibliography

Bhadauriya, Amit S. “Communicating Cybersecurity Effectively to the Board.” Metricstream. Web.
Booth, Steven, et al. “The Biggest Mistakes Made When Presenting Cyber Security to Senior Leadership or the Board, and How to Fix Them.” Mandiant, May 2019. Web.
Bradford, Nate. “6 Slides Every CISO Should Use in Their Board Presentation.” Security Boulevard, 9 July 2020. Web.
Buckalew, Lauren, et al. “Get the Board on Board: Leading Cybersecurity from the Top Down.” Newsroom, 2 Dec. 2019. Web.
Burg, Dave, et al. “Cybersecurity: How Do You Rise above the Waves of a Perfect Storm?” EY US - Home, EY, 22 July 2021. Web.
Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. Web.
“Chief Information Security Officer Salary.” Salary.com, 2022. Web.
“CISO's Guide to Reporting to the Board - Apex Assembly.” CISO's Guide To Reporting to the Board. Web.
“Cyber Security Oversight in the Boardroom” KPMG, Jan. 2016. Web.
“Cybersecurity CEO: My 3 Tips for Presenting in the Boardroom.” Cybercrime Magazine, 31 Mar. 2020. Web.
Dacri , Bryana. Do's & Don'ts for Security Professionals Presenting to Executives. Feb. 2018. Web.
Froehlich, Andrew. “7 Cybersecurity Metrics for the Board and How to Present Them: TechTarget.” Security, TechTarget, 19 Aug. 2022. Web.
“Global Board Risk Survey.” EY. Web.
“Guidance for CISOs Presenting to the C-Suite.” IANS, June 2021. Web.
“How to Communicate Cybersecurity to the Board of Directors.” Cybersecurity Conferences & News, Seguro Group, 12 Mar. 2020. Web.
Ide, R. William, and Amanda Leech. “A Cybersecurity Guide for Directors” Dentons. Web.
Lindberg, Randy. “3 Tips for Communicating Cybersecurity to the Board.” Cybersecurity Software, Rivial Data Security, 8 Mar. 2022. Web.
McLeod, Scott, et al. “How to Present Cybersecurity to Your Board of Directors.” Cybersecurity & Compliance Simplified, Apptega Inc, 9 Aug. 2021. Web.
Mickle, Jirah. “A Recipe for Success: CISOs Share Top Tips for Successful Board Presentations.” Tenable®, 28 Nov. 2022. Web.
Middlesworth, Jeff. “Top-down: Mitigating Cybersecurity Risks Starts with the Board.” Spiceworks, 13 Sept. 2022. Web.
Mishra, Ruchika. “4 Things Every CISO Must Include in Their Board Presentation.” Security Boulevard, 17 Nov. 2020. Web.
O’Donnell-Welch, Lindsey. “CISOs, Board Members and the Search for Cybersecurity Common Ground.” Decipher, 20 Oct. 2022. Web.

Bibliography

“Overseeing Cyber Risk: The Board's Role.” PwC, Jan. 2022. Web.
Pearlson, Keri, and Nelson Novaes Neto. “7 Pressing Cybersecurity Questions Boards Need to Ask.” Harvard Business Review, 7 Mar. 2022. Web.
“Reporting Cybersecurity Risk to the Board of Directors.” Web.
“Reporting Cybersecurity to Your Board - Steps to Prepare.” Pondurance ,12 July 2022. Web.
Staynings, Richard. “Presenting Cybersecurity to the Board.” Resource Library. Web.
“The Future of Cyber Survey.” Deloitte, 29 Aug. 2022. Web.
“Top Cybersecurity Metrics to Share with Your Board.” Packetlabs, 10 May 2022. Web.
Unni, Ajay. “Reporting Cyber Security to the Board? How to Get It Right.” Cybersecurity Services Company in Australia & NZ, 10 Nov. 2022. Web.
Vogel, Douglas, et al. “Persuasion and the Role of Visual Presentation Support.” Management Information Systems Research Center, 1986.
“Welcome to the Cyber Security Toolkit for Boards.” NCSC. Web.

Research Contributors

  • Fred Donatucci, New-Indy Containerboard, VP, Information Technology
  • Christian Rasmussen, St John Ambulance, Chief Information Officer
  • Stephen Rondeau, ZimVie, SVP, Chief Information Officer

Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}365|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

Organizations can struggle to understand what service-level agreements (SLAs) are required and how they can differ depending on the service type. In addition, these other challenges can also cloud an organization’s knowledge of SLAs:

  • No standardized SLAs documents, service levels, or metrics
  • Dealing with lost productivity and revenue due to persistent downtime
  • Not understanding SLAs components and what service levels are required for a particular service
  • How to manage the SLA and hold the vendor accountable

Our Advice

Critical Insight

SLAs need to have clear, easy-to-measure objectives, to meet expectations and service level requirements, including meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable to its obligations.

Impact and Result

This project will provide several benefits and learnings for almost all IT workers:

  • Better understanding of an SLA framework and required SLA elements
  • Standardized service levels and metrics aligned to the organization’s requirements
  • Reduced time in reviewing, evaluating, and managing service provider SLAs

Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements Research & Tools

Start here – Read our Executive Brief

Understand how to resolve your challenges with SLAs and their components and ensuring adequate metrics. Learn how to create meaningful SLAs that meet your requirements and manage them effectively.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Understand SLA elements – Understand the elements of SLAs, service types, service levels, metrics/KPIs, monitoring, and reporting

  • SLA Checklist
  • SLA Evaluation Tool

2. Create requirements – Create your own SLA criteria and templates that meet your organization’s requirements

  • SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

3. Manage obligations – Learn the SLA Management Framework to track providers’ performance and adherence to their commitments.

  • SLO Tracker & Trending Tool

Infographic

Workshop: Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Understand the Elements of SLAs

The Purpose

Understand key components and elements of an SLA.

Key Benefits Achieved

Properly evaluate an SLA for required elements.

Activities

1.1 SLA overview, objectives, SLA types, service levels

1.2 SLA elements and objectives

1.3 SLA components: monitoring, reporting, and remedies

1.4 SLA checklist review

Outputs

SLA Checklist 

Evaluation Process

SLA Checklist

Evaluation Process

SLA Checklist

Evaluation Process

SLA Checklist

Evaluation Process

2 Create SLA Criteria and Management Framework

The Purpose

Apply knowledge of SLA elements to create internal SLA requirements.

Key Benefits Achieved

Templated SLAs that meet requirements.

Framework to manage SLOs.

Activities

2.1 Creating SLA criteria and requirements

2.2 SLA templates and policy

2.3 SLA evaluation activity

2.4 SLA Management Framework

2.5 SLA monitoring, tracking, and remedy reconciliation

Outputs

Internal SLA Management Framework

Evaluation of current SLAs

SLA tracking and trending

Internal SLA Management Framework

Evaluation of current SLAs

SLA tracking and trending

Internal SLA Management Framework

Evaluation of current SLAs

SLA tracking and trending

Internal SLA Management Framework

Evaluation of current SLAs

SLA tracking and trending

Internal SLA Management Framework

Evaluation of current SLAs

SLA tracking and trending

Further reading

Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

Hold Service Providers more accountable to their contractual obligations with meaningful SLA components & remedies

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

Every year organizations outsource more and more IT infrastructure to the cloud, and IT operations to managed service providers. This increase in outsourcing presents an increase in risk to the CIO to save on IT spend through outsourcing while maintaining required and expected service levels to internal customers and the organization. Ensuring that the service provider constantly meets their obligations so that the CIO can meet their obligation to the organization can be a constant challenge. This brings forth the importance of the Service Level Agreement.

Research clearly indicates that there is a general lack of knowledge when comes to understanding the key elements of a Service Level Agreement (SLA). Even less understanding of the importance of the components of Service Levels and the Service Level Objectives (SLO) that service provider needs to meet so that the outsourced service consistently meets requirements of the organization. Most service providers are very good at providing the contracted service and they all are very good at presenting SLOs that are easy to meet with very few or no ramifications if they don’t meet their objectives. IT leaders need to be more resolute in only accepting SLOs that are meaningful to their requirements and have meaningful, proactive reporting and associated remedies to hold service providers accountable to their obligations.

Ted Walker

Principal Research Director, Vendor Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Brief

Vendors provide service level commitments to customers in contracts to show a level of trust, performance, availability, security, and responsiveness in an effort create a sense of confidence that their service or platform will meet your organization’s requirements and expectations. Sifting through these promises can be challenging for many IT Leaders. Customers struggle to understand and evaluate what’s in the SLA – are they meaningful and protect your investment? Not understanding the details of SLAs applicable to various types of Service (SaaS, MSP, Service Desk, DR, ISP) can lead to financial and compliance risk for the organization as well as poor customer satisfaction.

This project will provide IT leadership the knowledge & tools that will allow them to:

  • Understand what SLAs are and why they need them.
  • Develop standard SLAs that meet the organization’s requirements.
  • Negotiate meaningful remedies aligned to Service Levels metrics or KPIs.
  • Create SLA monitoring & reporting and remedies requirements to hold the provider accountable.

This research:

  1. Is designed for:
  • The CIO or CFO who needs to better understand their provider’s SLAs.
  • The CIO or BU that could benefit from improved service levels.
  • Vendor management who needs to standardize SLAs for the organization IT leadership that needs consistent service levels to the business
  • The contract manager who needs a better understanding of contact SLAs
  • Will help you:
    • Understand what a Service Level Agreement is and what it’s for
    • Learn what the components are of an SLA and why you need them
    • Create a checklist of required SLA elements for your organization
    • Develop standard SLA template requirements for various service types
    • Learn the importance of SLA management to hold providers accountable
  • Will also assist:
    • Vendor management
    • Procurement and sourcing
    • Organizations that need to understand SLAs within contract language
    • With creating standardized monitoring & reporting requirements
    • Organizations get better position remedies & credits to hold vendors accountable to their commitments
  • Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements (SLAs)

    Hold service providers more accountable to their contractual obligations with meaningful SLA components and remedies

    The Problem

    IT Leadership doesn't know how to evaluate an SLA.

    Misunderstanding of obligations given the type of service provided (SAAS, IAAS, DR/BCP, Service Desk)

    Expectations not being met, leading to poor service from the provider.

    No way to hold provider accountable.

    Why it matters

    SLAS are designed to ensure that outsourced IT services meet the requirements and expectations of the organization. Well-written SLAs with all the required elements, metrics, and remedies will allow IT departments to provide the service levels to their customer and avoid financial and contractual risk to the organization.

    The Solution

    1. Understand the key service elements within an SLA
    • Develop a solid understanding of the key elements within an SLA and why they're important.
  • Establish requirements to create SLA criteria
    • Prioritize contractual services and establish concise SLA checklists and performance metrics.
  • Manage SLA obligations to ensure commitments are met
    • Review the five steps for effective SLA management to track provider performance and deal with chronic issues.
  • Service types

    • Availability/Uptime
    • Response Times
    • Resolution Time
    • Accuracy
    • First-Call Resolution

    Agreement Types

    • SaaS/IaaS
    • Service Desk
    • MSP
    • Co-Location
    • DR/BCP
    • Security Ops

    Performance Metrics

    • Reporting
    • Remedies & Credits
    • Monitoring
    • Exclusion

    Example SaaS Provider

    • Response Times ✓
    • Availability/Uptime ✓
    • Resolution Time ✓
    • Update Times ✓
    • Coverage Time ✓
    • Monitoring ✓
    • Reporting ✓
    • Remedies/Credits ✓

    SLA Management Framework

    1. SLO Monitoring
    • SLOs must be monitored by the provider, otherwise they can't be measured.
  • Concise Reporting
    • This is the key element for the provider to validate their performance.
  • Attainment Tracking
    • Capturing SLO metric attainment provides performance trending for each provider.
  • Score carding
    • Tracking details provide input into overall vendor performance ratings.
  • Remedy Reconciliation
    • From SLO tracking, missed SLOs and associated credits needs to be actioned and consumed.
  • Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    To understand which SLAs are required for your organization and how they can differ depending on the service type. In addition, these other challenges can also cloud your knowledge of SLAs

    • No standardized SLA documents, Service levels, or metrics
    • Dealing with lost productivity & revenue due to persistent downtime
    • Understanding SLA components and what service levels are requires for a particular service
    • How to manage the SLA and hold the vendor accountable

    Common Obstacles

    There are several unknowns that SLA can present to different departments within the organization:

    • Little knowledge of what service levels are required
    • Not knowing SLO standards for a service type
    • Lack of resources to manage vendor obligations
    • Negotiating required metrics/KPIs with the provider
    • Low understanding of the risk that poor SLAs can present to the organization

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Info-Tech has a three-step approach to effective SLAs

    • Understand the elements of an SLA
    • Create Requirements for your organization
    • Manage the SLA obligations

    There are some basic components that every SLA should have – most don’t have half of what is required

    Info-Tech Insight

    SLAs need to have clear, easy to measure objectives to meet your expectations and service level requirements, including meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable to their obligations.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations gain a better understanding of what an SLA is, understand the importance of SLAs in IT contracts, and ensure organizations are provided with rock-solid SLAs that meet their requirements and not just what the vendor wants to provide.

    • Vendors can make SLAs weak and difficult to understand; sometimes the metrics are meaningless. Not fully understanding what makes up a good SLA can bring unknown risks to the organization.
    • Managing vendor SLA obligations effectively is important. Are adequate resources available? Does the vendor provide manual vs. automated processes and which do you need? Is the process proactive from the vendor or reactive from the customer?

    SLAs come in many variations and for many service types. Understanding what needs to be in them is one of the keys to reducing risk to your organization.

    “One of the biggest mistakes an IT leader can make is ignoring the ‘A’ in SLA,” adds Wendy M. Pfeiffer, CIO at Nutanix. “

    An agreement isn’t a one-sided declaration of IT capabilities, nor is it a one-sided demand of business requirements,” she says. “An agreement involves creating a shared understanding of desired service delivery and quality, calculating costs related to expectations, and then agreeing to outcomes in exchange for investment.” (15 SLA mistakes IT leaders still make | CIO)

    Common obstacles

    There are typically a lot of unknowns when it comes to SLAs and how to manage them.

    Most organizations don’t have a full understanding of what SLAs they require and how to ensure they are met by the vendor. Other obstacles that SLAs can present are:

    • Inadequate resources to create and manage SLAs
    • Poor awareness of standard or required SLA metrics/KPIs
    • Lack of knowledge about each provider’s commitment as well as your obligations
    • Low vendor willingness to provide or negotiate meaningful SLAs and credits
    • The know-how or resources to effectively monitor and manage the SLA’s performance

    SLAs need to address your requirements

    55% of businesses do not find all of their service desk metrics useful or valuable (Freshservice.com)

    27% of businesses spend four to seven hours a month collating metric reports (Freshservice.com)

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Understand the elements of an SLA
      • Availability
      • Monitoring
      • Response Times
      • SLO Calculation
      • Resolution Time
      • Reporting
      • Milestones
      • Exclusions
      • Accuracy
      • Remedies & Credits
    • Create standard SLA requirements and criteria
      • SLA Element Checklist
      • Corporate Requirements and Standards
      • SLA Templates and Policy
    • Effectively Manage the SLA Obligations
      • SLA Management Framework
        • SLO Monitoring
        • Concise Reporting
        • Attainment Tracking
        • Score Carding
        • Remedy Reconciliation

    Info-Tech’s three phase approach

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 1

    Understand SLA Elements

    Phase Content:

    • 1.1 What are SLAs, types of SLAs, and why are they needed?
    • 1.2 Elements of an SLA
    • 1.3 Obligation management monitoring, Reporting requirements
    • 1.4 Exclusions
    • 1.5 SLAs vs. SLOs vs. SLIs

    Outcome:

    This phase will present you with an understanding of the elements of an SLA: What they are, why you need them, and how to validate them.

    Phase 2

    Create Requirements

    Phase Content:

    • 2.1 Create a list of your SLA criteria
    • 2.2 Develop SLA policy & templates
    • 2.3 Create a negotiation strategy
    • 2.4 SLA Overachieving discussion

    Outcome:

    This phase will leverage knowledge gained in Phase 1 and guide you through the creation of SLA requirements, criteria, and templates to ensure that providers meet the service level obligations needed for various service types to meet your organization’s service expectations.

    Phase 3

    Manage Obligations

    Phase Content:

    • 3.1 SLA Monitoring, Tracking
    • 3.2 Reporting
    • 3.3 Vendor SLA Reviews & Optimizing
    • 3.4 Performance management

    Outcome:

    This phase will provide you with an SLA management framework and the best practices that will allow you to effectively manage service providers and their SLA obligations.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    SLAs need to have clear, easy-to-measure objectives to meet your expectations and service level requirements, including meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable to their obligations.

    Phase 1 insight

    Not understanding the required elements of an SLA and not having meaningful remedies to hold service providers accountable to their obligations can present several risk factors to your organization.

    Phase 2 insight

    Creating standard SLA criteria for your organization’s service providers will ensure consistent service levels for your business units and customers.

    Phase 3 insight

    SLAs can have appropriate SLOs and remedies but without effective management processes they could become meaningless.

    Tactical insight

    Be sure to set SLAs that are easily measurable from regularly accessible data and that are straight forward to interpret.

    Tactical insight

    Beware of low, easy to attain service levels and metrics/KPIs. Service levels need to meet your expectations and needs not the vendor’s.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    SLA Tracker & Trending Tool

    Track the provider’s SLO attainment and see how their performance is trending over time

    SLA Evaluation Tool

    Evaluate SLA service levels, metrics, credit values, reporting, and other elements

    SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    Reference guide for typical SLA metrics with a generic SLA Template

    Service-Level Agreement Checklist

    Complete SLA component checklist for core SLA and contractual elements.

    Key deliverable:

    Service-Level Agreement Evaluation Tool

    Evaluate each component of the SLA , including service levels, metrics, credit values, reporting, and processes to meet your requirements

    Blueprint objectives

    Understand the components of an SLA and effectively manage their obligations

    • To provide an understanding of different types of SLAs, their required elements, and what they mean to your organization. How to identify meaningful service levels based on service types. We will break down the elements of the SLA such as service types and define service levels such as response times, availability, accuracy, and associated metrics or KPIs to ensure they are concise and easy to measure.
    • To show how important it is that all metrics have remedies to hold the service provider accountable to their SLA obligations.

    Once you have this knowledge you will be able to create and negotiate SLA requirements to meet your organization’s needs and then manage them effectively throughout the term of the agreement.

    InfoTech Insight:

    Right-size your requirements and create your SLO criteria based on risk mitigation and create measurements that motivate the desired behavior from the SLA.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • An understanding of standard SLA service levels and metrics
    • Reduced financial risk through clear and concise easy-to-measure metrics and KPIs
    • Improved SLA commitments from the service provider
    • Meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable
    • Service levels and metrics that meet your requirements to support your customers

    Business Benefits

    • Better understanding of an SLA framework and required SLA elements
    • Improved vendor performance
    • Standardized service levels and metrics aligned to your organization’s requirements
    • Reduced time in reviewing and comprehending vendor SLAs
    • Consistent performance from your service providers

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    1. Dollars Saved
    • Improved performance from your service provider
    • Reduced financial risk through meaningful service levels & remedies
    • Dollars gained through:
      • Reconciled credits from obligation tracking and management
      • Savings due to automated processes
  • Time Saved
    • Reduced time in creating effective SLAs through requirement templates
    • Time spent tracking and managing SLA obligations
    • Reduced negotiation time
    • Time spent tracking and reconciling credits
  • Knowledge Gained
    • Understanding of SLA elements, service levels, service types, reporting, and remedies
    • Standard metrics and KPIs required for various service types and levels
    • How to effectively manage the service provider obligations
    • Tactics to negotiate appropriate service levels to meet your requirements
  • Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way wound help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between three to six calls over the course of two to three months.

    Phase 1 - Understand

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific SLA challenges

    Phase 2 - Create Requirements

    • Call #2: Review key SLA and how to identify them
    • Call #3: Deep dive into SLA elements and why you need them
    • Call #4: Review your service types and SLA criteria
    • Call #5: Create internal SLA requirements and templates

    Phase 3 - Management

    • Call #6: Review SLA Management Framework
    • Call #7: Review and create SLA Reporting and Tracking

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2
    Understanding SLAs SLA Templating & Management
    Activities

    1.1 SLA overview, objectives, SLA types, service levels

    1.2 SLA elements and objectives

    1.3 SLA components – monitoring, reporting, remedies

    1.4 SLA Checklist review

    2.1 Creating SLA criteria and requirements

    2.2 SLA policy & template

    2.3 SLA evaluation activity

    2.4 SLA management framework

    2.5 SLA monitoring, tracking, remedy reconciliation

    Deliverables
    1. SLA Checklist
    2. SLA policy & template creation
    3. SLA management gap analysis
    1. Evaluation of current SLAs
    2. SLA tracking and trending
    3. Create internal SLA management framework

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Understand SLA Elements

    Phase Steps

    • 1.1 What are SLAs, the types of SLAs, and why are they needed?
    • 1.2 Elements of an SLA
    • 1.3 Obligation management monitoring, Reporting requirements
    • 1.4 Exclusions and exceptions
    • 1.5 SLAs vs. SLOs vs. SLIs

    Create Requirements

    Manage Obligations

    1.1 What are SLAs, the types of SLAs, and why are they needed?

    SLA Overview

    What is a Service Level Agreement?

    An SLA is an overarching contractual agreement between a service provider and a customer (can be external or internal) that describes the services that will be delivered by the provider. It describes the service levels and associated performance metrics and expectations, how the provider will show it has attained the SLAs, and defines any remedies or credits that would apply if the provider fails to meet its commitments. Some SLAs also include a change or revision process.

    SLAs come in a few forms. Some are unique, separate, standalone documents that define the service types and levels in more detail and is customized to your needs. Some are separate documents that apply to a service and are web posted or linked to an MSA or SSA. The most common is to have them embedded in, or as an appendix to an MSA or SSA. When negotiating an MSA it’s generally more effective to negotiate better service levels and metrics at the same time.

    Objectives of an SLA

    To be effective, SLAs need to have clearly described objectives that define the service type(s) that the service provider will perform, along with commitment to associated measurable metrics or KPIs that are sufficient to meet your expectations. The goal of these service levels and metrics is to ensure that the service provider is committed to providing the service that you require, and to allow you to maintain service levels to your customers whether internal or external.

    1.1 What are SLAs, the types of SLAs, and why are they needed?

    Key Elements of an SLA

    Principle service elements of an SLA

    There are several more common service-related elements of an SLA. These generally include:

    • The Agreement – the document that defines service levels and commitments.
    • The service types – the type of service being provided by the vendor. These can include SaaS, MSP, Service Desk, Telecom/network, PaaS, Co-Lo, BCP, etc.
    • The service levels – these are the measurable performance objectives of the SLA. They include availability (uptime), response times, restore times, priority level, accuracy level, resolution times, event prevention, completion time, etc.
    • Metrics/KPIs – These are the targets or commitments associated to the service level that the service provider is obligated to meet.
    • Other elements – Reporting requirements, monitoring, remedies/credit values and process.

    Contractual Construct Elements

    These are construct components of an SLA that outline their roles and responsibilities, T&Cs, escalation process, etc.

    In addition, there are several contractual-type elements including, but not limited to:

    • A statement regarding the purpose of the SLA.
    • A list of services being supplied (service types).
    • An in-depth description of how services will be provided and when.
    • Vendor and customer requirements.
    • Vendor and customer obligations.
    • Acknowledgment/acceptance of the SLA.
    • They also list each party’s responsibilities and how issues will be escalated and resolved.

    Common types of SLAs explained

    Service-level SLA

    • This service-level agreement construct is the Service-based SLA. This SLA covers an identified service for all customers in general (for example, if an IT service provider offers customer response times for a service to several customers). In a service-based agreement, the response times would be the same and apply to all customers using the service. Any customer using the service would be provided the same SLA – in this case the same defined response time.

    Customer-based SLA

    • A customer-based SLA is a unique agreement with one customer. The entire agreement is defined for one or all service levels provided to a particular customer (for example, you may use several services from one telecom vendor). The SLAs for these services would be covered in one contract between you and the vendor, creating a unique customer-based vendor agreement. Another scenario could be where a vendor offers general SLAs for its services but you negotiate a specific SLA for a particular service that is unique or exclusive to you. This would be a customer-based SLA as well.

    Multi-level SLA

    • This service-level agreement construct is the multi-level SLA. In a multi-level SLA, components are defined to the organizational levels of the customer with cascading coverage to sublevels of the organization. The SLA typically entails all services and is designed to the cover each sub-level or department within the organization. Sometimes the multi-level SLA is known as a master organization SLA as it cascades to several levels of the organization.

    InfoTech Insight: Beware of low, easy to attain Service levels and metrics/KPIs. Service levels need to meet your requirements, expectations, and needs not the vendor’s.

    1.2 Elements of SLA-objectives, service types, and service levels

    Objectives of Service Levels

    The objective of the service levels and service credits are to:

    • Ensure that the services are of a consistently high quality and meet the requirements of the customer
    • Provide a mechanism whereby the customer can attain meaningful recognition of the vendors failure to deliver the level of service for which it was contracted to deliver
    • Incentivize the vendor or service provider to comply with and to expeditiously provide a remedy for any failure to attain the service levels committed to in the SLA
    • To ensure that the service provider fulfills the defined objectives of the outsourced service

    Service types

    There are several service types that can be part of an SLA. Service types are the different nature of services associated with the SLA that the provider is performing and being measured against. These can include:

    Service Desk, SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, ISP/Telecom/Network MSP, DR & BCP, Co-location security ops, SOW.

    Each service type should have standard service level targets or obligations that can vary depending on your requirements and reliance on the service being provided.

    Service levels

    Service levels are measurable targets, metrics, or KPIs that the service provider has committed to for the particular service type. Service levels are the key element of SLAs – they are the performance expectations set between you and the provider. The service performance of the provider is measured against the service level commitments. The ability of the provider to consistently meet these metrics will allow your organization to fully benefit from the objectives of the service and associated SLAs. Most service levels are time related but not all are.

    Common service levels are:

    Response times, resolution times per percent, restore/recovery times, accuracy, availability/uptime, completion/milestones, updating/communication, latency.

    Each service level has standard or minimum metrics for the provider. The metrics, or KPIs, should be relatively easy to measure and report against on a regular basis. Service levels are generally negotiable to meet your requirements.

    1.2.1 Activity SLA Checklist Tool

    1-2 hours

    Input

    • SLA content, Service elements
    • Contract terms & exclusions
    • Service metrices/KPIs

    Output

    • A concise list of SLA components
    • A list of missing SLA elements
    • Evaluation of the SLA

    Materials

    • Comprehensive checklist
    • Service provider SLA
    • Internal templates or policies

    Participants

    • Vendor or contract manager
    • IT or business unit manager
    • Legal
    • Finance

    Using this checklist will help you review a provider’s SLA to ensure it contains adequate service levels and remedies as well as contract-type elements.

    Instructions:

    Use the checklist to identify the principal service level elements as well as the contractual-type elements within the SLA.

    Review the SLA and use the dropdowns in the checklist to verify if the element is in the SLA and whether it is within acceptable parameters as well the page or section for reference.

    The checklist contains a list of service types that can be used for reference of what SLA elements you should expect to see in that service type SLA.

    Download the SLA Checklist Tool

    1.3 Monitoring, reporting requirements, remedies/credit process

    Monitoring & Reporting

    As mentioned, well-defined service levels are key to the success of the SLA. Validating that the metrics/KPIs are being met on a consistent basis requires regular monitoring and reporting. These elements of the SLA are how you hold the provider accountable to the SLA commitments and obligations. To achieve the service level, the service must be monitored to validate that timelines are met and accuracy is achieved.

    • Data or details from monitoring must then be presented in a report and delivered to the customer in an agreed-upon format. These formats can be in a dashboard, portal, spreadsheet, or csv file, and they must have sufficient criteria to validate the service-level metric. Reports should be kept for future review and to create historical trending.
    • Monitoring and reporting should be the responsibility of the service provider. This is the only way that they can validate to the customer that a service level has been achieved.
    • Reporting criteria and delivery timelines should be defined in the SLA and can even have a service level associated with it, such as a scheduled report delivery on the fifth day of the following month.
    • Reports need to be checked and balanced. When defining report criteria, be sure to define data source(s) that can be easily validated by both parties.
    • Report criteria should include compliance requirements, target metric/KPIs, and whether they were attained.
    • The report should identify any attainment shortfall or missed KPIs.

    Too many SLAs do not have these elements as often the provider tries to put the onus on the customer to monitor their performance of the service levels. .

    1.3.1 Monitoring, reporting requirements, remedies/credit process

    Remedies and Credits

    Service-level reports validate the performance of the service provider to the SLA metrics or KPIs. If the metrics are met, then by rights, the service provider is doing its job and performing up to expectations of the SLA and your organization.

    • What if the metrics are not being met either periodically or consistently? Solving this is the goal of remedies. Remedies are typically monetary costs (in some form) to the provider that they must pay for not meeting a service-level commitment. Credits can vary significantly and should be aligned to the severity of the missed service level. Sometimes there no credits offered by the vendor. This is a red flag in an SLA.
    • Typically expressed as a monetary credit, the SLA will have service levels and associated credits if the service-level metric/KPI is not met during the reporting period. Credits can be expressed in a dollar format, often defined as a percentage of a monthly fee or prorated annual fee. Although less common, some SLAs offer non-financial credits. These could include: an extension to service term, additional modules, training credits, access to a higher support level, etc.
    • Regardless of how the credit is presented, this is typically the only way to hold your provider accountable to their commitments and to ensure they perform consistently to expectations. You must do a rough calculation to validate the potential monetary value and if the credit is meaningful enough to the provider.

    Research shows that credit values that equate to just a few dollars, when you are paying the provider tens of thousands of dollars a month for a service or product, the credit is insignificant and therefore doesn’t incent the provider to achieve or maintain a service level.

    1.3.2 Monitoring, reporting requirements, remedies/credit process

    Credit Process

    Along with meaningful credit values, there must be a defined credit calculation method and credit redemption process in the SLA.

    Credit calculation. The credit calculation should be simple and straight forward. Many times, we see providers define complicated methods of calculating the credit value. In some cases complicated service levels require higher effort to monitor and report on, but this shouldn’t mean that the credit for missing the service level needs to require the same effort to calculate. Do a sample credit calculation to validate if the potential credit value is meaningful enough or meets your requirements.

    Credit redemption process. The SLA should define the process of how a credit is provided to the customer. Ideally the process should be fairly automated by the service provider. If the report shows a missed service level, that should trigger a credit calculation and credit value posted to account followed by notification. In many SLAs that we review, the credit process is either poorly defined or not defined at all. When it is defined, the process typically requires the customer to follow an onerous process and submit a credit request that must then be validated by the provider and then, if approved, posted to your account to be applied at year end as long as you are in complete compliance with the agreement and up-to-date on your account etc. This is what we need to avoid in provider-written SLAs. You need a proactive process where the service provider takes responsibility for missing an SLA and automatically assigns an accurate credit to your account with an email notice.

    Secondary level remedies. These are remedies for partial performance. For example, the platform is accessible but some major modules are not working (i.e.: the payroll platform is up and running and accessible but the tax table is not working properly so you can’t complete your payroll run on-time). Consider the requirement of a service level, metric, and remedy for critical components of a service and not just the platform availability.

    Info-Tech Insight SLA’s without adequate remedies to hold the vendor accountable to their commitments make the SLAs essentially meaningless.

    1.4 Exclusions indemnification, force majeure, scheduled maintenance

    Contract-Related Exclusions

    Attaining service-level commitments by the provider within an SLA can depend on other factors that could greatly influence their performance to service levels. Most of these other factors are common and should be defined in the SLA as exclusions or exceptions. Exceptions/exclusions can typically apply to credit calculations as well. Typical exceptions to attaining service levels are:

    • Denial of Service (DoS) attacks
    • Communication/ISP outage
    • Outages of third-party hosting
    • Actions or inactions of the client or third parties
    • Scheduled maintenance but not emergency maintenance
    • Force majeure events which can cover several different scenarios

    Attention should be taken to review the exceptions to ensure they are in fact not within the reasonable control of the provider. Many times the provider will list several exclusions. Often these are not reasonable or can be avoided, and in most cases, they allow the service provider the opportunity to show unjustified service-level achievements. These should be negotiated out of the SLA.

    1.5 Activity SLA Evaluation Tool

    1-2 hours

    Input

    • SLA content
    • SLA elements
    • SLA objectives
    • SLO calculation methods

    Output

    • Rating of the SLA service levels and objectives
    • Overall rating of the SLA content
    • Targeted list of required improvements

    Materials

    • SLA comprehensive checklist
    • Service provider SLA

    Participants

    • Vendor or contract manager
    • IT manager or leadership
    • Application or business unit manager

    The SLA Evaluation Tool will allow you evaluate an SLA for content. Enter details into the tool and evaluate the service levels and SLA elements and components to ensure the agreement contains adequate SLOs to meet your organization’s service requirements.

    Instructions:

    Review and identify SLA elements within the service provider’s SLA.

    Enter service-level details into the tool and rate the SLOs.

    Enter service elements details, validate that all required elements are in the SLA, and rate them accordingly.

    Capture and evaluate service-level SLO calculations.

    Review the overall rating for the SLA and create a targeted list for improvements with the service provider.

    Download the SLA Evaluation Tool

    1.5 Clarification: SLAs vs. SLOs vs. SLIs

    SLA – Service-Level Agreement The promise or commitment

    • This is the formal agreement between you and your service provider that contains their service levels and obligations with measurable metrics/KPIs and associated remedies. SLAs can be a separate or unique document, but are most commonly embedded within an MSA, SOW, SaaS, etc. as an addendum or exhibit.

    SLO – Service-Level Objective The goals or targets

    • This service-level agreement construct is the customer-based SLA. A Customer-based SLA is a unique agreement with one customer. The entire agreement is defined for one or all service levels provided to a particular customer. For example, you may use several services from one telecom vendor. The SLAs for these services would be covered in one contract between you and the Telco vendor, creating a unique customer-based to vendor agreement. Another scenario: a vendor offers general SLAs for its services and you negotiate a specific SLA for a particular service that is unique or exclusive to you. This would be a customer-based SLA as well.

    Other common names are Metrics and Key Performance Indicators (KPIs )

    SLI – Service-Level Indicator How did we do? Did we achieve the objectives?

    • An SLI is the actual metric attained after the measurement period. SLI measures compliance with an SLO (service level objective). So, for example, if your SLA specifies that your systems will be available 99.95% of the time, your SLO is 99.95% uptime and your SLI is the actual measurement of your uptime. Maybe it’s 99.96%. maybe 99.99% or even 99.75% For the vendor to be compliant to the SLA, the SLI(s) must meet or exceed the SLOs within the SLA document.

    Other common names: attainment, results, actual

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Web-posted SLAs that are not embedded within a signed MSA, can present uncertainty and risk as they can change at any time and typically without direct notice to the customer

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 2

    Understand SLA Elements

    Phase 2

    Create Requirements

    Phase Steps

    • 2.1 Create a list of your SLA criteria
    • 2.2 Develop SLA policy & templates
    • 2.3 Create a negotiation strategy
    • 2.4 SLA overachieving discussion

    Manage Obligations

    2.1 Create a list of your SLA criteria

    Principle Service Elements

    With your understanding of the types of SLAs and the elements that comprise a well-written agreement

    • The next step is to start to create a set of SLA criteria for service types that your organization outsources or may require in the future.
    • This criteria should define the elements of the SLA with tolerance levels that will require the provider to meet your service expectations.
    • Service levels, metrics/KPIs, associated remedies and reporting criteria. This criteria could be captured into table-like templates that can be referenced or inserted into service provider SLAs.
    • Once you have defined minimum service-level criteria, we recommend that you do a deeper review of the various service provider types that your organization has in place. The goal of the review is to understand the objective of the service type and associated service levels and then compare them to your requirements for the service to meet your expectations. Service levels and KPIs should be no less than if your IT department was providing the service with its own resources and infrastructure.
    • Most IT departments have service levels that they are required to meet with their infrastructure to the business units or organization, whether it’s App delivery, issue or problem resolution, availability etc. When any of these services are outsourced to an external service provider, you need to make all efforts to ensure that the service levels are equal to or better than the previous or existing internal expectations.
    • Additionally, the goal is to identify service levels and metrics that don’t meet your requirements or expectations and/or service levels that are missing.

    2.2 Develop SLA policies and templates

    Contract-type Elements

    After creating templates for minimum-service metrics & KPIs, reporting criteria templates, process, and timing, the next step should be to work on contract-type elements and additional service-level components. These elements should include:

    • Reporting format, criteria, and timelines
    • Monitoring requirements
    • Minimum acceptable remedy or credits process; proactive by provider vs. reactive by customer
    • Roles & responsibilities
    • Acceptable exclusion details
    • Termination language for persistent failure to meet SLOs

    These templates or criteria minimums can be used as guidelines or policy when creating or negotiating SLAs with a service provider.

    Start your initial element templates for your strategic vendors and most common service types: SaaS, IaaS, Service Desk, SecOps, etc. The goal of SLA templates is to create simple minimum guidelines for service levels that will allow you to meet your internal SLAs and expectations. Having SLA templates will show the service provider that you understand your requirements and may put you in a better negotiating position when reviewing with the provider.

    When considering SLO metrics or KPIs consider the SMART guidance:

    Simple: A KPI should be easy to measure. It should not be complicated, and the purpose behind recording it must be documented and communicated.

    Measurable: A KPI that cannot be measured will not help in the decision-making process. The selected KPIs must be measurable, whether qualitatively or quantitatively. The procedure for measuring the KPIs must be consistent and well-defined.

    Actionable: KPIs should contribute to the decision-making process of your organization. A KPI that does not make any such contributions serves no purpose.

    Relevant: KPIs must be related to operations or functions that a security team seeks to assess.

    Time-based: KPIs should be flexible enough to demonstrate changes over time. In a practical sense, an ideal KPI can be grouped together by different time intervals.

    (Guide for Security Operations Metrics)

    2.2.1 Activity: Review SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    1-2 hours

    Input

    • Service level metrics
    • List of who is accountable for PPM decisions

    Output

    • SLO templates for service types
    • SLA criteria that meets your organization’s requirements

    Materials

    • SLA Checklist
    • SLA criteria list with SLO & credit values
    • PPM Decision Review Workbook

    Participants

    • Vendor manager
    • IT leadership
    • Procurement or contract manager
    1. Review the SLA Template and Metrics Reference Guide for common metrics & KPIs for the various service types. Each Service Type tab has SLA elements and SLO metrics typically associated with the type of service.
    2. Some service levels have common or standard credits* that are typically associated with the service level or metric.
    3. Use the SLA Template to enter service levels, metrics, and credits that meet your organization’s criteria or requirements for a given service type.

    Download the SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    *Credit values are not standard values, rather general ranges that our research shows to be the typical ranges that credit values should be for a given missed service level

    2.3 Create a negotiation strategy

    Once you have created service-level element criteria templates for your organization’s requirements, it’s time to document a negotiation position or strategy to use when negotiating with service providers. Not all providers are flexible with their SLA commitments, in fact most are reluctant to change or create “unique” SLOs for individual customers. Particularly cloud vendors providing IaaS, SaaS, or PaaS, SLAs. ISP/Telcom, Co-Lo and DR/BU providers also have standard SLOs that they don’t like to stray far from. On the other hand, security ops (SIEM), service desk, hardware, and SOW/PS providers who are generally contracted to provide variable services are somewhat more flexible with their SLAs and more willing to meet your requirements.

    • Service providers want to avoid being held accountable to SLOs, and their SLAs are typically written to reflect that.

    The goal of creating internal SLA templates and policies is to set a minimum baseline of service levels that your organization is willing to accept, and that will meet their requirements and expectations for the outsourced service. Using these templated SLOs will set the basis for negotiating the entire SLA with the provider. You can set the SLA purpose, objectives, roles, and responsibilities and then achieve these from the service provider with solid SLOs and associated reporting and remedies.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Web-posted SLAs that are not embedded within a signed MSA can present uncertainty and risk as they can change at any time and typically without direct notice to the customer

    2.3.1 Negotiating strategy guidance

    • Be prepared. Create a negotiating plan and put together a team that understands your organization’s requirements for SLA.
    • Stay informed. Request provider’s recent performance data and negotiate SLOs to the provider’s average performance.
    • Know what you need. Corporate SLA templates or policies should be positioned to service providers as baseline minimums.
    • Show some flexibility. Be willing to give up some ground on one SLO in exchange for acceptance of SLOs that may be more important to your organization.
    • Re-group. Have a fallback position or Plan B. What if the provider can’t or won’t meet your key SLOs? Do you walk?
    • Do your homework. Understand what the typical standard SLOs are for the type of service level.

    2.4 SLO overachieving incentive discussion

    Monitoring & Reporting

    • SLO overachieving metrics are seen in some SLAs where there is a high priority for a service provider to meet and or exceed the SLOs within the SLA. These are not common terms but can be used to improve the overall service levels of a provider. In these scenarios the provider is sometimes rewarded for overachieving on the SLOs, either consistently or on a monthly or quarterly basis. In some cases, it can make financial sense to incent the service provider to overachieve on their commitments. Incentives can drive behaviors and improved performance by the provider that can intern improve the benefits to your organization and therefore justify an incent of some type.
    • Example: You could have an SLO for invoice accuracy. If not achieved, it could cost the vendor if they don’t meet the accuracy metric, however if they were to consistently overachieve the metric it could save accounts payable hours of time in validation and therefore you could pass on some of these measurable savings to the provider.
    • Overachieving incentives can add complexity to the SLA so they need to be easily measurable and simple to manage.
    • Overachieving incentives can also be used in provider performance improvement plans, where a provider might have poor trending attainment and you need to have them improve their performance in a short period of time. Incentives typically will motivate provider improvement and generally will cost much less than replacing the provider.
    • There is another school of thought that you shouldn’t have to pay a provider for doing their job; however, others are of the opinion that incentives or bonuses improve the overall performance of individuals or teams and are therefore worth consideration if both parties benefit from the over performance.

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 3

    Understand SLA Elements

    Create Requirements

    Phase 3

    Manage Obligations

    Phase Steps

    • 3.1 SLA monitoring and tracking
    • 3.2 Reporting
    • 3.3 Vendor SLA reviews & optimizing
    • 3.4 Performance management

    3.1 SLA monitoring, tracking, and remedy reconciliation

    The next step to effective SLAs is the management component. It could be fruitless if you were to spend your time and efforts negotiating your required service levels and metrics and don’t have some level of managing the SLA. In that situation you would have no way of knowing if the service provider is attaining their SLOs.

    There are several key elements to effective SLA management:

    • SLO monitoring
    • Simple, concise reporting
    • SLO attainment tracking
    • Score carding & trending
    • Remedy reconciliation

    SLA Management framework

    SLA Monitoring → Concise Reporting → Attainment Tracking → Score Carding →Remedy Reconciliation

    “A shift we’re beginning to see is an increased use of data and process discovery tools to measure SLAs,” says Borowski of West Monroe. “While not pervasive yet, these tools represent an opportunity to identify the most meaningful metrics and objectively measure performance (e.g., cycle time, quality, compliance). When provided by the client, it also eliminates the dependency on provider tools as the source-of-truth for performance data.” – Stephanie Overby

    3.1 SLA management framework

    SLA Performance Management

    • SLA monitoring provides data for SLO reports or dashboards. Reports provide attainment data for tacking over time. Attainment data feeds scorecards and allows for trending analysis. Missed attainment data triggers remedies.
    • All service providers monitor their systems, platforms, tickets, agents, sensors etc. to be able to do their jobs. Therefore, monitoring is readily available from your service provider in some form.
    • One of the key purposes of monitoring is to generate data into internal reports or dashboards that capture the performance metrics of the various services. Therefore, service-level and metric reports are readily available for all of the service levels that a service provider is contracted or engaged to provide.
    • Monitoring and reporting are the key elements that validate how your service provider is meeting its SLA obligations and thus are very important elements of an SLA. SLO report data becomes attainment data once the metric or KPI has been captured.
    • As a component of effective SLA management, this attainment data needs to be tracked/recorded in an easy-to-read format or table over a period of time. Attainment data can then be used to generate scorecards and trending reports for your review both internally and with the provider as required.
    • If attainment data shows that the service provider is meeting their SLA obligations, then the SLA is meeting your requirements and expectations. If on the other hand, attainment data shows that obligations are not being met, then actions must be taken to hold the service provider accountable. The most common method is through remedies that are typically in the form of a credit through a defined process (see Sec. 1.3). Any credits due for missed SLOs should also be tracked and reported to stakeholders and accounting for validation, reconciliation, and collection.

    3.2 Reporting

    Monitoring & Reporting

    • Many SLAs are silent on monitoring and reporting elements and require that the customer, if aware or able, to monitor the providers service levels and attainment and create their own KPI and reports. Then if SLOs are not met there is an arduous process that the customer must go through to request their rightful credit. This manual and reactive method creates all kinds of risk and cost to the customer and they should make all attempts to ensure that the service provider proactively provides SLO/KPI attainment reports on a regular basis.
    • Automated monitoring and reporting is a common task for many IT departments. There is no reason that a service provider can’t send reports proactively in a format that can be easily interpreted by the customer. The ideal state would be to capture KPI report data into a customer’s internal service provider scorecard.
    • Automated or automatic credit posting is another key element that service providers tend to ignore, primarily in hopes that the customer won’t request or go through the trouble of the process. This needs to change. Some large cloud vendors already have automated processes that automatically post a credit to your account if they miss an SLO. This proactive credit process should be at the top of your negotiation checklist. Service providers are avoiding thousands of credit dollars every year based on the design of their credit process. As more customers push back and negotiate more efficient credit processes, vendors will soon start to change and may use it as a differentiator with their service.

    3.2.1 Performance tracking and trending

    What gets measured gets done

    SLO Attainment Tracking

    A primary goal of proactive and automated reporting and credit process is to capture the provider’s attainment data into a tracker or vendor scorecard. These tracking scorecards can easily create status reports and performance trending of service providers, to IT leadership as well as feed QBR agenda content.

    Remedy Reconciliation

    Regardless of how a credit is processed it should be tracked and reconciled with internal stakeholders and accounting to ensure credits are duly applied or received from the provider and in a timely manner. Tracking and reconciliation must also align with your payment terms, whether monthly or annually.

    “While the adage, ‘You can't manage what you don't measure,’ continues to be true, the downside for organizations using metrics is that the provider will change their behavior to maximize their scores on performance benchmarks.” – Rob Lemos

    3.2.1 Activity SLA Tracker and Trending Tool

    1-2 hours setup

    Input

    • SLO metrics/KPIs from the SLA
    • Credit values associated with SLO

    Output

    • Monthly SLO attainment data
    • Credit tracking
    • SLO trending graphs

    Materials

    • Service provider SLO reports
    • Service provider SLA
    • SLO Tracker & Trending Tool

    Participants

    • Contract or vendor managers
    • Application or service managers
    • Service provider

    An important activity in the SLA management framework is to track the provider’s SLO attainment on a monthly or quarterly basis. In addition, if an SLO is missed, an associated credit needs to be tracked and captured. This activity allows you to capture the SLOs from the SLA and track them continually and provide data for trending and review at vendor performance meetings and executive updates.

    Instructions: Enter SLOs from the SLA as applicable.

    Each month, from the provider’s reports or dashboards, enter the SLO metric attainment.

    When an SLO is met, the cell will turn green. If the SLO is missed, the cell will turn red and a corresponding cell in the Credit Tracker will turn green, meaning that a credit needs to be reconciled.

    Use the Trending tab to view trending graphs of key service levels and SLOs.

    Download the SLO Tracker and Trending Tool

    3.3 Vendor SLA reviews and optimizing

    Regular reviews should be done with providers

    Collecting attainment data with scorecards or tracking tools provides summary information on the performance of the service provider to their SLA obligations. This information should be used for regular reviews both internally and with the provider.

    Regular attainment reviews should be used for:

    • Performance trending upward or downward
    • Identifying opportunities to revise or improve SLOs
    • Optimizing SLO and processes
    • Creating a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) for the service provider

    Some organizations choose to review SLA performance with providers at regular QBRs or at specific SLA review meetings

    This should be determined based on the criticality, risk, and strategic importance of the provider’s service. Providers that provide essential services like ERP, payroll, CRM, HRIS, IaaS etc. should be reviewed much more regularly to ensure that any decline in service is identified early and addressed properly in accordance with the service provider. Negative trending performance should also be documented for consideration at renewal time.

    3.4 Performance management

    Dealing with persistent poor performance and termination

    Service providers that consistently miss key service level metrics or KPIs present financial and security risk to the organization. Poor performance of a service provider reflects directly on the IT leadership and will affect many other business aspects of the organization including:

    • Ability to conduct day-to-day business activities
    • Meet internal obligations and expectations
    • Employee productivity and satisfaction
    • Maintain corporate policies or industry compliance
    • Meet security requirements

    Communication is key. Poor performance of a service provider needs to be dealt with in a timely manner in order to avoid more critical impact of the poor performance. Actions taken with the provider can also vary depending again on the criticality, risk, and strategic importance of the provider’s service.

    Performance reviews should provide the actions required with the goal of:

    • Making the performance problems into opportunities
    • Working with the provider to create a PIP with aggressive timelines and ramifications if not attained
    • Non-renewal or termination consideration, if feasible including provider replacement options, risk, costs, etc.
    • SLA renegotiation or revisions
    • Warning notifications to the service provider with concise issues and ramifications

    To avoid the issues and challenges of dealing with chronic poor performance, consider a Persistent or Chronic Failure clause into the SLA contract language. These clauses can define chronic failure, scenarios, ramifications there of, and defined options for the client including increased credit values, non-monetary remedies, and termination options without liability.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s difficult to prevent chronic poor performance but you can certainly track it and deal with it in a way that reduces risk and cost to your organization.

    SLA Hall of Shame

    Crazy service provider SLA content collection

    • Excessive list of unreasonable exclusions
    • Subcontractors’ behavior could be excluded
    • Downtime credit, equal to downtime percent x the MRC
    • Controllable FM events (internal labor issues, health events)
    • Difficult downtime or credit calculations that don’t make sense
    • Credits are not valid if agreement is terminated early or not renewed
    • Customer is not current on their account, SLA or credits do not count/apply
    • Total downtime = to prorated credit value (down 3 hrs = 3/720hrs = 0.4% credit)
    • SLOs don’t apply if customer fails to report the issue or request a trouble ticket
    • Downtime during off hours (overnight) do not count towards availability metrics
    • Different availability commitments based on different support-levels packages
    • Extending the agreement term by the length of downtime as a form of a remedy

    SLA Dos and Don’ts

    Dos

    • Do negotiate SLOs to vendor’s average performance
    • Do strive for automated reporting and credit processes
    • Do right-size and create your SLO criteria based on risk mitigation
    • Do review SLA attainment results with strategic service providers on a regular basis
    • Do ensure that all key elements and components of an SLA are present in the document or appendix

    Don'ts

    • Don’t accept the providers response that “we can’t change the SLOs for you because then we’d have to change them for everyone”
    • Don’t leave SLA preparation to the last minute. Give it priority as you negotiate with the provider
    • Don’t create complex SLAs with numerous service levels and SLOs that need to be reported and managed
    • Don’t aim for absolute perfection. Rather, prioritize which service levels are most important to you for the service

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Knowledge Gained

    • Understanding of the elements and components of an SLA
    • A list of SLO metrics aligned to service types that meet your organization’s criteria
    • SLA metric/KPI templates
    • SLA Management process for your provider’s service objectives
    • Reporting and tracking process for performance trending

    Deliverables Completed

    • SLA component and contract element checklist
    • Evaluation or service provider SLAs
    • SLA templates for strategic service types
    • SLA tracker for strategic service providers

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA

    • Understand business requirements, clarify current capabilities, and enable strategies to close service-level gaps.

    Data center Co-location SLA & Service Definition Template

    • In essence, the SLA defines the “product” that is being purchased, permitting the provider to rationalize resources to best meet the needs of varied clients, and permits the buyer to ensure that business requirements are being met.

    Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments

    • Keep your information security risks manageable when leveraging the benefits of cloud computing.

    Bibliography

    Henderson, George. “3 Most Common Types of Service Level Agreement (SLA).” Master of Project Academy. N.d. Web.

    “Guide to Security Operations Metrics.” Logsign. Oct 5, 2020. Web.

    Lemos, Rob. “4 lessons from SOC metrics: What your SpecOps team needs to know.” TechBeacon. N.d. Web.

    “Measuring and Making the Most of Service Desk Metrics.” Freshworks. N.d. Web.

    Overby, Stephanie. “15 SLA Mistakes IT Leaders Still Make.” CIO. Jan 21, 2021.

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}302|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $129,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 35 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management
    • Shadow IT: The IT team is regularly surprised to discover new products within the organization, often when following up on help desk tickets or requests for renewals from business users or vendors.
    • Renewal Management: The contracts and asset teams need to be aware of upcoming renewals and have adequate time to review renewals.
    • Over-purchasing: Contracts may be renewed without a clear picture of usage, potentially renewing unused applications.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    There is a direct correlation between service delivery dissatisfaction and increases in shadow IT. Whether the goal is to reduce shadow IT or gain control, improved customer service and fast delivery are key to making lasting changes.

    Impact and Result

    Our blueprint will help you design a service that draws the business to use it. If it is easier for them to buy from IT than it is to find their own supplier, they will use IT.

    A heavy focus on customer service, design optimization, and automation will provide a means for the business to get what they need, when they need it, and provide visibility to IT and security to protect organizational interests.

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Design the request service
    • Design the request catalog
    • Build the request catalog
    • Market the service

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog – A step-by-step document that walks you through creation of a request service management program.

    Use this blueprint to create a service request management program that provides immediate value.

    • Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog Storyboard

    2. Nonstandard Request Assessment – A template for documenting requirements for vetting and onboarding new applications.

    Use this template to define what information is needed to vet and onboard applications into the IT environment.

    • Nonstandard Request Assessment

    3. Service Request Workflows – A library of workflows used as a starting point for creating and fulfilling requests for applications and equipment.

    Use this library of workflows as a starting point for creating and fulfilling requests for applications and equipment in a service catalog.

    • Service Request Workflows

    4. Application Portfolio – A template to organize applications requested by the business and identify which items are published in the catalog.

    Use this template as a starting point to create an application portfolio and request catalog.

    • Application Portfolio

    5. Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog Communications Template – A presentation and communications plan to announce changes to the service and introduce a catalog.

    Use this template to create a presentation and communications plan for launching the new service and service request catalog.

    • Reduce Shadow IT with a Service Request Catalog Communications Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Design the Service

    The Purpose

    Collaborate with the business to determine service model.

    Collaborate with IT teams to build non-standard assessment process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Designed a service for service requests, including new product intake.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify challenges and obstacles.

    1.2 Complete customer journey map.

    1.3 Design process for nonstandard assessments.

    Outputs

    Nonstandard process.

    2 Design the Catalog

    The Purpose

    Design the service request catalog management process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the catalog is kept current and is integrated with IT service catalog if applicable.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine what will be listed in the catalog.

    2.2 Determine process to build and maintain the catalog, including roles, responsibilities, and workflows.

    2.3 Define success and determine metrics.

    Outputs

    Catalog scope.

    Catalog design and maintenance plan.

    Defined success metrics

    3 Build and Market the Catalog

    The Purpose

    Determine catalog contents and how requests will be fulfilled.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Catalog framework and service level agreements will be defined.

    Create communications documents.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine how catalog items will be displayed.

    3.2 Complete application categories for catalog.

    3.3 Create deployment categories and SLAs.

    3.4 Design catalog forms and deployment workflows.

    3.5 Create roadmap.

    3.6 Create communications plan.

    Outputs

    Catalog workflows and SLAs.

    Roadmap.

    Communications deck.

    4 Breakout Groups – Working Sessions

    The Purpose

    Create an applications portfolio.

    Prepare to populate the catalog.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Portfolio and catalog contents created.

    Activities

    4.1 Using existing application inventory, add applications to portfolio and categorize.

    4.2 Determine which applications should be in the catalog.

    4.3 Determine which applications are packaged and can be easily deployed.

    Outputs

    Application Portfolio.

    List of catalog items.

    Further reading

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog

    Foster business partnerships with sourcing-as-a-service.

    Analyst Perspective

    Improve the request management process to reduce shadow IT.

    In July 2022, Ivanti conducted a study on the state of the digital employee experience, surveying 10,000 office workers, IT professionals, and C-suite executives. Results of this study indicated that 49% of employees are frustrated by their tools, and 26% of employees were considering quitting their jobs due to unsuitable tech. 42% spent their own money to gain technology to improve their productivity. Despite this, only 21% of IT leaders prioritized user experience when selecting new tools.

    Any organization’s workers are expected to be productive and contribute to operational improvements or customer experience. Yet those workers don’t always have the tools needed to do the job. One option is to give the business greater control, allowing them to choose and acquire the solutions that will make them more productive. Info-Tech's blueprint Embrace Business-Managed Applications takes you down this path.

    However, if the business doesn’t want to manage applications, but just wants have access to better ones, IT is positioned to provide services for application and equipment sourcing that will improve the employee experience while ensuring applications and equipment are fully managed by the asset, service, and security teams.

    Improving the request management and deployment practice can give the business what they need without forcing them to manage license agreements, renewals, and warranties.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad

    Sandi Conrad
    ITIL Managing Professional
    Principal Research Director, IT Infrastructure & Operations,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are looking to improve request management processes and reduce shadow IT.

    Shadow IT: The IT team is regularly surprised to discover new products within the organization, often when following up on help desk tickets or requests for renewals from business users or vendors.

    Renewal management: The contracts and asset teams need to be aware of upcoming renewals and have adequate time to review renewals.

    Over-purchasing and over-spending: Contracts may be renewed without a clear picture of utilization, potentially renewing unused applications. Applications or equipment may be purchased at retail price where corporate, government, or educational discounts exist.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To increase the visibility of the IT environment, IT needs to transform the request management process to create a service that makes it easier for the business to access the tools they need rather than seeking them outside of the organization.

    609
    Average number of SaaS applications in large enterprises

    40%
    On average, only 60% of provisioned SaaS licenses are used, with the remaining 40% unused.

    — Source: Zylo, SaaS Trends for IT Leaders, 2022

    Common obstacles

    Too many layers of approvals and a lack of IT workers makes it difficult to rethink service request fulfillment.

    Delays: The business may not be getting the applications they need from IT to do their jobs or must wait too long to get the applications approved.

    Denials: Without IT’s support, the business is finding alternative options, including SaaS applications, as they can be bought and used without IT’s input or knowledge.

    Threats: Applications that have not been vetted by security or installed without their knowledge may present additional threats to the organization.

    Access: Self-serve isn’t mature enough to support an applications catalog.

    A diagram that shows the number of SaaS applications being acquired outside of IT is increasing year over year, and that business units are driving the majority of SaaS spend.

    8: average number of applications entering the organization every 30 days

    — Source: Zylo, SaaS Trends for Procurement, 2022

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Improve the request management process to create sourcing-as-a-service for the business.

    • Improve customer service
    • Reduce shadow IT
    • Gain control in a way that keeps the business happy

    1. Design the service

    Collaborate with the business

    Identify the challenges and obstacles

    Gain consensus on priorities

    Design the service

    2. Design the catalog

    Determine catalog scope

    Create a process to build and maintain the catalog

    Define metrics for the request management process

    3. Build the catalog

    Determine descriptions for catalog items

    Create definitions for license types, workflows, and SLAs

    Create application portfolio

    Design catalog forms and workflows

    4. Market the service

    Create a roadmap

    Determine messaging

    Build a communications plan

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Communications Presentation

    Photo of Communications Presentation

    Application Portfolio

    Photo of Application Portfolio

    Visio Library

    Photo of Visio Library

    Nonstandard Request Assessment

    Photo of Nonstandard Request Assessment

    Create a request management process and service catalog to improve delivery of technology to the business

    Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}437|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • PPM suite deployments are complicated and challenging. Vendors and consultants can provide much needed expertise and assistance to organizations deploying new PPM suites.
    • While functional requirements are often defined during the procurement stage (for example, in an RFP), the level of detail during this stage is likely insufficient for actually configuring the solution to your specific PPM needs. Too many organizations fail to further develop these functional requirements between signing their contracts and the official start of their professional implementation engagement.
    • Many organizations fail to organize and record the PPM data they will need to populate the new PPM suite. In almost all cases, customers have the expertise and are in the best position to collect and organize their own data. Leaving this until the vendor or consultant arrives to help with the deployment can result in using your professional services in a suboptimal way.
    • Vendors and consultants want you to prepare for their implementation engagements so that you can make the best use of their expertise and assistance. They want you to deploy a PPM suite that can be sustainably adopted in the long term. All too often, however, they arrive onsite to find customers that are disorganized and underprepared.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Preparing for a professional implementation engagement allows you to make the best use of your professional services, as well as helping to ensure that the PPM suite is deployed according to your specific PPM needs.
    • Involving your internal resources in the preparation of data and in fully defining functional requirements for the PPM suite helps to establish stakeholder buy-in early on, helping to build internal ownership of the solution from the beginning. This avoids the solution being perceived as something the vendor/consultant “forced upon us.”
    • Vendors and consultants are happy when organizations are organized and prepared for their professional implementation engagements. Preparation ensures these engagements are positive experiences for everyone involved.

    Impact and Result

    • Ensure that the data necessary to deploy the new PPM suite is recorded and organized.
    • Make your functional requirements detailed enough to ensure that the new PPM suite can be configured/customized during the deployment engagement in a way that best fits the organization’s actual PPM needs.
    • Through carefully preparing data and fully defining functional requirements, you help the solution become sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why preparing for PPM deployment will ensure that organizations get the most value out of the implementation professional services they purchased and will help drive long-term sustainable adoption of the new PPM suite.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a preparation team and plan

    Engage in purposeful and effective PPM deployment planning by clearly defining what to prepare and when exactly it is time to move from planning to execution.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 1: Create a Preparation Team and Plan
    • Prepare to Deploy PPM Suite Project Charter Template
    • PPM Suite Functional Requirements Document Template
    • PPM Suite Deployment Timeline Template (Excel)
    • PPM Suite Deployment Timeline Template (Project)
    • PPM Suite Deployment Communication Plan Template

    2. Prepare project-related requirements and deliverables

    Provide clearer definition to specific project-related functional requirements and collect the appropriate PPM data needed for an effective PPM suite deployment facilitated by vendors/consultants.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 2: Prepare Project-Related Requirements and Deliverables
    • PPM Deployment Data Workbook
    • PPM Deployment Dashboard and Report Requirements Workbook

    3. Prepare PPM resource requirements and deliverables

    Provide clearer definition to specific resource management functional requirements and data and create a communication and training plan.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 3: Prepare PPM Resource Requirements and Deliverables
    • PPM Suite Transition Plan Template
    • PPM Suite Training Plan Template
    • PPM Suite Training Management Tool

    4. Provide preparation materials to the vendor and implementation professionals

    Plan how to engage vendors/consultants by communicating functional requirements to them and evaluating changes to those requirements proposed by them.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 4: Provide Preparation Materials to the Vendor and Implementation Professionals
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan the Preparation Project

    The Purpose

    Select a preparation team and establish clear assignments and accountabilities.

    Establish clear deliverables, milestones, and metrics to ensure it is clear when the preparation phase is complete.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Preparation activities will be organized and purposeful, ensuring that you do not threaten deployment success by being underprepared or waste resources by overpreparing.

    Activities

    1.1 Overview: Determine appropriate functional requirements to define and data to record in preparation for the deployment.

    1.2 Create a timeline.

    1.3 Create a charter for the PPM deployment preparation project: record lessons learned, establish metrics, etc.

    Outputs

    PPM Suite Deployment Timeline

    Charter for the PPM Suite Preparation Project Team

    2 Prepare Project-Related Requirements and Deliverables

    The Purpose

    Collect and organize relevant project-related data so that you are ready to populate the new PPM suite when the vendor/consultant begins their professional implementation engagement with you.

    Clearly define project-related functional requirements to aid in the configuration/customization of the tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An up-to-date and complete record of all relevant PPM data.

    Avoidance of scrambling to find data at the last minute, risking importing out-of-date or irrelevant information into the new software.

    Clearly defined functional requirements that will ensure the suite is configured in a way that can be adoption in the long term.

    Activities

    2.1 Define project phases and categories.

    2.2 Create a list of all projects in progress.

    2.3 Record functional requirements for project requests, project charters, and business cases.

    2.4 Create a list of all existing project requests.

    2.5 Record the current project intake processes.

    2.6 Define PPM dashboard and reporting requirements.

    Outputs

    Project List (basic)

    Project Request Form Requirements (basic)

    Scoring/Requirements (basic)

    Business Case Requirements (advanced)

    Project Request List (basic)

    Project Intake Workflows (advanced)

    PPM Reporting Requirements (basic)

    3 Prepare PPM Resource Requirements and Deliverables

    The Purpose

    Collect and organize relevant resource-related data.

    Clearly define resource-related functional requirements.

    Create a purposeful transition, communication, and training plan for the deployment period.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An up-to-date and complete record of all relevant PPM data that allows your vendor/consultant to get right to work at the start of the implementation engagement.

    Improved buy-in and adoption through transition, training, and communication activities that are tailored to the actual needs of your specific organization and users.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a portfolio-wide roster of project resources (and record their competencies and skills, if appropriate).

    3.2 Record resource management processes and workflows.

    3.3 Create a transition plan from existing PPM tools and processes to the new PPM suite.

    3.4 Identify training needs and resources to be leveraged during the deployment.

    3.5 Define training requirements.

    3.6 Create a PPM deployment training plan.

    Outputs

    Resource Roster and Competency Profile (basic)

    User Roles and Permissions (basic)

    Resource Management Workflows (advanced)

    Transition Approach and Plan (basic)

    Data Archiving Requirements (advanced)

    List of Training Modules and Attendees (basic)

    Internal Training Capabilities (advanced)

    Training Milestones and Deadlines (basic)

    4 Provide Preparation Materials to the Vendor and Implementation Professionals

    The Purpose

    Compile the data collected and the functional requirements defined so that they can be provided to the vendor and/or consultant before the implementation engagement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Deliverables that record the outputs of your preparation and can be provided to vendors/consultants before the implementation engagement.

    Ensures that the customer is an active and equal partner during the deployment by having the customer prepare their material and initiate communication.

    Vendors and/or consultants have a clear understanding of the customer’s needs and expectations from the beginning.

    Activities

    4.1 Collect, review, and finalize the functional requirements.

    4.2 Compile a functional requirements and data package to provide to the vendor and/or consultants.

    4.3 Discuss how proposed changes to the functional requirements will be reviewed and decided.

    Outputs

    PPM Suite Functional Requirements Documents

    PPM Deployment Data Workbook

    Master the MSA for Your Managed Services Providers

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}235|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $9,869 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Master Services Agreements and Service Level Agreements are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Managed services providers have a repository of contract terms and conditions that are road-tested and prepackaged, and which are often biased in their favor.
    • With many different pricing options, it is difficult to choose the services you need.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Manage your managed services providers. Added value is realized when managed service providers are in tune with your IT strategies, goals, and mission.
    • Negotiate an agreement that is beneficial to both parties. The most successful partnerships are a win-win agreement.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. They tend to look at general terms and conditions and may overlook IT-specific components.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding managed services providers, including their roles and pricing models, will give you valuable insight into negotiating the best deal for your organization.
    • Info-Tech’s contract review methodology will help you navigate the complex process of managed services provider contract evaluation and review all the key details to maximize the benefits to your organization.
    • This blueprint provides guidance on catching vendor-biased terms and conditions, and suggests tips for getting managed services providers to take on their fair share of responsibilities.

    Master the MSA for Your Managed Services Providers Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should master the MSA for your MSPs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review terms and conditions for your MSP contract

    Use Info-Tech’s MSA Contract Review Tool to locate and track improvement areas in your MSAs.

    • Master the MSA for Your Managed Services Providers – Phase 1: Review Terms and Conditions of Your MSP Contract
    • MSA Contract Review Tool
    [infographic]

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}519|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Laws requiring digital accessibility are changing and differ by location.
    • You need to make sure your digital assets, products, and services (internal and external) are accessible to everyone, but getting buy-in is difficult.
    • You may not know where your gaps in understanding are because conventional thinking is driven by compliance and risk mitigation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The longer you put off accessibility, the more tech debt you accumulate and the more you risk losing access to new and existing markets. The longer you wait to adopt standards and best practices, the more interest you’ll accumulate on accessibility barriers and costs for remediation.
    • Implementing accessibility feels counterintuitive to IT departments. IT always wants to optimize and move forward, but with accessibility you may stay at one level for what feels like an uncomfortably long period. Don’t worry; building consistency and shifting culture takes time.
    • Accessibility goes beyond compliance, which should be an outcome, not the objective. With 1 billion people worldwide with some form of disability, nearly everyone likely has a connection to disability, whether it be in themselves, family, or colleagues. The market of people with disabilities has a spending power of more than $6 trillion (WAI, 2018).

    Impact and Result

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear “accessibility” and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The Accessibility Business Case for IT – Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.

    A step-by-step approach to walk you through understanding your current state related to accessibility maturity, identifying your desired future state, and building your business case to seek buy-in. This storyboard will help you figure out what’s right for your organization and build the accessibility business case for IT.

    • The Accessibility Business Case for IT – Phases 1-3

    2. Accessibility Business Case Template – A clear, concise, and compelling business case template to communicate the criticality of accessibility.

    The business case for accessibility is strong. Use this template to communicate to senior leaders the benefits, challenges, and risks of inaction.

    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    3. Accessibility Maturity Assessment – A structured tool to help you identify your current accessibility maturity level and identify opportunities to ensure progress.

    This tool uses a capability maturity model framework to evaluate your current state of accessibility. Maturity level is assessed on three interconnected aspects (people, process, and technology) across six dimensions proven to impact accessibility. Complete the assessment to get recommendations based on where you’re at.

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Infographic

    Further reading

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    Accessibility goes beyond compliance

    Analyst Perspective

    Avoid tech debt related to accessibility barriers

    Accessibility is important for individuals, businesses, and society. Diverse populations need diverse access, and it’s essential to provide access and opportunity to everyone, including people with diverse abilities. In fact, access to information and communications technologies (ICT) is a basic human right according to the United Nations.

    The benefits of ICT accessibility go beyond compliance. Many innovations that we use in everyday life, such as voice activation, began as accessibility initiatives and ended up creating a better lived experience for everyone. Accessibility can improve user experience and satisfaction, and it can enhance your brand, drive innovation, and extend your market reach (WAI, 2022).

    Although your organization might be required by law to ensure accessibility, understanding your users’ needs and incorporating them into your processes early will determine success beyond just compliance.

    Heather Leier-Murray, Senior Research Analyst, People and Leadership

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst, People and Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach

    Global IT and business leaders are challenged to make digital products and services accessible because inaccessibility comes with increasing risk to brand reputation, legal ramifications, and constrained market reach.

    • Laws requiring digital accessibility are changing and differ by location.
    • You need to make sure your digital assets, products, and services (internal and external) are accessible to everyone.
    • The cost of inaction is rising.

    Understanding where to start, where accessibility lives, and if or when you’re done can be overwhelmingly difficult.

    • Executive leadership buy-in is difficult to get.
    • Conventional thinking is driven by compliance and risk mitigation.
    • You don’t know where your gaps in understanding are.

    Conventional approaches to accessibility often fail because users are expected to do the hard work. You have to be doing 80% of the hard work.1

    Use Info-Tech’s research and resources to do what’s right for your organization. This framework takes away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear “accessibility” and makes the steps for your organization approachable.

    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2021

    Info-Tech Insight
    The longer you put off accessibility, the more tech debt you accumulate and the more you risk losing access to new and existing markets. The longer you wait to adopt standards and best practices, the more interest you’ll accumulate on accessibility barriers and costs for remediation.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Build a business case for accessibility.
    • Ensure that digital assets, products, and services are accessible to everyone, internally and externally.
    • Support staff and build skills to support the organization with accessibility and accommodation.
    • Get assistance figuring out where to start on the road to accessibility compliance and beyond.

    The cost of inaction related to accessibility is rising. Preparing for accessibility earlier helps prevent tech debt; the longer you wait to address your accessibility obligations, the more costly it gets.

    More than 3,500 digital accessibility lawsuits were filed in the US in 2020, up more than 50% from 2018.

    Source: UsableNet. Inc.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make accessibility difficult to address for many organizations:

    • You don’t know where your gaps in understanding are. Recognizing the importance of accessibility and how it fits into the bigger picture is key to developing buy-in.
    • Too often organizations focus on mitigating risk by being compliance driven. Shifting focus to the user experience, internally and externally, will realize better results.
    • Conventional approaches to accessibility often fail because the expectation is for users to do the hard work. One in five people have a permanent disability, but it’s likely everyone will be faced with some sort of disability at some point in their lives.1 Your organization has to be doing at least 80% of the hard work.2
    • Other types of compliance reside clearly with one area of the organization. Accessibility, however, has many homes: IT, user experience (UX), customer experience (CX), and even HR.

    1. Smashing Magazine

    2. Harvard Business Review, 2021

    90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity.

    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    Only 4% of those that claim to prioritize diversity consider disability in those initiatives.

    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    The four principles of accessibility

    WCAG (Web Content Accessibility Guidelines) identifies four principles of accessibility. WCAG is the most referenced standard in website accessibility lawsuits.

    The four principles of accessibility

    Source: eSSENTIAL Accessibility, 2022

    Why organizations address accessibility

    Top three reasons:

    61% 62% 78%
    To comply with laws To provide the best UX To include people with disabilities

    Source: Level Access

    Still, most businesses aren’t meeting compliance standards. Even though legislation has been in place for over 30 years, a 2022 study by WebAIM of 1,000,000 homepages returned a 96.8% WCAG 2.0 failure rate.

    Source: Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice

    How organizations prioritize digital accessibility

    43% rated it as a top priority.

    36% rated it as important.

    Fewer than 5% rated as either low priority or not even on the radar.

    More than 65% agreed or strongly agreed it’s a higher priority than last year.

    Source: Angel Business Communications

    Organizations expect consumers to do more online

    The pandemic led to many businesses going digital and more people doing things online.

    Chart of activities performed more often compared to before COVID-19

    Chart of activities performed for the first time during COVID-19

    Source: Statistics Canada

    Disability is part of being human

    Merriam-Webster defines disability as a “physical, mental, cognitive, or developmental condition that impairs, interferes with, or limits a person’s ability to engage in certain tasks or actions or participate in typical daily activities and interactions.”1

    The World Health Organization (WHO) points out that a crucial part of the definition of disability is that it’s not just a health problem, but the environment impacts the experience and extent of disability. Inaccessibility creates barriers for full participation in society.2

    The likelihood of you experiencing a disability at some point in your life is very high, whether a physical or mental disability, seen or unseen, temporary or permanent, severe or mild.2

    Many people acquire disabilities as they age yet may not identify as “a person with a disability.”3 Where life expectancies are over 70 years of age, 11.5% of life is spent living with a disability. 4

    “Extreme personalization is becoming the primary difference in business success, and everyone wants to be a stakeholder in a company that provides processes, products, and services to employees and customers with equitable, person-centered experiences and allows for full participation where no one is left out.”
    – Paudie Healy, CEO, Universal Access

    1. Merriam-Webster
    2. World Health Organization
    3. Digital Leaders, as cited in WAI, 2018
    4. Disabled World, as cited in WAI, 2018

    Untapped talent resource

    Common myths about people with disabilities:

    • They can’t work.
    • They need more time off or are absent more often.
    • Only basic, unskilled work is appropriate for them.
    • Their productivity is lower than that of coworkers.
    • They cost more to recruit, train, and employ.
    • They decrease others’ productivity.
    • They’re not eligible for governmental financial incentives (e.g. apprentices).
    • They don’t fit in.

    These assumptions prevent organizations from hiring valuable people into the workforce and retaining them.

    Source: Forbes

    50% to 70% of people with disabilities are unemployed in industrialized countries. In the US alone, 61 million adults have a disability.

    Source: United Nations, as cited in Forbes

    Thought Model

    Info-Tech’s methodology for the accessibility business case for IT

    1. Understand Current State 2. Plan for Buy-in 3. Prepare Your Business Case
    Phase Steps
    1. Understand standards and legislation
    2. Build awareness
    3. Understand current accessibility maturity level Define desired future state
    1. Define desired future state
    2. Define goals and objectives
    3. Document roles and responsibilities
    1. Customize and populate the Accessibility Business Case Template and gain approval
    2. Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines
    Phase Outcomes
    • Accessibility maturity assessment
    • Accessibility drivers determined
    • Goals defined
    • Objectives identified
    • Roles and responsibilities documented
    • Business case drafted
    • Approval to move forward with implementing your accessibility program
    • Next steps and timelines

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1 The longer you put off accessibility, the more tech debt you accumulate and the more you risk losing access to new and existing markets. The longer you wait to adopt standards and best practices, the more interest you’ll accumulate on accessibility barriers and costs for remediation.
    Insight 2 Implementing accessibility feels counterintuitive to IT departments. IT always wants to optimize and move forward, but with accessibility you may stay at one level for what feels like an uncomfortably long period. Don’t worry; building consistency and shifting culture takes time.
    Insight 3 Accessibility goes beyond compliance, which should be an outcome, not the objective. With 1 billion people worldwide with some form of disability, nearly everyone likely has a connection to disability, whether it be in themselves, family, or colleagues. The market of people with disabilities has a spending power of more than $6 trillion.1

    1. WAI, 2018

    Blueprint deliverables

    This blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Accessibility Business Case Template

    The business case for accessibility is strong. Use this template to communicate to senior leaders the benefits and challenges of accessibility and the risks of inaction.

    Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Use this assessment to understand your current accessibility maturity.

    Blueprint benefits

    Business Benefits IT Benefits
    • Don’t lose out on a 6-trillion-dollar market.
    • Don’t miss opportunities to work with organizations because you’re not accessible.
    • Enable and empower current employees with disabilities.
    • Minimize potential for negative brand reputation due to a lack of consideration for people with disabilities.
    • Decrease the risk of legal action being brought upon the organization.
    • Understand accessibility and know your role in it for your organization and your team members.
    • Be prepared and able to provide the user experience you want.
    • Decrease tech debt – start early to ensure accessibility for everyone.
    • Access an untapped labor market.
    • Mitigate IT retention challenges.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Improve stakeholder satisfaction and engagement

    • Tracking measures to understand the value of this blueprint is a critical part of the process.
    • Monitor employee engagement, overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT, and the overall end-customer satisfaction.
    • Remember, accessibility is not a one-and-done project – just because measures are positive does not mean your work is done.

    In phase 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish current-state and target-state metrics for your organization.

    Suggested Metrics
    Overall end-customer satisfaction
    Monies saved through cost optimization efforts
    Employee engagement
    Monies save through application rationalization and standardization

    For more metrics ideas, see the Info-Tech IT Metrics Library.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY
    Technology

    SOURCE
    W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 2018

    Google

    Investing in accessibility
    With an innovative edge, Google invests in accessibility with the objective of making life easier for everyone. Google has created a broad array of accessibility innovations in its products and services so that people with disabilities get as much out of them as anyone else.

    Part of Google’s core mission, accessibility means more to Google than implementing fixes. It is viewed positively by the organization and drives it to be more innovative to make information available to everyone. Google approaches accessibility problems not as barriers but as ways to innovate and discover breakthroughs that will become mainstream in the future.

    Results
    Among Google’s innovations are contrast minimums, auto-complete, voice-control, AI advances, and machine learning auto-captioning. All of these were created for accessibility purposes but have positively impacted the user experience in general for Google.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 4 to 6 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Discuss motivation for the initiative and foundational knowledge requirements.

    Call #2: Discuss next steps to assess current accessibility maturity.

    Call #3: Discuss stakeholder engagement and future-state analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss defining goals and objectives, along with roles and responsibilities.

    Call #5: Review draft business case presentation.

    Call #6: Discuss post-approval steps and timelines.

    Phase 1

    Understand Your Current State

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand standards and legislation
    1.2 Build awareness
    1.3 Understand maturity level

    Phase 2
    2.1 Define desired future state
    2.2 Define goals and objectives
    2.3 Document roles and responsibilities

    Phase 3
    3.1 Prepare business case template for presentation and approval
    3.2 Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identifying and understanding accessibility and compliance requirements and the ramifications of noncompliance.
    • Defining accessibility, disability, and disability inclusion and building awareness of these with senior leaders.
    • Completing the Accessibility Maturity Assessment to help you understand your current state.

    Step 1.1

    Understand standards and legislation

    Activities

    1.1.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with

    1.1.2 Seek legal and/or professional services’ input on compliance

    1.1.3 Detail the risks of inaction for your organization

    Understand Your Current State

    Outcomes of this step
    You will gain foundational understanding of the breadth of the regulation requirements for your organization. You will have reviewed and understand what is applicable to your organization.

    The regulatory landscape is evolving

    Canada

    • Canadian Human Rights Act
    • Policy on Communications and Federal Identity
    • Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms
    • Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act
    • Accessible Canada Act of 2019 (ACA)

    Europe

    • UK Equality Act 2010
    • EU Web and Mobile Accessibility Directive (2016)
    • EN 301 549 European Standard – Accessibility requirements for public procurement of ICT products and services

    United States

    • Section 508 of the US Rehabilitation Act of 1973
    • Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA)
    • Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act of 1996
    • Air Carrier Access Act of 1986
    • 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act of 2010 (CVAA)

    New Zealand

    • Human Rights Act 1993
    • Online Practice Guidelines for Government

    Australia

    • Disability Discrimination Act 1992 (DDA)

    Regulatory systems are moving toward an international standard.

    1.1.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with

    1. Download the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    2. Conduct research and investigate what legislation and standards are applicable to your organization.
    3. a) Start by looking at your local legislation.
      b) Then consider any other regions you conduct business in.
      c) Also account for the various industries you are in.
    4. While researching, build a list of legislation requirements. Document these in your Accessibility Business Case Template as part of the Project Context section.
    Input Output
    • Research
    • Websites
    • Articles
    • List of legislation that applies to the organization related to accessibility
    Materials Participants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    1.1.2 Seek professional advice on compliance

    1. Have general counsel review your list of regulations and standards related to accessibility or seek legal and/or professional support to review your list.
    2. Review or research further the implications of any suggestions from legal counsel.
    3. Make any updates to the Legal Landscape slide in the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    Input Output
    • Compiled list of applicable legislation and standards
    • Confirmed list of regulations that are applicable to your organization related to accessibility
    Materials Participants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator
    • General counsel/professional services

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Ramifications of noncompliance

    Go beyond financial consequences

    Beyond the costs resulting from a claim, noncompliance can damage your organization in several ways.

    Financial Impact

    ADA Warning Shot: A complaint often indicates pending legal action to come. Addressing issues on a reactive, ad hoc basis can be quite expensive. It can cost almost $10,000 to address a single complaint, and chances are if you have one complaint, you have many.

    Lawsuit Costs: In the US, 265,000 demand letters were sent in 2020 under the ADA for inaccessible websites. On average, a demand letter could cost the company $25,000 (conservatively). These are low-end numbers; another estimate is that a small, quickly settled digital accessibility lawsuit could cost upwards of $350,000 for the defendant.

    Non-Financial Impact

    Reputational Impact: Claims brought upon a company can bring negative publicity with them. In contrast, having a clear commitment to accessibility demonstrates inclusion and can enhance brand image and reputation. Stakeholder expectations are changing, and consumers, investors, and employees alike want to support businesses with a purpose.

    Technology Resource Strains: Costly workarounds and ad hoc accommodation processes take away from efficiency and effectiveness. Updates and redesigns for accessibility and best practices will reduce costs associated with maintenance and service, including overall stakeholder satisfaction improvements.

    Access to Talent: 2022 saw a record high number of job openings, over 11.4 million in the US alone. Ongoing labor shortages require eliminating bias and keeping an open mind about who is qualified.

    Source: May Hopewell

    In the last four years, 83% of the retail 500 have been sued. Since 2018, 417 of the top 500 have received ADA-based digital lawsuits.

    Source: UsableNet

    1.1.3 Detail the risks of inaction for your organization

    1. Using the information that you’ve gathered through your research and legal/professional advice, detail the risks of inaction for your organization.
    2. a) Consider legal risks, consumer risks, brand risks, and employee risks. (Remember, risks aren’t just monetary.)
    3. Document the risks in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • List of applicable legislation and standards
    • Information about risks
    • Identified accessibility maturity level
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Step 1.2

    Build awareness of accessibility and disability inclusion

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify gaps in understanding

    1.2.2 Brainstorm how to reframe accessibility positively

    Understand Your Current State

    Outcomes of this step
    You’ll have a better understanding of accessibility so that you can effectively implement and promote it.

    Where to look for understanding

    First-hand experience of how people with disabilities interact with your organization is often eye-opening. It will help you understand the benefits and value of accessibility.

    Where to look for understanding

    • Talk with people you know with disabilities that are willing to share.*
    • Find role-specific training that’s appropriate.
    • Research. Articles and videos are easy to find.
    • Set up assistive technology trials.
    • Seek out first-hand experience from people with disabilities and how they work and use digital assets.

    Source: WAI, 2016

    * Remember, people with disabilities aren't obligated to discuss or explain their disabilities and may not be comfortable sharing. If you're asking for their time, be respectful, only ask if appropriate, and accept a "no" answer if the person doesn't wish to assist.

    1.2.1 Identify gaps in understanding

    Find out what accessibility is and why it is important. Learn the basics.

    1. Using the information that you’ve gathered through your research and legal counsel, conduct further research to understand the importance of accessibility.
    2. Answer these questions:
    3. a) What is accessibility? Why is it important?
      b) From the legislation and standards identified in step 1.1, what gaps exist?
      c) What is the definition of disability?
      d) How does your organization currently address accessibility?
      e) What are your risks?
      f) Do you have any current employees who have disabilities?
    4. Review the previous slide for suggestions on where to find more information to answer the above questions.
    5. Document any changes to the risks in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Articles
    • Interviews
    • Websites
    • Greater understanding of the lived experience of people with disabilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Articles
    • Websites
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Reframe accessibility as a benefit, not a burden

    A clear understanding of accessibility and the related standards and regulations can turn accessibility from something big and scary to an achievable part of the business.

    The benefits of accessibility are:

    Market Reach Minimized Legal Risks Innovation Retention
    Over 1 billion people with a spending power of $6 trillion make up the global market of people with disabilities.1 Accessibility improves the experience for all users. In addition, many organizations require you to provide proof you meet accessibility standards during the RFP process. Accessibility regulations are changing, and claims are rising. Costs associated with legal proceedings can be more than just financial. Many countries have laws you need to follow. People with disabilities bring diversity of thought, have different lived experiences, and benefit inclusivity, which helps drive engagement. Plus accessibility features often solve unanticipated problems. Employing and supporting people with disabilities can reduce turnover and improve retention, reliability, company image, employee loyalty, ability awareness, and more.

    Source 1: WAI, 2018

    1.2.2 Brainstorm ways to reframe accessibility positively

    1. Using the information that you’ve gathered through your research, brainstorm additional positives of accessibility for your organization.
    2. Clearly identify the problem you want to solve (e.g., reframing accessibility positively in your organization).
    3. Collect any tools you want to use to during brainstorming (e.g., whiteboard, markers, sticky notes)
    4. Write down all the ideas that come to mind.
    5. Review all the points and group them into themes.
    6. Update the Accessibility Business Case Template with your findings.
    InputOutput
    • Research you have gathered
    • List of ways to positively reframe accessibility for your organization
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Sticky notes, whiteboard, pens, paper, markers.
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/initiator

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Make it part of the conversation

    A first step to disability and accessibility awareness is to talk about it. When it is talked about as freely as other things are in the workplace, this can create a more welcoming workplace.

    Accessibility goes beyond physical access and includes technological access and support as well as our attitudes.

    Accessibility is making sure everyone (disabled or abled) can access the workplace equally.

    Adjustments in the workplace are necessary to create an accessible and welcoming environment. Understanding the three dimensions of accessibility in the workplace is a good place to start.

    Source: May Hopewell

    Three dimensions of accessibility in the workplace

    Three dimensions of accessibility in the workplace

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY
    Professional Services

    SOURCE
    Accenture

    Accenture takes an inclusive approach to increase accessibility.

    Accessibility is more than tools

    Employee experience was the focus of embarking on the accessibility journey, ensuring inclusivity was built in and every employee was able to use the tools they needed and could achieve their goals.

    "We are removing barriers in technology to make all of our employees, regardless of their ability, more productive.”
    — Melissa Summers, Managing Director – Global IT, Corporate Technology, Accenture

    Accessibility is inclusive

    The journey began with formalizing a Global IT Accessibility practice and defining an accessibility program charter. This provided direction and underpinned the strategy used to create a virtual Accessibility Center of Excellence and map out a multiyear plan of initiatives.

    The team then identified all the technologies they wanted to enhance by prioritizing ones that were high use and high impact. Involving disability champions gave insight into focus areas.

    Accessibility is innovation

    Working with partners like Microsoft and over 100 employees, Accenture continues toward the goal of 75% accessibility for all its global high-traffic internal platforms.

    Achievements thus far include:

    • 100% of new Accenture video and broadcast content is automatically captioned.
    • Accenture received a perfect Disability Equality Index (US) score of 100 out of 100 for 2017, 2018, and 2019.

    Step 1.3

    Understand your current accessibility maturity level

    Activities

    1.3.1 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Understand Your Current State

    Outcomes of this step
    Completed Accessibility Maturity Assessment to inform planning for and building your business case in Phases 2 and 3.

    Know where you are to know where to go

    Consider accessibility improvements from three interconnected aspects to determine current maturity level

    Accessibility Maturity

    People

    • Consider employee, customer, and user experience.

    Process

    • Review processes to ensure accessibility is considered early.

    Technology

    • Whether it’s new or existing, technology is an important tool to increase accessibility.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    INITIAL DEVELOPING DEFINED MANAGED OPTIMIZE
    At this level, accessibility processes are mostly undocumented, if they exist. Accessibility is most likely happening on a reactive, ad hoc basis. No one understands who is responsible for accessibility or what their role is. At this stage the organization is driven by the need for compliance. At the developing level, the organization is taking steps to increase accessibility but still has a lot of opportunity for improvements. The organization is defining and refining processes and is working toward building a library of assistive tools. At this level, processes related to accessibility are repeatable. However, there’s a tendency to resort to old habits under stress. The organization has tools in place to facilitate accommodation requests and technology is compatible with assistive technologies. Accessibility initiatives are driven by the desire to make the user experience better. The managed level is defined by its effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics. The organization can mostly anticipate preferences of customers, employees, and users. The roles and responsibilities are defined, and disability is included as part of the organization’s diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives. This level is not the goal for all organizations. At this level there is a shift in the organization’s culture to a feeling of belonging. The organization also demonstrates ongoing process improvements. Everyone can experience a seamless interaction with the organization. The focus is on continuous improvement and using feedback to inform future initiatives.

    Determine your level of maturity

    Use Info-Tech’s Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    • On the accessibility questionnaire, tab 2, choose how much the statements apply to your organization. Answer the questions based on your knowledge of your current state organizationally.
    • Once you’ve answered all the questions, see the results on the tab 3, Accessibility Results. You can see your overall maturity level and the maturity level for each of six dimensions that are necessary to increase the success of an accessibility program.
    • Click through to tab 4, Recommendations, to see specific recommendations based on your results and proven research to progress through the maturity levels. Keep in mind that not all organizations will or should aspire to the “Optimize” maturity level.

    1.3.1 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    1. Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment and save it with the date so that as you work on your accessibility program, you can reassess later and track your progress.
    2. Once you have saved the assessment, select the appropriate answer for each statement on tab 2, Accessibility Questions, based on your knowledge of the organization’s approach.
    3. After reviewing all the accessibility statements, see your maturity level results on tab 3, Accessibility Results. Then see tab 4, Recommendations, for suggestions based on your answers.
    4. Document your accessibility maturity results in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    Input Output
    • Assess your current state of accessibility by choosing all the statements that apply to your organization
    • Identified accessibility maturity level
    Materials Participants
    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • Project leader/sponsor
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Phase 2

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand standards and legislation
    1.2 Build awareness
    1.3 Understand maturity level

    Phase 2
    2.1 Define desired future state
    2.2 Define goals and objectives
    2.3 Document roles and responsibilities

    Phase 3
    3.1 Prepare business case template for presentation and approval
    3.2 Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Defining your desired future state.
    • Determining your accessibility program goals and objectives.
    • Clarifying and documenting roles and responsibilities related to accessibility in IT.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project lead/sponsor
    • IT leadership team
    • Senior leaders/decision makers

    Step 2.1

    Define the desired future state of accessibility

    Activities

    2.1.1 Identify key stakeholders

    2.1.2 Hold a key stakeholder focus group

    2.1.3 Conduct a future-state analysis

    Outcomes of this step
    Following this step, you will have identified your aspirational maturity level and what your accessibility future state looks like for your organization.

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Cheat sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders, “Who else should I be talking to?” to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don’t miss anyone.

    Identify stakeholders through the following questions:
    • Who in areas of influence will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts of what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who is negatively impacted by the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers of impacted capabilities or functions?
    Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.
    • Executives
    • Peers
    • Direct reports
    • Partners
    • Customers
    • Subcontractors
    • Subcontractors
    • Contractors
    • Lobby groups
    • Regulatory agencies

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps teams categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – Players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – Generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Stakeholder prioritization map

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence, high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest Keep Informed
    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest Monitor
    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    2.1.1 Identify key stakeholders

    Collect this information by:

    1. List direct stakeholders for your area. Include stakeholders across the organization (both IT and business units) and externally.
    2. Create a stakeholder map to capture your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on digital accessibility.
    3. Shortlist stakeholders to invite as focus group participants in activity 2.1.2.
      • Aim for a combination of Players, Mediators, and Noisemakers.
    Input Output
    • List of stakeholders
    • Stakeholder requirements
    • A stakeholder map
    • List of stakeholders to include in the focus group in step 2.1.2
    Materials Participants
    • Sticky notes, pens, whiteboard, markers (optional)
    • Project leader/sponsor

    Hold a focus group to initiate planning

    Involve key stakeholders to determine the organizational drivers of accessibility, identify target maturity and key performance indicators (KPIs), and ultimately build the project charter.

    Building the project charter as a group will help you to clarify your key messages and secure buy-in from critical stakeholders up-front, which is key.

    Executing the business case for accessibility requires significant involvement from your IT leadership team. The challenge is that accessibility can be overwhelming because of inherent bias. Members of your IT leadership team will also need to participate in knowledge transfer, so get them involved up-front. The focus group will help stakeholders feel more engaged in the project, which is pivotal for success.

    You may feel like a full project charter isn’t necessary, and depending on your organizational size, it might not be. However, the exercise of building the charter is important regardless. No matter your current climate, some level of socializing the value of and plans for accessibility will be necessary.

    Meeting Agenda

    1. Short introduction
      Led by: Project Sponsor
      • Why the initiative is being considered.
    2. Make the case for the project
      Led by: Project Manager
      • Current state: What does the initiative address?
      • Future state: What is our target state of maturity?
    3. Success criteria
      Led by: Project Manager
      • How will success be measured?
    4. Define the project team
      Led by: Project Manager
      • Description of planned approach.
      • Stakeholder assessment.
      • What is required of the sponsor and stakeholders?
    5. Determine next steps
      Led by: Project Manager

    2.1.2 Hold a stakeholder focus group

    Identify the pain points you want to resolve and some of the benefits that you’d like to see from a program. By doing so, you’ll get a holistic view of what you need to achieve and what your drivers are.

    1. Ask the working group participants (as a whole or in smaller groups) to discuss pain points created by inaccessibility.
      • Challenges related to stakeholders.
      • Challenges created by process issues.
      • Difficulties improving accessibility practices.
    2. Discuss opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
    3. Have participants write these down on sticky notes and place them on a whiteboard or flip chart.
    4. Review all the points as a group. Group challenges and benefits into themes.
    5. Have the group prioritize the risks and benefits in terms of what the solution must have, should have, could have, and won’t have.
    Input Output
    • Reasons for the project
    • Stakeholder requirements
    • Pain points and risks
    • A prioritized list of risks and benefits of the solution
    Materials Participants
    • Agenda (see previous slide)
    • Sticky notes, pens, whiteboard, markers (optional)
    • IT leadership
    • Other key stakeholders

    While defining future state, consider your drivers

    The Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework identifies three key strategic drivers: compliance, experience, and incorporation.

    • Over 30% of organizations are focused on compliance, according to a 2022 survey by Harvard Business Review and Slack’s Future Forum. The survey asked more than 10,000 workers in six countries about their organizations’ approach to DEI.2

    Even though 90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity,1 over 30% are focused on compliance.2

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2020
    2. Harvard Business Review, 2022

    31.6% of companies remain in the Compliant stage, where they are focused on DEI compliance and not on integrating DEI throughout the organization or on creating continual improvement.

    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Align the benefits of program drivers to organizational goals or outcomes

    Although there will be various motivating factors, aligning the drivers of your accessibility program provides direction to the program. Connecting the advantages of program drivers to organizational goals builds the confidence of senior leaders and decision makers, increasing the continued commitment to invest in accessibility programming.

    Drivers Compliance Experience Incorporation
    Maturity level Initial Developing Defined Managed Optimized
    Description Any accessibility initiative is to comply with the minimum legislated requirement. Desire to avoid/decrease legal risk. Accessibility initiatives are focused on improving the experience of everyone from the start. Most organizations will be experience driven. Desire to increase accessibility and engagement. Accessibility is a seamless part of the whole organization and initiatives are focused on impacting social issues.
    Advantages Compliance is a good starting place for accessibility. It will reduce legal risk. Being people focused from the start of processes enables the organization to reduce tech debt, provide the best user experience, and realize other benefits of accessibility. There is a sense of belonging in the organization. The entire organization experiences the benefits of accessibility.
    Disadvantages Accessibility is about more than just compliance. Being compliance driven won’t give you the full benefits of accessibility. This can mean a culture change for the organization, which can take a long time. IT is used to moving quickly – it might feel counterintuitive to slow down and take time. It takes much longer to reach the associated level of maturity. Not possible for all organizations.

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    After initially ensuring your organization is compliant with regulations and standards, you will progress to building disciplined process and consistent standardized processes. Eventually you will build the ability for predictable process, and lastly, you’ll optimize by continuously improving.

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, it could take months or even years to implement. The important thing to understand, however, is that accessibility work is never done.

    At all levels of the maturity framework, you must consider the interconnected aspects of people, process, and technology. However, as the organization progresses, the impact will shift from largely being focused on process and technology improvement to being focused on people.

    Info-Tech Insight
    IT typically works through maturity frameworks from the bottom to the top, progressing at each level until they reach the end. When it comes to digital accessibility initiatives, being especially thorough, thoughtful, and collaborative is critical to success. This will mean spending more time in the Developing, Defined, and Managed levels of maturity rather than trying to reach Optimized as quickly as you can. This may feel contrary to what IT historically considers as a successful implementation.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    Driver Description Benefits
    Initial Compliance
    • Accessibility processes are mostly undocumented.
    • Accessibility happens mostly on a reactive or ad hoc basis.
    • No one is aware of who is responsible for accessibility or what role they play.
    • Heavily focused on complying with regulations and standards to decrease legal risk.
    • The organization is aware of the need for accessibility.
    • Legal risk is decreased.
    Developing Experience
    • The organization is starting to take steps to increase accessibility beyond compliance.
    • Lots of opportunity for improvement.
    • Defining and refining processes.
    • Working toward building a library of assistive tools.
    • Awareness of the need for accessibility is growing.
    • Process review for accessibility increases process efficiency through avoiding rework.
    Defined Experience
    • Accessibility processes are repeatable.
    • There is a tendency to resort to old habits under stress.
    • Tools are in place to facilitate accommodation.
    • Employees know accommodations are available to them.
    • Accessibility is becoming part of daily work.
    Managed Experience
    • Defined by effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics.
    • Mostly anticipating preferences.
    • Roles and responsibilities are defined.
    • Disability is included as part of DEI.
    • Employees understand their role in accessibility.
    • Engagement is positively impacted.
    • Attraction and retention are positively impacted.
    Optimized Incorporation
    • Not the goal for every organization.
    • Characterized by a dramatic shift in organizational culture and a feeling of belonging.
    • Ongoing continuous improvement.
    • Seamless interactions with the organization for everyone.
    • Using feedback to inform future initiatives.
    • More likely to be innovative and inclusive, reach more people positively, and meet emerging global legal requirements.
    • Better equipped for success.

    2.1.3 Conduct future-state analysis

    Identify your target state of maturity

    1. Provide the group with your maturity assessment results to review as well as the slides on the maturity levels, framework, and drivers.
    2. Compare the benefits listed on the Accessibility maturity levels slide to those that you named in the previous exercise and determine which maturity level best describes your target state.
    3. Discuss as a group and agree on one desired maturity level to reach.
    4. Review the other levels of maturity and determine what is in and out of scope for the project (higher-level benefits would be considered out of scope).
    5. Document your target state of maturity in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    Input Output
    • Accessibility maturity levels chart on previous slide
    • Maturity level assessment results
    • Target maturity level documented
    Materials Participants
    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Case Study

    Accessibility as a differentiator

    INDUSTRY
    Financial

    SOURCE
    WAI-Engage

    Accessibility inside and out

    As a financial provider, Barclays embarked on the accessibility journey to engage customers and employees with the goal of equal access for all. One key statement that provided focus was “Essential for some, easier for all. ”

    “It's about helping everyone to work, bank and live their lives regardless of their age, situation, abilities or circumstances.”

    Embedding into experiences

    “The Barclays Accessibility team [supports] digital teams to embed accessibility into our services and culture through effective governance, partnering, training and tools. Establishing an enterprise-wide accessibility strategy, standards and programmes coupled with senior sponsorship helps support our publicly stated ambition of becoming the most accessible and inclusive FTSE company.”

    – Paul Smyth, Head of Digital Accessibility, Barclays

    It’s a circle, not a roadmap

    • Barclays continues the journey through partnerships with disability charities and accessibility experts and through regularly engaging with customers and colleagues with disabilities directly.
    • More accessible, inclusive products and services engage and attract more people with disabilities. This translates to a more diverse workforce that identifies opportunities for innovation. This leads to being attractive to diverse talent, and the circle continues.
    • Barclays’ mobile banking app was first to be accredited by accessibility consultants AbilityNet.

    Step 2.2

    Define your accessibility program goals and objectives

    Activities

    2.2.1 Create a list of goals and objectives

    2.2.2 Finalize key metrics

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Outcomes of this step
    You will have clear measurable goals and objectives to respond to identified accessibility issues and organizational goals.

    What does a good goal look like?

    Use the SMART framework to build effective goals.

    S Specific: Is the goal clear, concrete, and well defined?
    M Measurable: How will you know when the goal is met?
    A Achievable: Is the goal possible to achieve in a reasonable time?
    R Relevant: Does this goal align with your responsibilities and with departmental and organizational goals?
    T Time-based: Have you specified a time frame in which you aim to achieve the goal?

    SMART is a common framework for setting effective goals. Make sure your goals satisfy these criteria to ensure you can achieve real results.

    2.2.1 Create a list of goals and objectives

    Use the outcomes from activity 2.1.2.

    1. Using the prioritized list of what your solution must have, should have, could have, and won’t have from activity 2.1.2, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives in your Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Outcomes of activity 2.1.2
    • Organizational and departmental goals
    • Goals and objectives added to your Accessibility Business Case Template
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    2.2.1 Create a list of goals and objectives

    Use the outcomes from activity 2.1.2.

    1. Using the prioritized list of what your solution must have, should have, could have, and won’t have from activity 2.1.2, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives in your Accessibility Business Case Template.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Progressing through the accessibility maturity model.
    2. Addressing accessibility earlier in processes to avoid tech debt and rework late in projects or releases.
    3. Making accessibility part of the procurement process as a scoring consideration and vendor choice.
    4. Ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.
    Metric Current Goal
    Overall end-customer satisfaction 90 120
    Monies saved through cost optimization efforts
    Employee engagement
    Monies save through application rationalization and standardization

    For more metrics ideas, see the Info-Tech IT Metrics Library.

    2.2.2 Finalize key metrics

    Finalize key metrics the organization will use to measure accessibility success

    1. Brainstorm how you would measure the success of each goal based on the benefits, challenges, and risks you previously identified.
    2. Write each of the metric ideas down and finalize three to five key metrics which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key challenges or risks you have identified and match your desired maturity level and driver.
    3. Document your key metrics in the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Accessibility challenges and benefits
    • Goals from activity 2.2.1
    • Three to five key metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team
    • Project lead/sponsor

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Step 2.3

    Document accessibility program roles and responsibilities

    Activities

    2.3.1 Populate a RACI chart

    Plan for Senior Leader Buy-In

    Outcomes of this step
    At the end of this step, you will have a completed RACI chart documenting the roles and responsibilities related to accessibility for your accessibility business case.

    2.3.1 Populate a RACI

    Populate a RACI chart to identify who should be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each key activity.

    Define who is responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for the project team:

    1. Write out the list of all stakeholders along the top of a whiteboard. Write out the key project steps along the left-hand side.
    2. For each initiative, identify each team member’s role. Are they:
      Responsible: The one responsible for getting the job done.
      Accountable: Only one person can be accountable for each task.
      Consulted: Are involved by providing knowledge.
      Informed: Receive information about execution and quality.
    3. As you proceed, continue to add tasks and assign responsibility to the RACI chart in the appendix of the Accessibility Business Case Template.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder list
    • Key project steps
    • Project RACI chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Phase 3

    Prepare your business case and get approval

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand standards and legislation
    1.2 Build awareness
    1.3 Understand maturity level

    Phase 2
    2.1 Define desired future state
    2.2 Define goals and objectives
    2.3 Document roles and responsibilities

    Phase 3
    3.1 Prepare business case template for presentation and approval
    3.2 Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Compiling the work and learning you’ve done so far into a business case presentation.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project lead/sponsor
    • Senior leaders/approval authority

    There is a business case for accessibility

    • When planning for initiatives, a business case is a necessary tool. Although it can feel like an administrative exercise, it helps create a compelling argument to senior leaders about the benefits and necessity of building an accessibility program.
    • No matter the industry, you need to justify how the budget and effort you require for the initiative support organizational goals. However, senior leaders of different industries might be motivated by different reasons. For example, government is strongly motivated by legal and equity aspects, commercial companies may be attracted to the increase in innovation or market reach, and educational and nonprofit companies are likely motivated by brand enhancement.
    • The organizational focus and goals will guide your business case for accessibility. Highlight the most relevant benefits to your operational landscape and the risk of inaction.

    Source: WAI, 2018

    “Many organizations are waking up to the fact that embracing accessibility leads to multiple benefits – reducing legal risks, strengthening brand presence, improving customer experience and colleague productivity.”
    – Paul Smyth, Head of Digital Accessibility, Barclays
    Source: WAI, 2018

    Step 3.1

    Customize and populate the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Activities

    3.1.1 Prepare your business case template for presentation and approval

    Build Your Business Case

    Outcomes of this step
    Following this step, you will have a customized business case presentation that you can present to senior leaders.

    Use Info-Tech’s template to communicate with stakeholders

    Obtain approval for your accessibility program by customizing Info-Tech’s Accessibility Business Case Template, which is designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project context
    • Project scope and objectives
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap
    • Next steps

    Info-Tech Insight
    The support of senior leaders is critical to the success of your accessibility program development. Remind them of the benefits and impact and the risks associated with inaction.

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    3.1.1 Prepare a presentation for senior leaders to gain approval

    Now that you understand your current and desired accessibility maturity, the next step is to get sign-off to begin planning your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Consider who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Management’s time is tight, and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery. Impact them hard and fast with the challenges, benefits, and risks of inaction.
    3. Contain the presentation to no more than an hour. Depending on your audience, the actual presentation delivery could be quite short. You want to ensure adequate time for questions and answers.
    4. Schedule a meeting with the key decision makers who will need to approve the initiatives (IT leadership team, executive team, the board, etc.) and present your business case.
    InputOutput
    • Activity results
    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment results
    • A completed presentation to communicate your accessibility business case
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Accessibility Business Case Template
    • IT leadership team
    • Project sponsor
    • Project stakeholders
    • Senior leaders

    Download the Accessibility Business Case Template

    Step 3.2

    Validate post-approval steps and establish timelines

    Activities

    3.2.1 Prepare for implementation: Complete the implementation prep to-do list and assign proposed timelines

    Build Your Business Case

    Outcomes of this step
    This step will help you gain leadership’s approval to move forward with building and implementing the accessibility program.

    Prepare to implement your program

    Complete the to-do list to ensure you are ready to move your accessibility program forward.

    To Do Proposed Timeline
    Reach out to your change management team for assistance.
    Discuss your plan with HR.
    Build a project team.
    Incorporate any necessary changes from senior leaders into your business case.
    [insert your own addition here]
    [insert your own addition here]
    [insert your own addition here]
    [insert your own addition here]

    3.2.1 Prep for implementation (action planning)

    Use the implementation prep to-do list to make sure you have gathered relevant information and completed critical steps to be ready for success.

    Use the list on the previous slide to make sure you are set up for implementation success and that you’re ready to move your accessibility program forward.

    1. Assign proposed timelines to each of the items.
    2. Work through the list, collecting or completing each item.
    3. As you proceed, keep your identified drivers, current state, desired future state, goals, and objectives in mind.
    Input Output
    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Business case presentation and any feedback from senior leaders
    • Goals, objectives, identified drivers, and desired future state
    • High-level action plan
    Materials Participants
    • Previous slide containing the checklist
    • Project lead

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

    • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
      • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
      • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
      • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.

    Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    • Users are demanding more valuable web functionalities and improved access to your website services.
    • The criteria of user acceptance and satisfaction involves more than an aesthetically pleasing user interface (UI). It also includes how emotionally attached the user is to the website and how it accommodates user behaviors.

    IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics

    • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
    • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

    Fix Your IT Culture

    • Go beyond value statements to create a culture that enables the departmental strategy.
    • There is confusion about how to translate culture from an abstract concept to something that is measurable, actionable, and process driven.
    • Organizations lack clarity about who is accountable and responsible for culture, with groups often pointing fingers at each other.

    Works cited

    “2021 State of Digital Accessibility.” Level Access, n.d. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022

    ”2022 Midyear Report: ADA Digital Accessibility Lawsuits.” UsableNet, 2022. Accessed 9 Nov. 2022

    “Barclay’s Bank Case Study.” WAI-Engage, 12 Sept. 2018. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.

    Bilodeau, Howard, et al. “StatCan COVID-19 Data to Insights for a Better Canada.” Statistics Canada, 24 June 2021. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.

    Casey, Caroline. “Do Your D&I Efforts Include People With Disabilities?” Harvard Business Review, 19 March 2020. Accessed 28 July 2022.

    Digitalisation World. “Organisations failing to meet digital accessibility standards.” Angel Business Communications, 19 May 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.

    “disability.” Merriam-Webster.com Dictionary, Merriam-Webster, https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/disability. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.

    “Disability.” World Health Organization, 2022. Accessed 10 Aug 2022.

    “Driving the Accessibility Advantage at Accenture.” Accenture, 2022. Accessed 7 Oct. 2022.

    eSSENTIAL Accessibility. The Must-Have WCAG 2.1 Checklist. 2022

    Hopewell, May. Accessibility in the Workplace. 2022.

    “Initiate.” W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 31 March 2016. Accessed 18 Aug. 2022.

    Kalcevich, Kate, and Mike Gifford. “How to Bake Layers of Accessibility Testing Into Your Process.” Smashing Magazine, 26 April 2021. Accessed 31 Aug. 2022.

    Noone, Cat. “4 Common Ways Companies Alienate People with Disabilities.” Harvard Business Review, 29 Nov. 2021. Accessed Jul. 2022.

    Taylor, Jason. “A Record-Breaking Year for ADA Digital Accessibility Lawsuits.” UsableNet, 21 December 2020. Accessed Jul. 2022.

    “The Business Case for Digital Accessibility.” W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 9 Nov. 2018. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.

    “The WebAIM Million.” Web AIM, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.

    Washington, Ella F. “The Five Stages of DEI Maturity.” Harvard Business Review, November - December 2022. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.

    Wyman, Nicholas. “An Untapped Talent Resource: People With Disabilities.” Forbes, 25 Feb. 2021. Accessed 14 Sep. 2022.

    Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}443|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $7,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 46 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Most companies are struggling to get their project work done. This is due in part to the fact that many prescribed remedies are confusing, disruptive, costly, or ineffective.
    • While struggling to find a solution, within the organization, project requests never stop and all projects continue to all be treated the same. Resources are requested for multiple projects without any visibility into their project capacity. Projects lack proper handoffs from closure to ongoing operational work. And the benefits are never tracked.
    • If you have too many projects, limited resources, ineffective communications, or low post-project adoption, keep reading. Perhaps you should spend a bit more on project, portfolio, and organizational change management.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Successful project outcomes are not built by rigorous project processes: Projects may be the problem, but project management rigor is not the solution.
    • Don’t fall into the common trap of thinking high-rigor project management should be every organization’s end goal.
    • Instead, understand that it is better to spend time assessing the portfolio to determine what projects should be prioritized.

    Impact and Result

    Begin by establishing a few foundational practices that will work to drive project throughput.

    • Capacity Estimation: Understand what your capacity is to do projects by determining how much time is allocated to doing other things.
    • Book of Record: Establish a basic but sustainable book of record so there is an official list of projects in flight and those waiting in a backlog or funnel.
    • Simple Project Management Processes: Align the rigor of your project management process with what is required, not what is prescribed by the PMP designation.
    • Impact Assessment: Address the impact of change at the beginning of the project and prepare stakeholders with the right level of communication.

    Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Begin by establishing a few foundational practices that will work to drive project throughput. Most project management problems are resolved with portfolio level solutions. This blueprint will address the eco-system of project, portfolio, and organizational change management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Project portfolio management

    Estimate project capacity, determine what needs to be tracked on an ongoing basis, and determine what criteria is necessary for prioritizing projects.

    • Project Portfolio Supply-Demand Analysis Tool
    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool
    • Project Portfolio Book of Record

    2. Project management

    Develop a process to inform the portfolio of the project status, create a plan that can be maintained throughout the project lifecycle, and manage the scope through a change request process.

    • Light Project Change Request Form Template

    3. Organizational change management

    Perform a change impact assessment and identify the obvious and non-obvious stakeholders to develop a message canvas accordingly.

    • Organizational Change Management Triage Tool

    4. Develop an action plan

    Develop a roadmap for how to move from the current state to the target state.

    • PPM Wireframe
    • Project Portfolio Management Foundations Stakeholder Communication Deck
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Project Portfolio Management

    The Purpose

    Establish the current state of the portfolio.

    Organize the portfolio requirements.

    Determine how projects are prioritized.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand project capacity supply-demand.

    Build a portfolio book of record.

    Create a project value scorecard.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct capacity supply-demand estimation.

    1.2 Determine requirements for portfolio book of record.

    1.3 Develop project value criteria.

    Outputs

    Clear project capacity

    Draft portfolio book of record

    Project value scorecard

    2 Project Management

    The Purpose

    Feed the portfolio with the project status.

    Plan the project work with a sustainable level of granularity.

    Manage the project as conditions change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a process to inform the portfolio of the project status.

    Create a plan that can be maintained throughout the project lifecycle and manage the scope through a change request process.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine necessary reporting metrics.

    2.2 Create a work structure breakdown.

    2.3 Document your project change request process.

    Outputs

    Feed the portfolio with the project status

    Plan the project work with a sustainable level of granularity

    Manage the project as conditions change

    3 Organizational Change Management

    The Purpose

    Discuss change accountability.

    Complete a change impact assessment.

    Create a communication plan for stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Complete a change impact assessment.

    Identify the obvious and non-obvious stakeholders and develop a message canvas accordingly.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss change accountability.

    3.2 Complete a change impact assessment.

    3.3 Create a communication plan for stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Assign accountability for the change

    Assess the change impact

    Communicate the change

    4 Develop an Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Summarize current state.

    Determine target state.

    Create a roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a roadmap for how to move from the current state to the target state.

    Activities

    4.1 Summarize current state and target state.

    4.2 Create a roadmap.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder Communication Deck

    MS Project Wireframe

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}164|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development

    Your organization is looking to invest in new software or a tool to solve key business and IT problems. They see open source as a viable option given the advertised opportunities and the popularity of many open-source projects, but they have concerns:

    • Despite the longevity and broad adoption of open-source software, stakeholders are hesitant about its long-term viability and the costs of ongoing support.
    • A clear direction and strategy are needed to align the expected value of open source to your stakeholders’ priorities and gain the funding required to select, implement, and support open-source software.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Position open source in the same light as commercial software. The continuous improvement and evolution of popular open-source software and communities have established a reputation for reliability in the industry.
    • Consider open source as another form of outsource development. Open source is externally developed software where the code is accessible and customizable. Code quality may not align to your organization’s standards, which can require extensive testing and optimization.
    • Treat open source as any internally developed solution. Configurations, integrations, customizations, and orchestrations of open-source software are often done at the code level. While some community support is provided, most of the heavy lifting is done by the applications team.

    Impact and Result

    • Outline the value you expect to gain. Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.
    • Define your open-source selection criteria. Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.
    • Assess the readiness of your team. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Storyboard – A guide to learn the fit, value, and considerations of open-source software.

    This research walks you through the misconceptions about open source, factors to consider in its selection, and initiatives to prepare your teams for its adoption.

    • Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Storyboard

    2. Open-Source Readiness Assessment – A tool to help you evaluate your readiness to embrace open-source software in your environment.

    Use this tool to identify key gaps in the people, processes, and technologies needed to support open source in your organization. It also contains a canvas to facilitate discussions about expectations with your stakeholders and applications teams.

    • Open-Source Readiness Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software

    Begin to understand what is required to embrace open-source software in your organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    With great empowerment comes great responsibilities.

    Open-source software promotes enticing technology and functional opportunities to any organization looking to modernize without the headaches of traditional licensing. Many organizations see the value of open source in its ability to foster innovation, be flexible to various use cases and system configurations, and give complete control to the teams who are using and managing it.

    However, open source is not free. While the software is freely and easily accessible, its use and sharing are bound by its licenses, and its implementation requires technical expertise and infrastructure investments. Your organization must be motivated and capable of taking on the various services traditionally provided and managed by the vendor.

    Photo of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Application Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization is looking to invest in new software or a tool to solve key business and IT problems. They see open source as a viable option because of the advertised opportunities and the popularity of many open-source projects.

    Despite the longevity and the broad adoption of open-source software, stakeholders are hesitant about its adoption, its long-term viability, and the costs of ongoing support.

    A clear direction and strategy is needed to align the expected value of open source to your stakeholders’ priorities and gain the funding required to select, implement, and support open-source software.

    Common Obstacles

    Your stakeholders’ fears, uncertainties, and doubts about open source may be driven by misinterpretation or outdated information. This hesitancy can persist despite some projects being active longer than their proprietary counterparts.

    Certain software features, support capabilities, and costs are commonly overlooked when selecting open-source software because they are often assumed in the licensing and service costs of commercial software.

    Open-source software is often technically complicated and requires specific skill sets and knowledge. Unfortunately, current software delivery capability gaps impede successful adoption and scaling of open-source software.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Outline the value you expect to gain. Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.

    Define your open-source selection criteria. Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.

    Assess the readiness of your team. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching Info-Tech Insight

    Open source is as much about an investment in people as it is about technology. It empowers applications teams to take greater control over their technology and customize it as they see fit. However, teams need the time and funding to conduct the necessary training, management, and ongoing community engagement that open-source software and its licenses require.

    • Position open source in the same light as commercial software.
      The continuous improvement and evolution of popular open-source software and communities have established a trusting and reliable reputation in the industry. Open-source software quality and community support can rival similar vendor capabilities given the community’s maturity and contributions in the technology.
    • Consider open source another form of outsource development.
      Open source is externally developed software where the code is accessible and customizable. Code quality may not align to your organization’s standards, which can require extensive testing and optimization. A thorough analysis of change logs, code repositories, contributors, and the community is recommended – much to the same degree as one would do with prospective outsourcing partners.
    • Treat open source as any internally developed solution.
      Configurations, integrations, customizations, and orchestrations of open-source software are often done at the code level. While some community support is provided, most of the heavy lifting is done by the applications team. Teams must be properly resourced, upskilled, and equipped to meet this requirement. Otherwise, third-party partners are needed.

    What is open source?

    According to Synopsys, “Open source software (OSS) is software that is distributed with its source code, making it available for use, modification, and distribution with its original rights. … Programmers who have access to source code can change a program by adding to it, changing it, or fixing parts of it that aren’t working properly. OSS typically includes a license that allows programmers to modify the software to best fit their needs and control how the software can be distributed.”

    What are the popular use cases?

    1. Programming languages and frameworks
    2. Databases and data technologies
    3. Operating systems
    4. Git public repos
    5. Frameworks and tools for AI/ML/DL
    6. CI/CD tooling
    7. Cloud-related tools
    8. Security tools
    9. Container technology
    10. Networking

    Source: OpenLogic, 2022

    Common Attributes of All Open-Source Software

    • Publicly shared repository that anyone can access to use the solution and contribute changes to the design and functionality of the project.
    • A community that is an open forum to share ideas and solution enhancements, discuss project direction and vision, and seek support from peers.
    • Project governance that sets out guidelines, rules, and requirements to participate and contribute to the project.
    • Distribution license that defines the terms of how a solution can be used, assessed, modified, and distributed.

    Take the first steps to embrace open-source software

    Begin to understand what is required to embrace open-source software in your organization.

    A diagram of open-source community.

    State the Value of Open Source: Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.

    Select Your Open-Source Software: Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.

    Prepare for Open Source: Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Step 1.1: State the Value of Open Source

    Diagram of step 1.1

    Activities

    1.1.1 Outline the value you expect to gain from open-source software

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications team
    • Product owner

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Value proposition for open source
    • Potential open-source use cases

    Use a canvas to frame your open-source evaluation

    A photo of open-source canvas

    This canvas is intended to provide a single pane of glass to start collecting your thoughts and framing your future conversations on open-source software selection and adoption.

    Record the results in the “Open-Source Canvas” tab in the Open-Source Readiness Assessment.

    Open source presents unique software and tooling opportunities

    Innovation

    Many leading-edge and bleeding-edge technologies are collaborated and innovated in open-source projects, especially in areas that are beyond the vision and scope of vendor products and priorities.

    Niche Solutions

    Open-source projects are focused. They are designed and built to solve specific business and technology problems.

    Flexible & Customizable

    All aspects of the open-source software are customizable, including source code and integrations. They can be used to extend, complement, or replace internally developed code. Licenses define how open-source code should be and must be used, productized, and modified.

    Brand & Recognition

    Open-source communities encourage contribution and collaboration among their members to add functionality and improve quality and adoption.

    Cost

    Open-source software is accessible to everyone, free of charge. Communities do not need be consulted prior to acquisition, but the software’s use, configurations, and modifications may be restricted by its license.

    However, myths continue to challenge adoption

    • Open source is less secure or poorer quality than proprietary solutions.
    • Open source is free from risk of intellectual property (IP) infringement.
    • Open source is cheaper than proprietary solutions.

    What are the top perceived barriers to using enterprise open source?

    • Concerns about the level of support
    • Compatibility concerns
    • Concerns about inherent security of the code
    • Lack of internal skills to manage and support it

    Source: Red Hat, 2022

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}487|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    The service desk is a major function within IT. Small enterprises with constrained resources need to look at designing a service desk that enables consistency in supporting the business and finds the right balance of documentation.

    Determining the right level of documentation to provide backup and getting the right level of data for good reporting may seem like a waste of time when the team is small, but this is key to knowing when to invest in more people, upgraded technology, and whether your efforts to improve service are successful.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    It’s easy to lose sight of the client experience when working as a small team supporting a variety of end users. Changing from a help desk to a service desk requires a focus on what it means to be a customer centric service desk and a change to the way the technicians think about providing support.

    • Make the best use of the team. Clearly define roles and responsibilities and monitor those wearing multiple hats to make sure they don’t burn out.
    • Build cross training and documentation into your culture to preserve service levels while giving team members time off to recharge.
    • Don’t discount the benefit of good tools. As volume increases, so does the likelihood of issues and requests getting missed. Look for tools that will help to keep a customer focus.

    Impact and Result

    • Improved workload distribution for technicians and enable prioritization based on work type, urgency, and impact.
    • Improved communications methods and messaging will help the technicians to set expectations appropriately and reduce friction between each other and their supported end users.
    • Best practices and use of industry standard tools will reduce administrative overhead while improving workload management.

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to help you identify and prioritize initiatives to become more customer centric.

    This blueprint provides a framework to quickly identify a plan for service desk improvements. It also provides references to build out additional skills and functionality as a continual improvement initiative.

    • Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Storyboard

    2. Maturity Assessment – An assessment to determine baseline maturity.

    The maturity assessment will provide a baseline and identify areas of focus based on level of current and target maturity.

    • IT Service Desk Maturity Assessment for Small Enterprise

    3. Standard Operating Procedure – A template to build out a clear, concise SOP right-sized for a small enterprise.

    The SOP provides an excellent guide to quickly inform new team members or contractors of your support approach.

    • Incident Management and Service Desk SOP for Small Enterprise

    4. Categorization Scheme – A template to build out an effective categorization scheme.

    The categorization scheme template provides examples of asset-based categories, resolution codes and status.

    • Service Desk Asset-Based Categories Template

    5. Improvement Plan – A template to present the improvement plan to stakeholders.

    This template provides a starting point for building your communications on planned improvements.

    • Service Desk Improvement Initiative
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise

    Turn your help desk into a customer-centric service desk.

    Analyst Perspective

    Small enterprises have many of the same issues as large ones, but with far fewer resources. Focus on the most important aspects to improve customer service.

    The service desk is a major function within IT. Small enterprises with constrained resources need to look at designing a service desk that enables consistency in supporting the business and finds the right balance of documentation.

    Evaluate documentation to ensure there is always redundancy built in to cover absences. Determining coverage will be an important factor, especially if vendors will be brought into the organization to assist during shortages. They will not have the same level of knowledge as teammates and may have different requirements for documentation.

    It is important to be customer centric, thinking about how services are delivered and communicated with a focus on providing self-serve at the appropriate level for your users and determining what information the business needs for expectation-setting and service level agreements, as well as communications on incidents and changes.

    And finally, don’t discount the value of good reporting. There are many reasons to document issues besides just knowing the volume of workload and may become more important as the organization evolves or grows. Stakeholder reporting, regulatory reporting, trend spotting, and staff increases are all good reasons to ensure minimum documentation standards are defined and in use.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group. Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Table of Contents

    Title Page Title Page
    Blueprint benefits 6 Incident management 25
    Start / Stop / Continue exercise 10 Prioritization scheme 27
    Complete a maturity assessment 11 Define SLAs 29
    Select an ITSM tool 13 Communications 30
    Define roles & responsibilities 15 Reporting 32
    Queue management 17 What can you do to improve? 33
    Ticket handling best practices 18 Staffing 34
    Customer satisfaction surveys 19 Knowledge base & self-serve 35
    Categorization 20 Customer service 36
    Separate ticket types 22 Ticket analysis 37
    Service requests 23 Problem management 38
    Roadmap 39

    Insight summary

    Help desk to service desk

    It’s easy to lose sight of the client experience when working as a small team supporting a variety of end users. Changing from a help desk to a service desk requires a focus on what it means to be a customer-centric service desk and a change to the way the technicians think about providing support.

    Make the best use of the team

    • Clearly define primary roles and responsibilities, and identify when and where escalations should occur.
    • Divide the work in a way that makes the most sense based on intake patterns and categories of incidents or service requests.
    • Recognize who is wearing multiple hats, and monitor to make sure they don’t burn out or struggle to keep up.
    • Determine the most appropriate areas to outsource based on work type and skills required.

    Build cross-training into your culture

    • Primary role holders need time off and need to know the day-to-day work won’t be waiting for them when they come back.
    • The knowledge base is your first line of defense to make sure incidents don’t have to wait for resolution and to avoid having technicians remote in on their day off.
    • When volumes spike for incidents and service requests, everyone needs to be prepared to pitch in. Train the team to recognize and step up to the call to action.

    Don’t discount the benefit of good tools

    • When volume increases, so does the likelihood of missing issues and requests.
    • Designate a single solution to manage the workload, so there is one place to go for work orders, incident reporting, asset data, and more.
    • Set up self-serve for users so they have access to how-to articles and can check the status of tickets themselves.
    • Create a service catalog to make it easy for them to request the most frequent items easily.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Standard Operating Procedures

    Sample of the Standard Operating Procedures deliverable.

    Maturity Assessment

    Sample of the Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Categorization scheme

    Sample of the Categorization scheme deliverable.

    Improvement Initiative

    Sample of the Improvement Initiative deliverable.
    Create a standard operating procedure to ensure the support team has a consistent understanding of how they need to engage with the business.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    • Improve workload distribution for technicians and enable prioritization based on work type, urgency, and impact.
    • Improved communications methods and messaging will help the technicians set expectations appropriately and reduce friction between each other and their supported end users.
    • Best practices and use of industry-standard tools will reduce administrative overhead while improving workload management.

    Business benefits

    • IT taking a customer-centric approach will improve access to support and reduce interruptions to the way they do business.
    • Expectation setting and improved communications will allow the business to better plan their work around new requests and will have a better understanding of service level agreements.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is six to ten calls over the course of three to four months.

    The current state discussion will determine the path.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Current State & Vision

    Best Practices

    Service Requests & Incidents

    Communications

    Next Steps & Roadmap

    Call #1: Discuss current state & create a vision

    Call #2: Document roles & responsibilities

    Call #3:Review and define best practices for ticket handling Call #4: Review categorization

    Call #5: Discuss service requests & self-serve

    Call #6: Assess incident management processes
    Call #7: Assess and document reporting and metrics

    Call #8: Discuss communications methods

    Call #9: Review next steps

    Call #10: Build roadmap for updates

    For a workshop on this topic, see the blueprint Standardize the Service Desk

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Southwest CARE Center
    Logo for Southwest Care.
    INDUSTRY
    Healthcare

    Service Desk Project

    After relying on a managed service provider (MSP) for a number of years, the business hired Kevin to repatriate IT. As part of that mandate, his first strategic initiative was to build a service desk. SCC engaged Info-Tech Research Group to select and build a structure; assign roles and responsibilities; implement incident management, request fulfilment, and knowledge management processes; and integrate a recently purchased ITSM tool.

    Over the course of a four-day onsite engagement, SCC’s IT team worked with two Info-Tech analysts to create and document workflows, establish ticket handling guidelines, and review their technological requirements.

    Results

    The team developed a service desk standard operating procedure and an implementation roadmap with clear service level agreements.

    Southwest CARE Center (SCC) is a leading specialty healthcare provider in New Mexico. They offer a variety of high-quality services with a focus on compassionate, patient-centered healthcare.

    “Info-Tech helped me to successfully rebrand from an MSP help desk to an IT service desk. Sandi and Michel provided me with a customized service desk framework and SOP that quickly built trust within the organization. By not having to tweak and recalibrate my service desk processes through trial and error, I was able to save a year’s worth of work, resulting in cost savings of $30,000 to $40,000.” (Kevin Vigil, Director of Information Technology, Southwest CARE Center)

    The service desk is the cornerstone for customer satisfaction

    Bar charts comparing 'Dissatisfied' vs 'Satisfied End Users' in both 'Service Desk Effectiveness' and 'Timeliness'.
    N=63, small enterprise organizations from the End-User Satisfaction Diagnostic, at December 2021
    Dissatisfied was classified as those organizations with an average score less than 7.
    Satisfied was classified as those organizations with an average score greater or equal to 8.
    • End users who were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT processes 36% higher than dissatisfied end users.
    • End users who were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT processes 34% higher than dissatisfied end-users.

    Improve the service desk with a Start, Stop, Continue assessment

    Use this exercise as an opportunity to discuss what’s working and what isn’t with your current help desk. Use this to define your goals for the improvement project, with a plan to return to the results and rerun the exercise on a regular basis.

    STOP

    • What service desk processes are counterproductive?
    • What service blockers exist that consistently undermine good results?
    • Are end-user relationships with individual team members negatively impacting satisfaction?
    • Make notes on initial ideas for improvement.

    START

    • What service process improvements could be implemented immediately?
    • What technical qualifications do individual staff members need to improve?
    • What opportunities exist to improve service desk communications with end users?
    • How can escalation and triage be more efficient?

    CONTINUE

    • What aspects of your current service desk are positive?
    • What processes are efficient and can be emulated elsewhere?
    • Where can you identify high levels of end-user satisfaction?

    Complete a maturity assessment to create a baseline and areas of focus

    The Service Desk Maturity Assessment tool helps organizations assess their service desk process maturity and focus the project on the activities that matter most.

    The tool will help guide improvement efforts and measure your progress.

    • The second tab of the tool walks through a qualitative assessment of your service desk practices. Questions will prompt you to evaluate how you are executing key activities. Select the answer in the drop-down menus that most closely aligns with your current state.
    • The third tab displays your rate of process completeness and maturity. You will receive a score for each phase, an overall score, and advice based on your performance.
    • Document the results of the efficiency assessment in the Service Desk Improvement Initiative.
    • The tool is intended for periodic use. Review your answers each year and devise initiatives to improve the process performance where you need it most.
    Sample of the Service Desk Maturity Assessment.

    Define your vision for the support structure

    Use this vision for communicating with the business and your IT team

    Consider service improvements and how those changes can be perceived by the organization. For example, offering multiple platforms, such as adding Macs to end-user devices, could translate to “Providing the right IT solutions for the way our employees want to work.”

    To support new platforms, you might need to look at the following steps to get there:
    • Evaluate skills needed – can you upskill generalists quickly, or will specialists be required? Determine training needs for support staff on new platforms.
    • Estimate uptake of the new platform and adjusting budgets – will these mostly be role-based decisions?
    • Determine what applications will work on the new platform and which will have a parity offering, which will require a solution like Parallels or VirtualBox, and which might need substitute applications.
    • What utilities will be needed to secure your solutions such as for encryption, antivirus, and firewalls?
    • What changes in the way you deploy and patch machines?
    • What level of support do you need to provide – just platform, or applications as well? What self-serve training can be made available?
    If you need to change the way you deploy equipment, you may want to review the blueprint Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify some high-level opportunities and plan out how these changes will impact the way you provide support today. Document steps you’ll need to follow to make it happen. This may include new offerings and product sourcing, training, and research.

    Facilitate service desk operations with an ITSM tool

    You don’t need to spend a fortune. Many solutions are free or low-cost for a small number of users, and you don’t necessarily have to give up functionality to save money.

    Encourage users to submit requests through email or self-serve to keep organized. Ensure that reporting will provide you with the basics without effort, but ensure report creation is easy enough if you need to add more.

    Consider tools that do more than just store tickets. ITSM tools for small enterprises can also assist with:
    • Equipment and software license management
    • Self-serve for password reset and improving the experience for end users to submit tickets
    • Software deployment
    • Onboarding and offboarding workflows
    • Integration with monitoring tools
    Info-Tech Insight Buying rather than building allows you the greatest flexibility and can provide enterprise-level functionality at small-enterprise pricing. Use Info-Tech’s IT Service Management Selection Guide to create a business case and list of requirements for your ITSM purchase.
    Logo for Spiceworks.
    Logo for ZenDesk. Logo for SysAid.
    Logo for ManageEngine.
    Logo for Vector Networks.
    Logo for Freshworks.
    Logo for Squadcast.
    Logo for Jira Software.
    Logos contain links

    ITSM implementations are the perfect time to fix processes

    Consider engaging a partner for the installation and setup as they will have the expertise to troubleshoot and get you to value quickly.

    Even with a partner, don’t rely on them to set up categories, prioritizations, and workflows. If you have unique requirements, you will need to bring your design work to the table to avoid getting a “standard install” that will need to be modified later.

    When we look at what makes a strong and happy product launch, it boils down to a few key elements:
    • Improving customer service, or at least avoiding a decline
    • Improving access to information for technical team and end users
    • Successfully taking advantage of workflows, templates, and other features designed to improve the technician and user experience
    • Using existing processes with the new tools, without having to completely reengineer how things are done
    For a complete installation guide, visit the blueprint Build an ITSM Implementation Plan
    To prepare for a quick time to value in setting up the new ITSM tool, prioritize in this order:
    1. Categorization and status codes
    2. Prioritization
    3. Divide tickets into incidents and service requests
    4. Create workflows for onboarding and offboarding (automate where you can)
    5. Track escalations to vendors
    6. Reporting
    7. Self-serve
    8. Equipment inventory (leading to hardware asset management)

    Define roles looking to balance between customer service and getting things done

    The team will need to provide backfill for each other with high volume, vacations, and leave, but also need to proactively manage interruptions appropriately as they work on projects.
    Icon of a bullseye. First contact – customer service, general knowledge
    Answers phones, chats, responds to email, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for end users.
    Icon of a pie chart. Analyst – experienced troubleshooter, general knowledge
    Answers phone when FC isn’t available, responds to email, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for first contact, escalates to other technicians or vendors.
    Icon of a lightbulb. Analyst – experienced troubleshooter, specialist
    Answers phones only when necessary, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for anyone in IT, consults with peers, escalates to vendors.
    Icon of gear on a folder. Engineer – deep expertise, specialist
    Answers phones only when necessary, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for anyone in IT, consults with peers, escalates to vendors.
    Icon of a handshake. Vendor, Managed Service Providers
    Escalation point per contract terms, must meet SLAs, communicate regularly with analysts and management as appropriate. Who escalates and who manages them?
    Row of colorful people.

    Note roles in the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Keep customers happy and technicians calm by properly managing your queue

    If ticket volume is too high or too dispersed to effectively have teams self-select tickets, assign a queue manager to review tickets throughout the day to ensure they’re assigned and on the technician’s schedule. This is particularly important for technicians who don’t regularly work out of the ticketing system. Follow up on approaching or missed SLAs.

    • Separate incidents (break fix) and service requests: Prioritize incidents over service requests to focus on getting users doing business as soon as possible. Schedule service requests for slower times or assign to technicians who are not working the front lines.
    • First in/first out…mostly: We typically look to prioritize incidents over service requests and only prioritize incidents if there are multiple people or VIPs affected. Where everything is equal, deal with the oldest first. Pause occasionally to deal with quick wins such as password resets.
    • Update ticket status and notes: Knowing what tickets are in progress and which ones are waiting on information or parts is important for anyone looking to pick up the next ticket. Make sure everyone is aware of the benefits of keeping this information up to date, so technicians know what to work on next without duplicating each other’s work.
    • Implement solutions quickly by using knowledge articles: Continue to build out the knowledge base to be able to resolve end-user issues quickly, check to see if additional information is needed before escalating tickets to other technicians.
    • Encourage end users to create tickets through the portal: Issues called in are automatically moved to the front of the queue, regardless of urgency. Make it easy for users to report issues using the portal and save the phone for urgent issues to allow appropriate prioritization of tickets.
    • Create a process to add additional resources on a regular basis to keep control of the backlog: A few extra hours once a week may be enough if the team is focused without interruptions.
    • Determine what backlog is acceptable to your users: Set that as a maximum time to resolve. Ideally, set up automated escalations for tickets that are approaching target SLAs, and build flexibility into schedules to have an “all hands on deck” option if the volume gets too high.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your queue manager has an accurate escalation list and has the authority to assign tickets and engage with the technical team to manage SLAs; otherwise, SLAs will never be consistently managed.

    Best practices for ticket handling

    Accurate data leads to good decisions. If working toward adding staff members, reducing recurring incidents, gaining access to better tools, or demonstrating value to the business, tickets will enable reporting and dashboards to manage your day-to-day business and provide reports to stakeholders.
    • Provide an easy way for end users to electronically submit tickets and encourage them to do so. This doesn’t mean you shouldn’t still accept phone calls, but that should be encouraged for time sensitive issues.
    • Create and update tickets, but not at the expense of good customer service. Agents can start the ticket but shouldn’t spend five minutes creating the ticket when they should be troubleshooting the problem.
    • Update the ticket when the issue is resolved or needs to be escalated. If agents are escalating, they should make sure all relevant information is passed along to the next technician.
    • Update user of ETA if issue cannot be resolved quickly.
    • Update categories to reflect the actual issue and resolution.
    • Reference or link to the knowledge base article as the documented steps taken to resolve the incident.
    • Validate incident is resolved with client. Automate this process with ticket closure after a certain time.
    • Close or resolve the ticket on time.
    Ticket templates (or quick tickets) for common incidents can lead to fast creation, data input, and categorizations. Templates can reduce the time it takes to create tickets from two minutes to 30 seconds.
    Sample ticket template.

    Create a right-sized self-service portal

    Review tickets and talk to the team to find out the most frequent requests and the most frequent incidents that could be solved by the end user if there were clear instructions. Check with your user community to see what they would like to see in the portal.

    A portal is only as attractive as it is useful. Enabling ticket creation and review is the bare minimum and may not entice users to the portal if email is just as easy to use for ticket creation.

    Consider opening the portal to groups other than IT. HR, finance, and others may have information they want to share or forms to fill in or download where an employee portal rather than an IT portal could be helpful. Work with other departments to see if they would find value. Make sure your solution is easy to use when adding content. Low-code options are useful for this.

    Portals could be built in the ITSM solution or SharePoint/Teams and should include:

    • Easy ways to create and see status on all tickets
    • Manuals, how-to articles, links to training
    • Answers to common questions, could be a wiki or Q&A for users to help each other as well as IT
    • Could have a chatbot to help people find documents or to create a ticket

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider using video capture software to create short how-to videos for common questions. Vendors such as TechSmith Snagit , Vimeo Screen Recorder, Screencast-O-Matic Video Recording, and Movavi Screen Recording may be quick and easy to learn.

    49%

    49% of employees have trouble finding information at work

    35%

    Employees can cut time spent looking for information by 35% with quality intranet

    (Source: Liferay)

    Use customer satisfaction surveys to monitor service levels

    Transactional surveys are tied to specific interactions and provide a means of communication to help users communicate satisfaction or dissatisfaction with single interactions.
    • Keep it simple: One question to rate the service with opportunity to add a comment is enough to understand the sentiment and potential issues, and it will be more likely that the user will fill it out.
    • Follow up: Feedback will only be provided if customers think it’s being read and actioned. Set an alert to receive notification of any negative feedback and follow up within one or two business days to show you’re listening.

    A simple customer feedback form with smiley face scale.

    Relationship surveys can be run annually to obtain feedback on the overall customer experience.

    Inform yourself of how well you are doing or where you need improvement in the broad services provided.

    Provide a high-level perspective on the relationship between the business and IT.

    Help with strategic improvement decisions.

    Should be sent over a duration of time and to the entire customer base after they’ve had time to experience all the services provided by the service desk. This can be done on an annual basis.

    For example: Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Diagnostic. Included in your membership.

    Keep categorizations simple

    Asset categorization provides reports that are straightforward and useful for IT and that are typically used where the business isn’t demanding complex reports.

    Too many options can cause confusion; too few options provide little value. Try to avoid using “miscellaneous” – it’s not useful information. Test your tickets against your new scheme to make sure it works for you. Effective classification schemes are concise, easy to use correctly, and easy to maintain.

    Build out the categories with these questions:
    • What kind of asset am I working on? (type)
    • What general asset group am I working on? (category)
    • What particular asset am I working on? (sub-category)

    Create resolution codes to further modify the data for deeper reporting. This is typically a separate field, as you could use the same code for many categories. Keep it simple, but make sure it’s descriptive enough to understand the type of work happening in IT.

    Create and define simple status fields to quickly review tickets and know what needs to be actioned. Don’t stop the clock for any status changes unless you’re waiting on users. The elapsed time is important to measure from a customer satisfaction perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Think about how you will use the data to determine which components need to be included in reports. If components won’t be used for reporting, routing, or warranty, reporting down to the component level adds little value.

    Example table of categorizations.


    Need to make quick progress? Use Info-Tech Research Group’s Service Desk Asset-Based Categories template.

    1.1 Build or review your categories

    1-3 hours

    Input: Existing tickets

    Output: Categorization scheme

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers, Sample categorization scheme

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Discuss:

    • How can you use categories and resolution information to enhance reporting?
    • What level of detail do you need to be able to understand the data and take action? What level of detail is too much?
    • Are current status fields allowing you to accurately assess pending work at a glance?

    Draft:

    1. Start with existing categories and review, identifying duplicates and areas of inconsistency.
    2. Write out proposed resolution codes and status fields and critically assess their value.
    3. Test categories and resolution codes against a few recent tickets.
    4. Record the ticket categorization scheme in the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure.

    Download the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Separate tickets into service requests and incidents

    Tickets should be separated into different ticket types to be able to see briefly what needs to be prioritized. This may seem like a non-issue if you have a small team, but if you ever need to report how quickly you’re solving break-fix issues or whether you’re doing root cause analysis, this will save on future efforts. Separating ticket types may make it easier to route tickets automatically or to a new provider in the future.

    INCIDENTS

    SERVICE REQUESTS

    Icon of a bullseye.

    PRIORITIZATION

    Incidents will be prioritized based on urgency and impact to the organization. Service requests will be scheduled and only increase in prioritization if there is an issue with the request process (e.g. new hire start).
    Icon of a handshake.

    SLAs

    Did incidents get resolved according to prioritization rules? REPONSE & RESOLUTION Did service requests get completed on time? SCHEDULING & FULFILMENT
    Icon of a lightbulb.

    TRIAGE & ROOT CAUSE ANALYSIS

    Incidents will typically need triage at the service desk unless something is set up to go directly to a specialist. Service requests don’t need triage and can be routed automatically for approvals and fulfillment.

    “For me, the first key question is, is this keeping you from doing business? Is this a service request? Is it actually something that's broken? Well, okay. Now let's have the conversation about what's broken and keeping you from doing business.” (Anonymous CIO)

    Determine how service requests will be fulfilled

    Process steps for service requests: 'Request, Approve, Schedule, Fulfill, Notify requester, Close ticket'.

    • Identify standard requests, meaning any product approved for use and deployment in the organization.
    • Determine whether this should be published and how. Consider a service catalog with the ability to create tickets right from the request page. If there is an opportunity to automate fulfillment, build that into your workflow and project plans.
    • Create workflows for complicated requests such as onboarding, and build them into a template in the service desk tool. This will allow you to reduce the administrative work to deploy tasks.
    • Who will fulfill requests? There may be a need for more than one technician to be able to fulfill if volume dictates, but it’s important to determine what will be done by each level to quickly assign those tickets for scheduling. Define what will be done by each group of technicians.
    • Determine reasonable SLAs for most service requests. Identify which ones will not meet “normal” SLAs. As you build out a service catalog or automate fulfillment, SLAs can be refined.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Service requests are not as urgent as incidents and should be scheduled.

    Set the SLA based on time to fulfill, plus a buffer to schedule around more urgent service requests.

    1.2 Identify service requests and routing needs

    2-3 hours

    Input: Ticket data, Existing workflow diagrams

    Output: Workflow diagrams

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers, Visio

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Identify:

    1. Create your list of typical service requests and identify the best person to fulfill, based on complexity, documentation, specialty, access rights.
    2. Review service requests which include multiple people or departments, such as onboarding and offboarding
    3. Draw existing processes.
    4. Discuss challenges and critique existing process.
    5. Document proposed changes and steps that will need to be taken to improve the process.

    Download the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Incident management

    Critical incidents and normal incidents

    Even with a small team, it’s important to define a priority for response and resolution time for SLA and uptime reporting and extracting insights for continual improvement efforts.

    • Mission-critical systems or problems that affect many people should always come first (i.e. Severity Level 1).
    • The bulk of reported problems, however, are often individual problems with desktop PCs (i.e. Severity Level 3 or 4).
    • Some questions to consider when deciding on problem severity include:
      • How is productivity affected?
      • How many users are affected?
      • How many systems are affected?
      • How critical are the affected systems to the organization?
    • Decide how many severity levels the organization needs the service desk to have. Four levels of severity is ideal for most organizations.
    Go to incident management for SE

    Super-specialization of knowledge is also a common factor in smaller teams and is caused by complex architectures. While helpful, if that knowledge isn’t documented, it can walk out the door with the resource and the rest of the team is left scrambling.

    Lessons learned may be gathered for critical incidents but often are not propagated, which impacts the ability to solve recurring incidents.

    Over time, repeated incidents can have a negative impact on the customer’s perception that the service desk is a credible and essential service to the business.

    Cover image for 'Incident Management for Small Enterprise'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    1.3 Activity: Identify critical systems

    1 hour

    Input: Ticket data, Business continuity plan

    Output: Service desk SOP

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Discuss and document:

    1. Create a list of the most critical systems, and identify and document the escalation path.
    2. Review inventory of support documents for critical systems and identify any that require runbooks to ensure quick resolution in the event of an outage or major performance issue. Refer to the blueprint Incident Management for Small Enterprise to prioritize and document runbooks as needed.
    3. Review vendor agreements to determine if SLAs are appropriate to support needs. If there is a need for adjustments, determine options for modifying or renegotiating SLAs.

    Download the Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool

    Prioritization scheme

    Keep the priority scheme simple and meaningful, using this framework to communicate and report to stakeholders and set SLAs for response and resolution.
    1. Focus primarily on incidents. Service requests should always be medium urgency, unless there is a valid reason to move one to high level.
    2. Separate major outages from all other tickets as these are a major factor in business impact.
    3. Decide how many levels of severity are appropriate for your organization.
    4. Build a prioritization matrix, breaking down priority levels by impact and urgency.
    5. Build out the definitions of “impact” and “urgency” to complete the prioritization matrix.
    6. Run through examples of each priority level to make sure everyone is on the same page.
    A matrix of prioritization with rows as levels of 'IMPACT' and columns as levels of 'URGENCY'. Ratings range from 'Critical' at 'Extensive/Critical' to 'Low' at 'Low Impact/Low'.

    Document escalation rules and contacts

    Depending on the size of the team, escalations may be mostly to internal technical colleagues or could be primarily to vendors.

    • Ensure the list of escalation rules and contacts is accurate and available, adding expected SLAs for quick reference
    • If tickets are being escalated but shouldn’t be, ensure knowledge articles and training materials are up to date
    • Follow up on all external escalations, ensuring SLAs are respected
    • Publish an escalation path for clients if service is not meeting their needs (for internal and external providers) and automate escalations for tickets breaching SLAs
    Escalation rules strung together.
    User doesn’t know who will fix the issue but expects to see it done in a reasonable time. If issue cannot be resolved right away, set expectations for resolution time.
    • Document information so next technician doesn’t need to ask the same questions.
    • Escalate to the right technician the first time.
    • Check notes to catch up on the issue.
    • Run tests if necessary.
    • Contact user to troubleshoot and fix.
    • Meet SLAs or update client on new ETA.
    • Provide complete information to vendor.
    • Monitor resolution.
    • Follow up with vendor if delays.
    • Update client as needed.
    • Vendor will provide support according to agreement.
    • Encourage vendor to provide regular updates to IT.
    • Review vendor performance regularly.
    • IT will validate issue is resolved and close ticket.
    Validate user is happy with the experience

    Define, measure, and report on service level agreements

    Improving communications is the most effective way to improve customer service
    1. Set goals for time to respond and time to resolve for different incident levels, communicate to the technical team, and test ability to meet these goals.
    2. Set goals for time to fulfil for most service requests, document exceptions (e.g. onboarding).
    3. Create reports to measure against goals and determine what information will be most effective for reporting to the business.
    4. Management: Communicate expectations to the business leaders and end users.
    5. Management: Set regular cadence to meet with stakeholders to discuss expectations and review relevant metrics.
    6. Management: Determine how metrics will be tracked and reviewed to manage technical partners.
    Keep messaging simple
    • Be prepared with detailed reporting if needed, but focus on a few key metrics to inform stakeholders of progress against goals.
    • Use trending to tell a story, especially when presenting success stories.
    • Use appropriate media for each type of message. For example: SLAs can be listed on automated ticket responses or in a banner on the portal.

    Determine what communications are most important and who will do them

    Icon of a bperson ascending a staircase.

    PROACTIVE, PLANNED CHANGES

    From: Service Desk

    Messaging provided by engineer or director, sent to all employees; proactive planning with business unit leaders.

    Icon of a bullseye.

    OUTAGES & UPDATES

    From: Service Desk

    Use templates to send out concise messaging and updates hourly, with input from technical team working on restoring services to all; director to liaise with business stakeholders.

    Icon of a lightbulb.

    UPDATES TO SERVICES, SELF-SERVE

    From: Director

    Send announcements no more than monthly about new services and processes.

    Icon of a handshake.

    REGULAR STAKEHOLDER COMMUNICATIONS

    From: Director

    Monthly reporting to business and IT stakeholders on strategic and project goals, manage escalations.

    1.4 Create communications plan

    2 hours

    Input: Sample past communications

    Output: Communications templates

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Determine where templates are needed to ensure quick and consistent communications. Review sample templates and modify to suit your needs:

    1. Proactive, planned changes
    2. Outages and updates
    3. Updates to services, self-serve
    4. Regular stakeholder communications

    Download the communications templates

    Create reports that are useful and actionable

    Reporting serves two purposes:

    1. Accountability to stakeholders
    2. Identification of items that need action

    To determine what reports are needed, ask yourself:

    • What are your goals?
    • What story are you trying to tell?
    • What do you need to manage day to day?
    • What do you need to report to get funding?
    • What do you need to report to your stakeholders for service updates?

    Determine which metrics will be most useful to suit your strategic and operational goals

    STRATEGIC GOAL (stakeholders): Improve customer service evidenced by:

    TIME

    • Aged backlog
    • Service requests solved within SLA (could also look for quick ones, e.g. tickets solved in one day, % solved within one hour)
    • Volume of incidents and time to solve each type
    • Critical incidents solved in 4 hours
    • Incidents solved same day

    QUALITY

    • Percentage of tickets solved at first contact
    • SLAs missed
    • Percentage of services available to request through catalog
    • Percentage of tickets created through portal (speaks to quality of experience)
    • Customer satisfaction survey results – transactional and annual

    RESOURCES

    • Knowledge articles used by technicians
    • Knowledge articles used by end users
    • Tickets resolved at each technician level (volume)
    • Non-standard requests evaluated and fulfilled by volume & time served
    • Volume of recurring incidents
    OPERATIONAL GOALS: Report to director & technicians

    What else can you do to improve service?

    Review the next few pages to see if you need additional blueprints to help you:
    • Evaluate staffing and training needs to ensure the right number of resources are available and they have the skills they need for your environment.
    • Create self-service for end users to get quick answers and create tickets.
    • Create a knowledge base to ensure backup for technical expertise.
    • Develop customer service skills through training.
    • Perform ticket analysis to better understand your technical environment.

    Be agile in your approach to service

    It’s easy for small teams to get overwhelmed when covering for vacations, illness, or leave. Determine where priorities may be adjusted during busy or short-staffed times.

    • Have a plan to cross-train technicians and create comprehensive knowledge articles for coverage during vacations and unexpected absences.
    • Know where it makes sense to bring in vendors, such as for managed print services, or to cover for extended absences.
    • Look for opportunities to automate functions or reduce administrative overhead through workflows.
    • Identify any risks and determine how to mitigate, such as managing or changing administrative passwords.
    • Create self-serve to enable ticket creation and self-solve for those users who wish to use it.

    Staff the service desk to meet demand

    • With increasing complexity of support and demand on service desks, staff are often left feeling overwhelmed and struggling to keep up with ticket volume, resulting in long resolution times and frustrated end users.
    • However, it’s not as simple as hiring more staff to keep up with ticket volume. IT managers must have the data to support their case for increasing resources or even maintaining their current resources in an environment where many executives are looking to reduce headcount.
    • Without changing resources to match demand, IT managers will need to determine how to maximize the use of their resources to deliver better service.

    Cover image for 'Staff the Service Desk to Meet Demand'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Create and manage a knowledge base

    With a small team, it may seem redundant to create a knowledge base, but without key system and process workflows and runbooks, an organization is still at risk of bottlenecks and knowledge failure.

    • Use a knowledge base to document pre-escalation troubleshooting steps, known errors and workarounds, and runbook solutions.
    • Where incidents may have many root causes, document which are the most frequent solutions and where variations are typically used.
    • Start with an inventory of personal documents, compare and consolidate into the knowledge base, and ensure they are accurate and up to date.
    • Assign someone to review articles on a regular basis and flag for editing and archiving as the technical environment changes.
    • Supplement with vendor-provided or purchased content. Two options for purchased content include RightAnswers or Netformx.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Appeal to a broad audience. Use non-technical language whenever possible to help less technical readers. Identify error messages and use screenshots where it makes sense. Take advantage of social features like voting buttons to increase use.

    Optimize the service desk with a shift-left strategy

    • “Shift left” is a strategy which moves appropriate technical work to users through knowledge articles, automation and service catalogs, freeing up time for technicians to work on more complex issues.
    • Many organizations have built a great knowledge base but fail to see the value of it over time as it becomes overburdened with overlapping and out-of-date information. Knowledge capture, updating, and review must be embedded into your processes if you want to keep the knowledge base useful.
    • Similarly, the self-service portal is often deployed out of the box with little input from end users and fails to deliver its intended benefits. The portal needs to be designed from the end user’s point of view with the goal of self-resolution if it will serve its purpose of deflecting tickets.

    Cover image for 'Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Customer service isn’t just about friendliness

    Your team will all need to deal with end users at some point, and that may occur in times of high stress. Ensure the team has the skills they need to actively listen, stay positive, and de-escalate.

    Info-Tech’s customer service program is a modular approach to improve skills one area at a time. Delivering good customer service means being effective in these areas:
    • Customer focus – Focus on the customer and use a positive, caring, and helpful attitude.
    • Listening and verbal communication skills – Demonstrate empathy and patience, actively listen, and speak in user-friendly ways to help get your point across.
    • Written communication skills – Use appropriate tone, language, and terms in writing (whether via chat, email, or other).
    • Manage difficult situations – Remain calm and in control when dealing with difficult customers and situations.
    • Go the extra mile – Go beyond simply resolving the request to make each interaction positive and memorable.

    Deliver a customer service training program to your IT department

    • There’s a common misconception that customer service skills can’t be taught, so no effort is made to improve those skills.
    • Even when there is a desire to improve customer service, it’s hard for IT teams to make time for training and improvement when they’re too busy trying to keep up with tickets.
    • A talented service desk agent with both great technical and customer service skills doesn’t have to be a rare unicorn, and an agent without innate customer service skills isn’t a lost cause. Relevant and impactful customer service habits, techniques, and skills can be taught through practical, role-based training.
    • IT leaders can make time for this training through targeted, short modules along with continual on-the-job coaching and development.

    Cover image for 'Deliver Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Improve your ticket analysis

    Once you’ve got great data coming into the ticketing system, it’s important to rethink your metrics and determine if there are more insights to be found.

    Analyzing ticket data involves:
    • Collecting ticket data and keeping it clean. Based on the metrics you’re analyzing, define ticket expectations and keep the data up to date.
    • Showing the value of the service desk. SLAs are meaningless if they are not met consistently. The prerequisite to implementing proper SLAs is fully understanding the proper workload of the service desk.
    • Understanding – and improving – the user experience. You cannot improve the user experience without meaningful metrics that allow you to understand the user experience. Different user groups will have different needs and different expectations of the level of service. Your metrics should reflect those needs and expectations.

    Analyze your service desk ticket data

    Properly analyzing ticket data is challenging for the following reasons:
    • Poor ticket hygiene and unclear ticket handling
    • Service desk personnel are not sure where to start with analysis
    • Too many metrics are tracked to parse actionable data from the noise
    Ticket data won’t give you a silver bullet, but it can help point you in the right direction.

    Cover image for 'Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Start doing problem management

    Proactively focusing on root cause analysis will reduce the most disruptive incidents to the organization.

    • A focus on elimination of critical incidents and the more disruptive recurring incidents will reduce future workloads for the team and improve customer satisfaction.
    • This can be challenging when the team is already struggling with workload; however, setting a regular cadence to review tickets, looking for trends, and identifying at least one focus area a month can be a positive outcome for everyone.
    • Focus on the most impactful ticket or service first. The initial goal should be to reduce or eliminate critical and high-impact incidents. Once the high-stress situations are reduced, proactively scheduling the smaller but still time-consuming repeatable incidents can be done.
    • Where you have vendors involved, work with them to determine when root cause analysis must happen and where they’ll need to coordinate with your team or other supporting vendors.

    Problem management

    Problem management can be challenging because it requires skills and knowledge to go deep into a problem and troubleshoot the root cause of an issue, but it also requires uninterrupted time.
    • Problem management, however, can be taught, and the issue isn’t always hard to spot if you have time to look.
    • Using tried and true methods for walking through an issue step by step will enable the team to improve their investigative and troubleshooting skills.
    • Reduction of one or two major incidents and recurring incidents per month will pay off quickly in reducing reactive ticket volume and improve customer satisfaction.

    Cover image for 'Problem Management'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Create your roadmap with high-level requirements

    Determine what tasks and projects need to be completed to meet your improvement goals. Create a high-level project plan and balance with existing resources.

    Roadmap of high-level requirements with 'Goals' as row headers and their timelines mapped out across fiscal quarters.

    Bibliography

    Taylor, Sharon and Ivor Macfarlane. ITIL Small Scale Implementation. Office of Government Commerce, 2005.

    “Share, Collaborate, and Communicate on One Consistent Platform.” Liferay, n.d. Accessed 19 July 2022.

    Rodela, Jimmy. “A Beginner’s Guide to Customer Self-Service.” The Ascent, 18 May 2022. Web.

    IT Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}22|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}22|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}22|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $124,127
    • member rating average days saved: 37
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you may want to redesign your IT governance, Review our methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing this process.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}596|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Employee Development
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • Many organizations have introduced mentoring programs without clearly defining and communicating the purpose and goals around having a program; they simply jumped on the mentoring bandwagon.
    • As a result, these programs have little impact. They don’t add value for mentors, mentees, or the organization.
    • It can be difficult to design a program that is well-suited to your organization, will be adopted by employees, and will drive the results you are looking for.
    • In particular, it is difficult to successfully match mentors and mentees so both derive maximum value from the endeavor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • As workforce composition shifts, there is a need for mentoring programs to move beyond the traditional senior–junior format option; organizational culture and goals will dictate the best approach.
    • An organization’s mentoring program doesn’t need to be restricted to one format; individual preferences and goals should also factor in. Be open to choosing format on a case-by-case basis.
    • Be sure to gain upper management buy-in and support early to ensure mentoring becomes a valued part of your organization.
    • Ensure that goal setting, communication, ongoing support for participants, and evaluation all play a role in your mentoring program.

    Impact and Result

    • Mentoring can have a significant positive impact on mentor, mentee, and organization.
    • Mentees gain guidance and advice on their career path and skill development. Mentors often experience re-engagement with their job and the satisfaction of helping another person.
    • Mentoring participants benefit from obtaining different perspectives of both the business and work-related problems. Participation in a mentoring program has been linked to greater access to promotions, pay raises, and increased job satisfaction.
    • Mentoring can have a number of positive outcomes for the organization, including breaking down silos, transferring institutional knowledge, accelerating leadership skills, fostering open communication and dialogue, and resolving conflict.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align the mentoring program with the organizational culture and goals

    Build a best-fit program that creates a learning culture.

    • Storyboard: Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High Performing Learning Organization

    2. Assess the organizational culture and current mentoring program

    Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    • Mentoring Program Diagnostic

    3. Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    Track project progress and have all program details defined in a central location.

    • Mentoring Project Plan Template
    • Peer Mentoring Guidelines
    • Mentoring Program Guidelines

    4. Gather feedback from the mentoring program participants

    Evaluate the success of the program.

    • Mentoring Project Feedback Surveys Template

    5. Get mentoring agreements in place

    Improve your mentoring capabilities.

    • Mentee Preparation Checklist
    • Mentoring Agreement Template
    [infographic]

    Run Better Meetings

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}287|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Voice & Video Management
    • Parent Category Link: /voice-video-management

    Your newly hybrid workplace will include virtual, hybrid, and physical meetings, presenting several challenges:

    • The experience for onsite and remote attendees is not equal.
    • Employees are experiencing meeting and video fatigue.
    • Meeting rooms are not optimized for hybrid meetings.
    • The fact is that many people have not successfully run hybrid meetings before.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Successful hybrid workplace plans must include planning around hybrid meetings. Seamless hybrid meetings are the result of thoughtful planning and documented best practices.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify your current state and the root cause of unsatisfactory meetings.
    • Review and identify meetings best practices around meeting roles, delivery models, and training.
    • Improve the technology that supports meetings.
    • Use Info-Tech’s quick checklists and decision flowchart to accelerate meeting planning and cover your bases.

    Run Better Meetings Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should run better meetings, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the current state of meetings

    Understand the problem before you try to fix it. Before you can improve meetings, you need to understand what your norms and challenges currently are.

    • Checklist: Run a Virtual or Hybrid Meeting

    2. Publish best practices for how meetings should run

    Document meeting roles, expectations, and how meetings should run. Decide what kind of meeting delivery model to use and develop a training program.

    • Meeting Challenges and Best Practices
    • Meeting Type Decision Flowchart (Visio)
    • Meeting Type Decision Flowchart (PDF)

    3. Improve meeting technology

    Always be consulting with users: early in the process to set a benchmark, during and after every meeting to address immediate concerns, and quarterly to identify trends and deeper issues.

    • Team Charter
    • Communications Guide Poster Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Run Better Meetings

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Current State of Meetings

    The Purpose

    Understand the current state of meetings in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    What you need to keep doing and what you need to change

    Activities

    1.1 Brainstorm meeting types.

    1.2 Document meeting norms.

    1.3 Document and categorize meeting challenges.

    Outputs

    Documented challenges with meetings

    Meeting norms

    Desired changes to meeting norms

    2 Review and Identify Best Practices

    The Purpose

    Review and implement meeting best practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined meeting best practices for your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Document meeting roles and expectations.

    2.2 Review common meeting challenges and identify best practices.

    2.3 Document when to use a hybrid meeting, virtual meeting, or an in-person meeting.

    2.4 Develop a training program.

    Outputs

    Meeting roles and expectations

    List of meeting best practices

    Guidelines to help workers choose between a hybrid, virtual, or in-person meeting

    Training plan for meetings

    3 Improve Meeting Technology

    The Purpose

    Identify opportunities to improve meeting technology.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A strategy for improving the underlying technologies and meeting spaces

    Activities

    3.1 Empower virtual meeting attendees.

    3.2 Optimize spaces for hybrid meetings.

    3.3 Build a team of meeting champions.

    3.4 Iterate to build and improve meeting technology.

    3.5 Guide users toward each technology.

    Outputs

    Desired improvements to meeting rooms and meeting technology

    Charter for the team of meeting champions

    Communications Guide Poster

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}195|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize the organization’s ability to respond to risk.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establish a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Drive a risk-aware organization toward innovation and consider alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Research & Tools

    Integrated Risk Management Capstone – A framework for how IT risks can be integrated into your organization’s enterprise risk management program to enable strategic risk-informed decisions.

    This is a capstone blueprint highlighting the benefits of an integrated risk management program that uses risk information and data to inform strategic decision making. Throughout this research you will gain insight into the five core elements of integrating risk through assessing, governing, defining the program, defining the process, and implementing.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Capstone
    • Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    • Risk Register Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    Don’t fear IT risks, integrate them.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Having siloed risks is risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Petar Hristov Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance.
    Petar Hristov
    Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Ian Mulholland Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance.
    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Every organization has a threshold for risk that should not be exceeded, whether that threshold is defined or not.

    In the age of digital, information and technology will undoubtedly continue to expand beyond the confines of the IT department. As such, different areas of the organization cannot address these risks in silos. A siloed approach will produce different ways of identifying, assessing, responding to, and reporting on risk events. Integrated risk management is about embedding IT uncertainty to inform good decision making across the organization.

    When risk is integrated into the organization's enterprise risk management program, it enables a single view of all risks and the potential impact of each risk event. More importantly, it provides a consistent view of the risk event in relation to uncertainty that might have once been seemingly unrelated to IT.

    And all this can be achieved while remaining within the enterprise’s clearly defined risk appetite.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Most organizations fail to integrate IT risks into enterprise risks:

    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Common Obstacles

    IT leaders have to overcome these obstacles when it comes to integrating risk:

    • Making business leaders aware of, involved in, and able to respond to all enterprise risks.
    • A lack of data or information being used to support a holistic risk management process.
    • A low level of enterprise risk maturity.
    • A lack of risk management capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By leveraging the Info-Tech Integrated Risk approach, your business can better address and embed risk by:

    • Understanding gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establishing a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Driving a risk-aware organization toward innovation and considering alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Helping integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize its ability to respond to risk.

    What is integrated risk management?

    • Integrated risk management is the process of ensuring all forms of risk information, including information and technology, are considered and included in the enterprise’s risk management strategy.
    • It removes the siloed approach to classifying risks related to specific departments or areas of the organization, recognizing that each of those risks is a threat to the overarching enterprise.
    • Aggregating the different threats or uncertainty that might exist within an organization allows for informed decisions to be made that align to strategic goals and continue to drive value back to the business.
    • By holistically considering the different risks, the organization can make informed decisions on the best course of action that will reduce any negative impacts associated with the uncertainty and increase the overall value.

    Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)

    • IT
    • Security
    • Digital
    • Vendor/Third Party
    • Other

    Enterprise risk management is the practice of identifying and addressing risks to your organization and using risk information to drive better decisions and better opportunities.

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Your challenge

    Embedding IT risks into the enterprise risk management program is challenging because:

    • Most organizations classify risks based on the departments or areas of the business where the uncertainty is likely to happen.
    • Unnecessary expectations are placed on the IT department to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Risks are often only identified when conducting due diligence for a project or ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.

    Risk-mature organizations have a unique benefit in that they often have established an overarching governance framework and embedded risk awareness into the culture.

    35% — Only 35% of organizations had embraced ERM in 2020. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    12% — Only 12% of organizations are leveraging risk as a tool to their strategic advantage. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make integrating IT risks difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT risks are not seen as enterprise risks.
    • The organization’s culture toward risk is not defined.
    • The organization’s appetite and threshold for risk are not defined.
    • Each area of the organization has a different method of identifying, assessing, and responding to risk events.
    • Access to reliable and informative data to support risk management is difficult to obtain.
    • Leadership does not see the business value of integrating risk into a single management program.
    • The organization’s attitudes and behaviors toward risk contradict the desired and defined risk culture.
    • Skills, training, and resources to support risk management are lacking, let alone those to support integrated risk management.

    Integrating risks has its challenges

    62% — Accessing and disseminating information is the main challenge for 62% of organizations maturing their organizational risk management. (Source: OECD)

    20-28% — Organizations with access to machine learning and analytics to address future risk events have 20 to 28% more satisfaction. (Source: Accenture)

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in Enterprise Risk Management.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside Risk Focus

    A diagram titled 'Risk and Controls' beginning with 'Possible Sources' and a list of sources, 'Control Activities' to prevent, the 'RISK EVENT', 'Recovery Activities' to recover, and 'Possible Repercussions' with a list of ramifications.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside and Upside Risk

    Third-Party Risk Example

    Example of a third-party risk mapped onto the diagram on the previous slide, but with potential upsides mapped out as well. The central risk event is 'Vendor exposes private customer data'. Possible Sources of the downside are 'External Attack' with likelihood prevention method 'Define security standard requirements for vendor assessment' and 'Exfiltration of data through fourth-party staff' with likelihood prevention method 'Ensure data is properly classified'. Possible Sources of the upside are 'Application rationalization' with likelihood optimization method 'Reduce number of applications in environment' and 'Review vendor assessment practices' with likelihood optimization method 'Improve vendor onboarding'. Possible Repercussions on the downside are 'Organization unable to operate in jurisdiction' with impact minimization method 'Engage in-house risk mitigation responses' and 'Fines levied against organization' with impact minimization method 'Report incident to any regulators'. Possible Repercussions on the upside are 'Easier vendor integration and management' with impact utilization method 'Improved vendor onboarding practices' and 'Able to bid on contracts with these requirements' with impact utilization method 'Vendors must provide attestations (e.g. SOC or CMMC)'.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight

    Stop fearing risk – integrate it. Integration leads to opportunities for organizations to embrace innovation and new digital technologies as well as reducing operational costs and simplifying reporting.

    Govern risk strategically

    Governance of risk management for information- and technology-related events is often misplaced. Just because it's classified as an IT risk does not mean it shouldn’t be owned by the board or business executive.

    Assess risk maturity

    Integrating risk requires a baseline of risk maturity at the enterprise level. IT can push integrating risks, but only if the enterprise is willing to adopt the attitudes and behaviors that will drive the integrated risk approach.

    Manage risk

    It is not a strategic decision to have different areas of the organization manage the risks perceived to be in their department. It’s the easy choice, but not the strategic one.

    Implement risk management

    Different areas of an enterprise apply risk management processes differently. Determining a single method for identification, assessment, response, and monitoring can ensure successful implementation of enterprise risk management.

    Tactical insight

    Good risk management will consider both the positives and negatives associated with a risk management program by recognizing both the upside and downside of risk event impact and likelihood.

    Integrated risk benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT executives have a responsibility but not accountability when it comes to risk. Ensure the right business stakeholders have awareness and ability to make informed risk decisions.
    • Controls and responses to risks that are within the “IT” realm will be funded and provided with sufficient support from the business.
    • The business respects and values the role of IT in supporting the enterprise risk program, elevating its role into business partner.

    Business Benefits

    • Business executives and boards can make informed responses to the various forms of risk, including those often categorized as “IT risks.”
    • The compounding severity of risks can be formally assessed and ideally quantified to provide insight into how risks’ ramifications can change based on scenarios.
    • Risk-informed decisions can be used to optimize the business and drive it toward adopting innovation as a response to risk events.
    • Get your organization insured against cybersecurity threats at the lowest premiums possible.

    Measure the value of integrating risk

    • Reduce Operating Costs

      • Organizations can reduce their risk operating costs by 20 to 30% by adopting enterprise-wide digital risk initiatives (McKinsey & Company).
    • Increase Cybersecurity Threat Preparedness

      • Increase the organization’s preparedness for cybersecurity threats. 79% of organizations that were impacted by email threats in 2020 were not prepared for the hit (Diligent)
    • Increase Risk Management’s Impact to Drive Strategic Value

      • Currently, only 3% of organizations are extensively using risk management to drive their unique competitive advantage, compared to 35% of companies who do not use it at all (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management).
    • Reduce Lost Productivity for the Enterprise

      • Among small businesses, 76% are still not considering purchasing cyberinsurance in 2021, despite the fact that ransomware attacks alone cost Canadian businesses $5.1 billion in productivity in 2020 (Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021).

    “31% of CIO’s expected their role to expand and include risk management responsibilities.” (IDG “2021 State of the CIO,” 2021)

    Make integrated risk management sustainable

    58%

    Focus not just on the preventive risk management but also the value-creating opportunities. With 58% of organizations concerned about disruptive technology, it’s an opportunity to take the concern and transform it into innovation. (Accenture)

    70%

    Invest in tools that have data and analytics features. Currently, “gut feelings” or “experience” inform the risk management decisions for 70% of late adopters. (Clear Risk)

    54%

    Align to the strategic vision of the board and CEO, given that these two roles account for 54% of the accountability associated with extended enterprise risk management. (Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020,” Deloitte)

    63%

    Include IT leaders in the risk committee to help informed decision making. Currently 63% of chief technology officers are included in the C‑suite risk committee. (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management)

    Successful adoption of integrated risk management is often associated with these key elements.

    Assessment

    Assess your organization’s method of addressing risk management to determine if integrated risk is possible

    Assessing the organization’s risk maturity

    Mature or not, integrated risk management should be a consideration for all organizations

    The first step to integrating risk management within the enterprise is to understand the organization’s readiness to adopt practices that will enable it to successfully integrate information.

    In 2021, we saw enterprise risk management assessments become one of the most common trends, particularly as a method by which the organization can consolidate the potential impacts of uncertainties or threats (Lawton, 2021). A major driver for this initiative was the recognition that information and technology not only have enterprise-wide impacts on the organization’s risk management but that IT has a critical role in supporting processes that enable effective access to data/information.

    A maturity assessment has several benefits for an organization: It ensures there is alignment throughout the organization on why integrated risk is the right approach to take, it recognizes the organization’s current risk maturity, and it supports the organization in defining where it would like to go.

    Pie chart titled 'Organizational Risk Management Maturity Assessment Results' showing just under half 'Progressing', a third 'Established', a seventh 'Emerging', and a very small portion 'Leading or Aspirational'.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understand the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Maturity should inform your approach to risk management

    The outcome of the risk maturity assessment should inform how risk management is approached within the organization.

    A row of waves starting light and small and becoming taller and darker in steps. The levels are 'Non-existent', 'Basic', 'Partially Integrated', 'Mostly Integrated', 'Fully Integrated', and 'Optimized'.

    For organizations with a low maturity, remaining superficial with risk will offer more benefits and align to the enterprise’s risk tolerance and appetite. This might mean no integrated risk is taking place.

    However, organizations that have higher risk maturity should begin to integrate risk information. These organizations can identify the nuances that would affect the severity and impact of risk events.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organization.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    Identify and Manage Regulatory and Compliance Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}366|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    More than at any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

    It is increasingly likely that one of your vendors, or their n-party support vendors, will fall out of regulatory compliance. Therefore, organizations must protect themselves by creating better mechanisms to hold their n-party vendors accountable and validate that they comply.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential regulatory impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect operations.
    • Organizational leadership is often taken unaware by changes, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant regulatory upheavals.

    Impact and Result

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks with our Regulatory Risk Impact Tool to manage potential impacts.

    Identify and Manage Regulatory and Compliance Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Regulatory and Compliance Risk Impacts to Your Organization Storyboard – Use the research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions to your brand reputation.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential regulatory impacts caused by vendors. Use Info-Tech's approach to look at the regulatory impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Regulatory and Compliance Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. Regulatory Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the operational impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Regulatory Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    It is easier for prospective clients to find out what you did wrong than that you fixed the issue.

    Analyst perspective

    Organizations must understand the regulatory damage vendors may cause from lack of compliance.

    Frank Sewell.

    The sheer number of regulations on the international market is immense, ever-changing, and make it almost impossible for any organization to consistently keep up with compliance.

    As regulatory enforcement increases, organizations must hold their vendors accountable for compliance through ongoing monitoring and validation of regulatory compliance to the relevant standards in their industries, or face increasing penalties for non-compliance.

    Frank Sewell,

    Research Director, Vendor Management

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    More than at any previous time, our world is changing rapidly. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

    It is increasingly likely that one of your vendors, or their n-party support vendors, will fall out of regulatory compliance. Organizations must protect themselves by creating better mechanisms to hold their n-party vendors accountable and validate that they comply.

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential regulatory impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect operations.

    Organizational leadership is often taken unaware by changes, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant regulatory upheavals.

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks with our Regulatory Risk Impact Tool to manage potential impacts.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to regulatory changes in the global market. Ongoing monitoring of the vendors who must comply with industry and governmental regulations is crucial to avoiding penalties and maintaining your regulatory compliance.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    The image contains a cube that is divided into 6 asymmetrical to highlight the six components of vendor risk. Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance, Financial, Reputational, Operational.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of Scope:

    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Regulatory and Compliance risk impacts

    Potential losses to the organization due regulatory and compliance incidents.

    • In this blueprint we’ll:
      • Explore regulatory and compliance risks and their impacts.
      • Identify potentially disruptive events to assess the overall impact on organizations and implement adaptive measures to identify, manage, and monitor vendor performance.

    The image contains a cube that is divided into 6 asymmetrical to highlight the six components of vendor risk. Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance, Financial, Reputational, Operational. Regulatory & Compliance is highlighted on the cube.

    The world is constantly changing

    The IT market is constantly reacting to global influences. By anticipating changes, leaders can set expectations and work with their vendors to accommodate them and avoid penalties.

    When the unexpected happens, being able to adapt quickly to new priorities and regulations ensures continued long-term business success.

    Below are some things no one expected to happen in the last few years:

    45%

    Have no visibility into their upstream supply chain, or they can only see as far as their first-tier suppliers.

    2022 McKinsey

    61%

    Of compliance officers expect to increase investment in their compliance function over the next two years.

    2022 Accenture

    $770k+

    Breaches involving third-party vendors cost more on average.

    2022 HIT Consultant.net

    Regulatory Compliance

    Consider implementing vendor management initiatives and practices in your organization to help gain compliance with your expanding vendor landscape.

    Your organizational risks may be monitored but are your n-party vendors?

    The image contains a cube that is divided into 6 asymmetrical to highlight the six components of vendor risk. Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance, Financial, Reputational, Operational.

    Review your expectations with your vendors and hold them accountable.

    Regulatory entities are looking beyond your organization’s internal compliance these days. More and more they are diving into your third-party and downstream relationships, particularly as awareness of downstream breaches increases globally.

    • Are you assessing your vendors regularly?
    • Are you validating those assessments?
    • Do your vendors have a map of their downstream support vendors?
    • Do they have the mechanisms to hold those downstream vendors accountable to your standards?

    Regulatory Guidance and Industry Standards

    Are you confident your vendors meet your standards?

    Identify and manage regulatory and compliance risks

    Environmental, Social, Governance (ESG)
    Regulatory agencies are putting more enforcement on ESG practices across the globe. As a result, organizations will need to monitor the changing regulations and validate that their vendors and n-party support vendors are adhering to these regulations, or face penalties for non-compliance.

    Data Protection
    Data Protection remains an issue in the world. Organizations should ensure that the data their vendors obtain remains protected throughout the vendor’s lifecycle, including post-termination. Otherwise, they could be monitoring for a data breach in perpetuity.

    Mergers and Acquisitions
    More prominent vendors continuously buy smaller companies to control the market in the IT industry. Therefore, organizations should put protections in their contracts to ensure that an IT vendor’s acquisition does not put them in a relationship with someone that could cause them an issue.

    What to look for

    Identify regulatory and compliance risk impacts.

    • Is there a record of complaints against the vendor from their employees or customers?
    • Has the vendor been cited for regulatory compliance issues in the past?
    • Does the vendor have a comprehensive list of their n-party vendor partners?
      • Are they willing to accept appropriate contractual protections regarding them?
    • Does the vendor self-audit, or do they use a vetted third-party audit firm to issue a SOC report annually?
    • Does the vendor operate in regions known for regulatory violations?
    • Is the vendor willing to make concessions on contractual protections, or are they only offering “one-sided” agreements with “as-is” warranties?

    Prepare your vendor risk management for success

    Due diligence will enable successful outcomes.

    1. Obtain top-level buy-in; it is critical to success.
    2. Build enterprise risk management (ERM) through incremental improvement.
    3. Focus initial efforts on the “big wins” to prove the process works.
    4. Use existing resources.
    5. Build on any risk management activities that already exist in the organization.
    6. Socialize ERM throughout the organization to gain additional buy‑in.
    7. Normalize the process long term, with ongoing updates and continuing education for the organization.

    (Adapted from COSO)

    How to assess third-party risk

    1. Review Organizational Regulations
    2. Understand the organization’s regulatory risks to prepare for the “What If” game exercise.

    3. Identify & Understand Potential Regulatory-Compliance Risks
    4. Play the “What If” game with the right people at the table.

    5. Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership
    6. Pull all the information together in a presentation document.

    7. Validate the Risks
    8. Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.

    9. Plan to Manage the Risks
    10. Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.

    11. Communicate the Plan
    12. It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.

    13. Enact the Plan
    14. Once the plan is finalized and socialized, put it in place with continued monitoring for success.

    Adapted from Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance

    Insight summary

    Regulatory risk impacts often come from unexpected places and have significant consequences. Knowing who your vendors are using for their support and supply chain could be crucial in eliminating the risk of non-compliance for your organization. Having a plan to identify and validate the regulatory compliance of your vendors is a must for any organization, to avoid penalties.

    Insight 1

    Organizations fail to plan for vendor acquisitions appropriately.

    Vendors routinely get acquired in the IT space. Does your organization have appropriate safeguards from inadvertently entering a negative relationship? Do you have plans around replacing critical vendors purchased in such a manner?

    Insight 2

    Organizations often fail to understand how n-party vendors could place them in non-compliance.

    Even if you know your complete third-party vendor landscape, you may not be aware of the downstream vendors in play. Ensure that you get visibility into this space as well and hold your direct vendors accountable for the actions of their vendors.

    Insight 3

    Organizations need to know where their data lives and ensure it is protected.

    Make sure you know which vendors are accessing/storing your data, where they are keeping it, and that you can get it back and have the vendors destroy it when the relationship is over. Without adequate protection throughout the lifecycle of the vendor, you could be monitoring for breaches in perpetuity.

    Identifying regulatory and compliance risks

    Who should be included in the discussion.

    • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make informed decisions.
    • Getting input from regulatory risk experts within your organization will enhance your long-term potential for successful compliance.
    • Involving those who not only directly manage vendors but also understand your regulatory requirements will aid in determining the path forward for relationships with your current vendors, and identifying new emerging potential partners.

    See the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Review your risk management plans for new risks on a regular basis.

    Keep in mind Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).

    Impact (I) tends to remain the same, while Likelihood (L) is becoming closer to 100% as threat actors become more prevalent

    Managing vendor regulatory and compliance risk impacts

    How could your vendors fall out of compliance?

    • Review vendors’ downstream connections to understand thoroughly with whom you are in business.
      • Monitor their regulatory stance as it could reflect on your organization.
    • Institute proper vendor lifecycle management.
      • Make sure to follow corporate due diligence and risk assessment policies and procedures.
      • Failure to consistently do so is a recipe for disaster.
    • Develop IT risk governance and change control.
    • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
      • Regularly review your regulatory requirements for new and changing risks.
    • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
      • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time, and adjust your plans accordingly.

    Organizations must review their regulatory risk appetite and tolerance levels, considering their complete landscape.

    Changing regulations, acquisitions, and events that affect global supply chains are current realities, not unlikely scenarios.

    Ongoing Improvement

    Incorporating lessons learned.

    • Over time, despite everyone’s best observations and plans, incidents will catch us off guard.
    • When it happens, follow your incident response plans and act accordingly.
    • An essential step is to document what worked and what did not – collectively known as the “lessons learned.”
    • Use the lessons learned document to devise, incorporate, and enact a better risk management process.

    Sometimes disasters occur despite our best plans to manage them.

    When this happens, it is important to document the lessons learned and update our plans.

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible adverse outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Regulatory Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potentials but manage the overall process to keep the discussion pertinent and on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts (SMEs) for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.
    Input Output
    • List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by regulatory-compliance impact
    • List of potential mitigations of the scenarios to reduce the risk
    • Comprehensive regulatory risk profile on the specific vendor solution
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Regulatory Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion
    • Vendor Management – Coordinator
    • Organizational Leadership
    • Operations Experts (SMEs)
    • Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager

    High risk example from tool

    The image contains a screenshot demonstrating high risk example from the tool.

    How to mitigate:

    Contractually insist that the vendor have a third-party security audit performed annually, with the stipulation that they will not denigrate below your acceptable standards.

    Note: Even though a few items are “scored” they have not been added to the overall weight, signaling that the company has noted but does not necessarily hold them against the vendor.

    Low risk example from tool

    The image contains a screenshot demonstrating low risk example from the tool.

    Summary

    Seek to understand all regulatory requirements to obtain compliance.

    • Organizations need to understand and map out their entire vendor landscape.
    • Understand where all your data lives and how you can control it throughout the vendor lifecycle.
    • Those organizations that consistently follow their established risk assessment and due diligence processes are better positioned to avoid penalties.
    • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks in the market and your organization.
    • Incorporate “lessons learned” from prior incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.

    Keeping up with the ever-changing regulations can make compliance a difficult task.

    Organizations should increase the resources dedicated to monitoring these regulations as agencies continue to hold them more accountable.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is easier for prospective clients to find out what you did wrong than that you fixed the issue.


    Bibliography

    Alicke, Knut, et al. "Taking the pulse of shifting supply chains", McKinsey & Company, August 26th 2022. Accessed October 31st
    Regan, Samantha, et al. "Can compliance keep up with warp-speed Change?", accenture, May 18th 2022. Accessed Oct 31st 2022.
    Feria, Nathalie, and Rosenberg, Daniel. "Mitigating Healthcare Cyber Risk Through Vendor Management", HIT Consultant, October 17th 2022. Accessed Oct 31st 2022.
    Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 23 Aug. 2012.
    Frigo, Mark L., and Richard J. Anderson. “Embracing Enterprise Risk Management: Practical Approaches for Getting Started.” COSO, 2011.

    Select a Security Outsourcing Partner

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}246|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $13,739 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • Most organizations do not have a clear understanding of their current security posture, their security goals, and the specific security services they require. Without a clear understanding of their needs, organizations may struggle to identify a partner that can meet their requirements.
    • Breakdowns and lack of communication can be a significant obstacle, especially when clear lines of communication with partners, including regular check-ins, reporting, and incident response protocols, have not been clearly established.
    • Ensuring that security partners’ systems and processes integrate seamlessly with existing systems can be a challenge for most organizations in addition to making sure that security partners have the necessary access and permissions to perform their services effectively.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You can outsource your responsibilities but not your accountability.
    • Be aware that in most cases, the traditional approach is more profitable to MSSPs, and they may push you toward one, so make sure you get the service you want, not what they prescribe.

    Impact and Result

    • Determine which security responsibilities can be outsourced and which should be insourced and the right procedure to outsourcing to gain cost savings, improve resource allocation, and boost your overall security posture.

    Select a Security Outsourcing Partner Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Select a Security Outsourcing Partner Storyboard – A guide to help you determine your requirements and select and manage your security outsourcing partner.

    Our systematic approach will ensure that the correct procedure for selecting a security outsourcing partner is implemented. This blueprint will help you build and implement your security policy program by following our three-phase methodology: determine what to outsource, select the right MSSP, and manage your MSSP.

    • Select a Security Outsourcing Partner – Phases 1-3

    2. MSSP RFP Template – A customizable template to help you choose the right security service provider.

    This modifiable template is designed to introduce consistency and outline key requirements during the request for proposal phase of selecting an MSSP.

    • MSSP RFP Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Select a Security Outsourcing Partner

    Outsource the right functions to secure your business.

    Analyst Perspective

    Understanding your security needs and remaining accountable is the key to selecting the right partner.

    The need for specialized security services is fast becoming a necessity to most organizations. However, resource challenges will always mean that organizations will still have to take practical measures to ensure that the time, quality, and service that they require from outsourcing partners have been carefully crafted and packaged to elicit the right services that cover all their needs and requirements.

    Organizations must ensure that security partners are aligned not only with their needs and requirements, but also with the corporate culture. Rather than introducing hindrances to daily operations, security partners must support business goals and protect the organization’s interests at all times.

    And as always, outsource only your responsibilities and do not outsource your accountability, as that will cost you in the long run.

    Photo of Danny Hammond
    Danny Hammond
    Research Analyst
    Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    A lack of high-skill labor increases the cost of internal security, making outsourcing more appealing.

    A lack of time and resources prevents your organization from being able to enable security internally.

    Due to a lack of key information on the subject, you are unsure which functions should be outsourced versus which functions should remain in-house.

    Having 24/7/365 monitoring in-house is not feasible for most firms.

    There is difficulty measuring the effectiveness of managed security service providers (MSSPs).

    Common Obstacles

    InfoSec leaders will struggle to select the right outsourcing partner without knowing what the organization needs, such as:

    • How to start the process to select the right service provider that will cover your security needs. With so many service providers and technology tools in this field, who is the right partner?
    • Where to obtain guidance on externalization of resources or maintaining internal posture to enable to you confidently select an outsourcing partner.

    InfoSec leaders must understand the business environment and their own internal security needs before they can select an outsourcing partner that fits.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s Select a Security Outsourcing Partner takes a multi-faceted approach to the problem that incorporates foundational technical elements, compliance considerations, and supporting processes:

    • Determine which security responsibilities can be insourced and which should be outsourced, and the right procedure to outsourcing in order to gain cost savings, improve resource allocation, and boost your overall security posture.
    • Understand the current landscape of MSSPs that are available today and the features they offer.
    • Highlight the future financial obligations of outsourcing vs. insourcing to explain which method is the most cost-effective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Mitigate security risks by developing an end-to-end process that ensures you are outsourcing your responsibilities and not your accountability.

    Your Challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations select an effective security outsourcing partner.

    • A security outsourcing partner is a third-party service provider that offers security services on a contractual basis depending on client needs and requirements.
    • An effective outsourcing partner can help an organization improve its security posture by providing access to more specialized security experts, tools, and technologies.
    • One of the main challenges with selecting a security outsourcing partner is finding a partner that is a good fit for the organization's unique security needs and requirements.
    • Security outsourcing partners typically have access to sensitive information and systems, so proper controls and safeguards must be in place to protect all sensitive assets.
    • Without careful evaluation and due diligence to ensure that the partner is a good fit for the organization's security needs and requirements, it can be challenging to select an outsourcing partner.

    Outsourcing is effective, but only if done right

    • 83% of decision makers with in-house cybersecurity teams are considering outsourcing to an MSP (Syntax, 2021).
    • 77% of IT leaders said cyberattacks were more frequent (Syntax, 2021).
    • 51% of businesses suffered a data breach caused by a third party (Ponemon, 2021).

    Common Obstacles

    The problem with selecting an outsourcing partner isn’t a lack of qualified partners, it’s the lack of clarity about an organization's specific security needs.

    • Most organizations do not have a clear understanding of their current security posture, their security goals, and the specific security services they require. Without a clear understanding of their needs, organizations may struggle to identify a partner that can meet their requirements.
    • Breakdowns and lack of communication can be a significant obstacle, especially when clear lines of communication with partners, including regular check-ins, reporting, and incident response protocols, have not been clearly established.
    • Ensuring that security partner's systems and processes integrate seamlessly with existing systems can be a challenge for most organizations. This is in addition to making sure that security partners have the necessary access and permissions to perform their services effectively.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users, as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.

    A diagram that shows Average cost of a data breach from 2019 to 2022.
    Source: IBM, 2022 Cost of a Data Breach; N=537.


    Reaching an all-time high, the cost of a data breach averaged US$4.35 million in 2022. This figure represents a 2.6% increase from 2021, when the average cost of a breach was US$4.24 million. The average cost has climbed 12.7% since 2020.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for selecting a security outsourcing partner

    Determine your responsibilities

    Determine what responsibilities you can outsource to a service partner. Analyze which responsibilities you should outsource versus keep in-house? Do you require a service partner based on identified responsibilities?

    Scope your requirements

    Refine the list of role-based requirements, variables, and features you will require. Use a well-known list of critical security controls as a framework to determine these activities and send out RFPs to pick the best candidate for your organization.

    Manage your outsourcing program

    Adopt a program to manage your third-party service security outsourcing. Trust your managed security service providers (MSSP) but verify their results to ensure you get the service level you were promised.

    Select a Security Outsourcing Partner

    A diagram that shows your organization responsibilities & accountabilities, framework for selecting a security outsourcing partner, and benefits.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT/InfoSec Benefits

    Reduces complexity within the MSSP selection process by highlighting all the key steps to a successful selection program.

    Introduces a roadmap to clearly educate about the do’s and don’ts of MSSP selection.

    Reduces costs and efforts related to managing MSSPs and other security partners.

    Business Benefits

    Assists with selecting outsourcing partners that are essential to your organization’s objectives.

    Integrates outsourcing into corporate culture, leveraging organizational requirements while maximizing value of outsourcing.

    Reduces security outsourcing risk.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight: You can outsource your responsibilities but not your accountability.

    Determine what to outsource: Assess your responsibilities to determine which ones you can outsource. It is vital that an understanding of how outsourcing will affect the organization, and what cost savings, if any, to expect from outsourcing is clear in order to generate a list of responsibilities that can/should be outsourced.

    Select the right partner: Create a list of variables to evaluate the MSSPs and determine which features are important to you. Evaluate all potential MSSPs and determine which one is right for your organization

    Manage your MSSP: Align the MSSP to your organization. Adopt a program to monitor the MSSP which includes a long-term strategy to manage the MSSP.

    Identifying security needs and requirements = Effective outsourcing program: Understanding your own security needs and requirements is key. Ensure your RFP covers the entire scope of your requirements; work with your identified partner on updates and adaptation, where necessary; and always monitor alignment to business objectives.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Phase

    Purpose

    Measured Value

    Determine what to outsource Understand the value in outsourcing and determining what responsibilities can be outsourced. Cost of determining what you can/should outsource:
    • 120 FTE hours at $90K per year = $5,400
    Cost of determining the savings from outsourcing vs. insourcing:
    • 120 FTE hours at $90K per year = $5,400
    Select the right partner Select an outsourcing partner that will have the right skill set and solution to identified requirements. Cost of ranking and selecting your MSSPs:
    • 160 FTE hours at $90K per year = $7,200
    Cost of creating and distributing RFPs:
    • 200 FTE hours at $90K per year = $9,000
    Manage your third-party service security outsourcing Use Info-Tech’s methodology and best practices to manage the MSSP to get the best value. Cost of creating and implementing a metrics program to manage the MSSP:
    • 80 FTE hours at $90K per year = $3,600

    After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.

    Overall Impact: 8.9 /10

    Overall Average Cost Saved: $22,950

    Overall Average Days Saved: 9

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation
    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop
    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting
    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}124|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,846 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 23 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Data architecture involves many moving pieces requiring coordination to provide greatest value from data.
    • Data architects are at the center of this turmoil and must be able to translate high-level business requirements into specific instructions for data workers using complex data models.
    • Data architects must account for the constantly growing data and application complexity, more demanding needs from the business, an ever-increasing number of data sources, and a growing need to integrate components to ensure that performance isn’t compromised.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Data architecture needs to evolve with the changing business landscape. There are four common business drivers that put most pressure on archaic architectures. As a result, the organization’s architecture must be flexible and responsive to changing business needs.
    • Data architecture is not just about models. Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to structurally unsound data that does not serve the business.
    • Data is used differently across the layers of an organization’s data architecture, and the capabilities needed to optimize use of data change with it. Architecting and managing data from source to warehousing to presentation requires different tactics for optimal use.

    Impact and Result

    • Have a framework in place to identify the appropriate solution for the challenge at hand. Our three-phase practical approach will help you build a custom and modernized data architecture.
      • Identify and prioritize the business drivers in which data architecture changes would create the largest overall benefit, and determine the corresponding data architecture tiers that need to be addressed.
      • Discover the best-practice trends, measure your current state, and define the targets for your data architecture tactics.
      • Build a cohesive and personalized roadmap for restructuring your data architecture. Manage your decisions and resulting changes.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should optimize its data architecture as it evolves with the drivers of the business to get the most from its data.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prioritize your data architecture with business-driven tactics

    Identify the business drivers that necessitate data architecture improvements, then create a tactical plan for optimization.

    • Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – Phase 1: Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics
    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template

    2. Personalize your tactics to optimize your data architecture

    Analyze how you stack up to Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model to uncover your tactical plan, and discover groundbreaking data architecture trends and how you can fit them into your action plan.

    • Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – Phase 2: Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    3. Create your tactical data architecture roadmap

    Optimize your data architecture by following tactical initiatives and managing the resulting change brought on by those optimization activities.

    • Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – Phase 3: Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap
    • Data Architecture Decision Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify the Drivers of the Business for Optimizing Data Architecture

    The Purpose

    Explain approach and value proposition.

    Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data architecture.

    Understand Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.

    Determine the pattern of tactics that apply to the organization for optimization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the current data architecture landscape.

    Priorities for tactical initiatives in the data architecture practice are identified.

    Target state for the data quality practice is defined.

    Activities

    1.1 Explain approach and value proposition.

    1.2 Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data architecture.

    1.3 Understand Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.

    1.4 Determine the pattern of tactics that apply to the organization for optimization.

    Outputs

    Five-tier logical data architecture model

    Data architecture tactic plan

    2 Determine Your Tactics For Optimizing Data Architecture

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives.

    Define a data architecture improvement strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gaps, inefficiencies, and opportunities in the data architecture practice are identified.

    Activities

    2.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap.

    2.2 Develop subject area project scope.

    2.3 Subject area 1: data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, business analysis

    Outputs

    Business unit prioritization roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data lineage diagram

    3 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives.

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined.

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy.

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives.

    Activities

    3.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap.

    3.2 Develop subject area project scope.

    3.3 Subject area 1: data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, business analysis.

    Outputs

    Business unit prioritization roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data lineage diagram

    Further reading

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    Optimizing data architecture requires a plan, not just a data model.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Integral to an insight-driven enterprise is a modern and business-driven data environment.

    “As business and data landscapes change, an organization’s data architecture needs to be able to keep pace with these changes. It needs to be responsive so as to not only ensure the organization continues to operate efficiently but that it supports the overall strategic direction of the organization.

    In the dynamic marketplace of today, organizations are constantly juggling disruptive forces and are finding the need to be more proactive rather than reactive. As such, organizations are finding their data to be a source of competitive advantage where the data architecture has to be able to not only support the increasing amount, sources, and rate at which organizations are capturing and collecting data but also be able to meet and deliver on changing business needs.

    Data architecture optimization should, therefore, aid in breaking down data silos and creating a more shared and all-encompassing data environment for better empowering the business.” (Crystal Singh, Director, Research, Data and Information Practice, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • Data architects or their equivalent, looking to optimize and improve the efficiency of the capture, movement and storage of data for a variety of business drivers.
    • Enterprise architects looking to improve the backbone of the holistic approach of their organization’s structure.
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Identify the business drivers that are impacted and improved by best-practice data architecture.
    • Optimize your data architecture using tactical practices to address the pressing issues of the business to drive modernization.
    • Align the organization’s data architecture with the grander enterprise architecture.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • CIOs concerned with costs, benefits, and the overall structure of their organizations data flow.
    • Database administrators tasked with overseeing crucial elements of the data architecture.
    This Research Will Help Them:
    • Get a handle on the current situation of data within the organization.
    • Understand how data architecture affects the operations of the data sources within the enterprise.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • The data architecture of a modern organization involves many moving pieces requiring coordination to provide greatest value from data.
    • Data architects are at the center of this turmoil and must be able to translate high-level business requirements into specific instructions for data workers using complex data models.

    Complication

    • Data architects must account for the constantly growing data and application complexity, and more demanding needs from the business.
    • There is an ever-increasing number of data sources and a growing need to integrate components to ensure that performance isn’t compromised.
    • There isn’t always a clearly defined data architect role, yet the responsibilities must be filled to get maximum value from data.

    Resolution

    • To deal with these challenges, a data architect must have a framework in place to identify the appropriate solution for the challenge at hand.
      • Identify and prioritize the business drivers in which data architecture changes would create the largest overall benefit, and determine the corresponding data architecture tiers that need to be addressed to customize your solution.
      • Discover the best practice trends, measure your current state, and define the targets for your data architecture tactics.
      • Build a cohesive and personalized roadmap for restructuring your data architecture. Manage your decisions and resulting changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Data architecture is not just about models. Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to a data environment that does not aptly serve or support the business. Identify the priorities of your business and adapt your data architecture to those needs.
    2. Changes to data architecture are typically driven by four common business driver patterns. Use these as a shortcut to understand how to evolve your data architecture.
    3. Data is used differently across the layers of an organization’s data architecture; therefore, the capabilities needed to optimize the use of data change with it. Architecting and managing data from source to warehousing to presentation requires different tactics for optimal use.

    Your data is the foundation of your organization’s knowledge and ability to make decisions

    Data should be at the foundation of your organization’s evolution.

    The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking to leverage can be uncovered with a data practice that makes high quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

    50% Organizations that embrace data are 50% more likely to launch products and services ahead of their competitors. (Nesta, 2016)

    Whether hoping to gain a better understanding of your business or trying to become an innovator in your industry, any organization can get value from its data regardless of where you are in your journey to becoming a data-driven enterprise:

    Business Monitoring
    • Data reporting
    • Uncover inefficiencies
    • Monitor progress
    • Track inventory levels
    Business Insights
    • Data analytics
    • Expose patterns
    • Predict future trends
    Business Optimization
    • Data-based apps
    • Build apps to automate actions based on insights
    Business Transformation
    • Monetary value of data
    • Create new revenue streams
    (Journey to Data Driven Enterprise, 2015)

    As organizations seek to become more data driven, it is imperative to better manage data for its effective use

    Here comes the zettabyte era.

    A zettabyte is a billion terabytes. Organizations today need to measure their data size in zettabytes, a challenge that is only compounded by the speed at which the data is expected to move.

    Arriving at the understanding that data can be the driving force of your organization is just the first step. The reality is that the true hurdles to overcome are in facing the challenges of today’s data landscape.

    Challenges of The Modern Data Landscape
    Data at rest Data movement
    Greater amounts Different types Uncertain quality Faster rates Higher complexity

    “The data environment is very chaotic nowadays. Legacy applications, data sprawl – organizations are grappling with what their data landscape looks like. Where are our data assets that we need to use?” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Solution

    Well-defined and structured data management practices are the best way to mitigate the limitations that derive from these challenges and leverage the most possible value from your data.

    Refer to Info-Tech’s capstone Create a Plan For Establishing a Business-Aligned Data Management Practice blueprint to understand data quality in the context of data disciplines and methods for improving your data management capabilities.

    Data architecture is an integral aspect of data management

    Data Architecture

    The set of rules, policies, standards, and models that govern and define the type of data collected and how it is used, stored, managed, and integrated within the organization and its database systems.

    In general, the primary objective of data architecture is the standardization of data for the benefit of the organization.

    54% of leading “analytics-driven” enterprises site data architecture as a required skill for data analytics initiatives. (Maynard 2015)

    MYTH

    Data architecture is purely a model of the technical requirements of your data systems.

    REALITY

    Data architecture is largely dependent on a human element. It can be viewed as “the bridge between defining strategy and its implementation”. (Erwin 2016)

    Functions

    A strong data architecture should:

    • Define, visualize, and communicate data strategy to various stakeholders.
    • Craft a data delivery environment.
    • Ensure high data quality.
    • Provide a roadmap for continuous improvement.

    Business value

    A strong data architecture will help you:

    • Align data processes with business strategy and the overall holistic enterprise architecture.
    • Enable efficient flow of data with a stronger focus on quality and accessibility.
    • Reduce the total cost of data ownership.

    Data architects must maintain a comprehensive view of the organization’s rapidly proliferating data

    The data architect:
    • Acts as a “translator” between the business and data workers to communicate data and technology requirements.
    • Facilitates the creation of the data strategy.
    • Manages the enterprise data model.
    • Has a greater knowledge of operational and analytical data use cases.
    • Recommends data management policies and standards, and maintains data management artifacts.
    • Reviews project solution architectures and identifies cross impacts across the data lifecycle.
    • Is a hands-on expert in data management and warehousing technologies.
    • Is not necessarily it’s own designated position, but a role that can be completed by a variety of IT professionals.

    Data architects bridge the gap between strategic and technical requirements:

    Visualization centering the 'Data Architect' as the bridge between 'Data Workers', 'Business', and 'Data & Applications'.

    “Fundamentally, the role of a data architect is to understand the data in an organization at a reasonable level of abstraction.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Many are experiencing the pains of poor data architecture, but leading organizations are proactively tackling these issues

    Outdated and archaic systems and processes limit the ability to access data in a timely and efficient manner, ultimately diminishing the value your data should bring.

    59%

    of firms believe their legacy storage systems require too much processing to meet today’s business needs. (Attivio, Survey Big Data decision Makers, 2016)

    48%

    of companies experience pains from being reliant on “manual methods and trial and error when preparing data.” (Attivio, Survey Big Data decision Makers, 2016)

    44%
    +
    22%

    44% of firms said preparing data was their top hurdle for analytics, with 22% citing problems in accessing data. (Data Virtualization blog, Data Movement Killed the BI Star, 2016)

    Intuitive organizations who have recognized these shortcomings have already begun the transition to modernized and optimized systems and processes.

    28%

    of survey respondents say they plan to replace “data management and architecture because it cannot handle the requirements of big data.” (Informatica, Digital Transformation: Is Your Data Management Ready, 2016)

    50%

    Of enterprises plan to replace their data warehouse systems and analytical tools in the next few years. (TDWI, End of the Data Warehouse as we know it, 2017)

    Leading organizations are attacking data architecture problems … you will be left behind if you do not start now!

    Once on your path to redesigning your data architecture, neglecting the strategic elements may leave you ineffective

    Focusing on only data models without the required data architecture guidance can cause harmful symptoms in your IT department, which will lead to organization-wide problems.

    IT Symptoms Due to Ineffective Data Architecture

    Poor Data Quality

    • Inconsistent, duplicate, missing, incomplete, incorrect, unstandardized, out of date, and mistake-riddled data can plague your systems.

    Poor Accessibility

    • Delays in accessing data.
    • Limits on who can access data.
    • Limited access to data remotely.

    Strategic Disconnect

    • Disconnect between owner and consumer of data.
    • Solutions address narrow scope problems.
    • System barriers between departments.
    Leads to Poor Organizational Conditions

    Inaccurate Insights

    • Inconsistent and/or erroneous operational and management reports.
    • Ineffective cross-departmental use of analytics.

    Ineffective Decision Making

    • Slow flow of information to executive decision makers.
    • Inconsistent interpretation of data or reports.

    Inefficient Operations

    • Limits to automated functionality.
    • Increased divisions within organization.
    • Regulatory compliance violations.
    You need a solution that will prevent the pains.

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to optimize data architecture to meet the business needs

    The following is a summary of Info-Tech’s methodology:

    1

    1. Prioritize your core business objectives and identify your business driver.
    2. Learn how business drivers apply to specific tiers of Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.
    3. Determine the appropriate tactical pattern that addresses your most important requirements.
    Visualization of the process described on the left: Business drivers applying to Info-Tech's five-tier data architecture, then determining tactical patterns, and eventually setting targets of your desired optimized state.

    2

    1. Select the areas of the five-tier architecture to focus on.
    2. Measure current state.
    3. Set the targets of your desired optimized state.

    3

    1. Roadmap your tactics.
    2. Manage and communicate change.
    A roadmap leading to communication.

    Info-Tech will get you to your optimized state faster by focusing on the important business issues

    First Things First

    1. Info-Tech’s methodology helps you to prioritize and establish the core strategic objectives behind your goal of modernizing data architecture. This will narrow your focus to the appropriate areas of your current data systems and processes that require the most attention.

    Info-Tech has identified these four common drivers that lead to the need to optimize your data architecture.

    • Becoming More Data Driven
    • Regulations and Compliance
    • Mergers and Acquisitions
    • New Functionality or Business Rule

    These different core objectives underline the motivation to optimize data architecture, and will determine your overall approach.

    Use the five-tier architecture to provide a consumable view of your data architecture

    Every organization’s data system requires a unique design and an assortment of applications and storage units to fit their business needs. Therefore, it is difficult to paint a picture of an ideal model that has universal applications. However, when data architecture is broken down in terms of layers or tiers, there exists a general structure that is seen in all data systems.

    Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture. The five tiers being 'Sources' which includes 'Apps', 'Excel and other documents', and 'Access database(s)'; 'Integration and Translation' the 'Movement and transformation of data'; 'Warehousing' which includes 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Raw Data)'; 'Analytics' which includes 'Data Marts', 'Data Cube', 'Flat Files', and 'BI Tools'; and 'Presentation' which includes 'Reports' and 'Dashboards'.

    Thinking of your data systems and processes in this framework will allow you to see how different elements of the architecture relate to specific business operations.

    1. This blueprint will demonstrate how the business driver behind your redesign requires you to address specific layers of the five-tier data architecture.
    1. Once you’ve aligned your business driver to the appropriate data tiers, this blueprint will provide you with the best practice tactics you should apply to achieve an optimized data architecture.

    Use the five-tier architecture to prioritize tactics to improve your data architecture in line with your pattern

    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model
    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model featuring the five-tier architecture listing 'Core Capabilities' and 'Advanced Capabilities' within each tier, and a list of 'Cross Capabilities' which apply to all tiers.
    1. Based on your business driver, the relevant data tiers, and your organization’s own specific requirements you will need to establish the appropriate data architecture capabilities.
    2. This blueprint will help you measure how you are currently performing in these capabilities…
    3. And help you define and set targets so you can reach your optimized state.
    1. Once completed, these steps will be provided with the information you will need to create a comprehensive roadmap.
    2. Lastly, this blueprint will provide you with the tools to communicate this plan across your organization and offer change management guidelines to ensure successful adoption.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Optimizing data architecture requires a tactical approach, not a passive approach.

    The demanding task of optimization requires the ability to heavily prioritize. After you have identified why, determine how using our pre-built roadmap to address the four common drivers.

    Do not forget: data architecture is not a standalone concept; it fits into the more holistic design of enterprise architecture

    Data Architecture in Alignment

    Data architecture can not be designed to simply address the focus of data specialists or even the IT department.

    It must act as a key component in the all encompassing enterprise architecture and reflect the strategy and design of the entire business.

    Data architecture collaborates with application architecture in the delivery of effective information systems, and informs technology architecture on data related infrastructure requirements/considerations

    Please refer to the following blueprints to see the full picture of enterprise architecture:

    A diagram titled 'Enterprise Architecture' with multiple forms of architecture interacting with each other. At the top is 'Business Architecture' which feeds into 'Data Architecture' and 'Application Architecture' which feed into each other, and influence 'Infrastructure Architecture' and 'Security Architecture'.
    Adapted from TOGAF
    Refer to Phase C of TOGAF and Bizbok for references to the components of business architecture that are used in data architecture.

    Info-Tech’s data architecture optimization methodology helped a monetary authority fulfill strict regulatory pressures

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'. Look for this symbol as you walk through the blueprint for details on how Info-Tech Consulting assisted this monetary authority.

    Situation: Strong external pressures required the monetary authority to update and optimize its data architecture.

    The monetary authority is responsible for oversight of the financial situation of a country that takes in revenue from foreign incorporation. Due to increased pressure from international regulatory bodies, the monetary authority became responsible for generating multiple different types of beneficial ownership reports based on corporation ownership data within 24 hours of a request.

    A stale and inefficient data architecture prevented the monetary authority from fulfilling external pressures.

    Normally, the process to generate and provide beneficial ownership reports took a week or more. This was due to multiple points of stale data architecture, including a dependence on outdated legacy systems and a broken process for gathering the required data from a mix of paper and electronic sources.

    Provide a structured approach to solving the problem

    Info-Tech helped the monetary authority identify the business need that resulted from regulatory pressures, the challenges that needed to be overcome, and actionable tactics for addressing the needs.

    Info-Tech’s methodology was followed to optimize the areas of data architecture that address the business driver.

    • External Requirements
    • Business Driver
        Diagnose Data Architecture Problems
      • Outdated architecture (paper, legacy systems)
      • Stale data from other agencies
      • Incomplete data
          Data Architecture Optimization Tactics
        1. Optimized Source Databases
        2. Improved Integration
        3. Data Warehouse Optimization
        4. Data Marts for Reports
        5. Report Delivery Efficiency

    As you walk through this blueprint, watch for additional case studies that walk through the details of how Info-Tech helped this monetary authority.

    This blueprint’s three-step process will help you optimize data architecture in your organization

    Phase 1
    Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics
    Phase 2
    Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture
    Phase 3
    Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap
    Step 1: Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture
    • Learn about what data architecture is and how it must evolve with the drivers of the business.
    • Determine the business driver that your organization is currently experiencing.
    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Step 2: Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture
    • Create your data architecture optimization plan to determine the high-level tactics you need to follow.
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Step 1: Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities
    • Determine where you currently stand in the data architecture capabilities across the five-tier data architecture.
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Step 2: Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities
    • Identify your targets for the data architecture capabilities.
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Step 3: Identify the Tactics that Apply to Your Organization
    • Understand the trends in the field of data architecture and how they can help to optimize your environment.
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    Step 1: Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap
    • Personalize the tactics across the tiers that apply to you to build your personalized roadmap.
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Step 2: Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes
    • Document the changes in the organization’s data architecture.
    • Data architecture involves change management – learn how data architects should support change management in the organization.
    • Data Architecture Decision Template

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – project overview

    PHASE 1
    Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics
    PHASE 2
    Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture
    PHASE 3
    Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture

    1.2 Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    2.1 Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities

    2.2 Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities

    2.3 Identify the Tactics that Apply to Your Organization

    3.1 Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap

    3.2 Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    Guided Implementations

    • Understand what data architecture is, how it aligns with enterprise architecture, and how data architects support the needs of the business.
    • Identify the business drivers that necessitate the optimization of the organization’s data architecture.
    • Create a tactical plan to optimize data architecture across Info-Tech’s five-tier logical data architecture model.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s tactical data architecture capability model and measure the current state of these capabilities at the organization.
    • Determine the target state of data architecture capabilities.
    • Understand the trends in the field of data architecture and identify how they can fit into your environment.
    • Use the results of the data architecture capability gap assessment to determine the priority of activities to populate your personalized data architecture optimization roadmap.
    • Understand how to manage change as a data architect or equivalent.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Identify the Drivers of the Business for Optimizing Data Architecture
    Module 2:
    Create a Tactical Plan for Optimizing Data Architecture
    Module 3:
    Create a Personalized Roadmap for Data Architecture Activities

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Preparation

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Workshop Day 5

    Organize and Plan Workshop Identify the Drivers of the Business for Optimizing Data Architecture Determine the Tactics For Optimizing Data Architecture Create Your Roadmap of Optimization Activities Create Your Personalized Roadmap Create a Plan for Change Management

    Morning Activities

    • Finalize workshop itinerary and scope.
    • Identify workshop participants.
    • Gather strategic documentation.
    • Engage necessary stakeholders.
    • Book interviews.
    • 1.1 Explain approach and value proposition.
    • 1.2 Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data architecture.
    • 2.1 Create your data architecture optimization plan.
    • 2.2 Interview key business stakeholders for input on business drivers for data architecture.
    • 3.1 Align with the enterprise architecture by interviewing the enterprise architect for input on the data architecture optimization roadmap.
    • 4.1 As a group, determine the roadmap activities that are applicable to your organization and brainstorm applicable initiatives.
    • 5.1 Use the Data Architecture Decision Documentation Template to document key decisions and updates.

    Afternoon Activities

    • 1.3 Understand Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture.
    • 1.4 Determine the pattern of tactics that apply to the organization for optimization.
    • 2.3 With input from the business and enterprise architect, determine the current data architecture capabilities.
    • 3.3 With input from the business and enterprise architect, determine the target data architecture capabilities.
    • 4.2 Determine the timing and effort of the roadmap activities.
    • 5.2 Review best practices for change management.
    • 5.3 Present roadmap and findings to the business stakeholders and enterprise architect.

    Deliverables

    • Workshop Itinerary
    • Workshop Participant List
    1. Five-Tier Logical Data Architecture Model
    2. Data Architecture Tactic Plan
    1. Five-Tier Data Architecture Capability Model
    1. Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap
    1. Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap
    1. Data Architecture Decision Template

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 1.1: Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture Step 1.2: Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Understand what data architecture is, what it is not, and how it fits into the broader enterprise architecture program.
    • Determine the drivers that fuel the need for data architecture optimization.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Understand the Five-Tier Data Architecture Model and how the drivers of the business inform your priorities across this logical model of data architecture.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Complete the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create a tactical data architecture optimization plan based on the business driver input.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Phase 1 Results & Insights

    • Data Architecture is not just about data models. The approach that Phase 1 guides you through will help to not only plan where you need to focus your efforts as a data architect (or equivalent) but also give you guidance in how you should go about optimizing the holistic data architecture environment based on the drivers of the business.

    Phase 1 will help you create a strategy to optimize your data architecture using actionable tactics

    In this phase, you will determine your focus for optimizing your data architecture based on the business drivers that are commonly felt by most organizations.

    1. Identify the business drivers that necessitate data architecture optimization efforts.
    2. Understand Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture, a logical architecture model that will help you prioritize tactics for optimizing your data architecture environment.
    3. Identify tactics for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the five tiers.

    “To stay competitive, we need to become more data-driven. Compliance pressures are becoming more demanding. We need to add a new functionality.”

    Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture:

    1. Data Sources
    2. Data Integration and Translation
    3. Data Warehousing
    4. Data Analytics
    5. Data Presentation

    Tactical plan for Data Architecture Optimization

    Phase 1, Step 1: Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture

    PHASE 1

    1.1 1.2
    Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand how data architecture fits into the organization’s larger enterprise architecture.
    • Understand what data architecture is and how it should be driven by the business.
    • Identify the driver that is creating a need for data architecture optimization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A starting point for the many responsibilities of the data architect role. Balancing business and technical requirements can be challenging, and to do so you need to first understand what is driving the need for data architecture improvements.
    • Holistic understanding of the organization’s architecture environment, including enterprise, application, data, and technology architectures and how they interact.

    Data architecture involves planning, communication, and understanding of technology

    Data Architecture

    A description of the structure and interaction of the enterprise’s major types and sources of data, logical data assets, physical data assets, and data management resources (TOGAF 9).

    The subject area of data management that defines the data needs of the enterprise and designs the master blueprints to meet those needs (DAMA DMBOK, 2009).

    IBM (2007) defines data architecture as the design of systems and applications that facilitate data availability and distribution across the enterprise.

    Definitions vary slightly across major architecture and management frameworks.

    However, there is a general consensus that data architecture provides organizations with:

    • Alignment
    • Planning
    • Road mapping
    • Change management
    • A guide for the organization’s data management program

    Data architecture must be based on business goals and objectives; developed within the technical strategies, constraints, and opportunities of the organization in support of providing a foundation for data management.

    Current Data Management
    • Alignment
    • Planning
    • Road mapping
    Goal for Data Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data Architecture is not just data models. Data architects must understand the needs of the business, as well as the existing people and processes that already exist in the organization to effectively perform their job.

    Review how data architecture fits into the broader architectural context

    A flow diagram starting with 'Business Processes/Activities' to 'Business Architecture' which through a process of 'Integration' flows to 'Data Architecture' and 'Application Architecture', the latter of which also flows into to the former, and they both flow into 'Technology Architecture' which includes 'Infrastructure' and 'Security'.

    Each layer of architecture informs the next. In other words, each layer has components that execute processes and offer services to the next layer. For example, data architecture can be broken down into more granular activities and processes that inform how the organization’s technology architecture should be arranged.

    Data does not exist on its own. It is informed by business architecture and used by other architectural domains to deliver systems, IT services, and to support business processes. As you build your practice, you must consider how data fits within the broader architectural framework.

    The Zachman Framework is a widely used EA framework; within it, data is identified as the first domain.

    The framework aims to standardize artifacts (work-products) within each architectural domain, provides a cohesive view of the scope of EA and clearly delineates data components. Use the framework to ensure that your target DA practice is aligned to other domains within the EA framework.

    'The Zachman Framework for Enterprise Architecture: The Enterprise Ontology', a complicated framework with top and bottom column headers and left and right row headers. Along the top are 'Classification Names': 'What', 'How', 'Where', 'Who', 'When', and 'Why'. Along the bottom are 'Enterprise Names': 'Inventory Sets', 'Process Flows', 'Distribution Networks', 'Responsibility Assignments', 'Timing Cycles', and 'Motivation Intentions'. Along the left are 'Audience Perspectives': 'Executive Perspective', 'Business Mgmt. Perspective', 'Architect Perspective', 'Engineer Perspective', 'Technician Perspective', and 'Enterprise Perspective'. Along the right are 'Model Names': 'Scope Contexts', 'Business Concepts', 'System Logic', 'Technology Physics', 'Tool Components', and 'Operations Instances'.
    (Source: Zachman International)

    Data architects operate in alignment with the other various architecture groups

    Data architects operate in alignment with the other various architecture groups, with coordination from the enterprise architect.

    Enterprise Architect
    The enterprise architect provides thought leadership and direction to domain architects.

    They also maintain architectural standards across all the architectural domains and serve as a lead project solution architect on the most critical assignments.

    • Business Architect
      A business subject matter expert who works with the line-of-business team to assist in business planning through capability-based planning.
    • Security Architect
      Plays a pivotal role in formulating the security strategy of the organization, working with the business and CISO/security manager. Recommends and maintains security standards, policies, and best practices.
    • Infrastructure Architect
      Recommends and maintains standards across the compute, storage, and network layers of the organization. Reviews project solution architectures to ensure compliance with infrastructure standards, regulations, and target state blueprints.
    • Application Architect
      Manages the business effectiveness, satisfaction, and maintainability of the application portfolio. Conduct application architecture assessments to document expected quality attribute standards, identify hotspots, and recommend best practices.
    • Data Architect
      Facilitates the creation of data strategy and has a greater understanding of operational and analytical data use cases. Manages the enterprise data model which includes all the three layers of modelling - conceptual, logical, and physical. Recommends data management policies and standards, and maintains data management artefacts. Reviews project solution architectures and identifies cross impacts across the data lifecycle.

    As a data architect, you must maintain balance between the technical and the business requirements

    The data architect role is integral to connecting the long-term goals of the business with how the organization plans to manage its data for optimal use.

    Data architects need to have a deep experience in data management, data warehousing, and analytics technologies. At a high level, the data architect plans and implements an organization’s data, reporting, and analytics roadmap.

    Some of the role’s primary duties and responsibilities include:

    1. Data modeling
    2. Reviewing existing data architecture
    3. Benchmark and improve database performance
    4. Fine tune database and SQL queries
    5. Lead on ETL activities
    6. Validate data integrity across all platforms
    7. Manage underlying framework for data presentation layer
    8. Ensure compliance with proper reporting to bureaus and partners
    9. Advise management on data solutions

    Data architects bridge the gap between strategic and technical requirements:

    Visualization centering the 'Data Architect' as the bridge between 'Data Workers', 'Business', and 'Data & Applications'.

    “Fundamentally, the role of a data architect is to understand the data in an organization at a reasonable level of abstraction.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The data architect role is not always clear cut. Many organizations do not have a dedicated data architect resource, and may not need one. However, the duties and responsibilities of the data architect must be carried out to some degree by a combination of resources as appropriate to the organization’s size and environment.

    Understand the role of a data architect to ensure that essential responsibilities are covered in the organization

    A database administrator (DBA) is not a data architect, and data architecture is not something you buy from an enterprise application vendor.

    Data Architect Role Description

    • The data architect must develop (along with the business) a short-term and long-term vision for the enterprise’s data architecture.
    • They must be able to create processes for governing the identification, collection, and use of accurate and valid metadata, as well as for tracking data quality, completeness, and redundancy.
    • They need to create strategies for data security, backup, disaster recovery, business continuity, and archiving, and ensure regulatory compliance.

    Skills Necessary

    • Hands-on experience with data architecting and management, data mining, and large-scale data modeling.
    • Strong understanding of relational and non-relational data structures, theories, principles, and practices.
    • Strong familiarity with metadata management.
    • Knowledge of data privacy practices and laws.

    Define Policies, Processes, and Priorities

    • Policies
      • Boundaries of the data architecture.
      • Data architecture standards.
      • Data architecture security.
      • Responsibility of ownership for the data architecture and data repositories.
      • Responsibility for data architecture governance.
    • Processes
      • Data architecture communication.
      • Data architecture change management.
      • Data architecture governance.
      • Policy compliance monitoring.
    • Priorities
      • Align architecture efforts with business priorities.
      • Close technology gaps to meet service level agreements (SLAs).
      • Determine impacts on current or future projects.

    See Info-Tech’s Data Architect job description for a comprehensive description of the data architect role.

    Leverage data architecture frameworks to understand how the role fits into the greater Enterprise Architecture framework

    Enterprise data architectures are available from industry consortiums such as The Open Group (TOGAF®), and open source initiatives such as MIKE2.0.

    Logo for The Open Group.

    The Open Group TOGAF enterprise architecture model is a detailed framework of models, methods, and supporting tools to create an enterprise-level architecture.

    • TOGAF was first developed in 1995 and was based on the Technical Architecture Framework for Information Management (TAFIM) developed by the US Department of Defense.
    • TOGAF includes application, data, and infrastructure architecture domains providing enterprise-level, product-neutral architecture principles, policies, methods, and models.
    • As a member of The Open Group, it is possible to participate in ongoing TOGAF development initiatives.

    The wide adoption of TOGAF has resulted in the mapping of it to several other industry standards including CoBIT and ITIL.

    Logo for MIKE2.0.

    MIKE2.0 (Method for an Integrated Knowledge Environment), is an open source method for enterprise information management providing a framework for information development.

    • SAFE (Strategic Architecture for the Federated Enterprise) provides the technology solution framework for MIKE2.0
    • SAFE includes application, presentation, information, data, Infrastructure, and metadata architecture domains.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    If an enterprise-level IT architecture is your goal, TOGAF is likely a better model. However, if you are an information and knowledge-based business then MIKE2.0 may be more relevant to your business.

    The data architect must identify what drives the need for data from the business to create a business-driven architecture

    As the business landscape evolves, new needs arise. An organization may undergo new compliance requirements, or look to improve their customer intimacy, which could require a new functionality from an application and its associated database.

    There are four common scenarios that lead to an organization’s need to optimize its data architecture and these scenarios all present unique challenges for a data architect:

    1. Becoming More Data Driven As organizations are looking to get more out of their data, there is a push for more accurate and timely data from applications. Data-driven decision making requires verifiable data from trustworthy sources. Result: Replace decisions made on gut or intuition with real and empirical data - make more informed and data-driven decisions.
    2. New Functionality or Business Rule In order to succeed as business landscapes change, organizations find themselves innovating on products or services and the way they do things. Changes in business rules, product or service offering, and new functionalities can subsequently demand more from the existing data architecture. Result: Prepare yourself to successfully launch new business initiatives with an architecture that supports business needs.
    3. Mergers and Acquisitions If an organization has recently acquired, been acquired, or is merging with another, the technological implications require careful planning to ensure a seamless fit. Application consolidation, retirement, data transfer, and integration points are crucial. Result: Leverage opportunities to incorporate and consolidate new synergistic assets to realize the ROI.
    4. Risk and Compliance Data in highly regulated organizations needs to be kept safe and secure. Architectural decisions around data impact the level of compliance within the organization. Result: Avoid the fear of data audits, regulatory violations, and privacy breaches.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    These are not the only reasons why data architects need to optimize the organization’s data architecture. These are only four of the most common scenarios, however, other business needs can be addressed using the same concept as these four common scenarios.

    Use the Data Architecture Driver tool to identify your focus for data architecture

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Follow Info-Tech’s process of first analyzing the needs of the business, then determining how best to architect your data based on these drivers. Data architecture needs to be able to rapidly evolve to support the strategic goals of the business, and the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool will help you to prioritize your efforts to best do this.

    Tab 2. Driver Identification

    Objective: Objectively assess the most pressing business drivers.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 2.

    Tab 3. Tactic Pattern Plan, Section 1

    Purpose: Review your business drivers that require architectural changes in your environment.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 3, section 1.

    Tab 3. Tactic Pattern Plan, Section 2

    Purpose: Determine a list of tactics that will help you address the business drivers.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 3, section 2.

    Step
    • Evaluate business drivers to determine the data architecture optimization priorities and tactics.
    Step
    • Understand how each business driver relates to data architecture and how each driver gives rise to a specific pattern across the five-tier data architecture.
    Step
    • Review the list of high-level tactics presented to optimize your data architecture across the five tier architecture.

    Identify the drivers for improving your data architecture

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 1 hour

    INPUT: Data Architecture Driver tool assessment prompts.

    OUTPUT: Identified business driver that applies to your organization.

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect

    Instructions

    In Tab 2. Driver Identification of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, assess the degree to which the organization is feeling the pains of the four most common business drivers:

    1. Is there a present or growing need for the business to be making data-driven decisions?
    2. Does the business want to explore a new functionality and hence require a new application?
    3. Is your organization acquiring or merging with another entity?
    4. Is your organization’s regulatory environment quick to change and require stricter reporting?

    Data architecture improvements need to be driven by business need.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 2 Driver Identification.
    Tab 2. Driver Identification

    “As a data architect, you have to understand the functional requirements, the non-functional requirements, then you need to make a solution for those requirements. There can be multiple solutions and multiple purposes. (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Interview the business to get clarity on business objectives and drivers

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 1 hour per interview

    INPUT: Sample questions targeting the activities, challenges, and opportunities of each business unit

    OUTPUT: Sample questions targeting the activities, challenges, and opportunities of each business unit

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Business representatives, IT representatives

    Identify 2-3 business units that demonstrate enthusiasm for or a positive outlook on improving how organizational data can help them in their role and as a unit.

    Conducting a deep-dive interview process with these key stakeholders will help further identify high-level goals for the data architecture strategy within each business unit. This process will help to secure their support throughout the implementation process by giving them a sense of ownership.

    Key Interview Questions:

    1. What are your primary activities? What do you do?
    2. What challenges do you have when completing your activities?
    3. How is poor data impacting your job?
    4. If [your selected domain]’s data is improved, what business issues would this help solve?

    Request background information and documentation from stakeholders regarding the following:

    • What current data management policies and processes exist (that you know of)?
    • Who are the data owners and end users?
    • Where are the data sources within the department stored?
    • Who has access to these data sources?
    • Are there existing or ongoing data issues within those data sources?

    Interview the enterprise architect to get input on the drivers of the business

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.3 2 hours

    INPUT: Data Architecture Driver tool assessment prompts.

    OUTPUT: Identified business driver that applies to your organization.

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect

    Data architecture improvements need to be driven by business need.

    Instructions

    As you work through Tab 2. Driver Identification of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, consult with the enterprise architect or equivalent to assist you in rating the importance of each of the symptoms of the business drivers. This will help you provide greater value to the business and more aligned objectives.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 2 Driver Identification.
    Tab 2. Driver Identification

    Once you know what that need is, go to Step 2.

    Phase 1, Step 2: Establish Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    PHASE 1

    1.11.2
    Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data ArchitectureDetermine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture to begin focusing your architectural optimization.
    • Create your Data Architecture Optimization Template to plan your improvement tactics.
    • Prioritize your tactics based on the five-tier architecture to plan optimization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect
    • DBAs

    Outcomes of this step

    • A tactical and prioritized plan for optimizing the organization’s data architecture according to the needs of the business.

    To plan a business-driven architecture, data architects need to keep the organization’s big picture in mind

    Remember… Architecting an organization involves alignment, planning, road mapping, design, and change management functions.

    Data architects must be heavily involved with:

    • Understanding the short- and long-term visions of the business to develop a vision for the organization’s data architecture.
    • Creating processes for governing the identification, collection, and use of accurate and valid data, as well as for tracking data quality, completeness, and redundancy.
    • They need to create strategies for data security, backup, disaster recovery, business continuity, and archiving, and ensure regulatory compliance.

    To do this, you need a framework. A framework provides you with the holistic view of the organization’s data environment that you can use to design short- and long-term tactics for improving the use of data for the needs of the business.

    Use Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture to model your environment in a logical, consumable fashion.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The more complicated an environment is, the more need there is for a framework. Being able to pick a starting point and prioritize tasks is one of the most difficult, yet most essential, aspects of any architect’s role.

    The five tiers of an organization’s data architecture support the use of data throughout its lifecycle

    Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model summarizes an organization’s data environment at a logical level. Data flows from left to right, but can also flow from the presentation layer back to the warehousing layer for repatriation of data.

    Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture. The five tiers being 'Sources' which includes 'App1 ', 'App2', 'Excel and other documents', 'Access database(s)', 'IOT devices', and 'External data feed(s) & social media'; 'Integration and Translation' which includes 'Solutions: SOA, Point to Point, Manual Loading, ESB , ETL, ODS, Data Hub' and 'Functions: Scrambling Masking Encryption, Tokenizing, Aggregation, Transformation, Migration, Modeling'; 'Warehousing' which includes 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Raw Data)', 'EIM, ECM, DAM', and 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Derived Data)'; 'Analytics' which includes 'Data Marts', 'Data Cube', 'Flat Files', 'BI Tools', and the 'Protected Zone: Data Marts - BDG Class Ref. MDM'; and 'Presentation' which includes 'Formulas', 'Thought Models', 'Reports', 'Dashboards', 'Presentations', and 'Derived Data (from analytics activities)'.

    Use the Data Architecture Optimization Template to build your improvement roadmap

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Download the Data Architecture Optimization Template.

    Overview

    Use this template to support your team in creating a tactical strategy for optimizing your data architecture across the five tiers of the organization’s architecture. This template can be used to document your organization’s most pressing business driver, the reasons for optimizing data architecture according to that driver, and the tactics that will be employed to address the shortcomings in the architecture.

    Sample of Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Optimization Template. Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Optimization Template Table of Contents
    1. Build Your Current Data Architecture Logical Model Use this section to document the current data architecture situation, which will provide context for your plan to optimize your data architecture.
    2. Optimization Plan Use this section to document the tactics that will be employed to optimize the current data architecture according to the tactic pattern identified by the business driver.

    Fill out as you go

    As you read about the details of the five-tier data architecture model in the following slides, start building your current logical data architecture model by filling out the sections that correspond to the various tiers. For example, if you identified that the most pressing business driver is becoming compliant with regulations, document the sources of data required for compliance, as well as the warehousing strategy currently being employed. This will help you to understand the organization’s data architecture at a logical level.

    Tier 1 represents all of the sources of your organization’s data

    Tier 1 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Sources', which includes 'App1 ', 'App2', 'Excel and other documents', 'Access database(s)', 'IOT devices', and 'External data feed(s) & social media'.
    –› Data to integration layer

    Tier 1 is where the data enters the organization.

    All applications, data documents such as MS Excel spreadsheets, documents with table entries, manual extractions from other document types, user-level databases including MS Access and MySQL, other data sources, data feeds, big datasets, etc. reside here.

    This tier typically holds the siloed data that is so often not available across the enterprise because the data is held within department-level applications or systems. This is also the layer where transactions and operational activities occur and where data is first created or ingested.

    There are any number of business activities from transactions through business processes that require data to flow from one system to another, so it is often at this layer we see data created more than once, data corruption occurs, manual re-keying of data from system to system, and spaghetti-like point-to-point connections are built that are often fragile. This is usually the single most problematic area within an enterprise’s data environment. Application- or operational-level (siloed) reporting often occurs at this level.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 1 has the following attributes:

    • Rationalized applications
    • Operationalized database administration
    • Databases governed, monitored, and maintained to ensure optimal performance

    Tier 2 represents the movement of data

    Tier 2 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Integration and Translation', which includes 'Solutions: SOA, Point to Point, Manual Loading, ESB , ETL, ODS, Data Hub' and 'Functions: Scrambling Masking Encryption, Tokenizing, Aggregation, Transformation, Migration, Modeling'.
    –› Data to Warehouse Environment

    Find out more

    For more information on data integration, see Info-Tech’s Optimize the Organization’s Data Integration Practices blueprint.

    Tier 2 is where integration, transformation, and aggregation occur.

    Regardless of how you integrate your systems and data stores, whether via ETL, ESB, SOA, data hub, ODS, point-to-point, etc., the goal of this layer is to move data at differing speeds for one of two main purposes:

    1) To move data from originating systems to downstream systems to support integrated business processes. This ensures the data is pristine through the process and improves trustworthiness of outcomes and speed to task and process completion.

    2) To move data to Tier 3 - The Data Warehouse Architecture, where data rests for other purposes. This movement of data in its purest form means we move raw data to storage locations in an overall data warehouse environment reflecting any security, compliance and other standards in our choices for how to store.

    Also, this is where data is transformed for unique business purpose that will also be moved to a place of rest or a place of specific use. Data masking, scrambling, aggregation, cleansing and matching, and other data related blending tasks occur at this layer.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 2 has the following attributes:

    • Business data glossary is leveraged
    • ETL is governed
    • ETL team is empowered
    • Data matching is facilitated
    • Canonical data model is present

    Tier 3 is where data comes together from all sources to be stored in a central warehouse environment

    Tier 3 is where data rests in long-term storage.

    This is where data rests (long-term storage) and also where an enterprise’s information, documents, digital assets, and any other content types are stored. This is also where derived and contrived data creations are stored for re-use, and where formulas, thought models, heuristics, algorithms, report styles, templates, dashboard styles, and presentations-layer widgets are all stored in the enterprise information management system.

    At this layer there may be many technologies and many layers of security to reflect data domains, classifications, retention, compliance, and other data needs. This is also the layer where data lakes exist as well as traditional relational databases, enterprise database systems, enterprise content management systems, and simple user-level databases.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 3 has the following attributes:

    • Data warehouse is governed
    • Data warehouse operations and planning
    • Data library is comprehensive
    • Four Rosetta Stones of data are in place: BDG, data classification, reference data, master data.
    Data from integration layer –›
    Tier 3 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Data Warehouse Environment' which includes 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Raw Data)', 'EIM, ECM, DAM'.
    –› Analytics

    Find out more

    For more information on Data Warehousing, see Info-Tech’s Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation and Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment blueprints.

    Tier 4 is where knowledge and insight is born

    Tier 4 represents data being used for a purpose.

    This is where you build fit-for-purpose data sets (marts, cubes, flat files) that may now draw from all enterprise data and information sources as held in Tier 3. This is the first place where enterprise views of all data may be effectively done and with trust that golden records from systems of record are being used properly.

    This is also the layer where BI tools get their greatest use for performing analysis. Unlike Tier 3 where data is at rest, this tier is where data moves back into action. Data is brought together in unique combinations to support reporting, and analytics. It is here that the following enterprise analytic views are crafted:
    Exploratory, Inferential, Causal, Comparative, Statistical, Descriptive, Diagnostic, Hypothesis, Predictive, Decisional, Directional, Prescriptive

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 4 has the following attributes:

    • Reporting meets business needs
    • Data mart operations are in place
    • Governance of data marts, cubes, and BI tools in place
    Warehouse Environment –›
    Tier 4 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Analytics', which includes 'Data Marts', 'Data Cube', 'Flat Files', and 'BI Tools'.
    –› Presentation

    Find out more

    For more information on BI tools and strategy, see Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution and Build a Next Generation BI with a Game-Changing BI Strategy blueprints.

    The presentation layer, Tier 5, is where data becomes presentable information

    Tier 5 represents data in knowledge form.

    This is where the data and information combine in information insight mapping methods (presentations, templates, etc.). We craft and create new ways to slice and dice data in Tier 4 to be shown and shared in Tier 5.

    Templates for presenting insights are extremely valuable to an enterprise, both for their initial use, and for the ability to build deeper, more insightful analytics. Re-use of these also enables maximum speed for sharing, consuming the outputs, and collective understanding of these deeper meanings that is a critical asset to any enterprise. These derived datasets and the thought models, presentation styles, templates, and other derived and contrived assets should be repatriated into the derived data repositories and the enterprise information management systems respectively as shown in Tier 3.

    Find out more

    For more information on enterprise content management and metadata, see Info-Tech’s Develop an ECM Strategy and Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata blueprints.

    Tier 5 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Presentation', which includes 'Formulas', 'Thought Models', 'Reports', 'Dashboards', 'Presentations', and 'Derived Data (from analytics activities)'. The 'Repatriation of data' feeds the derived data back into Warehousing.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 5 has the following attributes:

    • Metadata creation is supervised
    • Metadata is organized
    • Metadata is governed
    • Content management capabilities are present

    Info-Tech Insight

    Repatriation of data and information is an essential activity for all organizations to manage organizational knowledge. This is the activity where information, knowledge, and insights that are stored in content form are moved back to the warehousing layer for long-term storage. Because of this, it is crucial to have an effective ECM strategy as well as the means to find information quickly and efficiently. This is where metadata and taxonomy come in.

    As a data architect, you must prioritize your focus according to business need

    Determine your focus.

    Now that you have an understanding of the drivers requiring data architecture optimization, as well as the current data architecture situation at your organization, it is time to determine the actions that will be taken to address the driver.

    1. Business driver

    Screenshot of Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan.
    Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan

    3. Documented tactic plan

    Data Architecture Optimization Template

    2. Tactics across the five tiers

    Another screenshot of Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan.

    The next four slides provide an overview of the priorities that accompany the four most common business drivers that require updates to a stale data architecture.

    Business driver #1: Adding a new functionality to an application can have wide impacts on data architecture

    Does the business wants to add a new application or supplement an existing application with a new functionality?

    Whether the business wants to gain better customer intimacy, achieve operational excellence, or needs to change its compliance and reporting strategy, the need for collecting new data through a new application or a new functionality within an existing application can arise. This business driver has the following attributes:

    • Often operational oriented and application driven.
    • An application is changed through an application version upgrade, migration to cloud, or application customization, or as a result of application rationalization or changes in the way that application data is generated.
    • However, not all new functionalities trigger this scenario. Non-data-related changes, such as a new interface, new workflows, or any other application functionality changes that do not involve data, will not have data architecture impacts.
    Stock photo of someone using a smartphone with apps.
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture at the source tier and the integration of the new functionality. Tactics for this business driver should address the following pattern:
    Tiers 1 and 2 highlighted.

    Business driver #2: Organizations today are looking to become more data driven

    Does the business wants to better leverage its data?

    An organization can want to use its data for multiple reasons. Whether these reasons include improving customer experience or operational excellence, the data architect must ensure that the organization’s data aggregation environment, reporting and analytics, and presentation layer are assessed and optimized for serving the needs of the business.

    “Data-drivenness is about building tools, abilities, and, most crucially, a culture that acts on data.” (Carl Anderson, Creating a Data-Driven Organization)

    Tactics for this business driver should address the following pattern:
    Tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted.
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture at the source tier and the integration of the new functionality.
    Stock photo of someone sitting at multiple computers with analytics screens open.
    • This scenario is typically project driven and analytical oriented.
    • The business is looking to leverage data and information by processing data through BI tools and self-service.
    • Example: The organization wants to include new third-party data, and needs to build a new data mart to provide a slice of data for analysis.

    Business driver #3: Risk and compliance demands can put pressure on outdated architectures

    Is there increasing pressure on the business to maintain compliance requirements as per regulations?

    An organization can want to use its data for multiple reasons. Whether these reasons include improving customer experience or operational excellence, the data architect must ensure that the organization’s data aggregation environment, reporting and analytics, and presentation layer are assessed and optimized for serving the needs of the business.

    There are different types of requirements:
    • Can be data-element driven. For example, PII, PHI are requirements around data elements that are associated with personal and health information.
    • Can be process driven. For example, some requirements restrict data read/write to certain groups.
    Stock photo of someone pulling a block out of a Jenga tower.
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture where data is stored: at the sources, the warehouse environment, and analytics layer. Tactics for this business driver should address the following pattern:
    Tiers 1, 3, and 4 highlighted.

    Business driver #4: Mergers and acquisitions can require a restructuring of the organization’s data architecture

    Is the organization looking to acquire or merge with another organization or line of business?

    There are three scenarios that encompass the mergers and acquisitions business driver for data architecture:

    1. The organization acquires/merges with another organization and wants to integrate the data.
    2. The organization acquires/merges a subset of an organization (a line of business, for example) and wants to integrate the data.
    3. The organization acquires another organization for competitive purposes, and does not need to integrate the data.
    Regardless of what scenario your organization falls into, you must go through the same process of identifying the requirements for the new data:
    1. Understand what data you are getting.
      The business may acquire another organization for the data, for the technology, and/or for algorithms (for example). If the goal is to integrate the new data, you must understand if the data is unstructured, structured, how much data, etc.
    2. Plan for the integration of the new data into your environment.
      Do you have the expertise in-house to integrate the data? Database structures and systems are often mismatched (for example, acquired company could have an Oracle database whereas you are an SAP shop) and this may require expertise from the acquired company or a third party.
    3. Integrate the new data.
      Often, the extraction of the new data is the easy part. Transforming and loading the data is the difficult and costly part.
    “As a data architect, you must do due diligence of the acquired firm. What are the workflows, what are the data sources, what data is useful, what is useless, what is the value of the data, and what are the risks of embedding the data?” (Anonymous Mergers and Acquisitions Consultant)
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture at the source tier, the warehousing layer, and analytics. Tiers 1, 3, and 4 highlighted.

    Determine your tier priority pattern and the tactics that you should address based on the business drivers

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 30 minutes

    INPUT: Business driver assessment

    OUTPUT: Tactic pattern and tactic plan

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect

    Instructions
    1. After you have assessed the organization’s business driver on Tab 1. Driver Identification, move to Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan.
    2. Here, you will find a summary of the business driver that applies to you, as well as the tier priority pattern that will help you to focus your efforts for data architecture.
    3. Document the Tier Priority Pattern and associated tactics in Section 2. Optimization Plan of the Data Architecture Optimization Plan.
    Screenshot of Data Architecture Driver Tool.
    Data Architecture Driver Tool
    Arrow pointing right. Sample of Data Architecture Optimization Template
    Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Our approach will help you to get to the solution of the organization’s data architecture problems as quickly as possible. However, keep in mind that you should still address the other tiers of your data architecture even if they are not part of the pattern we identified. For example, if you need to become more data driven, don’t completely ignore the sources and the integration of data. However, to deliver the most and quickest value, focus on tiers 3, 4, and 5.

    This phase helped you to create a tactical plan to optimize your data architecture according to business priorities

    Phase 1 is all about focus.

    Data architects and those responsible for updating an organization’s data architecture have a wide-open playing field with which to take their efforts. Being able to narrow down your focus and generate an actionable plan will help you provide more value to the organization quickly and get the most out of your data.

      Phase 1
      • Business Drivers
        • Tactic Pattern
          • Tactical Plan

    Now that you have your prioritized tactical plan, move to Phase 2. This phase will help you map these priorities to the essential capabilities and measure where you stack up in these capabilities. This is an essential step in creating your data architecture roadmap and plan for coming years to modernize the organization’s data architecture.

    To identify what the monetary authority needed from its data architecture, Info-Tech helped determine the business driver

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'.

    Part 1

    Prior to receiving new external requirements, the monetary Authority body had been operating with an inefficient system. Outdated legacy systems, reports in paper form, incomplete reports, and stale data from other agencies resulted in slow data access. The new requirements demanded speeding up this process.

    Diagram comparing the 'Original Reporting' requirement of 'Up to 7 days' vs the 'New Requirement' of 'As soon as 1 hour'. The steps of reporting in that time are 'Report Request', 'Gather Data', and 'Make Report'.

    Although the organization understood it needed changes, it first needed to establish what were the business objectives, and which areas of their architecture they would need to focus on.

    The business driver in this case was compliance requirements, which directed attention to the sources, aggregation, and insights tiers.

    Tiers 1, 3, and 4 highlighted.

    Looking at the how the different tiers relate to certain business operations, the organization uncovered the best practise tactics to achieving an optimized data architecture.

    1. Source Tactics: 3. Warehousing Tactics: 4. Analytics Tactics:
    • Identify data sources
    • Ensure data quality
    • Properly catalogue data
    • Properly index data
    • Provide the means for data accessibility
    • Allow for data reduction/space for report building

    Once the business driver had been established, the organization was able to identify the specific areas it would eventually need to evaluate and remedy as needed.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1.1 'Identify the drivers for improving your data architecture'. Identify the business driver that will set the direction of your data architecture optimization plan.

    In this activity, the facilitator will guide the team in identifying the business driver that is creating the need to improve the organization’s data architecture. Data architecture needs to adapt to the changing needs of the business, so this is the most important step of any data architecture improvements.

    1.2.1

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Determine your tier priority pattern and the tactics that you should address based on the business drivers'. Determine the tactics that you will use to optimize data architecture.

    In this activity, the facilitator will help the team create a tactical plan for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the five tiers of the logical model. This plan can then be followed when addressing the business needs.

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture

    Phase 2 will determine your tactics that you should implement to optimize your data architecture

    Business Drivers
    Each business driver requires focus on specific tiers and their corresponding capabilities, which in turn correspond to tactics necessary to achieve your goal.
    New Functionality Risk and Compliance Mergers and Acquisitions Become More Data Driven
    Tiers 1. Data Sources 2. Integration 3. Warehousing 4. Insights 5. Presentation
    Capabilities Current Capabilities
    Target Capabilities
    Example Tactics Leverage indexes, partitions, views, and clusters to optimize performance.

    Cleanse data source.

    Leverage integration technology.

    Identify matching approach priorities.

    Establish governing principles.

    Install performance enhancing technologies.

    Establish star schema and snowflake principles.

    Share data via data mart.

    Build metadata architecture:
    • Data lineage
    • Sharing
    • Taxonomy
    • Automatic vs. manual creation

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 2.1: Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities Step 2.2: Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities Step 2.3: Identify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Understand Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model to begin identifying where to develop tactics for optimizing your data architecture.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Understand Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model to begin identifying where to develop tactics for optimizing your data architecture.
    Finalize phase deliverable:
    • Learn about the trends in data architecture that can be leveraged to develop tactics.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Measure your current state across the tiers of the capability model that will help address your business driver.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Measure your target state for the capabilities that will address your business driver.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Review the tactical roadmap that was created with guidance from the capability gap analysis.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights

    • Data architecture is not just data models. Understand the essential capabilities that your organization needs from its data architecture to develop a tactical plan for optimizing data architecture across its people, processes, and technology.

    Phase 2, Step 1: Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities

    PHASE 2

    2.1 2.2 2.3
    Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities Identify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • As you walk through the data architecture capability model, measure your current state in each of the relevant capabilities.
    • Distinguish between essential and nice-to-have capabilities for your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A framework for generating a tactical plan for data architecture optimization.
    • Knowledge of the various trends in the data architecture field that can be incorporated into your plan.

    To personalize your tactical strategy, you must measure up your base data architecture capabilities

    What is a capability?

    Capabilities represent a mixture of people, technology, and processes. The focus of capability design is on the outcome and the effective use of resources to produce a differentiating capability or an essential supporting capability.

    To personalize your tactics, you have to understand what the essential capabilities are across the five tiers of an organization’s data architecture. Then, assess where you currently stand in these capabilities and where you need to go in order to build your optimization plan.

    'Capability' as a mixture of 'People', 'Technology', 'Process', and 'Assets'.

    Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model can be laid over the five-tier data architecture to understand the essential and advanced capabilities that an organization should have, and to build your tactical strategy for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the tiers.

    Use Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model as a resource to assess and plan your personalized tactics

    Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model can be laid over the five-tier data architecture to understand the essential and advanced capabilities that an organization should have, and to build your tactical strategy for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the tiers.

    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model featuring the five-tier architecture listing 'Core Capabilities' and 'Advanced Capabilities' within each tier, and a list of 'Cross Capabilities' which apply to all tiers.

    Use the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool to create a tailored plan of action

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Instructions

    Use the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool as your central tool to develop a tactical plan of action to optimize the organization’s data architecture.

    This tool contains the following sections:

    1. Business Driver Input
    2. Capability Assessment
    3. Capability Gap Analysis
    4. Tactical Roadmap
    5. Metrics
    6. Initiative Roadmap

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of the Info-Tech deliverable Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool.

    Benefits of using this tool:

    • Comprehensive documentation of data architecture capabilities present in leading organizations.
    • Generates an accurate architecture roadmap for your organization that is developed in alignment with the broader enterprise architecture and related architectural domains.

    To create a plan for your data architecture priorities, you must first understand where you currently stand

    Now that you understand the business problem that you are trying to solve, it is time to take action in solving the problem.

    The organization likely has some of the capabilities that are needed to solve the problem, but also a need to improve other capabilities. To narrow down the capabilities that you should focus on, first select the business driver that was identified in Phase 1 in Tab 1. Business Driver Input of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool. This will customize the roadmap tool to deselect the capabilities that are likely to be less relevant to your organization.

    For Example: If you identified your business driver as “becoming more data-driven”, you will want to focus on measuring and building out the capabilities within Tiers 3, 4, and 5 of the capability model.

    Data Architecture Capability Model
    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model with tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted.

    Note

    If you want to assess your organization for all of the capabilities across the data architecture capability model, select “Comprehensive Data Architecture Assessment” in Tab 1. Business Driver Input of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool.

    Determine your current state across the related architecture tiers

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2 1 hour

    INPUT: Current data architecture capabilities.

    OUTPUT: An idea of where you currently stand in the capabilities.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect, Business representatives

    Use the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool to evaluate the baseline and target capabilities of your practice in terms of how data architecture is approached and executed.

    Instructions
    1. Invite the appropriate stakeholders to participate in this exercise.
    2. On Tab 2. Practice Components, assess the current and target states of each capability on a scale of 1–5.
    3. Note: “Ad hoc” implies a capability is completed, but randomly, informally, and without a standardized method.
      These results will set the baseline against which you will monitor performance progress and keep track of improvements over time.
    To assess data architecture maturity, Info-Tech uses the Capability Maturity Model Integration (CMMI) program for rating capabilities on a scale of 1 to 5:

    1 = Initial/Ad hoc

    2 = Developing

    3 = Defined

    4 = Managed and Measurable

    5 = Optimized

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on Early Alignment. Assessing capabilities within specific people’s job functions can naturally result in disagreement or debate, especially between business and IT people. Objectively facilitate any debate and only finalize capability assessments when there is full alignment. Remind everyone that data architecture should ultimately serve business needs wherever possible.

    Phase 2, Step 2: Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities

    PHASE 2

    2.12.22.3
    Measure Your Data Architecture CapabilitiesSet a Target for Data Architecture CapabilitiesIdentify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your target state in each of the relevant capabilities.
    • Distinguish between essential and nice-to-have capabilities for your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A holistic understanding of where the organization’s data architecture currently sits, where it needs to go, and where the biggest gaps lie.

    To create a plan for your data architecture priorities, you must also understand where you need to get to in the future

    Keep the goal in mind by documenting target state objectives. This will help to measure the highest priority gaps in the organization’s data architecture capabilities.

    Example driver = Becoming more data driven Arrow pointing right. Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model with tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted. Arrow pointing right. Current Capabilities Arrow pointing right. Target Capabilities
    Gaps and Priorities
    Stock photo of a hand placing four shelves arranged as stairs. On the first step is a mini-cut-out of a person walking.

    Determine your future state across the relevant tiers of the data architecture capability model

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1 2 hours

    INPUT: Current state of data architecture capabilities.

    OUTPUT: Target state of data architecture capabilities.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect

    The future of data architecture is now.

    Determine the state of data architecture capabilities that the organization needs to reach to address the drivers of the business.

    For example: If you identified your business driver as “becoming more data driven”, you will want to focus on the capabilities within Tiers 3, 4, and 5 of the capability model.

    Driver = Becoming more data driven Arrow pointing right. Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model with tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted. Arrow pointing right. Target Capabilities

    Identify where gaps in your data architecture capabilities lie

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2 1 hour

    INPUT: Current and target states of data architecture capabilities.

    OUTPUT: Holistic understanding of where you need to improve data architecture capabilities.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect

    Visualization of gap assessment of data quality practice capabilities

    To enable deeper analysis on the results of your capability assessment, Tab 4. Capability Gap Analysis in the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool creates visualizations of the gaps identified in each of your practice capabilities and related data management practices. These diagrams serve as analysis summaries.

    Gap Assessment of Data Source Capabilities

    Sample of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool, tab 4. Capability Gap Analysis.

    Use Tab 3. Data Quality Practice Scorecard to enhance your data quality project.

    1. Enhance your gap analyses by forming a relative comparison of total gaps in key practice capability areas, which will help in determining priorities.
    2. Put these up on display to improve discussion in the gap analyses and prioritization sessions.
    3. Improve the clarity and flow of your strategy template, final presentations, and summary documents by copying and pasting the gap assessment diagrams.

    Phase 2, Step 3: Identify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    PHASE 2

    2.12.22.3
    Measure Your Data Architecture CapabilitiesSet a Target for Data Architecture CapabilitiesIdentify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Before making your personal tactic plan, identify the trends in data architecture that can benefit your organization.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model.
    • Initiate the Data Architecture Roadmap Tool to begin creating a roadmap for your optimization plan.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A framework for generating a tactical plan for data architecture optimization.
    • Knowledge of the various trends in the data architecture field that can be incorporated into your plan.

    Capitalize on trends in data architecture before you determine the tactics that apply to you

    Stop here. Before you begin to plan for optimization of the organization’s data environment, get a sense of the sustainability and scalability of the direction of the organization’s data architecture evolution.

    Practically any trend in data architecture is driven by an attempt to solve one or more the common challenges of today’s tumultuous data landscape, otherwise known as “big data.” Data is being produced in outrageous amounts, at very high speeds, and in a growing number of types and structures.

    To meet these demands, which are not slowing down, you must keep ahead of the curve. Consider the internal and external catalysts that might fuel your organization’s need to modernize its data architecture:

    Big Data

    Data Storage

    Advanced analytics

    Unstructured data

    Integration

    Hadoop ecosystem

    The discussion about big data is no longer about what it is, but how do businesses of all types operationalize it.

    Is your organization currently capturing and leveraging big data?

    Are they looking to do so in the near future?

    The cloud

    The cloud offers economical solutions to many aspects of data architecture.

    Have you dealt with issues of lack of storage space or difficulties with scalability?

    Do you need remote access to data and tools?

    Real-time architecture

    Advanced analytics (machine learning, natural language processing) often require data in real-time. Consider Lambda and Kappa architectures.

    Has your data flow prevented you from automation, advanced analytics, or embracing the world of IoT?

    Graph databases

    Self-service data access allows more than just technical users to participate in analytics. NoSQL can uncover buried relationships in your data.

    Has your organization struggled to make sense of different types of unstructured data?

    Is ETL enough?

    What SQL is to NoSQL, ETL is to NoETL. Integration techniques are being created to address the high variety and high velocity of data.

    Have your data scientists wasted too much time and resources in the ETL stage?

    Read the Data Architecture Trends Presentation to understand the current cutting edge topics in data architecture

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    The speed at which new technology is changing is making it difficult for IT professionals to keep pace with best practices, let alone cutting edge technologies.

    The Info-Tech Data Architecture Trends Presentation provides a glance at some of the more significant innovations in technology that are driving today’s advanced data architectures.

    This presentation also explains how these trends relate to either the data challenges you may be facing, or the specific business drivers you are hoping to bring to your organization.

    Sample of the Data Architecture Trends Presentation.
    Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    Gaps between your current and future capabilities will help you to determine the tactics that apply to you

    Now that you know where the organization currently stands, follow these steps to begin prioritizing the initiatives:

    1. What are you trying to accomplish? Determine target states that are framed in quantifiable objectives that can be clearly communicated. The more specific the objectives are the better.
    2. Evaluate the “delta,” or difference between where the organization currently stands and where it needs to go. This will be expressed in terms of gap closure strategies, and will help clarify the initiatives that will populate the road map.
    3. Determine the relative business value of each initiative, as well as the relative complexities of successfully implementing them. These scores should be created with stakeholder input, and then plotted in an effort/transition quadrant map to determine where the quickest and most valuable wins lie.
    Current State Gap Closure Strategies Target State Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap
    • Organization objectives
    • Functional needs
    • Current operating models
    • Technology assets
    Initiatives involving:
    • Organizational changes
    • Functional changes
    • Technology changes
    • Process changes
    • Performance objectives (revenue growth, customer intimacy, growth of organization)
    • Operating model improvements
    • Prioritized, simplified, and compelling vision of how the organization will optimize data architecture

    (Source: “How to Build a Roadmap”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Optimizing data architecture requires a tactical approach, not a passive approach. The demanding task of optimization requires the ability to heavily prioritize. After you have identified why, determine how using our pre-built roadmap to address the four common drivers.

    Each of the layers of an organization’s data architecture have associated challenges to optimization

    Stop! Before you begin, recognize these “gotchas” that can present roadblocks to creating an effective data architecture environment.

    Before diving headfirst into creating your tactical data architecture plan, documenting the challenges associated with each aspect of the organization’s data architecture can help to identify where you need to focus your energy in optimizing each tier. The following table presents the common challenges across the five tiers:

    Source Tier

    Integration Tier

    Warehousing Tier

    Analytics Tier

    Presentation Tier

    Inconsistent data models Performance issues Scalability of the data warehouse Data currency, flexibility Model interoperability
    Data quality measures: data accuracy, timeliness, accessibility, relevance Duplicated data Infrastructure needed to support volume of data No business context for using the data in the correct manner No business context for using the data in the correct manner
    Free-form field and data values beyond data domain Tokenization and other required data transformations Performance
    Volume
    Greedy consumers can cripple performance
    Insufficient infrastructure
    Inefficiencies in building the data mart Report proliferation/chaos (“kitchen sink dashboards”)
    Reporting out of source systems DB model inefficiencies
    Manual errors;
    Application usability
    Elasticity

    Create metrics before you plan to optimize your data architecture

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3 1 hour

    INPUT: Tactics that will be used to optimize data architecture.

    OUTPUT: Metrics that can be used to measure optimization success.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect

    Metrics will help you to track your optimization efforts and ensure that they are providing value to the organization.

    There are two types of metrics that are useful for data architects to track and measure: program metrics and project metrics. Program metrics represent the activities that the data architecture program, which is the sum of multiple projects, should help to improve. Project metrics are the more granular metrics that track each project.

    Program Metrics

    • TCO of IT
      • Costs associated with applications, databases, data maintenance
      • Should decrease with better data architecture (rationalized apps, operationalized databases)
    • Cost savings:
      • Retiring a legacy system and associated databases
      • Consolidated licensing
      • Introducing shared services
    • Data systems under maintenance (maintenance burden)
    • End-user data requests fulfilled
    • Improvement of time of delivery of reports and insights

    Project Metrics

    • Percent of projects in alignment with EA
    • Percent of projects compliant with the EA governance process (architectural due diligence rate)
    • Reducing time to market for launching new products
      • Reducing human error rates
      • Speeding up order delivery
      • Reducing IT costs
      • Reducing severity and frequency of security incidents

    Use Tab 6. Metrics of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool to document and track metrics associated with your optimization tactics.

    Use Info-Tech’s resources to build your data architecture capabilities

    The following resources from Info-Tech can be used to improve the capabilities that were identified as having a gap. Read more about the details of the five-tier architecture in the blueprints below:

    Data Governance

    Data architecture depends on effective data governance. Use our blueprint, Enable Shared Insights With an Effective Data Governance Engine to get more out of your architecture.

    Data Quality

    The key to maintaining high data quality is a proactive approach that requires you to establish and update strategies for preventing, detecting, and correcting errors. Find out more on how to improve data quality with Info-Tech’s blueprint, Restore Trust in Your Data Using a Business-Aligned Data Quality Management Approach.

    Master Data Management

    When you start your data governance program, you will quickly realize that you need an effective MDM strategy for managing your critical data assets. Use our blueprint, Develop a Master Data Management Strategy and Roadmap to Better Monetize Data to get started with MDM.

    Data Warehouse

    The key to maintaining high data quality is a proactive approach that requires you to establish and update strategies for preventing, detecting, and correcting errors. Find out more on how to improve data quality with Info-Tech’s blueprint, Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment.

    With the optimal tactics identified, the monetary authority uncovered areas needing improvement

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'.

    Part 2

    After establishing the appropriate tactics based on its business driver, the monetary authority was able to identify its shortcomings and adopt resolutions to remedy the issues.

    Best Practice Tactic Current State Solution
    Tier 1 - Data Sources Identify data sources Data coming from a number of locations. Create data model for old and new systems.
    Ensure data quality Internal data scanned from paper and incomplete. Data cleansing and update governance and business rules for migration to new system.
    External sources providing conflicting data.
    Tier 3 - Data Warehousing Data catalogue Data aggregated incompletely. Built proper business data glossary for searchability.
    Indexing Data warehouse performance sub-optimal. Architected data warehouse for appropriate use (star schema).
    Tier 4 - Data Analytics Data accessibility Relevant data buried in warehouse. Build data marts for access.
    Data reduction Accurate report building could not be performed in current storage. Built interim solution sandbox, spin up SQL database.

    Establishing these solutions provided the organization with necessary information to build their roadmap and move towards implementing an optimized data architecture.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of a Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.1 – 2.2.2

    Sample of activities 2.1.1 and 2.2.2, the first being 'Determine your current state across the related architecture tiers'. Evaluate your current capabilities and design your target data quality practice from two angles

    In this assessment and planning activity, the team will evaluate the current and target capabilities for your data architecture’s ability to meet business needs based on the essential capabilities across the five tiers of an organization’s architectural environment.

    2.2.3

    Sample of activity 2.2.3 'Create metrics before you plan to optimize your data architecture'. Create metrics to track the success of your optimization plan.

    The Info-Tech facilitator will guide you through the process of creating program and project metrics to track as you optimize your data architecture. This will help to ensure that the tactics are helping to improve crucial business attributes.

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Personalize Your Data Architecture RoadmapStep 3.2: Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the tactical plan that addresses the business drivers by optimizing your data architecture in the relevant focus areas.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss and review the roadmap of optimization activities, including dependencies, timing, and ownership of activities.
    • Understand how change management is an integral aspect of any data architecture optimization plan.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create your detailed data architecture initiative roadmap.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create your Data Architecture Decision Template to document the changes that are going to be made to optimize your data architecture environment.
    • Review how change management fits into the data architecture improvement program.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Decision Template

    Phase 3 Results & Insights

    • Phase 3 will help you to build a personalized roadmap and plan for optimizing data architecture in your organization. In carrying out this roadmap, changes will, by necessity, occur. Therefore, an integral aspect of a data architect’s role is change management. Use the resources included in Phase 3 to smoothen the change management process.

    Phase 3, Step 1: Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap

    PHASE 3

    3.1 3.2
    Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the timing, effort, and ownership of the recommended optimization initiatives.
    • Brainstorm initiatives that are not yet on the roadmap but apply to you.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • DBAs
    • Enterprise Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A roadmap of specific initiatives that map to the tactical plan for optimizing your organization’s data architecture.
    • A plan for communicating high-level business objectives to data workers to address the issues of the business.

    Now that you have tactical priorities, identify the actionable steps that will lead you to an optimized data architecture

    Phase 1 and 2 helped you to identify tactics that address some of the most common business drivers. Phase 3 will bring you through the process of practically planning what those tactics look like in your organization’s environment and create a roadmap to plan how you will generate business value through optimization of your data architecture environment.

    Diagram of the three phases and the goals of each one. The first phase says 'Identify your data architecture business driver' and highlights 'Business Driver 3' out of four to focus on in Phase 2. Phase 2 says 'Optimization tactics across the five-tier logical data architecture' and identifies four of six 'Tactics' to use in Phase 3. Phase 3 is a 'Practical Roadmap of Initiatives' and utilizes a timeline of initiatives in which to apply the chosen tactics.

    Use the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool to personalize your roadmap

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1.1 Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool
    Generating Your Roadmap
    1. On Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning, you will find a list of tactics that correspond to every capability that applies to your chosen driver and where there is a gap. In addition, each tactic has a sequence of “Suggested Initiatives,” which represent the best-practice steps that you should take to optimize your data architecture according to your priorities and gaps.
    2. Customize this list of initiatives according to your needs.
    3. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap, and can be used to organize your plan and ensure that all of the essential aspects of optimizing data architecture are addressed.
    4. The roadmap can be used as an “executive brief” roadmap and as a communication tool for the business.
    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning.
    Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap.
    Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap

    Determine the details of your data architecture optimization activities

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.2 1 hour

    INPUT: Timing of initiatives for optimizing data architecture.

    OUTPUT: Optimization roadmap

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise Architect

    Instructions

    1. With the list of suggested activities in place on Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning, select whether or not the initiatives will be included in the roadmap. By default, all of the initiatives are set to “Yes.”
    2. Plan the sequence, starting time, and length of each initiative, as well as the assigned responsibility of the initiative in Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool.
    3. The tool will a generate a Gantt chart based on the start and length of your initiatives.
    4. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap.
    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning. Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap. Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap

    Info-Tech Insight

    The activities that populate the roadmap can be taken as best practice activities. If you want an actionable, comprehensive, and prescriptive plan for optimizing your data architecture, fill in the timing of the activities and print the roadmap. This can serve as a rapid communication tool for your data architecture plan to the business and other architects.

    Optimizing data architecture relies on communication between the business and data workers

    Remember: Data architects bridge the gap between strategic and technical requirements of data.

    Visualization centering the 'Data Architect' as the bridge between 'Data Workers', 'Business', and 'Data & Applications'.

    Therefore, as you plan the data and its interactions with applications, it is imperative that you communicate the plan and its implications to the business and the data workers. Stock photo of coworkers communicating.
    Also remember: In Phase 1, you built your tactical data architecture optimization plan.
    Sample 1 of the Data Architecture Optimization Template. Sample 2 of the Data Architecture Optimization Template.
    Use this document to communicate your plan for data architecture optimization to both the business and the data workers. Socialize this document as a representation of your organization’s current data architecture as well as where it is headed in the future.

    Communicate your data architecture optimization plan to the business for approval

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 2 hours

    INPUT: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap

    OUTPUT: Communication plan

    Materials: Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Participants: Data Architect, Business representatives, IT representatives

    Instructions

    Begin by presenting your plan and roadmap to the business units who participated in business interviews in activity 1.1.3 of Phase 1.

    If you receive feedback that suggests that you should make revisions to the plan, consult Info-Tech Research Group for suggestions on how to improve the plan.

    If you gain approval for the plan, communicate it to DBAs and other data workers.

    Iterative optimization and communication plan:
    Visualization of the Iterative optimization and communication plan. 'Start here' at 'Communicate Plan and Roadmap to the Business', and then continue in a cycle of 'Receive Approval or Suggested Modifications', 'Get Advice for Improvements to the Plan', 'Revise Plan', and back to the initial step until you receive 'Approval', then 'Present to Data Workers'.

    With a roadmap in place, the monetary authority followed a tactical and practical plan to repair outdated data architecture

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'.

    Part 3

    After establishing the appropriate tactics based on its business driver, the monetary authority was able to identify its shortcomings and adopt resolutions to remedy the issues.

    Challenge

    A monetary authority was placed under new requirements where it would need to produce 6 different report types on its clients to a regulatory body within a window potentially as short as 1 hour.

    With its current capabilities, it could complete such a task in roughly 7 days.

    The organization’s data architecture was comprised of legacy systems that had poor searchability. Moreover, the data it worked with was scanned from paper, regularly incomplete and often inconsistent.

    Solution

    The solution first required the organization to establish the business driver behind the need to optimize its architecture. In this case, it would be compliance requirements.

    With Info-Tech’s methodology, the organization focused on three tiers: data sources, warehousing, and analytics.

    Several solutions were developed to address the appropriate lacking capabilities. Firstly, the creation of a data model for old and new systems. The implementation of governance principles and business rules for migration of any data. Additionally, proper indexing techniques and business data glossary were established. Lastly, data marts and sandboxes were designed for data accessibility and to enable a space for proper report building.

    Results

    With the solutions established, the monetary authority was given information it needed to build a comprehensive roadmap, and is currently undergoing the implementation of the plan to ensure it will experience its desired outcome – an optimized data architecture built with the capacity to handle external compliance requirements.

    Phase 3, Step 2: Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    PHASE 3

    3.13.2
    Personalize Your Data Architecture RoadmapManage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • With a plan in place, document the major architectural decisions that have been and will be made to optimize data architecture.
    • Create a plan for change and release management, an essential function of the data architect role.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • Resources for documenting and managing the inevitable change associated with updates to the organization’s data architecture environment.

    To implement data architecture changes, you must plan to accommodate the issues that come with change

    Once you have a plan in place, one the most challenging aspects of improving an organization is yet to come…overcoming change!

    “When managing change, the job of the data architect is to avoid unnecessary change and to encapsulate necessary change.

    You must provide motivation for simplifying change, making it manageable for the whole organization.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Stock photo of multiple hands placing app/website design elements on a piece of paper.

    Create roadmap

    Arrow pointing down.

    Communicate roadmap

    Arrow pointing down.

    Implement roadmap

    Arrow pointing down.

    Change management

    Use the Data Architecture Decision Template when architectural changes are made

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2 Data Architecture Decision Template
    Document the architectural decisions made to provide context around changes made to the organization’s data environment.

    The goal of this Data Architecture Decision Template is to provide data architects with a template for managing the changes that accompany major architectural decisions. As you work through the Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy blueprint, you will create a plan for tactical initiatives that address the drivers of the business to optimize your data architecture. This plan will bring about changes to the organization’s data architecture that need change management considerations.

    Document any major changes to the organization’s data architecture that are required to evolve with the organization’s drivers. This will ensure that major architectural changes are documented, tracked, and that the context around the decision is maintained.

    “Environment is very chaotic nowadays – legacy apps, sprawl, ERPs, a huge mix and orgs are grappling with what our data landscape look like? Where are our data assets that we need to use?” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Sample of the Data Architecture Decision Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Decision Template to document any major changes in the organization’s data architecture.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s resources to smooth change management

    As changes to the architectural environment occur, data architects must stay ahead of the curve and plan the change management considerations that come with major architectural decisions.

    “When managing change, the job of the data architect is to avoid unnecessary change and to encapsulate necessary change.

    You must provide motivation for simplifying change, making it manageable for the whole organization.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    See Info-Tech’s resources on change management to smooth changes:
    Banner for the blueprint set 'Optimize Change Management' with subtitle 'Turn and face the change with a right-sized change management process'.
    Sample of the Optimize Change Management blueprint.

    Change Management Blueprint

    Sample of the Change Management Roadmap Tool.

    Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Use Info-Tech’s resources for effective release management

    As changes to the architectural environment occur, data architects must stay ahead of the curve and plan the release management considerations around new hardware and software releases or updates.

    Release management is a process that encompasses the planning, design, build, configuration, and testing of hardware and software releases to create a defined set of release components (ITIL). Release activities can include the distribution of the release and supporting documentation directly to end users. See Info-Tech’s resources on Release Management to smooth changes:

    Banner for the blueprint set 'Take a Holistic View to Optimize Release Management' with subtitle 'Build trust by right-sizing your process using appropriate governance'.
    Samples of the Release Management blueprint.

    Release Management Blueprint

    Sample of the Release Management Process Standard Template.

    Release Management Process Standard Template

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of a Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1

    Sample of activity 3.1.2 'Determine the timing of your data architecture optimization activities'. Create your personalized roadmap of activities.

    In this activity, the facilitator will guide the team in evaluating practice gaps highlighted by the assessment, and compare these gaps at face value so general priorities can be documented. The same categories as in 3.1.1 are considered.

    3.1.3

    Sample of activity 3.1.3 'Communicate your Data Architecture Optimization Plan to the business for approval'. Communicate your data architecture optimization plan.

    The facilitator will help you to identify the optimal medium and timing for communicating your plan for optimizing your data architecture.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • Data architecture needs to evolve along with the changing business landscape. There are four common business drivers that put most pressure on archaic architectures. As a result, the organization’s architecture must be flexible and responsive to changing business needs.

    Insight 2

    • Data architecture is not just about models.
      Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to structurally unsound data that does not serve the business.

    Insight 3

    • Data is used differently across the layers of an organization’s data architecture, and the capabilities needed to optimize use of data change with it. Architecting and managing data from source to warehousing to presentation requires different tactics for optimal use.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • An understanding of what data architecture is, how data architects can provide value to the organization, and how data architecture fits into the larger enterprise architecture picture.
    • The capabilities required for optimization of the organization’s data architecture across the five tiers of the logical data architecture model.

    Processes Optimized

    • Prioritization and planning of data architect responsibilities across the five tiers of the five-tier logical data architecture model.
    • Roadmapping of tactics that address the most common business drivers of the organization.
    • Architectural change management.

    Deliverables Completed

    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation
    • Data Architecture Roadmap Tool
    • Data Architecture Decision Template

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Ron Huizenga, Senior Product Manager, Embarcadero Technologies, Inc. Ron Huizenga, Senior Product Manager
    Embarcadero Technologies, Inc.

    Ron Huizenga has over 30 years of experience as an IT executive and consultant in enterprise data architecture, governance, business process reengineering and improvement, program/project management, software development, and business management. His experience spans multiple industries including manufacturing, supply chain, pipelines, natural resources, retail, healthcare, insurance, and transportation.

    Photo of Andrew Johnston, Architect, Independent Consultant. Andrew Johnston, Architect Independent Consultant

    An independent consultant with a unique combination of managerial, commercial, and technical skills, Andrew specializes in the development of strategies and technical architectures that allow businesses to get the maximum benefit from their IT resources. He has been described by clients as a "broad spectrum" architect, summarizing his ability to engage in many problems at many levels.

    Research contributors

    Internal Contributors
    Logo for Info-Tech Research Group.
    • Steven J. Wilson, Senior Director, Research & Advisory Services
    • Daniel Ko, Research Manager
    • Bernie Gilles, Senior Director, Research & Advisory Services
    External Contributors
    Logo for Embarcadero.
    Logo for Questa Computing. Logo for Geha.
    • Ron Huizenga, Embercardo Technologies
    • Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant
    • Darrell Enslinger, Government Employees Health Association
    • Anonymous Contributors

    Bibliography

    Allen, Mark. “Get the ETL Out of Here.” MarkLogic. Sep, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017.[http://www.marklogic.com/blog/get-the-etl-out-of-here/]

    Anadiotis, George. “Streaming hot: Real-time big data architecture matters.” ZDNet. Jan, 2017. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.zdnet.com/article/streaming-hot-real-time-big-data-architecture-matters/]

    Aston, Dan. “The Economic value of Enterprise Architecture and How to Show It.” Erwin. Aug, 2016. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [http://erwin.com/blog/economic-value-enterprise-architecture-show/]

    Baer, Tony. “2017 Trends to Watch: Big Data.” Ovum. Nov, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017.

    Bmc. “Benefits & Advantages of Hadoop.” Bmc. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.bmcsoftware.ca/guides/hadoop-benefits-business-case.html]

    Boyd, Ryan, et al. “Relational vs. Graph Data Modeling” DZone. Mar 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://dzone.com/articles/relational-vs-graph-data-modeling]

    Brahmachar, Satya. “Theme To Digital Transformation - Journey to Data Driven Enterprise” Feb, 2015. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [http://satyabrahmachari-thought-leader.blogspot.ca/2015/02/i-smac-theme-to-digital-transformation.html]

    Capsenta. “NoETL.” Capsenta. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://capsenta.com/wp-content/uploads/2015/03/Capsenta-Booklet.pdf]

    Connolly, Shaun. “Implementing the Blueprint for Enterprise Hadoop” Hortonworks. Apr, 2014. Web. 25 Apr 2017. https://hortonworks.com/blog/implementing-the-blue...

    Forbes. “Cloud 2.0: Companies Move From Cloud-First To Cloud-Only.” Forbes. Apr, 2017. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.forbes.com/sites/vmware/2017/04/07/cloud-2-0-companies-move-from-cloud-first-to-cloud-only/#5cd9d94a4d5e]

    Forgeat, Julien. “Lambda and Kappa.” Ericsson. Nov 2015. Web 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.ericsson.com/research-blog/data-knowledge/data-processing-architectures-lambda-and-kappa/]

    Grimes, Seth. “Is It Time For NoETL?” InformationWeek. Mar, 2010. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.informationweek.com/software/information-management/is-it-time-for-noetl/d/d-id/1087813]

    Gupta, Manav. et al. “How IB‹ leads in building big data analytics solutions in the cloud.” IBM. Feb, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.ibm.com/developerworks/cloud/library/cl-ibm-leads-building-big-data-analytics-solutions-cloud-trs/index.html#N102DE]

    “How To Build A Roadmap.” Hub Designs Magazine. Web 25 Apr 2017. [https://hubdesignsmagazine.com/2011/03/05/how-to-build-a-roadmap/]

    IBM. “Top industry use cases for stream computing.” IBM. Oct, 2015. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www-01.ibm.com/common/ssi/cgi-bin/ssialias?htmlfid=IMW14704USEN]

    Mateos-Garcia, Juan, et al. “Skills Of The Datavores.” Nesta. July. 2015. Web. 8 Aug 2016. [https://www.nesta.org.uk/sites/default/files/skills_of_the_datavores.pdf].

    Maynard, Steven. “Analytics: Don’t Forget The Human Element” Forbes. 2015. Web. 20 Apr. 2017. [http://www.ey.com/Publication/vwLUAssets/EY-Forbes-Insights-Data-and-Analytics-Impact-Index-2015/$FILE/EY-Forbes-Insights-Data-and-Analytics-Impact-Index-2015.pdf]

    Neo4j. “From Relational to Neo4j.” Neo4j. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://neo4j.com/developer/graph-db-vs-rdbms/#_from_relational_to_graph_databases]

    NoETL “NoETL.” NoETL. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://noetl.org/]

    Nolan, Roger. “Digital Transformation: Is Your Data Management Ready?” Informatica. Jun, 2016. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [https://blogs.informatica.com/2016/06/10/digital-transformation-data-management-ready/#fbid=hmBYQgS6hnm]

    OpsClarity. “2016 State of Fast Data & Streaming Applications.” OpsClarity. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.opsclarity.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/2016FastDataSurvey.pdf]

    Oracle. “A Relational Database Overview.” Oracle. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/jdbc/overview/database.html]

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “Big Data Cybersecurity Analytics Research Repor.t” Cloudera. Aug, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.cloudera.com/content/dam/www/static/documents/analyst-reports/big-data-cybersecurity-analytics-research-report.pdf]

    Sanchez, Jose Juan. “Data Movement Killed the BI Star.” DV Blog. May, 2016. Web. 20 Apr. 2017. [http://www.datavirtualizationblog.com/data-movement-killed-the-bi-star/]

    SAS. “Hadoop; What it is and why does it matter?” SAS. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.sas.com/en_ca/insights/big-data/hadoop.html#hadoopusers]

    Schumacher, Robin. “A Quick Primer on graph Databases for RDBMS Professionals.” Datastax. Jul, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.datastax.com/2016/07/quick-primer-on-graph-databases-for-rdbms-professionals]

    Swoyer, Steve. “It’s the End of the Data Warehouse as We Know It.” TDWI. Jan, 2017. Web. 20 Apr. 2017. [https://upside.tdwi.org/articles/2017/01/11/end-of-the-data-warehouse-as-we-know-it.aspx]

    Webber, Jim, and Ian Robinson. “The Top 5 Use Cases of Graph Databases.” Neo4j. 2015. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://info.neo4j.com/rs/773-GON-065/images/Neo4j_Top5_UseCases_Graph%20Databases.pdf]

    Zachman Framework. [https://www.zachman.com/]

    Zupan, Jane. “Survey of Big Data Decision Makers.” Attiv/o. May, 2016. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [https://www.attivio.com/blog/post/survey-big-data-decision-makers]

    Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}224|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • IT budgets are increasing, but many CIOs feel their budgets are inadequate to accomplish what is being asked of them.
    • Eighty percent of organizations don’t have a mature, repeatable, scalable negotiation process.
    • Training dollars on negotiations are often wasted or ineffective.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Negotiations are about allocating risk and money – how much risk is a party willing to accept at what price point?
    • Using a cross-functional/cross-insight team structure for negotiation preparation yields better results.
    • Soft skills aren’t enough and theatrical negotiation tactics aren’t effective.

    Impact and Result

    A good negotiation process can help:

    • Maximize budget dollars.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Enhance relationships internally and externally.

    Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create and follow a scalable process for preparing to negotiate with vendors, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Before

    Throughout this phase, the 12 steps for negotiation preparation are identified and reviewed.

    • Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively – Phase 1: Before
    • Before Negotiating Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 12 Steps to Better Negotiation Preparation

    The Purpose

    Improve negotiation preparation.

    Understand how to use the Info-Tech Before Negotiating Tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A scalable framework for negotiation preparation will be created.

    The Before Negotiating Tool will be configured for the customer’s environment.

    Activities

    1.1 Establish specific negotiation goals and ranges.

    1.2 Identify and assess alternatives to a negotiated agreement.

    1.3 Identify and evaluate assumptions made by the parties.

    1.4 Conduct research.

    1.5 Identify and evaluate relationship issues.

    1.6 Identify and leverage the team structure.

    1.7 Identify and address leverage issues.

    1.8 Evaluate timeline considerations.

    1.9 Create a strategy.

    1.10 Draft a negotiation agenda.

    1.11 Draft and answer questions.

    1.12 Rehearse (informal and formal).

    Outputs

    Sample negotiation goals and ranges will be generated via a case study to demonstrate the concepts and how to use the Before Negotiating Tool (this will apply to each Planned Activity)

    Sample alternatives will be generated

    Sample assumptions will be generated

    Sample research will be generated

    Sample relationship issues will be generated

    Sample teams will be generated

    Sample leverage items will be generated

    Sample timeline issues will be generated

    A sample strategy will be generated

    A sample negotiation agenda will be generated

    Sample questions and answers will be generated

    Sample rehearsals will be conducted

    Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}279|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Many business groups in the organization are siloed and have disjointed services that lead to a less than ideal customer experience.
    • Service management is too often process-driven and is implemented without a holistic view of customer value.
    • Businesses get caught up in the legacy of their old systems and find it difficult to move with the evolving market.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Customer experience is the new battleground. Parity between products is creating the need to differentiate via customer experience.
    • Don’t forget your employees! Enterprise service management (ESM) is also about delivering exceptional experiences to your employees so they can deliver exceptional services to your customers.
    • ESM is not driven by tools and processes. Rather, ESM is about pushing exceptional services to customers by pulling from organizational capabilities.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand ESM concepts and how they can improve customer service.
    • Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your organization’s state for ESM, identify the gaps, and create an action plan to move towards an ESM pilot.
    • Increase business and customer satisfaction by delivering services more efficiently.

    Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should move towards ESM, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand ESM and get buy-in

    Understand the concepts of ESM, determine the scope of the ESM program, and get buy-in.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 1: Understand ESM and Get Buy-in
    • Enterprise Service Management Executive Buy-in Presentation Template
    • Enterprise Service Management General Communications Presentation Template

    2. Assess the current state for ESM

    Determine the current state for ESM and identify the gaps.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 2: Assess the Current State for ESM
    • Enterprise Service Management Assessment Tool
    • Enterprise Service Management Assessment Tool Action Plan Guide
    • Enterprise Service Management Action Plan Tool

    3. Identify ESM pilot and finalize action plan

    Create customer journey maps, identify an ESM pilot, and finalize the action plan for the pilot.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 3: Identify ESM Pilot and Finalize Action Plan
    • Enterprise Service Management Customer Journey Map Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand ESM and Get Buy-In

    The Purpose

    Understand what ESM is and how it can improve customer service.

    Determine the scope of your ESM initiative and identify who the stakeholders are for this program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of ESM concepts.

    Understanding of the scope and stakeholders for your ESM initiative.

    Plan for getting buy-in for the ESM program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the concepts and benefits of ESM.

    1.2 Determine the scope of your ESM program.

    1.3 Identify your stakeholders.

    1.4 Develop an executive buy-in presentation.

    1.5 Develop a general communications presentation.

    Outputs

    Executive buy-in presentation

    General communications presentation

    2 Assess the Current State for ESM

    The Purpose

    Assess your current state with respect to culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    Identify your strengths and weaknesses from the ESM assessment scores.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of your organization’s current enablers and constraints for ESM.

    Determination and analysis of data needed to identify strengths or weaknesses in culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand your organization’s mission and vision.

    2.2 Assess your organization’s culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    2.3 Identify the gaps and determine the necessary foundational action items.

    Outputs

    ESM assessment score

    Foundational action items

    3 Define Services and Create Custom Journey Maps

    The Purpose

    Define and choose the top services at the organization.

    Create customer journey maps for the chosen services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of prioritized services.

    Customer journey maps for the prioritized services.

    Activities

    3.1 Make a list of your services.

    3.2 Prioritize your services.

    3.3 Build customer journey maps.

    Outputs

    List of services

    Customer journey maps

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}192|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,532 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Risk is unavoidable. Without a formal program to manage IT risk, you may be unaware of your severest IT risks.
    • The business could be making decisions that are not informed by risk.
    • Reacting to risks AFTER they occur can be costly and crippling, yet it is one of the most common tactics used by IT departments.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT risk is business risk. Every IT risk has business implications. Create an IT risk management program that shares accountability with the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program, and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders including the business senior management team to gain buy-in and to focus on IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an IT Risk Management Program – A holistic approach to managing IT risks within your organization and involving key business stakeholders.

    Gain business buy-in to understanding the key IT risks that could negatively impact the organization and create an IT risk management program to properly identify, assess, respond, monitor, and report on those risks.

    • Build an IT Risk Management Program – Phases 1-3

    2. Risk Management Program Manual – A single source of truth for the risk management program to exist and be updated to reflect changes.

    Leverage this Risk Management Program Manual to ensure that the decisions around how IT risks will be governed and managed can be documented in a single source accessible by those involved.

    • Risk Management Program Manual

    3. Risk Register & Risk Costing Tool – A set of tools to document identified risk events. Assess each risk event and consider the appropriate response based on your organization’s threshold for risk.

    Engage these tools in your organization if you do not currently have a GRC tool to document risk events as they relate to the IT function. Consider the best risk response to high severity risk events to ensure all possible situations are considered.

    • Risk Register Tool
    • Risk Costing Tool

    4. Risk Event Action Plan and Risk Report – A template to document the chosen risk responses and ensure accountable owners agree on selected response method.

    Establish clear guidelines and responses to risk events that will leave your organization vulnerable to unwanted threats. Ensure risk owners have agreed to the risk responses and are willing to take accountability for that response.

    • Risk Event Action Plan
    • Risk Report

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    The Purpose

    To assess current risk management maturity, develop goals, and establish IT risk governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified obstacles to effective IT risk management.

    Established attainable goals to increase maturity.

    Clearly laid out risk management accountabilities and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current program maturity

    1.2 Complete RACI chart

    1.3 Create the IT risk council

    1.4 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.5 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1.6 Identify risk events

    Outputs

    Maturity Assessment

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Risk Register

    2 Identify IT Risks

    The Purpose

    Identify and assess all IT risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a comprehensive list of all IT risk events.

    Risk events prioritized according to risk severity – as defined by the business.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify risk events (continued)

    2.2 Augment risk event list using COBIT 5 processes

    2.3 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    2.4 Create impact and probability scales

    2.5 Select a technique to measure reputational cost

    2.6 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    Outputs

    Finalized List of IT Risk Events

    Risk Register

    Risk Management Program Manual

    3 Identify IT Risks (continued)

    The Purpose

    Prioritize risks, establish monitoring responsibilities, and develop risk responses for top risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Risk monitoring responsibilities are established.

    Risk response strategies have been identified for all key risks.

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    3.2 Document the proximity of the risk event

    3.3 Conduct expected cost assessment

    3.4 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    3.5 Root cause analysis

    3.6 Identify and assess risk responses

    Outputs

    Risk Register

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Risk Event Action Plans

    4 Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    The Purpose

    Assess and select risk responses for top risks and effectively communicate recommendations and priorities to the business.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough analysis has been conducted on the value and effectiveness of risk responses for high severity risk events.

    Authoritative risk response recommendations can be made to senior leadership.

    A finalized Risk Management Program Manual is ready for distribution to key stakeholders.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and assess risk responses

    4.2 Risk response cost-benefit analysis

    4.3 Create multi-year cost projections

    4.4 Review techniques for embedding risk management in IT

    4.5 Finalize the Risk Report and Risk Management Program Manual

    4.6 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Outputs

    Risk Report

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Further reading

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    Table of Contents

    3 Executive Brief

    4 Analyst Perspective

    5 Executive Summary

    19 Phase 1: Review IT Risk Fundamentals & Governance

    43 Phase 2: Identify and Assess IT Risk

    74 Phase 3: Monitor, Communicate, and Respond to IT Risk

    102 Appendix

    108 Bibliography

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Siloed risks are risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Risk is an inherent part of life but not very well understood or executed within organizations. This has led to risk being avoided or, when it’s implemented, being performed in isolated siloes with inconsistencies in understanding of impact and terminology.

    Looking at risk in an integrated way within an organization drives a truer sense of the thresholds and levels of risks an organization is facing – making it easier to manage and leverage risk while reducing risks associated with different mitigation responses to the same risk events.

    This opens the door to using risk information – not only to prevent negative impacts but as a strategic differentiator in decision making. It helps you know which risks are worth taking, driving strong positive outcomes for your organization.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT has several challenges when it comes to addressing risk management:

    • Risk is unavoidable. Without a formal program to manage IT risk, you may be unaware of your severest IT risks.
    • The business could be making decisions that are not informed by risk.
    • Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and crippling, yet it is one of the most common tactics used by IT departments.

    Common Obstacles

    Many IT organizations realize these obstacles:

    • IT risks and business risks are often addressed separately, causing inconsistencies in the approach.
    • Security risk receives such a high profile that it often eclipses other important IT risks, leaving the organization vulnerable.
    • Failing to include the business in IT risk management leaves IT leaders too accountable; the business must have accountability as well.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders, including the business senior management team, to gain buy-in and to focus on the IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT risk is business risk. Every IT risk has business implications. Create an IT risk management program that shares accountability with the business.

    Ad hoc approaches to managing risk fail because…

    If you are like the majority of IT departments, you do not have a consistent and comprehensive strategy for managing IT risk.

    1. Ad hoc risk management is reactionary.
    2. Ad hoc risk management is often focused only on IT security.
    3. Ad hoc risk management lacks alignment with business objectives.

    The results:

    • Increased business risk exposure caused by a lack of understanding of the impact of IT risks on the business.
    • Increased IT non-compliance, resulting in costly settlements and fines.
    • IT audit failure.
    • Ineffective management of risk caused by poor risk information and wrong risk response decisions.
    • Increased unnecessary and avoidable IT failures and fixes.

    58% of organizations still lack a systematic and robust method to actually report on risks (Source: AICPA, 2021)

    Data is an invaluable asset – ensure it’s protected

    Case Studies

    Logo for Cognyte.

    Cognyte, a vendor hired to be a cybersecurity analytics company, had over five billion records exposed in Spring 2021. The data was compromised for four days, providing attackers with plenty of opportunities to obtain personally identifying information. (SecureBlink., 2021 & Security Magazine, 2021)

    Logo for Facebook.

    Facebook, the world’s largest social media giant, had over 533 million Facebook users’ personal data breached when data sets were able to be cross-listed with one another. (Business Insider, 2021 & Security Magazine, 2021)

    Logo for MGM Resorts.

    In 2020, over 10.6 million customers experienced some sort of data being accessible, with 1,300 having serious personally identifying information breached. (The New York Times, 2020)

    Risk management is a business enabler

    Formalize risk management to increase your likelihood of success.

    By identifying areas of risk exposure and creating solutions proactively, obstacles can be removed or circumvented before they become a real problem.

    A certain amount of risk is healthy and can stimulate innovation:

    • A formal risk management strategy doesn’t mean trying to mitigate every possible risk; it means exposing the organization to the right amount of risk.
    • Taking a formal risk management approach allows an organization to thoughtfully choose which risks it is willing to accept.
    • Organizations with high risk management maturity will vault themselves ahead of the competition because they will be aware of which risks to prepare for, which risks to ignore, and which risks to take.

    Only 12% of organizations are using risk as a strategic tool most or all of the time (Source: AICPA, 2021)

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Accountability for IT risks and the decisions made to address them should be shared between IT and the business.

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Follow the steps of this blueprint to build or optimize your IT risk management program

    Cycle of 'Goverance' beginning with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report'.

    Start Here

    PHASE 1
    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance
    PHASE 2
    Identify and Assess IT Risk
    PHASE 3
    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    1.1

    Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals

    1.2

    Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    2.1

    Identify IT Risks

    2.2

    Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    3.1

    Monitor IT Risks and Develop Risk Responses

    3.2

    Report IT Risk Priorities

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in 'Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)': 'IT', 'Security', 'Digital', 'Vendor/TPRM', and 'Other'.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Use the tools and activities in each phase of the blueprint to create a comprehensive, customized program manual for the ongoing management of IT risk.

    Sample of the key deliverable, Risk Manangement Program Fund.
    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    Assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment blueprint. Centralized Risk Register

    The repository for all the risks that have been identified within your environment.

    Sample of the Centralized Risk Register blueprint.
    Risk Costing Tool

    A potential cost-benefit analysis of possible risk responses to determine a good method to move forward.

    Sample of the Risk Costing Tool blueprint. Risk Report & Risk Event Action Plan

    A method to report risk severity and hold risk owners accountable for chosen method of responding.

    Samples of the Risk Report & Risk Event Action Plan blueprints.

    Benefit from industry-leading best practices

    As a part of our research process, we used the COSO, ISO 31000, and COBIT 2019 frameworks. Contextualizing IT risk management within these frameworks ensured that our project-focused approach is grounded in industry-leading best practices for managing IT risk.

    Logo for COSO.

    COSO’s Enterprise Risk Management — Integrating with Strategy and Performance addresses the evolution of enterprise risk management and the need for organizations to improve their approach to managing risk to meet the demands of an evolving business environment. (COSO)

    Logo for ISO.

    ISO 31000
    Risk Management can help organizations increase the likelihood of achieving objectives, improve the identification of opportunities and threats, and effectively allocate and use resources for risk treatment. (ISO 31000)

    Logo for COBIT.

    COBIT 2019’s IT functions were used to develop and refine our Ten IT Risk Categories used in our top-down risk identification methodology. (COBIT 2019)

    Abandon ad hoc risk management

    A strong risk management foundation is valuable when building your IT risk management program.

    This research covers the following IT risk fundamentals:

    • Benefits of formalized risk management
    • Key terms and definitions
    • Risk management within ERM
    • Risk management independent of ERM
    • Four key principles of IT risk management
    • Importance of a risk management program manual
    • Importance of buy-in and support from the business

    Drivers of Formalized Risk Management:

    Drivers External to IT
    External Audit Internal Audit
    Mandated by ERM
    Occurrence of Risk Event
    Demonstrating IT’s value to the business Proactive initiative
    Emerging IT risk awareness
    Grassroots Drivers

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Increased on-time, in-scope, and on-budget completion of IT projects.
    • Meet the business’ service requirements.
    • Improved satisfaction with IT by senior leadership and business units.
    • Fewer resources wasted on fire-fighting.
    • Improved availability, integrity, and confidentiality of sensitive data.
    • More efficient use of resources.
    • Greater ability to respond to evolving threats.

    Business Benefits

    • Reduced operational surprises or failures.
    • Improved IT flexibility when responding to risk events and market fluctuations.
    • Reduced budget uncertainty.
    • Improved ability to make decisions when developing long-term strategies.
    • Improved stakeholder and shareholder confidence.
    • Achieved compliance with external regulations.
    • Competitive advantage over organizations with immature risk management practices.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1

    • Call #1: Assess current risk maturity and organizational buy-in.
    • Call #2: Establish an IT risk council and determine IT risk management program goals.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #3: Identify the risk categories used to organize risk events.
    • Call #4: Identify the threshold for risk the organization can withstand.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #5: Create a method to assess risk event severity.
    • Call #6: Establish a method to monitor priority risks and consider possible risk responses.
    • Call #7: Communicate risk priorities to the business and implement risk management plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities
    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    1.1 Assess current program maturity

    1.2 Complete RACI chart

    1.3 Create the IT risk council

    1.4 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.5 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1.6 Identify risk events

    Identify IT Risks

    2.1 Identify risk events (continued)

    2.2 Augment risk event list using COBIT5 processes

    2.3 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    2.4 Create impact and probability scales

    2.5 Select a technique to measure reputational cost

    2.6 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    Assess IT Risks

    3.1 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    3.2 Document the proximity of the risk event

    3.3 Conduct expected cost assessment

    3.4 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    3.5 Perform root cause analysis

    3.6 Identify and assess risk responses

    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    4.1 Identify and assess risk responses

    4.2 Risk response cost-benefit analysis

    4.3 Create multi-year cost projections

    4.4 Review techniques for embedding risk management in IT

    4.5 Finalize the Risk Report and Risk Management Program Manual

    4.6 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Outcomes
    1. Maturity Assessment
    2. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Finalized List of IT Risk Events
    2. Risk Register
    3. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Risk Register
    2. Risk Event Action Plans
    3. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Risk Report
    2. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Workshop Report
    2. Risk Management Program Manual

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 1

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Gain buy-in from senior leadership
    • Assess current program maturity
    • Identify obstacles and pain points
    • Determine the risk culture of the organization
    • Develop risk management goals
    • Develop SMART project metrics
    • Create the IT risk council
    • Complete a RACI chart

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Step 1.1

    Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Gain buy-in from senior leadership
    • 1.1.2 Assess current program maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • Reviewed key IT principles and terminology
    • Gained understanding of the relationship between IT risk management and ERM
    • Introduced to Info-Tech’s IT Risk Management Framework
    • Obtained the support of senior leadership
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Effective IT risk management is possible with or without ERM

    Whether or not your organization has ERM, integrating your IT risk management program with the business is possible.

    Most IT departments find themselves in one of these two organizational frameworks for managing IT risk:

    Core Responsibilities With an ERM Without an ERM
    • Risk Decision-Making Authority
    • Final Accountability
    Senior Leadership Team Senior Leadership Team
    • Risk Governance
    • Risk Prioritization & Communication
    ERM IT Risk Management
    • Risk Identification
    • Risk Assessment
    • Risk Monitoring
    IT Risk Management
    Pro: IT’s risk management responsibilities are defined (assessment schedules, escalation and reporting procedures).
    Con: IT may lack autonomy to implement IT risk management best practices.
    Pro: IT is free to create its own IT risk council and develop customized processes that serve its unique needs.
    Con: Lack of clear reporting procedures and mechanisms to share accountability with the business.

    Info-Tech’s IT risk management framework walks you through each step to achieve risk readiness

    IT Risk Management Framework

    Risk Governance
    • Optimize Risk Management Processes
    • Assess Risk Maturity
    • Measure the Success of the Program
    A cycle surrounds the words 'Business Objectives', referring to the surrounding lists. On the top half is 'Communication', and the bottom is 'Monitoring'. Risk Identification
    • Engage Stakeholder Participation
    • Use Risk Identification Frameworks
    • Compile IT-Related Risks
    Risk Response
    • Establish Monitoring Responsibilities
    • Perform Cost-Benefit Analysis
    • Report Risk Response Actions
    Risk Assessment
    • Establish Thresholds for Unacceptable Risk
    • Calculate Expected Cost
    • Determine Risk Severity & Prioritize IT Risks

    Effective IT risk management benefits

    Obtain the support of the senior leadership team or IT steering committee by communicating how IT risk impacts their priorities.

    Risk management benefits To engage the business...
    IT is compliant with external laws and regulations. Identify the industry or legal legislation and regulations your organization abides by.
    IT provides support for business compliance. Find relevant business compliance issues, and relate compliance failures to cost.
    IT regularly communicates costs, benefits, and risks to the business. Acknowledge the number of times IT and the business miscommunicate critical information.
    Information and processing infrastructure are very secure. Point to past security breaches or potential vulnerabilities in your systems.
    IT services are usually delivered in line with business requirements. Bring up IT services that the business was unsatisfied with. Explain that their inputs in identifying risks are correlated with project quality.
    IT related business risks are managed very well. Make it clear that with no risk tracking process, business processes become exposed and tend to slow down.
    IT projects are completed on time and within budget. Point out late or over-budget projects due to the occurrence of unforeseen risks.

    1.1.1 Gain buy-in from senior leadership

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Buy-in from senior leadership for an IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    The resource demands of IT risk management will vary from organization to organization. Here are typical requirements:

    • Occasional participation of key IT personnel and select business stakeholders in IT risk council meetings (e.g. once every two weeks).
    • Periodic risk assessments (e.g. 4 days, twice a year).
    • IT personnel must take on risk monitoring responsibilities (e.g. 1-4 hours per week).
    • Record the results in the Program Manual sections 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM)

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization.
    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organizations.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    1.1.2 Assess current program maturity

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Maturity scores across four key risk categories

    Materials: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    This assessment is intended for frequent use; process completeness should be re-evaluated on a regular basis.

    How to Use This Assessment:

    1. Download the Integrated Risk Management Maturity Assessment Tool.
    2. Tab 2, "Data Entry:" This is a qualitative assessment of your integrated risk management process and is organized by the categories of integrated risk maturity. You will be asked to rate the extent to which you are executing the activities required to successfully complete each phase of the assessment. Use the drop-down menus provided to select the appropriate level of execution for each activity listed.
    3. Tab 3, "Results:" This tab will display your rate of IRM completeness/maturity. You will receive a score for each category as well as an overall score. The results will be displayed numerically, by percentage, and graphically.

    Record the results in the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understanding of the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Step 1.2

    Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Identify pain points/obstacles and opportunities
    • 1.2.2 Determine the risk culture of the organization
    • 1.2.3 Develop risk management goals
    • 1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics
    • 1.2.5 Create the IT risk council
    • 1.2.6 Complete a RACI chart

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • Developed goals for the risk management program
    • Established the IT risk council
    • Assigned accountability and responsibility for risk management processes

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Create an IT risk governance framework that integrates with the business

    Follow these best practices to make sure your requirements are solid:

    1. Self-assess your current approach to IT risk management.
    2. Identify organizational obstacles and set attainable risk management goals.
    3. Track the effectiveness and success of the program using SMART risk management metrics.
    4. Establish an IT risk council tasked with managing IT risk.
    5. Set clear risk management accountabilities and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.

    Key metrics for your IT risk governance framework

    Challenges:
    • Key stakeholders are left out or consulted once risks have already occurred.
    • Failure to employ consistent risk identification methodologies results in omitted and unknown risks.
    • Risk assessments do not reflect organizational priorities and may not align with thresholds for acceptable risk.
    • Risk assessment occurs sporadically or only after a major risk event has already occurred.
    Key metrics:
    • Number of risk management processes done ad hoc.
    • Frequency that IT risk appears as an agenda item at IT steering committee meetings.
    • Percentage of IT employees whose performance evaluations reflect risk management objectives.
    • Percentage of IT risk council members who are trained in risk management activities.
    • Number of open positions in the IT risk council.
    • Cost of risk management program operations per year.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics provide the foundation for determining the success of your IT risk management program and ensure ongoing funding to support appropriate risk responses.

    IT risk management success factors

    Support and sponsorship from senior leadership

    IT risk management has more success when initiated by a member of the senior leadership team or the board, rather than emerging from IT as a grassroots initiative.

    Sponsorship increases the likelihood that risk management is prioritized and receives the necessary resources and attention. It also ensures that IT risk accountability is assumed by senior leadership.

    Risk culture and awareness

    A risk-aware organizational culture embraces new policies and processes that reflect a proactive approach to risk.

    An organization with a risk-aware culture is better equipped to facilitate communication vertically within the organization.

    Risk awareness can be embedded by revising job descriptions and performance assessments to reflect IT risk management responsibilities.

    Organization size

    Smaller organizations can often institute a mature risk management program much more quickly than larger organizations.

    It is common for key personnel within smaller organizations to be responsible for multiple roles associated with risk management, making it easier to integrate IT and business risk management.

    Larger organizations may find it more difficult to integrate a more complex and dispersed network of individuals responsible for various risk management responsibilities.

    1.2.1 Identify obstacles and pain points

    1-4 hours

    Input: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    Output: Obstacles and pain points identified

    Materials: IT Risk Management Success Factors

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    Anticipate potential challenges and “blind spots” by determining which success factors are missing from your current situation.

    Instructions:

    1. List the potential obstacles and missing success factors that you must overcome to effectively manage IT risk and build a risk management program.
    2. Consider some opportunities that could be leveraged to increase the success of this program.
    3. Use this list in Activity 1.2.3 to develop program goals.

    Risk Management

    Replace the example pain points and opportunities with real scenarios in your organization.

    Pain Points/Obstacles
    • Lack of leadership buy-in
    • Skills and understanding around risk management within IT
    • Skills and understanding around risk management within the organization
    • Lack of a defined risk management posture
    Opportunities
    • Changes in regulations related to risk
    • Organization moving toward an integrated risk management program
    • Ability to leverage lessons learned from similar companies
    • Strong process management and adherence to policies by employees in the organization

    1.2.2 Determine the risk culture of your organization

    1-3 hours

    Determine how your organization fits the criteria listed below. Descriptions and examples do not have to match your organization perfectly.

    Risk Tolerant
    • You have no compliance requirements.
    • You have no sensitive data.
    • Customers do not expect you to have strong security controls.
    • Revenue generation and innovative products take priority and risk is acceptable.
    • The organization does not have remote locations.
    • It is likely that your organization does not operate within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Health care
      • Telecom
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    Moderate
    • You have some compliance requirements, e.g.:
      • HIPAA
      • PIPEDA
    • You have sensitive data, and are required to retain records.
    • Customers expect strong security controls.
    • Information security is visible to senior leadership.
    • The organization has some remote locations.
    • Your organization most likely operates within the following industries:
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    Risk Averse
    • You have multiple, strict compliance and/or regulatory requirements.
    • You house sensitive data, such as medical records.
    • Customers expect your organization to maintain strong and current security controls.
    • Information security is highly visible to senior management and public investors.
    • The organization has multiple remote locations.
    • Your organization operates within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Healthcare
      • Telecom

    Be aware of the organization’s attitude towards risk

    Risk culture is an organization’s attitude towards taking risks. This attitude manifests itself in two ways:

    One element of risk culture is what levels of risk the organization is willing to accept to pursue its objectives and what levels of risk are deemed unacceptable. This is often called risk appetite.
    Risk tolerant

    Risk-tolerant organizations embrace the potential of accelerating growth and the attainment of business objectives by taking calculated risks.

    Risk averse

    Risk-averse organizations prefer consistent, gradual growth and goal attainment by embracing a more cautious stance toward risk.

    The other component of risk culture is the degree to which risk factors into decision making.
    Risk conscious

    Risk-conscious organizations place a high priority on being aware of all risks impacting business objectives, regardless of whether they choose to accept or respond to those risks.

    Unaware

    Organizations that are largely unaware of the impact of risk generally believe there are few major risks impacting business objectives and choose to invest resources elsewhere.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations typically fall in the middle of these spectrums. While risk culture will vary depending on the industry and maturity of the organization, a culture with a balanced risk appetite that is extremely risk conscious is able to make creative, dynamic decisions with reasonable limits placed on risk-related decision making.

    1.2.3 Develop goals for the IT risk management program

    1-4 hours

    Input: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment, Risk Culture, Pain Points and Opportunities

    Output: Goals for the IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    Translate your maturity assessment and knowledge about organizational risk culture, potential obstacles, and success factors to develop goals for your IT risk management program.

    Instructions:

    1. In the Risk Management Program Manual, revise, replace, or add to the high-level goals provided in section 2.4.
    2. Make sure that you have three to five high-level goals that reflect the current and targeted maturity of IT risk management processes.
    3. Integrate potential obstacles, pain points, and insights from the organization’s risk culture.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics

    1-3 hours

    Create metrics for measuring the success of the IT risk management program.

    Ensure that all success metrics are SMART Instructions
    1. Document a list of appropriate metrics to assess the success of the IT risk management program on a whiteboard.
    2. Use the sample metrics listed in the table on the next slide as a starting point.
    3. Fill in the chart to indicate the:
      1. Name of the success metric
      2. Method for measuring success
      3. Baseline measurement
      4. Target measurement
      5. Actual measurements at various points throughout the process of improving the risk management program
      6. A deadline for each metric to meet the target measurement
    Strong Make sure the objective is clear and detailed.
    Measurable Objectives are measurable if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective.
    Actionable Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified.
    Realistic Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources.
    Time-Bound An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.

    1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics (continued)

    1-3 hours

    Attach metrics to your goals to gauge the success of the IT risk management program.

    Replace the example metrics with accurate KPIs or metrics for your organization.

    Sample Metrics
    Name Method Baseline Target Deadline Checkpoint 1 Checkpoint 2 Final
    Number of risks identified (per year) Risk register 0 100 Dec. 31
    Number of business units represented (risk identification) Meeting minutes 0 5 Dec. 31
    Frequency of risk assessment Assessments recorded in risk management program manual 0 2 per year Year 2
    Percentage of identified risk events that undergo expected cost assessment Ratio of risks assessed in the risk costing tool to risks assessed in the risk register 0 20% Dec. 31
    Number of top risks without an identified risk response Risk register 5 0 March 1
    Cost of risk management program operations per year Meeting frequency and duration, multiplied by the cost of participation $2,000 $5,000 Dec. 31

    Create the IT risk committee (ITRC)

    Responsibilities of the ITRC:
    1. Formalize risk management processes.
    2. Identify and review major risks throughout the IT department.
    3. Recommend an appropriate risk appetite or level of exposure.
    4. Review the assessment of the impact and likelihood of identified risks.
    5. Review the prioritized list of risks.
    6. Create a mitigation plan to minimize risk likelihood and impact.
    7. Review and communicate overall risk impact and risk management success.
    8. Assign risk ownership responsibilities of key risks to ensure key risks are monitored and risk responses are effectively implemented.
    9. Address any concerns in regards to the risk management program, including, but not limited to, reviewing their risk management duties and resourcing.
    10. Communicate risk reports to senior management annually.
    11. Make any alterations to the committee roster and the individuals’ responsibilities as needed and document changes.
    Must be on the ITRC:
    • CIO
    • CRO (if applicable)
    • Senior Directors
    • Security Officer
    • Head of Operations

    Must be on the ITRC:

    • CFO
    • Senior representation from every business unit impacted by IT risk

    1.2.5 Create the IT risk council

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Goals for the IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: CIO, CRO (if applicable), Senior Directors, Head of Operations

    Identify the essential individuals from both the IT department and the business to create a permanent committee that meets regularly and carries out IT risk management activities.

    Instructions:

    1. Review sections 3.1 (Mandate) and 3.2 (Agenda and Responsibilities) of the IT Risk Committee Charter, located in the Risk Management Program Manual. Make any necessary revisions.
    2. In section 3.3, document how frequently the council is scheduled to meet.
    3. In section 3.4, document members of the IT risk council.
    4. Obtain sign-off for the IT risk council from the CIO or another member of the senior leadership team in section 3.5 of the manual.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    1.2.6 Complete RACI chart

    1-3 hours

    A RACI diagram is a useful visualization that identifies redundancies and ensures that every role, project, or task has an accountable party.

    RACI is an acronym made up of four participatory roles: Instructions
    1. Use the template provided on the following slide, and add key stakeholders who do not appear and are relevant for your organization.
    2. For each activity, assign each stakeholder a letter.
    3. There must be an accountable party for each activity (every activity must have an “A”).
    4. For activities that do not apply to a particular stakeholder, leave the space blank.
    5. Once the chart is complete, copy/paste it into section 4.1 of the Risk Management Program Manual.
    Responsible Stakeholders who undertake the activity.
    Accountable Stakeholders who are held responsible for failure or take credit for success.
    Consulted Stakeholders whose opinions are sought.
    Informed Stakeholders who receive updates.

    1.2.6 Complete RACI chart (continued)

    1-3 hours

    Assign risk management accountabilities and responsibilities to key stakeholders:

    Stakeholder Coordination Risk Identification Risk Thresholds Risk Assessment Identify Responses Cost-Benefit Analysis Monitoring Risk Decision Making
    ITRC A R I R R R A C
    ERM C I C I I I I C
    CIO I A A A A A I R
    CRO I R C I R
    CFO I R C I R
    CEO I R C I A
    Business Units I C C C
    IT I I I I I I R C
    PMO C C C
    Legend: Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 2

    Identify and Assess IT Risk

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Add organization-specific risk scenarios
    • Identify risk events
    • Augment risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes
    • Conduct a PESTLE analysis
    • Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk
    • Create a financial impact assessment scale
    • Select a technique to measure reputational cost
    • Create a likelihood scale
    • Assess risk severity level
    • Assess expected cost

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business Risk Owners

    Step 2.1

    Identify IT Risks

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Add organization-specific risk scenarios
    • 2.1.2 Identify risk events
    • 2.1.3 Augment risk event list using COBIT 19 processes
    • 2.1.4 Conduct a PESTLE analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • IT Risk Council
    • Business executive leadership
    • Business risk owners

    Outcomes of this step

    • Participation of key stakeholders
    • Comprehensive list of IT risk events
    Identify and Assess IT Risk
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Get to know what you don’t know

    1. Engage the right stakeholders in risk identification.
    2. Employ Info-Tech’s top-down approach to risk identification.
    3. Augment your risk event list using alternative frameworks.
    Key metrics:
    • Total risks identified
    • New risks identified
    • Frequency of updates to the Risk Register Tool
    • Number of realized risk events not identified in the Risk Register Tool
    • Level of business participation in enterprise IT risk identification
      • Number of business units represented
      • Number of meetings attended in person
      • Number of risk reports received

    Info-Tech Insight

    What you don’t know CAN hurt you. How do you identify IT-related threats and vulnerabilities that you are not already aware of? Now that you have created a strong risk governance framework that formalizes risk management within IT and connects it to the enterprise, follow the steps outlined in this section to reveal all of IT’s risks.

    Engage key stakeholders

    Ensure that all key risks are identified by engaging key business stakeholders.

    Benefits of obtaining business involvement during the risk identification stage:
    • You will identify risk events you had not considered or you weren’t aware of.
    • You will identify risks more accurately.
    • Risk identification is an opportunity to raise awareness of IT risk management early in the process.

    Executive Participation:

    • CIO participation is integral when building a comprehensive register of risk events impacting IT.
    • CIOs and IT directors possess a holistic view of all of IT’s functions.
    • CIOs and IT directors are uniquely placed to identify how IT affects other business units and the attainment of business objectives. If applicable, CRO and CTO participation is also critical.

    Prioritizing and Selecting Stakeholders

    1. Reliance on IT services and technologies to achieve business objectives.
    2. Relationship with IT, and willingness to engage in risk management activities.
    3. Unique perspectives, skills, and experiences that IT may not possess.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While IT personnel are better equipped to identify IT risk than anyone, IT does not always have an accurate view of the business’ exposure to IT risk. Strive to maintain a 3 to 1 ratio of IT to non-IT personnel involved in the process.

    Enable IT to target risk holistically

    Take a top-down approach to risk identification to guide brainstorming

    Info-Tech’s risk categories are consistent with a risk identification method called Risk Prompting.

    A risk prompt list is a list that categorizes risks into types or areas. The n10 risk categories encapsulate the services, activities, responsibilities, and functions of most IT departments. Use these categories and the example risk scenarios provided as prompts to guide brainstorming and organize risks.

    Risk Category: High-level groupings that describe risk pertaining to major IT functions. See the following slide for all ten of Info-Tech’s IT risk categories. Risk Scenario: An abstract profile representing common risk groups that are more specific than risk categories. Typically, organizations are able to identify two to five scenarios for each category. Risk Event: Specific threats and vulnerabilities that fall under a particular risk scenario. Organizations are able to identify anywhere between 1 and 20 events for each scenario. See the Appendix of the Risk Management Program Manual for a list of risk event examples.

    Risk Category

    Risk Scenario

    Risk Event

    Compliance Regulatory compliance Being fined for not complying/being aware of a new regulation.
    Externally originated attack Phishing attack on the organization.
    Operational Technology evaluation & selection Partnering with a vendor that is not in compliance with a key regulation.
    Capacity planning Not having sufficient resources to support a DRP.
    Third-Party Risk Vendor management Vendor performance requirements are improperly defined.
    Vendor selection Vendors are improperly selected to meet the defined use case.

    2.1.1 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1-3 hours

    Review Info-Tech’s ten IT risk categories and add risk scenarios to the examples provided.

    IT Reputational
    • Negative PR
    • Consumers writing negative reviews
    • Employees writing negative reviews
    IT Financial
    • Stock prices drop
    • Value of the organization is reduced
    IT Strategic
    • Organization prioritizes innovation but remains focused on operational
    • Unable to access data to support strategic initiative
    Operational
    • Enterprise architecture
    • Technology evaluation and selection
    • Capacity planning
    • Operational errors
    Availability
    • Power outage
    • Increased data workload
    • Single source of truth
    • Lacking knowledge transfer processes for critical tasks
    Performance
    • Network failure
    • Service levels not being met
    • Capacity overload
    Compliance
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Standards compliance
    • Audit compliance
    Security
    • Malware
    • Internally originated attack
    Third Party
    • Vendor selection
    • Vendor management
    • Contract termination
    Digital
    • No back-up process if automation fails

    2.1.2 Identify risk events

    1-4 hours

    Input: IT risk categories

    Output: Risk events identified and categorized

    Materials: Risk Register Tool

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owners, CRO (if applicable)

    Use Info-Tech’s IT risk categories and scenarios to brainstorm a comprehensive list of IT-related threats and vulnerabilities impacting your organization.

    Instructions:

    1. Document risk events in the Risk Register Tool.
    2. List risk scenarios (organized by risk category) in the Risk Events/Threats column.
    3. Disseminate the list to key stakeholders who were unable to participate and solicit their feedback.
      • Consult the RACI chart located in section 4.1 of the Risk Management Program Manual.
    4. Attack one scenario at a time, exhausting all realistic risk events for that grouping before moving onto the next scenario. Each scenario should take approximately 45-60 minutes.

    Tip: If disagreement arises regarding whether a specific risk event is relevant to the organization or not and it cannot be resolved quickly, include it in the list. The applicability of these risks will become apparent during the assessment process.

    Record the results in the Risk Register Tool.

    2.1.3 Augment the risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes (Optional)

    1-3 hours

    Other industry-leading frameworks provide alternative ways of conceptualizing the functions and responsibilities of IT and may help you uncover additional risk events.

    1. Managed IT Management Framework
    2. Managed Strategy
    3. Managed Enterprise Architecture
    4. Managed Innovation
    5. Managed Portfolio
    6. Managed Budget and Costs
    7. Managed Human Resources
    8. Managed Relationships
    9. Managed Service Agreements
    10. Managed Vendors
    11. Managed Quality
    12. Managed Risk
    13. Managed Security
    14. Managed Data
    15. Managed Programs
    16. Managed Requirements Definition
    17. Managed Solutions Identification and Build
    18. Managed Availability and Capacity
    19. Managed Organizational Change Enablement
    20. Managed IT Changes
    1. Managed IT Change Acceptance and Transitioning
    2. Managed Knowledge
    3. Managed Assets
    4. Managed Configuration
    5. Managed Projects
    6. Managed Operations
    7. Managed Service Requests and Incidents
    8. Managed Problems
    9. Managed Continuity
    10. Managed Security Services
    11. Managed Business Process Controls
    12. Managed Performance and Conformance Monitoring
    13. Managed System of Internal Control
    14. Managed Compliance with External Requirements
    15. Managed Assurance
    16. Ensured Governance Framework Setting and Maintenance
    17. Ensured Benefits Delivery
    18. Ensured Risk Optimization
    19. Ensured Resource Optimization
    20. Ensured Stakeholder Engagement

    Instructions:

    1. Review COBIT 2019’s 40 IT processes and identify additional risk events.
    2. Match risk events to the corresponding risk category and scenario and add them to the Risk Register Tool.

    2.1.4 Finalize your risk register by conducting a PESTLE analysis (Optional)

    1-3 hours

    Explore alternative identification techniques to incorporate external factors and avoid “groupthink.”

    Consider the External Environment – PESTLE Analysis

    Despite efforts to encourage equal participation in the risk identification process, key risks may not have been shared in previous exercises.

    Conduct a PESTLE analysis as a final safety net to ensure that all key risk events have been identified.

    Avoid “Groupthink” – Nominal Group Technique

    The Nominal Group Technique uses the silent generation of ideas and an enforced “safe” period of time where ideas are shared but not discussed to encourage judgement-free idea generation.

    • Ideas are generated silently and independently.
    • Ideas are then shared and documented; however, discussion is delayed until all of the group’s ideas have been recorded.
    • Idea generation can occur before the meeting and be kept anonymous.

    Note: Employing either of these techniques will lengthen an already time-consuming process. Only consider these techniques if you have concerns regarding the homogeneity of the ideas being generated or if select individuals are dominating the exercise.

    List the following factors influencing the risk event:
    • Political factors
    • Economic factors
    • Social factors
    • Technological factors
    • Legal factors
    • Environmental factors
    'PESTLE Analysis' presented as a wheel with the acronym's meanings surrounding the title. 'Political Factors', 'Economic Factors', 'Social Factors', 'Technological Factors', 'Legal Factors', and 'Environmental Factors'.

    Step 2.2

    Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk
    • 2.2.2 Create a financial impact assessment scale
    • 2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost
    • 2.2.4 Create a likelihood scale
    • 2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment
    • 2.2.6 Expected cost assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business risk owners

    Outcomes of this step

    • Business-approved thresholds for unacceptable risk
    • Completed Risk Register Tool with risks prioritized according to severity
    • Expected cost calculations for high-priority risks

    Identify and Assess IT Risk

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Reveal the organization’s greatest IT threats and vulnerabilities

    1. Establish business-approved risk thresholds for acceptable and unacceptable risk.
    2. Conduct a streamlined assessment of all risks to separate acceptable and unacceptable risks.
    3. Perform a deeper, cost-based assessment of prioritized risks.
    Key metrics:
    • Frequency of IT risk assessments
      • (Annually, bi-annually, etc.)
    • Assessment accuracy
      • Percentage of risk assessments that are substantiated by later occurrences or testing
      • Ratio of cumulative actual costs to expected costs
    • Assessment consistency
      • Percentage of risk assessments that are substantiated by third-party audit
    • Assessment rigor
      • Percentage of identified risk events that undergo first-level assessment (severity scores)
      • Percentage of identified risk events that undergo second-level assessment (expected cost)
    • Stakeholder oversight and participation
      • Level of executive participation in IT risk assessment (attend in person, receive report, etc.)
      • Number of business stakeholder reviews per risk assessment

    Info-Tech Insight

    Risk is money. It’s impossible to make intelligent decisions about risks without knowing what their financial impact will be.

    Review risk assessment fundamentals

    Risk assessment provides you with the raw materials to conduct an informed cost-benefit analysis and make robust risk response decisions.

    In this section, you will be prioritizing your IT risks according to their risk severity, which is a reflection of their expected cost.

    Calculating risk severity

    How much you expect a risk event to cost if it were to occur:

    Likelihood of Risk Impact

    e.g. $250,000 or “High”

    X

    Calibrated by how likely the risk is to occur:

    Likelihood of Risk Occurrence

    e.g. 10% or “Low”

    =

    Produces a dollar value or “severity level” for comparing risks:

    Risk Severity

    e.g. $25,000 or “Medium”
    Which must be evaluated against thresholds for acceptable risk and the cost of risk responses.

    Risk Tolerance
    Risk Response

    CBA
    Cost-benefit analysis

    Maintain the engagement of key stakeholders in the risk assessment process

    1

    Engage the Business During Assessment Process

    Asking business stakeholders to make significant contributions to the assessment exercise may be unrealistic (particularly for members of the senior leadership team, other than the CIO).

    Ensure that they work with you to finalize thresholds for acceptable or unacceptable risk.

    2

    Verify the Risk Impact and Assessment

    If IT has ranked risk events appropriately, the business will be more likely to offer their input. Share impact and likelihood values for key risks to see if they agree with the calculated risk severity scores.

    3

    Identify Where the Business Focuses Attention

    While verifying, pay attention to the risk events that the business stresses as key risks. Keep these risks in mind when prioritizing risk responses as they are more likely to receive funding.

    Try to communicate the assessments of these risk events in terms of expected cost to attract the attention of business leaders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If business executives still won’t provide the necessary information to update your initial risk assessments, IT should approach business unit leaders and lower-level management. Lean on strong relationships forged over time between IT and business managers or supervisors to obtain any additional information.

    Info-Tech recommends a two-level approach to risk assessment

    Review the two levels of risk assessment offered in this blueprint.

    Risk severity level assessment (mandatory)

    1

    Information

    Number of risks: Assess all risk events identified in Phase 1.
    Units of measurement: Use customized likelihood and impact “levels.”
    Time required: One to five minutes per risk event.

    Assess Likelihood

    Negligible
    Low
    Moderate
    High
    Very High

    X

    Assess Likelihood

    Negligible
    Low
    Moderate
    High
    Very High

    =

    Output


    Risk Security Level:

    Moderate

    Example of a risk severity level assessment chart.
    Chart risk events according to risk severity as this allows you to organize and prioritize IT risks.

    Assess all of your identified risk events with a risk severity-level assessment.

    • By creating a likelihood and impact assessment scale divided into three to nine “levels” (sometimes referred to as “buckets”), you can evaluate every risk event quickly while being confident that risks are being assessed accurately.
    • In the following activities, you will create likelihood and impact scales that align with your organizational risk appetite and tolerance.
    • Severity-level assessment is a “first pass” of your risk list, revealing your organization’s most severe IT risks, which can be assessed in greater detail by incorporating expected cost into your evaluation.

    Info-Tech recommends a two-level approach to risk assessment (continued)

    Expected cost assessment (optional)

    2

    Information

    Number of risks: Only assess high-priority risks revealed by severity-level assessment.
    Units of measurement: Use actual likelihood values (%) and impact costs ($).
    Time required: 10-20 minutes per risk event.

    Assess Likelihood

    15%

    Moderate

    X

    Assess Likelihood

    $100,000

    High

    =

    Output


    Expected Cost:

    $15,000

    Expected cost is useful for conducting cost-benefit analysis and comparing IT risks to non-IT risks and other budget priorities for the business.

    Conduct expected cost assessments for IT’s greatest risks.

    For risk events warranting further analysis, translate risk severity levels into hard expected-cost numbers.

    Why conduct expected cost assessments?
    • Expected cost represents how much you would expect to pay in an average year for each risk event.
    • Communicate risk priorities to the business in language they can understand.
    • While risk severity levels are useful for comparing one IT risk to another, expected cost data allows the business to compare IT risks to non-IT risks that may not use the same scales.
    Why is expected cost assessment optional?
    • Determining robust likelihood values and precise impact estimates can be challenging and time consuming.
    • Some risk events may require extensive data gathering and industry analysis.

    Implement and leverage a centralized risk register

    The purpose of the risk register is to act as the repository for all the risks that have been identified within your environment.

    Use this tool to:

    1. Collect and maintain a repository for all IT risk events impacting the organization and relevant information for each risk.
      • Capture all relevant IT risk information in one location.
      • Organize risk identification and assessment information for transparent risk management, stakeholder review, and/or internal audit.
    2. Calculate risk severity scores to prioritize risk events and determine which risks require a risk response.
      • Separate acceptable and unacceptable risks (as determined by the business).
      • Rank risks based on severity levels.
    3. Assess risk responses and calculate residual risk.
      • Evaluate the effect that proposed risk response actions will have on top risk events and quantify residual risk magnitude.
      • This step will be completed in section 3.1

    2.2.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    1-4 hours

    Input: Risk events, Risk appetite

    Output: Threshold for risk identified

    Materials: Risk Register Tool, Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    There are times when the business needs to know about IT risks with high expected costs.

    1. Create an expected cost threshold that defines what constitutes an acceptable and unacceptable risk for the organization. This figure should be a concrete dollar value. In the next exercises, you will build risk impact and likelihood scales with this value in mind, ensuring that “high” or “extreme” risks are immediately communicated to senior leadership.
    2. Do not consider IT budget restrictions when developing this number. The acceptable risk threshold should reflect the business’ tolerance/appetite for risk.

    This threshold is typically based on the organization’s ability to absorb financial losses, and its tolerance/appetite towards risk.

    If your organization has ERM, adopt the existing acceptability threshold.

    Record this threshold in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    2.2.2 Create a financial impact assessment scale

    1-4 hours

    Input: Risk events, Risk threshold

    Output: Financial impact scale created

    Materials: Risk Register Tool, Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    1. Create a scale to assess the financial impact of risk events.
      • Typically, risk impacts are assessed on a scale of 1-5; however, some organizations may prefer to assess risks using 3, 4, 7, or 9-point scales.
    2. Ensure that the unacceptable risk threshold is reflected in the scale.
      • In the example provided, the unacceptable risk threshold ($100,000) is represented as “High” on the impact scale.
    3. Attach labels to each point on the scale. Effective labels will easily distinguish between risks on either side of the unacceptable risk threshold.

    Record the risk impact scale in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    Convert project overruns and service outages into costs

    Use the tables below to quickly convert impacts typically measured in units of time to financial cost. Replace the values in the table with those that reflect your own costs.

    • While project overruns and service outages may have intangible impacts beyond the unexpected costs stemming from paying employees and lost revenue (such as adding complexity to project management and undermining the business’ confidence in IT), these measurements will provide adequate impact estimations for risk assessment.
    • Remember, complex risk events can be analyzed further with an expected cost assessment.
    Project Overruns Scale for the use of cost assessment with dollar amounts associated with impact levels. '$250,000 - Extreme', '$100,000 - High', '$60,000 - Moderate', '$35,000 - Low', '$10,000 - Negligible'.

    Project

    Time (days)

    20 days

    Number of employees

    8

    Average cost per employee (per day)

    $300

    Estimated cost

    $48,000
    Service Outages

    Service

    Time (hours)

    4 hours

    Lost revenue (per hour)

    $10,000

    Estimated cost

    $40,000

    Impact scale

    Low

    2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (1 of 3)

    1-3 hours

    Realized risk events may have profound reputational costs that do not immediately impact your bottom line.

    Reputational cost can take several forms, including the internal and external perception of:
    1. Brand likeability
    2. Product quality
    3. Leadership capability
    4. Social responsibility

    Based on your industry and the nature of the risk, select one of the three techniques described in this section to incorporate reputational costs into your risk assessment.

    Technique #1 – Use financial indicators:

    For-profit companies typically experience reputational loss as a gradual decline in the strength of their brand, exclusion from industry groups, or lost revenue.

    If possible, use these measures to put a price on reputational loss:

    • Lost revenue attributable to reputation loss
    • Loss of market share attributable to reputation loss
    • Drops in share price attributable to reputation loss (for public companies)

    Match this dollar value to the corresponding level on the impact scale created in Activity 2.2.2.

    • If you are not able to effectively translate all reputational costs into financial costs, proceed to techniques 2 and 3 on the following slides.

    2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (2 of 3)

    1-3 hours
    It is common for public sector or not-for-profit organizations to have difficulty putting a price tag on intangible reputational costs.
    • For example, a government organization may be unable to directly quantify the cost of losing the confidence and/or support of the public.
    • A helpful technique is to reframe how reputation is assigned value.
    Technique #2 – Calculate the value of avoiding reputational cost:
    1. Imagine that the particular risk event you are assessing has occurred. Describe the resulting reputational cost using qualitative language.

    For example:

    A data breach, which caused the unsanctioned disclosure of 2,000 client files, has inflicted high reputational costs on the organization. These have impacted the organization in the following ways:

    • Loss of organizational trust in IT
    • IT’s reputation as a value provider to the organization is tarnished
    • Loss of client trust in the organization
    • Potential for a public reprimand of the organization by the government to restore public trust
  • Then, determine (hypothetically) how much money the organization would be willing to spend to prevent the reputational cost from being incurred.
  • Match this dollar value to the corresponding level on the impact scale created in Activity 2.2.2.
  • 2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (3 of 3)

    1-3 hours

    If you feel that the other techniques have not reflected reputational impacts in the overall severity level of the risk, create a parallel scale that roughly matches your financial impact scale.

    Technique #3 – Create a parallel scale for reputational impact:

    Visibility is a useful metric for measuring reputational impact. Visibility measures how widely knowledge of the risk event has spread and how negatively the organization is perceived. Visibility has two main dimensions:

    • Internal vs. External
    • Low Amplification vs. High Amplification
    • Internal/External: The further outside of the organization that the risk event is visible, the higher the reputational impact.
      Low/High Amplification: The greater the ability of the actor to communicate and amplify the occurrence of a risk event, the higher the reputational impact.
      After establishing a scale for reputational impact, test whether it reflects the severity of the financial impact levels in the financial impact scale.

    • For example, if the media learns about a recent data breach, does that feel like a $100,000 loss?
    Example:
    Scale for the use of cost assessment  of reputational impact with dimension combinations associated with impact levels. 'External, High Amp, (regulators, lawsuits) - Extreme', 'Internal, High Amp, (CEO) - Low', 'Internal, Low Amp (IT) - Negligible'.

    2.2.4 Create a likelihood scale

    1-3 hours

    Instructions:
    1. Create a scale to assess the likelihood that a risk event will occur over a given period of time.
      • Info-Tech recommends assessing the likelihood that the risk event will occur over a period of one year (the IT risk council should be reassessing the risk event no less than once per year).
    2. Ensure that the likelihood scale contains the same number of levels as the financial impact scale (3, 4, 5, 7, or 9).
    3. The example provided is likely to satisfy most IT departments; however, you may customize the distribution of likelihood values to reflect the organization’s aversion towards uncertainty.
      • For example, an extremely risk-averse organization may consider any risk event with a likelihood greater than 20% to have a “High” likelihood of occurrence.
    4. Attach the same labels used for the financial impact scale (Low, Moderate, High, etc.)

    Record the risk impact scale in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    Scale to assess the likelihood that a risk event will occur. '80-99% - Extreme', '60-79% - High', '40-59% - Moderate' '20-39% - Low', '1-19% - Negligible'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Note: Info-Tech endorses the use of likelihood values (1-99%) rather than frequency (3 times per year) as a measurement.
    For an explanation of why likelihood values lead to more precise and robust risk assessment, see the Appendix.

    2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment

    6-10 hours

    Input: Risk events identified

    Output: Assessed the likelihood of occurrence and impact for all identified risk events

    Materials: Risk Register Tool

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    1. Document the “Risk Category” and “Existing Controls.” in the Risk Register Tool.
      • (See the slide following this activity for tips on identifying existing controls.)
    2. Assign each risk event a likelihood and impact level.
      • Remember, you are assessing the impact that a risk event will have on the organization as a whole, not just on IT.
    3. When assigning a financial impact level to a risk event, factor in the likely number of instances that the event will occur within the time frame for which you are assessing (usually one year).
      • For risk events like third-party service outages that typically occur a few times each year, assign them an impact level that reflects the likelihood of financial impact the risk event will have over the entire year.
      • E.g. If your organization is likely to experience two major service outages next year and each outage costs the organization approximately $15,000, the total financial impact is $30,000.

    Record results in the Risk Register Tool

    2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment (continued)

    Instructions (continued):
    1. Assign a risk owner to non-negligible risk events.
      • For organizations that practice ongoing risk management and frequently reassess their risk portfolio (minimum once per year), risk ownership does not need to be assigned to “Negligible” or low-level risks.
      • View the following slides for advice on how to select a risk owner and information on their responsibilities.
    2. As you input the first few likelihood and impact values, compare them to one another to ensure consistency and accuracy:
      • Is a service outage really twice as impactful as our primary software provider going out of business?
      • Is a data breach far more likely than a ›1 hour web-services outage?
    Tips for Selecting Likelihood Values:

    Does ~10% sound right?

    Test a likelihood estimate by assessing the truth of the following statements:

    • The risk event will likely occur once in the next ten years (if the environment remains nearly identical).
    • If ten organizations existed that were nearly identical to our own, it is likely that one out of ten would experience the risk event this year.

    Screenshot of a risk severity level assessment.

    Identify current risk controls

    Consider how IT is already addressing key risks.

    Types of current risk control

    Tactical controls

    Apply to individual risks only.

    Example: A tactical control for backup/replication failure is faster WAN lines.

    Tactical risk control Strategic controls

    Apply to multiple risks.

    Example: A strategic control for backup/replication failure is implementing formal DR plans.

    Strategic risk control
    Risk event Risk event Risk event

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Current Controls' highlighted.
    Consider both tactical and strategic controls already in place when filling out risk event information in the Risk Register Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identifying existing risk controls (past risk responses) provides a clear picture of the measures already in place to avoid, mitigate, or transfer key risks. This reveals opportunities to improve existing risk controls, or where new strategies are needed, to reduce risk severity levels below business thresholds.

    Assign a risk owner for each risk event

    Designate a member of the IT risk council to be responsible for each risk event.

    Selecting the Appropriate Risk Owner

    Use the following considerations to determine the best owner for each risk:

    • The risk owner should be familiar with the process, project, or IT function related to the risk event.
    • The risk owner should have access to the necessary data to monitor and measure the severity of the risk event.
    • The risk owner’s performance assessment should reflect their ability to demonstrate the ongoing management of their assigned risk events.

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Risk Owner' highlighted.

    Risk Owner Responsibilities

    Risk ownership means that an individual is responsible for the following activities:

    • Monitoring the threat or vulnerability for changes in the likelihood of occurrence and/or likely impact.
    • Monitoring changes in the market and external environment that may alter the severity of the risk event.
    • Monitoring changes of closely related risks with interdependencies.
    • Developing and using key risk indicators (KRIs) to measure changes in risk severity.
    • Regularly reporting changes in risk severity to the IT risk council.
    • If necessary, escalating the risk event to other IT risk council personnel or senior management for reassessment.
    • Monitoring risk severity levels for risk events after a risk response has been implemented.

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Costing Tool to calculate the expected cost of IT’s high-priority risks (optional)

    Sample of the Risk Costing Tool.

    Use this tool to:

    1. Conduct a deeper analysis of severe risks.
      • Determine specific likelihood and financial impact values to communicate the severity of the risk in the Expected Cost tab.
      • Identify the maximum financial impact that the risk event may inflict.
    2. Assess the effectiveness of multiple risk responses for each risk event.
      • Determine how proposed risk events will change the likelihood of occurrence and financial impact of the risk event.
    3. Incorporate risk proximity into your cost-benefit analysis of risk responses.
      • Illustrate how spending decisions will impact the expected cost of the risk event over time.

    2.2.6 Expected cost assessment (optional)

    Assign likelihood and financial impact values to high-priority risks.

    Select risks with these characteristics:

    Strongly consider conducting an expected cost assessment for risk events that meet one or more of the following criteria.

    The risk:

    • Has been assigned to the highest risk severity level.
    • Has exposed the organization previously and had severe implications.
    • Exceeds the organization’s threshold for financial impact.
    • Involves an IT function that is highly visible to the business.
    • Will likely require risk response actions that will exceed current IT budgetary constraints.
    • Is conducive to expected cost assessment:
      • There is general consensus on likelihood estimates.
      • There is general consensus on financial impact estimates.
      • Historical data exists to support estimates.
    Determine which risks require a deeper assessment:

    Info-Tech recommends conducting a second-level assessment for 5-15% of your IT risk register.

    Communicating the expected cost of high-priority risks significantly increases awareness of IT risks by the business.

    Communicating risks to the business using their language also increases the likelihood that risk responses will receive the necessary support and investment


    Record the list of risk events requiring second-level assessment in the Risk Costing Tool.

    • Transfer the likelihood and impact levels for each event into the Risk Costing Tool using data from the Risk Register Tool.

    2.2.6 Expected cost assessment (continued)

    Assign likelihood and financial impact values to high-priority risks.

    Instructions:
    1. Go through the list of prioritized risks in the Risk Costing Tool one by one. Indicate the likelihood and impact level (from the Risk Register Tool) for the risk event being assessed.
    2. Record likelihood values (1-99%) and impact values ($) from participants.
      • Only record values from individuals that indicate they are fairly confident with their estimates.
      • Keep likelihood estimates to values that are multiples of five.
    3. Estimate and record the maximum impact that the risk event could inflict.
      • See Appendix III for information on how the possibility of high-impact scenarios may influence your decision making.
    4. Discuss the estimates provided. Eliminate outliers and retracted estimates.
      • If you are unable to achieve consensus, take the average of the values provided.
    5. If you are having difficulty arriving at a likelihood or impact value, select the median value of the level assigned to the risk during the risk severity level assessment.
      • E.g. Risk event assigned to likelihood level “Moderate” (20-39%). Select a likelihood value of 30%.

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Optional Inherent Likelihood Parameters' and 'Optional Inherent Impact Parameters' highlighted.

    Who should participate?
    • Depending on the size of your IT risk council, you may want to consider conducting this exercise in a smaller group.
    • Ideally, you should try to find the right balance between ensuring that the necessary experience and knowledge is in the room while insulating the exercise from outlier opinions, noise, and distractions.

    Evaluate likelihood and impact

    Refine your risk assessment process by developing more accurate measurements of likelihood and impact.

    Intersubjective likelihood

    The goal of the expected cost assessment is to develop robust intersubjective estimates of likelihood and financial impact.

    By aggregating a number of expert opinions of what they deem to be the “correct” value, you will arrive at a collectively determined value that better reflects reality than an individual opinion.

    Example: The Delphi Method

    The Delphi Method is a common technique to produce a judgement that is representative of the collective opinion of a group.

    • Participants are sent a series of sequential questionnaires (typically by email).
    • The first questionnaire asks them what the likelihood, likely impact, and expected cost is for a specific risk event.
    • Data from the questionnaire is compiled and then communicated in a subsequent questionnaire, which encourages participants to restate or revise their estimates given the group’s judgements.
    • With each successive questionnaire, responses will typically converge around a single intersubjective value.
    Justifying Your Estimates:

    When asked to explain the numbers you arrived at during the risk assessment, pointing to an assessment methodology gives greater credibility to your estimates.

    • Assign one individual to take notes during the assessment exercise.
    • Have them document the main rationale behind each value and the level of consensus.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The underlying assumption behind intersubjective forecasting is that group judgements are more accurate than individual judgements. However, this may not be the case at all.

    Sometimes, a single expert opinion is more valuable than many uninformed opinions. Defining whose opinion is valuable and whose is not is an unpleasant exercise; therefore, selecting the right personnel to participate in the exercise is crucially important.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 3

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols
    • Establish the reporting schedule
    • Identify and assess risk responses
    • Analyze risk response cost-benefit
    • Create multi-year cost projections
    • Obtain executive approval for risk action plans
    • Socialize the Risk Report
    • Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers
    • Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Risk business owner

    Step 3.1

    Monitor IT Risks and Develop Risk Responses

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols
    • 3.1.2 Establish the reporting schedule
    • 3.1.3 Identify and assess risk responses
    • 3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis
    • 3.1.5 Create multi-year cost projections

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business risk owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed risk event action plans
    • Risk responses identified and assessed for top risks
    • Risk response selected for top risks

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Event Action Plan to manage high-priority risks

    Manage risks in between risk assessments and create a paper trail for key risks that exceed the unacceptable risk threshold. Use a new form for every high-priority risk that requires tracking.

    Risk Event Action Plan Sample of the Risk Event Action Plan deliverable.

    Obtaining sign-off from the senior leadership team or from the ERM office is an important step of the risk management process. The Risk Event Action Plan ensures that high-priority risks are closely monitored and that changes in risk severity are detected and reported.

    Clear documentation is a way to ensure that critical information is shared with management so that they can make informed risk decisions. These reports should be succinct yet comprehensive; depending on time and resources, it is good practice to fill out this form and obtain sign-off for the majority of IT risks.

    3.1.1 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    The risk owner should be held accountable for monitoring their assigned risks but may delegate responsibility for these tasks.

    Instructions:
    1. Design key risk indicators (KRIs) for risks that measure changes in their severity and document them in the Risk Event Action Plan.
      • See the following slide for examples.
    2. Clearly document the risk owner and the individual(s) carrying out risk monitoring activities (delegates) in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Note: Examples of KRIs can be found on the following slide.

    What are KRIs?
    • KRIs should be observable metrics that alert the IT risk council and management when risk severity exceeds acceptable risk thresholds.
    • KRIs should serve as tripwires or early-warning indicators that trigger further actions to be taken on the risk.
    • Further actions may include:
      • Escalation to the risk owner (if delegated) or to a member of the senior leadership team.
      • Reporting to the IT risk council or IT steering committee.
      • Reassessment.
      • Updating the risk monitoring schedule.

    Document KRIs, escalation thresholds, and escalation protocols for each risk in a Risk Event Action Plan.

    Developing KRIs for success

    Visualization of KRI development, from the 'Risk Event' to the 'Intermediate Steps' with 'KRI Measurements' to the image of a growing seed.

    Examples of KRIs

    • Number of resources who quit or were fired who had access to critical data
    • Number of risk mitigation initiatives unfunded
    • Changes in time horizon of mitigation implementation
    • Number of employees who did not report phishing attempts
    • Amount of time required to get critical operations access to necessary data
    • Number of days it takes to implement a new regulation or compliance control

    3.1.2 Establish the reporting schedule

    For each risk event, document how frequently the risk owner must report to the IT risk council in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    • A clear reporting schedule enforces accountability for each risk event, ensuring that risk owners are fulfilling their monitoring responsibilities.
    • The ongoing discussion of risks between assessment cycles also increases overall awareness of how IT risks are not static but constantly evolving.
    Reporting Risk Event
    Weekly reports to ITRC Risk event severity represented as a thermometer with levels 'Extreme', 'High', 'Moderate', 'Low', and 'Negligible'.
    Bi-weekly reports to ITRC
    Monthly reports to ITRC
    Report to ITRC only if KRI thresholds triggered
    No reports; reassessed bi-annually

    Use Info-Tech’s tools to identify, analyze, and select risk responses

    1

    (Mandatory)
    Tool

    Screenshot of the Risk Register Tool.

    Risk Register Tool

    Information
    • Develop risk responses for all risk events pre-populated on the “2. Risk Register” sheet of the Risk Register Tool.
    • Document the root cause of the risk (Activity 3.1.3) and other contributing factors (Activity 3.1.4).
    • Identify risk responses (Activity 3.1.5).
    • Predict the effectiveness of the risk response, if implemented, by estimating the residual likelihood and impact of the risk (Activity 3.1.5).
    • The tool will calculate the residual severity of the risk after applying the risk response.

    2

    (Optional)
    Tool

    Screenshot of the Risk Costing Tool.

    Risk Costing Tool

    Information
    • Continue your second-level risk analysis for top risks for which you calculated expected cost in section 2.2.
    • Activity 3.1.5:
      • Identify between one and four risk response options for each risk.
      • Develop precise values for residual likelihood and impact.
      • Compare expected cost of the risk event to expected residual cost.
      • Select the risk response to recommend to senior leadership and document it in the Risk Register Tool.

    Determine the root cause of IT risks

    Root cause analysis

    Use the “Five Whys” methodology to identify the root cause and contributing/exacerbating factors for each risk event.

    Diagnosing the root cause of a risk as well as the environmental factors that increase its potential impact and likelihood of occurring allow you to identify more effective risk responses.

    Risk responses that only address the symptoms of the risk are less likely to succeed than responses that address the core issue.

    Concentric circles with 'Root Cause' at the center, 'Contributing Factors' around it, and 'Symptoms' on the outer circle.

    Example of 'The Five Whys Methodology', tracing symptoms to their root cause. In 'Symptoms' we see 'Risk Event: Network outage', Why? 'Network congestion', Why? Then on to 'Contributing Factors' the answer is 'Inadequate bandwidth for latency-sensitive applications', Why? 'Increased business use of latency-sensitive applications', Why? And finally to the 'Root Cause', 'Business units rely on 'real-time' data gathered from latency-sensitive applications', Why?

    Identify factors that contribute to the severity of the risk

    Environmental factors interact with the root cause to increase the likelihood or impact of the risk event.

    What factors matter?

    Identify relevant actors and assets that amplify or diminish the severity of the risk.

    Actors

    • Internal (business units)
    • External (vendor, regulator, market, competitor, hostile actor)

    Assets/Resources

    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Processes
    • Information/data
    • Personnel
    • Reputation
    • Operations
    Develop risk responses that target contributing factors.
    Root cause:
    Business units rely on “real-time” data gathered from latency-sensitive applications

    Actors: Enterprise App users (Finance, Product Development, Product Management)

    Asset/resource: Applications, network

    Risk response:
    Decrease the use of latency-sensitive applications.

    X

    Decreasing the use of key apps contradicts business objectives.

    Contributing factors:
    Unreliable router software

    Actors: Network provider, router vendor, router software vendor, IT department

    Asset/resource: Network, router, router software

    Risk response:
    Replace the vendor that provides routers and router software.

    Replacing the vendor would reduce network outages at a relatively low cost.

    Symptoms:
    Network outage

    Actors: All business units, network provider

    Asset/resource: Network, business operations, employee productivity

    Risk response:
    Replace legacy systems.

    X

    Replacing legacy systems would be too costly.

    3.1.3 Identify and assess risk responses

    Instructions:
    Complete the following steps for each risk event.
    1. Identify a risk response action that will help reduce the likelihood of occurrence or the impact if the event were to occur.
      • Indicate the type of risk response (avoidance, mitigation, transfer, acceptance, or no risk exists).
    2. Assign each risk response action a residual likelihood level and a residual impact level.
      • This is the same step performed in Activity 2.2.6, when initial likelihood and impact levels were determined; however, now you are estimating the likelihood and impact of the risk event after the risk response action has been implemented successfully.
      • The Risk Register Tool will generate a residual risk severity level for each risk event.
    3. Identify the potential Risk Action Owner (Project Manager) if the response is selected and turned into an IT project, and document this in the Risk Register Tool.
    Document the following in the Risk Event Action Plan for each risk event:
      • Risk response actions
      • Residual likelihood and impact levels
      • Residual risk severity level
    • Review the following slides about the four types of risk response to help complete the activity.
      1. Avoidance
      2. Mitigation
      3. Transfer
      4. Acceptance

    Record the results in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Take actions to avoid the risk entirely

    Risk Avoidance

    • Risk avoidance involves taking evasive maneuvers to avoid the risk event.
    • Risk avoidance targets risk likelihood, decreasing the likelihood of the risk event occurring.
    • Since risk avoidance measures are fairly drastic, the likelihood is often reduced to negligible levels.
    • However, risk avoidance response actions often sacrifice potential benefits to eliminate the possibility of the risk entirely.
    • Typically, risk avoidance measures should only be taken for risk events with extremely high severity and when the severity (expected cost) of the risk event exceeds the cost (benefits sacrificed) of avoiding the risk.

    Example

    Risk event: Information security vulnerability from third-party cloud services provider.

    • Risk avoidance action: Store all data in-house.
    • Benefits sacrificed: Cost savings, storage flexibility, etc.
    Stock photo of a person hikiing along a damp, foggy, valley path.

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event

    Risk Mitigation

    • Risk mitigation actions are risk responses that reduce the likelihood and impact of the risk event.
    • Risk mitigation actions can be to either implement new controls or enhance existing ones.
    Example 1

    Most risk responses will reduce both the likelihood of the risk event occurring and its potential impact.

    Example

    Mitigation: Purchase and implement enterprise mobility management (EMM) software with remote wipe capability.

    • EMM reduces the likelihood that sensitive data is accessed by a nefarious actor.
    • The remote-wipe capability reduces the impact by closing the window that sensitive data can be accessed from.
    Example 2

    However, some risk responses will have a greater effect on decreasing the likelihood of a risk event with little effect on decreasing impact.

    Example

    Mitigation: Create policies that restrict which personnel can access sensitive data on mobile devices.

    • This mitigation decreases the number of corporate phones that have access to (or are storing) sensitive data, thereby decreasing the likelihood that a device is compromised.
    Example 3

    Others will reduce the potential impact without decreasing its likelihood of occurring.

    Example

    Mitigation: Use robust encryption for all sensitive data.

    • Corporate-issued mobile phones are just as likely to fall into the hands of nefarious actors, but the financial impact they can inflict on the organization is greatly reduced.

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event (continued)

    Use the following IT functions to guide your selection of risk mitigation actions:

    Process Improvement

    Key processes that would most directly improve the risk profile:

    • Change Management
    • Project Management
    • Vendor Management
    Infrastructure Management
    • Disaster Recovery Plan/Business Continuity Plan
    • Redundancy and Resilience
    • Preventative Maintenance
    • Physical Environment Security
    Personnel
    • Greater staff depth in key areas
    • Increased discipline around documentation
    • Knowledge Management
    • Training
    Rationalization and Simplification

    This is a foundational activity, as complexity is a major source of risk:

    • Application Rationalization – reducing the number of applications
    • Data Management – reducing the volume and locations of data

    Transfer risks to a third party

    Risk transfer: the exchange of uncertain future costs for fixed present costs.

    Insurance

    The most common form of risk transfer is the purchase of insurance.

    • The uncertain future cost of an IT risk event can be transferred to an insurance company who assumes the risk in exchange for insurance premiums.
    • The most common form of IT-relevant insurance is cyberinsurance.

    Not all risks can be insured. Insurable risks typically possess the following five characteristics:

    1. The loss must be accidental (the risk event cannot be insured if it could have been avoided by taking reasonable actions).
    2. The insured cannot profit from the occurrence of the risk event.
    3. The loss must be able to be measured in monetary terms.
    4. The organization must have an insurable interest (it must be the party that incurs the loss).
    5. An insurance company must offer insurance against that risk.
    Other Forms of Risk Transfer

    Other forms of risk transfer include:

    • Self-insurance
      • Appropriate funds can be set aside in advance to address the financial impact of a risk event should it occur.
    • Warranties
    • Contractual transfer
      • The financial impact of a risk event can be transferred to a third party through clauses agreed to in a contract.
      • For example, a vendor can be contractually obligated to assume all costs resulting from failing to secure the organization’s data.
    • Example email addressing fields of an IT Risk Transfer to an insurance company.

    Accept risks that fall below established thresholds

    Risk Acceptance

    Accepting a risk means tolerating the expected cost of a risk event. It is a conscious and deliberate decision to retain the threat.

    You may choose to accept a risk event for one of the following three reasons:

    1. The risk severity (expected cost) of the risk event falls below acceptability thresholds and does not justify an investment in a risk avoidance, mitigation, or transfer measure.
    2. The risk severity (expected cost) exceeds acceptability thresholds but all effective risk avoidance, mitigation, and transfer measures are ineffective or prohibitively expensive.
    3. The risk severity (expected cost) exceeds acceptability thresholds but there are no feasible risk avoidance, mitigation, and transfer measures to be implemented.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Constant monitoring and the assignment of responsibility and accountability for accepted risk events is crucial for effective management of these risks. No IT risk should be accepted without detailed documentation outlining the reasoning behind that decision and evidence of approval by senior management.

    3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis (optional)

    The purpose of a cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is to guide financial decision making.

    This helps IT make risk-conscious investment decisions that fall within the IT budget and helps the organization make sound budgetary decisions for risk response projects that cannot be addressed by IT’s existing budget.

    Instructions:
    1. Reopen the Risk Costing Tool. For each risk that you conducted an expected cost assessment in section 2.2 for, find the Excel sheet that corresponds to the risk number (e.g. R001).
    2. Identify between one and four risk response options for the risk event and document them in the Risk Costing Tool.
      • The “Risk Response 1” field will be automatically populated with expected cost data for a scenario where no action was taken (risk acceptance). This will serve as a baseline for comparing alternative responses.
      • For the following steps, go through the risk responses one by one.
    3. Estimate the first-year cost for the risk response.
      • This cost should reflect initial capital expenditures and first-year operating expenditures.
    Screenshot of the Risk Response cost-benefit-analysis from the Risk Costing Tool with 'Capital Expenditures' and 'Operating Expenditures' highlighted.

    Record the results in the Risk Costing Tool.

    3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis (continued)

    The purpose of a cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is to guide financial decision making.

    Instructions:

    1. Estimate residual risk likelihood and financial impact for Year 1 with the risk response in place.
      • Rather than estimating the likelihood level (low, medium, high), determine a precise likelihood value of the risk event occurring once the response has been implemented.
      • Estimate the dollar value of financial impacts if the risk event were to occur with the risk response in place.
      • Screenshot of the Risk Response cost-benefit-analysis from the Risk Costing Tool with figured for 'Financial Impact' and 'Probability' highlighted. The tool will calculate the expected residual cost of the risk event: (Financial Impact x Likelihood) - Costs = Expected Residual Cost
    2. Select the highest value risk response and document it in the Risk Register Tool.
    3. Document your analysis and recommendations in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Note: See Activity 3.1.5 to build multi-year cost projections for risk responses.

    3.1.5 Create multi-year cost projections (optional)

    Select between risk response options by projecting their costs and benefits over multiple years.

    • It can be difficult to choose between risk response options that require different payment schedules. A risk response project with costs spread out over more than one year (e.g. incremental upgrades to an IT system) may be more advantageous than a project with costs concentrated up front that may cost less in the long run (e.g. replacing the system).
    • However, the impact that risk response projects have on reducing risk severity is not necessarily static. For example, an expensive project like replacing a system may drastically reduce the risk severity of a system failure. Whereas, incremental system upgrades may only marginally reduce risk severity in the short term but reach similar levels as a full system replacement in a few years.
    Instructions:

    Calculate expected cost for multiple years using the Risk Costing Tool for:

    • Risk events that are subject to change in severity over time.
    • Risk responses that reduce the severity of the risk gradually.
    • Risk responses that cannot be implemented immediately.

    Copy and paste the graphs into the Risk Report and the Risk Event Action Plan for the risk event.

    Sample charts on the cost of risk responses from the Risk Costing Tool.

    Record the results in the Risk Costing Tool.

    Step 3.2

    Report IT Risk Priorities

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Obtain executive approval for risk action plans
    • 3.2.2 Socialize the Risk Report
    • 3.2.3 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers
    • 3.2.4 Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Obtained approval for risk action plans
    • Communicated IT’s risk recommendations to senior leadership
    • Embedded risk management into day-to-day IT operations

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Effectively deliver IT risk expertise to the business

    Communicate IT risk management in two directions:

    1. Up to senior leadership (and ERM if applicable)
    2. Down to IT employees (embedding risk awareness)
    3. Visualization of communicating Up to 'Senior Leadership' and Down to 'IT Personnel'.

    Create a strong paper trail and obtain sign-off for the ITRC’s recommendations.

    Now that you have collected all of the necessary raw data, you must communicate your insights and recommendations effectively.

    A fundamental task of risk management is communicating risk information to senior management. It is your responsibility to enable them to make informed risk decisions. This can be considered upward communication.

    The two primary goals of upward communication are:

    1. Transferring accountability for high-priority IT risks to the ERM or to senior leadership.
    2. Obtaining funds for risk response projects recommended by the ITRC.

    Good risk management also has a trickle-down effect impacting all of IT. This can be considered downward communication.

    The two primary goals of downward communication are:

    1. Fostering a risk-aware IT culture.
    2. Ensuring that the IT risk management program maintains momentum and runs effectively.

    3.2.1 Obtain executive approval for risk action plans

    Best Practices and Key Benefits

    Best practice is for all acceptable risks to also be signed-off by senior leadership. However, for ITRCs that brainstorm 100+ risks, this may not be possible. If this is the case, prioritize accepted risks that were assessed to be closest to the organization’s thresholds.

    By receiving a stamp of approval for each key risk from senior management, you ensure that:

    1. The organization is aware of important IT risks that may impact business objectives.
    2. The organization supports the risk assessment conducted by the ITRC.
    3. The organization supports the plan of action and monitoring responsibilities proposed by the ITRC.
    4. If a risk event were to occur, the organization holds ultimate accountability.
    Sample of the Risk Event Action Plan template.

    Task:
    All IT risks that were flagged for exceeding the organization’s severity thresholds must obtain sign-off by the CIO or another member of the senior leadership team.

    • In the assessment phase, you evaluated risks using severity thresholds approved by the business and determined whether or not they justified a risk response.
    • Whether your recommendation was to accept the risk or to analyze possible risk responses, the business should be made aware of most IT risks.

    3.2.2 Socialize the risk report

    Create a succinct, impactful document that summarizes the outcomes of risk assessment and highlights the IT risk council’s top recommendations to the senior leadership team.

    The Risk Report contains:
    • An executive summary page highlighting the main takeaways for senior management:
      • A short summary of results from the most recent risk assessment
      • Dashboard
      • A list of top 10 risks ordered from most severe to least
    • Subsequent individual risk analyses (1 to 10)
      • Detailed risk assessment data
      • Risk responses
      • Risk response analysis
      • Multi-year cost projection (see the following slide)
      • Dashboard
      • Recommendations
    Sample of the Risk Report template.

    Risk Report

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event

    Encourage risk awareness to extend the benefits of risk management to every aspect of IT.

    Benefits of risk awareness:

    • More preventative and proactive approaches to IT projects are discussed and considered.
    • Changes to the IT threat landscape are more likely to be detected, communicated, and acted upon.
    • IT possesses a realistic perception of its ability to perform functions and provide services.
    • Contingency plans are put in place to hedge against risk events.
    • Fewer IT risks go unidentified.
    • CIOs and business executives make better risk decisions.

    Consequences of low risk awareness:

    • False confidence about the number of IT risks impacting the organization and their severity.
    • Risk-relevant information is not communicated to the ITRC, which may result in inaccurate risk assessments.
    • Confusion surrounding whose responsibility it is to consider how risk impacts IT decision making.
    • Uncertainty and panic when unanticipated risks impact the IT department and the organization.

    Embedding risk management in the IT department is a full-time job

    Take concrete steps to increase risk-aware decision making in IT.

    The IT risk council plays an instrumental role in fostering a culture of risk awareness throughout the IT department. In addition to periodic risk assessments, fulfilling reporting requirements, and undertaking ongoing monitoring responsibilities, members of the ITRC can take a number of actions to encourage other IT employees to adopt a risk-focused approach, particularly at the project planning stage.

    Embed risk management in project planning

    Make time for discussing project risks at every project kick-off.
    • A main benefit of including senior personnel from across IT in the ITRC is that they are able to disseminate the IT risk council’s findings to their respective practices.
    • At project kick-off meetings, schedule time to identify and assess project-specific risks.
    • Encourage the project team to identify strategies to reduce the likelihood and impact of those risks and document these in the project charter.
    • Lead by example by being clear and open about what constitutes acceptable and unacceptable risks.

    Embed risk management with employee

    Train IT staff on the ITRC’s planned responses to specific risk events.
    • If a response to a particular risk event is not to implement a project but rather to institute new policies or procedures, ensure that changes are communicated to employees and that they receive training.
    Provide risk management education opportunities.
    • Remember that a more risk-aware IT employee provides more value to the organization.
    • Invest in your employees by encouraging them to pursue education opportunities like receiving risk management accreditation or providing them with educational experiences such as workshops, seminars, and eLearning.

    Embedding risk management in the IT department is a full-time job (continued)

    Encourage risk awareness by adjusting performance metrics and job titles.

    Performance metrics:

    Depending on the size of your IT department and the amount of resources dedicated to ongoing risk management, you may consider embedding risk management responsibilities into the performance assessments of certain ITRC members or other IT personnel.

    • Personalize the risk management program metrics you have documented in your Risk Management Program Manual.
    • Evidence that KPIs are monitored and frequently reported is also a good indicator that risk owners are fulfilling their risk management responsibilities.
    • Info-Tech Insight

      If risk management responsibilities are not built into performance assessments, it is less likely that they will invest time and energy into these tasks. Adding risk management metrics to performance assessments directly links good job performance with good risk management, making it more likely that ITRC activities and initiatives gain traction throughout the IT department.

    Job descriptions:

    Changing job titles to reflect the focus of an individual’s role on managing IT risk may be a good way to distinguish personnel tasked with developing KRIs and monitoring risks on a week-to-week basis.

    • Some examples include IT Risk Officer, IT Risk Manager, and IT Risk Analyst.

    3.2.3 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Once risk responses have obtained approval and funding, it is time to transform them into fully-fledged projects.

    Image of a hand giving a key to another hand and a circle split into quadrants of Governance with 'Governance of Risks' being put into 'Governance of Projects'.

    3.2.4 Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    Go back through the Risk Management Program Manual and ensure that the material will accurately reflect your approach to risk management going forward.

    Remember, the program manual is a living document that should be evolving alongside your risk management program, reflecting best practices, knowledge, and experiences accrued from your own assessments and experienced risk events.

    The best way to ensure that the program manual continues to guide and document your risk management program is to make it the focal point of every ITRC meeting and ensure that one participant is tasked with making necessary adjustments and additions.

    Sample of the Risk Management Program Manual. Risk Management Program Manual

    “Upon completing the Info-Tech workshop, the deliverables that we were left with were really outstanding. We put together a 3-year project plan from a high level, outlining projects that will touch upon our high risk areas.” (Director of Security & Risk, Water Management Company)

    Don’t allow your risk management program to flatline

    54% of small businesses haven’t implemented controls to respond to the threat of cyber attacks (Source: Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021)

    Don’t be lulled into a false sense of security. It might be your greatest risk.

    So you’ve identified the most important IT risks and implemented projects to protect IT and the business.

    Unfortunately, your risk assessment is already outdated.

    Perform regular health checks to keep your finger on the pulse of the key risks threatening the business and your reputation.

    To continue the momentum of your newly forged IT risk management program, read Info-Tech’s research on conducting periodic risk assessments and “health checks”:

    Revive Your Risk Management Program With a Regular Health Check

    • Complete Info-Tech’s Risk Management Health Check to seize the momentum you created by building a robust IT risk management program and create a process for conducting periodic health checks and embedding ongoing risk management into every aspect of IT.
    • Our focus is on using data to make IT risk assessment less like an art and more like a science. Ongoing data-driven risk management is self-improving and grounded in historical data.

    Appendix I: Familiarize yourself with key risk terminology

    Review important risk management terms and definitions.

    Risk

    An uncertain event or set of events which, should it occur, will have an effect on the achievement of objectives. A risk consists of a combination of the likelihood of a perceived threat or opportunity occurring and the magnitude of its impact on objectives (Office of Government Commerce, 2007).

    Threat

    An event that can create a negative outcome (e.g. hostile cyber/physical attacks, human errors).

    Vulnerability

    A weakness that can be taken advantage of in a system (e.g. weakness in hardware, software, business processes).

    Risk Management

    The systematic application of principles, approaches, and processes to the tasks of identifying and assessing risks, and then planning and implementing risk responses. This provides a disciplined environment for proactive decision making (Office of Government Commerce, 2007).

    Risk Category

    Distinct from a risk event, a category is an abstract profile of risk. It represents a common group of risks. For example, you can group certain types of risks under the risk category of IT Operations Risks.

    Risk Event

    A specific occurrence of an event that falls under a particular risk category. For example, a phishing attack is a risk event that falls under the risk category of IT Security Risks.

    Risk Appetite

    An organization’s attitude towards risk taking, which determines the amount of risk that it considers acceptable. Risk appetite also refers to an organization’s willingness to take on certain levels of exposure to risk, which is influenced by the organization’s capacity to financially bear risk.

    Enterprise Risk Management

    (ERM) – A strategic business discipline that supports the achievement of an organization’s objectives by addressing the full spectrum of organizational risks and managing the combined impact of those risks as an interrelated risk portfolio (RIMS, 2015).

    Appendix II: Likelihood vs. Frequency

    Why we measure likelihood, not frequency:

    The basic formula of Likelihood x Impact = Severity is a common methodology used across risk management frameworks. However, some frameworks measure likelihood using Frequency rather than Likelihood.

    Frequency is typically measured as the number of instances an event occurs over a given period of time (e.g. once per month).

    • For risk assessment, historical data regarding the frequency of a risk event is commonly used to indicate the likelihood that the event will happen in the future.

    Likelihood is a numerical representation of the “degree of belief” that the risk event will occur in a given future timeframe (e.g. 25% likelihood that the event will occur within the next year).

    False Objectivity

    While some may argue that frequency provides an objective measurement of likelihood, it is well understood in the field of likelihood theory that historical data regarding the frequency of a risk event may have little bearing over the likelihood of that event happening in the future. Frequency is often an indication of future likelihood but should not be considered an objective measurement of it.

    Likelihood scales that use frequency underestimate the magnitude of risks that lack historical precedent. For example, an IT department that has never experienced a high-impact data breach would adopt a very low likelihood score using the frequentist approach. However, if all of the organization’s major competitors have suffered a major breach within the last two years, they ought to possess a much higher degree of belief that the risk event will occur within the next year.

    Likelihood is a more comprehensive measurement of future likelihood, as frequency can be used to inform the selection of a likelihood value. The process of selecting intersubjective likelihood values will naturally internalize historical data such as the frequency that the event occurred in the past. Further, the frequency that the event is expected to occur in the future can be captured by the expected impact value. For example, a risk event that has an expected impact per occurrence of $10,000 that is expected to occur three times over the next year has an expected impact of $30,000.

    Appendix III: Should max impacts sway decision making?

    Don’t just fixate on the most likely impact – be aware of high-impact outcomes.

    During assessment, risks are evaluated according to their most likely financial impact.

    • For example, a service outage will likely last for two hours and may have an expected cost of $14,000.

    Naturally, focusing on the most likely financial impact will exclude higher impacts that – while theoretically possible – are so unlikely that they do not warrant any real consideration.

    • For example, it is possible that a service outage could last for days; however, the likelihood for such an event may be well below 1%.

    While the risk severity level assessment allows you to present impacts as a range of values (e.g. $50,000 to $75,000), the expected cost assessment requires you to select specific values.

    • However, this analysis may fail to consider much higher potential impacts that have non-negligible likelihood values (likelihood values that you cannot ignore).
    • What you consider “non-negligible” will depend on your organizational risk tolerance/appetite.

    Sometimes called Black Swan events or Fat-Tailed outcomes, high-impact events may occur when the far right of the likelihood distribution – or the “tail” – is thicker than a normal distribution (see fig. 2).

    • A good example is a data breach. While small to medium impacts are far more likely to occur than a devastating intrusion, the high-impact scenario cannot be ignored completely.

    For risk events that contain non-negligible likelihoods (too high to be ignored) consider elevating the risk severity level or expected cost.

    Figure 1 is a graph presenting a 'Normal Likelihood Distribution', the axes being 'Likelihood' and 'Financial Impact'.
    Figure 2 is a graph presenting a 'Fat-Tailed Likelihood Distribution' with a point at the top of the parabola labelled 'Most Likely Impact' but with a much wider bottom labelled 'Fat-Tailed Outcomes', the axes being 'Likelihood' and 'Financial Impact'.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s research on security and compliance risk to identify additional risk events

    Title card of the Info-tech blueprint 'Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit' with subtitle 'Don't gamble recklessly with external compliance. Play a winning system and take calculated risks to stack the odds in your favor.


    Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t gamble recklessly with external compliance. Play a winning system and take calculated risks to stack the odds in your favor.

    Take an agile approach to analyze your gaps and prioritize your remediations. You don’t always have to be fully compliant as long as your organization understands and can live with the consequences.

    Stock photo of a woman sitting at a computer surrounded by rows of computers.


    Develop and Implement a Security Risk Management Program

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security risk management equals cost effectiveness.

    Time spent upfront identifying and prioritizing risks can mean the difference between spending too much and staying on budget.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz
    Executive Counsellor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Milena Litoiu
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Magerfleisch
    Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Aadil Nanji
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy Neill
    Associate Vice-President of Research
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Daisha Pennie
    IT Risk Management
    Oklahoma State University

    Ken Piddington
    CIO and Executive Advisor
    MRE Consulting

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Sharpe
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Chris Warner
    Consulting Director- Security
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sterling Bjorndahl
    Director of IT Operations
    eHealth Saskatchewan

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Tamara Dwarika
    Internal Auditor
    A leading North American Utility

    Anne Leroux
    Director
    ES Computer Training

    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Michel Fossé
    Consulting Services Manager
    IBM Canada (LGS)

    Petar Hristov
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steve Woodward
    Research Director
    CEO, Cloud Perspectives

    *Plus 10 additional interviewees who wish to remain anonymous.

    Bibliography

    “2021 State of the CIO.” IDG, 28 January 2021. Web.

    “4 Reasons Why CIOs Lose Their Jobs.” Silverton Consulting, 2012. Web.

    Beasley, Mark, Bruce Branson, and Bonnie Hancock. “The State of Risk Oversight,” AICPA, April 2021. Web.

    COBIT 2019. ISACA, 2019. Web.

    “Cognyte jeopardized its database exposing 5 billion records, including earlier data breaches.” SecureBlink, 21 June 2021. Web.

    Culp, Steve. “Accenture 2019 Global Risk Management Study, Financial Services Report.” Accenture, 2019. Web.

    Curtis, Patchin, and Mark Carey. “Risk Assessment in Practice.” COSO Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Deloitte & Touche LLP, 2012. Web.

    “Cyber Risk Management.” Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC), 2022. Web.

    Eccles, Robert G., Scott C. Newquist, and Roland Schatz. “Reputation and Its Risks.” Harvard Business Review, February 2007. Web.

    Eden, C. and F. Ackermann. Making Strategy: The Journey of Strategic Management. Sage Publications, 1998.

    “Enterprise Risk Management Maturity Model.” OECD, 9 February 2021. Web.

    Ganguly, Saptarshi, Holger Harreis, Ben Margolis, and Kayvaun Rowshankish. “Digital Risks: Transforming risk management for the 2020s.” McKinsey & Company, 10 February 2017. Web.

    “Governance Institute of Australia Risk Management Survey 2020.” Governance Institute of Australia, 2020. Web.

    “Guidance on Enterprise Risk Management.” COSO, 2022. Web.

    Henriquez, Maria. “The Top 10 Data Breaches of 2021” Security Magazine, 9 December 2021. Web.

    Holmes, Aaron. “533 million Facebook users’ phone numbers and personal data have been leaked online.” Business Insider, 3 April 2021. Web.

    Bibliography

    “Integrated Risk and Compliance Management for Banks and Financial Services Organizations: Benefits of a Holistic Approach.” MetricStream, 2022. Web.

    “ISACA’s Risk IT Framework Offers a Structured Methodology for Enterprises to Manage Information and Technology Risk.” ISACA, 25 June 2020. Web.

    ISO 31000 Risk Management. ISO, 2018. Web.

    Lawton, George. “10 Enterprise Risk Management Trends in 2022.” TechTarget, 2 February 2022. Web.

    Levenson, Michael. “MGM Resorts Says Data Breach Exposed Some Guests’ Personal Information.” The New York Times, 19 February 2020. Web.

    Management of Risk (M_o_R): Guidance for Practitioners. Office of Government Commerce, 2007. Web.

    “Many small businesses vulnerable to cyber attacks.” Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC), 5 October 2021.

    Maxwell, Phil. “Why risk-informed decision-making matters.” EY, 3 December 2019. Web.

    “Measuring and Mitigating Reputational Risk.” Marsh, September 2014. Web.

    Natarajan, Aarthi. “The Top 6 Business Risks you should Prepare for in 2022.” Diligent, 22 December 2021. Web.

    “Operational Risk Management Excellence – Get to Strong Survey: Executive Report.” KMPG and RMA, 2014. Web.

    “Third-party risk is becoming a first priority challenge.” Deloitte, 2022. Web.

    Thomas, Adam, and Dan Kinsella. “Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020.” Deloitte, 2021. Web.

    Treasury Board Secretariat. “Guide to Integrated Risk Management.” Government of Canada, 12 May 2016. Web.

    Webb, Rebecca. “6 Reasons Data is Key for Risk Management.” ClearRisk, 13 January 2021. Web.

    “What is Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)?” RIMS, 2015. Web.

    Wiggins, Perry. “Do you spend enough time assessing strategic risks?” CFO, 26 January 2022. Web.

    Prevent Data Loss Across Cloud and Hybrid Environments

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}377|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations are often beholden to compliance obligations that require protection of sensitive data.
    • All stages of the data lifecycle exist in the cloud and all stages provide opportunity for data loss.
    • Organizations must find ways to mitigate insider threats without impacting legitimate business access.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Data loss prevention is the outcome of a well-designed strategy that incorporates multiple, sometimes disparate, tools within your existing security program.
    • The journey to data loss prevention is complex and should be taken in small and manageable steps.

    Impact and Result

    • Organizations will achieve data comprehension.
    • Organizations will align DLP with their current security program and architecture.
    • A DLP strategy will be implemented with a distinct goal in mind.

    Prevent Data Loss Across Cloud and Hybrid Environments Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prevent Data Loss Across Cloud and Hybrid Environments Storyboard – A guide to handling data loss prevention in cloud services.

    This research describes an approach to strategize and implement DLP solutions for cloud services.

    • Prevent Data Loss Across Cloud and Hybrid Environments Storyboard

    2. Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner – A workbook designed to guide you through identifying and prioritizing your data and planning what DLP actions should be applied to protect that data.

    Use this tool to identify and prioritize your data, then use that information to make decisions on DLP strategies based on classification and data environment.

    • Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Prevent Data Loss Across Cloud and Hybrid Environments

    Leverage existing tools and focus on the data that matters most to your organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Data loss prevention is an additional layer of protection

    Driven by reduced operational costs and improved agility, the migration to cloud services continues to grow at a steady rate. A recent report by Palo Alto Networks indicates workload in the cloud increased by 13% last year, and companies are expecting to move an additional 11% of their workload to the cloud in the next 24 months1.

    However, moving to the cloud poses unique challenges for cyber security practitioners. Cloud services do not offer the same level of management and control over resources as traditional IT approaches. The result can be reduced visibility of data in cloud services and reduced ability to apply controls to that data, particularly data loss prevention (DLP) controls.

    It’s not unusual for organizations to approach DLP as a point solution. Many DLP solutions are marketed as such. The truth is, DLP is a complex program that uses many different parts of an organization’s security program and architecture. To successfully implement DLP for data in the cloud, an organization should leverage existing security controls and integrate DLP tools, whether newly acquired or available in cloud services, with its existing security program.

    Photo of Bob Wilson
    Bob Wilson
    CISSP
    Research Director, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Organizations must prevent the misuse and leakage of data, especially sensitive data, regardless of where it’s stored.

    Organizations often have compliance obligations requiring protection of sensitive data.

    All stages of the data lifecycle exist in the cloud and all stages provide opportunity for data loss.

    Organizations must find ways to mitigate insider threats without impacting legitimate business access.

    Common Obstacles

    Many organizations must handle a plethora of data in multiple varied environments.

    Organizations don’t know enough about the data they use or where it is located.

    Different systems offer differing visibility.

    Necessary privileges and access can be abused.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    The path to data loss prevention is complex and should be taken in small and manageable steps.

    First, organizations must achieve data comprehension.

    Organizations must align DLP with their current security program and architecture.

    Organizations need to implement DLP with a distinct goal in mind.

    Once the components are in place it’s important to measure and improve.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data loss prevention is the outcome of a well-designed strategy that incorporates multiple, sometimes disparate, tools within your existing security program.

    Your challenge

    Protecting data is a critical responsibility for organizations, no matter where it is located.

    45% of breaches occurred in the cloud (“Cost of a Data Breach 2022,” IBM Security, 2022).

    A diagram that shows the mean time to detect and contain.

    It can take upwards of 12 weeks to identify and contain a breach (“Cost of a Data Breach 2022,” IBM Security, 2022).

    • Compliance obligations will require organizations to protect certain data.
    • All data states can exist in the cloud, and each state provides a unique opportunity for data loss.
    • Insider threats, whether intentional or not, are especially challenging for organizations. It’s necessary to prevent illicit data use while still allowing work to happen.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data loss prevention doesn’t depend on a single tool. Many of the leading cloud service providers offer DLP controls with their services and these controls should be considered.

    Common obstacles

    As organizations increasingly move data into the cloud, their environments become more complex and vulnerable to insider threats

    • It’s not uncommon for an organization not to know what data they use, where that data exists, or how they are supposed to protect it.
    • Cloud systems, especially software as a service (SaaS) applications, may not provide much visibility into how that data is stored or protected.
    • Insider threats are a primary concern, but employees must be able to access data to perform their duties. It isn’t always easy to strike a balance between adequate access and being too restrictive with controls.

    Insider threats are a significant concern

    53%

    53% of a study’s respondents think it is more difficult to detect insider threats in the cloud.

    Source: "2023 Insider Threat Report," Cybersecurity Insiders, 2023

    45%

    Only about 45% of organizations think native cloud app functionality is useful in detecting insider threats.

    Source: "2023 Insider Threat Report," Cybersecurity Insiders, 2023

    Info-Tech Insight

    An insider threat management (ITM) program focuses on the user. DLP programs focus on the data.

    Insight summary

    DLP is not just a single tool. It’s an additional layer of security that depends on different components of your security program, and it requires time and effort to mature.

    Organizations should leverage existing security architecture with the DLP controls available in the cloud services they use.

    Data loss prevention is not a point solution

    Data loss prevention is the outcome of a well-designed strategy that incorporates multiple, sometimes disparate tools within your existing security program.

    Prioritize data

    Start with the data that matters most to your organization.

    Define an objective

    Having a clearly defined objective will make implementing a DLP program much easier.

    DLP is a layer

    Data loss prevention is not foundational, and it depends on many other parts of a mature information security program.

    The low hanging fruit is sweet

    Start your DLP implementation with a quick win in mind and build on small successes.

    DLP is a work multiplier

    Your organization must be prepared to investigate alerts and respond to incidents.

    Prevent data loss across cloud or hybrid environments

    A diagram that shows preventing data loss across cloud or hybrid environments

    Data loss prevention is not a point solution.
    It’s the outcome of a well-designed strategy that incorporates multiple, sometimes disparate tools within your existing security program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Leverage existing security tools where possible.

    Data loss prevention (DLP) overview

    DLP is an additional layer of security.

    DLP is a set of technologies and processes that provides additional data protection by identifying, monitoring, and preventing data from being illicitly used or transmitted.

    DLP depends on many components of a mature security program, including but not limited to:

    • Acceptable use policy
    • Data classification policy and data handling guidelines
    • Identity and access management

    DLP is achieved through some or all of the following tactics:

    • Identify: Data is detected using policies, rules, and patterns.
    • Monitor: Data is flagged and data activity is logged.
    • Prevent: Action is taken on data once it has been detected.

    Info-Tech Insight

    DLP is not foundational. Your information security program needs to be moderately mature to support a DLP strategy.

    DLP approaches and methods

    DLP uses a handful of techniques to achieve its tactics:

    • Policy and access rights: Limits access to data based on user permissions or other contextual attributes.
    • Isolation or virtualization: Data is isolated in an environment with channels for data leakage made unavailable.
    • Cryptographic approach: Data is encrypted.
    • Quantifying and limiting: Use or transfer of data is restricted by quantity.
    • Social and behavioral analysis: The DLP system detects anomalous activity, such as users accessing data outside of business hours.
    • Pattern matching: Data content is analyzed for specific patterns.
    • Data mining and text clustering: Large sets are analyzed, typically with machine learning (ML), to identify patterns.
    • Data fingerprinting: Data files are matched against a pre-calculated hash or based on file contents.
    • Statistical Analysis: Data content is analyzed for sensitive data. Usually involves machine learning.


    DLP has two primary approaches for applying techniques:

    • Content-based: Data is identified through inspecting its content. Fingerprinting and pattern matching are examples of content-based methods.
    • Context-based: Data is identified based on its situational or contextual attributes. Some factors that may be used are source, destination, and format.

    Some DLP tools use both approaches.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Different DLP products will support different methods. It is important to keep these in mind when choosing a DLP solution.

    Start by defining your data

    Define data by answering the 5 “W”s

    Who? Who owns the data? Who needs access? Who would be impacted if it was lost?
    What? What data do you have? What type of data is it? In what format does it exist?
    When? When is the data generated? When is it used? When is it destroyed?
    Where? Where is the data stored? Where is it generated? Where is it used?
    Why? Why is the data needed?

    Use what you discover about your data to create a data inventory!

    Compliance requirements

    Compliance requirements often dictate what must be done to manage and protect data and vary from industry to industry.

    Some examples of compliance requirements to consider:

    • Healthcare - Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    • Financial Services - Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (GLBA)
    • Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Why is especially important. If you don’t need a specific piece of data, dispose of it to reduce risk and administrative overhead related to maintaining or protecting data.

    Classify your data

    Data classification facilitates making decisions about how data is treated.

    Data classification is a process by which data is categorized.

    • The classifications are often based on the sensitivity of the data or the impact a loss or breach of that data would have on the organization.
    • Data classification facilitates decisions about data handling and how information security controls are implemented. Instead of considering many different types of data individually, decisions are based on a handful of classification levels.
    • A mature data classification should include a formalized policy, handling standards, and a steering committee.

    Refer to our Discover and Classify Your Data blueprint for guidance on data classification.

    Sample data classification schema

    Label

    Category

    Top Secret Data that is mission critical and highly likely to negatively impact the organization if breached. The “crown jewels.”
    Examples: Trade secrets, military secrets
    Confidential Data that must not be disclosed, either because of a contractual or regulatory requirement or because of its value to the organization.
    Examples: Payment card data, private health information, personally identifiable information, passwords
    Internal Data that is intended for organizational use, which should be kept private.
    Examples: Internal memos, sales reports
    Limited Data that isn’t generally intended for public consumption but may be made public.
    Examples: Employee handbooks, internal policies
    Public Data that is meant for public consumption and anonymous access.
    Examples: Press releases, job listings, marketing material

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data classification should be implemented as a continuous program, not a one-time project.

    Understand data risk

    Knowing where and how your data is at risk will inform your DLP strategy.

    Data exists in three states, and each state presents different opportunities for risk. Different DLP methodologies will be appropriate for different states.

    Data states

    In use

    • End-user devices
    • Mobile devices
    • Servers

    In motion

    • Cloud services
    • Email
    • Web/web apps
    • Instant messaging
    • File transfers

    At rest

    • Cloud services
    • Databases
    • End-user devices
    • Email archives
    • Backups
    • Servers
    • Physical storage devices

    Causes of Risk

    The most common causes of data loss can be categorized by people, processes, and technology.

    A diagram that shows the categorization of causes of risk.

    Check out our Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program blueprint for guidance on risk management, including how to do a full risk assessment.

    Prioritize your data

    Know what data matters most to your organization.

    Prioritizing the data that most needs protection will help define your DLP goals.

    The prioritization of your data should be a business decision based on your comprehension of the data. Drivers for prioritizing data can include:

    • Compliance-driven: Noncompliance is a risk in itself and your organization may choose to prioritize data based on meeting compliance requirements.
    • Audit-driven: Data can be prioritized to prepare for a specific audit objective or in response to an audit finding.
    • Business-driven: Data could be prioritized based on how important it is to the organization’s business processes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s not feasible for most organizations to apply DLP to all their data. Start with the most important data.

    Activity: Prioritize your data

    Input: Lists of data, data types, and data environments
    Output: A list of data types with an estimated priority
    Materials: Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner worksheet
    Participants: Security leader, Data owners

    1-2 hours

    For this activity, you will use the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner workbook to prioritize your data.

    1. Start with tab “2. Setup” and fill in the columns. Each column features a short explanation of itself, and the following slides will provide more detail about the columns.
    2. On tab “3. Data Prioritization,” work through the rows by selecting a data type and moving left to right. This sheet features a set of instructions at the top explaining each column, and the following slides also provide some guidance. On this tab, you may use data types and data environments multiple times.

    Click to download the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner

    Activity: Prioritize your data

    In the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner tool, start with tab “2. Setup.”

    A diagram that shows tab 2 setup

    Next, move to tab “3. Data Prioritization.”

    A diagram that shows tab 3 Data Prioritization.

    Click to download the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner

    Determine DLP objectives

    Your DLP strategy should be able to function as a business case.

    DLP objectives should achieve one or more of the following:

    • Prevent disclosure or unauthorized use of data, regardless of its state.
    • Preserve usability while providing adequate security.
    • Improve security, privacy, and compliance capabilities.
    • Reduce overall risk for the enterprise.

    Example objectives:

    • Prevent users from emailing ePHI to addresses outside of the organization.
    • Detect when a user is uploading an unusually large amount of data to a cloud drive.

    Most common DLP use cases:

    • Protection of data, primarily from internal threats.
    • Meet compliance requirements to protect data.
    • Automate the discovery and classification of data.
    • Provide better data management and visibility across the enterprise.
    • Manage and protect data on mobile devices.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Having a clear idea of your objectives will make implementing a DLP program easier.

    Align DLP with your existing security program/architecture

    DLP depends on many different aspects of your security program.
    To the right are some components of your existing security program that will support DLP.


    1. Data handling standards or guidelines: These specify how your organization will handle data, usually based on its classification. Your data handling standards will inform the development of DLP rules, and your employees will have a clear idea of data handling expectations.

    2. Identity and access management (IAM): IAM will control the access users have to various resources and data and is integral to DLP processes.

    3. Incident response policy or plan: Be sure to consider your existing incident handling processes when implementing DLP. Modifying your incident response processes to accommodate alerts from DLP tools will help you efficiently process and respond to incidents.

    4. Existing security tools: Firewalls, email gateways, security information and event management (SIEM), and other controls should be considered or leveraged when implementing a DLP solution.

    5. Acceptable use policy: An organization must set expectations for acceptable/unacceptable use of data and IT resources.

    6. User education and awareness: Aside from baseline security awareness training, organizations should educate users about policies and communicate the risks of data leakage to reduce risk caused by user error.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider DLP as a secondary layer of protection; a safety net. Your existing security program should do most of the work to prevent data misuse.

    Cloud service models

    A fundamental challenge with implementing DLP with cloud services is the reduced flexibility that comes with managing less of the technology stack. Each cloud model offers varying levels of abstraction and control to the user.

    Infrastructure as a service (IaaS): This service model provides customers with virtualized technology resources, such as servers and networking infrastructure. IaaS allows users to have complete control over their virtualized infrastructure without needing to purchase and maintain hardware resources or server space. Popular examples include Amazon Web Servers, Google Cloud Engine, and Microsoft Azure.

    Platform as a service (PaaS): This service model provides users with an environment to develop and manage their own applications without needing to manage an underlying infrastructure. Popular examples include Google Cloud Engine, OpenShift, and SAP Cloud.

    Software as a service (SaaS): This service model provides customers with access to software that is hosted and maintained by the cloud provider. SaaS offers the least flexibility and control over the environment. Popular examples include Salesforce, Microsoft Office, and Google Workspace.

    A diagram that shows cloud models, including IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud service providers may include DLP controls and functionality for their environments with the subscription. These tools are usually well suited for DLP functions on that platform.

    Different DLP tools

    DLP products often fall into general categories defined by where those tools provide protection. Some tools fit into more than one category.

    Cloud DLP refers to DLP products that are designed to protect data in cloud environments.

    • Cloud access security broker (CASB): This system, either in-cloud or on-premises, sits between cloud service users and cloud service providers and acts as a point of control to enforce policies on cloud-based resources. CASBs act on data in motion, for the most part, but can detect and act on data at rest through APIs.
    • Existing tools integrated within a service: Many cloud services provide DLP tools to manage data loss in their service.

    Endpoint DLP: This DLP solution runs on an endpoint computing device and is suited to detecting and controlling data at rest on a computer as well as data being uploaded or downloaded. Endpoint DLP would be feasible for IaaS.

    Network DLP: Network DLP, deployed on-premises or as a cloud service, enforces policies on network flows between local infrastructure and the internet.

    • “Email DLP”: Detects and enforces security policies specifically on data in motion as emails.

    A diagram of CASB

    Choosing a DLP solution

    You will also find that some DLP solutions are better suited for some cloud service models than others.


    DLP solution types that are better suited for SaaS: CASB and Integrated Tools

    DLP solution types that are better suited for PaaS: CASB, Integrated Tools, Network DLP

    DLP solution types that are better suited for IaaS: CASB, Integrated Tools, Network DLP, and Endpoint DLP

    Your approach for DLP will vary depending on the data state you’ll be acting on and whether you are trying to detect or prevent.

    A diagram that shows DLP tactics by approach and data state

    Click to download the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner
    Check the tab labeled “6. DLP Features Reference” for a list of common DLP features.

    Activity: Plan DLP methods

    Input: Knowledge of data states for data types
    Output: A set of technical DLP policy rules for each data type by environment
    Materials: The same Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner worksheet from the earlier activity
    Participants: Security leader, Data owners

    1-2 hours

    Continue with the same workbook used in the previous activity.

    1. On tab “4. DLP Methods,” indicate the expected data state the DLP control will act on. Then, select the type of DLP control your organization intends to use for that data type in that data environment.
    2. DLP actions are suggested based on the classification of the data type, but these may be overridden by manually selecting your preferred action.
    3. You will find more detail on this activity on the following slide, and you will find some additional guidance in the instructional text at the top of the worksheet.
    4. Once you have populated the columns on this worksheet, a summary of suggested DLP rules can be found on tab “5. Results.”

    Click to download the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner

    Activity: Plan DLP methods

    Use tab “4. DLP Methods” to plan DLP rules and technical policies.

    A diagram that shows tab 4 DLP Methods

    See tab “5. Results” for a summary of your DLP policies.

    A diagram that shows tab 5 Results.

    Click to download the Data Loss Prevention Strategy Planner

    Implement your DLP program

    Take the steps to properly implement your DLP program

    1. It’s important to shift the culture. You will need leadership’s support to implement controls and you’ll need stakeholders’ participation to ensure DLP controls don’t negatively affect business processes.
    2. Integrate DLP tools with your security program. Most cloud service providers, like Amazon, Microsoft, and Google provide DLP controls in their native environment. Many of your other security controls, such as firewalls and mail gateways, can be used to achieve DLP objectives.
    3. DLP is best implemented with a crawl, walk, then run approach. Following change management processes can reduce friction.
    4. Communicating controls to users will also reduce friction.

    A diagram of implementing DLP program

    Info-Tech Insight

    After a DLP program is implemented, alerts will need to be investigated and incidents will need a response. Be prepared for DLP to be a work multiplier!

    Measure and improve

    Metrics of effectiveness

    DLP attempts to tackle the challenge of promptly detecting and responding to an incident.
    To measure the effectiveness of your DLP program, compare the number of events, number of incidents, and mean time to respond to incidents from before and after DLP implementation.

    Metrics that indicate friction

    A high number of false positives and rule exceptions may indicate that the rules are not working well and may be interfering with legitimate use.
    It’s important to address these issues as the frustration felt by employees can undermine the DLP program.

    Tune DLP rules

    Establish a process for routinely using metrics to tune rules.
    This will improve performance and reduce friction.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Aside from performance-based tuning, it’s important to evaluate your DLP program periodically and after major system or business changes to maintain an awareness of your data environment.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Photo of Discover and Classify Your Data

    Discover and Classify Your Data

    Understand where your data lives and who has access to it. This blueprint will help you develop an appropriate data classification system by conducting interviews with data owners and by incorporating vendor solutions to make the process more manageable and end-user friendly.

    Photo of Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture

    Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture

    This blueprint and associated tools are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors. It allows them to know what types of risk they are facing and what security services are strongly recommended to mitigate those risks.

    Photo of Data Loss Prevention on SoftwareReviews

    Data Loss Prevention on SoftwareReviews

    Quickly evaluate top vendors in the category using our comprehensive market report. Compare product features, vendor strengths, user-satisfaction, and more.

    Don’t settle for just any vendor – find the one you can trust. Use the Emotional Footprint report to see which vendors treat their customers right.

    Research Contributors

    Andrew Amaro
    CSO and Founder
    Klavan Physical and Cyber Security Services

    Arshad Momin
    Cyber Security Architect
    Unicom Engineering, Inc.

    James Bishop
    Information Security Officer
    StructureFlow

    Michael Mitchell
    Information Security and Privacy Compliance Manager
    Unicom Engineering, Inc.

    One Anonymous Contributor

    Bibliography

    Alhindi, Hanan, Issa Traore, and Isaac Woungang. "Preventing Data Loss by Harnessing Semantic Similarity and Relevance." jisis.org Journal of Internet Services and Information Security, 31 May 2021. Accessed 2 March 2023. https://jisis.org/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/jisis-2021-vol11-no2-05.pdf

    Cash, Lauryn. "Why Modern DLP is More Important Than Ever." Armorblox, 10 June 2022. Accessed 10 February 2023. https://www.armorblox.com/blog/modern-dlp-use-cases/

    Chavali, Sai. "The Top 4 Use Cases for a Modern Approach to DLP." Proofpoint, 17 June 2021. Accessed 7 February 2023. https://www.proofpoint.com/us/blog/information-protection/top-4-use-cases-modern-approach-dlp

    Crowdstrike. "What is Data Loss Prevention?" Crowdstrike, 27 Sept. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023. https://www.crowdstrike.com/cybersecurity-101/data-loss-prevention-dlp/

    De Groot, Juliana. "What is Data Loss Prevention (DLP)? Definition, Types, and Tips." Digital Guardian, 8 February 2023. Accessed 9 Feb. 2023. https://digitalguardian.com/blog/what-data-loss-prevention-dlp-definition-data-loss-prevention

    Denise. "Learn More About DLP Key Use Cases." CISO Platform, 28 Nov. 2019. Accessed 10 February 2023. https://www.cisoplatform.com/profiles/blogs/learn-more-about-dlp-key-use-cases

    Google. "Cloud Data Loss Prevention." Google Cloud Google, n.d. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://cloud.google.com/dlp#section-6

    Gurucul. "2023 Insider Threat Report." Cybersecurity Insiders, 13 Jan. 2023. Accessed 23 Feb. 2023. https://gurucul.com/2023-insider-threat-report

    IBM Security. "Cost of a Data Breach 2022." IBM Security, 1 Aug. 2022. Accessed 13 Feb. 2023. https://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/3R8N1DZJ

    Mell, Peter & Grance, Tim. "The NIST Definition of Cloud Computing." NIST CSRC NIST, Sept. 2011. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://csrc.nist.gov/publications/detail/sp/800-145/final

    Microsoft. "Plan for Data Loss Prevention (DLP)." Microsoft 365 Solutions and Architecture Microsoft, 6 Feb. 2023. Accessed 14 Feb. 2023. https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/compliance/dlp-overview-plan-for-dlp

    Nanchengwa, Christopher. "The Four Questions for Successful DLP Implementation." ISACA Journal ISACA, 1 Jan. 2019. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023. https://www.isaca.org/resources/isaca-journal/issues/2019/volume-1/the-four-questions-for-successful-dlp-implementation

    Palo Alto Networks. "The State of Cloud Native Security 2023." Palo Alto Networks, 2 March 2023. Accessed 23 March 2023. https://www.paloaltonetworks.com/content/dam/pan/en_US/assets/pdf/reports/state-of-cloud-native-security-2023.pdf

    Pritha. "Top Six Metrics for your Data Loss Prevention Program." CISO Platform, 27 Nov. 2019. Accessed 10 Feb. 2023. https://www.cisoplatform.com/profiles/blogs/top-6-metrics-for-your-data-loss-prevention-program

    Raghavarapu, Mounika. "Understand DLP Key Use Cases." Cymune, 12 June 2021. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://www.cymune.com/blog-details/DLP-key-use-cases

    Sheela, G. P., & Kumar, N. "Data Leakage Prevention System: A Systematic Report." International Journal of Recent Technology and Engineering BEIESP, 30 Nov. 2019. Accessed 2 March 2023. https://www.ijrte.org/wp-content/uploads/papers/v8i4/D6904118419.pdf

    Sujir, Shiv. "What is Data Loss Prevention? Complete Guide [2022]." Pathlock, 15 Sep. 2022. Accessed 7 February 2023. https://pathlock.com/learn/what-is-data-loss-prevention-complete-guide-2022/

    Wlosinski, Larry G. "Data Loss Prevention - Next Steps." ISACA Journal, 16 Feb. 2018. Accessed 21 Feb. 2023. https://www.isaca.org/resources/isaca-journal/issues/2018/volume-1/data-loss-preventionnext-steps

    Create a Customized Big Data Architecture and Implementation Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}388|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Big data architecture is different from traditional data for several key reasons, including:
      • Big data architecture starts with the data itself, taking a bottom-up approach. Decisions about data influence decisions about components that use data.
      • Big data introduces new data sources such as social media content and streaming data.
      • The enterprise data warehouse (EDW) becomes a source for big data.
      • Master data management (MDM) is used as an index to content in big data about the people, places, and things the organization cares about.
      • The variety of big data and unstructured data requires a new type of persistence.
    • Many data architects have no experience with big data and feel overwhelmed by the number of options available to them (including vendor options, storage options, etc.). They often have little to no comfort with new big data management technologies.
    • If organizations do not architect for big data, there are a couple of main risks:
      • The existing data architecture is unable to handle big data, which will eventually result in a failure that could compromise the entire data environment.
      • Solutions will be selected in an ad hoc manner, which can cause incompatibility issues down the road.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Before beginning to make technology decisions regarding the big data architecture, make sure a strategy is in place to document architecture principles and guidelines, the organization’s big data business pattern, and high-level functional and quality of service requirements.
    • The big data business pattern can be used to determine what data sources should be used in your architecture, which will then dictate the data integration capabilities required. By documenting current technologies, and determining what technologies are required, you can uncover gaps to be addressed in an implementation plan.
    • Once you have identified and filled technology gaps, perform an architectural walkthrough to pull decisions and gaps together and provide a fuller picture. After the architectural walkthrough, fill in any uncovered gaps. A proof-of-technology project can be started as soon as you have evaluation copies (or OSS) products and at least one person who understands the technology.

    Impact and Result

    • Save time and energy trying to fix incompatibilities between technology and data.
    • Allow the Data Architect to respond to big data requests from the business more quickly.
    • Provide the organization with valuable insights through the analytics and visualization technologies that are integrated with the other building blocks.

    Create a Customized Big Data Architecture and Implementation Plan Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Recognize the importance of big data architecture

    Big data is centered on the volume, variety, velocity, veracity, and value of data. Achieve a data architecture that can support big data.

    • Storyboard: Create a Customized Big Data Architecture and Implementation Plan

    2. Define architectural principles and guidelines while taking into consideration maturity

    Understand the importance of a big data architecture strategy. Assess big data maturity to assist with creation of your architectural principles.

    • Big Data Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Big Data Architecture Principles & Guidelines Template

    3. Build the big data architecture

    Come to accurate big data architecture decisions.

    • Big Data Architecture Decision Making Tool

    4. Determine common services needs

    What are common services?

    5. Plan a big data architecture implementation

    Gain business satisfaction with big data requests. Determine what steps need to be taken to achieve your big data architecture.

    • Big Data Architecture Initiative Definition Tool
    • Big Data Architecture Initiative Planning Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Create a Customized Big Data Architecture and Implementation Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Recognize the Importance of Big Data Architecture

    The Purpose

    Set expectations for the workshop.

    Recognize the importance of doing big data architecture when dealing with big data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Big data defined.

    Understanding of why big data architecture is necessary.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the corporate strategy.

    1.2 Define big data and what it means to the organization.

    1.3 Understand why doing big data architecture is necessary.

    1.4 Examine Info-Tech’s Big Data Reference Architecture.

    Outputs

    Defined Corporate Strategy

    Defined Big Data

    Reference Architecture

    2 Design a Big Data Architecture Strategy

    The Purpose

    Identification of architectural principles and guidelines to assist with decisions.

    Identification of big data business pattern to choose required data sources.

    Definition of high-level functional and quality of service requirements to adhere architecture to.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key Architectural Principles and Guidelines defined.

    Big data business pattern determined.

    High-level requirements documented.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss how maturity will influence architectural principles.

    2.2 Determine which solution type is best suited to the organization.

    2.3 Define the business pattern driving big data.

    2.4 Define high-level requirements.

    Outputs

    Architectural Principles & Guidelines

    Big Data Business Pattern

    High-Level Functional and Quality of Service Requirements Exercise

    3 Build a Big Data Architecture

    The Purpose

    Establishment of existing and required data sources to uncover any gaps.

    Identification of necessary data integration requirements to uncover gaps.

    Determination of the best suited data persistence model to the organization’s needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined gaps for Data Sources

    Defined gaps for Data Integration capabilities

    Optimal Data Persistence technology determined

    Activities

    3.1 Establish required data sources.

    3.2 Determine data integration requirements.

    3.3 Learn which data persistence model is best suited.

    3.4 Discuss analytics requirements.

    Outputs

    Data Sources Exercise

    Data Integration Exercise

    Data Persistence Decision Making Tool

    4 Plan a Big Data Architecture Implementation

    The Purpose

    Identification of common service needs and how they differ for big data.

    Performance of an architectural walkthrough to test decisions made.

    Group gaps to form initiatives to develop an Initiative Roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common service needs identified.

    Architectural walkthrough completed.

    Initiative Roadmap completed.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify common service needs.

    4.2 Conduct an architectural walkthrough.

    4.3 Group gaps together into initiatives.

    4.4 Document initiatives on an initiative roadmap.

    Outputs

    Architectural Walkthrough

    Initiative Roadmap

    Leading Through Uncertainty Workshop Overview

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}474|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $123,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
    • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs

    As the world around us changes there is a higher risk that IT productivity and planned priorities will be derailed.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    To meet the challenges of uncertainty head on IT leaders must adapt so their employees are supported and IT departments continue to operate successfully.

    Impact and Result

    • Clearly define and articulate the current and future priorities to provide direction and cultivate hope for the future.
    • Recognize and manage your own reactions to be conscious of how you are showing up and the perceptions others may have.
    • Incorporate the 4Cs of Leading Through Uncertainty into your leadership practice to make sense of the situation and lead others through it.
    • Build tactics to connect with your employees that will ensure employee engagement and productivity.

    Leading Through Uncertainty Workshop Overview Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Workshop Overview

    Read our concise Workshop Overview to find out how this program can support IT leaders when managing teams through uncertain times.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Leading Through Uncertainty (LTU) Workshop Overview
    [infographic]

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}127|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $40,241 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Experiencing the pitfalls of poor data quality and failing to benefit from good data quality, including:
      • Unreliable data and unfavorable output.
      • Inefficiencies and costly remedies.
      • Dissatisfied stakeholders.
    • The chances of successful decision-making capabilities are hindered with poor data quality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Address the root causes of your data quality issues and form a viable data quality program.
      • Be familiar with your organization’s data environment and business landscape.
      • Prioritize business use cases for data quality fixes.
      • Fix data quality issues at the root cause to ensure proper foundation for your data to flow.
    • It is important to sustain best practices and grow your data quality program.

    Impact and Result

    • Implement a set of data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.
    • Develop a prioritized data quality improvement project roadmap and long-term improvement strategy.
    • Build related practices such as artificial intelligence and analytics with more confidence and less risk after achieving an appropriate level of data quality.

    Build Your Data Quality Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish a data quality program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your organization’s data environment and business landscape

    Learn about what causes data quality issues, how to measure data quality, what makes a good data quality practice in relation to your data and business environments.

    • Business Capability Map Template

    2. Analyze your priorities for data quality fixes

    Determine your business unit priorities to create data quality improvement projects.

    • Data Quality Problem Statement Template
    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    3. Establish your organization’s data quality program

    Revisit the root causes of data quality issues and identify the relevant root causes to the highest priority business unit, then determine a strategy for fixing those issues.

    • Data Lineage Diagram Template
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    4. Grow and sustain your data quality practices

    Identify strategies for continuously monitoring and improving data quality at the organization.

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Data Quality Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape

    The Purpose

    Evaluate the maturity of the existing data quality practice and activities.

    Assess how data quality is embedded into related data management practices.

    Envision a target state for the data quality practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the current data quality landscape

    Gaps, inefficiencies, and opportunities in the data quality practice are identified

    Target state for the data quality practice is defined

    Activities

    1.1 Explain approach and value proposition

    1.2 Detail business vision, objectives, and drivers

    1.3 Discuss data quality barriers, needs, and principles

    1.4 Assess current enterprise-wide data quality capabilities

    1.5 Identify data quality practice future state

    1.6 Analyze gaps in data quality practice

    Outputs

    Data Quality Management Primer

    Business Capability Map Template

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Data Quality Diagnostic

    Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    2 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 1

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives

    Activities

    2.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap

    2.2 Develop subject areas project scope

    2.3 By subject area 1 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Business Unit Prioritization Roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data Lineage Diagram

    3 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives

    Activities

    3.1 Understand how data quality management fits in with the organization’s data governance and data management programs

    3.2 By subject area 2 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Data Lineage Diagram

    Root Cause Analysis

    Impact Analysis

    4 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 3

    The Purpose

    Determine a strategy for fixing data quality issues for the highest priority business unit

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strategy defined for fixing data quality issues for highest priority business unit

    Activities

    4.1 Formulate strategies and actions to achieve data quality practice future state

    4.2 Formulate a data quality resolution plan for the defined subject area

    4.3 By subject area 3 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Data Quality Improvement Plan

    Data Lineage Diagram

    5 Create a Plan for Sustaining Data Quality

    The Purpose

    Plan for continuous improvement in data quality

    Incorporate data quality management into the organization’s existing data management and governance programs

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sustained and communicated data quality program

    Activities

    5.1 Formulate metrics for continuous tracking of data quality and monitoring the success of the data quality improvement initiative

    5.2 Workshop Debrief with Project Sponsor

    5.3 Meet with project sponsor/manager to discuss results and action items

    5.4 Wrap up outstanding items from the workshop, deliverables expectations, GIs

    Outputs

    Data Quality Practice Improvement Roadmap

    Data Quality Improvement Plan (for defined subject areas)

    Further reading

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Quality Data Drives Quality Business Decisions

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Get ahead of the data curve by conquering data quality challenges.

    Regardless of the driving business strategy or focus, organizations are turning to data to leverage key insights and help improve the organization’s ability to realize its vision, key goals, and objectives.

    Poor quality data, however, can negatively affect time-to-insight and can undermine an organization’s customer experience efforts, product or service innovation, operational efficiency, or risk and compliance management. If you are looking to draw insights from your data for decision making, the quality of those insights is only as good as the quality of the data feeding or fueling them.

    Improving data quality means having a data quality management practice that is sustainably successful and appropriate to the use of the data, while evolving to keep pace with or get ahead of changing business and data landscapes. It is not a matter of fixing one data set at a time, which is resource and time intensive, but instead identifying where data quality consistently goes off the rails, and creating a program to improve the data processes at the source.

    Crystal Singh

    Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization is experiencing the pitfalls of poor data quality, including:

    • Unreliable data and unfavorable output.
    • Inefficiencies and costly remedies.
    • Dissatisfied stakeholders.

    Poor data quality hinders successful decision making.

    Common Obstacles

    Not understanding the purpose and execution of data quality causes some disorientation with your data.

    • Failure to realize the importance/value of data quality.
    • Unsure of where to start with data quality.
    • Lack of investment in data quality.

    Organizations tend to adopt a project mentality when it comes to data quality instead of taking the strategic approach that would be all-around more beneficial in the long term.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Address the root causes of your data quality issues by forming a viable data quality program.

    • Be familiar with your organization’s data environment and business landscape.
    • Prioritize business use cases for data quality fixes.
    • Fixing data quality issues at the root cause to ensure a proper foundation for your data to flow.

    It is important to sustain best practices and grow your data quality program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Fix data quality issues as close as possible to the source of data while understanding that business use cases will each have different requirements and expectations from data quality.

    Data is the foundation of your organization’s knowledge

    Data enables your organization to make decisions.

    Reliable data is needed to facilitate data consumers at all levels of the enterprise.

    Insights, knowledge, and information are needed to inform operational, tactical, and strategic decision-making processes. Data and information are needed to manage the business and empower business processes such as billing, customer touchpoints, and fulfillment.

    Raw Data

    Business Information

    Actionable Insights

    Data should be at the foundation of your organization’s evolution. The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking can be uncovered with a data quality practice that makes high-quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

    98% of companies use data to improve customer experience. (Experian Data Quality, 2019)

    High-Level Data Architecture

    The image is a graphic, which at the top shows different stages of data, and in the lower part of the graphic shows the data processes.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    1. Data Quality & Data Culture Diagnostics Business Landscape Exercise
    2. Business Strategy & Use Cases
    3. Prioritize Use Cases With Poor Quality

    Info-Tech Insight

    As data is ingested, integrated, and maintained in the various streams of the organization's system and application architecture, there are multiple points where the quality of the data can degrade.

    1. Understand the organization's data culture and data quality environment across the business landscape.
    2. Prioritize business use cases with poor data quality.
    3. For each use case, identify data quality issues and requirements throughout the data pipeline.
    4. Fix data quality issues at the root cause.
    5. As data flow through quality assurance monitoring checkpoints, monitor data to ensure good quality output.

    Insight:

    Proper application of data quality dimensions throughout the data pipeline will result in superior business decisions.

    Data quality issues can occur at any stage of the data flow.

    The image shows the flow of data through various stages: Data Creation; Data Ingestion; Data Accumulation and Engineering; Data Delivery; and Reporting & Analytics. At the bottom, there are two bars: the left one labelled Fix data quality root causes here...; and the right reads: ...to prevent expensive cures here.

    The image is a legend that accompanies the data flow graphic. It indicates that a white and green square icon indicates Data quality dimensions; a red cube indicates a potential point of data quality degradation; the pink square indicates Root cause of poor data quality; and a green flag indicates Quality Assurance Monitoring.

    Prevent the domino effect of poor data quality

    Data is the foundation of decisions made at data-driven organizations.

    Therefore, if there are problems with the organization’s underlying data, this can have a domino effect on many downstream business functions.

    Let’s use an example to illustrate the domino effect of poor data quality.

    Organization X is looking to migrate their data to a single platform, System Y. After the migration, it has become apparent that reports generated from this platform are inconsistent and often seem wrong. What is the effect of this?

    1. Time must be spent on identifying the data quality issues, and often manual data quality fixes are employed. This will extend the time to deliver the project that depends on system Y by X months.
    2. To repair these issues, the business needs to contract two additional resources to complete the unforeseen work. The new resources cost $X each, as well as additional infrastructure and hardware costs.
    3. Now, the strategic objectives of the business are at risk and there is a feeling of mistrust in the new system Y.

    Three key challenges impacting the ability to deliver excellent customer experience

    30% Poor data quality

    30% Method of interaction changing

    30% Legacy systems or lack of new technology

    95% Of organizations indicated that poor data quality undermines business performance.

    (Source: Experian Data Quality, 2019)

    Maintaining quality data will support more informed decisions and strategic insight

    Improving your organization’s data quality will help the business realize the following benefits:

    Data-Driven Decision Making

    Business decisions should be made with a strong rationale. Data can provide insight into key business questions, such as, “How can I provide better customer satisfaction?”

    89% Of CIOs surveyed say lack of quality data is an obstacle to good decision making. (Larry Dignan, CIOs juggling digital transformation pace, bad data, cloud lock0in and business alignment, 2020)

    Customer Intimacy

    Improve marketing and the customer experience by using the right data from the system of record to analyze complete customer views of transactions, sentiments, and interactions.

    94% Percentage of senior IT leaders who say that poor data quality impinges business outcomes. (Clint Boulton, Disconnect between CIOs and LOB managers weakens data quality, 2016)

    Innovation Leadership

    Gain insights on your products, services, usage trends, industry directions, and competitor results to support decisions on innovations, new products, services, and pricing.

    20% Businesses lose as much as 20% of revenue due to poor data quality. (RingLead Data Management Solutions, 10 Stats About Data Quality I Bet You Didn’t Know)

    Operational Excellence

    Make sure the right solution is delivered rapidly and consistently to the right parties for the right price and cost structure. Automate processes by using the right data to drive process improvements.

    10-20% The implementation of data quality initiatives can lead to reductions in corporate budget of up to 20%. (HaloBI, 2015)

    However, maintaining data quality is difficult

    Avoid these pitfalls to get the true value out of your data.

    1. Data debt drags down ROI – a high degree of data debt will hinder you from attaining the ROI you’re expecting.
    2. Lack of trust means lack of usage – a lack of confidence in data results in a lack of data usage in your organization, which negatively effects strategic planning, KPIs, and business outcomes.
    3. Strategic assets become a liability – bad data puts your business at risk of failing compliance standards, which could result in you paying millions in fines.
    4. Increased costs and inefficiency – time spent fixing bad data means less workload capacity for your important initiatives and the inability to make data-based decisions.
    5. Barrier to adopting data-driven tech – emerging technologies, such as predictive analytics and artificial intelligence, rely on quality data. Inaccurate, incomplete, or irrelevant data will result in delays or a lack of ROI.
    6. Bad customer experience – Running your business on bad data can hinder your ability to deliver to your customers, growing their frustration, which negatively impacts your ability to maintain your customer base.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data quality suffers most at the point of entry. This is one of the causes of the domino effect of data quality – and can be one of the most costly forms of data quality errors due to the error propagation. In other words, fix data ingestion, whether through improving your application and database design or improving your data ingestion policy, and you will fix a large majority of data quality issues.

    Follow Our Data & Analytics Journey

    Data Quality is laced into Data Strategy, Data Management, and Data Governance.

    • Data Strategy
      • Data Management
        • Data Quality
        • Data Governance
          • Data Architecture
            • MDM
            • Data Integration
            • Enterprise Content Management
            • Information Lifecycle Management
              • Data Warehouse/Lake/Lakehouse
                • Reporting and Analytics
                • AI

    Data quality is rooted in data management

    Extract Maximum Benefit Out of Your Data Quality Management.

    • Data management is the planning, execution, and oversight of policies, practices, and projects that acquire, control, protect, deliver, and enhance the value of data and information assets (DAMA, 2009).
    • In other words, getting the right information, to the right people, at the right time.
    • Data quality management exists within each of the data practices, information dimensions, business resources, and subject areas that comprise the data management framework.
    • Within this framework, an effective data quality practice will replace ad hoc processes with standardized practices.
    • An effective data quality practice cannot succeed without proper alignment and collaboration across this framework.
    • Alignment ensures that the data quality practice is fit for purpose to the business.

    The DAMA DMBOK2 Data Management Framework

    • Data Governance
      • Data Quality
      • Data Architecture
      • Data Modeling & Design
      • Data Storage & Operations
      • Data Security
      • Data Integration & Interoperability
      • Documents & Content
      • Reference & Master Data
      • Data Warehousing & Business Intelligence
      • Meta-data

    (Source: DAMA International)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    • People often think that the main problems they need to fix first are related to data quality when the issues transpire at a much larger level. This blueprint is the key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    • Refer to this blueprint to understand data quality in the context of data disciplines and methods for improving your data management capabilities.

    Establish Data Governance

    • Define an effective data governance strategy and ensure the strategy integrates well with data quality with this blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Data Quality

    Phase Steps 1. Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape 2. Analyze Your Priorities for Data Quality Fixes 3. Establish Your Organization’s Data Quality Program 4. Grow and Sustain Your Data Quality Practice
    Phase Outcomes This step identifies the foundational understanding of your data and business landscape, the essential concepts around data quality, as well as the core capabilities and competencies that IT needs to effectively improve data quality. To begin addressing specific, business-driven data quality projects, you must identify and prioritize the data-driven business units. This will ensure that data improvement initiatives are aligned to business goals and priorities. After determining whose data is going to be fixed based on priority, determine the specific problems that they are facing with data quality, and implement an improvement plan to fix it. Now that you have put an improvement plan into action, make sure that the data quality issues don’t keep cropping up. Integrate data quality management with data governance practices into your organization and look to grow your organization’s overall data maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Data Quality is in the eyes of the beholder.”– Igor Ikonnikov, Research Director

    Data quality means tolerance, not perfection

    Data from Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Diagnostic, which represents over 400 business stakeholders, shows that data quality is very important when satisfaction with data quality is low.

    However, when data quality satisfaction hit a threshold, it became less important.

    The image is a line graph, with the X-axis labelled Satisfaction with Data Quality, and the Y axis labelled Rated Importance for Data Quality. The line begins high, and then descends. There is text inside the graph, which is transcribed below.

    Respondents were asked “How satisfied are you with the quality, reliability, and effectiveness of the data you use to manage your group?” as well as to rank how important data quality was to their organization.

    When the business satisfaction of data quality reached a threshold value of 71-80%, the rated importance reached its lowest value.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data needs to be good, but truly spectacular data may go unnoticed.

    Provide the right level of data quality, with the appropriate effort, for the correct usage. This blueprint will help you to determine what “the right level of data quality” means, as well as create a plan to achieve that goal for the business.

    Data Roles and Responsibilities

    Data quality occurs through three main layers across the data lifecycle

    Data Strategy

    Data Strategy should contain Data Quality as a standard component.

    ← Data Quality issues can occur throughout at any stage of the data flow →

    DQ Dimensions

    Timeliness – Representation – Usability – Consistency – Completeness – Uniqueness – Entry Quality – Validity – Confidence – Importance

    Source System Layer

    • Data Resource Manager/Collector: Enters data into a database and ensures that data collection sources are accurate

    Data Transformation Layer

    • ETL Developer: Designs data storage systems
    • Data Engineer: Oversees data integrations, data warehouses and data lakes, data pipelines
    • Database Administrator: Manages database systems, ensures they meet SLAs, performances, backups
    • Data Quality Engineer: Finds and cleanses bad data in data sources, creates processes to prevent data quality problems

    Consumption Layer

    • Data Scientist: Gathers and analyses data from databases and other sources, runs models, and creates data visualizations for users
    • BI Analyst: Evaluates and mines complex data and transforms it into insights that drive business value. Uses BI software and tools to analyze industry trends and create visualizations for business users
    • Data Analyst: Extracts data from business systems, analyzes it, and creates reports and dashboards for users
    • BI Engineer: Documents business needs on data analysis and reporting and develops BI systems, reports, and dashboards to support them
    Data Creation → [SLA] Data Ingestion [ QA] →Data Accumulation & Engineering → [SLA] Data Delivery [QA] →Reporting & Analytics
    Fix Data Quality root causes here… to prevent expensive cures here.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Primary Info-Tech Research

    Align source systems to maximize business output.

    A healthcare insurance agency faced data quality issues in which a key business use case was impacted negatively. Business rules were not well defined, and default values instead of real value caused a concern. When dealing with multiple addresses, data was coming from different source systems.

    The challenge was to identify the most accurate address, as some were incomplete, and some lacked currency and were not up to date. This especially challenged a key business unit, marketing, to derive business value in performing key activities by being unable to reach out to existing customers to advertise any additional products.

    For this initiative, this insurance agency took an economic approach by addressing those data quality issues using internal resources.

    Results

    Without having any MDM tools or having a master record or any specific technology relating to data quality, this insurance agency used in-house development to tackle those particular issues at the source system. Data quality capabilities such as data profiling were used to uncover those issues and address them.

    “Data quality is subjective; you have to be selective in terms of targeting the data that matters the most. When getting business tools right, most issues will be fixed and lead to achieving the most value.” – Asif Mumtaz, Data & Solution Architect

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    • Call #1: Learn about the concepts of data quality and the common root causes of poor data quality.
    • Call #2: Identify the core capabilities of IT for improving data quality on an enterprise scale.
    • Call #3: Determine which business units use data and require data quality remediation.
    • Call #4: Create a plan for addressing business unit data quality issues according to priority of the business units based on value and impact of data.
    • Call #5: Revisit the root causes of data quality issues and identify the relevant root causes to the highest priority business unit.
    • Call #6: Determine a strategy for fixing data quality issues for the highest priority business unit.
    • Call #7: Identify strategies for continuously monitoring and improving data quality at the organization.
    • Call #8: Learn how to incorporate data quality practices in the organization’s larger data management and data governance frameworks.
    • Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps on how to evolve your data landscape.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between eight to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 1 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 3 Create a Plan for Sustaining Data Quality
    Activities
    1. Explain approach and value proposition.
    2. Detail business vision, objectives, and drivers.
    3. Discuss data quality barriers, needs, and principles.
    4. Assess current enterprise-wide data quality capabilities.
    5. Identify data quality practice future state.
    6. Analyze gaps in data quality practice.
    1. Create business unit prioritization roadmap.
    2. Develop subject areas project scope.
    3. By subject area 1:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Understand how data quality management fits in with the organization’s data governance and data management programs.
    2. By subject area 2:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Formulate strategies and actions to achieve data quality practice future state.
    2. Formulate data quality resolution plan for defined subject area.
    3. By subject area 3:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Formulate metrics for continuous tracking of data quality and monitoring the success of the data quality improvement initiative.
    2. Workshop Debrief with Project Sponsor.
    • Meet with project sponsor/manager to discuss results and action items.
    • Wrap up outstanding items from the workshop, deliverables expectations, GIs.
    Deliverables
    1. Data Quality Management Primer
    2. Business Capability Map Template
    3. Data Culture Diagnostic
    4. Data Quality Diagnostic
    5. Data Quality Problem Statement Template
    1. Business Unit Prioritization Roadmap
    2. Subject area scope
    3. Data Lineage Diagram
    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    2. Root Cause Analysis
    3. Impact Analysis
    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    2. Data Quality Improvement Plan
    1. Data Quality Practice Improvement Roadmap
    2. Data Quality Improvement Plan (for defined subject areas)

    Phase 1

    Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Data quality is a methodology and must be treated as such

    A comprehensive data quality practice includes appropriate business requirements gathering, planning, governance, and oversight capabilities, as well as empowering technologies for properly trained staff, and ongoing development processes.

    Some common examples of appropriate data management methodologies for data quality are:

    • The data quality team has the necessary competencies and resources to perform the outlined workload.
    • There are processes that exist for continuously evaluating data quality performance capabilities.
    • Improvement strategies are designed to increase data quality performance capabilities.
    • Policies and procedures that govern data quality are well-documented, communicated, followed, and updated.
    • Change controls exist for revising policies and procedures, including communication of updates and changes.
    • Self-auditing techniques are used to ensure business-IT alignment when designing or recalibrating strategies.

    Effective data quality practices coordinate with other overarching data disciplines, related data practices, and strategic business objectives.

    “You don’t solve data quality with a Band-Aid; you solve it with a methodology.” – Diraj Goel, Growth Advisor, BC Tech

    Data quality can be defined by four key quality indicators

    Similar to measuring the acidity of a substance with a litmus test, the quality of your data can be measured using a simple indicator test. As you learn about common root causes of data quality problems in the following slides, think about these four quality indicators to assess the quality of your data:

    • Completeness – Closeness to the correct value. Encompasses accuracy, consistency, and comparability to other databases.
    • Usability – The degree to which data meets current user needs. To measure this, you must determine if the user is satisfied with the data they are using to complete their business functions.
    • Timeliness – Length of time between creation and availability of data.
    • Accessibility – How easily a user can access and understand the data (including data definitions and context). Interpretability can also be used to describe this indicator.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Quality is a relative term. Data quality is measured in terms of tolerance. Perfect data quality is both impossible and a waste of time and effort.

    How to get investment for your data quality program

    Follow these steps to convince leadership of the value of data quality:

    “You have to level with people, you cannot just start talking with the language of data and expect them to understand when the other language is money and numbers.” – Izabela Edmunds, Information Architect at Mott MacDonald

    1. Perform Phases 0 & 1 of this blueprint as this will offer value in carrying out the following steps.
    2. Build credibility. Show them your understanding of data and how it aligns to the business.
    3. Provide tangible evidence of how significant business use cases are impacted by poor quality data.
    4. Present the ROI of fixing the data quality issues you have prioritized.
    5. Explain how the data quality program will be established, implemented, and sustained.
    6. Prove the importance of fixing data quality issues at the source and how it is the most efficient, effective, and cost-friendly solution.

    Phase 1 deliverables

    Each of these deliverables serve as inputs to detect key outcomes about your organization and to help complete this blueprint:

    1. Data Culture Diagnostic

    Use this report to understand where your organization lies across areas relating to data culture.

    While the Quality & Trust area of the report might be most prevalent to this blueprint, this diagnostic may point out other areas demanding more attention.

    Please speak to your account manager for access

    2. Business Capability Map Template

    Perform this process to understand the capabilities that enable specific value streams. The output of this deliverable is a high-level view of your organization’s defined business capabilities.

    Download this tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding your data culture and business capabilities are foundational to starting the journey of data quality improvement.

    Key deliverable:

    3. Data Quality Diagnostic

    The Data Quality Report is designed to help you understand, assess, and improve key organizational data quality issues. This is where respondents across various areas in the organization can assess Data Quality across various dimensions.

    Download this tool

    Data Quality Diagnostic Value

    Prioritize business use cases with our data quality dimensions.

    • Complete this diagnostic for each major business use case. The output from the Data Culture Diagnostic and the Business Capability Map should help you understand which use cases to address.
    • Involve all key stakeholders involved in the business use case. There may be multiple business units involved in a single use case.
    • Prioritize the business use cases that need the most attention pertaining to data quality by comparing the scores of the Importance and Confidence data quality dimensions.

    If there are data elements that are considered of high importance and low confidence, then they must be prioritized.

    Sample Scorecard

    The image shows a screen capture of a scorecard, with sample information filled in.

    The image shows a screen capture of a scorecard, with sample information filled in.

    Poor data quality develops due to multiple root causes

    After you get to know the properties of good quality data, understand the underlying causes of why those indicators can point to poor data quality.

    If you notice that the usability, completeness, timeliness, or accessibility of the organization’s data is suffering, one or more of the following root causes are likely plaguing your data:

    Common root causes of poor data quality, through the lens of Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture:

    The image shows a graphic of Info-Tech's Five-Tier Data Architecture, with root causes of poor data quality identified. In the data creation and ingestion stages, the root causes are identified as Poor system/application design, Poor database design, Inadequate enterprise integration. The root causes identified in the latter stages are: Absence of data quality policies, procedures, and standards, and Incomplete/suboptimal business processes

    These root causes of poor data quality are difficult to avoid, not only because they are often generated at an organization’s beginning stages, but also because change can be difficult. This means that the root causes are often propagated through stale or outdated business processes.

    Data quality problems root cause #1:

    Poor system or application design

    Application design plays one of the largest roles in the quality of the organization’s data. The proper design of applications can prevent data quality issues that can snowball into larger issues downstream.

    Proper ingestion is 90% of the battle. An ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. This is true in many different topics, and data quality is one of them. Designing an application so that data gets entered properly, whether by internal staff or external customers, is the single most effective way to prevent data quality issues.

    Some common causes of data quality problems at the application/system level include:

    • Too many open fields (free-form text fields that accept a variety of inputs).
    • There are no lookup capabilities present. Reference data should be looked up instead of entered.
    • Mandatory fields are not defined, resulting in blank fields.
    • No validation of data entries before writing to the underlying database.
    • Manual data entry encourages human error. This can be compounded by poor application design that facilitates the incorrect data entry.

    Data quality problems root cause #2:

    Poor database design

    Database design also affects data quality. How a database is designed to handle incoming data, including the schema and key identification, can impact the integrity of the data used for reporting and analytics.

    The most common type of database is the relational database. Therefore, we will focus on this type of database.

    When working with and designing relational databases, there are some important concepts that must be considered.

    Referential integrity is a term that is important for the design of relational database schema, and indicates that table relationships must always be consistent.

    For table relationships to be consistent, primary keys (unique value for each row) must uniquely identify entities in columns of the table. Foreign keys (field that is defined in a second table but refers to the primary key in the first table) must agree with the primary key that is referenced by the foreign key. To maintain referential integrity, any updates must be propagated to the primary parent key.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Other types of databases, including databases with unstructured data, need data quality consideration. However, unstructured data may have different levels of quality tolerance.

    At the database level, some common root causes include:

    1. Lack of referential integrity.
    2. Lack of unique keys.
    3. Don’t have restricted data range.
    4. Incorrect datatype, string fields that can hold too many characters.
    5. Orphaned records.

    Databases and People:

    Even though database design is a technology issue, don’t forget about the people.

    A lack of training employees on database permissions for updating/entering data into the physical databases is a common problem for data quality.

    Data quality problems root cause #3:

    Improper integration and synchronization of enterprise data

    Data ingestion is another category of data-quality-issue root causes. When moving data in Tier 2, whether it is through ETL, ESB, point-to-point integration, etc., the integrity of the data during movement and/or transformation needs to be maintained.

    Tier 2 (the data ingestion layer) serves to move data for one of two main purposes:

    • To move data from originating systems to downstream systems to support integrated business processes.
    • To move data to Tier 3 where data rests for other purposes. This movement of data in its purest form means we move raw data to storage locations in an overall data warehouse environment reflecting any security, compliance and other standards in our choices for how to store. Also, it is where data is transformed for unique business purpose that will also be moved to a place of rest or a place of specific use. Data cleansing and matching and other data-related blending tasks occur at this layer.

    This ensures the data is pristine throughout the process and improves trustworthiness of outcomes and speed to task completion.

    At the integration layer, some common root causes of data quality problems include:

    1. No data mask. For example, zip code should have a mask of five numeric characters.
    2. Questionable aggregation, transformation process, or incorrect logic.
    3. Unsynchronized data refresh process in an integrated environment.
    4. Lack of a data matching tool.
    5. Lack of a data quality tool.
    6. Don’t have data profiling capability.
    7. Errors with data conversion or migration processes – when migrating, decommissioning, or converting systems – movement of data sets.
    8. Incorrect data mapping between data sources and targets.

    Data quality problems root cause #4:

    Insufficient and ineffective data quality policies and procedures

    Data policies and procedures are necessary for establishing standards around data and represent another category of data-quality-issue root causes. This issue spans across all five of the 5 Tier Architecture.

    Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organizations, depending on your specific data needs.

    • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
    • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organization’s data needs.
    • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

    Some common root causes of data quality issues related to policies and procedures include:

    1. Policies are absent or out of date.
    2. Employees are largely unaware of policies in effect.
    3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced.
    4. Policies are in multiple locations.
    5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist.
    6. Policies are managed inconsistently across different silos.
    7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors.
    8. Inadequate policy training program.
    9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum.
    10. Weak policy support from senior management.

    Data quality problems root cause #5:

    Inefficient or ineffective business processes

    Some common root causes of data quality issues related to business processes include:

    1. Multiple entries of the same record leads to duplicate records proliferating in the database.
    2. Many business definitions of data.
    3. Failure to document data manipulations when presenting data.
    4. Failure to train people on how to understand data.
    5. Manually intensive processes can result in duplication of effort (creates room for errors).
    6. No clear delineation of dependencies of business processes within or between departments, which leads to a siloed approach to business processes, rather than a coordinated and aligned approach.

    Business processes can impact data quality. How data is entered into systems, as well as employee training and knowledge about the correct data definitions, can impact the quality of your organization’s data.

    These problematic business process root causes can lead to:

    Duplicate records

    Incomplete data

    Improper use of data

    Wrong data entered into fields

    These data quality issues will result in costly and inefficient manual fixes, wasting valuable time and resources.

    Phase 1 Summary

    1. Data Quality Understanding

    • Understanding that data quality is a methodology and should be treated as such.
    • Data quality can be defined by four key indicators which are completeness, usability, timeliness, and accessibility.
    • Explained how to get investment for your data quality program and showcasing its value to leadership.

    2. Phase 0 Deliverables

    Introduced foundational tools to help you throughout this blueprint:

    • Complete the Data Culture Diagnostic and Business Capability Map Template as they are foundational in understanding your data culture and business capabilities to start the journey of data quality improvement.
    • Involve key relevant stakeholders when completing the Data Quality Diagnostic for each major business use case. Use the Importance and Confidence dimensions to help you prioritize which use case to address.

    3. Common Root Causes

    Addressed where multiple root causes can occur throughout the flow of your data.

    Analyzed the following common root causes of data quality:

    1. Poor system or application design
    2. Poor database design
    3. Improper integration and synchronization of enterprise data
    4. Insufficient and ineffective data quality policies and procedures
    5. Inefficient or ineffective business processes

    Phase 2

    Analyze Your Priorities for Data Quality Fixes

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Business Context & Data Quality

    Establish the business context of data quality improvement projects at the business unit level to find common goals.

    • To ensure the data improvement strategy is business driven, start your data quality project evaluation by understanding the business context. You will then determine which business units use data and create a roadmap for prioritizing business units for data quality repairs.
    • Your business context is represented by your corporate business vision, mission, goals and objectives, differentiators, and drivers. Collectively, they provide essential information on what is important to your organization, and some hints on how to achieve that. In this step, you will gather important information about your business view and interpret the business view to establish a data view.

    Business Vision

    Business Goals

    Business Drivers

    Business Differentiators

    Not every business unit uses data to the same extent

    A data flow diagram can provide value by allowing an organization to adopt a proactive approach to data quality. Save time by knowing where the entry points are and where to look for data flaws.

    Understanding where data lives can be challenging as it is often in motion and rarely resides in one place. There are multiple benefits that come from taking the time to create a data flow diagram.

    • Mapping out the flow of data can help provide clarity on where the data lives and how it moves through the enterprise systems.
    • Having a visual of where and when data moves helps to understand who is using data and how it is being manipulated at different points.
    • A data flow diagram will allow you to elicit how data is used in a different use case.

    Info-Tech’s Four-Column Model of Data will help you to identify the essential aspects of your data:

    Business Use Case →Used by→Business Unit →Housed in→Systems→Used for→Usage of the Data

    Not every business unit requires the same standard of data quality

    To prioritize your business units for data quality improvement projects, you must analyze the relative importance of the data they use to the business. The more important the data is to the business, the higher the priority is of fixing that data. There are two measures for determining the importance of data: business value and business impact.

    Business Value of Data

    Business value of data can be evaluated by thinking about its ties to revenue generation for the organization, as well as how it is used for productivity and operations at the organization.

    The business value of data is assessed by asking what would happen to the following parameters if the data is not usable (due to poor quality, for example):

    • Loss of Revenue
    • Loss of Productivity
    • Increased Operating Costs

    Business Impact of Data

    Business impact of data should take into account the effects of poor data on both internal and external parties.

    The business impact of data is assessed by asking what the impact would be of bad data on the following parameters:

    • Impact on Customers
    • Impact on Internal Staff
    • Impact on Business Partners

    Value + Impact = Data Priority Score

    Ensure that the project starts on the right foot by completing Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Before you can identify a solution, you must identify the problem with the business unit’s data.

    Download this tool

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template to identify the symptoms of poor data quality and articulate the problem.

    Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template will walk you through a step-by-step approach to identifying and describing the problems that the business unit feels regarding its data quality.

    Before articulating the problem, it helps to identify the symptoms of the problem. The following W’s will help you to describe the symptoms of the data quality issues:

    What

    Define the symptoms and feelings produced by poor data quality in the business unit.

    Where

    Define the location of the data that are causing data quality issues.

    When

    Define how severe the data quality issues are in frequency and duration.

    Who

    Define who is affected by the data quality problems and who works with the data.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Symptoms vs. Problems. Often, people will identify a list of symptoms of a problem and mistake those for the problem. Identifying the symptoms helps to define the problem, but symptoms do not help to identify the solution. The problem statement helps you to create solutions.

    Define the project problem to articulate the purpose

    1 hour

    Input

    • Symptoms of data quality issues in the business unit

    Output

    • Refined problem description

    Materials

    • Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Participants

    • Data Quality Improvement Project team
    • Business line representatives

    A defined problem helps you to create clear goals, as well as lead your thinking to determine solutions to the problem.

    A problem statement consists of one or two sentences that summarize a condition or issue that a quality improvement team is meant to address. For the improvement team to fix the problem, the problem statement therefore has to be specific and concise.

    Instructions

    1. Gather the Data Quality Improvement Project Team in a room and start with an issue that is believed to be related to data quality.
    2. Ask what are the attributes and symptoms of that reality today; do this with the people impacted by the issue. This should be an IT and business collaboration.
    3. Draw your conclusions of what it all means: what have you collectively learned?
    4. Consider the implications of your conclusions and other considerations that must be taken into account such as regulatory needs, compliance, policy, and targets.
    5. Develop solutions – Contain the problem to something that can be solved in a realistic timeframe, such as three months.

    Download the Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Case Study

    A strategic roadmap rooted in business requirements primes a data quality improvement plan for success.

    MathWorks

    Industry

    Software Development

    Source

    Primary Info-Tech Research

    As part of moving to a formalized data quality practice, MathWorks leveraged an incremental approach that took its time investigating business cases to support improvement actions. Establishing realistic goals for improvement in the form of a roadmap was a central component for gaining executive approval to push the project forward.

    Roadmap Creation

    In constructing a comprehensive roadmap that incorporated findings from business process and data analyses, MathWorks opted to document five-year and three-year overall goals, with one-year objectives that supported each goal. This approach ensured that the tactical actions taken were directed by long-term strategic objectives.

    Results – Business Alignment

    In presenting their roadmap for executive approval, MathWorks placed emphasis on communicating the progression and impact of their initiatives in terms that would engage business users. They focused on maintaining continual lines of communication with business stakeholders to demonstrate the value of the initiatives and also to gradually shift the corporate culture to one that is invested in an effective data quality practice.

    “Don’t jump at the first opportunity, because you may be putting out a fire with a cup of water where a fire truck is needed.” – Executive Advisor, IT Research and Advisory Firm

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to create your strategy for improving data quality

    Assess IT’s capabilities and competencies around data quality and plan to build these as the organization’s data quality practice develops. Before you can fix data quality, make sure you have the necessary skills and abilities to fix data quality correctly.

    The following IT capabilities are developed on an ongoing basis and are necessary for standardizing and structuring a data quality practice:

    • Meeting Business Needs
    • Services and Projects
    • Policies, Procedures, and Standards
    • Roles and Organizational Structure
    • Oversight and Communication
    • Data Quality of Different Data Types

    Download this Tool

    Data Handling and Remediation Competencies:

    • Data Standardization: Formatting values into consistent standards based on industry standards and business rules.
    • Data Cleansing: Modification of values to meet domain restrictions, integrity constraints, or other business rules for sufficient data quality for the organization.
    • Data Matching: Identification, linking, and merging related entries in or across sets of data.
    • Data Validation: Checking for correctness of the data.

    After these capabilities and competencies are assessed for a current and desired target state, the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool will suggest improvement actions that should be followed in order to build your data quality practice. In addition, a roadmap will be generated after target dates are set to create your data quality practice development strategy.

    Benchmark current and identify target capabilities for your data quality practice

    1 hour

    Input

    • Current and desired data quality practices in the organization

    Output

    • Assessment of where the gaps lie in your data quality practice

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality Project Lead
    • Business Line Representatives
    • Business Architects

    Use the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to evaluate the baseline and target capabilities of your practice in terms of how data quality is approached and executed.

    Download this Tool

    Instructions

    1. Invite the appropriate stakeholders to participate in this exercise. Examples:
      1. Business executives will have input in Tab 2
      2. Unique stakeholders: communications expert or executive advisors may have input
    2. On Tab 2: Practice Components, assess the current and target states of each capability on a scale of 1–5. Note: “Ad hoc” implies a capability is completed, but randomly, informally, and without a standardized method.

    These results will set the baseline against which you will monitor performance progress and keep track of improvements over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on early alignment. Assessing capabilities within specific people’s job functions can naturally result in disagreement or debate, especially between business and IT people. Remind everyone that data quality should ultimately serve business needs wherever possible.

    Visualization improves the holistic understanding of where gaps exist in your data quality practice

    To enable deeper analysis on the results of your practice assessment, Tab 3: Data Quality Practice Scorecard in the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool creates visualizations of the gaps identified in each of your practice capabilities and related data management practices. These diagrams serve as analysis summaries.

    Gap assessment of “Meeting Business Needs” capabilities

    The image shows a screen capture of the Gap assessment of 
“Meeting Business Needs” capabilities, with sample information filled in.

    Visualization of gap assessment of data quality practice capabilities

    The image shows a bar graph titled Data Quality Capabilities.

    1. Enhance your gap analyses by forming a relative comparison of total gaps in key practice capability areas, which will help in determining priorities.
    • Example: In Tab 2 compare your capabilities within “Policies, Procedures, and Standards.” Then in Tab 3, compare your overall capabilities in “Policies, Procedures, and Standards” versus “Empowering Technologies.”
  • Put these up on display to improve discussion in the gap analyses and prioritization sessions.
  • Improve the clarity and flow of your strategy template, final presentations, and summary documents by copying and pasting the gap assessment diagrams.
  • Before engaging in the data quality improvement project plan, receive signoff from IT regarding feasibility

    The final piece of the puzzle is to gain sign-off from IT.

    Hofstadter's law: It always takes longer than you expect, even when you take into account Hofstadter’s Law.

    This means that before engaging IT in data quality projects to fix the business units’ data in Phase 2, IT must assess feasibility of the data quality improvement plan. A feasibility analysis is typically used to review the strengths and weaknesses of the projects, as well as the availability of required skills and technologies needed to complete them. Use the following workflow to guide you in performing a feasibility analysis:

    Project evaluation process:

    Present capabilities

    • Operational Capabilities
    • System Capabilities
    • Schedule Capabilities
      • Summary of Evaluation Results
        • Recommendations/ modifications to the project plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    While the PMO identifies and coordinates projects, IT must determine how long and for how much.

    Conduct gap analysis sessions to review and prioritize the capability gaps

    1 hour

    Input

    • Current and Target State Assessment

    Output

    • Documented initiatives to help you get to the target state

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality team
    • IT representatives

    Instructions

    • Analyze Gap Analysis Results – As a group, discuss the high-level results on Tab 3: Data Quality Practice Score. Discuss the implications of the gaps identified.
    • Do a line-item review of the gaps between current and target levels for each assessed capability by using Tab 2: Practice Components.
    • Brainstorm Alignment Strategies – Brainstorm the effort and activities that will be necessary to support the practice in building its capabilities to the desired target level. Ask the following questions:
      • What activities must occur to enable this capability?
      • What changes/additions to resources, process, technology, business involvement, and communication must occur?
    • Document Data Quality Initiatives – Turn activities into initiatives by documenting them in Tab 4. Data Quality Practice Roadmap. Review the initiatives and estimate the start and end dates of each one.
    • Continue to evaluate the assessment results in order to create a comprehensive set of data quality initiatives that support your practice in building capabilities.

    Download this Tool

    Create the organization’s data quality improvement strategy roadmap

    1 hour

    Input

    • Data quality practice gaps and improvement actions

    Output

    • Data quality practice improvement roadmap

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality Project Lead
    • Business Executives
    • IT Executives
    • Business Architects

    Generating Your Roadmap

    1. Plan the sequence, starting time, and length of each initiative in the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.
    2. The tool will generate a Gantt chart based on the start and length of your initiatives.
    3. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 4: Data Quality Practice Roadmap, and can be used to organize and ensure that all of the essential aspects of data quality are addressed.

    Use the Practice Roadmap to plan and improve data quality capabilities

    Download this Tool

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    To help get you started, Info-Tech has provided an extensive list of data quality improvement initiatives that are commonly undertaken by organizations looking to improve their data quality.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    2 hours

    Create practice-level metrics to monitor your data quality practice.

    Instructions:

    1. Establish metrics for both the business and IT that will be used to determine if the data quality practice development is effective.
    2. Set targets for each metric.
    3. Collect current data to calculate the metrics and establish a baseline.
    4. Assign an owner for tracking each metric to be accountable for performance.
    Metric Current Goal
    Usage (% of trained users using the data warehouse)
    Performance (response time)
    Performance (response time)
    Resource utilization (memory usage, number of machine cycles)
    User satisfaction (quarterly user surveys)
    Data quality (% values outside valid values, % fields missing, wrong data type, data outside acceptable range, data that violates business rules. Some aspects of data quality can be automatically tracked and reported)
    Costs (initial installation and ongoing, Total Cost of Ownership including servers, software licenses, support staff)
    Security (security violations detected, where violations are coming from, breaches)
    Patterns that are used
    Reduction in time to market for the data
    Completeness of data that is available
    How many "standard" data models are being used
    What is the extra business value from the data governance program?
    How much time is spent for data prep by BI & analytics team?

    Phase 2 summary

    As you improve your data quality practice and move from reactive to stable, don’t rest and assume that you can let data quality keep going by itself. Rapidly changing consumer requirements or other pains will catch up to your organization and you will fall behind again. By moving to the proactive and predictive end of the maturity scale, you can stay ahead of the curve. By following the methodology laid out in Phase 1, the data quality practices at your organization will improve over time, leading to the following results:

    Chaotic

    Before Data Quality Practice Improvements

    • No standards to data quality

    Reactive

    Year 1

    • Processes defined
    • Data cleansing approach to data quality

    Stable

    Year 2

    • Business rules/ stewardship in place
    • Education and training

    Proactive

    Year 3

    • Data quality practices fully in place and embedded in the culture
    • Trusted and intelligent enterprise

    (Global Data Excellence, Data Excellence Maturity Model)

    Phase 3

    Establish Your Organization’s Data Quality Program

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Create a data lineage diagram to map the data journey and identify the data subject areas to be targeted for fixes

    It is important to understand the various data that exist in the business unit, as well as which data are essential to business function and require the highest degree of quality efforts.

    Visualize your databases and the flow of data. A data lineage diagram can help you and the Data Quality Improvement Team visualize where data issues lie. Keeping the five-tier architecture in mind, build your data lineage diagram.

    Reminder: Five-Tier Architecture

    The image shows the Five-Tier Architecture graphic.

    Use the following icons to represent your various data systems and databases.

    The image shows four icons. They are: the image of a square and a computer monitor, labelled Application; the image of two sheets of paper, labelled Desktop documents; the image of a green circle next to a computer monitor, labelled Web Application; and a blue cylinder labelled Database.

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Lineage Diagram to document the data sources and applications used by the business unit

    2 hours

    Input

    • Data sources and applications used by the business unit

    Output

    • Data lineage diagram

    Materials

    • Data Lineage Diagram Template

    Participants

    • Business Unit Head/Data Owner
    • Business Unit SMEs
    • Data Analysts/Architects

    Map the flow and location of data within a business unit by creating a system context diagram.

    Gain an accurate view of data locations and uses: Engage business users and representatives with a wide breadth of knowledge-related business processes and the use of data by related business operations.

    1. Sit down with key business representatives of the business unit.
    2. Document the sources of data and processes in which they’re involved, and get IT confirmation that the sources of the data are correct.
    3. Map out the sources and processes in a system context diagram.

    Download this Tool

    Sample Data Lineage Diagram

    The image shows a sample data lineage diagram, split into External Applications and Internal Applications, and showing the processes involved in each.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to document business context

    1 hour

    Input

    • Business vision, goals, and drivers

    Output

    • Business context for the data quality improvement project

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality project lead
    • Business line representatives
    • IT executives

    Develop goals and align them with specific objectives to set the framework for your data quality initiatives.

    In the context of achieving business vision, mission, goals, and objectives and sustaining differentiators and key drivers, think about where and how data quality is a barrier. Then brainstorm data quality improvement objectives that map to these barriers. Document your list of objectives in Tab 5. Prioritize business units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.

    Establishing Business Context Example

    Healthcare Industry

    Vision To improve member services and make service provider experience more effective through improving data quality and data collection, aggregation, and accessibility for all the members.
    Goals

    Establish meaningful metrics that guide to the improvement of healthcare for member effectiveness of health care providers:

    • Data collection
    • Data harmonization
    • Data accessibility and trust by all constituents.
    Differentiator Connect service consumers with service providers, that comply with established regulations by delivering data that is accurate, trusted, timely, and easy to understand to connect service providers and eliminate bureaucracy and save money and time.
    Key Driver Seamlessly provide a healthcare for members.

    Download this Tool

    Document the identified business units and their associated data

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Business units

    Output

    • Documented business units to begin prioritization

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager

    Instructions

    1. Using Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool, document the business units that use data in the organization. This will likely be all business units in the organization.
    2. Next, document the primary data used by those business units.
    3. These inputs will then be used to assess business unit priority to generate a data quality improvement project roadmap.

    The image shows a screen capture of Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units, with sample information inputted.

    Reminder – Not every business unit requires the same standard of data quality

    To prioritize your business units for data quality improvement projects, you must analyze the relative importance of the data they use to the business. The more important the data is to the business, the higher the priority is of fixing that data. There are two measures for determining the importance of data: business value and business impact.

    Business Value of Data

    Business value of data can be evaluated by thinking about its ties to revenue generation for the organization, as well as how it is used for productivity and operations at the organization.

    The business value of data is assessed by asking what would happen to the following parameters if the data is not usable (due to poor quality, for example):

    • Loss of Revenue
    • Loss of Productivity
    • Increased Operating Costs

    Business Impact of Data

    Business impact of data should take into account the effects of poor data on both internal and external parties.

    The business impact of data is assessed by asking what the impact would be of bad data on the following parameters:

    • Impact on Customers
    • Impact on Internal Staff
    • Impact on Business Partners

    Value + Impact = Data Priority Score

    Assess the business unit priority order for data quality improvements

    2 hours

    Input

    • Assessment of value and impact of business unit data

    Output

    • Prioritization list for data quality improvement projects

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Data owners

    Instructions

    Instructions In Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool, assess business value and business impact of the data within each documented business unit.

    Use the ratings High, Medium, and Low to measure the financial, productivity, and efficiency value and impact of each business unit’s data.

    In addition to these ratings, assess the number of help desk tickets that are submitted to IT regarding data quality issues. This parameter is an indicator that the business unit’s data is high priority for data quality fixes.

    Download this Tool

    Create a business unit order roadmap for your data quality improvement projects

    1 hour

    Input

    • Rating of importance of data for each business unit

    Output

    • Roadmap for data quality improvement projects

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Product Manager
    • Business line representatives

    Instructions

    After assessing the business units for the business value and business impact of their data, the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool automatically assesses the prioritization of the business units based on your ratings. These prioritizations are then summarized in a roadmap on Tab 6: Data Quality Project Roadmap. The following is an example of a project roadmap:

    The image shows an example of a project roadmap, with three business units listed vertically along the left hand side, and a Gantt chart showing the time periods in which each Business Unit would work. At the bottom, a table shows the Length of the Project in days (100), and the start date for the first project.

    On Tab 6, insert the timeline for your data quality improvement projects, as well as the starting date of your first data quality project. The roadmap will automatically update with the chosen timing and dates.

    Download this Tool

    Identify metrics at the business unit level to track data quality improvements

    As you improve the data quality for specific business units, measuring the benefits of data quality improvements will help you demonstrate the value of the projects to the business.

    Use the following table to guide you in creating business-aligned metrics:

    Business Unit Driver Metrics Goal
    Sales Customer Intimacy Accuracy of customer data. Percent of missing or incomplete records. 10% decrease in customer record errors.

    Marketing

    Customer Intimacy Accuracy of customer data. Percent of missing or incomplete records. 10% decrease in customer record errors.
    Finance Operational Excellence Relevance of financial reports. Decrease in report inaccuracy complaints.
    HR Risk Management Accuracy of employee data. 10% decrease in employee record errors.
    Shipping Operational Excellence Timeliness of invoice data. 10% decrease in time to report.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Relating data governance success metrics to overall business benefits keeps executive management and executive sponsors engaged because they are seeing actionable results. Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

    Case Study

    Address data quality with the right approach to maximize the ROI

    EDC

    Industry: Government

    Source: Environment Development of Canada (EDC)

    Challenge

    Environment Development Canada (EDC) would initially identify data elements that are important to the business purely based on their business instinct.

    Leadership attempted to tackle the enterprise’s data issues by bringing a set of different tools into the organization.

    It didn’t work out because the fundamental foundational layer, which is the data and infrastructure, was not right – they didn't have the foundational capabilities to enable those tools.

    Solution

    Leadership listened to the need for one single team to be responsible for the data persistence.

    Therefore, the data platform team was granted that mandate to extensively execute the data quality program across the enterprise.

    A data quality team was formed under the Data & Analytics COE. They had the mandate to profile the data and to understand what quality of data needed to be achieved. They worked constantly with the business to build the data quality rules.

    Results

    EDC tackled the source of their data quality issues through initially performing a data quality management assessment with business stakeholders.

    From then on, EDC was able to establish their data quality program and carry out other key initiatives that prove the ROI on data quality.

    Begin your data quality improvement project starting with the highest priority business unit

    Now that you have a prioritized list for your data quality improvement projects, identify the highest priority business unit. This is the business unit you will work through Phase 3 with to fix their data quality issues.

    Once you have initiated and identified solutions for the first business unit, tackle data quality for the next business unit in the prioritized list.

    The image is a graphic labelled as Phase 2. On the left, there is a vertical arrow pointing upward labelled Priority of Business Units. Next to it, there are three boxes, with downward pointing arrows between them, each box labelled as each Business Unit's Data Quality Improvement Project. From there an arrow points right to a circle. Inside the circle are the steps necessary to complete the data quality improvement project.

    Create and document your data quality improvement team

    1 hour

    Input

    • Individuals who fit the data quality improvement plan team roles

    Output

    • Project team

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data owner
    • Project Manager
    • Product Manager

    The Data Quality Improvement Plan is a concise document that should be created for each data quality project (i.e. for each business unit) to keep track of the project.

    Instructions

    1. Meet with the data owner of the business unit identified for the data quality improvement project.
    2. Identify individuals who fit the data quality improvement plan team roles.
    3. Using the Data Quality Improvement Plan Template to document the roles and individuals who will fit those roles.
    4. Have an introductory meeting with the Improvement team to clarify roles and responsibilities for the project.

    Download this Tool

    Team role Assigned to
    Data Owner [Name]
    Project Manager [Name]
    Business Analyst/BRM [Name]
    Data Steward [Name]
    Data Analyst [Name]

    Document the business context of the Data Quality Improvement Plan

    1 hour

    Input

    • Project team
    • Identified data attributes

    Output

    • Business context for the data quality improvement plan

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data owner
    • Project Sponsor
    • Product owner

    Data quality initiatives have to be relevant to the business, and the business context will be used to provide inputs to the data improvement strategy. The context can then be used to determine exactly where the root causes of data quality issues are, which will inform your solutions.

    Instructions

    The business context of the data quality improvement plan includes documenting from previous activities:

    1. The Data Quality Improvement Team.
    2. Your Data Lineage Diagram.
    3. Your Data Quality Problem Statement.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    While many organizations adopt data quality principles, not all organizations express them along the same terms. Have multiple perspectives within your organization outline principles that fit your unique data quality agenda. Anyone interested in resolving the day-to-day data quality issues that they face can be helpful for creating the context around the project.

    Download this tool

    Now that you have a defined problem, revisit the root causes of poor data quality

    You previously fleshed out the problem with data quality present in the business unit chosen as highest priority. Now it is time to figure out what is causing those problems.

    In the table below, you will find some of the common categories of causes of data quality issues, as well as some specific root causes.

    Category Description
    1. System/Application Design Ineffective, insufficient, or even incorrect system/application design accepts incorrect and missing data elements to the source applications and databases. The data records in those source systems may propagate into systems in tiers 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the 5-tier architecture, creating domino and ripple effects.
    2. Database design Database is created and modeled in an incorrect manner so that the management of the data records is incorrect, resulting in duplicated and orphaned records, and records that are missing data elements or records that contain incorrect data elements. Poor operational data in databases often leads to issues in tiers 2, 3, 4, and 5.
    3. Enterprise Integration Data or information is improperly integrated, transformed, masked, and aggregated in tier 2. In addition, some data integration tasks might not be timely, resulting in out-of-date data or even data that contradicts with other data. Enterprise integration is a precursor of loading a data warehouse and data marts. Issues in this layer affect tier 3, 4 and 5 on the 5-tier architecture.
    4. Policies and Procedures Policies and procedures are not effectively used to reinforce data quality. In some situations, policy gaps are found. In others, policies are overlapped and duplicated. Policies may also be out-of-date or too complex, affecting the users’ ability to interpret the policy objectives. Policies affect all tiers in the 5-tier architecture.
    5. Business Processes Improper business process design introduces poor data into the data systems. Failure to create processes around approving data changes, failure to document key data elements, and failure to train employees on the proper uses of data make data quality a burning problem.

    Leverage a root cause analysis approach to pinpoint the origins of your data issues

    A root cause analysis is a systematic approach to decompose a problem into its components. Use fishbone diagrams to help reveal the root causes of data issues.

    The image shows a fishbone diagram on the left, which starts with Process on the left, and then leads to Application and Integration, and then Database and Policies. This section is titled Root causes. The right hand section is titled Lead to problems with data... and includes 4 circles with the word or in between each. The circles are labelled: Completeness; Usability; Timeliness; Accessibility.

    Info-Tech recommends five root cause categories for assessing data quality issues:

    Application Design. Is the issue caused by human error at the application level? Consider internal employees, external partners/suppliers, and customers.

    Database Design. Is the issue caused by a particular database and stems from inadequacies in its design?

    Integration. Data integration tools may not be fully leveraged, or data matching rules may be poorly designed.

    Policies and Procedures. Do the issues take place because of lack of governance?

    Business Processes. Do the issues take place due to insufficient processes?

    For Example:

    When performing a deeper analysis of your data issues related to the accuracy of the business unit’s data, you would perform a root cause analysis by assessing the contribution of each of the five categories of data quality problem root causes:

    The image shows another fishbone diagram, with example information filled in. The first section on the left is titled Application Design, and includes the text: Data entry problems lead to incorrect accounting entries. The second is Integration, and includes the text: Data integration tools are not fully leveraged. The third section is Policies, and includes the text: No policy on standardizing name and address. The last section is Database design, with text that reads: Databases do not contain unique keys. The diagram ends with an arrow pointing right to a blue circle with Accuracy in it.

    Leverage a combination of data analysis techniques to identify and quantify root causes

    Info-Tech Insight

    Including all attributes of the key subject area in your data profiling activities may produce too much information to make sense of. Conduct data profiling primarily at the table level and undergo attribute profiling only if you are able to narrow down your scope sufficiently.

    Data Profiling Tool

    Data profiling extracts a sample of the target data set and runs it through multiple levels of analysis. The end result is a detailed report of statistics about a variety of data quality criteria (duplicate data, incomplete data, stale data, etc.).

    Many data profiling tools have built-in templates and reports to help you uncover data issues. In addition, they quantify the occurrences of the data issues.

    E-Discovery Tool

    This supplements a profiling tool. For Example, use a BI tool to create a custom grouping of all the invalid states (e.g. “CAL,” “AZN,” etc.) and visualize the percentage of invalid states compared to all states.

    SQL Queries

    This supplements a profiling tool. For example, use a SQL statement to group the customer data by customer segment and then by state to identify which segment–state combinations contain poor data.

    Identify the data issues for the particular business unit under consideration

    2 hours

    Input

    • Issues with data quality felt by the business unit
    • Data lineage diagram

    Output

    • Categorized data quality issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, markers, sticky notes
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data quality improvement project team
    • Business line representatives

    Instructions

    1. Gather the data quality improvement project team in a room, along with sticky notes and a whiteboard.
    2. Display your previously created data lineage diagram on the whiteboard.
    3. Using color-coded sticky notes, attach issues to each component of the data lineage diagram that team members can identify. Use different colors for the four quality attributes: Completeness, Usability, Timeliness, and Accessibility.

    Example:

    The image shows the data lineage diagram that has been shown in previous sections. In addition, the image shows 4 post-its arranges around the diagram, labelled: Usability; Completeness; Timeliness; and Accessibility.

    Map the data issues on fishbone diagrams to identify root causes

    1 hour

    Input

    • Categorized data quality issues

    Output

    • Completed fishbone diagrams

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, markers, sticky notes
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data quality improvement project team

    Now that you have data quality issues classified according to the data quality attributes, map these issues onto four fishbone diagrams.

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, which is titled Example: Root cause analysis diagram for data accuracy.

    Download this Tool

    Get to know the root causes behind system/application design mistakes

    Suboptimal system/application design provides entry points for bad data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Insufficient data mask No data mask is defined for a free-form text field in a user interface. E.g. North American phone number should have 4 masks – country code (1-digit), area code (3-digit), and local number (7-digit). X X
    Too many free-form text fields Incorrect use of free-form text fields (fields that accept a variety of inputs). E.g. Use a free-form text field for zip code instead of a backend look up. X X
    Lack of value lookup Reference data is not looked up from a reference list. E.g. State abbreviation is entered instead of being looked up from a standard list of states. X X
    Lack of mandatory field definitions Mandatory fields are not identified and reinforced. Resulting data records with many missing data elements. E.g. Some users may fill up 2 or 3 fields in a UI that has 20 non-mandatory fields. X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Application Design section is highlighted.

    Get to know the root causes behind common database design mistakes

    Improper database design allows incorrect data to be stored and propagated.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Incorrect referential integrity Referential integrity constraints are absent or incorrectly implemented, resulting in child records without parent records, or related records are updated or deleted in a cascading manner. E.g. An invoice line item is created before an invoice is created. X X
    Lack of unique keys Lack of unique keys creating scenarios where record uniqueness cannot be guaranteed. E.g. Customer records with the same customer_ID. X X
    Data range Fail to define a data range for incoming data, resulting in data values that are out of range. E.g. The age field is able to store an age of 999. X X
    Incorrect data type Incorrect data types are used to store data fields. E.g. A string field is used to store zip codes. Some users use that to store phone numbers, birthdays, etc. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Database Design section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind enterprise integration mistakes

    Improper data integration or synchronization may create poor analytical data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Incorrect transformation Transformation is done incorrectly. A wrong formula may have been used, transformation is done at the wrong data granularity, or aggregation logic is incorrect. E.g. Aggregation is done for all customers instead of just active customers. X X
    Data refresh is out of sync Data is synchronized at different intervals, resulting in a data warehouse where data domains are out of sync. E.g. Customer transactions are refreshed to reflect the latest activities but the account balance is not yet refreshed. X X
    Data is matched incorrectly Fail to match records from disparate systems, resulting in duplications and unmatched records. E.g. Unable to match customers from different systems because they have different cust_ID. X X
    Incorrect data mapping Fields from source systems are not properly matched with data warehouse fields. E.g. Status fields from different systems are mixed into one field. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Integration section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind policy and procedure mistakes

    Suboptimal policies and procedures undermine the effect of best practices.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Policy Gaps There are gaps in the policy landscape in terms of some missing key policies or policies that are not refreshed to reflect the latest changes. E.g. A data entry policy is absent, leading to inconsistent data entry practices. X X
    Policy Communications Policies are in place but the policies are not communicated effectively to the organization, resulting in misinterpretation of policies and under-enforcement of policies. E.g. The data standard is created but very few developers are aware of its existence. X X
    Policy Enforcement Policies are in place but not proactively re-enforced and that leads to inconsistent application of policies and policy adoption. E.g. Policy adoption is dropping over time due to lack of reinforcement. X X
    Policy Quality Policies are written by untrained authors and they do not communicate the messages. E.g. A non-technical data user may find a policy that is loaded with technical terms confusing. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Policies section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind common business process mistakes

    Ineffective and inefficient business processes create entry points for poor data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Lack of training Key data personnel and business analysts are not trained in data quality and data governance, leading to lack of accountability. E.g. A data steward is not aware of downstream impact of a duplicated financial statement. X X
    Ineffective business process The same piece of information is entered into data systems two or more times. Or a piece of data is stalled in a data system for too long. E.g. A paper form is scanned multiple times to extract data into different data systems. X X
    Lack of documentation Fail to document the work flows of the key business processes. A lack of work flow results in sub-optimal use of data. E.g. Data is modeled incorrectly due to undocumented business logic. X X
    Lack of integration between business silos Business silos hold on to their own datasets resulting in data silos in which data is not shared and/or data is transferred with errors. E.g. Data from a unit is extracted as a data file and stored in a shared drive with little access. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Processes section is highlighted

    Phase 3 Summary

    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    • Creating the data lineage diagram is recommended to help visualize the flow of your data and to map the data journey and identify the data subject areas to be targeted for fixes.
    • The data lineage diagram was leveraged multiple times throughout this Phase. For example, the data lineage diagram was used to document the data sources and applications used by the business unit
  • Business Context
    • Business context was documented through the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.
    • The same tool was used to document identified business units and their associated data.
    • Metrics were also identified at the business unit level to track data quality improvements.
  • Common Root Causes
    • Leverage a root cause analysis approach to pinpoint the origins of your data quality issues.
    • Analyzed and got to know the root causes behind the following:
      1. System/application design mistakes
      2. Common database design mistakes
      3. Enterprise integration mistakes
      4. Policies and procedures mistakes
      5. Common business processes mistakes
  • Phase 4

    Grow and Sustain Your Data Quality Program

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    For the identified root causes, determine the solutions for the problem

    As you worked through the previous step, you identified the root causes of your data quality problems within the business unit. Now, it is time to identify solutions.

    The following slides provide an overview of the solutions to common data quality issues. As you identify solutions that apply to the business unit being addressed, insert the solution tables in Section 4: Proposed Solutions of the Data Quality Improvement Plan Template.

    All data quality solutions have two components to them:

    • Technology
    • People

    For the next five data quality solution slides, look for the slider for the contributions of each category to the solution. Use this scale to guide you in creating solutions.

    When designing solutions, keep in mind that solutions to data quality problems are not mutually exclusive. In other words, an identified root cause may have multiple solutions that apply to it.

    For example, if an application is plagued with inaccurate data, the application design may be suboptimal, but also the process that leads to data being entered may need fixing.

    Data quality improvement strategy #1:

    Fix data quality issues by improving system/application design.

    Technology

    Application Interface Design

    Restrict field length – Capture only the characters you need for your application.

    Leverage data masks – Use data masks in standardized fields like zip code and phone number.

    Restrict the use of open text fields and use reference tables – Only present open text fields when there is a need. Use reference tables to limit data values.

    Provide options – Use radio buttons, drop-down lists, and multi-select instead of using open text fields.

    Data Validation at the Application Level

    Validate data before committing – Use simple validation to ensure the data entered is not random numbers and letters.

    Track history – Keep track of who entered what fields.

    Cannot submit twice – Only design for one-time submission.

    People

    Training

    Data-entry training – Training that is related to data entry, creating, or updating data records.

    Data resolution training – Training data stewards or other dedicated data personnel on how to resolve data records that are not entered properly.

    Continuous Improvement

    Standards – Develop application design principles and standards.

    Field testing – Field data entry with a few people to look for abnormalities and discrepancies.

    Detection and resolution – Abnormal data records should be isolated and resolved ASAP.

    Application Testing

    Thorough testing – Application design is your first line of defence against poor data. Test to ensure bad data is kept out of the systems.

    Case Study

    HMS

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Informatica

    Improve your data quality ingestion procedures to provide better customer intimacy for your users

    Healthcare Management Systems (HMS) provides cost containment services for healthcare sponsors and payers, and coordinates benefits services. This is to ensure that healthcare claims are paid correctly to both government agencies and individuals. To do so, HMS relies on data, and this data needs to be of high quality to ensure the correct decisions are made, the right people get the correct claims, and the appropriate parties pay out.

    To improve the integrity of HMS’s customer data, HMS put in place a framework that helped to standardize the collection of high volume and highly variable data.

    Results

    Working with a data quality platform vendor to establish a framework for data standardization, HMS was able to streamline data analysis and reduce new customer implementations from months to weeks.

    HMS data was plagued with a lack of standardization of data ingestion procedures.

    Before improving data quality processes After improving data quality processes
    Data Ingestion Data Ingestion
    Many standards of ingestion. Standardized data ingestion
    Data Storage Data Storage
    Lack of ability to match data, creating data quality errors.
    Data Analysis Data Analysis
    = =
    Slow Customer Implementation Time 50% Reduction in Customer Implementation Time

    Data quality improvement strategy #2:

    Fix data quality issues using proper database design.

    Technology

    Database Design Best Practices

    Referential integrity – Ensure parent/child relationships are maintained in terms of cascade creation, update, and deletion.

    Primary key definition – Ensure there is at least one key to guarantee the uniqueness of the data records, and primary key should not allow null.

    Validate data domain – Create triggers to check the data values entered in the database fields.

    Field type and length – Define the most suitable data type and length to hold field values.

    One-Time Data Fix (more on the next slide)

    Explore solutions – Where to fix the data issues? Is there a case to fix the issues?

    Running profiling tools to catch errors – Run scans on the database with defined criteria to identify occurrences of questionable data.

    Fix a sample before fixing all records – Use a proof-of-concept approach to explore fix options and evaluate impacts before fixing the full set.

    People

    The DBA Team

    Perform key tasks in pairs – Take a pair approach to perform key tasks so that validation and cross-check can happen.

    Skilled DBAs – DBAs should be certified and accredited.

    Competence – Assess DBA competency on an ongoing basis.

    Preparedness – Develop drills to stimulate data issues and train DBAs.

    Cross train – Cross train team members so that one DBA can cover another DBA.

    Data quality improvement strategy #3:

    Improve integration and synchronization of enterprise data.

    Technology

    Integration Architecture

    Info-Tech’s 5-Tier Architecture – When doing transformations, it is good practice to persist the integration results in tier 3 before the data is further refined and presented in tier 4.

    Timing, timing, and timing – Think of the sequence of events. You may need to perform some ETL tasks before other tasks to achieve synchronization and consistence.

    Historical changes – Ensure your tier 3 is robust enough to include historical data. You need to enable type 2 slowly, changing dimension to recreate the data at a point in time.

    Data Cleansing

    Standardize – Leverage data standardization to standardize name and address fields to improve matching and integration.

    Fuzzy matching – When there are no common keys between datasets. The datasets can only be matched by fuzzy matching. Fuzzy matching is not hard science; define a confidence level and think about a mechanism to deal with the unmatched.

    People

    Reporting and Documentations

    Business data glossary and data lineage – Define a business data glossary to enhance findability of key data elements. Document data mappings and ETL logics.

    Create data quality reports – Many ETL platforms provide canned data quality reports. Leverage those quality reports to monitor the data health.

    Code Review

    Create data quality reports – Many ETL platforms provide canned data quality reports. Leverage those quality reports to monitor the data health.

    ARB (architectural review board) – All ETL codes should be approved by the architectural review board to ensure alignment with the overall integration strategy.

    Data quality improvement strategy #4:

    Improve data quality policies and procedures.

    Technology

    Policy Reporting

    Data quality reports – Leverage canned data quality reports from the ETL platforms to monitor data quality on an on-going basis. When abnormalities are found, provoke the right policies to deal with the issues.

    Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralized website.

    Make the repository searchable and easily navigable. myPolicies helps you do all this and more.

    myPolicies helps you do all this and more.

    Go to this link

    People

    Policy Review and Training

    Policy review – Create a schedule for reviewing policies on a regular basis – invite professional writers to ensure polices are understandable.

    Policy training – Policies are often unread and misread. Training users and stakeholders on policies is an effective way to make sure those users and stakeholders understand the rationale of the policies. It is also a good practice to include a few scenarios that are handled by the policies.

    Policy hotline/mailbox – To avoid misinterpretation of the policies, a policy hotline/mailbox should be set up to answer any data policy questions from the end users/stakeholders.

    Policy Communications

    Simplified communications – Create handy one-pagers and infographic posters to communicate the key messages of the polices.

    Policy briefing – Whenever a new data project is initiated, a briefing of data policies should be given to ensure the project team follows the policies from the very beginning.

    Data quality improvement strategy #5:

    Streamline and optimize business processes.

    Technology

    Requirements Gathering

    Data Lineage – Leverage a metadata management tool to construct and document data lineage for future reference.

    Documentations Repository – It is a best practice to document key project information and share that knowledge across the project team and with the stakeholder. An improvement understanding of the project helps to identify data quality issues early on in the project.

    “Automating creation of data would help data quality most. You have to look at existing processes and create data signatures. You can then derive data off those data codes.” – Patrick Bossey, Manager of Business Intelligence, Crawford and Company

    People

    Requirements Gathering

    Info-Tech’s 4-Column Model – The datasets may exist but the business units do not have an effective way of communicating the quality needs. Use our four-column model and the eleven supporting questions to better understand the quality needs. See subsequent slides.

    I don’t know what the data means so I think the quality is poor – It is not uncommon to see that the right data presented to the business but the business does not trust the data. They also do not understand the business logic done on the data. See our Business Data Glossary in subsequent slides.

    Understand the business workflow – Know the business workflow to understand the manual steps associated with the workflow. You may find steps in which data is entered, manipulated, or consumed inappropriately.

    “Do a shadow data exercise where you identify the human workflows of how data gets entered, and then you can identify where data entry can be automated.” – Diraj Goel, Growth Advisor, BC Tech

    Brainstorm solutions to your data quality issues

    4 hours

    Input

    • Data profiling results
    • Preliminary root cause analyses

    Output

    • Proposals for data fix
    • Fixed issues

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Business and Data Analysts
    • Data experts and stewards

    After walking through the best-practice solutions to data quality issues, propose solutions to fix your identified issues.

    Instructions

    1. Review Root Cause Analyses: Revisit the root cause analysis and data lineage diagram you have generated in Step 3.2. to understand the issues in greater details.
    2. Characterize Each Issue: You may need to generate a data profiling report to characterize the issue. The report can be generated by using data quality suites, BI platforms, or even SQL statements.
    3. Brainstorm the Solutions: As a group, discuss potential ways to fix the issue. You can tackle the issues by approaching from these areas:
    Solution Approaches
    Technology Approach
    People Approach

    X crossover with

    Problematic Areas
    Application/System Design
    Database Design
    Data Integration and Synchronization
    Policies and Procedures
    Business Processes
    1. Document and Communicate: Document the solutions to your data issues. You may need to reuse or refer to the solutions. Also brainstorm some ideas on how to communicate the results back to the business.

    Download this Tool

    Sustaining your data quality requires continuous oversight through a data governance practice

    Quality data is the ultimate outcome of data governance and data quality management. Data governance enables data quality by providing the necessary oversight and controls for business processes in order to maintain data quality. There are three primary groups (at right) that are involved in a mature governance practice. Data quality should be tightly integrated with all of them.

    Define an effective data governance strategy and ensure the strategy integrates well with data quality with Info-Tech’s Establish Data Governance blueprint.

    Visit this link

    Data Governance Council

    This council establishes data management practices that span across the organization. This should be comprised of senior management or C-suite executives that can represent the various departments and lines of business within the organization. The data governance council can help to promote the value of data governance, facilitate a culture that nurtures data quality, and ensure that the goals of the data governance program are well aligned with business objectives.

    Data Owners

    Identifying the data owner role within an organization helps to create a greater degree of accountability for data issues. They often oversee how the data is being generated as well as how it is being consumed. Data owners come from the business side and have legal rights and defined control over a data set. They ensure data is available to the right people within the organization.

    Data Stewards

    Conflict can occur within an organization’s data governance program when a data steward’s role is confused with that of the steering committee’s role. Data stewards exist to enforce decisions made about data governance and data management. Data stewards are often business analysts or power users of a particular system/dataset. Where a data owner is primarily responsible for access, a data steward is responsible for the quality of a dataset.

    Integrate the data quality management strategy with existing data governance committees

    Ongoing and regular data quality management is the responsibility of the data governance bodies of the organization.

    The oversight of ongoing data quality activities rests on the shoulders of the data governance committees that exist in the organization.

    There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organizations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. They strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic, tactical, and operational level:

    The image shows a pyramid, with Executive Sponsors at the top, with the following roles in descending order: DG Council; Steering Committee; Working Groups; Data Owners and Data Stewards; and Data Users. Along the left side of the pyramid, there are three labels, in ascending order: Operational, Tactical, and Strategic.

    The image is a flow chart showing project roles, in two sections: the top section is labelled Governing Bodies, and the lower section is labelled Data Quality Improvement Team. There is a note indicating that the Data Owner reports to and provides updates regarding the state of data quality and data quality initiatives.

    Create and update the organization’s Business Data Glossary to keep up with current data definitions

    2 hours

    Input

    • Metrics and goals for data quality

    Output

    • Regularly scheduled data quality checkups

    Materials

    • Business Data Glossary Template
    • Data Quality Dashboard

    Participants

    • Data steward

    A crucial aspect of data quality and governance is the Business Data Glossary. The Business Data Glossary helps to align the terminology of the business with the organization’s data assets. It allows the people who interact with the data to quickly identify the applications, processes, and stewardship associated with it, which will enhance the accuracy and efficiency of searches for organization data definitions and attributes, enabling better access to the data. This will, in turn, enhance the quality of the organization’s data because it will be more accurate, relevant, and accessible.

    Use the Business Data Glossary Template to document key aspects of the data, such as:

    • Definition
    • Source System
    • Possible Values
    • Data Steward
    • Data Sensitivity
    • Data Availability
    • Batch or Live
    • Retention

    Data Element

    • Mkt-Product
    • Fin-Product

    Info-Tech Insight

    The Business Data Glossary ensures that the crucial data that has key business use by key business systems and users is appropriately owned and defined. It also establishes rules that lead to proper data management and quality to be enforced by the data owners.

    Download this Tool

    Data Steward(s): Use the Data Quality Improvement Plan of the business unit for ongoing quality monitoring

    Integrating your data quality strategy into the organization’s data governance program requires passing the strategy over to members of the data governance program. The data steward role is responsible for data quality at the business unit level, and should have been involved with the creation and implementation of the data quality improvement project. After the data quality repairs have been made, it is the responsibility of the data steward to regularly monitor the quality of the business unit’s data.

    Create Improvement Plan ↓
    • Data Quality Improvement Team identifies root cause issues.
    • Brainstorm solutions.
    Implement Improvement Plan ↓
    • Data Quality Improvement Team works with IT.
    Sustain Improvement Plan
    • Data Steward should regularly monitor data quality.

    Download this tool

    See Info-Tech’s Data Steward Job Description Template for a detailed understanding of the roles and responsibilities of the data steward.

    Responsible for sustaining

    The image shows a screen capture of a document entitled Business Context & Subject Area Selection.

    Develop a business-facing data quality dashboard to show improvements or a sudden dip in data quality

    One tool that the data steward can take advantage of is the data quality dashboard. Initiatives that are implemented to address data quality must have metrics defined by business objectives in order to demonstrate the value of the data quality improvement projects. In addition, the data steward should have tools for tracking data quality in the business unit to report issues to the data owner and data governance steering committee.

    • Example 1: Marketing uses data for direct mail and e-marketing campaigns. They care about customer data in particular. Specifically, they require high data quality in attributes such as customer name, address, and product profile.
    • Example 2: Alternatively, Finance places emphasis on financial data, focusing on attributes like account balance, latency in payment, credit score, and billing date.

    The image is Business dashboard on Data Quality for Marketing. It features Data Quality metrics, listed in the left column, and numbers for each quarter over the course of one year, on the right.

    Notes on chart:

    General improvement in billing address quality

    Sudden drop in touchpoint accuracy may prompt business to ask for explanations

    Approach to creating a business-facing data quality dashboard:

    1. Schedule a meeting with the functional unit to discuss what key data quality metrics are essential to their business operations. You should consider the business context, functional area, and subject area analyses you completed in Phase 1 as a starting point.
    2. Discuss how to gather data for the key metrics and their associated calculations.
    3. Discuss and decide the reporting intervals.
    4. Discuss and decide the unit of measurement.
    5. Generate a dashboard similar to the example. Consider using a BI or analytics tool to develop the dashboard.

    Data quality management must be sustained for ongoing improvements to the organization’s data

    • Data quality is never truly complete; it is a set of ongoing processes and disciplines that requires a permanent plan for monitoring practices, reviewing processes, and maintaining consistent data standards.
    • Setting the expectation to stakeholders that a long-term commitment is required to maintain quality data within the organization is critical to the success of the program.
    • A data quality maintenance program will continually revise and fine-tune ongoing practices, processes, and procedures employed for organizational data management.

    Data quality is a program that requires continual care:

    →Maintain→Good Data →

    Data quality management is a long-term commitment that shifts how an organization views, manages, and utilizes its corporate data assets. Long-term buy-in from all involved is critical.

    “Data quality is a process. We are trying to constantly improve the quality over time. It is not a one-time fix.” – Akin Akinwumi, Manager of Data Governance, Startech.com

    Define a data quality review agenda for data quality sustainment

    2 hours

    Input

    • Metrics and goals for data quality

    Output

    • Regularly scheduled data quality checkups

    Materials

    • Data Quality Diagnostic
    • Data Quality Dashboard

    Participants

    • Data Steward

    As a data steward, you are responsible for ongoing data quality checks of the business unit’s data. Define an improvement agenda to organize the improvement activities. Organize the activities yearly and quarterly to ensure improvement is done year-round.

    Quarterly

    • Measure data quality metrics against milestones. Perform a regular data quality health check with Info-Tech’s Data Quality Diagnostic.
    • Review the business unit’s Business Data Glossary to ensure that it is up to date and comprehensive.
    • Assess progress of practice area initiatives (time, milestones, budget, benefits delivered).
    • Analyze overall data quality and report progress on key improvement projects and corrective actions in the executive dashboard.
    • Communicate overall status of data quality to oversight body.

    Annually

    • Calculate your current baseline and measure progress by comparing it to previous years.
    • Set/revise quality objectives for each practice area and inter-practice hand-off processes.
    • Re-evaluate/re-establish data quality objectives.
    • Set/review data quality metrics and tracking mechanisms.
    • Set data quality review milestones and timelines.
    • Revisit data quality training from an end-user perspective and from a practitioner perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do data quality diagnostic at the beginning of any improvement plan, then recheck health with the diagnostic at regular intervals to see if symptoms are coming back. This should be a monitoring activity, not a data quality fixing activity. If symptoms are bad enough, repeat the improvement plan process.

    Take the next step in your Data & Analytics Journey

    After establishing your data quality program, look to increase your data & analytics maturity.

    • Artificial Intelligence (AI) is a concept that many organizations strive to implement. AI can really help in areas such as data preparation. However, implementing AI solutions requires a level of maturity that many organizations are not at.
    • While a solid data quality foundation is essential for AI initiatives being successful, AI can also ensure high data quality.
    • An AI analytics solution can address data integrity issues at the earliest point of data processing, rapidly transforming these vast volumes of data into trusted business information. This can be done through Anomaly detection, which flags “bad” data, identifying suspicious anomalies that can impact data quality. By tracking and evaluating data, anomaly detection gives critical insights into data quality as data is processed. (Ira Cohen, The End to a Never-Ending Story? Improve Data Quality with AI Analytics, anodot, 2020)

    Consider… “Garbage in, garbage out.”

    Lay a solid foundation by addressing your data quality issues prior to investing heavily in an AI solution.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Are You Ready for AI?

    • Use AI as a compelling event to expedite funding, resources, and project plans for your data-related initiatives. Check out this note to understand what it takes to be ready to implement AI solutions.

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence

    • Current AI technology is data-enabled, automated, adaptive decision support. Once you believe you are ready for AI, check out this blueprint on how to get started.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • The data lineage diagram was a key tool used in establishing your data quality program. Check out this blueprint and learn how to optimize your data architecture to provide greatest value from data.

    Create an Architecture for AI

    • Build your target state architecture from predefined best practice building blocks. This blueprint assists members first to assess if they have the maturity to embrace AI in their organization, and if so, which AI acquisition model fits them best.

    Phase 4 Summary

    1. Data Quality Improvement Strategy
    • Brainstorm solutions to your data quality issues using the following data quality improvement strategies as a guide:
      1. Fix data quality issues by improving system/application design
      2. Fix data quality issues using proper database design
      3. Improve integration and synchronization of enterprise data
      4. Improve data quality policies and procedures
      5. Streamline and optimize business processes
  • Sustain Your Data Quality Program
    • Quality data is the ultimate outcome of data governance and data quality management.
    • Sustaining your data quality requires continuous oversight through a data governance practice.
    • There are three primary groups (Data Governance Council, Data Owners, and Data Stewards) that are involved in a mature governance practice.
  • Grow Your Data & Analytics Maturity
    • After establishing your data quality program, take the next step in increasing your data & analytics maturity.
    • Good data quality is the foundation of pursuing different ways of maximizing the value of your data such as implementing AI solutions.
    • Continue your data & analytics journey by referring to Info-Tech’s quality research.
  • Research Contributors and Experts

    Izabela Edmunds

    Information Architect Mott MacDonald

    Akin Akinwumi

    Manager of Data Governance Startech.com

    Diraj Goel

    Growth Advisor BC Tech

    Sujay Deb

    Director of Data Analytics Technology and Platforms Export Development Canada

    Asif Mumtaz

    Data & Solution Architect Blue Cross Blue Shield Association

    Patrick Bossey

    Manager of Business Intelligence Crawford and Company

    Anonymous Contributors

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader

    Research Specialist Info-Tech Research Group

    Ibrahim is a Research Specialist at Info-Tech Research Group. In his career to date he has assisted many clients using his knowledge in process design, knowledge management, SharePoint for ECM, and more. He is expanding his familiarity in many areas such as data and analytics, enterprise architecture, and CIO-related topics.

    Reddy Doddipalli

    Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group

    Reddy is a Senior Workshop Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on data management and specialized analytics applications. He has over 25 years of strong industry experience in IT leading and managing analytics suite of solutions, enterprise data management, enterprise architecture, and artificial intelligence–based complex expert systems.

    Andy Neill

    Practice Lead, Data & Analytics and Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy leads the data and analytics and enterprise architecture practices at ITRG. He has over 15 years of experience in managing technical teams, information architecture, data modeling, and enterprise data strategy. He is an expert in enterprise data architecture, data integration, data standards, data strategy, big data, and development of industry standard data models.

    Crystal Singh

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Crystal is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She brings a diverse and global perspective to her role, drawing from her professional experiences in various industries and locations. Prior to joining Info-Tech, Crystal led the Enterprise Data Services function at Rogers Communications, one of Canada’s leading telecommunications companies.

    Igor Ikonnikov

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Igor is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. He has extensive experience in strategy formation and execution in the information management domain, including master data management, data governance, knowledge management, enterprise content management, big data, and analytics.

    Andrea Malick

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrea Malick is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on building best practices knowledge in the enterprise information management domain, with corporate and consulting leadership in enterprise architecture and content management (ECM).

    Natalia Modjeska

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Natalia Modjeska is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She advises members on topics related to AI, machine learning, advanced analytics, and data science, including ethics and governance. Natalia has over 15 years of experience in developing, selling, and implementing analytical solutions.

    Rajesh Parab

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Rajesh Parab is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. He has over 20 years of global experience and brings a unique mix of technology and business acumen. He has worked on many data-driven business applications. In his previous architecture roles, Rajesh created a number of product roadmaps, technology strategies, and models.

    Bibliography

    Amidon, Kirk. "Case Study: How Data Quality Has Evolved at MathWorks." The Fifth MIT Information Quality Industry Symposium. 13 July 2011. Web. 19 Aug. 2015.

    Boulton, Clint. “Disconnect between CIOs and LOB managers weakens data quality.” CIO. 05 February 2016. Accessed June 2020.

    COBIT 5: Enabling Information. Rolling Meadows, IL: ISACA, 2013. Web.

    Cohen, Ira. “The End to a Never-Ending Story? Improve Data Quality with AI Analytics.” anodot. 2020.

    “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK Guide).” First Edition. DAMA International. 2009. Digital. April 2014.

    "Data Profiling: Underpinning Data Quality Management." Pitney Bowes. Pitney Bowes - Group 1 Software, 2007. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Data.com. “Data.com Clean.” Salesforce. 2016. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “Dawn of the CDO." Experian Data Quality. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Demirkan, Haluk, and Bulent Dal. "Why Do So Many Analytics Projects Fail?" The Data Economy: Why Do so Many Analytics Projects Fail? Analytics Magazine. July-Aug. 2014. Web.

    Dignan, Larry. “CIOs juggling digital transformation pace, bad data, cloud lock-in and business alignment.” ZDNet. 11 March 2020. Accessed July.

    Dumbleton, Janani, and Derek Munro. "Global Data Quality Research - Discussion Paper 2015." Experian Data Quality. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Eckerson, Wayne W. "Data Quality and the Bottom Line - Achieving Business Success through a Commitment to High Quality Data." The Data Warehouse Institute. 2002. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “Infographic: Data Quality in BI the Costs and Benefits.” HaloBI. 2015 Web.

    Lee, Y.W. and Strong, D.M. “Knowing-Why About Data Processes and Data Quality.” Journal of Management Information Systems. 2004.

    “Making Data Quality a Way of Life.” Cognizant. 2014. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    "Merck Serono Achieves Single Source of Truth with Comprehensive RIM Solutions." www.productlifegroup.com. ProductLife Group. 15 Apr. 2015. Web. 23 Nov. 2015.

    Myers, Dan. “List of Conformed Dimensions of Data Quality.” Conformed Dimensions of Data Quality (CDDQ). 2019. Web.

    Redman, Thomas C. “Make the Case for Better Data Quality.” Harvard Business Review. 24 Aug. 2012. Web. 19 Aug. 2015.

    RingLead Data Management Solutions. “10 Stats About Data Quality I Bet You Didn’t Know.” RingLead. Accessed 7 July 2020.

    Schwartzrock, Todd. "Chrysler's Data Quality Management Case Study." Online video clip. YouTube. 21 April. 2011. Web. 18 Aug. 2015

    “Taking control in the digital age.” Experian Data Quality. Jan 2019. Web.

    “The data-driven organization, a transformation in progress.” Experian Data Quality. 2020. Web.

    "The Data Quality Benchmark Report." Experian Data Quality. Jan. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “The state of data quality.” Experian Data Quality. Sept. 2013. Web. 17 Aug. 2015.

    Vincent, Lanny. “Differentiating Competence, Capability and Capacity.” Innovation Management Services. Web. June 2008.

    “7 ways poor data quality is costing your business.” Experian Data Quality. July 2020. Web.

    Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}338|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • According to Info-Tech research, 74% of our clients feel that IT quality management is an important process, however, only 15% said they actually had effective quality management.
    • IT is required to deliver high quality projects and services, but if CIOs are ineffective at quality management, how can IT deliver?
    • Rather than disturb the status quo with holistic quality initiatives, heads of IT leave quality in the hands of process owners, functional areas, and other segmented facets of the department.
    • CIOs are facing greater pressures to be innovative, agile, and cost-effective, but cannot do so without stable operations, an accountable staff base, and business support; all of which are achieved by high IT quality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Quality management needs more attention that it’s typically getting. It’s not going to happen randomly; you must take action to see results.
    • Quality must be holistic. Centralized accountability will align inconsistencies in quality and refocus IT towards a common goal.
    • Accountability is the key to quality. Clearly defined roles and responsibilities will put your staff on the hook for quality outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    • Shift your mindset to the positive implications of high quality. Info-Tech’s quality management methodology will promote innovation, agility, lower costs, and improved operations.
    • We will help you develop a fully functional quality management program in four easy steps:
      • Position your program as a group to encourage buy-in and unite IT around a common quality vision. Enact a center of excellence to build, support, and monitor the program.
      • Build flexible program requirements that will be adapted for a fit-to-purpose solution.
      • Implement the program using change management techniques to alleviate challenges and improve adoption.
      • Operate the program with a focus on continual improvement to ensure that your IT department continues to deliver high quality projects and services as stakeholder needs change.

    Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Understand why Info-Tech’s unique approach to quality management can fix a variety of IT issues and understand the four ways we can support you in building a quality management program designed just for you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Position the program

    Hold a positioning working session to focus the program around business needs, create solid targets, and create quality champions to get the job done.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 1: Position the Quality Program
    • Quality Management Program Charter
    • Quality Management Capability Assessment and Planning Tool
    • Quality Management Roadmap

    2. Build the program

    Build program requirements and design standard templates that will unite IT quality.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 2: Build a Quality Program
    • Quality Management Quality Plan Template
    • Quality Management Review Template
    • Quality Management Dashboard Template

    3. Implement the program

    Evaluate the readiness of the department for change and launch the program at the right time and in the right way to transform IT quality.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 3: Implement the Quality Program
    • Quality Management Communication Plan Template
    • Quality Management Readiness Assessment Template

    4. Operate the program

    Facilitate the success of key IT practice areas by operating the Center of Excellence to support the key IT practice areas’ quality initiatives.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 4: Operate the Quality Program
    • Quality Management User Satisfaction Survey
    • Quality Management Practice Area Assessment and Planning Tool
    • Quality Management Capability Improvement Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Position Your Program

    The Purpose

    Create a quality center of excellence to lead and support quality initiatives.

    Position your quality program to meet the needs of your business.

    Develop clear targets and create a roadmap to achieve your vision. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined Center of Excellence roles & responsibilities.

    A firm vision for your program with clearly outlined targets.

    A plan for improvements to show dedication to the program and create accountability. 

    Activities

    1.1 Identify current quality maturity.

    1.2 Craft vision and mission.

    1.3 Define scope.

    1.4 Determine goals and objectives.

    1.5 Specify metrics and critical success factors.

    1.6 Develop quality principles.

    1.7 Create action plan.

    Outputs

    Completed Maturity Assessment

    Completed Project Charter

    Completed Quality Roadmap

    2 Build Your Program

    The Purpose

    Build the requirements for the quality program, including outputs for quality planning, quality assurance, quality control, and quality improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined standards for the quality program.

    General templates to be used to unify quality throughout IT. 

    Activities

    2.1 Define quality policy, procedures, and guidelines.

    2.2 Define your standard Quality Plan.

    2.3 Define your standard Quality Review Document.

    2.4 Develop your Standard Quality Management Dashboard.

    Outputs

    Quality Policy

    Standard Quality Plan Template

    Standard Quality Review Template

    Standard Quality Dashboard

    3 Implement Your Program

    The Purpose

    Launch the program and begin quality improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Perform a readiness assessment to ensure your organization is ready to launch its quality program.

    Create a communication plan to ensure constant and consistent communication throughout implementation. 

    Activities

    3.1 Assess organizational readiness.

    3.2 Create a communication plan.

    Outputs

    Completed Readiness Assessment

    Completed Communication Plan

    4 Operate Your Program

    The Purpose

    Have the Center of Excellence facilitate the roll-out of the quality program in your key practice areas.

    Initiate ongoing monitoring and reporting processes to enable continuous improvement.  

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Quality plans for each practice area aligned with the overall quality program.

    Periodic quality reviews to ensure plans are being acted upon.

    Methodology for implementing corrective measures to ensure quality expectations are met.

    Activities

    4.1 Perform a quality management satisfaction survey.

    4.2 Complete a practice area assessment.

    4.3 Facilitate the creation of practice area quality plans.

    4.4 Populate quality dashboards.

    4.5 Perform quality review(s).

    4.6 Address issues with corrective and preventative measures.

    4.7 Devise a plan for improvement.

    4.8 Report on quality outcomes.

    Outputs

    Completed Satisfaction Surveys

    Practice Area Assessments

    Quality Plans (for each practice area)

    Quality Reviews (for each practice area)

    Quality Improvement Plan

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}156|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $86,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 53 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They provide the capabilities the business needs to deliver value to both internal and external customers and stakeholders.
    • Product organizations are expected to continually deliver evolving value to the overall organization as they grow.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of a broad product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that improve end-user value and enterprise alignment.
    • Your organizational goals and strategy are achieved through capabilities that deliver value. Your product hierarchy is the mechanism to translate enterprise goals, priorities, and constraints down to the product level where changes can be made.
    • Recognize that each product owner represents one of three primary perspectives: business, technical, and operational. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.
    • The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.
    • Your product family roadmap and product roadmap tell different stories. The product family roadmap represents the overall connection of products to the enterprise strategy, while the product roadmap focuses on the fulfillment of the product’s vision.
    • Although products can be delivered with any software development lifecycle, methodology, delivery team structure, or organizational design, high-performing product teams optimize their structure to fit the needs of product and product family delivery.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the importance of product families for scaling product delivery.
    • Define products in your context and organize products into operational families.
    • Use product family roadmaps to align product roadmaps to enterprise goals and priorities.
    • Evaluate the different approaches to improve your product family delivery pipelines and milestones.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should define enterprise product families to scale your product delivery capability, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Become a product-centric organization

    Define products in your organization’s context and explore product families as a way to organize products at scale.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 1: Become a Product-Centric Organization
    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook
    • Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook

    2. Organize products into product families

    Identify an approach to group the inventory of products into one or more product families.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 2: Organize Products Into Product Families

    3. Ensure alignment between products and families

    Confirm alignment between your products and product families via the product family roadmap and a shared definition of delivered value.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 3: Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    4. Bridge the gap between product families and delivery

    Agree on a delivery approach that best aligns with your product families.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 4: Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery
    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment

    5. Build your transformation roadmap and communication plan

    Define your communication plan and transformation roadmap for transitioning to delivering products at the scale of your organization.

    • Deliver Digital Products at Scale – Phase 5: Transformation Roadmap and Communication

    Infographic

    Workshop: Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Become a Product-Centric Organization

    The Purpose

    Define products in your organization’s context and explore product families as a way to organize products at scale.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the case for product practices

    A concise definition of products and product families

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your organizational factors driving product-centric delivery.

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory.

    1.3 Determine your approach to scale product families.

    Outputs

    Organizational drivers and goals for a product-centric delivery

    Definition of product

    Product scaling principles

    Scaling approach and direction

    Pilot list of products to scale

    2 Organize Products Into Product Families

    The Purpose

    Identify a suitable approach to group the inventory of products into one or more product families.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A scaling approach for products that fits your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Define your product families.

    Outputs

    Product family mapping

    Enabling applications

    Dependent applications

    Product family canvas

    3 Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    The Purpose

    Confirm alignment between your products and product families via the product family roadmap and a shared definition of delivered value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Recognition of the product family roadmap and a shared definition of value as key concepts to maintain alignment between your products and product families

    Activities

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps.

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication.

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps.

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment.

    Outputs

    Current approach for communication of product family strategy

    List of product family stakeholders and a prioritization plan for communication

    Defined key pieces of a product family roadmap

    An approach to confirming alignment between products and product families through a shared definition of business value

    4 Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    The Purpose

    Agree on the delivery approach that best aligns with your product families.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the team configuration and operating model required to deliver value through your product families

    Activities

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness.

    4.2 Understand your delivery options.

    4.3 Determine your operating model.

    4.4 Identify how to fund product delivery.

    4.5 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy.

    4.6 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy.

    4.7 Determine your next steps.

    Outputs

    Assessment results on your organization’s delivery maturity

    A preferred approach to structuring product delivery

    Your preferred operating model for delivering product families

    Understanding of your preferred approach for product family funding

    Product family transformation roadmap

    Your plan for communicating your roadmap

    List of actionable next steps to start on your journey

    5 Advisory: Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    The Purpose

    Implement your communication plan and transformation roadmap for transitioning to delivering products at the scale of your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    New product family organization and supporting product delivery approach

    Activities

    5.1 Execute communication plan and product family changes.

    5.2 Review the pilot family implementation and update the transformation roadmap.

    5.3 Begin advisory calls for related blueprints.

    Outputs

    Organizational communication of product families and product family roadmaps

    Product family implementation and updated transformation roadmap

    Support for product owners, backlog and roadmap management, and other topics

    Further reading

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Analyst Perspective

    Product families align enterprise goals to product changes and value realization.

    A picture of Info-Tech analyst Banu Raghuraman. A picture of Info-Tech analyst Ari Glaizel. A picture of Info-Tech analyst Hans Eckman

    Our world is changing faster than ever, and the need for business agility continues to grow. Organizations are shifting from long-term project delivery to smaller, iterative product delivery models to be able to embrace change and respond to challenges and opportunities faster.

    Unfortunately, many organizations focus on product delivery at the tactical level. Product teams may be individually successful, but how well are their changes aligned to division and enterprise goals and priorities?

    Grouping products into operationally aligned families is key to delivering the right value to the right stakeholders at the right time.

    Product families translate enterprise goals, constraints, and priorities down to the individual product level so product owners can make better decisions and more effectively manage their roadmaps and backlogs. By scaling products into families and using product family roadmaps to align product roadmaps, product owners can deliver the capabilities that allow organizations to reach their goals.

    In this blueprint, we’ll provide the tools and guidance to help you define what “product” means to your organization, use scaling patterns to build product families, align product and product family roadmaps, and identify impacts to your delivery and organizational design models.

    Banu Raghuraman, Ari Glaizel, and Hans Eckman

    Applications Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They deliver the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, internal users, and stakeholders.
    • The shift to becoming a product organization is intended to continually increase the value you provide to the broader organization as you grow and evolve.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of your product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.

    Common Obstacles

    • IT organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This conflicts with product delivery, which continuously delivers value over the lifetime of a product.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach will guide you through:

    • Understanding the importance of product families in scaling product delivery.
    • Defining products in your context and organizing products into operational families.
    • Using product family roadmaps to align product roadmaps to enterprise goals and priorities.
    • Evaluating the different approaches to improve your product family delivery pipelines and milestones.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Changes can only be made at the individual product or service level. To achieve enterprise goals and priorities, organizations needed to organize and scale products into operational families. This structure allows product managers to translate goals and constraints to the product level and allows product owners to deliver changes that support enabling capabilities. In this blueprint, we’ll help you define your products, scale them using the best patterns, and align your roadmaps and delivery models to improve throughput and value delivery.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals

    A flowchart is shown on how to operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Start by piloting product families to determine which approaches work best for your organization.
    2. Create a common definition of what a product is and identify products in your inventory.
    3. Use scaling patterns to build operationally aligned product families.
    4. Develop a roadmap strategy to align families and products to enterprise goals and priorities.
    5. Use products and families to evaluate delivery and organizational design improvements.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale via Enterprise Product Families

    An infographic on the Enterprise Product Families is shown.

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.

    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.”

    - Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance

    “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.”

    - TechTarget

    “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.”

    - Mark Curphey

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business. This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.”

    – Chad Beier, "How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org

    What is a product?

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business:

    • Customer facing, revenue generating

    Technical:

    • IT systems and tools

    Operations:

    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.”

    – Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project

    Product

    Fund projects

    Funding

    Fund products or teams

    Line of business sponsor

    Prioritization

    Product owner

    Makes specific changes to a product

    Product management

    Improve product maturity and support

    Assign people to work

    Work allocation

    Assign work to product teams

    Project manager manages

    Capacity management

    Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for delivering product changes and improvements

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the difference between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle and product lifecycle.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply. The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release. Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    An image is shown to demonstrate the relationship between the product backlog and the product roadmap.

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown to demonstrate how it is the core to value realization.

    Adapted from: Pichler, "What Is Product Management?""

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Use Agile DevOps principles to expedite product-centric delivery and management

    Delivering products does not necessarily require an Agile DevOps mindset. However, Agile methods facilitate the journey because product thinking is baked into them.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the product deliery maturity and the Agile DevOps used.
    Based on: Ambysoft, 2018

    Organizations start with Waterfall to improve the predictable delivery of product features.

    Iterative development shifts the focus from delivery of features to delivery of user value.

    Agile further shifts delivery to consider ROI. Often, the highest-value backlog items aren’t the ones with the highest ROI.

    Lean and DevOps improve your delivery pipeline by providing full integration between product owners, development teams, and operations.

    CI/CD reduces time in process by allowing release on demand and simplifying release and support activities.

    Although teams will adopt parts of all these stages during their journey, it isn’t until you’ve adopted a fully integrated delivery chain that you’ve become product centric.

    Scale products into related families to improve value delivery and alignment

    Defining product families builds a network of related products into coordinated value delivery streams.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relations between product family and the delivery streams.

    “As with basic product management, scaling an organization is all about articulating the vision and communicating it effectively. Using a well-defined framework helps you align the growth of your organization with that of the company. In fact, how the product organization is structured is very helpful in driving the vision of what you as a product company are going to do.”

    – Rich Mironov, Mironov Consulting

    Product families translate enterprise goals into value-enabling capabilities

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relationship between enterprise strategy and enabling capabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organizational goals and strategy are achieved through capabilities that deliver value. Your product hierarchy is the mechanism to translate enterprise goals, priorities, and constraints down to the product level where changes can be made.

    Arrange product families by operational groups, not solely by your org chart

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate how to arrange product families by operational groups.

    1. To align product changes with enterprise goals and priorities, you need to organize your products into operational groups based on the capabilities or business functions the product and family support.

    2. Product managers translate these goals, priorities, and constraints into their product families, so they are actionable at the next level, whether that level is another product family or products implementing enhancements to meet these goals.

    3. The product family manager ensures that the product changes enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family, division, and enterprise goals.

    4. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals, which then drives your next set of enterprise goals and strategy.

    Approach alignment from both directions, validating by the opposite way

    Defining your product families is not a one-way street. Often, we start from either the top or the bottom depending on our scaling principles. We use multiple patterns to find the best arrangement and grouping of our products and families.

    It may be helpful to work partway, then approach your scaling from the opposite direction, meeting in the middle. This way you are taking advantage of the strengths in both approaches.

    Once you have your proposed structure, validate the grouping by applying the principles from the opposite direction to ensure each product and family is in the best starting group.

    As the needs of your organization change, you may need to realign your product families into your new business architecture and operational structure.

    A top-down alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You have a business architecture defined or clear market/functional grouping of value streams.

    A bottom-up alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You are starting from an Application Portfolio Management application inventory to build or validate application families.

    Leverage patterns for scaling products

    Organizing your products and families is easier when leveraging these grouping patterns. Each is explained in greater detail on the following slides

    Value Stream Alignment

    Enterprise Applications

    Shared Services

    Technical

    Organizational Alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products
    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > ModulesSupporting: Job board, healthcare administrator
    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools
    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network
    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure no longer needed because the management team owns product management role

    Leverage the product family roadmap for alignment

    It’s more than a set of colorful boxes. It’s the map to align everyone to where you are going.

    Your product family roadmap

      ✓ Lays out a strategy for your product family.

      ✓ Is a statement of intent for your family of products.

      ✓ Communicates direction for the entire product family and product teams.

      ✓ Directly connects to the organization’s goals.

    However, it is not:

      x Representative of a hard commitment.

      x A simple combination of your current product roadmaps.

    Before connecting your family roadmap to products, think about what each roadmap typically presents

    An example of a product family roadmap is shown and how it can be connected to the products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product family roadmap and product roadmap tell different stories. The product family roadmap represents the overall connection of products to the enterprise strategy, while the product roadmap focuses on the fulfillment of the product’s vision.

    Product family roadmaps are more strategic by nature

    While individual product roadmaps can be different levels of tactical or strategic depending on a variety of market factors, your options are more limited when defining roadmaps for product families.

    Product

    TACTICAL

    A roadmap that is technical, committed, and detailed.

    Product Family

    STRATEGIC

    A roadmap that is strategic, goal based, high level, and flexible.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Roadmaps for your product family are, by design, less detailed. This does not mean they aren’t actionable! Your product family roadmap should be able to communicate clear intentions around the future delivery of value in both the near and long term.

    Consider volatility when structuring product family roadmaps

    A roadmap is shown without any changes.

    There is no such thing as a roadmap that never changes.

    Your product family roadmap represents a broad statement of intent and high-level tactics to get closer to the organization’s goals.

    A roadmap is shown with changes.

    All good product family roadmaps embrace change!

    Your strategic intentions are subject to volatility, especially those planned further in the future. The more costs you incur in planning, the more you leave yourself exposed to inefficiency and waste if those plans change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A good product family roadmap is intended to manage and communicate the inevitable changes as a result of market volatility and changes in strategy.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    PRODUCT STRATEGY

    What are the artifacts?

    What are you saying?

    Defined at the family level?

    Defined at the product level?

    Vision

    I want to...

    Strategic focus

    Delivery focus

    Goals

    To get there we need to...

    Roadmap

    To achieve our goals, we’ll deliver...

    Backlog

    The work will be done in this order...

    Release Plan

    We will deliver in the following ways...

    Typical elements of a product family roadmap

    While there are others, these represent what will commonly appear across most family-based roadmaps.

    An example is shown to highlight the typical elements of a product family roadmap.

    GROUP/CATEGORY: Groups are collections of artifacts. In a product family context, these are usually product family goals, value streams, or products.

    ARTIFACT: An artifact is one of many kinds of tangible by-products produced during the delivery of products. For a product family, the artifacts represented are capabilities or value streams.

    MILESTONE: Points in the timeline when established sets of artifacts are complete. This is a critical tool in the alignment of products in a given family.

    TIME HORIZON: Separated periods within the projected timeline covered by the roadmap.

    Connecting your product family roadmaps to product roadmaps

    Your product and product family roadmaps should be connected at an artifact level that is common between both. Typically, this is done with capabilities, but it can be done at a more granular level if an understanding of capabilities isn’t available.

    An example is shown on how the product family roadmpas can be connected to the product roadmaps.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Audience

    Business/ IT Leaders

    Users/Customers

    Delivery Teams

    Roadmap View

    Portfolio

    Product Family

    Technology

    Objectives

    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority products

    To visualize and validate product strategy

    To coordinate broad technology and architecture decisions

    Artifacts

    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual products, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level.

    Artifacts are generally grouped by product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals.

    Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of technical capabilities that support the broader delivery of value for the product family.

    Your communication objectives are linked to your audience; ensure you know your audience and speak their language

    I want to...

    I need to talk to...

    Because they are focused on...

    ALIGN PRODUCT TEAMS

    Get my delivery teams on the same page.

    Architects

    Products Owners

    PRODUCTS

    A product that delivers value against a common set of goals and objectives.

    SHOWCASE CHANGES

    Inform users and customers of product strategy.

    Bus. Process Owners

    End Users

    FUNCTIONALITY

    A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.

    ARTICULATE RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS

    Inform the business of product development requirements.

    IT Management

    Business Stakeholders

    FUNDING

    An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    Assess the impacts of product-centric delivery on your teams and org design

    Product delivery can exist within any org structure or delivery model. However, when making the shift toward product management, consider optimizing your org design and product team structure to match your capacity and throughput needs.

    A flowchart is shown to see how the impacts of product-centric delivery can impact team and org designs.

    Determine which delivery team structure best fits your product pipeline

    Four delivery team structures are shown. The four are: functional roles, shared service and resource pools, product or system, and skills and competencies.

    Weigh the pros and cons of IT operating models to find the best fit

    There are many different operating models. LoB/Product Aligned and Hybrid Functional align themselves most closely with how products and product families are typically delivered.

    1. LoB/Product Aligned – Decentralized Model: Line of Business, Geographically, Product, or Functionally Aligned
    2. A decentralized IT operating model that embeds specific functions within LoBs/product teams and provides cross-organizational support for their initiatives.

    3. Hybrid Functional: Functional/Product Aligned
    4. A best-of-both-worlds model that balances the benefits of centralized and decentralized approaches to achieve both customer responsiveness and economies of scale.

    5. Hybrid Service Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model
    6. A model that supports what is commonly referred to as a matrix organization, organizing by highly related service categories and introducing the role of the service owner.

    7. Centralized: Plan-Build-Run
    8. A highly typical IT operating model that focuses on centralized strategic control and oversight in delivering cost-optimized and effective solutions.

    9. Centralized: Demand-Develop-Service
    10. A centralized IT operating model that lends well to more mature operating environments. Aimed at leveraging economies of scale in an end-to-end services delivery model.

    Consider how investment spending will differ in a product environment

    Reward for delivering outcomes, not features

    Autonomy

    Flexibility

    Accountability

    Fund what delivers value

    Allocate iteratively

    Measure and adjust

    Fund long-lived delivery of value through products (not projects).

    Give autonomy to the team to decide exactly what to build.

    Allocate to a pool based on higher-level business case.

    Provide funds in smaller amounts to different product teams and initiatives based on need.

    Product teams define metrics that contribute to given outcomes.

    Track progress and allocate more (or less) funds as appropriate.

    Adapted from Bain, 2019

    Info-Tech Insight

    Changes to funding require changes to product and Agile practices to ensure product ownership and accountability.

    Why is having a common value measure important?

    CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic

    A stacked bar graph is shown to demonstrate CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic. A bar titled: Business Value Metrics is highlighted. 51% had some improvement necessary and 32% had significant improvement necessary.

    Over 700 Info-Tech members have implemented the Balanced Value Measurement Framework.

    “The cynic knows the price of everything and the value of nothing.”

    – Oscar Wilde

    “Price is what you pay. Value is what you get.”

    – Warren Buffett

    Understanding where you derive value is critical to building solid roadmaps.

    Measure delivery and success

    Metrics and measurements are powerful tools to drive behavior change and decision making in your organization. However, metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes, so use them with great care. Use metrics judiciously to uncover insights but avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    Build good practices in your selection and use of metrics:

    • Choose the metrics that are as close to measuring the desired outcome as possible.
    • Select the fewest metrics possible and ensure they are of the highest value to your team, the safest from gaming behaviors and unintended consequences, and the easiest to gather and report.
    • Never use metrics for reward or punishment; use them to develop your team.
    • Automate as much metrics gathering and reporting as possible.
    • Focus on trends rather than precise metrics values.
    • Review and change your metrics periodically.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Public Sector & Financial Services

    SOURCE: Info-Tech Interviews

    A tale of two product transformations

    Two of the organizations we interviewed shared the challenges they experienced defining product families and the impact these challenges had on their digital transformations.

    A major financial services organization (2,000+ people in IT) had employed a top-down line of business–focused approach and found itself caught in a vicious circle of moving applications between families to resolve cross-LoB dependencies.

    A similarly sized public sector organization suffered from a similar challenge as grouping from the bottom up based on technology areas led to teams fragmented across multiple business units employing different applications built on similar technology foundations.

    Results

    Both organizations struggled for over a year to structure their product families. This materially delayed key aspects of their product-centric transformation, resulting in additional effort and expenditure delivering solutions piecemeal as opposed to as a part of a holistic product family. It took embracing a hybrid top-down and bottom-up approach and beginning with pilot product families to make progress on their transformation.

    A picture of Cole Cioran is shown.

    Cole Cioran

    Practice Lead,

    Applications Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    There is no such thing as a perfect product-family structure. There will always be trade-offs when you need to manage shifting demand from stakeholder groups spanning customers, business units, process owners, and technology owners.

    Focusing on a single approach to structure your product families inevitably leads to decisions that are readily challenged or are brittle in the face of changing demand.

    The key to accelerating a product-centric transformation is to build a hybrid model that embraces top-down and bottom-up perspectives to structure and evolve product families over time. Add a robust pilot to evaluate the structure and you have the key to unlocking the potential of product delivery in your organization.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    1. Become a Product-Centric Organization

    2. Organize Products Into Product Families

    3. Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    4. Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    5. Build Your Transformation Roadmap and Communication Plan

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm goal and value alignment of products and their product families

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    Phase Outcomes
    • Organizational drivers and goals for a product-centric delivery
    • Definition of product
    • Pilot list of products to scale
    • Product scaling principles
    • Scaling approach and direction
    • Product family mapping
    • Enabling applications
    • Dependent applications
    • Product family canvas
    • Approach for communication of product family strategy
    • Stakeholder management plan
    • Defined key pieces of a product family roadmap
    • An approach to confirming alignment between products and product families
    • Assessment of delivery maturity
    • Approach to structuring product delivery
    • Operating model for product delivery
    • Approach for product family funding
    • Product family transformation roadmap
    • Your plan for communicating your roadmap
    • List of actionable next steps to start on your journey

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook

    Use this supporting workbook to document interim results from a number of exercises that will contribute to your overall strategy.

    A screenshot of the Scale Workbook is shown.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment

    Your strategy needs to encompass your approaches to delivery. Understand where you need to focus using this simple assessment.

    A screenshot of the Scale Readiness Assessment is shown.

    Key deliverable:

    Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook

    Record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and deliver digital products at scale.

    A screenshot of the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook is shown.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Improved product delivery ROI.
    • Improved IT satisfaction and business support.
    • Greater alignment between product delivery and product family goals.
    • Improved alignment between product delivery and organizational models.
    • Better support for Agile/DevOps adoption.

    Business Benefits

    • Increased value realization across product families.
    • Faster delivery of enterprise capabilities.
    • Improved IT satisfaction and business support.
    • Greater alignment between product delivery and product family goals.
    • Uniform understanding of product and product family roadmaps and key milestones.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Align product family metrics to product delivery and value realization.

    Member Outcome Suggested Metric Estimated Impact

    Increase business application satisfaction

    Satisfaction with business applications (CIO Business Vision diagnostic)

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Increase effectiveness of application portfolio management

    Effectiveness of application portfolio management (Management & Governance diagnostic)

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Increase importance and effectiveness of application portfolio

    Importance and effectiveness to business ( Application Portfolio Assessment diagnostic)

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Increase satisfaction of support of business operations

    Support to business (CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Successfully deliver committed work (productivity)

    Number of successful deliveries; burndown

    20% increase within one year after implementation

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1: Become a Product-Centric Organization

    Phase 2: Organize Products Into Product Families

    Phase 3: Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    Phase 4: Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Define products and product families in your context.

    Call #3: Understand the list of products in your context.

    Call #4: Define your scaling principles and goals.

    Call #5: Select a pilot and define your product families.

    Call #6: Understand the product family roadmap as a method to align products to families.

    Call #7: Define components of your product family roadmap and confirm alignment.

    Call #8: Assess your delivery readiness.

    Call #9: Discuss delivery, operating, and funding models relevant to delivering product families.

    Call #10: Wrap up.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Become a Product-Centric Organization

    Day 2

    Organize Products Into Product Families

    Day 3

    Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    Day 4

    Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    Advisory

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your organizational factors driving product-centric delivery.

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory.

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families.

    2.2 Define your product families.

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps.

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication.

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps.

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment.

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness.

    4.2 Understand your delivery options.

    4.3 Determine your operating model.

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery.

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy.

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy.

    5.3 Determine your next steps.

    1. Execute communication plan and product family changes.
    2. Review the pilot family implementation and update the transformation roadmap.
    3. Begin advisory calls for related blueprints.

    Key Deliverables

    1. Organizational drivers and goals for a product-centric delivery
    2. Definition of product
    3. Product scaling principles
    4. Scaling approach and direction
    5. Pilot list of products to scale
    1. Product family mapping
    2. Enabling applications
    3. Dependent applications
    4. Product family canvas
    1. Current approach for communication of product family strategy
    2. List of product family stakeholders and a prioritization plan for communication
    3. Defined key pieces of a product family roadmap
    4. An approach to confirming alignment between products and product families through a shared definition of business value
    1. Assessment results on your organization’s delivery maturity
    2. A preferred approach to structuring product delivery
    3. Your preferred operating model for delivering product families
    4. Understanding your preferred approach for product family funding
    5. Product family transformation roadmap
    6. Your plan for communicating your roadmap
    7. List of actionable next steps to start on your journey
    1. Organizational communication of product families and product family roadmaps
    2. Product family implementation and updated transformation roadmap
    3. Support for product owners, backlog and roadmap management, and other topics

    Phase 1

    Become a Product-Centric Organization

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    1.1.2 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    1.1.3 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    1.2.1 Define “product” in your context

    1.2.2 Identify and establish a pilot list of products

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    Activities

    1.1.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    1.1.2 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    1.1.3 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery
    • List of differences between project and product delivery
    • Goals for product-centric delivery

    1.1.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    30-60 minutes

    1. Identify your pain points in the current delivery model.
    2. What is the root cause of these pain points?
    3. How will a product-centric delivery model fix the root cause?
    4. Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
    Pain Points Root Causes Drivers
    • Lack of ownership
    • Siloed departments
    • Accountability

    Output

    • Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    1.1.2 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    30-60 minutes

    1. Consider project delivery and product delivery.
    2. Discuss what some differences are between the two.
    3. Note: This exercise is not about identifying the advantages and disadvantages of each style of delivery. This is to identify the variation between the two.

    4. Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
    Project Delivery Product Delivery
    Point in time What is changed
    Method of funding changes Needs an owner

    Output

    • List of differences between project and product delivery

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project Product
    Fund projects Funding Fund products or teams
    Line of business sponsor Prioritization Product owner
    Makes specific changes to a product Product management Improves product maturity and support
    Assignment of people to work Work allocation Assignment of work to product teams
    Project manager manages Capacity management Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the difference between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle, and product lifecycle.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Use Agile DevOps principles to expedite product-centric delivery and management

    Delivering products does not necessarily require an Agile DevOps mindset. However, Agile methods facilitate the journey because product thinking is baked into them.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the product delivery maturity and the Agile DevOps used.

    Based on: Ambysoft, 2018

    Organizations start with Waterfall to improve the predictable delivery of product features.

    Iterative development shifts the focus from delivery of features to delivery of user value.

    Agile further shifts delivery to consider ROI. Often, the highest-value backlog items aren’t the ones with the highest ROI.

    Lean and DevOps improve your delivery pipeline by providing full integration between product owners, development teams, and operations.

    CI/CD reduces time in process by allowing release on demand and simplifying release and support activities.

    Although teams will adopt parts of all these stages during their journey, it isn’t until you’ve adopted a fully integrated delivery chain that you’ve become product centric.

    1.1.3 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    30 minutes

    1. Review your list of drivers from exercise 1.1.1 and the differences between project and product delivery from exercise 1.1.2.
    2. Define your goals for achieving a product-centric organization.
    3. Note: Your drivers may have already covered the goals. If so, review if you would like to change the drivers based on your renewed understanding of the differences between project and product delivery.

    Pain PointsRoot CausesDriversGoals
    • Lack of ownership
    • Siloed departments
    • Accountability
    • End-to-end ownership

    Output

    • Goals for product-centric delivery

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 1.2

    Establish your organization’s product inventory

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define “product” in your context

    1.2.2 Identify and establish a pilot list of products

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Your organizational definition of products and services
    • A pilot list of active products

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.

    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.”

    - Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance

    “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.”

    - TechTarget

    “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.”

    - Mark Curphey

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business. This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.”

    – Chad Beier, "How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business:

    • Customer facing, revenue generating

    Technical:

    • IT systems and tools

    Operations

    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.”

    – Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”

    Your product definition should include everything required to support it, not just what users see.

    A picture of an iceburg is shown, showing the ice both above and below the water to demonstrate that the product definition should include everything, not just what users see. On top of the picture are various words to go with the product definition. They inlude: funding, external relationships, adoption, product strategy, stakeholder managment. The product defitions that may not be seen include: Product governance, business functionality, user support, managing and governing data, maintenance and enhancement, R-and-D, requirements analysis and design, code, and knowledge management.

    Establish where product management would be beneficial in the organization

    What does not need product ownership?

    • Individual features
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams

    Characteristics of a discrete product

    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate

    Product capabilities deliver value!

    These are the various facets of a product. As a product owner, you are responsible for managing these facets through your capabilities and activities.

    A flowchart is shown that demonstrates the various facets of a product.

    It is easy to lose sight of what matters when we look at a product from a single point of view. Despite what The Agile Manifesto says, working software is not valuable without the knowledge and support that people need in order to adopt, use, and maintain it. If you build it, they will not come. Product leaders must consider the needs of all stakeholders when designing and building products.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    An image is shown to demonstrate the relationship between the product backlog and the product roadmap.

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown to demonstrate how it is the core to value realization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    What is a product?

    Not all organizations will define products in the same way. Take this as a general example:

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.

    1.2.1 Define “product” in your context

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss what “product” means in your organization.
    2. Create a common, enterprise-wide definition for “product.”
    3. Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    For example:

    • An application, platform, or application family.
    • Discrete items that deliver value to a user/customer.

    Output

    • Your enterprise/organizational definition of products and services

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    1.2.2 Identify and establish a pilot list of products

    1-2 hours

    1. Review any current documented application inventory. If you have these details in an existing document, share it with the team. Select the group of applications for your family scaling pilot.
    2. List your initial application inventory on the Product List tab of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
  • For each of the products listed, add the vision and goals of the product. Refer to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision to learn more about identifying vision and goals or to complete the product vision canvas.
  • You’ll add business capabilities and vision in Phase 2, but you can add these now if they are available in your existing inventory.
  • Output

    • A pilot list of active products

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Phase 2

    Organize Products Into Product Families

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1.1 Define your scaling principles and goals

    2.1.2 Define your pilot product family areas and direction

    2.2.1 Arrange your applications and services into product families

    2.2.2 Define enabling and supporting applications

    2.2.3 Build your product family canvas

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Step 2.1

    Determine your approach to scale product families

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define your scaling principles and goals

    2.1.2 Define your pilot product family areas and direction

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of product scaling principles
    • Scope of product scaling pilot and target areas
    • Scaling approach and direction

    Use consistent terminology for product and service families

    In this blueprint, we refer to any grouping of products or services as a “family.” Your organization may prefer other terms, such as product/service line, portfolio, group, etc. The underlying principles for grouping and managing product families are the same, so define the terminology that fits best with your culture. The same is true for “products” and “services,” which may also be referred to in different terms.

    An example flowchart is displayed to demonstrate the terminology for product and service families.

    A product family is a logical and operational grouping of related products or services. The grouping provides a scaled hierarchy to translate goals, priorities, strategy, and constraints down the grouping while aligning value realization upwards.

    Group product families by related purpose to improve business value

    Families should be scaled by how the products operationally relate to each other, with clear boundaries and common purpose.

    A product family contains...

    • Vision
    • Goals
    • Cumulative roadmap of the products within the family

    A product family can be grouped by...

    • Function
    • Value stream and capability
    • Customer segments or end-user group
    • Strategic purpose
    • Underlying architecture
    • Common technology or support structures
    • And many more
    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the product family and product relations.

    Scale products into related families to improve value delivery and alignment

    Defining product families builds a network of related products into coordinated value delivery streams.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relations between product family and the delivery streams.

    “As with basic product management, scaling an organization is all about articulating the vision and communicating it effectively. Using a well-defined framework helps you align the growth of your organization with that of the company. In fact, how the product organization is structured is very helpful in driving the vision of what you as a product company are going to do.”

    – Rich Mironov, Mironov Consulting

    Product families translate enterprise goals into value-enabling capabilities

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the relationship between enterprise strategy and enabling capabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organizational goals and strategy are achieved through capabilities that deliver value. Your product hierarchy is the mechanism to translate enterprise goals, priorities, and constraints down to the product level where changes can be made.

    Arrange product families by operational groups, not solely by your org chart

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate how to arrange product families by operational groups.

    1. To align product changes with enterprise goals and priorities, you need to organize your products into operational groups based on the capabilities or business functions the product and family support.

    2. Product managers translate these goals, priorities, and constraints into their product families, so they are actionable at the next level, whether that level is another product family or products implementing enhancements to meet these goals.

    3. The product family manager ensures that the product changes enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family, division, and enterprise goals.

    4. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals, which then drives your next set of enterprise goals and strategy.

    Product families need owners with a more strategic focus

    Product Owner

    (More tactical product delivery focus)

    • Backlog management and prioritization
    • Product vision and product roadmap
    • Epic/story definition, refinement in conjunction with business stakeholders
    • Sprint planning with Scrum Master and delivery team
    • Working with Scrum Master to minimize disruption to team velocity
    • Ensuring alignment between business and Scrum teams during sprints
    • Profit and loss (P&L) product analysis and monitoring

    Product Manager

    (More strategic product family focus)

    • Product strategy, positioning, and messaging
    • Product family vision and product roadmap
    • Competitive analysis and positioning
    • New product innovation/definition
    • Release timing and focus (release themes)
    • Ongoing optimization of product-related marketing and sales activities
    • P&L product analysis and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Product owner” and “product manager” are terms that should be adapted to fit your culture and product hierarchy. These are not management relationships but rather a way to structure related products and services that touch the same end users. Use the terms that work best in your culture.

    Download Build a Better Product Owner for role support.

    2.1.1 Define your scaling principles and goals

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss the guiding principles for your product scaling model. Your guiding principles should consider key business priorities, organizational culture, and division/team objectives, such as improving:
    • Business agility and ability to respond to changes and needs.
    • Alignment of product roadmaps to enterprise goals and priorities.
    • Collaboration between stakeholders and product delivery teams.
    • Resource utilization and productivity.
    • The quality and value of products.
    • Coordination between related products and services.

    Output

    • List of product scaling principles

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Start scaling with a pilot

    You will likely use a combination of patterns that work best for each product area. Pilot your product scaling with a domain, team, or functional area before organizing your entire portfolio.

    Learn more about each pattern.

    Discuss the pros and cons of each.

    Select a pilot product area.

    Select a pattern.

    Approach alignment from both directions, validating by the opposite way

    Defining your product families is not a one-way street. Often, we start from either the top or the bottom depending on our scaling principles. We use multiple patterns to find the best arrangement and grouping of our products and families.

    It may be helpful to work partway, then approach your scaling from the opposite direction, meeting in the middle. This way you are taking advantage of the strengths in both approaches.

    Once you have your proposed structure, validate the grouping by applying the principles from the opposite direction to ensure each product and family is in the best starting group.

    As the needs of your organization change, you may need to realign your product families into your new business architecture and operational structure.

    A top-down alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You have a business architecture defined or clear market/functional grouping of value streams.

    A bottom-up alignment example is shown.

    When to use: You are starting from an Application Portfolio Management application inventory to build or validate application families.

    Top-down examples: Start with your enterprise structure or market grouping

    A top-down example flowchart is shown.

    Examples:

    Market Alignment
    • Consumer Banking
      • DDA: Checking, Savings, Money Market
      • Revolving Credit: Credit Cards, Line of Credit
      • Term Credit: Mortgage, Auto, Boat, Installment
    Enterprise Applications
    • Human Resources
      • Benefits: Health, Dental, Life, Retirement
      • Human Capital: Hiring, Performance, Training
      • Hiring: Posting, Interviews, Onboarding
    Shared Service
    • End-User Support
      • Desktop: New Systems, Software, Errors
      • Security: Access Requests, Password Reset, Attestations
    Business Architecture
    • Value Stream
      • Capability
        • Applications
        • Services

    Bottom-up examples: Start with your inventory

    Based on your current inventory, start organizing products and services into related groups using one of the five scaling models discussed in the next step.

    A bottom-up example flowchart is shown.

    Examples:

    Technical Grouping
    • Custom Apps: Java, .NET, Python
    • Cloud: Azure, AWS, Virtual Environments
    • Low Code: ServiceNow, Appian
    Functional/Capability Grouping
    • CRM: Salesforce, Microsoft CRM
    • Security Platforms: IAM, SSO, Scanning
    • Workflow: Remedy, ServiceNow
    Shared Services Grouping
    • Workflow: Appian, Pega, ServiceNow
    • Collaboration: SharePoint, Teams
    • Data: Dictionary, Lake, BI/Reporting

    2.1.2 Define your pilot product family areas and direction

    30-60 minutes

    1. Using your inventory of products for your pilot, consider the top-down and bottom-up approaches.
    2. Identify areas where you will begin arranging your product into families.
    3. Prioritize these pilot areas into waves:
      1. First pilot areas
      2. Second pilot areas
      3. Third pilot areas
    4. Discuss and decide whether a top-down or bottom-up approach is the best place to start for each pilot group.
    5. Prioritize your pilot families in the order in which you want to organize them. This is a guide to help you get started, and you may change the order during the scaling pattern exercise.

    Output

    • Scope of product scaling pilot and target areas

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 2.2

    Define your product families

    Activities

    2.2.1 Arrange your applications and services into product families

    2.2.2 Define enabling and supporting applications

    2.2.3 Build your product family canvas

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers’
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product family mapping
    • Product families
    • Enabling applications
    • Dependent applications
    • Product family canvas

    Use three perspectives to guide scaling pattern selection

    • One size does not fit all. There is no single or static product model that fits all product teams.
    • Structure relationships based on your organizational needs and capabilities.
    • Be flexible. Product ownership is designed to enable value delivery.
    • Avoid structures that promote proxy product ownership.
    • Make decisions based on products and services, not people. Then assign people to the roles.
    Alignment perspectives:

    Value Stream

    Align products based on the defined sources of value for a collection of products or services.

    For example: Wholesale channel for products that may also be sold directly to consumers, such as wireless network service.

    Users/Consumers

    Align products based on a common group of users or product consumers.

    For example: Consumer vs. small business vs. enterprise customers in banking, insurance, and healthcare.

    Common Domain

    Align products based on a common domain knowledge or skill set needed to deliver and support the products.

    For example: Applications in a shared service framework supporting other products.

    Leverage patterns for scaling products

    Organizing your products and families is easier when leveraging these grouping patterns. Each is explained in greater detail on the following slides

    Value Stream AlignmentEnterprise ApplicationsShared ServicesTechnicalOrganizational Alignment
    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products
    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > ModulesSupporting: Job board, healthcare administrator
    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools
    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network
    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure no longer needed because the management team owns product management role

    Select the best family pattern to improve alignment

    A flowchart is shown on how to select the best family pattern to improve alignment.

    Use scenarios to help select patterns

    Top-Down

    Bottom-Up

    We have a business architecture defined.

    (See Document Your Business Architecture and industry reference architectures for help.)

    Start with your business architecture

    Start with market segments

    We want to be more customer first or customer centric.

    Start with market segments

    Our organization has rigid lines of business and organizational boundaries.

    Start with LoB structure

    Most products are specific to a business unit or division. Start with LoB structure

    Products are aligned to people, not how we are operationally organized.

    Start with market or LoB structure

    We are focusing on enterprise or enabling applications.

    1. Start with enterprise app and service team

    2. Align supporting apps

    We already have applications and services grouped into teams but want to evaluate if they are grouped in the best families.

    Validate using multiple patterns

    Validate using multiple patterns

    Our applications and services are shared across the enterprise or support multiple products, value streams, or shared capabilities.

    Our applications or services are domain, knowledge, or technology specific.

    Start by grouping inventory

    We are starting from an application inventory. (See the APM Research Center for help.)

    Start by grouping inventory

    Pattern: Value Stream – Capability

    Grouping products into capabilities defined in your business architecture is recommended because it aligns people/processes (services) and products (tools) into their value stream and delivery grouping. This requires an accurate capability map to implement.

    Example:

    • Healthcare is delivered through a series of distinct value streams (top chevrons) and shared services supporting all streams.
    • Diagnosing Health Needs is executed through the Admissions, Testing, Imaging, and Triage capabilities.
    • Products and services are needed to deliver each capability.
    • Shared capabilities can also be grouped into families to better align capability delivery and maturity to ensure that the enterprise goals and needs are being met in each value stream the capabilities support.
    An example is shown to demonstrate how to group products into capabilities.

    Sample business architecture/ capability map for healthcare

    A sample business architecture/capability map for healthcare is shown.

    Your business architecture maps your value streams (value delivered to your customer or user personas) to the capabilities that deliver that value. A capability is the people, processes, and/or tools needed to deliver each value function.

    Defining capabilities are specific to a value stream. Shared capabilities support multiple value streams. Enabling capabilities are core “keep the lights on” capabilities and enterprise functions needed to run your organization.

    See Info-Tech’s industry coverage and reference architectures.

    Download Document Your Business Architecture

    Pattern: Value Stream – Market

    Market/Customer Segment Alignment focuses products into the channels, verticals, or market segments in the same way customers and users view the organization.

    An example is shown to demonstrate how products can be placed into channels, verticals, or market segments.

    Example:

    • Customers want one stop to solve all their issues, needs, and transactions.
    • Banking includes consumer, small business, and enterprise.
    • Consumer banking can be grouped by type of financial service: deposit accounts (checking, savings, money market), revolving credit (credit cards, lines of credit), term lending (mortgage, auto, installment).
    • Each group of services has a unique set of applications and services that support the consumer product, with some core systems supporting the entire relationship.

    Pattern: Value Stream – Line of Business (LoB)

    Line of Business Alignment uses the operational structure as the basis for organizing products and services into families that support each area.

    An example of the operational structure as the basis is shown.

    Example:

    • LoB alignment favors continuity of services, tools, and skills based on internal operations over unified customer services.
    • A hospital requires care and services from many different operational teams.
    • Emergency services may be internally organized by the type of care and emergency to allow specialized equipment and resources to diagnose and treat the patients, relying on support teams for imaging and diagnostics to support care.
    • This model may be efficient and logical from an internal viewpoint but can cause gaps in customer services without careful coordination between product teams.

    Pattern: Enterprise Applications

    A division or group delivers enabling capabilities, and the team’s operational alignment maps directly to the modules/components of an enterprise application and other applications that support the specific business function.

    An example flowchart is shown with enterprise applications.

    Example:

    • Human resources is one corporate function. Within HR, however, there are subfunctions that operate independently.
    • Each operational team is supported by one or more applications or modules within a primary HR system.
    • Even though the teams work independently, the information they manage is shared with or ties into processes used by other teams. Coordination of efforts helps provide a higher level of service and consistency.

    For additional information about HRMS, please download Get the Most Out of Your HRMS.

    Pattern: Shared Services

    Grouping by service type, knowledge area, or technology allows for specialization while families align service delivery to shared business capabilities.

    An example is shown with the shared services.

    Example:

    • Recommended for governance, risk, and compliance; infrastructure; security; end-user support; and shared platforms (workflow, collaboration, imaging/record retention). Direct hierarchies do not necessarily exist within the shared service family.
    • Service groupings are common for service owners (also known as support managers, operations managers, etc.).
    • End-user ticketing comes through a common request system, is routed to the team responsible for triage, and then is routed to a team for resolution.
    • Collaboration tools and workflow tools are enablers of other applications, and product families might support multiple apps or platforms delivering that shared capability.

    Pattern: Technical

    Technical grouping is used in Shared Services or as a family grouping method within a Value Stream Alignment (Capability, Market, LoB) product family.

    An example of technical grouping is shown.

    Example:

    • Within Shared Services, Technical product grouping focuses on domains requiring specific experience and knowledge not common to typical product teams. This can also support insourcing so other product teams do not have to build their own capacity.
    • Within a Market or LoB team, these same technical groups support specific tools and services within that product family only while also specializing in the business domain.
    • Alignment into tool, platform, or skill areas improves delivery capabilities and resource scalability.

    Pattern: Organizational Alignment

    Eventually in your product hierarchy, the management structure functions as the product management team.

    • When planning your product families, be careful determining when to merge product families into the management team structure.
    • Since the goal of scaling products into families is to align product delivery roadmaps to enterprise goals and enable value realization, the primary focus of scaling must be operational.
    • Alignment to the organizational chart should only occur when the product families report into an HR manager who has ownership for the delivery and value realization for all product and services within that family.
    Am example of organizational alignment is shown.

    Download Build a Better Product Owner for role support.

    2.2.1 Arrange your applications and services into product families

    1-4 hours

    1. (Optional but recommended) Define your value streams and capabilities on the App Capability List tab in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
    2. On the Product Families tab, build your product family hierarchy using the following structure:
    • Value Stream > Capability > Family 3 > Family 2 > Family 1 > Product/Service.
    • If you are not using a Value Stream > Capability grouping, you can leave these blank for now.
    A screenshot of the App Capability List in the Deliver Disital Products at Scale Workbook is shown.
  • If you previously completed an application inventory using one of our application portfolio management (APM) resources, you can paste values here. Do not paste cells, as Excel may create a cell reference or replace the current conditional formatting.
  • Output

    • Product family mapping

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    2.2.2 Define enabling and supporting applications

    1-4 hours

    1. Review your grouping from the reverse direction or with different patterns to validate the grouping. Consider each grouping.
    • Does it operationally align the products and families to best cascade enterprise goals and priorities while validating enabling capabilities?
    • In the next phase, when defining your roadmap strategy, you may wish to revisit this phase and adjust as needed.
  • Select and enter enabling or dependent applications to the right of each product.
  • A screenshot from the Deliver Digitial Products at Scale Workbook is shown.

    Output

    • Product families
    • Enabling applications
    • Dependent applications

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Use a product canvas to define key elements of your product family

    A product canvas is an excellent tool for quickly providing important information about a product family.

    Product owners/managers

    Provide target state to align child product and product family roadmaps.

    Stakeholders

    Communicate high-level concepts and key metrics with leadership teams and stakeholders.

    Strategy teams

    Use the canvas as a tool for brainstorming, scoping, and ideation.

    Operations teams

    Share background overview to align operational team with end-user value.

    Impacted users

    Refine communication strategy and support based on user impacts and value realization.

    Download Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.

    Product Family Canvas: Define your core information

    A screenshot of the product family canvas is shown.

    Problem Statement: The problem or need the product family is addressing

    Business Goals: List of business objectives or goals for the product

    Personas/Customers/Users: List of groups who consume the product/service

    Vision: Vision, unique value proposition, elevator pitch, or positioning statement

    Child Product Families or Products: List of product families or products within this family

    Stakeholders: List of key resources, stakeholders, and teams needed to support the product or service

    Download Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.

    2.2.3 Build your product family canvas

    30-60 minutes

    1. Complete the following fields to build your product family canvas in your Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook:
      1. Product family name
      2. Product family owner
      3. Parent product family name
      4. Problem that the family is intending to solve (For additional help articulating your problem statement, refer to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.)
      5. Product family vision/goals (For additional help writing your vision, refer to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision..)
      6. Child product or product family name(s)
      7. Primary customers/users (For additional help with your product personas, download and complete Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision..)
      8. Stakeholders (If you aren’t sure who your stakeholders are, fill this in after completing the stakeholder management exercises in phase 3.)

    Output

    • Product family canvas

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    A screenshot of the Product Family Canvas is shown.

    Phase 3

    Ensure Alignment Between Products and Families

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.1.1 Evaluate your current approach to product family communication
    • 3.2.1 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • 3.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories
    • 3.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 3.3.1 Define the communication objectives and audience of your product family roadmaps
    • 3.3.2 Identify the level of detail that you want your product family roadmap artifacts to represent
    • 3.4.1 Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 3.1

    Leverage product family roadmaps

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate your current approach to product family communication

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of what a product family roadmap is
    • Comparison of Info-Tech’s position on product families to how you currently communicate about product families

    Aligning products’ goals with families

    Without alignment between product family goals and their underlying products, you aren’t seeing the full picture.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown to demonstrate how it is the core to value realization.

    Adapted from: Pichler," What Is Product Management?"

    • Aligning product strategy to enterprise goals needs to happen through the product family.
    • A product roadmap has traditionally been used to express the overall intent and visualization of the product strategy.
    • Connecting the strategy of your products with your enterprise goals can be done through the product family roadmap.

    Leveraging product family roadmaps

    It’s more than a set of colorful boxes.

      ✓ Lays out a strategy for your product family.

      ✓ Is a statement of intent for your family of products.

      ✓ Communicates direction for the entire product family and product teams.

      ✓ Directly connects to the organization’s goals.

    However, it is not:

      x Representative of a hard commitment.

      x A simple combination of your current product roadmaps.

      x A technical implementation plan.

    Product family roadmaps

    A roadmap is shown without any changes.

    There is no such thing as a roadmap that never changes.

    Your product family roadmap represents a broad statement of intent and high-level tactics to get closer to the organization’s goals.

    A roadmap is shown with changes.

    All good product family roadmaps embrace change!

    Your strategic intentions are subject to volatility, especially those planned further in the future. The more costs you incur in planning, the more you leave yourself exposed to inefficiency and waste if those plans change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A good product family roadmap is intended to manage and communicate the inevitable changes as a result of market volatility and changes in strategy.

    Product family roadmaps are more strategic by nature

    While individual product roadmaps can be different levels of tactical or strategic depending on a variety of market factors, your options are more limited when defining roadmaps for product families.

    An image is displayed to show the relationships between product and product family, and how the roadmaps could be tactical or strategic.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Roadmaps for your product family are, by design, less detailed. This does not mean they aren’t actionable! Your product family roadmap should be able to communicate clear intentions around the future delivery of value in both the near and long term.

    Reminder: Your enterprise vision provides alignment for your product family roadmaps

    Not knowing the difference between enterprise vision and goals will prevent you from both dreaming big and achieving your dream.

    Your enterprise vision represents your “north star” – where you want to go. It represents what you want to do.

    • Your enterprise goals represent what you need to achieve in order to reach your enterprise vision.
    • A key element of operationalizing your vision.
    • Your strategy, initiatives, and features will align with one or more goals.

    Download Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision for support.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Audience

    Business/ IT Leaders

    Users/Customers

    Delivery Teams

    Roadmap View

    Portfolio

    Product Family

    Technology

    Objectives

    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority products

    To visualize and validate product strategy

    To coordinate broad technology and architecture decisions

    Artifacts

    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual products, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level.

    Artifacts are generally grouped by product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals.

    Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of technical capabilities that support the broader delivery of value for the product family.

    Typical elements of a product family roadmap

    While there are others, these represent what will commonly appear across most family-based roadmaps.

    An example is shown to highlight the typical elements of a product family roadmap.

    GROUP/CATEGORY: Groups are collections of artifacts. In a product family context, these are usually product family goals, value streams, or products.

    ARTIFACT: An artifact is one of many kinds of tangible by-products produced during the delivery of products. For a product family, the artifacts represented are capabilities or value streams.

    MILESTONE: Points in the timeline when established sets of artifacts are complete. This is a critical tool in the alignment of products in a given family.

    TIME HORIZON: Separated periods within the projected timeline covered by the roadmap.

    3.1.1 Evaluate your current approach to product family communication

    1-2 hours

    1. Write down how you currently communicate your intentions for your products and family of products.
    2. Compare and contrast this to how this blueprint defines product families and product family roadmaps.
    3. Consider the similarities and the key gaps between your current approach and Info-Tech’s definition of product family roadmaps.

    Output

    • Your documented approach to product family communication

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 3.2

    Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    Activities

    3.2.1 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    3.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    3.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Info-Tech Note

    If you have done the stakeholder exercises in Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision or Build a Better Product Owner u don’t need to repeat the exercises from scratch.

    You can bring the results forward and update them based on your prior work.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers
    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers
    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Reminder: Not everyone is a user!

    USERS

    Individuals who directly obtain value from usage of the product.

    STAKEHOLDERS

    Represent individuals who provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what you will be able to accomplish.

    FUNDERS

    Individuals both external and internal that fund the product initiative. Sometimes they are lumped in as stakeholders. However, motivations can be different.

    For more information, see Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.

    A stakeholder strategy is a key part of product family attainment

    A roadmap is only “good” when it effectively communicates to stakeholders. Understanding your stakeholders is the first step in delivering great product family roadmaps.

    A picture is shown that has 4 characters with puzzle pieces, each repersenting a key to product family attainment. The four keys are: Stakeholder management, product lifecycle, project delivery, and operational support.

    Create a stakeholder network map for product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    An example stakeholder network map is displayed.

    Legend

    Black arrows: indicate the direction of professional influence

    Dashed green arrows: indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product family operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantial relationships with your stakeholders.

    3.2.1 Visualize interrelationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    60 minutes

    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
    • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
    • Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.

    Output

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product leaders categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    An example stakeholder prioritization map is shown.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    3.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    30-60 minutes

    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on your product as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    The example stakeholder prioritization map is shown with the stakeholders grouped into the categories.

    Output

    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Level of Support

    Stakeholder Category

    Supporter

    Evangelist

    Neutral Blocker

    Player

    Critical

    High

    High

    Critical

    Mediator

    Medium

    Low

    Low

    Medium

    Noisemaker

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    High

    Spectator

    Low

    Irrelevant

    Irrelevant

    Low

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by answering the following question: How likely is it that this stakeholder would recommend your product?

    These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention.

    3.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How likely is it that this stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.

    Stakeholder

    Category

    Level of Support

    Prioritization

    CMO

    Spectator

    Neutral

    Irrelevant

    CIO

    Player

    Supporter

    Critical

    Output

    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    An example is shown to demonstrate how to define strategies to engage staeholders by type.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players

    High influence, high interest – actively engage

    Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.

    Mediators

    High influence, low interest – keep satisfied

    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.

    Noisemakers

    Low influence, high interest – keep informed

    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.

    Spectators

    Low influence, low interest – monitor

    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers, while ensuring the needs of Mediators and Players are met.

    Step 3.3

    Configure your product family roadmaps

    Activities

    3.3.1 Define the communication objectives and audience of your product family roadmaps

    3.3.2 Identify the level of detail that you want your product family roadmap artifacts to represent

    Info-Tech Note

    If you are unfamiliar with product roadmaps, Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision contains more detailed exercises we recommend you review before focusing on product family roadmaps.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the key communication objectives and target stakeholder audience for your product family roadmaps
    • A position on the level of detail you want your product family roadmap to operate at

    Your communication objectives are linked to your audience; ensure you know your audience and speak their language

    I want to... I need to talk to... Because they are focused on...
    ALIGN PRODUCT TEAMS Get my delivery teams on the same page. Architects Products Owners PRODUCTS A product that delivers value against a common set of goals and objectives.
    SHOWCASE CHANGES Inform users and customers of product strategy. Bus. Process Owners End Users FUNCTIONALITY A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.
    ARTICULATE RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS Inform the business of product development requirements. IT Management Business Stakeholders FUNDING An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    3.3.1 Define the communication objectives and audience of your product family roadmaps

    30-60 minutes

    1. Explicitly state the communication objectives and audience of your roadmap.
    • Think of finishing this sentence: This roadmap is designed for … in order to …
  • You may want to consider including more than a single audience or objective.
  • Example:
  • Roadmap

    Audience

    Statement

    Internal Strategic Roadmap

    Internal Stakeholders

    This roadmap is designed to detail the strategy for delivery. It tends to use language that represents internal initiatives and names.

    Customer Strategic Roadmap

    External Customers

    This roadmap is designed to showcase and validate future strategic plans and internal teams to coordinate the development of features and enablers.

    Output

    • Roadmap list with communication objectives and audience

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    The length of time horizons on your roadmap depend on the needs of the underlying products or families

    Info-Tech InsightAn example timeline is shown.

    Given the relationship between product and product family roadmaps, the product family roadmap needs to serve the time horizons of its respective products.

    This translates into product family roadmaps with timelines that, at a minimum, cover the full scope of the respective product roadmaps.

    Based on your communication objectives, consider different ways to visualize your product family roadmap

    Swimline/Stream-Based roadmap example.

    Swimlane/Stream-Based – Understanding when groups of items intend to be delivered.

    An example is shown that has an overall plan with rough intentions around delivery.

    Now, Next, Later – Communicate an overall plan with rough intentions around delivery without specific date ranges.

    An example of a sunrise roadmap is shown.

    Sunrise Roadmap – Articulate the journey toward a given target state across multiple streams.

    Before connecting your family roadmap to products, think about what each roadmap typically presents

    An example of a product family roadmap is shown and how it can be connected to the products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product family roadmap and product roadmap tell different stories. The product family roadmap represents the overall connection of products to the enterprise strategy, while the product roadmap focuses on the fulfillment of the product’s vision.

    Example: Connecting your product family roadmaps to product roadmaps

    Your roadmaps should be connected at an artifact level that is common between both. Typically, this is done with capabilities, but you can do it at a more granular level if an understanding of capabilities isn’t available.

    Example is shown connecting product family roadmaps to product roadmaps.

    3.3.2 Identify the level of detail that you want your product family roadmap artifacts to represent

    30-60 minutes

    1. Consider the different available artifacts for a product family (goals, value stream, capabilities).
    2. List the roadmaps that you wish to represent.
    3. Based on how you currently articulate details on your product families, consider:
    • What do you want to use as the level of granularity for the artifact? Consider selecting something that has a direct connection to the product roadmap itself (for example, capabilities).
    • For some roadmaps you will want to categorize your artifacts – what would work best in those cases?

    Examples

    Level of Hierarchy

    Artifact Type

    Roadmap 1

    Goals

    Capability

    Roadmap 2

    Roadmap 3

    Output

    • Details on your roadmap granularity

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Step 3.4

    Confirm goal and value alignment of products and their product families

    Activities

    3.4.1 Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Validation of the alignment between your product families and products

    Confirming product to family value alignment

    It isn’t always obvious whether you have the right value delivery alignment between products and product families.

    An example is shown to demonstrate product-to-family-alignment.

    Product-to-family alignment can be validated in two different ways:

    1. Initial value alignment
    2. Confirm the perceived business value at a family level is aligned with what is being delivered at a product level.

    3. Value measurement during the lifetime of the product
    4. Validate family roadmap attainment through progression toward the specified product goals.

    For more detail on calculating business value, see Build a Value Measurement Framework.

    To evaluate a product family’s contribution, you need a common definition of value

    Why is having a common value measure important?

    CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic

    A stacked bar graph is shown to demonstrate CIO-CEO Alignment Diagnostic. A bar titled Business Value Metrics is highlighted. 51% had some improvement necessary and 32% had significant improvement necessary.

    Over 700 Info-Tech members have implemented the Balanced Value Measurement Framework.

    “The cynic knows the price of everything and the value of nothing.”

    – Oscar Wilde

    “Price is what you pay. Value is what you get.”

    – Warren Buffett

    Understanding where you derive value is critical to building solid roadmaps.

    All value in your product family is not created equal

    Business value is the value of the business outcome the application produces and how effective the product is at producing that outcome. Dissecting value by the benefit type and the value source allows you to see the many ways in which a product or service brings value to your organization. Capture the value of your products in short, concise statements, like an elevator pitch.

    A business value matrix is shown.

    Increase Revenue

    Product or service functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue.

    Reduce Costs

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which your product limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Enhance Services

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    Financial Benefits vs. Improved Capabilities

    • Financial Benefit refers to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often quite tangible.
    • Human Benefit refers to how a product or service can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    • Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.
    • Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    3.4.1 Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    30-60 minutes

    1. Draw the 2x2 Business Value Matrix on a flip chart or open the Business Value Matrix tab in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook to use in this exercise.
    2. Brainstorm and record the different types of business value that your product and product family produce on the sticky notes (one item per sticky note).
    3. As a team, evaluate how the product value delivered contributes to the product family value delivered. Note any gaps or differences between the two.

    Download and complete Build a Value Measurement Framework for full support in focusing product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    A business value matrix is shown.

    Output

    • Confirmation of value alignment between product families and their respective products

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Example: Validate business value alignment between products and their product families

    An example of a business value matrix is shown.

    Measure product value with metrics tied to your business value sources and objectives

    Assign metrics to your business value sources

    Business Value Category

    Source Examples

    Metric Examples

    Profit Generation

    Revenue

    Customer Lifetime Value (LTV)

    Data Monetization

    Average Revenue per User (ARPU)

    Cost Reduction

    Reduce Labor Costs

    Contract Labor Cost

    Reduce Overhead

    Effective Cost per Install (eCPI)

    Service Enablement

    Limit Failure Risk

    Mean Time to Mitigate Fixes

    Collaboration

    Completion Time Relative to Deadline

    Customer and Market Reach

    Customer Satisfaction

    Net Promoter Score

    Customer Trends

    Number of Customer Profiles

    The importance of measuring business value through metrics

    The better an organization is at using business value metrics to evaluate IT’s performance, the more satisfied the organization is with IT’s performance as a business partner. In fact, those that say they’re effective at business value metrics have satisfaction scores that are 30% higher than those that believe significant improvements are necessary (Info-Tech’s IT diagnostics).

    Assigning metrics to your prioritized values source will allow you to more accurately measure a product’s value to the organization and identify optimization opportunities. See Info-Tech’s Related Research: Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation blueprint for more information.

    Your product delivery pipeline connects your roadmap with business value realization

    The effectiveness of your product roadmap needs to be evaluated based on delivery capacity and throughput.

    A product roadmap is shown with additional details to demonstrate delivery capacity and throughput.

    When thinking about product delivery metrics, be careful what you ask for…

    As the saying goes “Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.”

    Metrics are powerful because they drive behavior.

    • Metrics are also dangerous because they often lead to unintended negative outcomes.
    • Choose your metrics carefully to avoid getting what you asked for instead of what you intended.

    It’s a cautionary tale that also offers a low-risk path through the complexities of metrics use.

    For more information on the use (and abuse) of metrics, see Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively.

    Measure delivery and success

    Metrics and measurements are powerful tools to drive behavior change and decision making in your organization. However, metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes, so use them with great care. Use metrics judiciously to uncover insights but avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    Build good practices in your selection and use of metrics:

    • Choose the metrics that are as close to measuring the desired outcome as possible.
    • Select the fewest metrics possible and ensure they are of the highest value to your team, the safest from gaming behaviors and unintended consequences, and the easiest to gather and report.
    • Never use metrics for reward or punishment; use them to develop your team.
    • Automate as much metrics gathering and reporting as possible.
    • Focus on trends rather than precise metrics values.
    • Review and change your metrics periodically.

    Phase 4

    Bridge the Gap Between Product Families and Delivery

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    4.1.1 Assess your organization’s readiness to deliver digital product families

    4.2.1 Consider pros and cons for each delivery model relative to how you wish to deliver

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    4.4.1 Discuss traditional vs. product-centric funding methods

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Assess the impacts of product-centric delivery on your teams and org design

    Product delivery can exist within any org structure or delivery model. However, when making the shift toward product management, consider optimizing your org design and product team structure to match your capacity and throughput needs.

    A flowchart is shown to see how the impacts of product-centric delivery can impact team and org designs.

    Info-Tech Note

    Realigning your delivery pipeline and org design takes significant effort and time. Although we won’t solve these questions here, it’s important to identify factors in your current or future models that improve value delivery.

    Step 4.1

    Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    Activities

    4.1.1 Assess your organization’s readiness to deliver digital product families

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the group’s maturity level when it comes to product delivery

    Maturing product practices enables delivery of product families, not just products or projects

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the differences between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle, and product lifecycle.

    Just like product owners, product family owners are needed to develop long-term product value, strategy, and delivery. Projects can still be used as the source of funding and change management; however, the product family owner must manage product releases and operational support. The focus of this section will be on aligning product families to one or more releases.

    4.1.1 Assess your organization’s readiness to deliver digital product families

    30-60 minutes

    1. For each question in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment, ask yourself which of the five associated maturity statements most closely describes your organization.
    2. As a group, agree on your organization’s current readiness score for each of the six categories.

    A screenshot of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment is shown.

    Output

    • Product delivery readiness score

    Participants

    • Product managers
    • Product owners

    Download the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Readiness Assessment.

    Value realization is constrained by your product delivery pipeline

    Value is realized through changes made at the product level. Your pipeline dictates the rate, quality, and prioritization of your backlog delivery. This pipeline connects your roadmap goals to the value the goals are intended to provide.

    An example of a product roadmap is shown with the additional details of the product delivery pipeline being highlighted.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    PRODUCT STRATEGY

    What are the artifacts?

    What are you saying?

    Defined at the family level?

    Defined at the product level?

    Vision

    I want to...

    Strategic focus

    Delivery focus

    Goals

    To get there we need to...

    Roadmap

    To achieve our goals, we’ll deliver...

    Backlog

    The work will be done in this order...

    Release Plan

    We will deliver in the following ways...

    Step 4.2

    Understand your delivery options

    Activities

    4.2.1 Consider pros and cons for each delivery model relative to how you wish to deliver

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the different team configuration options when it comes to delivery and their relevance to how you currently work

    Define the scope of your product delivery strategy

    The goal of your product delivery strategy is to establish streamlined, enforceable, and standardized product management and delivery capabilities that follow industry best practices. You will need to be strategic in how and where you implement your changes because this will set the stage for future adoption. Strategically select the most appropriate products, roles, and areas of your organization to implement your new or enhanced capabilities and establish a foundation for scaling.

    Successful product delivery requires people who are knowledgeable about the products they manage and have a broad perspective of the entire delivery process, from intake to delivery, and of the product portfolio. The right people also have influence with other teams and stakeholders who are directly or indirectly impacted by product decisions. Involve team members who have expertise in the development, maintenance, and management of your selected products and stakeholders who can facilitate and promote change.

    Learn about different patterns to structure and resource your product delivery teams

    The primary goal of any product delivery team is to improve the delivery of value for customers and the business based on your product definition and each product’s demand. Each organization will have different priorities and constraints, so your team structure may take on a combination of patterns or may take on one pattern and then transform into another.

    Delivery Team Structure Patterns

    How Are Resources and Work Allocated?

    Functional Roles

    Teams are divided by functional responsibilities (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk) and arranged according to their placement in the software development lifecycle (SDLC).

    Completed work is handed off from team to team sequentially as outlined in the organization’s SDLC.

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Teams are created by pulling the necessary resources from pools (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk).

    Resources are pulled whenever the work requires specific skills or pushed to areas where product demand is high.

    Product or System

    Teams are dedicated to the development, support, and management of specific products or systems.

    Work is directly sent to the teams who are directly managing the product or directly supporting the requester.

    Skills and Competencies

    Teams are grouped based on skills and competencies related to technology (e.g. Java, mobile, web) or familiarity with business capabilities (e.g. HR, finance).

    Work is directly sent to the teams who have the IT and business skills and competencies to complete the work.

    See the flow of work through each delivery team structure pattern

    Four delivery team structures are shown. The four are: functional roles, shared service and resource pools, product or system, and skills and competencies.

    Staffing models for product teams

    Functional Roles Shared Service and Resource Pools Product or System Skills and Competencies
    A screenshot of the functional roles from the flow of work example is shown. A screenshot of the shared service and resource pools from the flow of work example is shown. A screenshot of the product or system from the flow of work example is shown. A screenshot of skills and competencies from the flow of work example is shown.
    Pros
      ✓ Specialized resources are easier to staff

      ✓ Product knowledge is maintained

      ✓ Flexible demand/capacity management

      ✓ Supports full utilization of resources

      ✓ Teams are invested in the full life of the product

      ✓ Standing teams enable continuous improvement

      ✓ Teams are invested in the technology

      ✓ Standing teams enable continuous improvement

    Cons
      x Demand on specialists can create bottlenecks

      x Creates barriers to collaboration

      x Unavailability of resources can lead to delays

      x Product knowledge can be lost as resources move

      x Changes in demand can lead to downtime

      x Cross-functional skills make staffing a challenge

      x Technology bias can lead to the wrong solution

      x Resource contention when team supports multiple solutions

    Considerations
      ! Product owners must break requests down into very small components to support Agile delivery as mini-Waterfalls
      ! Product owners must identify specialist requirements in the roadmap to ensure resources are available
      ! Product owners must ensure that there is a sufficient backlog of valuable work ready to keep the team utilized
      ! Product owners must remain independent of technology to ensure the right solution is built
    Use Case
    • When you lack people with cross-functional skills
    • When you have specialists such as those skilled in security and operations who will not have full-time work on the product
    • When you have people with cross-functional skills who can self-organize around the request
    • When you have a significant investment in a specific technology stack

    4.2.1 Consider pros and cons for each delivery model relative to how you wish to deliver

    1. Document your current staffing model for your product delivery teams.
    2. Evaluate the pros and cons of each model, as specified on the previous slide, relative to how you currently work.
    3. What would be the ideal target state for your team? If one model does not completely fit, is there a hybrid option worth considering? For example: Product-Based combined with Shared Service/Resource Pools for specific roles.

    Functional Roles

    Teams are divided by functional responsibilities (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk) and arranged according to their placement in the software development lifecycle (SDLC).

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Teams are created by pulling the necessary resources from pools (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk).

    Product or System

    Teams are dedicated to the development, support, and management of specific products or systems.

    Skills and Competencies

    Teams are grouped based on skills and competencies related to technology (e.g. Java, mobile, web) or familiarity with business capabilities (e.g. HR, finance).

    Output

    • An understanding of pros and cons for each delivery model and the ideal target state for your team

    Participants

    • Product managers
    • Product owners

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Step 4.3

    Determine your operating model

    Activities

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the potential operating models and what will work best for your organization

    Reminder: Patterns for scaling products

    The alignment of your product families should be considered in your operating model.

    Value Stream Alignment

    Enterprise Applications

    Shared Services

    Technical

    Organizational Alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products
    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > ModulesSupporting: Job board, healthcare administrator
    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools
    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network
    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure no longer needed because the management team owns product management role

    Ensure consistency in the application of your design principles with a coherent operating model

    What is an operating model?

    An operating model is an abstract visualization, used like an architect’s blueprint, that depicts how structures and resources are aligned and integrated to deliver on the organization’s strategy. It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint before embarking on detailed organizational design

    The visual should highlight which capabilities are critical to attaining strategic goals and clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization.

    An example of an operating model is shown.

    For more information, see Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure.

    Weigh the pros and cons of IT operating models to find the best fit

    1. LoB/Product Aligned – Decentralized Model: Line of Business, Geographically, Product, or Functionally Aligned
    2. A decentralized IT operating model that embeds specific functions within LoBs/product teams and provides cross-organizational support for their initiatives.

    3. Hybrid Functional: Functional/Product Aligned
    4. A best-of-both-worlds model that balances the benefits of centralized and decentralized approaches to achieve both customer responsiveness and economies of scale.

    5. Hybrid Service Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model
    6. A model that supports what is commonly referred to as a matrix organization, organizing by highly related service categories and introducing the role of the service owner.

    7. Centralized: Plan-Build-Run
    8. A highly typical IT operating model that focuses on centralized strategic control and oversight in delivering cost-optimized and effective solutions.

    9. Centralized: Demand-Develop-Service
    10. A centralized IT operating model that lends well to more mature operating environments. Aimed at leveraging economies of scale in an end-to-end services delivery model.

    There are many different operating models. LoB/Product Aligned and Hybrid Functional align themselves most closely with how products and product families are typically delivered.

    Decentralized Model: Line of Business, Geographically, Product, or Functionally Aligned

    An example of a decentralized model is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Organization around functions (FXN) allows for diversity in approach in how areas are run to best serve specific business units needs.
    • Each functional line exists largely independently, with full capacity and control to deliver service at the committed service level agreements.
    • Highly responsive to shifting needs and demands with direct connection to customers and all stages of the solution development lifecycle.
    • Accelerates decision making by delegating authority lower into the FXN.
    • Promotes a flatter organization with less hierarchy and more direct communication with the CIO.
    • Less synergy and integration across what different lines of business are doing can result in redundancies and unnecessary complexity.
    • Higher overall cost to the IT group due to role and technology duplication across different FXN.
    • Inexperience becomes an issue; requires more competent people to be distributed across the FXN.
    • Loss of sight of the big picture – difficult to enforce standards around people/process/technology with solution ownership within the FXN.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Hybrid Model: Functional/Product Aligned

    An example of a hybrid model: functional/product aligned is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Best of both worlds of centralization and decentralization; attempts to channel benefits from both centralized and decentralized models.
    • Embeds key IT functions that require business knowledge within functional areas, allowing for critical feedback.
    • Balances a holistic IT strategy and architecture with responsiveness to needs of the organization.
    • Achieves economies of scale where necessary through the delivery of shared services that can be requested by the function.
    • May result in excessive cost through role and system redundancies across different functions
    • Business units can have variable levels of IT competence; may result in different levels of effectiveness.
    • No guaranteed synergy and integration across functions; requires strong communication, collaboration, and steering.
    • Cannot meet every business unit’s needs – can cause tension from varying effectiveness of the IT functions placed within the functional areas.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Hybrid Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model

    An example of a hybrid model: product-aligned operating model.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Focus is on the full lifecycle of a product – takes a strategic view of how technology enables the organization.
    • Promotes centralized backlog around a specific value creator, rather than traditional project focus, which is more transactional.
    • Dedicated teams around the product family ensure that you have all of the resources required to deliver on your product roadmap.
    • Reduces barriers between IT and business stakeholders, focuses on technology as a key strategic enabler.
    • Delivery is largely done through a DevOps methodology.
    • Significant business involvement is required for success within this model, with business stakeholders taking an active role in product governance and potentially product management as well.
    • Strong architecture standards and practices are required to make this successful because you need to ensure that product families are building in a consistent manner and limiting application sprawl.
    • Introduced the need for practice standards to drive consistency in quality of delivered services.
    • May result in increased cost through role redundancies across different squads.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Centralized: Plan-Build-Run

    An example of a centralized: Plan-Build-Run is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Effective at implementing long-term plans efficiently, separates maintenance and projects to allow each to have the appropriate focus.
    • More oversight over financials; better suited for fixed budgets.
    • Works across centralized technology domains to better align with the business's strategic objectives – allows for a top-down approach to decision making.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Well suited for a project-driven environment that employs Waterfall or a hybrid project management methodology that is less iterative.
    • Not optimized for unpredictable/shifting project demands, as decision making is centralized in the plan function.
    • Less agility to deliver new features or solutions to the customer in comparison to decentralized models.
    • Build (developers) and run (operations staff) are far removed from the business, resulting in lower understanding of business needs (as well as “passing the buck” – from development to operations).
    • Requires strong hand-off processes to be defined and strong knowledge transfer from build to run functions in order to be successful.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Centralized: Demand-Develop-Service

    An example of a centralized: Demand-Develop-Service model is shown.

    BENEFITS

    DRAWBACKS

    • Aligns well with an end-to-end services model; constant attention to customer demand and service supply.
    • Centralizes service operations under one functional area to serve shared needs across lines of business.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Elevates sourcing and vendor management as its own strategic function; lends well to managed service and digital initiatives.
    • Development and operations housed together; lends well to DevOps-related initiatives.
    • Can be less responsive to business needs than decentralized models due to the need for portfolio steering to prioritize initiatives and solutions.
    • Requires a higher level of operational maturity to succeed; stable supply functions (service mgmt., operations mgmt., service desk, security, data) are critical to maintaining business satisfaction.
    • Requires highly effective governance around project portfolio, services, and integration capabilities.
    • Effective feedback loop highly dependent on accurate performance measures.

    For more information, see Redesign your IT Organizational Structure.

    Assess how your product scaling pattern impacts your resource delivery model

    Value Stream Alignment

    Enterprise Applications

    Shared Services

    Technical

    Plan-Build-Run:
    Centralized

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Can be used to align high-level families.

    Con: Lacks flexibility at the product level to address shifting priorities in product demand.

    Pro: Supports a factory model.

    Con: Lacks flexibility at the product level to address shifting priorities in product demand.

    Centralized Model 2:
    Demand-Develop-
    Service

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Supports established and stable families.

    Con: Command-and-control nature inhibits Agile DevOps and business agility.

    Pro: Recommended for aligning high-level service families based on user needs.

    Con: Reduces product empowerment, prioritizing demand. Slow.

    Pro: Supports factory models.

    Con: Reduces product empowerment, prioritizing demand. Slow.

    Decentralized Model:
    Line of Business, Product, Geographically, or

    Functionally Aligned

    Pro: Aligns product families to value streams, capabilities, and organizational structure.

    Con: Reduces shared solutions and may create duplicate apps and services.

    Pro: Enterprise apps treated as distinct LoB groups.

    Con: Reduces shared solutions and may create duplicate apps and services.

    Pro: Complements value stream alignment by consolidating shared apps and services.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Fits within other groupings where technical expertise is needed.

    Con: Creates redundancy between localized and shared technical teams.

    Hybrid Model:
    Functional/Product

    Aligned

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Creates redundancy between localized and shared technical teams.

    Hybrid Model:

    Product-Aligned Operating Model

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Requires additional effort to differentiate local vs. shared solutions.

    Pro: Supports multiple patterns of product grouping.

    Con: Creates redundancy between localized and shared technical teams.

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss the intake sources of product work.
    2. Trace the flow of requests down to the functional roles of your delivery team (e.g., developer, QA, operations).
    3. Indicate where key deliverables are produced, particularly those that are built in collaboration.
    4. Discuss the five operating models relative to your current operating model choice. How aligned are you?
    5. Review Info-Tech’s recommendation on the best-aligned operating models for product family delivery. Do you agree or disagree?
    6. Evaluate recommendations against how you operate/work.

    Output

    • Understanding of the relationships between key groups
    • A preferred operating model

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Delivery managers

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    4.3.1 Understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders

    An example of activity 4.3.1 to understand the relationships between product management, delivery teams, and stakeholders is shown.

    Output

    • Understanding of the relationships between key groups
    • A preferred operating model

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Delivery managers

    Step 4.4

    Identify how to fund product family delivery

    Activities

    4.4.1 Discuss traditional vs. product-centric funding methods

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the differences between product-based and traditional funding methods

    Why is funding so problematic?

    We often still think about funding products like construction projects.

    Three models are shown on the various options to fund projects.

    These models require increasing accuracy throughout the project lifecycle to manage actuals vs. estimates.

    "Most IT funding depends on one-time expenditures or capital-funding mechanisms that are based on building-construction funding models predicated on a life expectancy of 20 years or more. Such models don’t provide the stability or flexibility needed for modern IT investments." – EDUCAUSE

    Reminder: Projects don’t go away. The center of the conversation changes.

    A flowchart is shown to demonstrate the difference between project lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle, and product lifecycle.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Planning and budgeting for products and families

    Reward for delivering outcomes, not features

    AutonomyFlexibilityAccountability
    Fund what delivers valueAllocate iterativelyMeasure and adjust

    Fund long-lived delivery of value through products (not projects).

    Give autonomy to the team to decide exactly what to build.

    Allocate to a pool based on higher-level business case.

    Provide funds in smaller amounts to different product teams and initiatives based on need.

    Product teams define metrics that contribute to given outcomes.

    Track progress and allocate more (or less) funds as appropriate.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Changes to funding require changes to product and Agile practices to ensure product ownership and accountability.

    The Lean Enterprise Funding Model is an example of a different approach

    An example of the lean enterprise funding model is shown.
    From: Implement Agile Practices That Work

    A flexible funding pool akin to venture capital models is maintained to support innovative ideas and fund proofs of concept for product and process improvements.

    Proofs of concept (POCs) are run by standing innovation teams or a reserve of resources not committed to existing products, projects, or services.

    Every product line has funding for all changes and ongoing operations and support.

    Teams are funded continuously so that they can learn and improve their practices as much as possible.

    Budgeting approaches must evolve as you mature your product operating environment

    TRADITIONAL PROJECTS WITH WATERFALL DELIVERY

    TRADITIONAL PROJECTS WITH AGILE DELIVERY

    PRODUCTS WITH AGILE PROJECT DELIVERY

    PRODUCTS WITH AGILE DELIVERY

    WHEN IS THE BUDGET TRACKED?

    Budget tracked by major phases

    Budget tracked by sprint and project

    Budget tracked by sprint and project

    Budget tracked by sprint and release

    HOW ARE CHANGES HANDLED?

    All change is by exception

    Scope change is routine, budget change is by exception

    Scope change is routine, budget change is by exception

    Budget change is expected on roadmap cadence

    WHEN ARE BENEFITS REALIZED?

    Benefits realization after project completion

    Benefits realization is ongoing throughout the life of the project

    Benefits realization is ongoing throughout the life of the product

    Benefits realization is ongoing throughout life of the product

    WHO “DRIVES”?

    Project Manager

    • Project team delivery role
    • Refines project scope, advocates for changes in the budget
    • Advocates for additional funding in the forecast

    Product Owner

    • Project team delivery role
    • Refines project scope, advocates for changes in the budget
    • Advocates for additional funding in the forecast

    Product Manager

    • Product portfolio team role
    • Forecasting new initiatives during delivery to continue to drive value throughout the life of the product

    Product Manager

  • Product family team role
  • Forecasting new initiatives during delivery to continue to drive value throughout the life of the product
  • Info-Tech Insight

    As you evolve your approach to product delivery, you will be decoupling the expected benefits, forecast, and budget. Managing them independently will improve your ability to adapt to change and drive the right outcomes!

    Your strategy must include the cost to build and operate

    Most investment happens after go-live, not in the initial build!

    An example strategy is displayed that incorporates the concepts of cost to build and operate.

    Adapted from: LookFar

    Info-Tech Insight

    While the exact balance point between development or implementation costs varies from application to application, over 80% of the cost is accrued after go-live.

    Traditional accounting leaves software development CapEx on the table

    Software development costs have traditionally been capitalized, while research and operations are operational expenditures.

    The challenge has always been the myth that operations are only bug fixes, upgrades, and other operational expenditures. Research shows that most post-release work on developed solutions is the development of new features and changes to support material changes in the business. While projects could bundle some of these changes into capital expenditure, much of the business-as-usual work that goes on leaves capital expenses on the table because the work is lumped together as maintenance-related OpEx.

    From “How to Stop Leaving Software CapEx on the Table With Agile and DevOps”

    4.4.1 Discuss traditional vs. product-centric funding methods

    30-60 minutes

    1. Discuss how products and product families are currently funded.
    2. Review how the Agile/product funding models differ from how you currently operate.
    3. What changes do you need to consider in order to support a product delivery model?
    4. For each change, identify the key stakeholders and list at least one action to take.
    5. Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Output

    • Understanding of funding principles and challenges

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Delivery managers

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Phase 5

    Build Your Transformation Roadmap and Communication Plan

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5

    1.1 Understand the organizational factors driving product-centric delivery

    1.2 Establish your organization’s product inventory

    2.1 Determine your approach to scale product families

    2.2 Define your product families

    3.1 Leverage product family roadmaps

    3.2 Use stakeholder management to improve roadmap communication

    3.3 Configure your product family roadmaps

    3.4 Confirm product family to product alignment

    4.1 Assess your organization’s delivery readiness

    4.2 Understand your delivery options

    4.3 Determine your operating model

    4.4 Identify how to fund product family delivery

    5.1 Learn how to introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2 Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    5.3 Determine your next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    5.1.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    5.2.1 Define your communication cadence for your strategy updates

    5.2.2 Define your messaging for each stakeholder

    5.3.1 How do we get started?

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Step 5.1

    Introduce your digital product family strategy

    Activities

    5.1.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A completed executive summary presenting your digital product strategy

    Product decisions are traditionally made in silos with little to no cross-functional communication and strategic oversight

    Software delivery teams and stakeholders traditionally make plans, strategies, and releases within their silos and tailor their decisions based on their own priorities. Interactions are typically limited to hand-offs (such as feature requests) and routing of issues and defects back up the delivery pipeline. These silos likely came about through well-intentioned training, mandates, and processes, but they do not sufficiently support today’s need to rapidly release and change platforms.

    Siloed departments often have poor visibility into the activities of other silos, and they may not be aware of the ramifications their decisions have on teams and stakeholders outside of their silo.

    • Silos may make choices that are optimal largely for themselves without thinking of the holistic impact on a platform’s structure, strategy, use cases, and delivery.
    • The business may approve platform improvements without the consideration of the delivery team’s current capacity or the system’s complexity, resulting in unrealistic commitments.
    • Quality standards may be misinterpreted and inconsistently enforced across the entire delivery pipeline.

    In some cases, the only way to achieve greater visibility and communication for all roles across a platform’s lifecycle is implementing an overarching role or team.

    “The majority of our candid conversations with practitioners and project management offices indicate that the platform ownership role is poorly defined and poorly executed.”

    – Barry Cousins

    Practice Lead, Applications – Project & Portfolio Management

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Use stakeholder management and roadmap views to improve communication

    Proactive, clear communication with stakeholders, SMEs, and your product delivery team can significantly improve alignment and agreement with your roadmap, strategy, and vision.

    When building your communication strategy, revisit the work you completed in phase 3 developing your:

    • Roadmap types
    • Stakeholder strategy

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players

    High influence, high interest – actively engage

    Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.

    Mediators

    High influence, low interest – keep satisfied

    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.

    Noisemakers

    Low influence, high interest – keep informed

    Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.

    Spectators

    Low influence, low interest – monitor

    They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    5.1.1 Introduce your digital product family strategy

    30-60 minutes

    This exercise is intended to help you lay out the framing of your strategy and the justification for the effort. A lot of these items can be pulled directly from the product canvas you created in phase 2. This is intended to be a single slide to frame your upcoming discussions.

    1. Update your vision, goals, and values on your product canvas. Determine which stakeholders may be impacted and what their concerns are. If you have many stakeholders, limit to Players and Influencers.
    2. Identify what you need from the stakeholders as a result of this communication.
    3. Keeping in mind the information gathered in steps 1 and 2, describe your product family strategy by answering three questions:
    1. Why do we need product families?
    2. What is in our way?
    3. Our first step will be... ?

    Output

    • An executive summary that introduces your product strategy

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Example: Scaling delivery through product families

    Why do we need product families?

    • The growth of our product offerings and our company’s movement into new areas of growth mean we need to do a better job scaling our offerings to meet the needs of the organization.

    What is in our way?

    • Our existing applications and services are so dramatically different we are unsure how to bring them together.

    Our first step will be...

    • Taking a full inventory of our applications and services.

    Step 5.2

    Communicate changes on updates to your strategy

    Activities

    5.2.1 Define your communication cadence for your strategy updates

    5.2.2 Define your messaging for each stakeholder

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A communication plan for when strategy updates need to be given

    5.2.1 Define your communication cadence for your strategy updates

    30 minutes

    Remember the role of different artifacts when it comes to your strategy. The canvas contributes to the What, and the roadmap addresses the How. Any updates to the strategy are articulated and communicated through your roadmap.

    1. Review your currently defined roadmaps, their communication objectives, update frequency, and updates.
    2. Consider the impacted stakeholders and the strategies required to communicate with them.
    3. Fill in your communication cadence and communication method.

    EXAMPLE:

    Roadmap Name

    Audience/Stakeholders

    Communication Cadence

    External Customer Roadmap

    Customers and External Users

    Quarterly (Website)

    Product Delivery Roadmap

    Development Teams, Infrastructure, Architects

    Monthly (By Email)

    Technology Roadmap

    Development Teams, Infrastructure, Architects

    Biweekly (Website)

    Output

    • Clear communication cadence for your roadmaps

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    The “what” behind the communication

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state and makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.

    Five elements of communicating change

    1. What is the change?
    2. Why are we doing it?
    3. How are we going to go about it?
    4. How long will it take us to do it?
    5. What is the role for each department and individual?

    Source: Cornelius & Associates

    How we engage with the message is just as important as the message itself

    Why are we here?

    Speak to what matters to them

    Sell the improvement

    Show real value

    Discuss potential fears

    Ask for their support

    Be gracious

    5.2.2 (Optional) Define your messaging for each stakeholder

    30 minutes

    It’s one thing to communicate the strategy, it’s another thing to send the right message to your stakeholders. Some of this will depend on the kind of news given, but the majority of this is dependent on the stakeholder and the cadence of communication.

    1. From exercise 5.2.1, take the information on the specific roadmaps, target audience, and communication cadence.
    2. Based on your understanding of the audience’s needs, what would the specific update try to get across?
    3. Pick a specific typical example of a change in strategy that you have gone through. (e.g. Product will be delayed by a quarter; key feature is being substituted for another.)

    EXAMPLE:

    Roadmap Name

    Audience/ Stakeholder

    Communication Cadence

    Messaging

    External Customer Roadmap

    Customers and External Users

    Quarterly (Website)

    Output

    • Messaging plan for each roadmap type

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Step 5.3

    Determine your next steps

    Activities

    5.3.1 How do we get started?

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding the steps to get started in your transformation

    Make a plan in order to make a plan!

    Consider some of the techniques you can use to validate your strategy.

    Learning Milestones

    Sprint Zero (AKA Project-before-the-project)

    The completion of a set of artifacts dedicated to validating business opportunities and hypotheses.

    Possible areas of focus:

    Align teams on product strategy prior to build

    Market research and analysis

    Dedicated feedback sessions

    Provide information on feature requirements

    The completion of a set of key planning activities, typically the first sprint.

    Possible areas of focus:

    Focus on technical verification to enable product development alignment

    Sign off on architectural questions or concerns

    An image showing the flowchart of continuous delivery of value is shown.

    Go to your backlog and prioritize the elements that need to be answered sooner rather than later.

    Possible areas of focus:

    Regulatory requirements or questions to answer around accessibility, security, privacy.

    Stress testing any new processes against situations that may occur.

    The “Now, Next, Later” roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    Now: What are you going to do now?

    Next: What are you going to do very soon?

    Later: What are you going to do in the future?

    An example of a now, next, later roadmap is shown.

    Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017

    5.3.1 How do we get started?

    30-60 minutes

    1. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace product-centric delivery.
    2. Group each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
    • Now: Let’s do this ASAP.
    • Next: Sometime very soon, let’s do these things.
    • Later: Much further off in the distance, let’s consider these things.
  • Record the group results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.
  • Record changes for your product and product family in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.
  • An example of a now, next, later roadmap is shown.

    Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017

    Output

    • Product family transformation critical steps and basic roadmap

    Participants

    • Product owners and product managers
    • Application leaders
    • Stakeholders

    Record the results in the Digital Product Family Strategy Playbook.

    Record the results in the Deliver Digital Products at Scale Workbook.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    The journey to become a product-centric organization is not short or easy. Like with any improvement or innovation, teams need to continue to evolve and mature with changes in their operations, teams, tools, and user needs.You’ve taken a big step completing your product family alignment. This provides a backbone for aligning all aspects of your organization to your enterprise goals and strategy while empowering product teams to find solutions closer to the problem. Continue to refine your model and operations to improve value realization and your product delivery pipelines to embrace business agility. Organizations that are most responsive to change will continue to outperform command-and-control leadership.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Emily Archer.

    Emily Archer

    Lead Business Analyst,

    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    Photo of David Berg

    Founder & CTO

    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert that has spent the last 20 years of his career delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world with the goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Kathy Borneman

    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Photro of Charlie Campbell

    Charlie Campbell

    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Photo of Yarrow Diamond

    Yarrow Diamond

    Sr. Director, Business Architecture

    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Photo of Cari J. Faanes-Blakey

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA

    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,

    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Photo of Kieran Gobey

    Kieran Gobey

    Senior Consultant Professional Services

    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations. Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Photo of Rupert Kainzbauer

    Rupert Kainzbauer

    VP Product, Digital Wallets

    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. Together with a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Photo of Saeed Khan

    Saeed Khan

    Founder,

    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in both Canada and the US and has held a number of leadership roles in Product Management over that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005. Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders; the only global community of senior level product executives.

    Photo of Hoi Kun Lo

    Hoi Kun Lo

    Product Owner

    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Photo of Abhishek Mathur

    Abhishek Mathur

    Sr Director, Product Management

    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Photo of Jeff Meister

    Jeff Meister

    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations. Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements. Jeff holds a Bachelor’s of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor’s of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Photo of Vincent Mirabelli

    Vincent Mirabelli

    Principal,

    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Photo of Oz Nazili

    Oz Nazili

    VP, Product & Growth

    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Photo of Mark Pearson

    Mark Pearson

    Principal IT Architect, First Data Corporation

    Mark Pearson is an executive business leader grounded in the process, data, technology, and operations of software-driven business. He knows the enterprise software landscape and is skilled in product, technology, and operations design and delivery within information technology organizations, outsourcing firms, and software product companies.

    Photo of Brenda Peshak

    Brenda Peshak

    Product Owner,

    Widget Industries, LLC

    Brenda Peshak is skilled in business process, analytical skills, Microsoft Office Suite, communication, and customer relationship management (CRM). She is a strong product management professional with a Master’s focused in Business Leadership (MBL) from William Penn University.

    Photo of Mike Starkey

    Mike Starkey

    Director of Engineering

    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Photo of Anant Tailor

    Anant Tailor

    Cofounder & Head of Product

    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes. Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries. Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Photo of Angela Weller

    Angela Weller

    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    • Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    • Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    • Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    • Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    • Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Application Portfolio Management

    APM Research Center

    • See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management for Small Enterprises

    • There is no one-size-fits-all rationalization. Tailor your framework to meet your goals.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    • Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Justify modernizing your application portfolio from both business and technical perspectives.

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Ensure your applications enable your business strategy.

    Discover Your Applications

    • Most application strategies fail. Arm yourself with the necessary information and team structure for a successful application portfolio strategy.

    Streamline Application Management

    • Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    • Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    • Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    • Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    • Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    • Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Org Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic Workforce Plan

    • Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    • Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance

    • Don’t just measure engagement, act on it.

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    • Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Product Management Insider, Medium, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance. n.d. Web.

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Berez, Steve, et al. “How to Plan and budget for Agile at Scale.” Bain & Company, 08 Oct 2019. Web

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint. 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, Agile Alliance 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group. 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike. “What Is a Product?” Mountain Goat Software. 6 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom, Bard Press, 1997.

    Curphey, Mark. “Product Definition.” SlideShare, 25 Feb. 2007. Web.

    “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    Distel, Dominic, et al. “Finding the sweet spot in product-portfolio management.’ McKinsey, 4 Dec. 2020. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” PM101, Medium, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile2016 Conference, Agile Alliance, 2016. Web.

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” The Ready, Medium, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Scaled Agile Framework, Medium, 23 Jul. 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 Apr. 2014 . Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    Radigan, Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Rouse, Margaret. “Definition: product.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin Voice of Product, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2016. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group. 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” The Liberators, Medium, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Vlaanderen, Kevin. “Towards Agile Product and Portfolio Management”. Academia.edu. 2010. Web.

    Bibliography (Roadmap)

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012 IEEE International Conference, 12 June 2012, Herzliya, Israel. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, Web. Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP).” Leanstack, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 October 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    Adams, Paul. “The Future Product Canvas.” Inside Intercom, 10 Jan. 2014. Web.

    “Aligning IT Funding Models to the Pace of Technology Change.” EDUCAUSE, 14 Dec. 2015. Web.

    Altman, Igor. “Metrics: Gone Bad.” OpenView, 10 Nov. 2009. Web.

    Barry, Richard. “The Product Vision Canvas – a Strategic Tool in Developing a Successful Business.” Polymorph, 2019. Web.

    “Business Canvas – Business Models & Value Propositions.” Strategyzer, 2019. Web.

    “Business Model Canvas.” Wikipedia: The Free Encyclopedia, 4 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Idea to Product: The Working Model.” ThoughtWorks, 13 July 2017. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Product Management Canvas - Product in a Snapshot.” Dinker Charak, 29 May 2017. Web.

    Chudley, James. “Practical Steps in Determining Your Product Vision (Product Tank Bristol, Oct. 2018).” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by cxpartners, 2 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Cowan, Alex. “The 20 Minute Business Plan: Business Model Canvas Made Easy.” COWAN+, 2019. Web.

    Craig, Desiree. “So You've Decided To Become A Product Manager.” Start it up, Medium, 2 June 2019. Web.

    Create an Aha! Business Model Canvas Strategic Model.” Aha! Support, 2019. Web.

    Eick, Stephen. “Does Code Decay? Assessing the Evidence from Change Management Data.” IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering, vol. 27, no. 1, Jan. 2001, pp. 1-12. Web.

    Eriksson, Martin. “The next Product Canvas.” Mind the Product, 22 Nov. 2013. Web.

    “Experience Canvas: a Lean Approach: Atlassian Team Playbook.” Atlassian, 2019. Web.

    Freeman, James. “How to Make a Product Canvas – Visualize Your Product Plan.” Edraw, 23 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Fuchs, Danny. “Measure What Matters: 5 Best Practices from Performance Management Leaders.” OpenGov, 8 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Gorisse, Willem. “A Practical Guide to the Product Canvas.” Mendix, 28 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Gothelf, Jeff. “The Lean UX Canvas.” Jeff Gothelf, 15 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product: Getting Started.” EBG Consulting, 15 Jan. 2019. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product's Core Requirements.” EBG Consulting, 4 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Gray, Mark Krishan. “Should I Use the Business Model Canvas or the Lean Canvas?” Emergn, 2019. Web.

    Hanby, Jeff. "Software Maintenance: Understanding and Estimating Costs." LookFar, 21 Oct. 2016. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 Apr 2017, Web

    Juncal, Shaun. “How to Build a Product Roadmap Based on a Business Model Canvas.” ProductPlan, 19 June 2019. Web.

    “Lean Canvas Intro - Uber Example.” YouTube, uploaded by Railsware Product Academy, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “Lesson 6: Product Canvas.” ProdPad Help Center, 2019. Web.

    Lucero, Mario. “The Product Canvas.” Agilelucero.com, 22 June 2015. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Create a New Lean Canvas.” Canvanizer, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Don't Write a Business Plan. Create a Lean Canvas Instead.” LEANSTACK, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Why Lean Canvas vs Business Model Canvas?” Medium, 27 Feb. 2012. Web.

    Mirabelli, Vincent. “The Project Value Canvas.” Vincent Mirabelli, 2019. Web.

    Mishra, LN. “Business Analysis Canvas – The Ultimate Enterprise Architecture.” BA Times, 19 June 2019. Web.

    Muller. Jerry Z. “Why performance metrics isn’t always the best way to judge performance.” Fast Company, 3 April 2019. Web.

    Perri, Melissa. “What Is Good Product Strategy?” Melissa Perri, 14 July 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “A Product Canvas for Agile Product Management, Lean UX, Lean Startup.” Roman Pichler, 16 July 2012. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Introducing the Product Canvas.” JAXenter, 15 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Roman's Product Canvas: Introduction.” YouTube, uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Agile Vision Board: Vision and Product Strategy.” Roman Pichler, 10 May 2011. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas – Template.” Roman Pichler, 11 Oct. 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas Tutorial V1.0.” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by Roman Pichler, 14 Feb. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Vision Board: Introduction.” YouTube uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “Product Canvas PowerPoint Template.” SlideModel, 2019. Web.

    Product Canvas.” SketchBubble, 2019, Web.

    “Product Canvas.” YouTube, uploaded by Wojciech Szramowski, 18 May 2016. Web.

    “Product Roadmap Software to Help You Plan, Visualize, and Share Your Product Roadmap.” Productboard, 2019. Web.

    Roggero, Giulio. “Product Canvas Step-by-Step.” LinkedIn SlideShare, uploaded by Giulio Roggero, 18 May 2013. Web.

    Royce, Dr. Winston W. “Managing the Development of Large Software Systems.” Scf.usc.edu, 1970. Web.

    Ryan, Dustin. “The Product Canvas.” Qdivision, Medium, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Snow, Darryl. “Product Vision Board.” Medium, 6 May 2017. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas – a Tool Your Startup Needs Instead of a Business Plan.” Railsware, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas Examples of Multi-Billion Startups.” Railsware, 20 Feb. 2019. Web.

    “The Product Vision Canvas.” YouTube, Uploaded by Tom Miskin, 20 May 2019. Web.

    Tranter, Leon. “Agile Metrics: the Ultimate Guide.” Extreme Uncertainty, n.d. Web.

    “Using Business Model Canvas to Launch a Technology Startup or Improve Established Operating Model.” AltexSoft, 27 July 2018. Web.

    Veyrat, Pierre. “Lean Business Model Canvas: Examples + 3 Pillars + MVP + Agile.” HEFLO BPM, 10 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “What Are Software Metrics and How Can You Track Them?” Stackify, 16 Sept. 2017. Web

    “What Is a Product Vision?” Aha!, 2019. Web.

    Train Managers to Strengthen Employee Relationships to Improve Engagement

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}545|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • The responsibility of employee engagement has been on the shoulders of HR and the executive team for years, but managers, not HR or executives, should be primarily responsible for employee engagement.
    • Managers often fail to take steps to improve due to the following reasons:
      • They don’t understand the impact they can have on engagement.
      • They don’t understand the value of an engaged workforce.
      • They don’t feel that they are responsible for engagement.
      • They don’t know what steps they can personally take to improve engagement levels.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Managers have a large impact on employee engagement and retention. According to McLean & Company’s engagement data, every 10% increase in the category “my manager inspires me to improve” resulted in a 3.6% increase in an employee’s intent to stay.
    • To improve the manager relationship driver, managers cannot abdicate the responsibility of strengthening relationships with employees to HR – they must take the ownership role.

    Impact and Result

    • When an organization focuses on strengthening manager relationships with employees, managers should be the owner and IT leadership should be the facilitator.
    • Info-Tech recommends starting with the three most important actions to improve employee trust and therefore engagement: inform employees of the why behind decisions, interact with them on a personal level, and involve them in decisions that affect them (also known as the “3 I’s”).
    • Use this blueprint to prepare to train managers on how to apply the 3 I principles and improve the score on this engagement driver.

    Train Managers to Strengthen Employee Relationships to Improve Engagement Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the case

    Educate managers on the impact they have on engagement.

    • Train Managers to Strengthen Employee Relationships to Improve Engagement Storyboard

    2. Prepare for the training session by understanding key concepts

    Learn the 3 I’s of engagement and understand IT leaders as role models for engagement.

    • Training Deck: Train Managers to Build Trusting Relationships to Improve Engagement

    3. Plan the training session and customize the materials

    Determine the logistics of the training session: the who, what, and where.

    • Participant Notebook: Take Ownership of Manager Relationships

    4. Track training success metrics and follow up

    Determine ways to track the impact the training has on employee engagement.

    • Training Evaluation: Manager Relationships
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Train Managers to Strengthen Employee Relationships to Improve Engagement

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Make the Case for Strengthening Manager Relationships

    The Purpose

    Educate managers on the impact they have on engagement and the relationship between employee trust and engagement.

    Identify reasons why managers fail to positively impact employee engagement.

    Inform managers of their responsibility for employee engagement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased awareness of managers regarding their impact on employee engagement.

    Improved understanding of manager role.

    Creation of plan to increase employee trust and engagement.

    Activities

    1.1 Describe relationship between trust and engagement.

    1.2 Review data on manager’s impact on engagement.

    Outputs

    Gain an understanding of the 3 I’s of building trust.

    Address key objections managers might have.

    2 Prepare for the Training Session by Understanding Key Concepts and Your Role as HR

    The Purpose

    Understand key concepts for engagement, such as inform, interact, and involve.

    Use McLean & Company’s advice to get past pain points with managers.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the key principles and activities in the manager training deck.

    Gain advice for dealing with pushback from managers.

    Learn about actions that you can take to adopt the 3 I’s principle and act as a role model.

    Activities

    2.1 Practice manager training exercises on informing, interacting with, and involving employees.

    Outputs

    Become familiar with and prepared to take managers through key training exercises.

    3 Plan the Training Session and Customize the Materials

    The Purpose

    Determine who will participate in the manager training session.

    Become familiar with the content in the training deck and ensure the provided examples are appropriate.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Logistics planned for your own training session.

    Your own case made more powerful by adding your engagement data to the training deck slides.

    Improved delivery of training, making it more effective and engaging for participants.

    Activities

    3.1 Consider your audience for delivering the training.

    3.2 Plan out logistics for the training session—the who, where, and when.

    Outputs

    Ensure that your training sessions include the appropriate participants.

    Deliver a smooth and successful training session.

    4 Track Training Success Metrics and Follow Up

    The Purpose

    Determine ways to track the impact the training has on employee engagement.

    Understand how to apply the 3 I’s principle across HR functions. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Measure the value of engagement training.

    Gain immediate feedback on employee engagement with the McLean Leadership Index.

    Determine how HR can support managers in building stronger relationships with employees.

    Activities

    4.1 Determine how HR can support management in strengthening employee relationships.

    Outputs

    Create a culture of trust throughout the organization.

    Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}219|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    Moreso than any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their strategic plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

    A new global change will impact your organizational strategy at any given time. So, make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential strategic impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes affect strategic plans.
    • Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility needed to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts to Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions on your strategic plans.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential strategic impacts caused by vendors. Use Info-Tech’s approach to look at the strategic impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. What If Vendor Strategic Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the strategic impacts of negative vendor actions

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Strategic Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    The world is in a perpetual state of change. Organizations need to build adaptive resiliency into their strategic plans to adjust to ever-changing market dynamics.

    Analyst perspective

    Organizations need to build flexible resiliency into their strategic plans to be able to adjust to ever-changing market dynamics.

    This is a picture of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management at Info-Tech Research Group

    Like most people, organizations are poor at assessing the likelihood of risk. If the past few years have taught us anything, it is that the probability of a risk occurring is far more flexible in the formula Risk = Likelihood * Impact than we ever thought possible. The impacts of these risks have been catastrophic, and organizations need to be more adaptive in managing them to strengthen their strategic plans.

    Frank Sewell,
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Moreso than any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their strategic plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

    A new global change will impact your organizational strategy at any given time. So, make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential strategic impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes affect strategic plans.

    Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility needed to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Impacts Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations must evolve their strategic risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to global changes in the market. Ongoing monitoring of the market and the vendors tied to company strategies is imperative to achieving success.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    This image depicts a cube divided into six different coloured sections. The sections are labeled: Financial; Reputational; Operational; Strategic; Security; Regulatory & Compliance.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of Scope:

    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Strategic risk impacts

    Potential losses to the organization due to risks to the strategic plan

    • In this blueprint, we’ll explore strategic risks (risks to the Strategic Plans of the organization) and their impacts.
    • Identify potentially disruptive events to assess the overall impact on organizations and implement adaptive measures to correct strategic plans.
    This image depicts a cube divided into six different coloured sections. The section labeled Strategic is highlighted.

    The world is constantly changing

    The IT market is constantly reacting to global influences. By anticipating changes, leaders can set expectations and work with their vendors to accommodate them.

    When the unexpected happens, being able to adapt quickly to new priorities ensures continued long-term business success.

    Below are some things no one expected to happen in the last few years:

    62%

    of IT professionals are more concerned about being a victim of ransomware than they were a year ago.

    82%

    of Microsoft’s non-essential employees shifted to working from home in 2020, joining the 18% already remote.

    89%

    of organizations invested in web conferencing technology to facilitate collaboration.

    Source: Info-Tech Tech Trends Survey 2022

    Strategic risks on a global scale

    Odds are at least one of these is currently affecting your strategic plans

    • Vendor Acquisitions
    • Global Pandemic
    • Global Shortages
    • Gas Prices
    • Poor Vendor Performance
    • Travel Bans
    • War
    • Natural Disasters
    • Supply Chain Disruptions
    • Security Incidents

    Make sure you have the right people at the table to identify and plan to manage impacts.

    Identify & manage strategic risks

    Global Pandemic

    Very few people could have predicted that a global pandemic would interrupt business on the scale experienced today. Organizations should look at their lessons learned and incorporate adaptable preparations into their strategic planning moving forward.

    Vendor Acquisitions

    The IT market is an ever-shifting environment. Larger companies often gobble up smaller ones to control their sectors. Incorporating plans to manage those shifts in ownership will be key to many strategic plans that depend on niche vendor solutions for success. Be sure to monitor the potentially affected markets on an ongoing cadence.

    Global Shortages

    Organizations need to accept that shortages will recur periodically and that preparing for them will significantly increase the success potential of long-term strategic plans. Understand what your business needs to stock for project needs and where those supplies are located, and plan how to rapidly access and distribute them as required if supply chain disruptions occur.

    What to look for in vendors

    Identify strategic risk impacts

    • A vendor acquires many smaller, seemingly irrelevant IT products. Suddenly their revenue model includes aggressive license compliance audits.
      • Ensure that your installed software meets license compliance requirements with good asset management practices.
      • Monitor the market for such acquisitions or news of audits hitting companies.
    • A vendor changes their primary business model from storage and hardware to becoming a self-proclaimed “professional services guru,” relying almost entirely on their name recognition to build their marketing.
      • Be wary of self-proclaimed experts and review their successes and failures with other organizations before adopting them into your business strategy.
      • Review the backgrounds their “experts” have and make sure they have the industry and technical skill sets to perform the services to the required level.

    Not preparing for your growth can delay your goals

    Why can’t I get a new laptop?

    For example:

    • An IT professional services organization plans to take advantage of the growing work-from-home trend to expand its staff by 30% over the coming year.
    • Logically, this should include a review of the necessary tasks involved, including onboarding.
      • Suppose the company does not order enough equipment in preparation to cover the new staff plus routine replacement. In that case, this will delay the output of the new team members immeasurably as they wait for their company equipment and will delay existing staff whose equipment breaks, preventing them from getting back to work efficiently.

    Sometimes an organization has the right mindset to take advantage of the changes in the market but can fail to plan for the particulars.

    When your strategic plan changes, you need to revisit all the steps in the processes to ensure a successful outcome.

    Strategic risks

    Poor or uninformed business decisions can lead to organizational strategic failures

    • Supply chain disruptions and global shortages
      • Geopolitical disruptions and natural disasters have caused unprecedented interruptions to business. Incorporate forecasting of product and ongoing business continuity planning into your strategic plans to adapt as events unfold.
    • Poor vendor performance
      • Consider the impact of a vendor that fails to perform midway through the implementation. Organizations need to be able to manage the impact of replacing that vendor and cutting their losses rather than continuing to throw good money away after bad performance.
    • Vendor acquisitions
      • A lot of acquisition is going on in the market today. Large companies are buying competitors and either imposing new terms on customers or removing the competing products from the market. Prepare options for any strategy tied to a niche product.

    It is important to identify potential risks to strategic plans to manage the risk and be agile enough in planning to adapt to the changing environments.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Few organizations are good at identifying risks to their strategic plan. As a result, almost none realistically plan to monitor, manage, and adapt their strategies to those risks.

    Prepare your strategic risk management for success

    Due diligence will enable successful outcomes

    1. Obtain top-level buy-in; it is critical to success.
    2. Build enterprise risk management (ERM) through incremental improvement.
    3. Focus initial efforts on the “big wins” to prove the process works.
    4. Use existing resources.
    5. Build on any risk management activities that already exist in the organization.
    6. Socialize ERM throughout the organization to gain additional buy‑in.
    7. Normalize the process long term with ongoing updates and continuing education for the organization.

    (Adapted from COSO)

    How to assess strategic risk

    1. Review Organizational Strategy
      Understand the organizational strategy to prepare for the “What If” game exercise.
    2. Identify & Understand Potential Strategic Risks
      Play the “What If” game with the right people at the table.
    3. Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership
      Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
    4. Validate the Risks
      Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
    5. Plan to Manage the Risks
      Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
    6. Communicate the Plan
      It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
    7. Enact the Plan
      Once the plan is finalized and socialized, put it in place with continued monitoring for success.

    Insight summary

    Insight 1

    Organizations build portions of their strategies around chosen vendors and should protect those plans against the risks of unforeseen acquisitions in the market.
    Is your vendor solvent? Does it have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has its long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Is it unique in its space?

    Insight 2

    Organizations’ strategic plans need to be adaptable to avoid vendors’ negative actions causing an expedited shift in priorities.
    For example, Philip's recall of ventilators impacted its products and the availability of its competitor’s products as demand overwhelmed the market.

    Insight 3

    Organizations need to become better at risk assessment and actively manage the identified risks to their strategic plans.
    Few organizations are good at identifying risks to their strategic plan. As a result, almost none realistically plan to monitor, manage, and adapt their strategies to those risks.

    Strategic risk impacts are often unanticipated, causing unforeseen downstream effects. Anticipating the potential changes in the global IT market and continuously monitoring vendors’ risk levels can help organizations modify their strategic alignment with the new norms.

    Identifying strategic risk

    Who should be included in the discussion

    • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make informed decisions.
    • Getting input from operational experts at your organization will enhance the long-term potential for success of your strategies.
    • Involving those who directly manage vendors and understand the market will aid operational experts in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying new emerging potential strategic partners.

    Review your strategic plans for new risks and evolving likelihood on a regular basis.

    Keep in mind Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).

    Impact (I) tends to remain the same, while Likelihood (L) is a very flexible variable.

    See the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Managing strategic risk impacts

    What can we realistically do about the risks?

    • Review business continuity plans and disaster recovery testing.
    • Institute proper contract lifecycle management.
    • Re-evaluate corporate policies frequently.
    • Develop IT governance and change control.
    • Ensure strategic alignment in contracts.
    • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
      • Regularly review your strategic plans for new risks and evolving likelihood.
      • Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I)
        • Impact (I) tends to remain the same and be well understood, while Likelihood (L) turns out to be highly variable.
    • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
      • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time, and adjust your strategy based on the lessons.

    Organizations need to be reviewing their strategic risk plans considering the likelihood of incidents in the global market.

    Pandemics, extreme weather, and wars that affect global supply chains are a current reality, not unlikely scenarios.

    Ongoing Improvement

    Incorporating lessons learned

    • Over time, despite everyone’s best observations and plans, incidents will catch us off guard.
    • When it happens, follow your incident response plans and act accordingly.
    • An essential step is to document what worked and what did not – collectively known as the “lessons learned.”
    • Use the lessons learned document to devise, incorporate, and enact a better risk management process.

    Sometimes disasters occur despite our best plans to manage them.

    When this happens, it is important to document the lessons learned and improve our plans going forward.

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible adverse outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Strategic Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potentials but manage the overall process to keep the discussion pertinent and on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts (SMEs) for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Strategic Risk Impact Tool

    Input Output
    • List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact
    • List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk
    • Comprehensive strategic risk profile on the specific vendor solution
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Strategic Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion
    • Vendor Management – Coordinator
    • Organizational Leadership
    • Operations Experts (SMEs)
    • Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager

    Case Study

    Airline Industry Strategic Adaptation

    Industry: Airline

    Impact categories: Pandemic, Lockdowns, Travel Bans, Increased Fuel Prices

    • In 2019 the airline industry yielded record profits of $35.5 billion.
    • In 2020 the pandemic devastated the industry with losses around $371 billion.
    • The industry leaders engaged experts to conduct a study on how the pandemic impacted them and propose measures to ensure the survival of their industry in the future after the pandemic.
    • They determined that “[p]recise decision-making based on data analytics is essential and crucial for an effective Covid-19 airline recovery plan.”

    Results

    The pandemic prompted systemic change to the overall strategic planning of the airline industry.

    Summary

    Be vigilant and adaptable to change

    • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global world.
    • Those organizations that incorporate adaptive risk management processes can prepare their strategic plans for greater success.
    • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks in the market.
    • Socialize the risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the strategic plan.
    • Incorporate lessons learned from incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.

    Organizations must evolve their strategic risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to global changes in the market.

    Ongoing monitoring of the market and the vendors tied to company strategies is imperative to achieving success.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization.
    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk
    • Customer maturity levels with Agile are low, with 67% of organizations using Agile for less than five years.
    • Customer competency levels with Agile are also low, with 84% of organizations stating they are below a high level of competency.
    • Contract disputes are the number one or two types of disputes faced by organizations across all industries.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Build an IT Risk Management Program
    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program, and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders including the business senior management team to gain buy-in and to focus on IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Bibliography

    Olaganathan, Rajee. “Impact of COVID-19 on airline industry and strategic plan for its recovery with special reference to data analytics technology.” Global Journal of Engineering and Technology Advances, vol 7, no 1, 2021, pp. 033-046.

    Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 23 Aug. 2012.

    Frigo, Mark L., and Richard J. Anderson. “Embracing Enterprise Risk Management: Practical Approaches for Getting Started.” COSO, 2011.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    • Frank Sewell
      Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Steven Jeffery
      Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Scott Bickley
      Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Donna Glidden
      Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Phil Bode
      Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • David Espinosa
      Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Rick Pittman
      Vice President, Research, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Patrick Philpot
      CISSP
    • Gaylon Stockman
      Vice President, Information Security
    • Jennifer Smith
      Senior Director

    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}511|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,314 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge - which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge – which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door. It’s estimated that Fortune 500 companies lose approximately $31.5 billion each year by failing to share knowledge.
    • Don’t follow a one-size-fits-all approach to knowledge transfer strategy! Right-size your approach based on your business goals.
    • Prioritize knowledge transfer candidates based on their likelihood of departure and the impact of losing that knowledge.
    • Select knowledge transfer tactics based on the type of knowledge that needs to be captured – explicit or tacit.

    Impact and Result

    Successful completion of the IT knowledge transfer project will result in the following outcomes:

    1. Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained.
    2. Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified.
    3. Effective knowledge transfer plans built.
    4. Knowledge transfer roadmap built.
    5. Knowledge transfer roadmap communicated and approval obtained.

    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to transfer knowledge on your team to mitigate risks from employees leaving the organization.

    Minimize risk and IT costs resulting from attrition through effective knowledge transfer.

    • Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss Storyboard

    2. Project Stakeholder Register Template – A template to help you identify and document project management stakeholders.

    Use this template to document the knowledge transfer stakeholder power map by identifying the stakeholder’s name and role, and identifying their position on the power map.

    • Project Stakeholder Register Template

    3. IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template – Define your project and lay the foundation for subsequent knowledge transfer project planning

    Use this template to communicate the value and rationale for knowledge transfer to key stakeholders.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    4. IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool – Identify the risk profile of knowledge sources and the knowledge they have

    Use this tool to identify and assess the knowledge and individual risk of key knowledge holders.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    5. IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template – A template to help you determine the most effective knowledge transfer tactics to be used for each knowledge source by listing knowledge sources and their knowledge, identifying type of knowledge to be transferred and choosing tactics that are appropriate for the knowledge type

    Use this template to track knowledge activities, intended recipients of knowledge, and appropriate transfer tactics for each knowledge source.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    6. IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template – A template that provides a framework to conduct interviews with knowledge sources, including comprehensive questions that cover what type of knowledge a knowledge source has and how unique the knowledge is

    Use this template as a starting point for managers to interview knowledge sources to extract information about the type of knowledge the source has.

    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    7. IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template – A presentation template that provides a vehicle used to communicate IT knowledge transfer recommendations to stakeholders to gain buy-in

    Use this template as a starting point to build your proposed IT knowledge transfer roadmap presentation to management to obtain formal sign-off and initiate the next steps in the process.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    Further reading

    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    Transfer IT knowledge before it’s gone.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge1 which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door. You need to:

    • Build a strategic roadmap to retain and share knowledge.
    • Build a knowledge transfer strategy based on your organization’s business goals.
    • Increase departmental efficiencies through increased collaboration.
    • Retain key IT knowledge
    • Improve junior employee engagement by creating development opportunities.
    • Don’t follow a one-size fits all approach. Right-size your approach based on your organizational goals.
    • Prioritize knowledge transfer candidates based on their likelihood of departure and the impact of losing that knowledge.
    • What you’re transferring impacts how you should transfer it. Select knowledge transfer tactics based on the type of knowledge that needs to be captured – explicit or tacit.

    Our client-tested methodology and project steps allow you to tailor your knowledge transfer plan to any size of organization, across industries. Successful completion of the IT knowledge transfer project will result in the following outcomes:

    • Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained.
    • Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified.
    • Effective knowledge transfer plans built.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap built.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap communicated.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Seventy-four percent of organizations do not have a formal process for capturing and retaining knowledge which, when lost, results in decreased productivity, increased risk, and money out the door.1

    1 McLean & Company, 2016, N=120

    Stop your knowledge from walking out the door

    Today, the value of an organization has less to do with its fixed assets and more to do with its intangible assets. Intangible assets include patents, research and development, business processes and software, employee training, and employee knowledge and capability.

    People (and their knowledge and capabilities) are an organization’s competitive advantage and with the baby boomer retirement looming, organizations need to invest in capturing employee knowledge before the employees leave. Losing employees in key roles without adequate preparation for their departure has a direct impact on the bottom line in terms of disrupted productivity, severed relationships, and missed opportunities.

    Knowledge Transfer (KT) is the process and tactics by which intangible assets – expertise, knowledge, and capabilities – are transferred from one stakeholder to another. A well-devised knowledge transfer plan will mitigate the risk of knowledge loss, yet as many as 74%2 of organizations have no formal approach to KT – and it’s costing them money, reputation, and time.

    84%of all enterprise value on the S&P 500 is intangibles.3

    $31.5 billion lost annually by Fortune 500 companies failing to share knowledge. 1

    74% of organizations have no formal process for facilitating knowledge transfer. 2

    1 Shedding Light on Knowledge Management, 2004, p. 46

    2 McLean & Company, 2016, N=120

    3 Visual Capitalists, 2020

    Losing knowledge will undermine your organization’s strategy in four ways

    In a worst-case scenario, key employees leaving will result in the loss of valuable knowledge, core business relationships, and profits.

    1

    Inefficiency due to “reinvention of the wheel.” When older workers leave and don’t effectively transfer their knowledge, younger generations duplicate effort to solve problems and find solutions.

    2

    Loss of competitive advantage. What and who you know is a tremendous source of competitive edge. Losing knowledge and/or established client relationships hurts your asset base and stifles growth, especially in terms of proprietary or unique knowledge.

    3

    Reduced capacity to innovate. Older workers know what works and what doesn’t, as well as what’s new and what’s not. They can identify the status quo faster, to make way for novel thinking.

    4

    Increased vulnerability. One thing that comes with knowledge is a deeper understanding of risk. Losing knowledge can impede your organizational ability to identify, understand, and mitigate risks. You’ll have to learn through experience all over again.

    Are you part of the 74% of organizations with no knowledge transfer planning in place? Can you afford not to have it?

    Consider this:

    55-60

    67%

    78%

    $14k / minute

    the average age of mainframe workers – making close to 50% of workers over 60.2

    of Fortune 100 companies still use mainframes3 requiring. specialized skills and knowledge

    of CIOs report mainframe applications will remain a key asset in the next decade.1

    is the cost of mainframe outages for an average enterprise.1

    A system failure to a mainframe could be disastrous for organizations that haven’t effectively transferred key knowledge. Now think past the mainframe to key processes, customer/vendor relationships, legal requirements, home grown solutions etc. in your organization.

    What would knowledge loss cost you in terms of financial and reputational loss?

    Source: 1 Big Tech Problem as Mainframes Outlast Workforce

    Source: 2 IT's most wanted: Mainframe programmers

    Source: 3The State of the Mainframe, 2022

    Case Study

    Insurance organization fails to mitigate risk of employee departure and incurs costly consequences – in the millions

    INDUSTRY: Insurance

    SOURCE: ITRG Member

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    • A rapidly growing organization's key Senior System Architect unexpectedly fell ill and needed to leave the organization.
    • This individual had been with the organization for more than 25 years and was the primary person in IT responsible for several mission-critical systems.
    • Following this individual’s departure, one of the systems unexpectedly went down.
    • As this individual had always been the go-to person for the system, and issues were few and far between, no one had thought to document key system elements and no knowledge transfer had taken place.
    • The failed system cost the organization more than a million dollars in lost revenue.
    • The organization needed to hire a forensic development team to reverse engineer the system.
    • This cost the organization another $200k in consulting fees plus the additional cost of training existing employees on a system which they had originally been hoping to upgrade.

    Forward thinking organizations use knowledge transfer not only to avoid risks, but to drive IT innovation

    IT knowledge transfer is a process that, at its most basic level, ensures that essential IT knowledge and capabilities don’t leave the organization – and at its most sophisticated level, drives innovation and customer service by leveraging knowledge assets.

    Knowledge Transfer Risks:

    Knowledge Transfer Opportunities:

    ✗ Increased training and development costs when key stakeholders leave the organization.

    ✗ Decreased efficiency through long development cycles.

    ✗ Late projects that tie up IT resources longer than planned, and cost overruns that come out of the IT budget.

    ✗ Lost relationships with key stakeholders within and outside the organization.

    ✗ Inconsistent project/task execution, leading to inconsistent outcomes.

    ✗ IT losing its credibility due to system or project failure from lost information.

    ✗ Customer dissatisfaction from inconsistent service.

    ✓ Mitigated risks and costs from talent leaving the organization.

    ✓ Business continuity through redundancies preventing service interruptions and project delays.

    ✓ Operational efficiency through increased productivity by never having to start projects from scratch.

    ✓ Increased engagement from junior staff through development planning.

    ✓ Innovation by capitalizing on collective knowledge.

    ✓ Increased ability to adapt to change and save time-to-market.

    ✓ IT teams that drive process improvement and improved execution.

    Common obstacles

    In building your knowledge transfer roadmap, the size of your organization can present unique challenges

    How you build your knowledge transfer roadmap will not change drastically based on the size of your organization; however, the scope of your initiative, tactics you employ, and your communication plan for knowledge transfer may change.


    How knowledge transfer projects vary by organization size:

    Small Organization

    Medium Organization

    Large Organization

    Project Opportunities

    ✓ Project scope is much more manageable.

    ✓ Communication and planning can be more manageable.

    ✓ Fewer knowledge sources and receivers can clarify prioritization needs.

    ✓ Project scope is more manageable.

    ✓ Moderate budget for knowledge transfer activities.

    ✓ Communication and enforcement is easier.

    ✓ Budget available to knowledge transfer initiatives.

    ✓ In-house expertise may be available.

    Project Risks

    ✗ Limited resources for the project.

    ✗ In-house expertise is unlikely.

    ✗ Knowledge transfer may be informal and not documented.

    ✗ Limited overlap in responsibilities, resulting in fewer redundancies.

    ✗ Limited staff with knowledge transfer experience for the project.

    ✗ Knowledge assets are less likely to be documented.

    ✗ Knowledge transfer may be a lower priority and difficult to generate buy-in.

    ✗ More staff to manage knowledge transfer for, and much larger scope for the project.

    ✗ Impact of poor knowledge transfer can result in much higher costs.

    ✗Geographically dispersed business units make collaboration and communication difficult.

    ✗ Vast amounts of historical knowledge to capture.

    Capture both explicit and tacit knowledge

    Explicit

    Tacit

    • “What knowledge” – knowledge can be articulated, codified, and easily communicated.
    • Easily explained and captured – documents, memos, speeches, books, manuals, process diagrams, facts, etc.
    • Learn through reading or being told.
    • “How knowledge” – intangible knowledge from an individual’s experience that is more from the process of learning, understanding, and applying information (insights, judgments, and intuition).
    • Hard to verbalize, and difficult to capture and quantify.
    • Learn through observation, imitation, and practice.

    Types of explicit knowledge

    Types of tacit knowledge

    Information

    • Specialized technical knowledge.
    • Unique design capabilities/ methods/ models.
    • Legacy systems, details, passwords.
    • Special formulas/algorithms/ techniques/contacts.

    Process

    • Specialized research and development processes.
    • Proprietary production processes.
    • Decision-making processes.
    • Legacy systems.
    • Variations from documented processes.

    Skills

    • Techniques for executing on processes.
    • Relationship management.
    • Competencies built through deliberate practice enabling someone to act effectively.

    Expertise

    • Company history and values.
    • Relationships with key stakeholders.
    • Tips and tricks.
    • Competitor history and differentiators.

    Examples: reading music, building a bike, knowing the alphabet, watching a YouTube video on karate.

    Examples: playing the piano, riding a bike, reading or speaking a language, earning a black belt in karate.

    Knowledge transfer is not a one-size-fits-all project

    The image contains a picture of Info-Tech's Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model. Level 0: Accidental, goal is not prioritized. Level 1: Stabilize, goal is risk mitigation. Level 2: Proactive, goal is operational efficiency. Level 3: Knowledge Culture, goal is innovation & customer service.

    No formal knowledge transfer program exists; knowledge transfer is ad hoc, or may be conducted through an exit interview only.

    74% of organizations are at level 0.1

    At level one, knowledge transfer is focused around ensuring that high risk, explicit knowledge is covered for all high-risk stakeholders.

    Organizations have knowledge transfer plans for all high-risk knowledge to ensure redundancies exist and leverage this to drive process improvements, effectiveness, and employee engagement.

    Increase end-user satisfaction and create a knowledge value center by leveraging the collective knowledge to solve repeat customer issues and drive new product innovation.

    1 Source: McLean & Company, 2016, N=120

    Assess your fit for this blueprint by considering the following statements

    I’m an IT Leader who…

    Stabilize

    …has witnessed that new employees have recently left or are preparing to leave the organization, and worries that we don’t have their knowledge captured anywhere.

    …previously had to cut down our IT department, and as a result there is a lack of redundancy for tasks. If someone leaves, we don’t have the information we need to continue operating effectively.

    …is worried that the IT department has no succession planning in place and that we’re opening ourselves up to risk.

    Proactive

    …feels like we are losing productivity because the same problems are being solved differently multiple times.

    …worries that different employees have unique knowledge which is critical to performance and that they are the only ones who know about it.

    …has noticed that the processes people are using are different from the ones that are written down.

    …feels like the IT department is constantly starting projects from scratch, and employees aren’t leveraging each other’s information, which is causing inefficiencies.

    …feels like new employees take too long to get up to speed.

    …knows that we have undocumented systems and more are being built each day.

    Knowledge Culture

    …feels like we’re losing out on opportunities to innovate because we’re not sharing information, learning from others’ mistakes, or capitalizing on their successes.

    …notices that staff don’t have a platform to share information on a regular basis, and believes if we brought that information together, we would be able to improve customer service and drive product innovation.

    …wants to create a culture where employees are valued for their competencies and motivated to learn.

    …values knowledge and the contributions of my team.

    This blueprint can help you build a roadmap to resolve each of these pain points. However, not all organizations need to have a knowledge culture. In the next section, we will walk you through the steps of selecting your target maturity model based on your knowledge goals.

    Case Study

    Siemens builds a knowledge culture to drive customer service improvements and increases sales by $122 million

    INDUSTRY: Electronics Engineering

    SOURCE: KM Best Practices

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    • As a large electronics and engineering global company, Siemens was facing increased global competition.
    • There was an emphasized need for agility and specialized knowledge to remain competitive.
    • The new company strategy to address competitive forces focused on becoming a knowledge enterprise and improving knowledge-sharing processes.
    • New leadership roles were created to develop a knowledge management culture.
    • “Communities of practice” were created with the goal of “connecting people to people” by allowing them to share best practices and information across departments.
    • An internal information-sharing program was launched that combined chat, database, and search engine capabilities for 12,000 employees.
    • Employees were able to better focus on customer needs based on offering services and products with high knowledge content.
    • With the improved customer focus, sales increased by $122 million and there was a return of $10-$20 per dollar spent on investment in the communities of practice.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Five steps to future-proof your IT team

    The five steps are in a cycle. The five steps are: Obtain approval for IT knowledge transfer project, Identify your  knowledge and stakeholder risks, Build knowledge transfer plans, Build your knowledge transfer roadmap, Communicate your knowledge transfer roadmap to stakeholders.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Successfully build a knowledge transfer roadmap based on your goals, no matter what market segment or size of business.
    2. Increase departmental efficiencies through increased collaboration.
    3. Retain key IT knowledge.
    4. Improve junior employee engagement by creating development opportunities.

    Use Info-Tech tools and templates

    Project outcomes

    1. Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained

    2. Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified

    3. Tactics for individuals’ knowledge transfer identified

    4. Knowledge transfer roadmap built

    5. Knowledge transfer roadmap approved

    Info-Tech tools and templates to help you complete your project deliverables

    Project Stakeholder Register Template

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    Project Planning and Monitoring Tool

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Your completed project deliverables

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plans

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap

    Info-Tech’s methodology to mitigate key IT employee knowledge loss

    1. Initiate

    2. Design

    3. Implement

    Phase Steps

    1. Obtain approval for IT knowledge transfer project.
    2. Identify your knowledge and stakeholder risks.
    1. Build knowledge transfer plans.
    2. Build your knowledge transfer roadmap.
    1. Communicate your knowledge transfer roadmap to stakeholders.

    Phase Outcomes

    • Approval for IT knowledge transfer project obtained.
    • Knowledge and stakeholder risks identified.
    • IT knowledge transfer project charter created.
    • Tactics for individuals’ knowledge transfer identified.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap built.
    • IT knowledge transfer plans established.
    • IT Knowledge transfer roadmap presented.
    • Knowledge transfer roadmap approved.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter

    Establish a clear project scope, decision rights, and executive sponsorship for the project.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Identify and assess the knowledge and individual risk of key knowledge holders.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide

    Extract information about the type of knowledge sources have.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation

    Communicate IT knowledge transfer recommendations to stakeholders to gain buy-in.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation.

    Key deliverable:

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan

    Track knowledge activities, intended recipients, and appropriate transfer tactics for each knowledge source.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Plan.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Business continuity through redundancies preventing service interruptions and project delays.
    • Operational efficiency through increased productivity by never having to start projects from scratch.
    • Increased engagement from junior staff through development planning.
    • IT teams that drive process improvement and improved execution.
    • Mitigated risks and costs from talent leaving the organization.
    • Innovation by capitalizing on collective knowledge.
    • Increased ability to adapt to change and save time-to-market.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “ Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Structure the project. Discuss transfer maturity goal and metrics.

    Call #2: Build knowledge transfer plans.

    Call #3: Identify priorities & review risk assessment tool.

    Call #4: Build knowledge transfer roadmap. Determine logistics of implementation.

    Call #5: Determine logistics of implementation.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is five to six calls.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Define the Current and Target State

    Identify Knowledge Priorities

    Build Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Define the Knowledge Transfer Roadmap

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Have knowledge transfer fireside chat.

    1.2 Identify current and target maturity.

    1.3 Identify knowledge transfer metrics

    1.4 Identify knowledge transfer project stakeholders

    2.1 Identify your knowledge sources.

    2.2 Complete a knowledge risk assessment.

    2.3 Identify knowledge sources’ level of knowledge risk.

    3.1 Build an interview guide.

    3.2 Interview knowledge holders.

    4.1 Prioritize the sequence of initiatives.

    4.2 Complete the project roadmap.

    4.3 Prepare communication presentation.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Organizational benefits and current pain points of knowledge transfer.
    2. Identification of target state of maturity.
    3. Metrics for knowledge transfer.
    4. Project stakeholder register.
    1. List of high risk knowledge sources.
    2. Departure analysis.
    3. Knowledge risk analysis.
    1. Knowledge transfer interview guide.
    2. Itemized knowledge assets.
    1. Prioritized sequence based on target state maturity goals.
    2. Project roadmap.
    3. Communication deck.

    Phase #1

    Initiate your IT knowledge transfer project

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Obtain approval for project

    1.2 Identify knowledge and stakeholder risks

    2.1 Build knowledge transfer plans

    2.2 Build knowledge transfer roadmap

    3.1 Communicate your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Hold a working session with key stakeholders.
    • Identify your current state of maturity for knowledge transfer.
    • Identify your target state of maturity for knowledge transfer.
    • Define key knowledge transfer metrics.
    • Identify your project team and their responsibilities.
    • Build the project charter and obtain approval.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Leadership
    • Other key stakeholders

    Step 1.1

    Obtain Approval for Your IT Knowledge Transfer Project

    Activities

    1.1.1 Hold a Working Session With Key Stakeholders

    1.1.2 Conduct a Current and Target State Analysis.

    1.1.3 Identify Key Metrics

    1.1.4 Identify Your Project Team

    1.1.5 Populate an RACI

    1.1.6 Build the Project Charter and Obtain Approval

    Initiate Your IT Knowledge Transfer Project

    The primary goal of this section is to gain a thorough understanding of the reasons why your organization should invest in knowledge transfer and to identify the specific challenges to address.

    Outcomes of this step

    Organizational benefits and current pain points of knowledge transfer

    Hold a working session with the key stakeholders to structure the project

    Don’t build your project charter in a vacuum. Involve key stakeholders to determine the desired knowledge transfer goals, target maturity and KPIs, and ultimately build the project charter.

    Building the project charter as a group will help you to clarify your key messages and help secure buy-in from critical stakeholders up-front, which is key.

    In order to execute on the knowledge transfer project, you will need significant involvement from your IT leadership team. The trouble is that knowledge transfer can be inherently stressful for employees as it can cause concerns around job security. Members of your IT leadership team will also be individuals who need to participate in knowledge transfer, so get them involved upfront. The working session will help stakeholders feel more engaged in the project, which is pivotal for success.

    You may feel like a full project charter isn’t necessary, and depending on your organizational size, it might not be. However, the exercise of building the charter is important regardless. No matter your current climate, some level of socializing the value and plans for knowledge transfer will be necessary.

    Meeting Agenda

    1. Short project introduction
    2. Led by: Project Sponsor

    • Why the project was initiated.
  • Make the case for the project
  • Led by: Project Manager

    • Current state: What project does the project address?
    • Future state: What is our target state of maturity?
  • Success criteria
  • Led by: Project Manager

    • How will success be measured?
  • Define the project team
  • Led by: Project Manager

    • Description of planned project approach.
    • Stakeholder assessment.
    • What is required of the sponsor and stakeholders?
  • Determine next steps
  • Led by: Project Manager

    1.1.1 Key Stakeholder Working Session

    Identify the pain points you’re experiencing with knowledge transfer and some of the benefits which you’d like to see from a program to determine the key objectives By doing so, you’ll get a holistic view of what you need to achieve.

    Collect this information by:

    1. Asking the working group participants (as a whole or in smaller groups) to discuss pain points created by ineffective knowledge transfer practices.
    • Challenges related to stakeholders.
    • Challenges created by process issues.
    • Issues achieving the intended outcome due to ineffective knowledge transfer.
    • Difficulties improving knowledge transfer practices.
  • Discussing opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
  • Having participants write these down on sticky notes and place them on a whiteboard or flip chart.
  • Reviewing all the points as a group and grouping challenges and benefits into themes.
  • Having the group prioritize the risks and benefits in terms of what the solution “must have,” “should have,” “could have,” and “won’t have.”
  • Documenting this in the IT Knowledge Transfer Charter template.
  • Input Output
    • Reasons for the project
    • Stakeholder requirements
    • Pain point and risks
    • Identified next steps
    • Target state
    • Completed IT Knowledge Transfer Charter
    Materials Participants
    • Agenda (see previous slide)
    • Sticky notes (optional)
    • Pens (optional)
    • Whiteboard (optional
    • Markers (optional)
    • IT leadership

    Examples of Possible Pain Points

    • Employees have recently left or are preparing to leave the organization, and we worry that we don’t have their knowledge captured anywhere.
    • We previously had to cut down our IT department, and as a result there is a lack of redundancy for tasks. If someone leaves, we don’t have the information we need to continue operating effectively.
    • We’re worried that the IT department has no succession planning in place and that we’re opening ourselves up to risk.
    • It feels like we are losing productivity because the same problems are being solved multiple times, differently.
    • We’re worried that different employees have unique knowledge which is critical to performance, and that they are the only ones who know about it.
    • We’ve noticed that the processes people are using are different from the ones that are written down.
    • It feels like the IT department is constantly starting projects from scratch and employees aren’t leveraging each other’s information, which is causing inefficiencies.
    • It feels like new employees take too long to get up to speed.
    • We know that we have undocumented systems and more are being built each day.
    • We feel like we’re losing out on opportunities to innovate because we’re not sharing information, learning from others’ mistakes, or capitalizing on their successes.
    • We’ve noticed that staff don’t have a platform to share information on a regular basis. We believe if we brought that information together, we would be better able to improve customer service and drive product innovation.
    • We want to create a culture where employees are valued for their competencies and motivated to learn.
    • We value knowledge and the contributions of our team.

    1.1.2 Conduct a Current and Target State Analysis

    Identify your current and target state of maturity

    How to determine your current and target state of maturity:

    1. Provide the previous two slides with the details of the maturity assessment to the group, to review.
    2. Ask each participant to individually determine what they think is the IT team’s current state of maturity. After a few minutes, discuss as a group and come to an agreement.
    3. Review each of the benefits and timing for each of the maturity levels. Compare the benefits listed to those that you named in the previous exercise and determine which maturity level best describes your target state.
    4. Discuss as a group and agree on one maturity level.
    5. Review the other levels of maturity and determine what is in and out of scope for the project (hint: higher level benefits would be considered out of scope). Document this in the IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter template.
    Input Output
    • Knowledge Transfer Maturity Level charts
    • Target maturity level documented in the IT Knowledge Transfer Charter
    Materials Participants
    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels
    • IT Leadership Team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    Info-Tech’s Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, a knowledge transfer project could take weeks, months, or even years. Your maturity level depends on the business goal you would like to achieve, and impacts who and what your roadmap targets.

    The image contains a picture of Info-Tech's Knowledge Transfer Maturity Model. Level 0: Accidental, goal is not prioritized. Level 1: Stabilize, goal is risk mitigation. Level 2: Proactive, goal is operational efficiency. Level 3: Knowledge Culture, goal is innovation & customer service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The maturity levels build on one another; if you start with a project, it is possible to move from a level 0 to a level 1, and once the project is complete, you can advance to a level 2 or 3. However, it’s important to set clear boundaries upfront to limit scope creep, and it’s important to set appropriate expectations for what the project will deliver.

    Knowledge Transfer Maturity Level: Accidental and Stabilize

    Goal

    Description

    Time to implement

    Benefits

    Level 0: Accidental

    Not Prioritized

    • No knowledge transfer process is present.
    • Knowledge transfer is completed in an ad hoc manner.
    • Some transfer may take place through exit interviews.

    N/A

    • Simple to implement and maintain.

    Level 1: Stabilize

    Risk Mitigation

    At level one, knowledge transfer is focused around ensuring that redundancies exist for explicit knowledge for:

    1. ALL high-risk knowledge.
    2. ALL high-risk stakeholders.

    Your high-risk knowledge is any information which is proprietary, unique, or specialized.

    High risk stakeholders are those individuals who are at a higher likelihood of departing the organization due to retirement or disengagement.

    0 – 6 months

    • Mitigates risks from talent leaving the organization.
    • Ensures business continuity through redundancies.
    • Provides stability to sustain high-performing services, and mitigates risks from service interruptions.

    Knowledge Transfer Maturity Level: Proactive and Knowledge Culture

    Goal

    Description

    Time to implement

    Benefits

    Level 2: Proactive

    Operational Efficiency

    Level 2 extends Level 1.

    Once stabilized, you can work on KT initiatives that allow you to be more proactive and cover high risk knowledge that may not be held by those see as high risk individuals.

    Knowledge transfer plans must exist for ALL high risk knowledge.

    3m – 1yr

    • Enhances productivity by reducing need to start projects from scratch.
    • Increases efficiency by tweaking existing processes with best practices.
    • Sees new employees become productive more quickly through targeted development planning.
    • Increases chance that employees will stay at the organization longer, if they can see growth opportunities.
    • Streamlines efficiencies by eliminating redundant or unnecessary processes.

    Level 3: Knowledge Culture

    Drive Innovation Through Knowledge

    Level 3 extends Level 2.

    • Knowledge Transfer covers explicit and tacit information throughout the IT organization.
    • The program should be integrated with leadership development and talent management.
    • Key metrics should be tied to process improvement, innovation, and customer service.

    1-2 years

    • Increases end-user satisfaction by leveraging the collective knowledge to solve repeat customer issues.
    • Drives product innovation through collaboration.
    • Increases employee engagement by recognizing and rewarding knowledge sharing.
    • Increases your ability to adapt to change and save time-to-market through increased learning.
    • Enables the development of new ideas through iteration.
    • Supports faster access to knowledge.

    Select project-specific KPIs

    Use the selected KPIs to track the value of knowledge transfer

    You need to ensure your knowledge transfer initiatives are having the desired effect and adjust course when necessary. Establishing an upfront list of key performance indicators that will be benchmarked and tracked is a crucial step.

    Many organizations overlook the creation of KPIs for knowledge transfer because the benefits are often one step removed from the knowledge transfer itself. However, there are several metrics you can use to measure success.

    Hint: Metrics will vary based on your knowledge transfer maturity goals.

    Metrics For Knowledge Transfer

    Creating KPIs for knowledge transfer is a crucial step that many organizations overlook because the benefits are often one step removed from the knowledge transfer itself. However, there are several qualitative and quantitative metrics you can use to measure success depending on your maturity level goals.

    Stabilize

    • Number of high departure risk employees identified.
    • Number of high-risk employees without knowledge transfer plans.
    • Number of post-retirement knowledge issues.

    Be Proactive

    • Number of issues arising from lack of redundancy.
    • Percentage of high-risk knowledge items without transfer plans.
    • Time required to get new employees up to speed.

    Promote Knowledge Culture

    • Percentage of returned deliverables for rework.
    • Percentage of errors repeated in reports.
    • Number of employees mentoring their colleagues.
    • Number of issues solved through knowledge sharing.
    • Percentage of employees with knowledge transfer/development plans.

    1.1.3 Identify Key Metrics

    Identify key metrics the organization will use to measure knowledge transfer success

    How to determine knowledge transfer metrics:

    1. Assign each participant 1-4 of the desired knowledge transfer benefits and pain points which you identified as priorities.
    2. Independently have them brainstorm how they would measure the success of each, and after 10 minutes, present their thoughts to the group.
    3. Write each of the metric suggestions on a whiteboard and agree to 3-5 benefits which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key pain points you have identified and match your desired maturity level.
    InputOutput
    • Knowledge transfer pain points and benefits
    • 3-5 key metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • IT Leadership Team

    Identify knowledge transfer project team

    Determine Project Participants

    Pick a Project Sponsor

    • The project participants are the IT managers and directors whose day-to-day lives will be impacted by the knowledge transfer roadmap and its implementation.
    • These individuals will be your roadmap ream and will help with planning. Most of these individuals should be in the workshop, but ensure you have everyone covered. Some examples of individuals you should consider for your team are:
      • Director/Manager Level:
        • Applications
        • Infrastructure
        • Operations
      • Service Delivery Managers
      • Business Relationship Managers
    • The project sponsor should be a member of your IT department’s senior executive team whose goals and objectives will be impacted by knowledge transfer implementation.
      • This is the person you will get to sign-off on the project charter document.
    The image contains a triangle that has been split into three parts. The top section is labelled: Project Sponsor, middle section: Project Participants, and the bottom is labelled Project Stakeholders.

    The project sponsor is the main catalyst for the creation of the roadmap. They will be the one who signs off on the project roadmap.

    The Project Participants are the key stakeholders in your organization whose input will be pivotal to the creation of the roadmap.

    The project stakeholders are the senior executives who have a vested interest in knowledge transfer. Following completion of this workshop, you will present your roadmap to these individuals for approval.

    1.1.4 Identify Your Project Team

    How to define the knowledge transfer project team:

    1. Through discussion, generate a complete list of key stakeholders, considering each of the roles indicated in the chart on the Key Project Management Stakeholders slide. Write their names on a whiteboard.
    2. Using the quadrant template on the next slide, draw the stakeholder power map.
    3. Evaluate each stakeholder on the list based on their level of influence and support of the project. Write the stakeholder’s name on a sticky note and place it in the appropriate place on the grid.
    4. Create an engagement plan based on the stakeholder’s placement.
    5. Use Info-Tech’s Project Stakeholder Register Template to identify and document your project management stakeholders.

    Project Stakeholder Register Template

    Input Output
    • Initial stakeholder analysis
    • Complete list of project participants.
    • Complete project stakeholder register.
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard / Flip chart
    • Markers / Pens
    • Project Stakeholder Register Template
    • IT Leadership Team
    • Other stakeholders

    Have a strategic approach for engaging stakeholders to help secure buy-in

    If your IT leadership team isn’t on board, you’re in serious trouble! IT leaders will not only be highly involved in the knowledge transfer project, but they also may be participants, so it’s essential that you get their buy-in for the project upfront.

    Document the results in the Project Stakeholder Register Template; use this as a guide to help structure your communication with stakeholders based on where they fall on the grid.

    How to Manage:

    Focus on increasing these stakeholders’ level of support!

    1. Have a one-on-one meeting to seek their views on critical issues and address concerns.
    2. Identify key pain points they have experienced and incorporate these in the project goal statements.
    3. Where possible, leverage KT champions to help encourage support.
    The image contains a small graph to demonstrate the noise makers, the blockers, the changers, and the helpers.

    Capitalize on champions to drive the project/change.

    1. Use them for internal PR of the objectives and benefits.
    2. Ask them what other stakeholders can be leveraged.
    3. Involve them early in creating project documents.

    How to Manage:

    How to Manage:

    Pick your battles – focus on your noise makers first, and then move on to your blockers.

    1. Determine the level of involvement the blockers will have in the project (i.e. what you will need from them in the future) and determine next steps based on this (one-on-one meeting, group meeting, informal communication, or leveraging helpers/ champions to encourage them).

    Leverage this group where possible to help socialize the program and to help encourage dissenters to support.

    1. Mention their support in group settings.
    2. Focus on increasing their understanding via informal communication.

    How to Manage:

    Key Project Management Stakeholders

    Role

    Project Role

    Required

    CIO

    Will often play the role of project sponsor and should be involved in key decision points.

    IT Managers Directors

    Assist in the identification of high-risk stakeholders and knowledge and will be heavily involved in the development of each transfer plan.

    Project Manager

    Should be in charge of leading the development and execution of the project.

    Business Analysts

    Responsible for knowledge transfer elicitation analysis and validation for the knowledge transfer project.

    Situational

    Technical Lead

    Responsible for solution design where required for knowledge transfer tactics.

    HR

    Will aid in the identification of high-risk stakeholders or help with communication and stakeholder management.

    Legal

    Organizations that are subject to knowledge confidentiality, Sarbanes-Oxley, federal rules, etc. may need legal to participate in planning.

    Ensure coverage of all project tasks

    Populate a Project RACI (Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed) chart

    Apps MGR

    Dev. MGR

    Infra MGR

    Build the project charter

    R

    R

    I

    Identify IT stakeholders

    R

    R

    I

    Identify high risk stakeholders

    R

    A

    R

    Identify high risk knowledge

    I C C

    Validate prioritized stakeholders

    I C R

    Interview key stakeholders

    R R A

    Identify knowledge transfer tactics for individuals

    C C A

    Communicate knowledge transfer goals

    C R A

    Build the knowledge transfer roadmap

    C R A

    Approve knowledge transfer roadmap

    C R C

    1.1.5 Populate an RACI

    Populate a RACI chart to identify who should be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each key activity.

    How to define RACI for the project team:

    1. Write out the list of all stakeholders along the top of a whiteboard. Write out the key project steps along the left-hand side (use this list as a starting point).
    2. For each initiative, identify each team member’s role. Are they:
    3. Responsible: The one responsible for getting the job done.

      Accountable: Only one person can be accountable for each task.

      Consulted: Involvement through input of knowledge and information.

      Informed: Receiving information about process execution and quality.

    4. As you proceed through the project, continue to add tasks and assign responsibility to the RACI chart on the next slide.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder list
    • Key project steps
    • Project RACI chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • IT Leadership Team

    1.1.6 Build the Project Charter and Obtain Sign-off

    Complete the IT knowledge transfer project charter.

    Build the project charter and obtain sign-off from your project sponsor. Use your organization’s project charter if one exists. If not, customize Info-Tech’s IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template to suit your needs.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT knowledge transfer project charter template.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Project Charter Template

    Step 1.2

    Identify Your Knowledge and Stakeholder Risks

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify Knowledge Sources

    1.2.2 Complete a Knowledge Risk Assessment

    1.2.3 Review the Prioritized List of Knowledge Sources

    The primary goal of this section is to identify who your primary risk targets are for knowledge transfer.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A list of your high-risk knowledge sources
    • Departure analysis
    • Knowledge risk analysis

    Prioritize your knowledge transfer initiatives

    Throughout this section, we will walk through the following 3 activities in the tool to determine where you need to focus attention for your knowledge transfer roadmap based on knowledge value and likelihood of departure.

    1. Identify Knowledge Sources

    Create a list of knowledge sources for whom you will be conducting the analysis, and identify which sources currently have a transfer plan in place.

    2. Value of Knowledge

    Consider the type of knowledge held by each identified knowledge source and determine the level of risk based on the knowledge:

    1. Criticality
    2. Availability

    3. Likelihood of Departure

    Identify the knowledge source’s risk of leaving the organization based on their:

    1. Age cohort
    2. Engagement level

    This tool contains sensitive information. Do not share this tool with knowledge sources. The BA and Project Manager, and potentially the project sponsor, should be the only ones who see the completed tool.

    The image contains screenshots from the Knowledge Risk Assessment Tool.

    Focus on key roles instead of all roles in IT

    Identify Key Roles

    Hold a meeting with your IT Leadership team, or meet with members individually, and ask these questions to identify key roles:

    • What are the roles that have a significant impact on delivering the business strategy?
    • What are the key differentiating roles for our IT organization?
    • Which roles, if vacant, would leave the organization open to non-compliance with regulatory or legal requirements?
    • Which roles have a direct impact on the customer?
    • Which roles, if vacant, would create system, function, or process failure for the organization?

    Key roles include:

    • Strategic roles: Roles that give the greatest competitive advantage. Often these are roles that involve decision-making responsibility.
    • Core roles: Roles that must provide consistent results to achieve business goals.
    • Proprietary roles: Roles that are tied closely to unique or proprietary internal processes or knowledge that cannot be procured externally. These are often highly technical or specialized.
    • Required roles: Roles that support the department and are required to keep it moving forward day-to-day.
    • Influential roles: Positions filled by employees who are the backbone of the organization, i.e. the go-to people who are the corporate culture.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This step is meant to help speed up and simplify the process for large IT organizations. IT organizations with fewer than 30 people, or organizations looking to build a knowledge culture, can opt to skip this step and include all members of the IT team. This way, everyone is considered and you can prioritize accordingly.

    1.2.1 Identify Key Knowledge Sources

    1. Identify key roles, as shown on the previous slide. This can be done by brainstorming names on sticky notes and placing them on a whiteboard.
    2. Document using IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool Tab 2. Input with first name, last name, department/ IT area, and manager of each identified Knowledge Source.
    3. Also answer the question of whether the Knowledge Source currently has a knowledge transfer plan in place.
    • Not in place
    • Partially in place
    • In place
  • Conduct sanity check: once you have identified key roles, ask – “did we miss anybody?”
  • InputOutput
    • Employee list
    • List of knowledge sources for IT
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.
    • IT Leadership Team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Document key knowledge sources (example)

    Use information about the current state of knowledge transfer plans in your organization to understand your key risks and focus areas.

    The image contains a screenshot of the knowledge source.

    Legend:

    1. Document knowledge source information (name, department, and manager).

    2. Select the current state of knowledge transfer plans for each knowledge source.

    Once you have identified key roles, conduct a sanity check and ask – “did we miss anybody?” For example:

    • There are three systems administrators. One of them, Joe, has been with the organization for 15 years.
    • Joe’s intimate systems knowledge and long-term relationship with one of the plant systems vendors has made him a go-to person during times of operational systems crisis and has resulted in systems support discounts.
    • While the systems administrator role by itself is not considered key (partly due to role redundancy), Joe is a key person to flag for knowledge transfer activities as losing him would make achieving core business goals more difficult.

    Case Study

    Municipal government learns the importance of thorough knowledge source identification after losing key stakeholder

    INDUSTRY: Government

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    • A municipal government was introducing a new integration project that was led by their controller.
    • The controller left abruptly, and while the HR department conducted an exit interview, they didn’t realize until after the individual had left how much information was lost.
    • Nobody knew the information needed to complete the integration, so they had to make do with what they had.
    • The Director of IT at the time was the most familiar with the process.
    • Even though she would not normally do this type of project, at the time she was the only person with knowledge of the process and luckily was able to complete the integration.
    • The Director of IT had to put other key projects on hold, and lost productivity on other prioritized work.
    • The organization realized how much they were at risk and changed how they approached knowledge. They created a new process to identify “single point of failures” and label people as high risk. These processes started with the support organization’s senior level key people to identify their processes and record everything they do and what they know.

    Identify employees who may be nearing retirement and flag them as high risk

    Risk Parameter

    Description

    How to Collect this Data:

    Age Cohort

    • 60+ years of age or older, or anyone who has indicated they will be retiring within five years (highest risk).
    • Employees in their early 50s: are still many years away from retirement but have a sufficient number of years remaining in their career to make a move to a new role outside of your organization.
    • Employees in their late 50s: are likely more than five years away from retirement but are less likely than younger employees to leave your organization for another role because of increasing risk in making such a move, and persistent employer unwillingness to hire older employees.
    • Employees under 50: should never be considered low risk only based on age – which is why the second component of stakeholder risk is engagement.

    For those people on your shortlist, pull some hard demographic data.

    Compile a report that breaks down employees into age-based demographic groups.

    Flag those over the age of 50 – they’re in the “retirement zone” and could decide to leave at any time.

    Check to see which stakeholders identified fall into the “over 50” age demographic.

    Document this information in the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    150% of an employee’s base salary and benefits is the estimated cost of turnover according to The Society of Human Resource Professionals.1

    1McLean & Company, Make the Case for Employee Engagement

    Identify disengaged employees who may be preparing to leave the organization

    Risk Parameter

    Description

    How to Collect this Data:

    Engagement

    An engaged stakeholder is energized and passionate about their work, leading them to exert discretionary effort to drive organizational performance (lowest risk).

    An almost engaged stakeholder is generally passionate about their work. At times they exert discretionary effort to help achieve organizational goals.

    Indifferent employees are satisfied, comfortable, and generally able to meet minimum expectations. They see their work as “just a job,” prioritizing their needs before organizational goals.

    Disengaged employees have little interest in their job and the organization and often display negative attitudes (highest risk).

    Option 1:

    The optimal approach for determining employee engagement is through an engagement survey. See McLean & Company for more details.

    Option 2:

    Ask the identified stakeholder’s manager to provide an assessment of their engagement either independently or via a meeting.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engaged employees are five times more likely than disengaged employees to agree that they are committed to their organization.1

    1Source: McLean & Company, N = 13683

    The level of risk of the type of information is defined by criticality and availability

    Risk Parameter

    Description

    How to Collect this Data:

    Criticality

    Roles that are critical to the continuation of business and cannot be left vacant without risking business operations. Would the role, if vacant, create system, function, or process failure for the organization?

    Option 1: (preferred)

    Meet with IT managers/directors over the phone or directly and review each of the identified reports to determine the risk.

    Option 2: Send the IT mangers/directors the list of their direct reports, and ask them to evaluate their knowledge type risk independently and return the information to you.

    Option 3: (if necessary) Review individual job descriptions independently, and use your judgment to come up with a rating for each. Send the assessment to the stakeholders’ managers for validation.

    Availability

    Refers to level of redundancy both within and outside of the organization. Information which is highly available is considered lower risk. Key questions to consider include: does this individual have specialized, unique, or proprietary expertise? Are there internal redundancies?

    1.2.2 Complete a Knowledge Risk Assessment

    Complete a Tab 3 assessment for each of your identified Knowledge Sources. The Knowledge Source tab will pre-populate with information from Tab 2 of the tool. For each knowledge source, you will determine their likelihood of departure and degree of knowledge risk.

    Likelihood of departure:

    1. Document the age cohort risk for each knowledge source on Tab 3 of the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool. Age Cohort: Under 50, 51-55, 56-60, or over 60.
    2. Document the engagement risk for each knowledge source on Tab 3, “Assessment”, of the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool. Engagement level: Engaged, Almost engaged, Indifferent employees, Disengaged.
    3. Degree of knowledge risk is based on:

    4. Document the knowledge type risk for each stakeholder on Tab 3, “Assessment” in the IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool.
    • Criticality: Would the role, if vacant, create system, function, or process failure for the organization?
    • Availability: Does this individual have specialized, unique, or proprietary expertise? Are there internal redundancies?
    Input Output
    • Knowledge source list (Tab 2)
    • Employee demographics information
    • List of high-risk knowledge sources
    Materials Participants
    • Sticky notes
    • Pens
    • Whiteboard
    • Marker
    • IT Leadership Team
    • HR

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Results matrix

    The image contains a screenshot of risk assessment. The image contains a matrix example from tab 4.

    Determine where to focus your efforts

    The IT Knowledge Transfer Map on Tab 5 helps you to determine where to focus your knowledge transfer efforts

    Knowledge sources have been separated into the three maturity levels (Stabilize, Proactive, and Knowledge Culture) and prioritized within each level.

    Focus first on your stabilize groups, and based on your target maturity goal, move on to your proactive and knowledge culture groups respectively.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer Map on tab 5.

    Sequential Prioritization

    Orange line Level 1: Stabilize

    Blue Line Level 2: Proactive

    Green Line Level 3: Knowledge Culture

    Each pie chart indicates which of the stakeholders in that risk column currently has knowledge transfer plans.

    Each individual also has their own status ball on whether they currently have a knowledge transfer plan.

    1.2.3 Review the Prioritized List

    Review results

    Identify knowledge sources to focus on for the knowledge transfer roadmap. Review the IT Knowledge Transfer Map on Tab 5 to determine where to focus your knowledge transfer efforts

    1. Show the results from the assessment tool.
    2. Discuss matrix and prioritized list.
    • Does it match with maturity goals?
    • Do prioritizations seem correct?
    InputOutput
    • Knowledge source risk profile
    • Risk Assessment (Tab 3)
    • Prioritized list of knowledge sources to focus on for the knowledge transfer roadmap
    MaterialsParticipants
    • n/a
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool
    • IT Leadership Team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool

    Phase #2

    Design your knowledge transfer plans

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Obtain approval for project

    1.2 Identify knowledge and stakeholder risks

    2.1 Build knowledge transfer plans

    2.2 Build knowledge transfer roadmap

    3.1 Communicate your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Building knowledge transfer plans for all prioritized knowledge sources.
    • Understanding which transfer tactics are best suited for different knowledge types.
    • Identifying opportunities to leverage collaboration tools for knowledge transfer.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Leadership
    • Other key stakeholders
    • Knowledge sources

    Define what knowledge needs to be transferred

    Each knowledge source has unique information which needs to be transferred. Chances are you don’t know what you don’t know. The first step is therefore to interview knowledge sources to find out.

    Identify the knowledge receiver

    Depending on who the information is going to, the knowledge transfer tactic you employ will differ. Before deciding on the knowledge receiver and tactic, consider three key factors:

    • How will this knowledge be used in the future?
    • What is the next career step for the knowledge receiver?
    • Are the receiver and the source going to be in the same location?

    Identify which knowledge transfer tactics you will use for each knowledge asset

    Not all tactics are good in every situation. Always keep the “knowledge type” (information, process, skills, and expertise), knowledge sources’ engagement level, and the knowledge receiver in mind as you select tactics.

    Determine knowledge transfer tactics

    Determine tactics for each stakeholder based on qualities of their specific knowledge.

    This tool is built to accommodate up to 30 knowledge items; Info-Tech recommends focusing on the top 10-15 items.

    1. Send documents to each manager. Include:
    • a copy of this template.
    • interview guide.
    • tactics booklet.
  • Instruct managers to complete the template for each knowledge source and return it to you.
  • These steps should be completed by the BA or IT Manager. The BA is helpful to have around because they can learn about the tactics and answer any questions about the tactics that the managers might have when completing the template.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Knowledge Source's Name.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Step 2.1

    Build Your Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Activities

    2.1.1 Interview Knowledge Sources to Uncover Key Knowledge Items

    2.1.2 Identify When to use Knowledge Transfer Tactics

    2.1.3 Build Individual Knowledge Transfer Plans

    The primary goal of this section is to build an interview guide and interview knowledge sources to identify key knowledge assets.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Knowledge Transfer Interview Guide
    • Itemized knowledge assets
    • Completed knowledge transfer plans

    2.1.1 Interview Knowledge Sources

    Determine key knowledge items

    The first step is for managers to interview knowledge sources in order to extract information about the type of knowledge the source has.

    Meet with the knowledge sources and work with them to identify essential knowledge. Use the following questions as guidance:

    1. What are you an expert in?
    2. What do others ask you for assistance with?
    3. What are you known for?
    4. What are key responsibilities you have that no one else has or knows how to do?
    5. Are there any key systems, processes, or applications which you’ve taken the lead on?
    6. When you go on vacation, what is waiting for you in your inbox?
    7. If you went on vacation, would there be any systems that, if there was a failure, you would be the only one who knows how to fix?
    8. Would you say that all the key processes you use, or tools, codes etc. are documented?
    Input Output
    • Knowledge type information
    • Prioritized list of key knowledge sources.
    • Knowledge activity information
    • What are examples of good use cases for the technique?
    • Why would you use this technique over others?
    • Is this technique suitable for all projects? When wouldn’t you use it?
    Materials Participants
    • Interview guide
    • Pen
    • Paper
    • IT Leadership Team
    • Knowledge sources

    IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template

    2.1.2 Understand Knowledge Transfer Tactics

    Understand when and how to use different knowledge transfer tactics

    1. Break the workshop participants into teams. Assign each team two to four knowledge transfer tactics and provide them with the associated handout(s) from the following slides. Using the material provided, have each team brainstorm around the following questions:
      1. What types of information can the technique be used to collect?
      2. What are examples of good use cases for the technique?
      3. Why would you use this technique over others?
      4. Is this technique suitable for all projects? When wouldn’t you use it?
    2. Have each group present their findings from the brainstorming to the group.
    3. Once everyone has presented, have the groups select which tactics they would be interested in using and which ones they would not want to use by putting green and red dots on each.
    4. As a group, confirm the list of tactics you would be interested in using and disqualify the others.
    Input Output
    • List of knowledge tactics to utilize.
    Materials Participants
    • Knowledge transfer tactics handouts
    • Flip chart paper
    • Markers
    • Green and red dot stickers
    • IT Leadership Team
    • Project team

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Interviews

    Interviews provide an opportunity to meet one-on-one with key stakeholders to document key knowledge assets. Interviews can be used for explicit and tacit information, and in particular, capture processes, rules, coding information, best practices, etc.

    Benefits:

    • Good bang-for-your-buck interviews are simple to conduct and can be used for all types of knowledge.
    • Interviews can obtain a lot of information in a relatively short period of time.
    • Interviews help make tacit knowledge more explicit through effective questioning.
    • They have highly flexible formatting as interviews can be conducted in person, over the phone, or by email.

    How to get started:

    1. Have the business analyst (BA) review the employee’s knowledge transfer plan and highlight the areas to be discussed in the interview.
    2. The BA will then create an interview guide detailing key questions which would need to be asked to ascertain the information.
    3. Schedule a 30-60 minute interview. When complete, document the interview and key lessons learned. Send the information back to the interviewee for validation of what was discussed.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development: Minimal

    Duration: Annual

    Participants

    Business analysts

    Knowledge source

    Materials

    Interview guide

    Notepad

    Pen

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Process Mapping

    Business process mapping refers to building a flow chart diagram of the sequence of actions which defines what a business does. The flow chart defines exactly what a process does and the specific succession of steps including all inputs, outputs, flows, and linkages. Process maps are a powerful tool to frame requirements in the context of the complete solution.

    Benefits:

    • They are simple to build and analyze; most organizations and users are familiar with flow diagrams, making them highly usable.
    • They provide an end-to-end picture of a process.
    • They’re ideal for gathering full and detailed requirements of a process.
    • They include information around who is responsible, what they do, when, where it occurs, triggers, to what degree, and how often it occurs.
    • They’re great for legacy systems.

    How to get started:

    1. Have the BA prepare beforehand by doing some preliminary research on the purpose of the process, and the beginning and end points.
    2. With the knowledge holder, use a whiteboard and identify the different stakeholders who interact with the process, and draw swim lanes for each.
    3. Together, use sticky notes and/or dry erase markers etc. to draw out the process.
    4. When you believe you’re complete, start again from the beginning and break the process down to more details.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development: Minimal

    Duration: Annual

    Participants

    Business analysts

    Knowledge source

    Materials

    Whiteboard / flip-chart paper

    Marker

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Use Cases

    Use case diagrams are a common transfer tactic where the BA maps out step-by-step how an employee completes a project or uses a system. Use cases show what a system or project does rather than how it does it. Use cases are frequently used by product managers and developers.

    Benefits:

    • Easy to draw and understand.
    • Simple way to digest information.
    • Can get very detailed.
    • Should be used for documenting processes, experiences etc.
    • Initiation and brainstorming.
    • Great for legacy systems.

    How to get started:

    1. The BA will schedule a 30-60 minute in-person meeting with the employee, draw a stick figure on the left side of the board, and pose the initial question: “If you need to do X, what is your first step?” Have the stakeholder go step-by-step through the process until the end goal. Draw this process across the whiteboard. Make sure you capture the triggers, causes of events, decision points, outcomes, tools, and interactions.
    2. Starting at the beginning of the diagram, go through each step again and ask the employee if the step can be broken down into more granular steps. If the answer is yes, break down the use case further.
    3. Ask the employee if there are any alternative flows that people could use, or any exceptions. If there are, map these out on the board.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development: Minimal

    Duration: Annual

    Participants

    Business analysts

    Knowledge source

    Materials

    Whiteboard / flip-chart paper

    Marker

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Job Shadow

    Job shadowing is a working arrangement where the “knowledge receiver” learns how to do a job by observing an experienced employee complete key tasks throughout their normal workday.

    Benefits:

    • Low cost and minimal effort required.
    • Helps employees understand different elements of the business.
    • Helps build relationships.
    • Good for knowledge holders who are not great communicators.
    • Great for legacy systems.

    How to get started:

    1. Determine goals and objectives for the knowledge transfer, and communicate these to the knowledge source and receiver.
    2. Have the knowledge source identify when they will be performing a particular knowledge activity and select that day for the job shadow. If the information is primarily experience, select any day which is convenient.
    3. Ask the knowledge receiver to shadow the source and ask questions whenever they have them.
    4. Following the job shadow, have the knowledge receiver document what they learned that day and file that information.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    BA

    IT manager

    Knowledge source and receiver

    Materials

    N/A

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Peer Assist

    Meeting or workshop where peers from different teams share their experiences and knowledge with individuals or teams that require help with a specific challenge or problem.

    Benefits:

    • Improves productivity through enhanced problem solving.
    • Encourages collaboration between teams to share insight, and assistance from people outside your team to obtain new possible approaches.
    • Promotes sharing and development of new connections among different staff, and creates opportunities for innovation.
    • Can be combined with Action Reviews.

    How to get started:

    1. Create a registry of key projects that different individuals have solved. Where applicable, leverage the existing work done through action reviews.
    2. Create and communicate a process for knowledge sources and receivers to reach out to one another. Email or social collaboration platforms are the most common.
    3. The source may then reply with documentation or a peer can set up an interview to discuss.
    4. Information should be recorded and saved on a corporate share drive with appropriate metadata to ensure ease of search.
    5. See Appendix for further details.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Minimal

    Technology Support: N/A

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    Knowledge sources

    Knowledge receiver

    BA to build a skill repository

    Materials

    Intranet

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Transition Workshop

    A half- to full-day exercise where an outgoing leader facilitates a knowledge transfer of key insights they have learned along the way and any high-profile knowledge they may have.

    Benefits:

    • Accelerates knowledge transfer following a leadership change.
    • Ensures business continuity.
    • New leader gets a chance to understand the business drivers behind team decisions and skills of each member.
    • The individuals on the team learn about the new leader’s values and communication styles.

    How to get started:

    1. Outgoing leader organizes a one-time session where they share information with the team (focus on tacit knowledge, such as team successes and challenges) and team can ask questions.
    2. Incoming leader and remaining team members share information about norms, priorities, and values.
    3. Document the information.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: Some

    Process Development: Some

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT leader

    Incoming IT team

    Key stakeholders

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Action Review

    Action Review is a team-based discussion at the end of a project or step to review how the activity went and what can be done differently next time. It is ideal for transferring expertise and skills.

    Benefits:

    • Learning is done during and immediately after the project so that knowledge transfer happens quickly.
    • Results can be shared with other teams outside of the immediate members.
    • Makes tacit knowledge explicit.
    • Encourages a culture where making mistakes is OK, but you need to learn from them.

    How to get started:

    1. Hold an initial meeting with IT teams to inform them of the action reviews. Create an action review goals statement by working with IT teams to discuss what they hope to get out of the initiative.
    2. Ask project teams to present their work and answer the following questions:
      1. What was supposed to happen?
      2. What actually happened?
      3. Why were there differences?
      4. What can we learn and do differently next time?
    3. Have each individual or group present, record the meeting minutes, and send the details to the group for future reference. Determine a share storage place on your company intranet or shared drive for future reference.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training:Minimal

    Technology Support: Minimal

    Process Development: Some

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT unit/group

    Any related IT stakeholder impacted by or involved in a project.

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Mentoring

    Mentoring can be a formal program where management sets schedules and expectations. It can also be informal through an environment for open dialogue where staff is encouraged to seek advice and guidance, and to share their knowledge with more novice members of the organization.

    Benefits:

    • Speeds up learning curves and helps staff acclimate to the organizational culture.
    • Communicates organizational values and appropriate behaviors, and is an effective way to augment training efforts.
    • Leads to higher engagement by improving communication among employees, developing leadership, and helping employees work effectively.
    • Improves succession planning by preparing and grooming employees for future roles and ensuring the next wave of managers is qualified.

    How to get started:

    1. Have senior management define the goals for a mentorship program. Depending on your goals, the frequency, duration, and purpose for mentorship will change. Create a mission statement for the program.
    2. Communicate the program with mentors and mentees and define what the scope of their roles will be.
    3. Implement the program and measure success.

    Creating a mentorship program is a full project in itself. For full details on how to set up a mentorship program, see McLean & Company’s Build a Mentoring Program.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: N/a

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT unit/group

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Documentation

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Story Telling

    Knowledge sources use anecdotal examples to highlight a specific point and pass on information, experience, and ideas through narrative.

    Benefits:

    • Provides context and transfers expertise in a simple way between people of different contexts and background.
    • Illustrates a point effectively and makes a lasting impression.
    • Helps others learn from past situations and respond more effectively in future ones.
    • Can be completed in person, through blogs, video or audio recordings, or case studies.

    How to get started:

    1. Select a medium for how your organization will record stories, whether through blogs, video or audio recordings, or case studies. Develop a template for how you’re going to record the information.
    2. Integrate story telling into key activities – project wrap-up, job descriptions, morning meetings, etc.
    3. Determine the medium for retaining and searching stories.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Required

    Technology Support: Some

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    Knowledge source

    Knowledge receiver

    Videographer (where applicable)

    Materials

    Meeting space

    Video conferencing (as needed)

    Documentation

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Job Share

    Job share exists when at least two people share the knowledge and responsibilities of two job roles.

    Benefits:

    • Reduces the risk of concentrating all knowledge in one person and creating a single point of failure.
    • Increases the number of experts who hold key knowledge that can be shared with others, i.e. “two heads are better than one.”
    • Ensures redundancies exist for when an employee leaves or goes on vacation.
    • Great for getting junior employees up to speed on legacy system functionality.
    • Results in more agile teams.
    • Doubles the amount of skills and expertise.

    How to get started:

    1. Determine which elements of two individuals’ job duties could be shared by two people. Before embarking on a job share, ensure that the two individuals will work well together as a team and individually.
    2. Establish a vision, clear values, and well-defined roles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships to avoid duplication of effort and confusion.
    3. Start with a pilot group of employees who are in support of the initiative, track the results, and make adjustments where needed.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training: Some

    Technology Support: Minimal

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    IT manager

    HR

    Employees

    Materials

    Job descriptions

    Knowledge Transfer Tactics:

    Communities of Practice

    Communities of practice are working groups of individuals who engage in a process of regularly sharing information with each other across different parts of the organization by focusing on common purpose and working practices. These groups meet on a regular basis to work together on problem solving, to gain information, ask for help and assets, and share opinions and best practices.

    Benefits:

    • Supports a collaborative environment.
    • Creates a sense of community and positive working relationships, which is a key driver for engagement.
    • Encourages creative thinking and support of one another.
    • Facilitates transfer of wide range of knowledge between people from different specialties.
    • Fast access to information.
    • Multiple employees hear the answers to questions and discussions, resulting in wider spread knowledge.
    • Can be done in person or via video conference, and is best when supported by social collaboration tools.

    How to get started:

    1. Determine your medium for these communities and ensure you have the needed technology.
    2. Develop training materials, and a rewards and recognition process for communities.
    3. Have a meeting with staff, ask them to brainstorm a list of different key “communities,” and ask staff to self select into communities.
    4. Have the communities determine the purpose statement for each group, and set up guidelines for functionality and uses.

    Knowledge Types

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Dependencies

    Training:Required

    Technology Support: Required

    Process Development:Required

    Duration:Ongoing

    Participants

    Employees

    BA (to assist in establishing)

    IT managers (rewards and recognition)

    Materials

    TBD

    The effectiveness of each knowledge transfer tactic varies based on the type of knowledge you are trying to transfer

    This table shows the relative strengths and weaknesses of each knowledge transfer tactic compared to four different knowledge types.

    Not all techniques are effective for types of knowledge; it is important to use a healthy mixture of techniques to optimize effectiveness.

    Very strong = Very effective

    Strong = Effective

    Medium = Somewhat effective

    Weak = Minimally effective

    Very weak = Not effective

    Knowledge Type

    Tactic

    Explicit

    Tacit

    Information

    Process

    Skills

    Expertise

    Interviews

    Very strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Process mapping

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very weak

    Very weak

    Use cases

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very weak

    Very weak

    Job shadow

    Very weak

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Peer assist

    Strong

    Medium

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Action review

    Medium

    Medium

    Strong

    Weak

    Mentoring

    Weak

    Weak

    Strong

    Very strong

    Transition workshop

    Strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Strong

    Story telling

    Weak

    Weak

    Strong

    Very strong

    Job share

    Weak

    Weak

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Communities of practice

    Strong

    Weak

    Very strong

    Very strong

    Consider your stakeholders’ level of engagement prior to selecting a knowledge transfer tactic

    Level of Engagement

    Tactic

    Disengaged/ Indifferent

    Almost Engaged - Engaged

    Interviews

    Yes

    Yes

    Process mapping

    Yes

    Yes

    Use cases

    Yes

    Yes

    Job shadow

    No

    Yes

    Peer assist

    Yes

    Yes

    Action review

    Yes

    Yes

    Mentoring

    No

    Yes

    Transition workshop

    Yes

    Yes

    Story telling

    No

    Yes

    Job share

    Maybe

    Yes

    Communities of practice

    Maybe

    Yes

    When considering which tactics to employ, it’s important to consider the knowledge holder’s level of engagement. Employees whom you would identify as being disengaged may not make good candidates for job shadowing, mentoring, or other tactics where they are required to do additional work or are asked to influence others.

    Knowledge transfer can be controversial for all employees as it can cause feelings of job insecurity. It’s essential that motivations for knowledge transfer are communicated effectively.

    Pay particular attention to your communication style with disengaged and indifferent employees, communicate frequently, and tie communication back to what’s in it for them.

    Putting disengaged employees in a position where they are mentoring others can be a risk. Their negativity could influence others not to participate as well or negate the work you’re doing to create a positive knowledge sharing culture.

    Consider using collaboration tools as a medium for knowledge transfer

    There is a wide variety of different collaboration tools available to enable interpersonal and team connections for work-related purposes. Familiarize yourself with all types of collaboration tools to understand what is available to help facilitate knowledge transfer.

    Collaboration Tools

    Content Management

    Real Time Communication

    Community Collaboration

    Social Collaboration

    Tools for collaborating around documents. They store content and allow for easy sharing and editing, e.g. content repositories and version control.

    Can be used for:

    • Action review
    • Process maps and use cases
    • Storing interview notes
    • Stories: blogs, video, and case studies

    Tools that enable real-time employee interactions. They permit “on-demand” workplace communication, e.g. IM, video and web conferencing.

    Can be used for:

    • Action review
    • Interviews
    • Mentoring
    • Peer assist
    • Story telling
    • Transition workshops

    Tools that allow teams and communities to come together and share ideas or collaborate on projects, e.g. team portals, discussion boards, and ideation tools.

    Can be used for:

    • Action review
    • Communities of practice
    • Peer assist
    • Story Telling

    Social tools borrow concepts from consumer social media and apply them to the employee-centric context, e.g. employee profiles, activity streams, and microblogging.

    Can be used for:

    • Peer assist
    • Story telling
    • Communities of practice

    For more information on Collaboration Tools and how to use them, see Info-Tech’s Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy.

    Identify potential knowledge receivers

    Hold a meeting with your IT leaders to identify who would be the best knowledge receivers for specific knowledge assets

    • Before deciding on a successor, determine how the knowledge asset will be used in the future. This will impact who the receiver will be and your tactic. That is, if you are looking to upgrade a technology in the future, consider who would be taking on that project and what they would need to know.
    • Prior to the meeting, each manager should send a copy of the knowledge assets they have identified to the other managers.
    • Participants should come equipped with names of members of their teams and have an idea of what their career aspirations are.
    • Don’t assume that all employees want a career change. Be sure to have conversations with employees to determine their career aspirations.

    Ask how effectively the potential knowledge receiver would serve in the role today.

    • Review their competencies in terms of:
      • Relationship-building skills
      • Business skills
      • Technical skills
      • Industry-specific skills or knowledge
    • Consider what competencies the knowledge receiver currently has and what must be learned.
    • Finally, determine how difficult it will be for the knowledge receiver to acquire missing skills or knowledge, whether the resources are available to provide the required development, and how long it will take to provide it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Wherever possible, ask employees about their personal learning styles. It’s likely that a collaborative compromise will have to be struck for knowledge transfer to work well.

    Using the IT knowledge transfer plan tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Knowledge Transfer tool.

    We will use the IT Knowledge Transfer Plans as the foundation for building your knowledge transfer roadmap.

    2.1.3 Complete Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Complete one plan template for each of the knowledge sources

    1. Fill in the top with the knowledge source’s name. Remember that one template should be filled out for each source.
    2. List their key knowledge activities as identified through the interview.
    3. For each knowledge activity, identify and list the most appropriate recipient of this knowledge.
    4. For each knowledge activity, use the drop-down options to identify the type of knowledge that it falls under.
    5. Depending on the type of knowledge, different tactic drop-down options are available. Select which tactic would be most appropriate for this knowledge as well as the people involved in the knowledge transfer.

    The Strength Level column will indicate how well matched the tactic is to the type of knowledge.

    Input Output
    • Results of knowledge source interviews
    • A completed knowledge transfer plan for each identified knowledge source.
    Materials Participants
    • A completed knowledge transfer plan for each identified knowledge source.
    • IT leadership team

    IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template

    Step 2.2

    Build Your Knowledge Transfer Roadmap

    Activities

    2.2.1 Merge Your Knowledge Transfer Plans

    2.2.2 Define Knowledge Transfer Initiatives’ Timeframes

    The goal of this step is to build the logistics of the knowledge transfer roadmap to prepare to communicate it to key stakeholders.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritized sequence based on target state maturity goals.
    • Project roadmap.

    Plan and monitor the knowledge transfer project

    Depending on the desired state of maturity, the number of initiatives your organization has will vary and there could be a lengthy number of tasks and subtasks required to reach your organization knowledge transfer target state. The best way to plan, organize, and manage all of them is with a project roadmap.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Planning and Monitoring tool.

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    Steps to use the project planning and monitoring tool:

    1. Begin by identifying all the project deliverables in scope for your organization. Review the previous content pertaining to specific people, process, and technology deliverables that your organization plans on creating.
    2. Identify all the tasks and subtasks necessary to create each deliverable.
    3. Arrange the tasks in the appropriate sequential order.
    4. Assign each task to a member of the project team.
    5. Estimate the day the task will be started and completed.
    6. Specify any significant dependencies or prerequisites between tasks.
    7. Update the project roadmap throughout the project by accounting for injections and entering the actual starting and ending dates.
    8. Use the project dashboard to monitor the project progress and identify risks early.

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    Prioritize your tactics to build a realistic roadmap

    Initiatives should not and cannot be tackled all at once;

    • At this stage, each of the identified stakeholders should have a knowledge transfer plan for each of their reports with rough estimates for how long initiatives will take.
    • Simply looking at this raw list of transition plans can be daunting. Logically bundle the identified needs into IT initiatives to create the optimal IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap.
    • It’s important not to try to do too much too quickly. Focus on some quick wins and leverage the success of these initiatives to drive the project forward.

    The image contains a screenshot of the prioritize tactics step.

    Populate the task column of the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool. See the following slides for more details on how to do this.

    Some techniques require a higher degree of effort than others

    Effort by Stakeholder

    Tactic

    Business Analyst

    IT Manager

    Knowledge Holder

    Knowledge Receiver

    Interviews

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    These tactics require the least amount of effort, especially for organizations that are already using these tactics for a traditional requirements gathering process.

    Process Mapping

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Use Cases

    Medium

    N/A

    Low

    Low

    Job Shadow

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    These tactics generally require more involvement from IT management and the BA in tandem for preparation. They will also require ongoing effort for all stakeholders. Stakeholder buy-in is key for success.

    Peer Assist

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Action Review

    Low

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Mentoring

    Medium

    High

    High

    Medium

    Transition Workshop

    Medium

    Low

    Medium

    Low

    Story Telling

    Medium

    Medium

    Low

    Low

    Job Share

    Medium

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Communities of Practice

    High

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    Consider each tactic’s dependencies as you build your roadmap

    Implementation Dependencies

    Tactic

    Training

    Technology Support

    Process Development

    Duration

    Interviews

    Minimal

    N/A

    Minimal

    Annual

    Start your knowledge transfer project here to get quick wins for explicit knowledge.

    Process Mapping

    Minimal

    N/A

    Minimal

    Annual

    Use Cases

    Minimal

    N/A

    Minimal

    Annual

    Job Shadow

    Required

    N/A

    Required

    Ongoing

    Don’t change too much too quickly or try to introduce all of the tactics at once. Focus on 1-2 key tactics and spend a significant amount of time upfront building an effective process and rolling it out. Leverage the effectiveness of the initial tactics to push these initiatives forward.

    Peer Assist

    Minimal

    N/A

    Required

    Ongoing

    Action Review

    Minimal

    Minimal

    Some

    Ongoing

    Mentoring

    Required

    N/A

    Required

    Ongoing

    Transition Workshop

    Required

    Some

    Some

    Ongoing

    Story Telling

    Some

    Required

    Required

    Ongoing

    Job Share

    Some

    Minimal

    Required

    Ongoing

    Communities of Practice

    Required

    Required

    Required

    Ongoing

    2.2.1 Merge Your Knowledge Transfer Plans

    Populate the task column of the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool

    1. Take an inventory of all the tactics and techniques which you plan to employ. Eliminate redundancies where possible.
    2. Start your implementation with your highest risk group using explicit knowledge transfer tactics. Interviews, use cases, and process mapping will give you some quick wins and will help gain momentum for the project.
    3. Proactive and knowledge culture should then move forward to other tactics, the majority of which will require training and process design. Pick one to two other key tactics you would like to employ and build those out.
    4. Once you get more advanced, you can continue to grow the number of tactics you employ, but in the beginning, less is more. Keep growing your implementation roadmap one tactic at a time and track key metrics as you go.
    InputOutput
    • A list of project tasks to be completed.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Project Planning Monitoring Tool.
    • IT Leadership Team

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    2.2.2 Define Initiatives’ Timeframes

    Populate the estimated start and completion date and task owner columns of the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.

    1. Define the time frame: time frames will depend on several factors. Consider the following while defining timelines for your knowledge transfer tactics:
    • Tactics you choose to employ
    • Availability of resources to implement the initiative
    • Technology requirements
  • Input the Start Date and End Date for each initiative via the drop-down. (Year 1-M1 = year 1, month 1 of implementation.)
  • Define the status of initiative:
    • Planned
    • In progress
    • Completed
  • The initiative owner will ensure each step of the rollout is executed as planned, and will:
    • Engage all required stakeholders at appropriate stages of the project.
    • Engage all required resources to implement the process and make sure that communication channels are open and available between all relevant parties.
    Input Output
    • Timeframes for all project tasks.
    Materials Participants
    • Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.
    • IT Leadership Team

    Project Planning & Monitoring Tool

    Once you start the implementation, leverage the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool for ongoing status updates

    Track your progress

    • Update your project roadmap as you complete the project and keep track of your progress by completing the “Actual Start Date” and “Actual Completion Date” as you go through your project.
    • Use the Progress Report tab in project team meetings to update stakeholders on which tasks have been completed on schedule, for an analysis of tasks to date, and project time management.
    The image contains screenshots from the Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.

    Phase #3

    Implement your knowledge transfer plans and roadmap

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Obtain approval for project

    1.2 Identify knowledge and stakeholder risks

    2.1 Build knowledge transfer plans

    2.2 Build knowledge transfer roadmap

    3.1 Communicate your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Preparing a key stakeholder communication presentation.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Leadership
    • Other key stakeholders

    Step 3.1

    Communicate Your Knowledge Transfer Roadmap to Stakeholders

    Activities

    3.1.1 Prepare IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation

    The goal of this step is to be ready to communicate the roadmap with the project team, project sponsor, and other key stakeholders.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key stakeholder communication deck.

    Use Info-Tech’s template to communicate with stakeholders

    Obtain approval for the IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap by customizing Info-Tech’s IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project Context
    • Project Scope and Objectives
    • Knowledge Transfer Roadmap
    • Next Steps

    The image contains screenshots of the IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The support of IT leadership is critical to the success of your roadmap roll-out. Remind them of the project benefits and impact them hard with the risks/pain points.

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template

    3.1.1 Prepare a Presentation for Your Project Team and Sponsor

    Now that you have created your knowledge transfer roadmap, the final step of the process is to get sign-off from the project sponsor to begin the planning process to roll-out your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Revisit your project charter to determine the knowledge transfer project stakeholders who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Management’s time is tight, and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery. Impact them hard and fast with the pains and benefits of your roadmap.
    3. The presentation should take no more than an hour. Depending on your audience, the actual presentation delivery could be quite short (12-13 slides). However, you want to ensure adequate time for Q & A.
    Input Output
    • Project charter
    • A completed presentation to communicate your knowledge transfer roadmap.
    Materials Participants
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template
    • IT leadership team
    • Project sponsor
    • Project stakeholders

    IT Knowledge Transfer Roadmap Presentation Template

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Succession Plan

    Train Managers to Handle Difficult Conversations

    Lead Staff Through Change

    Bibliography

    Babcock, Pamela. “Shedding Light on Knowledge Management.” HR Magazine, 1 May 2004.

    King, Rachael. "Big Tech Problem as Mainframes Outlast Workforce." Bloomberg, 3 Aug. 2010. Web.

    Krill, Paul. “IT’s Most Wanted: Mainframe Programmers.” IDG Communications, Inc. 1 December 2011.

    McLean & Company. “Mitigate the Risk of Baby Boomer Retirement with Scalable Succession Planning.” 7 March 2016.

    McLean & Company. “Make the Case For Employee Engagement.” McLean and Company. 27 March 2014.

    PwC. “15th Annual Global CEO Survey: Delivering Results Growth and Value in a Volatile World.” PwC, 2012.

    Rocket Software, Inc. “Rocket Software 2022 Survey Report: The State of the Mainframe.” Rocket Software, Inc. January 2022. Accessed 30 April 2022.

    Ross, Jenna. “Intangible Assets: A Hidden but Crucial Driver of Company Value.” Visual Capitalist, 11 February 2020. Accessed 2 May 2022.

    Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}255|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,656 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations must adapt their information security programs to accommodate insurance requirements.
    • Organizations need to reduce insurance costs.
    • Some organizations must find alternatives to cyber insurance.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Shopping for insurance policies is not step one.
    • First and foremost, we must determine what the organization is at risk for and how much it would cost to recover.
    • The cyber insurance market is still evolving. As insurance requirements change, effectively managing cyber insurance requires that your organization proactively manages risk.

    Impact and Result

    Perform an insurance policy comparison with scores based on policy coverage and exclusions.

    Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Storyboard - A step-by-step document that walks you through how to acquire cyber insurance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Use this blueprint to score your potential cyber insurance policies and develop skills to overcome common insurance pitfalls.

    • Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Storyboard

    2. Acquire cyber insurance with confidence – Learn the essentials of the requirements gathering, policy procurement, and review processes.

    Use these tools to gather cyber insurance requirements, prepare for the underwriting process, and compare policies.

    • Threat and Risk Assessment Tool
    • DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • Legacy DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • DRP BIA Scoring Context Example
    • Cyber Insurance Policy Comparison Tool
    • Cyber Insurance Controls Checklist

    Infographic

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}331|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $111,064 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • As an IT leader, you oversee a project environment in which the organizational demand for new products, services, and enhancements far outweighs IT’s resource capacity to adequately deliver on everything.
    • As a result, project throughput suffers. IT starts a lot of projects, but has constant difficulties delivering the bulk of them on time, on budget, in scope, and of high quality. What’s more, many of the projects that consume IT’s time are of questionable value to the business.
    • You need a project portfolio management (PPM) strategy to help bring order to IT’s project activity. With the right PPM strategy, you can ensure that you’re driving the throughput of the best projects and maximizing stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT leaders commonly conflate PPM and project management, falsely believing that they already have a PPM strategy via their project management playbook. While the tactical focus of project management can help ensure that individual projects are effectively planned, executed, and closed, it is no supplement for the insight into “the big picture” that a PPM strategy can provide.
    • Many organizations falter at PPM by mistaking a set of processes for a strategy. While processes are no doubt important, without an end in mind – such as that provided by a deliberate strategy – they inevitably devolve into inertia or confusion.
    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a PPM strategy. Without it, any efforts to reconcile supply and demand, and improve the strategic value of IT’s project activity, could be quashed by irresponsible, non-compliant stakeholders.

    Impact and Result

    • Manage the portfolio as more than just the sum of its parts. Create a coherent strategy to maximize the sum of values that projects deliver as a whole – as a project portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Get to value early. Info-Tech’s methodology tackles one of PPM’s most pressing challenges upfront by helping you to articulate a strategy and get executive buy-in for it before you define your process goals. When senior management understands why a PPM strategy is necessary and of value to them, the path to implementation is much more stable.
    • Create PPM processes you can sustain. Translate your PPM strategy into specific, tangible near-term and long-term goals, which are realized through a suite of project portfolio management processes tailored to your organization and its culture.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a project portfolio management strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Executive Brief
    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phases 1-3

    1. Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization and get executive buy-in before you start to set PPM process goals.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 1: Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy
    • PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    • PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template

    2. Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    Use the advice and tools in this phase to align the PPM processes that make up the infrastructure around projects with your new PPM strategy.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 2: Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool

    3. Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Refine your PPM strategic plan with inputs from the previous phases by adding a cost-benefit analysis and PPM tool recommendation.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 3: Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan
    • Project Portfolio Analyst / PMO Analyst
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy

    The Purpose

    Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization and ensure executive buy-in.

    Set process goals to address PPM strategic expectations and steer the PPM strategic plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A right-sized PPM strategy complete with executive buy-in for it.

    A prioritized list of PPM process goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess leadership mandate.

    1.2 Determine potential resource capacity.

    1.3 Create a project inventory.

    1.4 Prepare to communicate your PPM strategy to key stakeholders.

    1.5 Translate each strategic goal into process goals.

    1.6 Set metrics and preliminary targets for PPM process goals.

    Outputs

    Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate

    Analysis of current project capacity

    Analysis of current project demand

    PPM Strategic Plan – Executive Brief

    PPM strategy-aligned process goals

    Metrics and long-term targets for PPM process goals

    2 Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals

    The Purpose

    Examine your current-state PPM processes and create a high-level description of the target-state process for each of the five PPM processes within Info-Tech’s PPM framework.

    Build a sound business case for implementing the new PPM strategy by documenting roles and responsibilities for key PPM activities as well as the time costs associated with them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Near-term and long-term goals as well as an organizationally specific wireframe for your PPM processes.

    Time cost assumptions for your proposed processes to ensure sustainability.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop and refine the project intake, prioritization, and approval process.

    2.2 Develop and refine the resource management process.

    2.3 Develop and refine the portfolio reporting process.

    2.4 Develop and refine the project closure process

    2.5 Develop and refine the benefits realization process.

    Outputs

    Process capability level

    Current-state PPM process description

    Retrospective examination of the current-state PPM process

    Action items to achieve the target states

    Time cost of the process at current and target states

    3 Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan

    The Purpose

    Perform a PPM tool analysis in order to determine the right tool to support your processes.

    Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio, as well as the estimated benefits of an optimized PPM strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A right-sized tool selection to help support your PPM strategy.

    A PPM strategy cost-benefit analysis.

    Activities

    3.1 Right-size the PPM tools for your processes.

    3.2 Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of implementing the new PPM strategy.

    3.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the new processes.

    3.4 Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan.

    Outputs

    Recommendation for a PPM tool

    Cost-benefit analysis

    Roles and responsibilities matrix for each PPM process

    An implementation timeline for your PPM strategy

    Further reading

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Drive IT project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

    Analyst Perspective

    “Tactics without strategy is the noise before defeat.” – Sun Tzŭ

    "Organizations typically come to project portfolio management (PPM) with at least one of two misconceptions: (1) that PPM is synonymous with project management and (2) that a collection of PPM processes constitutes a PPM strategy.

    Both foundations are faulty: project management and PPM are separate disciplines with distinct goals and processes, and a set of processes do not comprise a strategy – they should flow from a strategy, not precede one. When built upon these foundations, the benefits of PPM go unrealized, as the means (i.e. project and portfolio processes) commonly eclipse the ends of a PPM strategy – e.g. a portfolio better aligned with business goals, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction, and so on.

    Start with the end in mind: articulate a PPM strategy that is truly project portfolio in nature, i.e. focused on the whole portfolio and not just the individual parts. Then, let your PPM strategy guide your process goals and help to drive successful outcomes, project after project." (Barry Cousins, Senior Director of Research, PMO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIOs who want to maximize IT’s fulfillment of both business strategic goals and operational needs.
    • CIOs who want to better manage the business and project sponsors’ expectations and satisfaction.
    • CIOs, PMO directors, and portfolio managers who want a strategy to set the best projects for the highest chance of success.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Get C-level buy-in on a strategy for managing the project portfolio and clarify their expectations on how it should be managed.
    • Draft strategy-aligned, high-level project portfolio management process description.
    • Put together a strategic plan for improving PPM processes to reclaim wasted project capacity and increase business satisfaction of IT.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Steering committee and C-suite management who want to maximize IT’s value to business.
    • Project sponsors who seek clarity and fairness on pushing their projects through a myriad of priorities and objectives.
    • CIOs, PMO directors, and portfolio managers who want to enable data-driven decisions from the portfolio owners.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Optimize IT’s added value to the business through project delivery.
    • Provide clarity on how IT’s project portfolio should be managed and the expectations for its management.
    • Improve project portfolio visibility by making trustworthy project portfolio data available, with which to steer the portfolio.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • As CIO, there are too many projects and not enough resource capacity to deliver projects on time, on budget, and in scope with high quality.
    • Prioritizing projects against one another is difficult in the face of conflicting priorities and agenda; therefore, projects with dubious value/benefits consume resource capacity.

    Complication

    • Not all IT projects carry a direct value to business; IT is accountable for keeping the lights on and it consumes a significant amount of resources.
    • Business and project sponsors approve projects without considering the scarcity of resource capacity and are frustrated when the projects fail to deliver or linger in the backlog.

    Resolution

    • Create a coherent strategy to maximize the total value that projects deliver as a whole portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Ensure that the steering committee or senior executive layer buys into the strategy by helping them understand why the said strategy is necessary, and more importantly, why the strategy is valuable to them.
    • Translate the strategic expectations to specific, tangible goals, which are realized through a suite of project portfolio management processes tailored to your organization and its culture.
    • Putting into place people, processes, and tools that are sustainable and manageable, plus a communication strategy to maintain the stakeholder buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Time is money; therefore, the portfolio manager is an accountant of time. It is the portfolio manager’s responsibility to provide the project portfolio owners with reliable data and close the loop on portfolio decisions.
    2. Business satisfaction is driven by delivering projects that align to and maximize business value. Use Info-Tech’s method for developing a PPM strategy and synchronize its definition of “best projects” with yours.

    Projects that deliver on strategic goals of the business is the #1 driver of business satisfaction for IT

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367) has identified a direct correlation between IT project success and overall business satisfaction with IT.

    Comparative rankings of IT services in two columns 'Reported Importance' and 'Actual Importance' with arrows showing where each service moved to in the 'Actual Importance' ranking. The highlighted move is 'Projects' from number 10 in 'Reported' to number 1 in 'Actual'. 'Reported' rankings from 1 to 12 are 'Network Infrastructure', 'Service Desk', 'Business Applications', 'Data Quality', Devices', 'Analytical Capability', 'Client-Facing Technology', 'Work Orders', 'Innovation Leadership', 'Projects', 'IT Policies', and 'Requirements Gathering'. 'Actual' rankings from 1 to 12 are 'Projects', 'Work Orders', 'Innovation Leadership', 'Business Applications', 'Requirements Gathering', 'Service Desk', 'Client-Facing Technology', 'Network Infrastructure', 'Analytical Capability', 'Data Quality', 'IT Policies', and 'Devices'.

    Reported Importance: Initially, when CIOs were asked to rank the importance of IT services, respondents ranked “projects” low on the list – 10 out of a possible 12.

    Actual Importance: Despite this low “reported importance,” of those organizations that were “satisfied” to “fully satisfied” with IT, the service that had the strongest correlation to high business satisfaction was “projects,” i.e. IT’s ability to help plan, support, and execute projects and initiatives that help the business achieve its strategic goals.

    On average, executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business strategy

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT projects in supporting the business achieve its strategic goals. However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals:

    • 43% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.
    • 60% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.
    • 80% of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.
    • 30% of business stakeholders* are supporters of their IT departments.
    • (Source: Info-Tech CIO/CEO Alignment Diagnostics, * N=32,536)

    Efforts to deliver on projects are largely hampered by causes of project failure outside a project manager’s control

    The most recent data from the Project Management Institute (PMI) shows that more projects are meeting their original goals and business intent and less projects are being deemed failures. However, at the same time, more projects are experiencing scope creep. Scope creeps result in schedule and cost overrun, which result in dissatisfied project sponsors, stakeholders, and project workers.

    Graph of data from Project Management Institute comparing projects from 2015 to 2017 that 'Met original goals/business intent', 'Experienced scope creep', and were 'Deemed failures'. Projects from the first two categories went up in 2017, while projects that were deemed failures went down.

    Meanwhile, the primary causes of project failures remain largely unchanged. Interestingly, most of these primary causes can be traced to sources outside of a project manager’s control, either entirely or in part. As a result, project management tactics and processes are limited in adequately addressing them.

    Relative rank

    Primary cause of project failure

    2015

    2016

    2017

    Trend

    Change in organization's priorities 1st 1st 1st Stable
    Inaccurate requirements gathering 2nd 3rd 2nd Stable
    Change in project objectives 3rd 2nd 3rd Stable
    Inadequate vision/goal for project 6th 5th 4th Rising
    Inadequate/poor communication 5th 7th 5th Stable
    Poor change management 11th 9th 6th Rising
    (Source: Project Management Institute, Pulse of the Profession, 2015-2017)

    Project portfolio management (PPM) can improve business alignment of projects and reduce chance of project failure

    PPM is about “doing the right things.”

    The PMI describes PPM as:

    Interrelated organizational processes by which an organization evaluates, selects, prioritizes, and allocates its limited internal resources to best accomplish organizational strategies consistent with its vision, mission, and values. (PMI, Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.)

    Selecting and prioritizing projects with the strongest alignment to business strategy goals and ensuring that resources are properly allocated to deliver them, enable IT to:

    1. Improve business satisfaction and their perception of IT’s alignment with the business.
    2. Better engage the business and the project customers.
    3. Minimize the risk of project failure due to changing organizational/ project vision, goals, and objectives.

    "In today’s competitive business environment, a portfolio management process improves the linkage between corporate strategy and the selection of the ‘right’ projects for investment. It also provides focus, helping to ensure the most efficient and effective use of available resources." (Lou Pack, PMP, Senior VP, ICF International (PMI, 2015))

    PPM is a common area of shortcomings for IT, with much room for improvement

    Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Survey (N=879) shows that PPM tends to be regarded as neither an effective nor an important process amongst IT organizations.

    Two deviation from median charts highlighting Portfolio Management's ranking compared to other IT processes in 'Effectiveness scores' and 'Importance scores'. PPM ranks 37th out of 45 in Effectiveness and 33rd out of 45 in Importance.

    55% ... of IT organizations believe that their PPM processes are neither effective nor important.

    21% ... of IT organizations reported having no one responsible or accountable for PPM.

    62% ... of projects in organizations effective in PPM met/exceeded the expected ROI (PMI, 2015).

    In addition to PPM’s benefits, improving PPM processes presents an opportunity for getting ahead of the curve in the industry.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for developing a PPM strategy delivers extraordinary value, fast

    Our methodology is designed to tackle your hardest challenge first to deliver the highest-value part of the deliverable. For developing a PPM strategy, the biggest challenge is to get the buy-in of the executive layer.

    "Without senior management participation, PPM doesn’t work, and the organization is likely to end up with, or return to, a squeaky-wheel-gets-the-grease mindset for all those involved." (Mark Price Perry, Business Driven Project Portfolio Management)

    In the first step of the blueprint, you will be guided through the following steps:

    1. Choose the right PPM strategy: driven by the executives, supported by management.
    2. Objectively assess your current project portfolio with minimal effort to build a case for the PPM strategy.
    3. Engage the executive layer to get the critical prerequisite of a PPM strategy: their buy-in.

    A PPM strategic plan is the end deliverable of this blueprint. In the first step, download the pre-filled template with content that represents the most common case. Then, throughout the blueprint, customize with your data.

    Use this blueprint to develop, or refine, a PPM strategy that works for your organization

    Get buy-in for PPM strategy from decision makers.

    Buy-in from the owners of project portfolio (Steering Committee, C-suite management, etc.) is a critical prerequisite for any PPM strategy. This blueprint will give you the tools and templates to help you make your case and win the buy-in of portfolio owners.

    Connect strategic expectations to PPM process goals.

    This blueprint offers a methodology to translate the broad aim of PPM to practical, tactical goals of the five core PPM processes, as well as how to measure the results. Our methodology is supported with industry-leading frameworks, best practices, and our insider research.

    Develop your PPM processes.

    This blueprint takes you through a series of steps to translate the process goals into a high-level process description, as well as a business case and a roadmap for implementing the new PPM processes.

    Refine your PPM processes.

    Our methodology is also equally as applicable for making your existing PPM processes better, and help you draft a roadmap for improvement with well-defined goals, roles, and responsibilities.

    Info-Tech’s PPM model consists of five core processes

    There are five core processes in Info-Tech’s thought model for PPM.

    Info-Tech's Process Model detailing the steps and their importance in project portfolio management. Step 3: 'Status and Progress Reporting' sits above the others as a process of importance throughout the model. In the 'Intake' phase of the model are Step 1: 'Intake, Approval, and Prioritization' and Step 2: 'Resource Management'. In the 'Execution' phase is 'Project Management', the main highlighted section, and a part of Step 3, the overarching 'Status and Progress Reporting'. In the 'Closure' phase of the model are Step 4: 'Project Closure' and Step 5: 'Benefits Tracking'.

    These processes create an infrastructure around projects, which aims to enable:

    1. Initiation of the “best” projects with the right resources and project information.
    2. Timely and trustworthy reporting to facilitate the flow of information for better decision making.
    3. Proper closure of projects, releasing resources, and managing benefits realization.

    PPM has many moving pieces. To ensure that all of these processes work in harmony, you need a PPM strategy.

    De-couple project management from PPM to break down complexity and create flexibility

    Tailor project management (PM) processes to fit your projects.

    Info-Tech’s PPM thought model enables you to manage your project portfolio independent of your PM methodology or capability. Projects interact with PPM via:

    • A project charter that authorizes the use of resources and defines project benefits.
    • Status reports that feed up-to-date, trustworthy data to your project portfolio.
    • Acceptance of deliverables that enable proper project closure and benefits reporting.

    Info-Tech’s PPM strategy is applicable whether you use Agile, waterfall, or anything in between for PM.

    The process model from the previous page but with project management processes overlaid. The 'Intake' phase is covered by 'Project Charter'. The 'Execution' phase, or 'Project Management' is covered by 'Status report'. The 'Closure' phase is covered by 'Deliverable Acceptance'.

    Learn about project management approach for small projects in Info-Tech’s Tailor PM Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint.

    Sample of the Info-Tech blueprint 'Tailor PM Processes to Fit Your Projects'.

    Info-Tech’s approach to PPM is informed by industry best practices and rooted in practical insider research

    Info-Tech uses PMI and ISACA frameworks for areas of this research.

    Logo for 'Project Management Institute (PMI)'.' Logo for 'COBIT 5 an ISACA Framework'.
    PMI’s Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed. is the leading industry framework, proving project portfolio management best practices and process guidelines. COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    In addition to industry-leading frameworks, our best-practice approach is enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Logo for 'Info-Tech Research Group'.

    33,000+ Our peer network of over 33,000 happy clients proves the effectiveness of our research.

    1000+ Our team conducts 1,000+ hours of primary and secondary research to ensure that our approach is enhanced by best practices.

    Re-position IT as the “facilitator of business projects” for PPM success

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Construction
    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Chaos in the project portfolio

    At first, there were no less than 14 teams of developers, each with their own methodologies and processes. Changes to projects were not managed. Only 35% of the projects were completed on time.

    Business drives, IT facilitates

    Anyone had the right to ask for something; however, converting ideas to a formal project demand required senior leadership within a business division getting on board with the idea.

    The CIO and senior leadership decided that projects, previously assigned to IT, were to be owned and driven by the business, as the projects are undertaken to serve its needs and rarely IT’s own. The rest of the organization understood that the business, not IT, was accountable for prioritizing project work: IT was re-positioned as a facilitator of business projects. While it was a long process, the result speaks for itself: 75% of projects were now being completed on time.

    Balancing the target mix of the project portfolio

    What about maintaining and feeding the IT infrastructure? The CIO reserved 40% of IT project capacity for “keeping the lights on,” and 20% for reactive, unplanned activities, with an aim to lower this percentage. With the rest of the time, IT facilitated business projects

    Three key drivers of project priority

    1. Does the project meet the overall company goals and objectives?
      “If they don't, we must ask why we are bothering with it.”
    2. Does the project address a regulatory or compliance need?
      “Half of our business is heavily regulated. We must focus on it.”
    3. Are there significant savings to be had?
      “Not soft; hard savings. Can we demonstrate that, after implementing this, can we see good hard results? And, can we measure it?”

    "Projects are dumped on IT, and the business abdicates responsibility. Flip that over, and say ‘that's your project’ and ‘how can we help you?’"

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop a PPM strategy – project overview

    1. Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    2. Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    3. Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization

    1.2 Translate PPM strategy expectations to specific process goals

    2.1 Develop and refine project intake, prioritization, and resource management processes

    2.2 Develop and refine portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes

    3.1 Select a right-sized PPM solution for supporting your new processes

    3.2 Finalize customizing your PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Guided Implementations

    • Scoping call: discuss current state of PPM and review strategy options.
    • How to wireframe realistic process goals, rooted in your PPM strategic expectations, that will be sustained by the organization.
    • Examine your current-state PPM process and create a high-level description of the target-state process for each of the five PPM processes (1-2 calls per each process).
    • Assess your PPM tool requirements to help support your processes.
    • Determine the costs and potential benefits of your PPM practice.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Set strategic expectations and realistic goals for the PPM strategy
    Module 2:
    Develop and refine strategy-aligned PPM processes
    Module 3:
    Compose your PPM strategic plan
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Analysis of the current state of PPM
    • Strategy-aligned goals and metrics for PPM processes
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • PPM capability levels
    • High-level descriptions of near- and long-term target state
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • PPM tool recommendations
    • Cost-benefit analysis
    • Customized PPM strategic plan

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Workshop Day 5

    Get leadership buy-in for PPM strategy Set PPM process goals and metrics with strategic expectations Develop and Refine PPM processes Develop and Refine PPM processes Complete the PPM strategic plan

    Activities

    • 1.1 Assess leadership mandate.
    • 1.2 Determine potential resource capacity.
    • 1.3 Create a project inventory.
    • 1.4 Communicate your PPM strategy to key stakeholders.
    • 2.1 Translate each strategic goal into process goals.
    • 2.2 Set metrics and preliminary targets for PPM process goals.
    • 3.1 Develop and refine the project intake, prioritization, and approval process.
    • 3.2 Develop and refine the resource management process.
    • 4.1 Develop and refine the portfolio reporting process.
    • 4.2 Develop and refine the project closure process.
    • 4.3 Develop and refine the benefits realization process.
    • 5.1 Right-size the PPM tools for your processes.
    • 5.2 Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of implementing the new PPM strategy.
    • 5.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the new processes.

    Deliverables

    1. Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate
    2. Analysis of current project capacity
    3. Analysis of current project demand
    4. PPM Strategic Plan – Executive Brief
    1. PPM strategy-aligned process goals
    2. Metrics and long-term targets for PPM process goals
      For each of the five PPM processes:
    1. Process capability level
    2. Current-state PPM process description
    3. Retrospective examination of the current-state PPM process
    4. Action items to achieve the target states
    5. Time cost of the process at current and target states
    1. Recommendation for a PPM tool
    2. Cost-benefit analysis
    3. Roles and responsibilities matrix for each PPM process

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 1.1: Choose the right PPM strategy Step 1.2: Translate strategic expectations to process goals
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Scoping call to discuss the current state of PPM and review strategy options.
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Discuss how to wireframe realistic process goals, rooted in your PPM strategic expectations, that will be sustained by the organization.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Execute a leadership mandate survey.
    • Perform a high-level supply/demand analysis.
    • Prepare an executive presentation to get strategy buy-in.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Develop realistic process goals based in your PPM strategic expectations.
    • Set metrics and preliminary targets for your high-priority PPM process goals.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Phase 1 Results & Insights

    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are onboard before proceeding to implement your PPM strategy.

    Prepare to get to value early with step 1.1 of this blueprint

    The first step of this blueprint will help you define your PPM strategy and get executive buy-in for it using section one of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Where traditional models of consulting can take considerable amounts of time before delivering value to clients, Info-Tech’s methodology for developing a PPM strategy gets you to value fast.

    In the first step of this blueprint, you will define your PPM strategy and prepare an executive presentation to get buy-in for the strategy. The presentation can be prepared in just a few hours.

    • The activities in step 1.1 of this blueprint will help you customize the slides in section 1 of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    • Section one of the Template will then serve as your presentation document.

    Once you have received buy-in for your PPM strategy, the remainder of this blueprint will help you customize section 2 of the Template.

    • Section 2 of the Template will communicate:
      • Your processes and process goals.
      • Your near-term and long-term action items for implementing the strategy.
      • Your PPM tool requirements.
      • The costs and benefits of your PPM strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Sample of Info-Tech's 'PPM Strategic Plan Template.'

    Step 1.1: Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
    Choose the right PPM strategy Translate strategy into process goals Define intake & resource mgmt. processes Define reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processes Select a right-sized PPM solution Finalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a leadership mandate survey.
    • Choose your PPM strategy.
    • Calculate your resource capacity for projects.
    • Determine overall organizational demand for projects.
    • Prepare an executive presentation of the PPM strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A PPM strategy
    • A resource supply/project demand analysis
    • An executive brief presentation
    • Executive buy-in for the PPM strategy

    “Too many projects, not enough resources” is the reality of most IT environments

    In today’s organizations, the desires of business units for new products and enhancements, and the appetites of senior leadership to approve more and more projects for those products and services, far outstrips IT’s ability to realistically deliver on everything.

    The vast majority of IT departments lack the resourcing to meet project demand – especially given the fact that day-to-day operational demands frequently trump project work.

    As a result, project throughput suffers – and with it, IT's reputation within the organization.

    A visualization of 'Project Demand' versus 'Resource supply' utilizing courtroom scales with numerous project titles weighing down the 'Project Demand' side and silhouettes of three little people raised aloft on the 'Resource supply' side.

    In these environments, a PPM strategy is required.

    A PPM strategy should enable executive decision makers to make sense of the excess of demand and give IT the ability to prioritize those projects that are of the most strategic value to the business.

    With the right PPM strategy, IT can improve project outcomes across its portfolio and drive business value – all while improving the workloads of IT project staff.

    Info-Tech has two PPM strategy options that you can start to deploy today

    This step will help you choose the most suitable option, depending on your project pain points and current level of executive engagement in actively steering the portfolio.

    Option A:
    Top-Down, Executive Driven Strategy

    Option B:
    Bottom-Up, Project Manager Driven Strategy

    Goals of this approach:
    • This approach is intended to assist decision makers in their job: choosing the right projects, committing to timelines for those projects, and monitoring/directing their progress.
    Goals of this approach:
    • This approach is primarily intended to ensure that projects are well managed in a standardized manner in order to provide project managers with clear direction.
    Who this approach is for:
    • IT departments looking to improve alignment of project demand and resource capacity.
    • IT departments wanting to prioritize strategically valuable work.
    • IT departments with sufficient executive backing and engagement with the portfolio.
    Who this approach is for:
    • IT departments that would not the get support for a top-down approach due to a disengaged executive layer.
    • IT departments that already have a top-down PPM strategy and feel they are sufficiently resourced to confront project demand.

    Each of these strategy options is driven by a set of specific strategic expectations to help communicate your PPM goals. See the following slides for an articulation of each strategy option.

    A top-down, executive driven strategy is the optimal route, putting leadership in a position to best conduct the portfolio

    Option A: Top-Down, Executive Driven Strategy

    Strategic Expectations:

    • Project Throughput: Maximize throughput of the best projects.
    • Portfolio Visibility: Ensure visibility of current and pending projects.
    • Portfolio Responsiveness: Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
    • Resource Utilization: Minimize resource waste and optimize the alignment of skills to assignments.
    • Benefits Realization: Clarify accountability for post-project benefits attainment for each project, and facilitate the process of tracking/reporting those benefits.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Serve the executive with insight before you impede the projects with governance. This strategy option is where Info-Tech sees the most PPM success. A strategy focused at improving decision making at the executive layer will both improve project outcomes and help alleviate project workloads.

    A bottom-up strategy can help project managers and teams succeed where insight into the big picture is lacking

    Option B: Bottom-Up, Project Manager Driven Strategy

    Strategic Expectations:

    • Project Management Governance: All projects consuming IT resources will be continually validated in terms of best-practice process compliance.
    • Project Risk Management: Identify risks and related mitigation approaches for all high-risk areas.
    • Stakeholder Management: Ensure that project stakeholders are identified and involved.
    • Project Manager Resourcing: Provide project managers as needed.
    • Project-Level Visibility: Provide access to the details of project management processes (planning and progress) as needed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Right-size governance to maximize success. Project management and governance success don’t necessarily equal project success. Project management processes should be a means to an end (i.e. successful project outcomes), and not an end in themselves. Ensure the ends justify the means.

    Most recurring project challenges require a top-down portfolio management approach

    While project management is a key ingredient to project success, tying to solve endemic project problems with project management alone won’t improve results over the long term.

    Why Top-Down is a better starting point than Bottom-Up.

    The most common IT project problems – schedule and budget overruns, scope creep, and poor quality – can ultimately, in the vast majority of cases, be traced back to bad decisions made at the portfolio level:

    • The wrong projects get greenlighted.
    • Shifting leadership priorities and operational demands make project plans and estimated delivery dates obsolete from the start.
    • Too many projects get approved when there are not enough resources to effectively work on them all.

    No amount of project management rigor can help alleviate these common root causes of project failure.

    With a top-down PPM strategy, however, you can make sure that leadership is informed and engaged in making the right project decisions and that project managers and teams are situated for success.

    "There is nothing so useless as doing efficiently that which should not be done at all." (Peter Drucker (quoted in Lessing))

    Info-Tech Insight

    Get Strategic About Project Success.

    The difference between project management and project portfolio management comes down to doing things right vs. doing the right things. Both are important, no doubt; but doing the wrong things well doesn’t provide much value to the business in the long run.

    Get insight into the big picture with a top-down strategy before imposing more administrative overhead on project managers and leads.

    Perform a leadership mandate assessment to gauge executive needs and expectations

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 – 15 to 30 minutes (prep time) 10 to 20 minutes (execution time)

    INPUT: Leadership expectations for portfolio and project management.

    OUTPUT: Leadership mandate bar chart

    Materials: Tab 6 of Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), PPM strategy sponsor(s), CIO and other members of senior management

    Before choosing your strategy option, survey the organization’s leadership to assess what they’re expecting from the PPM strategy.

    Use the “Leadership Mandate Survey” (located on tab 6 of Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator) to assess the degree to which your leadership expects the PPM strategy to provide outcomes across the following capabilities: portfolio reporting, project governance, and project management.

    • Deploy the 12-question survey via individual one-on-one meetings or group working sessions with your boss (the PPM strategy sponsor) as well as with the CIO and other senior managers from within IT and the business.
      • If you cannot connect with the executive layer for this survey, do your best to estimate their responses to complete the survey.
    • The survey should help distinguish if executives are looking for portfolio management or project management. It should be one input that informs your choice of strategy option A or B.
      • If leadership is looking primarily for project management, you should proceed to Info-Tech’s Tailor Project Management Processes that Fit Your Projects blueprint.

    Refer to the next slide for assistance analyzing the outputs in tab 6 and using them to inform your choice of strategy.

    How to make use of the results of the leadership survey

    Two possible result scenarios of the leadership survey. There are two bar graphs titled 'Leadership Mandate', each with an explanation of the scenario they belong to. In Scenario 1, the 'Leadership Mandate' graph has a descending trend with 'Portfolio Reporting' at the highest level, 'Project Governance' in the middle, and 'Project Management' at the lowest level. 'A result like this, with a higher portfolio reporting score, shows a higher need for a top-down approach and demonstrates well-balanced expectations for a PPM strategy from the leadership. There is greater emphasis put on the portfolio than there is project governance or project management.' In Scenario 2, the 'Leadership Mandate' graph has an ascending trend with 'Portfolio Reporting' at the lowest level, 'Project Governance' in the middle, and 'Project Management' at the highest level. 'If your graph looks like this, your executive leadership has placed greater importance on project governance and management. Completing a top-down PPM strategy may not meet their expectations at this time. In this situation, a bottom-up approach may be more applicable.'

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Insert screenshots of the survey and the bar graph from tab 6 of the PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator onto slides 7 and 8, “PPM Strategy Leadership Mandate,” of the PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Proceed with the right PPM strategy for your organization

    Based upon the results of the “Leadership Mandate Survey,” and your assessment of each strategy option as described in the previous slides, choose the strategy option that is right for your IT department/PMO at this time.

    "Without a strategic methodology, project portfolio planning is frustrating and has little chance of achieving exceptional business success." (G Wahl (quoted in Merkhofer))

    Option A:

    Those proceeding with Option A should continue with remainder of this blueprint. Update your strategy statement on slide 3 of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to reflect your choice

    Option B:

    Those proceeding with Option B should exit this blueprint and refer to Info-Tech’s Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint to help define a project management standard operating procedure.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. If you’re proceeding with Option A, update slide 4, “Project Portfolio Management Strategy,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to reflect your choice of PPM strategy. If you’re proceeding with Option B, you may want to include your strategy statement in your Project Management SOP Template.

    The success of your top-down strategy will hinge on the quality of your capacity awareness and resource utilization

    A PPM strategy should facilitate alignment between project demand with resource supply. Use Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator as a step towards this alignment.

    Info-Tech’s research shows that the ability to provide a centralized view of IT’s capacity for projects is one of the top PPM capabilities that contributes to overall project success.

    Accurate and reliable forecasts into IT’s capacity, coupled with an engaged executive layer making project approval and prioritization decisions based upon that capacity data, is the hallmark of an effective top-down PPM strategy.

    • Use Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator to help improve visibility (and with it, organizational understanding) into project demand and IT resource supply.
    • The Calculator will help you determine IT’s actual capacity for projects and analyze organizational demand by taking an inventory of active and backlog projects.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.

    Sample of Into-Tech's PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where does the time go? The portfolio manager (or equivalent) should function as the accounting department for time, showing what’s available in IT’s human resources budget for projects and providing ongoing visibility into how that budget of time is being spent.

    Establish the total resource capacity of your portfolio

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 – 30 to 60 minutes

    INPUT: Staff resource types, Average work week, Estimated allocations

    OUTPUT: Breakdown of annual portfolio HR spend, Capacity pie chart

    Materials: PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator, tab 3

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), Resource and/or project managers

    Use tab 3 of the calculator to determine your actual HR portfolio budget for projects, relative to the organization’s non-project demands.

    • Tab 3 analyzes your resource supply asks you to consider how your staff spend their time weekly across four categories: out of office time, administrative time (e.g. meetings, training, checking email), keep-the-lights-on time (i.e. support and maintenance), and project time.
    • The screenshot below walks you through columns B to E of tab 3, which help calculate your potential capacity. This activity will continue on the next slide, where we will determine your realized capacity for project work from this potential capacity.
    Screenshot of tab 3 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 4 columns, 'Resource Type', '# People', 'Hours / Week', and 'Hours / Year', which are referred to in notes as columns B through E respectively. The note on 'Resource Type' reads '1. Compile a list of each of the roles within your department in column B'. The note on '# People' reads '2. In column C, provide the number of staff currently performing each role'. The note on 'Hours / Week' reads '3. In column D, provide a baseline for the number of hours in a typical work week for each role'. The note on 'Hours / Year' reads '4. Column E will auto-populate based on E and D. The total at the bottom of column E (row 26) constitutes your department’s total capacity'.

    Determine the project/non-project ratio for each role

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 (continued)

    The previous slide walked you through columns B to E of tab 3. This slide walks you through columns F to J, which ask you to consider how your potential capacity is spent.

    Screenshot of tab 3 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 6 columns, 'Hours / Year', 'Absence', 'Working Time / Year', 'Admin', 'KTLO', and 'Project Work', which, starting at 'Absence', are referred to in notes as columns F through J respectively. The note on 'Absence' reads '5. Enter the percentage of your total time across each role that is unavailable due to foreseeable out-of-office time (vacation, sick time, etc.) in column F. Industry standard runs anywhere from 12% to 16%, depending on your industry and geographical region'. The note on 'Working Time / Year' reads '6. Column G will auto-calculate to show your overall net capacity after out-of-office percentages have been taken off the top. These totals constitute your working time for the year'. The note on 'Admin' and 'KTLO' reads '6. Column G will auto-calculate to show your overall net capacity after out-of-office percentages have been taken off the top. These totals constitute your working time for the year'. The note on 'Project Work' reads '8. The project percentage in column J will auto-calculate based upon what’s leftover after your non-project working time allocations in columns H and I have been subtracted'.

    Review your annual portfolio capacity for projects

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 (continued)

    The previous slides walked you through the inputs for tab “3. Project Capacity.” This slide walks you through the outputs of the tab.

    Based upon the inputs from columns B to J, the rest of tab 3 analyzes how IT available time is spent across the time categories, highlighting how much of IT’s capacity is actually available for projects after admin work, support and maintenance work, and absences have been taken into account.

    A table and pie chart of output data from Tab 3 of the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. Pie segments are labelled 'Admin', 'Absence', 'Project Capacity', and 'Keep The Lights On'.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slide 10, “Current Project Capacity,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the outputs from tab 3 of the Calculator.

    Create an inventory of active and backlog projects to help gauge overall project demand

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.3 – 15 to 30 minutes

    INPUT: Number of active and backlog projects across different sizes

    OUTPUT: Total project demand in estimated hours of work effort

    Materials: PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator, tab 4

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), Project managers

    Where tab 3 of the Calculator gave you visibility into your overall resource supply for projects, tab 4 will help you establish insight into the demand side.

    • Before starting on tab 4, be sure to enter the required project size data on the set-up tab.
    • Using a list of current active projects, categorize the items on the list by size: small, medium, large, and extra large. Enter the number of projects in each category of project in column C of tab 4.
    • Using a list of on-hold projects, or projects that have been approved but not started, categorize the list by size and enter the number of projects in each category in column D.
    • In column E, estimate the number of new requests and projects across each size that you anticipate being added to the portfolio/backlog in the next 12 months. Use historical data from the past 12 to 24 months to inform your estimates.
    • In column F, estimate the number of projects that you anticipate being completed in each size category in the next 12 months. Take the current state of active projects into account as you make your estimates, as well as throughput data from the previous 12 to 24 months.
    Screenshot of tab 4 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 5 columns labelled 'Project Types' with values Small to Extra-Large, 'Number of active projects currently in the portfolio', 'Number of projects currently in the portfolio backlog', 'Number of new requests anticipated to be added to the portfolio/backlog in the next 12 months', and 'Number of projects expected to be delivered within the next 12 months'.

    Make supply and demand part of the conversation as you get buy-in for your top-down strategy

    Tab 5 of the Calculator is an output tab, visualizing the alignment (or lack thereof) of project demand and resource supply.

    Once tabs 3 and 4 are complete, use tab 5 to analyze the supply/demand data to help build your case for a top-down PPM strategy and get buy-in for it.

    Screenshots of Tab 5 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. A bar chart obscures a table with the note 'The bar chart shows your estimated total project demand in person hours (in black) relative to your estimated total resource capacity for projects (in green)'. Notes on the table are 'The table below the bar chart shows your estimated annual project throughput rate (based upon the number of projects you estimated you would complete this year) as well as the rate at which portfolio demand will grow (based upon the number of new requests and projects you estimated for the next 12 months)' and 'If the “Total Estimated Project Demand (in hours) in 12 Months Time” number is more than your current demand levels, then you have a supply-demand problem that your PPM strategy will need to address'.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slides 11 and 12, “Current Project Demand,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the outputs from tabs 4 and 5 of the Calculator.

    Recommended: Complete Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard to measure your resource utilization

    Associated Activity icon Contact your rep or call 1-888-670-8889

    This step is highly recommended but not required. Call 1-888-670-8889 to inquire about or request the PPM Diagnostics.

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your portfolio management strengths and weaknesses, including project portfolio management, project management, customer management, and resource utilization.

    Screenshots of Info-Tech's PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic with a pie chart obscuring a table/key. The attached note reads 'In particular, the analysis of resource utilization in the PPM Current State Scorecard report, will help to complement the supply/demand analysis in the previous slides. The diagnostic will help you to analyze how, within that percentage of your overall capacity that is available for project work, your staff productively utilizes this time to successfully complete project tasks and how much of this time is lost within Info-Tech’s categories of resource waste.'

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slides 14 and 15, “Current State Resource Utilization” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the resource utilization outputs from your PPM Current State Scorecard.

    Finalize section one of the PPM Strategic Plan Template and prepare to communicate your strategy

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.4 – 10 to 30 minutes

    INPUT: The previous activities from this step

    OUTPUT: An presentation communication your PPM strategy

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template, section 1

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent)

    By now, you should be ready to complete section one of the PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    The purpose of this section of the Template is to capture the outputs of this step and use them to communicate the value of a top-down PPM strategy and to get buy-in for this strategy from senior management before you move forward to develop your PPM processes in the subsequent phases of this blueprint.

    • Within section one, update any of the text that is (in grey) to reflect the specifics of your organization – i.e. the name of your organization and department – and the specific outcomes of step 1.2 activities. In addition, replace the placeholders for a company logo with the logo of your company.
    • Replace the tool screenshots with the outputs from your version of the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.
    • Proofread all of the text to ensure the content accurately reflects your outcomes. Edit the content as needed to more accurately reflect your outcomes.
    • Determine the audience for the presentation of your PPM strategy and make a logistical arrangement. Include PPM strategy sponsors, senior management from within IT and the business, and other important stakeholders.

    Get executive buy-in for your top-down PPM strategy

    Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are on board before preceding.

    You’re now ready to communicate your PPM strategy to your leadership team and other stakeholders.

    It is essential that you get preliminary buy-in for this strategy from the executive layer before you move forward to develop your PPM processes in the subsequent phases of this blueprint. Lack of executive engagement is one of the top barriers to PPM strategy success.

    • If you have gone through the preceding activities in this step, section one of your PPM Strategic Plan Template should now be ready to present.
    • As explained in 1.1.4, you should present this section to an audience of PPM strategy sponsors, C-suite executives, and other members of the senior management team.
    • Allow at least 60 minutes for the presentation – around 20 minutes to deliver the slide presentation and 40 minutes for discussion.
    • If you get sufficient buy-in by the end of the presentation, proceed to the next step of this blueprint. If buy-in is lacking, now might not be the right time for a top-down PPM strategy. Think about adopting a bottom-up approach until leadership is more engaged in the portfolio.

    "Gaining executive sponsorship early is key…It is important for the executives in your organization to understand that the PPM initiatives and the PMO organization are there to support (but never hinder) executive decision making." (KeyedIn Projects)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Engage(d) sponsorship. According to Prosci, the top factor in contributing to the success of a change initiative is active and visible executive sponsorship. Use this meeting to communicate to your sponsor(s) the importance of their involvement in championing the PPM strategy.

    A PPM strategic plan elevates PMO’s status to a business strategic partner

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    The PMO operated in a way that is, in their self-assessment, reactive; project requests and capacity were not effectively managed. Perhaps due to this, the leadership team was not always visible, or regularly available, to PM leaders. This, in turn, complicated efforts to effectively manage their projects.

    Solution

    Establishing a simple prioritization methodology enabled the senior leadership to engage and effectively steer the project portfolio by strategic importance. The criteria and tool also gave the business units a clear understanding to promote the strategic value of each of their project requests.

    Results

    PM leaders now have the support and confidence of the senior leadership team to both proactively manage and deliver on strategic projects. This new prioritization model brought the PM Leader and senior leadership team in direct access with each other.

    "By implementing this new project intake and prioritization framework, we drastically improved our ability to predict, meet, and manage project requests and unit workload. We adopted a client-focused and client-centric approach that enabled all project participants to see their role and value in successful project delivery. We created methodologies that were easy to follow from the client participation perspective, but also as PM leaders, provided us with the metrics, planning, and proactive tools to meet and anticipate client project demand. The response from our clients was extremely positive, encouraging, and appreciative."

    Step 1.2: Translate PPM strategic expectations to process goals

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine process goals based upon your PPM strategy.
    • Set metrics and preliminary targets for your PPM processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Unit Leaders
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder-prioritized PPM process goals
    • Metrics and targets for high-priority process goals

    Use the PPM strategy to set the direction for PPM processes that make up the infrastructure around projects

    PPM strategy enables you to answer any and all of these questions in a way that is consistent, cohesive, and aligned with one another.

    Info-Tech's PPM Process Model from earlier with notes overlaid asking a series of questions. The questions for '1. Intake, Approval, and Prioritization' are 'Who can request a project? How do you request a project? Who decides what to fund? What is the target investment mix? How will they decide?' The questions for '2. Resource Management' are 'Who assigns the resources? Who feeds the data on resources? How do we make sure it’s valid? How do we handle contingencies when projects are late, or if availability changes?' The questions for '3. Status and Progress Reporting' are 'What project information that should be reported? Who reports on project status? When? How?' The questions between 'Project Management' and '4. Project Closure' are 'Who declares that a project is done? Who validates it? Who is this reported to? Who terminates low-value projects? How will they decide?' The questions for '5. Benefits Tracking' are 'How do we validate the project benefits from the original business case? How do we track the benefits? Who reports it? When?'

    Set process goals to address PPM strategic expectations and steer the PPM strategic plan

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 – 2 hours

    INPUT: PPM strategy & expectations, Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Prioritized list of strategy-aligned PPM process goals

    Materials: PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Participants: CIO, Steering Committee, Business Unit Leaders, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    This activity is designed for key departmental stakeholders to articulate how PPM processes should be developed or refined to meet the PPM strategic expectations.

    Participation of the key departmental stakeholders in this exercise is critical, e.g. CIO, Steering Committee, business unit leaders.

    Strategic Expectations x Processes = Process goals aligned to strategy
    Throughput Project Intake, Approval, & Prioritization
    Visibility Resource Management
    Responsiveness Status & Progress Reporting
    Resource Utilization Project Closure
    Benefits Benefits Realization

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Translation Matrix to systematically articulate strategy-aligned PPM process goals

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.1 – PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix, tab 2

    Formula: To answer “[question]” in a way that we can [strategic expectation], it will be important to [process goal].

    Example 1:
    To answer the question “who can request a project, and how?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to standardize the project request process.

    Example 2:
    To answer the question “how will they decide what to fund?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to reach a consensus on project prioritization criteria.

    Example 3:
    To answer the question “how will we track the projected benefits?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to double-check the validity of benefits before projects are approved.

    Screenshot of Tab 2 in Info-Tech's PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix tool. There is a table with notes overlaid 'Enter the process goals in the appropriate question–strategic expectation slot' and 'Assign a priority, from the most important (1) to the least important (5)'.

    Set metrics and preliminary targets for your high-priority PPM process goals

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.2 – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Prioritized list of strategy-aligned PPM process goals, Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Metrics and targets for high-priority PPM process goals

    Materials: PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Participants: CIO, Steering Committee, Business Unit Leaders, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Your highest-priority process goals and their corresponding strategy expectations are displayed in tab 3 of the PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix template (example below).

    Through a group discussion, document what will be measured to decide the achievement of each process goal, as well as your current estimate and the long-term target. If necessary, adjust the approximate target duration.

    Screenshot of Tab 3 in Info-Tech's PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix tool. There is a table with 6 columns 'PPM Process', 'High-priority Process Goals', 'Strategy Expectation', 'How will you measure success?', 'Current Estimate', and 'Long-Term Target'; they are referred to in notes as columns B through G respectively. Overlaid notes are 'Columns C and D will auto-populate based upon your inputs from tab 2. The five PPM process areas are arranged vertically in column B and your top-five process goals from each area appear in column C.' 'Use column E to brainstorm how you might measure the success of each process goal at your organization. These can be tentative for now and refined over time.' 'Determine current metrics for each process goals and long-term target metrics in columns F and G.'

    Project-client-centered approach to PPM process design improves client satisfaction and team confidence

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    Reactive instead of proactive

    "We had no effective means of tracking project intake requests vs. capacity. We struggled using ad hoc processes and methods which worked to meet immediate needs, but we quickly realized that they were ineffective in tracking critical project metrics, key performance indicators (KPIs), or performance measures...In short, we were being reactive, instead of proactive."

    The result was a disorganized portfolio that led to low client satisfaction and team morale.

    Solution

    Examine processes “through the eyes of the client”

    With the guiding principle of “through the eyes of the client,” PPM processes and tools were developed to formalize project intake, prioritization, and capacity planning. All touchpoints between client and PPM processes were identified, and practices for managing client expectations were put in place. A client satisfaction survey was formulated as part of the post-project assessment and review.

    Results

    Client-centered processes improved client satisfaction and team confidence

    People, processes, and tools are now aligned to support client demand, manage client expectations, measure project KPIs, and perform post-project analysis. A standard for client satisfaction metrics was put in place. The overwhelmingly positive feedback has increased team confidence in their ability to deliver quality efforts.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 1.1.2 'Determine your actual resource capacity for projects'. Determine your actual resource capacity for projects

    Work with Info-Tech analysts to define your project vs. non-project ratio to help define how much of your overall resource capacity is actual available for projects.

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Set realistic PPM process goals'. Set realistic PPM process goals

    Leverage Info-Tech facilitators to help walk you through our PPM framework and define achievable process goals that are rooted in your current PPM maturity levels and organizational culture.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks
    Step 2.1: Develop intake & resource mgmt. processes Step 2.2: Define reporting, closure, & benefits processes
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Assess your current intake, prioritization, and resource management processes and wireframe a sustainable target state for each capability.
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Analyze your current portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes and wireframe a sustainable target state for each capability.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Set near-term and long-term goals.
    • Draft high-level steps within your target-state processes.
    • Document your process steps and roles and responsibilities.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Set near-term and long-term goals.
    • Draft high-level steps within your target-state processes.
    • Document your process steps and roles and responsibilities.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights

    • The means of project and portfolio management (i.e. processes) shouldn’t eclipse the ends – strategic goals. Root your process in your PPM strategic goals to realize PPM benefits (e.g. optimized portfolio value, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction).

    Read first: Overview of the methodology for articulating new strategy-aligned PPM processes

    In the previous step of the blueprint, key department stakeholders established the PPM process goals, metrics, and targets in a way that aligns with the overall PPM strategy. In this phase, we draft a high-level description of the five PPM processes that reflect those goals using the following methodology:

    Methodology at a glance

    1. Articulate the current state of the process.
    2. Examine the process against the strategy-aligned goals.
    3. Create short- and long-term action items to refine the current process and meet the strategy-aligned targets.
    4. Develop a high-level target-state description of the PPM process.
    5. Estimate costs-in-use of the target-state process.

    Out-of-scope topics

    • Draft a detailed target-state description of the PPM process. Avoid falling into the “analysis paralysis” trap and keep the discussion focused on the overall PPM strategy.
    • PPM tools to support the process. This discussion will take place in the next phase of the blueprint.

    INPUT

    –›

    PROCESS

    –›

    OUTPUT

    • Strategy-aligned process goals, metrics, and targets (Activity 1.2.1)
    • Knowledge of current process
    • Knowledge of organizational culture and structure
    • Capability level assessment
    • Table-top design planning activity
    • Start-stop-continue retrospective
    • High-level description of the target state
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • High-level descriptions of current and target states
    • Short- and long-term action items for improving the process
    • Cost-in-use of the current- and target-state processes

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Build a sound business case for implementing the new PPM strategy with realistic costs and benefits of managing your project portfolio.

    Time spent on managing the project portfolio is an investment. Like any other business endeavors, the benefits must outweigh the costs to be worth doing.

    As you draft a high-level description of the PPM processes in this phase of the blueprint, use Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool to track the estimate the cost-in-use of the process. In the next phase, this information will be inform a cost-benefit analysis, which will be used to support your plan to implement the PPM strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Screenshots of Info-Tech's PPM Strategy Development Tool including a Cost-Benefit Analysis with tables and graphs.

    Step 2.1: Develop and refine project intake, prioritization, and resource management processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your process maturity.
    • Benchmark current processes against strategy-aligned goals.
    • Set near- and long-term action items.
    • Draft a high-level description of your target state.
    • Document your new processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A definition of current and target state maturity levels for intake, prioritization, and resource management
    • Near-term and long-term process goals for intake, prioritization, and resource management
    • A high-level wireframe for your intake, prioritization, and resource management process steps

    Project intake, prioritization, and approval: Get projects with the highest value done first

    Give your organization the voice to say “no” (or “not yet”) to new projects.

    Questions

    • Who can request a project?
    • How do you request a project?
    • Who decides what to fund?
    • What is the target investment mix?
    • How will they decide?

    Benefits

    • Maximize value of time spent on project work by aligning projects with priorities and stakeholder needs.
    • Finish the projects you start by improving alignment of intake and prioritization with resource capacity.
    • Improve stakeholder satisfaction by managing expectations with consistent, streamlined processes.

    Challenges

    • Stakeholders who benefit from political or ad hoc prioritization processes will resist or circumvent formal intake processes.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient awareness of resource capacity necessary to align intake with availability.

    A graph highlighting the sweet spot of project intake decision making. The vertical axis is 'Rigor and Effort' increasing upward, and the horizontal axis is 'Quality and Effectiveness of Decisions' increasing to the right. The trend line starts at 'Gut Feel' with low 'Rigor and Effort', and gradually curves upward to 'Analysis Paralysis' at the top. A note with an arrow pointing to a midway point in the line reads 'The sweet spot changes between situations and types of decisions'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the project demand. A balance between rigor and flexibility is critical in order to avoid the “analysis paralysis” as much as the “gut feel” approach.

    Funnel project requests into a triage system for project intake

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing project intake.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request into the funnel.
    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.
      1. Divert non-project request.
      2. Quickly assess value and urgency.
      3. Assign specialist to follow up on request.
      4. Inform the requestor.
    3. Business analyst starts to gather preliminary requirements.
      1. Follow up with sponsors to validate and define scope.
      2. Estimate size and determine project management rigor required.
      3. Start to develop an initial business case.
    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An excess number of intake channels is the tell-tale sign of a project portfolio in distress. The PMO needs to exercise and enforce discipline on stakeholders. PMO should demand proper documentation and diligence from stakeholders before proceeding with requests.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with a recurrent project intake, prioritization, and approval practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a five-step process for managing project intake, prioritization, and approval.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's five-step process for managing project intake. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Business Analysts', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Collect project requests' which involves 'Resources'. Step 2 is 'Screen project requests' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. A part of the step that may be applicable to some organizations is 'Concept approval' involving 'Governance Layer'. Step 3 is 'Develop business case' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. A part of the step that may be applicable to some organizations is 'Get a project sponsor' involving 'Governance Layer'. Step 4 is 'Prioritize project' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. Step 5 is 'Approve (greenlight) project' which involves 'Business Analysts', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer', with an attached note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date project portfolio information is available (project status, resource forecast, etc.)'. All of these steps lead to 'Initiate project, commit resources, etc.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Approval” can be a dangerous word in project and portfolio management. Use it carefully. Clarify precisely what is being “approved” at each step in the process, what is required to pass each gate, and how long the process will take.

    Determine your project intake, prioritization, and approval process maturity

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Project intake, prioritization, and approval capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the project intake, prioritization, and approval process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: Optimized We have effective intake processes with right-sized administrative overhead. Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.
    Capability Level 4: Aligned We have very strong intake processes. Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Capability Level 3: Engaged Processes are in place to track project requests and follow up on them. Priorities are periodically re-evaluated, based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.
    Capability Level 2: Defined Some processes are in place, but there is no capacity to say no to new projects. There is a backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Capability Level 1: Unmanaged Our organization has no formal intake processes in place. Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize project work proactively.

    Benchmark the current project intake, prioritization, and approval process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the intake, prioritization, and approval process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Simplify business cases
    • Send emails to requestor to manage expectations
    • Accept verbal project requests
    • Approve “pet projects”
    • Monthly prioritization meetings
    • Evaluate prioritization criteria

    Set near- and long-term action items for the project intake, prioritization, and approval process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Limit the number of channels available to request new projects.
    • Revise the intake form.
    • Establish a regular triage process.
    For example:
    • Establish a comprehensive scorecard and business case scoring process at the steering committee level.
    • Limit the rate of approval to be aligned with resource capacity.

    Review and customize slide 23, “Project intake, prioritization, and approval: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the intake, prioritization, and approval process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: project intake, prioritization, and approval
      Collect project requests –› Screen requests –› Develop business case –› Prioritize project –› Approve project

    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool; see next slide for instructions.

    Use the PPM Strategy Development Tool to track the time cost of the process

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 3: Costing Assumptions

    Record the time cost of each high-level process task from Activity 2.1.1d.

    Screenshot of tab 3 from Info-Tech's PPM Strategy Development Tool with notes overlaid. Columns are 'ID', 'Task Description', 'Who does the task?', a super-column titled 'Current State' which includes 'How many times per year?', 'How many people?', and 'For how long?', a super-column titled 'Near-Term Target State' with the same three sub columns, and a super-column titled 'Long-Term Target State' with the same three sub columns. Notes for 'Who does the task?' read 'Choose executive, management or resource' and 'If task is done by more than one party, duplicate the task'. Notes for the 3 recurring sub columns are 'Estimate how many times in a year the task is performed (e.g. 120 project requests per year)', 'Indicate the number of people needed to perform the task each time', 'Estimate the average work-hours for the task… either in minutes or in hours', 'If a task is not applicable to a state (e.g. currently PMO does not screen project requests), leave the row blank', and 'For meetings, remember to indicate the number of people'.

    Document the high-level description for the new intake, prioritization, and approval process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new project intake, prioritization, and approval process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic document, for example:

    • Updated prioritization scorecard.
    • Roles and responsibility matrix, identifying consulted and informed parties.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Optimize Project Intake, Prioritization, and Approval blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 24, “Project intake, prioritization, and approval: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Clarity in project prioritization process leads to enterprise-wide buy-in

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    "Our challenge from the start was to better understand the strategic perspective and priorities of our client departments.

    In addition, much of the work requested was not aligned to corporate goals and efforts, and seemed to be contradictory, redundant, and lacking strategic focus."

    Complicating this challenge was the fact that work requests were being received via all means of communication, which made the monitoring and controlling of requests more difficult.

    Solution

    Client departments were consulted to improve the understanding of their strategic goals and priorities. Based on the consultation:

    • A new, enterprise-wide project prioritization criteria was developed.
    • Priority of project requests from all business areas are evaluated on a quarterly basis.
    • A prioritized list of projects are made available to the senior leadership team.

    Results

    "By creating and implementing a tool for departments to prioritize strategic efforts, we helped them consider the important overall project criteria and measure them uniformly, across all anticipated projects. This set a standard of assessment, prioritization, and ranking, which helped departments clearly see which efforts were supportive and matched their strategic goals."

    Resource management process ensures that projects get the resources they need

    Reclaim project capacity: properly allocate project work and establish more stable project timelines.

    Questions

    • Who assigns the resources?
    • Who feeds the data on resources?
    • How do we make sure it’s valid?
    • How do we handle contingencies when projects are late, or if availability changes?

    Benefits

    • Ensure that approved projects can be completed by aligning intake with real project capacity.
    • Reduce over-allocation of resources by allocating based on their proportion of project vs. non-project work.
    • Forecast future resource requirements by maintaining accurate resource capacity data.

    Challenges

    • Time tracking can be difficult when project workers balance project work with “keep the lights on” activities and other administrative work.
    • Continuous partial attention, interruptions, and distractions are a part of today’s reality that makes it very difficult to maximize productivity.
    A see-saw balancing 'Resource availability' on one side and 'Ongoing projects, Operational work, Administrative work, and Resource absence' on the other side.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with a recurrent resource management practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a five-step process for resource management.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's five-step process for resource management. There are five groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Collect resource availability' which involves 'Resources' and 'Resource Managers'. Step 2 is 'Collect resource demand' which involves 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 3 is 'Identify need for reconciliation' which involves 'PMO'. Step 4 is 'Resolve conflicts and smoothen resource allocations' which involves 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 5 is 'Report resource allocations and forecast' which involves all groups, with an attached note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date information is available for project approval, portfolio reporting, closure, etc.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the resource supply to meet the demand – project and non-project alike. Coordinate this process with the intake, approval, and prioritization process.

    Determine your resource management process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Resource management capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the resource management process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedOur organization has an accurate picture of project versus non-project work loads and allocates resources accordingly. We periodically reclaim lost capacity through organizational and behavioral change.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedWe have an accurate picture of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work. We allocate resources to these projects accordingly. We are checking in on project progress bi-weekly.
    Capability Level 3: PixelatedWe are allocating resources to projects and tracking progress monthly. We have a rough estimate of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 2: OpaqueWe match resources teams to projects and check in annually, but we do not forecast future resource needs or track project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedOur organization expects projects to be finished, but there is no process in place for allocating resources or tracking project progress.

    Benchmark the current resource management process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the resource management process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Collect project actuals
    • Make enhancements to the PPM tool in use
    • Over allocating resources
    • “Around the room” reporting at monthly meeting
    • Send project updates before resource management meetings

    Set near- and long-term action items for the resource management process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Determine the percentage of project vs. non-project work through implementation of a weekly survey.
    For example:
    • Reduce resource waste to 6%.
    • Forecast resource requirements monthly.
    • Implement a mid-market PPM tool.

    Review and customize slide 26, “Resource management: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the resource management process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: resource management
      Collect resource availability –› Collect resource demand –› Identify need for reconciliation –› Resolve conflicts and over-allocation –› Update resource forecast


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?


    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new resource management process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new resource management process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Resource management meeting agenda template
    • Roles and responsibility matrix, identifying consulted and informed parties

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Develop a Resource Management for the New Reality blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 27, “Resource management: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Step 2.2: Develop and refine portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your process maturity.
    • Benchmark current processes against strategy-aligned goals.
    • Set near- and long-term action items.
    • Draft a high-level description of your target state.
    • Document your new processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A definition of current and target state maturity levels for portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization
    • Near-term and long-term process goals for portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization
    • A high-level wireframe for your portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization process steps

    Portfolio reporting process makes trustworthy data accessible for informing decisions

    Giving stakeholders the ability to make informed decisions is the most important function of managing the project portfolio.

    Questions

    • What project information should be reported?
    • Who reports on project status?
    • When and how do we report on the status of the project portfolio?

    Benefits

    • Reporting is the linchpin of any successful PPM strategy.
    • Timely and accurate status reports enable decision makers to address issues risks and issues before they create bigger problems.
    • Executive visibility can be achieved with or without a commercial tool using spreadsheets, a content management system such as SharePoint, or a combination of tools you already have.

    Challenges

    • Trying to increase detailed visibility too fast leads to difficulty gathering and maintaining data. As a result, reporting is rarely accurate and people quickly lose trust in the portfolio.
    • If you are planning to adopt a commercial tool, Info-Tech strongly recommends validating your organization’s ability to maintain a consistent reporting process using simple tools before investing in a more sophisticated system.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you can only do one thing, establish frequently current reporting on project status. Reporting doesn’t have to be detailed or precise, as long as it’s accurate.

    Maintain reliable portfolio status data with a recurrent status and progress reporting practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for portfolio status and progress reporting.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for portfolio status and progress reporting. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Create project status reports' which involves 'Resources' and 'Project Managers'. Step 2 is 'Create a project portfolio status report' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', with a note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date information is available for project approval, resource management, closure, etc.' Step 3 is 'Report on project portfolio status' which involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 4 is 'Act on portfolio steering decisions' which involves 'Resources', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'.

    Start by establishing a regular reporting cadence with lightweight project status KPIs:

    Red Issue or risk that requires intervention For projects that are red or yellow, high-level status reports should be elaborated on with additional comments on budget, estimated hours/days until completion, etc.
    Yellow Issue or risk that stakeholders should be aware of
    Green No significant risks or issues

    Determine your resource management process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Portfolio reporting capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Kick-off the discussion about the portfolio reporting process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedWith the right tools, we can ensure that all projects are planned and maintained at a detailed task level with high-quality estimates, and that actual task progress is updated at least weekly.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedWe have the skills, knowledge, and resources needed to prepare a detailed cost-benefit analysis for all proposed projects. We track the progress throughout project execution.
    Capability Level 3: InterventionWith the right tools, we can ensure that project issues and risks are identified and addressed on a regular basis (e.g. at least monthly) for all projects.
    Capability Level 2: OversightWith the right tools, we can ensure that project status updates are revised on a regular basis (e.g. at least monthly) for all ongoing projects.
    Capability Level 1: ReactiveProject managers escalate issues directly with their direct supervisor or project sponsor because there is no formal PPM practice.

    Benchmark the current portfolio reporting process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the portfolio reporting process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Report on lightweight KPIs
    • Standardize the status reports
    • Project managers waiting too long before declaring a red status
    • Produce weekly project portfolio-wide report for senior leadership

    Set near- and long-term action items for the portfolio reporting process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Establish a reporting process that can be consistently maintained using lightweight KPIs.
    • Provide a simple dashboard that stakeholders can use to see their project status reports at a high level.
    For example:
    • Adopt a commercial tool for maintaining consistent status reports.
    • Support the tool with training and a mandate of adoption among all users.

    Review and customize slide 29, “Portfolio reporting: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the portfolio reporting process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: portfolio reporting
      Create project status reports –› Create a project portfolio status report –› Report on project portfolio status –› Act on portfolio steering decisions


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      InputWhat information do you need to perform the work?
      OutputWhat artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/TimingHow often, and when, will the work be performed?
      ResponsibilityWho will perform the work?
      AccountabilityWho will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new portfolio reporting process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new portfolio reporting process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated project status report template with new KPIs.
    • Documentation of requirements for improved PPM dashboards and reports.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 30, “Portfolio reporting: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Streamlined status reporting improves portfolio visibility for executives, enabling data-driven steering of the portfolio

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    The client had no effective real-time reporting in place to summarize their work efforts. In addition, the client struggled with managing existing resources against the ability to deliver on the requested project workload.

    Existing project reporting processes were manually intensive and lacked mature reporting capabilities.

    Solution

    Through a short and effective engagement, IAG conducted surveys and facilitated interviews to identify the information needed by each stakeholder. From this analysis and industry best practices, IAG developed scorecards, dashboards, and project summary reports tailored to the needs of each stakeholder group. This integrated reporting tool was then made available on a central portal for PPM stakeholders.

    Results

    Stakeholders can access project scorecard and dashboard reports that are available at any given time.

    Resource reporting enabled the PMO to better balance client demand with available project capacity and forecast any upcoming deficiencies in resourcing that affect project delivery.

    Project closure at the portfolio level controls throughput and responsiveness of the portfolio

    Take control over projects that linger on, projects that don’t provide value, and projects that do not align with changing organizational priority.

    Questions

    • Who declares that a project is done?
    • Who validates it?
    • Who is this reported to?
    • Who terminates low-value projects?
    • How will they decide that a project is too low value to continue?

    Benefits

    • Minimize post-implementation problems by ensuring clean handoffs, with clear responsibilities for ongoing support and maintenance.
    • Drive continuous improvement by capturing and applying lessons learned.
    • Increase the project portfolio’s responsiveness to change by responding to emerging opportunities and challenges.

    Challenges

    • Completion criteria and “definition of done” need to be well defined and done so at project initiation.
    • Scope changes need to be managed and documented throughout the project.
    • Portfolio responsiveness requires deep cultural changes that will be met with confusion and resistance from some stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although “change in organizational priority” is the most frequently cited cause of project failure (PMI Pulse of Profession, 2017), closing projects that don’t align with organizational priority ought to be a key PPM goal. Therefore, don’t think of it as project failure; instead, think of it as PPM success.

    Maintain the health of the project portfolio with a repeatable project closure process

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for project closure.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for project closure. There are five groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first steps are 'Complete project' which involves 'Project Managers', and 'Terminate low value projects' which involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 2 is 'Validate project closure' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', with a note that reads 'This includes facilitating the project sponsor sign-off, accepting and archiving lessons learned documents, etc.' The third steps are 'Conduct post-project work' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', and 'Update resource availability' which includes 'Resource Managers'. Step 4 is 'Conduct post-implementation review' which involves all groups.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Post-implementation review checks which benefits (including those set out in the business case) have been achieved and identifies opportunities for further improvement. Without it, it can be difficult to demonstrate that investment in a project was worthwhile.

    Determine your project closure process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Project closure capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the project closure process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedProject closure is centrally managed and supports post-project benefits tracking.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedProject closure is centrally managed at the portfolio level to ensure completion/acceptance criteria are satisfied.
    Capability Level 3: EngagedProject closure is confirmed at the portfolio level, but with minimal enforcement of satisfaction of completion/acceptance criteria.
    Capability Level 2: EncouragedProject managers often follow handoff and closure procedures, but project closure is not confirmed or governed at the portfolio level.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedProject closure is not governed at either the project or portfolio level.

    Benchmark the current project closure process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the project closure process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Conduct reprioritization of projects at a regular cadence
    • Prune projects every year
    • Waive post-implementation review for time-constrained projects
    • Collect project post-mortem reports and curate in PMO SharePoint

    Set near- and long-term action items for the project closure process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Begin establishing project closure criteria in the project initiation process.
    • Manage and document scope changes throughout the project.
    For example:
    • Institute a formal process to ensure that all projects are closed at the portfolio level and properly handed off to support and maintenance teams.

    Review and customize slide 32, “Project closure: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the project closure process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: project closure
      Complete or terminate projects –› Validate project closure –› Conduct post-project work –› Conduct post-implementation review


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?


    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new project closure process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new project closure process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated project closure checklist.
    • Project value review meeting process document.
    • Post-implementation review process document.

    Info-Tech has several research notes that elaborate on aspects of project closure. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s research notes on project closure:

    • The Importance of Conducting a Post Implementation Review
    • Five Key Steps to Mastering Project Closure
    • ‘Governance’ Will Kill Your Projects

    Review and customize slide 33, “Project closure: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Validate the time and effort spent on projects with a benefits realization process

    Maximizing benefits from projects is the primary goal of PPM. Tracking and reporting on benefits post-project closes the loop on benefits.

    Questions

    • How do validate the project benefits from the original business case?
    • How do we track the benefits?
    • Who reports it? When?

    Benefits

    • Maximize benefits realization by identifying and addressing unforeseen issues or limitations to success.
    • Improve project approval and prioritization by improving validity of the business case definition process.

    Challenges

    • Project sponsors need to be willing to invest time – months and years post-project completion – to validate benefits realization.
    • Portfolio management needs to proactively work with sponsors to facilitate benefits tracking.
    • Business cases need to be well developed and documented to reflect real anticipated benefits.

    Too many projects fail to achieve the originally proposed benefits, and too few organizations are able to identify and address the root causes of those shortfalls.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In reality, benefits realization process extends across the entire project life cycle: during intake, during the execution of the project, and after project completion. Be mindful of this extended scope when you discuss benefits realization in the following activity.

    Keep project benefits front and center with a repeatable benefits realization process

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for benefits realization.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for benefits realization. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Business Analysts', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Quantify and validate benefits in business case' which happens 'Before Project' and involves 'Business Analysts' and 'Project Managers'. Step 2 is 'Update projected project benefits' which happens 'During Project' and involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 3 is 'Hand-off benefits realization ownership' which happens at the end of project and involves 'Project Managers', 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 4 is 'Monitor and report on benefits' which happens 'After Project' and involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    At the heart of benefits realization is accountability: who is held accountable for projects that don’t realize the benefits and how? Without the buy-in from the entire executive layer team, addressing this issue is very difficult.

    Determine your benefits realization process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: benefits realization capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the benefits realization process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedProject sponsors and key stakeholders are accountable for stated project benefits before, during and after the project. There is a process to maximize the realization of project benefits.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, updated when changes are made to the project, and monitored/reported after projects are completed.
    Capability Level 3: EngagedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, and there is a loosely defined process to report on benefits realization.
    Capability Level 2: DefinedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, but there is no process to monitor whether the said benefits are realized.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedProjects are approved and initiated without discussing benefits.

    Benchmark the current benefits realization process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the benefits realization process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    StartStopContinue
    • Require “hard monetary value” in business benefits
    • Send project updates before resource management meetings

    Set near- and long-term action items for the benefits realization process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Create an “orientation for project sponsors” document.
    • Encourage project managers to re-validate project benefits on an ongoing basis and report any deviation.
    For example:
    • Recruit the finance department’s help in benefits tracking.
    • Require Finance’s sign-off on project benefits in business cases during intake.

    Review and customize slide 35, “Benefits realization: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the benefits realization process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: benefits realization
      Validate benefits in business case –› Update project benefits during execution –› Hand-off benefits ownership –› Monitor and report on benefits


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      InputWhat information do you need to perform the work?
      OutputWhat artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/TimingHow often, and when, will the work be performed?
      ResponsibilityWho will perform the work?
      AccountabilityWho will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new benefits realization process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new benefits realization process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated business plan templates.
    • Communication plan for project sponsors.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 36, “Benefits realization: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 2.1.1 'Align your project intake, prioritization, and approval process to the PPM strategy'. Align your project intake, prioritization, and approval process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.1.2 'Align your resource management process to the PPM strategy'. Align your resource management process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Sample of activity 2.2.1 'Align your portfolio reporting process to the PPM strategy'.Align your portfolio reporting process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.2.2 'Align your project closure process to the PPM strategy'.Align your project closure process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.2.3 'Align your benefits realization process to the PPM strategy'.Align your benefits realization process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select a right-sized PPM solutionStep 3.2: Finalize your PPM Strategic Plan Template
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Assess your PPM tool requirements to help support your processes.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine the costs and potential benefits of your PPM strategy.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine the functionality requirements of the PPM solution.
    • Estimate your PPM tool budget.
    • Review the tool assessment.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio.
    • Estimate the benefits of the PPM strategy.
    • Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive implementation plan.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Phase 3 Insight:

    • Approach PPM as an evolving discipline that requires adaptability and long-term organizational change. Near-term process improvements should create stakeholder desire for better portfolio visibility and agility over the long term.

    Step 3.1: Select a right-sized PPM solution for supporting your new processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the functionality requirements of a PPM solution in the near and long terms.
    • Estimate your PPM tool budget.
    • Review tool assessment.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of functional requirements for a PPM solution
    • An estimate budget and cost for supporting a PPM tool in the near and long terms
    • PPM tool requirements for the near and long terms

    Right-size your PPM solution/tool to fit your PPM processes

    Avoid a common pitfall: the disconnect between PPM processes and PPM tools.

    PPM tools act as both a receptacle for portfolio data generated by your processes and a source of portfolio data to drive your processes forward. Therefore, choosing a suitable PPM tool is critical to the success of your PPM strategy:

    • PPM tool inputs must match the type, level of detail, and amount of portfolio data generated by your PPM processes.
    • PPM tool outputs must be useful, insightful, easy to access, and easy to understand for people who engage in your PPM processes.

    User adoption is an often cited cause of failed PPM tool implementation:

    "The biggest problem is getting the team to work with the tool. We need to make sure that we’re not wasting time delving too far down into the tool, yet putting enough information to get useful information back." (IT Director, Financial Services)

    This final step of the blueprint will discuss the choice of PPM tools to ensure the success of PPM strategy by avoiding the process-tool disconnect.

    Common pitfalls for PPM tools

    • Purchasing and implementing a PPM tool before the process is defined and accepted.
    • Poor expectation setting: inability of tools to perform the necessary analysis.
    • Underleveraged: low user/process adoption.
    • Poor integration with the corporate finance function.
    • (WGroup, 2017)

    Leverage PPM tools to get the information you need

    An optimized PPM solution is the vehicle that provides decision makers with four key pieces of information they require when making decisions for your project portfolio:

    • Historical Insight – inform decision makers about how much time and resources have been spent to date, and benchmark the accuracy of prior project estimates and resource allocations.
    • Forecasting – provide a trustworthy estimate of demand on resources and current projects.
    • Portfolio Analytics – analyze portfolio data and generate easy-to-consume reports that provide answers to questions such as:
      • How big is our overall portfolio?
      • How much money/resource time is available?
      • How efficiently are we using our resources?
    • Project Visibility – provide a trustworthy report on the status of current projects and the resources working on them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without the proper information, decision makers are driving blind and are forced to make gut feel decisions as opposed to data-informed decisions. Implement a PPM solution to allocate projects properly and ensure time and money don’t vanish without being accounted for.

    Commercial PPM tools have more functionality but are more costly, complex, and difficult to adopt

    • Granular timesheet management
    • Workflow and team collaboration
    • Robust data and application integration
    • Advanced what-if planning
    • Mobile usability
    A map comparing commercial PPM tools by 'Functionality', 'Cost', and 'Difficulty to implement/adopt'. 'Functionality' and 'Difficulty to implement/adopt' share an axis and can be assumed to have a linear relationship. 'Spreadsheets' are low functionality and low cost. 'Google Sites' are low to middling functionality and low cost. 'SharePoint' is middling functionality with a slightly higher cost. The next three start at middling cost and above-average functionality and trend higher in both categories: 'Commercial Entry-Level PPM', 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM', and 'Commercial Enterprise PPM'.
    • Business case scoring and prioritization
    • Multi-user reporting and request portal
    • High-level resource management
    • Project status, cost, and risk tracking

    "Price tags [for PPM tools] vary considerably. Expensive products don't always provide more capability. Inexpensive products are generally low cost for good reason." (Merkhofer)

    Your PPM tool options are not limited to commercial offerings

    Despite the rapid growth in the commercial PPM tool market today, homegrown approaches like spreadsheets and intranet sites continue to be used as PPM tools.

    Kinds of PPM solutions used by Info-Tech clients

    A pie chart visualizing the kinds of PPM solutions that are used by Info-Tech clients. There are three sections, the largest of which is 'Spreadsheet-based, 46%', then 'Commercial, 33%', then 'No solution, 21%'. (Source: Info-Tech Research Group (2016), N=433)

    Category

    Characteristics

    PPM maturity

    Enterprise tool
    • Higher professional services requirements for enterprise deployment
    • Larger reference customers
    High
    Mid-market tool
    • Lower expectation of professional services engaged in initial deployment contract
    • Fewer globally recognizable reference clients
    • Faster deployments
    High
    Entry-level tool
    • Lower cost than mid-market & enterprise PPM tools
    • Limited configurability, reporting, and resource management functionalities
    • Compelling solutions to the organizations that wants to get a fast start to a trial deployment
    Intermediate
    Spreadsheet based
    • Little/no up-front cost, highly customizable to suit your organization’s needs
    • Varying degrees of sophistication
    • Few people in the organization may understand the logic behind the tool; knowledge may not be easily transferrable
    Intermediate Low

    Determine the functional requirements of the PPM solution

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.1 – 20 minutes

    INPUT: PPM strategic plan

    OUTPUT: Modified PPM strategic plan with a proposed choice of PPM tool

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, IT Managers

    Use the Tool Assessment tab (tab 4) of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool to rate and analyze functional requirements of your PPM solution.

    • Review the list of PPM features provided on column B of tab 4. You can add any desired features not listed.
    • Rate your near-term and long-term feature requirements using the drop-down menus in columns C and D. Your selections here will inform the tool selection bubble chart to the right of the features list.

    Screenshot showing the features list on tab 4 of the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Estimate your PPM tool budget

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.2 – 20 minutes

    INPUT: PPM strategic plan

    OUTPUT: Modified PPM strategic plan with a proposed choice of PPM tool

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: CIO, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, IT Managers

    Enter the PPM tool budget information on the Tool Assessment tab of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    • As a starting point, it can help to know that low-priced PPM tools cost around $1,000 per user per year. High-priced PPM tools cost around $3,000 per user per year.
    • Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)-based pricing for PPM solutions is increasingly popular. If you plan to purchase perpetual licensing, divide the total implementation and licensing cost by three years to be comparable with a three-year SaaS total cost of ownership analysis.

    Screenshot showing the tool assessment from the PPM Strategy Development Tool with 'Near-Term' and 'Long-Term' budget columns. Notes include 'Enter the number of fully licensed PPM users you expect to provision for and your estimated annual budget for a PPM tool', 'The tool assessment automatically calculates your annual budget per user, which is reflected in the bubble chart analysis (see next slide)'.

    Review the tool assessment graphic

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 – 20 minutes

    The map comparing commercial PPM tools from before, this time overlaid with 'Near-Term' and 'Long-Term' budgets as coloured circles. The vertical axis is 'Functionality Rating' and the horizontal axis is now 'Annual Cost/Budget per User'. 'Spreadsheets' are low functionality and low cost. 'Google Sites' are low to middling functionality and low cost. 'SharePoint' is middling functionality with a slightly higher cost. The 'Near-Term' budget circle covers those three tools. The next three start at middling cost and above-average functionality and trend higher in both categories: 'Commercial Entry-Level PPM', 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM', and 'Commercial Enterprise PPM'. The 'Long-Term' budget circle covers 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM'.

    If you are in one of the non-covered areas, consider revisiting your functional requirements and PPM strategy. You may need to lessen your expectations to be able to stay within your budget, or find a way to get more money.

    Keep in mind that the long-term goal can be to work towards a commercial tool, while the short-term goal would be to be able to maintain your portfolio in a simple spreadsheet first.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you choose a commercial solution, you will need to gain executive buy-in in order to implement the tool; proceed to near-term and long-term plans to get the ball rolling on this decision.

    Review and customize slide 37, “Tools for PPM: proposed near- and long-term solutions,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Grow your own, or select and implement, a PPM solution with Info-Tech

    Whether you choose spreadsheet-based or commercially available PPM solutions, use Info-Tech’s research for scoping, designing, and implementing them.

    Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint will help you implement a highly evolved spreadsheet-based PPM solution. It features the Portfolio Manager 2017, a Microsoft Excel-based workbook that leverages its business intelligence features to provide a basis for implementing a scalable, highly customizable PPM tool with useful and easy-to-manipulate analytics.

    Read Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution blueprint is part of our Vendor Landscape research. Make sense of the diversity of PPM solutions available in today’s market, and choose the most appropriate solutions for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.

    Read Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution blueprint.

    A right-sized PPM strategy leads to a right-sized portfolio management tool based on Info-Tech’s template

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Energy
    Source: Info-Tech Client

    “The approach makes it easy to run the portfolio without taking time away from the project themselves.” (IT Manager, Energy Resources Firm)

    Situation

    • A small IT department struggled with balancing project work with ongoing operational management and support work.
    • The department includes experienced and successful project managers and a mature, skilled team.
    • However, the nature of the department’s role has evolved to the point where the project and operational work demands have exceeded the available time.
    • Prioritization needed to become more centralized and formalized while management control of the work assignments became increasingly decentralized.

    Complication

    • Agile projects offer clear advantages by lightening the requirement for proactive planning. However, getting the staff to adapt would be challenging because of the overall workload and competing priorities.
    • Some of the team’s time needed to be carefully tracked and reported for time & materials-based billing, but the time sheet system was unsuited to their portfolio management needs.
    • Commercial PPM systems were ruled out because strict task management seemed unlikely to gain adoption.

    Resolution

    • The team deployed Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Workbook, based on a Microsoft Excel template, and the Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint.
    • For the first time, executive leadership was given a 12-month forecast of resource capacity based on existing and pending project commitments. The data behind the capacity forecast was based on allocating people to projects with a percentage of their time for each calendar month.
    • The data behind the forecast is high level but easily maintainable.

    Step 3.2: Finalize customizing your PPM Strategic Plan Template

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the costs of support your PPM strategic plan.
    • Estimate some of the benefits of your PPM strategic plan.
    • Perform a cost-benefit analysis.
    • Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A cost/benefit analyst
    • An implementation action plan
    • A finalized PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.1 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 5: Costing Summary

    The time cost of PPM processes (tab 3) and PPM tool costs (tab 4) are summarized in this tab. Enter additional data to estimate the total PPM cost-in-use: the setup information and the current cost of PPM software tools.

    Screenshot of the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 5: Costing Summary. Notes include 'If unknown, the overall HR budget of your project portfolio can be estimated as: (# FTEs) * (fully-loaded FTE cost per hour) * 1800', 'This is your total PPM cost-in-use'.

    Estimate the benefits of managing the project portfolio

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.2 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions

    The benefits of PPM processes are estimated by projecting the sources of waste on your resource capacity.

    1. Estimate the current extent of waste on your resource capacity. If you have completed Info-Tech’s PPM Current Score Scorecard, enter the data from the report.
    2. Screenshot of a Waste Assessment pie chart from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions.
    3. Given your near- and long-term action items for improving PPM processes, estimate how each source of waste on your resource capacity will change.
    4. Screenshot of a Waste Assessment table titled 'These inputs represent the percentage of your overall portfolio budget that is wasted in each scenario' from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions.

    Review the cost-benefit analysis results and update the PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.3 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 7: Conclusion Screenshot of a 'PPM Strategy Cost-Benefit Analysis' from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 7: Conclusion. It has tables on top and bar charts underneath.

    This tab summarizes the costs and benefits of your PPM strategic plan.

    • Costs are estimated from wasted project capacity and time spent on PPM process work.
    • Benefits are estimated from the project capacity to be reclaimed as a result of improvements in PPM.
    • Return on investment is calculated by dividing the value of project capacity to be reclaimed by investment in PPM in addition to the current-state cost.

    Capture this summary in your PPM strategic plan.

    Customize slides 40 and 41, “Return on PPM investment,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Determine who will be responsible for coordinating the flow, collection, and reporting of portfolio data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.3 – Project Portfolio/PMO Analyst Job Description

    You will need to determine responsibilities and accountabilities for portfolio management functions within your team.

    If you do not have a clearly identifiable portfolio manager at this time, you will need to clarify who will wear which hats in terms of facilitating intake and prioritization, high-level capacity awareness, and portfolio reporting.

    • Use Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template to help clarify some of the required responsibilities to support your PPM strategy.
      • If you need to bring in an additional staff member to help support the strategy, you can customize the job description template to help advertise the position. Simply edit the text in grey within the template.
    • If you have other PPM tasks that you need to define responsibilities for, you can use the RASCI chart on the final tab of the PPM Strategy Develop Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template.

    Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan

    Associated Activity icon 3.2.4 – 30 minutes

    INPUT: Near-term action items

    OUTPUT: Near-term action plan

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Collect the near-term action items for each of the five PPM processes and arrange them into a table that outlines the near-term action plan. Once it is compiled, adjust the timeline and responsibility so that the plan is coherent and realistic as a whole.

    Example:

    Outcome

    Action required

    Timeline

    Responsibility

    Determine the percentage distribution of project vs. non-project work Run a time audit survey with all project resources 2 weeks Resource managers
    Test a simple dashboard for project status Pilot Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017 workbook 2 weeks PMO Director

    "There is a huge risk of taking on too much too soon, especially with the introduction of specific tools and tool sets. There is also an element of risk involved that can lead to failure and disappointment with PPM if these tools are not properly introduced and supported." (Jim Carse, Director of the Portfolio Office, Queen’s University)

    Review and customize slide 43, “Summary of near-term action plan,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Finalize and publish your PPM strategic plan

    Table of Contents

    Read over the document to ensure its completeness and consistency.

    At this point, you have a PPM strategic plan that is actionable and realistic, which addresses the goals set by the senior leadership.

    The executive brief establishes the need for PPM strategy, the goals and metrics are set by members of the senior leadership that gave the initial buy-in, and the target states of PPM processes that meet those goals are described. Finally, the costs and benefits of the improved PPM practice are laid out in a way that can be validated.

    The next step for your PPM strategy is to use this document as a foundation for implementing and operationalizing the target-state PPM processes.

    Review and publish the document for your executive layer and key project stakeholders. Solicit their feedback.

    Info-Tech has a library of blueprints that will guide you through each of the five processes. Contact your Info-Tech account manager or Info-Tech analyst to get started.

    • Project Portfolio Management Strategy
      • Strategic Expectations
      • Overview
    • Leadership Mandate
    • Project Demand and Resource Supply
    • The Current State of Resource Utilization
    • PPM Processes
      • Project intake, prioritization, and approval
      • Resource management
      • Portfolio reporting
      • Project closure
      • Benefits realization
      • Tools for PPM
    • The Economic Impact of PPM
    • PPM Strategy Next Steps

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Scope the right-sized PPM solution for your PPM strategy'. Scope the right-sized PPM solution for your PPM strategy

    Use the PPM Strategy Development Tool to quickly determine our near- and long-term recommendation for your PPM solution.

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of your PPM strategic plan'. Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of your PPM strategic plan

    Using the time cost estimates of each process and the requirement for a PPM tool, Info-Tech helps you quantify the overhead costs of PPM and estimate the monetary benefits of reclaimed project capacity for your project portfolio.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are on board before preceding to implement your PPM strategy.

    Insight 2

    • The means of project and portfolio management (i.e. processes) shouldn’t eclipse the ends – strategic goals. Root your process in your PPM strategic goals to realize PPM benefits (e.g. optimized portfolio value, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction).

    Insight 3

    • Without the proper information, decision makers are driving blind and are forced to make gut-feel decisions as opposed to data-informed decisions. Implement a PPM solution to allocate projects properly and ensure time and money don’t vanish without being accounted for.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Info-Tech’s thought model on PPM processes that create an infrastructure around projects
    • Your current state of project portfolio: project capacity vs. project demand
    • Importance of gaining executive buy-in for installing the PPM practice

    Processes Optimized

    • Project intake, prioritization, and approval process
    • Resource management process
    • Portfolio reporting process
    • Project closure process
    • Benefits realization process

    Deliverables Completed

    • Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate
    • Analysis of current project capacity and demand
    • PPM process goals and metrics, aligned to meet PPM strategic expectations
    • PPM process capability levels
    • Retrospective examination of current state, near/long-term action items for improvement, and high-level descriptions of the five PPM processes
    • Recommendation of PPM tools to support the processes
    • Estimate of PPM overhead costs
    • Cost-benefit analysis of PPM practice
    • PPM strategic plan

    Related Info-Tech Research

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    • Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization
    • Develop a Resource Management Strategy for the New Reality
    • Manage a Minimum-Viable PMO
    • Establish the Benefits Realization Process
    • Manage an Agile Portfolio
    • Establish the Benefits Realization Process
    • Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program
      The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low-effort, high-impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment in order to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Kiron D. Bondale PMP, PMI-RMP, CDAP, CDAI, Senior Project Portfolio Management Professional Kiron D. Bondale PMP, PMI-RMP, CDAP, CDAI
    Senior Project Portfolio Management Professional

    Kiron has worked in the project management domain for more than fifteen years managing multiple projects, leading Project Management Offices (PMO) and providing project portfolio management consulting services to over a hundred clients across multiple industries. He has been an active member of the Project Management Institute (PMI) since 1999 and served as a volunteer director on the Board of the PMI Lakeshore Chapter for six years. Kiron has published articles on project and project portfolio management in multiple journals and has delivered over a hundred webinar presentations on a variety of PPM and PM topics and has presented at multiple industry conferences. Since 2009, Kiron has been blogging on a weekly basis on project management topics and responds to questions daily in the LinkedIn PMI Project, Program and Portfolio Management discussion group.

    Photo of Shaun Cahill, Project Manager, Queen’s University Shaun Cahill, Project Manager &
    Jim Carse, Director of the Project Portfolio Office
    Queen’s University

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Amy Fowler Stadler, Managing Partner, Lewis Fowler Amy Fowler Stadler, Managing Partner
    Lewis Fowler

    Amy has more than 20 years of experience in business and technology, most recently owning her own management consulting firm since 2002, focused on business transformation, technology enablement, and operational improvement. Prior to that, she was at CenturyLink (formerly Qwest) as an IT Director, Perot Systems in various roles, and Information Handling Services, Inc. as a Software Development Product Manager.

    Amy holds a bachelor’s degree in Computer Science with a minor in Business Communications and is also a 2015 Hall of Fame inductee to Illinois State University College of Applied Science and Technology.

    Photo of Rick Morris, President, R2 Consulting LLC Rick Morris, President
    R2 Consulting LLC

    Rick A. Morris, PMP, is a certified Scrum Agile Master, Human Behavior Consultant, best-selling author, mentor, and evangelist for project management. Rick is an accomplished project manager and public speaker. His appetite for knowledge and passion for the profession makes him an internationally sought after speaker delivering keynote presentations for large conferences and PMI events around the world. He holds the PMP (Project Management Professional), MPM (Masters of Project Management), Scrum Agile Master, OPM3, Six Sigma Green Belt, MCITP, MCTS, MCSE, TQM, ATM-S, ITIL, and ISO certifications, and is a John Maxwell Certified Speaker, Mentor, and Coach. Rick is the Owner of R2 Consulting, LLC and has worked for organizations such as GE, Xerox, and CA, and has consulted with numerous clients in a wide variety of industries including financial services, entertainment, construction, non-profit, hospitality, pharmaceutical, retail, and manufacturing.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Terry Lee Ricci PgMP, PfMP, PMP, PPM Practice Lead, IAG Consulting Terry Lee Ricci PgMP, PfMP, PMP, PPM Practice Lead
    IAG Consulting

    Terry is passionate and highly skilled at PMO transformation, developing high-performing teams that sustain long-term business results. Terry has a reputation built upon integrity, resourcefulness, and respect. She has the vision to implement long and short-term strategies, meeting both current and evolving business needs.

    Change Management/Business transformation: Terry has extensive background in PMO strategy development aligned to corporate goals. Many years in the PMO organization integration/transformation building or overhauling programs and processes.

    Governance: Terry loves to monitor and measure performance and outcomes and uses her collaborative style to successfully bring simplicity to complexity (technology – people – process). Performance optimization results are easy to use and clearly define who is doing what across functions. End results consistently align to business strategy while mitigating risks effectively.

    Comprehensive: A “through the ranks” executive with a comprehensive understanding of PMO operations, high-performance teams, and the respective business units they support.

    Photo of Alana Ruckstuhl MSc, IT Project Officer, Federal Economic Development Agency for Southern Ontario Alana Ruckstuhl MSc, IT Project Officer
    Federal Economic Development Agency for Southern Ontario

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Jay Wardle, Director of the PMO, Red Wing Shoes Co. Jay Wardle, Director of the PMO
    Red Wing Shoes Co.
    Photo of Bob White, Vice President/Chief Information Officer, ALM Holding Company Bob White, Vice President/Chief Information Officer
    ALM Holding Company

    As vice president and chief information officer for ALM Holding Company, Bob White directs all technology activity and support for three main verticals: road construction, energy management, and delivery and transportation. He has been with ALM Holding Company for one and a half years, focusing on PPM process improvement, cybersecurity initiatives, and IT service management.

    Prior to joining ALM, Bob was executive vice president/chief information officer at Ashley Furniture Industries, Inc. where he led the strategic direction, implementation, and management of information technology throughout the company’s global operations. Bob has also held VP/CIO positions at the Stride Rite Corporation and Timex Corporation.

    Bob holds a Master’s degree in Operations Management from the University of Arkansas and a Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Engineering from Southern Illinois University.

    Bibliography

    Bersin, Josh. “Time to Scrap Performance Appraisals?” Forbes Magazine, 5 June 2013. Web. 30 Oct 2013.

    Cheese, Peter et al. “Creating an Agile Organization.” Accenture, Oct. 2009. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Croxon, Bruce et al. “Dinner Series: Performance Management with Bruce Croxon from CBC's 'Dragon's Den'” HRPA Toronto Chapter. Sheraton Hotel, Toronto, ON. 12 Nov. 2013. Panel discussion.

    Culbert, Samuel. “10 Reasons to Get Rid of Performance Reviews.” Huffington Post Business, 18 Dec. 2012. Web. 28 Oct. 2013.

    Denning, Steve. “The Case Against Agile: Ten Perennial Management Objections.” Forbes Magazine, 17 Apr. 2012. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Estis, Ryan. “Blowing up the Performance Review: Interview with Adobe’s Donna Morris.” Ryan Estis & Associates, 17 June 2013. Web. Oct. 2013.

    Gallup, Inc. “Gallup Study: Engaged Employees Inspire Company Innovation.” Gallup Management Journal, 12 Oct. 2006. Web. 12 Jan 2012.

    Gartside, David et al. “Trends Reshaping the Future of HR.” Accenture, 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2013.

    KeyedIn Solutions. “Why PPM and PMOs Fail.” KeyedIn Projects, 2013. Ebook.

    Lessing, Lawrence. Free Culture. Lulu Press Inc.: 30 July 2016.

    Merkhofer, Lee. “Keys to Implementing Project Portfolio Management.” Lee Merkhofer Consulting, 2017.

    Perry, Mark Price. Business Driven Project Portfolio Management. J Ross Pub: 17 May 2011.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2015: Capturing the Value of Project Management.” PMI, Feb. 2015. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2016: The High Cost of Low Performance.” PMI, 2016. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2017: Success Rates Rise.” PMI, 2017. Web.

    Project Management Institute. The Standard for Portfolio Management – Third Edition. PMI: 1 Dec. 2012.

    WGroup. “Common Pitfalls in Project Portfolio Management – Part 2.” WGroup, 24 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}182|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $82,374 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 35 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Rapid changes in today’s market require rapid, value-based decisions, and organizations that lack a shared definition of value fail to maintain their competitive advantage.
    • Different parts of an organization have different value drivers that must be given balanced consideration.
    • Focusing solely on revenue ignores the full extent of value creation in your organization and does not necessarily result in the right outcomes.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Business is the authority on business value. While IT can identify some sources of value, business stakeholders must participate in the creation of a definition that is meaningful to the whole organization.
    • It’s about more than profit. Organizations must have a definition that encompasses all of the sources of value or they risk making short-term decisions with long-term negative impacts.
    • Technology creates business value. Treating IT as a cost center makes for short-sighted decisions in a world where every business process is enabled by technology.

    Impact and Result

    • Standardize your definition of business value. Work with your business partners to define the different sources of business value that are created through technology-enabled products and services.
    • Weigh your value drivers. Ensure that business and IT understand the relative weight and priority of the different sources of business value you have identified.
    • Use a balanced scorecard to understand value. Use the different value drivers to understand and prioritize different products, applications, projects, initiatives, and enhancements.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why building a consistent and aligned framework to measure the value of your products and services is vital for setting priorities and getting the business on board.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your value drivers

    This phase will help you define and weigh value drivers based on overarching organizational priorities and goals.

    • Build a Value Measurement Framework – Phase 1: Define Your Value Drivers
    • Value Calculator

    2. Measure value

    This phase will help you analyze the value sources of your products and services and their alignment to value drivers to produce a value score that you can use for prioritization.

    • Build a Value Measurement Framework – Phase 2: Measure Value
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "A meaningful measurable definition of value is the key to effectively managing the intake, prioritization, and delivery of technology-enabled products and services."

    Cole Cioran,

    Senior Director, Research – Application Development and Portfolio Management

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIOs who need to understand the value IT creates
    • Application leaders who need to make good decisions on what work to prioritize and deliver
    • Application and project portfolio managers who need to ensure the portfolio creates business value
    • Product owners who are accountable for delivering value

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Define quality in your organization’s context from both business and IT perspectives.
    • Define a repeatable process to understand the value of a product, application, project, initiative, or enhancement.
    • Define value sources and metrics.
    • Create a tool to make it easier to balance different sources of value.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Product and application delivery teams who want to make better decisions about what they deliver
    • Business analysts who need to make better decisions about how to prioritize their requirements

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Create a meaningful relationship with business partners around what creates value for the organization.
    • Enable better understanding of your customers and their needs.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Measuring the business value provided by IT is critical for improving the relationship between business and IT.
    • Rapid changes in today’s market require rapid, value-based decisions.
    • Every organization has unique drivers that make it difficult to see the benefits based on time and impact approaches to prioritization.

    Complication

    • An organization’s lack of a shared definition of value leads to politics and decision making that does not have a firm, quantitative basis.
    • Different parts of an organization have different value drivers that must be given balanced consideration.
    • Focusing solely on revenue does not necessarily result in the right outcomes.

    Resolution

    • Standardize your definition of business value. Work with your business partners to define the different sources of business value that are created through technology-enabled products and services.
    • Weigh your value drivers. Ensure business and IT understand the relative weight and priority of the different sources of business value you have identified.
    • Use a balanced scorecard to understand value. Use the different value drivers to understand and prioritize different products, applications, projects, initiatives, and enhancements.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Business is the authority on business value. While IT can identify some sources of value, business stakeholders must participate in the creation of a definition that is meaningful to the whole organization.
    2. It’s about more than profit. Organizations must have a definition that encompasses all of the sources of value, or they risk making short-term decisions with long-term negative impacts.
    3. Technology creates business value. Treating IT as a cost center makes for short-sighted decisions in a world where every business process is enabled by technology.

    Software is not currently creating the right outcomes

    Software products are taking more and more out of IT budgets.

    38% of spend on IT employees goes to software roles.

    Source: Info-Tech’s Staffing Survey

    18% of opex is spent on software licenses.

    Source: SoftwareReviews.com

    33% of capex is spent on new software.

    However, the reception and value of software products do not justify the money invested.

    Only 34% of software is rated as both important and effective by users.

    Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision

    IT benchmarks do not help or matter to the business. Focus on the metrics that represent business outcomes.

    A pie chart is shown as an example to show how benchmarks do not help the business.

    IT departments have a tendency to measure only their own role-based activities and deliverables, which only prove useful for selling practice improvement services. Technology doesn’t exist for technology's sake. It’s in place to generate specific outcomes. IT and the business need to be aligned toward a common goal of enabling business outcomes, and that’s the important measurement.

    "In today’s connected world, IT and business must not speak different languages. "

    – Cognizant, 2017

    CxOs stress the importance of value as the most critical area for IT to improve reporting

    A bar graph is shown to demonstrate the CxOs importance of value. Business value metrics are 32% of significant improvement necessary, and 51% where some improvement is necessary.

    N=469 CxOs from Info-Tech’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic

    Key stakeholders want to know how you and your products or services help them realize their goals.

    While the basics of value are clear, few take the time to reach a common definition and means to measure and apply value

    Often, IT misses the opportunity to become a strategic partner because it doesn’t understand how to communicate and measure its value to the business.

    "Price is what you pay. Value is what you get."

    – Warren Buffett

    Being able to understand the value context will allow IT to articulate where IT spend supports business value and how it enables business goal achievement.

    Value is...

    Derived from business context

  • What is our business context?
  • Enabled through governance and strategy

  • Who sees the strategy through?
  • The underlying context for decision making

  • How is value applied to support decisions?
  • A measure of achievement

  • How do I measure?
  • Determine your business context by assessing the goals and defining the unique value drivers in your organization

    Competent organizations know that value cannot always be represented by revenue or reduced expenses. However, it is not always apparent how to envision the full spectrum of sources of value. Dissecting value by the benefit type and the value source’s orientation allows you to see the many ways in which a product or service brings value to the organization.

    A business value matrix is shown. It shows the relationship between reading customers, increase revenue, reduce costs, and enhance services.

    Financial Benefits vs. Improved Capabilities

    Financial Benefits refers to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often quite tangible. Human Benefits refers to how a product or service can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Increase Revenue

    Reduce Costs

    Enhance Services

    Reach Customers

    Product or service functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue.

    Reduction of overhead. They typically are less related to broad strategic vision or goals and more simply limit expenses that would occur had the product or service not been put in place.

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    See your strategy through by involving both IT and the business

    Buy-in for your IT strategy comes from the ability to showcase value. IT needs to ensure it has an aligned understanding of what is valuable to the organization.

    Business value needs to first be established by the business. After that, IT can build a partnership with the business to determine what that value means in the context of IT products and services.

    The Business

    What the Business and IT have in common

    IT

    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the products along with those most familiar with the capabilities or processes enabled by technology.

    Business Value of Products and Services

    Technical subject matter experts of the products and services they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality products and services are delivered up to stakeholder expectations.

    Measure your product or services with Info-Tech’s Value Measurement Framework (VMF) and value scores

    The VMF provides a consistent and less subjective approach to generating a value score for an application, product, service, or individual feature, by using business-defined value drivers and product-specific value metrics.

    Info-Tech's Value Measurement Framework is shown.

    A consistent set of established value drivers, sources, and metrics gives more accurate comparisons of relative value

    Value Drivers

    Value Sources

    Value Fulfillment Metrics

    Broad categories of values, weighed and prioritized based on overarching goals

    Instances of created value expressed as a “business outcome” of a particular function

    Units of measurement and estimated targets linked to a value source

    Reach Customers

    Customer Satisfaction

    Net Promoter Score

    Customer Loyalty

    # of Repeat Visits

    Create Revenue Streams

    Data Monetization

    Dollars Derived From Data Sales

    Leads Generation

    Leads Conversation Rate

    Operational Efficiency

    Operational Efficiency

    Number of Interactions

    Workflow Management

    Cycle Time

    Adhere to regulations & compliance

    Number of Policy Exceptions

    A balanced and weighted scorecard allows you to measure the various ways products generate value to the business

    The Info-Tech approach to measuring value applies the balanced value scorecard approach.

    Importance of value source

    X

    Impact of value source

    = Value Score

    Which is based on…

    Which is based on…

    Alignment to value driver

    Realistic targets for the KPI

    Which is weighed by…

    Which is estimated by…

    A 1-5 scale of the relative importance of the value driver to the organization

    A 1-5 scale of the application or feature’s ability to fulfill that value source

    +

    Importance of Value Source

    X

    Impact of Value Source

    +

    Importance of Value Source

    +

    Impact of Value Source

    +

    Importance of Value Source

    +

    Impact of Value Source

    +

    Importance of Value Source

    +

    Impact of Value Source

    =

    Balanced Business Value Score

    Value Score1 + VS2 + … + VSN = Overall Balance Value Score

    Value scores help support decisions. This blueprint looks specifically at four use cases for value scores.

    A value score is an input to the following activities:

    1. Prioritize Your Product Backlog
    2. Estimate the relative value of different product backlog items (i.e. epics, features, etc.) to ensure the highest value items are completed first.

      This blueprint can be used as an input into Info-Tech’s Build a Better Backlog.

    3. Prioritize Your Project Backlog
    4. Estimate the relative value of proposed new applications or major changes or enhancements to existing applications to ensure the right projects are selected and completed first.

      This blueprint can be used as an input into Info-Tech’s Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization.

    5. Rationalize Your Applications
    6. Gauge the relative value from the current use of your applications to support strategic decision making such as retirement, consolidation, and further investments.

      This blueprint can be used as an input into Info-Tech’s Visualize Your Application Portfolio Strategy With a Business Value-Driven Roadmap.

    7. Categorize Application Tiers
    8. Gauge the relative value of your existing applications to distinguish your most to least important systems and build tailored support structures that limit the downtime of key value sources.

      This blueprint can be used as an input into Info-Tech’s Streamline Application Maintenance.

    The priorities, metrics, and a common understanding of value in your VMF carry over to many other Info-Tech blueprints

    Transition to Product Delivery

    Build a Product Roadmap

    Modernize Your SDLC

    Build a Strong Foundation for Quality

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Use Info-Tech’s Value Calculator

    The Value Calculator facilitates the activities surrounding defining and measuring the business value of your products and services.

    Use this tool to:

    • Weigh the importance of each Value Driver based on established organizational priorities.
    • Create a repository for Value Sources to provide consistency throughout each measurement.
    • Produce an Overall Balanced Value Score for a specific item.

    Info-Tech Deliverable

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Value Calculator is shown.

    Populate the Value Calculator as you complete the activities and steps on the following slides.

    Limitations of the Value Measurement Framework

    "All models are wrong, but some are useful."

    – George E.P. Box, 1979

    Value is tricky: Value can be intangible, ambiguous, and cause all sorts of confusion, with the multiple, and often conflicting, priorities any organization is sure to have. You won’t likely come to a unified understanding of value or an agreement on whether one thing is more valuable than something else. However, this doesn’t mean you shouldn’t try. The VMF provides a means to organize various priorities in a meaningful way and to assess the relative value of a product or service to guide managers and decision makers on the right track and keep alignment with the rest of the organization.

    Relative value vs. ROI: This assessment produces a score to determine the value of a product or service relative to other products or services. Its primary function is to prioritize similar items (projects, epics, requirements, etc.) as opposed to producing a monetary value that can directly justify cost and make the case for a positive ROI.

    Apply caution with metrics: We live in a metric-crazed era, where everything is believed to be measurable. While there is little debate over recent advances in data, analytics, and our ability to trace business activity, some goals are still quite intangible, and managers stumble trying to link these goals to a quantifiable data source.

    In applying the VMF Info-Tech urges you to remember that metrics are not a magical solution. They should be treated as a tool in your toolbox and are sometimes no more than a rough gauge of performance. Carefully assign metrics to your products and services and do not disregard the informed subjective perspective when SMART metrics are unavailable.

    "One of the deadly diseases of management is running a company on visible figures alone."

    – William Edwards Deming, 1982

    Info-Tech’s Build a Value Measurement Framework glossary of terms

    This blueprint discusses value in a variety of ways. Use our glossary of terms to understand our specific focus.

    Value Measurement Framework (VMF)

    A method of measuring relative value for a product or service, or the various components within a product or service, through the use of metrics and weighted organizational priorities.

    Value Driver

    A board organizational goal that acts as a category for many value sources.

    Value Source

    A specific business goal or outcome that business and product or service capabilities are designed to fulfill.

    Value Fulfillment

    The degree to which a product or service impacts a business outcome, ideally linked to a metric.

    Value Score

    A measurement of the value fulfillment factored by the weight of the corresponding value driver.

    Overall Balanced Value Score

    The combined value scores of all value sources linked to a product or service.

    Relative Value

    A comparison of value between two similar items (i.e. applications to applications, projects to projects, feature to feature).

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Build a Value Measurement Framework – project overview

    1. Define Your Value Drivers

    2. Measure Value

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify your business value authorities.

    2.1 Define your value drivers.

    2.2 Weigh your value drivers.

    • Identify your product or service SMEs.
    • List your products or services items and components.
    • Identify your value sources.
    • Align to a value driver.
    • Assign metrics and gauge value fulfillment.

    Guided Implementations

    Identify the stakeholders who should be the authority on business value.

    Identify, define, and weigh the value drivers that will be used in your VMF and all proceeding value measurements.

    Identify the stakeholders who are the subject matter experts for your products or services.

    Measure the value of your products and services with value sources, fulfillment, and drivers.

    Outcome:

    • Value drivers and weights

    Outcome:

    • An initial list of reusable value sources and metrics
    • Value scores for your products or services

    Phase 1

    Define Your Value Drivers

    First determine your value drivers and add them to your VMF

    One of the main aspects of the VMF is to apply consistent and business-aligned weights to the products or services you will evaluate.

    This is why we establish your value drivers first:

    • Get the right executive-level “value authorities” to establish the overarching weights.
    • Build these into the backbone of the VMF to consistently apply to all your future measurements.
    An image of the Value Measure Framework is shown.

    Step 1.1: Identify Value Authorities

    Phase 1

    1.1: Identify Value Authorities

    1.2: Define Value Drivers

    Phase 2

    2.1: Identify Product or Service SMEs

    2.2: Measure Value

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your authorities on business value.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Owners of your value measurement framework

    Outcomes of this step

    • Your list of targeted individuals to include in Step 2.1

    Business value is best defined and measured by the combined effort and perspective of both IT and the business

    Buy-in for your IT strategy comes from the ability to showcase value. IT needs to ensure it has an aligned understanding of what is valuable to the organization. First, priorities need to be established by the business. Second, IT can build a partnership with the business to determine what that value means in the context of IT products and services.

    The Business

    What the Business and IT have in common

    IT

    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the products along with those most familiar with the capabilities or processes enabled by technology.

    Business Value of Products and Services

    Technical subject matter experts of the products and services they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality products and services are delivered up to stakeholder expectations.

    Engage key stakeholders to reach a consensus on organizational priorities and value drivers

    Engage these key players to create your value drivers:

    CEO: Who better holds the vision or mandate of the organization than its leader? Ideally, they are front and center for this discussion.

    CIO: IT must ensure that technical/practical considerations are taken into account when determining value.

    CFO: The CFO or designated representative will ensure that estimated costs and benefits can be used to manage the budgets.

    VPs: Application delivery and mgmt. is designed to generate value for the business. Senior management from business units must help define what that value is.

    Evaluators (PMO, PO, APM, etc.): Those primarily responsible for applying the VMF should be present and active in identifying and carefully defining your organization’s value drivers.

    Steering Committee: This established body, responsible for the strategic direction of the organization, is really the primary audience.

    Identify your authorities of business value to identify, define, and weigh value drivers

    1.1 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to identify key business stakeholders involved in strategic decision making at an organizational level.

    1. Review your organization’s governance structure and any related materials.
    2. Identify your key business stakeholders. These individuals are the critical business strategic partners.
      1. Target those who represent the business at an organizational level and often comprise the organization’s governing bodies.
      2. Prioritize a product backlog – include product owners and product managers who are in tune with the specific value drivers of the product in question.

    INFO-TECH TIP

    If your organization does not have a formal governance structure, your stakeholders would be the key players in devising business strategy. For example:

    • CEO
    • CFO
    • BRMs
    • VPs

    Leverage your organizational chart, governing charter, and senior management knowledge to better identify key stakeholders.

    INPUT

    • Key decision maker roles

    OUTPUT

    • Targeted individuals to define and weigh value drivers

    Materials

    • N/A

    Participants

    • Owner of the value measurement framework

    Step 1.2: Define Value Drivers

    Phase 1

    1.1: Identify Value Authorities

    1.2: Define Value Drivers

    Phase 2

    2.1: Identify Product or Service SMEs

    2.2: Measure Value

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define your value drivers.
    • Weigh your value drivers.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Owners of your value measurement framework
    • Authorities of business value

    Outcomes of this step

    • A list of your defined and weighted value drivers

    Value is based on business needs and vision

    Value is subjective. It is defined through the organization’s past achievement and its future objectives.

    Purpose & Mission

    Past Achievement & Current State

    Vision & Future State

    Culture & Leadership

    There must be a consensus view of what is valuable within the organization, and these values need to be shared across the enterprise. Instead of maintaining siloed views and fighting for priorities, all departments must have the same value and purpose in mind. These factors – purpose and mission, past achievement and current state, vision and future state, and culture and leadership – impact what is valuable to the organization.

    Value derives from the mission and vision of an organization; therefore, value is unique to each organization

    Business value represents what the business needs to do to achieve its target state. Establishing the mission and vision helps identify that target state.

    Mission

    Vision

    Business Value

    Why does the company exist?

    • Specify the company’s purpose, or reason for being, and use it to guide each day’s activities and decisions.

    What does the organization see itself becoming?

    • Identify the desired future state of the organization. The vision articulates the role the organization strives to play and the way it wants to be perceived by the customer.
    • State the ends, rather than the means, to get to the future state.

    What critical factors fulfill the mission and vision?

    • Articulate the important capabilities the business should have in order to achieve its objectives. All business activities must enable business value.
    • Communicate the means to achieve the mission and vision.

    Understand the many types of value your products or services produce

    Competent organizations know that value cannot always be represented by revenue or reduced expenses. However, it is not always apparent how to envision the full spectrum of value sources. Dissecting value by the benefit type and the value source’s orientation allows you to see the many ways in which a product or service brings value to the organization.

    A business value matrix is shown. It shows the relationship between reading customers, increase revenue, reduce costs, and enhance services.

    Financial Benefits vs. Improved Capabilities

    Financial Benefits refers to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often quite tangible. Human Benefits refers to how a product or service can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations. Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Increase Revenue

    Reduce Costs

    Enhance Services

    Reach Customers

    Product or service functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue.

    Reduction of overhead. They typically are less related to broad strategic vision or goals and more simply limit expenses that would occur had the product or service not been put in place.

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    Expand past Info-Tech’s high-level value quadrants and identify the value drivers specific to your organization

    Different industries have a wide range of value drivers. Consider the difference between public and private entities with respect to generating revenue or reaching their customers or other external stakeholders. Even organizations in the same industry may have different values. For example, a mature, well-established manufacturer may view reputation and innovation as its highest-priority values, whereas a struggling manufacturer will see revenue or market share growth as its main drivers.

    Value Drivers

    Increase Revenue

    Reduce Costs

    Enhance Services

    Reach Customers

    • Revenue growth
    • Data monetization
    • Cost optimization
    • Labor reduction
    • Collaboration
    • Risk and compliance
    • Customer experience
    • Trust and reputation

    You do not need to dissect each quadrant into an exhaustive list of value drivers. Info-Tech recommends defining distinct value drivers only for the areas you’ve identified as critical to your organization’s core goals and objectives.

    Understand value drivers that enable revenue growth

    Direct Revenue

    This value driver is the ability of a product or service to directly produce revenue through core revenue streams.

    Can be derived from:

    • Creating revenue
    • Improving the revenue generation of an existing service
    • Preventing the loss of a revenue stream

    Be aware of the differences between your products and services that enable a revenue source and those that facilitate the flow of capital.

    Funding

    This value driver is the ability of a product or service to enable other types of funding unrelated to core revenue streams.

    Can be derived from:

    • Tax revenue
    • Fees, fines, and ticketing programs
    • Participating in government subsidy or grant programs

    Be aware of the difference between your products and services that enable a revenue source and those that facilitate the flow of capital.

    Scale & Growth

    In essence, this driver can be viewed as the potential for growth in market share or new developing revenue sources.

    Does the product or service:

    • Increase your market share
    • Help you maintain your market share

    Be cautious of which items you identify here, as many innovative activities may have some potential to generate future revenue. Stick to those with a strong connection to future revenue and don’t qualify for other value driver categories.

    Monetization of Assets

    This value driver is the ability of your products and services to generate additional assets.

    Can be derived from:

    • Sale of data
    • Sale of market or customer reports or analysis
    • Sale of IP

    This value source is often overlooked. If given the right attention, it can lead to a big win for IT’s role in the business.

    Understand value drivers that reduce costs

    Cost Reduction

    A cost reduction is a “hard” cost saving that is reflected as a tangible decrease to the bottom line.

    This can be derived from reduction of expenses such as:

    • Salaries and wages
    • Hardware/software maintenance
    • Infrastructure

    Cost reduction plays a critical role in an application’s ability to increase efficiency.

    Cost Avoidance

    A cost avoidance is a “soft” cost saving, typically achieved by preventing a cost from occurring in the first place (i.e. risk mitigation). Cost avoidance indirectly impacts the bottom line.

    This can be derived from prevention of expenses by:

    • Mitigating a business outage
    • Mitigating another risk event
    • Delaying a price increase

    Understand the value drivers that enhance your services

    Enable Core Operations

    Some applications are in place to facilitate and support the structure of the organization. These vary depending on the capabilities of your organization but should be assessed in relation to the organization’s culture and structure.

    • Enables a foundational capability
    • Enables a niche capability

    This example is intentionally broad, as “core operations” should be further dissected to define different capabilities with ranging priority.

    Compliance

    A product or service may be required in order to meet a regulatory requirement. In these cases, you need to be aware of the organizational risk of NOT implementing or maintaining a service in relation to those risks.

    In this case, the product or service is required in order to:

    • Prevent fines
    • Allow the organization to operate within a specific jurisdiction
    • Remediate audit gaps
    • Provide information required to validate compliance

    Internal Improvement

    An application’s ability to create value outside of its core operations and facilitate the transfer of information, insights, and knowledge.

    Value can be derived by:

    • Data analytics
    • Collaboration
    • Knowledge transfer
    • Organizational learning

    Innovation

    Innovation is typically an ill-defined value driver, as it refers to the ability of your products and services to explore new value streams.

    Consider:

    • Exploration into new markets and products
    • New methods of organizing resources and processes

    Innovation is one of the more divisive value drivers, as some organizations will strive to be cutting edge and others will want no part in taking such risks.

    Understand business value drivers that connect the business to your customers

    Policy

    Products and services can also be assessed in relation to whether they enable and support policies of the organization. Policies identify and reinforce required processes, organizational culture, and core values.

    Policy value can be derived from:

    • The service or initiative will produce outcomes in line with our core organizational values.
    • Products that enable sustainability and corporate social responsibility

    Experience

    Applications are often designed to improve the interaction between customer and product. This value type is most closely linked to product quality and user experience. Customers, in this sense, can also include any stakeholders who consume core offerings.

    Customer experience value can be derived from:

    • Improving customer satisfaction
    • Ease of use
    • Resolving a customer issue or identified pain point
    • Providing a competitive advantage for your customers

    Customer Information

    Understanding demand and customer trends is a core driver for all organizations. Data provided through understanding the ways, times, and reasons that consumers use your services is a key driver for growth and stability.

    Customer information value can be achieved when an app:

    • Addresses strategic opportunities or threats identified through analyzing trends
    • Prevents failures due to lack of capacity to meet demand
    • Connects resources to external sources to enable learning and growth within the organization

    Trust & Reputation

    Products and services are designed to enable goals of digital ethics and are highly linked to your organization’s brand strategy.

    Trust and reputation can also be described as:

    • Customer loyalty and sustainability
    • Customer privacy and digital ethics

    Prioritizing this value source is critical, as traditional priorities can often come at the expense of trust and reputation.

    Define your value drivers

    1.2 Estimated Time: 1.5 hours

    The objective of this exercise is to establish a common understanding of the different values of the organization.

    1. Place your business value authorities at the center of this exercise.
    2. Collect all the documents your organization has on the mission and vision, strategy, governance, and target state, which may be defined by enterprise architecture.
    3. Identify the company mission and vision. Simply transfer the information from the mission and vision document into the appropriate spaces in the business value statement.
    4. Determine the organization’s business value drivers. Use the mission and vision, as well as the information from the collected documents, to formulate your own idea of business values.
    5. Use value driver template on the next slide to define the value driver, including:
    • Value Driver Name
    • Description
    • Related Business Capabilities – If available, review business architecture materials, such as business capability maps.
    • Established KPI and Targets – If available, include any organization-wide established KPIs related to your value driver. These KPIs will likely be used or influence the metrics eventually assigned to your applications.

    INPUT

    • Mission, vision, value statements

    OUTPUT

    • List and description of value drivers

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Business value authorities
    • Owner of value measurement framework

    Example Value Driver

    Value Driver Name

    Reach Customers

    Value Driver Description

    Our organization’s ability to provide quality products and experience to our core customers

    Value Driver Weight

    10/10

    Related Business Capabilities

    • Customer Services
    • Marketing
      • Customer Segmentation
      • Customer Journey Mapping
    • Product Delivery
      • User Experience Design
      • User Acceptance Testing

    Key Business Outcomes, KPIs, and Targets

    • Improved Customer Satisfaction
      • Net Promotor Score: 80%
    • Improved Loyalty
      • Repeat Sales: 30%
      • Customer Retention: 25%
      • Customer Lifetime Value: $2,500
    • Improved Interaction
      • Repeat Visits: 50%
      • Account Conversation Rates: 40%

    Weigh your value drivers

    1.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to prioritize your value drivers based on their relative importance to the business.

    1. Again, place the business value authorities at the center of this exercise.
    2. In order to determine priority, divide 100% among your value drivers, allocating a percentage to each based on its relative importance to the organization.
    3. Normalize those percentages on to a scale of 1 to 10, which will act as the weights for your value drivers.

    INPUT

    • Mission, vision, value statements

    OUTPUT

    • Weights for value drivers

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Business value authorities
    • Owner of value measurement framework

    Weigh your value drivers

    1.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Value Driver

    Percentage Allocation

    1 to 10 Weight

    Revenue and other funding

    24%

    9

    Cost reduction

    8%

    3

    Compliance

    5%

    2

    Customer value

    30%

    10

    Operations

    13%

    7

    Innovation

    5%

    2

    Sustainability and social responsibility

    2%

    1

    Internal learning and development

    3%

    1

    Future growth

    10%

    5

    Total

    100%

    Carry results over to the Value Calculator

    1.3

    Document results of this activity in the “Value Drivers” tab of the Value Calculator.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Value Calculator is shown.

    List your value drivers.

    Define or describe your value drivers.

    Use this tool to create a repository for value sources to reuse and maintain consistency across your measurements.

    Enter the weight of each value driver in terms of importance to the organization.

    Phase 2

    Measure Value

    Step 2.1: Identify Product or Service SMEs

    Phase 1

    1.1: Identify Value Authorities

    1.2: Define Value Drivers

    Phase 2

    2.1: Identify Product or Service SMEs

    2.2: Measure Value

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your product or service SMEs.
    • List your product or services items and components.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Owners of your value measurement framework
    • Product or service SMEs

    Outcomes of this step

    • Your list of targeted individuals to include in Step 2.2

    Identify the products and services you are evaluating and break down their various components for the VMF

    In order to get a full evaluation of a product or service you need to understand its multiple facets, functions, features capabilities, requirements, or any language you use to describe its various components.

    An image of the value measure framework is shown.

    Decompose a product or service:

    • Get the right subject matter experts in place who know the business and technical aspects of the product or service.
    • Decompose the product or service to capture all necessary components.

    Before beginning, consider how your use case will impact your value measurement approach

    This table looks at how the different use cases of the VMF call for variations of this analysis, is directed at different roles, and relies on participation from different subject matter experts to provide business context.

    Use Case (uses of the VMF applied in this blueprint)

    Value (current vs. future value)

    Item (the singular entity you are producing a value score for)

    Components (the various facets of that entity that need to be considered)

    Scope (# of systems undergoing analysis)

    Evaluator (typical role responsible for applying the VMF)

    Cadence (when and why do you apply the VMF)

    Information Sources (what documents, tools, etc., do you need to leverage)

    SMEs (who needs to participate to define and measure value)

    1. Prioritize Your Product Backlog

    You are estimating future value of proposed changes to an application.

    Product backlog items (epic, feature, etc.) in your product backlog

    • Features
    • User stories
    • Enablers

    A product

    Product owner

    Continuously apply the VMF to prioritize new and changing product backlog items.

    • Epic hypothesis, documentation
    • Lean business case

    Product manager

    ????

    2. Prioritize Your Project Backlog

    Proposed projects in your project backlog

    • Benefits
    • Outcomes
    • Requirements

    Multiple existing and/or new applications

    Project portfolio manager

    Apply the VMF during your project intake process as new projects are proposed.

    • Completed project request forms
    • Completed business case forms
    • Project charters
    • Business requirements documents

    Project manager

    Product owners

    Business analysts

    3. Application Rationalization

    You are measuring current value of existing applications and their features.

    An application in your portfolio

    The uses of the application (features, function, capabilities)

    A subset of applications or the full portfolio

    Application portfolio manager

    During an application rationalization initiative:

    • Iteratively collect information and perform value measurements.
    • Structure your iterations based on functional areas to target the specific SMEs who can speak to a particular subset of applications.
    • Business capability maps

    Business process owners

    Business unit representatives

    Business architects

    Application architects

    Application SMEs

    4. Application Categorization

    The full portfolio

    Application maintenance or operations manager

    • SLAs
    • Business capability maps

    Identify your product or service SMEs

    2.1 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to identify specific business stakeholders who can speak to the business outcomes of your applications at a functional level.

    1. Review your related materials that reference the stakeholders for the scoped products and services (i.e. capability maps, org charts, stakeholder maps).
    2. Identify your specific business stakeholders and application SMEs. These individuals represent the business at a functional level and are in tune with the business outcomes of their operations and the applications that support their operations.
      1. Use Case 1 – Product Owner, Product Manager
      2. Use Case 2 – Project Portfolio Manager, Project Manager, Product Owners, Business Process Owners, Appropriate Business Unit Representatives
      3. Use Case 3 – Application Portfolio Manager, Product Owners, Business Analysts, Application SMEs, Business Process Owners, Appropriate Business Unit Representatives
      4. Use Case 4 – Application Maintenance Manager, Operations Managers, Application Portfolio Manager, Product Owners, Application SMEs, Business Process Owners, Appropriate Business Unit Representatives

    INPUT

    • Specific product or service knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Targeted individuals to measure specific products or services

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Owner of value measurement framework

    Use Case 1: Collect and review all of the product backlog items

    Prioritizing your product backlog (epics, features, etc.) requires a consistent method of measuring the value of your product backlog items (PBIs) to continuously compare their value relative to one another. This should be treated as an ongoing initiative as new items are added and existing items change, but an initial introduction of the VMF will require you to collect and analyze all of the items in your backlog.

    Regardless of producing a value score for an epic, feature, or user story, your focus should be on identifying their various value sources. Review your product’s artifact documentation, toolsets, or other information sources to extract the business outcomes, impact, benefits, KPIs, or any other description of a value source.

    High

    Epics

    Carefully valuated with input from multiple stakeholders, using metrics and consistent scoring

    Level of valuation effort per PBI

    User Stories

    Collaboratively valuated by the product owner and teams based on alignment and traceability to corresponding epic or feature

    Low

    Raw Ideas

    Intuitively valuated by the product owner based on alignment to product vision and organization value drivers

    What’s in your backlog?

    You may need to create standards for defining and measuring your different PBIs. Traceability can be critical here, as defined business outcomes for features or user stories may be documented at an epic level.

    Additional Research

    Build a Better Backlog helps you define and organize your product backlog items.

    Use Case 2: Review the scope and requirements of the project to determine all of the business outcomes

    Depending on where your project is in your intake process, there should be some degree of stated business outcomes or benefits. This may be a less refined description in the form of a project request or business case document, or it could be more defined in a project charter, business requirements document/toolset, or work breakdown structure (WBS). Regardless of the information source, to make proper use of the VMF you need a clear understanding of the various business outcomes to establish the new or improved value sources for the proposed project.

    Project

    User Requirements

    Business Requirements

    System Requirements

    1

    1

    1

    2

    2

    2

    3

    3

    4

    Set Metrics Early

    Good project intake documentation begins the discussion of KPIs early on. This alerts teams to the intended value and gives your PMO the ability to integrate it into the workload of other proposed or approved projects.

    Additional Research

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization provides templates to define proposed project benefits and outcomes.

    Use Cases 3 & 4: Ensure you’ve listed all of each application’s uses (functions, features, capabilities, etc.) and user groups

    An application can enable multiple capabilities, perform a variety of functions, and have a range of different user groups. Therefore, a single application can produce multiple value sources, which range in type, impact, and significance to the business’ overarching priorities. In order to effectively measure the overall value of an application you need to determine all of the ways in which that application is used and apply a business-downward view of your applications.

    Business Capability

    • Sub-capability
    • Process
    • Task

    Application

    • Module
    • Feature
    • Function

    Aim for Business Use

    Simply listing the business capabilities of an app can be too high level. Regardless of your organization’s terminology, you need to establish all of the different uses and users of an application to properly measure all of the facets of its value.

    Additional Research

    Discover Your Applications helps you identify and define the business use and features of your applications.

    List your product or services items and components

    2.2 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to produce a list of the different items that you are scoring and ensure you have considered all relevant components.

    1. List each item you intend to produce a value score for:
      1. Use Case 1 – This may be the epics in your product backlog.
      2. Use Case 2 – This may be the projects in your project backlog.
      3. Use Cases 3 & 4 – This may be the applications in your portfolio. For this approach Info-Tech strongly recommends iteratively assessing the portfolio to produce a list of a subset of applications.
    2. For each item list its various components:
      1. Use Case 1 – This may be the features or user stories of an epic.
      2. Use Case 2 – This may be the business requirements of a project.
      3. Use Cases 3 & 4 – This may be the modules, features, functions, capabilities, or subsystems of an application.

    Item

    Components

    Add Customer Portal (Epic)

    User story #1: As a sales team member I need to process customer info.

    User story #2: As a customer I want access to…

    Transition to the Cloud (Project)

    Requirement #1: Build Checkout Cart

    NFR – Build integration with data store

    CRM (Application)

    Order Processing (module), Returns & Claims (module), Analytics & Reporting (Feature)

    INPUT

    • Product or service knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Detailed list of items and components

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Owner of value measurement framework
    • Product or service SMEs

    Use Cases 3 & 4: Create a functional view of your applications (optional)

    2.3 Estimated Time: 1 hour

    The objective of this exercise is to establish the different use cases of an application.

    1. Recall the functional requirements and business capabilities for your applications.
    2. List the various actors who will be interacting with your applications and list the consumers who will be receiving the information from the applications.
    3. Based on your functional requirements, list the use cases that the actors will perform to deliver the necessary information to consumers. Each use case serves as a core function of the application. See the diagram below for an example.
    4. Sometimes several use cases are completed before information is sent to consumers. Use arrows to demonstrate the flow of information from one use case to another.

    Example: Ordering Products Online

    Actors

    Order Customer

    Order Online

    Search Products

    Consumers

    Submit Delivery Information

    Order Customer

    Pay Order

    Bank

    INPUT

    • Product or service knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Product or service function

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Application architect
    • Enterprise architect
    • Business and IT stakeholders
    • Business analyst
    • Development teams

    Use Cases 3 & 4: Create a functional view of your applications (optional) (cont’d.)

    2.3 Estimated Time: 1 hour

    5. Align your application’s use cases to the appropriate business capabilities and stakeholder objectives.

    Example:

    Stakeholder Objective: Automate Client Creation Processes

    Business Capability: Account Management

    Function: Create Client Profile

    Function: Search Client Profiles

    Business Capability: Sales Transaction Management

    Function: Order Online

    Function: Search Products Function: Search Products

    Function: Submit Delivery Information

    Function: Pay Order

    Step 2.2: Measure Value

    Phase 1

    1.1: Identify Value Authorities

    1.2: Define Value Drivers

    Phase 2

    2.1: Identify Product or Service SMEs

    2.2: Measure Value

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your value sources.
    • Align to a value driver.
    • Assign metrics and gauge value fulfillment.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Owners of your value measurement framework
    • Product or service SMEs

    Outcomes of this step

    • An initial list of reusable value sources and metrics
    • Value scores for your products or services

    Use your VMF and a repeatable process to produce value scores for all of your items

    With your products or services broken down, you can then determine a list of value sources, as well as their alignment to a value driver and a gauge of their value fulfillment, which in turn indicate the importance and impact of a value source respectively.

    A image of the value measure framework is shown.

    Lastly, we produce a value score for all items:

    • Determine business outcomes and value sources.
    • Align to the appropriate value driver.
    • Use metrics as the gauge of value fulfillment.
    • Collect your score.
    • Repeat.

    The business outcome is the impact the product or service has on the intended business activity

    Business outcomes are the business-oriented results produced by organization’s capabilities and the applications that support those capabilities. The value source is, in essence, “How does the application impact the outcome?” and this can be either qualitative or quantitative.

    Quantitative

    Qualitative

    Key Words

    Examples

    Key Words

    Examples

    Faster, cheaper

    Deliver faster

    Better

    Better user experience

    More, less

    More registrations per week

    Private

    Enhanced privacy

    Increase, decrease

    Decrease clerical errors

    Easier

    Easier to input data

    Can, cannot

    Can access their own records

    Improved

    Improved screen flow

    Do not have to

    Do not have to print form

    Enjoyable

    Enjoyable user experience

    Compliant

    Complies with regulation 12

    Transparent

    Transparent progress

    Consistent

    Standardized information gathered

    Richer

    Richer data availability

    Adapted from Agile Coach Journal.

    Measure value – Identify your value sources

    2.4 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to establish the different value sources of a product or service.

    1. List the items you are producing an overall balance value score for. These can be products, services, projects, applications, product backlog items, epics, etc.
    2. For each item, list its various business outcomes in the form of a description that includes:
      1. The item being measured
      2. Business capability or activity
      3. How the item impacts said capability or activity

    Consider applying the user story format for future value sources or a variation for current value sources.

    As a (user), I want to (activity) so that I get (impact)

    INPUT

    • Product or service knowledge
    • Business process knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • List of value sources

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Owner of value measurement framework
    • Product or service SMEs

    Measure value – Align to a value driver

    2.5 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to determine the value driver for each value source.

    1. Align each value source to a value driver. Choose between options A and B.
      1. Using a whiteboard, draw out a 2 x 2 business value matrix or an adapted version based on your own organizational value drivers. Place each value source in the appropriate quadrant.
        1. Increase Revenue
        2. Reduce Costs
        3. Enhance Services
        4. Reach Customers
      2. Using a whiteboard or large sticky pads, create a section for each value driver. Place each value source with the appropriate value driver.

    INPUT

    • Product or service knowledge
    • Business process knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Value driver weight

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Owner of value measurement framework
    • Product or service SMEs

    Brainstorm the different sources of business value (cont’d.)

    2.5

    Example:

    An example of activity 2.5 is shown.

    Carry results over to the Value Calculator

    2.5

    Document results of this activity in the Value Calculator in the Item {#} tab.

    A screenshot of the Value Calculator is shown.

    List your Value Sources

    Your Value Driver weights will auto-populate

    Aim, but do not reach, for SMART metrics

    Creating meaningful metrics

    S pecific

    M easureable

    A chievable

    R ealisitic

    T ime-based

    Follow the SMART framework when adding metrics to the VMF.

    The intention of SMART goals and metrics is to make sure you have chosen a gauge that will:

    • Reflect the actual business outcome or value source you are measuring.
    • Ensure all relevant stakeholders understand the goals or value you are driving towards.
    • Ensure you actually have the means to capture the performance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics are NOT a magical solution. They should be treated as a tool in your toolbox and are sometimes no more than a rough gauge of performance. Carefully assign metrics to your products and services and do not disregard the informed subjective perspective when SMART metrics are unavailable.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    One last critical consideration here is the degree of effort required to collect the metric compared to the value of the analysis you are performing. Assessing whether or not to invest in a project should apply the rigor of carefully selecting and measuring value. However, performing a rationalization of the full app portfolio will likely lead to analysis paralysis. Taking an informed subjective perspective may be the better route.

    Measure value – Assign metrics and gauge value fulfillment

    2.6 30-60 minutes

    The objective of this exercise is to determine an appropriate metric for each value source.

    1. For each value source assign a metric that will be the unit of measurement to gauge the value fulfilment of the application.
    2. Review the product or services performance with the metric
      1. Use case 1&2 (Proposed Applications and/or Features) - You will need to estimate the degree of impact the product or services will have on your selected metric.
      2. Use case 3&4 (Existing Applications and/or Features) – You can review historically how the product or service has performed with your selected metric
    3. Determine a value fulfillment on a scale of 1 – 10.
    4. 10 = The product or service far exceeds expectations and targets on the metric.

      5 = the product or service meets expectations on this metric.

      1 = the product or service underperforms on this metric.

    INPUT

    • Product or service knowledge
    • Business process knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Value driver weight

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Owner of value measurement framework
    • Product or service SMEs

    Carry results over to the Value Calculator

    2.6

    Document results of this activity in the Value Calculator in the Item {#} tab.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Value Calculator is shown.

    Assign Metrics.

    Consider using current or estimated performance and targets.

    Assess the impact on the value source with the value fulfillment.

    Collect your Overall Balanced Value Score

    Appendix

    Bibliography

    Brown, Alex. “Calculating Business Value.” Agile 2014 Orlando – July 13, 2014. Scrum Inc. 2014. Web. 20 Nov. 2017.

    Brown, Roger. “Defining Business Value.” Scrum Gathering San Diego 2017. Agile Coach Journal. Web.

    Curtis, Bill. “The Business Value of Application Internal Quality.” CAST. 6 April 2009. Web. 20 Nov. 2017.

    Fleet, Neville, Joan Lasselle, and Paul Zimmerman. “Using a Balance Scorecard to Measure the Productivity and Value of Technical Documentation Organizations.” CIDM. April 2008. Web. 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harris, Michael. “Measuring the Business Value of IT.” David Consulting Group. 20 Nov. 2017.

    Intrafocus. “What is a Balanced Scorecard?” Intrafocus. Web. 20 Nov. 2017

    Kerzner, Harold. Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling. 12th ed., Wiley, 2017.

    Lankhorst, Marc., et al. “Architecture-Based IT Valuation.” Via Nova Architectura. 31 March 2010. Web. 20 Nov. 2017.

    Rachlin, Sue, and John Marshall. “Value Measuring Methodology.” Federal CIO Council, Best Practices Committee. October 2002. Web. April 2019.

    Thiagarajan, Srinivasan. “Bridging the Gap: Enabling IT to Deliver Better Business Outcomes.” Cognizant. July 2017. Web. April 2019.

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}520|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn’t sustainable.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.
    • Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative, however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging, the tendency is to start with tech or compliance, however, starting with the people is key. It must be culture.
    • Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Impact and Result

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear ‘accessibility’ and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.
    • Build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Use this blueprint to narrow down the requirements for your organization and team while also clearly communicating why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.

    A step-by-step approach to walk you through understanding the IT accessibility compliance requirements, building your roadmap, and communicating with your department. This storyboard will help you figure out what’s needed from IT to support the business and launch accessibility with your team.

    • Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Phases 1-2

    2. IT Manager Meeting Template – A clear, concise, and compelling communication to introduce accessibility for your organization to IT managers and to facilitate their participation in building the roadmap.

    Accessibility compliance can be overwhelming at first. Use this template to simplify the requirements for the IT managers and build out a roadmap.

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    3. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool – This tool helps to decrease the overwhelm of accessibility compliance. Narrow down the list of controls needed to the ones that apply to your organization and to IT.

    Using the EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. Use this tool to build a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization.

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    4. Departmental Meeting Template – Cascade your communication down to the IT department with this facilitation guide for introducing accessibility and the roadmap to the entire IT team.

    Use this pre-built slide deck to customize your accessibility communication to the IT department. It will help you build a shared vision for accessibility, a current state picture, and plans to build to the target future state.

    • Departmental Meeting Template
    • Accessibility Quick Cards

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    Make accessibility accessible.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project.

    Accessibility is an organizational directive; however, IT plays a fundamental role in its success. As business partners require support and expertise to assist with their accessibility requirements IT needs to be ready to respond. Even if your organization hasn't fully committed to an accessibility standard, you can proactively get ready by planting the seeds to change the culture. By building understanding and awareness of the significant impact technology has on accessibility, you can start to change behaviors.

    Implementing an accessibility program requires many considerations: legal requirements; international guidelines, such as Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG); training for staff; ongoing improvement; and collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities. It can be overwhelming to know where to start. The tendency is to start with compliance, which is a fantastic first step. For a sustained program use, change management practices are needed to change behaviors and build inclusion for people with disabilities.

    15% of the world's population identify as having some form of a disability (not including others that are impacted, e.g. caretakers, family). Why would anyone want to alienate over 1.1 billion people?

    This is a picture of Heather Leier-Murray

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst, People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Disability is part of being human

    Merriam-Webster defines disability as a "physical, mental, cognitive, or developmental condition that impairs, interferes with, or limits a person's ability to engage in certain tasks or actions or participate in typical daily activities and interactions."(1)

    The World Health Organization points out that a crucial part of the definition of disability is that it's not just a health problem, but the environment impacts the experience and extent of disability. Inaccessibility creates barriers for full participation in society.(2)

    The likelihood of you experiencing a disability at some point in your life is very high, whether a physical or mental disability, seen or unseen, temporary or permanent, severe or mild.(2)

    Many people acquire disabilities as they age yet may not identify as "a person with a disability."3 Where life expectancies are over 70 years of age, 11.5% of life is spent living with a disability. (4)

    "Extreme personalization is becoming the primary difference in business success, and everyone wants to be a stakeholder in a company that provides processes, products, and services to employees and customers with equitable, person-centered experiences and allows for full participation where no one is left out."
    – Paudie Healy, CEO, Universal Access

    (1.) Merriam-Webster
    (2.) World Health Organization, 2022
    (3.) Digital Leaders, as cited in WAI, 2018
    (4.) Disabled World, as cited in WAI, 2018

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You know the push for accessibility is coming in your organization. You might even have a program started or approval to build one. But you're not sure if you and your team are ready to support and enable the organization on its accessibility journey.

    Common Obstacles

    Understanding where to start, where accessibility lives, and if or when you're done can be overwhelmingly difficult. Accessibility is an organizational initiative that IT enables; being able to support the organization requires a level of understanding of common obstacles.

    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn't sustainable.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare your people for accessibility and inclusion, even if your organization doesn't have a formal standard yet. Take your accessibility from mandate to movement, i.e. from Phase 1 - focused on compliance to Phase 2 - driven by experience for sustained change.

    • Use this blueprint to build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change.
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging because the tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help IT leaders who are looking to:

    • Determine accessibility requirements of IT based on the business' needs and priorities, and the existing standards and regulations.
    • Prepare the IT leaders to implement and sustain accessibility and prepare for the behavior shift that is necessary.
    • Build the plan for IT as it pertains to accessibility, including a list of business needs and priorities, and prioritization of accessibility initiatives that IT is responsible for.
    • Ensure that accessibility is sustained in the IT department by following phase 2 of this blueprint on using change management and communication to impact behavior and change the culture.

    90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    Over 30% of those that claim to prioritize diversity are focused on compliance.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Accessibility is an organizational initiative

    Is IT ready and capable to enable it?

    • With increasing rates of lawsuits related to digital accessibility, more organizations are prioritizing initiatives to support increased accessibility. About 68% of Applause's survey respondents indicated that digital accessibility is a higher priority for their organization than it was last year.
    • This increase in priority will trickle into IT's tasks – get ahead and start working toward accessibility proactively so you're ready when business requests start coming in.

    A survey of nearly 1,800 respondents conducted by Applause found that:

    • 79% of respondents rated digital accessibility either a top priority or important for their organizations.
    • 42% of respondents indicated they have limited or no in-house expertise or resources to test accessibility.
      Source: Business Wire, May 2022

    How organizations prioritize digital accessibility

    • 43% rated accessibility as a top priority.
    • 36% rated accessibility as important.
    • Fewer than 5% rated accessibility as either low priority or not even on the radar.
    • More than 65% agreed or strongly agreed that accessibility is a higher priority than last year.

    Source: Angel Business Communications, 2022

    Why organizations address accessibility

    Top three reasons:

    1. 61% To comply with laws
    2. 62% To provide the best user experience
    3. 78% To include people with disabilities
      Source: Level Access, 2022

    Still, most businesses aren't meeting compliance standards. Even though legislation has been in place for over 30 years, a 2022 study by WebAIM of 1,000,000 homepages returned a 96.8% WCAG 2.0 failure rate.

    Source: Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 2022

    Info-Tech's approach to Initiate Digital Accessibility

    An image of the Business Case for Accessibility

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Phase 1 of this blueprint gets you started and helps you build a plan to get you to the initial compliance driven maturity level. It's focused more on standards and regulations than on the user and employee experience.
    2. Phase 2 takes you further in maturity and helps you become experience driven in your efforts. It focuses on building your accessibility maturity into the developing, defined, and managed levels, as well as balancing mandate and movement of the accessibility maturity continuum.

    Determining conformance seems overwhelming

    Unfortunately, it's the easier part.

    • Focus on local regulations and what corporate leaders are setting as accessibility standards for the organization. This will narrow down the scope of what compliance looks like for your team.
    • Look to best practices like WCAG guidelines to ensure digital assets are accessible and usable for all users. WCAG's international guideline outlines principles that can also aid in scoping.
    • In phase 1 of this blueprint, use the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto prioritize criteria and legislation for which IT is responsible.
    • Engage with business partners and other areas of the organization to figure out what is needed from IT. Accessibility is an organizational initiative; it shouldn't be on IT to figure it all out. Determine what your team is specifically responsible for before tackling it all.

    Motivating behavior change

    This is the hard part.

    Changing behaviors and mindsets is necessary to be experience driven and sustain accessibility.

    • Compliance is the minimum when it comes to accessibility, much like employment or labor regulations.
    • Making accessibility an organizational imperative is an iterative process. Managing the change is hard. People, culture, and behavior change matures accessibility from compliance driven to experience driven, increasing the benefits of accessibility.
    • Focus accessibility initiatives on improving the experience of everyone and improving engagement (customer and employee).
    • Being people focused and experience driven enables the organization to provide the best user experience and realize the benefits of accessibility.

    A picture of Jordyn Zimmerman

    "Compliance is the minimum. And when we look at web tech, people are still arguing about their positioning on the standards that need to be enforced in order to comply, forgetting that it isn't enough to comply."
    -- Jordyn Zimmerman, M.Ed., Director of Professional Development, The Nora Project, and Appointee, President's Committee for People with Intellectual Disabilities.

    This is an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework Table.

    To see more on the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework:

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    Think of accessibility like you think of IT security

    Use IT security concepts to build your accessibility program.

    • Risk management: identify and prioritize accessibility risks and implement controls to mitigate those risks.
    • Compliance: use an IT security-style compliance approach to ensure that the accessibility program is compliant with the many accessibility regulations and standards.
    • Defense in depth: implement multiple layers of accessibility controls to address different types of accessibility risks and issues.
    • Response and recovery: quickly and effectively respond to accessibility issues, minimizing the potential impact on the organization and its users.
    • End-user education: educate end users about accessibility best practices, such as how to use assistive technologies and how to report accessibility issues.
    • Monitor and audit: use monitoring and auditing tools to ensure that accessibility remains over time and to identify and address issues that arise.
    • Collaboration: ensure the accessibility program is effective and addresses the needs of all users by collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities.

    "As an organization matures, the impact of accessibility shifts. A good company will think of security at the very beginning. The same needs to be applied to accessibility thinking. At the peak of accessibility maturity an organization will have people with disabilities involved at the outset."
    -- Cam Beaudoin, Owner, Accelerated Accessibility

    This is a picture of Cam Beaudoin

    Info-Tech's methodology for Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    1. Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    2. Change enablement of accessibility

    Phase Steps

    1. Determine accessibility requirements of IT
    2. Build the IT accessibility plan
    1. Build awareness
    2. Support new behaviors
    3. Continuous reinforcement

    Phase Outcomes

    List of business needs and priorities related to accessibility

    IT accessibility requirements for conformance

    Assessment of state of accessibility conformance

    Prioritization of accessibility initiatives for IT

    Remediation plan for IT related to accessibility conformance

    Accessibility commitment statement

    Team understanding of what, why, and how

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Sustainment plan

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging. The tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Insight 1

    Compliance is the minimum; people and behavior changes are the hardest part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    Insight 2

    Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Insight 3

    People are learning a new way to behave and think; this can be an unsettling period. Patience, education, communication, support, and time are keys for success of the implementation of accessibility. There is a transition period needed; people will gradually change their practices and attitudes. Celebrate small successes as they arise.

    Insight 4

    Accessibility isn't a project as there is no end. Effective planning and continuous reinforcement of "the new way of doing things" is necessary to enable accessibility as the new status quo.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    IT Manager Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to work with IT managers to build out the accessibility remediation plan and commitment statement.

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to introduce the concept of accessibility and communicate IT goals and objectives.

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards
    Using the Info-Tech IT Management and Governance Framework to identify key activities to help improve and maintain the accessibility of your organization and your core IT processes.

    Key deliverable:

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool
    This tool will assist you in identifying remediation priorities applicable to your organization.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Know and understand your role and responsibility in accessibility implementation within the organization.
    • Provide effective support and excellent business service experience to internal stakeholders related to accessibility.
    • You will be set up to effectively support your team through the necessary behavior, process, and thinking changes.
    • Proactively prepare for accessibility requests that will be coming in.
    • Move beyond compliance to support your organization's sustainment of accessibility.
    • Don't lose out on a trillion-dollar market.
    • Don't miss opportunities to work with organizations because you're not accessible.
    • Enable and empower current employees with disabilities.
    • Minimize potential for negative brand reputation due to a lack of consideration for people with disabilities.
    • Decrease the risk of legal action being brought upon the organization.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Improve IT effectiveness and employee buy-in to change.

    Measuring the effectiveness of your program helps contribute to a culture of continuous improvement. Having consistent measures in place helps to inform decisions and enables your plan to be iterative to take advantage of emerging opportunities.

    Monitor employee engagement, overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT, and the overall end-customer satisfaction.

    Remember, accessibility is not a project – just because measures are positive does not mean your work is done.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish metrics for your organization.
    In phase 2, we will help you develop a sustainment for achieving those metrics.

    A screenshot of the slide titled Establish Baseline Metrics.

    Suggested Metrics
    • Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled
    • Employee engagement
    • Overall compliance status

    Info-Tech's IT Metrics Library

    Executive brief case study

    INDUSTRY: Technology


    SOURCE: Microsoft.com
    https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessib...

    Microsoft

    Microsoft's accessibility journey starts with the goal of building a culture of accessibility and disability inclusion. They recognize that the starting point for the magnitude of organizational change is People.

    "Accessibility in Action Badge"

    Every employee at Microsoft is trained on accessibility to build understanding of why and how to be inclusive using accessibility. The program entails 90 minutes of virtual content.

    Microsoft treats accessibility and inclusion like a business, managing and measuring it to ensure sustained growth and success. They have worked over the years to bust systemic bias company-wide and to build a program with accessibility criteria that works for their business.

    Results

    The program Microsoft has built allows them to shift the accessibility lens earlier in their processes and listen to its users' needs. This allows them to continuously mature their accessibility program, which means continuously improving its users' experience.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical guided implementation (GI) on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Discuss motivation for the initiative and foundational knowledge requirements.
    Call #2: Discuss stakeholder analysis and business needs of IT.

    Call #3: Identify current maturity and IT accountabilities.
    Call #4: Discuss introduction to senior IT leaders and drivers.
    Call #5: Discuss manager meeting outline and slides.

    Call #6: Review key messages and next steps to prepare for departmental meeting.
    Call #7: Discuss post-meetings next steps and timelines.

    Call #8: Review sustainment plan and plan next steps.

    A GI is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is eight to ten calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Understand Your Legislative Environment

    Understand Your Current State

    Define the
    IT Target State

    Build the IT Accessibility Plan

    Prepare for Change Enablement

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up

    Activities

    0.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with
    0.2 Seek legal counsel or and/or professional services' input on compliance
    0.3 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    0.4 Conduct stakeholder analysis

    1.1 Define the risks of inaction
    1.2 Review maturity assessment
    1.3 Conduct stakeholder focus group

    2.1 Define IT compliance accountabilities
    2.2 Define IT accessibility goals/objectives/ metrics
    2.3 Indicate the target-state maturity

    3.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation
    3.2 Decide on priorities
    3.3 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    4.1 Prepare the roadmap
    4.2 Prepare the communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Legislative requirements for your organization
    2. List of stakeholders
    3. Completed maturity assessment.
    1. Defined risks of inaction
    2. Stakeholder analysis completed with business needs identified
    1. IT accessibility goals/objectives
    2. Target maturity
    1. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool completed
    2. Accessibility commitment statement
    3. Current compliance and mitigation assessed
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan

    Phase 1

    Planning IT's Accessibility Requirements.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing stakeholders to determine accessibility needs of business for IT.
    • Determining accessibility compliance requirements of IT.
    • Build a manager communication deck.
    • Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation.
    • Prioritize and assign timelines.
    • Build a sunrise diagram to visualize your accessibility roadmap.
    • Write an IT accessibility commitment statement.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT leadership team
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Step 1.1

    Determine the accessibility requirements of IT.

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT
    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)
    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance requirements
    1.1.4 Define target state
    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives
    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics
    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Prepare to support the organization with accessibility

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder analysis with business needs listed
    • Defined target future state
    • List of goals and objectives
    • Key metrics
    • Communication deck for IT management rollout meeting

    While defining future state, consider your drivers

    The Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework identifies three key strategic drivers: compliance, experience, and incorporation.

    • Over 30% of organizations are focused on compliance, according to a 2022 survey by Harvard Business Review and Slack's Future Forum. The survey asked more than 10,000 workers in six countries about their organizations' approach to diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI).(2)
    • Even though 90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity, over 30% are focused on compliance.(1)

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2020
    2. Harvard Business Review, 2022

    31.6% of companies remain in the compliant stage where they are focused on DEI compliance and not on integrating DEI throughout the organization or on creating continual improvement, from Harvard Business Review 2022.

    Info-Tech accessibility maturity framework

    This is an image of Info-Tech's accessibility maturity framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT typically works through maturity frameworks from the bottom to the top, progressing at each level until they reach the end. When it comes to IT accessibility initiatives, being especially thorough, thoughtful, and collaborative is critical to success. This will mean spending more time in the Developing, Defined, and Managed levels of maturity rather than trying to reach Optimized as quickly as you can. This may feel contrary to what IT historically considers as a successful implementation.

    After initially ensuring your organization is compliant with regulations and standards, you will progress to building disciplined process and consistent standardized processes. Eventually you will build the ability for predictable process, and lastly, you'll optimize by continuously improving.

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, it could take months or even years to implement. The important thing to understand, however, is that accessibility work is never done.

    At all levels of the maturity framework, you must consider the interconnected aspects of people, process, and technology. However, as the organization progresses, the impact will shift from largely being focused on process and technology improvement to being focused on people.

    Align the benefits of program drivers to organizational goals or outcomes

    Although there will be various motivating factors, aligning the drivers of your accessibility program provides direction to the program. Connecting the advantages of program drivers to organizational goals builds the confidence of senior leaders and decision makers, increasing the continued commitment to invest in accessibility programming.

    This is an image of a table describing the maturity level; Description; Advantages, and Disadvantages for the three drivers: Compliance; Experience; and Incorporation.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    Driver Description Benefits
    Initial Compliance
    • Accessibility processes are mostly undocumented.
    • Accessibility happens mostly on a reactive or ad hoc basis.
    • No one is aware of who is responsible for accessibility or what role they play.
    • Heavily focused on complying with regulations and standards to decrease legal risk.
    • The organization is aware of the need for accessibility.
    • Legal risk is decreased.
    Developing Experience
    • The organization is starting to take steps to increase accessibility beyond compliance.
    • Lots of opportunity for improvement.
    • Defining and refining processes.
    • Working toward building a library of assistive tools.
    • Awareness of the need for accessibility is growing.
    • Process review for accessibility increases process efficiency through avoiding rework.
    Defined Experience
    • Accessibility processes are repeatable.
    • There is a tendency to resort to old habits under stress.
    • Tools are in place to facilitate accommodation.
    • Employees know accommodations are available to them.
    • Accessibility is becoming part of daily work.
    Managed Experience
    • Defined by effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics.
    • Mostly anticipating preferences.
    • Roles and responsibilities are defined.
    • Disability is included as part of DEI.
    • Employees understand their role in accessibility.
    • Engagement is positively impacted.
    • Attraction and retention are positively impacted.
    Optimized Incorporation
    • Not the goal for every organization.
    • Characterized by a dramatic shift in organizational culture and a feeling of belonging.
    • Ongoing continuous improvement.
    • Seamless interactions with the organization for everyone.
    • Using feedback to inform future initiatives.
    • More likely to be innovative and inclusive, reach more people positively, and meet emerging global legal requirements.
    • Better equipped for success.

    Cheat sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders, "Who else should I be talking to?" to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don't miss anyone.

    Identify stakeholders through the following questions:

    Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.

    • Who in areas of influence will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts of what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who is negatively impacted by the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers of impacted capabilities or functions?
    • Executives
    • Peers
    • Direct reports
    • Partners
    • Customers
    • Subcontractors
    • Suppliers
    • Contractors
    • Lobby groups
    • Regulatory agencies

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map help teams categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis for mediators; players; spectators; and noisemakers.
    • Players – Players have a high interest in the initiative and high influence to affect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – Generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Strategize to engage stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy spectators and noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the mediators and players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence, high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest Keep InformedTry to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest MonitorThey are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT (stakeholder analysis)

    1.5 hours

    1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or influence the accessibility needs of IT.
    2. List each of the stakeholders you identify. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that potentially have needs from IT related to accessibility before, during, or after the initiative.
    3. As you list each stakeholder, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to interact with them.
    4. For each stakeholder identified as potentially having a business need requirement for IT related to accessibility, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
    5. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the business need can inform the interaction and prioritization of IT requirements.
    6. Update slide 9 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    Input

    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • Key stakeholder map from activity 2.1.1 of The Accessibility Business Case for IT (optional)

    Output

    • The degree of influence or impact each stakeholder has on accessibility needs from IT

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool (optional)

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • Business partners

    Proactively consider how accessibility could be received

    Think about the positive and negative reactions you could face about implementing accessibility.

    It's likely individuals will have an emotional reaction to change and may have different emotions at different times during the change process.
    Plan for how to leverage support and deal with resistance to change by assessing people's emotional responses:

    • What are possible questions, objections, suggestions, and concerns that might arise.
    • How will you respond to the possible questions and concerns.
    • Include proactive messaging in your communications that address possible objections.
    • Express an understanding for others point of views by re-positioning objections and suggestions as questions.

    This is an image of the 10 change chakras

    Determine your level of maturity

    Use Info-Tech's Accessibility Maturity Assessment.

    On the accessibility questionnaire, tab 2, choose the amount you agree or disagree with each statement. Answer the questions based on your knowledge of your current state organizationally.

    Once you've answered all the questions, see the results on the tab 3, Accessibility Results. You can see your overall maturity level and the maturity level for each of six dimensions that are necessary to increase the success of an accessibility program.

    Click through to tab 4, Recommendations, to see specific recommendations based on your results and proven research to progress through the maturity levels. Keep in mind that not all organizations will or should aspire to the "Optimize" maturity level.

    A series of three screenshots from the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    1. Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment and save it with the date so that as you work on your accessibility program, you can reassess later and track your progress.
    2. Once you have saved the assessment, select the appropriate answer for each statement on tab 2, Accessibility Questions, based on your knowledge of the organization's approach.
    3. After reviewing all the accessibility statements, see your maturity level results on tab 3, Accessibility Results. Then see tab 4, Recommendations, for suggestions based on your answers.
    4. Document your accessibility maturity results on slides 12 and 13 of the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 17 of the Departmental Meeting Template.
    5. Use the maturity assessment results in activity 1.1.3.

    Input

    • Assess your current state of accessibility by choosing all the statements that apply to your organization

    Output

    • Identified accessibility maturity level

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • Project leader/sponsor
    • IT leadership team

    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance responsibilities

    1-3 hours

    Before you start this activity, you may need to discuss with your organization's legal counsel to determine the legislation that applies to your organization.

    1. Determine which controls apply to your organization based on your knowledge of the organization goals, stakeholders, and accessibility maturity target. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity model, use the Info-Tech resource from the Accessibility Business Case for IT(see previous two slides).
    2. Using the drop down in column J – Applies to My Org., select "Yes" or "No" for each control on each of the data entry tabs of the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool.
    3. For each control you have selected "Yes" for in column J, identify the control owner in column I.
    4. Update slide 10 in the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 13 in the IT Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Local, regional, and/or global legislation and guidelines applicable to your organization
    • Organizational accessibility standard
    • Business needs list
    • Completed Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    Output

    • List of legislation and standards requirements that are narrowed based on organization need

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader
    • Legal counsel

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    1.1.4 Conduct future-state analysis*

    Identify your target state of maturity.

      1. Provide the group with the accessibility maturity levels to review as well as the slides on the framework and drivers (slides 27-29).
      2. Ask the group to brainstorm pain points created by inaccessibility (e.g. challenges related to stakeholders, process issues).
      3. Next, discuss opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
      4. Then, have everyone look at the accessibility maturity levels and, based on the descriptions, determine as a group the current maturity level of accessibility in your organization .
      5. Next, review the benefits listed on the accessibility maturity levels slide to those that you named in step 3 and determine which maturity level best describes your target state. Discuss as a group and agree on one desired maturity level to reach.
      6. Document your current and target states on slide 14 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activities 2.1.2 and 2.1.3.

    Input

    • Accessibility maturity levels chart, framework, and drivers slides
    • Maturity level assessment results (optional)

    Output

    • Target maturity level documented

    Materials

    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders

    What does a good goal look like?

    SMART is a common framework for setting effective goals. Make sure your goals satisfy these criteria to ensure you can achieve real results.

    Use the SMART framework to build effective goals.

    S

    Specific: Is the goal clear, concrete, and well defined?

    M

    Measurable: How will you know when the goal is met?

    A

    Achievable: Is the goal possible to achieve in a reasonable time?

    R

    Relevant: Does this goal align with your responsibilities and with departmental and organizational goals?

    T

    Time-based: Have you specified a time frame in which you aim to achieve the goal?

    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives*

    Use the outcomes from activity 1.2.1.

    1. Using the information from activity 1.2.1, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives on slides 6 and 9 in your IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.1.

    Input

    • Outcomes of activity 1.2.1
    • Organizational and departmental goals

    Output

    • Accessibility goals and objectives identified

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Progressing through the accessibility maturity model.
    2. Addressing accessibility earlier in processes with input from people with disabilities.
    3. Motivating behavior changes and culture that supports accessibility and disability inclusion.
    4. Ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.
    5. Focusing on experience and building a disability inclusive culture.
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Overall end-customer satisfaction The percentage of end customers who are satisfied with the IT department. Number of end customers who are satisfied / Total number of end customers
    Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled The percentage of accommodation/assistive technology requests fulfilled by the IT department. Number of requests fulfilled / Total number of requests
    Employee engagement The percentage of employees who are engaged within an organization. Number of employees who are engaged / Total number of employees
    Overall compliance status The percentage of accessibility controls in place in the IT department. The number of compliance controls in place / Total number of applicable accessibility controls

    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics*

    Finalize key metrics the organization will use to measure accessibility success.

    1. Brainstorm how you will measure the success of each goal you identified in the previous activity, based on the benefits, challenges, and risks you previously identified.
    2. Write each of the metric ideas down and finalize three to five key metrics which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key challenges or risks you have identified and match your desired maturity level and driver.
    3. Document your key metrics on slide 15 of your IT Manager Meeting Templateand slide 23 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Accessibility challenges and benefits
    • Goals from activity 1.2.2

    Output

    • Three to five key metrics to track

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Project lead/sponsor

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.2.

    Use Info-Tech's template to communicate with IT managers

    Cascade messages down to IT managers next. This ensures they will have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others.

    Communicate with and build the accessibility plan with IT managers by customizing Info-Tech's IT Manager Meeting Template, which is designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project scope and objectives
    • Current state analysis
    • Compliance planning
    • Commitment statement drafting

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Now that you understand your current and desired accessibility maturity, the next step is to communicate with IT managers and begin planning your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Consider who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Managers are under huge demands and time is tight, they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
    3. Contain the presentation and planning activities to no more than an afternoon. You want to ensure adequate time for questions and answers, as well as the planning activities necessary to inform the roll out to the larger IT department later.
    4. Schedule a meeting with the IT managers.

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Input

    • Activity results

    Output

    • A completed presentation to communicate your accessibility initiatives to IT managers

    Materials

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Step 1.2

    Build the IT accessibility action plan.

    Activities

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Priority controls and mitigation list with identified control owners.
    • IT accessibility commitment statement.
    • Draft visualization of roadmap/sunrise diagram.

    Involve managers in assessing current compliance

    To know what work needs to happen you need to know what's already happening.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.1.3 where you identified which controls apply to your organization.

    Have managers work in groups to identify which controls (of the applicable ones) are currently being met and which ones have an existing mitigation plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Based on EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. This tool is designed to assist you in building a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization. EN 301 549 is currently the most robust accessibility regulation and encompasses other regulations within it. Although EN 301 549 is the European Standard, other countries are leaning on it as the standard they aspire to as well.

    This is an image of the Compliance Tracing Tool, with a green box drawn around the columns for Current Compliance, and Mitigation.

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1-3 hours

    1. Share the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool with the IT leaders and managers during the meeting with IT management that you scheduled in activity 1.1.7.
    2. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      1. Divide up the controls between the small groups to work on assessing current compliance and mitigation plans.
      2. For each control that is identified as applying to your organization, identify if there currently is compliance by selecting "yes" from the drop-down. For controls where the organization is not compliant, select "no" and identify if there is a mitigation plan in place by selecting "yes" or "no" in column L.
      3. Use the comments column to add any pertinent information regarding the control.

    Input

    • List of IT compliance requirements applicable to the org. from activities 1.1.2 and 1.1.3

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements that have current compliance or mitigation plans

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Involve managers in building accountability into the accessibility plan

    Building accountability into your compliance tracking will help ensure accessibility is prioritized.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.3.1.

    Have managers work in the same groups to prioritize controls by assigning a quarterly timeline for compliance.

    An image of the Compliance Tracking tool, with the timeline column highlighted in green.

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1-3 hours

    1. In the same groups used in activity 1.2.1, prioritize the list of controls that have no compliance and no mitigation plan.
    2. As you work through the spreadsheet again, assign a timeline using the drop-down menu in column M for each control that applies to the organization and has no current compliance. Consider the following in your prioritization:
      1. Does the control impact customers or is it public-facing?
      2. What are the business needs related to accessibility?
      3. Does the team currently have the skills and knowledge needed to address the control?
      4. What future state accessibility maturity are you targeting?
    3. Be prepared to review with the larger group.

    Input

    • List from activity 1.2.1
    • Business needs from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements with accountability timelines

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Review your timeline

    Don't overload your team. Make sure the timelines assigned in the breakout groups make sense and are realistic.

    A screenshot of the Accessibility Compliance Dashboard.

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Empty roadmap template

    An image of an empty Roadmap Template.

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1 hour

    1. Using the information entered in the compliance tracking spreadsheet during activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2, build a visual representation to capture your strategic initiatives over time, using themes and timelines. Consider group initiatives in four categories, technology, people, process, and other.
    2. Copy and paste the controls onto the roadmap from the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto the desired time quadrant on the roadmap.
    3. Set your desired timelines by changing the Q1-Q4 blocks (set the timelines that make sense for your situation).

    Input

    • Output of activity 1.2.2
    • Roadmap template
    • Other departmental project plans and timelines

    Output

    • Visual roadmap of accessibility compliance controls

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Communicate commitment

    Support people leaders in leading by example with an accessibility commitment statement.

    A commitment statement communicates why accessibility and disability inclusion are important and guides behaviors toward the ideal state. The statement will guide and align work, build accountability, and acknowledge the dedication of the leadership team to accessibility and disability inclusion. The statement will:

    • Publicly commit the team to fostering disability inclusivity.
    • Highlight related values and goals of the team or organization.
    • Set expectations.
    • Help build trust and increase feelings of belonging.
    • Connect the necessary changes (people, process, and technology related) to organization strategy.

    Take action! Writing the statement is only the first step. It takes more than words to build accessibility and make your work environment more disability inclusive.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    Sample accessibility commitment statements

    theScore

    "theScore strives to provide products and services in a way that respects the dignity and independence of persons with disabilities. We are committed to giving persons with disabilities the same opportunity to access our products and services and allowing them to benefit from the same services, in the same place and in a similar way as other clients. We are also committed to meeting the needs of persons with disabilities in a timely manner, and we will meet applicable legislative requirements for preventing and removing barriers."(1)

    Apple Canada

    "Apple Canada is committed to ensuring equal access and participation for people with disabilities. Apple Canada is committed to treating people with disabilities in a way that allows them to maintain their dignity and independence. Apple Canada believes in integration and is committed to meeting the needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner. Apple Canada will do so by removing and preventing barriers to accessibility and meeting accessibility requirements under the AODA and provincial and federal laws across Canada." (2)

    Google Canada

    "We are committed to meeting the accessibility needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner, and will do so by identifying, preventing and removing barriers to accessibility, and by meeting the accessibility requirements under the AODA." (3)

    Source 1: theScore
    Source 2: Apple Canada
    Source 3: Google Canada.

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    45 minutes

    1. As a group, brainstorm the key reasons and necessity for disability inclusion and accessibility for your organization, and the drivers and behaviors required. Record the ideas brainstormed by the group.
    2. Break into smaller groups or pairs (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      • Each group uses the brainstormed ideas to draft an accessibility commitment statement.
    3. Each smaller group shares their statement with the larger group and receives feedback. Smaller groups redraft their statements based on the feedback.
    4. Post each redrafted statement and provide each person two dot stickers to place on the two statements that resonate the most with them.
    5. Using the two statements with the highest number of dot votes, write the final accessibility commitment statement.
    6. Add the commitment statement to slide 18 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Business objectives
    • Risks related to accessibility
    • Target future accessibility maturity

    Output

    • IT accessibility commitment statement

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Dot stickers or other voting mechanism

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Phase 2

    Change Enablement for Accessibility.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Clarifying key messages
    • IT department accessibility presentation
    • Establishing a frequency and timeframe for communications
    • Obtaining feedback
    • Sustainment plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Other key business stakeholders
    • Marketing and communications team

    Be experience driven

    Building awareness and focusing on experience helps move along the accessibility maturity framework. Shifting from mandate to movement.

    In this phase, start to move beyond compliance. Build the IT team's understanding of accessibility, disability inclusion, and their role.
    Communicate the following messages to your team:

    • The motivation behind the change.
    • The reasons for the change.
    • And encourage feedback.

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    What is an organizational change?

    Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

    Incremental Change:

    • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).

    Transitional Change:

    • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).

    Transformational Change:

    • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.

    Examples:

    • New or changed policy
    • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
    • Implementing ransomware risk controls
    • Implementing a Learning and Development Plan

    Examples:

    • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
    • Developing a BI and analytics function
    • Integrating risk into organization risk
    • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)

    Examples:

    • Organizational redesign
    • Acquisition or merger of another organization
    • Implementing a digital strategy
    • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

    Consider the various impacts of the change

    Invest time at the start to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

    Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

    People

    Process Technology
    • Team structure
    • Reporting structure
    • Career paths
    • Job skills
    • Responsibilities
    • Company vision/mission
    • Number of FTE
    • Culture
    • Training required
    • Budget
    • Work location
    • Daily workflow
    • Working conditions
    • Work hours
    • Reward structure
    • Required number of completed tasks
    • Training required
    • Required tools
    • Required policies
    • Required systems
    • Training required

    Change depends on how well people understand it

    Help people internalize what they can do to make the organization more inclusive.

    Anticipate responses to change:

    1. Emotional reaction – different people require different styles of management to guide them through the change. Individual's may have different emotions at different times during the change process. The more easily you can identify persona characteristics, the better you can manage them.
    2. Level of impact – the higher level of change on an individual's day-to-day, the more difficult it will be to adjust to the change. The more impactful the change, the more time focused on people management.

    an image showing staff personas at different stages through the change process.

    Quickly assess the size of change by answering these questions:

    1. Will the change affect your staff's daily work?
    2. Is the change high urgency?
    3. Is there a change in reporting relationships?
    4. Is there a change in skills required for staff to be successful?
    5. Will the change modify entrenched cultural practices?
    6. Is there a change in the mission or vision of the role?

    If you answered "Yes" to two or more questions, the change is bigger than you think. Your staff will feel the impact.

    Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

    1. Audience
    • Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.
  • Message
    • Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.
  • Messenger
    • Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.
  • Channel
    • Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.
  • Step 2.1

    Build awareness and define key messages for IT.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key accessibility messages

    Determine the desired outcome of communicating within IT

    This phase is focused on communicating within IT. All communication has an overall goal. This outcome or purpose of communicating is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change will have on them. Consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

    Communicating within IT

    • Obtain buy-in
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Create a training plan
    • Inform about department changes
    • Inform about organization changes
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Distribute key messages to change agents

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

    What are key messages?

    1. Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
    2. Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization's strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.

    How to establish key messages

    Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization's key messages:

    • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
    • Look at the organization's values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

    The intent of key messages is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me?, and specific expectations.

    2.1.1 Clarify the key messages

    30 minutes

    1. Brainstorm the key stakeholders and target audiences you will likely need to communicate with to sustain the accessibility initiative (depending on the size of your group, you might break into pairs or smaller groups and each work on one target audience).
    2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging the target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed about accessibility.
    3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, plan of action, or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
    4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
    5. Document the key messages on Tab 3 of the Communications Planner Tool.

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcomes

    Output

    • Key messages to support a consistent approach

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications partner (optional)

    Step 2.2

    Support new behaviors.

    Activities

    2.2.1 Prepare for IT department meeting

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation

    2.2.3 Hold department meeting

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Entire IT department

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT departmental meeting slides
    • Accessibility quick cards
    • Task list of how each IT team will support the accessibility roadmap

    Key questions to answer with change communication

    To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they're asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what's happening next for the audience, as well as answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages.

    Examples of key questions by change stage include:

    The outline for each stage of the change process, showing what happens next.

    2.2.1 Prepare for the IT departmental meeting

    2 hours

    1. Download the IT Department Presentation Template and follow the instructions on each slide to update for your organization.
    2. Insert information on the current accessibility maturity level. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity level, use the Info-Tech resource from The Accessibility Business Case for IT.
    3. Review the presentation with the information added.
    4. Consider what could be done to make the presentation better:
      1. Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
      2. Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
      3. Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
      4. Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
    5. Schedule a departmental meeting or add the presentation to an existing departmental meeting.

    Download the Departmental Presentation Template

    Input

    • Organizational accessibility risks
    • Accessibility maturity current state
    • Outputs from manager presentation
    • Key messages

    Output

    • Prepared presentation to introduce accessibility to the entire IT department

    Materials

    • Departmental Presentation Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, frame – all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren't engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation and schedule department meeting

    45 minutes

    1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your presentation. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
    2. Set a timer on your phone or watch. Record yourself if possible.
    3. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
    4. Practice delivery of your presentation out loud. Don't forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
    5. Listen to the recording. Are the ideas communicated correctly? Are you convinced?
    6. Review and repeat.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1
    • Best practices for delivering

    Output

    • An ability to deliver the presentation in a clear and concise manner that creates understanding

    Materials

    • Recorder
    • Timer

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    2.2.3 Lead the IT department meeting

    1–2 hours

    1. Gather the IT department in a manner appropriate for your organization and facilitate the meeting prepared in activity 2.2.1.
    2. Within the meeting, capture all key action items and outcomes from the Quick Cards Development and Roadmap Planning.
    3. Following the meeting, review the quick cards that everyone built and share these with all IT participants.
    4. Update your sunrise diagram to include any initiatives that came up in the team meetings to support moving to experiential.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1

    Output

    • A shared understanding of accessibility at your organization and everyone's role
    • Area task list (including behavior change needs)
    • Accessibility quick cards

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    Download the Accessibility Quick Cards template

    Step 2.3

    Continuous reinforcement – keep the conversation going – sustain the change.

    Activities

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe for communications

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    2.3.3 Sustainment plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT leadership team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assigned roles for ongoing program monitoring
    • Communication plan
    • Accessibility maturity monitoring plan
    • Program evaluation

    Communication is ongoing before, during, and after implementing a change initiative

    Just because you've rolled out the plan doesn't mean you can stop talking about it.

    An image of the five steps, with steps four and five highlighted in a green box. The five headings are: Identify and Prioritize; Prepare for initiative; Create a communication plan; Implement change; Sustain the desired outcome

    Don't forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe

    30 minutes

    1. For each row in Tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
      • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
      • Timeframe: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
    2. When selecting the timeframe, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so that the message is not lost in the noise.
    3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organizations. And even then, it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • Frequency and timeframe of the communication

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

    Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

    Make sure you have established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

    • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (e.g. likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
    • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
    • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

    Feedback Mechanisms:

    • CIO business vision survey
    • Engagement surveys
    • Focus groups
    • Suggestion boxes
    • Team meetings
    • Random sampling
    • Informal feedback
    • Direct feedback
    • Audience body language
    • Repeating the message back

    Gather feedback on plan and iterate

    Who

    The project team gathers feedback from:

    • As many members of impacted groups as possible, as it helps build broad buy-in for the plan.
    • All levels (e.g. frontline employees, managers, directors).

    What

    Gather feedback on:

    • How to implement tactics successfully.
    • The timing of implementation (helps inform the next slide).
    • The resources required (helps inform the next slide).
    • Potential unforeseen impacts, questions, and concerns.

    How

    • Use focus groups to gather feedback.
    • Adjust sustainment plan based on feedback.

    Use Info-Tech's Standard Focus Group Guide

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    20 minutes

    1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
    2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 75) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
    3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
    4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. If the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
    5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it be tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.

    Input

    • Communication outcome
    • Target audience
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Identify owners and assign other roles

    • Eventually there needs to be a hand off to leaders to sustain accessibility. Senior leaders continue to play the role of guide and facilitator, helping the team identify owners and transfer ownership.
    • Guide the team to work with owners to assign roles to other stakeholders. Spread responsibility across multiple people to avoid overload.

    R

    Responsible
    Carries out the work to implement the component (e.g. payroll manager).

    A

    Accountable
    Owner of the component and held accountable for its implementation (e.g. VP of finance).

    C

    Consulted
    Asked for feedback and input to modify sustainment tactics (e.g. sustainment planning team).

    I

    Informed
    Told about progress of implementation (senior leadership team, impacted staff).

    Identify required resources and secure budget

    Sustainment is critical to success of accessibility

    • This step (i.e. sustainment) often gets overlooked because leaders are focused on the implementation. It takes resources and budget to sustain a plan and change as well.
    • Resorting to the old way is more likely to occur when you don't plan to support sustainment with ongoing resources and budget that's required.

    Resources

    Identify resources required for sustainment components using metrics and input from implementation owners, subject matter experts, and frontline managers.

    For example:

    • Inventory
    • Collateral for communications
    • Technology
    • Physical space
    • People resources (FTE)

    Budget

    Estimate the budget required for resources based on past projects that used similar resources, and then estimate the time it will take until the change evolves into "business as usual" (e.g. 6 months, 12 months).

    Monitor accessibility maturity

    If you haven't already performed the Accessibility Maturity Assessment, complete it in the wake of the accessibility initiative to assess improvements and progress toward target future accessibility maturity.
    As your accessibility program starts to scale out over a range of projects, revisit the assessment on a quarterly or bi-annual basis to help focus your improvement efforts across the six accessibility categories.

    • Vendor relations
    • Products and services
    • Policy and process
    • Support and accommodation
    • Communication
    • People and culture

    Info-Tech Insight

    To drive continual improvement of your organizational accessibility and disability inclusion, continue to share progress, wins, challenges, feedback, and other accessibility related concerns with stakeholders. At the end of the day, IT's efforts to become a change leader and support organizational accessibility will come down to stakeholder perceptions based upon employee morale and benefits realized.

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    An image of the maturity level bar graph.

    Evaluate and iterate the program on an ongoing basis

    1. Continually monitor the results of project metrics.
      • Track progress toward goals and metrics set at the beginning of the initiative to gauge the success of the program.
      • Analyze metrics at the work-unit level to highlight successes and challenges in accessibility and disability inclusion and the parameters around it for each impacted unit.
    2. Regularly gather feedback on program effectiveness using questions such as:
      • Has the desired culture been effectively communicated and leveraged, or has the culture changed?
      • Collect feedback through regular channels (e.g. manager check-ins) and set up a cadence to survey employees on the program (e.g. three months after rollout and then annually).
    3. Determine if changes to the program structure are needed.
      • Revisit the accessibility maturity framework and the compliance requirements of IT. Understand what is being experienced; it may be necessary to select a different target or adjust the parameters to mitigate the common challenges.
      • Evaluate the effectiveness of current internal processes to determine if the program would benefit from a dedicated resource.

    2.3.3 Sustain the change

    1. Identify who will own what pieces of the program going forward and assign roles to transition the initiative from implementation to the new normal.
    2. Continue to communicate with stakeholders about accessibility and disability inclusion initiatives, controls, and requirements.
    3. Identify required resources and secure any budget that will be needed to support the accessibility program. Think about employee training, consulting needs, assistive technology requirements, human resources (FTE), etc.
    4. Continue to monitor your accessibility maturity. Use the Accessibility Maturity Assessment tool to periodically evaluate progress on goals and targets. Also, use this tool to communicate progress with senior leaders and executives.
    5. Strive for continuous improvement by evaluating and iterating the program on an ongoing basis.

    Input

    • Activity outputs from this blueprint

    Output

    • Ongoing continuous improvement and progress related to accessibility
    • Demonstrable results

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative Lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Related Info-Tech Research

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear "accessibility" and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization's key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    Lead Staff through Change

    • Anticipate and respond to staff questions about the change in order to keep messages consistent, organized, and clear.
    • Manage staff based on their specific concerns and change personas to get the best out of your team during the transition through change.
    • Maintain a feedback loop between staff, executives, and other departments in order to maintain the change momentum and reduce angst throughout the process.

    IT Diversity and Inclusion Tactics

    • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
    • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

    Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

    • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
      • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
      • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
      • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.

    Works cited

    "2021 State of Digital Accessibility." Level Access, n.d. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022
    "Apple Canada Accessibility Policy & Plan." Apple Canada, 11 March 2019. .
    Casey, Caroline. "Do Your D&I Efforts Include People With Disabilities?" Harvard Business Review, 19 March 2020. Accessed 28 July 2022.
    Digitalisation World. "Organisations failing to meet digital accessibility standards." Angel Business Communications, 19 May 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    "disability." Merriam-Webster.com Dictionary, Merriam-Webster, . Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    "Disability." World Health Organization, 2022. Accessed 10 Aug 2022.
    "Google Canada Corporation Accessibility Policy and Multi Year Plan." Google Canada, June 2020. .
    Hypercontext. "The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022." Hypercontext. 2022..
    Lay-Flurrie, Jenny. "Accessibility Evolution Model: Creating Clarity in your Accessibility Journey." Microsoft, 2023. <https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessibility-evolution-model/>.
    Maguire, Jennifer. "Applause 2022 Global Accessibility Survey Reveals Organizations Prioritize Digital Accessibility but Fall Short of Conformance with WCAG 2.1 Standards." Business Wire, 19 May 2022. . Accessed 2 January 2023.
    "The Business Case for Digital Accessibility." W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 9 Nov. 2018. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.
    "THESCORE's Commitment to Accessibility." theScore, May 2021. .
    "The WebAIM Million." Web AIM, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.
    Washington, Ella F. "The Five Stages of DEI Maturity." Harvard Business Review, November - December 2022. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.
    Web AIM. "The WebAIM Million." Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.

    Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}524|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Users are demanding more valuable web functionalities and improved access to your website services. They are expecting development teams to keep up with their changing needs.
    • The criteria of user acceptance and satisfaction involves more than an aesthetically pleasing user interface (UI). It also includes how emotionally attached the user is to the website and how it accommodates user behaviors.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Complication

    • Organizations are focusing too much on the UI when they optimize the user experience of their websites. The UI is only one of many components involved in successful websites with good user experience.
    • User experience (UX) is often an afterthought in development, risking late and costly fixes to improve end-user reception after deployment.

    Insights

    • Organizations often misinterpret UX as UI. In fact, UX incorporates both the functional and emotional needs of the user, going beyond the website’s UI.
    • Human behaviors and tendencies are commonly left out of the define and design phases of website development, putting user satisfaction and adoption at risk.

    Impact and Result

    • Gain a deep understanding of user needs and behaviors. Become familiar with the human behaviors, emotions, and pain points of your users in order to shortlist the design elements and website functions that will receive the highest user satisfaction.
    • Perform a comprehensive website review. Leverage satisfaction surveys, user feedback, and user monitoring tools (e.g. heat maps) to reveal high-level UX issues. Use these insights to drill down into the execution and composition of your website to identify the root causes of issues.
    • Incorporate modern UX trends in your design. New web technologies are continuously emerging in the industry to enhance user experience. Stay updated on today’s UX trends and validate their fit for the specific needs of your target audience.

    Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your website, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and discover the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define UX requirements

    Reveal the opportunities to heighten the user experience of your website through a deep understanding of the behaviors, emotions, and needs of your end users in order to design a receptive and valuable website.

    • Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value – Phase 1: Define UX Requirements
    • Website Design Document Template

    2. Design UX-driven website

    Design a satisfying and receptive website by leveraging industry best practices and modern UX trends and ensuring the website is supported with reliable and scalable data and infrastructure.

    • Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value – Phase 2: Design UX-Driven Website
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your UX Requirements

    The Purpose

    List the business objectives of your website.

    Describe your user personas, use cases, and user workflow.

    Identify current UX issues through simulations, website design, and system reviews.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strong understanding of the business goals of your website.

    Knowledge of the behaviors and needs of your website’s users.

    Realization of the root causes behind the UX issues of your website.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the business objectives for the website you want to optimize

    1.2 Define your end-user personas and map them to use cases

    1.3 Build your website user workflow

    1.4 Conduct a SWOT analysis of your website to drive out UX issues

    1.5 Gauge the UX competencies of your web development team

    1.6 Simulate your user workflow to identify the steps driving down UX

    1.7 Assess the composition and construction of your website

    1.8 Understand the execution of your website with a system architecture

    1.9 Pinpoint the technical reason behind your UX issues

    1.10 Clarify and prioritize your UX issues

    Outputs

    Business objectives

    End-user personas and use cases

    User workflows

    Website SWOT analysis

    UX competency assessment

    User workflow simulation

    Website design assessment

    Current state of web system architecture

    Gap analysis of web system architecture

    Prioritized UX issues

    2 Design Your UX-Driven Website

    The Purpose

    Design wireframes and storyboards to be aligned to high priority use cases.

    Design a web system architecture that can sufficiently support the website.

    Identify UX metrics to gauge the success of the website.

    Establish a website design process flow.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implementation of key design elements and website functions that users will find stimulating and valuable.

    Optimized web system architecture to better support the website.

    Website design process aligned to your current context.

    Rollout plan for your UX optimization initiatives.

    Activities

    2.1 Define the roles of your UX development team

    2.2 Build your wireframes and user storyboards

    2.3 Design the target state of your web environment

    2.4 List your UX metrics

    2.5 Draw your website design process flow

    2.6 Define your UX optimization roadmap

    2.7 Identify and engage your stakeholders

    Outputs

    Roles of UX development team

    Wireframes and user storyboards

    Target state of web system architecture

    List of UX metrics

    List of your suppliers, inputs, processes, outputs, and customers

    Website design process flow

    UX optimization rollout roadmap

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}468|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $35,642 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy

    Despite the universally agreed-upon benefit of formulating a coherent strategy, several obstacles make execution difficult:

    • Inconsistent understanding of what the cloud means
    • Inability to come to a consensus on key decisions
    • Ungoverned decision-making
    • Unclear understanding of cloud roles and responsibilities

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it’s just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations, using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas:

    • Vision and alignment
    • People
    • Governance
    • Technology

    Impact and Result

    • A shared understanding of what is necessary to succeed in the cloud
    • An end to ad hoc deployments that solve small problems and create larger ones
    • A unified approach and set of principles that apply to governance, architecture, integration, skills, and roles (and much, much more).

    Document Your Cloud Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Document Your Cloud Strategy – a phased guide to identifying, validating, and recording the steps you’ll take, the processes you’ll leverage, and the governance you’ll deploy to succeed in the cloud.

    This storyboard comprises four phases, covering mission and vision, people, governance, and technology, and how each of these areas requires forethought when migrating to the cloud.

    • Document Your Cloud Strategy – Phases 1-4

    2. Cloud Strategy Document Template – a template that allows you to record the results of the cloud strategy exercise in a clear, readable way.

    Each section of Document Your Cloud Strategy corresponds to a section in the document template. Once you’ve completed each exercise, you can record your results in the document template, leaving you with an artifact you can share with stakeholders.

    • Cloud Strategy Document Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Document Your Vision and Alignment

    The Purpose

    Understand and document your cloud vision and its alignment with your other strategic priorities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A complete understanding of your strategy, vision, alignment, and a list of success metrics that will help you find your way.

    Activities

    1.1 Record your cloud mission and vision.

    1.2 Document your cloud strategy’s alignment with other strategic plans.

    1.3 Record your cloud guiding principles.

    Outputs

    Documented strategy, vision, and alignment.

    Defined success metrics.

    2 Record Your People Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define how people, skills, and roles will contribute to the broader cloud strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sections of the strategy that highlight skills, roles, culture, adoption, and the creation of a governance body.

    Activities

    2.1 Outline your skills and roles strategy.

    2.2 Document your approach to culture and adoption

    2.3 Create a cloud governing body.

    Outputs

    Documented people strategy.

    3 Document Governance Principles

    The Purpose

    This section facilitates governance in the cloud, developing principles that apply to architecture, integration, finance management, and more.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sections of the strategy that define governance principles.

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct discussion on architecture.

    3.2 Conduct discussion on integration and interoperability.

    3.3 Conduct discussion on operations management.

    3.4 Conduct discussion on cloud portfolio management.

    3.5 Conduct discussion on cloud vendor management.

    3.6 Conduct discussion on finance management.

    3.7 Conduct discussion on security.

    3.8 Conduct discussion on data controls.

    Outputs

    Documented cloud governance strategy.

    4 Formalize Your Technology Strategy

    The Purpose

    Creation of a formal cloud strategy relating to technology around provisioning, monitoring, and migration.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed strategy sections of the document that cover technology areas.

    Activities

    4.1 Formalize organizational approach to monitoring.

    4.2 Document provisioning process.

    4.3 Outline migration processes and procedures.

    Outputs

    Documented cloud technology strategy.

    Further reading

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Get ready for the cloudy future with a consistent, proven strategy.

    Analyst perspective

    Any approach is better than no approach

    The image contains a picture of Jeremy Roberts

    Moving to the cloud is a big, scary transition, like moving from gas-powered to electric cars, or from cable to streaming, or even from the office to working from home. There are some undeniable benefits, but we must reorient our lives a bit to accommodate those changes, and the results aren’t always one-for-one. A strategy helps you make decisions about your future direction and how you should respond to changes and challenges. In Document Your Cloud Strategy we hope to help you accomplish just that: clarifying your overall mission and vision (as it relates to the cloud) and helping you develop an approach to changes in technology, people management, and, of course, governance. The cloud is not a panacea. Taken on its own, it will not solve your problems. But it can be an important tool in your IT toolkit, and you should aim to make the best use of it – whatever “best” happens to mean for you.

    Jeremy Roberts

    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The cloud is multifaceted. It can be complicated. It can be expensive. Everyone has an opinion on the best way to proceed – and in many cases has already begun the process without bothering to get clearance from IT. The core challenge is creating a coherent strategy to facilitate your overall goals while making the best use of cloud technology, your financial resources, and your people.

    Common Obstacles

    Despite the universally agreed-upon benefit of formulating a coherent strategy, several obstacles make execution difficult:

    • Inconsistent understanding of what the cloud means
    • Inability to come to a consensus on key decisions
    • Ungoverned decision making
    • Unclear understanding of cloud roles and responsibilities

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it’s just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations, using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas:

    1. Vision and alignment
    2. People
    3. Governance
    4. Technology

    The answers might be different, but the questions are the same

    Every organization will approach the cloud differently, but they all need to ask the same questions: When will we use the cloud? What forms will our cloud usage take? How will we manage governance? What will we do about people? How will we incorporate new technology into our environment? The answers to these questions are as numerous as there are people to answer them, but the questions must be asked.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are facing these challenges or looking to:

    • Ensure that the cloud strategy is complete and accurately reflects organizational goals and priorities.
    • Develop a consistent and coherent approach to adopting cloud services.
    • Design an approach to mitigate risks and challenges associated with adopting cloud services.
    • Create a shared understanding of the expected benefits of cloud services and the steps required to realize those benefits.

    Grappling with a cloud strategy is a top initiative: 43% of respondents report progressing on a cloud-first strategy as a top cloud initiative.

    Source: Flexera, 2021.

    Definition: Cloud strategy

    A document providing a systematic overview of cloud services, their appropriate use, and the steps that an organization will take to maximize value and minimize risk.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • The cloud means different things to different people, and creating a strategy that is comprehensive enough to cover a multitude of use cases while also being written to be consumable by all stakeholders is difficult.
    • The incentives to adopt the cloud differ based on the expected benefit for the individual customer. User-led decision making and historically ungoverned deployments can make it difficult to reset expectation and align with a formal strategy.
    • Getting all the right people in a room together to agree on the key components of the strategy and the direction undertaken for each one is often difficult.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Vision and alignment

    • Mission and vision
    • Alignment to other strategic plans
    • Guiding principles
    • Measuring success

    Technology

    • Monitoring
    • Provisioning
    • Migration

    Governance

    • Architecture
    • Integration and interoperability
    • Operations management
    • Cloud portfolio management
    • Cloud vendor management
    • Finance management
    • Security
    • Data controls

    People

    • Skills and roles
    • Culture and adoption
    • Governing bodies

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Your cloud strategy will comprise the elements listed under “vision and alignment,” “technology,” “governance,” and “people.” The Info-Tech methodology involves breaking the strategy down into subcomponents and going through a three-step process for each one. Start by reviewing a standard set of questions and understanding the goal of the exercise: What do we need to know? What are some common considerations and best practices? Once you’ve had a chance to review, discuss your current state and any gaps: What has been done? What still needs to be done? Finally, outline how you plan to go forward: What are your next steps? Who needs to be involved?

    Review

    • What questions do we need to answer to complete the discussion of this strategy component? What does the decision look like?
    • What are some key terms and best practices we must understand before deciding?

    Discuss

    • What steps have we already taken to address this component?
    • Does anything still need to be done?
    • Is there anything we’re not sure about or need further guidance on?

    Go forward

    • What are the next steps?
    • Who needs to be involved?
    • What questions still need to be asked/answered?
    • What should the document’s wording look like?

    Info-Tech’s methodology for documenting your cloud strategy

    1. Document your vision and alignment

    2. Record your people strategy

    3. Document governance principles

    4. Formalize your technology strategy

    Phase Steps

    1. Record your cloud mission and vision
    2. Document your cloud strategy’s alignment with other strategic plans
    3. Record your cloud guiding principles
    4. Define success
    1. Outline your skills and roles strategy
    2. Document your approach to culture and adoption
    3. Create a cloud governing body

    Document official organizational positions in these governance areas:

    1. Architecture
    2. Integration and interoperability
    3. Operations management
    4. Cloud portfolio management
    5. Cloud vendor management
    6. Finance management
    7. Security
    8. Data controls
    1. Formalize organizational approach to monitoring
    2. Document provisioning process
    3. Outline migration processes and procedures

    Phase Outcomes

    Documented strategy: vision and alignment

    Documented people strategy

    Documented cloud governance strategy

    Documented cloud technology strategy

    Insight summary

    Separate strategy from tactics

    Separate strategy from tactics! A strategy requires building out the framework for ongoing decision making. It is meant to be high level and achieve a large goal. The outcome of a strategy is often a sense of commitment to the goal and better communication on the topic.

    The cloud does not exist in a vacuum

    Your cloud strategy flows from your cloud vision and should align with the broader IT strategy. It is also part of a pantheon of strategies and should exist harmoniously with other strategies – data, security, etc.

    People problems needn’t preponderate

    The cloud doesn’t have to be a great disruptor. If you handle the transition well, you can focus your people on doing more valuable work – and this is generally engaging.

    Governance is a means to an end

    Governing your deployment for its own sake will only frustrate your end users. Articulate the benefits users and the organization can expect to see and you’re more likely to receive the necessary buy-in.

    Technology isn’t a panacea

    Technology won’t solve all your problems. Technology is a force multiplier, but you will still have to design processes and train your people to fully leverage it.

    Key deliverable

    Cloud Strategy Document template

    Inconsistency and informality are the enemies of efficiency. Capture the results of the cloud strategy generation exercises in the Cloud Strategy Document template.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Strategy Document Template.
    • Record the results of the exercises undertaken as part of this blueprint in the Cloud Strategy Document template.
    • It is important to remember that not every cloud strategy will look exactly the same, but this template represents an amalgamation of best practices and cloud strategy creation honed over several years of advisory service in the space.
    • You know your audience better than anyone. If you would prefer a strategy delivered in a different way (e.g. presentation format) feel free to adapt the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation into a longer strategy presentation.
    • Emphasis is an area where you should exercise discretion as well. A cost-oriented cloud strategy, or one that prioritizes one type of cloud (e.g. SaaS) at the exclusion of others, may benefit from more focus on some areas than others, or the introduction of relevant subcategories. Include as many of these as you think will be relevant.
    • Parsimony is king – if you can distill a concept to its essence, start there. Include additional detail only as needed. You want your cloud strategy document to be read. If it’s too long or overly detailed, you’ll encounter readability issues.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    Business benefits

    • A consistent, well-defined approach to the cloud
    • Consensus on key strategy components, including security, architecture, and integration
    • A clear path forward on skill development and talent acquisition/retention
    • A comprehensive resource for information about the organization’s approach to key strategy components
    • Predictable access to cloud services
    • A business-aligned approach to leveraging the resources available in the cloud
    • Efficient and secure consumption of cloud resources where appropriate to do so
    • Answers to questions about the cloud and how it will be leveraged in the environment

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Don’t take our word for it:

    • Document Your Cloud Strategy has been available for several years in various forms as both a workshop and as an analyst-led guided implementation.
    • After each engagement, we send a survey that asks members how they benefited from the experience. Those who have worked through Info-Tech’s cloud strategy material have given overwhelmingly positive feedback.
    • Additionally, members reported saving between 10 and 20 days and an average of $46,499.
    • Measure the value by calculating the time saved as a result of using Info-Tech’s framework vs. a home-brewed cloud strategy alternative and by comparing the overall cost of a guided implementation or workshop with the equivalent offering from another firm. We’re confident you’ll come out ahead.

    8.8/10 Average reported satisfaction

    13 Days Average reported time savings

    $46,499 Average cost savings

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Pharmaceuticals

    SOURCE: Info-Tech workshop

    Pharmaceutical company

    The unnamed pharmaceutical company that is the subject of this case study was looking to make the transition to the cloud. In the absence of a coherent strategy, the organization had a few cloud deployments with no easily discernable overall approach. Representatives of several distinct functions (legal, infrastructure, data, etc.) all had opinions on the uses and abuses of cloud services, but it had been difficult to round everyone up and have the necessary conversations. As a result, the strategy exercise had not proceeded in a speedy or well-governed way. This lack of strategic readiness presented a roadblock to moving forward with the cloud strategy and to work with the cloud implementation partner, tasked with execution.

    Results

    The company engaged Info-Tech for a four-day workshop on cloud strategy documentation. Over the course of four days, participants drawn from across the organization discussed the strategic components and generated consensus statements and next steps. The team was able to formalize the cloud strategy and described the experience as saving 10 days.

    Example output: Document your cloud strategy workshop exercise

    The image contains an example of Document your cloud streatgy workshop exercise.

    Anything in green, the team was reasonably sure they had good alignment and next steps. Those yellow flags warranted more discussion and were not ready for documentation.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Document your vision and alignment

    Record your people strategy

    Document governance principles

    Formalize your technology strategy

    Call #1: Review existing vision/strategy documentation.

    Call #2: Review progress on skills, roles, and governance bodies.

    Call #3: Work through integration, architecture, finance management, etc. based on reqs. (May be more than one call.)

    Call #4: Discuss challenges with monitoring, provisioning, and migration as-needed.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is 4 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 3 months

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Answer
    “so what?”

    Define the
    IT target state

    Assess the IT
    current state

    Bridge the gap and
    create the strategy

    Next steps and
    wrap-up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction

    1.2 Discuss cloud mission and vision

    1.3 Discuss alignment with other strategic plans

    1.4 Discuss guiding principles

    1.5 Define success metrics

    2.1 Discuss skills and roles

    2.2 Review culture and adoption

    2.3 Discuss a cloud governing body

    2.4 Review architecture position

    2.5 Discuss integration and interoperability

    3.1 Discuss cloud operations management

    3.2 Review cloud portfolio management

    3.3 Discuss cloud vendor management

    3.4 Discuss cloud finance management

    3.5 Discuss cloud security

    4.1 Review and formalize data controls

    4.2 Design a monitoring approach

    4.3 Document the workload provisioning process

    4.4 Outline migration processes and procedures

    5.1 Populate the Cloud Strategy Document

    Deliverables

    Formalized cloud mission and vision, along with alignment with strategic plans, guiding principles, and success metrics

    Position statement on skills and roles, culture and adoption, governing bodies, architecture, and integration/interoperability

    Position statements on cloud operations management, portfolio management, vendor management, finance management, and cloud security

    Position statements on data controls, monitoring, provisioning, and migration

    Completed Cloud Strategy Document

    Phase 1

    Document Your Vision and Alignment

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Document your mission and vision

    1.2 Document alignment to other strategic plans

    1.3 Document guiding principles

    1.4 Document success metrics

    2.1 Define approach to skills and roles

    2.2 Define approach to culture and adoption

    2.3 Define cloud governing bodies

    3.1 Define architecture direction

    3.2 Define integration approach

    3.3 Define operations management process

    3.4 Define portfolio management direction

    3.5 Define vendor management direction

    3.6 Document finance management tactics

    3.7 Define approach to cloud security

    3.8 Define data controls in the cloud

    4.1 Define cloud monitoring strategy

    4.2 Define cloud provisioning strategy

    4.3 Define cloud migration strategy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Record your cloud mission and vision
    2. Document your cloud strategy’s alignment with other strategic plans
    3. Record your cloud guiding principles
    4. Define success

    This phase has the following outcome:

    • Documented strategy: vision and alignment

    Record your mission and vision

    Build on the work you’ve already done

    Before formally documenting your cloud strategy, you should ensure that you have a good understanding of your overall cloud vision. How do you plan to leverage the cloud? What goals are you looking to accomplish? How will you distribute your workloads between different cloud service models (SaaS, PaaS, IaaS)? What will your preferred delivery model be (public, private, hybrid)? Will you support your cloud deployment internally or use the services of various consultants or managed service providers?

    The answers to these questions will inform the first section of your cloud strategy. If you haven’t put much thought into this or think you could use a deep dive on the fundamentals of your cloud vision and cloud archetypes, consider reviewing Define Your Cloud Vision, the companion blueprint to this one.

    Once you understand your cloud vision and what you’re trying to accomplish with your cloud strategy, this phase will walk you through aligning the strategy with other strategic initiatives. What decisions have others made that will impact the cloud strategy (or that the cloud strategy will impact)? Who must be involved/informed? What callouts must be involved at what point? Do users have access to the appropriate strategic documentation (and would they understand it if they did)?

    You must also capture some guiding principles. A strategy by its nature provides direction, helping readers understand the decisions they should make and why those decisions align with organizational interests. Creating some top-level principles is a useful exercise because those principles facilitate comprehension and ensure the strategy’s applicability.

    Finally, this phase will walk you through the process of measuring success. Once you know where you’d like to go, the principles that underpin your direction, and how your cloud strategy figures into the broader strategic pantheon, you should record what success actually means. If you’re looking to save money, overall cost should be a metric you track. If the cloud is all about productivity, generate appropriate productivity metrics. If you’re looking to expand into new technology or close a datacenter, you will need to track output specific to those overall goals.

    Review: mission and vision

    The overall organizational mission is a key foundational element of the cloud strategy. If you don’t understand where you’re going, how can you begin the journey to get there? This section of the strategy has four key parts that you should understand and incorporate into the beginning of the strategy document. If you haven’t already, review Define Your Cloud Vision for instructions on how to generate these elements.

    1. Cloud vision statement: This is a succinct encapsulation of your overall perspective on the suitability of cloud services for your environment – what you hope to accomplish. The ideal statement includes a scope (who/what does the strategy impact?), a goal (what will it accomplish?), and a key differentiator (what will make it happen?). This is an example: “[Organization] will leverage public cloud solutions and retire existing datacenter and colocation facilities. This transition will simplify infrastructure administration, support and security, while modernizing legacy infrastructure and reducing the need for additional capital expenditure.” You might also consider reviewing your overall cloud archetype (next slide) and including the output of that exercise in the document

    2. Service model decision framework: Services can be provided as software as a service (SaaS), platform as a service (PaaS), infrastructure as a service (IaaS), or they can be colocated or remain on premises. Not all cloud service models serve the same purpose or provide equal value in all circumstances. Understanding how you plan to take advantage of these distinct service models is an important component of the cloud strategy. In this section of the strategy, a rubric that captures the characteristics of the ideal workload for each of the named service models, along with some justification for the selection, is essential. This is a core component of Define Your Cloud Vision, and if you would like to analyze individual workloads, you can use the Cloud Vision Workbook for that purpose.

    3. Delivery model decision framework: Just as there are different cloud service models that have unique value propositions, there are several unique cloud delivery models as well, distinguished by ownership, operation, and customer base. Public clouds are the purview of third-party providers who make them available to paying customers. Private clouds are built for the exclusive use of a designated organization or group of organizations with internal clients to serve. Hybrid clouds involve the use of multiple, interoperable delivery models (interoperability is the key term here), while multi-cloud deployment models incorporate multiple delivery and service models into a single coherent strategy. What will your preferred delivery model be? Why?

    4. Support model decision framework: Once you have a service model nailed down and understand how you will execute on the delivery, the question then becomes about how you will support your cloud deployment going forward. Broadly speaking, you can choose to manage your deployment in house using internal resources (e.g. staff), to use managed service providers for ongoing support, or to hire consultants to handle specific projects/tasks. Each approach has its strengths and weaknesses, and many cloud customers will deploy multiple support models across time and different workloads. A foundational perspective on the support model is a key component of the cloud vision and should appear early in the strategy.

    Understand key cloud concepts: Archetype

    Once you understand the value of the cloud, your workloads’ general suitability for the cloud, and your proposed risks and mitigations, the next step is to define your cloud archetype. Your organization’s cloud archetype is the strategic posture that IT adopts to best support the organization’s goals. Info-Tech’s model recognizes seven archetypes, divided into three high-level archetypes. After consultation with your stakeholders, and based on the results of the suitability and risk assessment activities, define your archetype. The archetype feeds into the overall cloud vision and provides simple insight into the cloud future state for all stakeholders. The cloud vision itself is captured in a “vision statement,” a short summary of the overall approach that includes the overall cloud archetype.

    The image contains an arrow facing vertically up. The pointed end of the arrow is labelled more cloud, and the bottom of the arrow is labelled less cloud.

    We can best support the organization’s goals by:

    Cloud-Focused

    Cloud-Centric

    Providing all workloads through cloud delivery.

    Cloud-First

    Using the cloud as our default deployment model. For each workload, we should ask “why NOT cloud?”

    Cloud-Opportunistic

    Hybrid

    Enabling the ability to transition seamlessly between on-premises and cloud resources for many workloads.

    Integrated

    Combining cloud and traditional infrastructure resources, integrating data and applications through APIs or middleware.

    Split

    Using the cloud for some workloads and traditional infrastructure resources for others.

    Cloud-Averse

    Cloud-Light

    Using traditional infrastructure resources and limiting our use of the cloud to when it is absolutely necessary.

    Anti-Cloud

    Using traditional infrastructure resources and avoiding the use of cloud wherever possible.

    Implement an IT Employee Development Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}592|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Train & Develop
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • There is a growing gap between the competencies organizations have been focused on developing and what is needed in the future.
    • Employees have been left to drive their own development with little direction or support and without the alignment of development to organizational needs.
    • The pace of change in today’s environment demands new competencies while making others obsolete, and IT is challenged with keeping up with upskilling employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations position development as employee-owned, yet employees still feel like their needs aren’t being met, and many leave as a result.
    • Development needs to be employee-owned and manager-supported but also organization-informed to ensure that it meets the organization’s needs.
    • Today, operating environments change quickly, and organizations need to develop the competencies employees need both today and in the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Design employee development plans that build the competencies the organization and IT department need both today and in the future.
    • Equip managers and build program support to foster continuous learning and development.
    • Connect the right development opportunity to the right employee through an effective development planning process.

    Implement an IT Employee Development Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement effective development planning, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess employees' development needs

    Assist your employees in setting appropriate development goals.

    • Implement Effective Employee Development Planning – Phase 1: Assess Employees' Development Needs
    • IT Manager Job Aid: Employee Development
    • IT Employee Job Aid: Employee Development
    • IT Employee Career Development Workbook
    • Individual Competency Development Plan
    • IT Competency Library
    • Leadership Competencies Workbook

    2. Select appropriate activities for development

    Review existing and identify new development activities that employees can undertake to achieve their goals.

    • Implement Effective Employee Development Planning – Phase 2: Select Activities for Developing Prioritized Competencies
    • Learning Methods Catalog for IT Employees

    3. Build manager coaching skills

    Establish manager and employee follow-up accountabilities.

    • Implement Effective Employee Development Planning – Phase 3: Build Manager Coaching Skills to Support Employee Development
    • Role Play Coaching Scenarios
    [infographic]

    Formalize Your Digital Business Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}101|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    Your organization already has a digital strategy, but there is a lack of understanding of what digital means across the enterprise. Digital investments have been made in the past but failed to yield or demonstrate business value. Given the pace of change, the current digital strategy is outdated, and new digital opportunities need to be identified to inform the technology innovation roadmap.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Turn your digital strategy into a compelling change story that will create a unified vision of how you want to transform your business.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify new digitally enabled growth opportunities.
    • Understand which digital ideas yield the biggest return and the value they generate for the organization.
    • Understand the impact of opportunities on your business capabilities.
    • Map a customer journey to identify opportunities to transform stakeholder experiences.

    Formalize Your Digital Business Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Formalize Your Digital Business Strategy – a document that walks you through a series of activities to help brainstorm and ideate on possible new digital opportunities as an input into building your business case for a new IT innovation roadmap.

    Knowing which digital opportunities create the greatest business value requires a structured approach to ideate, prioritize, and understand the value they create for the business to help inform the creation of your business case for investment approval.

    • Formalize Your Digital Strategy Storyboard

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Formalize Your Digital Business Strategy

    Stay relevant in an evolving digital economy

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Solution

    • Since 2020, the environment has been volatile, leading many CIOs to rethink their priorities and strategies.
    • The organization already has a digital strategy, but there is a lack of understanding of what digital means across the enterprise.
    • Digital investments have been made but fail to demonstrate the business value.
    • The current digital strategy was developed in isolation and failed to garner consensus on a common understanding of the digital vision from across the business.
    • CIOs struggle to understand what existing capabilities need to transform or what new digital capabilities are needed to support the digital ambitions.
    • The existing Digital Strategy is synonymous with the IT Strategy.
    • Identify new digitally enabled growth opportunities.
    • Understand which digital ideas yield the biggest return and the value they generate for the organization.
    • Understand the impact of opportunities on your business capabilities.
    • Map the customer journey to identify opportunities to transform the stakeholder experience.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Turn your existing digital strategy into a compelling change story that will create a unified vision of how you want to transform your business.

    Info-Tech’s Digital Transformation Journey

    Your journey: An IT roadmap for your Digital Business Strategy

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Digital Transformation Journey.

    By now, you understand your current business context and capabilities

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT roadmap for your Digital Business Strategy.

    By this point you have leveraged industry roundtables to better understand the art of the possible, exploring global trends, shifts in market forces, customer needs, emerging technologies, and economic forecasts to establish your business objectives and innovation goals.

    Now you need to formalize digital business strategy.

    Phase 1: Industry Trends Report

    The image contains a screenshot of phase 1 industry trends report.

    Phase 2: Digital Maturity Assessment

    The image contains a screenshot of phase 2 digital maturity assessment.

    Phase 3: Zero-In on Business Objectives

    The image contains a screenshot of phase 3 Zero-in on business objectives.

    Business and innovation goals are established through stakeholder interviews and a heatmap of your current capabilities for transformation.

    Since 2020, market dynamics have forced organizations to reassess their strategies

    The unprecedented pace of global disruptions has become both a curse and a silver lining for many CIOs. The ability to maximize the value of digital will be vital to remain relevant in the new digital economy.

    The image contains a screenshot of an image that demonstrates how market dynamics force organizations to reassess their strategies.

    Formalize your digital strategy to address industry trends and market dynamics

    The goal of this phase is to ensure the scope of the current digital strategy reflects the right opportunities to allocate capital to resources, assets, and capabilities to drive strategic growth and operational efficiency.

    There are three key activities outlined in this deck that that can be undertaken by industry members to help evolve their current digital business strategy.

    1. Identify New Digitally Enabled Growth Opportunities
      • Host an ideation session to identify new leapfrog ideas
      • Discuss assumptions, value drivers, and risks
      • Translate ideas into opportunities and consolidate
    2. Evaluate New Digital Opportunities and Business Capabilities
      • Build an opportunity profile
      • Identify business capabilities for transformation
    3. Transform Stakeholder Journeys
      • Understand the impact of opportunities on value-chains
      • Identify stakeholder personas
      • Build a stakeholder journey map
      • Compile your new list of digital opportunities
    The image contains a screenshot of Formalize your digital business strategy.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    1. Identify New Digital Opportunities
      • Conduct an ideation session
      • Identify leapfrog ideas from trends
      • Evaluate each leapfrog idea to define opportunity
    2. Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities
      • Build Opportunity Profile
      • Understand the impact of opportunities on business capabilities
    3. Transform Stakeholder Journeys
      • Analyze value chains
      • Map your Stakeholder Journey
      • Breakdown opportunities into initiatives

    Overview of Key Activities

    Formalize your digital business strategy

    Methodology

    Members Engaged

    • CIO
    • Business Executives

    Info-Tech

    • Industry Analyst
    • Executive Advisor

    Phase 1: New Digital Opportunities

    Phase 2: Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities

    Phase 3: Transform Stakeholder Journeys

    Content Leveraged

    • Digital Business Strategy blueprint
    • Client’s Business Architecture
    1. Hold an ideation session with business executives.
      • Review relevant reports on industry trends, market shifts, and emerging technologies.
      • Establish guiding principles for digital transformation.
      • Leverage a trend-analysis approach to determine the most impactful and relevant trends.
      • From tends, elicit leapfrog ideas for growth opportunities.
      • For each idea, engage in discussion on assumptions, value drivers, benefits, and risks.
    1. Create opportunity profiles.
      • Evaluate each opportunity to determine if it is important to turn into initiatives
    2. Evaluate the impact of opportunities on your business capabilities.
      • Leverage a value-chain analysis to assess the impact of the opportunity across value chains in order to understand the impact across your business capabilities.
    1. Map stakeholder journey:
      • Identify stakeholder personas
      • Identify one journey scenario
      • Map stakeholder journey
      • Consolidate opportunities
    2. Breakdown opportunities into actional initiatives
      • Brainstorm priority initiatives against opportunities.

    Deliverable:

    Client’s Digital Business Strategy

    Phase 1: Deliverable

    1. Compiled list of leapfrog ideas for new growth opportunities

    Phase 2: Deliverables

    1. Opportunity Profile
    2. Business Capability Impact

    Phase 3: Deliverables

    1. Opportunity Profile
    2. Business Capability Impact

    Glossary of Terms

    LEAPFROG IDEAS

    The concept was originally developed in the area of industrial organizations and economic growth. Leapfrogging is the notion that organizations can identify opportunities to skip one or several stages ahead of their competitors.

    DIGITAL OPPORTUNITIES

    Opening of new possibilities to transform or change your business model and create operational efficiencies and customer experiences through the adoption of digital platforms, solutions, and capabilities.

    INITIATIVES

    Breakdown of opportunities into actionable initiatives that creates value for organizations through new or changes to business models, operational efficiencies, and customer experiences.

    1. LEAPFROG IDEAS:
      • Precision medicine
    2. DIGITAL OPPORTUNITY:
      • Machine Learning to sniff out pre-cancer cells
    3. INITIATIVES:
      1. Define genomic analytics capabilities and recruit
      2. Data quality and cleansing review
      3. Implement Machine Learning SW

    Identify Digitally Enabled Opportunities

    Host an ideation session to turn trends into growth opportunities with new leapfrog ideas.

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify New Digitally Enabled Opportunities

    Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities

    Transform Stakeholder Journeys

    Phase 1

    Host an Ideation Session to Identify New Digital Opportunities

    1.1

    IDENTIFY AND ASSEMBLE YOUR KEY STAKEHOLDERS

    Build support and eliminate blind spots

    It is important to make sure the right stakeholders participate in this working group. Designing a digital strategy will require debate, insights, and business decisions from a broad perspective across the enterprise. The focus is on the value to be generated from digital.

    Consider:

    • Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
    • Who will impact the business?
    • Who has a vested interest in the success or failure of the practice? Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help you be successful?

    Avoid:

    • Don’t focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups don’t fit the traditional structure.
    • Don’t ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.
    1.2

    ESTABLISH GUIDING PRINCIPLES

    Define the guardrails to focus your ideas

    All ideas are great until you need one that works. Establish guiding principles that will help you establish the perimeters for turning big ideas into opportunities.

    Consider:

    • Focus on the breadth and alignment to support business objectives
    • This should help narrow conceptual ideas into actionable initiatives

    Avoid:

    • Don’t recreate the corporate guiding principles
    • Focus on what will help define strategic growth opportunities and operational efficiencies
    1.3

    LEVERAGE STRATEGIC FORESIGHT TO IDENTIFY LEAPFROG IDEAS

    Create space to elicit “big ideas”

    Leverage industry roundtables and trend reports imagining how digital solutions can help drive strategic growth and operational efficiency. Brainstorm new opportunities and discuss their viability to create value and better experiences for your stakeholders.

    Consider:

    • Accelerate this exercise by leveraging stakeholder insights from:
      • Your corporate strategy and financial plan
      • Outputs from stakeholder interviews
      • Market research

    Avoid:

    • Don’t simply go with the existing documented strategic objectives for the business. Ensure they are up to date and interview the decision makers to validate their perspectives if needed.

    Host an Ideation Session

    Identify digitally enabled opportunities

    Industry Roundtables and Trend Reports

    Industry Trends Report

    The image contains a screenshot of phase 1 industry trends report.

    Business Documents

    The image contains a screenshot of Business Documents.

    Digital Maturity Assessment

    The image contains a screenshot of phase 2 digital maturity assessment.

    Activity: 2-4 hours

    Members Engaged

    • CIO
    • Business Executives

    Info-Tech

    • Industry Analyst
    • Executive Advisor

    Hold a visioning session with key business executives (e.g., CIO, CEO, CFO, CCO, and COO) and others as needed. Here is a proposed agenda of activities for the ideation session:

    1. Leverage current trend reports and relevant emerging trend reports, market analysis, and customer research to envision future possibilities.
    2. Establish guiding principles for defining your digital strategy and scope.
    3. Leverage insights from trend reports and market analysis to generate leapfrog ideas that can be turned into opportunities.
    4. For each leapfrog idea, engage in a discussion on assumptions, value drivers, benefits, and risks.

    Content Leveraged

    • Digital Trends Report
    • Industry roundtables and trend reports
    • Digital Maturity Assessment
    • Digital Business Strategy v1.0

    Deliverable:

    1. Guiding principles
    2. Strategic growth opportunities

    1.1 Executive Stakeholder Engagement

    Assemble Executive Stakeholders

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps.

    CIOs tasked with designing digital strategies must add value to the business. Given the goal of digital is to transform the business, CIOs will need to ensure they have both the mandate and support from the business executives.

    Designing the digital strategy is more than just writing up a document. It is an integrated set of business decisions to create a competitive advantage and financial returns. Establishing a forum for debates, decisions, and dialogue will increase the likelihood of success and support during execution.

    1. Confirm your role

    2. Identify Stakeholders

    3. Diverse Perspective

    The digital strategy aims to transform the business. Given the scope, validate your role and mandate to lead this work. Identify a business executive to co-sponsor.

    Identify key decision-makers and influencers who can help make rapid decisions as well as garner support across the enterprise.

    Don’t be afraid to include contrarians or naysayers. They will help reduce any blind spots but can also become the greatest allies through participation.

    1.2 Guiding Principles

    Set the Guiding Principles

    Guiding principles help define the parameters of your digital strategy. They act as priori decisions that establish the guardrails to limit the scope of opportunities from the perspective of people, assets, capabilities, and budgets that are aligned with the business objectives. Consider these components when brainstorming guiding principles:

    Consider these three components when brainstorming

    Breadth

    Digital strategy should span people, culture, organizational structure, governance, capabilities, assets, and technology. The guiding principle should cover a 3600 view across the entire organization.

    Planning Horizon

    Timing should anchor stakeholders to look to the long-term with an eye on the foreseeable future i.e., business value realization in one, two, and three years.

    Depth

    Needs to encompass more than the enterprise view of lofty opportunities but establish boundaries to help define actionable initiatives (i.e., individual projects).

    1.2 Guiding Principles

    Examples of Guiding Principles

    IT Principle NameIT Principle Statement
    1.Enterprise value focusWe aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
    2.Fit for purposeWe maintain capability levels and create solutions that are fit for purpose without over engineering them.
    3.SimplicityWe choose the simplest solutions and aim to reduce operational complexity of the enterprise.
    4.Reuse > buy > buildWe maximize reuse of existing assets. If we can’t reuse, we procure externally. As a last resort, we build custom solutions.
    5.Managed dataWe handle data creation and modification and use it enterprise-wide in compliance with our data governance policy.
    6.Controlled technical diversityWe control the variety of what technology platforms we use.
    7.Managed securityWe manage security enterprise-wide in compliance with our security governance policy.
    8.Compliance to laws and regulationsWe operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    9.InnovationWe seek innovative ways to use technology for business advantage.
    10.Customer centricityWe deliver best experiences to our customers with our services and products.
    11.Digital by default We always put digital solutions at the core of our plans for all viable solutions across the organization.
    12.Customer-centricity by designWe design new products and services with the goal to drive greater engagement and experiences with our customers.

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Leverage strategic foresight to identify growth opportunities

    What is Strategic Foresight?

    In times of increasing uncertainty, rapid change, market volatility, and complexity, the development of strategies can be difficult. Strategic foresight offers a solution.
    Strategic foresight refers to an approach that uses a range of methodologies, such as scanning the horizon for emerging changes and signals, analyzing megatrends, and developing multiple scenarios to identify opportunities (source: OECD, 2022). However, it cannot predict the future and is distinct from:

    • Forecasting tools
    • Strategic planning
    • Scenario planning (only)
    • Predictive analyses of the future

    Why is Strategic Foresight useful?

    • Reduce uncertainties about the future
    • Better anticipate changes
    • Future-proof to stress test proposed strategies
    • Explore innovation to reveal new products, services, and approaches

    Explore Info-Tech’s Strategic Foresight Process Tool

    “When situations lack analogies to the past, it’s hard to envision the future.”

    - J. Peter Scoblic, HBR, 2020

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Leverage industry roundtables and trend reports to understand the art of the possible

    Uncover important business and industry trends that can inform possibilities for technology innovation.

    Explore trends in areas such as:

    • Machine Learning
    • Citizen Dev 2.0
    • Venture Architecture
    • Autonomous Organizations
    • Self-Sovereign Cloud
    • Digital Sustainability

    Market research is critical in identifying factors external to your organization and identifying technology innovation that will provide a competitive edge. It’s important to evaluate the impact each trend or opportunity will have in your organization and market.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Trends & Priorities Research Center

    Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to get started.

    The image contains screenshots from Info-Tech blueprints.

    Images are from Info-Tech’s Rethinking Higher Education Report and 2023 Tech Trends Report

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Scan the Horizon

    Understand how the environment is evolving in your industry

    Scan the horizon to detect early signs of future changes or threats.

    Horizon scanning involves scanning, analyzing, and communicating changes in an organization’s environment to prepare for potential threats and opportunities. Much of what we know about the future is based around the interactions and trajectory of macro trends, trends, and drivers. These form the foundations for future intelligence.

    Macro Trends

    A macro trend captures a large-scale transformative trend on a global scale that could impact your addressable market

    Industry Trend

    An industry trend captures specific use cases of the macro trend in relation to your market and industry. Consider this in terms of shifts in your market dynamics i.e., competitors, size, transaction, international trade, supply/demand, etc.

    Driver(s)

    A driver is an underlying force causing the trend to occur. There can be multiple causal forces, or drivers, that influence a trend, and multiple trends can be influenced by the same causal force.

    Identify signals of change in the present and their potential future impacts.

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Identify macro trends

    Macro trends capture a global shift that can change the market and the industry. Here are examples of macro-trends to consider when scanning the horizon for your own organization:

    Talent Availability

    Customer Expectations

    Emerging Technologies

    Regulatory System

    Supply Chain Continuity

    Decentralized workforce

    Hybrid workforce

    Diverse workforce

    Skills gap

    Digital workforce

    Multigenerational workforce

    Personalization

    Digital experience

    Data ownership

    Transparency

    Accessibility

    On-demand

    Mobility

    AI & robotics

    Virtual world

    Ubiquitous connectivity

    Genomics (nano, bio, smart….)

    Big data

    Market control

    Economic shifts

    Digital regulation

    Consumer protection

    Global green

    Resource scarcity

    Sustainability

    Supply chain digitization

    Circular supply chains

    Agility

    Outsource

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Determine impact and relevance of trends

    Understand which trends create opportunities or risks for your organization.

    Key Concepts:

    Once an organization has uncovered a set of trends that are of potential importance, a judgment must be made on which of the trends should be prioritized to understand their impact on your market and ultimately, the implications for your business or organization. Consider the following criteria to help you prioritize your trends.

    Impact to Industry: The degree of impact the trend will have on your industry and market to create possibilities or risks for your business. Will this trend create opportunities for the business? Or does it pose a risk that we need to mitigate?

    Relevance to Organization. The relevance of the trend to your organization. Does the trend align with the mission, vision, and business objectives of your organization?

    Activity: 2-4hours

    In order to determine which trends will have an impact on your industry and are relevant to your organization, you need to use a gating approach to short-list those that may create opportunities to capitalize on while you need to manage the ones that pose risk.

    Impact

    What does this trend mean for my industry and market?

    • Degree – how broad or narrow is the impact
    • Likelihood – the reality of disrupting an industry or market
    • Timing – when do we expect disruption?

    Relevance

    What opportunity or risk does it pose to my business/organization?

    • Significance – depth and breadth across the enterprise
    • Duration – how long is the anticipated impact?

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Prioritize Trends for Exploration

    The image contains a screenshot of a table to demonstrate the trends.The image contains a graph that demonstrates the trends from the table on a graph to show how to prioritze them based on relevance and impact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While the scorecard may produce a ranking based on weighted metrics, you need to leverage the group discussion to help contextualize and challenge assumptions when validating the priority. The room for debate is important to truly understand whether a trend is a fad or a fact that needs to be addressed.

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Discuss the driver(s) behind the trend

    Determining the root cause(s) of a trend is an important precursor to understanding the how, why, and to what extent a trend will impact your industry and market.

    Trend analysis can be a valuable approach to reduce uncertainties about the future and an opportunity to understand the underlying drivers (forces) that may be contributing to a shift in pattern. Understanding the drivers is important to help determine implication on your organization and potential opportunities.

    The image contains a screenshot of a driver diagram.

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Examples of driver(s)

    INDUSTRY

    Healthcare Exemplar

    Macro Trends

    (Transformative change)

    Industry Trend

    (A pattern of change…)

    Drivers

    (“Why”….)

    Accessibility

    Increase in wait times

    Aging population leading to global workforce shortage

    New models of care e.g., diversify scope of practice

    Address capacity issues

    Understanding the drivers is not about predicting the future. Don’t get stuck in “analysis paralysis.” The key objective is to determine what opportunities and risks the trend and its underlying driver pose to your business. This will help elicit leapfrog opportunities that can be funneled into actionable initiatives.

    Other examples…

    Dimensions

    Macro-Trends

    Industry Trend

    Driver

    Social

    Demographic shift

    Global shortage of healthcare workers

    Workforce age

    Customer expectations

    Patients as partners

    Customer demographics

    Technology

    AI and robotics

    Early detection of cancer

    Patient outcomes

    Ubiquitous connectivity

    Virtual health

    Capacity

    Economic

    Recession

    Cost-savings

    Sustainability

    Consumer spending

    Value-for-money

    Prioritization

    Environment

    Climate change

    Shift in manufacturers

    ESG compliant vendors

    Pandemic

    Supply chain disruption

    Local production

    Political

    Regulatory

    Consolidation of professional colleges

    Operational efficiency

    De-regulation

    New models of care

    New service (business) model

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    Case Study

    Industry

    Healthcare

    Artificial Intelligence (AI) in Precision Medicine (Genomics)

    Precision Medicine has become very popular over the recent years fueled by research but also political and patient demands to focus more on better outcomes vs. profits. A cancer care center in Canada wanted to look at what was driving this popularity but more importantly, what this potentially meant to their current service delivery model and operations and what opportunities and risks they needed to address in the foreseeable future. They determined the following drivers:

    • Improve patient outcomes
    • Earlier detection of cancer
    • Better patient experience
    • Ability to compute vast amounts of data to reduce manual effort and errors
    • Accelerate from research to clinical trials to delivery

    The image contains a screenshot of AI in Genomics.

    1.3 Trend-Analysis

    INDUSTRY

    Healthcare Exemplar

    Category

    Macro-Trends

    Industry Trends

    (Use-Case)

    Drivers

    Impact to Industry

    Impact to Business

    Talent Availability

    Diverse workforce

    Aboriginal health

    Systemic inequities

    Brand and legal

    Policies in place

    Hybrid workforce

    Virtual care

    COVID-19 and infectious disease

    New models of care

    New digital talent

    Customer Expectation

    Personalization

    On-demand care

    Patient experience

    Patients as consumers

    New operating model

    Digital experience

    Patient portals

    Democratization of data

    Privacy and security

    Capacity

    Emerging Technologies

    Internet of Things (IoT)

    Smart glucometers

    Greater mobility

    System redesign

    Shift from hospital to home care

    Quantum computing

    Genomic sequencing

    Accelerate analysis

    Improve quality of data analysis

    Faster to clinical trial and delivery

    Regulatory System

    Consumer protection

    Protect access to sensitive patient data

    HIPPA legislation

    Restrict access to health record

    Electronic health records

    Global green

    Green certification for redev. projects

    Political optics

    Higher costs

    Contract management

    Supply Chain

    Supply chain disruptions

    Surgical strategic sourcing

    Preference cards

    Quality

    Organizational change management

    New pharma entrants

    Telco’s move into healthcare

    Demand/supply

    Funding model

    Resource competition

    Sample Output From Trend Analysis

    1.3 Elicit New Opportunities

    Leapfrog into the future

    Turn trends into growth opportunities.

    To thrive in the digital age, organizations must innovate big, leverage internal creativity, and prepare for flexibility.

    In this digital era, organizations are often playing catch up to a rapidly evolving technological landscape and following a strict linear approach to innovation. However, this linear catch-up approach does not help companies get ahead of competitors. Instead, organizations must identify avenues to skip one or several stages of technological development to leapfrog ahead of their competitors.

    “The best way to predict the future is to invent it.”

    – Alan Kay

    Leapfrogging takes place when an organization introduces disruptive innovation into the market and sidesteps competitors, who are unable to mobilize to respond to the opportunities.

    1.3 Elicit New Opportunities

    Funnel trends into leapfrog ideas

    Go from trend insights into ideas for opportunities

    Brainstorm ways to generate leapfrog ideas from trend insights.

    Dealing with trends is one of the most important tasks for innovation. It provides the basis of developing the future orientation of the organization. However, being aware of a trend is one thing, to develop strategies for response is another.

    To identify the impact the trend has on the organization, consider the four areas of growth for the organization:

    1. New Customers: Leverage the trend to target new customers for existing products or services.
    2. New Business Models: Adjust the business model to capture a change in how the organization delivers value.
    3. New Markets: Enter or create new markets by applying existing products or services to different problems.
    4. New Product or Service Offerings: Introduce new products or services to the existing market.

    1.3 Elicit New Opportunities

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare

    SOURCE: Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Center

    Case Study

    Machine Learning Sensor to Sniff Out Cancer

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    Timely access to diagnostic services is a key indicator of a cancer patient’s prognosis i.e., outcome. Early detection of cancer means the difference between life and death for cancer patients.

    Typically, cancer biomarkers need to be present to detect cancer. Often the presence of these biomarkers is late in the disease state when the cancer cells have likely spread, resulting in suspicions of cancer only when the patient does not feel well or suspects something is wrong.

    Researchers in partnership with IBM Watson at Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Center (MSK) have created a tool that can sniff for and identify cancer in a blood sample using machine learning.

    Originally, MSK worked with IBM Watson to identify machine learning as an emerging technology that could drive early cancer detection without the use of cancer biomarkers. But they needed to find specific use cases. After a series of concept prototypes, they were able to use machine learning to detect patterns in blood cells vs. cancer biomarkers to detect cancer disease.

    Machine learning was an emerging trend that researchers at MSK felt held great promise. They needed to turn the trend into tangible opportunities by identifying some key use cases that could be prototyped.

    Computational tools in oncology have the ability to greatly reduce clinician labor, improve the consistency of variant classification, and help accelerate the analytics of vast amounts of clinical data that would be prone to errors and delays when done manually.

    From trends to leapfrog ideas

    Additional Examples in the Appendix

    Example of leapfrog ideas that can generate opportunities for consideration

    Trend

    New Customer

    New Market

    New Business or Operating Model

    New Service Offering

    What trend(s) pose a significant impact on your business?

    New stakeholder segment

    Enter or create new markets

    Adjust the business or operating model to capture change in how the business creates and delivers value

    Introduce new digital products, services and experiences

    Virtualize Registration

    Empower patients as consumers of healthcare partners

    Direct B2C to close gap between providers and patients by removing middle administrative overhead.

    24/7 On-Demand Patient Portal

    Leverage AI to develop chatbots and on-demand

    Phase 1: Deliverable

    Phase 1 Deliverable

    Example of output from phase 1 ideation session

    Business Objectives

    New Customers

    (Customer Experience)

    New Markets

    (Health Outcomes)

    New Business or

    Operating Models

    (Operational Excellence)

    New Service Offering

    (Value for Money)

    Description:

    Focus on improving experiences for patients and providers

    Improve quality and standards of care to continually drive better health outcomes

    Deliver care better, faster, and more efficiently

    Reduce cost per capital of delivery care and increase value for services

    Trends:

    • Global workforce shortage due to ageing demographics
    • Clinicians are burnt-out and unable to practice at the top of their profession
    • On-demand care/mobile/wearables
    • Virtual care
    • Faster access to quality service
    • Help navigating complex medical ecosystem from primary to acute to community
    • Standardize care across regions
    • New models of care to expand capacity
    • Improve medication errors
    • Opportunities to use genomics to design personalized medicine
    • Automate tasks
    • Leverage AI and robotics more effectively
    • Regulatory colleges consolidation mandate
    • Use data and analytics to forecast capacity and health outcomes
    • Upskill vs. virtualize workforce
    • Payment reform i.e., move to value-based care vs. fee-for-service
    • Consolidation of back-office functions like HR, supply chain, IT, etc. to reduce cost i.e., shared services model

    Digital Opportunities:

    1. Virtual health command center
    2. Self-scheduling patient portal
    3. Patient way-finder
    4. Smart glucometer for diabetes
    1. Machine learning for early detection of cancer
    2. Visualization tools for capacity planning and forecasting
    3. Contact tracing apps for public health
    1. Build advanced analytics capabilities with new skills and business intelligence tools
    2. Pharmacy robotics
    3. Automate registration
    1. Automate provider billing solution
    2. Payment gateways – supplier portal in the cloud

    Phase 2

    Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities

    Build a better understanding of the opportunities and their impact on your business.

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify New Digitally Enabled Opportunities

    Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities

    Transform Stakeholder Journeys

    Phase 2

    Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities

    2.1

    CREATE OPPORTUNITY PROFILES

    Evaluate each opportunity

    Some opportunities will have an immediate and significant impact on your business. Some may have a significant impact but on a longer time scale or some may be unlikely to have a significant impact at all. Understanding these trends is an important context for your digital business strategy.

    Consider:

    • Does this opportunity conform with your guiding principles?
    • Can this opportunity feasibly deliver the anticipated benefits?
    • Is this opportunity desired by your stakeholders?

    Avoid:

    • Overly vague language. Opportunities need to be specific enough to evaluate what impact they will have.
    • Simply following what competitors are doing. Be ambitious and tailor your digital strategy to your organizational values, goals, and priorities.
    2.2

    UNDERSTAND THE IMPACT OF OPPORTUNITIES ON BUSINESS CAPABILITIES

    Understand the impact across your value chains

    Each opportunity has the potential to impact multiple areas of your business. Prioritize where to start acting on new opportunities based on your business objectives and capabilities. You need to assess their impacts across value chains. Does the opportunity impact existing value chain(s) or create a new value chain?

    Consider:

    • How well does this opportunity align with your digital vision, mission, and goals?
    • What will be the overall impact of this opportunity?
    • How urgently must you act?

    Avoid:

    • Guessing. Validate assumptions and use clear, unbiased information to make decisions. Info-Tech has extensive resources to assist in evaluating trends, opportunities, and solutions.
    • Making everything a high priority. Most organizations can only prioritize one to two initiatives at a time.

    2.1 Build an opportunity profile

    Evaluate each opportunity

    Discussion Framework:

    In your discussion, evaluate each opportunity to assess assumptions, value drivers, and benefits.

    Ideas matter, but not all ideas are created equal. Now that you have elicited opportunities, discuss the assumptions, risks, and benefits associated with each new digital opportunity.

    Design Thinking

    Leverage the guiding principles as the guardrails to limit the scope of your new digital opportunities. You may want to consider taking a design-thinking approach to innovation by discussing the merits of each opportunity based on:

    • DesirabilityDesirability: People want it. Does the solution enable the organization to meet the expectations of stakeholders?
    • Feasibility
    • Feasibility: Able to Execute. Do we have the capabilities to deliver e.g., the right skills, partners, technology, and leadership?

    • Viability
    • Viability: Delivers Value. Will this idea meet business goals e.g., cost, revenue, and benefits?

    Source: Adapted from IDEO

    Transform the Business

    Must Prioritize

    Should Plan

    Drive Digital Experiences

    Build Digital Capabilities

    High Value/Low Complexity

    • stakeholders want it
    • easy to implement
    • capabilities exist to deliver
    • creates significant value
    • strategic growth = competitive advantage

    High Value/High Complexity

    • customers want it
    • not easy to implement without carefully planning
    • need to invest in developing capabilities
    • Competitive differentiator

    Low Value/Low Complexity

    • stakeholders don’t want it
    • easy to implement but takes resources away from priority
    • some capabilities exist
    • creates marginal value
    • minimal growth

    Low Value/High Complexity

    • stakeholders don’t want it
    • difficult to implement
    • need to invest in developing capabilities
    • no real strategic growth

    Could Have

    Don’t Need

    Transform Operations

    IMPACT

    COMPLEXITY

    Source: Adapted from MoSCoW prioritization model

    Exemplar: Opportunity Profile

    Example:

    An example of a template to capture the output of discussion.

    Automate the Registration Process Around Admission, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT)

    Description of Opportunity:

    ADT is a critical function of registration that triggers patient identification to support services and billing. Currently, ADT is a heavily manual process with a high degree of errors as a result of human intervention. There is an opportunity to leverage intelligent automation by using RPA and AI.

    Alignment With Business Objectives

    Improve patient outcome

    Drive operational efficiency and effectiveness

    Better experiences for patients

    Business Architecture

    This opportunity may impact the following business capabilities:

    • Referral evaluation
    • Admission, discharge, and transfer management
    • Scheduling management
    • Patient registry management
    • Provider registry management
    • Patient billing
    • Provider billing
    • Finance management
    • EHR/EMR integration management
    • Enterprise data warehouse for reporting
    • Provincial/state quality reporting

    Benefits & Outcomes

    • Reduce errors by manual registration
    • Improve turnaround time for registration
    • Create a consistent customer experience
    • Improve capacity
    • Virtualize low-value work

    Key Risks & Assumptions

    • Need to add skills & knowledge to maintain systems
    • Perception of job loss or change by unions
    • assume documentation of standard work for automation vs. non-standard

    Opportunity Owner

    VP, Health Information Management (HIM)

    Incremental Value

    Reduce errors in patient identity

    • Next Steps
    • Investigate use cases for RPA and AI in registration
    • Build business case for funding

    2.2 Business capabilities impact

    Understand the impact on your business capabilities

    Each opportunity has the potential to impact multiple areas of your business. Prioritize where to start acting on new opportunities based on your business objectives and capabilities.

    You will need:

    Industry Reference Architecture.Industry Reference Architecture

    Activity: 1-2 hours

    1. Using your industry reference architecture, highlight the business capabilities that may be impacted by the opportunity. Use a value chain analysis approach to help with this exercise.
    2. Referring to your Prioritized Opportunities for Transformation, prioritize areas to transform. Priority should be given to low maturity areas that are highly or urgently relevant to your overall strategic goals.
    +
    Prioritized Opportunities for Transformation.Prioritized Opportunities for TransformationPrioritized Business Capability Map.

    2.2 Business capabilities impact

    Start with a value chain analysis

    This will help identify the impact on your business capabilities.

    As we identify and prioritize the opportunities available to us, we need to assess impacts on value chains. Does the opportunity directly impact an existing value chain? Or does it open us to the creation of a new value chain?

    The image contains a screenshot of the value chain analysis.

    The value chain perspective allows an organization to identify how to best minimize or enhance impacts and generate value.

    As we move from opportunity to impact, it is important to break down opportunities into the relevant pieces so we can see a holistic picture of the sources of differentiation.

    Exemplar: Prioritized Business Capability Map

    The image contains a screenshot of the exemplar prioritized business capability map.

    In this example, intelligent automation for referral and admission would create opportunity to virtualize repeatable tasks.

    Phase 3

    ETransform Stakeholder Journeys

    Understand the impact of opportunities across the value chain and possibilities of new or better stakeholder experiences.

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify New Digitally Enabled Opportunities

    Evaluate Opportunities and Business Capabilities

    Transform Stakeholder Journeys

    Phase 3

    Identify opportunities to transform stakeholder experiences

    3.1 IDENTIFY STAKEHOLDER PERSONA

    Understand WHO gains value from the value chain

    To define a stakeholder scenario, you need to understand whom we are mapping for. Developing stakeholder personas is a great way to understand their needs through a lens of empathy.

    Consider:

    • Keep your stakeholder persona groupings to the core clusters typical of your industry.
    • See it from their perspective not the business’s.

    Avoid:

    • Don’t create a multitude of personas based on discrete nuances.
    3.2 BUILD A STAKEHOLDER JOURNEY

    Identify opportunities to transform the stakeholder experience

    A stakeholder or customer journey helps teams visualize the impact of a given opportunity through a value chain. This exercise uncovers the specific initiatives and features that should be considered in the evolution of the digital strategy.

    Consider:

    • Which stakeholders may be most affected by this opportunity?
    • How might stakeholders feel about a given solution as they move through the journey? What pain points can be solved?

    Avoid:

    • Simply listing steps in a process. Put yourself in the shoes of whoever’s journey you are mapping. What do they care about?
    • Choosing a stakeholder with limited involvement in the process.
    3.3 BREAKDOWN OPPORTUNITIES INTO INITIATIVES ALIGNED TO BUSINESS OBJECTIVES

    Unlock key initiatives to deliver value

    Opportunities need to be broken down into actionable initiatives that can be turned into business cases with clear goals, benefits realization, scope, work plans, and investment ask.

    Consider:

    • Multiple initiatives can be grouped into one opportunity that is similar or in phases.
    • Ensure the initiatives support and enable the business goals.

    Avoid:

    • Creating a laundry list of initiatives.
    • Initiatives that don’t align with business goals.

    Map Stakeholder Journey

    Conduct a journey mapping exercise to further refine and identify value streams to transform.

    Stakeholder Journey Mapping

    Digital Business Strategy Blueprint

    Activity: 4-6 hours

    Our analysts can guide and support you, where needed.

    1. First download the Define Your Digital Business Strategy blueprint to review the Stakeholder Journey Mapping exercise.
    2. Identify a stakeholder persona and a one-journey scenario.
    3. Map a stakeholder journey using a single persona across one-journey scenarios to identify pain points and opportunities to improve experiences and generate value.
    4. Consolidate a list of opportunities for business case prioritization.

    Key Concepts:

    Value Stream: a set of activities to create and capture value for and from the end consumer.

    Value Chain: a string of end-to-end processes that creates value for the consumer.

    Journey Scenario: a specific use case across a value chain (s).

    Members Engaged

    • CIO
    • Business Executives

    Info-Tech

    • Industry Analyst
    • Executive Advisor

    Stakeholder Persona.Stakeholder Persona

    1-Journey Use Case.1-Journey Use Case

    Map Stakeholder Journey 
Map Stakeholder Journey

    Content Leveraged

    • Stakeholder Persona
    • Journey Use Case
    • Map Stakeholder Journey

    Deliverable:

    1. Guiding principles
    2. Strategic growth opportunities

    Download the Define Your Digital Business Strategy blueprint for Customer Journey Mapping Activities

    3.1 Persona identification

    Identify a stakeholder persona and journey scenario

    From value chain to journey scenario.

    Stakeholder personas and scenarios help us build empathy towards our customers. It helps put us into the shoes of a stakeholder and relate to their experience to solve problems or understand how they experience the steps or processes required to accomplish a goal. A user persona is a valuable basis for stakeholder journey mapping.

    A stakeholder persona is a fictitious profile to represent a customer or a user segment. Creating this persona helps us understand who your customers really are and why they are using your service or product.

    A stakeholder scenario describes the situation the journey map addresses. Scenarios can be real (for existing products and services) or anticipated.

    Learn more about applying design thinking methodologies

    3.1 Persona identification

    Identify a stakeholder persona

    Who are you transforming for?

    To define a stakeholder scenario, we need to understand who we are mapping for. In each value chain, we identified a stakeholder who gains value from that value chain. We now need to develop a stakeholder persona: a representation of the end user to gain a strong understanding of who they are, what they need, and their pains and gains.

    One of the best ways to flesh out your stakeholder persona is to engage with the stakeholders directly or to gather the input of those who may engage with them within the organization.

    For example, if we want to define a journey map for a student, we might want to gather the input of students or teaching faculty that have firsthand encounters with different student types and are able to define a common student type.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Run a survey to understand your end users and develop a stronger picture of who they are and what they are seeking to gain from your organization.

    3.1 Persona identification

    Identify stakeholder scenarios to map

    For your digital strategy, leverage the existing and opportunity value chains identified in phases 1 and 2 for journey mapping.

    Identify two existing value chains to be transformed.

    In section 1, we identified existing value chains to be transformed. For example, your stakeholder persona is a registration clerk who is part of the Health Information Management team responsible for registering and adjudicating patient identity.

    The image contains a screenshot example of two existing value chains to be transformed.

    Identify one new value chain.

    In section 2, we identified a new value chain. However, for a new opportunity, the scenario is more complex as it may capture many different areas of a value chain. Subsequently, a journey map for a new opportunity may require mapping all parts of the value chain.

    The image contains a screenshot of one value chain.

    3.1 Persona identification

    Example Stakeholder Persona

    Stakeholder demographics

    Name: Anne

    Age: 35

    Occupation: HIM Clerk

    Location: Unity Hospital System

    Pains

    What are their frustrations, fears, and anxieties?

    • Volume of patients to schedule
    • Too many applications to access
    • Data quality is an error
    • Extensive manual entry of data prone to errors
    • Disruptions with calls from patients, doctors, and FOI requests

    What do they need to do?

    What do they want to get done? How will they know they are successful?

    • Automate some non-valuable tasks that can also reduce human errors. Allow patients to self-schedule online or answer FAQs via a chatbox. Would love to have a virtual triage to alleviate volume of calls and redirects.

    Gains

    What are their wants, needs, hopes, and dreams?

    • Reduce errors in data entry for patient identity (reduce manual look-ups).
    • Have standard requests go through a chatbot.
    • Have physicians automate billing through front-end speech recognition software.

    3.1 Persona identification

    Define a journey statement for mapping

    Now that we understand who we are mapping for, we need to define a journey statement to capture the stakeholder journey.

    Leverage the following format to define the journey statement.

    “As a [stakeholder], I need to [prioritized value chain task], so that I can [desired result or overall goal].”

    The image contains a screenshot of a journey statement for mapping.

    3.2 Stakeholder Journey-Map

    Leverage customer journey mapping to capture value chains to be transformed

    Conduct a journey mapping exercise to identify opportunities for innovation or automation.

    A journey-based approach helps an organization understand how a stakeholder moves through a process and interacts with the organization in the form of touch points, channels, and supporting characters. By identifying pain points in the journey and the activity types, we can identify opportunities for innovation and automation along the journey.

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of journey mapping.

    Embrace design-thinking methodologies to elevate the stakeholder journey and build a competitive advantage for your organization.

    3.2 Stakeholder Journey-Map

    Key Concepts

    0. Name: Annie Smith

    Age: 35

    Occupation: HIM Registration Clerk for Unity Hospital System

    Key Concepts.0.Stakeholder Persona

    A fictitious profile of a representative stakeholder group that shares a common yet discrete set of characteristics that embodies how they think, feel, and act.

    1. Journey (Value Chain)

    Describes the end-to-end steps or processes that a customer takes across the value chain that groups a set of activities, interactions, touch-points, and experiences.

    2. Persona’s Goals

    Exemplifies what the persona is thinking and wanting across each specific step of their journey.

    3. Nature of Activity (see detailed definition in this section)

    This section captures two key components: 1) the description of the action or interaction between the personas to achieve their goals, and 2) the classification of the activity to determine the feasibility for automation. The type is based on four main characteristics: 1) routine cognitive, 2) non-routine cognitive , 3) routine manual, and 4) non-routine manual.

    4. Type of Touch-Point

    The channel by which a persona interacts or touches products, services, the organization, or information.

    5. Key Moments & Pain Points

    Captures the emotional experience and value of the persona across each step and interaction.

    6. Metrics

    This section captures the KPIs used to measure the experience, process or activity today. Future KPIs will need to be developed to measure the opportunities.

    7. Opportunities refer to both the possible initiatives to address the persona’s pain points, and the ability to enable business goals.

    3.2 Stakeholder Journey-Map

    Opportunities for Automation: Nature of Activity

    Example
    We identified opportunities for automation

    Categorize the activity type to identify opportunities for automation. While there is no perfect framework for automation, this 4x4 matrix provides a general guide to identifying automation opportunities for consideration.

    Automation example list.Automation Quadrant Analysis

    Info-Tech Insight

    Automation is more than a 1:1 relationship between the defined task or job and automation. When considering automation, look for opportunities to: 1) streamline across multiple processes, 2) utilize artificial intelligence to augment or virtualize manual tasks, and 3) create more structured data to allow for improved data quality over the long-term.

    3.2 Stakeholder Journey-Map

    Example of stakeholder journey output: Healthcare

    Stakeholder: HIM Clerks

    Journey: Follow-up visit of 80-year-old diabetes patient at diabetic clinic outpatient

    Journey

    (Value Chain)

    AppointmentRegistrationIdentity ReconciliationEligibility VerificationTreatment Consult

    Persona’s Goals

    • Confirm appointment
    • Verify referral through provider registry
    • Request medical insurance or care card
    • Enroll patient into CIS
    • Patient registry validation
    • Secondary identification request
    • Verify eligibility through the patient registry
    • Schedule follow referrals & appointments
    • Coding for billing

    Nature of Activity

    Priority

    Priority

    Investigate – ROI

    Investigate – ROI

    Defer

    Type of Touchpoint

    • Telephone (land/mobile)
    • Email
    • CIS Application
    • Verbal
    • Patient registry system
    • Telephone
    • Patient and provider registry
    • CIS
    • Email, call, verbal
    • Physician billing
    • Hospital ERP
    • CIS
    • Paper appointments

    Pain Points & Gains

    • Volume of calls
    • Manual scheduling
    • Too many applications
    • Data entry errors
    • Limited languages
    • Too many applications
    • Data entry errors
    • Too many applications
    • Limited languages
    • Ask patients to repeat info
    • Data entry errors
    • Too many applications
    • Limited languages
    • Ask patients to repeat info
    • Patient identity not linked to physician billing
    • Manual coding entry

    Metrics

    Time to appointment

    Time to enrollment

    Patient mis-match

    Provider mis-match

    Percentage of errors in billing codes

    Opportunities

    • Patient scheduling portal (24/7)
    • Use of AI and chatbots
    • Automate patient matching index digitalization and integration
    • Automate provider matching index digitalization and integration
    • Natural language processing using front-end speech recognition software for billing

    Break opportunities into a series of initiatives aligned to business objectives

    Opportunity 1

    Virtual Registration

    »

    Business Goals

    Initiatives

    Health Outcomes

    Stakeholder Experience

    New Models of Care

    Operational Efficiency

    • Enterprise master patient index integration with patient registry
    • Intelligent automation for outpatient department
    • Customer service chat box for triage FOI1
    • Front-end speech recognition for billing (FESR)

    Opportunity 2

    Machine Learning Pre-Cancer Diagnosis

    »

    Business Goals

    Initiatives

    Health Outcomes

    Stakeholder Experience

    New Models of Care

    Operational Efficiency

    • Enterprise Datawarehouse architecture (build data lake)
    • Build genomics analytics capabilities e.g., recruitment, data-quality review
    • Implementation of machine learning software
    • Supply chain integration with ERP for medical and research supplies
    FOI = Freedom of Information

    Info-Tech Insight

    Evaluate if an opportunity will require a series of discrete activities to execute and/or if they can be a stand-alone initiative.

    Now you are ready to select and prioritize digital initiatives for business case development

    After completing all three phases of activities in this blueprint, you will have compiled a list of new and planned digital initiatives for prioritization and business case development in the next phase.

    Consolidated List of Digital Initiatives.

    Example: Consolidated List of Digital Initiatives

    The next step will focus on prioritizing and building a business case for your top digital initiatives.

    IT Roadmap for your Digital Business Strategy.

    Appendix: Additional Examples

    From trend to leapfrog ideas

    Every idea is a good one, unless you need one that works.

    Additional Examples
    Examples of leapfrog ideas that can generate opportunities for consideration

    Example 1 Finance

    Trend

    New Customer

    New Market

    New Business or Operating Model

    New Service Offering

    What trend(s) pose a significant impact on your business?

    New customer segments

    Enter or create new markets

    Adjust the business or operating model to capture change in how the business creates and delivers value

    Introduce new digital products, services, and experiences

    Open banking

    Account integrators (AISPs)

    Payment integrators
    (PISPs)

    Data monetization

    Social payments

    Example 2: Retail

    Trend

    New Customer

    New Market

    New Business or Operating Model

    New Service Offering

    What trend(s) pose a significant impact on your business?

    New customer segments

    Enter or create new markets

    Adjust the business or operating model to capture change in how the business creates and delivers value

    Introduce new digital products, services, and experiences

    Virtual cashier

    (RFID Enablement)

    Big-box retailers

    Brick & mortar stores

    Automated stores driving new customer experiences

    Digital cart

    From trend to leapfrog ideas

    Every idea is a good one, unless you need one that works.

    Additional Exemplars in Appendix

    Examples of leapfrog ideas that can generate opportunities for consideration

    Example 3:

    Manufacturing

    Trend

    New Customer

    New Market

    New Business or

    Operating Model

    New Service Offering

    What trend(s) pose a significant impact on your business?

    New customer segments

    Enter or create new markets

    Adjust the business or operating model to capture change in how the business creates and delivers value

    Introduce new digital products, services, and experiences

    IT/OT convergence

    Value-added resellers

    New geographies

    Train quality-control algorithms and sell as a service to other manufacturers

    Quality control as a service

    Case Study: International Airport

    Persona Journey Map: International/Domestic Departure

    Persona: Super Traveler

    Name: Annie Smith

    Age: 35

    Occupation: Engineer, Global Consultant

    Journey Activity Name: Inspired to Travel

    Persona’s Goals

    What Am I Thinking?

    • I am planning on traveling to Copenhagen, Denmark for work.
    • It’s my first time and I need to gather information about the destination, accommodation, costs, departure information, bag weight, etc..

    Nature of Activity

    What Am I Doing?

    • Logging onto airline website
    • Confirming departure gates

    Type of Touchpoint

    • Airport rewards program
    • Airport Website
    • Online hotel eCommerce
    • Social media
    • Transportation services on mobile

    Key moments & pain points

    How Am I Feeling?

    • Frustrated because the airport website is difficult to navigate to get information
    • Annoyed because there is no FAQ online and I have to call; there’s a long wait to speak to someone.
    • Stress & uncertainty (cancellation, logistics, insurance, etc..)

    Metrics

    • Travel dates
    • Trip price & budget

    Opportunities

    • Tailored communication based on search history
    • Specific messaging (e.g., alerts for COVID-19, changes in events, etc.)
    • Interactive VR experience that guides customers through the airport as a navigator

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Tech Trends and Priorities Research Center

    • Access Info-Tech’s Tech Trends reports and research center to learn about current industry trends, shifts in markets, and disruptions that are impacting your industry and sector. This is a great starting place to gain insights into how the ecosystem is changing your business and the impact of these changes on IT.

    Digital Business Strategy

    • Leverage Info-Tech’s Digital Business Strategy to identify opportunities to transform the customer experience.

    Industry Reference Architecture

    • Access Info-Tech’s Industry coverage to accelerate your understanding of your business capabilities and opportunities for automation.

    Contact Your Account Manager

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Joanne Lee

    Joanne Lee

    Principal, Research Director, CIO Strategy

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kim Osborne-Rodgriguez

    Kim Osborne-Rodgriguez

    Research Director, CIO Strategy

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joanne is an executive with over 25 years of in digital technology and management consulting across both public and private entities from solution delivery to organizational redesign across Canada and globally.

    Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Joanne was a management consultant within KPMG’s CIO management consulting services and the Western Canada Digital Health Practice lead. She has held several executive roles in the industry with the most recent position as Chief Program Officer for a large $450M EHR implementation. Her expertise spans cloud strategy, organizational design, data and analytics, governance, process redesign, transformation, and PPM. She is passionate about connecting people, concepts, and capital.

    Joanne holds a Master’s in Business and Health Policy from the University of Toronto and a Bachelor of Science (Nursing) from the University of British Columbia.

    Kim is a professional engineer and Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) with over a decade of experience in management and engineering consulting spanning healthcare, higher education, and commercial sectors. She has worked on some of the largest hospital construction projects in Canada, from early visioning and IT strategy through to design, specifications, and construction administration. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach to digital transformation, with a track record of supporting successful implementations.

    Kim holds a Bachelor’s degree in Mechatronics Engineering from University of Waterloo.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Jack Hakimian

    Jack Hakimian

    Vice President, Research

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Charl Lombard.

    Charl Lombard

    President, Digital Transformation Consulting

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jack has more than 25 years of technology and management consulting experience. He has served multi-billion dollar organizations in multiple industries including Financial Services and Telecommunications. Jack also served a number of large public sector institutions.

    Prior to joining the Info-Tech Research Group, he worked for leading consulting players such as Accenture, Deloitte, EY, and IBM.

    Jack led digital business strategy engagements as well as corporate strategy and M&A advisory services for clients across North America, Europe, the Middle East, and Africa. He is a seasoned technology consultant who has developed IT strategies and technology roadmaps, led large business transformations, established data governance programs, and managed the deployment of mission-critical CRM and ERP applications.

    He is a frequent speaker and panelist at technology and innovation conferences and events and holds a Master’s degree in Computer Engineering as well as an MBA from the ESCP-EAP European School of Management.

    Charl has more than 20 years of professional services experience, “majoring” in digital transformation and strategic topics. He has led multiple successful Digital Transformation programs across a range of industries like Information technology, hospitality, Advanced Industries, High Tech, Entertainment, Travel and Transport, Insurance & Financial Services, Metals & Mining, Electric Power, Renewable Energy, Telecoms, Manufacturing) across different geographics (i.e., North America, EU, Africa) in both private and public sectors.

    Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Charl was the Vice President of Global Product Management and Strategy (Saber Hospitality Solution), Associate President, McKinsey Transformation Practice, e-Business Practice for PwC, and tech start-up founder and investor.

    Charl is a frequent speaker at innovation and digital transformation conferences and holds an MBA from the University of Cape Town Graduate School of Business, and a bachelor’s degree from the University of Pretoria, South Africa.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Mike Tweedie

    Mike Tweedie

    Practice Lead, CIO Strategy

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Michael Alemany

    Michael Alemany

    Vice President, Digital Transformation Consulting

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike Tweedie brings over 25 years of experience as a technology executive. He’s led several large transformation projects across core infrastructure, application, and IT services as the head of Technology at ADP Canada. He was also the Head of Engineering and Service Offerings for a large French IT services firm, focused on cloud adoption and complex ERP deployment and management.

    Mike holds a Bachelor’s degree in Architecture from Ryerson University.

    Michael is a leader in Info-Tech’s digital transformation consulting practice. He brings over 10 years of experience working with companies across a range of industries. His work experience includes ~4.5 years at McKinsey & Company where he led large-scale transformations for fortune 500 companies. Prior to joining Info-Tech, he worked for Sabre Corp., an SaaS platform provider for the travel and hospitality sector, leading Product Strategy & Operations. Michael holds an MBA from the Tuck School of Business at Dartmouth and a B.S in Business Strategy from Brigham Young University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Duane Cooney

    Duane Cooney

    Executive Counselor, Healthcare

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Denis Goulet

    Denis Goulet

    Senior Workshop Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Duane brings over 30 years of experiences a healthcare IT leader with a passion for the transformation of people, processes, and technology. He has led large-scale health technology transformation and operations across the enterprise. Before joining Info-Tech, Duane served as the Deputy CIO, Senior Information Technology Director, and Enterprise Architect for both public not-for-profit and private sectors. He has a Bachelors in Computer Science and is a graduate of EDS Operations. He holds certifications in EHR, LEAN/Agile, ITIL, and PMP.

    Denis is an IAF Certified Professional Facilitator who has helped organizations and technology executives develop IT strategies for small to large global enterprises. He firmly believes in a collaborative value-driven approach. Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Denis held several industry positions as CIO, Chief Administrative Office (City Manager), General Manager, and Vice President of Engineering. Denis holds an MBA from Queen’s University and a Diploma in Technology Engineering and Executive Municipal Management.

    Jay Cappis.

    Jay Cappis

    Executive Advisor, Real-Estate

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Brick.

    Christine Brick

    Executive Advisor, Financial Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jay brings over 30 years of experience in management and technology across small and medium enterprises to large global enterprises including Exxon and Xerox. His cross-industry experience includes professional services, commercial real estate, oil and gas, digital start-ups, insurance, and aerospace. Jay has led business process improvements and change management and has expertise in software development lifecycle management and DevOps practices.

    Christine brings over 20 years in IT transformation across DevOps, infrastructure, operations, supply chain, IT Strategy, modernization, cost optimization, data management, and operational risk. She brings expertise in business transformation, mergers and acquisitions, vendor selection, and contract management.

    Bibliography

    Bhatia, AD. “Transforming through disruptions: A conversation with Dan Antonelli. Transformation Insights.” McKinsey & Company. January 31, 2022. Web
    Bertoletti, Antonella and Peter Eeles. “Use an IT Maturity Model.” IBM Garage Methodology. Web. accessed May 30, 2022.
    Catlin, Tanguy, Jay Scanlan, and Paul Willmott. “Raising your Digital Quotient.” McKinsey Quarterly. June 1, 2015. Article
    Custers, Heidi. “Digital Blueprint. Reference Architecture. Deloitte Digital.Accessed May 15, 2022.
    Coundouris, Anthony. “Reviewed: The Top 5 Digital Transformation Frameworks in 2020.” Run-frictionless Blog. Accessed May 15, 2022. Web.
    Daub, Matthias and Anna Wiesinger. “Acquiring the Capabilities you need to go digital.” Business Technology Office – McKinsey and Company. March 2015. Web.
    De La Boutetiere, Alberto Montagner and Angelika Reich. “Unlocking success in digital transformations.” McKinsey and Company. October 2018. Web.
    “Design Thinking Defined.” IDEO.com. November 21, 2022. Web.
    Dorner, Karle and David Edelman. “What ‘Digital’ really means.” McKinsey Digital. July 2015. Web
    “Everything Changed. Or Did it? Harvey Nash KPMG CIO Survey 2020.” KPMG, 2020
    Kane, Gerald C., Doug Palmer, Ahn Nguyen Phillips, David Kiron, Natasha Buckley. “Aligning the organization for its digital future.” Findings from the 2016 Digital Business Global Executive Study and Research Project. MIT Sloan Management Review. July 26, 2016. Web
    LaBerge, Laura, et al. “How COVID-19 has pushed companies over the technology tipping point—and transformed business forever.” McKinsey, 5 Oct. 2020. Accessed 14 June 2021
    Mindtools Content Team. “Cause and Effect Analysis.” Mindtools.com. November 21, 2022. Web.
    “Strategic Foresight.” OECD.org. November 21, 2022, Web
    Sall, Sherman, Dan Lichtenfeld. “The Digital ME Method. Turning digital opportunities into customer engagement and business growth.” Sygnific. 2017. Web.
    Scoblic, J. Peter. “Learning from the Future. How to make robust strategy in times of deep uncertainty.” Harvard Business Review, August 2020.
    Silva, Bernardo and Schoenwaelder, Tom. ‘Why Good Strategies fail. Addressing the three critical strategic tensions.” Deloitte Monitor Group. 2019.

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}295|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $52,211 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management

    You have a mandate to create an accurate and actionable database of the IT assets in your environment, but:

    • The data you have is often incomplete or wrong.
    • Processes are broken or non-existent.
    • Your tools aren’t up to the task of tracking ever more hardware, software, and relevant metadata.
    • The role of stakeholders outside the core ITAM team isn’t well defined or understood.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides accurate, accessible, actionable data on IT assets. But there’s no value in data for data’s sake. Enable collaboration between IT asset managers, business leaders, and IT leaders to develop an ITAM strategy that maximizes the value they can deliver as service providers.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop an approach and strategy for ITAM that is sustainable and aligned with your business priorities.
    • Clarify the structure for the ITAM program, including scope, responsibility and accountability, centralization vs. decentralization, outsourcing vs. insourcing, and more.
    • Create a practical roadmap to guide improvement.
    • Summarize your strategy and approach using Info-Tech’s templates for review with stakeholders.

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy – A methodology to create a business-aligned, coherent, and durable approach to ITAM.

    This two-phase, step-by-step methodology will guide you through the activities to build a business-aligned, coherent, and durable approach to ITAM. Review the executive brief at the start of the slide deck for an overview of the methodology and the value it can provide to your organization.

    • Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy – Phases 1-2

    2. ITAM Strategy Template – A presentation-ready repository for the work done as you define your ITAM approach.

    Use this template to document your IT asset management strategy and approach.

    • ITAM Strategy Template

    3. IT Asset Estimations Tracker – A rough-and-ready inventory exercise to help you evaluate the work ahead of you.

    Use this tool to estimate key data points related to your IT asset estate, as well as your confidence in your estimates.

    • IT Asset Estimations Tracker

    Infographic

    Workshop: Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify ITAM Priorities & Goals, Maturity, Metrics and KPIs

    The Purpose

    Align key stakeholders to the potential strategic value of the IT asset management practice.

    Ensure the ITAM practice is focused on business-aligned goals.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Define a business-aligned direction and expected outcomes for your ITAM program.

    Activities

    1.1 Brainstorm ITAM opportunities and challenges.

    1.2 Conduct an executive alignment working session.

    1.3 Set ITAM priorities, goals and tactics.

    1.4 Identify target and current state ITAM maturity.

    Outputs

    ITAM opportunities and challenges

    Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities.

    ITAM metrics and KPIs

    ITAM maturity

    2 Identify Your Approach to Support ITAM Priorities and Goals

    The Purpose

    Translate goals into specific and coherent actions to enable your ITAM practice to deliver business value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A business-aligned approach to ITAM, encompassing scope, structure, tools, audits, budgets, documentation and more.

    A high-level roadmap to achieve your vision for the ITAM practice.

    Activities

    2.1 Define ITAM scope.

    2.2 Acquire ITAM services (outsourcing and contracting).

    2.3 Centralize or decentralize ITAM capabilities.

    2.4 Create a RACI for the ITAM practice.

    2.5 Align ITAM with other service management practices.

    2.6 Evaluate ITAM tools and integrations.

    2.7 Create a plan for internal and external audits.

    2.8 Improve your budget processes.

    2.9 Establish a documentation framework.

    2.10 Create a roadmap and communication plan.

    Outputs

    Your ITAM approach

    ITAM roadmap and communication plan

    Further reading

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy

    Define your business-aligned approach to ITAM.

    Table of Contents

    4 Analyst Perspective

    5 Executive Summary

    17 Phase 1: Establish Business-Aligned ITAM Goals and Priorities

    59 Phase 2: Support ITAM Goals and Priorities

    116 Bibliography

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy

    Define your business-aligned approach to ITAM.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Track hardware and software. Seems easy, right?

    It’s often taken for granted that IT can easily and accurately provide definitive answers to questions like “how many laptops do we have at Site 1?” or “do we have the right number of SQL licenses?” or “how much do we need to budget for device replacements next year?” After all, don’t we know what we have?

    IT can’t easily provide these answers because to do so you must track hardware and software throughout its lifecycle – which is not easy. And unfortunately, you often need to respond to these questions on very short notice because of an audit or to support a budgeting exercise.

    IT Asset Management (ITAM) is the solution. It’s not a new solution – the discipline has been around for decades. But the key to success is to deploy the practice in a way that is sustainable, right-sized, and maximizes value.

    Use our practical methodology to develop and document your approach to ITAM that is aligned with the goals of your organization.

    Photo of Andrew Sharp, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Andrew Sharp
    Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Realize the value of asset management

    Cost optimization, application rationalization and reduction of technical debt are all considered valuable to right-size spending and improve service outcomes. Without access to accurate data, these activities require significant investments of time and effort, starting with creation of point-in-time inventories, which lengthens the timeline to reaching project value and may still not be accurate.

    Cost optimization and reduction of technical debt should be part of your culture and technical roadmap rather than one-off projects. Why? Access to accurate information enables the organization to quickly make decisions and pivot plans as needed. Through asset management, ongoing harvest and redeployment of assets improves utilization-to-spend ratios. We would never see any organization saying, “We’ve closed our year end books, let’s fire the accountants,” but often see this valuable service relegated to the back burner. Similar to the philosophy that “the best time to plant a tree is 20 years ago and the next best time is now,” the sooner you can start to collect, validate, and analyze data, the sooner you will find value in it.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You have a mandate to create an accurate and actionable database of the IT assets in your environment, but:

    • The data you have is often incomplete or wrong.
    • Processes are broken or non-existent.
    • Your tools aren’t up to the task of tracking ever more hardware, software, and relevant metadata.
    • The role of stakeholders outside the core ITAM team isn’t well defined or understood.
    Common Obstacles

    It is challenging to make needed changes because:

    • There’s cultural resistance to asset tracking, it’s seen as busywork that doesn’t clearly create value.
    • Decentralized IT teams aren’t generating the data required to track hardware and licenses.
    • ITAM can’t direct needed tool improvements because the admins don’t report to ITAM.
    • It’s hard to find time to improve processes given the day-to-day demands on your time.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Develop an approach and strategy for ITAM that is sustainable and aligned with your business priorities.
    • Clarify the structure for the ITAM program, including scope, responsibility and accountability, centralization vs. decentralization, outsourcing vs. insourcing, and more.
    • Create a practical roadmap to guide improvement.
    • Summarize your strategy and approach using Info-Tech’s templates for review with stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides accurate, accessible, actionable data on IT assets. But there’s no value in data for data’s sake. Enable collaboration between IT asset managers, business leaders, and IT leaders to develop an ITAM strategy that maximizes the value they can deliver as service providers.

    Unlock business value with IT asset management

    • IT asset management (ITAM) is the practice of maintaining accurate, accessible, and actionable data on the assets within the organization’s IT estate. Each IT asset will have a record that tracks it across its lifecycle from purchase to disposal.
    • ITAM’s value is realized through other processes and practice areas that can leverage ITAM data to manage risk, improve IT services, and control costs.
    • Develop an approach to ITAM that maximizes the value delivered to the business and IT. ITAM succeeds when its partners succeed at delivering business value, and it fails when it doesn’t show value to those partners.

    This blueprint will help you develop your approach for the management of IT hardware and software, including cloud services. Leverage other Info-Tech methodologies to dive directly into developing hardware asset management procedures, software asset management procedures, or to implement configuration management best practices.

    Info-Tech Members report significant savings from implementing our hardware and software asset management frameworks. In order to maximize value from the process-focused methodologies below, develop your ITAM strategy first.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management (Based on Info-Tech Measured Value Surveys results from clients working through these blueprints, as of February 2022.)

    9.6/10

    $23k

    32

    Overall Impact Average $ Saved Average Days Saved
    Implement Software Asset Management (Based on Info-Tech Measured Value Surveys results from clients working through these blueprints, as of February 2022.)

    9.0/10

    $12k

    5

    Overall Impact Average $ Saved Average Days Saved

    ITAM provides both early and ongoing value

    ITAM isn’t one-and-done. Properly supported, your ITAM practice will deliver up-front value that will help demonstrate the value ongoing ITAM can offer through the maintenance of an accurate, accessible, and actionable ITAM database.

    Example: Software Savings from ITAM



    This chart shows the money saved between the first quote and the final price for software and maintenance by a five-person ITAM team. Over a year and a half, they saved their organization a total of $7.5 million from a first quote total of $21 million over that period.

    This is a perfect example of the direct value that ITAM can provide on an ongoing basis to the organization, when properly supported and integrated with IT and the business.

    Examples of up-front value delivered in the first year of the ITAM practice:

    • Save money by reviewing and renegotiating critical, high-spend, and undermanaged software and service contracts.
    • Redeploy or dispose of clearly unused hardware and software.
    • Develop and enforce standards for basic hardware and software.
    • Improve ITAM data quality and build trust in the results.

    Examples of long-term value from ongoing governance, management, and operational ITAM activities:

    • Optimize spend: Reallocate unused hardware and software, end unneeded service agreements, and manage renewals and audits.
    • Reduce risk: Provide comprehensive asset data for security controls development and incident management; manage equipment disposal.
    • Improve IT service: Support incident, problem, request, and change management with ITAM data. Develop new solutions with an understanding of what you have already.

    Common obstacles

    The rulebook is available, but hard to follow
    • ITAM takes a village, but stakeholders aren’t aware of their role. ITAM processes rely on technicians to update asset records, vendors to supply asset data, administrators to manage tools, leadership to provide direction and support, and more.
    • Constant change in the IT and business environment undermines the accuracy of ITAM records (e.g. licensing and contract changes, technology changes that break discovery tools, personnel and organizational changes).
    • Improvement efforts are overwhelmed by day-to-day activities. One study found that 83% of SAM teams’ time is consumed by audit-related activities. (Flexera State of ITAM Report 2022) A lack of improvement becomes a vicious cycle when stakeholders who don’t see the value of ITAM decline to dedicate resources for improvement.
    • Stakeholders expect ITAM tools to be a cure-all, but even at their best, they can’t provide needed answers without some level of configuration, manual input, and supervision.
    • There’s often a struggle to connect ITAM to value. For example, respondents to Info-Tech’s Management & Governance Diagnostic consistently rank ITAM as less important than other processes that ITAM directly supports (e.g. budget management and budget optimization). (Info-Tech MGD Diagnostic (n=972 unique organizations))
    ITAM is a mature discipline with well-established standards, certifications, and tools, but we still struggle with it.
    • Only 28% of SAM teams track IaaS and PaaS spend, and only 35% of SAM teams track SaaS usage.
    • Increasing SAM maturity is a challenge for 76% of organizations.
    • 10% of organizations surveyed have spent more than $5 million in the last three years in audit penalties and true-ups.
    • Half of all of organizations lack a viable SAM tool.
    • Seventy percent of SAM teams have a shortfall of qualified resources.
    • (Flexera State of ITAM Report 2022)

    Info-Tech's IT Asset Management Framework (ITAM)

    Adopt, manage, and mature activities to enable business value thorugh actionable, accessible, and accurate ITAM data

    Logo for Info-Tech Research Group. Enable Business Value Logo for #iTRG.
    Business-Aligned Spend
    Optimization and Transparency
    Facilitate IT Services
    and Products
    Actionable, Accessible,
    and Accurate Data
    Context-Aware Risk Management
    and Security Controls

    Plan & Govern

    Business Goals, Risks, and Structure
    • ITAM Goals & Priorities
    • Roles, Accountability, Responsibilities
    • Scope
    Ongoing Management Commitment
    • Resourcing & Funding
    • Policies & Enforcement
    • Continuous Improvement
    Culture
    • ITAM Education, Awareness & Training
    • Organizational Change Management
    Section title 'Operate' with a cycle surrounding key components of Operate: 'Data Collection & Validation', 'Tool Administration', 'License Management', and 'Lease Management'. The cycle consists of 'Request', 'Procure', 'Receive', 'Deploy', 'Manage', 'Retire & Dispose', and back to 'Request'.

    Build & Manage

    Tools & Data
    • ITAM Tool Selection & Deployment
    • Configuration Management Synchronization
    • IT Service Management Integration
    Process
    • Process Management
    • Data & Process Audits
    • Document Management
    People, Policies, and Providers
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Technology Standardization
    • Vendor & Contract Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides actionable, accessible, and accurate data on IT assets. But there's no value in data for data's sake. Use this methodology to enable collaboration between ITAM, the business, and IT to develop an approach to ITAM that maximizes the value the ITAM team can deliver as service providers.

    Key deliverable

    IT asset management requires ongoing practice – you can’t just implement it and walk away.

    Our methodology will help you build a business-aligned strategy and approach for your ITAM practice with the following outputs:

    • Business-aligned ITAM priorities, opportunities, and goals.
    • Current and target state ITAM maturity.
    • Metrics and KPIs.
    • Roles, responsibilities, and accountability.
    • Insourcing, outsourcing, and (de)centralization.
    • Tools and technology.
    • A documentation framework.
    • Initiatives, a roadmap, and a communication plan.
    Each step of this blueprint is designed to help you create your IT asset management strategy:
    Sample of Info-Tech's key deliverable 'IT Asset Management' blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s methodology to develop an IT asset management strategy

    1. Establish business-aligned ITAM goals and priorities 2. Identify your approach to support ITAM priorities and goals
    Phase Steps
    • 1.1 Define ITAM and brainstorm opportunities and challenges.
    • Executive Alignment Working Session:
    • 1.2 Review organizational priorities, strategy, and key initiatives.
    • 1.3 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities and priorities.
    • 1.4 Identify business-aligned ITAM goals and target maturity.
    • 1.5 Write mission and vision statements.
    • 1.6 Define ITAM metrics and KPIs.
    • 2.1 Define ITAM scope.
    • 2.2 Acquire ITAM services (outsourcing and contracting).
    • 2.3 Centralize or decentralize ITAM capabilities.
    • 2.4 Create a RACI for the ITAM practice.
    • 2.5 Align ITAM with other service management practices.
    • 2.6 Evaluate ITAM tools and integrations.
    • 2.7 Create a plan for internal and external audits.
    • 2.8 Improve your budget processes.
    • 2.9 Establish a documentation framework.
    • 2.10 Create a roadmap and communication plan.
    Phase Outcomes Defined, business-aligned goals and priorities for ITAM. Establish an approach to achieving ITAM goals and priorities including scope, structure, tools, service management integrations, documentation, and more.
    Project Outcomes Develop an approach and strategy for ITAM that is sustainable and aligned with your business priorities.

    Insight Summary

    There’s no value in data for data’s sake

    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides accurate, accessible, actionable data on IT assets. Enable collaboration between IT asset managers, business leaders, and IT leaders to develop an approach to ITAM that maximizes the value they can deliver as service providers.

    Service provider to a service provider

    ITAM is often viewed (when it’s viewed at all) as a low-value administrative task that doesn’t directly drive business value. This can make it challenging to build a case for funding and resources.

    Your ITAM strategy is a critical component to help you define how ITAM can best deliver value to your organization, and to stop creating data for the sake of data or just to fight the next fire.

    Collaboration over order-taking

    To align ITAM practices to deliver organizational value, you need a very clear understanding of the organization’s goals – both in the moment and as they change over time.

    Ensure your ITAM team has clear line of sight to business strategy, objectives, and decision-makers, so you can continue to deliver value as priorities change

    Embrace dotted lines

    ITAM teams rely heavily on staff, systems, and data beyond their direct area of control. Identify how you will influence key stakeholders, including technicians, administrators, and business partners.

    Help them understand how ITAM success relies on their support, and highlight how their contributions have created organizational value to encourage ongoing support.

    Project benefits

    Benefits for IT
    • Set a foundation and direction for an ITAM practice that will allow IT to manage risk, optimize spend, and enhance services in line with business requirements.
    • Establish accountability and responsibility for essential ITAM activities. Decide where to centralize or decentralize accountability and authority. Identify where outsourcing could add value.
    • Create a roadmap with concrete, practical next steps to develop an effective, right-sized ITAM practice.
    Stock image of a trophy. Benefits for the business
    • Plan and control technology spend with confidence based on trustworthy ITAM data.
    • Enhance IT’s ability to rapidly and effectively support new priorities and launch new projects. Effective ITAM can support more streamlined procurement, deployment, and management of assets.
    • Implement security controls that reflect your total technology footprint. Reduce the risk that a forgotten device or unmanaged software turns your organization into the next Colonial Pipeline.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI around 12 calls over the course of 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Review business priorities.

    Call #3: Identify ITAM goals & target maturity.

    Call #4: Identify metrics and KPIs. Call #5: Define ITAM scope.

    Call #6: Acquire ITAM services.

    Call #7: ITAM structure and RACI.

    Call #8: ITAM and service management.

    Tools and integrations.

    Call #10: Internal and external audits.

    Call #11: Budgets & documentation

    Call #12: Roadmap, comms plan. Wrap-up.

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Identify ITAM priorities & goals, maturity, metrics and KPIs
    Identify your approach to support ITAM priorities and goals
    Next Steps and wrap-Up (offsite)
    Activities

    1.1 Define ITAM.

    1.2 Brainstorm ITAM opportunities and challenges.

    Conduct an executive alignment working session:

    1.3 Review organizational priorities, strategy, and key initiatives.

    1.4 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities.

    1.5 Set ITAM priorities.

    2.1 Translate opportunities into ITAM goals and tactics.

    2.2 Identify target and current state ITAM maturity.

    2.3 Create mission and vision statements.

    2.4 Identify key ITAM metrics and KPIs.

    3.1 Define ITAM scope.

    3.2 Acquire ITAM services (outsourcing and contracting)

    3.3 Centralize or decentralize ITAM capabilities.

    3.4 Create a RACI for the ITAM practice.

    3.5 Align ITAM with other service management practices.

    3.6 Evaluate ITAM tools and integrations.

    4.1 Create a plan for internal and external audits.

    4.2 Improve your budget processes.

    4.3 Establish a documentation framework and identify documentation gaps.

    4.4 Create a roadmap and communication plan.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. ITAM opportunities and challenges.
    2. Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities.
    3. Set ITAM priorities.
    1. ITAM goals and tactics.
    2. Current and target ITAM maturity.
    3. Mission and vision statements.
    4. ITAM metrics and KPIs.
    1. Decisions that will shape your ITAM approach, including:
      1. What’s in scope (hardware, software, and cloud services).
      2. Where to centralize, decentralize, or outsource ITAM activities.
      3. Accountability, responsibility, and structure for ITAM activities.
      4. Service management alignment, tooling gaps, audit plans, budget processes, and required documentation.
    2. A roadmap and communication plan.
    1. Your completed ITAM strategy template.
    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy

    Phase 1:

    Establish business-aligned ITAM goals and priorities

    Phase 1

    1.1 Define ITAM and brainstorm opportunities and challenges.

    Executive Alignment Working Session:

    1.2 Review organizational priorities, strategy, and key initiatives.

    1.3 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities & priorities.

    1.4 Identify business-aligned ITAM goals and target maturity.

    1.5 Write mission and vision statements.

    1.6 Define ITAM metrics and KPIs.

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define ITAM scope.

    2.2 Acquire ITAM services (outsourcing and contracting).

    2.3 Centralize or decentralize ITAM capabilities.

    2.4 Create a RACI for the ITAM practice.

    2.5 Align ITAM with other service management practices.

    2.6 Evaluate ITAM tools and integrations.

    2.7 Create a plan for internal and external audits.

    2.8 Improve your budget processes.

    2.9 Establish a documentation framework.

    2.10 Create a roadmap and communication plan.

    Phase Outcomes:

    Defined, business-aligned goals, priorities, and KPIs for ITAM. A concise vision and mission statement. The direction you need to establish a practical, right-sized, effective approach to ITAM for your organization.

    Before you get started

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps:
    • This methodology and the related slides are intended to be executed via intensive, collaborative working sessions using the rest of this slide deck.
    • Ensure the working sessions are a success by working through these steps before you start work on your IT asset management strategy.

    1. Identify participants

    Review recommended roles and identify who should participate in the development of your ITAM strategy.

    2. Estimate assets managed today

    Work through an initial assessment to establish ease of access to ITAM data and your level of trust in the data available to you.

    3. Create a working folder

    Create a repository to house your notes and any work in progress, including your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template.

    0.1 Identify participants

    30 minutes

    Output: List of key roles for the strategy exercises outlined in this methodology

    Participants: Project sponsor, Lead facilitator, ITAM manager and SMEs

    This methodology relies on having the right stakeholders in the room to identify ITAM goals, challenges, roles, structure, and more. On each activity slide in this deck, you’ll see an outline of the recommended participants. Use the table below to translate the recommended roles into specific people in your organization. Note that some people may fill multiple roles.

    Role Expectations People
    Project Sponsor Accountable for the overall success of the methodology. Ideally, participates in all exercises in this methodology. May be the asset manager or whoever they report to. Jake Long
    Lead Facilitator Leads, schedules, and manages all working sessions. Guides discussions and ensures activity outputs are completed. Owns and understands the methodology. Has a working knowledge of ITAM. Robert Loblaw
    Asset Manager(s) SME for the ITAM practice. Provides strategic direction to mature ITAM practices in line with organizational goals. Supports the facilitator. Eve Maldonado
    ITAM Team Hands-on ITAM professionals and SMEs. Includes the asset manager. Provide input on tactical ITAM opportunities and challenges. Bruce Wayne, Clark Kent
    IT Leaders & Managers Leaders of key stakeholder groups from across the IT department – the CIO and direct reports. Provide input on what IT needs from ITAM, and the role their teams should play in ITAM activities. May include delegates, particularly those familiar with day-to-day processes relevant to a particular discussion or exercise. Marcelina Hardy, Edmund Broughton
    ITAM Business Partners Non-IT business stakeholders for ITAM. This could include procurement, vendor management, accounting, and others. Zhang Jin, Effie Lamont
    Business Executives Organizational leaders and executives (CFO, COO, CEO, and others) or their delegates. Will participate in a mini-workshop to identify organizational goals and initiatives that can present opportunities for the ITAM practice. Jermaine Mandar, Miranda Kosuth

    0.2 Estimate asset numbers

    1 hour

    Output: Estimates of quantity and spend related to IT assets, Confidence/margin of error on estimates

    Participants: IT asset manager, ITAM team

    What do you know about your current IT environment, and how confident are you in that knowledge?

    This exercise will help you evaluate the size of the challenge ahead in terms of the raw number of assets in your environment, the spend on those assets, and the level of trust your organization has in the ITAM data.

    It is also a baseline snapshot your ability to relay key ITAM metrics quickly and confidently, so you can measure progress (in terms of greater confidence) over time.

    1. Download the estimation tracker below. Add any additional line items that are particularly important to the organization.
    2. Time-box this exercise to an hour. Use your own knowledge and existing data repositories to identify count/spend for each line item, then add a margin of error to your guess. Larger margins of error on larger counts will typically indicate larger risks.
    3. Track any assumptions, data sources used, or SMEs consulted in the comments.

    Download the IT Asset Estimation Tracker

    “Any time there is doubt about the data and it doesn’t get explained or fixed, then a new spreadsheet is born. Data validation and maintenance is critical to avoid the hidden costs of having bad data”

    Allison Kinnaird,
    Operations Practice Lead,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    0.3 Create a working folder

    15 minutes

    Output: A repository for templates and work in progress

    Participants: Lead facilitator

    Create a central repository for collaboration – it seems like an obvious step, but it’s one that gets forgotten about
    1. Download a copy of the ITAM Strategy Template.
      1. This will be the repository for all the work you do in the activities listed in this blueprint; take a moment to read it through and familiarize yourself with the contents.
    2. House the template in a shared repository that can house other related work in progress. Share this folder with participants so they can check in on your progress.
    3. You’ll see this callout box: Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template as you work through activities in this blueprint. Copy the output to the appropriate slide in the ITAM Strategy Template.
    Stock image of a computer screen with a tiny person putting likes on things.

    Collect action items as you go

    Don’t wait until the end to write down your good ideas.
    • The last exercise in this methodology is to gather everything you’ve learned and build a roadmap to improve the ITAM practice.
    • The output of the exercises will inform the roadmap, as they will highlight areas with opportunities for improvement.
    • Write them down as you work through the exercises, or you risk forgetting valuable ideas.
    • Keep an “idea space” – a whiteboard with sticky notes or a shared document – to which any of your participants can post an idea for improvement and that you can review and consolidate later.
    • Encourage participants to add their ideas at any time during the exercises.
    Pad of sticky notes, the top of which reads 'Good ideas go here!'

    Step 1.1: Brainstorm ITAM opportunities and challenges

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Rally the working group around a collection of ideas that, when taken together, create a vision for the future ITAM practice.
    • Identify your organization’s current ITAM challenges.

    “ITAM is a cultural shift more than a technology shift.” (Rory Canavan, SAM Charter)

    What is an IT Asset?

    Any piece of technology can be considered an asset, but it doesn’t mean you need to track everything. Image of three people building a computer from the inside.
    Icon of a power button.

    According to the ISO 19770 standard on ITAM, an IT Asset is “[an] item, thing, or entity that can be used to acquire, process, store and distribute digital information and has potential or actual value to an organization.”
    These are all things that IT is expected to support and manage, or that have the potential to directly impact services that IT supports and manages.

    Icon of a half-full battery.

    IT assets are distinct from capital assets. Some IT assets will also be capital assets, but not all will be. And not all capital assets are IT assets, either.

    Icon of a microphone.

    IT assets are typically tracked by IT, not by finance or accounting.
    IT needs more from their IT asset tracking system than the typical finance department can deliver.
    This can include end-user devices, software, IT infrastructure, cloud-based resources, third-party managed IT services, Internet-of-Things devices, embedded electronics, SCADA equipment, “smart” devices, and more.

    Icon of a fingerprint.

    It’s important to track IT assets in a way that enables IT to deliver value to the business – and an important part of this is understanding what not to track. This list should be aligned to the needs of your organization.

    What is IT asset management?

    • IT asset management is the practice of maintaining accurate, accessible, and actionable data on IT hardware, software, and cloud assets from procurement to disposal.
    • Trustworthy data maintained by an IT asset management practice will help your business meet its goals by managing risk, controlling costs, and enabling IT services and products.
    • ITAM tends to focus on the asset itself – its technical, financial, contractual, lifecycle, and ownership attributes – rather than its interactions or connections to other IT assets, which tends to be part of configuration management.

    What IT Asset Management is NOT:

    Configuration Management: Configuration management databases (CMDBs) often draw from the same data pool as ITAM (many configuration items are assets, and vice versa), but they focus on the interaction, interconnection, and interoperation of configuration items within the IT estate.

    In practice, many configuration items will be IT assets (or parts of assets) and vice versa. Configuration and asset teams should work closely together as they develop different but complementary views of the IT environment. Use Info-Tech’s methodology to harness configuration management superpowers.

    Organizational Data Management: Leverage a different Info-Tech methodology to develop a digital and data asset management program within Info-Tech’s DAM framework.

    “Asset management’s job is not to save the organization money, it’s not to push back on software audits.

    It’s to keep the asset database as up-to-date and as trustworthy as possible. That’s it.” (Jeremy Boerger, Consultant & Author)

    “You can’t make any real decisions on CMDB data that’s only 60% accurate.

    You start extrapolating that out, you’re going to get into big problems.” (Mike Austin, Founder & CEO, MetrixData 360)

    What is an ITAM strategy?

    Our strategy document will outline a coherent, sustainable, business-aligned approach to ITAM.

    No single approach to ITAM fits all organizations. Nor will the same approach fit the same organization at different times. A world-leading research university, a state government, and a global manufacturer all have very different goals and priorities that will be best supported by different approaches to ITAM.

    This methodology will walk you through these critical decisions that will define your approach to ITAM:

    • Business-aligned priorities, opportunities, and goals: What pressing opportunities and challenges do we face as an organization? What opportunities does this create that ITAM can seize?
    • Current and future state maturity, challenges: What is the state of the practice today? Where do we need to improve to meet our goals? What challenges stand in the way of improvement?
    • Responsibility, accountability, sourcing and (de)centralization: Who does what? Who is accountable? Where is there value to outsourcing? What authority will be centralized or decentralized?
    • Tools, policies, and procedures: What technology do we need? What’s our documentation framework?
    • Initiatives, KPIs, communication plan, and roadmap: What do we need to do, in what order, to build the ITAM practice to where we need it to be? How long do we expect this to take? How will we measure success?

    “A good strategy has coherence, coordinating actions, policies, and resources so as to accomplish an important end. Most organizations, most of the time, don’t have this.

    Instead, they have multiple goals and initiatives that symbolize progress, but no coherent approach to accomplish that progress other than ‘spend more and try harder.’” (Good Strategy, Bad Strategy, Richard Rumelt)

    Enable business value with IT asset management

    If you’ve never experienced a mature ITAM program before, it is almost certainly more rewarding than you’d expect once it’s functioning as intended.

    Each of the below activities can benefit from accessible, actionable, and accurate ITAM data.

    • Which of the activities, practices, and initiatives below have value to your organization?
    • Which could benefit most from ITAM data?
    Manage Risk: Effective ITAM practices provide data and processes that help mitigate the likelihood and impact of potentially damaging IT risks.

    ITAM supports the following practices that help manage organizational risk:

    • Security Controls Development
    • Security Incident Response
    • Security Audit Reports
    • Regulatory Compliance Reports
    • IT Risk Management
    • Technical Debt Management
    • M&A Due Diligence
    Optimize Spend: Asset data is essential to maintaining oversight of IT spend, ensuring that scarce resources are allocated where they can have the most impact.

    ITAM supports these activities that help optimize spend:

    • Vendor Management & Negotiations
    • IT Budget Management & Variance Analysis
    • Asset Utilization Analysis
    • FinOps & Cloud Spend Optimization
    • Showback & Chargeback
    • Software Audit Defense
    • Application Rationalization
    • Contract Consolidation
    • License and Device Reallocation
    Improve IT Services: Asset data can help inform solutions development and can be used by service teams to enhance and improve IT service practices.

    Use ITAM to facilitate these IT services and initiatives:

    • Solution and Enterprise Architecture
    • Service Level Management
    • Technology Procurement
    • Technology Refresh Projects
    • Incident & Problem Management
    • Request Management
    • Change Management
    • Green IT

    1.1 Brainstorm ideas to create a vision for the ITAM practice

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholders with a vision of what ITAM could provide, if resourced and funded adequately

    Output: A collection of ideas that, when taken together, create a vision for the future ITAM practice

    Materials: ITAM strategy template, Whiteboard or virtual whiteboard

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    It can be easy to lose sight of long-term goals when you’re stuck in firefighting mode. Let’s get the working group into a forward-looking mindset with this exercise.

    Think about what ITAM could deliver with unlimited time, money, and technology.

    1. Provide three sticky notes to each participant.
    2. Add the headings to a whiteboard, or use a blank slide as a digital whiteboard
    3. On each sticky note, ask participants to outline a single idea as follows:
      1. We could: [idea]
      2. Which would help: [stakeholder]
      3. Because: [outcome]
    4. Ask participants to present their sticky notes and post them to the whiteboard. Ask later participants to group similar ideas together.

    As you hear your peers describe what they hope and expect to achieve with ITAM, a shared vision of what ITAM could be will start to emerge.

    1.1 Identify structural ITAM challenges

    30 minutes

    Input: The list of common challenges on the next slide, Your estimated visibility into IT assets from the previous exercise, The experience and knowledge of your participants

    Output: Identify current ITAM challenges

    Materials: Your working copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    What’s standing in the way today of delivering the ITAM practices you want to achieve?

    Review the list of common challenges on the next slide as a group.

    1. Delete any challenges that don’t apply to your organization.
    2. Modify any challenges as required to reflect your organization.
    3. Add further challenges that aren’t on the list, as required.
    4. Highlight challenges that are particularly painful.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    “The problem – the reason why asset management initiatives keep falling on their face – is that people attack asset management as a problem to solve, instead of a practice and epistemological construct.” (Jeremy Boerger, Consultant & Author)

    1.1 Identify structural ITAM challenges

    Review and update the list of common challenges below to reflect your own organization.

    • Leadership and executives don’t understand the value of asset management and don’t fund or resource it.
    • Tools aren’t fit for purpose, don’t scale, or are broken.
    • There’s a cultural tendency to focus on tools over processes.
    • ITAM data is fragmented across multiple repositories.
    • ITAM data is widely viewed as untrustworthy.
    • Stakeholders respond to vendor audits before consulting ITAM, which leads to confusion and risks penalties.
    • No time for improvement; we’re always fighting fires.
    • We don’t audit our own ITAM data for accuracy.
    • End-user equipment is shared, re-assigned, or disposed without notifying or involving IT.
    • No dedicated resources.
    • Lack of clarity on roles and responsibilities.
    • Technicians don’t track assets consistently; ITAM is seen as administrative busywork.
    • Many ITAM tasks are manual and prone to error.
    • Inconsistent organizational policies and procedures.
    • We try to manage too many hardware types/software titles.
    • IT is not involved in the procurement process.
    • Request and procurement is seen as slow and excessively bureaucratic.
    • Hardware/software standards don’t exist or aren’t enforced.
    • Extensive rogue purchases/shadow IT are challenging to manage via ITAM tools and processes.
    What Else?

    Copy results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 1.2: Review organizational priorities, strategy, initiatives

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • Business executives or their delegates

    Outcomes

    • Review organizational priorities and strategy.
    • Identify key initiatives.

    Enter the executives

    Deliver on leadership priorities

    • Your business’ major transformative projects and executive priorities might seem far removed from hardware and software tracking. Why would we start with business strategy and executive priorities as we’re setting goals for the ITAM program?
    • While business executives have (likely) no interest in how software and hardware is tracked, they are accountable for the outcomes ITAM can enable. They are the most likely to understand why and how ITAM can deliver value to the organization.
    • ITAM succeeds by enabling its stakeholders to achieve business outcomes. The next three activities are designed to help you identify how you can enable your stakeholders, and what outcomes are most important from their point of view. Specifically:
      • What are the business’ planned transformational initiatives?
      • What are your highest priority goals?
      • What should the priorities of the ITAM practice be?
    • The answers to these questions will shape your approach to ITAM. Direct input from your leadership and executives – or their delegates – will help ensure you’re setting a solid foundation for your ITAM practice.

    “What outcomes does the organization want from IT asset management? Often, senior managers have a clear vision for the organization and where IT needs to go, and the struggle is to communicate that down.” (Kylie Fowler, ITAM Intelligence)

    Stock image of many hands with different puzzle pieces.

    Executive Alignment Session Overview

    ITAM Strategy Working Sessions

    • Discover & Brainstorm
    • Executive Alignment Working Session
      • 1.2 Review organizational strategy, priorities, and key initiatives
      • 1.3 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities, set ITAM priorities
    • ITAM Practice Maturity, Vision & Mission, Metrics & KPIs
    • Scope, Outsourcing, (De)Centralization, RACI
    • Service Management Integration
    • ITAM Tools
    • Audits, Budgets, Documents
    • Roadmap & Comms Plan

    A note to the lead facilitator and project sponsor:
    Consider working through these exercises by yourself ahead of time. As you do so, you’ll develop your own ideas about where these discussions may go, which will help you guide the discussion and provide examples to participants.

    1.2 Review organizational strategy and priorities

    30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The diagram in the next slide, and/or a whiteboard, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: Asset manager, IT leadership, Business executives or delegates

    Welcome your group to the working session and outline the next few exercises using the previous slide.

    Ask the most senior leader present to provide a summary of the following:

    1. What is the vision for the organization?
    2. What are our priorities and what must we absolutely get right?
    3. What do we expect the organization to look like in three years?

    The facilitator or a dedicated note-taker should record key points on a whiteboard or flipchart paper.

    1.2 Identify transformational initiatives

    30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The diagram in the next slide, and/or a whiteboard, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: Asset manager, IT leadership, Business executives or delegates

    Ask the most senior leader present to provide a summary of the following: What transformative business and IT initiatives are planned? When will they begin and end?

    Using one box per initiative, draw the initiatives in a timeline like the one below.

    Sample timeline for ITAM initiatives.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 1.3: Set business-aligned ITAM priorities

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • Business executives

    Outcomes

    • Connect executive priorities to ITAM opportunities.
    • Set business-aligned priorities for the ITAM practice.

    1.3 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities

    45 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The diagram in the next slide, and/or a whiteboard, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: Asset manager, IT leaders and managers, Business executives or delegates

    In this exercise, we’ll use the table on the next slide to identify the top priorities of key business and IT stakeholders and connect them to opportunities for the ITAM practice.

    1. Ask your leadership or executive delegates – what are their goals? What are they trying to accomplish? List roles and related goals in the table.
    2. Brainstorm opportunities for IT asset management to support listed goals:
      1. Can ITAM provide an enhanced level of service, access, or insight?
      2. Can ITAM address an existing issue or mitigate an existing risk?

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    1.3 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities (example)

    ITAM is for the… Who wants to… Which presents these ITAM opportunities
    CEO Deliver transformative business initiatives Acquire the right tech at the right time to support transformational initiatives.
    Establish a data-driven culture of stewardship Improve data to increase IT spend transparency.
    COO Improve organizational efficiency Increase asset use.
    Consolidate major software contracts to drive discounts.
    CFO Accurately forecast spending Track and anticipate IT asset spending.
    Control spending Improve data to increase IT spend transparency.
    Consolidate major software contracts to drive discounts.
    CIO Demonstrate IT value Use data to tell a story about value delivered by IT assets.
    Govern IT use Improve data to increase IT spend transparency.
    CISO Manage IT security and compliance risks Identify abandoned or out-of-spec IT assets.
    Provide IT asset data to support controls development.
    Respond to security incidents Support security incident teams with IT asset data.
    Apps Leader Build, integrate, and support applications Identify opportunities to retire applications with redundant functionality.
    Connect applications to relevant licensing and support agreements.
    IT Infra Leader Build and support IT infrastructure. Provide input on opportunities to standardize hardware and software.
    Provide IT asset data to technicians supporting end users.

    1.3 Categorize ITAM opportunities

    10-15 minutes

    Input: The outputs from the previous exercise

    Output: Executive priorities, sorted into the three categories at the right

    Materials: The table in this slide, The outputs from the previous exercise

    Participants: Lead facilitator

    Give your participants a quick break. Quickly sort the identified ITAM opportunities into the three main categories below as best you can.

    We’ll use this table as context for the next exercise.

    Example: Optimize Spend Enhance IT Services Manage Risk
    ITAM Opportunities
    • Improve data to increase IT spend transparency.
    • Consolidate major software contracts to drive discounts.
    • Increase asset utilization.
    • Identify opportunities to retire applications with redundant functionality
    • Acquire the right tech at the right time to support transformational initiatives.
    • Provide IT asset data to technicians supporting end users.
    • Identify abandoned or out-of-spec IT assets.
    • Provide IT asset data to support controls development.
    • Support security incident teams with IT asset data.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    1.3 Set ITAM priorities

    30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: Whiteboard, The template on the next slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: Asset manager, IT leaders and managers, Business executives or delegates

    The objective of this exercise is to prioritize the outcomes your organization wants to achieve from its ITAM practice, given the context from the previous exercises.

    Review the image below. The three points of the triangle are the three core goals of ITAM: Enhance IT Service, Manage Risk, and Optimize Spend. This exercise was first developed by Kylie Fowler of ITAM Intelligence. It is an essential exercise to understand ITAM priorities and the tradeoffs associated with those priorities. These priorities aren’t set in stone and should be revisited periodically as technology and business priorities change.

    Draw the diagram on the next slide on a whiteboard. Have the most senior leader in the room place the dot on the triangle – the closer it is to any one of the goals, the more important that goal is to the organization. Note: The center of the triangle is off limits! It’s very rarely possible to deliver on all three at once.
    Track notes on what’s being prioritized – and why – in the template on the next slide.
    Triangle with the points labelled 'Enhance IT Service', 'Manage Risk', and 'Optimize Spend'.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    1.3 Set ITAM Priorities

    The priorities of the ITAM practice are to:
    • Optimize Spend
    • Manage Risk
    Why?
    • We believe there is significant opportunity right now to rationalize spend by consolidating key software contracts.
    • Major acquisitions are anticipated in the near future. Effective ITAM processes are expected to mitigate acquisition risk by supporting due diligence and streamlined integration of acquired organizations.
    • Ransomware and supply chain security threats have increased demands for a comprehensive accounting of IT assets to support security controls development and security incident response.
    (Update this section with notes from your discussion.)
    Triangle with the points labelled 'Enhance IT Service', 'Manage Risk', and 'Optimize Spend'. There is a dot close to the 'Optimize Spend' corner, a legend labelling the dot as 'Our Target', and a note reading 'Move this dot to reflect your priorities'.

    Step 1.4: Identify ITAM goals, target maturity

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers

    Outcomes

    • Connect executive priorities to ITAM opportunities.
    • Set business-aligned priorities for the ITAM practice.

    “ITAM is really no different from the other ITIL practices: to succeed, you’ll need some ratio of time, treasure, and talent… and you can make up for less of one with more of the other two.” (Jeremy Boerger, Consultant and Author)

    1.4 Identify near- and medium-term goals

    15-30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Narrow down the list of opportunities to identify specific goals for the ITAM practice.

    1. Use one color to highlight opportunities you will seize in the next year.
    2. Use a second color to highlight opportunities you plan to address in the next three years.
    3. Leave blank anything you don’t intend to address in this timeframe.

    The highlighted opportunities are your near- and medium-term objectives.

    Optimize Spend Enhance IT Services Manage Risk
    Priority Critical Normal High
    ITAM Opportunities
    • Improve data to increase IT spend transparency.
    • Increase asset utilization.
    • Consolidate major software contracts to drive discounts.
    • Identify opportunities to retire applications with redundant functionality
    • Acquire the right tech at the right time to support transformational initiatives.
    • Provide IT asset data to technicians supporting end users.
    • Identify abandoned or out-of-spec IT assets.
    • Provide IT asset data to support controls development.
    • Support security incident teams with IT asset data.

    1.4 Connect ITAM goals to tactics

    30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Let’s dig down a little deeper. Connect the list of opportunities from earlier to specific ITAM tactics that allow the team to seize those opportunities.

    Add another row to the earlier table for ITAM tactics. Brainstorm tactics with your participants (e.g. sticky notes on a whiteboard) and align them with the priorities they’ll support.

    Optimize SpendEnhance IT ServicesManage Risk
    PriorityCriticalNormalHigh
    ITAM Opportunities
    • Improve data to increase IT spend transparency.
    • Increase asset utilization.
    • Consolidate major software contracts to drive discounts.
    • Identify opportunities to retire applications with redundant functionality
    • Acquire the right tech at the right time to support transformational initiatives.
    • Provide IT asset data to technicians supporting end users.
    • Identify abandoned or out-of-spec IT assets.
    • Provide IT asset data to support controls development.
    • Support security incident teams with IT asset data.
    ITAM Tactics to Seize Opportunities
    • Review and improve hardware budgeting exercises.
    • Reallocate unused licenses, hardware.
    • Ensure ELP reports are up to date.
    • Validate software usage.
    • Data to support software renewal negotiations.
    • Use info from ITAM for more efficient adds, moves, changes.
    • Integrate asset records with the ticket intake system, so that when someone calls the service desk, the list of their assigned equipment is immediately available.
    • Find and retire abandoned devices or services with access to the organization’s network.
    • Report on lost/stolen devices.
    • Develop reliable disposal processes.
    • Report on unpatched devices/software.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    1.4 Identify current and target state

    20 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    We’ll use this exercise to identify the current and one-year target state of ITAM using Info-Tech’s ITAM maturity framework.

    1. Review the maturity framework on the next slide as a group.
    2. In one color, highlight statements that reflect your organization today. Summarize your current state. Are you in firefighter mode? Between “firefighter” and “trusted operator”?
    3. In a second color, highlight statements that reflect where you want to be one year from today, taking into consideration the goals and tactics identified in the last exercise.
    4. During a break, copy the highlighted statements to the table on the slide after next, then add this final slide to your working copy of the ITAM Strategy Template.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Establish current and target ITAM maturity

    IT maturity ladder with five color-coded levels. Innovator – Optimized Asset Management
    • All items from Business & Technology Partner, plus:
    • Business and IT stakeholders collaborate regularly with the ITAM team to identify new opportunities to leverage or deploy ITAM practices and data to mitigate risks, optimize spend, and improve service. The ITAM program scales with the business.
    Business & Technology Partner – Proactive Asset Management
    • All items from Trusted Operator, plus:
    • The ITAM data is integral to decisions related to budget, project planning, IT architecture, contract renewal, and vendor management. Software and cloud assets are reviewed as frequently as required to manage costs. ITAM data consumers have self-serve access to ITAM data.
    • Continuous improvement practices strengthen ITAM efficiency and effectiveness.
    • ITAM processes, standards, and related policies are regularly reviewed and updated. ITAM teams work closely with SMEs for key tools/systems integrated with ITAM (e.g. AD, ITSM, monitoring tools) to maximize the value and reliability of integrations.
    Trusted Operator – Controls Assets
    • ITAM data for deployed hardware and software is regularly audited for accuracy.
    • Sufficient staff and skills to support asset tracking, including a dedicated IT asset management role. Teams responsible for ITAM data collection cooperate effectively. Policies and procedures are documented and enforced. Key licenses and contracts are available to the ITAM team. Discovery, tracking, and analysis tools support most important use cases.
    Firefighter – Reactive Asset Tracking
    • Data is often untrustworthy, may be fragmented across multiple repositories, and typically requires significant effort to translate or validate before use.
    • Insufficient staff, fragmented or incomplete policies or documentation. Data tracking processes are extremely highly manual. Effective cooperation for ITAM data collection is challenging.
    • ITAM tools are in place, but additional configuration or tooling is needed.
    Unreliable - Struggles to Support
    • No data, or data is typically unusable.
    • No allocated staff, no cooperation between parties responsible for ITAM data collection.
    • No related policies or documentation.
    • Tools are non-existent or not fit-for-purpose.

    Current and target ITAM maturity

    Today:
    Firefighter
    • Data is often untrustworthy, is fragmented across multiple repositories, and typically requires significant effort to translate or validate before use.
    • Insufficient staff, fragmented or incomplete policies or documentation.
    • Tools are non-existent.
    In One Year:
    Trusted Operator
    • ITAM data for deployed hardware and software is regularly audited for accuracy.
    • Sufficient staff and skills to support asset tracking, including a dedicated IT asset management role.
    • Teams responsible for ITAM data collection cooperate effectively.
    • Discovery, tracking, and analysis tools support most important use cases.
    IT maturity ladder with five color-coded levels.

    Innovator – Optimized Asset Management

    Business & Technology Partner – Proactive Asset Management

    Trusted Operator – Controls Assets

    Firefighter – Reactive Asset Tracking

    Unreliable - Struggles to Support

    Step 1.5: Write mission and vision statements

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers

    Outcomes

    • Write a mission statement that encapsulates the purpose and intentions of the ITAM practice today.
    • Write a vision statement that describes what the ITAM practice aspires to become and achieve.

    Write vision and mission statements

    Create two statements to summarize the role of the ITAM practice today – and where you want it to be in the future.

    Create two short, compelling statements that encapsulate:
    • The vision for what we want the ITAM practice to be in the future; and
    • The mission – the purpose and intentions – of the ITAM practice today.

    Why bother creating mission and vision statements? After all, isn’t it just rehashing or re-writing all the work we’ve just done? Isn’t that (at best) a waste of time?

    There are a few very important reasons to create mission and vision statements:

    • Create a compass that can guide work today and your roadmap for the future.
    • Focus on the few things you must do, rather than the many things you could do.
    • Concisely communicate a compelling vision for the ITAM practice to a larger audience who (let’s face it) probably won’t read the entire ITAM Strategy deck.

    “Brevity is the soul of wit.” (Hamlet, Act 2, Scene 2)

    “Writing is easy. All you have to do is cross out the wrong words.” (Mark Twain)

    1.5 Write an ITAM vision statement

    30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: A whiteboard, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT Leaders and managers

    Your vision statement describes the ITAM practice as it will be in the far future. It is a target to aspire to, beyond your ability to achieve in the near or medium term.

    Examples of ITAM vision statements:

    Develop the single accurate view of IT assets, available to anyone who needs it.

    Indispensable data brokers that support strategic decisions on the IT environment.

    Provide sticky notes to participants. Write out the three questions below on a whiteboard side by side. Have participants write their answers to the questions and post them below the appropriate question. Give everyone 10 minutes to write and post their ideas.

    1. What’s the desired future state of the ITAM practice?
    2. What needs to be done to achieved this desired state?
    3. How do we want ITAM to be perceived in this desired state?

    Review the answers and combine them into one focused vision statement. Use the 20x20 rule: take no more than 20 minutes and use no more than 20 words. If you’re not finished after 20 minutes, the ITAM manager should make any final edits offline.

    Document your vision statement in your ITAM Strategy Template.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    1.5 Write an ITAM mission statement

    30 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Your ITAM mission statement is an expression of what your IT asset management function brings to your organization today. It should be presented in straightforward language that is compelling, easy to understand, and sharply focused.

    Examples of ITAM mission statements:

    Maintain accurate, actionable, accessible on data on all IT assets.

    Support IT and the business with centralized and integrated asset data.

    Provide sticky notes to participants. Write out the questions below on a whiteboard side by side. Have participants write their answers to the questions and post them below the appropriate question. Give everyone 10 minutes to write and post their ideas.

    1. What is our role as the asset management team?
    2. How do we support the IT and business strategies?
    3. What does our asset management function offer that no one else can?

    Review the answers and combine them into one focused vision statement. Use the 20x20 rule: take no more than 20 minutes and use no more than 20 words. If you’re not finished after 20 minutes, the ITAM manager should make any final edits offline.

    Document your vision statement in your ITAM Strategy Template.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 1.6: Define ITAM metrics and KPIs

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers

    Outcomes

    • Identify metrics, data, or reports that may be of interest to different consumers of ITAM data.
    • Identify the key performance indicators (KPIs) for the ITAM practice, based on the goals and priorities established earlier.

    Navigate a universe of ITAM metrics

    When you have the data, how will you use it?

    • There’s a dizzying array of potential metrics you can develop and track across your ITAM environment.
    • Different stakeholders will need different data feeds, metrics, reports, and dashboards.
    • Different measures will be useful at different times. You will often need to filter or slice the data in different ways (by department, timeframe, equipment type, etc.)
    • We’ll use the next few exercises to identify the types of metrics that may be useful to different stakeholders and the KPIs to measure progress towards ITAM goals and priorities.

    ITAM Metrics

    • Quantity
      e.g. # of devices or licenses
    • Cost
      e.g. average laptop cost
    • Compliance
      e.g. effective license position reports
    • Progress
      e.g. ITAM roadmap items completed
    • Quality
      e.g. ITAM data accuracy rate
    • Time
      e.g. time to procure/ deploy

    Drill down by:

    • Vendor
    • Date
    • Dept.
    • Product
    • Location
    • Cost Center

    Develop different metrics for different teams

    A few examples:

    • CIOs — CIOs need asset data to govern technology use, align to business needs, and demonstrate IT value. What do we need to budget for hardware and software in the next year? Where can we find money to support urgent new initiatives? How many devices and software titles do we manage compared to last year? How has IT helped the business achieve key goals?
    • Asset Managers — Asset managers require data to help them oversee ITAM processes, technology, and staff, and to manage the fleet of IT assets they’re expected to track. What’s the accuracy rate of ITAM data? What’s the state of integrations between ITAM and other systems and processes? How many renewals are coming up in the next 90 days? How many laptops are in stock?
    • IT Leaders — IT managers need data that can support their teams and help them manage the technology within their mandate. What technology needs to be reviewed or retired? What do we actually manage?
    • Technicians — Service desk technicians need real-time access to data on IT assets to support service requests and incident management – for example, easy access to the list of equipment assigned to a particular user or installed in a particular location.
    • Business Managers and Executives — Business managers and executives need concise, readable dashboards to support business decisions about business use of IT assets. What’s our overall asset spend? What’s our forecasted spend? Where could we reallocate spend?

    1.6 Identify useful ITAM metrics and reports

    60 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Use this exercise to identify as many potentially useful ITAM metrics and reports as possible, and narrow them down to a few high-priority metrics. Leverage the list of example metrics on the next slide for your own exercise. If you have more than six participants, consider splitting into two or more groups, and divide the table between groups to minimize overlap.

    1. List potential consumers of ITAM data in the column on the left.
    2. What type of information do we think this role needs? What questions about IT assets do we get on a regular basis from this role or team?
    3. Review and consolidate the list as a group. Discuss and highlight any metrics the group thinks are a particularly high priority for tracking.
    Role Compliance Quality Quantity Cost Time Progress
    IT Asset Manager Owned devices not discovered in last 60 days Discrepancies between discovery data and ITAM DB records # of corporate-owned devices Spend on hardware (recent and future/ planned) Average time, maximum time to deploy end-user devices Number of ITAM roadmap items in progress
    Service Desk

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Examples of ITAM metrics

    Compliance Quality Quantity Cost Time/Duration/Age Progress
    Owned devices not discovered in last 60 days Discrepancies between discovery data and ITAM DB records # of corporate-owned devices Spend on hardware (recent and future/planned) Average time, maximum time to deploy end-user devices Number of ITAM roadmap items in progress or completed
    Disposed devices without certificate of destruction Breakage rates (in and out of warranty) by vendor # of devices running software title X, # of licenses for software title X Spend on software (recent and future/planned) Average time, maximum time to deploy end user software Number of integrations between ITAM DB and other sources
    Discrepancies between licenses and install count, by software title RMAs by vendor, model, equipment type Number of requests by equipment model or software title Spend on cloud (recent and future/planned) Average & total time spent on software audit responses Number of records in ITAM database
    Compliance reports (e.g. tied to regulatory compliance or grant funding) Tickets by equipment type or software title Licenses issued from license pool in the last 30 days Value of licenses issued from license pool in the last 30 days (cost avoidance) Devices by age Software titles with an up-to-date ELP report
    Reports on lost and stolen devices, including last assigned, date reported stolen, actions taken User device satisfaction scores, CSAT scores Number of devices retired or donated in last year Number of IT-managed capital assets Number of hardware/software request tickets beyond time-to-fulfil targets Number of devices audited (by ITAM team via self-audit)
    Number of OS versions, unpatched systems Number of devices due for refresh in the next year Spend saved by harvesting unused software Number of software titles, software vendors managed by ITAM team
    Audit accuracy rate Equipment in stock Cost savings from negotiations
    # of users assigned more than one device Number of non-standard devices or requests Dollars charged during audit or true-up

    Differentiate between metrics and KPIs

    Key performance indicators (KPIs) are metrics with targets aligned to goals.

    Targets could include one or more of:

    • Target state (e.g. completed)
    • Target magnitude (e.g. number, percent, rate, dollar amount)
    • Target direction (e.g. trending up or down)

    You may track many metrics, but you should have only a few KPIs (typically 2-3 per objective).

    A breached KPI should be a trigger to investigate and remediate the root cause of the problem, to ensure progress towards goals and priorities can continue.

    Which KPIs you track will change over the life of the practice, as ITAM goals and priorities shift. For example, KPIs may initially track progress towards maturing ITAM practices. Once you’ve reached target maturity, KPIs may shift to track whether the key service targets are being met.

    1.6 Identify ITAM KPIs

    20 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Good KPIs are a more objective measure of whether you’re succeeding in meeting the identified priorities for the ITAM practice.

    Identify metrics that can measure progress or success against the priorities and goals set earlier. Aim for around three metrics per goal. Identify targets for the metric you think are SMART (specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and timebound). Track your work using the example table below.

    Goal Metric Target
    Consolidate major software contracts to drive discounts Amount spent on top 10 software contracts Decrease by 10% by next year
    Customer satisfaction scores with enterprise software Satisfaction is equal to or better than last year
    Value of licenses issued from license pool 30% greater than last year
    Identify abandoned or out-of-spec IT assets # of security incidents involving undiscovered assets Zero
    % devices with “Deployed” status in ITAM DB but not discovered for 30+ days ‹1% of all records in ITAM DB
    Provide IT asset data to technicians for service calls Customer satisfaction scores Satisfaction is equal to or better than last year
    % of end-user devices meeting minimum standards 97%

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy

    Phase 2:

    Identify your approach to support ITAM priorities and goals

    Phase 1

    1.1 Define ITAM and brainstorm opportunities and challenges.

    Executive Alignment Working Session:

    1.2 Review organizational priorities, strategy, and key initiatives.

    1.3 Align executive priorities with ITAM opportunities & priorities.

    1.4 Identify business-aligned ITAM goals and target maturity.

    1.5 Write mission and vision statements.

    1.6 Define ITAM metrics and KPIs.

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define ITAM scope.

    2.2 Acquire ITAM services (outsourcing and contracting).

    2.3 Centralize or decentralize ITAM capabilities.

    2.4 Create a RACI for the ITAM practice.

    2.5 Align ITAM with other service management practices.

    2.6 Evaluate ITAM tools and integrations.

    2.7 Create a plan for internal and external audits.

    2.8 Improve your budget processes.

    2.9 Establish a documentation framework.

    2.10 Create a roadmap and communication plan.

    Phase Outcomes:

    Establish an approach to achieving ITAM goals and priorities, including scope, structure, tools, service management integrations, documentation, and more.

    Create a roadmap that enables you to realize your approach.

    Step 2.1: Define ITAM Scope

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Establish what types of equipment and software you’ll track through the ITAM practice.
    • Establish which areas of the business will be in scope of the ITAM practice.

    Determine ITAM Scope

    Focus on what’s most important and then document it so everyone understands where they can provide the most value.

    Not all categories of assets require the same level of tracking, and some equipment and software should be excluded from the ITAM practice entirely.

    In some organizations, portions of the environment won’t be tracked by the asset management team at all. For example, some organizations will choose to delegate tracking multi-function printers (MFPs) or proprietary IoT devices to the department or vendor that manages them.

    Due to resourcing or technical limitations, you may decide that certain equipment or software is out of scope for the moment.

    What do other organizations typically track in detail?
    • Installs and entitlements for major software contracts that represent significant spend and/or are highly critical to business goals.
    • Equipment managed directly by IT that needs to be refreshed on a regular cycle:
      • End-user devices such as laptops, desktops, and tablets.
      • Server, network, and telecoms devices.
    • High value equipment that is not regularly refreshed may also be tracked, but in less detail – for example, you may not refresh large screen TVs, but you may need to track date of purchase, deployed location, vendor, and model for insurance or warranty purposes.

    2.1 Establish scope for ITAM

    45 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: ITAM scope, in terms of types of assets tracked and not tracked

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    Establish the hardware and software that are within the scope of the ITAM program by updating the tables below to reflect your own environment. The “out of scope” category will include asset types that may be of value to track in the future but for which the capability or need don’t exist today.

    Hardware Software Out of Scope
    • End-user devices housing data or with a dollar value of more than $300, which will be replaced through lifecycle refresh.
    • Infrastructure devices, including network, telecom, video conferencing, servers and more
    • End-user software purchased under contract
    • Best efforts on single license purchases
    • Infrastructure software, including solutions used by IT to manage the infrastructure
    • Enterprise applications
    • Cloud (SaaS, IaaS, PaaS)
    • Departmental applications
    • Open-source applications
    • In-house developed applications
    • Freeware & shareware
    • IoT devices

    The following locations will be included in the ITAM program: All North and South America offices and retail locations.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.2: Acquire ITAM Services

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Define the type of work that may be more effectively or efficiently delivered by an outsourcer or contractor.

    “We would like our clients to come to us with an idea of where they want to get to. Why are you doing this? Is it for savings? Because you want to manage your security attack surface? Are there digital initiatives you want to move forward? What is the end goal?” (Mike Austin, MetrixData 360)

    Effectively acquire ITAM services

    Allow your team to focus on strategic, value-add activities by acquiring services that free them from commodity tasks.
    • When determining which asset capabilities and activities are best kept in-house and which ones are better handled by a supplier, it is imperative to keep the value to the business in mind.
    • Activities/capabilities that are challenging to standardize and are critical to enabling business goals are better kept in-house.
    • Activities/capabilities that are (or should be) standardized and automated are ideal candidates for outsourcing.
    • Outsourcing can be effective and successful with a narrow scope of engagement and an alignment to business outcomes.
    • Organizations that heavily weigh cost reduction as a significant driver for outsourcing are far less likely to realize the value they expected to receive.
    Business Enablement
    • Supports business-aligned ITAM opportunities & priorities
    • Highly specialized
    • Offers competitive advantages
    Map with axes 'Business Enablement' and 'Vendor's Performance Advantage' for determining whether or not to outsource.
    Vendor’s Performance Advantage
    • Talent or access to skills
    • Economies of scale
    • Access to technology
    • Does not require deep knowledge of your business

    Decide what to outsource

    It’s rarely all or nothing.

    Ask yourself:
    • How important is this activity or capability to ITAM, IT, and business priorities and goals?
    • Is it a non-commodity IT service that can improve customer satisfaction?
    • Is it a critical service to the business and the specialized knowledge must remain in-house?
    • Does the function require access to talent or skills not currently available in-house, and is cost-prohibitive to obtain?
    • Are there economies of scale that can help us meet growing demand?
    • Does the vendor provide access to best-of-breed tools and solutions that can handle the integration, management, maintenance and support of the complete system?

    You may ultimately choose to engage a single vendor or a combination of multiple vendors who can best meet your ITAM needs.

    Establishing effective vendor management processes, where you can maximize the amount of service you receive while relying on the vendor’s expertise and ability to scale, can help you make your asset management practice a net cost-saver.

    ITAM activities and capabilities
    • Contract review
    • Software audit management
    • Asset tagging
    • Asset disposal and recycling
    • Initial ITAM record creation
    • End-user device imaging
    • End-user device deployment
    • End-user software provisioning
    • End-user image management
    • ITAM database administration
    • ELP report creation
    • ITAM process management
    • ITAM report generation
    ITAM-adjacent activities and capabilities
    • Tier 1 support/service desk
    • Deskside/field support
    • Tier 3 support
    • IT Procurement
    • Device management/managed IT services
    • Budget development
    • Applications development, maintenance
    • Infrastructure hosting (e.g. cloud or colocation)
    • Infrastructure management and support
    • Discovery/monitoring tools management and support

    2.2 Identify outsourcing opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: Understanding of current ITAM processes and challenges

    Output: Understanding of potential outsourcing opportunities

    Materials: The table in this slide, and insight in previous slides, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    At a high level, discuss which functions of ITAM are good candidates for outsourcing.

    Start with the previous slide for examples of outsourcing activities or capabilities directly related to or adjacent to the ITAM practice. Categorize these activities as follows:

    Outsource Potentially Outsource Insource
    • Asset disposal/recycling
    • ELP report creation
    • ITAM process management

    Go through the list of activities to potentially or definitely outsource and confirm:

    1. Will outsourcing solve a resourcing need for an existing process, or can you deliver this adequately in-house?
    2. Will outsourcing improve the effectiveness and efficiency of current processes? Will it deliver more effective service channels or improved levels of reliability and performance consistency?
    3. Will outsourcing provide or enable enhanced service capabilities that your IT customers could use, and which you cannot deliver in-house due to lack of scale or capacity?

    Answering “no” to more than one of these questions suggests a need to further review options to ensure the goals are aligned with the potential value of the service offerings available.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.3: Centralize or decentralize ITAM capabilities

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Outline where the team(s) responsible for ITAM sit across the organization, who they report to, and who they need to work with across IT and the business.

    Align ITAM with IT’s structure

    ITAM’s structure will typically align with the larger business and IT structure. The wrong structure will undermine your ability to meet ITAM goals and lead to frustration, missed work, inefficiency, and loss of value.

    Which of the four archetypes below reflects the structure you need?

    1. Centralized — ITAM is entirely centralized in a single function, which reports into a central IT department.
    2. Decentralized — Local IT groups are responsible and accountable for ITAM. They may coordinate informally but do not report to any central team.
    3. Hybrid-Shared Services — Local IT can opt in to shared services but must follow centrally set ITAM practices to do so, usually with support from a shared ITAM function.
    4. Hybrid-Federated — Local IT departments are free to develop their own approach to ITAM outside of core, centrally set requirements.

    Centralized ITAM

    Total coordination, control, and oversight

    • ITAM accountability, policies, tools, standards, and expertise – in this model, they’re all concentrated in a single, specialized IT asset management practice. Accountability, authority, and oversight are concentrated in the central function as well.
    • A central ITAM team will benefit from knowledge sharing and task specialization opportunities. They are a visible single point of contact for ITAM-related questions
    • The central ITAM team will coordinate ITAM activities across the organization to optimize spend, manage risk, and enhance service. Any local IT teams are supported by and directly answerable to the central ITAM team for ITAM activities.
    • There is a single, centrally managed ITAM database. Wherever possible, this database should be integrated with other tools to support cross-solution automation (e.g. integrate AD to automatically reflect user identity changes in the ITAM database).
    • This model drives cross-organization coordination and oversight, but it may not be responsive to specific and nuanced local requirements.
    Example: Centralized
    Example of a Centralized ITAM.

    Solid line. Direct reporting relationship

    Dotted line. Dotted line working or reporting relationship

    Decentralized ITAM

    Maximize choice

    • ITAM accountability and oversight are entirely devolved to local or regional IT and/or ITAM organizations, which are free to set their own priorities, goals, policies, and standards. This model maximizes the authority of local groups to build practices that meet local requirements.
    • It may be challenging to resource and mature local practices. ITAM maturity will vary from one local organization to the next.
    • It is more likely that ITAM managers are a part-time role, and sometimes even a non-IT role. Local ITAM teams or coordinators may coordinate and share knowledge informally, but specialization can be challenging to build or leverage effectively across the organization.
    • There is likely no central ITAM tool. Local tools may be acquired, implemented, and integrated by local IT departments to suit their own needs, which can make it very difficult to report on assets organization-wide – for example, to establish compliance on an enterprise software contract.
    Example: Decentralized


    Example of a Decentralized ITAM.

    Solid line. Direct reporting relationship

    Dotted line. Dotted line working or reporting relationship

    Blue dotted line. Informal working relationships, knowledge sharing

    Hybrid: Federation

    Centralization with a light touch

    • A middle ground between centralized and decentralized ITAM, this model balances centralized decision making, specialization, and governance with local autonomy.
    • A central team will define organization-wide ITAM goals, develop capabilities, policies, and standards, and monitor compliance by local and central teams. All local teams must comply with centrally defined requirements, but they can also develop further capabilities to meet local goals.
    • For example, there will typically be a central ITAM database that must be used for at least a subset of assets, but other teams may build their own databases for day-to-day operations and export data to the central database as required.
    • There are often overlapping responsibilities in this model. A strong collaborative relationship between central and local ITAM teams is especially important here, particularly after major changes to requirements, processes, tools, or staffing when issues and breakdowns are more likely.
    Example: Federation


    Example of a Federation ITAM.

    Solid line. Direct reporting relationship

    Purple solid line. Oversight/governance

    Dotted line. Dotted line working or reporting relationship

    Hybrid: Shared Services

    Optional centralization

    • A special case of federated ITAM that balances central control and local autonomy, but with more power given to local IT to opt out of centralized shared services that come with centralized ITAM requirements.
    • ITAM requirements set by the shared services team will support management, allocation, and may have showback or chargeback implications. Following the ITAM requirements is a condition of service. If a local organization chooses to stop using shared services, they are (naturally) no longer required to adhere to the shared services ITAM requirements.
    • As with the federated model, local teams may develop further capabilities to meet local goals.
    Example: Shared Services


    Example of a Shared Services ITAM.

    Solid line. Direct reporting relationship

    Dotted line. Dotted line working relationship

    Blue dotted line. Informal working relationships, knowledge sharing

    Structure data collection & analysis

    Consider the implications of structure on data.

    Why centralize?
    • There is a need to build reports that aggregate data on assets organization-wide, rather than just assets within a local environment.
    • Decentralized ITAM tracking isn’t producing accurate or usable data, even for local purposes.
    • Tracking tools have overlapping functionality. There’s an opportunity to rationalize spend, management and support for ITAM tools.
    • Contract centralization can optimize spend and manage risks, but only with the data required to manage those contracts.
    Why decentralize?
    • Tracking and reporting on local assets is sufficient to meet ITAM goals; there is limited or no need to track assets organization-wide.
    • Local teams have the skills to track and maintain asset data; subsidiaries have appropriate budgets and tools to support ITAM tracking.
    • Decentralized ITSM/ITAM tools are in place, populated, and accurate.
    • The effort to consolidate tools and processes may outweigh the benefits to data centralization.
    • Lots of variability in types of assets and the environment is stable.
    Requirements for success:
    • A centralized IT asset management solution is implemented and managed.
    • Local teams must understand the why and how of centralized data tracking and be held accountable for assigned responsibilities.
    • The asset tool should offer both centralized and localized views of the data.
    Requirements for success:
    • Guidelines and expectations for reporting to centralized asset management team will be well defined and supported.
    • Local asset managers will have opportunity to collaborate with others in the role for knowledge transfer and asset trading, where appropriate.

    Structure budget and contract management

    Contract consolidation creates economies of scale for vendor management and license pooling that strengthen your negotiating position with vendors and optimize spend.

    Why centralize?
    • Budgeting, governance, and accountability are already centralized. Centralized ITAM practices can support the existing governance practices.
    • Centralizing contract management and negotiation can optimize spend and/or deliver access to better service.
    • Centralize management for contracts that cover most of the organization, are highly complex, involve large spend and/or higher risk, and will benefit from specialization of asset staff.
    Why decentralize?
    • Budgeting, governance, and accountability rest with local organizations.
    • There may be increased need for high levels of customer responsiveness and support.
    • Decentralize contract management for contracts used only by local groups (e.g. a few divisions, a few specialized functions), and that are smaller, low risk, and come with standard terms and conditions.
    Requirements for success:
    • A centralized IT asset management solution is implemented and managed.
    • Contract terms must be harmonized across the organization.
    • Centralized fulfillment is as streamlined as possible. For example, software contracts should include the right to install at any time and pay through a true-up process.
    Requirements for success:
    • Any expectations for harmonization with the centralized asset management team will be well defined and supported.
    • Local asset managers can collaborate with other local ITAM leads to support knowledge transfer, asset swapping, etc.

    Structure technology management

    Are there opportunities to centralize or decentralize support functions?

    Why centralize?
    • Standard technologies are deployed organization-wide.
    • There are opportunities to improve service and optimize costs by consolidating knowledge, service contracts, and support functions.
    • Centralizing data on product supply allows for easier harvest and redeployment of assets by a central support team.
    • A stable, central support function can better support localized needs during seasonal staffing changes, mergers and acquisitions.
    Why decentralize?
    • Technology is unique to a local subset of users or customers.
    • Minimal opportunity for savings or better support by consolidating knowledge, service contracts, or support functions.
    • Refresh standards are set at a local level; new tech adoption may be impeded by a reliance on older technologies, local budget shortfalls, or other constraints.
    • Hardware may need to be managed locally if shipping costs and times can’t reasonably be met by a distant central support team.
    Requirements for success:
    • Ensure required processes, technologies, skills, and knowledge are in place to enable centralized support.
    • Keep a central calendar of contract renewals, including reminders to start work on the renewal no less than 90 days prior. Prioritize contracts with high dollar value or high risk.
    • The central asset management solution should be configured to provide data that can enable the central support team.
    Requirements for success:
    • Ensure required processes, technologies, skills, and knowledge are in place to enable decentralized support.
    • Decentralized support teams must understand and adhere to ITAM activities that are part of support work (e.g. data entry, data audits).
    • The central asset management solution should be configured to provide data that can enable the central support team, or decentralized asset solutions must be funded, and teams trained on their use.

    2.3 Review ITAM Structure

    1-2 hours

    Input: Understanding of current organizational structure, Understanding of challenges and opportunities related to the current structure

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    Outline the current model for your organization and identify opportunities to centralize or decentralize ITAM-related activities.

    1. What model best describes how ITAM should be structured in your organization? Modify the slide outlining structure as a group to outline your own organization, as required.
    2. In the table below, outline opportunities to centralize or decentralize data tracking, budget and contract management, and technology management activities.
    Centralize Decentralize
    Data collection & analysis
    • Make better use of central ITAM database.
    • Support local IT departments building runbooks for data tracking during lifecycle activities (create templates, examples)
    Budget and contract management
    • Centralize Microsoft contracts.
    • Create a runbook to onboard new companies to MSFT contracts.
    • Create tools and data views to support local department budget exercises.
    Technology management
    • Ensure all end-user devices are visible to centrally managed InTune, ConfigMgr.
    • Enable direct shipping from vendor to local sites.
    • Establish disposal/pickup at local sites.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.4: Create a RACI

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Review the role of the IT asset manager.
    • Identify who’s responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for key ITAM activities.

    Empower your asset manager

    The asset manager is the critical ITAM role. Ensure they’re positioned to succeed.

    There’s too much change in the technology and business environment to expect ITAM to be “a problem to solve.” It is a practice that requires care and feeding through regular iteration to achieve success. At the helm of this practice is your asset manager, whose approach and past experience will have a significant impact on how you approach ITAM.

    The asset manager role requires a variety of skills, knowledge, and abilities including:

    • Operations, process, and practice management.
    • An ability to communicate, influence, negotiate, and facilitate.
    • Organizational knowledge and relationship management.
    • Contract and license agreement analysis, attention to detail.
    • Natural curiosity and a willingness to learn.
    • A strong understanding of technologies in use by the organization, and how they fit into the asset management program.
    Where the asset manager sits in the organization will also have an impact on their focus and priorities. When the asset manager reports into a service team, their focus will often reflect their team’s focus: end-user devices and software, customer satisfaction, request fulfillment. Asset teams that report into a leadership or governance function will be more likely to focus on organization-wide assets, governance, budget management, and compliance.

    “Where your asset manager sits, and what past experience they have, is going to influence how they do asset management.” (Jeremy Boerger, Consultant & Author)

    “It can be annoying at times, but a good IT asset manager will poke their nose into activities that do not obviously concern them, such as programme and project approval boards and technical design committees. Their aim is to identify and mitigate ITAM risks BEFORE the technology is deployed as well as to ensure that projects and solutions ‘bake in’ the necessary processes and tools that ensure IT assets can be managed effectively throughout their lifecycle.” (Kylie Fowler, ITAM by Design, 2017)

    IT asset managers must have a range of skills and knowledge

    • ITAM Operations, Process, and Practice Management
      The asset manager is typically responsible for managing and improving the ITAM practice and related processes and tools. The asset manager may administer the ITAM tool, develop reports and dashboards, evaluate and implement new technologies or services to improve ITAM maturity, and more.
    • Organizational Knowledge
      An effective IT asset manager has a good understanding of your organization and its strategy, products, stakeholders, and culture.
    • Technology & Product Awareness
      An IT asset manager must learn about new and changing technologies and products adopted by the organization (e.g. IoT, cloud) and develop recommendations on how to track and manage them via the ITAM practice.
    A book surrounded by icons corresponding to the bullet points.
    • People Management
      Asset managers often manage a team directly and have dotted-line reports across IT and the business.
    • Communication
      Important in any role, but particularly critical where learning, listening, negotiation, and persuasion are so critical.
    • Finance & Budgeting
      A foundational knowledge of financial planning and budgeting practices is often helpful, where the asset manager is asked to contribute to these activities.
    • Contract Review & Analysis
      Analyze new and existing contracts to evaluate changes, identify compliance requirements, and optimize spend.

    Assign ITAM responsibilities and accountabilities

    Align authority and accountability.
    • A RACI exercise will help you discuss and document accountability and responsibility for critical ITAM activities.
    • When responsibility and accountability are not currently well documented, it’s often useful to invite a representative of the roles identified to participate in this alignment exercise. The discussion can uncover contrasting views on responsibility and governance, which can help you build a stronger management and governance model.
    • The RACI chart can help you identify who should be involved when making changes to a given activity. Clarify the variety of responsibilities assigned to each key role.
    • In the future, you may need to define roles in more detail as you change your hardware and software asset management procedures.

    R

    Responsible: The person who actually gets the job done.

    Different roles may be responsible for different aspects of the activity relevant to their role.

    A

    Accountable: The one role accountable for the activity (in terms completion, quality, cost, etc.)

    Must have sufficient authority to be held accountable; responsible roles are often accountable to this role.

    C

    Consulted: Must have the opportunity to provide meaningful input at certain points in the activity.

    Typically, subject matter experts or stakeholders. The more people you must consult, the more overhead and time you’ll add to a process.

    I

    Informed: Receives information regarding the task, but has no requirement to provide feedback.

    Information might relate to process execution, changes, or quality.

    2.4 Conduct a RACI Exercise

    1-2 hours

    Input: An understanding of key roles and activities in ITAM practices, An understanding of your organization, High-level structure of your ITAM program

    Output: A RACI diagram for IT asset management

    Materials: The table in the next slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    Let’s face it – RACI exercises can be dry. We’ve found that the approach below is more collaborative, engaging, and effective compared to filling out the table as a large group.

    1. Create a shared working copy of the RACI charts on the following slides (e.g. write it out on a whiteboard or provide a link to this document and work directly in it).
    2. Review the list of template roles and activities as a group. Add, change, or remove roles and activities from the table as needed.
    3. Divide into small groups. Assign each group a set of roles, and have them define whether that role is accountable, responsible, consulted, or informed for each activity in the chart. Refer to the previous slide for context on RACI. Give everyone 15 minutes to update their section of the chart.
    4. Come back together as a large group to review the chart. First, check for accountability – there should generally be just one role accountable for each activity. Then, have each small group walk through their section, and encourage participants to ask questions. Is there at least one role responsible for each task, and what are they responsible for? Does everyone listed as consulted or informed really need to be? Make any necessary adjustments.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Define ITAM governance activities

    RACI Chart for ITAM governance activities. In the first column is a list of governance activities, and the row headers are positions within a company. Fields are marked with an R, A, C, or I.

    Document asset management responsibilities and accountabilities

    RACI Chart for ITAM asset management responsibilities and accountabilities. In the first column is a list of responsibilities and accountabilities, and the row headers are positions within a company. Fields are marked with an R, A, C, or I.

    Step 2.5: Align ITAM with other Service Management Practices

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers

    Outcomes

    • Establish shared and separate responsibilities for asset and configuration management.
    • Identify how ITAM can support other practices, and how other practices can support ITAM.

    Asset vs. Configuration

    Asset and configuration management look at the same world through different lenses.
    • IT asset management tends to focus on each IT asset in its own right: assignment or ownership, its lifecycle, and related financial obligations and entitlements.
    • Configuration management is focused on configuration items (CIs) that must be managed to deliver a service and the relationships and integrations to other CIs.
    • ITAM and configuration management teams and practices should work closely together. Though asset and configuration management focus on different outcomes, they tend use overlapping tools and data sets. Each practice, when working effectively, can strengthen the other.
    • Many objects will exist in both the CMDB and AMDB, and the data on those shared objects will need to be kept in sync.
    Asset and Configuration Management: An Example

    Configuration Management Database (CMDB)

    A database of uniquely identified configuration items (CIs). Each CI record may include information on:
    Service Attributes

    Supported Service(s)
    Service Description, Criticality, SLAs
    Service Owners
    Data Criticality/Sensitivity

    CI Relationships

    Physical Connections
    Logical Connections
    Dependencies

    Arrow connector.

    Discovery, Normalization, Dependency Mapping, Business Rules*

    Manual Data Entry

    Arrow connector.
    This shared information could be attached to asset records, CI records, or both, and it should be synchronized between the two databases where it’s tracked in both.
    Hardware Information

    Serial, Model and Specs
    Network Address
    Physical Location

    Software Installations

    Hypervisor & OS
    Middleware & Software
    Software Configurations

    Arrow connector.

    Asset Management Database (AMDB)

    A database of uniquely identified IT assets. Each asset record may include information on:
    Procurement/Purchasing

    Purchase Request/Purchase Order
    Invoice and Cost
    Cost Center
    Vendor
    Contracts and MSAs
    Support/Maintenance/Warranties

    Asset Attributes

    Model, Title, Product Info, License Key
    Assigned User
    Lifecycle Status
    Last ITAM Audit Date
    Certificate of Disposal

    Arrows connecting multiple fields.

    IT Security Systems

    Vulnerability Management
    Threat Management
    SIEM
    Endpoint Protection

    IT Service Management (ITSM) System

    Change Tickets
    Request Tickets
    Incident Tickets
    Problem Tickets
    Project Tickets
    Knowledgebase

    Financial System/ERP

    General Ledger
    Accounts Payable
    Accounts Receivable
    Enterprise Assets
    Enterprise Contract Database

    (*Discovery, dependency mapping, and data normalization are often features or modules of configuration management, asset management, or IT service management tools.)

    2.5 Integrate ITAM and configuration practices

    45 minutes

    Input: Knowledge of the organization’s configuration management processes

    Output: Define how ITAM and configuration management will support one another

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, Configuration manager

    Work through the table below to identify how you will collaborate and synchronize data across ITAM and configuration management practices and tools.

    What are the goals (if any currently exist) for the configuration management practice? Connect configuration items to services to support service management.
    How will configuration and asset management teams collaborate? Weekly status updates. As-needed working sessions.
    Shared visibility on each others’ Kanban tracker.
    Create tickets to raise and track issues that require collaboration or attention from the other team.
    How can config leverage ITAM? Connect CIs to financial, contractual, and ownership data.
    How can ITAM leverage config? Connect assets to services, changes, incidents.
    What key fields will be primarily tracked/managed by ITAM? Serial number, unique ID, user, location, PO number, …
    What key fields will be primarily tracked/managed by configuration management? Supported service(s), dependencies, service description, service criticality, network address…

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    ITAM supports service management

    Decoupling asset management from other service management practices can result in lost value. Establish how asset management can support other service management practices – and how those practices can support ITAM.

    Incident Management

    What broke?
    Was it under warranty?
    Is there a service contract?
    Was it licensed?
    Who was it assigned to?
    Is it end-of-life?

    ITAM
    Practice

    Request Management

    What can this user request or purchase?
    What are standard hardware and software offerings?
    What does the requester already have?
    Are there items in inventory to fulfil the request?
    Did we save money by reissuing equipment?
    Is this a standard request?
    What assets are being requested regularly?

    What IT assets are related to the known issue?
    What models and vendors are related to the issue?
    Are the assets covered by a service contract?
    Are other tickets related to this asset?
    What end-of-life assets have been tied to incidents recently?

    Problem Management

    What assets are related to the change?
    Is the software properly licensed?
    Has old equipment been properly retired and disposed?
    Have software licenses been returned to the pool?
    Is the vendor support on the change part of a service contract?

    Change Enablement

    2.5. Connect with other IT service practices

    45 minutes

    Input: Knowledge of existing organizational IT service management processes

    Output: Define how ITAM will help other service management processes, and how other service management processes will help ITAM

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, Service leads

    Complete the table below to establish what ITAM can provide to other service management practices, and what other practices can provide to ITAM.

    Practice ITAM will help Will help ITAM
    Incident Management Provide context on assets involved in an incident (e.g. ownership, service contracts). Track when assets are involved in incidents (via incident tickets).
    Request Management Oversee request & procurement processes. Help develop asset standards. Enter new assets in ITAM database.
    Problem Management Collect information on assets related to known issues. Report back on models/titles that are generating known issues.
    Change Enablement Provide context on assets for change review. Ensure EOL assets are retired and licenses are returned during changes.
    Capacity Management Identify ownership, location for assets at capacity. Identify upcoming refreshes or purchases.
    Availability Management Connect uptime and reliability to assets. Identify assets that are causing availability issues.
    Monitoring and Event Management Provide context to events with asset data. Notify asset of unrecognized software and hardware.
    Financial Management Establish current and predict future spending. Identify upcoming purchases, renewals.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.6: Evaluate ITAM tools and integrations

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers

    Outcomes

    • Create a list of the ITAM tools currently in use, how they’re used, and their current limitations.
    • Identify new tools that could provide value to the ITAM practice, and what needs to be done to acquire and implement them.

    “Everything is connected. Nothing is also connected.” (Dirk Gently’s Holistic Detective Agency)

    Establish current strengths and gaps in your ITAM toolset

    ITAM data quality relies on tools and integrations that are managed by individuals or teams who don’t report directly to the ITAM function.

    Without direct line of sight into tools management, the ITAM team must influence rather than direct improvement initiatives that are in some cases critical to the performance of the ITAM function. To more effectively influence improvement efforts, you must explicitly identify what you need, why you need it, from which tools, and from which stakeholders.

    Data Sources
    Procurement Tools
    Discovery Tools
    Active Directory
    Purchase Documents
    Spreadsheets
    Input To Asset System(s) of Record
    ITAM Database
    ITSM Tool
    CMDB
    Output To Asset Data Consumption
    ITFM Tools
    Security Tools
    TEM Tools
    Accounting Tools
    Spreadsheets
    “Active Directory plays a huge role in audit defense and self-assessment, but no-one really goes out there and looks at Active Directory.

    I was talking to one organization that has 1,600,000 AD records for 100,000 employees.” (Mike Austin, Founder, MetrixData 360)

    2.6 Evaluate ITAM existing technologies

    30 minutes

    Input: Knowledge of existing ITAM tools

    Output: A list of prioritized organizational goals, An initial assessment of how ITAM can support these goals

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Identify the use, limitations, and next steps for existing ITAM tools, including those not directly managed by the ITAM team.

    1. What tools do we have today?
    2. What are they used for? What are their limitations?
    3. Who manages them?
    4. What actions could we take to maximize the value of the tools?
    Existing Tool Use Constraints Owner Proposed Action?
    ITAM Module
    • Track HW/SW
    • Connect assets to incident, request
    • Currently used for end-user devices only
    • Not all divisions have access
    • SAM capabilities are limited
    ITAM Team/Service Management
    • Add license for additional read/write access
    • Start tracking infra in this tool
    Active Directory
    • Store user IDs, organizational data
    Major data quality issues IT Operations
    • Work with AD team to identify issues creating data issues

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    2.6 Identify potential new tools

    30 minutes

    Input: Knowledge of tooling gaps, An understanding of available tools that could remediate gaps

    Output: New tools that can improve ITAM capabilities, including expected value and proposed next steps

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers

    Identify tools that are required to support the identified goals of the ITAM practice.

    1. What types of tools do we need that we don’t have?
    2. What could these tools help us do?
    3. What needs to be done next to investigate or acquire the appropriate tool?
    New Tool Expected Value Proposed Next Steps
    SAM tool
    • Automatically calculate licensing entitlements from contract data.
    • Automatically calculate licensing requirements from discovery data.
    • Support gap analyses.
    • Further develop software requirements.
    • Identify vendors in the space and create a shortlist.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.7: Create a plan for internal and external audits

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Establish your approach to internal data audits.
    • Create a high-level response plan for external audits.

    Validate ITAM data via internal audits

    Data audits provide assurance that the records in the ITAM database are as accurate as possible. Consider these three approaches:

    Compare Tool Records

    Audit your data by comparing records in the ITAM system to other discovery sources.

    • Ideally, use three separate data sources (e.g. ITAM database, discovery tool, security tool). Use a common field, such as the host name, to compare across fields. (To learn more about discovery tool analysis, see Jeremy Boerger’s book, Rethinking IT Asset Management.)
    • Run reports to compare records and identify discrepancies. This could include assets missing from one system or metadata differences such as different users or installed software.
    • Over time, discrepancies between tools should be well understood and accepted; otherwise, they should be addressed and remediated.
    IT-led Audit

    Conduct a hands-on investigation led by ITAM staff and IT technicians.

    • In-person audits require significant effort and resources. Each audit should be scoped and planned ahead of time to focus on known problem areas.
    • Provide the audit team with exact instructions on what needs to be verified and recorded. Depending on the experience and attention to detail of the audit team, you may need to conduct spot checks to ensure you’re catching any issues in the audit process itself.
    • Automation should be used wherever possible (e.g. through barcodes, scanners, and tables for quick access to ITAM records).
    User-led audit

    Have users validate the IT assets assigned to them.

    • Even more than IT-led audits: don’t use this approach too frequently; keep the scope as narrow as possible and the process as simple as possible.
    • Ensure users have all the information and tools they’ll need readily available to complete this task, or the result will be ineffective and will only frustrate your users.
    • Consider a process integrated with your ITSM tool: once a year, when a user logs in to the portal, they will be asked to enter the asset code for their laptop (and provided with instructions on where to find that code). Investigate discrepancies between assignments and ITAM records.

    2.7 Set an approach to internal data audits

    30 minutes

    Input: An understanding of current data audit capabilities and needs

    Output: An outline of how you’ll approach data audits, including frequency, scope, required resources

    Materials: Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team

    Review the three internal data audit approaches outlined on the previous slide, and identify which of the three approaches you’ll use. For each approach, complete the fields in the table below.

    Audit Approach How often? What scope? Who’s involved? Comments
    Compare tool records Monthly Compare ITAM DB, Intune/ConfigMgr, and Vulnerability Scanner Data; focus on end-user devices to start Asset manager will lead at first.
    Work with tool admins to pull data and generate reports.
    IT-led audit Annual End-user devices at a subset of locations Asset manager will work with ITSM admins to generate reports. In-person audit to be conducted by local techs.
    User-led audit Annual Assigned personal devices (start with a pilot group) Asset coordinator to develop procedure with ITSM admin. Run pilot with power users first.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Prepare for and respond to external audits and true-ups

    Are you ready when software vendors come knocking?

    • Vendor audits are expensive.
    • If you’re out of compliance, you will at minimum be required to pay the missing license fees. At their discretion, vendors may choose to add punitive fees and require you to cover the hourly cost of their audit teams. If you choose not to pay, the vendor could secure an injunction to cut off your service, which in many cases will be far more costly than the fines. And this is aside from the intangible costs of the disruption to your business and damaged relationships between IT, ITAM, your business, and other partners.
    • Having a plan to respond to an audit is critical to reducing audit risk. Preparation will help you coordinate your audit response, ensure the audit happens on the most favorable possible terms, and even prevent some audits from happening in the first place.
    • The best defense, as they say, is a good offense. Good ITAM and SAM processes will allow you to track acquisition, allocation, and disposal of software licenses; understand your licensing position; and ensure you remain compliant whenever possible. The vendor has no reason to audit you when there’s nothing to find.
    • Know when and where your audit risk is greatest, so you can focus your resources where they can deliver the most value.
    “If software audits are a big part of your asset operations, you have problems. You can reduce the time spent on audits and eliminate some audits by having a proactive ITAM practice.” (Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Audit defense starts long before you get audited. For an in-depth review of your audit approach, see Info-Tech’s Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit.

    Identify areas of higher audit risk

    Watch for these warning signs
    • Your organization is visibly fighting fires. Signs of disorder may signal to vendors that there are opportunities to exploit via an audit. Past audit failures make future audits more likely.
    • You are looking for ways to decrease spend. Vendors may counter attempts to true-down licensing by launching an audit to try to find unlicensed software that provides them leverage to negotiate maintained or even increased spending.
    • Your license/contract terms with the vendor are particularly complex or highly customized. Very complex terms may make it harder to validate your own compliance, which may present opportunities to the vendor in an audit.
    • The vendor has earned a reputation for being particularly aggressive with audits. Some vendors include audits as a standard component of their business model to drive revenue. This may include acquiring smaller vendors or software titles that may not have been audit-driven in the past, and running audits on their new customer base.

    “The reality is, software vendors prey on confusion and complication. Where there’s confusion, there’s opportunity.” (Mike Austin, Founder, MetrixData 360)

    Develop an audit response plan

    You will be on the clock once the vendor sends you an audit request. Have a plan ready to go.
    • Don’t panic: Resist knee-jerk reactions. Follow the plan.
    • Form an audit response team and centralize your response: This team should be led by a member of the ITAM group, and it should include IT leadership, software SMEs, representatives from affected business areas, vendor management, contract management, and legal. You may also need to bring on a contractor with deep expertise with the vendor in question to supplement your internal capabilities. Establish clearly who will be the point of contact with the vendor during the audit.
    • Clarify the scope of the audit: Clearly establish what the audit will cover – what products, subsidiaries, contracts, time periods, geographic regions, etc. Manage the auditors to prevent scope creep.
    • Establish who covers audit costs: Vendors may demand the auditee cover the hourly cost of their audit team if you’re significantly out of compliance. Consider asking the vendor to pay for your team’s time if you’re found to be compliant.
    • Know your contract: Vendors’ contracts change over time, and it’s no guarantee that even your vendor’s licensing experts will be aware of the rights you have in your contract. You must know your entitlements to negotiate effectively.
    1. Bring the audit request received to the attention of ITAM and IT leadership. Assemble the response team.
    2. Acknowledge receipt of audit notice.
    3. Negotiate timing and scope of the audit.
    4. Direct staff not to remove or acquire licenses for software under audit without directly involving the ITAM team first.
    5. Gather installation data and documentation to establish current entitlements, including original contract, current contract, addendums, receipts, invoices.
    6. Compare entitlements to installed software.
    7. Investigate any anomalies (e.g. unexpected or non-compliant software).
    8. Review results with the audit response team.

    2.7 Clarify your vendor audit response plan

    1 hour

    Input: Organizational knowledge on your current audit response procedures

    Output: Audit response team membership, High-level audit checklist, A list of things to start, stop, and continue doing as part of the audit response

    Materials: Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    1. Who’s on the audit response team, and what’s their role? Who will lead the team? Who will be the point of contact with the auditor?
    2. What are the high-level steps in our audit response workflow? Use the example checklist below as a starting point.
    3. What do we need to start, stop, and continue doing in response to audit requests?

    Example Audit Checklist

    • Bring the audit request received to the attention of ITAM and IT leadership. Assemble the response team.
    • Acknowledge receipt of audit notice.
    • Negotiate timing and scope of the audit.
    • Direct staff not to remove or acquire licenses for software under audit without directly involving the ITAM team first.
    • Gather installation data and documentation to establish current entitlements, including original contract, current contract, addendums, receipts, invoices.
    • Compare entitlements to installed software.
    • Investigate any anomalies (e.g. unexpected or non-compliant software).
    • Review results with the audit response team.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.8: Improve budget processes

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers
    • ITAM business partners

    Outcomes

    • Identify what you need to start, stop, and continue to do to support budgeting processes.

    Improve budgeting and forecasting

    Insert ITAM into budgeting processes to deliver significant value.

    Some examples of what ITAM can bring to the budgeting table:
    • Trustworthy data on deployed assets and spending obligations tied to those assets.
    • Projections of hardware due for replacement in terms of quantity and spend.
    • Knowledge of IT hardware and software contract terms and pricing.
    • Lists of unused or underused hardware and software that could be redeployed to avoid spend.
    • Comparisons of spend year-over-year.

    Being part of the budgeting process positions ITAM for success in other ways:

    • Helps demonstrate the strategic value of the ITAM practice.
    • Provides insight into business and IT strategic projects and priorities for the year.
    • Strengthens relationships with key stakeholders, and positions the ITAM team as trusted partners.

    “Knowing what you have [IT assets] is foundational to budgeting, managing, and optimizing IT spend.” (Dave Kish, Info-Tech, Practice Lead, IT Financial Management)

    Stock image of a calculator.

    2.8 Build better budgets

    20 minutes

    Input: Context on IT budgeting processes

    Output: A list of things to start, stop, and continue doing as part of budgeting exercises

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, ITAM business partners

    What should we start, stop, and continue doing to support organizational budgeting exercises?

    Start Stop Continue
    • Creating buckets of spend and allocating assets to those buckets.
    • Zero-based review on IaaS instances quarterly.
    • Develop dashboards plugged into asset data for department heads to view allocated assets and spend.
    • Create value reports to demonstrate hard savings as well as cost avoidance.
    • Waiting for business leaders to come to us for help (start reaching out with reports proactively, three months before budget cycle).
    • % increases on IT budgets without further review.
    • Monthly variance budget analysis.
    • What-if analysis for asset spend based on expected headcount increases.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.9: Establish a documentation framework

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team

    Outcomes

    • Identify key documentation and gaps in your documentation.
    • Establish where documentation should be stored, who should own it, who should have access, and what should trigger a review.

    Create ITAM documentation

    ITAM documentation will typically support governance or operations.

    Long-term planning and governance
    • ITAM policy and/or related policies (procurement policy, security awareness policy, acceptable use policy, etc.)
    • ITAM strategy document
    • ITAM roadmap or burndown list
    • Job descriptions
    • Functional requirements documents for ITAM tools

    Operational documentation

    • ITAM SOPs (hardware, software) and workflows
    • Detailed work instructions/knowledgebase articles
    • ITAM data/records
    • Contracts, purchase orders, invoices, MSAs, SOWs, etc.
    • Effective Licensing Position (ELP) reports
    • Training and communication materials
    • Tool and integration documentation
    • Asset management governance, operations, and tools typically generate a lot of documentation.
    • Don’t create documentation for the sake of documentation. Prioritize building and maintaining documentation that addresses major risks or presents opportunities to improve the consistency and reliability of key processes.
    • Maximize the value of ITAM documentation by ensuring it is as current, accessible, and usable as it needs to be.
    • Clearly identify where documentation is stored and who should have access to it.
    • Identify who is accountable for the creation and maintenance of key documentation, and establish triggers for reviews, updates, and changes.

    Consider ITAM policies

    Create policies that can and will be monitored and enforced.
    • Certain requirements of the ITAM practice may need to be backed up by corporate policies: formal statements of organizational expectations that must be recognized by staff, and which will lead to sanctions/penalties if breached.
    • Some organizations will choose to create one or more ITAM-specific policies. Others will include ITAM-related statements in other existing policies, such as acceptable use policies, security training and awareness policies, procurement policies, configuration policies, e-waste policies, and more.
    • Ensure that you are prepared to monitor compliance with policies and evenly enforce breaches of policy. Failing to consistently enforce your policies exposes you and your organization to claims of negligence or discriminatory conduct.
    • For a template for ITAM-specific policies, see Info-Tech’s policy templates for Hardware Asset Management and Software Asset Management.

    2.9 Establish documentation gaps

    15-30 minutes

    Input: An understanding of existing documentation gaps and risks

    Output: Documentation gaps, Identified owners, repositories, access rights, and review/update protocols

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, Optional: IT managers, ITAM business partners

    Discuss and record the following:

    • What planning/governance, operational, and tooling documentation do we still need to create? Who is accountable for the creation and maintenance of these documents?
    • Where will the documentation be stored? Who can access these documents?
    • What will trigger reviews or changes to the documents?
    Need to Create Owner Stored in Accessible by Trigger for review
    Hardware asset management SOP ITAM manager ITAM SharePoint site › Operating procedures folder
    • All IT staff
    • Annual review
    • As-needed for major tooling changes that require a documentation update

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Step 2.10: Create a roadmap and communication plan

    Participants

    • Project sponsor and lead facilitator
    • ITAM team
    • IT leaders and managers

    Outcomes

    • A timeline of key ITAM initiatives.
    • Improvement ideas aligned to key initiatives.
    • A communication plan tailored to key stakeholders.
    • Your ITAM Strategy document.

    “Understand that this is a journey. This is not a 90-day project. And in some organizations, these journeys could be three or five years long.” (Mike Austin, MetrixData 360)

    2.10 Identify key ITAM initiatives

    30-45 minutes

    Input: Organizational strategy documents

    Output: A roadmap that outlines next steps

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, Project sponsor

    1. Identify key initiatives that are critical to improving practice maturity and meeting business goals.
    2. There should only be a handful of really key initiatives. This is the work that will have the greatest impact on your ability to deliver value. Too many initiatives muddy the narrative and can distract from what really matters.
    3. Plot the target start and end dates for each initiative in the business and IT transformation timeline you created in Phase 1.
    4. Review the chart and consider – what new capabilities should the ITAM practice have once the identified initiatives are complete? What transformational initiatives will you be better positioned to support?

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Transformation Timeline

    Example transformation timeline with row headers 'Business Inititiaves', 'IT Initiatives', and 'ITAM Initiatives'. Each initiative is laid out along the timeline appropriately.

    2.10 Align improvement ideas to initiatives

    45 minutes

    Input: Key initiatives, Ideas for ITAM improvement collected over the course of previous exercises

    Output: Concrete action items to support each initiative

    Materials: The table in the next slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: ITAM team, IT leaders and managers, Project sponsor

    As you’ve been working through the previous exercises, you have been tracking ideas for improvement – now we’ll align them to your roadmap.

    1. Review the list of ideas for improvement you’ve produced over the working sessions. Consolidate the list – are there any ideas that overlap or complement each other? Record any new ideas. Frame each idea as an action item – something you can actually do.
    2. Connect the action items to initiatives. It may be that not every action item becomes part of a key initiative. (Don’t lose ideas that aren’t part of key initiatives – track them in a separate burndown list or backlog.)
    3. Identify a target completion date and owner for each action item that’s part of an initiative.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Example ITAM initiatives

    Initiative 1: Develop hardware/software standards
    Task Target Completion Owner
    Laptop standards Q1-2023 ITAM manager
    Identify/eliminate contracts for unused software using scan tool Q2-2023 ITAM manager
    Review O365 license levels and standard service Q3-2023 ITAM manager

    Initiative 2: Improve ITAM data quality
    Task Target Completion Owner
    Implement scan agent on all field laptops Q3-2023 Desktop engineer
    Conduct in person audit on identified data discrepancies Q1-2024 ITAM team
    Develop and run user-led audit Q1-2024 Asset manager

    Initiative 3: Acquire & implement a new ITAM tool
    Task Target Completion Owner
    Select an ITAM tool Q3-2023 ITAM manager
    Implement ITAM tool, incl. existing data migration Q1-2024 ITAM manager
    Training on new tool Q1-2024 ITAM manager
    Build KPIs, executive dashboards in new tool Q2-2024 Data analyst
    Develop user-led audit functionality in new tool Q3-2024 ITAM coordinator

    2.10 Create a communication plan

    45 minutes

    Input: Proposed ITAM initiatives, Stakeholder priorities and goals, and an understanding of how ITAM can help them meet those goals

    Output: A high-level communication plan to communicate the benefits and impact of proposed changes to the ITAM program

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: IT asset manager, Project sponsor

    Develop clear, consistent, and targeted messages to key ITAM stakeholders.

    1. Modify the list of stakeholders in the first column.
    2. What benefits should those stakeholders realize from ITAM? What impact may the proposed improvements have on them? Refer back to exercises from Phase 1, where you identified key stakeholders, their priorities, and how ITAM could help them.
    3. Identify communication channels (in-person, email, all-hands meeting, etc.) and timing – when you’ll distribute the message. You may choose to use more than one channel, and you may need to convey the message more than once.
    Group ITAM Benefits Impact Channel(s) Timing
    CFO
    • More accurate IT spend predictions
    • Better equipment utilization and value for money
    • Sponsor integration project between ITAM DB and financial system
    • Support procurement procedures review
    Face-to-face – based on their availability Within the next month
    CIO
    • Better oversight into IT spend
    • Data to help demonstrate IT value
    • Resources required to support tool and ITAM process improvements
    Standing bi-monthly 1:1 meetings Review strategy at next meeting
    IT Managers
    Field Techs

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    2.10 Put the final touches on your ITAM Strategy

    30 minutes

    Input: Proposed ITAM initiatives, Stakeholder priorities and goals, and an understanding of how ITAM can help them meet those goals

    Output: A high-level communication plan to communicate the benefits and impact of proposed changes to the ITAM program

    Materials: The table in this slide, Your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Participants: IT asset manager, Project sponsor

    You’re almost done! Do a final check of your work before you send a copy to your participants.

    1. Summarize in three points the key findings from the activities you’ve worked through. What have you learned? What are your priorities? What key message do you need to get across? Add these to the appropriate slide near the start of the ITAM Strategy Template.
    2. What are your immediate next steps? Summarize no more than five and add them to the appropriate slide near the start of the ITAM Strategy Template.
      1. Are you asking for something? Approval for ITAM initiatives? Funding? Resources? Clearly identify the ask as part of your next steps.
    3. Are the KPIs identified in Phase 1 still valid? Will they help you monitor for success in the initiatives you’ve identified in Phase 2? Make any adjustments you think are required to the KPIs to reflect the additional completed work.

    Add your results to your copy of the ITAM Strategy Template

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kylie Fowler
    Principal Consultant
    ITAM Intelligence

    Kylie is an experienced ITAM/FinOps consultant with a track record of creating superior IT asset management frameworks that enable large companies to optimize IT costs while maintaining governance and control.

    She has operated as an independent consultant since 2009, enabling organizations including Sainsbury's and DirectLine Insurance to leverage the benefits of IT asset management and FinOps to achieve critical business objectives. Recent key projects include defining an end-to-end SAM strategy, target operating model, policies and processes which when implemented provided a 300% ROI.

    She is passionate about supporting businesses of all sizes to drive continuous improvement, reduce risk, and achieve return on investment through the development of creative asset management and FinOps solutions.

    Rory Canavan
    Owner and Principal Consultant
    SAM Charter

    Rory is the founder, owner, and principal consultant of SAM Charter, an internationally recognized consultancy in enterprise-wide Software & IT Asset Management. As an industry leader, SAM Charter is uniquely poised to ensure your IT & SAM systems are aligned to your business requirements.

    With a technical background in business and systems analysis, Rory has a wide range of first-hand experience advising numerous companies and organizations on the best practices and principles pertaining to software asset management. This experience has been gained in both military and civil organizations, including the Royal Navy, Compaq, HP, the Federation Against Software Theft (FAST), and several software vendors.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Jeremy Boerger
    Founder, Boerger Consulting
    Author of Rethinking IT Asset Management

    Jeremy started his career in ITAM fighting the Y2K bug at the turn of the 21st century. Since then, he has helped companies in manufacturing, healthcare, banking, and service industries build and rehabilitate hardware and software asset management practices.

    These experiences prompted him to create the Pragmatic ITAM method, which directly addresses and permanently resolves the fundamental flaws in current ITAM and SAM implementations.

    In 2016, he founded Boerger Consulting, LLC to help business leaders and decision makers fully realize the promises a properly functioning ITAM can deliver. In his off time, you will find him in Cincinnati, Ohio, with his wife and family.

    Mike Austin
    Founder and CEO
    MetrixData 360

    Mike Austin leads the delivery team at MetrixData 360. Mike brings more than 15 years of Microsoft licensing experience to his clients’ projects. He assists companies, from Fortune 500 to organizations with as few as 500 employees, with negotiations of Microsoft Enterprise Agreements (EA), Premier Support Contracts, and Select Agreements. In addition to helping negotiate contracts, he helps clients build and implement software asset management processes.

    Previously, Mike was employed by Microsoft for more than 8 years as a member of the global sales team. With Microsoft, Mike successfully negotiated more than a billion dollars in new and renewal EAs. Mike has also negotiated legal terms and conditions for all software agreements, developed Microsoft’s best practices for global account management, and was awarded Microsoft’s Gold Star Award in 2003 and Circle of Excellence in 2008 for his contributions.

    Bibliography

    “Asset Management.” SFIA v8. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Boerger, Jeremy. Rethinking IT Asset Management. Business Expert Press, 2021.

    Canavan, Rory. “C-Suite Cheat Sheet.” SAM Charter, 2021. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Fisher, Matt. “Metrics to Measure SAM Success.” Snow Software, 26 May 2015. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Flexera (2021). “State of ITAM Report.” Flexera, 2021. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Fowler, Kylie. “ITAM by design.” BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT, 2017. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Fowler, Kylie. “Ch-ch-ch-changes… Is It Time for an ITAM Transformation?” ITAM Intelligence, 2021. Web. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Fowler, Kylie. “Do you really need an ITAM policy?” ITAM Accelerate, 15 Oct. 2021. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Hayes, Chris. “How to establish a successful, long-term ITAM program.” Anglepoint, Sept. 2021. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    ISO/IEC 19770-1-2017. IT Asset Management Systems – Requirements. Third edition. ISO, Dec 2017.

    Joret, Stephane. “IT Asset Management: ITIL® 4 Practice Guide”. Axelos, 2020.

    Jouravlev, Roman. “IT Service Financial Management: ITIL® 4 Practice Guide”. Axelos, 2020.

    Pagnozzi, Maurice, Edwin Davis, Sam Raco. “ITAM Vs. ITSM: Why They Should Be Separate.” KPMG, 2020. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Rumelt, Richard. Good Strategy, Bad Strategy. Profile Books, 2013.

    Stone, Michael et al. “NIST SP 1800-5 IT Asset Management.” Sept, 2018. Accessed 17 March 2022.

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}281|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
    • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
    • Organizations see the value of mobile applications in improving productivity and reach of day-to-day business and IT operations. This motivates leaders to begin the planning of their first application.
    • However, organizations often lack the critical foundational knowledge and skills to deliver and maintain high quality and valuable applications that meet business and user priorities and technical requirements.
    • Mobile technologies and trends are continually evolving and maturing. It is hard to predict which trends will make a significant impact and to prepare current mobile investments to harness their value of these trends.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mobile applications can stress the stability, reliability, and overall quality of your enterprise systems and services. They will also increase your security risks because of the exposure of your enterprise technology assets to unsecured networks and devices.
    • High costs of entry may restrict what built-in features your users can have in their mobile experience. Workarounds may not be sufficient to offset the costs of certain built-in feature needs.
    • Many operating models do not enable or encourage the collaboration required to fully understand user needs and behaviors and evaluate mobile opportunities and underlying operational systems from multiple perspectives.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the right expectations. Understand your mobile users by learning their needs, challenges, and behaviors. Discuss the current state of your systems and your high priority non-functional requirements to determine what to expect from your mobile applications.
    • Choose the right mobile platform approach and shortlist your mobile delivery solutions. Obtain a thorough view of the business and technical complexities of your mobile opportunities, including current mobile delivery capabilities and system compatibilities.
    • Create your mobile roadmap. Describe the gradual rollout of your mobile technologies through minimal valuable products (MVPs).

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools Storyboard

    This blueprint helps you develop an approach to understand the mobile experience your stakeholders want your users to have and select the appropriate platform and delivery tools to meet these expectations.

    • Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools Storyboard

    2. Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template – Clearly communicate the goal and approach of your mobile application implementation in a language your audience understands.

    This template narrates a story to describe the need and expectations of your low- and no-code initiative to get buy-in from stakeholders and interested parties.

    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Choose Your Platform and Delivery Solution

    The Purpose

    Choose the right mobile platform.

    Shortlist your mobile delivery solution and desired features and services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A chosen mobile platform that meets user and enterprise needs.

    Candidate mobile delivery solutions that meet your delivery needs and capacity of your teams.

    Activities

    1.1 Select your platform approach.

    1.2 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution.

    1.3 Build your feature and service lists.

    Outputs

    Desired mobile platform approach.

    Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions.

    Desired list of vendor features and services.

    2 Create Your Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Design the mobile application minimal viable product (MVP).

    Create your mobile roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An achievable and valuable mobile application that is scalable for future growth.

    Clear intent of business outcome delivery and completing mobile delivery activities.

    Activities

    2.1 Define your MVP release.

    2.2 Build your roadmap.

    Outputs

    MVP design.

    Mobile delivery roadmap.

    3 Set the Mobile Context

    The Purpose

    Understand your user’s environment needs, behaviors, and challenges.

    Define stakeholder expectations and ensure alignment with the holistic business strategy.

    Identify your mobile application opportunities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough understanding of your mobile user and opportunities where mobile applications can help.

    Level set stakeholder expectations and establish targeted objectives.

    Prioritized list of mobile opportunities.

    Activities

    3.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps.

    3.2 Build your mobile application canvas.

    3.3 Build your mobile backlog.

    Outputs

    User personas.

    Mobile objectives and metrics.

    Mobile opportunity backlog.

    4 Identify Your Technical Needs

    The Purpose

    Define the mobile experience you want to deliver and the features to enable it.

    Understand the state of your current system to support mobile.

    Identify your definition of mobile application quality.

    List the concerns with mobile delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of the desired mobile experience.

    Potential issues and risks with enabling mobile on top of existing systems.

    Grounded understanding of mobile application quality.

    Holistic readiness assessment to proceed with mobile delivery.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss your mobile needs.

    4.2 Conduct a technical assessment.

    4.3 Define mobile application quality.

    4.4 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications.

    Outputs

    List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience.

    System current assessment.

    Mobile application quality definition.

    Verification to proceed with mobile delivery.

    Further reading

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    Maximize the value of your mobile investments by prioritizing technology decisions on user experience, business priorities, and system quality.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Mobile is the way of working.

    Workers require access to enterprise products, data, and services anywhere at anytime on any device. Give them the device-specific features, offline access, desktop-like interfaces, and automation capabilities they need to be productive.

    To be successful, you need to instill a collaborative business-IT partnership. Only through this partnership will you be able to select the right mobile platform and tools to balance desired outcomes with enterprise security, performance, integration, quality, and other delivery capacity concerns.

    This is a picture of Andrew Kum-Seun Senior Research Analyst, Application Delivery and Application Management Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Senior Research Analyst,
    Application Delivery and Application Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Organizations see the value of mobile applications in improving productivity and reach of day-to-day business and IT operations. This motivates leaders to begin the planning of their first application.
    • However, organizations often lack the critical foundational knowledge and skills to deliver and maintain high quality and valuable applications that meet business and user priorities and technical requirements.
    • Mobile technologies and trends are continually evolving and maturing. It is hard to predict which trends will make a significant impact and to prepare current mobile investments to harness the value of these trends.

    Common Obstacles

    • Mobile applications can stress the stability, reliability and overall quality of your enterprise systems and services. They will also increase your security risks because of the exposure of your enterprise technology assets to unsecured networks and devices.
    • High costs of entry may restrict what native features your users can have in their mobile experience. Workarounds may not be sufficient to offset the costs of certain native feature needs.
    • Many operating models do not enable or encourage the collaboration required to fully understand user needs and behaviors and evaluate mobile opportunities and underlying operational systems from multiple perspectives.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Establish the right expectations. Understand your mobile users by learning their needs, challenges, and behaviors. Discuss the current state of your systems and your high priority non-functional requirements to determine what to expect from your mobile applications.
    • Choose the right mobile platform approach and shortlist your mobile delivery solutions. Obtain a thorough view of the business and technical complexities of your mobile opportunities, including current mobile delivery capabilities and system compatibilities.
    • Create your mobile roadmap. Describe the gradual rollout of your mobile technologies through minimal valuable products (MVPs).

    Insight Summary

    Overarching Info-Tech Insight

    Treat your mobile applications as digital products. Digital products are continuously modernized to ensure they are fit-for-purpose, secured, accessible, and immersive. A successful mobile experience involves more than just the software and supporting system. It involves good training and onboarding, efficient delivery turnaround, and a clear and rational vision and strategy.

    Phase 1: Set the Mobile Context

    • Build applications your users need and desire – Design the right mobile application that enables your users to address their frustrations and productivity challenges.
    • Maximize return on your technology investments – Build your mobile applications with existing web APIs, infrastructure, and services as much as possible.
    • Prioritize mobile security, performance and integration requirements – Understand the unique security, performance, and integration influences has on your desired mobile user experience. Find the right balance of functional and non-functional requirements through business and IT collaboration.

    Phase 2: Define Your Mobile Approach

    • Start with a mobile web platform - Minimize disruptions to your existing delivery process and technical stack by building against common web standards. Select a hybrid platform or cross-platform if you need device hardware access or have complicated non-functional requirements.
    • Focus your mobile solution decision on vendor support and functional complexity – Verify that your solution is not only compatible with the architecture, data, and policies of existing business systems, but satisfies IT's concerns with access to restricted technology and data, and with IT's ability to manage and operate your applications.
    • Anticipate changes, defects & failures in your roadmap - Quickly shift your mobile roadmaps according to user feedback, delivery challenges, value, and stability.

    Mobile is how the business works today

    Mobile adoption continues to grow in part due to the need to be a mobile workforce, and the shift in customer behaviors. This reality pushed the industry to transform business processes and technologies to better support the mobile way of working.

    Mobile Builds Interests
    61%
    Mobile devices drove 61% of visits to U.S. websites
    Source: Perficient, 2021

    Mobile Maintains Engagement
    54%
    Mobile devices generated 54.4% of global website traffic in Q4 2021.
    Source: Statista, 2022

    Mobile Drives Productivity
    82%
    According to 82% of IT executives, smartphones are highly important to employee productivity
    Source: Samsung and Oxford Economics, 2022

    Mobile applications enable and drive your digital business strategy

    Organizations know the criticality of mobile applications in meeting key business and digital transformation goals, and they are making significant investments. Over half (58%) of organizations say their main strategy for driving application adoption is enabling mobile access to critical enterprise systems (Enterprise CIO, 2016). The strategic positioning and planning of mobile applications are key for success.

    Mobile Can Motivate, Support and Drive Progress in Key Activities Underpinning Digital Transformation Goals

    Goal: Enhance Customer Experience

    • A shift from paper to digital communications
    • Seamless, omni-channel client experiences across devices
    • Create Digital interactive documents with sections that customers can customize to better understand their communications

    Goal: Increase Workflow Throughput & Efficiency

    • Digitized processes and use of data to improve process efficiency
    • Modern IT platforms
    • Automation through robotic process automation (RPA) where possible
    • Use of AI and machine learning for intelligent automation

    Source: Broadridge, 2022

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Define Your Digital Business Strategy blueprint.

    Well developed mobile applications bring unique opportunities to drive more value

    Role

    Opportunities With Mobile Applications

    Expected Value

    Stationary Worker

    Design flowcharts and diagrams, while abandoning paper and desktop applications in favor of easy-to-use, drawing tablet applications.

    Multitask by checking the application to verify information given by a vendor during their presentation or pitch.

    • Reduce materials cost to complete administrative responsibilities.
    • Digitally and automatically store and archive frequently used documents.

    Roaming Worker
    (Engineer)

    Replace physical copies of service and repair manuals with digital copies, and access them with mobile applications.

    Scan or input product bar code to determine whether a replacement part is available or needs to be ordered.

    • Readily access and update corporate data anywhere at anytime.
    • Expand employee responsibilities with minimal skills impact.

    Roaming Worker
    (Nurse)

    Log patient information according to HIPAA standards and complete diagnostics live to propose medication for a patient.

    Receive messages from senior staff about patients and scheduling while on-call.

    • Quickly and accurately complete tasks and update patient data at site.
    • Be readily accessible to address urgent issues.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you build it, they may not come. Design and build the applications your user wants and needs, and ensure users are properly onboarded and trained. Learn how your applications are leveraged, capture feedback from the user and system dashboards, and plan for enhancements, fixes, and modernizations.

    Workers expect IT to deliver against their high mobile expectations

    Workers want sophisticated mobile applications like what they see their peers and competitors use.

    Why is IT considering building their own applications?

    • Complex and Unique Workflows: Canned templates and shells are viewed as incompatible to the workflows required to complete worker responsibilities outside the office, with the same level of access to corporate data as on premise.
    • Supporting Bring Your Own Device (BYOD): Developing your own mobile applications around your security protocols and standards can help mitigate the risks with personal devices that are already in your workforce.
    • Long-Term Architecture Misalignment: Outsourcing mobile development risks the mobile application misaligned with your quality standards or incompatible with other enterprise and third-party systems.

    Continuously meeting aggressive user expectations will not be easy

    Value Quickly Wears Off
    39.9% of users uninstall an application because it is not in use.
    40%
    Source: n=2,000, CleverTap, 2021

    Low Tolerance to Waiting
    Keeping a user waiting for 3 seconds is enough to dissatisfy 43% of users.
    43%
    Source: AppSamurai, 2018

    Quick Fixes Are Paramount
    44% of defects are found by users
    44%
    Source: Perfecto Mobile, 2014

    Mobile emphasizes the importance of good security, performance, and integration

    Today's mobile workers are looking for new ways to get more work done quickly. They want access to enterprise solutions and data directly on their mobile devices, which can reside on multiple legacy systems and in the cloud and third-party infrastructure. This presents significant performance, integration, and security risks.

    Cloud Solutions: Can I use my existing APIs?. Solutions in Corporate Networks: Do my legacy systems have the capacity to support mobile?; How do I integrate solutions and data from multiple sources into a single view?; Third Party Solutions: Will I have a significant performance bottleneck?; Single View on Mobile Devices: How is corporate data stored on the device?; What new technology dependencies must I account for in my architecture and operational support capabilities?

    Accept change as the norm

    IT is challenged with keeping up with disruptive technologies, such as mobile, which are arriving and changing faster and faster.

    What is the issue? Mobile priorities, concepts, and technologies do not remain static. For example, current Google's Pixels benefit from at least three versions of Android updates and at least three years of monthly security patches after their release (NextPit, 2022). Keeping up to date with anything mobile is difficult if you do not have the right delivery and product management practices in place.

    What is the impact on IT? Those who fail to prepare for changing requirements and technologies will quickly run into maintainability, extensibility, and flexibility issues. Mobile applications will quickly become stale and misaligned with the maturity of other enterprise infrastructure and applications.

    Continuously look at the trends, vendor roadmaps, and your user's feedback to envision where your mobile applications should be. Learning from your past attempts gives you insights on the opportunities and impacts changes will have on your people, process, and technology.

    How do I address this issue? A well-defined mobile vision and roadmap ensures your initiatives are aligned with your holistic business and technology strategies, the right problem is being solved, and resources are available to deliver high priority changes.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    Address the difficulties in managing enterprise mobile technologies

    Adaptability During Development

    Teams must be ready to alter their mobile approach when new insights and issues arise during and after the delivery of your mobile application and its updates.

    High Cybersecurity Standards

    Cybersecurity should be a top priority given the high security exposure of mobiles and the sensitive data mobile applications need to operate. Role-based access, back-up systems, advanced scanning, and protection software and encryption should all be implemented.

    Integration with Other Systems

    Your application will likely be integrated with other systems to expand service offerings and optimize performance and user experience. Your enterprise integration strategy ensures all systems connect against a common pattern with compatible technologies.

    Finding the Right Mobile Developers

    Enterprise mobile delivery requires a broad skillset to build valuable applications against extensive non-functional requirements in complex and integration environments. The right resources are even harder to find when native applications are preferred over web-based ones.

    Source: Radoslaw Szeja, Netguru, 2022.

    Build and manage the right experience by treating mobile as digital products

    Digital products are continuously modernized to ensure they are fit-for-purpose, secured, insightful, accessible, and interoperable. A good experience involves more than just technology.

    First, deliver the experience end users want and expect by designing the application against digital application principles.

    Business Value

    Continuous modernization

    • Fit for purpose
    • User-centric
    • Adaptable
    • Accessible
    • Private and secured
    • Informative and insightful
    • Seamless application connection
    • Relationship and network building

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your Applications blueprint.

    Then, deliver a long-lasting experience by supporting your applications with key governance and management capabilities.

    • Product Strategy and Roadmap
    • External Relationships
    • User Adoption and Organizational Change Management
    • Funding
    • Knowledge Management
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Product Governance
    • Maintenance & Enhancement
    • User Support
    • Managing and Governing Data
    • Requirements Analysis and Design
    • Research & Development

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Make the Case for Product Delivery blueprint.

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    Maximize the value of your mobile investments by prioritizing technology decisions on user experience, business priorities, and system quality.

    WORKFLOW

    1. Capture Your User Personas and Journey workflow: Trigger: Step 1; Step 2; Step 3; Step 4; Outcome
    2. Select Your Platform Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform.
    3. Shortlist Your Solutions A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions

    Strategic Perspective
    Business and Product Strategies

    1. End-User Perspective

    End User Needs

    • Productivity
    • Innovation
    • Transformation

    Native User Experience

    • Anytime, Anywhere
    • Visually Pleasing & Fulfilling
    • Personalized & Insightful
    • Hands-Off & Automated
    • Integrated Ecosystem

    2. Platform Perspective

    Technical Requirements

    Security

    Performance

    Integration

    Mobile Platform

    3. Solution Perspective

    Vendor Support

    Services

    Stack Mgmt.

    Quality & Risk

    Mobile Delivery Solutions

    Make user experience (UX) the standard

    User experience (UX) focuses on a user's emotions, beliefs, and physical and psychological responses that occur before, during, or after interacting with a service or product.

    For a mobile application to be meaningful, the functions, aesthetics and content must be:

    • Usable
      • Users can intuitively navigate through your mobile application and complete their desired tasks.
    • Desirable
      • The application elements are used to evoke positive emotions and appreciation.
    • Accessible
      • Users can easily use your mobile application, including those with disabilities.
    • Valuable
      • Users find the content useful, and it fulfills a need.

    Enable a greater experience with UX-driven thinking

    Designing for a high-quality experience requires more than just focusing on the UI. It also requires the merging of multiple business, technical, and social disciplines in order to create an immersive, practical, and receptive application. The image on the right explains the disciplines involved in UX. This is critical for ensuring users have a strong desire to use the mobile application, it is adequately supported technically, and it supports business objectives.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice blueprint.

    A Venn diagram is depicted, demonstrating the inputs that lead to an interactive design, with interactive elements, usability, and accessibility. This work by Mark Roden is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License.

    Source: Marky Roden, Xomino, 2018

    Define the mobile experience your end users want

    • Anytime, Anywhere
      • The user can access, update and analyze data and corporate products and services whenever they want, in all networks, and on any device.
    • Hands-Off and Automated
      • The application can perform various workflows and tasks without the user's involvement and notify the user when specific triggers are hit.
    • Personalized and Insightful
      • Content presentation and subject are tailored for the user based on specific inputs from the user, device hardware, or predicted actions.
    • Integrated Ecosystem
      • The application supports a seamless experience across various third-party and enterprise applications and services the user needs.
    • Visually Pleasing and Fulfilling
      • The UI is intuitive and aesthetically gratifying, with little security and performance trade-offs to use the full breadth of its functions and services.

    Each mobile platform has its own take on the mobile native experience. The choice ultimately depends on whether the costs and effort are worth the anticipated value.

    Mobile value is dependent on the platform you choose

    What is a platform?

    "A platform is a set of software and a surrounding ecosystem of resources that helps you to grow your business. A platform enables growth through connection: its value comes not only from its own features, but from its ability to connect external tools, teams, data, and processes." (Source: Emilie Nøss Wangen, 2021) In the mobile context, applications in a platform execute and communicate through a loosely-coupled API architecture, whether the supporting system is managed and supported by your organization or by third-party providers.

    Web

    Mobile web applications are deployed and executed within the mobile web browser. They are often developed with a combination of web and scripting languages, such as HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. Web often takes two forms on mobile:

    • Progressive Web Applications (PWA)
    • Mobile Web Sites

    Hybrid

    Hybrid applications are developed with web technologies but are deployed as native applications. The code is wrapped using a framework so that it runs locally within a native container. It uses the device's browser runtime engine to support more sophisticated designs and features than to the web approach.

    Cross-Platform

    Cross-platform applications are developed within a distinct programming or scripting environment that uses its own scripting language (often like web languages) and APIs. The solution compiles the code into device-specific builds for native deployment.

    Native

    Native applications are developed and deployed to specific devices and OSs using platform-specific software development kits (SDKs) provided by the operating system vendors. The programming language and framework are dictated by the targeted device, such as Java for Android.

    Start mobile development on a mobile web platform

    Start with what you have: begin with a mobile web platform to minimize impacts to your existing delivery skill sets and technical stack while addressing business needs. Resort to a hybrid first. Then consider a cross-platform application if you require device access or need to meet specific non-functional requirements.

    Why choose a mobile web platform?

    Pros

    The latest versions of the most popular web languages (HTML5, CSS3, JavaScript) abstract away from the granular, physical components of the application, simplifying the development process. HTML5 offer some mobile features (e.g. geolocation, accelerometer) that can meet your desired experience without the need for native development skills. Native look-and-feel, high performance, and full device access are just a few tradeoffs of going with web languages.

    Cons

    Native mobile platforms depend on device-specific code which follows specific frameworks and leverages unique programming libraries, such as Objective C for iOS and Java for Android. Each language requires a high level of expertise in the coding structure and hardware of specific devices. This requires resources with specific skillsets and different tools to support development and testing.

    Other Notable Benefits with Web Languages

    • Modern browsers in most mobile devices can execute and render many mobile features developed in web languages, allowing for greater portability and sophistication of code across multiple devices. However, this flexibility comes at the cost of performance since the browser's runtime engine will not perform as well as a native engine.
    • Web languages are well known by developers, minimizing skills and resourcing impacts. Consequently, changes can be quickly accommodated and updated uniformly across all end users.

    Select your mobile platform

    Drive your mobile platform selection against user-centric needs (e.g. device access, aesthetics) and enterprise-centric needs (e.g. security, system performance).

    When does a platform makes sense to use?

    Web

    • Desire to maximize current web technologies investments (people, process, and technologies).
    • Use cases do not require significant computational resources on the device or are tightly constrained by non-functional requirements.
    • Limited budget to acquire mobile development resources.
    • Access to device hardware is not a high priority.

    Hybrid / Cross-Platform

    • The need to quickly spin up native-like applications for multiple platforms and devices.
    • Desire to leverage existing web development skills, but also a need for device access and meeting specific non-functional requirements.
    • Vendor support is needed for the entire mobile delivery process.

    Native

    • Developers are experts in the target programming language and with the device's hardware.
    • Strong need for high performance, security, and device-specific access and customizations.
    • Application use cases require significant computing resources.

    Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform.

    Understand the common attributes of a mobile delivery solution

    • Source Code Management – Built-in or having the ability to integrate with code management solutions for branching, merging, and versioning. Debugging and coding assistance capabilities may be available.
    • Single Code Base – Capable of programming in a standard coding and scripting language for deployment into several platforms and devices. This code base is aligned to a common industry framework (e.g. AngularJS, Java) or a vendor-defined one.
    • Out-of-the-Box Connectors & Plug-ins – Pre-built APIs enhance the solution's capabilities with third-party tools and systems to deliver and manage high quality and valuable mobile applications.
    • Emulators – Ability to virtualize an application's execution on a target platform and device.
    • Support for Native Features – Supports plug-ins and APIs for access to device-specific features.

    What are mobile delivery solutions?

    A mobile delivery solution provides the tools, resources, and support to enable or build your mobile application. It can provide pre-built applications, vendor supported components to allow some configurations, or resources for full stack customizations. Solutions can be barebone software development kits (SDKs), or comprehensive suites offering features to support the entire software delivery lifecycle, such as:

    • Mobile application management
    • Testing and publishing to app stores
    • Content management
    • Cloud hosting
    • Application performance management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Mobile enablement and development capabilities are already embedded in many common productivity tools and enterprise applications, such as Microsoft PowerApps and ERP modules. They can serve as a starting point in the initial rollout of new management and governance practices without the need to acquire new tools.

    Select your mobile delivery solutions

    1. Set the scope of your framework.
    • The initial context of this framework is based on the mobile functions needed to support your desired mobile experience and on the current state of your enterprise and 3rd party systems.
  • Define the decision factors for your solution selection.
    • Review the decision factors that will influence the selection of your mobile delivery solution for each mobile opportunity:
    • Stack Management – Who will be hosting and supporting your mobile application stack?
    • Workflows Complexity & Native Experience – How complex is your desired mobile experience and how will native device features be leveraged?
  • Select your solution type.
    • Mobile delivery solutions are broadly defined in the following groups:
    • Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) – Pre-built mobile applications requiring little to no configurations or implementation effort.
    • Vendor Hosted Mobile Platform – Back-end and mid-tier infrastructure and operational support are managed by a vendor.
    • Cross-Platform Development – Frameworks that transform a single code base into platform-specific builds.
    • Hybrid Development – Tools that wrap a single code base into a locally deployable build.
    • Custom Web Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile web applications.
    • Custom Native Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile native applications.
  • A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions

    Optimize your software delivery process

    Mobile brings new delivery and management challenges that are often difficult for organizations that are tied to legacy systems, hindered by rigid and slow delivery lifecycles, and are unable to adopt leading-edge technologies. Many of these challenges stem from the fact that mobile is a significant shift from desktop development:

    • Mobile devices and operating systems are heavily fragmented, especially in the Android space.
    • Test coverage is significantly expanded to include physical environments and multiple network connections.
    • Mobile devices do not have the same performance capabilities and memory storage as their desktop counterparts.
    • The user interface must be strategically designed to accommodate the limited screen size.
    • Mobile applications are highly susceptible to security breaches.
    • Mobile users often expect quick turnaround time on fixes and enhancements due to continuously changing technology, business priorities, and user needs.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your SDLC blueprint.

    How should the process change?

    • Cross-functional collaboration – Bringing business and IT together at the most opportune times to clarify user needs and business priorities, and set realistic expectations given technology and capacity constraints. The appropriate tactics and techniques are used to improve decision making and delivery effectiveness according to the type of work.
    • Iterative delivery – Frequent delivery of progressive changes minimizes the risk of low-quality features by containing and simplifying scope, and enables responsive turnarounds of fixes, enhancements, and priority changes.
    • Feedback loops –Mobile application owners constantly review, update and refine their backlog of mobile features and changes to reflect user feedback and system performance metrics. Delivery teams proactively prepare the application for future scaling based on lessons and feedback learned from earlier releases.

    Achieve mobile success with MVPs

    By delivering mobile capabilities in small iterations, teams recognize value sooner and reduce accumulated risk. Both benefits are realized as the iteration enters validation testing and release.

    This image depicts a graph of the learn-build-measure cycle over time, adapted from Managing the Development of Large Software Systems, Dr. Winston W. Royce, 1970

    An MVP focuses on a small set of functions, involves minimal possible effort to deliver a working and valuable solution, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to:

    • Maximize learning.
    • Evaluate the value and acceptance of mobile applications.
    • Inform the building of a mobile delivery practice.

    The build-measure-learn loop suggests mobile delivery teams should perpetually take an idea and develop, test, and validate it with the mobile development solution, then expand on the MVP using the lessons learned and evolving ideas. In this sense the MVP is just the first iteration in the loop.

    Gauge the value with the right metrics

    Metrics are a powerful way to drive behavior change in your organization. But metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes so they must be used with great care. Use metrics judiciously to avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively blueprint.

    What should I measure?

    1. Mobile Application Engagement, Retention and User Satisfaction
      1. The activeness of users on the applications, the number of returning users, and the happiness of the users.
      2. Example: Number of tasks completed, number of active and returning users, session length and intervals, user satisfaction
    2. Value Driven from Mobile Applications
      1. The business value that the user directly or indirectly receives with the mobile application.
      2. Example: Mobile application revenue, business operational costs, worker productivity, business reputation and image
    3. Delivery Throughput and Quality
      1. The health and quality of your mobile applications throughout their lifespan and the speed to deliver working applications that meet stakeholder expectations.
      2. Example: Frequency of release, lead time, request turnaround, escaped defects, test coverage.

    Use Info-Tech's diagnostic to evaluate the reception of your mobile applications

    Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic is a canned end-user satisfaction survey used to evaluate your application portfolio health to support data-driven decisions.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic

    USE THE PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC TO:

    • Assess the importance and satisfaction of enterprise applications.
    • Solicit feedback from your end users on applications being used.
    • Understand the strengths and weaknesses of your current applications.
    • Perform a high-level application rationalization initiative.

    INTEGRATE DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS TO:

    • Target which applications to analyze in greater detail.
    • Expand on the initial application rationalization results with a more comprehensive and business-value-focused criteria.

    Grow your mobile delivery practice

    Level 1: Mobile Delivery Foundations

    You understand the opportunities and impacts mobile has on your business operations and its disruptive nature on your enterprise systems. Your software delivery lifecycle was optimized to incorporate the specific practices and requirements needed for mobile. A mobile platform was selected based on stakeholder needs that are weighed against current skillsets, high priority non-functional requirements, the available capacity and scalability of your stack, and alignment to your current delivery process.

    Level 2: Scaled Mobile Delivery

    New features and mobile use cases are regularly emerging in the industry. Ensuring your mobile platform and delivery process can easily scale to incorporate constantly changing mobile features and technologies is key. This can help minimize the impact these changes will have on your mobile stack and the resulting experience.

    Achieving this state requires three competencies: mobile security, performance optimization, and integration practices.

    Level 3: Leading-Edge Mobile Delivery

    Many of today's mobile trends involve, in one form or another, hardware components on the mobile device (e.g., NFC receivers, GPS, cameras). You understand the scope of native features available on your end user's mobile device and the required steps and capabilities to enable and leverage them.

    Hit a home run with your stakeholders

    Use a data-driven approach to select the right tooling vendor for your needs – fast.

    Awareness Education & Discovery Evaluation Selection

    Negotiation & Configuration

    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization 2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends 3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics 4.1 Create a Weighted Selection Decision Model 5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation with Top Two Venders
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action 2.2 Discover Alternate Solutions & Conduct Market Education 3.2 Conduct a Data Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities 4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities with Top 2-4 Vendors 5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration

    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment

    2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application Portfolio Narrow the Field to Four Top Contenders 4.3 Validate Key Issues with Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks 5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation 2.4 Validate the Business Case 5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Investing time improving your software selection methodology has big returns.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small, some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you're looking to select. Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology in Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    Pitch your mobile delivery approach with Info-Tech's template

    Communicate the justification of your approach to mobile applications with Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template:

    • Level set your mobile application goals and objectives by weighing end user expectations with technical requirements.
    • Define the high priority opportunities for mobile applications.
    • Educate decision makers of the limitations and challenges of delivering specific mobile experiences with the various mobile platform options.
    • Describe your framework to select the right mobile platform and delivery tools.
    • Lay out your mobile delivery roadmap and initiatives.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Info-Tech's methodology for mobile platform and delivery solution selection

    1. Set the Mobile Context

    2. Define Your Mobile Approach

    Phase Steps

    Step 1.1 Build Your Mobile Backlog

    Step 1.2 Identify Your Technical Needs

    Step 1.3 Define Your Non-Functional Requirements

    Step 2.1 Choose Your Platform Approach

    Step 2.2 Shortlist Your Mobile Delivery Solution

    Step 2.3 Create a Roadmap for Mobile Delivery

    Phase Outcomes

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog
    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment
    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Readiness for mobile delivery
    • Desired mobile platform approach
    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services
    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Understand the case and motivators for mobile applications.

    Call #2: Discuss the end user and desired mobile experience.

    Call #5: Discuss the desired mobile platform.

    Call #8: Discuss your mobile MVP.

    Call #3: Review technical complexities and non-functional requirements.

    Call #6: Shortlist mobile delivery solutions and desired features.

    Call #9: Review your mobile delivery roadmap.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 9 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Post-Workshop
    Activities Set the Mobile Context Identify Your Technical Needs Choose Your Platform & Delivery Solution Create Your Roadmap Next Steps andWrap-Up (offsite)

    1.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps

    1.2 Build your mobile application canvas

    1.3 Build your mobile backlog

    2.1 Discuss your mobile needs

    2.2 Conduct a technical assessment

    2.3 Define mobile application quality

    2.4 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications

    3.1 Select your platform approach

    3.2 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution

    3.3 Build your feature and service lists

    4.1 Define your MVP release

    4.2 Build your roadmap

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog
    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment
    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Verification to proceed with mobile delivery
    • Desired mobile platform approach
    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services
    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap
    • Completed workshop output deliverable
    • Next steps

    Phase 1

    Set the Mobile Context

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    • Step 1.1 – Build Your Mobile Backlog
    • Step 1.2 – Identify Your Technical Needs
    • Step 1.3 – Define Your Non-Functional Requirements

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Step 1.1

    Build Your Mobile Backlog

    Activities

    1.1.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps

    1.1.2 Build your mobile application canvas

    1.1.3 Build your mobile backlog

    Set the Mobile Context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog

    Users expect your organization to support their mobile way of working

    Today, users expect sophisticated and personalized features, immersive interactions, and cross-platform capabilities from their mobile applications and be able to access information and services anytime, anywhere and on any device. These demands are pushing organizations to become more user-driven, placing greater importance on user experience (UX) with enterprise-grade technologies.

    How has technologies evolved to easily enable mobile capabilities?

    • Desktop-Like Features
      • Native-like features, such as geolocation and local caching, are supported through web language or third-party plugins and extensions.
    • Extendable & Scalable
      • Plug-and-play architecture is designed to allow software delivery teams to explore new use cases and mobile capabilities with out-of-the-box connectors and/or customizable REST APIs.
    • Low Barrier to Entry
      • Low- and no-code development tools, full-stack solutions, and plug-and-play architectures allow non-technical users to easily build and implement applications without direct IT involvement.
    • Templates & Shells
      • Vendors provide UI templates and application shells that contain pre-built native features and multiple aesthetic layouts in a publishing-friendly and configurable way.
    • Personalized Content
      • Content can be uniquely tailored to a user's preference or be automatically generated based on the user's profile or activity history.
    • Hands-Off Operations
      • Many mobile solutions operate in a as-a-service model where the underlying and integrated technologies are managed by the vendor and abstracted away.

    Make user experience (UX) the standard

    User experience (UX) focuses on a user's emotions, beliefs, and physical and psychological responses that occur before, during, or after interacting with a service or product.

    For a mobile application to be a meaningful experience, the functions, aesthetics and content must be:

    • Usable
      • Users can intuitively navigate through your mobile application and complete their desired tasks.
    • Desirable
      • The application elements are used to evoke positive emotions and appreciation.
    • Accessible
      • Users can easily use your mobile application, including those with disabilities.
    • Valuable
      • Users find the content useful, and it fulfills a need.

    Enable a greater experience with UX-driven thinking

    Designing for a high-quality experience requires more than just focusing on the UI. It also requires the merging of multiple business, technical, and social disciplines in order to create an immersive, practical, and receptive application. The image on the right explains the disciplines involved in UX. This is critical for ensuring users have a strong desire to use the mobile application, it is adequately supported technically, and it supports business objectives.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice blueprint.

    A Venn diagram is depicted, demonstrating the inputs that lead to an interactive design, with interactive elements, usability, and accessibility. This work by Mark Roden is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License.

    Source: Marky Roden, Xomino, 2018

    UX-driven mobile apps bring together a compelling UI with valuable functionality

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations often over-rotate on the UI. Receptive and satisfying applications require more than just pretty pictures, bold colors, and flashy animations. UX-driven mobile applications require the seamless merging of enticing design elements and valuable functions that are specifically tailored to the behaviors of the users. Take a deep look at how each design element and function is used and perceived by the user, and how your application can sufficiently support user needs.

    UI-Function Balance to Achieve Highly Satisfying Mobile Applications

    An application's UI and function both contribute to UX, but they do so in different ways.

    • The UI generates the visual, audio, and vocal cues to draw the attention of users to key areas of the application while stimulating the user's emotions.
    • Functions give users the means to satisfy their needs effortlessly.

    Finding the right balance of UI and function is dependent on the organization's understanding of user emotions, needs, and tendencies. However, these factors are often left out of an application's design. Having the right UX competencies is key in assuring user behaviors are appropriately accommodated early in the delivery process.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value blueprint.

    Focus your efforts on all items that drive high user experience and satisfaction

    UX-driven mobile applications involve all interaction points and system components working together to create an immersive experience while being actively supported by delivery and operations teams. Many organizations commonly focus on visual and content design to improve the experience, but this is only a small fraction of the total UX design. Look beyond the surface to effectively enhance your application's overall UX.

    Typical Focus of Mobile UX

    Aesthetics
    What Are the Colors & Fonts?

    Relevance & Modern
    Will Users Receive Up to Date Content and Trending Features?

    UI Design
    Where Are the Interaction Points?

    Content Layout
    How Is Content Organized?

    Critical Areas of Mobile UX That Are Often Ignored

    Web Infrastructure
    How Will Your Application Be Operationally Supported?

    Human Behavior
    What Do the Users Feel About Your Application?

    Coding Language
    What Is the Best Language to Use?

    Cross-Platform Compatibility
    How Does It Work in a Browser Versus Each Mobile Platform?

    Application Quality
    How are Functional and Non-Functional Needs Balanced?

    Adoption & Retention
    How Do I Promote Adoption and Maintain User Engagement?

    Application Support
    How Will My Requests and Issues Be Handled?

    Use personas to envision who will be using your mobile application

    What Are Personas?

    Personas are detailed descriptions of the targeted audience of your mobile application. It represents a type of user in a particular scenario. Effective personas:

    • Express and focus on the major needs and expectations of the most important user groups.
    • Give a clear picture of the typical user's behavior.
    • Aid in uncovering critical features and functionalities.
    • Describe real people with backgrounds, goals, and values.

    Why Are Personas Important to UX?

    They are important because they help:

    • Focus the development of mobile application features on the immediate needs of the intended audience.
    • Detail the level of customization needed to ensure content is valuable to and resonates with the user.
    • Describe how users may behave when certain audio and visual stimulus are triggered from the mobile application.
    • Outline the special design considerations required to meet user accessibility needs.

    Key Elements of a Persona:

    • Professional and Technical Skills and Experiences (e.g., knowledge of mobile applications, area of expertise)
    • Persona Group (e.g., executives)
    • Technological Environment of User (e.g., devices, browsers, network connection)
    • Demographics (e.g., nationality, age, language spoken)
    • Typical Behaviors and Tendencies (e.g., goes to different website when cannot find information in 20 seconds)
    • Purpose of Using the Mobile Application (e.g., search for information, submit registration form)

    Create empathy maps to gain a deeper understanding of stakeholder personas

    Empathy mapping draws out the characteristics, motivations, and mannerisms of a potential end user.

    This image contains an image of an empathy map from XPLANE, 2017. it includes the following list: 1. Who are we empathizing with; 2. What do they need to DO; 3. What do they SEE; 4. What do they SAY?; 5. What do they DO; 6. What do they HEAR; 7. What do they THINK and FEEL.

    Source: XPLANE, 2017

    Empathy mapping focuses on identifying the problems, ambitions, and frustrations they are looking to resolve and describes their motivations for wanting to resolve them. This analysis helps your teams:

    • Better understand the reason behind the struggles, frustrations and motivators through a user's perspective.
    • Verify the accuracy of assertions made about the user.
    • Pinpoint the specific problem the mobile application will be designed to solve and the constraints to its successful adoption and on-going use.
    • Read more about empathy mapping and download the empathy map PDF template here.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Use Experience Design to Drive Empathy with the Business blueprint.

    1.1.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the Empathy Map Canvas and draw the map on a whiteboard or project it on the screen.
    2. Choose an end user to be the focus of your empathy map. Using sticky notes, fill out the sections of the empathy map in the following order:
      1. Start by filling out the goals section. State who the subject of the empathy map will be and what activity or task you would like them to do.
        1. Focus on activities and tasks that may benefit from mobile.
      2. Next, complete the outer sections in clockwise order (see, say, do, hear). The purpose of this is to think in terms of what the subject of your empathy map is observing, sensing, and experiencing.
        1. Indicate the mobile devices and OS users will likely use and the environments they will likely be in (e.g., places with poor connections)
        2. Discuss accessibility needs and how user prefer to consume content.
      3. Last, complete the inner circle of the empathy map (pains and gains). Since you spent the last step of the exercise thinking about the external influences on your stakeholder, you can think about how those stimuli affect their emotions.
    3. Document your end user persona into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • List of potential mobile application users
    • User personas
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.1.1 cont'd

    This image contains an image of an empathy map from XPLANE, 2017. it includes the following list: 1. Who are we empathizing with; 2. What do they need to DO; 3. What do they SEE; 4. What do they SAY?; 5. What do they DO; 6. What do they HEAR; 7. What do they THINK and FEEL.

    Download the Empathy Map Canvas

    Many business priorities are driving mobile

    Mobile Applications

    • Product Roadmap
      • Upcoming enterprise technology releases and updates offer mobile capabilities to expand its access to a broader userbase.
    • Cost Optimization
      • Maximizing business value in processes and technologies through disciplined and strategic cost and spending reduction practices with mobile applications.
    • Competitive Differentiation
      • Developing and optimizing your organization's distinct products and services quickly with mobile applications.
    • Digital Transformation
      • Transitioning processes, data and systems to a digital environment to broaden access to enterprise data and services anywhere at anytime.
    • Operational Efficiency
      • Improving software delivery and business process throughput by increasing worker productivity with mobile applications.
    • Other Business Priorities
      • New corporate products and services, business model changes, application rationalization and other priorities may require modernization, innovation and a mobile way of working.

    Focus on the mobile business and end user problem, not the solution

    People are naturally solution-focused. The onus isn't on them to express their needs in the form of a problem statement!

    When refining your mobile problem statement, attempt to answer the following four questions:

    • Who is impacted?
    • What is the (user or organizational) challenge that needs to be addressed?
    • Where does it happen?
    • Why does it matter?

    There are many ways of writing problem statements, a clear approach follows the format:

    • "Our (who) has the problem that (what) when (where). Our solution should (why)."
    • Example: "Our system analysts has the problem that new tickets take too long to update when working on user requests. Our approach should enable the analyst to focus on working with customers and not on administration."

    Adapted from: "Design Problem Statements – What and How to Frame Them"

    How to write a vision statement

    It's ok to dream a little!

    When thinking about a vision statement, think about:

    • Who is it for?
    • What does the customer need?
    • What can we do for them?
    • And why is this special?

    There are different statement templates available to help form your vision statements. Some include:

    1. For [our target customer], who [customer's need], the [product] is a [product category or description] that [unique benefits and selling points]. Unlike [competitors or current methods], our product [main differentiators]. (Crossing the Chasm)
    2. "We believe (in) a [noun: world, time, state, etc.] where [persona] can [verb: do, make, offer, etc.], for/by/with [benefit/goal].
    3. To [verb: empower, unlock, enable, create, etc.] [persona] to [benefit, goal, future state].
    4. Our vision is to [verb: build, design, provide], the [goal, future state], to [verb: help, enable, make it easier to...] [persona]."

    (Numbers 2-4 from: How to define a product vision)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A vision shouldn't be so far out that it doesn't feel real and so short term that it gets bogged down in minutiae and implementation details. Finding that right balance will take some trial and error and will be different depending on your organization.

    Ensure mobile supports ongoing value delivery and stakeholder expectations

    Success hinges on your team's ability to deliver business value. Well-developed mobile applications instill stakeholder confidence in ongoing business value delivery and stakeholder buy-in, provided proper expectations are set and met.

    Business value defines the success criteria of an organization, and it is interpreted from four perspectives:

    • Profit Generation – The revenue generated from a business capability with mobile applications.
    • Cost Reduction – The cost reduction when performing business capabilities with mobile applications.
    • Service Enablement – The productivity and efficiency gains of internal business operations with mobile applications.
    • Customer and Market Reach – Metrics measuring the improved reach and insights of the business in existing or new markets.

    See our Build a Value Measurement Framework blueprint for more information about business value definition.

    This image contains a quadrant analysis with the following labels: Left - Improved Capabilities; Top - Outward; Right - Financial Benefit; Bottom - Inward. the quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Customer and Market Reach; Profit Generation; Service Enhancement; Cost Reduction

    Set realistic mobile goals

    Mobile applications enables the exploration of new and different ways to improve worker productivity and deliver business value. However, the realities of mobile applications may limit your ability to meet some of your objectives:

    • On the day of installation, the average retention rate for public-facing applications was 25.3%. By day 30, the retention rate drops to 5.7%. (Source: Statista, 2020)
    • 63% of 3,335 most popular Android mobile applications on the Google Play Store contained open-source components with known security vulnerabilities and other pervasive security concerns including exposing sensitive data (Source: Synopsys, 2021)
    • 62% of users would delete the application because of performance issues, such as crashes, freezes and other errors (Source: Intersog, 2021).

    These realities are not guaranteed to occur or impede your ability to deliver valuable mobile applications, but they can lead to unachievable expectations. Ensure your stakeholders are not oversold on advertised benefits and hold you accountable for unrealistic objectives. Recognize that the organization must also change how it works and operates to see the full benefit and adoption of mobile applications and overcome the known and unknown challenges and hurdles that often come with mobile delivery.

    Benchmarks present enticing opportunities, but should be used to set reasonable expectations

    66%
    Improve Market Reach
    66% of the global population uses a mobile device
    Source: DataReportal, 2021

    20%
    Connected Workers are More Productive
    Nearly 20 percent of mobile professionals estimate they miss more than three hours of working time a week not being able to get connected to the internet
    Source: iPass, 2017

    80%
    Increase Brand Recognition
    80% of smartphone users are more likely to purchase from companies whose mobile sites of apps help them easily find answers to their questions
    Source: Google, 2018

    Gauge the value with the right metrics

    Metrics are a powerful way to drive behavior change in your organization. But metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes so they must be used with great care. Use metrics judiciously to avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively blueprint.

    What should I measure?

    1. Mobile Application Engagement, Retention and User Satisfaction
      • The activeness of users on the applications, the number of returning users, and the happiness of the users.
      • Example: Number of tasks completed, number of active and returning users, session length and intervals, user satisfaction
    2. Value Driven from Mobile Applications
      • The business value that the user directly or indirectly receives with the mobile application.
      • Example: Mobile application revenue, business operational costs, worker productivity, business reputation and image
    3. Delivery Throughput and Quality
      • The health and quality of your mobile applications throughout their lifespan and the speed to deliver working applications that meet stakeholder expectations.
      • Example: Frequency of release, lead time, request turnaround, escaped defects, test coverage.

    Use Info-Tech's diagnostic to evaluate the reception of your mobile applications

    Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic is a canned end user satisfaction survey used to evaluate your application portfolio health to support data-driven decisions.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic

    USE THE PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC TO:

    • Assess the importance and satisfaction of enterprise applications.
    • Solicit feedback from your end users on applications being used.
    • Understand the strengths and weaknesses of your current applications.
    • Perform a high-level application rationalization initiative.

    INTEGRATE DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS TO:

    • Target which applications to analyze in greater detail.
    • Expand on the initial application rationalization results with a more comprehensive and business-value-focused criteria.

    Use a canvas to define key elements of your mobile initiative

    Mobile Application Initiative Name

    Owner:
    Parent Initiative:
    Updated:

    NAME
    LINK
    October 05, 2022

    Problem Statement

    Vision

    The problem or need mobile applications are addressing

    Vision, unique value proposition, elevator pitch, or positioning statement

    Business Goals & Metrics

    Capabilities, Processes & Application Systems

    List of business objectives or goals for the mobile application initiative.

    List of business capabilities, processes and application systems related to this initiative.

    Personas/Customers/Users

    Stakeholders

    List of groups who consume the mobile application

    List of key resources, stakeholders, and teams needed to support the process, systems and services

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    1.1.2 Build your mobile application canvas

    1-3 hours

    1. Complete the following fields to build your mobile application canvas:
      • Mobile application initiative name
      • Mobile application owner
      • Parent initiative name
      • Problem that mobile applications are intending to solve and your vision. See the outcome from the previous exercise.
      • Mobile application business goals and metrics.
      • Capabilities, processes and application systems involved
      • Primary customers/users (For additional help with your product personas, download and complete to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.)
    2. Stakeholders
    3. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • User personas
    • Business strategy
    • Problem and vision statements
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile application canvas
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.1.2 cont'd

    Mobile Application Initiative Name

    Owner:
    Parent Initiative:
    Updated:

    NAME
    LINK
    October 05, 2022

    Problem Statement

    Vision

    [Problem Statement]

    [Vision]

    Business Goals & Metrics

    Capabilities, Processes & Application Systems

    [Business Goal 1, Metric]
    [Business Goal 2, Metric]
    [Business Goal 3, Metric]

    [Business Capability]
    [Business Process]
    [Application System]

    Personas/Customers/Users

    Stakeholders

    [User 1]
    [User 2]
    [User 3]

    [Stakeholder 1]
    [Stakeholder 2]
    [Stakeholder 3]

    Create your mobile backlog

    Your backlog gives you a holistic understanding of the demand for mobile applications across your organization.

    Opportunities
    Trends
    MVP

    External Sources

    Internal Sources

    • Market Trends Analysis
    • Competitive Analysis
    • Regulations & Industry Standards
    • Customer & Reputation Analysis
    • Application Rationalization
    • Capability & Value Stream Analysis
    • Business Requests & Incidents
    • Discovery & Mining Capabilities

    A mobile application minimum viable product (MVP) focuses on a small set of functions, involves minimal possible effort to deliver a working and valuable solution, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to maximize learning, evaluate value and acceptance, and inform the development of a full-fledged mobile delivery practice.

    Find your mobile opportunities

    Modern mobile technologies enable users to access, analyze and change data anywhere with native device features, which opens the door to enhanced processes and new value sources.

    Examples of Mobile Opportunities:

    • Mobile Payment
      • Cost alternative to credit card transaction fees.
      • Loyalty systems are updated upon payment without need of a physical card.
      • Quicker completion of transactions.
    • Inventory Management
      • Update inventory database when shipments arrive or deliveries are made.
      • Inform retailers and consumers of current stock on website.
      • Alert staff of expired or outdated products.
    • Quick and Small Data Transfer
      • Embed tags into posters to transfer URIs, which sends users to sites containing product or location information.
      • Replace entry tags, fobs, or smart cards at doors.
      • Exchange contact details.
    • Location Sensitive Information
      • Proactively send promotions and other information (e.g. coupons, event details) to users within a defined area.
      • Inform employees of nearby prospective clients.
    • Supply Chain Management
      • Track the movement and location of goods and delivery trucks.
      • Direct drivers to the most optimal route.
      • Location-sensitive billing apps such as train and bus ticket purchases.
    • Education and Learning
      • Educate users about real-world objects and places with augmented books and by pushing relevant learning materials.
      • Visualize theories and other text with dynamic 3D objects.
    • Augmented Reality (AR)
      • Provide information about the user's surroundings and the objects in the environment through the mobile device.
      • Interactive and immersive experiences with the inclusion of virtual reality.
    • Architecture and Planning
      • Visualize historic buildings or the layout of structural projects and development plans.
      • Develop a digital tour with location-based audio initiated with location-based services or a camera.
    • Navigation
      • Provide directions to users to navigate and provide contextual travelling instructions.
      • Push traffic notifications and route changes to travelling users.
    • Tracking User Movement
      • Predict the future location of users based on historic information and traffic modelling.
      • Proactively push information to users before they reach their destination.

    1.1.3 Build your mobile backlog

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, discuss the use and value mobile already has within your organization for each persona.
      1. What are some of the apps being used?
      2. What enterprise systems and applications are already exposed to the web and accessible by mobile devices?
      3. How critical is mobile to business operations, marketing campaigns, etc.?
    2. Discuss how mobile can bring additional business value to other areas of your organization for each persona.
      1. Can mobile enhance your customer reach? Do your customers care that your services are offered through mobile?
      2. Are employees asking for better access to enterprise systems in order to improve their productivity?
    3. Write your mobile opportunities in the following form: As a [end user persona], I want to [process or capability to enable with mobile applications], so that [organizational benefit]. Prioritize each opportunity against feasibility, desirability, and viability.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • Problem and vision statements
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Mobile opportunities backlog
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Manage your mobile backlog

    Your backlog stores and organizes your mobile opportunities at various stages of readiness. It must be continuously refined to address new requests, maintenance and changing priorities.

    3 – IDEAS
    Composed of raw, vague, and potentially large ideas that have yet to go through any formal valuation.

    2 – QUALIFIED
    Researched and qualified opportunities awaiting refinement.

    1 READY
    Discrete, refined opportunities that are ready to be placed in your team's delivery plans.

    Adapted from Essential Scrum

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog

    • Detailed Appropriately: opportunities are broken down and refined as necessary
    • Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as opportunities are added and removed.
    • Estimated: The effort an opportunity requires is estimated at each tier.
    • Prioritized: The opportunity's value and priority are determined at each tier.

    (Source Perforce, 2018)

    See our Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision for more information on backlog practices.

    Step 1.2

    Identify Your Technical Needs

    Activities

    1.2.1 Discuss your mobile needs

    1.2.2 Conduct a technical assessment

    Set the Mobile Context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment

    Describe your desired mobile experiences with journey maps

    A journey map tells the story of the user's experience with an existing or prospective product or service, starting with a trigger, through the process of engagement, to create an outcome. Journey maps can focus on a particular part of the user's or the entire experience with your organization's products or services. All types of maps capture key interactions and motivations of the user in chronological order.

    Why are journey maps an important for mobile application delivery?

    Everyone has their own preferred method for completing their tasks on mobile devices – often, what differentiates one persona from another has to do with how users privately behave. Understand that the activities performed outside of IT's purview develop context for your persona's pain points and position IT to meet their needs with the appropriate solution.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Use Experience Design to Drive Empathy with the Business blueprint.

    Two charts are depicted, the first shows the path from Trigger, through steps 1-4, to the outcome, and the Activities and Touchpoints for each. The second chart shows the Expectation analysis, showing which steps are must-haves, nice-to-haves, and hidden-needs.

    Pinpoint specific mobile needs in your journey map

    Realize that mobile applications may not precisely fit with your personas workflow or align to their expectations due to device and system limitations and restrictions. Flag the mobile opportunities that require significant modifications to underlying systems.

    Consider these workflow scenarios that can influence your persona's desire for mobile:

    Workflow Scenarios Ask Yourself The Key Questions Technology Constraints or Restrictions to Consider Examples of Mobile Opportunities

    Data View – Data is queried, prepared and presented to make informed decisions, but it cannot be edited.

    Where is the data located and can it be easily gathered and prepared?

    Is the data sensitive and can it be locally stored?

    What is the level of detail in my view?

    Multi-factor authentication required.

    Highly sensitive data requires encryption in transit and at rest.

    Minor calculations and preparation needed before data view.

    Generate a status report.

    View social media channels.

    View contact information.

    Data Collection – Data is inputted directly into the application and updates back-end system or integrated 3rd party services.

    Do I need special permission to add, delete and overwrite data?

    How much data can I edit?

    Is the data automatically gathered?

    Bandwidth restrictions.

    Multi-factor authentication required.

    Native device access required (e.g., camera).

    Multiple types and formats of gathered data.

    Manual and automatic data gathering

    Book appointments with clients.

    Update inventory.

    Tracking movement of company assets.

    Data Analysis & Modification – Data is evaluated, manipulated and transformed through the application, back-end system or 3rd party service.

    How complex are my calculations?

    Can computations be offloaded?

    What resources are needed to complete the analysis?

    Memory and processing limitations on device.

    Inability to configure device and enterprise hardware to support system resource demand.

    Scope and precision of analysis and modifications.

    Evaluate and propose trends.

    Gauge user sentiment.

    Propose next steps and directions.

    Define the mobile experience your end users want

    Anytime, Anywhere
    The user can access, update and analyze data, and corporate products and services whenever they want, in all networks, and on any device.

    Hands-Off & Automated
    The application can perform various workflows and tasks without the user's involvement and notify the user when specific triggers are hit.

    Personalized & Insightful
    Content presentation and subject are tailored for the user based on specific inputs from the user, device hardware or predicted actions.

    Integrated Ecosystem
    The application supports a seamless experience across various 3rd party and enterprise applications and services the user needs.

    Visually Pleasing & Fulfilling
    The UI is intuitive and aesthetically gratifying with little security and performance trade-offs to use the full breadth of its functions and services.

    Each mobile platform has its own take on the mobile native experience. The choice ultimately depends on whether the costs and effort are worth the anticipated value.

    1.2.1 Discover your mobile needs

    1-3 hours

    1. Define the workflow of a high priority opportunity in your mobile backlog. This workflow can be pertaining to an existing mobile application or a workflow that can benefit with a mobile application.
      1. Indicate the trigger that will initiate the opportunity and the desired outcome.
      2. Break down the persona's desired outcome into small pieces of value that are realized in each workflow step.
    2. Identify activities and touchpoints the persona will need to complete to finish each step in the workflow. Indicate the technology used to complete the activity or to facilitate the touchpoint.
    3. Indicate which activities and touchpoints can be satisfied, complimented or enhanced with mobile.

    Input

    Output
    • User personas
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Desired mobile experience
    • List of mobile features
    • Journey map
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.2.1 cont'd

    Workflow

    Trigger

    Conduct initial analysis

    Get planning help

    Complete and submit RFP

    Design and implement solution

    Implement changes

    Activities, Channels, and Touchpoints

    Need is recognized in CIO council meeting

    See if we have a sufficient solution internally

    Seek planning help (various channels)

    *Meet with IT shared services business analyst

    Select the appropriate vendor

    Follow action plan

    Compliance rqmt triggered by new law

    See if we have a sufficient solution internally

    *Hold in-person initial meeting with IT shared services

    *Review and approve rqmts (email)

    Seek miscellaneous support

    Implement project and manage change

    Research potential solutions in the marketplace

    Excess budget identified for utilization

    Pick a "favorite" solution

    *Negotiate and sign statement of work (email)

    Prime organization for the change

    Create action plan

    If solution is unsatisfactory, plan remediation

    Current Technology

    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Meeting transcripts and recordings
    • ERP
    • IT asset management
    • Internet browser for research
    • Virtual environment to demonstrate solutions
    • Email
    • Vendor assessment and procurement solution
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Meeting transcripts and recordings
    • PDF documents and reader
    • Digital signature
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Meeting transcripts and recordings
    • PDF documents and reader
    • Digital signature
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Vendor assessment and procurement solution
    • Project management solution
    • Team collaboration solution
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Project management solution
    • Team collaboration solution
    • Vendor's solution

    Legend:

    Bold – Touchpoint

    * – Activities or Touchpoints That Can Benefit with Mobile

    1.2.1 cont'd

    1-3 hours

    1. Analyze persona expectations. Identify the persona's must-haves, then nice-to-haves, and then hidden needs to effectively complete the workflow.
      1. Must-haves. The necessary outcomes, qualities, and features of the workflow step.
      2. Nice-to-haves. Desired outcomes, qualities, or features that your persona is able to articulate or express.
      3. Hidden needs. Outcomes, qualities, or features that your persona is not aware they have a desire for; benefits that they are pleasantly surprised to receive. These will usually be unknown for your first-iteration journey map.
    2. Indicate which persona expectations can be satisfied with mobile. Discuss what would the desired mobile experience be.
    3. Discuss feedback and experiences your team has heard from the personas they engage with regularly.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    1.2.1 cont'd

    Example

    This image contains an example workflow for determining mobile needs.

    1.2.1 cont'd

    Template:

    Workflow

    TriggerStep 1Step 2Step 3Step 4

    Desired Outcome

    Journey Map

    Activities & Touch-points

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Must-Haves

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Nice-to-Haves

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Hidden Needs

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Emotional Journey

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    If you need more than four steps in the workflow, duplicate this slide.

    Understand how mobile fits with your current system

    Evaluate the risks and impacts of your desired mobile features by looking at your enterprise system architecture from top to bottom. Is your mobile vision and needs compatible with your existing business capabilities and technologies?

    An architecture is usually represented by one or more architecture views that together provide a coherent description of the application system, including demonstrating the full impact mobile will have. A single, comprehensive model is often too complex to be understood and communicated in its most detailed form, and a model too high level hides the underlying complexity of an application's structure and deployment (The Open Group, TOGAF 8.1.1 - Developing Architecture Views). Obtain a complete understanding of your architecture by assessing it through multiple levels of views to reveal different sets of concerns:

    Application Architecture Views

    1. Use Case View
    • How does your business operate, and how will users interact with your mobile applications?
  • . Process View
    • What is the user workflow impacted by mobile, and how will it change?
  • Component View
    • How are my existing applications structured? What are its various components? How will mobile expand the costs of the existing technical debt?
  • Data View
    • What is the relationship of the data and information consumed, analyzed, and transmitted? Will mobile jeopardize the quality and reliability of the data?
  • Deployment View
    • In what environment are your mobile application components deployed? How will the existing systems operate with your mobile applications?
  • System View
    • How does your mobile application communicate with other internal and external systems? How will dependencies change with mobile?
  • See our Enhance Your Solution Architecture for more information.

    Ask key questions in your current system assessment

    • How do the various components of your system communicate with each other (e.g., web APIs, middleware, and point to point)?
    • What information is exchanged during the conversation?
    • How does the data flow from one component to the next? Is the data read-only or can application and users edit and modify it?
    • What are the access points to your mid- and back-tier systems (e.g., user access through web interface, corporate networks and third-party application access through APIs)?
    • Who has access to your enterprise systems?
    • Which components are managed and operated by third-party providers? What is your level of control?
    • What are the security protocols currently enforced in your system?
    • How often are your databases updated? Is it real-time or periodic extract, transfer, and load (ETL)?
    • What are the business rules?
    • Is your mobile stack dependent on other systems?
    • Is a mobile middleware, web server, or API gateway needed to help facilitate the integration between devices and your back-end support?

    1.2.2 Conduct a technical assessment

    1-3 hours

    1. Evaluate your current systems that will support the journey map of your mobile opportunities based on two categories: system quality and system management. Use the tables on the following slides and modify the questions if needed.
    2. Discuss if the current state of your system will impede your ability to succeed with mobile. Use this discussion to verify the decision to continue with mobile applications in your current state.
    3. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Journey map
    • Understanding of current system
    • Assessment of current system
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.2.2 cont'd

    Current State System Quality Assessment

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Fit-for-Purpose System functionalities, services and integrations are designed and implemented for the purpose of satisfying the end users' needs and technology compatibilities. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Response Rate The system completes computation and processing requests within acceptable timeframes. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Data Quality The system delivers consumable, accurate, and trustworthy data. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Usability The system provides functionalities, services and integrations that are rewarding, engaging, intuitive, and emotionally satisfying. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Reliability The system is resilient or quickly recovers from issues and defects. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Accessible The system is available on demand and on the end user's preferred interface and device. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Secured End-user activity and data is protected from unauthorized access. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Adaptable The system can be quickly tailored to meet changing end-user and technology needs with reusable and customizable components. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)

    1.2.2 cont'd

    Current State System Management Assessment

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Documentation The system is documented, accurate, and shared in the organization. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Measurement The system is continuously measured against clearly defined metrics tied to business value. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Compliance The system is compliant with regulations and industry standards. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Continuous Improvement The system is routinely rationalized and enhanced. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Architecture There is a shared overview of how the process supports business value delivery and its dependencies with technologies and other processes. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Ownership & Accountability The process has a clearly defined owner who is accountable for its risks and roadmap. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Support Resources are available to address adoption and execution challenges. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Organizational Change Management Communication, onboarding, and other change management capabilities are available to facilitate technology and related role and process changes. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)

    Step 1.3

    Define Your Non-Functional Requirements

    Activities

    1.3.1 Define mobile application quality

    1.3.2 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications

    Set the Mobile Context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Readiness for mobile delivery

    Build a strong foundation of mobile application quality

    Functionality and aesthetics often take front seats in mobile application delivery. Applications are then frequently modified and changed, not because they are functionally deficient or visually displeasing, but because they are difficult to maintain or scale, too slow, vulnerable or compromised. Implementing clear quality principles (i.e., non-functional requirements) and strong quality assurance practices throughout delivery are critical to minimize the potential work of future maintenance and to avoid, mitigate and manage IT risks.

    What is Mobile Application Quality?

    • Quality requirements (i.e., non-functional requirements) are properties of a system or product that dictate how it should behave at runtime and how it should be designed, implemented, and maintained.
    • These requirements should be involved in decision making around architecture, UI and functional design changes.
    • Functionality should not dictate the level of security, availability, or performance of a product, thereby risking system quality. Functionality and quality are viewed orthogonally, and trade-offs are discussed when one impacts the other.
    • Quality attributes should never be achieved in isolation as one attribute can have a negative or positive impact on another (e.g. security and availability).

    Why is Mobile Quality Assurance Critical?

    • Quality assurance (QA) is a necessity for the validation and verification of mobile delivery, whether you are delivering applications in an Agile or Waterfall fashion. Effective QA practices implemented across the software development lifecycle (SDLC) are vital, as all layers of the mobile stack need to readily able to adjust to suddenly evolving and changing business and user needs and technologies without risking system stability and breaking business standards and expectations.
    • However, investments in QA optimizations are often afterthoughts. QA is commonly viewed as a lower priority compared to other delivery capabilities (e.g., design and coding) and is typically the first item cut when delivery is under pressure.

    See our Build a Software Quality Assurance Program for more information.

    Mobile emphasizes the importance of good security, performance and integration

    Today's mobile workforce is looking for new ways to get more work done quickly. They want access to enterprise solutions and data directly on their mobile device, which can reside on multiple legacy systems and in the cloud and third-party infrastructure. This presents significant performance, integration, and security risks.

    Cloud Solutions: Can I use my existing APIs?. Solutions in Corporate Networks: Do my legacy systems have the capacity to support mobile?; How do I integrate solutions and data from multiple sources into a single view?; Third Party Solutions: Will I have a significant performance bottleneck?; Single View on Mobile Devices: How is corporate data stored on the device?; What new technology dependencies must I account for in my architecture and operational support capabilities?

    Mobile risks opening and widening existing security gaps

    New mobile technologies and the continued expansion of the enterprise environment increase the number of entry points attackers to your corporate data and networks. The ever-growing volume, velocity, and variety of new threats puts significant pressure on mobile delivery teams who are responsible for implementing mobile security measures and maintaining alignment to your security policies and those of app stores.

    Mobile attacks can come from various vectors:

    Attack Surface: Mobile Device

    Attack Surface: Network

    Attack Surface: Data Center

    Browser:
    Phishing
    Buffer Overflow
    Data Caching

    System:
    No Passcode
    Jailbroken and Rooted OS
    No/Weak Encryption
    OS Data Caching

    Phone:
    SMSishing
    Radio Frequency Attacks

    Apps:
    Configuration Manipulation
    Runtime Injection
    Improper SSL Validation

    • Packet Sniffing
    • Session Hijacking
    • Man-in-the-Middle (circumvent password verification systems)
    • Fake SSL Certificate
    • Rogue Access Points

    Web Server:
    Cross-Site Scripting (XSS)
    Brute Force Attacks
    Server Misconfigurations

    Database:
    SQL Injection
    Data Dumping

    Understand the top web security risks and vulnerabilities seen in the industry

    Recognize mobile applications are exposed to the same risks and vulnerabilities as web applications. Learn of OWASP's top 10 web security risks.

    • Broken Access Control
      • Failures typically lead to unauthorized information disclosure, modification, or destruction of all data or performing a business function outside the user's limits.
    • Cryptographic Failures
      • Improper and incorrect protection of data in transit and at rest, especially proprietary and confidential data and those that fall under privacy laws.
    • Injection
      • Execution of malicious code and injection of hostile or unfiltered data on the mobile device via the mobile application.
    • Insecure Design
      • Missing or ineffective security controls in the application design. An insecure design cannot be fixed by a perfect implementation,. Needed security controls were never created to defend against specific attacks.
    • Security Misconfiguration
      • The security settings in the application are not securely set or configured, including poor security hardening and inadequate system upgrading practices.
    • Vulnerable and Outdated Components
      • System components are vulnerable because they are unsupported, out of date, untested or not hardened against current security concerns.
    • Identification and Authentication Failures
      • Improper or poor protection against authentication-related attacks, particularly to the user's identity, authentication and session management.
    • Software and Data Integrity Failures
      • Failures related to code and infrastructure that does not protect against integrity violations, such as an application relying upon plugins, libraries, or modules from untrusted sources, repositories, and content delivery networks
    • Security Logging and Monitoring Failures
      • Insufficient logging, detection, monitoring, and active response that hinders the ability to detect, escalate, and respond to active breaches.
    • Server-Side Request Forgery (SSRF)
      • SSRF flaws occur whenever a web application is fetching a remote resource without validating the user-supplied URL.

    Good mobile application performance drives satisfaction and value delivery

    Underperforming mobile applications can cause your users to be unproductive. Your mobile applications should always aim to satisfy the productivity requirements of your end users.

    Users quickly notice applications that are slow and difficult to use. Providing a seamless experience for the user is now heavily dependent on how well your application performs. Optimizing your mobile application's processing efficiency can help your users perform their jobs properly in various environment conditions.

    Productive Users Need
    Performant Mobile Applications

    Persona

    Mobile Application Use Case

    Optimized Mobile Application

    Stationary Worker

    • Design flowcharts and diagrams, while abandoning paper and desktop apps in favor of easy-to-use, drawing tablet applications.
    • Multitask by checking the application to verify information given by a vendor during their presentation or pitch.
    • Flowcharts and diagrams are updated in real time for team members to view and edit
    • Compare vendors under assessment with a quick look-up app feature

    Roaming Worker (Engineer)

    • Replace physical copies of service and repair manuals physically stored with digital copies and access them with mobile applications.
    • Scan or input product bar code to determine whether a replacement part is available or needs to be ordered.
    • Worker is capable of interacting with other features of the mobile web app while product bar code is being verified

    Enhance the performance of the entire mobile stack

    Due to frequently changing mobile hardware, users' high performance expectations and mobile network constraints, mobile delivery teams must focus on the entire mobile stack for optimizing performance.

    Fine tune your enterprise mobile applications using optimization techniques to improve performance across the full mobile stack.

    This image contains a bar graph ranking the importance of the following datapoints: Minimize render blocking resources; Configure the mobile application viewport; Determine the right image file format ; Determine above-the-fold content; Minimize browser reflow; Adopt UI techniques to improve perceived latency; Resource minification; Data compression; Asynchronous programming; Resource HTTP caching; Minimize network roundtrips for first time to render.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Some user performance expectations can be managed with clever UI design (e.g., spinning pinwheels to indicate loading in progress and directing user focus to quick loading content) and operational choices (e.g. graceful degradation and progressive enhancements).

    Create an API-centric integration strategy

    Mobile delivery teams are tasked to keep up with the changing needs of end users and accommodate the evolution of trending mobile features. Ensuring scalable APIs is critical in quickly releasing changes and ensuring availability of corporate services and resources.

    As your portfolio of mobile applications grows, and device platforms and browsers diversify, it will become increasingly complex to provide all the data and service capabilities your mobile apps need to operate. It is important that your APIs are available, reliable, reusable, and secure for multiple uses and platforms.

    Take an API-centric approach to retain control of your mobile development and ensure reliability.

    APIs are the underlying layer of your mobile applications, enabling remote access of company data and services to end users. Focusing design and development efforts on the maintainability, reliability and scalability of your APIs enables your delivery teams to:

    • Reuse tried-and-tested APIs to deliver, test and harden applications and systems quicker by standardizing on the use and structure of REST APIs.
    • Ensure a consistent experience and performance across different applications using the same API.
    • Uniformly apply security and access control to remain compliant to security protocols, industry standards and regulations.
    • Provide reliable integration points when leveraging third-party APIs and services.

    See our Build Effective Enterprise Integration on the Back of Business Process for more information.

    Guide your integration strategy with principles

    Craft your principles around good API management and integration practices

    Expose Enterprise Data And Functionality in API-Friendly Formats
    Convert complex on-premises application services into developer-friendly RESTful APIs

    Protect Information Assets Exposed Via APIs to Prevent Misuse
    Ensure that enterprise systems are protected against message-level attack and hijack

    Authorize Secure, Seamless Access for Valid Identities
    Deploy strong access control, identity federation and social login functionality

    Optimize System Performance and Manage the API Lifecycle
    Maintain the availability of backend systems for APIs, applications and end users

    Engage, Onboard, Educate and Manage Developers
    Give developers the resources they need to create applications that deliver real value

    Source: 5 Pillars of API Management, Broadcom, 2021

    Clarify your definition of mobile quality

    Quality does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of mobile quality. Each department, person and industry standard will have a different interpretation of quality, and they will perform certain activities and enforce policies that meet those interpretations. Misunderstanding of what is defined as a high quality mobile application within business and IT teams can lead to further confusion behind governance, testing priorities and compliance.

    Each interpretation of quality can lead to endless testing, guardrails and constraints, or lack thereof. Be clear on the priority of each interpretation and the degree of effort needed to ensure they are met.

    For example:

    Mobile Application Owner
    What does an accessible mobile application mean?

    Persona: Customer
    I can access it on mobile phones, tablets and the web browser

    Persona: Developer
    I have access to each layer of the mobile stack including the code & data

    Persona: Operations
    The mobile application is accessible 24/7 with 95% uptime

    Example: A School Board's Quality Definition

    Quality Attribute Definitions
    Usability The product is an intuitive solution. Usability is the ease with which the user accomplishes a desired task in the application system and the degree of user support the system provides. Limited training and documentation are required.
    Performance Usability and performance are closely related. A solution that is slow is not usable. The application system is able to meet timing requirements, which is dependent on stable infrastructure to support it regardless of where the application is hosted. Baseline performance metrics are defined and changes must result in improvements. Performance is validated against peak loads.
    Availability The application system is present, accessible, and ready to carry out its tasks when needed. The application is accessible from multiple devices and platforms, is available 24x7x365, and teams communicate planned downtimes and unplanned outages. IT must serve teachers international student's parents, and other users who access the application outside normal business hours. The application should never be down when it should be up. Teams must not put undue burden on end users accessing the systems. Reasonable access requirements are published.
    Security Applications handle both private and personal data, and must be able to segregate data based on permissions to protect privacy. The application system is able to protect data and information from unauthorized access. Users want it to be secure but seamless. Vendors need to understand and implement the District School Board's security requirements into their products. Teams ensure access is authorized, maintain data integrity, and enforce privacy.
    Reusability Reusability is the capability for components and subsystems to be suitable for use in other applications and in other scenarios. This attribute minimizes the duplication of components and implementation time. Teams ensure a modular design that is flexible and usable in other applications.
    Interoperability The degree to which two or more systems can usefully exchange meaningful information via interfaces in a particular context.

    Scalability

    There are two kinds of scalability:

    • Horizontal scalability (scaling out): Adding more resources to logical units, such as adding another server to a cluster of servers.
    • Vertical scalability (scaling up): Adding more resources to a physical unit, such as adding more memory to a single computer.

    Ease of maintenance and enhancements are critical. Additional care is given to custom code because of the inherent difficulty to make it scale and update.

    Modifiability The capability to manage the risks and costs of change, considering what can be changed, the likelihood of change, and when and who makes the change. Teams minimize the barriers to change, and get business buy in to keep systems current and valuable.
    Testability The ease with which software are made to demonstrate its faults through (typically execution-based) testing. It cannot be assumed that the vendor has already tested the system against District School Board's requirements. Testability applies to all applications, operating systems, and databases.
    Supportability The ability of the system to provide information helpful for identifying and resolving issues when it fails to work correctly. Supportability applies to all applications and systems within the District School Board's portfolio, whether that be custom developed applications or vendor provided solutions. Resource investments are made to better support the system.
    Cost Efficiency The application system is executed and maintained in such a way that each area of cost is reduced to what is critically needed. Cost efficiency is critical (e.g. printers cost per page, TCO, software what does downtime cost us), and everyone must understand the financial impact of their decisions.
    Self-Service End users are empowered to make configurations, troubleshoot and make changes to their application without the involvement of IT. The appropriate controls are in place to manage the access to unauthorized access to corporate systems.
    Modifiability The capability to manage the risks and costs of change, considering what can be changed, the likelihood of change, and when and who makes the change. Teams minimize the barriers to change, and get business buy in to keep systems current and valuable.
    Testability The ease with which software are made to demonstrate its faults through (typically execution-based) testing. It cannot be assumed that the vendor has already tested the system against District School Board's requirements. Testability applies to all applications, operating systems, and databases.
    Supportability The ability of the system to provide information helpful for identifying and resolving issues when it fails to work correctly. Supportability applies to all applications and systems within the District School Board's portfolio, whether that be custom developed applications or vendor provided solutions. Resource investments are made to better support the system.

    1.3.1 Define mobile application quality

    1-3 hours

    1. List 5 quality attributes that your organization sees as important for a successful mobile application.
    2. List the core personas that will support mobile delivery and that will consume the mobile application. Start with development, operations and support, and end user.
    3. Describe each quality attributes from the perspective of each persona by asking, "What does quality mean to you?".
    4. Review each description from each persona to come to an acceptable definition.
    5. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • User personas
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Journey map
    • Mobile application quality definition
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.3.1 cont'd

    Example: Info-Tech Guided Implementation with a Legal and Professional Services Organization

    Quality AttributeDeveloperOperations & Support TeamEnd Users

    Usability

    • Architecture and frameworks are aligned with industry best practices
    • Regular feedback through analytics and user feedback
    • Faster development and less technical debt
    • Pride in the product
    • Satisfaction that the product is serving its purpose and is actually being used by the user
    • Increased update of product use and feedback for future lifecycle
    • Standardization and positive perception of IT processes
    • Simpler to train users to adopt products and changes
    • Trust in system and ability to promote the product in a positive light
    • Trusted list of applications
    • Intuitive (easy to use, no training required)
    • Encourage collaboration and sharing ideas between end users and delivery teams
    • The information presented is correct and accurate
    • Users understand where the data came from and the algorithms behind it
    • Users learn features quickly and retain their knowledge longer, which directly correlates to decreased training costs and time
    • High uptake in use of the product
    • Seamless experience, use less energy to work with product

    Security

    • Secure by design approach
    • Testing across all layers of the application stack
    • Security analysis of our source code
    • Good approach to security requirement definition, secure access to databases, using latest libraries and using semantics in code
    • Standardized & clear practices for development
    • Making data access granular (not all or none)
    • Secure mission critical procedures which will reduce operational cost, improve compliance and mitigate risks
    • Auditable artifacts on security implementation
    • Good data classification, managed secure access, system backups and privacy protocols
    • Confidence of protection of user data
    • Encryption of sensitive data
    Availability
    • Good access to the code
    • Good access to the data
    • Good access to APIs and other integration technologies
    • Automatic alerts when something goes wrong
    • Self-repairing/recovering
    • SLAs and uptimes
    • Code documentation
    • Proactive support from the infrastructure team
    • System availability dashboard
    • Access on any end user device, including mobile and desktop
    • 24/7 uptime
    • Rapid response to reported defects or bugs
    • Business continuity

    1.3.2 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the various end user, business and technical expectations for mobile its achievability given the current state of your system and non-functional requirements.
    2. Complete the list of questions on the following slide as an indication for your readiness for mobile delivery.

    Input

    Output
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Assessment to proceed with mobile
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.3.2 cont'd

    Skill Sets
    Software delivery teams have skills in creating mobile applications that stakeholders are expecting in value and quality. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Architects look for ways to reuse existing technical asset and design for future growth and maturity in mobile. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Resources can be committed to implement and manage a mobile platform. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Software delivery teams and resources are adaptable and flexible to requirements and system changes. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Delivery Process
    My software delivery process can accommodate last minute and sudden changes in mobile delivery tasks. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Business and IT requirements for the mobile are clarified through collaboration between business and IT representatives. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Mobile will help us fill the gaps and standardize our software delivery process process. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    My testing practices can be adapted to verify and validate the mobile functional and non-functional requirements. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Technical Stack
    My mid-tier and back-end support has the capacity to accommodate additional traffic from mobile. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    I have access to my web infrastructure and integration technologies, and I am capable of making configurations. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    My security approaches and capabilities can be enhanced address specific mobile application risks and vulnerabilities. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    I have a sound and robust integration strategy involving web APIs that gives me the flexibility to support mobile applications. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)

    Phase 2

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Step 2.1 – Choose Your Platform Approach
    • Step 2.2 – Shortlist Your Mobile Delivery Solution
    • Step 2.3 – Create a Roadmap for Mobile Delivery

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Step 2.1

    Choose Your Platform Approach

    Activities

    2.1.1 Select your platform approach

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Desired mobile platform approach

    Mobile value is dependent on the platform you choose

    What is a platform?

    "A platform is a set of software and a surrounding ecosystem of resources that helps you to grow your business. A platform enables growth through connection: its value comes not only from its own features, but from its ability to connect external tools, teams, data, and processes." (Source: Emilie Nøss Wangen, 2021) In the mobile context, applications in a platform execute and communicate through a loosely coupled API architecture whether the supporting system is managed and supported by your organization or by 3rd party providers.

    Web

    The mobile web often takes on one of the following two approaches:

    • Responsive websites – Content, UI and other website elements automatically adjusts itself according to the device, creating a seamless experience regardless of the device.
    • Progressive web applications (PWAs) – PWAs uses the browser's APIs and features to offer native-like experiences.

    Mobile web applications are often developed with a combination of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript languages.

    Hybrid

    Hybrid applications are developed with web technologies but are deployed as native applications. The code is wrapped using a framework so that it runs locally within a native container, and it uses the device's browser runtime engine to support more sophisticated designs and features compared to the web approach. Hybrid mobile solutions allows teams to code once and deploy to multiple platforms.

    Some notable examples:

    • Gmail
    • Instagram

    Cross-Platform

    Cross-platform applications are developed within a distinct programming or scripting environment that uses its own scripting language (often like web languages) and APIs. Then the solution will compile the code into device-specific builds for native deployment.

    Some notable examples:

    • Facebook
    • Skype
    • Slack

    Native

    Native applications are developed and deployed to specific devices and OSs using platform-specific software development kits (SDKs) provided by the operating system vendors. The programming language and framework are dictated by the targeted device, such as Java for Android.

    With this platform, developers have direct access to local device features allowing customized operations. This enables the use of local resources, such as memory and runtime engines, which will achieve a higher performance than hybrid and cross-platform applications.

    Each platform offers unique pros and cons depending on your mobile needs

    WebHybridCross-PlatformNative

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    • Modern browsers support the popular of web languages (HTML, CSS, and JavaScript).
    • Ubiquitous across multiple form factors and devices.
    • Mobile can be easily integrated into traditional web development processes and technical stacks.
    • Installations are not required, and updates are immediate.
    • Sensitive data can be wiped from memory after app is closed.
    • Limited access to local device hardware and software.
    • Local caching is available for limited offline capabilities, but the scope of tasks that can be completed in this scenario is restricted.
    • The browser's runtime engine is limited in computing power.
    • Not all browsers fully support the latest versions of HTML, CSS, or JavaScript.
    • Web languages can be used to develop a complete application.
    • Code can be reused for multiple platforms, including web.
    • Access to commonly-used native features that are not available through the web platform.
    • Quick delivery and maintenance updates compared to native and cross-platform platforms.
    • Consistent internet access is needed due to its reliance heavily reliance on web technologies to operate.
    • Limited ability to support complex workflows and features.
    • Sluggish performance compared to cross-platform and native applications.
    • Certain features may not operate the same across all platforms given the code once, deploy everywhere approach.
    • More cost-effective to develop than using native development approaches to gain similar features. Platform-specific developers are not needed.
    • Common codebase to develop applications on different applications.
    • Enables more complex application functionalities and technical customizations compared to hybrid applications.
    • Code is not portable across cross-platform delivery solutions.
    • The framework is tied to the vendor solution which presents the risk of vendor lock-in.
    • Deployment is dependent on an app store and the delivery solution may not guarantee the application's acceptance into the application store.
    • Significant training and onboarding may be needed using the cross-platform framework.
    • Tight integration with the device's hardware enables high performance and greater use of hardware features.
    • Computationally-intensive and complex tasks can be completed on the device.
    • Available offline access.
    • Apps are available through easy-to-access app stores.
    • Requires additional investments, such as app stores, app-specific support, versioning, and platform-specific extensions.
    • Developers skilled in a device-specific language are difficult to acquire and costly to train.
    • Testing is required every time a new device or OS is introduced.
    • Higher development and maintenance costs are tradeoffs for native device features.

    Start mobile development on a mobile web platform

    Start with what you have: begin with a mobile web platform to minimize impacts to your existing delivery skill sets and technical stack while addressing business needs. Resort to a hybrid first and then consider a cross-platform application if you require device access or the need to meet specific non-functional requirements.

    Why choose a mobile web platform?

    Pros

    The latest versions of the most popular web languages (HTML5, CSS3, JavaScript) abstract away from the granular, physical components of the application, simplifying the development process. HTML5 offer some mobile features (e.g., geolocation, accelerometer) that can meet your desired experience without the need for native development skills. Native look-and-feel, high performance, and full device access are just a few tradeoffs of going with web languages.

    Cons

    Native mobile platforms depend on device-specific code which follows specific frameworks and leverages unique programming libraries, such as Objective C for iOS and Java for Android. Each language requires a high level of expertise in the coding structure and hardware of specific devices requiring resources with specific skillsets and different tools to support development and testing.

    Other Notable Benefits with Web Languages

    • Modern browsers in most mobile devices are capable of executing and rendering many mobile features developed in web languages, allowing for greater portability and sophistication of code across multiple devices. However, this flexibility comes at the cost of performance since the browser's runtime engine will not perform as well as a native engine.
    • Web languages are well known by developers, minimizing skills and resourcing impacts. Consequently, changes can be quickly accommodated and updated uniformly across all end users.

    Do you need a native platform?

    Consider web workarounds if you choose a web platform but require some native experiences.

    The web platform does not give you direct access or sophisticated customizations to local device hardware and services, underlying code and integrations. You may run into the situation where you need some native experiences, but the value of these features may not offset the costs to undertake a native, hybrid or cross-platform application. When developing hybrid and cross-platform applications with a mobile delivery solution, only the APIs of the commonly used device features are available. Note that some vendors may not offer a particular native feature across all devices, inhibiting your ability to achieve feature parity or exploiting device features only available in certain devices. Workarounds are then needed.

    Consider the following workarounds to address the required native experiences on the web platform:

    Native Function Description Web Workaround Impact
    Camera Takes pictures or records videos through the device's camera. Create an upload form in the web with HTML5. Break in workflow leading to poor user experience (UX).
    Geolocation Detects the geographical location of the device. Available through HTML5. Not Applicable.
    Calendar Stores the user's calendar in local memory. Integrate with calendaring system or manually upload contacts. Costly integration initiative. Poor user experience.
    Contacts Stores contact information in local memory. Integrate app with contact system or manually upload contacts. Costly integration initiative. Poor user experience.
    Near Field Communication (NFC) Communication between devices by touching them together or bringing them into proximity. Manual transfer of data. A lot of time is consumed transferring simple information.
    Native Computation Computational power and resources needed to complete tasks on the device. Resource-intensive requests are completed by back-end systems and results sent back to user. Slower application performance given network constraints.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In many cases, workarounds are available when evaluating the gaps between web and native applications. For example, not having application-level access to the camera does not negate the user option to upload a picture taken by the camera through a web form. Tradeoffs like this will come down to assessing the importance of each platform gap for your organization and whether a workaround is good enough as a native-like experience.

    Architect and configure your entire mobile stack with a plan

    • Assess your existing technology stack that will support your mobile platform. Determine if it has the capacity to handle mobile traffic and the necessary integration between devices and enterprise and 3rd party systems are robust and reliable. Reach out to your IT teams and vendors if you are missing key mobile components, such as:
    • The acquisition and provisioning of physical or virtual mobile web servers and middleware from existing vendors.
    • Cloud services [e.g., Mobile Back-end as a Service (mBaaS)] that assists in the mobilization of back-end data sources with API SDKs, orchestration of data from multiple sources, transformation of legacy APIs to mobile formats, and satisfaction of other security, integration and performance needs.
    • Configure the services of your web server or middleware to facilitate the translation, transformation, and transfer of data between your mobile front-end and back-end. If your plan involves scripts, maintenance and other ongoing costs will likely increase.
    • Leverage the APIs or adapters provided by your vendors or device manufacturers to integrate your mobile front-end and back-end support to your web server or middleware. If you are reusing a web server, the back-end integration should already be in place. Remember, APIs implement business rules to maintain the integrity of data exchange within your mobile stack.
    • See Appendix A for examples of reference architectures of mobile platforms.

    See our Enhance Your Solution Architecture for more information.

    Do Not Forget Your Security and Performance Requirements

    Security: New threats from mobile put organizations into a difficult situation beyond simply responding to them in a timely matter. Be careful not to take the benefits of security out of the mobile context. You need to make security a first-order citizen during the scoping, design, and optimization of your systems supporting mobile. It must also be balanced with other functional and non-functional requirements with the right roles taking accountability for these decisions.

    See our Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications for more information.

    Performance: Within a distributed mobile environment, performance has a risk of diminishing due to limited device capacity, network hopping, lack of server scalability, API bottlenecks, and other device, network and infrastructure issues. Mobile web APIs suffer from the same pain points as traditional web browsing and unplanned API call management in an application will lead to slow performance.

    See our Develop Enterprise Mobile Applications With Realistic and Relevant Performance for more information.

    Enterprise platform selection requires a shift in perspective

    Your mobile platform selection must consider both user and enterprise (i.e., non-functional) needs. Use a two-step process for your analysis:

    Begin Platform Selection with a User-Centric Approach

    Organizations appealing to end users place emphasis on the user experience: the look and appeal of the user interface, and the satisfaction, ease of use, and value of its functionalities. In this approach, IT concerns and needs are not high priorities, but many functions are completed locally or isolated from mission critical corporate networks and sensitive data. Some needs include:

    • Performance: quick execution of tasks and calculations made on the device or offloaded to web servers or the cloud.
    • User Interface: cross-platform compatibility and feature-rich design and functionality. The right native experience is critical to the user adoption and satisfaction.
    • Device Access: use of local device hardware and software to complete app use cases, such as camera, calendar, and contact lists.

    Refine Platform Selection with an Enterprise-Centric Approach

    From the enterprise perspective, emphasis is on security, system performance, integration, reuse and other non-functional requirements as the primary motivations in the selection of a mobile platform. User experience is still a contributing factor because of the mobile application's need to drive value but its priority is not exclusive. Some drivers include:

    • Openness: agreed-upon industry standards and technologies that can be applied to serve enterprise needs which support business processes.
    • Integration: increase the reuse of legacy investments and existing applications and services with integration capabilities.
    • Flexibility: support for multiple data types from applications such as JSON format for mobile.
    • Capacity: maximize the utilization of your software delivery resources beyond the initial iteration of the mobile application.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Selecting a mobile platform should not solely be made on business requirements. Key technical stakeholders should be at the table in this discussion to provide insight on the implementation and ongoing costs and benefits of each platform. Both business and technical requirements should be considered when deciding on a final platform.

    Select your mobile platform

    Drive your mobile platform selection against user-centric needs (e.g. device access, aesthetics) and enterprise-centric needs (e.g. security, system performance).

    When does a platform makes sense to use?

    Web

    • Desire to maximize current web technologies investments (people, process, and technologies).
    • Use cases do not require significant computational resources on the device or are tightly constrained by non-functional requirements.
    • Limited budget to acquire mobile development resources.
    • Access to device hardware is not a high priority.

    Hybrid / Cross-Platform

    • The need to quickly spin up native-like applications for multiple platforms and devices.
    • Desire to leverage existing web development skills, but also a need for device access and meeting specific non-functional requirements.
    • Vendor support is needed for the entire mobile delivery process.

    Native

    • Developers are experts in the target programming language and with the device's hardware.
    • Strong need for high performance, security and device-specific access and customizations.
    • Application use cases requiring significant computing resources.

    Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform.

    2.1.1 Select your platform approach

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your mobile objectives, end user needs and non-functional requirements.
    2. Determine which mobile platform is appropriate for each mobile opportunity or use case by answering the following questions on the following slides against two factors: user-centric and enterprise-centric needs.
    3. Calculate an average score for user-centric and one for enterprise-centric. Then, map them on the matrix to indicate possible platform options. Consider all options around the plotted point.
    4. Further discuss which platforms should be the preferred choice.
    5. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Desired mobile experience
    • List of desired mobile features
    • Current state assessments
    • Mobile platform approach
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.1.1 cont'd

    User-Centric Needs: Functional Requirements

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Device Hardware Access The scope of access to native device hardware features. Basic features include those that are available through current web languages (e.g., geolocation) whereas comprehensive features are those that are device-specific. 1 (Basic) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Comprehensive)
    Customized Execution of Device Hardware The degree of changes to the execution of local device hardware to satisfy functional needs. 1 (Use as Is) – 2 – 3 (Configure) – 4 – 5 (Customize)
    Device Software Access The scope of access to software on the user's device, such as calendars and contact. 1 (Basic) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Comprehensive)
    Customized Execution of Device Software The degree of changes to the execution of local device software to satisfy functional needs. 1 (Use as Is) – 2 – 3 (Configure) – 4 – 5 (Customize)
    Use Case Complexity Workflow tasks and decisions are simple and straightforward. Complex computation is not needed to acquire the desired outcome. 1 (Strongly Agree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Disagree)
    Computational Resources The resources needed on the device to complete desired functional needs. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Use Case Ambiguity The mobile use case and technical requirements are well understood and documented. Changes to the mobile application is likely. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Mobile Application Access Enterprise systems and data are accessible to the broader organization through the mobile application. This factor does not necessarily mean that anyone can access it untracked. You may still need to identify yourself or log in, etc. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Scope of Adoption & Impact The extent to which the mobile application is leveraged in the organization. 1 (Enterprise) – 2 – 3 (Department) – 4 – 5 (Team)
    Installable The need to locally install the mobile application. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Targeted Devices & Platforms Mobile applications are developed for a defined set of mobile platform versions and types and device. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Output Audience The mobile application transforms an input into a valuable output for high-priority internal or external stakeholders. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    User-Centric Needs: Native User Experience Factors

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Immersive Experience The need to bridge physical world with the virtual and digital environment, such as geofencing and NFC. 1 (Internally Delivered) – 2 – 3 (3rd Party Supported) – 4 – 5 (Business Implemented)
    Timeliness of Content and Updates The speed of which the mobile application (and supporting system) responds with requested information, data and updates from enterprise systems and 3rd party services. 1 (Reasonable Delayed Response) – 2 – 3 (Partially Outsourced) – 4 – 5 (Fully Outsourced)
    Application Performance The speed of which the mobile application completes tasks is critical to its success. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Network Accessibility The needed ability to access and use the mobile application in various network conditions. 1 (Only Available When Online) – 2 – 3 (Partially Available When Online) – 4 – 5 (Available Online)
    Integrated Ecosystem The approach to integrate the mobile application with enterprise or 3rd party systems and services. 1 (Out-of-the-Box Connectors) – 2 – 3 (Configurable Connectors) – 4 – 5 (Customized Connectors)
    Desire to Have a Native Look-and-Feel The aesthetics and UI features (e.g., heavy animations) that are only available through native and cross-platform applications. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    User Tolerance to Change The degree of willingness and ableness for a user to change their way of working to maximize the value of the mobile application. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Mission Criticality The business could not execute its main strategy if the mobile application was removed. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Business Value The mobile application directly adds business value to the organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Industry Differentiation The mobile application provides a distinctive competitive advantage or is unique to your organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    Enterprise-Centric Needs: Non-Functional Requirements

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Legacy Compatibility The need to integrate and operate with legacy systems. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Code Portability The need to enable the "code once and deploy everywhere" approach. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Vendor & Technology Lock-In The tolerance to lock into a vendor mobile delivery solution or technology framework. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Data Sensitivity The data used by the mobile application does not fall into the category of sensitive data – meaning nothing financial, medical, or personal identity (GDPR and worldwide equivalents). The disclosure, modification, or destruction of this data would cause limited harm to the organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Data Policies Policies of the mobile application's data are mandated by internal departmental standards (e.g. naming standards, backup standards, data type consistency). Policies only mandated in this way usually have limited use in a production capacity. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Security Risks Mobile applications are connected to private data sources and its intended use will be significant if underlying data is breached. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Business Continuity & System Integrity Risks The mobile application in question does not have much significance relative to the running of mission critical processes in the organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    System Openness Openness of enterprise systems to enable mobile applications from the user interface to the business logic and backend integrations and database. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Mobile Device Management The organization's policy for the use of mobile devices to access and leverage enterprise data and services. 1 (Bring-Your-Own-Device) – 2 – 3 (Hybrid) – 4 – 5 (Corporate Devices)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    Enterprise-Centric Needs: Delivery Capacity

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Ease of Mobile Delivery The desire to have out-of-the-box and packaged tools to expedite mobile application delivery using web technologies. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Solution Competency The capability for internal staff to and learn how to implement and administer mobile delivery tools and deliver valuable, high-quality applications. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Ease of Deployment The desire to have the mobile applications delivered by the team or person without specialized resources from outside the team. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Delivery Approach The capability to successfully deliver mobile applications given budgetary and costing, resourcing, and supporting services constraints. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Maintenance & Operational Support The capability of the resources to responsibly maintain and operate mobile applications, including defect fixes and the addition and extension of modules to base implementations of the digital product. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Domain Knowledge Support The availability and accessibility of subject and domain experts to guide facilitate mobile application implementation and adoption. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Delivery Urgency The desire to have the mobile application delivered quickly. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Reusable Components The desire to reuse UI elements and application components. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    Example:

    Score Factors (Average) Mobile Opportunity 1: Inventory Management Mobile Opportunity 2: Remote Support
    User-Centric Needs 4.25 3
    Functional Requirements 4.5 2.25
    Native User Experience Factors 4 1.75
    Enterprise-Centric Needs 4 2
    Non-Functional Requirements 3.75 3.25
    Delivery Capacity 4.25 2.75
    Possible Mobile Platform Cross-Platform Native PWA Hybrid

    Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform. Two yellow circles are overlaid, one containing the phrase: Remote Support - over the box containing Progressive Web Applications (PWA) or Hybrid; and a yellow circle containing the phrase Inventory MGMT, partly covering the box containing Native; and the box containing Cross-Platform.

    Build a scalable and manageable platform

    Long-term mobile success depends on the efficiency and reliability of the underlying operational platform. This platform must support the computational and performance demands in a changing business environment, whether it is composed of off-the-self or custom-developed solutions, or a single vendor or best-of-breed.

    • Application
      • The UI design and content language is standardized and consistently applied
      • All mobile configurations and components are automatically versioned
      • Controlled administration and tooling access, automation capabilities, and update delivery
      • Holistic portfolio management
    • Data
      • Automated data management to preserve data quality (e.g. removal of duplications)
      • Defined single source of truth
      • Adherence to data governance, and privacy and security policies
      • Good content management practices, governance and architecture
    • Infrastructure
      • Containers and sandboxes are available for development and testing
      • Self-healing and self-service environments
      • Automatic system scaling and load balancing
      • Comply to budgetary and licensing constraints
    • Integration
      • Backend database and system updates are efficient
      • Loosely coupled architecture to minimize system regressions and delivery effort
      • Application, system and data monitoring

    Step 2.2

    Shortlist Your Mobile Delivery Solution

    Activities

    2.2.1 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution

    2.2.2 Build your feature and service lists

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services

    Ask yourself: should I build or buy?

    Build Buy

    Multi-Source Best-of-Breed

    Vendor Add-Ons & Integrations

    Integrate various technologies that provide subset(s) of the features needed for supporting the business functions.

    Enhance an existing vendor's offerings by using their system add-ons either as upgrades, new add-ons or integrations.

    Pros

    • Flexibility in choice of tools.
    • In some cases, cost may be lower.
    • Easier to enhance with in-house teams.

    Cons

    • Introduces tool sprawl.
    • Requires resources to understand tools and how they integrate.
    • Some of the tools necessary may not be compatible with each other.

    Pros

    • Reduces tool sprawl.
    • Supports consistent tool stack.
    • Vendor support can make enhancement easier.
    • Total cost of ownership may be lower.

    Cons

    • Vendor Lock-In.
    • The processes to enhance may require tweaking to fit tool capability.

    Multi-Source Custom

    Single Source

    Integrate systems built in-house with technologies developed by external organizations.

    Buy an application/system from one vendor only.

    Pros

    • Flexibility in choice of tools.
    • In some cases, cost may be lower.
    • Easier to enhance with in-house teams.

    Cons

    • May introduce tool sprawl.
    • Requires resources to have strong technical skills
    • Some of the tools necessary may
    • not be compatible with each other.

    Pros

    • Reduces tool sprawl.
    • Supports consistent tool stack.
    • Vendor support can make enhancement easier.
    • Total cost of ownership may be lower.

    Cons

    • Vendor Lock-In.
    • The processes to enhance may require tweaking to fit tool capability.

    Weigh the pros and cons of mobile enablement versus development

    Mobile Enablement

    Mobile Development

    Description Mobile interfaces that heavily rely on enterprise or 3rd party systems to operate. Mobile does not expand the functionality of the system but complements it with enhanced access, input and consumption capabilities. Mobile applications that are custom built or configured in a way that can operate as a standalone entity, whether they are locally deployed to a user's device or virtually hosted.
    Mobile Platform Mobile web, locally installed mobile application provided by vendor Mobile web, hybrid, cross-platform, native
    Typical Audience Internal staff, trusted users Internal and external users, general public
    Examples of Tooling Flavors Enterprise applications, point solutions, robotic & process automation Mobile enterprise application platform, web development, low and no code development, software development kits (SDKs)
    Technical Skills Required Little to no mobile delivery experience and skillsets are needed, but teams must be familiar with the supporting system to understand how a mobile interface can improve the value of the system. Have good UX-driven and quality-first practices in the mobile context. In-depth coding, networking, system and UX design, data management and security skills are needed for complex designs, functions, and architectures.
    Architecture & Integration Architecture is standardized by the vendor or enterprise with UI elements that are often minimally configurable. Extensions and integrations must be done through the system rather than the mobile interface. Much of application stack and integration approach can be customized to meet the specific functional and non-functional needs. It should still leverage web and design standards and investments currently used.
    Functional Scope Functionality is limited to the what the underlying system allows the interface to do. This often is constrained to commodity web application features (e.g., reporting) or tied to minor configurations to the vendor-provided point solution Functionality is only constrained by the platform and the targeted mobile devices whether it is performance, integration, access or security related. Teams should consider feature and content parity across all products within the organization portfolio.
    Delivery Pipeline End-to-end delivery and automated pipeline is provided by the vendor to ensure parity across all interfaces. Many vendors provide cloud-based services for hosting. Otherwise, it is directly tied to the SDLC of the supporting system. End-to-end delivery and automated pipeline is directly tied to enterprise SDLC practices or through the vendor. Some vendors provide cloud-based services for hosting. Updates are manually or automatically (through a vendor) published to app stores and can be automatically pushed to corporate users through mobile application management capabilities.
    Standards & Guardrails Quality standards and technology governance are managed by the vendor or IT with limited capabilities to tailor them to be mobile specific. Quality standards and technology governance are managed by the mobile delivery teams. The degree of customizations to these standards and guardrails is dependent on the chosen platform and delivery team competencies.

    Understand the common attributes of a mobile delivery solution

    • Source Code Management – Built-in or having the ability to integrate with code management solutions for branching, merging, and versioning. Debugging and coding assistance capabilities may be available.
    • Single Code Base – Capable of programming in a standard coding and scripting language for deployment into several platforms and devices. This code base is aligned to a common industry framework (e.g., AngularJS, Java) or a vendor-defined one.
    • Out-of-the-Box Connectors & Plug-ins – Pre-built APIs enhance the solution's capabilities with 3rd party tools and systems to deliver and manage high quality and valuable mobile applications.
    • Emulators – Ability to virtualize an application's execution on a target platform and device.
    • Support for Native Features – Supports plug-ins and APIs for access to device-specific features.

    What are mobile delivery solutions?

    A mobile delivery solution gives you the tools, resources and support to enable or build your mobile application. They can provide pre-built applications, vendor supported components to allow some configurations, or resources for full stack customizations. Some solutions can be barebone software development kits (SDKs) or comprehensive suites offering features to support the entire software delivery lifecycle, such as:

    • Mobile application management
    • Testing and publishing to app stores
    • Content management
    • Cloud hosting
    • Application performance management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Mobile enablement and development capabilities are already embedded in many common productivity tools and enterprise applications, such as Microsoft PowerApps and ERP modules. They can serve as a starting point in the initial rollout of new management and governance practices without the need of acquiring new tools.

    Select your mobile delivery solutions

    1. Set the scope of your framework.
    • The initial context of this framework is based on the mobile functions needed to support your desired mobile experience and on the current state of your enterprise and 3rd party systems.
  • Define the decision factors for your solution selection.
    • Review the decision factors that will influence the selection of your mobile delivery solution for each mobile opportunity:
    • Stack Management – Who will be hosting and supporting your mobile application stack?
    • Workflows Complexity & Native Experience – How complex is your desired mobile experience and how will native device features be leveraged?
  • Select your solution type.
    • Mobile delivery solutions are broadly defined in the following groups:
    • Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) – Pre-built mobile applications requiring little to no configurations or implementation effort.
    • Vendor Hosted Mobile Platform – Back-end and mid-tier infrastructure and operational support are managed by a vendor.
    • Cross-Platform Development – Frameworks that transform a single code base into platform-specific builds.
    • Hybrid Development – Tools that wrap a single code base into a locally deployable build.
    • Custom Web Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile web applications.
    • Custom Native Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile native applications.
  • A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions

    Explore the various solution options

    Vendor Hosted Mobile Platform

    • Cloud Services (Mobile Backend-as-a-Service) (Amazon Amplify, Kinvey, Back4App, Google Firebase, Apache Usergrid)
    • Low Code Mobile Platforms (Outsystems, Mendix, Zoho Creator, IBM Mobile Foundation, Pega Mobile, HCL Volt MX, Appery)
    • Mobile Development via Enterprise Application (SalesForce Heroku, Oracle Application Accelerator MAX, SAP Mobile Development Kit, NetSuite Mobile)
    • Mobile Development via Business Process Automation (PowerApps, Appian, Nintex, Quickbase)

    Cross-Platform Development SDKs

    React Native, NativeScript, Xamarin Forms, .NET MAUI, Flutter, Kotlin Multiplatform Mobile, jQuery Mobile, Telerik, Temenos Quantum

    Custom Native Development Solutions

    • Native Development Languages and Environments (Swift, Java, Objective-C, Kotlin, Xcode, NetBeans, Android Studio, AppCode, Microsoft Visual Studio, Eclipse, DriodScript, Compose, Atom)
    • Mobile Application Utilities (Unity, MonoGame, Blender, 3ds Max Design, Maya, Unreal Engine, Amazon Lumberyard, Oculus)

    Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions

    • No Code Mobile Platforms (Swiftic, Betty Blocks, BuildFire, Appy Pie, Plant an App, Microsoft Power Apps, AppSheet, Wix, Quixy)
    • Mobile Application Point Solutions and Enablement via Enterprise Applications

    Hybrid Development SDKs

    Cordova Project, Sencha Touch, Electron, Ionic, Capacitor, Monaca, Voltbuilder

    Custom Web Development Solutions

    Web Development Frameworks (React, Angular, Vue, Express, Django, Rails, Spring, Ember, Backbone, Bulma, Bootstrap, Tailwind CSS, Blade)

    Get the most out of your solutions by understanding their core components

    While most of the heavy lifting is handled by the vendor or framework, understanding how the mobile application is built and operates can identify where further fine-tuning is needed to increase its value and quality.

    Platform Runtime

    Automatic provisioning, configurations, and tuning of organizational and 3rd party infrastructure for high availability, performance, security and stability. This can include cloud management and non-production environments.

    Extensions

    • Mobile delivery solutions can be extended to allow:
    • Custom development of back-end code
    • Customizable integrations and hooks where needed
    • Integrations with CI/CD pipelines and administrative services
    • Integrations with existing databases and authentication services

    Platform Services

    The various services needed to support mobile delivery and enable continuous delivery, such as:

    • Configuration & Change Management – Verifies, validates, and monitors builds, deployments and changes across all components.
    • Code Generator – Transforms UI and data models into native application components that are ready to be deployed.
    • Deployment Services – Deploys application components consistently across all target environments and app stores.
    • Application Services – Manages the mobile application at runtime, including executing scheduled tasks and instrumentation.

    Application Architecture

    Fundamentally, mobile application architecture is no different than any other application architecture so much of your design standards still applies. The trick is tuning it to best meet your mobile functional and non-functional needs.

    This image contains an example of mobile application architecture.

    Source: "HCL Volt MX", HCL.

    Build your shortlist decision criteria

    The decision on which type of mobile delivery solution to use is dependent on several key questions?

    Who is the Mobile Delivery Team?

    • Is it a worker, business or IT?
    • What skills and knowledge does this person have?
    • Who is supporting mobile delivery and management?
    • Are other skills and tools needed to support, extend or mature mobile delivery adoption?

    What are the Use Cases?

    • What is the value and priority of the use cases?
    • What native features do we need?
    • Who is the audience of the output and who is impacted?
    • What systems, data and services do I need access?
    • Is it best to build it or buy it?
    • What are the quality standards?
    • How strategic is the use case?

    How Complex is the System?

    • Is the mobile application a standalone or integrated with enterprise systems?
    • What is the system's state and architecture?
    • What 3rd party services do we need integrated?
    • Are integrations out-of-the-box or custom?
    • Is the data standardized and who can edit its definition?
    • Is the system monolithic or loosely coupled?

    How Much Can We Tolerate?

    • Risks: What are the business and technical risks involved?
    • Costs: How much can we invest in implementation, training and operations?
    • Change: What organizational changes am I expecting to make? Will these changes be accepted and adopted?

    2.2.1 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution

    1-3 hours

    1. Determine which mobile delivery solutions is appropriate for each mobile opportunity or use case by answering the following questions on the following slides against two factors: complexity of mobile workflows and native features and management of the mobile stack.
      1. Take the average of the enterprise-centric and user-centric scores from step 2.1 for your complexity of mobile workflows and native features scores.
    2. Calculate an average score for the management of the mobile stack. Then, map them on the matrix to indicate possible solution options alongside your user-centric scores. Consider all options around the plotted point.
    3. Further discuss which solution should be the preferred choice and compare those options with your selected platform approach.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Current state assessment
    • Mobile platform approach
    • Shortlist of mobile delivery solution
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.2.1 cont'd

    Stack Management

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Cost of Delayed Delivery The expected cost if a vendor solution or update is delayed. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Vendor Negotiation Organization's ability to negotiate favorable terms from vendors. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Controllable Delivery Timeline Organization's desire to control when solutions and updates are delivered. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Solution Hosting The desired approach to host the mobile application. 1 (Fully Outsourced) – 2 – 3 (Partially Outsourced) – 4 – 5 (Internally Hosted)
    Vendor Lock-In The tolerance to be locked into a specific technology stack or vendor ecosystem. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Operational Cost Target The primary target of the mobile application's operational budget. 1 (External Resources) – 2 – 3 (Hybrid) – 4 – 5 (Internal Resources)
    Platform Management The desired approach to manage the mobile delivery solution, platform or underlying technology. 1 (Decentralized) – 2 – 3 (Federated) – 4 – 5 (Centralized)
    Skill & Competency of Mobile Delivery Team The ability of the team to create and manage valuable and high-quality mobile applications. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Current Investment in Enterprise Technologies The need to maximize the ROI of current enterprise technologies or integrate with legacy technologies. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Ease of Extensibility Need to have out-of-the-box connectors and plug-ins to extend the mobile delivery solution beyond its base implementation. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Holistic Application Strategy Organizational priorities on the types of applications the portfolio should be comprised. 1 (Buy) – 2 – 3 (Hybrid) – 4 – 5 (Build)
    Control of Delivery Pipeline The desire to control the software delivery pipeline from design to development, testing, publishing and support. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Specific Quality Requirements Software and mobile delivery is constrained to your unique quality standards (e.g., security, performance, availability) 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)

    2.2.1 cont'd

    Example:

    Score Factors (Average) Mobile Opportunity 1: Inventory Management Mobile Opportunity 2: Remote Support
    User-Centric & Enterprise Centric Needs (From Step 2.1) 4.125 2.5
    Stack Management 2 2.5
    Desired Mobile Delivery Solution Vendor-Hosted Mobile Platform

    Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solution

    Hybrid Development Solution

    A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions.

    Consider the following in your solution selection and implementation

    • Vendor lock in – Each solution has its own approach, frameworks, and data schemas to convert designs and logic into an executable build that is stable in the targeted environment. Consequently, moving application artifacts (e.g., code and designs) from one solution or environment to another may not be easily accomplished without significant modifications or the use of application modernization or migration services.
    • Conflicting priorities and viewpoints of good delivery practices – Mobile delivery solutions are very particular on how they generate applications from designs and configurations. The solution's approach may not accommodate your interpretation of high-quality code (e.g., scalability, maintainability, extensibility, security). Technical experts should be reviewing and refactoring the generated code.
    • Incompatibility with enterprise applications and systems – The true benefit of mobile delivery solutions is their ability to connect your mobile application to enterprise and 3rd party technologies and services. This capability often requires enterprise technologies and services to be architected in a way that is compatible with your delivery solution while ensuring data, security protocols and other standards and policies are consistently enforced.
    • Integration with current application development and management tools – Mobile delivery solutions should be extensions from your existing application development and management tools that provides the versioning, testing, monitoring, and deployment capabilities to sustain a valuable application portfolio. Without this integration, IT will be unable to:
      • Root cause issues found on IT dashboards or reported to help desk.
      • Rollback defective applications to a previous stable state.
      • Obtain a complete application portfolio inventory.
      • Execute comprehensive testing for high-risk applications.
      • Trace artifacts throughout the development lifecycle.
      • Generate reports of the status of releases.

    Enhance your SDLC to support mobile delivery

    What is the SDLC?

    The software development lifecycle (SDLC) is a process that ensures valuable software products are efficiently delivered to customers. It contains a repeatable set of activities needed to intake and analyze requirements to design, build, test, deploy, and maintain software products.

    How will mobile delivery influence my SDLC?

    • Cross-functional collaboration – Bringing business and IT together at the most opportune times to clarify user needs and business priorities, and set realistic expectations given technology and capacity constraints. The appropriate tactics and techniques are used to improve decision making and delivery effectiveness according to the type of work.
    • Iterative delivery – Frequent delivery of progressive changes minimizes the risk of low-quality features by containing and simplifying scope, and enables responsive turnarounds of fixes, enhancements, and priority changes.
    • Feedback loops –Mobile application owners constantly review, update and refine their backlog of mobile features and changes to reflect user feedback and system performance metrics. Delivery teams proactively prepare the application for future scaling based on lessons and feedback learned from earlier releases.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your SDLC blueprint.

    Example: Low- & No-Code Mobile Delivery Pipeline

    Low Code

    Data Modeling & Configuration

    No Code

    Visual Interface with Complex Data Models

    Data Modeling & Configuration

    Visual Interfaces with Simple Data Models

    GUI Designer with Customizable Components & Entities

    UI Definition & Design

    GUI Designer with Canned Templates

    Visual Workflow and Custom Scripting

    Business Logic Rules and Workflow Specification

    Visual Workflow and Natural Language Scripting

    Out-of-the-Box Plugins & Custom Integrations

    Integration of External Services (via 3rd Party APIs)

    Out-of-the-Box Plugins

    Automated and Manual Build & Packaging

    Build & Package

    Automated Build & Packaging

    Automated & Manual Testing

    Test

    Automated Testing

    One-Click Push or IT Push to App Store

    Publish to App Store

    One-Click Push to App Store

    Use Info-Tech's research to address your delivery gaps

    Mobile success requires more than a set of good tools.

    Overcome the Common Challenges Faced with Building Mobile Applications

    Common Challenges with Digital Applications

    Suggested Solutions

    • Time & Resource Constraints
    • Buy-In From Internal Stakeholders
    • Rapidly Changing Requirements
    • Legacy Systems
    • Low-Priority for Internal Tools
    • Insufficient Data Access

    Source: DronaHQ, 2021

    Learn the differentiators of mobile delivery solutions

    • Native Program Languages – Supports languages other than web (Java, Ruby, C/C++/C#, Objective-C).
    • IDE Integration – Available plug-ins for popular development suites and editors.
    • Debugging Tools – Finding and eliminating bugs (breakpoints, single stepping, variable inspection, etc.).
    • Application Packaging via IDE – Digitally sign applications through the IDE for it to be packaged and published in app stores.
    • Automated Testing Tools – Native or integration with automated functional and unit testing tools.
    • Low- and No- Code Designer – Tools for designing graphical user interfaces and features and managing data with drag-and-drop functionalities.
    • Publishing and Deployment Capabilities – Automated deployment to mobile device management (MDM) systems, mobile application management (MAM) systems, mobile application stores, and web servers.
    • Third-Party and Open-Source Integration – Integration with proprietary and open-source third-party modules, development tools, and systems.
    • Developer Marketplace – Out-of-the-box plug-ins, templates, and integration are available through a marketplace.
    • Mobile Application Support Capabilities – Ability to gather, manage, and address application issues and defects.
    • API Gateway, Monitoring, and Management – Services that enable the creation, publishing, maintenance, monitoring, and securing of APIs through a common interface.
    • Mobile Analytics and Monitoring – View the adoption, usage, and performance of deployed mobile applications through graphical dashboards.
    • Mobile Content Management – Publish and manage mobile content through a centralized system.
    • Mobile Application Security – Supports the securing of application access and usage, data encryption, and testing of security controls.

    Define your mobile delivery vendor selection criteria

    Focus on the key vendor attributes and capabilities that enable mobile delivery scaling and growth in your organization

    Considerations in Mobile Delivery Vendor Selection
    Platform Features & Capabilities Price to Implement & Operate Platform
    Types of Mobile Applications That Can Be Developed Ease of IT Administration & Management
    User Community & Marketplace Size Security, Privacy & Access Control Capabilities
    SME in Industry Verticals & Business Functions Vendor Product Roadmap & Corporate Strategy
    Pre-Built Designs, Templates & Application Shells Scope of Device- and OS-Specific Compatibilities
    Regulatory & Industry Compliance Integration & Technology Partners
    Importing Artifacts From and Exporting to Other Solutions Platform Architecture & Underlying Technology
    End-to-End Support for the Entire Mobile SDLC Relevance to Current Mobile Trends & Practices

    Build your features list

    Incorporate different perspectives when defining the list of mandatory and desired features of your target solution.

    Appendix B contains a list of features for low- and no-code solutions that can be used as a starting point.

    Visit Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint.

    Mobile Developer

    • Visual, drag-and-drop models to define data models, business logic, and user interfaces.
    • One-click deployment.
    • Self-healing capabilities.
    • Vendor-managed infrastructure.
    • Active community and marketplace.
    • Pre-built templates and libraries.
    • Optical character recognition and natural language processing.
    • Knowledgebase and document management.
    • Business value, operational costs, and other KPI monitoring.
    • Business workflow automation.

    Mobile IT Professional

    • Audit and change logs.
    • Theme and template builder.
    • Template management.
    • Role-based access.
    • Regulatory compliance.
    • Consistent design and user experience across applications.
    • Application and system performance monitoring.
    • Versioning and code management.
    • Automatic application and system refactoring and recovery.
    • Exception and error handling.
    • Scalability (e.g. load balancing) and infrastructure management.
    • Real-time debugging.
    • Testing capabilities.
    • Security management.
    • Application integration management.

    2.2.2 Build your feature and service lists

    1-3 hours

    Review the key outcomes in the previous exercises to help inform the features and vendor support you require to support your mobile delivery needs:

    End user personas and desired mobile experience

    Objectives and expectations

    Desired mobile features and platform

    Mobile delivery solutions

    Brainstorm a list of features and functionalities you require from your ideal solution vendors. Prioritize these features and functionalities. See our Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint for more information on vendor procurement.

    Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Shortlist of mobile solutions
    • Quality definitions
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • List of desired features and services of mobile delivery solution vendors
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Hit a home run with your stakeholders

    Use a data-driven approach to select the right tooling vendor for your needs – fast.

    AwarenessEducation & DiscoveryEvaluationSelection

    Negotiation & Configuration

    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics4.1 Create a Weighted Selection Decision Model5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation with Top Two Venders
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action2.2 Discover Alternate Solutions & Conduct Market Education3.2 Conduct a Data Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities with Top 2-4 Vendors5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration

    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment

    2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application PortfolioNarrow the Field to Four Top Contenders4.3 Validate Key Issues with Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation2.4 Validate the Business Case5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Investing time improving your software selection methodology has big returns.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small, some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you're looking to select. Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology in Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    Step 2.3

    Create a Roadmap for Mobile Delivery

    Activities

    2.3.1 Define your MVP release

    2.3.2 Build your roadmap

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap

    Achieve mobile success with MVPs

    By delivering mobile capabilities in small iterations, teams recognize value sooner and reduce accumulated risk. Both benefits are realized as the iteration enters validation testing and release.

    This image depicts a graph of the learn-build-measure cycle over time, adapted from Managing the Development of Large Software Systems, Dr. Winston W. Royce, 1970

    An MVP focuses on a small set of functions, involves minimal possible effort to deliver a working and valuable solution, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to:

    • Maximize learning.
    • Evaluate the value and acceptance of mobile applications.
    • Inform the building of a mobile delivery practice.

    The build-measure-learn loop suggests mobile delivery teams should perpetually take an idea and develop, test, and validate it with the mobile development solution, then expand on the MVP using the lessons learned and evolving ideas. In this sense the MVP is just the first iteration in the loop.

    Leverage a canvas to detail your MVP

    Use the release canvas to organize and align the organization around your MVP!

    This is an example of a release canvas which can be used to detail your MVP.

    2.3.1 Define your MVP release

    1-3 hours

    1. Create a list of high priority use cases slated for mobile application delivery. Brainstorm the various supporting activities required to implement your use cases including the shortlisting of mobile delivery tools.
    2. Prioritize these use cases based on business priority (from your canvas). Size the effort of these use cases through collaboration.
    3. Define your MVPs using a release canvas as shown on the following slide.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • High priority mobile opportunities
    • Mobile platform approach
    • Shortlist of mobile solutions
    • List of potential MVPs
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.3.1 cont'd

    MVP Name

    Owner:
    Parent Initiative:
    Updated:

    NAME
    LINK
    October 05, 2022

    MVP Theme/Goals

    [Theme / Goal]

    Use Cases

    Value

    Costs

    [Use Case 1]
    [Use Case 2]
    [Use Case 3]

    [Business Value 1]
    [Business Value 2]
    [Business Value 3]

    [Cost Item 1]
    [Cost Item 2]
    [Cost Item 3]

    Impacted Personas

    Impacted Workflows

    Stakeholders

    [Persona 1]
    [Persona 2]
    [Persona 3]

    [Workflow 1]
    [Workflow 2]
    [Workflow 3]

    [Stakeholder 1]
    [Stakeholder 2]
    [Stakeholder 3]

    Build your mobile roadmap

    It's more than a set of colorful boxes. It's the map to align everyone to where you are going

    Your mobile roadmap

    • Lays out a strategy for your mobile application, platform and practice implementation and scaling.
    • Is a statement of intent for your mobile adoption.
    • Communicates direction for the implementation and use of mobile delivery tools, mobile applications and supporting technologies.
    • Directly connects to the organization's goals

    However, it is not:

    • Representative of a hard commitment.
    • A simple combination of your current product roadmaps

    Roadmap your MVPs against your milestones and release dates

    This is an image of an example of a roadmap for your MVPS, with milestones across Jan 2022, Feb 2022, Mar 2022, Apr 2022. under milestones, are the following points: Points in the timeline when an established set of artifacts is complete (feature-based), or to check status at a particular point in time (time-based); Typically assigned a date and used to show progress; Plays an important role when sequencing different types of artifacts. Under Release Dates are the following points: Releases mark the actual delivery of a set of artifacts packaged together in a new version of processes and applications or new mobile application and delivery capabilities. ; Release dates, firm or not, allow stakeholders to anticipate when this is coming.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    Understand what is communicated in your roadmap

    WHY is the work being done?

    Explains the overarching goal of work being done to a specific audience.

    WHO is doing the work?

    Categorizes the different groups delivering the work on the product.

    WHAT is the work being done?

    Explains the artifacts, or items of work, that will be delivered.

    WHEN is the work being done?

    Explains when the work will be delivered within your timeline.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    Pay attention to organizational changes

    Be prepared to answer:

    "How will mobile change the way I do my job?"

    • Plan how workers will incorporate mobile applications into their way of working and maximize the features it offers.
    • Address the human concerns regarding the transition to a digital world involving modern and mobile technologies and automation.
    • Accept changes, challenges and failures with open arms and instill tactics to quickly address them.
    • Build and strengthen business-IT trust, empowerment, and collaborative culture by adopting the right practices throughout the mobile delivery process.
    • Ensure continuous management and leadership support for business empowerment, operational changes, and shifts in role definitions to best support mobile delivery.
    • Establish a committee to manage the growth, adoption, and delivery of mobile as part of a grandeur digital application portfolio and address conflicts among business units and IT.

    Anticipate and prepare for changes and issues

    Verify and validate the flexibility and adaptability of your mobile applications, strategy and roadmap against various scenarios

    • Scenarios
      • Application Stores Rejecting the Application
      • Security Incidents & Risks
      • Low User Adoption, Retention & Satisfaction
      • Incompatibility with User's Device & Other Systems
      • Device & OS Patches & Updates
      • Changes in Industry Standards & Regulations

    Use the "Now, Next, Later" roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    Now

    What are you going to do now?

    Next

    What are you going to do very soon?

    Later

    What are you going to do in the future?

    This is a roadmap showing various points in the following categories: Now; Next; Later

    Adapted From: "Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples," Scrum.org, 2017

    2.3.2 Build your roadmap

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify the business outcomes your mobile application delivery and MVP is expected to deliver.
    2. Build your strategic roadmap by grouping each business outcome by how soon you need to deliver it:
      1. Now: Let's achieve this ASAP.
      2. Next: Sometime very soon, let's achieve these things.
      3. Later: Much further off in the distance, let's consider these things.
    3. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace mobile application delivery and deliver your MVP.
    4. Build your tactical roadmap by grouping each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
      1. Now: Let's do this ASAP.
      2. Next: Sometime very soon, let's do these things.
      3. Later: Much further off in the distance, let's consider these things.
    5. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • List of potential MVPs
    • Mobile roadmap
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.3.2 cont'd

    Example: Tactical Roadmap

    Milestone 1

    • Modify the business processes of the MVP to best leverage mobile technologies. Streamline the business processes by removing the steps that do not directly support value delivery.
    • Develop UI templates using the material design framework and the organization's design standards. Ensure it is supported on mobile devices through the mobile browser and satisfy accessibility design standards.
    • Verify and validate current security controls against latest security risks using the W3C as a starting point. Install the latest security patches to maintain compliance.
    • Acquire the Ionic SDK and upskill delivery teams.

    Milestone 2

    • Update the current web framework and third-party libraries with the latest version and align web infrastructure to latest W3C guidelines.
    • Verify and validate functionality and stability of APIs with third-party applications. Begin transition to REST APIs where possible.
    • Make minor changes to the existing data architecture to better support the data volume, velocity, variety, and veracity the system will process and deliver.
    • Update the master data management with latest changes. Keep changes to a minimum.
    • Develop and deliver the first iteration of the MVP with Ionic.

    Milestone 3

    • Standardize the initial mobile delivery practice.
    • Continuously monitor the system and proactively address business continuity, system stability and performance, and security risks.
    • Deliver a hands-on and facilitated training session to end users.
    • Develop intuitive user manuals that are easily accessible on SharePoint.
    • Consult end users for their views and perspectives of suggested business model and technology changes.
    • Regularly survey end users and the media to gauge industry sentiment toward the organization.

    Pitch your roadmap initiatives

    There are multiple audiences for your pitch, and each audience requires a different level of detail when addressed. Depending on the outcomes expected from each audience, a suitable approach must be chosen. The format and information presented will vary significantly from group to group.

    Audience

    Key Contents

    Outcome

    Outcome

    • Costs or benefits estimates

    Sign off on cost and benefit projections

    Executives and decision makers

    • Business value and financial benefits
    • Notable business risks and impacts
    • Business rationale and strategic roadmap

    Revisions, edits, and approval

    IT teams

    • Notable technical and IT risks
    • IT rationale and tactical roadmap
    • Proposed resourcing and skills capacity

    Clarity of vision and direction and readiness for delivery

    Business workers

    • Business rationale
    • Proposed business operations changes
    • Application roadmap

    Verification on proposed changes and feedback

    Continuously measure the benefits and value realized in your mobile applications

    Success hinges on your team's ability to deliver business value. Well-developed mobile applications instill stakeholder confidence in ongoing business value delivery and stakeholder buy-in, provided proper expectations are set and met.

    Business value defines the success criteria of an organization, and it is interpreted from four perspectives:

    • Profit Generation – The revenue generated from a business capability with mobile applications.
    • Cost Reduction – The cost reduction when performing business capabilities with mobile applications.
    • Service Enablement – The productivity and efficiency gains of internal business operations with mobile applications.
    • Customer and Market Reach – Metrics measuring the improved reach and insights of the business in existing or new markets.

    See our Build a Value Measurement Framework blueprint for more information about business value definition.

    Business Value Matrix

    This image contains a quadrant analysis with the following labels: Left - Improved Capabilities; Top - Outward; Right - Financial Benefit; Bottom - Inward. the quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Customer and Market Reach; Profit Generation; Service Enhancement; Cost Reduction

    Grow your mobile delivery practice

    We are Here
    Level 1: Mobile Delivery Foundations Level 2: Scaled Mobile Delivery Level 3: Leading-Edge Mobile Delivery

    You understand the opportunities and impacts mobile has on your business operations and its disruptive nature on your enterprise systems. Your software delivery lifecycle was optimized to incorporate the specific practices and requirements needed for mobile. A mobile platform was selected based on stakeholder needs that are weighed against current skillsets, high priority non-functional requirements, the available capacity and scalability of your stack, and alignment to your current delivery process.

    New features and mobile use cases are regularly emerging in the industry. Ensuring your mobile platform and delivery process can easily scale to incorporate constantly changing mobile features and technologies is key. This can help minimize the impact these changes will have on your mobile stack and the resulting experience.

    Achieving this state requires three competencies: mobile security, performance optimization, and integration practices.

    Many of today's mobile trends involve, in one form or another, hardware components on the mobile device (e.g., NFC receivers, GPS, cameras). You understand the scope of native features available on your end user's mobile device and the required steps and capabilities to enable and leverage them.

    Grow your mobile delivery practice (cont'd)

    Ask yourself the following questions:
    Level 1: Mobile Delivery Foundations Level 2: Scaled Mobile Delivery Level 3: Leading-Edge Mobile Delivery

    Checkpoint questions shown at the end of step 1.2 of this blueprint

    You should be at this point upon the successful delivery of your first mobile application.

    Security

    • Your mobile stack (application, data, and infrastructure) is updated to incorporate the security risks mobile apps will have on your systems and business operations.
    • Leading edge encryption, authentication management (e.g., multi-factor), and access control systems are used to bolster existing mobile security infrastructure.
    • Network traffic to and from mobile application is monitored and analyzed.

    Performance Optimization

    • Performance enhancements are made with the entire mobile stack in mind.
    • Mobile performance is monitored and assessed with both proactive (data flow) and retroactive (instrumentation) approaches.
    • Development and testing practices and technologies accommodate the performance differences between mobile and desktop applications.

    API Development

    • Existing web APIs are compatible with mobile applications, or a gateway / middleware is used to facilitate communication with backend and third-party services.
    • APIs are secured to prevent unauthorized access and misuse.
    • Web APIs are documented and standardized for reuse in multiple mobile applications.
    • Implementing APIs of native features in native and/or cross-platform and/or hybrid platforms is well understood.
    • All leading-edge mobile features are mapped to and support business requirements and objectives.
    • The new mobile use cases are well understood and account for the various scenarios/environments a user may encounter with the leading-edge mobile features.
    • The relevant non-mobile devices, readers, sensors, and other dependent systems are shortlisted and acquired to enable and support your new mobile capabilities.
    • Delivery teams are prepared to accommodate the various security, performance, and integration risks associated with implementing leading-edge mobile features. Practices and mechanisms are established to minimize the impact to business operations.
    • Metrics are used to measure the success of your leading-edge mobile features implementation by comparing its performance and acceptance against past projects.
    • Business stakeholders and development teams are up to date with the latest mobile technologies and delivery techniques.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog
    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment
    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Readiness for mobile delivery
    • Desired mobile platform approach
    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services
    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    This is a picture of Chaim Yudkowsky, Chief Information Officer for The American Israel Public Affairs Committee

    Chaim Yudkowsky
    Chief Information Officer
    The American Israel Public Affairs Committee

    Chaim Yudkowsky is currently Chief information Officer for American Israel Public Affairs Committee (AIPAC), the DC headquartered not-for-profit focused on lobbying for a strong US-Israel relationship. In that role, Chaim is responsible for all traditional IT functions including oversight of IT strategy, vendor relationships, and cybersecurity program. In addition, Chaim also has primary responsibility for all physical security technology and strategy for US offices and event technology for the many AIPAC events.

    Bibliography

    "5 Pillars of API Management". Broadcom, 2021. Web.

    Bourne, James. "Apperian research shows more firms pushing larger numbers of enterprise apps". Enterprise CIO, 17 Feb 2016. Web.

    Ceci, L. "Mobile app user retention rate worldwide 2020, by vertical". Statista, 6 Apr 2022. Web.

    Clement, J. "Share of global mobile website traffic 2015-2021". Statista, 18 Feb 2022. Web

    DeVos, Jordan. "Design Problem Statements – What They Are and How to Frame Them." Toptal, n.d. Web.

    Enge, Eric. "Mobile vs. Desktop Usage in 2020". Perficient, 23 March 2021. Web.

    Engels, Antoine. "How many Android updates does Samsung, Xiaomi or OnePlus offer?" NextPit, Mar 2022. Web.

    "Fast-tracking digital transformation through next-gen technologies". Broadridge, 2022. Web.

    Gayatri. "The Pulse of Digital Transformation 2021 – Survey Results." DronaHQ, 2021. Web.

    Gray, Dave. "Updated Empathy Map Canvas." The XPLANE Collection, 15 July 2017. Web.

    "HCL Volt MX". HCL, n.d. Web.

    "iPass Mobile Professional Report 2017". iPass, 2017. Web.

    Karlsson, Johan. "Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products." Perforce, 2019. Web.

    Karnes, KC. "Why Users Uninstall Apps: 28% of People Feel Spammed [Survey]". CleverTap, 27 July 2021. Web.

    Kemp, Simon. "Digital 2021: Global Overview Report". DataReportal, 27 Jan 2021. Web.

    Kleinberg, Sara. "Consumers are always shopping and eager for your help". Google, Aug 2018. Web.

    MaLavolta, Ivano. "Anatomy of an HTML 5 mobile web app". University of L'Aquila, 16 Apr 2012. Web.

    "Maximizing Mobile Value: To BYOD or not to BYOD?" Samsung and Oxford Economics, 2022. Web.

    "Mobile App Performance Metrics For Crash-Free Apps." AppSamurai, 27 June 2018. Web.

    "Mobile Application Development Statistics: 5 Facts". Intersog, 23 Nov 2021. Web.

    Moore, Geoffrey A. "Crossing the Chasm, 3rd Edition: Marketing and Selling Disruptive Products to Mainstream Customers." Harper Business, 3rd edition, 2014. Book.

    "OWASP Top Ten". OWASP, 2021. Web.

    "Personas". Usability.gov, n.d. Web.

    Roden, Marky. "PSC Tech Talk: UX Design – Not just making things pretty". Xomino, 18 Mar 2018. Web.

    Royce, Dr. Winston W. "Managing the Development of Large Software Systems." USC Student Computing Facility, 1970. Web.

    Rubin, Kenneth S. Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process. Pearson Education, 2012. Book.

    Sahay, Apurvanand et al. "Supporting the understanding and comparison of low-code development platforms." Universit`a degli Studi dell'Aquila, 2020. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. "Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples." Scrum.org, 2017. Web.

    Strunk, Christian. "How to define a product vision (with examples)." Christian Strunk. n.d. Web.

    Szeja, Radoslaw. "14 Biggest Challenges in Mobile App Development in 2022". Netguru, 4 Jan 2022. Web.

    "Synopsys Research Reveals Significant Security Concerns in Popular Mobile Apps Amid Pandemic". Synopsys, 25 Mar 2021. Web.

    "TOGAF 8.1.1 Online, Part IV: Resource Base, Developing Architecture Views." The Open Group, n.d. Web.

    Wangen, Emilie Nøss. "What Is a Software Platform & How Is It Different From a Product?" HubSpot, 2021. Web.

    "Mobile App Retention Rate: What's a Good Retention Rate?" Localytics, July 2021. Web.

    "Why Mobile Apps Fail: Failure to Launch". Perfecto Mobile, 26 Jan 2014. Web.

    Appendix A

    Sample Reference Frameworks

    Reference Framework: Web Platform

    Most of the operations of the applications on a web platform are executed in the mid-tier or back-end servers. End users interact with the platform through the presentation layer, developed with web languages, in the browser.

    This is an image of the Reference Framework: Web Platform

    Reference Framework: Mobile Web Application

    Many mobile web applications are composed of JavaScript (the muscle of the app), HTML5 (the backbone of the app), and CSS (the aesthetics of the app). The user will make a request to the web server which will interact with the application to provide a response. Since each device has unique attributes, consider a device detection service to help adjust content for each type of device.

    this is an image of the Reference Framework: Mobile Web Application

    Source: MaLavolta, Ivono, 2012.

    Web Platform: Anatomy of a Web Server

    Web Server Services

    • Mediation Services: Perform transformation of data/messages.
    • Boundary Services: Provide interface protocol and data/message conversion capabilities.
    • Event Distribution: Provides for the enterprise-wide adoption of content and topic-based publish/subscribe event distribution.
    • Transport Services: Facilitate data transmission across the middleware/server.
    • Service Directory: Manages multiple service identifiers and locations.

    This image shows the relationships of the various web server services listed above

    Reference Framework: Hybrid Platform

    Unlike the mobile web platform, most of an application's operations on the hybrid platform is on the device within a native container. The container leverages the device browser's runtime engine and is based on the framework of the mobile delivery solution.

    This is an image of the Reference Framework: Hybrid Platform

    Reference Framework: Native Platform

    Applications on a native platform are installed locally on the device giving it access to native device hardware and software. The programming language depends on the operating system's or device's SDK.

    This is an image of the Reference Framework: Native Platform

    Appendix B

    List of Low- and No- Code Software Delivery Solution Features

    Supplementary List of Features

    Graphical user interface

    • Drag-and-drop designer - This feature enhances the user experience by permitting to drag all the items involved in making an app including actions, responses, connections, etc.
    • Point and click approach - This is similar to the drag-and-drop feature except it involves pointing on the item and clicking on the interface rather than dragging and dropping the item.
    • Pre-built forms/reports - This is off-the-shelf and most common reusable editable forms or reports that a user can use when developing an application.
    • Pre-built dashboards - This is off-the-shelf and most common dashboards that a user can use when developing an application.
    • Forms - This feature helps in creating a better user interface and user experience when developing applications. A form includes dashboards, custom forms, surveys, checklists, etc. which could be useful to enhance the usability of the application being developed.
    • Progress tracking - This features helps collaborators to combine their work and track the development progress of the application.
    • Advanced Reporting - This features enables the user to obtain a graphical reporting of the application usage. The graphical reporting includes graphs, tables, charts, etc.
    • Built-in workflows - This feature helps to concentrate the most common reusable workflows when creating applications.
    • Configurable workflows - Besides built-in workflows, the user should be able to customize workflows according to their needs.

    Interoperability support

    • Interoperability with external services - This feature is one of the most important features to incorporate different services and platforms including that of Microsoft, Google, etc. It also includes the interoperability possibilities among different low-code platforms.
    • Connection with data sources - This features connects the application with data sources such as Microsoft Excel, Access and other relational databases such as Microsoft SQL, Azure and other non-relational databases such as MongoDB.

    Security Support

    • Application security - This feature enables the security mechanism of an application which involves confidentiality, integrity and availability of an application, if and when required.
    • Platform security - The security and roles management is a key part in developing an application so that the confidentiality, integrity and authentication (CIA) can be ensured at the platform level.

    Collaborative development support

    • Off-line collaboration - Different developers can collaborate on the specification of the same application. They work off-line locally and then they commit to a remote server their changes, which need to be properly merged.
    • On-line collaboration - Different developers collaborate concurrently on the specification of the same application. Conflicts are managed at run-time.

    Reusability support

    • Built-in workflows - This feature helps to concentrate the most common reusable workflows in creating an application.
    • Pre-built forms/reports - This is off-the-shelf and most common reusable editable forms or reports that a user might want to employ when developing an application.
    • Pre-built dashboards - This is off-the-shelf and most common dashboards that a user might want to employ when developing an application.

    Scalability

    • Scalability on number of users - This features enables the application to scale-up with respect to the number of active users that are using that application at the same time.
    • Scalability on data traffic - This features enables the application to scale-up with respect to the volume of data traffic that are allowed by that application in a particular time.
    • Scalability on data storage - This features enables the application to scale-up with respect to the data storage capacity of that application.

    Business logic specification mechanisms

    • Business rules engine - This feature helps in executing one or more business rules that help in managing data according to user's requirements.
    • Graphical workflow editor - This feature helps to specify one or more business rules in a graphical manner.
    • AI enabled business logic - This is an important feature which uses Artificial Intelligence in learning the behavior of an attributes and replicate those behaviors according to learning mechanisms.

    Application build mechanisms

    • Code generation - According to this feature, the source code of the modeled application is generated and subsequently deployed before its execution.
    • Models at run-time - The model of the specified application is interpreted and used at run-time during the execution of the modeled application without performing any code generation phase.

    Deployment support

    • Deployment on cloud - This features enables an application to be deployed online in a cloud infrastructure when the application is ready to deployed and used.
    • Deployment on local infrastructures - This features enables an application to be deployed locally on the user organization's infrastructure when the application is ready to be deployed and used.

    Kinds of supported applications

    • Event monitoring - This kind of applications involves the process of collecting data, analyzing the event that can be caused by the data, and signaling any events occurring on the data to the user.
    • Process automation - This kind of applications focuses on automating complex processes, such as workflows, which can take place with minimal human intervention.
    • Approval process control - This kind of applications consists of processes of creating and managing work approvals depending on the authorization of the user. For example, payment tasks should be managed by the approval of authorized personnel only.
    • Escalation management - This kind of applications are in the domain of customer service and focuses on the management of user viewpoints that filter out aspects that are not under the user competences.
    • Inventory management - This kind of applications is for monitoring the inflow and outflow of goods and manages the right amount of goods to be stored.
    • Quality management - This kind of applications is for managing the quality of software projects, e.g., by focusing on planning, assurance, control and improvements of quality factors.
    • Workflow management - This kind of applications is defined as sequences of tasks to be performed and monitored during their execution, e.g., to check the performance and correctness of the overall workflow.

    Source: Sahay, Apurvanand et al., 2020

    Build an Application Integration Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}198|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Integration
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-integration
    • Even though organizations are now planning for Application Integration (AI) in their projects, very few have developed a holistic approach to their integration problems resulting in each project deploying different tactical solutions.
    • Point-to-point and ad hoc integration solutions won’t cut it anymore: the cloud, big data, mobile, social, and new regulations require more sophisticated integration tooling.
    • Loosely defined AI strategies result in point solutions, overlaps in technology capabilities, and increased maintenance costs; the correlation between business drivers and technical solutions is lost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Involving the business in strategy development will keep them engaged and align business drivers with technical initiatives.
    • An architectural approach to AI strategy is critical to making appropriate technology decisions and promoting consistency across AI solutions through the use of common patterns.
    • Get control of your AI environment with an appropriate architecture, including policies and procedures, before end users start adding bring-your-own-integration (BYOI) capabilities to the office.

    Impact and Result

    • Engage in a formal AI strategy and involve the business when aligning business goals with AI value; each double the AI success rate.
    • Benefits from a formal AI strategy largely depend on how gaps will be filled.
    • Create an Integration Center of Competency for maintaining architectural standards and guidelines.
    • AI strategies are continuously updated as new business drivers emerge from changing business environments and/or essential technologies.

    Build an Application Integration Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the Case for AI Strategy

    Obtain organizational buy-in and build a standardized and formal AI blueprint.

    • Storyboard: Build an Application Integration Strategy

    2. Assess the organization's readiness for AI

    Assess your people, process, and technology for AI readiness and realize areas for improvement.

    • Application Integration Readiness Assessment Tool

    3. Develop a Vision

    Fill the required AI-related roles to meet business requirements

    • Application Integration Architect
    • Application Integration Specialist

    4. Perform a Gap Analysis

    Assess the appropriateness of AI in your organization and identify gaps in people, processes, and technology as it relates to AI.

    • Application Integration Appropriateness Assessment Tool

    5. Build an AI Roadmap

    Compile the important information and artifacts to include in the AI blueprint.

    • Application Integration Strategy Template

    6. Build the Integration Blueprint

    Keep a record of services and interfaces to reduce waste.

    • Integration Service Catalog Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an Application Integration Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Make the Case for AI Strategy

    The Purpose

    Uncover current and future AI business drivers, and assess current capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Perform a current state assessment and create a future vision.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify Current and Future Business Drivers

    1.2 AI Readiness Assessment

    1.3 Integration Service Catalog Template

    Outputs

    High-level groupings of AI strategy business drivers.

    Determine the organization’s readiness for AI, and identify areas for improvement.

    Create a record of services and interfaces to reduce waste.

    2 Know Current Environment

    The Purpose

    Identify building blocks, common patterns, and decompose them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop an AI Architecture.

    Activities

    2.1 Integration Principles

    2.2 High-level Patterns

    2.3 Pattern decomposition and recomposition

    Outputs

    Set general AI architecture principles.

    Categorize future and existing interactions by pattern to establish your integration framework.

    Identification of common functional components across patterns.

    3 Perform a Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Analyze the gaps between the current and future environment in people, process, and technology.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Uncover gaps between current and future capabilities and determine if your ideal environment is feasible.

    Activities

    3.1 Gap Analysis

    Outputs

    Identify gaps between the current environment and future AI vision.

    4 Build a Roadmap for Application Integration

    The Purpose

    Define strategic initiatives, know your resource constraints, and use a timeline for planning AI.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a plan of strategic initiatives required to close gaps.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and prioritize strategic initiatives

    4.2 Distribute initiatives on a timeline

    Outputs

    Use strategic initiatives to build the AI strategy roadmap.

    Establish when initiatives are going to take place.

    2021 CIO Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}83|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • It is a new year, but the challenges of 2020 remain: COVID-19 infection rates continue to climb, governments continue to enforce lockdown measures, we continue to find ourselves in the worst economic crisis since the Great Depression, and civil unrest grows in many democratic societies.
    • At the start of 2020, no business leader predicted the disruption that was to come. This left IT in a reactive but critical role as the health crisis hit. It was core to delivering the organization’s products and services, as it drove the radical shift to work-from-home.
    • For the year ahead, IT will continue to serve a critical function in uncertain times. However, unlike last year, CIOs can better prepare for 2021. That said, in the face of the uncertainty and volatility of the year ahead, what they need to prepare for is still largely undefined.
    • But despite the lack of confidence on knowing specifically what is to come, most business leaders will admit they need to get ready for it. This year’s priority report will help.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • “Resilience” is the theme for this year’s CIO Priorities Report. In this context, resilience is about building up the capacity and the capabilities to effectively respond to emergent and unforeseen needs.
    • Early in 2021 is a good time to develop resilience in several different areas. As we explore in this year’s Report, CIOs can best facilitate enterprise resilience through strategic financial planning, proactive risk management, effective organizational change management and capacity planning, as well as through remaining tuned into emergent technologies to capitalize on innovations to help weather the uncertainty of the year ahead.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s 2021 CIO Priorities Report to prepare for the uncertainty of the year ahead. Across our five priorities we provide five avenues through which CIOs can demonstrate resilient planning, enabling the organization as a whole to better confront what’s coming in 2021.
    • Each of our priorities is backed up by a “call to action” that will help CIOs start to immediately implement the right drivers of resilience for their organization.
    • By building up resilience across our five key areas, CIOs will not only be able to better prepare for the year to come, but also strengthen business relations and staff morale in difficult times.

    2021 CIO Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Read the 2021 CIO Priorities Report

    Use Info-Tech’s 2021 CIO Priorities Report to prepare for the uncertainty of the year ahead. Across our five priorities we provide five avenues through which CIOs can demonstrate resilient planning, enabling the organization as a whole to better confront what’s coming in 2021.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an appropriate budget reserve

    Identifying and planning sources of financial contingency will help ensure CIOs can meet unforeseen and emergent operational and business needs throughout the year.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 1 – Create an Appropriate Budget Reserve

    2. Refocus IT risk planning

    The start of 2021 is a time to refocus and redouble IT risk management and business continuity planning to bring it up to the standards of our “new normal.” Indeed, if last year taught us anything, it’s that no “black swan” should be off the table in terms of scenarios or possibilities for business disruption.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 2 – Refocus IT Risk Planning

    3. Strengthen organizational change management capabilities

    At its heart, resilience is having the capacity to deal with unexpected change. Organizational change management can help build up this capacity, providing the ability to strategically plot known changes while leaving some capacity to absorb the unknowns as they present themselves.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 3 – Strengthen Organizational Change Management Capabilities

    4. Establish capacity awareness

    Capacity awareness facilitates resilience by providing capital in the form of resource data. With this data, CIOs can make better decisions on what can be approved and when it can be scheduled for.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 4 – Establish Capacity Awareness

    5. Keep emerging technologies in view

    Having an up-to-date view of emerging technologies will enable the resilient CIO to capitalize on and deploy leading-edge innovations as the business requires.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 5 – Keep Emerging Technologies in View
    [infographic]

    Tymans Group Consulting

    IT resilience, carefree entrepreneurship.

    Discover and implement all the ingredients that make your IT perform fast and rock solid.

    Yes, I want stable and performant IT Operations

    We are multidisciplinary infrastructure and IT Operations experts.
    We bring passion, focus, and results to our work and your company.

    TY innovates resilience embedding in your organization

    Let's have a chat

    • TY as your advisor

      This gives you our expertise on tap. Do you have an issue? Call us. You want to have a sparring partner to solve a problem? Call us. Do you need a sounding board? Call us.

      TY provides advisory services as well as traditional consulting. We also execute study and revision services for your policies, standards, procedures, and guidelines to ensure compliance with DORA, NIS2 and corporate requirements of both your own company and that of your clients. And we also check against our internal best ways of working.

      Book a conversation

    • Focused Consulting and Implementing

      This is where you have our undivided attention, and we work with you one on one until resolution. Note that there is a waiting period for this service at this time.

      If you are interested, please first book a call so that we can determine if we are a good fit together.

      Book a conversation

    What our relations tell us

    • Citigroup Manager

      As a technical consultant, Gert is an All-Star performer...  He has got many wins under his belt... His willingness to work hard, knowledge of regional systems (especially Tokyo) and Microsoft Office is well respected within the Group 

    • Sandra

      Tx for all the efforts done! Great Job! And good luck for the ones amongst you that still need to work tomorrow Grtz Sandra VB
    • Patrick A.

      Hi Gert, I'm busy documenting .... Thanks for your real friendly and careful, yet effective support :-) Patrick A.
    • Lucie VH

      During my vacation, Gert took over the management of a number of ongoing problems. Even before I actually left for my trip, he took action and proposed a number of improvements. Gert coordinated between the different stakeholders and PTA's and resolved a number of acute issues. And he did this in a very pleasant, yet effective way.
    • Dawn

      No worries. It only freaked me out for a few minutes, then I saw that the system had blocked them from doing any real damage. Thanks for the cleanup and extra measures, though! As always, you rock!
    • After a successful DRP

      Thanks for all the efforts done ans special Tx Gert for Coordinating this again!
    • A CIO

      Yet again Gert, Thanks for handling this in such a top way!
    • A Sales Manager

      Awesome Gert, I will let the team know we can close this issue!
    • Investment bank manager

      Flexibility, Adaptability, problem Solving are Gert's strong points, Exceptionally beneficial in "crisis." I can attest that Gert will always see a problem through. if he needs to hand it off, it will aways have good handoff notes. His business knowledge is good and will part of the next project.

    • Wall Street Performance Review

      As with the classes for SFC, Gert organised formal classes for all of the Research IT teams.... I would class this job as well done, given everything that was going on with Rsearch IT. 

    • Stuart B on Gert Taeymans

      Excellent technical resource. Quick help on issues and provide explanations to regional teams. Often covers for us in the evenings or when things get particularly busy.

    • Asia support to roll out global system

      Gert time in Japan was a great success. He really helped the IT group through a really difficult tume during the roll out of {the global research publishing system} and had to cover all the bases that had not been properly coverd by the previous person in Japan. Gert's visit also coincided with Stuart's joining into the Asia IT Research group. Gert was very flexible  in the hours that he worked and the lenght of time he was out in Tokyo (in the end more than 4 weeks.)

      The feedback from both the users and the IT group was VERY positive on Gertt's contribution. He was more than capabable to put across technical points to the IT team, in their language.

    • IT Director

      Gert is a knowledgeable individual who takes on additional responsibility... rapidly addressng end-user issues and developing custom solutions when needed.

    Benefits of working with Tymans Group

    • We focus on actual deliverables

      TY delivers on the IT resilience what and how. Get actionable IT, management, governance, and productivity research, insights, blueprints with templates, easy-to-use tools, and clear instructions to help you execute effectively and become IT resilient.

    • Get insights from top IT professionals

      Our TY network base constantly informs us about our IT resilience research and validates it through client experiences. TY adds to that by applying this research to real-world situations in Belgium, the Netherlands, Germany, Europe and the US.

    • Data-driven insights

      It is tempting to use your gut instinct. Don't. Everything TY does, is data-driven. From our research to our interactions with you, we use an analytical approach to help you move forward with your key IT resilience projects.

    Frequently asked questions

    • How does Tymans Group IT Operations advisory work?

      TY believes strongly in leveraging technology and personal delivery. That is why TY uses one on one calling sessions using Teams and Zoom. When needed I do on site delivery.

      Every advisory option has a set number of interactive contact points in addition to email and chat options. Every contact request is answered by me personally. 

      Through the use of technology, I ensure that instead of you having to drive to your coach, the coach “comes” to you!

    • What are Tymans Group advisory service timings?

      TY is available on European time from 09:00 until 17:00 and US EST 09:00-17:00 (depending on already booked appointments). 

    • How much to Tymans Group programs cost?

      While this is a difficult question to answer, let's give it a shot.

      Ideally I work value-based. But this is more for well-defined projects where the ROI is quantifiable rather than qualifiable.

      Often advisory services are a discovery and we obtain results together. You may even only need an experienced sounding board. This type of pricing starts from €4,500.

    • Does Tymans Group have a "pick your brain" option?

      By popular demand, yes, I added this. It is not the cheapest way to use me, but it may be the most effective for you.

    • How are Tymans Group advisory services delivered?

      TY believes strongly in leveraging technology and personal delivery. That is why TY uses one on one calling sessions using Teams and Zoom. When needed I do on site delivery.

      This way I ensure that instead of you having to drive to your coach, the coach “comes” to you!

      You are allowed to record the sessions and use them internally in your organization, including as part of your internal training. You are not allowed to resell these without a resale agreement.

    • Tymans Group is delivered online via calls? Isn't on-site better?

      Interestingly, in the majority of advisory services the answer is no.

      Purely on-site automatically limits the time we can spend together. Thus, typically, the interactions are of a shorter duration. Even when this is done over a longer timeframe, like 5 to 10 days, this is really too short for effective advising, coaching and mentoring. 

      We stay away from accelerated programs, where I can send a lot of information, and most of it will not stick.

      Terry Sejnowski  a neuroscientist, actually states that cramming does not help you remember. It gets you, maybe, through the next exam, but the information is not retained. The way to integrate and remember information is to spread out the study and repeat. This is called the spacing effect.

      This is why I employ the online delivery method. When you record our sessions, you can come back and again repeat it, note down your questions and fire them off to me. I respond and you go back into the talk. Then you apply, possibly fail, and come back again until it succeeds, and then you make it your own.

      That is why time-pressured, on-site delivery does not work. Our method makes you effective because you internalized the material and feedback. This can then be rounded-off by on-site finalization.

      10-15 years ago, this was not possible, as the web-based tools were simply not fast enough. Today, unless you are taking classes like carpentry or other topics that require on-site delivery, online delivery is the way to go.

    • Can I pay by wire transfer?

      We actually prefer wire transfer. It cuts down on the financial fees and it is the norm in the European Union. Our US customer can also use this feature and pay into our US bank.

    • Where is Tymans Group located?

      Tymans Group has two locations:

      In Europe, Belgium and in Greenville, DE, United States, 

      The HQ is in Belgium.

    • Does this work for less than 25 employees?

      Resilience is not size-dependent. That said, if you are supplying critical services to financial services firms, you may not have a choice. In that case, be prepared to up your game. Call TY in this case. We can help you fulfill third-party requirements, such as the DORA regulation.

      In other cases, if you plan to grow your company beyond 25 employees, then yes. Start with the basics, though. Make sure you have a good understanding of your current challenges. Schedule a chat with me to determine the right baseline.

      If you are just starting out and want to ensure that your company's processes are correct right out of the gate, it's better to give me a call. We can start you off in the right direction without spending too much.

      Our guides are only available to existing advisory clients. Let's chat informally if we are a fit for you.

    • I'm a small business owner, can I do all this by myself?

      Our guides are only available to existing advisory clients.

      But also see the above question about company size and target clients. If you have fewer than 25 employees and you are not supplying critical services to financial institutions, then maybe some of our guides are not for you. We can still help you organize your resilience, but it may be more cost-effective to use only our TY Advisory services.

      Once you grow beyond 25 employees, you will benefit from our processes. Just implement what you need. How do you know what you require? You probably already have an inkling of what is lacking in your organization. If you are unsure, please get in touch with us.

      In short, the answer is yes, and TY can help you. Once you know what you are looking for, that guide allows you to handle it yourself. If you require help selecting the right guide, please get in touch with us.

    • Do you provide refunds?

      Before buying the DIY guides, available only to existing advisory clients,, please refer to the free Executive Summary when available. If there is no Executive summary available, please contact me with any questions you have. 

      As these are downloadable products, I cannot provide any refunds, but I will help you with any exchange where you have a good reason. 

    • I bought the wrong item

      If you bought the wrong item, please contact me and we'll be happy to provide an alternative item.

    • I want more assistance

      Yes, more assistance is available.  Tymans Group can provide you with any assistance you require within the parameters of your contract.

      Per-guide assistance ranges from a single phone or video consultation to guided implementation or a workshop. Alternatively we can go to do-it-for-you implementation or even full-time consulting.

      Note that our guides are only available to existing advisory clients.

      Please contact me for a talk.

    I want more information to become more resilient.

    Continue reading

    Advisory Call Outline: Software Selection Engagement

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}609|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Selection takes forever. Traditional software selection drags on for years, sometimes in perpetuity.
    • IT is viewed as a bottleneck and the business has taken control of software selection.
    • “Gut feel” decisions rule the day. Intuition, not hard data, guides selection, leading to poor outcomes.
    • Negotiations are a losing battle. Money is left on the table by inexperienced negotiators.
    • Overall: Poor selection processes lead to wasted time, wasted effort, and applications that continually disappoint.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Adopt a formal methodology to accelerate and improve software selection results.
    • Improve business satisfaction by including the right stakeholders and delivering new applications on a truly timely basis.
    • Kill the “sacred cow” requirements that only exist because “it’s how we’ve always done it.”
    • Forget about “RFP” overload and hone in on the features that matter to your organization.
    • Skip the guesswork and validate decisions with real data.
    • Take control of vendor “dog and pony shows” with single-day, high-value, low-effort, rapid-fire investigative interviews.
    • Master vendor negotiations and never leave money on the table.

    Impact and Result

    • Improving software selection is a critical project that will deliver huge value.
    • Hit a home run with your business stakeholders: use a data-driven approach to select the right application vendor for their needs – fast.
    • Shatter stakeholder expectations with truly rapid application selections.
    • Boost collaboration and crush the broken telephone with concise and effective stakeholder meetings.
    • Lock in hard savings and do not pay list price by using data-driven tactics.

    Advisory Call Outline: Software Selection Engagement Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Advisory Call Outline

    Info-Tech's expert analyst guidance will help you save money, align stakeholders, and speed up the application selection process.

    • Advisory Call Outline: Software Selection Engagement Deck

    2. Workshop Overview

    Info-Tech's workshop will help you implement a repeatable, data-driven approach that accelerates software selection efforts.

    • Rapid Software Selection Workshop Overview
    [infographic]

    Initiate Your Service Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}398|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations continue attempting to implement service management, often based on ITIL, with limited success and without visible value.
    • More than half of service management implementations have failed beyond simply implementing the service desk and the incident, change, and request management processes.
    • Organizational structure, goals, and cultural factors are not considered during service management implementation and improvement.
    • The business lacks engagement and understanding of service management.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service management is an organizational approach. Focus on producing successful and valuable services and service outcomes for the customers.
    • All areas of the organization are accountable for governing and executing service management. Ensure that you create a service management strategy that improves business outcomes and provides the value and quality expected.

    Impact and Result

    • Identified structure for how your service management model should be run and governed.
    • Identified forces that impact your ability to oversee and drive service management success.
    • Mitigation approach to restraining forces.

    Initiate Your Service Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why service management implementations often fail and why you should establish governance for service management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the level of oversight you need

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective service management program with proper oversight.

    • Service Management Program Initiation Plan
    [infographic]

    The First 100 Days As CIO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}540|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $54,525 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: High Impact Leadership
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • You’ve been promoted from within to the role of CIO.
    • You’ve been hired externally to take on the role of CIO.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Foundational understanding must be achieved before you start. Hit the ground running before day one by using company documents and initial discussions to pin down the company’s type and mode.
    • Listen before you act (usually). In most situations, executives benefit from listening to peers and staff before taking action.
    • Identify quick wins early and often. Fix problems as soon as you recognize them to set the tone for your tenure.

    Impact and Result

    • Collaborate to collect the details needed to identify the right mode for your organization and determine how it will influence your plan.
    • Use Info-Tech’s diagnostic tools to align your vision with that of business executives and form a baseline for future reference.

    The First 100 Days As CIO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why the first 100 days of being a new executive is a crucial time that requires the right balance of listening with taking action. See how seven calls with an executive advisor will guide you through this period.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Check in with your executive advisor over seven calls

    Organize your first 100 days as CIO into activities completed within two-week periods, aided by the guidance of an executive advisor.

    • The First 100 Days As CIO – Storyboard
    • Organizational Catalog
    • Cultural Archetype Calculator
    • IT Capability Assessment

    2. Communicate your plan to your manager

    Communicate your strategy with a presentation deck that you will complete in collaboration with Info-Tech advisors.

    • The First 100 Days As CIO – Presentation Deck

    3. View an example of the final presentation

    See an example of a completed presentation deck, from the new CIO of Gotham City.

    • The First 100 Days As CIO – Presentation Deck Example

    4. Listen to our podcast

    Check out The Business Leadership podcast in Info-Tech's special series, The First 100 Days.

    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Alan Fong, CTO, DealerFX
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Denis Gaudreault, country manager for Intel’s Canada and Latin America region
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Dave Penny & Andrew Wertkin, BlueCat
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Wayne Berger, CEO IWG Plc Canada and Latin America
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Eric Wright, CEO, LexisNexis Canada
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Erin Bury, CEO, Willful
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    The First 100 Days As CIO

    Partner with Info-Tech for success in this crucial period of transition.

    Analyst Perspective

    The first 100 days refers to the 10 days before you start and the first three months on the job.

    “The original concept of ‘the first 100 days’ was popularized by Franklin Delano Roosevelt, who passed a battery of new legislation after taking office as US president during the Great Depression. Now commonly extended to the business world, the first 100 days of any executive role is a critically important period for both the executive and the organization.

    But not every new leader should follow FDR’s example of an action-first approach. Instead, finding the right balance of listening and taking action is the key to success during this transitional period. The type of the organization and the mode that it’s in serves as the fulcrum that determines where the point of perfect balance lies. An executive facing a turnaround situation will want to focus on more action more quickly. One facing a sustaining success situation or a realignment situation will want to spend more time listening before taking action.” (Brian Jackson, Research Director, CIO, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • You’ve been promoted from within to the role of CIO.
    • You’ve been hired externally to take on the role of CIO.

    Complication

    Studies show that two years after a new executive transition, as many as half are regarded as failures or disappointments (McKinsey). First impressions are hard to overcome, and a CIO’s first 100 days are heavily weighted in terms of how others will assess their overall success. The best way to approach this period is determined by both the size and the mode of an organization.

    Resolution

    • Work with Info-Tech to prepare a 100-day plan that will position you for success.
    • Collaborate to collect the details needed to identify the right mode for your organization and determine how it will influence your plan.
    • Use Info-Tech’s diagnostic tools to align your vision with that of business executives and form a baseline for future reference.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Foundational understanding must be achieved before you start.
      Hit the ground running before day one by using company documents and initial discussions to pin down the company’s type and mode.
    2. Listen before you act (usually).
      In most situations, executives benefit from listening to peers and staff before taking action.
    3. Identify quick wins early and often.
      Fix problems as soon as you recognize them to set the tone for your tenure.

    The First 100 Days: Roadmap

    A roadmap timeline of 'The 100-Day Plan' for your first 100 days as CIO and related Info-Tech Diagnostics. Step A: 'Foundational Preparation' begins 10 days prior to your first day. Step B: 'Management's Expectations' is Days 0 to 30, with the diagnostic 'CIO-CEO Alignment'. Step C: 'Assessing the IT Team' is Days 10 to 75, with the diagnostics 'IT M&G Diagnostic' at Day 30 and 'IT Staffing Assessment' at Day 60. Step D: 'Assess the Key Stakeholders' is Days 40 to 85 with the diagnostic 'CIO Business Vision Survey'. Step E: 'Deliver First-Year Plan' is Days 80 to 100.

    Concierge service overview

    Organize a call with your executive advisor every two weeks during your first 100 days. Info-Tech recommends completing our diagnostics during this period. If you’re not able to do so, instead complete the alternative activities marked with (a).

    Call 1 Call 2 Call 3 Call 4 Call 5 Call 6 Call 7
    Activities
    Before you start: Day -10 to Day 1
    • 1.1 Interview your predecessor.
    • 1.2 Learn the corporate structure.
    • 1.3 Determine STARS mode.
    • 1.4 Create a one-page intro sheet.
    • 1.5 Update your boss.
    Day 0 to 15
    • 2.1 Introduce yourself to your team.
    • 2.2 Document your sphere of influence.
    • 2.3 Complete a competitor array.
    • 2.4 Complete the CEO-CIO Alignment Program.
    • 2.4(a) Agree on what success looks like with the boss.
    • 2.5 Inform team of IT M&G Framework.
    Day 16 to 30
    • 3.1 Determine the team’s cultural archetype.
    • 3.2 Create a cultural adjustment plan.
    • 3.3 Initiate IT M&G Diagnostic.
    • 3.4 Conduct a high-level analysis of current IT capabilities.
    • 3.4 Update your boss.
    Day 31 to 45
    • 4.1 Inform stakeholders about CIO Business Vision survey.
    • 4.2 Get feedback on initial assessments from your team.
    • 4.3 Initiate CIO Business Vision survey.
    • 4.3(a) Meet stakeholders and catalog details.
    Day 46 to 60
    • 5.1 Inform the team that you plan to conduct an IT staffing assessment.
    • 5.2 Initiate the IT Staffing Assessment.
    • 5.3 Quick wins: Make recommend-ations based on CIO Business Vision Diagnostic/IT M&G Framework.
    • 5.4 Update your boss.
    Day 61 to 75
    • 6.1 Run a start, stop, continue exercise with IT staff.
    • 6.2 Make a categorized vendor list.
    • 6.3 Determine the alignment of IT commitments with business objectives.
    Day 76 to 90
    • 7.1 Finalize your vision – mission – values statement.
    • 7.2 Quick Wins: Make recommend-ations based on IT Staffing Assessment.
    • 7.3 Create and communicate a post-100-day plan.
    • 7.4 Update your boss.
    Deliverables Presentation Deck Section A: Foundational Preparation Presentation Deck slides 9, 11-13, 19-20, 29 Presentation Deck slides 16, 17, 21 Presentation Deck slides 30, 34 Presentation Deck slides 24, 25, 2 Presentation Deck slides 27, 42

    Call 1

    Before you start: Day -10 to Day 1

    Interview your predecessor

    Interviewing your predecessor can help identify the organization’s mode and type.

    Before reaching out to your predecessor, get a sense of whether they were viewed as successful or not. Ask your manager. If the predecessor remains within the organization in a different role, understand your relationship with them and how you'll be working together.

    During the interview, make notes about follow-up questions you'll ask others at the organization.

    Ask these open-ended questions in the interview:

    • Tell me about the team.
    • Tell me about your challenges.
    • Tell me about a major project your team worked on. How did it go?
    • Who/what has been helpful during your tenure?
    • Who/what created barriers for you?
    • What do your engagement surveys reveal?
    • Tell me about your performance management programs and issues.
    • What mistakes would you avoid if you could lead again?
    • Why are you leaving?
    • Could I reach out to you again in the future?

    Learn the corporate structure

    Identify the organization’s corporate structure type based on your initial conversations with company leadership. The type of structure will dictate how much control you'll have as a functional head and help you understand which stakeholders you'll need to collaborate with.

    To Do:

    • Review the organization’s structure list and identify whether the structure is functional, prioritized, or a matrix. If it's a matrix organization, determine if it's a strong matrix (project manager holds more authority), weak matrix (functional manager holds more authority), or balanced matrix (managers hold equal authority).

    Functional

    • Most common structure.
    • Traditional departments such as sales, marketing, finance, etc.
    • Functional managers hold most authority.

    Projectized

    • Most programs are implemented through projects with focused outcomes.
    • Teams are cross-functional.
    • Project managers hold the most authority.

    Matrix

    • Combination of projectized and functional.
    • Organization is a dynamic environment.
    • Authority of functional manager flows down through division, while authority of project manager flows sideways through teams.

    This organization is a ___________________ type.

    (Source: Simplilearn)

    Presentation Deck, slide 6

    Determine the mode of the organization: STARS

    Based on your interview process and discussions with company leadership, and using Michael Watkins’ STARS assessment, determine which mode your organization is in: startup, turnaround, accelerated growth, realignment, or sustaining success.

    Knowing the mode of your organization will determine how you approach your 100-day plan. Depending on the mode, you'll rebalance your activities around the three categories of assess, listen, and deliver.

    To Do:

    • Review the STARS table on the right.

    Based on your situation, prioritize activities in this way:

    • Startup: assess, listen, deliver
    • Turnaround: deliver, listen, assess
    • Accelerated Growth: assess, listen, deliver
    • Realignment: listen, assess, deliver
    • Sustaining success: listen, assess, deliver

    This organization is a ___________________ type.

    (Source: Watkins, 2013.)

    Presentation Deck, slide 6

    Determine the mode of the organization: STARS

    STARS Startup Turnaround Accelerated Growth Realignment Sustaining Success
    Definition Assembling capabilities to start a project. Project is widely seen as being in serious trouble. Managing a rapidly expanding business. A previously successful organization is now facing problems. A vital organization is going to the next level.
    Challenges Must build strategy, structures, and systems from scratch. Must recruit and make do with limited resources. Stakeholders are demoralized; slash and burn required. Requires structure and systems to scale; hiring and onboarding. Employees need to be convinced change is needed; restructure at the top required. Risk of living in shadow of a successful former leader.
    Advantages No rigid preconceptions. High-energy environment and easy to pivot. A little change goes a long way when people recognize the need. Motivated employee base willing to stretch. Organization has clear strengths; people desire success. Likely a strong team; foundation for success likely in place.

    Satya Nadella's listen, lead, and launch approach

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Software
    Source Gregg Keizer, Computerworld, 2014

    When Satya Nadella was promoted to the CEO role at Microsoft in 2014, he received a Glassdoor approval rating of 85% and was given an "A" grade by industry analysts after his first 100 days. What did he do right?

    • Created a sense of urgency by shaking up the senior leadership team.
    • Already understood the culture as an insider.
    • Listened a lot and did many one-on-one meetings.
    • Established a vision communicated with a mantra that Microsoft would be "mobile-first, cloud-first."
    • Met his words with actions. He launched Office for iPad and made many announcements for cloud platform Azure.
    Photo of Satya Nadella, CEO, Microsoft Corp.
    Satya Nadella, CEO, Microsoft Corp. (Image source: Microsoft)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Alan Fong

    Create a one-page introduction sheet to use in communications

    As a new CIO, you'll have to introduce yourself to many people in the organization. To save time on communicating who you are as a person outside of the office, create a brief one-pager that includes a photo of you, where you were born and raised, and what your hobbies are. This helps make a connection more quickly so your conversations can focus on the business at hand rather than personal topics.

    For your presentation deck, remove the personal details and just keep it professional. The personal aspects can be used as a one-pager for other communications. (Source: Personal interview with Denis Gaudreault, Country Lead, Intel.)

    Presentation Deck, slide 5

    Call 2

    Day 1 to Day 15

    Introduce yourself to your team

    Prepare a 20-second pitch about yourself that goes beyond your name and title. Touch on your experience that's relevant to your new role or the industry you're in. Be straightforward about your own perceived strengths and weaknesses so that people know what to expect from you. Focus on the value you believe you'll offer the group and use humor and humility where you're comfortable. For example:

    “Hi everyone, my name is John Miller. I have 15 years of experience marketing conferences like this one to vendors, colleges, and HR departments. What I’m good at, and the reason I'm here, is getting the right people, businesses, and great ideas in a room together. I'm not good on details; that's why I work with Tim. I promise that I'll get people excited about the conference, and the gifts and talents of everyone else in this room will take over from there. I'm looking forward to working with all of you.”

    Have a structured set of questions ready that you can ask everyone.

    For example:
    • How well is the company performing based on expectations?
    • What must the company do to sustain its financial performance and market competitiveness?
    • How do you foresee the CIO contributing to the team?
    • How have past CIOs performed from the perspective of the team?
    • What would successful performance of this role look like to you? To your peers?
    • What challenges and obstacles to success am I likely to encounter? What were the common challenges of my predecessor?
    • How do you view the culture here and how do successful projects tend to get approved?
    • What are your greatest challenges? How could I help you?

    Get to know your sphere of influence: prepare to connect with a variety of people before you get down to work

    Your ability to learn from others is critical at every stage in your first 100 days. Keep your sphere of influence in the loop as you progress through this period.

    A diagram of circles within circles representing your spheres of influence. The smallest circle is 'IT Leaders' and is noted as your 'Immediate circle'. The next largest circle is 'IT Team', then 'Peers - Business Leads', then 'Internal Clients' which is noted as you 'Extended circle'. The largest circle is 'External clients'.

    Write down the names, or at least the key people, in each segment of this diagram. This will serve as a quick reference when you're planning communications with others and will help you remember everyone as you're meeting lots of new people in your early days on the job.

    • Everyone knows their networks are important.
    • However, busy schedules can cause leaders to overlook their many audiences.
    • Plan to meet and learn from all people in your sphere to gain a full spectrum of insights.

    Presentation Deck, slide 29

    Identify how your competitors are leveraging technology for competitive advantage

    Competitor identification and analysis are critical steps for any new leader to assess the relative strengths and weaknesses of their organization and develop a sense of strategic opportunity and environmental awareness.

    Today’s CIO is accountable for driving innovation through technology. A competitive analysis will provide the foundation for understanding the current industry structure, rivalry within it, and possible competitive advantages for the organization.

    Surveying your competitive landscape prior to the first day will allow you to come to the table prepared with insights on how to support the organization and ensure that you are not vulnerable to any competitive blind spots that may exist in the evaluations conducted by the organization already.

    You will not be able to gain a nuanced understanding of the internal strengths and weaknesses until you are in the role, so focus on the external opportunities and how competitors are using technology to their advantage.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For a more in-depth approach to identifying and understanding relevant industry trends and turning them into insights, leverage the following Info-Tech blueprints:

    Presentation Deck, slide 9

    Assess the external competitive environment

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: External research

    OUTPUT: Competitor array

    1. Conduct a broad analysis of the industry as a whole. Seek to answer the following questions:
      1. Are there market developments or new markets?
      2. Are there industry or lifestyle trends, e.g. move to mobile?
      3. Are there geographic changes in the market?
      4. Are there demographic changes that are shaping decision making?
      5. Are there changes in market demand?
    2. Create a competitor array by identifying and listing key competitors. Try to be as broad as possible here and consider not only entrenched close competitors but also distant/future competitors that may disrupt the industry.
    3. Identify the strengths, weaknesses, and key brand differentiators that each competitor brings to the table. For each strength and differentiator, brainstorm ways that IT-based innovation enables each. These will provide a toolkit for deeper conversations with your peers and your business stakeholders as you move further into your first 100 days.
    Competitor Strengths Weaknesses Key Differentiators IT Enablers
    Competitor 1
    Competitor 2
    Competitor 3

    Complete the CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Associated Activity icon Run the diagnostic program or use the alternative activities to complete your presentation

    INPUT: CEO-CEO Alignment Program (recommended)

    OUTPUT: Desired and target state of IT maturity, Innovation goals, Top priorities

    Materials: Presentation Deck, slides 11-13

    Participants: CEO, CIO

    Introduce the concept of the CEO-CIO Alignment Program using slide 10 of your presentation deck and the brief email text below.

    Talk to your advisory contact at Info-Tech about launching the program. More information is available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Once the report is complete, import the results into your presentation:

    • Slide 11, the CEO’s current and desired states
    • Slide 12, IT innovation goals
    • Slide 13, top projects and top departments from the CEO and the CIO

    Include any immediate recommendations you have.

    Hello CEO NAME,

    I’m excited to get started in my role as CIO, and to hit the ground running, I’d like to make sure that the IT department is aligned with the business leadership. We will accomplish this using Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO-CIO Alignment Program. It’s a simple survey of 20 questions to be completed by the CEO and the CIO.

    This survey will help me understand your perception and vision as I get my footing as CIO. I’ll be able to identify and build core IT processes that will automate IT-business alignment going forward and create an effective IT strategy that helps eliminate impediments to business growth.

    Research shows that IT departments that are effectively aligned to business goals achieve more success, and I’m determined to make our IT department as successful as possible. I look forward to further detailing the benefits of this program to you and answering any questions you may have the next time we speak.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    New KPIs for CEO-CIO Alignment — Recommended

    Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program is set up to build IT-business alignment in any organization. It helps the CIO understand CEO perspectives and priorities. The exercise leads to useful IT performance indicators, clarifies IT’s mandate and which new technologies it should invest in, and maps business goals to IT priorities.

    Benefits

    Master the Basics
    Cut through the jargon.
    Take a comprehensive look at the CEO perspective.
    Target Alignment
    Identify how IT can support top business priorities. Address CEO-CIO differences.
    Start on the Right Path
    Get on track with the CIO vision. Use correct indicators and metrics to evaluate IT from day one.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials are available on Info-Tech’s website.

    The desired maturity level of IT — Alternative

    Associated Activity icon Use only if you can’t complete the CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Step 1: Where are we today?

    Determine where the CEO sees the current overall maturity level of the IT organization.

    Step 2: Where do we want to be as an organization?

    Determine where the CEO wants the IT organization to be in order to effectively support the strategic direction of the business.

    A colorful visual representation of the different IT maturity levels. At the bottom is 'STRUGGLE, Unable to Provide Reliable Business Services', then moving upwards are 'SUPPORT, Reliable Infrastructure and IT Service Desk', 'OPTIMIZE, Effective Fulfillment of Work Orders, Functional Business Applications, and Reliable Service Management', 'EXPAND, Effective Execution on Business Projects, Strategic Use of Analytics and Customer Technology', and at the top is 'TRANSFORM, Reliable Technology Innovation'.

    Presentation Deck, slide 11

    Tim Cook's powerful use of language

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Consumer technology
    Source Carmine Gallo, Inc., 2019

    Apple CEO Tim Cook, an internal hire, had big shoes to fill after taking over from the late Steve Jobs. Cook's ability to control how the company is perceived is a big credit to his success. How does he do it? His favorite five words are “The way I see it..." These words allow him to take a line of questioning and reframe it into another perspective that he wants to get across. Similarly, he'll often say, "Let me tell you the way I look at it” or "To put it in perspective" or "To put it in context."

    In your first two weeks on the job, try using these phrases in your conversations with peers and direct reports. It demonstrates that you value their point of view but are independently coming to conclusions about the situation at hand.

    Photo of Tim Cook, CEO, Apple Inc.
    Tim Cook, CEO, Apple Inc. (Image source: Apple)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Denis Gaudreault

    Inform your team that you plan to do an IT Management & Governance Diagnostic survey

    Associated Activity icon Run the diagnostic program or use the alternative activities to complete your presentation

    INPUT: IT Management & Governance Diagnostic (recommended)

    OUTPUT: Process to improve first, Processes important to the business

    Materials: Presentation Deck, slides 19-20

    Participants: CIO, IT staff

    Introduce the IT Management & Governance Diagnostic survey that will help you form your IT strategy.

    Explain that you want to understand current IT capabilities and you feel a formal approach is best. You’ll also be using this approach as an important metric to track your department’s success. Tell them that Info-Tech Research Group will be conducting the survey and it’s important to you that they take action on the email when it’s sent to them.

    Example email:

    Hello TEAM,

    I appreciate meeting each of you, and so far I’m excited about the talents and energy on the team. Now I need to understand the processes and capabilities of our department in a deeper way. I’d like to map our process landscape against an industry-wide standard, then dive deeper into those processes to understand if our team is aligned. This will help us be accountable to the business and plan the year ahead. Advisory firm Info-Tech Research Group will be reaching out to you with a simple survey that shouldn’t take too long to complete. It’s important to me that you pay attention to that message and complete the survey as soon as possible.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    Call 3

    Day 16 to Day 30

    Leverage team interviews as a source of determining organizational culture

    Info-Tech recommends that you hold group conversations with your team to uncover their opinions of the current organizational culture. This not only helps build transparency between you and your team but also gives you another means of observing behavior and reactions as you listen to team members’ characterizations of the current culture.

    A visualization of the organizational culture of a company asks the question 'What is culture?' Five boxes are stacked, the bottom two are noted as 'The invisible causes' and the top two are noted as 'The visible signs'. From the bottom, 'Fundamental assumptions and beliefs', 'Values and attitudes', 'The way we do things around here', 'Behaviors', and at the top, 'Environment'. (Source: Hope College Blog Network)

    Note: It is inherently difficult for people to verbalize what constitutes a culture – your strategy for extracting this information will require you to ask indirect questions to solicit the highest value information.

    Questions for Discussion:

    • What about the current organizational environment do you think most contributes to your success?
    • What barriers do you experience as you try to accomplish your work?
    • What is your favorite quality that is present in our organization?
    • What is the one thing you would most like to change about this organization?
    • Do the organization's policies and procedures support your efforts to accomplish work or do they impede your progress?
    • How effective do you think IT’s interactions are with the larger organization?
    • What would you consider to be IT’s top three guiding principles?
    • What kinds of people fail in this organization?

    Supporting Tool or Template icon See Info-Tech’s Cultural Archetype Calculator.

    Use the Competing Values Framework to define your organization’s cultural archetype

    THE COMPETING VALUES FRAMEWORK (CVF):

    CVF represents the synthesis of academic study of 39 indicators of effectiveness for organizations. Using a statistical analysis, two polarities that are highly predictive of differences in organizational effectiveness were isolated:

    1. Internal focus and integration vs. external focus and differentiation.
    2. Stability and control vs. flexibility and discretion.

    By plotting these dimensions on a matrix of competing values, four main cultural archetypes are identified with their own value drivers and theories of effectiveness.

    A map of cultural archetypes with 'Internal control and integration' on the left, 'External focus and differentiation' on the right, 'Flexibility and discretion' on top, and 'Stability and control' on the bottom. Top left is 'Clan Archetype', internal and flexible. Top right is 'Adhocracy Archetype', external and flexible. Bottom left is 'Hierarchy Archetype', internal and controlled. Bottom right is 'Market Archetype', external and controlled.

    Presentation Deck, slide 16

    Create a cultural adjustment plan

    Now that you've assessed the cultural archetype, you can plan an appropriate approach to shape the culture in a positive way. When new executives want to change culture, there are a few main options at hand:

    Autonomous evolution: Encourage teams to learn from each other. Empower hybrid teams to collaborate and reward teams that perform well.

    Planned and managed change: Create steering committee and project-oriented taskforces to work in parallel. Appoint employees that have cultural traits you'd like to replicate to hold responsibility for these bodies.

    Cultural destruction: When a toxic culture needs to be eliminated, get rid of its carriers. Putting new managers or directors in place with the right cultural traits can be a swift and effective way to realign.

    Each option boils down to creating the right set of incentives and deterrents. What behaviors will you reward and which ones will you penalize? What do those consequences look like? Sometimes, but not always, some structural changes to the team will be necessary. If you feel these changes should be made, it's important to do it sooner rather than later. (Source: “Enlarging Your Sphere of Influence in Your Organization,” MindTools Corporate, 2014.)

    As you're thinking about shaping a desired culture, it's helpful to have an easy way to remember the top qualities you want to espouse. Try creating an acronym that makes it easy for staff to remember. For example: RISE could remind your staff to be Responsive, Innovative, Sustainable, and Engaging (RISE). Draw upon your business direction from your manager to help produce desired qualities (Source: Jennifer Schaeffer).

    Presentation Deck, slide 17

    Gary Davenport’s welcome “surprise”

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Telecom
    Source Interview with Gary Davenport

    After Gary Davenport was hired on as VP of IT at MTS Allstream, his first weekend on the job was spent at an all-executive offsite meeting. There, he learned from the CEO that the IT department had a budget reduction target of 25%, like other departments in the company. “That takes your breath away,” Davenport says.

    He decided to meet the CEO monthly to communicate his plans to reduce spending while trying to satisfy business stakeholders. His top priorities were:

    1. Stabilize IT after seven different leaders in a five-year period.
    2. Get the IT department to be respected. To act like business owners instead of like servants.
    3. Better manage finances and deliver on projects.

    During Davenport’s 7.5-year tenure, the IT department became one of the top performers at MTS Allstream.

    Photo of Gary Davenport.
    Gary Davenport’s first weekend on the job at MTS Allstream included learning about a 25% reduction target. (Image source: Ryerson University)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – David Penny & Andrew Wertkin

    Initiate IT Management & Governance Diagnostic — Recommended

    Info-Tech Management & Governance Diagnostic

    Talk to your Info-Tech executive advisor about launching the survey shortly after informing your team to expect it. You'll just have to provide the names and email addresses of the staff you want to be involved. Once the survey is complete, you'll harvest materials from it for your presentation deck. See slides 19 and 20 of your deck and follow the instructions on what to include.

    Benefits

    A sample of the 'High Level Process Landscape' materials available from Info-Tech. A sample of the 'Strategy and Governance In Depth Results' materials available from Info-Tech. A sample of the 'Process Accountability' materials available from Info-Tech.
    Explore IT Processes
    Dive deeper into performance. Highlight problem areas.
    Align IT Team
    Build consensus by identifying opposing views.
    Ownership & Accountability
    Identify process owners and hold team members accountable.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Conduct a high-level analysis of current IT capabilities — Alternative

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: Interviews with IT leadership team, Capabilities graphic on next slide

    OUTPUT: High-level understanding of current IT capabilities

    Run this activity if you're not able to conduct the IT Management & Governance Diagnostic.

    Schedule meetings with your IT leadership team. (In smaller organizations, interviewing everyone may be acceptable.) Provide them a list of the core capabilities that IT delivers upon and ask them to rate them on an effectiveness scale of 1-5, with a short rationale for their score.

    • 1. Not effective (NE)
    • 2. Somewhat Effective (SE)
    • 3. Effective (E)
    • 4. Very Effective (VE)
    • 5. Extremely Effective (EE)

    Presentation Deck, slide 21

    Use the following set of IT capabilities for your assessment

    Strategy & Governance

    IT Governance Strategy Performance Measurement Policies Quality Management Innovation

    People & Resources

    Stakeholder Management Resource Management Financial Management Vendor Selection & Contract Management Vendor Portfolio Management Workforce Strategy Strategic Comm. Organizational Change Enablement

    Service Management & Operations

    Operations Management Service Portfolio Management Release Management Service Desk Incident & Problem Management Change Management Demand Management

    Infrastructure

    Asset Management Infrastructure Portfolio Management Availability & Capacity Management Infrastructure Management Configuration Management

    Information Security & Risk

    Security Strategy Risk Management Compliance, Audit & Review Security Detection Response & Recovery Security Prevention

    Applications

    Application Lifecycle Management Systems Integration Application Development User Testing Quality Assurance Application Maintenance

    PPM & Projects

    Portfolio Management Requirements Gathering Project Management

    Data & BI

    Data Architecture BI & Reporting Data Quality & Governance Database Operations Enterprise Content Management

    Enterprise Architecture

    Enterprise Architecture Solution Architecture

    Quick wins: CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Complete this while waiting on the IT M&G survey results. Based on your completed CEO-CIO Alignment Report, identify the initiatives you can tackle immediately.

    If you are here... And want to be here... Drive toward... Innovate around...
    Business Partner Innovator Leading business transformation
    • Emerging technologies
    • Analytical capabilities
    • Risk management
    • Customer-facing tech
    • Enterprise architecture
    Trusted Operator Business Partner Optimizing business process and supporting business transformation
    • IT strategy and governance
    • Business architecture
    • Projects
    • Resource management
    • Data quality
    Firefighter Trusted Operator Optimize IT processes and services
    • Business applications
    • Service management
    • Stakeholder management
    • Work orders
    Unstable Firefighter Reduce use disruption and adequately support the business
    • Network and infrastructure
    • Service desk
    • Security
    • User devices

    Call 4

    Day 31 to Day 45

    Inform your peers that you plan to do a CIO Business Vision survey to gauge your stakeholders’ satisfaction

    Associated Activity icon Run the diagnostic program or use the alternative activities to complete your presentation

    INPUT: CIO Business Vision survey (recommended)

    OUTPUT: True measure of business satisfaction with IT

    Materials: Presentation Deck, slide 30

    Participants: CIO, IT staff

    Meet the business leaders at your organization face-to-face if possible. If you can't meet in person, try a video conference to establish some rapport. At the end of your introduction and after listening to what your colleague has to say, introduce the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic.

    Explain that you want to understand how to meet their business needs and you feel a formal approach is best. You'll also be using this approach as an important metric to track your department's success. Tell them that Info-Tech Research Group will be conducting the survey and it’s important to you that they take the survey when the email is sent to them.

    Example email:

    Hello PEER NAMES,

    I'm arranging for Info-Tech Research Group to invite you to take a survey that will be important to me. The CIO Business Vision survey will help me understand how to meet your business needs. It will only take about 15 minutes of your time, and the top-line results will be shared with the organization. We will use the results to plan initiatives for the future that will improve your satisfaction with IT.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    Gain feedback on your initial assessments from your IT team

    There are two strategies for gaining feedback on your initial assessments of the organization from the IT team:

    1. Review your personal assessments with the relevant members of your IT organization as a group. This strategy can help to build trust and an open channel for communication between yourself and your team; however, it also runs the risk of being impacted by groupthink.
    2. Ask for your team to complete their own assessments for you to compare and contrast. This strategy can help extract more candor from your team, as they are not expected to communicate what may be nuanced perceptions of organizational weaknesses or criticisms of the way certain capabilities function.

    Who you involve in this process will be impacted by the size of your organization. For larger organizations, involve everyone down to the manager level. In smaller organizations, you may want to involve everyone on the IT team to get an accurate lay of the land.

    Areas for Review:

    • Strategic Document Review: Are there any major themes or areas of interest that were not covered in my initial assessment?
    • Competitor Array: Are there any initiatives in flight to leverage new technologies?
    • Current State of IT Maturity: Does IT’s perception align with the CEO’s? Where do you believe IT has been most effective? Least effective?
    • IT’s Key Priorities: Does IT’s perception align with the CEO’s?
    • Key Performance Indicators: How has IT been measured in the past?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    You need your team’s hearts and minds or you risk a short tenure. Overemphasizing business commitment by neglecting to address your IT team until after you meet your business stakeholders will result in a disenfranchised group. Show your team their importance.

    Susan Bowen's talent maximization

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Infrastructure Services
    Source Interview with Susan Bowen

    Susan Bowen was promoted to be the president of Cogeco Peer 1, an infrastructure services firm, when it was still a part of Cogeco Communications. Part of her mandate was to help spin out the business to a new owner, which occurred when it was acquired by Digital Colony. The firm was renamed Aptum and Bowen was put in place as CEO, which was not a certainty despite her position as president at Cogeco Peer 1. She credits her ability to put the right talent in the right place as part of the reason she succeeded. After becoming president, she sought a strong commitment from her directors. She gave them a choice about whether they'd deliver on a new set of expectations – or not. She also asks her leadership on a regular basis if they are using their talent in the right way. While it's tempting for directors to want to hold on to their best employees, those people might be able to enable many more people if they can be put in another place.

    Bowen fully rounded out her leadership team after Aptum was formed. She created a chief operating officer and a chief infrastructure officer. This helped put in place more clarity around roles at the firm and put an emphasis on client-facing services.

    Photo of Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum.
    Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum (Image source: Aptum)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Susan Bowen

    Initiate CIO Business Vision survey – new KPIs for stakeholder management — Recommended

    Info-Tech CIO Business Vision

    Be sure to effectively communicate the context of this survey to your business stakeholders before you launch it. Plan to talk about your plans to introduce it in your first meetings with stakeholders. When ready, let your executive advisor know you want to launch the tool and provide the names and email addresses of the stakeholders you want involved. After you have the results, harvest the materials required for your presentation deck. See slide 30 and follow the instructions on what to include.

    Benefits

    Icon for Key Stakeholders. Icon for Credibility. Icon for Improve. Icon for Focus.
    Key Stakeholders
    Clarify the needs of the business.
    Credibility
    Create transparency.
    Improve
    Measure IT’s progress.
    Focus
    Find what’s important.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials are available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Create a catalog of key stakeholder details to reference prior to future conversations — Alternative

    Only conduct this activity if you’re not able to run the CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    Use the Organizational Catalog as a personal cheat sheet to document the key details around each of your stakeholders, including your CEO when possible.

    The catalog will be an invaluable tool to keep the competing needs of your different stakeholders in line, while ensuring you are retaining the information to build the political capital needed to excel in the C-suite.

    Note: It is important to keep this document private. While you may want to communicate components of this information, ensure your catalog remains under lock and (encryption) key.

    Screenshot of the Organizational Catalog for Stakeholders. At the top are spaces for 'Name', 'Job Title', etc. Boxes include 'Key Personal Details', 'Satisfaction Levels With IT', 'Preferred Communications', 'Key Activities', 'In-Flight and Scheduled Projects', 'Key Performance Indicators', and 'Additional Details'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While profiling your stakeholders is important, do not be afraid to profile yourself as well. Visualizing how your interests overlap with those of your stakeholders can provide critical information on how to manage your communications so that those on the receiving end are hearing exactly what they need.

    Activity: Conduct interviews with your key business stakeholders — Alternative

    Associated Activity icon

    1. Once you have identified your key stakeholders through your interviews with your boss and your IT team, schedule a set of meetings with those individuals.
    2. Use the meetings to get to know your stakeholders, their key priorities and initiatives, and their perceptions of the effectiveness of IT.
      1. Use the probative questions to the right to elicit key pieces of information.
      2. Refer to the Organizational Catalog tool for more questions to dig deeper in each category. Ensure that you are taking notes separate from the tool and are keeping the tool itself secure, as it will contain private information specific to your interests.
    3. Following each meeting, record the results of your conversation and any key insights in the Organizational Catalog. Refer to the following slide for more details.

    Questions for Discussion:

    • Be indirect about your personal questions – share stories that will elicit details about their interests, kids, etc.
    • What are your most critical/important initiatives for the year?
    • What are your key revenue streams, products, and services?
    • What are the most important ways that IT supports your success? What is your satisfaction level with those services?
    • Are there any current in-flight projects or initiatives that are a current pain point? How can IT assist to alleviate challenges?
    • How is your success measured? What are your targets for the year on those metrics?

    Presentation Deck, slide 34

    Call 5

    Day 46 to Day 60

    Inform your team that you plan to do an IT staffing assessment

    Associated Activity icon Introduce the IT Staffing Assessment that will help you get the most out of your team

    INPUT: Email template

    OUTPUT: Ready to launch diagnostic

    Materials: Email template, List of staff, Sample of diagnostic

    Participants: CIO, IT staff

    Explain that you want to understand how the IT staff is currently spending its time by function and by activity. You want to take a formal approach to this task and also assess the team’s feelings about its effectiveness across different processes. The results of the assessment will serve as the foundation that helps you improve your team’s effectiveness within the organization.

    Example email:

    Hello PEER NAMES,

    The feedback I've heard from the team since joining the company has been incredibly useful in beginning to formulate my IT strategy. Now I want to get a clear picture of how everyone is spending their time, especially across different IT functions and activities. This will be an opportunity for you to share feedback on what we're doing well, what we need to do more of, and what we're missing. Expect to receive an email invitation to take this survey from Info-Tech Research Group. It's important to me that you complete the survey as soon as you're can. Attached you’ll find an example of the report this will generate. Thank you again for providing your time and feedback.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    Wayne Berger's shortcut to solve staffing woes

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Office leasing
    Source Interview with Wayne Berger

    Wayne Berger was hired to be the International Workplace Group (IWG) CEO for Canada and Latin America in 2014.

    Wayne approached his early days with the office space leasing firm as a tour of sorts, visiting nearly every one of the 48 office locations across Canada to host town hall meetings. He heard from staff at every location that they felt understaffed. But instead of simply hiring more staff, Berger actually reduced the workforce by 33%.

    He created a more flexible approach to staffing:

    • Employees no longer just reported to work at one office; instead, they were ready to go to wherever they were most needed in a specific geographic area.
    • He centralized all back-office functions for the company so that not every office had to do its own bookkeeping.
    • Finally, he changed the labor profile to consist of full-time staff, part-time staff, and time-on-demand workers.
    Photo of Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc.
    Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc (Image source: IWG)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Wayne Berger

    Initiate IT Staffing Assessment – new KPIs to track IT performance — Recommended

    Info-Tech IT Staffing Assessment

    Info-Tech’s IT Staffing Assessment provides benchmarking of key metrics against 4,000 other organizations. Dashboard-style reports provide key metrics at a glance, including a time breakdown by IT function and by activity compared against business priorities. Run this survey at about the 45-day mark of your first 90 days. Its insights will be used to inform your long-term IT strategy.

    Benefits

    Icon for Right-Size IT Headcount. Icon for Allocate Staff Correctly. Icon for Maximize Teams.
    Right-Size IT Headcount
    Find the right level for stakeholder satisfaction.
    Allocate Staff Correctly
    Identify staff misalignments with priorities.
    Maximize Teams
    Identify how to drive staff.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials are available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Quick wins: Make recommendations based on IT Management & Governance Framework

    Complete this exercise while waiting on the IT Staffing Assessment results. Based on your completed IT Management & Governance report, identify the initiatives you can tackle immediately. You can conduct this as a team exercise by following these steps:

    1. Create a shortlist of initiatives based on the processes that were identified as high need but scored low in effectiveness. Think as broadly as possible during this initial brainstorming.
    2. Write each initiative on a sticky note and conduct a high-level analysis of the amount of effort that would be required to complete it, as well as its alignment with the achievement of business objectives.
    3. Draw the matrix below on a whiteboard and place each sticky note onto the matrix based on its potential impact and difficulty to address.
    A matrix of initiative categories based on effort to achieve and alignment with business objectives. It is split into quadrants: the vertical axis is 'Potential Impact' with 'High, Fully supports achievement of business objectives' at the top and 'Low, Limited support of business objectives' at the bottom; the horizontal axis is 'Effort' with 'Low' on the left and 'High' on the right. Low impact, low effort is 'Low Current Value, No immediate attention required, but may become a priority in the future if business objectives change'. Low impact, high effort is 'Future Reassessment, No immediate attention required, but may become a priority in the future if business objectives change'. High impact, high effort is 'Long-Term Initiatives, High impact on business outcomes but will take more effort to implement. Schedule these in your long-term roadmap'. High impact, low effort is 'Quick Wins, High impact on business objectives with relatively small effort. Some combination of these will form your early wins'.

    Call 6

    Day 61 to Day 75

    Run a start, stop, continue exercise with your IT staff — Alternative

    This is an alternative activity to running an IT Staffing Assessment, which contains a start/stop/continue assessment. This activity can be facilitated with a flip chart or a whiteboard. Create three pages or three columns and label them Start, Stop, and Continue.

    Hand out sticky notes to each team member and then allow time for individual brainstorming. Instruct them to write down their contributions for each category on the sticky notes. After a few minutes, have everyone stick their notes in the appropriate category on the board. Discuss as a group and see what themes emerge. Record the results that you want to share in your presentation deck (GroupMap).

    Gather your team and explain the meaning of these categories:

    Start: Activities you're not currently doing but should start doing very soon.

    Stop: Activities you're currently doing but aren’t working and should cease.

    Continue: Things you're currently doing and are working well.

    Presentation Deck, slide 24

    Determine the alignment of IT commitments with business objectives

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: Interviews with IT leadership team

    OUTPUT: High-level understanding of in-flight commitments and investments

    Run this only as an alternative to the IT Management & Governance Diagnostic.

    1. Schedule meetings with IT leadership to understand what commitments have been made to the business in terms of new products, projects, or enhancements.
    2. Determine the following about IT’s current investment mix:
      1. What are the current IT investments and assets? How do they align to business goals?
      2. What investments in flight are related to which information assets?
      3. Are there any immediate risks identified for these key investments?
      4. What are the primary business issues that demand attention from IT consistently?
      5. What choices remain undecided in terms of strategic direction of the IT organization?
    3. Document your key investments and commitments as well as any points of misalignment between objectives and current commitments as action items to address in your long-term plans. If they are small fixes, consider them during your quick-win identification.

    Presentation Deck, slide 25

    Determine the alignment of IT commitments with business objectives

    Run this only as an alternative to the IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic.

    Schedule meetings with IT leadership to understand what commitments have been made to the business in terms of new products, projects, or enhancements.

    Determine the following about IT’s current investment mix:

    • What are the current IT investments and assets?
    • How do they align to business goals?
    • What in-flight investments are related to which information assets?
    • Are there any immediate risks identified for these key investments?
    • What are the primary business issues that demand attention from IT consistently?
    • What remains undecided in terms of strategic direction of the IT organization?

    Document your key investments and commitments, as well as any points of misalignment between objectives and current commitments, as action items to address in your long-term plans. If they are small-effort fixes, consider them during your quick-win identification.

    Presentation Deck, slide 25

    Make a categorized vendor list by IT process

    As part of learning the IT team, you should also create a comprehensive list of vendors under contract. Collaborate with the finance department to get a clear view of how much of the IT budget is spent on specific vendors. Try to match vendors to the IT processes they serve from the IT M&G framework.

    You should also organize your vendors based on their budget allocation. Go beyond just listing how much money you’re spending with each vendor and categorize them into either “transactional” relationships or “strategic relationships.” Use the grid below to organize them. Ideally, you’ll want most relationships to be high spend and strategic (Source: Gary Davenport).

    A matrix of vendor categories with the vertical axis 'Spend' increasing upward, and the horizontal axis 'Type of relationship' with values 'Transactional' or 'Strategic'. The bottom left corner is 'Low Spend Transactional', the top right corner is 'High Spend Strategic'.

    Where to source your vendor list:

    • Finance department
    • Infrastructure managers
    • Vendor manager in IT

    Further reading: Manage Your Vendors Before They Manage You

    Presentation Deck, slide 26

    Jennifer Schaeffer’s short-timeline turnaround

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Education
    Source Interview with Jennifer Schaeffer

    Jennifer Schaeffer joined Athabasca University as CIO in November 2017. She was entering a turnaround situation as the all-online university lacked an IT strategy and had built up significant technical debt. Armed with the mandate of a third-party consultant that was supported by the president, Schaeffer used a people-first approach to construct her strategy. She met with all her staff, listening to them carefully regardless of role, and consulted with the administrative council and faculty members. She reflected that feedback in her plan or explained to staff why it wasn’t relevant for the strategy. She implemented a “strategic calendaring” approach for the organization, making sure that her team members were participating in meetings where their work was assessed and valued. Drawing on Spotify as an inspiration, she designed her teams in a way that everyone was connected to the customer experience. Given her short timeline to execute, she put off a deep skills analysis of her team for a later time, as well as creating a full architectural map of her technology stack. The outcome is that 2.5 years later, the IT department is unified in using the same tooling and optimization standards. It’s more flexible and ready to incorporate government changes, such as offering more accessibility options.

    Photo of Jennifer Schaeffer.
    Jennifer Schaeffer took on the CIO role at Athabasca University in 2017 and was asked to create a five-year strategic plan in just six weeks.
    (Image source: Athabasca University)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Eric Wright

    Call 7

    Day 76 to Day 90

    Finalize your vision – mission – values statement

    A clear statement for your values, vision, and mission will help crystallize your IT strategy and communicate what you're trying to accomplish to the entire organization.

    Mission: This statement describes the needs that IT was created to meet and answers the basic question of why IT exists.

    Vision: Write a statement that captures your values. Remember that the vision statement sets out what the IT organization wants to be known for now and into the future.

    Values: IT core values represent the standard axioms by which the IT department operates. Similar to the core values of the organization as a whole, IT’s core values are the set of beliefs or philosophies that guide its strategic actions.

    Further reading: IT Vision and Mission Statements Template

    Presentation Deck, slide 42

    John Chen's new strategic vision

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Mobile Services
    Source Sean Silcoff, The Globe and Mail

    John Chen, known in the industry as a successful turnaround executive, was appointed BlackBerry CEO in 2014 following the unsuccessful launch of the BlackBerry 10 mobile operating system and a new tablet.

    He spent his first three months travelling, talking to customers and suppliers, and understanding the company's situation. He assessed that it had a problem generating cash and had made some strategic errors, but there were many assets that could benefit from more investment.

    He was blunt about the state of BlackBerry, making cutting observations of the past mistakes of leadership. He also settled a key question about whether BlackBerry would focus on consumer or enterprise customers. He pointed to a base of 80,000 enterprise customers that accounted for 80% of revenue and chose to focus on that.

    His new mission for BlackBerry: to transform it from being a "mobile technology company" that pushes handset sales to "a mobile solutions company" that serves the mobile computing needs of its customers.

    Photo of John Chen, CEO of BlackBerry.
    John Chen, CEO of BlackBerry, presents at BlackBerry Security Summit 2018 in New York City (Image source: Brian Jackson)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Erin Bury

    Quick wins: Make recommendations based on the CIO Business Vision survey

    Based on your completed CIO Business Vision survey, use the IT Satisfaction Scorecard to determine some initiatives. Focus on areas that are ranked as high importance to the business but low satisfaction. While all of the initiatives may be achievable given enough time, use the matrix below to identify the quick wins that you can focus on immediately. It’s important to not fail in your quick-win initiative.

    • High Visibility, Low Risk: Best bet for demonstrating your ability to deliver value.
    • Low Visibility, Low Risk: Worth consideration, depending on the level of effort required and the relative importance to the stakeholder.
    • High Visibility, High Risk: Limit higher-risk initiatives until you feel you have gained trust from your stakeholders, demonstrating your ability to deliver.
    • Low Visibility, High Risk: These will be your lowest value, quick-win initiatives. Keep them in a backlog for future consideration in case business objectives change.
    A matrix of initiative categories based on organizational visibility and risk of failure. It is split into quadrants: the vertical axis is 'Organizational Visibility' with 'High' at the top and 'Low' at the bottom; the horizontal axis is 'Risk of Failure' with 'Low' on the left and 'High' on the right. 'Low Visibility, Low Risk, Few stakeholders will benefit from the initiative’s implementation.' 'Low Visibility, High Risk, No immediate attention is required, but it may become a priority in the future if business objectives change.' 'High Visibility, Low Risk, Multiple stakeholders will benefit from the initiative’s implementation, and it has a low risk of failure.' 'High Visibility, High Risk, Multiple stakeholders will benefit from the initiative’s implementation, but it has a higher risk of failure.'

    Presentation Deck, slide 27

    Create and communicate a post-100 plan

    The last few slides of your presentation deck represent a roundup of all the assessments you’ve done and communicate your plan for the months ahead.

    Slide 38. Based on the information on the previous slide and now knowing which IT capabilities need improvement and which business priorities are important to support, estimate where you'd like to see IT staff spend their time in the near future. Will you be looking to shift staff from one area to another? Will you be looking to hire staff?

    Slide 39. Take your IT M&G initiatives from slide 19 and list them here. If you've already achieved a quick win, list it and mark it as completed to show what you've accomplished. Briefly outline the objectives, how you plan to achieve the result, and what measurement will indicate success.

    Slide 40. Reflect your CIO Business Vision initiatives from slide 31 here.

    Slide 41. Use this roadmap template to list your initiatives by roughly when they’ll be worked on and completed. Plan for when you’ll update your diagnostics.

    Expert Contributors

    Photo of Alan Fong, Chief Technology Officer, Dealer-FX Alan Fong, Chief Technology Officer, Dealer-FX
    Photo of Andrew Wertkin, Chief Strategy Officer, BlueCat NetworksPhoto of David Penny, Chief Technology Officer, BlueCat Networks Andrew Wertkin, Chief Strategy Officer, BlueCat Networks
    David Penny, Chief Technology Officer, BlueCat Networks
    Photo of Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum
    Photo of Erin Bury, CEO, Willful Erin Bury, CEO, Willful
    Photo of Denis Gaudreault, Country Manager, Intel Canada and Latin America Denis Gaudreault, Country Manager, Intel Canada and Latin America
    Photo of Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc
    Photo of Eric Wright, CEO, LexisNexis Canada Eric Wright, CEO, LexisNexis Canada
    Photo of Gary Davenport Gary Davenport, past president of CIO Association” of Canada, former VP of IT, Enterprise Solutions Division, MTS AllStream
    Photo of Jennifer Schaeffer, VP of IT and CIO, Athabasca University Jennifer Schaeffer, VP of IT and CIO, Athabasca University

    Bibliography

    Beaudan, Eric. “Do you have what it takes to be an executive?” The Globe and Mail, 9 July 2018. Web.

    Bersohn, Diana. “Go Live on Day One: The Path to Success for a New CIO.” PDF document. Accenture, 2015. Web.

    Bradt, George. “Executive Onboarding When Promoted From Within To Follow A Successful Leader.” Forbes, 15 Nov. 2018. Web.

    “CIO Stats: Length of CIO Tenure Varies By Industry.” CIO Journal, The Wall Street Journal. 15 Feb. 2017. Web.

    “Enlarging Your Sphere of Influence in Your Organization: Your Learning and Development Guide to Getting People on Side.” MindTools Corporate, 2014.

    “Executive Summary.” The CIO's First 100 Days: A Toolkit. PDF document. Gartner, 2012. Web.

    Forbes, Jeff. “Are You Ready for the C-Suite?” KBRS, n.d. Web.

    Gallo, Carmine. “Tim Cook Uses These 5 Words to Take Control of Any Conversation.” Inc., 9 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Giles, Sunnie. “The Most Important Leadership Competencies, According to Leaders Around the World.” Harvard Business Review, 15 March 2016. Web.

    Godin, Seth. “Ode: How to tell a great story.” Seth's Blog. 27 April 2006. Web.

    Green, Charles W. “The horizontal dimension of race: Social culture.” Hope College Blog Network, 19 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Hakobyan, Hayk. “On Louis Gerstner And IBM.” Hayk Hakobyan, n.d. Web.

    Bibliography

    Hargrove, Robert. Your First 100 Days in a New Executive Job, edited by Susan Youngquist. Kindle Edition. Masterful Coaching Press, 2011.

    Heathfield, Susan M. “Why ‘Blink’ Matters: The Power of Your First Impressions." The Balance Careers, 25 June 2019. Web.

    Hillis, Rowan, and Mark O'Donnell. “How to get off to a flying start in your new job.” Odgers Berndtson, 29 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Karaevli, Ayse, and Edward J. Zajac. “When Is an Outsider CEO a Good Choice?” MIT Sloan Management Review, 19 June 2012. Web.

    Keizer, Gregg. “Microsoft CEO Nadella Aces First-100-Day Test.” Computerworld, 15 May 2014. Web.

    Keller, Scott, and Mary Meaney. “Successfully transitioning to new leadership roles.” McKinsey & Company, May 2018. Web.

    Kress, R. “Director vs. Manager: What You Need to Know to Advance to the Next Step.” Ivy Exec, 2016. Web.

    Levine, Seth. “What does it mean to be an ‘executive’.” VC Adventure, 1 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Lichtenwalner, Benjamin. “CIO First 90 Days.” PDF document. Modern Servant Leader, 2008. Web.

    Nawaz, Sabina. “The Biggest Mistakes New Executives Make.” Harvard Business Review, 15 May 2017. Web.

    Pruitt, Sarah. “Fast Facts on the 'First 100 Days.‘” History.com, 22 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Rao, M.S. “An Action Plan for New CEOs During the First 100 Days.” Training, 4 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Reddy, Kendra. “It turns out being a VP isn't for everyone.” Financial Post, 17 July 2012. Web.

    Silcoff, Sean. “Exclusive: John Chen’s simple plan to save BlackBerry.” The Globe & Mail, 24 Feb. 2014. Web.

    Bibliography

    “Start Stop Continue Retrospective.” GroupMap, n.d. Web.

    Surrette, Mark. “Lack of Rapport: Why Smart Leaders Fail.” KBRS, n.d. Web.

    “Understanding Types of Organization – PMP Study.” Simplilearn, 4 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Wahler, Cindy. “Six Behavioral Traits That Define Executive Presence.” Forbes, 2 July 2015. Web.

    Watkins, Michael D. The First 90 Days, Updated and Expanded. Harvard Business Review Press, 2013.

    Watkins, Michael D. “7 Ways to Set Up a New Hire for Success.” Harvard Business Review, 10 May 2019. Web.

    “What does it mean to be a business executive?” Daniels College of Business, University of Denver, 12 Aug. 2014. Web.

    Yeung, Ken. “Turnaround: Marissa Mayer’s first 300 days as Yahoo’s CEO.” The Next Web, 19 May 2013. Web.

    Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}161|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Hiring quality development team resources is becoming increasingly difficult and costly in most domestic markets.
    • Firms are seeking to do more with less and increase their development team throughput.
    • Globalization and increased competition are driving a need for more innovation in your applications.
    • Firms want more cost certainty and tighter control of their development investment.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Choosing the right sourcing strategy is not just a question of technical skills! Successful sourcing is based on matching your organization’s culture, knowledge, and experiences to the right choice of internal or external partnership.

    Impact and Result

    • We will help you build a sourcing strategy document for your application portfolio.
    • We will examine your portfolio and organization from three different perspectives to enable you to determine the right approach:
      • From a business perspective, reliance on the business, strategic value of the product, and maturity of product ownership are critical.
      • From an organizational perspective, you must examine your culture for communication processes, conflict resolution methods, vendor management skills, and geographic coverage.
      • From a technical perspective, consider integration complexity, environmental complexity, and testing processes.

    Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team Storyboard – A guide to help you choose the right resourcing strategy to keep pace with your rapidly changing application and development needs.

    This project will help you define a sourcing strategy for your application development team by assessing key factors about your products and your organization, including critical business, technical, and organizational factors. Use this analysis to select the optimal sourcing strategy for each situation.

    • Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team Storyboard

    2. Define a Sourcing Strategy Workbook – A tool to capture the results of activities to build your sourcing strategy.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of the activities in the storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds with an activity from the deck. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

    • Define a Sourcing Strategy Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team

    Choose the right resourcing strategy to keep pace with your rapidly changing application and development needs.

    Analyst Perspective

    Choosing the right sourcing strategy for your development team is about assessing your technical situation, your business needs, your organizational culture, and your ability to manage partners!

    Photo of Dr. Suneel Ghei, Principal Research Director, Application Development, Info-Tech Research Group

    Firms today are under continuous pressure to innovate and deliver new features to market faster while at the same time controlling costs. This has increased the need for higher throughput in their development teams along with a broadening of skills and knowledge. In the face of these challenges, there is a new focus on how firms source their development function. Should they continue to hire internally, offshore, or outsource? How do they decide which strategy is the right fit?

    Info-Tech’s research shows that the sourcing strategy considerations have evolved beyond technical skills and costs. Identifying the right strategy has become a function of the characteristics of the organization, its culture, its reliance on the business for knowledge, its strategic value of the application, its vendor management skills, and its ability to internalize external knowledge. By assessing these factors firms can identify the best sourcing mix for their development portfolios.

    Dr. Suneel Ghei
    Principal Research Director, Application Development
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Hiring quality development team resources is becoming increasingly difficult and costly in most domestic markets.
    • Firms are seeking to do more with less and increase their development team throughput.
    • Globalization and increased competition is driving a need for more innovation in your applications.
    • Firms want more cost certainty and tighter control of their development investment.
    Common Obstacles
    • Development leaders are encouraged to manage contract terms and SLAs rather than build long-term relationships.
    • People believe that outsourcing means you will permanently lose the knowledge around solutions.
    • Moving work outside of the current team creates motivational and retention challenges that can be difficult to overcome.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Looking at this from these three perspectives will enable you to determine the right approach:
      1. From a business perspective, reliance on the business, strategic value of the product, and maturity of product ownership are critical.
      2. From an organizational perspective, you must examine your culture for communication processes, conflict resolution methods, vendor management skills, and geographic coverage
      3. From a technical perspective, consider integration complexity, environment complexity, and testing processes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Choosing the right sourcing strategy is not just a question of technical skills! Successful sourcing is based on matching your organization’s culture, knowledge, and experiences to the right choice of internal or external partnership.

    Define a sourcing strategy for your development team

    Business
    • Business knowledge/ expertise required
    • Product owner maturity
    Technical
    • Complexity and maturity of technical environment
    • Required level of integration
    Organizational
    • Company culture
    • Desired geographic proximity
    • Required vendor management skills
    1. Assess your current delivery posture for challenges and impediments.
    2. Decide whether to build or buy a solution.
    3. Select your desired sourcing strategy based on your current state and needs.
    Example sourcing strategy with initiatives like 'Client-Facing Apps' and 'ERP Software' assigned to 'Onshore Dev', 'Outsource Team', 'Offshore Dev', 'Outsource App (Buy)', 'Outsource Dev', or 'Outsource Roles'.

    Three Perspectives +

    Three Steps =

    Your Sourcing Strategy

    Diverse sourcing is used by many firms

    Many firms across all industries are making use of different sourcing strategies to drive innovation and solve business issues.

    According to a report by ReportLinker the global IT services outsourcing market reached US$413.8 billion in 2021.

    In a recent study of Canadian software firms, it was found that almost all firms take advantage of outside knowledge in their application development process. In most cases these firms also use outside resources to do development work, and about half the time they use externally built software packages in their products (Ghei, 2020)!

    Info-Tech Insight

    In today’s diverse global markets, firms that wish to stay competitive must have a defined ability to take advantage of external knowledge and to optimize their IT services spend.

    Modeling Absorptive Capacity for Open Innovation in the Canadian Software Industry (Source: Ghei, 2020; n=54.)

    56% of software development firms are sourcing applications instead of resources.

    68% of firms are sourcing external resources to develop software products.

    91% of firms are leveraging knowledge from external sources.

    Internal sourcing models

    Insourcing comes in three distinct flavors

    Geospatial map giving example locations for the three internal sourcing models. In this example, 'Head Office' is located in North America, 'Onshore' is 'Located in the same area or even office as your core business resources. Relative Cost: $$$', 'Near Shore' is 'Typically, within 1-3 time zones for ease of collaboration where more favorable resource costs exist. Relative Cost: $$', and 'Offshore' is 'Located in remote markets where significant labor cost savings can be realized. Relative Cost: $'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Insourcing allows you to stay close to more strategic applications. But choosing the right model requires a strong look inside your organization and your ability to provide business knowledge support to developers who may have different skills and cultures and are in different geographies.

    Outsourcing models

    External sourcing can be done to different degrees

    Outsource Roles
    • Enables resource augmentation
    • Typically based on skills needs
    • Short-term outsourcing with eventual integration or dissolution
    Outsource Teams (or Projects)
    • Use of a full team or multiple teams of vendor resources
    • Meant to be temporary, with knowledge transfer at the end of the project
    Outsource Products
    • Use of a vendor to build, maintain, and support the full product
    • Requires a high degree of contract management skill

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing represents one of the most popular ways for organizations to source external knowledge and skills. The choice of model is a function of the organization’s ability to support the external resources and to absorb the knowledge back into the organization.

    Defining your sourcing strategy

    Follow the steps below to identify the best match for your organization

    Review Your Current Situation

    Review the issues and opportunities related to application development and categorize them based on the key factors.

    Arrow pointing right. Assess Build Versus Buy

    Before choosing a sourcing model you must assess whether a particular product or function should be bought as a package or developed.

    Arrow pointing right. Choose the Right Sourcing Strategy

    Based on the research, use the modeling tool to match the situation to the appropriate sourcing solution.

    Step 1.1

    Review Your Current Situation

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Identify and categorize your challenges

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product management team
    • Software development leadership team
    • Key stakeholders
    Outcomes of this step

    Review your current delivery posture for challenges and impediments.

    Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

    Review your situation

    There are three key areas to examine in your current situation:

    Business Challenges
    • Do you need to gain new knowledge to drive innovation?
    • Does your business need to enhance its software to improve its ability to compete in the market?
    • Do you need to increase your speed of innovation?

    Technology Challenges

    • Are you being asked to take tighter control of your development budgets?
    • Does your team need to expand their skills and knowledge?
    • Do you need to increase your development speed and capacity?

    Market Challenges

    • Is your competition seen as more innovative?
    • Do you need new features to attract new clients?
    • Are you struggling to find highly skilled and knowledgeable development resources?
    Stock image of multi-colored arrows travelling in a line together before diverging.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sourcing is a key tool to solve business and technical challenges and enhance market competitiveness when coupled with a robust definition of objectives and a way to measure success.

    1.1.1 Identify and categorize your challenges

    60 minutes

    Output: List of the key challenges in your software lifecycle. Breakdown of the list into categories to identify opportunities for sourcing

    Participants: Product management team, Software development leadership team, Key stakeholders

    1. What challenge is your firm is facing with respect to your software that you think sourcing can address? (20 minutes)
    2. Is the challenge related to a business outcome, development methodology, or technology challenge? (10 minutes)
    3. Is the challenge due to a skills gap, budget or resource challenge, throughput issue, or a broader organizational knowledge or process issue? (10 minutes)
    4. What is the specific objective for the team/leader in addressing this challenge? (15 minutes)
    5. How will you measure progress and achievement of this objective? (5 minutes)

    Document results in the Define a Sourcing Strategy Workbook

    Identify and categorize your challenges

    Sample table for identifying and categorizing challenges, with column groups 'Challenge' and 'Success Measures' containing headers 'Issue, 'Category', 'Breadth', and 'Stakeholder' in the former, and 'Objective' and 'Measurement' in the latter.

    Step 1.2

    Assess Build Versus Buy

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Understand the benefits and drawbacks of build versus buy in your organizational context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product management team
    • Software development leadership team
    • Key stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    Understand in your context the benefits and drawbacks of build versus buy, leveraging Info-Tech’s recommended definitions as a starting point.

    Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

    Look vertically across the IT hierarchy to assess the impact of your decision at every level

    IT Hierarchy with 'Enterprise' at the top, branching out to 'Portfolio', then to 'Solution' at the bottom. The top is 'Strategic', the bottom 'Operational'.

    Regardless of the industry, a common and challenging dilemma facing technology teams is to determine when they should build software or systems in-house versus when they should rely wholly on an outside vendor for delivering on their technology needs.

    The answer is not as cut and dried as one would expect. Any build versus buy decision may have an impact on strategic and operational plans. It touches every part of the organization, starting with individual projects and rolling up to the enterprise strategy.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not ignore the impact of a build or buy decision on the various management levels in an IT organization.

    Deciding whether to build or buy

    It is as much about what you gain as it is about what problem you choose to have

    BUILD BUY

    Multi-Source Best of Breed

    Integrate various technologies that provide subset(s) of the features needed for supporting the business functions.

    Vendor Add-Ons & Integrations

    Enhance an existing vendor’s offerings by using their system add-ons either as upgrades, new add-ons, or integrations.
    Pros
    • Flexibility in choice of tools
    • In some cases, cost may be lower
    • Easier to enhance with in-house teams
    Cons
    • Introduces tool sprawl
    • Requires resources to understand tools and how they integrate
    • Some of the tools necessary may not be compatible with one another
    Pros
    • Reduces tool sprawl
    • Supports consistent tool stack
    • Vendor support can make enhancement easier
    • Total cost of ownership may be lower
    Cons
    • Vendor lock-in
    • The processes to enhance may require tweaking to fit tool capability

    Multi-Source Custom

    Integrate systems built in-house with technologies developed by external organizations.

    Single Source

    Buy an application/system from one vendor only.
    Pros
    • Flexibility in choice of tools
    • In some cases, cost may be lower
    • Easier to enhance with in-house teams
    Cons
    • May introduce tool sprawl
    • Requires resources to have strong technical skills
    • Some of the tools necessary may not be compatible with one another
    Pros
    • Reduces tool sprawl
    • Supports consistent tool stack
    • Vendor support can make enhancement easier
    • Total cost of ownership may be lower
    Cons
    • Vendor lock-in
    • The processes to enhance may require tweaking to fit tool capability

    1.2.1 Understand the benefits and drawbacks of build versus buy in your organizational context

    30 minutes

    Output: A common understanding of the different approaches to build versus buy applied to your organizational context

    Participants: Product management team, Software development leadership team, Key stakeholders

    1. Look at the previous slide, Deciding whether to build or buy.
    2. Discuss the pros and cons listed for each approach.
      1. Do they apply in your context? Why or why not?
      2. Are there some approaches not applicable in terms of how you wish to work?
    3. Record the curated list of pros and cons for the different build/buy approaches.
    4. For each approach, arrange the pros and cons in order of importance.

    Document results in the Define a Sourcing Strategy Workbook

    Step 1.3

    Choose the Right Sourcing Strategy

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Determine the right sourcing strategy for your needs

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product management team
    • Software development leadership team
    • Key stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    Choose your desired sourcing strategy based on your current state and needs.

    Define a Sourcing Strategy for Your Development Team

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

    Choose the right sourcing strategy

    • Based on our research, finding the right sourcing strategy for a particular situation is a function of three key areas:
      • Business drivers
      • Organizational drivers
      • Technical drivers
    • Each area has key characteristics that must be assessed to confirm which strategy is best suited for the situation.
    • Once you have assessed the factors and ranked them from low to high, we can then match your results with the best-fit strategy.
    Business
    • Business knowledge/ expertise required
    • Product owner maturity

    Technical

    • Complexity and maturity of technical environment
    • Required level of integration

    Organizational

    • Your culture
    • Desired geographic proximity
    • Required vendor management skills

    Business drivers

    To choose the right sourcing strategy, you need to assess your key drivers of delivery

    Product Knowledge
    • The level of business involvement required to support the development team is a critical factor in determining the sourcing model.
    • Both the breadth and depth of involvement are critical factors.
    Strategic Value
    • The strategic value of the application to the company is also a critical component.
    • The more strategic the application is to the company, the closer the sourcing should be maintained.
    • Value can be assessed based on the revenue derived from the application and the depth of use of the application by the organization.
    Product Ownership Maturity
    • To support sourcing models that move further from organizational boundaries a strong product ownership function is required.
    • Product owners should ideally be fully allocated to the role and engaged with the development teams.
    • Product owners should be empowered to make decisions related to the product, its vision, and its roadmap.
    • The higher their allocation and empowerment, the higher the chances of success in external sourcing engagements.
    Stock image of a person running up a line with a positive trend.

    Case Study: The GoodLabs Studio Experience Logo for GoodLabs Studio.

    INDUSTRY: Software Development | SOURCE: Interview with Thomas Lo, Co-Founder, GoodLabs Studio
    Built to Outsource Development Teams
    • GoodLabs is an advanced software innovation studio that provides bespoke team extensions or turnkey digital product development with high-caliber software engineers.
    • Unlike other consulting firms, GoodLabs works very closely with its customers as a unified team to deliver the most significant impact on clients’ projects.
    • With this approach, it optimizes the delivery of strong software engineering skills with integrated product ownership from the client, enabling long-term and continued success for its clients.
    Results
    • GoodLabs is able to attract top engineering talent by focusing on a variety of complex projects that materially benefit from technical solutions, such as cybersecurity, fraud detection, and AI syndrome surveillance.
    • Taking a partnership approach with the clients has led to the successful delivery of many highly innovative and challenging projects for the customers.

    Organizational drivers

    To choose the right sourcing strategy for a particular problem you need to assess the organization’s key capabilities

    Stock photo of someone placing blocks with illustrated professionals one on top of the other. Vendor Management
    • Vendor management is a critical skill for effective external sourcing.
    • This can be assessed based on the organization’s ability to cultivate and grow long-term relationships of mutual value.
    • The longevity and growth of existing vendor relationships can be a good benchmark for future success.
    Absorptive Capacity
    • To effectively make use of external sourcing models, the organization must have a well-developed track record of absorbing outside knowledge.
    • This can be assessed by looking at past cases where external knowledge was sourced and internalized, such as past vendor development engagements or use of open-source code.
    Organizational Culture
    • Another factor in success of vendor engagements and long-term relationships is the matching of organizational cultures.
    • It is key to measure the organization’s current position on items like communication strategy, geographical dispersal, conflict resolution strategy, and hierarchical vs flat management.
    • These factors should be documented and matched with partners to determine the best fit.

    Case Study: WCIRB California Logo for WCIRB California.

    INDUSTRY: Workers Compensation Insurance | SOURCE: Interview with Roger Cottman, Senior VP and CIO, WCIRB California
    Trying to Find the Right Match
    • WCIRB is finding it difficult to hire local resources in California.
    • Its application is a niche product. Since no off-the-shelf alternatives exist, the organization will require a custom application.
    • WCIRB is in the early stages of a digital platform project and is looking to bring in a partner to provide a full development team, with the goal of ideally bringing the application back in-house once it is built.
    • The organization is looking for a local player that will be able to integrate well with the business.
    • It has engaged with two mid-sized players but both have been slow to respond, so it is now considering alternative approaches.
    Info-Tech’s Recommended Approach
    • WCIRB is finding that mid-sized players don’t fit its needs and is now looking for a larger player
    • Based on our research we have advised that WCIRB should ensure the partner is geographically close to its location and can be a strategic partner, not simply work on an individual project.

    Technical drivers

    To choose the right sourcing strategy for a particular problem you need to assess your technical situation and capabilities

    Environment Complexity
    • The complexity of your technical environment is a hurdle that must be overcome for external sourcing models.
    • The number of environments used in the development lifecycle and the location of environments (physical, virtual, on-premises, or cloud) are key indicators.
    Integration Requirements
    • The complexity of integration is another key technical driver.
    • The number of integrations required for the application is a good measuring stick. Will it require fewer than 5, 5-10, or more than 10?
    Testing Capabilities
    • Testing of the application is a key technical driver of success for external models.
    • Having well-defined test cases, processes, and shared execution with the business are all steps that help drive success of external sourcing models.
    • Test automation can also help facilitate success of external models.
    • Measure the percentage of test cases that are standardized, the level of business involvement, and the percentage of test cases that are automated.
    Stock image of pixelated light.

    Case Study: Management Control Systems (MC Systems) Logo for MC Systems.

    INDUSTRY: Technology Services | SOURCE: Interview with Kathryn Chin See, Business Development and Research Analyst, MC Systems
    Seeking to Outsource Innovation
    • MC Systems is seeking to outsource its innovation function to get budget certainty on innovation and reduce costs. It is looking for a player that has knowledge of the application areas it is looking to enhance and that would augment its own business knowledge.
    • In previous outsourcing experiences with skills augmentation and application development the organization had issues related to the business depth and product ownership it could provide. The collaborations did not lead to success as MC Systems lacked product ownership and the ability to reintegrate the outside knowledge.
    • The organization is concerned about testing of a vendor-built application and how the application will be supported.
    Info-Tech’s Recommended Approach
    • To date MC Systems has had success with its outsourcing approach when outsourcing specific work items.
    • It is now looking to expand to outsourcing an entire application.
    • Info-Tech’s recommendation is to seek partners who can take on development of the application.
    • MC Systems will still need resources to bring knowledge back in-house for testing and to provide operational support.

    Choosing the right model


    Legend for the table below using circles with quarters to represent Low (0 quarters) to High (4 quarters).
    Determinant Key Questions to Ask Onshore Nearshore Offshore Outsource Role(s) Outsource Team Outsource Product(s)
    Business Dependence How much do you rely on business resources during the development cycle? Circle with 4 quarters. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 2 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 0 quarters.
    Absorptive Capacity How successful has the organization been at bringing outside knowledge back into the firm? Circle with 0 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 2 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 4 quarters.
    Integration Complexity How many integrations are required for the product to function – fewer than 5, 5-10, or more than 10? Circle with 4 quarters. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 2 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 0 quarters.
    Product Ownership Do you have full-time product owners in place for the products? Do product owners have control of their roadmaps? Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 2 quarters. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 2 quarters. Circle with 4 quarters. Circle with 4 quarters.
    Organization Culture Fit What are your organization’s communication and conflict resolution strategies? Is your organization geographically dispersed? Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 4 quarters.
    Vendor Mgmt Skills What is your skill level in vendor management? How long are your longest-standing vendor relationships? Circle with 0 quarters. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 1 quarter. Circle with 2 quarters. Circle with 3 quarters. Circle with 4 quarters.

    1.3.1 Determine the right sourcing strategy for your needs

    60 minutes

    Output: A scored matrix of the key drivers of the sourcing strategy

    Participants: Development leaders, Product management team, Key stakeholders

    Choose one of your products or product families and assess the factors below on a scale of None, Low, Medium, High, and Full.

    • 3.1 Assess the business factors that drive selection using these key criteria (20 minutes):
      • 3.1.1 Product knowledge
      • 3.1.2 Strategic value
      • 3.1.3 Product ownership
    • 3.2 Assess the organizational factors that drive selection using these key criteria (20 minutes):
      • 3.2.1 Vendor management
      • 3.2.2 Absorptive capacity
      • 3.2.3 Organization culture
    • 3.3 Assess the technical factors that drive selection using these key criteria (20 minutes):
      • 3.3.1 Environments
      • 3.3.2 Integration
      • 3.3.3 Testing

    Document results in the Define a Sourcing Strategy Workbook

    Things to Consider When Implementing

    Once you have built your strategy there are some additional things to consider

    Things to Consider Before Acting on Your Strategy

    By now you understand what goes into an effective sourcing strategy. Before implementing one, there are a few key items you need to consider:

    Example 'Sourcing Strategy for Your Portfolio' with initiatives like 'Client-Facing Apps' and 'ERP Software' assigned to 'Onshore Dev', 'Outsource Team', 'Offshore Dev', 'Outsource App (Buy)', 'Outsource Dev', or 'Outsource Roles'. Start with a pilot
    • Changing sourcing needs to start with one team.
    • Grow as skills develop to limit risk.
    Build an IT workforce plan Enhance your vendor management skills Involve the business early and often
    • The business should feel they are part of the discussion.
    • See our Agile/DevOps Research Center for more information on how the business and IT can better work together.
    Limit sourcing complexity
    • Having too many different partners and models creates confusion and will strain your ability to manage vendors effectively.

    Bibliography

    Apfel, Isabella, et al. “IT Project Member Turnover and Outsourcing Relationship Success: An Inverted-U Effect.” Developments, Opportunities and Challenges of Digitization, 2020. Web.

    Benamati, John, and Rajkumar, T.M. “The Application Development Outsourcing Decision: An Application of the Technology Acceptance Model.” Journal of Computer Information Systems, vol. 42, no. 4, 2008, pp. 35-43. Web.

    Benamati, John, and Rajkumar, T.M. “An Outsourcing Acceptance Model: An Application of TAM to Application Development Outsourcing Decisions.” Information Resources Management Journal, vol. 21, no. 2, pp. 80-102, 2008. Web.

    Broekhuizen, T. L. J., et al. “Digital Platform Openness: Drivers, Dimensions and Outcomes.” Journal of Business Research, vol. 122, July 2019, pp. 902-914. Web.

    Brook, Jacques W., and Albert Plugge. “Strategic Sourcing of R&D: The Determinants of Success.” Business Information Processing, vol. 55, Aug. 2010, pp. 26-42. Web.

    Delen, G. P A.J., et al. “Foundations for Measuring IT-Outsourcing Success and Failure.” Journal of Systems and Software, vol. 156, Oct. 2019, pp. 113-125. Web.

    Elnakeep, Eman, et al. “Models and Frameworks for IS Outsourcing Structure and Dimensions: A Holistic Study.” Lecture notes in Networks and Systems, 2019. Web.

    Ghei, Suneel. Modeling Absorptive Capacity for Open Innovation in the Software Industry. 2020. Faculty of Graduate Studies, Athabasca University, 2020. DBA Dissertation.

    “IT Outsourcing Market Research Report by Service Model, Organization Sizes, Deployment, Industry, Region – Global Forecast to 2027 – Cumulative Impact of COVID-19.” ReportLinker, April 2022. Web.

    Jeong, Jongkil Jay, et al. “Enhancing the Application and Measurement of Relationship Quality in Future IT Outsourcing Studies.” 26th European Conference on Information Systems: Beyond Digitization – Facets of Socio-Tehcnical Change: Proceedings of ECIS 2018, Portsmouth, UK, June 23-28, 2018. Edited by Peter Bednar, et al., 2018. Web.

    Könning, Michael. “Conceptualizing the Effect of Cultural Distance on IT Outsourcing Success.” Proceedings of Australasian Conference on Information Systems 2018, Sydney, Australia, Dec. 3-5, 2018. Edited by Matthew Noble, UTS ePress, 2018. Web.

    Lee, Jae-Nam, et al. “Holistic Archetypes of IT Outsourcing Strategy: A Contingency Fit and Configurational Approach.” MIS Quarterly, vol. 43, no. 4, Dec. 2019, pp. 1201-1225. Web.

    Loukis, Euripidis, et al. “Determinants of Software-as-a-Service Benefits and Impact on Firm Performance.” Decision Support Systems, vol. 117, Feb. 2019, pp. 38-47. Web.

    Martensson, Anders. “Patterns in Application Development Sourcing in the Financial Industry.” Proceedings of the 13th European Conference of Information Systems, 2004. Web.

    Martínez-Sánchez, Angel, et al. “The Relationship Between R&D, the Absorptive Capacity of Knowledge, Human Resource Flexibility and Innovation: Mediator Effects on Industrial Firms.” Journal of Business Research, vol. 118, Sept. 2020, pp. 431-440. Web.

    Moreno, Valter, et al. “Outsourcing of IT and Absorptive Capacity: A Multiple Case Study in the Brazilian Insurance Sector.” Brazilian Business Review, vol. 17, no. 1, Jan.-Feb. 2020, pp. 97-113. Web.

    Ozturk, Ebru. “The Impact of R&D Sourcing Strategies on Basic and Developmental R&D in Emerging Economies.” European Journal of Innovation Management, vol. 21, no. 7, May 2018, pp. 522-542. Web.

    Ribas, Imma, et al. “Multi-Step Process for Selecting Strategic Sourcing Options When Designing Supply Chains.” Journal of Industrial Engineering and Management, vol. 14, no. 3, 2021, pp. 477-495. Web.

    Striteska, Michaela Kotkova, and Viktor Prokop. “Dynamic Innovation Strategy Model in Practice of Innovation Leaders and Followers in CEE Countries – A Prerequisite for Building Innovative Ecosystems.” Sustainability, vol. 12, no. 9, May 2020. Web.

    Thakur-Wernz, Pooja, et al. “Antecedents and Relative Performance of Sourcing Choices for New Product Development Projects.” Technovation, 2020. Web.

    Release management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}9|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}9|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}9|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $35,731
    • member rating average days saved: 20
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Today's world requires frequent and fast deployments. Stay in control with release management.

    The MVP Major Incident Manager

    The time has come to hire a new major incident manager. How do you go about that? How do you choose the right candidate? Major incident managers must have several typically conflicting traits, so how do you pick the right person? Let's dive into that.

    Register to read more …

    Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}315|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management

    Organizations wishing to mature their IT financial management (ITFM) maturity often face the following obstacles:

    • Unfamiliarity: Lack of knowledge and understanding related to ITFM maturity.
    • Shortsightedness: Randomly reacting to changing circumstances.
    • Exchange: Inability to consistently drive dialogues.
    • Perception: IT is perceived as a cost center instead of a trustworthy strategic partner.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    No matter where you currently stand in your ITFM practice, there is always room for improvement. Hence, a maturity assessment should be viewed as a self-improvement tool that is only valuable if you are willing to act on it.

    Impact and Result

    A mature ITFM practice leads to many benefits.

    • Foundation: Improved governance, skill sets, processes, and tools.
    • Data: An appropriate taxonomy/data model alongside accurate data for high-quality reporting and insights.
    • Language: A common vocabulary across the organization.
    • Organization Culture: Improved communication and collaboration between IT and business partners.

    Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively Storyboard – A framework and step-by-step methodology to assess your ITFM maturity.

    This research seeks to support IT leaders and ITFM practitioners in evaluating and improving their current maturity. It will help document both current and target states as well as prioritize focus areas for improvement.

    • Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively Storyboard

    2. IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool – A structured tool to help you assess your ITFM maturity.

    This Excel workbook guides IT finance practitioners to effectively assess their IT financial management practice. Incorporate the visual outputs into your final executive presentation document. Key activities include context setting, completing the assessment, and prioritizing focus areas based on results.

    • IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template – A report summarizing your ITFM maturity assessment results to help you communicate with stakeholders.

    Use this template to document your final ITFM maturity outputs, including the current and target states and your identified priorities.

    • IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively

    Influence your organization’s strategic direction.

    Analyst Perspective

    Make better informed data-driven business decisions.

    Technology has been evolving throughout the years, increasing complexity and investments, while putting more stress on operations and people involved. As an IT leader, you are now entrusted to run your outfit as a business, sit at the executive table as a true partner, and be involved in making decisions that best suit your organization. Therefore, you have an obligation to fulfill the needs of your end customers and live up to their expectations, which is not an easy task.

    IT financial management (ITFM) helps you generate value to your organization’s clientele by bringing necessary trade-offs to light, while driving effective dialogues with your business partners and leadership team.

    This research will focus on Info-Tech’s approach to ITFM maturity, aiming for a state of continuous improvement, where an organization can learn and grow as it adapts to change. As the ITFM practice matures, IT and business leaders will be able to better understand one another and together make better business decisions, driven by data.

    This client advisory presentation and accompanying tool seek to support IT leaders and ITFM practitioners in evaluating and improving their current maturity. It will help document both current and target states as well as prioritize focus areas for improvement.

    Photo of Bilal Alberto Saab, Research Director, IT Financial Management, Info-Tech Research Group. Bilal Alberto Saab
    Research Director, IT Financial Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    The value of ITFM is undermined

    ITFM is often discarded and not given enough importance and relevance due to the operational nature of IT, and the specialized skillset of its people, leading to several problems and challenges, such as:

    • Unfamiliarity: Lack of knowledge and understanding related to ITFM maturity.
    • Shortsightedness: Randomly reacting to changing circumstances.
    • Exchange: Inability to consistently drive dialogues.
    • Perception: IT is perceived as a cost center instead of a trustworthy strategic partner.

    Constructive dialogues with business partners are not the norm

    Business-driven conversations around financials (spending, cost, revenue) are a rarity in IT due to several factors, including:

    • Foundation: Weak governance, inadequate skillset, and less than perfect processes and tools.
    • Data: Lack of adequate taxonomy/data model, alongside inaccurate data leading to poor reporting and insights.
    • Language: Lack of a common vocabulary across the organization.
    • Organization culture: No alignment, alongside minimal communication and collaboration between IT and business partners.

    Follow Info-Tech’s approach to move up the ITFM maturity ladder

    Mature your ITFM practice by activating the means to make informed business decisions.

    Info-Tech’s methodology helps you move the dial by focusing on three maturity focus areas:

    • Build an ITFM Foundation
    • Manage and Monitor IT Spending
    • Bridge the Language Barrier

    Info-Tech Insight

    Influence your organization’s strategic direction by maturing your ITFM practice.

    What is ITFM?

    ITFM is not just about finance.

    • ITFM has evolved from traditional budgeting, accounting, and cost optimization; however, it is much more than those activities alone.
    • It starts with understanding the financial implications of technology by adopting different perspectives to become adept in communicating with various stakeholders, including finance, business partners, IT managers, and your CEO.
    • Armed with this knowledge, ITFM helps you address a variety of questions, such as:
      • How are technology funds being spent?
      • Which projects is IT prioritizing and why?
      • What are the resources needed to speed IT delivery?
      • What’s the value of IT within the organization?
    • ITFM’s main objective is thus to improve decision-making capabilities by facilitating communication between IT leaders and stakeholders, while enabling a customer focus attitude throughout the organization.

    “ITFM embeds technology in financial management practices. Through cost, demand, and value, ITFM brings technology and business together, forging the necessary relationships and starting the right conversations to enable the best decisions for the organization.”
    – Monica Braun, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Your challenge

    IT leaders struggle to articulate and communicate business value.

    • IT spending is often questioned by different stakeholders, such as business partners and various IT business units. These questions, usually resulting from shifts in business needs, may revolve around investments, expenditures, services, and speed to market, among others. While IT may have an idea about its spending habits, aligning it to the business strategy may prove difficult.
    • IT staff often does not have access to, or knowledge of, the business model and its intricacies. In an operational environment, the focus tends to be on technical issues rather than overall value.
    • People tend to fear what they do not know. Some business managers may not be comfortable with technology. They do not recognize the implications and ramifications of certain implementations or understand the related terminology, which puts a strain on any conversation.

    “Value is not the numbers you visualize on a chart, it’s the dialogue this data generates with your business partners and leadership team.”
    – Dave Kish, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Technology is constantly evolving

    Increasing IT spending and decision-making complexity.

    Timeline of IT technology evolution, starting with 'Timesharing' in the 1980s to 'All Things Digital' in the 2020s. 'IT Spend Growth' grows from start to finish.

    Common obstacles

    IT leaders are not able to have constructive dialogues with their stakeholders.

    • The way IT funds are spent has changed significantly, moving from the purchase of discrete hardware and software tools to implementing data lakes, cloud solutions, the metaverse and blockchain. This implies larger investments and more critical decisions. Conversations around interoperability, integration, and service-based solutions that focus more on big-picture architecture than day-to-day operations have become the norm.
    • Speed to market is now a survival criterion for most organizations, requiring IT to shift rapidly based on changing priorities and customer expectations. This leads to the need for greater financial oversight, with the CFO as the gatekeeper. Today’s IT leaders need to possess both business and financial management savvy to justify their spending with various stakeholders.
    • Any IT budget increase is tied to expectations of greater value. Hence, the compelling demands for IT to prove its worth to the business. Promoting value comes in two ways: 1) objectively, based on data, KPIs, and return on investment; and 2) subjectively, based on stakeholder satisfaction, alongside relationships. Building trust, credibility, and confidence can go a long way.

    In a technology-driven world, advances come at a price. With greater spending required, more complex and difficult conversations arise.

    Constructive dialogues are key

    You don’t know what you don’t know.

    • IT, being historically focused on operations, has become a hub for technically savvy personnel. On the downside, technology departments are often alien to business, causing problems such as:
      • IT staff have no knowledge of the business model and lack customer focus.
      • Business is not comfortable with technology and related jargon.
    • The lack of two-way communication and business alignment is hence an important ramification. If the business does not understand technology, and IT does not speak in business terms, where does that lead us?
    • Poor data quality and governance practices, alongside overly manual processes can only exasperate the situation.

    IT Spending Survey

    79% of respondents believe that decisions taking too long to make is either a significant or somewhat of a challenge (Flexera 2022 Tech Spend Pulse; N=501).

    81% of respondents believe that ensuring spend efficiency (avoiding waste) is either a challenge or somewhat of a challenge (Flexera 2022 Tech Spend Pulse; N=501).

    ITFM is trailing behind

    IT leaders must learn to speak business.

    In today’s world, where organizations are driving customer experience through technology investments, having a seat at the table means IT leaders must be well versed in business language and practice, including solid financial management skills.

    However, IT staff across all industries aren’t very confident in how well IT is doing in managing its finances. This becomes evident after looking at three core processes:

    • Demonstrating IT’s value to the business.
    • Accounting of costs and budgets.
    • Optimizing costs to gain the best return on investment.

    Recent data from 4,137 respondents to Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Diagnostic shows that while most IT staff feel that these three financial management processes are important, notably fewer feel that IT management is effective at executing on them.

    IT leadership’s capabilities around fundamental cost data capture appear to be lagging, not to mention the essential value-added capabilities around optimizing costs and demonstrating IT’s contribution to business value.

    Bar charts comparing percentages of people who 'Agree process is important' and 'Agree process is effective' for three processes: Business Value, Cost & Budget Management, and Cost Optimization. In all instances, the importance outweighed the perceived effectiveness.
    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, IT Management & Governance Diagnostic, 2023.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    We take a holistic approach to ITFM and support you throughout your maturity journey.

    Visualization of the IT maturity levels with three goals at the bottom, 'Build am ITFM Foundation', 'Manage & Monitor IT Spending', and 'Bridge the Language Barrier'. The 5 levels, from bottom to top, are 'Nascent - Level 1, Inability to consistently deliver financial planning services', 'Cost Operator - Level 2, Rudimentary financial planning capabilities', 'Trusted Coordinator - Level 3, Enablement of business through cost-effective supply of technology', 'Value Optimizer - Level 4, Effective impact on business performance', and 'Strategic Partner - Level 5, Influence on the organization's strategic direction'.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    • Info-Tech has a methodology and set of tools that will help assess your ITFM maturity and take the first step in developing an improvement plan. We have identified three maturity focus areas:
      • Build an ITFM Foundation
      • Manage and Monitor IT Spending
      • Bridge the Language Barrier
    • No matter where you currently stand in your ITFM practice, there is always room for improvement. Hence, a maturity assessment should be viewed as a self-improvement tool, which is only valuable if you are willing to act on it.

    Note: See Appendix A for maturity level definitions and descriptions.

    Climb the maturity ladder

    By growing along three maturity focus areas.

    A diagram with '3 Maturity Focus Areas' and '9 Maturity Levers' within them. The first area is 'Build an ITFM Foundation' with levers 'Establish your Team', 'Set up your Governance Structure', and 'Adopt ITFM Processes & Tools'. The second area is 'Manage & Monitor IT Spending', with levers 'Standardize your Taxonomy & Data Model', 'Identify, Gather & Prepare your Data', and 'Analyze your Findings and Develop your Reports'. The third area is 'Bridge the Language Barrier' with levers 'Communicate your IT Spending', 'Educate the Masses', and 'Influence your Organization's Culture'.

    Info-Tech identified three maturity focus areas, each containing three levers.

    Identify where you stand across the nine maturity levers, detect the gaps, and determine your priorities as a first step to develop an improvement plan.

    Note: See Appendix B for maturity level definitions and descriptions per lever.

    Key project deliverables

    Each step of this activity is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template

    A template of an ITFM maturity assessment report that can be customized based on your own results.

    IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    A workbook including an ITFM maturity survey, generating a summary of your current state, target state, and priorities.

    Measure the value of this activity

    Reach your 12-month maturity target.

    • Determine your 12-month maturity target, identify your gaps, and set your priorities.
    • Use the ITFM maturity assessment to kickstart your improvement plan by developing actionable initiatives.
    • Implement your initiatives and monitor your progress to reach your 12-month target.

    Sample of a result page from the ITFM maturity assessment.

    Build your improvement plan and implement your initiatives to move the dial and climb the maturity ladder.

    Sample of a result page from the ITFM maturity assessment with a graph.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Step 1

    Prepare for the ITFM maturity assessment

    Content Overview

    1. Identify your stakeholders
    2. Set the context
    3. Determine the methodology
    4. Identify assessment takers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • CFO/finance director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT audit lead
    • Other IT management

    1. Prepare to take the ITFM maturity assessment

    3 hours

    Input: Understanding your context, objectives, and methodology

    Output: ITFM maturity assessment stakeholders and their objectives, ITFM maturity assessment methodology, ITFM maturity assessment takers

    Materials: 1a. Prepare for Assessment tab in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: CIO/IT director, CFO/finance director, IT finance lead, IT audit lead, Other IT management

    1. Identify your stakeholders and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool (see next slides). We recommend having representatives from different business units across the organization, most notably IT, IT finance, finance, and IT audit.
    2. Set the context with your stakeholders and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool. Discuss the reason behind taking the ITFM maturity assessment among the various stakeholders. Why do each of your stakeholders want to take the assessment? What are their main objectives? What would they like to achieve?
    3. Determine the methodology and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool. Discuss how you want to go about taking the assessment with your stakeholders. Do you want to have representatives from each business unit take the assessment individually, then share and discuss their findings? Do you prefer forming a working group with representatives from each business unit and go through the assessment together? Or does any of your stakeholders have a different suggestion? You will have to consider the effort, skillset, and knowledge required.
    4. Identify the assessment takers and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool. Determine who will be taking the assessment (specific names of stakeholders). Consider their availability, knowledge, and skills.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Document your stakeholders, objectives, and methodology

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Prepare for Assessment worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to document stakeholders, objectives, and methodology (table range: columns B to G and rows 8 to 15).

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: 'Maturity Assessment Stakeholders'.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Text Enter the full name of each stakeholder on a separate row.
    D Text Enter the job title related to each stakeholder.
    E Text Enter the objective(s) related to each stakeholder.
    F Text Enter the agreed upon methodology.
    G Text Enter any notes or comments per stakeholder (optional).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the 1a. Prepare for Assessment tab.
    2. Enter the full names and job titles of the ITFM maturity assessment stakeholders.
    3. Document the maturity assessment objective of each of your stakeholders.
    4. Document the agreed-upon methodology.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Document your assessment takers

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Prepare for Assessment worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to document assessment takers (table range: columns B to E and rows 18 to 25).

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: 'Maturity Assessment Takers'.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Text Enter the full name of each assessment taker on a separate row.
    D Text Enter the job title related to each stakeholder to identify which party is being represented per assessment taker.
    E Text Enter any notes or comments per stakeholder (optional).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the 1a. Prepare for Assessment tab.
    2. Enter the full name of each assessment taker, along with the job title of the stakeholder they are representing.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Step 2

    Take the ITFM maturity assessment

    Content Overview

    1. Complete the survey
    2. Review your assessment results
    3. Determine your priorities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • CFO/finance director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT audit lead
    • Other IT management

    2. Take the ITFM maturity assessment

    3 hours

    Input: Understanding of your ITFM current state and 12-month target state, ITFM maturity assessment results

    Output: ITFM current- and target-state maturity levels, average scores, and variance, ITFM current- and target-state average scores, variance, and priority by maturity focus area and maturity lever

    Materials: 1b. Glossary, 2a. Assess ITFM Foundation, 2b. Assess Mngt. & Monitoring, 2c. Assess Language, and 3. Assessment Summary tabs in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: CIO/IT director, CFO/finance director, IT finance lead, IT audit lead, Other IT management

    1. Complete the survey: select the current and target state of each statement – refer to the glossary as needed for definitions of key terms – in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool (see next slides). There are three tabs (one per maturity focus area) with three tables each (nine maturity levers). Review and discuss statements with all assessment takers: consider variations, differing opinions, and reach an agreement on each statement inputs.
    2. Review assessment results: navigate to the Assessment Summary tab in the ITFM maturity assessment tool (see next slides) to view your results. Review and discuss with all assessment takers: consider any shocking output and adjust survey input if necessary.
    3. Determine your priorities: decide on the priority (Low/Medium/High) by maturity focus area and/or maturity lever. Rank your maturity focus area priorities from 1 to 3 and your maturity lever priorities from 1 to 9. Consider the feasibility in terms of timeframe, effort, and skillset required, positive and negative impacts on business and technology, likelihood of failure, and necessary approvals. Document your priorities in the ITFM maturity assessment tool (see next slides).
      Review and discuss priorities with all assessment takers: consider variations, differing opinions, and reach an agreement on each priority.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Complete the survey

    Excel workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Survey worksheets

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete the survey.

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: Survey worksheets.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: ITFM maturity statement to assess.
    D, E Dropdown Select the maturity levels of your current and target states. One of five maturity levels for each statement, from “1. Nonexistent” (lowest maturity) to “5. Advanced” (highest maturity).
    F, G, H Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: scores associated with your current and target state selection, along with related variance (column G – column F).
    I Text Enter any notes or comments per ITFM maturity statement (optional).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the survey tabs: 2a. Assess ITFM Foundation, 2b. Assess Management and Monitoring, and 2c. Assess Language.
    2. Select the appropriate current and target maturity levels.
    3. Add any notes or comments per ITFM maturity statement where necessary or helpful.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Review your overall result

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Assessment Summary worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to review your results.

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: Assessment Summary worksheet.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    K Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    L Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: Current State, Target State, and Variance entries. Please ignore the current state benchmark, it’s a placeholder for future reference.
    M Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: average overall maturity score for your Current State and Target State entries, along with related Variance.
    N, O Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: maturity level and related name based on the overall average score (column M), where level 1 corresponds to an average score less than or equal to 1.49, level 2 corresponds to an average score between 1.5 and 2.49 (inclusive), level 3 corresponds to an average score between 2.5 and 3.49 (inclusive), level 4 corresponds to an average score between 3.5 and 4.49 (inclusive), and level 5 corresponds to an average score between 4.5 and 5 (inclusive).
    P, Q Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: maturity definition and related description based on the maturity level (column N).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to tab 3. Assessment Summary.
    2. Review your overall current state and target state result along with the corresponding variance.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Set your priorities

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Assessment Summary worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to review your results per maturity focus area and maturity lever, then prioritize accordingly.

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: Assessment Summary worksheet.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: ITFM maturity focus area or lever, depending on the table.
    D Placeholder Ignore this column because it’s a placeholder for future reference.
    E, F, G Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: average score related to the current state and target state, along with the corresponding variance per maturity focus area or lever (depending on the table).
    H Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: preliminary priority based on the average variance (column G), where Low corresponds to an average variance between 0 and 0.5 (inclusive), Medium corresponds to an average variance between 0.51 and 0.99 (inclusive), and High corresponds to an average variance greater than or equal to 1.
    J Dropdown Select your final priority (Low, Medium, or High) per ITFM maturity focus area or lever, depending on the table.
    K Whole Number Enter the appropriate rank based on your priorities; do not use the same number more than once. A whole number between 1 and 3 to rank ITFM maturity focus areas, and between 1 and 9 to rank ITFM maturity levers, depending on the table.

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to tab 3. Assessment Summary.
    2. Review your current-state and target-state result along with the corresponding variance per maturity focus area and maturity lever.
    3. Select the appropriate priority for each maturity focus area and maturity lever.
    4. Enter a unique rank for each maturity focus area (1 to 3).
    5. Enter a unique rank for each maturity lever (1 to 9).

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Step 3

    Communicate your ITFM maturity results

    Content Overview

    1. Review your assessment charts
    2. Customize the assessment report
    3. Communicate your results

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • CFO/finance director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT audit lead
    • Other IT management

    3. Communicate your ITFM maturity results

    3 hours

    Input: ITFM maturity assessment results

    Output: Customized ITFM maturity assessment report

    Materials: 3. Assessment Summary tab in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool, ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template

    Participants: CIO/IT director, CFO/finance director, IT finance lead, IT audit lead, Other IT management

    1. Review assessment charts: navigate to the Assessment Summary tab in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool (see next slides) to view your results and related charts.
    2. Edit the report template: complete the template based on your results and priorities to develop your customized ITFM maturity assessment report (see next slide).
    3. Communicate results: communicate and deliberate the assessment results with assessment takers at a first stage, and with your stakeholders at a second stage. The objective is to agree on next steps, including developing an improvement plan.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Review assessment charts

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Assessment Summary worksheet

    Refer to the example below on charts depicting different views of the maturity assessment results across the three focus areas and nine levers.

    Samples of different tabs from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool: 'Assessment Summary tab: From cell B49 to cell M100' and 'Assessment Summary tab: From cell K13 to cell Q34'.

    From the Excel workbook, after completing your potential initiatives and filling all related entries in the Outline Initiatives tab:

    1. Navigate to tab 3. Assessment Summary.
    2. Review each of the charts.
    3. Navigate back to the survey tabs to examine, drill down, and amend individual entries as you deem necessary.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Customize your report

    PowerPoint presentation: ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template

    Refer to the example below on slides depicting different views of the maturity assessment results across the three maturity focus areas and nine maturity levers.

    Samples of different slides from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template, detailed below.

    Slide 6: Edit levels based on your assessment results. Copy and paste the appropriate maturity level definition and description from slide 4.

    Slide 7: Copy related charts from the assessment summary tab in the Excel workbook and remove the chart title. You can use the “Outer Offset: Bottom” shadow under shape effects on the chart.

    Slide 8: Copy related charts from the assessment summary tab in the Excel workbook and remove the chart title and legend. You can use the “Outer Offset: Center” shadow under shape effects on the chart.

    From the ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template:

    1. Edit the report based on your results found in the assessment summary tab of the Excel workbook (see previous slide).
    2. Review slides 6 to 8 and bring necessary adjustments.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template

    Make informed business decisions

    Take a holistic approach to ITFM.

    • A thorough understanding of your technology spending in relation to business needs and drivers is essential to make informed decisions. As a trusted partner, you cannot have effective conversations around budgets and cost optimization without a solid foundation.
    • It is important to realize that ITFM is not a one-time exercise, but a continuous, sustainable process to educate (teach, mentor, and train), increase transparency, and assign responsibility.
    • Move up the ITFM maturity ladder by improving across three maturity focus areas:
      • Build an ITFM Foundation
      • Manage and Monitor IT Spending
      • Bridge the Language Barrier

    What’s Next?

    Communicate your maturity results with stakeholders and develop an actionable ITFM improvement plan.

    And remember, having informed discussions with your business partners and stakeholders, where technology helps propel your organization forward, is priceless!

    IT Financial Management Team

    Photo of Dave Kish, Practice Lead, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Dave Kish
    Practice Lead, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Jennifer Perrier
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Angie Reynolds
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Monica Braun
    Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Rex Ding
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Aman Kumari
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Amy Byalick, Vice President, IT Finance, Info-Tech Research Group. Amy Byalick
    Vice President, IT Finance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Amy Byalick is an IT Finance practitioner with 15 years of experience supporting CIOs and IT leaders elevating the IT financial storytelling and unlocking insights. Amy is currently working at Johnson Controls as the VP, IT Finance, previously working at PepsiCo, AmerisourceBergen, and Jacobs.
    Photo of Carol Carr, Technical Counselor, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group. Carol Carr
    Technical Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Scott Fairholm, Executive Counselor, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group. Scott Fairholm
    Executive Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Gokul Rajan, Executive Counselor, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group. Gokul Rajan
    Executive Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Allison Kinnaird, Practice Lead, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group. Allison Kinnaird
    Practice Lead, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Isabelle Hertanto, Practice Lead, Security & Privacy, Info-Tech Research Group. Isabelle Hertanto
    Practice Lead, Security & Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of the IT spending transparency research. Achieve IT Spending Transparency

    Mature your ITFM practice by activating the means to make informed business decisions.

    Sample of the IT cost optimization roadmap research. Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Develop an IT cost optimization strategy based on your specific circumstances and timeline.

    Bibliography

    Eby, Kate. “The Complete Guide to Organizational Maturity: Models, Levels, and Assessments.” Smartsheet, 8 June 2022. Web.

    “Financial Management Maturity Model.” National Audit Office, n.d. Accessed 28 Apr. 2023.

    “ITFM/TBM Program Maturity Guide.” Nicus Software, n.d. Accessed 28 Apr. 2023.

    Jouravlev, Roman. "Service Financial Management: ITIL 4 Practice Guide." Axelos, 2020.

    McCarthy, Seamus. “Financial Management Maturity Model: A Good Practice Guide.” Office of the Comptroller & Auditor General, 26 June 2018. Web.

    “Principles for Effective Risk Data Aggregation and Risk Reporting.“ Bank for International Settlements, Jan. 2013. Web.

    “Role & Influence of the Technology Decision-Maker 2022.” Foundry, 2022. Web.

    Stackpole, Beth. “State of the CIO, 2022: Focus turns to IT fundamentals.” CIO, 21 March 2022. Web.

    “Tech Spend Pulse.” Flexera, 2022. Web.

    Appendix A

    Definition and Description
    Per Maturity Level

    ITFM maturity levels and definitions

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to consistently deliver financial planning services ITFM practices are almost inexistent. Only the most basic financial tasks and activities are being performed on an ad hoc basis to fulfill the Finance department’s requests.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Rudimentary financial planning capabilities. ITFM activities revolve around minimizing the IT budget as much as possible. ITFM practices are not well defined, and IT’s financial view is limited to day-to-day technical operations.
    IT is only involved in low complexity decision making, where financial conversations center on general ledger items and IT spending.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Enablement of business through cost-effective supply of technology. ITFM activities revolve around becoming a proficient and cost-effective technology supplier to business partners.
    ITFM practices are in place, with moderate coordination and adherence to execution. Various IT business units coordinate to produce a consolidated financial view focused on business services.
    IT is involved in moderate complexity decision making, as a technology subject matter expert, where financial conversations center on IT spending in relation to technology services or solutions provided to business partners.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Effective impact on business performance. ITFM activities revolve around optimizing existing technology investments to improve both IT and business performance.
    ITFM practices are well managed, established, documented, repeatable, and integrated as necessary across the organization. IT’s financial view tie technology investments to lines of business, business products, and business capabilities.
    Business partners are well informed on the technology mix and drive related discussion. IT is trusted to contribute to complex decision making around existing investments to cost-effectively plan initiatives, as well as enhance business performance.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Influence on the organization’s strategic direction. ITFM activities revolve around predicting the outcome of new or potential technology investments to continuously optimize business performance.
    ITFM practices are fully optimized, reviewed, and improved in a continuous and sustainable manner, and related execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback. IT’s financial view is holistic and fully integrated with the business, with an outlook on innovation, growth, and strategic transformation.
    Business and IT leaders know the financial ramifications of every business and technology investment decision. IT is trusted to contribute to strategic decision making around potential and future investments to grow and transform the business.

    Appendix B

    Maturity Level Definitions and Descriptions
    Per Lever

    Establish your ITFM team

    Maturity focus area: Build an ITFM foundation.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide any type of financial insight.ITFM tasks, activities, and functions are not being met in any way, shape, or form.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide basic financial insights.There is no dedicated ITFM team.


    Basic ITFM tasks, activities, and functions are being performed on an ad hoc basis, such as high-level budget reporting.

    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide basic business insights.A dedicated team is fulfilling essential ITFM tasks, activities, and functions.


    ITFM team can combine and analyze financial and technology data to produce necessary reports.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide valuable business driven insights.A dedicated ITFM team with well-defined roles and responsibilities can provide effective advice to IT leaders, in a timely fashion, and positively influence IT decisions.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to influence both technology and business decisions.A dedicated and highly specialized ITFM team is trusted and valued by both IT and Business leaders.


    Insights provided by the ITFM team can influence and shape the organization’s strategy.

    Set up your governance structure

    Maturity focus area: Build an ITFM foundation

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to ensure any adherence to rules and regulations.ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to ensure basic adherence to rules and regulations.Basic ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are in place, developed on an ad hoc basis, with no apparent coherence or complete documentation.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to ensure compliance to rules and regulations, as well as accountability across ITFM processes.Essential ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are in place, coherent, and documented, aiming to (a) comply with rules and regulations, and (b) provide clear accountability.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to ensure compliance to rules and regulations, as well as structure, transparency, and business alignment across ITFM processes.ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are well defined, coherent, documented, and regularly reviewed, aiming to (a) comply with rules and regulations, (b) provide clear accountability, and (c) maintain business alignment.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to:
    • Ensure compliance to rules and regulations, as well as ITFM processes are transparent, structured, focused on business objectives, and support decision making.
    • Reinforce and shape the organization culture.
    ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to (a) comply with rules and regulations, (b) provide clear accountability, (c) maintain business alignment, and (d) facilitate the decision-making process.


    Enforcement of the ITFM governance structure can influence the organization culture.

    Adopt ITFM processes and tools

    Maturity focus area: Build an ITFM foundation.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to deliver IT financial planning and performance output.ITFM processes and tools are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to deliver basic IT financial planning output.Basic ITFM processes and tools are in place, developed on an ad hoc basis, with no apparent coherence or complete documentation.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to deliver accurate IT financial output and basic IT performance output in a consistent cadence.Essential ITFM processes and tools are in place, coherent, and documented, aiming to (a) maintain integrity across activities, tasks, methodologies, data, and reports; (b) deliver IT financial planning and performance output needed by stakeholders; and (c) provide clear accountability. ITFM tools and processes are adopted by the ITFM team and some IT business units but are not fully integrated.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to deliver accurate IT financial planning and performance output at the needed level of detail to stakeholders in a consistent cadence.ITFM processes and tools are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to (a) maintain integrity across activities, tasks, methodologies, data, and reports; (b) deliver IT financial planning and performance output needed by stakeholders; (c) provide clear accountability; and (d) facilitate decision-making. ITFM tools and processes are adopted by IT and business partners but are not fully integrated.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to:
    • Deliver accurate IT financial planning and performance output at the needed level of detail to stakeholders.
    • Leverage IT financial planning and performance output in real time and when needed by stakeholders.
    ITFM processes and tools are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to (a) maintain integrity across activities, tasks, methodologies, data, and reports; (b) deliver IT financial planning and performance output needed by stakeholders; (c) provide clear accountability; and (d) facilitate decision making.


    ITFM processes and tools are automated to the full extent needed by the organization, utilized to their full potential, and integrated into a single enterprise platform, providing a holistic view of IT spending and IT performance.

    Standardize your taxonomy and data model

    Maturity focus area: Manage and monitor IT spending.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide transparency across technology spending.ITFM taxonomy and data model are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide transparency and support IT financial planning data, analysis, and reporting needs of finance stakeholders.ITFM taxonomy and data model are in place, developed on an ad hoc basis, with no apparent coherence or complete documentation, to comply with, and meet the needs of finance stakeholders.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide transparency and support IT financial planning and performance data, analysis, and reporting needs of IT and finance stakeholders.ITFM taxonomy and data model are in place, coherent, and documented to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide transparency and support IT financial planning and performance data, analysis, and reporting needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.ITFM taxonomy and data model are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to provide (a) a holistic view of IT spending and IT performance, (b) visibility and transparency, (c) flexibility, and (d) valuable insights to facilitate data driven decision making.


    ITFM taxonomy and data model are standardized to meet the needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders, but not flexible enough to be adjusted in a timely fashion as needed.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to:
    • Provide transparency and support IT financial planning and performance data, analysis, and reporting needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.
    • Change to meet evolving needs.
    ITFM taxonomy and data model are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to provide (a) a holistic view of IT spending and IT performance, (b) visibility and transparency, (c) flexibility, and (d) valuable insights to facilitate data driven decision making.


    ITFM taxonomy and data model are standardized and meet the changing needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.

    Identify, gather, and prepare your data

    Maturity focus area: Manage and monitor IT spending.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide accurate and complete across technology spending.ITFM data needs and requirements are not understood.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide accurate, but incomplete IT financial planning data to meet the needs of finance stakeholders.Technology spending data is extracted, transformed, and loaded on an ad hoc basis to meet the needs of finance stakeholders.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide accurate and complete IT financial planning data to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders, but IT performance data remain incomplete.IT financial planning data is extracted, transformed, and loaded in a regular cadence to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders.


    IT financial planning data is (a) complete and accurate, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) regularly validated for inconsistencies, and (c) sourced from the organization’s system of record.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide accurate and complete IT financial planning and performance data to meet the needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.ITFM data needs and requirements are understood.


    ITFM data is extracted, transformed, and loaded in a regular cadence to meet the needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.


    IT financial planning and performance data are (a) complete and accurate, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) regularly validated for inconsistencies, and (c) sourced from the organization’s system of record.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to provide accurate and complete IT financial planning and performance data real time and when needed by IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.ITFM data needs and requirements are understood.


    IT financial planning and performance data are (a) complete and accurate, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) regularly validated for inconsistencies, (c) available and refreshed as needed, and (d) sourced from the organization’s system of record.

    Analyze your findings and develop your reports

    Maturity focus area: Manage and monitor IT spending.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide any type of financial insight.ITFM analysis and reports are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide basic financial insights.IT financial planning analysis is conducted on an ad hoc basis to meet the needs of finance stakeholders.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide basic financial planning and performance insights to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders.IT financial planning and performance analysis are methodical and rigorous, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.).


    IT financial planning and performance reports are accurate, precise, and methodical, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.).

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide practical insights and useful recommendations as needed by IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders to facilitate business decision making around technology investments.ITFM analysis and reports support business decision making around technology investments.


    IT financial planning and performance analysis are methodical and rigorous, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.).


    IT financial planning and performance reports are (a) accurate, precise, and methodical, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) fit for purpose, and (c) regularly validated for inconsistencies.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to provide practical insights and useful recommendations as needed by IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders to facilitate strategic decision making.ITFM analysis and reports support strategic decision making.


    IT financial planning and performance analysis are methodical and rigorous, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), and consider multiple point of views (hypotheses, interpretations, opinions, etc.).


    IT financial planning and performance reports are (a) accurate, precise, and methodical, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) fit for purpose, (c) comprehensive, and (d) regularly validated for inconsistencies.

    Communicate your IT spending

    Maturity focus area: Bridge the language barrier.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability of organization stakeholders to communicate and understand each other.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives do not understand one another, and cannot speak the same language.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to understand business and finance requirements.IT understands and meets business and financial planning requirements but does not communicate in a similar language.


    IT cannot influence finance or business decision making.

    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to understand the needs of different stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives and take part in decision making around technology spending.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives understand each other’s needs, but do not communicate in a common language.


    IT leaders provide insights as technology subject matter experts, where conversations center on IT spending in relation to technology services or solutions provided to business partners.


    IT can influence technology decisions around its own budget.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to communicate in a common vocabulary across the organization and take part in business decision making around technology investments.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives communicate in a common vocabulary and understand one another.


    IT and business leaders, along with their respective teams, collaborate frequently across various initiatives.


    IT leaders provide valuable insight to support and influence business decision making around existing technology investments.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to communicate in a common vocabulary across the organization and take part in strategic decision making.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives communicate in a common vocabulary and understand one another.


    IT and business leaders, along with their respective teams, collaborate frequently across various initiatives.


    IT leaders provide valuable insight to facilitate decision making around potential and future investments to grow and transform the business, thus influencing the organization’s overall strategic direction.

    Educate the masses

    Maturity focus area: Bridge the language barrier.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability of organization stakeholders to acquire knowledge.Educational resources are inexistent.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to acquire financial knowledge and understand financial concepts.IT leaders have access to educational resources to gain the financial knowledge necessary to perform their duties.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to acquire financial and business knowledge and understand related concepts.IT leaders and their respective teams have access to educational resources to gain the financial and business knowledge necessary to perform their duties.


    ITFM team has access to the necessary educational resources to keep up with changing financial regulations and technology developments.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to acquire knowledge, across technology, business, and finance as needed by different organization stakeholders, and the leadership understand concepts across these various domains.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives have access to various educational resources to gain knowledge in different domains as needed.


    IT leaders have a good understanding of business and financial concepts.


    Business leaders have a good understanding of technology concepts.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to acquire knowledge, and understand concepts across technology, business, and finance as needed by different organization stakeholders.The organization promotes continuous learning through well designed programs including training, mentorship, and academic courses. Thus, stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives have access to various educational resources to gain knowledge in different domains as needed.


    IT leaders and their respective teams have a good understanding of business and financial concepts.


    Business leaders and their respective teams have a good understanding of technology concepts.

    Influence your organization’s culture

    Maturity focus area: Bridge the language barrier.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration and continuous improvement.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives operate in silos, and collaboration between different teams is inexistent.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide an environment of cooperation to meet the needs of IT, finance, and business leaders.IT, finance, and business leaders cooperate to meet financial planning requirements as necessary to perform their duties.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration across the organization.IT, finance, and business collaborate on various initiatives.

    ITFM employees are trusted and supported by their stakeholders (IT, finance, and business).

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration and continuous improvement, where employees across the organization feel trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives support and promote continuous improvement, transparency practices, and collaboration across the organization.


    Employees are trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration and continuous improvement, where leaders are willing to change, and employees across the organization feel trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives support and promote continuous improvement, transparency practices, and collaboration across the organization.


    The organization’s leadership is adaptable and open to change.


    Employees are trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.

    Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}470|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • The growth of the Cloud and the evolution of business operations have shown that traditional testing strategies do not work well with modern applications.
    • Organizations require a new framework around testing cloud applications that account for on-demand scalability and self-provisioning.
    • Expectations of application consumers are continually increasing with speed-to-market and quality being the norm.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Cloud technology does not change the traditional testing processes that many organizations have accepted and adopted. It does, however, enhance traditional practices with increased replication capacity, execution speed, and compatibility through its virtual infrastructure and automated processes. Consider these factors when developing the cloud testing strategy.
    • Involving the business in strategy development will keep them engaged and align business drivers with technical initiatives.
    • Implement cloud testing solutions in a well-defined rollout process to ensure business objectives are realized and cloud testing initiatives are optimized.
    • Cloud testing is green and dynamic. Realize the limitations of cloud testing and play on its strengths.

    Impact and Result

    • Engaging in a formal and standardized cloud testing strategy and consistently meeting business needs throughout the organization maintains business buy-in.
    • The Cloud compounds the benefits from virtualization and automation because of the Cloud’s scalability, speed, and off-premise and virtual infrastructure and data storage attributes.
    • Cloud testing presents a new testing avenue. Realize that only certain tests are optimized in the Cloud, i.e., load, stress, and functional testing.

    Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a cloud testing strategy.

    Obtain organizational buy-ins and build a standardized and formal cloud testing strategy.

    • Storyboard: Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps
    • None

    2. Assess the organization's readiness for cloud testing.

    Assess your people, process, and technology for cloud testing readiness and realize areas for improvement.

    • Cloud Testing Readiness Assessment Tool

    3. Plan and manage the resources allocated to each project task.

    Organize and monitor cloud project planning tasks throughout the project's duration.

    • Cloud Testing Project Planning and Monitoring Tool
    [infographic]

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}293|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,459 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
    • Communication and collaboration portfolios are overburdened with redundant and overlapping services. Between Office 365, Slack, Jabber, and WebEx, IT is supporting a collection of redundant apps. This redundancy takes a toll on IT, and on the user.
    • Shadow IT is easier than ever, and cheap sharing tools are viral. Users are literally carrying around computers in their pockets (in the form of smartphones). IT often has no visibility into how these devices – and the applications on them – are used for work.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You don’t know what you don’t know. Unstructured conversations with users will uncover insights.
    • Security is meaningless without usability. If security controls make a tool unusable, then users will rush to adopt something that’s free and easy.
    • Training users on a new tool once isn’t effective. Engage with users throughout the collaboration tool’s lifecycle.

    Impact and Result

    • Few supported apps and fewer unsupported apps. This will occur by ensuring that your collaboration tools will be useful to and used by users. Give users a say through surveys, focus groups, and job shadowing.
    • Lower total cost of ownership and greater productivity. Having fewer apps in the workplace, and better utilizing the functionality of those apps, will mean that IT can be much more efficient at managing your ECS.
    • Higher end-user satisfaction. Tools will be better suited to users’ needs, and users will feel heard by IT.

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a new approach to communication and collaboration apps, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a shared vision on the future of communication and collaboration

    Identify and validate goals and collaboration tools that are used by your users, and the collaboration capabilities that must be supported by your desired ECS.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 1: Create a Shared Vision on the Future of Communication and Collaboration
    • Enterprise Collaboration Strategy Template
    • Building Company Communication and Collaboration Technology Improvement Plan Executive Presentation
    • Communications Infrastructure Stakeholder Focus Group Guide
    • Enterprise Communication and Collaboration System Business Requirements Document

    2. Map a path forward

    Map a path forward by creating a collaboration capability map and documenting your ECS requirements.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 2: Map a Path Forward
    • Collaboration Capability Map

    3. Build an IT and end-user engagement plan

    Effectively engage everyone to ensure the adoption of your new ECS. Engagement is crucial to the overall success of your project.

    • Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy – Phase 3: Proselytize the Change
    • Collaboration Business Analyst
    • Building Company Exemplar Collaboration Marketing One-Pager Materials
    • Communication and Collaboration Strategy Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify What Needs to Change

    The Purpose

    Create a vision for the future of your ECS.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Validate and bolster your strategy by involving your end users.

    Activities

    1.1 Prioritize Components of Your ECS Strategy to Improve

    1.2 Create a Plan to Gather Requirements From End Users

    1.3 Brainstorm the Collaboration Services That Are Used by Your Users

    1.4 Focus Group

    Outputs

    Defined vision and mission statements

    Principles for your ECS

    ECS goals

    End-user engagement plan

    Focus group results

    ECS executive presentation

    ECS strategy

    2 Map Out the Change

    The Purpose

    Streamline your collaboration service portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented the business requirements for your collaboration services.

    Reduced the number of supported tools.

    Increased the effectiveness of training and enhancements.

    Activities

    2.1 Create a Current-State Collaboration Capability Map

    2.2 Build a Roadmap for Desired Changes

    2.3 Create a Future-State Capability Map

    2.4 Identify Business Requirements

    2.5 Identify Use Requirements and User Processes

    2.6 Document Non-Functional Requirements

    2.7 Document Functional Requirements

    2.8 Build a Risk Register

    Outputs

    Current-state collaboration capability map

    ECS roadmap

    Future-state collaboration capability map

    ECS business requirements document

    3 Proselytize the Change

    The Purpose

    Ensure the system is supported effectively by IT and adopted widely by end users.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Unlock the potential of your ECS.

    Stay on top of security and industry good practices.

    Greater end-user awareness and adoption.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop an IT Training Plan

    3.2 Develop a Communications Plan

    3.3 Create Initial Marketing Material

    Outputs

    IT training plan

    Communications plan

    App marketing one-pagers

    Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}548|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • The uncertainty of the pandemic means that employee engagement is at higher risk.
    • Organizations need to think beyond targeting traditional audiences by considering engagement of onsite, remote, and laid-off employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The changing way of work triggered by this pandemic means engagement efforts must be easy to implement and targeted for relevant audiences.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify key drivers to leverage during the pandemic to boost engagement as well as at-risk drivers to focus efforts on.
    • Select quick-win tactics to sustain and boost engagement for relevant target audiences.

    Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Determine the scope

    Evaluate the current state, stakeholder capacity, and target audience of engagement actions.

    • Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic Storyboard
    • Pandemic Engagement Workbook

    2. Identify engagement drivers

    Review impact to engagement drivers in order to prioritize and select tactics for addressing each.

    • Tactics Catalog: Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic
    • Employee Engagement During COVID-19: Manager Tactics

    3. Determine ownership and communicate engagement actions

    Designate owners of tactics, select measurement tools and cadence, and communicate engagement actions.

    • Crisis Communication Guide for HR
    • Crisis Communication Guide for Leaders
    • Leadership Crisis Communication Guide Template
    • HR Action and Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Key Metrics for Every CIO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}119|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • As a CIO, you are inundated with data and information about how your IT organization is performing based on the various IT metrics that exist.
    • The information we receive from metrics is often just that – information. Rarely is it used as a tool to drive the organization forward.
    • CIO metrics need to consider the goals of key stakeholders in the organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The top metrics for CIOs don’t have anything to do with IT.
    • CIOs should measure and monitor metrics that have a direct impact on the business.
    • Be intentional with the metric and number of metrics that you monitor on a regular basis.
    • Be transparent with your stakeholders on what and why you are measuring those specific metrics.

    Impact and Result

    • Measure fewer metrics, but measure those that will have a significant impact on how your deliver value to your organization.
    • Focus on the metrics that you can take action against, rather than simply monitor.
    • Ensure your metrics tie to your top priorities as a CIO.

    Key Metrics for Every CIO Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Key Metrics for Every CIO deck – The top metrics every CIO should measure and act on

    Leverage the top metrics for every CIO to help focus your attention and provide insight into actionable steps.

    • Key Metrics for Every CIO Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Key Metrics for Every CIO

    The top six metrics for CIOs – and they have very little to do with IT

    Analyst Perspective

    Measure with intention

    Be the strategic CIO who monitors the right metrics relevant to their priorities – regardless of industry or organization. When CIOs provide a laundry list of metrics they are consistently measuring and monitoring, it demonstrates a few things.

    First, they are probably measuring more metrics than they truly care about or could action. These “standardized” metrics become something measured out of expectation, not intention; therefore, they lose their meaning and value to you as a CIO. Stop spending time on these metrics you will be unable or unwilling to address.

    Secondly, it indicates a lack of trust in the IT leadership team, who can and should be monitoring these commonplace operational measures. An empowered IT leader will understand the responsibility they have to inform the CIO should a metric be derailing from the desired outcome.

    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, Organizational Transformation Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst
    Organizational Transformation Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    CIOs need to measure a set of specific metrics that:

    • Will support the organization’s vision, their career, and the IT function all in one.
    • Can be used as a tool to make informed decisions and take appropriate actions that will improve the IT function’s ability to deliver value.
    • Consider the influence of critical stakeholders, especially the end customer.
    • Are easily measured at any point in time.
    Common Obstacles

    CIOs often cannot define these metrics because:

    • We confuse the operational metrics IT leaders need to monitor with strategic metrics CIOs need to monitor.
    • Previously monitored metrics did not deliver value.
    • It is hard to decide on a metric that will prove both insightful and easily measurable.
    • We measure metrics without any method or insight on how to take actionable steps forward.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    For every CIO, there are six areas that should be a focus, no matter your organization or industry. These six priorities will inform the metrics worth measuring:

    • Risk management
    • Delivering on business objectives
    • Customer satisfaction
    • Employee engagement
    • Business leadership relations
    • Managing to a budget

    Info-Tech Insight

    The top metrics for a CIO to measure and monitor have very little to do with IT and everything to do with ensuring the success of the business.

    Your challenge

    CIOs are not using metrics as a personal tool to advance the organization:
    • Metrics should be used as a tool by the CIO to help inform the future actions that will be taken to reach the organization’s strategic vision.
    • As a CIO, you need to have a defined set of metrics that will support your career, the organization, and the IT function you are accountable for.
    • CIO metrics must consider the most important stakeholders across the entire ecosystem of the organization – especially the end customer.
    • The metrics for a CIO are distinctly different from the metrics you use to measure the operational effectiveness of the different IT functions.
    “CIOs are businesspeople first and technology people second.” (Myles Suer, Source: CIO, 2019.)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many CIOs:
    • CIOs often do not measure metrics because they are not aware of what should or needs to be measured.
    • As a result of not wanting to measure the wrong thing, CIOs can often choose to measure nothing at all.
    • Or they get too focused on the operational metrics of their IT organization, leaving the strategic business metrics forgotten.
    • Moreover, narrowing the number of metrics that are being measured down to an actionable number is very difficult.
    • We rely only on physical data sets to help inform the measurements, not considering the qualitative feedback received.
    CIO priorities are business priorities

    46% of CIOs are transforming operations, focused on customer experiences and employee productivity. (Source: Foundry, 2022.)

    Finances (41.3%) and customers (28.1%) remain the top two focuses for CIOs when measuring IT effectiveness. All other focuses combine for the remaining 30.6%. (Source: Journal of Informational Technology Management, 2018.)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Organizational goals inform CIO metrics

    Diagram with 'CIO Metrics' at the center surrounded by 'Directive Goals', 'Product/Service Goals', 'IT Goals', and 'Operations Goals', each of which are connected to eachother by 'Customers'.

    The Info-Tech difference:
    1. Every CIO has the same set of priorities regardless of their organization or industry given that these metrics are influenced by similar goals of organizations.
    2. CIO metrics are a tool to help inform the actions that will support each core area in reaching their desired goals.
    3. Be mindful of the goals different business units are using to reach the organization’s strategic vision – this includes your own IT goals.
    4. Directly or indirectly, you will always influence the ability to acquire and retain customers for the organization.

    CIO priorities

    MANAGING TO A BUDGET
    Reducing operational costs and increasing strategic IT spend.
    Table centerpiece for CIO Priorities. DELIVERING ON BUSINESS OBJECTIVES
    Aligning IT initiatives to the vision of the organization.
    CUSTOMER SATISFACTION
    Directly and indirectly impacting customer experience.
    EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT
    Creating an IT workforce of engaged and purpose-driven people.
    RISK MANAGEMENT
    Actively knowing and mitigating threats to the organization.
    BUSINESS LEADERSHIP RELATONS
    Establishing a network of influential business leaders.

    High-level process flow

    How do we use the CIO metrics?
    Process flow that starts at 'Consider - Identify and analyze CIO priorities', and is followed by 'Select priorities - Identify the top priorities for CIOs (see previous slide)', 'Create a measure - Determine a measure that aligns to each priority', 'Make changes & improvements - Take action to improve the measure and reach the goal you are trying to achieve', 'Demonstrate progress - Use the metrics to demonstrate progress against priorities'. Using priority-based metrics allows you to make incremental improvements that can be measured and reported on, which makes program maturation a natural process.

    Example CIO dashboard

    Example CIO dashboard.
    * Arrow indicates month-over-month trend

    Harness the value of metric data

    Metrics are rarely used accurately as a tool
    • When you have good metrics, you can:
      • Ensure employees are focused on the priorities of the organization
      • Have insight to make better decisions
      • Communicate with the business using language that resonates with each stakeholder
      • Increase the performance of your IT function
      • Continually adapt to meet changing business demands
    • Metrics are tools that quantifiably indicate whether a goal is on track to being achieved (proactive) or if the goal was successfully achieved (retroactive)
    • This is often reflected through two metric types:
      • Leading Metrics: The metric indicates if there are actions that should be taken in the process of achieving a desired outcome.
      • Lagging Metrics: Based on the desired outcome, the metric can indicate where there were successes or failures that supported or prevented the outcome from being achieved.
    • Use the data from the metrics to inform your actions. Do not collect this data if your intent is simply to know the data point. You must be willing to act.
    "The way to make a metric successful is by understanding why you are measuring it." (Jeff Neyland CIO)

    CIOs measure strategic business metrics

    Keep the IT leadership accountable for operational metrics
    • Leveraging the IT leadership team, empower and hold each leader accountable for the operational metrics specific to their functional area
    • As a CIO, focus on the metrics that are going to impact the business. These are often tied to people or stakeholders:
      • The customers who will purchase the product or service
      • The decision makers who will fund IT initiatives
      • The champions of IT value
      • The IT employees who will be driven to succeed
      • The owner of an IT risk event
    • By focusing on these priority areas, you can regularly monitor aspects that will have major business impacts – and be able to address those impacts.
    As a CIO, avoid spending time on operational metrics such as:
    • Time to deliver
    • Time to resolve
    • Project delivery (scope, time, money)
    • Application usage
    • User experiences
    • SLAs
    • Uptime/downtime
    • Resource costs
    • Ticket resolution
    • Number of phishing attempts
    Info-Tech Insight

    While operational metrics are important to your organization, IT leaders should be empowered and responsible for their management.

    SECTION 1

    Actively Managing IT Risks

    Actively manage IT risks

    The impact of IT risks to your organization cannot be ignored any further
    • Few individuals in an organization understand IT risks and can proactively plan for the prevention of those threats, making the CIO the responsible and accountable individual when it comes to IT risks – especially the components that tie into cybersecurity.
    • When the negative impacts of an IT threat event are translated into terms that can be understood and actioned by all in the organization, it increases the likelihood of receiving the sponsorship and funding support necessary.
    • Moreover, risk management can be used as a tool to drive the organization toward its vision state, enabling informed risk decisions.

    Risk management metric:

    Number of critical IT threats that were detected and prevented before impact to the organization.

    Beyond risk prevention
    Organizations that have a clear risk tolerance can use their risk assessments to better inform their decisions.
    Specifically, taking risks that could lead to a high return on investment or other key organizational drivers.

    Protect the organization from more than just cyber threats

    Other risk-related metrics:
    • Percentage of IT risks integrated into the organization’s risk management approach.
    • Number of risk management incidents that were not identified by your organization (and the potential financial impact of those risks).
    • Business satisfaction with IT actions to reduce impact of negative IT risk events.
    • Number of redundant systems removed from the organizations portfolio.
    Action steps to take:
    • Create a risk-aware culture, not just with IT folks. The entire organization needs to understand how IT risks are preventable.
    • Clearly demonstrate the financial and reputational impact of potential IT risks and ensure that this is communicated with decision-makers in the organization.
    • Have a single source of truth to document possible risk events and report prevention tactics to minimize the impact of risks.
    • Use this information to recommend budget changes and help make risk-informed decisions.

    49%

    Investing in Risk

    Heads of IT “cited increasing cybersecurity protections as the top business initiative driving IT investments this year” (Source: Foundry, 2022.)

    SECTION 2

    Delivering on Business Objectives

    Delivering on business objectives

    Deliver on initiatives that bring value to your organization and stop benchmarking
    • CIOs often want to know how they are performing in comparison to their competitors (aka where do you compare in the benchmarking?)
    • While this is a nice to know, it adds zero value in demonstrating that you understand your business, let alone the goals of your business
    • Every organization will have a different set of goals it is striving toward, despite being in the same industry, sector, or market.
    • Measuring your performance against the objectives of the organization prevents CIOs from being more technical than it would do them good.

    Business Objective Alignment Metric:

    Percentage of IT metrics have a direct line of impact to the business goals

    Stop using benchmarks to validate yourself against other organizations. Benchmarking does not provide:
    • Insight into how well that organization performed against their goals.
    • That other organizations goals are likely very different from your own organization's goals.
    • It often aggregates the scores so much; good and bad performers stop being clearly identified.

    Provide a clear line of sight from IT metrics to business goals

    Other business alignment metrics:
    • Number of IT initiatives that have a significant impact on the success of the organization's goals.
    • Number of IT initiatives that exceed the expected value.
    • Positive impact ($) of IT initiatives on driving business innovation.
    Action steps to take:
    • Establish a library or dashboard of all the metrics you are currently measuring as an IT organization, and align each of them to one or more of the business objectives your organization has.
    • Leverage the members of the organization’s executive team to validate they understand how your metric ties to the business objective.
    • Any metric that does not have a clear line of sight should be reconsidered.
    • IT metrics should continue to speak in business terms, not IT terms.

    50%

    CIOs drive the business

    The percentage of CEOs that recognize the CIO as the main driver of the business strategy in the next 2-3 years. (Source: Deloitte, 2020.)

    SECTION 3

    Impact on Customer Satisfaction

    Influencing end-customer satisfaction

    Directly or indirectly, IT influences how satisfied the customer is with their product or service
    • Now more than ever before, IT can positively influence the end-customer’s satisfaction with the product or service they purchase.
    • From operational redundancies to the customer’s interaction with the organization, IT can and should be positively impacting the customer experience.
    • IT leaders who take an interest in the customer demonstrate that they are business-focused individuals and understand the intention of what the organization is seeking to achieve.
    • With the CIO role becoming a strategic one, understanding why a customer would or would not purchase your organization’s product or service stops being a “nice to have.”

    Customer satisfaction metric:

    What is the positive impact ($ or %) of IT initiatives on customer satisfaction?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be the one to suggest new IT initiatives that will impact the customer experience – stop waiting for other business leaders to make the recommendation.

    Enhance the end-customer experience with I&T

    Other customer satisfaction metrics:
    • Amount of time CIO spends interacting directly with customers.
    • Customer retention rate.
    • Customer attraction rate.
    Action steps to take:
    • Identify the core IT capabilities that support customer experience. Automation? Mobile application? Personal information secured?
    • Suggest an IT-supported or-led initiative that will enhance the customer experience and meet the business goals. Retention? Acquisition? Growth in spend?
    • This is where operational metrics or dashboards can have a real influence on the customer experience. Be mindful of how IT impacts the customer journey.

    41%

    Direct CX interaction

    In 2022, 41% of IT heads were directly interacting with the end customer. (Source: Foundry, 2022.)

    SECTION 4

    Keeping Employees Engaged

    Keeping employees engaged

    This is about more than just an annual engagement survey
    • As a leader, you should always have a finger on the pulse of how engaged your employees are
    • Employee engagement is high when:
      • Employees have a positive disposition to their place of work
      • Employees are committed and willing to contribute to the organization's success
    • Employee engagement comprises three types of drivers: organizational, job, and retention. As CIO, you have a direct impact on all three drivers.
    • Providing employees with a positive work environment where they are empowered to complete activities in line with their desired skillset and tied to a clear purpose can significantly increase employee engagement.

    Employee engagement metric:

    Number of employees who feel empowered to complete purposeful activities related to their job each day

    Engagement leads to increases in:
    • Innovation
    • Productivity
    • Performance
    • Teamwork
    While reducing costs associated with high turnover.

    Employees daily tasks need to have purpose

    Other employee engagement metrics:
    • Tenure of IT employees at the organization.
    • Number of employees who seek out or use a training budget to enhance their knowledge/skills.
    • Degree of autonomy employees feel they have in their work on a daily basis.
    • Number of collaboration tools provided to enable cross-organizational work.
    Action steps to take:
    • If you are not willing to take actionable steps to address engagement, don’t bother asking employees about it.
    • Identify the blockers to empowerment. Common blockers include insufficient team collaboration, bureaucracy, inflexibility, and feeling unsupported and judged.
    • Ensure there is a consistent understanding of what “purposeful” means. Are you talking about “purposeful” to the organization or the individual?
    • Provide more clarity on what the organization’s purpose is and the vision it is driving toward. Just because you understand does not mean the employees do.

    26%

    Act on engagement

    Only 26% of leaders actually think about and act on engagement every single day. (Source: SHRM, 2022.)

    SECTION 5

    Establishing Trusted Business Relationships

    Establishing trusted business partnerships

    Leverage your relationships with other C-suite executives to demonstrate IT’s value
    • Your relationship with other business peers is critical – and, funny enough, it is impacted by the use of good metrics and data.
    • The performance of your IT team will be recognized by other members of the executive leadership team (ELT) and is a direct reflection of you as a leader.
    • A good relationship with the ELT can alleviate issues if concerns about IT staff surface.
      • Of the 85% of IT leaders working on transformational initiatives, only 30% are trying to cultivate an IT/business partnership (Foundry, 2022).
    • Don’t let other members of the organizations ELT overlook you or the value IT has. Build the key relationships that will drive trust and partnerships.

    Business leadership relationship metric:

    Ability to influence business decisions with trusted partners.

    Some key relationships that are worth forming with other C-suite executives right now include:
    • Chief Sustainability Officer
    • Chief Revenue Officer
    • Chief Marketing Officer
    • Chief Data Officer

    Influence business decisions with trusted partners

    Other business relations metrics:
    • The frequency with which peers on the ELT complain about the IT organization to other ELT peers.
    • Percentage of business leaders who trust IT to make the right choices for their accountable areas.
    • Number of projects that are initiated with a desired solution versus problems with no desired solution.
    Action steps to take:
    • From lunch to the boardroom, it is important you make an effort to cultivate relationships with the other members of the ELT.
    • Identify who the most influential members of the ELT are and what their primary goals or objectives are.
    • Follow through on what you promise you will deliver – if you do not know, do not promise it!
    • What will work for one member of the ELT will not work for another – personalize your approach.

    60%

    Enterprise-wide collaboration

    “By 2023, 60% of CIOs will be primarily measured for their ability to co-create new business models and outcomes through extensive enterprise and ecosystem-wide collaboration.” (Source: IDC, 2021.)

    SECTION 6

    Managing to a Budget

    Managing to a budget

    Every CIO needs to be able to spend within budget while increasing their strategic impact
    • From security, to cloud, to innovating the organization's products and services, IT has a lot of initiatives that demand funds and improve the organization.
    • Continuing to demonstrate good use of the budget and driving value for the organization will ensure ongoing recognition in the form of increased money.
    • 29% of CIOs indicated that controlling costs and expense management was a key duty of a functional CIO (Foundry, 2022).
    • Demonstrating the ability to spend within a defined budget is a key way to ensure the business trusts you.
    • Demonstrating an ability to spend within a defined budget and reducing the cost of operational expenses while increasing spend on strategic initiatives ensures the business sees the value in IT.

    Budget management metric:

    Proportion of IT budget that is strategic versus operational.

    Info-Tech Insight

    CIOs need to see their IT function as its own business – budget and spend like a CEO.

    Demonstrate IT’s ability to spend strategically

    Other budget management metrics:
    • Cost required to lead the organization through a digital transformation.
    • Reduction in operational spend due to retiring legacy solutions.
    • Percentage of budget in the run, grow, and transform categories.
    • Amount of money spent keeping the lights on versus investing in new capabilities.

    Action steps to take:

    • Consider opportunities to automate processes and reduce the time/talent required to spend.
    • Identify opportunities and create the time for resources to modernize or even digitize the organization to enable a better delivery of the products or services to the end customer.
    • Review the previous metrics and tie it back to running the business. If customer satisfaction will increase or risk-related threats decrease through an initiative IT is suggesting, you can make the case for increased strategic spend.

    90%

    Direct CX interaction

    Ninety percent of CIOs expect their budget to increase or remain the same in their next fiscal year. (Source: Foundry, 2022.)

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Jeff Neyland. Jeff Neyland
    Chief Information Officer – University of Texas at Arlington
    Photo of Brett Trelfa. Brett Trelfa
    SVP and CIO – Arkansas Blue Cross Blue Shield
    Blank photo template. Lynn Fyhrlund
    Chief Information Officer – Milwaukee County Department of Administrative Services

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Vicki Van Alphen Executive Counselor Ibrahim Abdel-Kader Research Analyst
    Mary Van Leer Executive Counselor Graham Price Executive Counselor
    Jack Hakimian Vice President Research Valence Howden Principal Research Director
    Mike Tweedie CIO Practice Lead Tony Denford Organization Transformation Practice Lead

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of the 'IT Metrics Library'. IT Metrics Library
    • Use this tool to review commonly used KPIs for each practice area
    • Identify KPI owners, data sources, baselines, and targets. It also suggests action and research for low-performing KPIs.
    • Use the "Action Plan" tab to keep track of progress on actions that were identified as part of your KPI review.
    Sample of 'Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter'. Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to those currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard.
    Sample of 'CIO Priorities 2022'. CIO Priorities 2022
    • Understand how to respond to trends affecting your organization.
    • Determine your priorities based on current state and relevant internal factors.
    • Assign the right resources to accomplish your vision.
    • Consider what new challenges outside of your control will demand a response.

    Bibliography

    “Developing and Sustaining Employee Engagement.” SHRM, 2022.

    Dopson, Elise. “KPIs Vs. Metrics: What’s the Difference & How Do You Measure Both?” Databox, 23 Jun. 2021.

    Shirer, Michael, and Sarah Murray. “IDC Unveils Worldwide CIO Agenda 2022 Predictions.” IDC, 27 Oct. 2021.

    Suer, Myles. “The Most Important Metrics to Drive IT as a Business.” CIO, 19 Mar. 2019.

    “The new CIO: Business Savvy.” Deloitte Insights. Deloitte, 2020.

    “2022 State of the CIO: Rebalancing Act: CIO’s Operational Pandemic-Era Innovation.” Foundry, 2022.

    “Why Employee Engagement Matters for Leadership at all Levels.” Walden University, 20 Dec. 2019.

    Zhang, Xihui, et al. “How to Measure IT Effectiveness: The CIO’s Perspective.” Journal of Informational Technology Management, 29(4). 2018.

    Terms of use

     These Terms of Use state the terms and conditions under which you may use this website and the Services, which are the property of Tymans Group BV. ("TY"). Your use of this site and the Services constitutes acceptance of these Terms of Use.
    1. General Use Restrictions

    TY services, advice, materials, products, websites, and networks (collectively the "Services") are to be used for the User (meaning a named individual user that uses the publicly available Services or is authorized by TY in a service agreement to use the Services that require paid access) use and benefit only pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription and may not be disclosed, disseminated or distributed to any other party, except as TY otherwise agrees in writing. The User will not circumvent any encryption or otherwise gain access to Services for which the User has not been expressly granted the appropriate rights of access.

    The User will not use the Services for or knowingly transmit to TY or upload to any TY site or network any illegal, improper, or unacceptable material or use them for illegal, improper, or unacceptable practices, including without limitation the dissemination of any defamatory, fraudulent, infringing, abusive, lewd, obscene or pornographic material, viruses, trojan horses, time bombs, worms, or other harmful code designed to interrupt, destroy, or limit the functionality of any software, hardware or communications equipment, unsolicited mass email or other internet-based advertising campaigns, privacy breaches, denial of use attacks, spoofing, or impersonation.

    1. Copyright

    The Services are © Tymans Group BV. All rights reserved.

    The Services are owned by and copyrighted by TY and other parties and may contain trademarks of TY or others. They are protected by Canadian, US, and international copyright and trademark laws and conventions.

    User may use the Services solely for his or their own information purposes pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription. The User may download any of the Service's tools or templates for his or her individual use but may not distribute any articles, tools, templates, or blueprints internally, subject to the exceptions below. The User may create derivative works from the Service's tools or templates and distribute these for internal use but may not distribute these derivative works externally for any commercial or resale purposes.

    Any other reproduction or dissemination of the Services in any form or by any means is forbidden without TY's written permission, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the User will not:

    • A. record and re-transmit the Service over any network (including any local area network), except as otherwise stated above;
    • B. use any Service in any timesharing, service bureau, bulletin board, or similar arrangement or public display;
    • C. post any Service to any other online service (including bulletin boards or the internet);
    • D. sublicense, lease, sell, offer for sale or assign the Service; or
    • E. use TY's name or any excerpts from the Services in the promotion of its products or services.
    1. Users

    Users must be authorized to use the Services by TY. Users must maintain and protect the confidentiality of any password(s) and are responsible for ensuring that the passwords are effective. Users shall advise TY immediately if they discover that their password has been compromised at the following number: 1-888-670-8889. If you are an organization that is party to a service agreement with TY, references in these Terms of Use to "User(s)" include you, and you are responsible for compliance by named individual Users within your organization with these Terms of Use.

    1. User Perspective

    For the benefit of all Users, TY's research services include the ability for Users to (i) participate in the creation of research by contributing User perspectives for publication on TY's websites and (ii) participate in industry-specific community groups and other forums by contributing discussion posts. All such contributions are voluntary with the full consent of the User. If your account is used to contribute content to TY's websites (collectively, "User Contributions"), you agree to accept sole responsibility for those User Contributions, including the information, statements, facts, and material contained in any form or medium (e.g., text, audio, video, and photographic) therein. To the extent Users contribute any feedback to TY (as User Contributions or otherwise), TY may use that feedback to assess, improve, and market its products. To the extent Users contribute to research, TY may incorporate those contributions within the research Services without the necessity of attribution. You grant us and our affiliates a worldwide, irrevocable, royalty-free, nonexclusive license to use, reproduce, create derivative works of, distribute publicly display, and publish User Contributions. You agree you will not attempt to enforce any so-called "moral rights" in User Contributions against us or our affiliates.

    By using TY's research services, you agree that none of your User Contributions will:

    • Infringe on the intellectual property, trade secret, privacy, publicity, or other rights of others;
    • Contain false statements or misrepresentations that could damage TY or any third party;
    • Include obscene, libelous, defamatory, threatening, harassing, abusive, hateful, sexually explicit, sexually-oriented, profane, or embarrassing material, as determined by TY in its sole discretion;
    • Be illegal or otherwise objectionable;
    • Contain the personal information of any third party, including, without limitation, addresses, phone numbers, email addresses, Social Security numbers, and credit card numbers;
    • Encourage or facilitate insider trading or anti-competitive behavior;
    • Include commercial advertisements or solicitations; or
    • Purport to or actually provide legal or professional advice.

    BecauseTY's Web sites are available to the public, User Contributions on TY's Web sites are not Confidential Information.

    Although you are solely responsible for the content you provide, and we do not have a policy of reviewing or monitoring all User Contributions, we reserve the right to pre-screen and/or monitor User Contributions. If we become aware of User Contributions that violate these Terms of Service or that we believe to be otherwise objectionable, we may reject or delete them or take other action without notice to you and at our sole discretion.

    If you believe that any User Contributions appear to violate these Terms of Service, or if you believe any other user is engaged in illegal, harassing, or objectionable behavior, please contact us.

    1. Non-Disclosure of Confidential Information

    In these Terms of Use, "Confidential Information" means information of a commercially sensitive or proprietary character that is marked as confidential or that a reasonable person would understand to be confidential. The "Disclosing Party" is the party disclosing Confidential Information, and the "Receiving Party" is the party receiving Confidential Information. However, Confidential Information does not include information that:

    • was in the public domain at the time of communication to the Receiving Party or is later placed in the public domain by the Disclosing Party;
    • entered the public domain through no fault of the Receiving Party subsequent to the time of disclosure hereunder to the Receiving Party;
    • was in the Receiving Party's possession free of any obligation of confidence prior to disclosure hereunder; or
    • was developed by employees or agents of the Receiving Party independently of and without reference to any Confidential Information.

    The Receiving Party shall not disclose, publish or communicate the Confidential Information to any third party without the prior written consent of the Disclosing Party. However, the Receiving Party may disclose the Confidential Information to a third party who has a need to know the Confidential Information and (i) is an accountant, attorney, underwriter, or advisor under a duty of confidentiality; or (ii) is under a written obligation of confidentiality at least as restrictive as this Agreement and to the extent required by law.

    TY may create or use anonymized data for purposes such as benchmarking, analytics, and other good-faith business purposes. Anonymized data is not the Confidential Information of Users.

    1. Term

    Many of the Services are "subscription" services that have a fixed Term and must be renewed in writing at the end of the term for services to continue. The contractual term of membership is generally one (1) to three (3) years in length and is agreed to by the parties in writing. Workshops purchased as part of membership expire without refund or credit at the end of the membership period covered by the purchase. Workshops purchased outside membership expire without refund or credit one (1) year after purchase. TY may terminate a User's access at any time if the User or the entity paying for the User's access violates the terms of use or subscription or any other agreement with TY.

    1. Cancellation

    As the Services are paid in advance for a committed membership term, a service agreement or membership cannot be terminated by a User for convenience during a contractual term.

    1. Changes

    TY strives to innovate. TY may update, upgrade or otherwise change or discontinue content, features, or other aspects of its Services. TY will not make changes that cumulatively degrade the quality of a paid subscription to the Services. TY also reserves the right to change the terms and conditions applicable to your use of the Services unless TY has otherwise agreed in a service agreement. Use of the Services after such changes shall be deemed to be acceptance by the User of such changes. These terms were last revised on June 8, 2022.

    1. Accuracy of Information and Warranty

    The information contained in the Services has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but TY does not warrant the completeness, timeliness, or accuracy of any information contained in the Services. The Services are intended to: help identify business risks; provide insights based on industry research; and help you focus on certain matters which may be affecting your business. TY does not provide legal, accounting, or other professional advice, nor should any advice from TY be construed as such. We encourage you to seek professional advice whenever necessary.

    TY expressly excludes and disclaims all express or implied conditions, representations, and warranties, including, without limitation, any implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, to the extent allowable by law.

    Although TY takes reasonable steps to screen Services for infection by viruses, worms, Trojan horses, or other code manifesting contaminating or destructive properties before making the Services available, TY cannot guarantee that any Service will be free of infection.

    User assumes sole responsibility for the selection of the Services to achieve its intended results. The opinions expressed in the Services are subject to change without notice.

    TY does not endorse third-party products or services. TY assesses and analyzes the effectiveness and appropriateness of information technology in the context of a general business environment only unless specifically hired by a User to assess in the context of their own environment.

    1. Limitation of Liability

    In no event is TY liable for any special, indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, or other damages however caused, whether in contract, tort, negligence, strict liability, operation of law, or otherwise (including without limitation damages for lost profits, business interruption or loss arising out of the use of or inability to use the Services, or any information provided in the Services, or claims attributable to errors, omissions or other inaccuracies in the Service or interpretations thereof), even if TY has been advised of the possibility of such damages. TY's total liability shall in no event exceed the amount paid by the User for the Service in question.

    The User acknowledges that TY has set its prices and sold the Services to it in reliance on the limitations of liability and disclaimers of warranties and damages set forth herein and that the same form a fundamental and essential basis of the bargain between the parties. They shall apply even if the contract between the User and TY is found to have failed in its fundamental or essential purpose or has been fundamentally breached.

    1. Links to Third-Party Sites

    Any third-party sites that are linked to the Services are not under TY's control. TY is not responsible for anything on the linked sites, including without limitation any content, links to other sites, any changes to those sites, or any policies those sites may have. TY provides links as a convenience only, and such links do not imply any endorsement by TY of those sites.

    1. Investment Advice

    The Services are not intended to be used for the purpose of, or as a basis for, making investment decisions or recommendations with respect to securities of any company or industry, and TY assumes no liability for decisions made, in whole or in part, on the basis of any information contained in the Services.

    1. Governing Law

    This site and any service agreement are governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, excluding any conflicts of law provisions and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. Any legal action against TY shall take place in the courts of the province of Antwerp, Belgium. The parties attorn to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Ontario.

    1. Entire Agreement

    These standard terms of use, together with any service agreements and statements of work signed by the parties, contains the complete and exclusive statement of Agreement between the parties and supersedes all purchase order terms and conditions, understandings, proposals, negotiations, representations, or warranties of any kind whether written or oral.

    1. Privacy

    A User's right to privacy is of paramount importance to TY. See our Privacy Policy for more detail. The identity of our research clients is not considered personal or confidential information, and we may disclose that information for promotion and marketing purposes.

    1. Contact Information

    Attn: General Counsel

    legal@tymansgroup.com

    (US): 1-917-473-8669

    (BE): 32-468-142-754

    The latest burning platform: Exit Plans in a shifting world

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    The current global situation, marked by significant trade tensions and retaliatory measures between major economic powers, has elevated the importance of more detailed, robust, and executable exit plans for businesses in nearly all industries. The current geopolitical headwinds create an unpredictable environment that can severely impact supply chains, technology partnerships, and overall business operations. What was once a prudent measure is now a critical necessity – a “burning platform” – for ensuring business continuity and resilience.

    Here I will delve deeper into the essential components of an effective exit plan, outline the practical steps for its implementation, and explain the crucial role of testing in validating its readiness.

    exit plan

    Continue reading

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}351|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $133,318 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Product organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide to the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey your direction, strategy, and tactics to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    • Products require continuous additions and enhancements to sustain their value. This requires detailed, yet simple communication to a variety of stakeholders.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A vision without tactics is an unsubstantiated dream, while tactics without a vision is working without a purpose. You need to have a handle on both to achieve outcomes that are aligned with the needs of your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up – lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built-in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented – define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a digital product vision that you can stand behind. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a digital product vision

    Define a digital product vision that takes into account your objectives, business value, stakeholders, customers, and metrics.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 1: Define a Digital Product Vision
    • Digital Product Strategy Template
    • Digital Product Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Build a better backlog

    Build a structure for your backlog that supports your product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 2: Build a Better Backlog
    • Product Backlog Item Prioritization Tool

    3. Build a product roadmap

    Define standards, ownership for your backlog to effectively communicate your strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 3: Build a Product Roadmap
    • Product Roadmap Tool

    4. Release and deliver value

    Understand what to consider when planning your next release.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 4: Release and Deliver Value

    5. Communicate the strategy – make it happen

    Build a plan for communicating and updating your strategy and where to go next.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 5: Communicate the Strategy – Make It Happen!

    Infographic

    Workshop: Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define a Digital Product Vision

    The Purpose

    Understand the elements of a good product vision and the pieces that back it up.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide a great foundation for an actionable vision and goals people can align to.

    Activities

    1.1 Build out the elements of an effective digital product vision

    Outputs

    Completed product vision definition for a familiar product via the product canvas

    2 Build a Better Backlog

    The Purpose

    Define the standards and approaches to populate your product backlog that support your vision and overall strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized backlog with quality throughout that enables alignment and the operationalization of the overall strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Introduction to key activities required to support your digital product vision

    2.2 What do we mean by a quality backlog?

    2.3 Explore backlog structure and standards

    2.4 Define backlog data, content, and quality filters

    Outputs

    Articulate the activities required to support the population and validation of your backlog

    An understanding of what it means to create a quality backlog (quality filters)

    Defining the structural elements of your backlog that need to be considered

    Defining the content of your backlog and quality standards

    3 Build a Product Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define standards and procedures for creating and updating your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Enable your team to create a product roadmap to communicate your product strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    Activities

    3.1 Disambiguating backlogs vs. roadmaps

    3.2 Defining audiences, accountability, and roadmap communications

    3.3 Exploring roadmap visualizations

    Outputs

    Understand the difference between a roadmap and a backlog

    Roadmap standards and agreed-to accountability for roadmaps

    Understand the different ways to visualize your roadmap and select what is relevant to your context

    4 Define Your Release, Communication, and Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Build a release plan aligned to your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what goes into defining a release via the release canvas.

    Considerations in communication of your strategy.

    Understand how to frame your vision to enable the communication of your strategy (via an executive summary).

    Activities

    4.1 Lay out your release plan

    4.2 How to introduce your product vision

    4.3 Communicate changes to your strategy

    4.4 Where do we get started?

    Outputs

    Release canvas

    An executive summary used to introduce other parties to your product vision

    Specifics on communication of the changes to your roadmap

    Your first step to getting started

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}544|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,734 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • IT’s performance and stakeholder satisfaction with IT services hinge on IT’s ability to attract and retain top talent and to motivate teams to go above and beyond.
    • With the growing IT job market, turnover is a serious threat to IT’s ability to deliver seamless value and continuously drive innovation.
    • Engagement initiatives are often seen as being HR’s responsibility; however, IT leadership needs to take accountability for the retention and productivity of their employees in order to drive business value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Engagement is a two-way street. Initiatives must address a known need and be actively sought by employees – not handed down from management.
    • Engagement initiatives are useless unless they target the right issues. It can be tempting to focus on the latest perks and gadgets and ignore difficult issues. Use a systematic approach to uncover and tackle the real problems.
    • It’s time for IT leadership to step up. IT leaders have a much bigger impact on IT staff engagement than HR ever can. Leverage this power to lead your team to peak performance.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech engagement diagnostics and accompanying tools will help you perform a deep dive into the root causes of disengagement on your team.
    • The guidance that accompanies Info-Tech’s tools will help you avoid common engagement program pitfalls and empower IT leaders to take charge of their own team’s engagement.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to discover why engagement is critical to IT performance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how our tools will help you construct an effective employee engagement program.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Measure employee engagement

    Use Info-Tech's Pulse or Full Engagement Surveys to measure employee engagement.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 1: Measure Employee Engagement
    • Engagement Strategy Record
    • Engagement Communication Template

    2. Analyze results and ideate solutions

    Understand the drivers of engagement that are important for your team, and involve your staff in brainstorming engagement initiatives.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 2: Analyze Results and Ideate Solutions
    • Engagement Survey Results Interpretation Guide
    • Full Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide
    • Pulse Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide
    • Focus Group Facilitation Guide Driver Definitions
    • One-on-One Manager Meeting Worksheet

    3. Select and implement engagement initiatives

    Select engagement initiatives for maximal impact, create an action plan, and establish open and ongoing communication about engagement with your team.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 3: Select and Implement Engagement Initiatives
    • Summary of Interdepartmental Engagement Initiatives
    • Engagement Progress One-Pager
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 (Preparation) Run Engagement Survey

    The Purpose

    Select and run your engagement survey prior to the workshop.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Receive an in-depth report on your team’s engagement drivers to form the basis of your engagement strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Select engagement survey.

    1.2 Identify engagement program goals and metrics.

    1.3 Run engagement survey.

    Outputs

    Full or Pulse engagement survey report

    Engagement survey results interpretation guide

    2 Explore Engagement

    The Purpose

    To understand the current state of engagement and prepare to discuss the drivers behind it with your staff.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Empower your leadership team to take charge of their own teams’ engagement.

    Activities

    2.1 Review engagement survey results.

    2.2 Finalize focus group agendas.

    2.3 Train managers.

    Outputs

    Customized focus group agendas

    3 Hold Focus Groups

    The Purpose

    Establish an open dialogue with your staff to understand what would improve their engagement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Employee-generated initiatives have the greatest chance at success.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify priority drivers.

    3.2 Identify engagement KPIs.

    3.3 Brainstorm engagement initiatives.

    3.4 Vote on initiatives within teams.

    Outputs

    Summary of focus groups results

    Identified engagement initiatives

    Identified engagement initiatives

    4 Select and Plan Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Learn the characteristics of successful engagement initiatives and build execution plans for each.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Choose initiatives with the greatest impact on your team’s engagement, and ensure you have the necessary resources for success.

    Activities

    4.1 Select engagement initiatives with IT leadership.

    4.2 Create initiative project plans.

    4.3 Present project plans.

    4.4 Define implementation checkpoints.

    4.5 Develop communications plan.

    4.6 Define strategy for ongoing engagement monitoring.

    Outputs

    Engagement project plans

    Implementation and communication checkpoints

    Further surveys planned (optional)

    5 Additional Leadership Training

    The Purpose

    Select training modules that best address your team’s needs from Info-Tech’s modular leadership training program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Arm your IT leadership team with the key skills of effective leadership, tailored to their existing experience level.

    Activities

    5.1 Adopting an Integrated Leadership Mindset

    5.2 Optimizing Talent Leadership Practices

    5.3 Driving Diversity & Inclusion

    5.4 Fortifying Internal Stakeholder Relations

    5.5 Engaging Executives and the Board

    5.6 Crafting Your Leadership Brand

    5.7 Crafting and Delivering Compelling Presentations

    5.8 Communication & Difficult Conversations

    5.9 Conflict Management

    5.10 Performance Management

    5.11 Feedback & Coaching

    5.12 Creating a Culture of Personal Accountability

    Outputs

    Develop the skills to lead resourcefully in times of uncertainty

    Apply leadership behaviors across enterprise initiatives to deploy and develop talent successfully

    Develop diversity and inclusion practices that turn the IT function and leaders into transformative champions of inclusion

    Identify elements of effective partnering to maximize the impact of internal interactions

    Understand the major obstacles to CEO and board relevance and uncover the keys to elevating your internal executive profile

    Develop a leadership brand statement that demonstrates leadership competency and is aligned with the brand, mission, vision, and goals of the organization

    Identify the components of effective presentations and hone your presentation skills

    Gain the skills to confront and drive solutions from difficult situations

    Develop strategies to engage in conflict constructively and reach a resolution that benefits the team or organization

    Learn to identify the root causes of low performance and develop the skills to guide employees through the process of improvement

    Adopt a behavior-focused coaching model to help managers sustain and apply effective coaching principles

    Understand how and when to encourage autonomy and how to empower employees to take success into their own hands

    Manage Your Chromebooks and MacBooks

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}167|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Devices
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-devices

    Windows is no longer the only option. MacBooks and Chromebooks are justified, but now you have to manage them.

    • If you have modernized your end-user computing strategy, you may have Windows 10 devices as well as MacBooks.
    • Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) and desktop as a service (DaaS) are becoming popular. Chromebooks may be ideal as a low-cost interface into DaaS for your employees.
    • Managing Chromebooks can be particularly challenging as they grow in popularity in the education sector.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Managing end-user devices may be accomplished with a variety of solutions, but many of those solutions advocate integration with a Microsoft-friendly solution to take advantage of features such as conditional access, security functionality, and data governance.

    Impact and Result

    • Many solutions are available to manage end-user devices, and they come with a long list of options and features. Clarify your needs and define your requirements before you purchase another endpoint management tool. Don’t purchase capabilities that you may never use.
    • Use the associated Endpoint Management Selection Tool spreadsheet to identify your desired endpoint solution features and compare vendor solution functionality based on your desired features.

    Manage Your Chromebooks and MacBooks Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage Your Chromebooks and MacBooks deck – MacBooks and Chromebooks are growing in popularity in enterprise and education environments, and now you have to manage them.

    Explore options, guidance and some best practices related to the management of Chromebooks and MacBooks in the enterprise environment and educational institutions. Our guidance will help you understand features and options available in a variety of solutions. We also provide guidance on selecting the best endpoint management solution for your own environment.

    • Manage Your Chromebooks and MacBooks Storyboard

    2. Endpoint Management Selection Tool – Select the best endpoint management tool for your environment. Build a table to compare endpoint management offerings in relation to the features and options desired by your organization.

    This tool will help you determine the features and options you want or need in an endpoint management solution.

    • Endpoint Management Selection Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Manage Your Chromebooks and MacBooks

    Financial constraints, strategy, and your user base dictate the need for Chromebooks and MacBooks – now you have to manage them in your environment.

    Analyst Perspective

    Managing MacBooks and Chromebooks is similar to managing Windows devices in many ways and different in others. The tools have many common features, yet they struggle to achieve the same goals.

    Until recently, Windows devices dominated the workplace globally. Computing devices were also rare in many industries such as education. Administrators and administrative staff may have used Windows-based devices, but Chromebooks were not yet in use. Most universities and colleges were Windows-based in offices with some flavor of Unix in other areas, and Apple devices were gaining some popularity in certain circles.

    That is a stark contrast compared to today, where Chromebooks dominate the classrooms and MacBooks and Chromebooks are making significant inroads into the enterprise environment. MacBooks are also a common sight on many university campuses. There is no doubt that while Windows may still be the dominant player, it is far from the only one in town.

    Now that Chromebooks and MacBooks are a notable, if not significant, part of the education and enterprise environments, they must be afforded the same considerations as Windows devices in those environments when it comes to management. The good news is that there is no lack of available solutions for managing these devices, and the endpoint management landscape is continually evolving and improving.

    This is a picture of P.J. Ryan, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    P.J. Ryan
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • You modernized your end-user computing strategy and now have Windows 10 devices as well as MacBooks.
    • Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) and desktop as a service (DaaS) are becoming popular. Chromebooks would be ideal as a low-cost interface into DaaS for your employees.
    • You are responsible for the management of all the new Chromebooks in your educational district.
    • Windows is no longer the only option. MacBooks and Chromebooks are justified, but now you have to manage them.

    Common Obstacles

    • Endpoint management solutions typically do a great job at managing one category of devices, like Windows or MacBooks, but they struggle to fully manage alternative endpoints.
    • Multiple solutions to manage multiple devices will result in multiple dashboards. A single view would be better.
    • One solution may not fit all, but multiple solutions is not desirable either, especially if you have Windows devices, MacBooks, and Chromebooks.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use the tools at your disposal first – don't needlessly spend money if you don't have to. Many solutions can already manage other types of devices to some degree.
    • Use the integration capabilities of endpoint management tools. Many of them can integrate with each other to give you a single interface to manage multiple types of devices while taking advantage of additional functionality.
    • Don't purchase capabilities you will never use. Using 80% of a less expensive tool is economically smarter than using 10% of a more expensive tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Managing end-user devices may be accomplished with a variety of solutions, but many of those solutions advocate integration with a Microsoft-friendly solution to take advantage of features such as conditional access, security functionality, and data governance.

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Google Admin Console is necessary to manage Chromebooks, but it can be paired with other tools. Implementation partnerships provide solutions to track the device lifecycle, track the repair lifecycle, sync with Google Admin Console as well as PowerSchool to provide a more complete picture of the user and device, and facilitate reminders to return the device, pay fees if necessary, pick up a device when a repair is complete, and more.

    Insight 2

    The Google Admin Console allows admins to follow an organizational unit (OU) structure very similar to what they may have used in Microsoft's Active Directory environment. This familiarity makes the task of administering Chromebooks easier for admins.

    Insight 3

    Chromebook management goes beyond securing and manipulating the device. Controls to protect the students while online, such as Safe Search and Safe Browsing, should also be implemented.

    Insight 4

    Most companies choose to use a dedicated MacBook management tool. Many unified endpoint management (UEM) tools can manage MacBooks to some extent, but admins tend to agree that a MacBook-focused endpoint management tool is best for MacBooks while a Windows-based endpoint management tool is best for Windows devices.

    Insight 5

    Some MacBook management solutions advocate integration with Windows UEM solutions to take advantage of Microsoft features such as conditional access, security functionality, and data governance. This approach can also be applied to Chromebooks.

    Chromebooks

    Chromebooks had a respectable share of the education market before 2020, but the COVID-19 pandemic turbocharged the penetration of Chromebooks in the education industry.

    Chromebooks are also catching the attention of some decision makers in the enterprise environment.

    "In 2018, Chromebooks represented an incredible 60 percent of all laptop or tablet devices in K-12 -- up from zero percent when the first Chromebook launched during the summer break in 2011."
    – "Will Chromebooks Rule the Enterprise?" Computerworld

    "Chromebooks were the best performing PC products in Q3 2020, with shipment volume increasing to a record-high 9.4 million units, up a whopping 122% year-on-year."
    – Android Police

    "Until the pandemic, Chrome OS' success was largely limited to U.S. schools. Demand in 2020 appears to have expanded beyond that small but critical part of the U.S. PC market."
    – Geekwire

    "In addition to running a huge number of Chrome Extensions and Apps at once, Chromebooks also run Android, Linux and Windows apps."
    – "Will Chromebooks Rule the Enterprise?" Computerworld

    Managing Chromebooks

    Start with the Google Admin Console (GAC)

    GAC is necessary to initially manage Chrome OS devices.

    GAC gives you a centralized console that will allow you to:

    • Create organizational units
    • Add your Chromebook devices
    • Add users
    • Assign users to devices
    • Create groups
    • Create and assign policies
    • Plus more

    GAC can facilitate device management with features such as:

    • Control admin permissions
    • Encryption and update settings
    • App deployment, screen timeout settings
    • Perform a device wipe if required
    • Audit user activity on a device
    • Plus more

    Device and user addition, group and organizational unit creation and administration, applying policies to devices and users – does all this remind you of your Active Directory environment?

    GAC lets you administer users and devices with a similar approach.

    Managing Chromebooks

    Use Active Directory to manage Chromebooks.

    • Enable Active Directory (AD) management from within GAC and you will be able to integrate your Chromebook devices with your AD environment.
    • Devices will be visible in both the GAC and AD environment.
    • Use Windows Group Policy to manage devices and to push policies to users and devices.
    • Users can use their AD username and password to sign into Chromebook devices.
    • GAC can still be used for devices that are not synced with AD.

    Chromebooks can also be managed through these approved partners:

    • Cisco Meraki
    • Citrix XenMobile
    • IBM MaaS360
    • ManageEngine Mobile Device Manager Plus
    • VMware Workspace ONE

    Source: Google

    You must be running the Chrome Enterprise Upgrade and have any licenses required by the approved partner to take advantage of this management option. The partner admin policies supersede GAC.

    If you stop using the approved partner admin console to manage your devices, the polices and settings in GAC will immediately take over the devices.

    Microsoft still has the market share when it comes to device sales, and many administrators are already familiar with Microsoft's Active Directory. Google took advantage of that familiarity when it designed the Google Admin Console structure for users, groups, and organizational units.

    Chromebook Deployment

    Chromebook deployment becomes a challenge when device quantities grow. The enrollment process can be time consuming, and every device must be enrolled before it can be used by an employee or a student. Many admins enlist their full IT teams to assist in the short term. Some vendor partners may assist with distribution options if staffing levels permit. Recent developments from Google have opened additional options for device enrollment beyond the manual enrollment approach.

    Enrolling Chromebooks comes down to one of two approaches:

    1. Manually enrolling one device at a time
      • Users can assist by entering some identifying details during the enrollment if permitted.
      • Some third-party solutions exist, such as USB drives to reduce repetitive keystrokes or hubs to facilitate manually enrolling multiple Chromebooks simultaneously.
    2. Google's Chrome Enterprise Upgrade or the Chrome Education Upgrade
      • This allows you to let your users enroll devices after they accept the end-user license agreement.
      • You can take advantage of Google's vendor partner program and use a zero-touch deployment method where the Chromebook devices automatically receive the assigned policies, apps, and settings as soon as the device is powered on and an authorized user signs in.
      • The Enterprise Upgrade and the Education Upgrade do come with an annual cost per device, which is currently less than US$50.
      • The Enterprise and Education Upgrades come with other features as well, such as enhanced security.

    Chromebooks are automatically assigned to the top-level organizational unit (OU) when enrolled. Devices can be manually moved to another OU, but admins can also create enrollment policies to place newly enrolled devices in a specific OU or have the device locate itself in the same OU as the user.

    Chromebooks in Education

    GAC is also used with Education-licensed devices

    Most of the settings and features previously mentioned are also available for Education-licensed devices and users. Enterprise-specific features will not be available to Education licenses. (Active Directory integration with Education licenses, for example, is accomplished using a different approach)

    • Groups, policies, administrative controls, app deployment and management, adding devices and users, creating organizational units, and more features are all available to Education Admins to use.

    Education device policies and settings tend to focus more on protecting the students with controls such as:

    • Disable incognito mode
    • Disable location tracking
    • Disable external storage devices
    • Browser based protections such as Safe Search or Safe Browsing
    • URL blocking
    • Video input disable for websites
    • App installation prevention, auto re-install, and app blocking
    • Forced re-enrollment to your domain after a device is wiped
    • Disable Guest Mode
    • Restrict who can sign in
    • Audit user activity on a device

    When a student takes home a Chromebook assigned to them, that Chromebook may be the only computer in the household. Administrative polices and settings must take into account the fact that the device may have multiple users accessing many different sites and applications when the device is outside of the school environment.

    Chromebook Management Extended

    An online search for Chromebook management solutions will reveal several software solutions that augment the capabilities of the Google Admin Console. Many of these solutions are focused on the education sector and classroom and student options, although the features would be beneficial to enterprises and educational organizations alike.

    These solutions assist or augment Chromebook management with features such as:

    • Ability to sync with Google Admin Console
    • Ability to sync with student information systems, such as PowerSchool
    • Financial management, purchase details, and chargeback
    • Asset lifecycle management
    • 1:1 Chromebook distribution management
    • Repair programs and repair process management
    • Check-out/loan program management
    • Device distribution/allocation management, including barcode reader integration
    • Simple learning material distribution to the classroom for teachers
    • Facilitate GAC bulk operations
    • Manage inventory of non-IT assets such as projectors, TVs, and other educational assets
    • Plus more

    "There are many components to managing Chromebooks. Schools need to know which student has which device, which school has which device, and costs relating to repairs. Chromebook Management Software … facilitates these processes."
    – VIZOR

    MacBooks

    • MacBooks are gaining popularity in the Enterprise world.
    • Some admins claim MacBooks are less expensive in the long run over Windows-based PCs.
    • Users claim less issues when using a MacBook, and overall, companies report increased retention rates when users are using MacBooks.

    "Macs now make up 23% of endpoints in enterprises."
    – ComputerWeekly.com

    "When given the choice, no less than 72% of employees choose Macs over PCs."
    – "5 Reasons Mac is a must," Jamf

    "IBM says it is 3X more expensive to manage PCs than Macs."
    – Computerworld

    "74% of those who previously used a PC for work experienced fewer issues now that they use a Mac"
    – "Global Survey: Mac in the Enterprise," Jamf

    "When enterprise moves to Mac, staff retention rates improve by 20%. That's quite a boost! "
    – "5 Reasons Mac is a must," Jamf

    Managing MacBooks

    Can your existing UEM keep up?

    Many Windows unified endpoint management (UEM) tools can manage MacBooks, but most companies choose to use a dedicated MacBook management tool.

    • UEM tools that are primarily Windows focused do not typically go deep enough into the management capabilities of non-Windows devices.
    • Admins have noted limitations when it comes to using Windows UEM tools, and reasons they prefer a dedicated MacBook management solution include:
      • Easier to use
      • Faster response times when deploying settings and policies
      • Better control over notification settings and lock screen settings.
      • Easier Apple Business Manager (ABM) integration and provisioning.
    • Note that not every UEM will have the same limitations or advantages. Functionality is different between vendor products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most Windows UEM tools are constantly improving, and it is only a matter of time before they rival many of the dedicated MacBook management tools out there.

    Admins tend to agree that a Windows UEM is best for Windows while an Apple-based UEM is best for Apple devices.

    Managing MacBooks

    The market for "MacBook-first" management solutions includes a variety of players of varying ages such as:

    • Jamf
    • Kandji
    • Mosyle
    • SimpleMDM
    • Others

    MacBook-focused management tools can provide features such as:

    • Encryption and update settings
    • App deployment and lifecycle management
    • Remote device wipe, scan, shutdown, restart, and lock
    • Zero touch deployment and support
    • Location tracking
    • Browser content filtering
    • Enable, hide/block, or disable built-in features
    • Configure Wi-Fi, VPN, and certificate-based settings
    • Centralized dashboard with device and app listings as well as individual details
    • Data restrictions
    • Plus more

    Unified endpoint management (UEM) solutions that can provide MacBook management to some degree include (but are not limited to):

    • Intune
    • Ivanti
    • Endpoint Central
    • WorkspaceOne

    Dedicated solutions advocate integration with UEM solutions to take advantage of conditional access, security functionality, and data governance features.

    Jamf and Microsoft entered into a collaboration several years ago with the intention of making the MacBook management process easier and more secure.

    Microsoft Intune and Jamf Pro: Better together to manage and secure Macs
    Microsoft Conditional Access with Jamf Pro ensures that company data is only accessed by trusted users, on trusted devices, using trusted apps. Jamf extends this Enterprise Mobile + Security (EMS) functionality to Mac, iPhone and iPad.
    – "Microsoft Intune and Jamf Pro," Jamf

    Endpoint Management Selection Tool
    Activity

    There are many solutions available to manage end-user devices, and they come with a long list of options and features. Clarify your needs and define your requirements before you purchase another endpoint management tool. Don't purchase capabilities that you may never use.

    Use the Endpoint Management Selection Tool to identify your desired endpoint solution features and compare vendor solution functionality based on your desired features.

    1. List out the desired features you want in an endpoint solution for your devices and record those features in the first column. Use the features provided, or add your own and edit or delete the existing ones if necessary.
    2. List your selected endpoint management solution vendors in each of the columns in place of "Vendor 1," "Vendor 2," etc.
    3. Fill out the spreadsheet by changing the corresponding desired feature cell under each vendor to a "yes" or "no" based on your findings while investigating each vendor solution.
    4. When you have finished your investigation, review your spreadsheet to compare the various offerings and pros and cons of each vendor.
    5. Select your endpoint management solution.

    Endpoint Management Selection Tool

    In the first column, list out the desired features you want in an endpoint solution for your devices. Use the features provided if desired, or add your own and edit or delete the existing ones if necessary. As you look into various endpoint management solution vendors, list them in the columns in place of "Vendor 1," "Vendor 2," etc. Use the "Desired Feature" list as a checklist and change the values to "yes" or "no" in the corresponding box under the vendors' names. When complete, you will be able to look at all the features and compare vendors in a single table.

    Desired Feature Vendor 1 Vendor 2 Vendor 3
    Organizational unit creation Yes No Yes
    Group creation Yes Yes Yes
    Ability to assign users to devices No Yes Yes
    Control of administrative permissions Yes Yes Yes
    Conditional access No Yes Yes
    Security policies enforced Yes No Yes
    Asset management No Yes No
    Single sign-on Yes Yes Yes
    Auto-deployment No Yes No
    Repair lifecycle tracking No Yes No
    Application deployment Yes Yes No
    Device tracking Yes Yes Yes
    Ability to enable encryption Yes No Yes
    Device wipe Yes No Yes
    Ability to enable/disable device tracking No No Yes
    User activity audit No No No

    Related Info-Tech Research

    this is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy.

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy
    This project helps support the workforce of the future by answering the following questions: What types of computing devices, provisioning models, and operating systems should be offered to end users? How will IT support devices? What are the policies and governance surrounding how devices are used? What actions are we taking and when? How do end-user devices support larger corporate priorities and strategies?

    Best Unified Endpoint Management (UEM) Software 2022 | SoftwareReviews
    Compare and evaluate unified endpoint management vendors using the most in-depth and unbiased buyer reports available. Download free comprehensive 40+ page reports to select the best unified endpoint management software for your organization.

    Best Enterprise Mobile Management (EMM) Software 2022 | (softwarereviews.com)
    Compare and evaluate enterprise mobile management vendors using the most in-depth and unbiased buyer reports available. Download free comprehensive 40+ page reports to select the best enterprise mobile management software for your organization.

    Bibliography

    Bridge, Tom. "Macs in the enterprise – what you need to know". Computerweekly.com, TechTarget. 27 May 2022. Accessed 12 Aug. 2022.
    Copley-Woods, Haddayr. "5 reasons Mac is a must in the enterprise". Jamf.com, Jamf. 28 June 2022. Accessed 16 Aug. 2022.
    Duke, Kent. "Chromebook sales skyrocketed in Q3 2020 with online education fueling demand." androidpolice.com, Android Police. 16 Nov 2020. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    Elgin, Mike. "Will Chromebooks Rule the Enterprise? (5 Reasons They May)". Computerworld.com, Computerworld. 30 Aug 2019. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    Evans, Jonny. "IBM says it is 3X more expensive to manage PCs than Macs". Computerworld.com, Computerworld. 19 Oct 2016. Accessed 23 Aug. 2022.
    "Global Survey: Mac in the Enterprise". Jamf.com, Jamf. Accessed 16 Aug. 2022.
    "How to Manage Chromebooks Like a Pro." Vizor.cloud, VIZOR. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    "Manage Chrome OS Devices with EMM Console". support.google.com, Google. Accessed 16 Aug. 2022.
    Protalinski, Emil. "Chromebooks outsold Macs worldwide in 2020, cutting into Windows market share". Geekwire.com, Geekwire. 16 Feb 2021. Accessed 22 Aug. 2022.
    Smith, Sean. "Microsoft Intune and Jamf Pro: Better together to manage and secure Macs". Jamf.com, Jamf. 20 April 2022. Accessed 16 Aug. 2022.

    Optimize Your Software Selection Process: Why 5 and 30 Are the Magic Numbers

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}607|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Software selection takes forever. The process of choosing even the smallest apps can drag on for years: sometimes in perpetuity. Software selection teams are sprawling, leading to scheduling slowdowns and scope creep. Moreover, cumbersome or ad hoc selection processes lead to business-driven software selection.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Maximize project effectiveness with a five-person team. Project satisfaction and effectiveness is stagnant or decreases once the team grows beyond five people.
    • Tight project timelines are critical. Keep stakeholders engaged with a defined application selection timeline that moves the project forward briskly – 30 days is optimal.
    • Empower both IT and end users with a standardized selection process to consistently achieve high satisfaction coming out of software selection projects.

    Impact and Result

    • Shatter stakeholder expectations with truly rapid application selections.
    • Put the “short” back in shortlist by consolidating the vendor shortlist up-front and reducing downstream effort.
    • Identify high-impact software functionality by evaluating fewer use cases.
    • Lock in hard savings and do not pay list price by using data-driven tactics.

    Optimize Your Software Selection Process: Why 5 and 30 Are the Magic Numbers Research & Tools

    Discover the Magic Numbers

    Increase project satisfaction with a five-person core software selection team that will close out projects within 30 days.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Optimize Your Software Selection Process: Why 5 and 30 Are the Magic Numbers Storyboard

    1. Align and eliminate elapsed time

    Ensure a formal selection process is in place and make a concerted effort to align stakeholder calendars.

    2. Reduce low-impact activities

    Reduce time spent watching vendor dog and pony shows, while reducing the size of your RFPs or skipping them entirely.

    3. Focus on high-impact activities

    Narrow the field to four contenders prior to in-depth comparison and engage in accelerated enterprise architecture oversight.

    4. Use these rapid and essential selection tools

    Focus on key use cases rather than lists of features.

    • The Software Selection Workbook
    • The Vendor Evaluation Workbook
    • The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual

    5. Engage Two Viable Vendors in Negotiation

    Save more by bringing two vendors to the final stage of the project and surfacing a consolidated list of demands prior to entering negotiation.

    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Optimize Your Software Selection Process: Why 5 and 30 Are the Magic Numbers

    Select your applications better, faster, and cheaper.

    How to Read This Software Selection Insight Primer

    1. 43,000 Data Points
    2. This report is based on data gathered from a survey of 43,000 real-world IT practitioners.

    3. Aggregating Feedback
    4. The data is compiled from SoftwareReviews (a sister company of Info-Tech Research Group), which collects and aggregates feedback on a wide variety of enterprise technologies.

    5. Insights Backed by Data
    6. The insights, charts, and graphs in this presentation are all derived from data submitted by real end users.

    The First Magic Number Is Five

    The optimal software selection team comprises five people

    • Derived from 43,000 data points. Analysis of thousands of software selection projects makes it clear a tight core selection team accelerates the selection process.
    • Five people make up the core team. A small but cross-functional team keeps the project moving without getting bogged down on calendar alignment and endless back-and-forth.
    • It is a balancing act. Having too few stakeholders on the core selection team will lead to missing valuable information, while having too many will lead to delays and politically driven inefficiencies.

    There Are Major Benefits to Narrowing the Selection Team Size to Five

    Limit the risk of ineffective “decision making by committee”

    Expedite resolution of key issues and accelerate crucial decisions

    Achieve alignment on critical requirements

    Streamline calendar management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Too many cooks spoil the broth: create a highly focused selection team that can devote the majority of its time to the project while it’s in flight to demonstrate faster time to value.

    Arm Yourself With Data to Choose the Right Plays for Selection

    Software selection takes forever. The process of choosing even the smallest apps can drag on for years: sometimes in perpetuity.

    Organizations keep too many players on the field, leading to scheduling slowdowns and scope creep.

    Keeping the size of the core selection team down, while liaising with more stakeholders and subject matter experts (SMEs), leads to improved results.

    Maximize project effectiveness with a five-person team. Project satisfaction and effectiveness are stagnant or decrease once the team grows beyond five people.

    Cumbersome or ad hoc selection processes lead to business-driven software selection.

    Increase stakeholder satisfaction by using a consistent selection framework that captures their needs while not being a burden.

    Empower both IT and end users with a standardized selection process to consistently achieve high satisfaction coming out of software selection projects.

    The image contains a graph that is titled: A compact selection team can save you weeks. The graph demonstrates time saved with a five person team in comparison to larger teams.

    Project Satisfaction and Effectiveness Are Stagnant Once the Team Grows Beyond Five People

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate project satisfaction and effectiveness being stagnant with a team larger than five.
    • There is only a marginal difference in selection effectiveness when more people are involved, so why include so many? It only bogs down the process!
    • Full-time resourcing: At least one member of the five team members must be allocated to the selection initiative as a full-time resource.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It sounds natural to include as many players as possible in the core selection group; however, expanding the group beyond five people does not lead to an increase in satisfaction. Consider including a general stakeholder feedback working session instead.

    Shorten Project Duration by Capping the Selection Team at Five People

    However, it is important to make all stakeholders feel heard

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate that an increase in time and effort connects with an increase in total number of people involved.

    Exclusion is not the name of the game.

    • Remember, we are talking about the core selection team.
    • Help stakeholders understand their role in the project.
    • Educate stakeholders about your approach to selection.
    • Ensure stakeholders understand why the official selection team is being capped at five people.
    • Soliciting requirements and feedback from a broader array of stakeholders is still critical.

    Large Organizations Benefit From Compact Selection Teams Just as Much as Small Firms

    Think big even if your organization is small

    Small organizations

    Teams smaller than five people are common due to limited resources.

    Medium organizations

    Selection project satisfaction peaks with teams of fewer than two people. Consider growing the team to about five people to make stakeholders feel more included with minimal drops in satisfaction.

    Large organizations

    Satisfaction peaks when teams are kept to three to five people. With many SMEs available, it is critical to choose the right players for your team.

    The image contains a multi bar graph to demonstrate the benefits of compact selection teams depending on the size of the company, small, medium, or large.

    Keep the Core Selection Team to Five People Regardless of the Software Category

    Smaller selection teams yield increased satisfaction across software categories

    Info-Tech Insight

    Core team size remains the same regardless of the application being selected. However, team composition will vary depending on the end users being targeted.

    Think beyond application complexity

    • Our instinct is to vary the size of the core selection team based on perceived application complexity.
    • The data has demonstrated that a small team yields increased satisfaction for applications across a wide array of application complexity profiles.
    • The real differentiator for complex applications will be the number of stakeholders that the core selection team liaise with, particularly for defining strong requirements.

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate satisfaction across software categories increases with smaller selection teams.

    The Second Magic Number Is 30

    Finish the project while stakeholders are still fully engaged in order to maximize satisfaction

    • 30- to 60-day project timelines are critical. Keep stakeholders engaged with a defined application selection timeline that moves the project forward briskly.
    • Strike while the iron is hot. Deliver applications in a timely manner after the initial request. Don’t let IT become the bottleneck for process optimization.
    • Minimize scope creep: As projects drag on in perpetuity, the scope of the project balloons to something that cannot possibly achieve key business objectives in a timely fashion.

    Aggressively Timeboxing the Project Yields Benefits Across Multiple Software Categories

    After four weeks, stakeholder satisfaction is variable

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate that aggressively timeboxing the project yields benefits across multiple software categories.
    Only categories with at least 1,000 responses were included in the analysis.

    Achieve peak satisfaction by allotting 30 days for an application selection project.

    • Spending two weeks or less typically leads to higher levels of satisfaction for each category because it leaves more time for negotiation, implementation, and making sure everything works properly (especially if there is a time constraint).
    • Watch out for the “satisfaction danger zone” once project enters the 6- to 12-week mark. Completing a selection in four weeks yields greater satisfaction.

    Spend Your Time Wisely to Complete the Selection in 30 Days

    Save time in the first three phases of the selection project

    Awareness

    Education & Discovery

    Evaluation

    Reduce Time

    Reduce Time

    Reduce Time

    Save time duplicating existing market research. Save time and maintain alignment with focus groups.

    Save time across tedious demos and understanding the marketplace.

    Save time gathering detailed historical requirements. Instead, focus on key issues.

    Info-Tech Insight – Awareness

    Timebox the process of impact analysis. More time should be spent performing the action than building a business case.

    Info-Tech Insight – Education

    Save time duplicating existing market research. Save time and maintain alignment with focus groups.

    Info-Tech Insight – Evaluation

    Decision committee time is valuable. Get up to speed using third-party data and written collateral. Use committee time to conduct investigative interviews instead. Salesperson charisma and marketing collateral quality should not be primary selection criteria. Sadly, this is the case far too often.

    Limit Project Duration to 30 Days Regardless of the Application Being Selected

    Timeboxing application selection yields increased satisfaction across software categories

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate selection effort in weeks by satisfaction. The graph includes informal and formal methods on the graph across the software categories.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Office collaboration tools are a great case study for increasing satisfaction with decreased time to selection. Given the sharp impetus of COVID-19, many organizations quickly selected tools like Zoom and Teams, enabling remote work with very high end-user satisfaction.

    There are alternative approaches for enterprise-sized applications:

    • New applications that demand rigorous business process improvement efforts may require allotting time for prework before engaging in the 30-day selection project.
    • To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you’re looking to select.

    The Data Also Shows That There Are Five Additional Keys to Improving Your Selection Process

    1. ALIGN & ELIMINATE ELAPSED TIME
    • Ensure a formal selection process is in place.
    • Balance the core selection team’s composition.
    • Make a concerted effort to align stakeholder calendars.
    2. REDUCE TIME SPENT ON LOW-IMPACT ACTIVITIES
    • Reduce time spent on internet research. Leverage hard data and experts.
    • Reduce RFP size or skip RFPs entirely.
    • Reduce time spent watching vendor dog and pony shows.
    3. FOCUS ON HIGH- IMPACT ACTIVITIES
    • Narrow the field to four contenders prior to in-depth comparison.
    • Identify portfolio overlap with accelerated enterprise architecture oversight.
    • Focus on investigative interviews and proof of concept projects.
    4. USE RAPID & ESSENTIAL ASSESSMENT TOOLS
    • Focus on key use cases, not lists of features.
    • You only need three essential tools: Info-Tech’s Vendor Evaluation Workbook, Software Selection Workbook, and Business Stakeholder Manual.
    5. ENGAGE TWO VIABLE VENDORS IN NEGOTIATION
    • Save more during negotiation by selecting two viable alternatives.
    • Surface a consolidated list of demands prior to entering negotiation.
    • Communicate your success with the organization.

    1. Align & Eliminate Elapsed Time

    ✓ Ensure a formal selection process is in place.

    ✓ Reduce time by timeboxing the project to 30 days.

    ✓ Align the calendars of the five-person core selection team.

    Improving Your IT Department’s Software Selection Capability Yields Big Results

    Time spent building a better process for software selection is a great investment

    • Enterprise application selection is an activity that every IT department must embark on, often many times per year.
    • The frequency and repeatability of software selection means it is an indispensable process to target for optimization.
    • A formal process is not always synonymous with a well-oiled process.
    • Even if you have a formal selection process already in place, it’s imperative to take a concerted approach to continuous improvement.

    It is critical to improve the selection process before formalizing

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework to gain insights on how you can fine-tune and accelerate existing codified approaches to application selection.

    Before Condensing the Selection Team, First Formalize the Software Selection Process

    Software selection processes are challenging

    Vendor selection is politically charged, requiring Procurement to navigate around stakeholder biases and existing relationships.

    Stakeholders

    The process is time consuming and often started too late. In the absence of clarity around requirements, it is easy to default to looking at price instead of best functional and architectural fit.

    Timing

    Defining formal process and methodology

    Formal selection methodologies are repeatable processes that anybody can consistently follow to quickly select new technology.

    Repeatable

    The goal of formalizing the approach is to enable IT to deliver business value consistently while also empowering stakeholders to find tools that meet their needs. Remember! A formal selection process is synonymous with a bureaucratic, overblown approach.

    Driving Value

    Most Organizations Are Already Using a Formal Software Selection Methodology

    Don’t get left behind!

    • A common misconception for software selection is that only large organizations have formal processes.
    • The reality is that organizations of all sizes are making use of formal processes for software selection.
    • Moreover, using a standardized method to evaluate new technology is most likely common practice among your competitors regardless of their size.
    • It is important to remember that the level of rigor for the processes will vary based not only on project size but also on organization size.
    Only categories with at least 1,000 responses were included in the analysis.

    The image contains a double bar graph that compares the sizes of companies using formal or informal evaluation and selection methodology.

    Use a Formal Evaluation and Selection Methodology to Achieve Higher Satisfaction

    A formal selection process does not equal a bloated selection process

    • No matter what process is being used, you should consider implementing a formal methodology to reduce the amount of time required to select the software. This trend continues across different levels of software (commodity, complex, and enterprise).
    • It is worth noting that using a process can actually add more time to the selection process, so it is important to know how to use it properly.
    • Don’t use just one process: you should use a combination, but don’t use more than three when selecting your software.
    The image contains a double bar graph to demonstrate the difference between formal and informal evaluation to achieve a higher satisfaction.

    Hit a Home Run With Your Business Stakeholders

    Use a data-driven approach to select the right application vendor for their needs – fast

    The image contains a screenshot of the data-drive approach. The approach includes: awareness, education & discovery, evaluation, selection, negotiation & configuration.

    Investing time improving your software selection methodology has big returns.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small; some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you’re looking to select. The Rapid Application Selection Framework approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology described in Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    Lock Down the Key Players Before Setting Up the Relevant Timeline

    You are the quarterback of your selection team

    Don’t get bogged down “waiting for the stars to align” in terms of people’s availability: if you wait for the perfect alignment, the project may never get done.

    If a key stakeholder is unavailable for weeks or months due to PTO or other commitments, don’t jeopardize project timelines to wait for them to be free. Find a relevant designate that can act in their stead!

    You don’t need the entire team on the field at once. Keep certain stakeholders on the bench to swap in and out as needed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assemble the key stakeholders for project kick-off to synchronize the application selection process and limit elapsed time. Getting all parties on the same page increases output satisfaction and eliminates rework. Save time and get input from key stakeholders at the project kick-off.

    Assemble a Cross-Functional Team for Best Results

    A blend of both worlds gets the best of both worlds from domain expertise (technical and business)

    The image contains a graph labelled: Likeliness to recommend. It is described in the text below.

    How to manage the cross-functional selection team:

    • There should be a combination of IT and businesspeople involved in the selection process, and ideally the ratio would be balanced.
    • No matter what you are looking for, you should never include more than five people in the selection process.
    • You can keep key stakeholders and other important individuals informed with what is going on, but they don’t necessarily have to be involved in the selection process.

    Leverage a Five-Person Team With Players From Both IT and the Business

    For maximum effectiveness, assign at least one resource to the project on a full-time basis

    IT Leader

    Technical IT

    Business Analyst/ Project Manager

    Business Lead

    Process Expert

    This team member is an IT director or CIO who will provide sponsorship and oversight from the IT perspective.

    This team member will focus on application security, integration, and enterprise architecture.

    This team member elicits business needs and translates them into technology requirements.

    This team member will provide sponsorship from the business needs perspective.

    This team member will contribute their domain-specific knowledge around the processes that the new application supports.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is critical for the selection team to determine who has decision rights. Organizational culture will play the largest role in dictating which team member holds the final say for selection decisions.

    Ensure That Your Project Has the Right Mix of the Core Team and Ancillary Stakeholders

    Who is involved in selecting the new application?

    • Core selection team:
      • The core team ideally comprises just five members.
      • There will be representatives from IT and the specific business function that is most impacted by the application.
      • The team is typically anchored by a business analyst or project management professional.
      • This is the team that is ultimately accountable for ensuring that the project stays on track and that the right vendor is selected.
    • Ancillary stakeholders:
      • These stakeholders are brought into the selection project on an as-needed basis. They offer commentary on requirements and technical know-how.
      • They will be impacted by the project outcome but they do not bear ultimate accountability for selecting the application.
    The image contains an outer circle that lists Ancillary Stakeholders, and an inner selection team that lists core selection teams.

    Tweak the Team Composition Based on the Application Category in Question

    All applications are different. Some categories may require a slightly different balance of business and IT users.

    When to adjust the selection team’s business to IT ratio:

    • Increase the number of business stakeholders for customer-centric applications like customer relationship management and customer service management.
    • Keep projects staffed with more technical resources when selecting internal-facing tools like network monitoring platforms, next-generation firewalls, and endpoint protection systems.
    The image contains a graph to demonstrate how to tweak the team composition based on the application category.

    When to adjust the selection team’s business to IT ratio:

    • Increase the number of business stakeholders for customer-centric applications like customer relationship management and customer service management.
    • Keep projects staffed with more technical resources when selecting internal-facing tools like network monitoring platforms, next-generation firewalls, and endpoint protection systems.

    Balance the Selection Team With Decision Makers and Front-Line Resources

    Find the right balance!

    • Make sure to include key decision makers to increase the velocity of approvals.
    • However, it is critical to include the right number of front-line resources to ensure that end-user needs are adequately reflected in the requirements and decision criteria used for selection.

    The image contains a graph on the team composition with number of decision makers involved.

    Info-Tech Insight

    When selecting their software, organizations have an average of two to four business and IT decision makers/influencers on the core selection team.

    Optimize Meeting Cadence to Complete Selection in 30 Days

    Project Cadence:

    • Execute approximately one phase per week.
    • Conduct weekly checkpoints to move through your formal selection framework.
    • Allot two to four hours per touchpoint.

    The image contains a calendar with the five phases spread put over five weeks.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use weekly touchpoints with the core selection team to eliminate broken telephone. Hold focus groups and workshops to take a more collaborative, timely, and consensus-driven approach to zero in on critical requirements.

    2. Reduce Time Spent on Low-Impact Activities

    ✓ Reduce time spent on internet research. Leverage hard data and experts.

    ✓ Reduce RFP size or skip RFPs entirely.

    ✓ Reduce time spent watching vendor dog and pony shows.

    Reduce Time Spent on Internet Research by Leveraging Hard Data and Experts

    REDUCE BIAS

    Taking a data-driven approach to vendor selection ensures that decisions are made in a manner that reduces human bias and exposure to misaligned incentives.

    SCORING MODELS

    Create a vendor scoring model that uses several different scored criteria (alignment to needs, alignment to architecture, cost, relationship, etc.) and weight them.

    AGGREGATE EXPERIENCES

    When you leverage services such as SoftwareReviews, you’re relying on amalgamated data from hundreds of others that have already been down this path: benefit from their experience!

    PEER-DRIVEN INSIGHTS

    Formally incorporate a review of Category Reports from SoftwareReviews into your vendor selection process to take advantage of peer-driven expert insights.

    Contact Us

    Info-Tech is just a phone call away. Our expert analysts can guide you to successful project completion at no additional cost to you.

    Bloated RFPs Are Weighing You Down

    Avoid “RFP overload” – parse back deliverables for smaller projects

    1. Many IT and procurement professionals are accustomed to deliverable-heavy application selection projects.
    2. Massive amounts of effort is spent creating onerous RFIs, RFPs, vendor demo scripts, reference guides, and Pugh matrices – with only incremental (if any) benefits.
    3. For smaller projects, focus on creating a minimum viable RFP that sketches out a brief need statement and highlights three or four critical process areas to avoid RFP fatigue.

    Draft a lightweight RFI (or minimum viable RFP) to give vendors a snapshot of your needs while managing effort

    An RFI or MV-RFP is a truncated RFP document that highlights core use cases to vendors while minimizing the amount of time the team has to spend building it.

    You may miss out on the right vendor if:

    • The RFP is too long or cumbersome for the vendor to respond.
    • Vendors believe their time is better spent relationship selling.
    • The RFP is unclear and leads them to believe they won’t be successful.
    • The vendor was forced to guess what you were looking for.

    How to write a successful RFI/MV-RFP:

    • Expend your energy relative to the complexity of the required solution or product you’re seeking.
    • A good MV-RFP is structured as follows: a brief description of your organization, business context, and key requirements. It should not exceed a half-dozen pages in length.
    • Be transparent.
    • This could potentially be a long-term relationship, so don’t try to trick suppliers.
    • Be clear in your expectations and focus on the key aspects of what you’re trying to achieve.

    Use the appropriate Info-Tech template for your needs (RFI, RFQ, or RFP). The Request for Information Template is best suited to the RASF approach.

    If Necessary, Make Sure That You Are Going About RFPs the Right Way

    RFPs only add satisfaction when done correctly

    The image contains a graph to demonstrate RFP and satisfaction.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Prescriptive yet flexible: Avoid RFP overload when selecting customer experience–centric applications, but a formal approach to selection is still beneficial.

    When will an RFP increase satisfaction?

    • Satisfaction is increased when the RFP is used in concert with a formal selection methodology. An RFP on its own does not drive significant value.
    • RFPs that focus on an application’s differentiating features lead to higher satisfaction with the selection process.
    • Using the RFP to evaluate mandatory or standard and/or mandatory features yields neutral results.

    Reduce Time Spent Watching Vendor Dog and Pony Shows

    Salesperson charisma and marketing collateral quality should not be primary selection criteria. Sadly, this is the case far too often.

    Use data to take control back from the vendor

    • Taking a data-driven approach to vendor selection ensures that decisions are made in a manner that reduces human bias and exposure to misaligned incentives.
    • When you leverage services such as SoftwareReviews, you’re relying on amalgamated data from hundreds of others that have already been down this path: benefit from their collective experience!

    Kill the “golf course effect” and eliminate stakeholder bias

    • A leading cause of selection failure is human bias. While rarely malicious, the reality is that decision makers and procurement staff can become unduly biased over time by vendor incentives. Conference passes, box seats, a strong interpersonal relationship – these are all things that may be valuable to a decision maker but have no bearing on the efficacy of an enterprise application.
    • A strong selection process mitigates human bias by using a weighted scoring model and basing decisions on hard data: cost, user satisfaction scores, and trusted third-party data from services such as SoftwareReviews.

    Conduct a Day of Rapid-Fire Investigative Interviews

    Zoom in on high-value use cases and answers to targeted questions

    Make sure the solution will work for your business

    Give each vendor 60 to 90 minutes to give a rapid-fire presentation. We suggest the following structure:

    • 20 minutes: company introduction and vision
    • 20 minutes: one high-value scenario walkthrough
    • 20-40 minutes: targeted Q&A from the business stakeholders and procurement team

    To ensure a consistent evaluation, vendors should be asked analogous questions, and a tabulation of answers should be conducted.

    How to challenge the vendors in the investigative interview

    • Change the visualization/presentation.
    • Change the underlying data.
    • Add additional data sets to the artifacts.
    • Collaboration capabilities.
    • Perform an investigation in terms of finding BI objects and identifying previous changes and examine the audit trail.

    Rapid-Fire Vendor Investigative Interview

    Invite vendors to come onsite (or join you via videoconference) to demonstrate the product and to answer questions. Use a highly targeted demo script to help identify how a vendor’s solution will fit your organization’s particular business capability needs.

    Spend Your Time Wisely and Accelerate the Process

    Join the B2B software selection r/evolution

    Awareness

    Education & Discovery

    Evaluation

    Selection

    Negotiation & Configuration

    Reduce Time

    Reduce Time

    Reduce Time

    Reduce Time

    Reduce Time

    Save time
    duplicating existing market research. Save time and maintain alignment with focus groups.

    Save time across tedious demos and understanding the marketplace.

    Save time gathering detailed historical requirements. Instead, focus on key issues.

    Use your time to validate how the solution will handle mission-critical requirements.

    Spend time negotiating with two viable alternatives to reduce price by up to 50%.

    Use a tier-based model to accelerate commodity and complex selection projects.

    Eliminate elapsed process time with focus groups and workshops.

    3. Focus on High-Impact Activities

    ✓ Narrow the field to four contenders prior to in-depth comparison.

    ✓ Identify portfolio overlap with accelerated enterprise architecture oversight.

    ✓ Focus on investigative interviews and proof of concept projects.

    Narrow the Field to a Maximum of Four Contenders

    Focus time spent on the players that we know can deliver strong value

    1. ACCELERATE SELECTION

    Save time by exclusively engaging vendors that support the organization’s differentiating requirements.

    2. DECISION CLARITY

    Prevent stakeholders from getting lost in the weeds with endless lists of vendors.

    3.CONDENSED DEMOS

    Limiting the project to four contenders allows you to stack demos/investigative interviews into the same day.

    4. LICENSING LEVERAGE

    Keep track of key differences between vendor offerings with a tight shortlist.

    Rapid & Effective Selection Decisions

    Consolidating the Vendor Shortlist Up-Front Reduces Downstream Effort

    Put the “short” back in shortlist!

    • Radically reduce effort by narrowing the field of potential vendors earlier in the selection process. Too many organizations don’t funnel their vendor shortlist until nearing the end of the selection process. The result is wasted time and effort evaluating options that are patently not a good fit.
    • Leverage external data (such as SoftwareReviews) and expert opinion to consolidate your shortlist into a smaller number of viable vendors before the investigative interview stage and eliminate time spent evaluating dozens of RFP responses.
    • Having fewer RFP responses to evaluate means you will have more time to do greater due diligence.

    Rapid Enterprise Architecture Evaluations Are High-Impact Activities

    When accelerating selection decisions, finding the right EA is a balancing act

    • Neglecting enterprise architecture as a shortcut to save time often leads to downstream integration problems and decreases application satisfaction.
    • On the other hand, overly drawn out enterprise architecture evaluations can lead to excessively focusing on technology integration versus having a clear and concise understanding of critical business needs.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Targeting an enterprise architecture evaluation as part of your software selection process that does not delay the selection while also providing sufficient insight into platform fit is critical.

    Key activities for rapid enterprise architecture evaluation include:

    1. Security analysis
    2. Portfolio overlap review + integration assessment
    3. Application standards check

    The data confirms that it is worthwhile to spend time on enterprise architecture

    • Considering software architecture fit up-front to determine if new software aligns with the existing application architecture directly links to greater satisfaction.
    • Stakeholders are most satisfied with their software value when there is a good architectural platform fit.
    • Stakeholders that ranked Architectural Platform Fit lower during the selection process were ultimately more unsatisfied with their software choice.

    The image contains a screenshot of data to demonstrate that it is worthwhile to spend time on enterprise architecture.

    Identify Portfolio Overlap With an Accelerated Enterprise Architecture Assessment

    Develop a clear view of any overlap within your target portfolio subset and clear rationalization/consolidation options

    • Application sprawl is a critical pain point in many organizations. It leads to wasted time, money, and effort as IT (and the business) maintain myriad applications that all serve the same functional purpose.
    • Opportunities are missed to consolidate and streamline associated business process management, training, and end-user adoption activities.
    • Identify which applications in your existing architecture serve a duplicate purpose: these applications are the ones you will want to target for consolidation.
    • As you select a new application, identify where it can be used to serve the goal for application rationalization (i.e. can we replace/retire existing applications in our portfolio by standardizing the new one?).

    Keep the scope manageable!

    • Highlight the major functional processes that are closely related to the application you’re selecting and identify which applications support each.
    • The template below represents a top-level view of a set of customer experience management (CXM) applications. Identify linkages between sets of applications and if they’re uni- or bi-directional.
    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate portfolio overlap with an accelerated enterprise architecture assessment.

    Rapidly Evaluate the Security & Risk Profile for a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Evaluation

    There are four considerations for determining the security and risk profile for the new application

    1. Financial Risk
    • Consider the financial impact the new application has on the organization.
      • How significant is the investment in technology?
    • If this application fails to meet its business goals and deliver strong return on investment, will there be a significant amount of financial resources to mitigate the problem?
  • Data Sensitivity Risk
    • Understand the type of data that will be handled/stored by the application.
      • For example, a CRM will house customer personally identifiable information (PII) and an ECM will store confidential business documentation.
    • Determine the consequences of a potential breach (i.e. legal and financial).
  • Application Vulnerability Risk
    • Consider whether the application category has a historically strong security track record.
      • For example, enterprise cloud storage solutions may have a different level of vulnerability than an HRIS platform.
  • Infrastructure Risk
    • Determine whether the new application requires changes to infrastructure or additional security investments to safeguard expanded infrastructure.
    • Consider the ways in which the changes to infrastructure increase the vectors for security breaches.

    Spend More Time Validating Key Issues With Deep Technical Assessments

    The image contains a screenshot of an image of an iceberg. The top part of the iceberg is above water and labelled 40%. The rest of the iceberg is below water and is labelled 60%.

    Conversations With the Vendor

    • Initial conversations with the vendor build alignment on overall application capabilities, scope of work, and pricing.

    Pilot Projects and Trial Environments

    • Conduct a proof of concept project to ensure that the application satisfies your non-functional requirements.
    • Technical assessments not only demonstrate whether an application is compatible with your existing systems but also give your technical resources the confidence that the implementation process will be as smooth as possible.
    • Marketing collateral glosses over actual capabilities and differentiation. Use unbiased third-party data and detailed system training material.

    4. Use Rapid & Essential Assessment Tools

    ✓ Focus on key use cases, not lists of features.

    ✓ You only need three essential tools:

    1. Info-Tech’s Vendor Evaluation Workbook
    2. The Software Selection Workbook
    3. A Business Stakeholder Manual

    Focus on Key Use Cases, Not an Endless Laundry List of Table Stakes Features

    Focus on Critical Requirements

    Failure to differentiate must-have and nice-to-have use cases leads to applications full of non-critical features.

    Go Beyond the Table Stakes

    Accelerate the process by skipping common requirements that we know that every vendor will support.

    Streamline the Quantity of Use Cases

    Working with a tighter list of core use cases increases time spent evaluating the most impactful functionality.

    Over-Customization Kills Projects

    Eliminating dubious “sacred cow” requirements reduces costly and painful platform customization.

    Only Make Use of Essential Selection Artifacts

    Vendor selection projects often demand extensive and unnecessary documentation

    The Software Selection Workbook

    Work through the straightforward templates that tie to each phase of the Rapid Application Selection Framework, from assessing the business impact to requirements gathering.

    The image contains a screenshot of The Software Selection Workbook.

    The Vendor Evaluation Workbook

    Consolidate the vendor evaluation process into a single document. Easily compare vendors as you narrow the field to finalists.

    The image contains a screenshot of The Vendor Evaluation Workbook.

    The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual

    Quickly explain the Rapid Application Selection Framework to your team while also highlighting its benefits to stakeholders.

    The image contains a screenshot of The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual.

    Software Selection Engagement

    Five advisory calls over a five-week period to accelerate your selection process

    • Expert analyst guidance over five weeks on average to select and negotiate software.
    • Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions.
    • Use a repeatable, formal methodology to improve your application selection process.
    • Better, faster results, guaranteed, included in membership.
    The image contains a screenshot of the calendar over 30 days that outlines the five calls.

    Click here to book your selection engagement

    Software Selection Workshop

    With 40 hours of advisory assistance delivered online, select better software, faster.

    • 40 hours of expert analyst guidance.
    • Project and stakeholder management assistance.
    • Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions.
    • Better, faster results, guaranteed; $20K standard engagement fee.
    The image contains a screenshot of the calendar over 30 days that outlines the five calls.

    CLICK HERE TO BOOK YOUR WORKSHOP ENGAGEMENT

    5. Select Two Viable Options & Engage Both in Negotiation

    ✓ Save more during negotiation by selecting two viable alternatives.

    ✓ Surface a consolidated list of demands prior to entering negotiation.

    ✓ Communicate your success with the organization.

    Save More During Negotiation by Selecting Two Viable Alternatives

    VENDOR 1

    Build in a realistic plan B that allows you to apply leverage to the incumbent or primary vendor of choice.

    VENDOR 2

    If the top contender is aware that they do not have competition, they will be less inclined to make concessions.

    Maintain momentum with two options

    • Should you realize that the primary contender is no longer a viable option (i.e. security concerns), keeping a second vendor in play enables you to quickly pivot without slowing down the selection project.

    Secure best pricing by playing vendors off each other

    • Vendors are more likely to give concessions on the base price once they become aware that a direct competitor has entered the evaluation.

    Truly commit to a thorough analysis of alternatives

    • By evaluating competitive alternatives, you’ll get a more comprehensive view on market standards for a solution and be able to employ a range of negotiation tactics.

    Focus on 5-10 Specific Contract Change Requests

    Accelerate negotiation by picking your battles

    ANALYZE

    DOCUMENT

    CONSOLIDATE

    PRESENT

    • Parse the contract, order form, and terms & conditions for concerning language.
    • Leverage expertise from internal subject matter experts in addition to relevant legal council.
    • Document all concerns and challenges with the language in the vendor contract in a single spreadsheet.
    • Make vendors more receptive to your cause by going one step beyond writing what the change should be. Provide the reasoning behind the change and even the relevant context.
    • Identify the change requests that are most important for the success of the selection project.
    • Compile a list of the most critical change requests.
    • Consider including nice-to-have requests that you can leverage as strategic concessions.
    • Present the consolidated list of critical change requests to the vendor rather than sharing the entire range of potential changes to the contract.
    • Make sure to include context and background for each request.
    • Eliminate potential delays by proactively establishing a timeline for the vendor’s response.

    Share Stories of Cost Savings With the Organization

    Secure IT’s seat at the table

    Hard cost savings speak louder than words. Executive leadership will see IT as the go-to team for driving business value quickly, yet responsibly.

    Build hype around the new software

    Generate enthusiasm by highlighting the improved user experience provided by the new software that was has just been selected.

    Drive end-user adoption

    Position the cost savings as an opportunity to invest in onboarding. An application is only as valuable as your employees’ ability to effectively use it.

    Keep the process rolling

    Use the momentum from the project and its successful negotiation to roll out the accelerated selection approach to more departments across the organization.

    Overall: The Magic Number Saves You Time and Money

    Software selection takes forever. The process of choosing even the smallest apps can drag on for years: sometimes in perpetuity.

    Organizations keep too many players on the field, leading to scheduling slowdowns and scope creep.

    Keeping the size of the core selection team down, while liaising with more stakeholders and subject matter experts (SMEs), leads to improved results.

    Maximize project effectiveness with a five-person team. Project satisfaction and effectiveness are stagnant or decrease once the team grows beyond five people.

    Cumbersome or ad hoc selection processes lead to business-driven software selection.

    Increase stakeholder satisfaction by using a consistent selection framework that captures their needs while not being a burden.

    Empower both IT and end users with a standardized selection process to consistently achieve high satisfaction coming out of software selection projects.

    The image contains a graph that is titled: A compact selection team can save you weeks. The graph demonstrates time saved with a five person team in comparison to larger teams.

    Key Takeaways for Improving Your Selection Process

    1. ALIGN & ELIMINATE ELAPSED TIME

    • Ensure a formal selection process is in place and reduce time by timeboxing the project to 30 days.
    • Align the calendars of the five-person core selection team to maximize efficiency.

    2. REDUCE TIME SPENT ON LOW-IMPACT ACTIVITIES

    • Go beyond the table stakes and accelerate the process by skipping common requirements that we know that every vendor will support.
    • Only make use of essential selection artifacts.

    3. FOCUS ON HIGH- IMPACT ACTIVITIES

    • Skip the vendor dog and pony shows with investigative interviews.
    • Minimize time spent on novel-sized RFPs; instead highlight three or four critical process areas.

    4. USE RAPID & ESSENTIAL ASSESSMENT TOOLS

    • Consolidating the vendor shortlist up-front reduces downstream effort.
    • Application sprawl is a critical pain point in many organizations that leads to wasted time and money.

    5. ENGAGE TWO VIABLE VENDORS IN NEGOTIATION

    • Build in a realistic plan B that allows you to apply leverage to the incumbent or primary vendor of choice.
    • Pick your battles and focus on 5-10 specific contract change requests.

    Appendix

    This study is based on a survey of 43,000 real-world IT practitioners.

    • SoftwareReviews (a sister company of Info-Tech Research Group) collects and aggregates feedback on a wide variety of enterprise technologies.
    • The practitioners are actual end users of hundreds of different enterprise application categories.
    • The following slides highlight the supplementary data points from the comprehensive survey.

    Methodology

    A comprehensive study based on the responses of thousands of real-world practitioners.

    Qualitative & Secondary

    Using comprehensive statistical techniques, we surveyed what our members identified as key drivers of success in selecting enterprise software. Our goal was to determine how organizations can accelerate selection processes and improve outcomes by identifying where people should spend their time for the best results.

    Large-n Survey

    To determine the “Magic Numbers,” we used a large-n survey: 40,000 respondents answered questions about their applications, selection processes, organizational firmographics, and personal characteristics. We used this data to determine what drives satisfaction not only with the application but with the selection process itself.

    Quantitative Drill-Down

    We used the survey to narrow the list of game-changing practices. We then conducted additional quantitative research to understand why our respondents may have selected the responses they did.

    Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}317|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $68,467 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Sophisticated ransomware attacks are on the rise and evolving quickly.
    • Executives want reassurance but are not ready to write a blank check. We need to provide targeted and justified improvements.
    • Emerging strains can exfiltrate sensitive data, encrypt systems, and destroy backups in hours, which makes recovery a grueling challenge.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Malicious agents design progressive, disruptive attacks to pressure organizations to pay a ransom.
    • Organizations misunderstand ransomware risk scenarios, which obscures the likelihood and impact of an attack.
    • Conventional approaches focus on response and recovery, which do nothing to prevent an attack and are often ineffective against sophisticated attacks.

    Impact and Result

    • Conduct a thorough assessment of your current state; identify potential gaps and assess the possible outcomes of an attack.
    • Analyze attack vectors and prioritize controls that prevent ransomware attacks, and implement ransomware protections and detection to reduce your attack surface.
    • Visualize, plan, and practice your response and recovery to reduce the potential impact of an attack.

    Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks

    Use this step-by-step guide to assess your ransomware readiness and implement controls that will improve your ability to prevent incursions and defend against attacks.

    • Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks – Phases 1-4

    2. Ransomware Resilience Assessment – Complete the ransomware resilience assessment and establish metrics.

    Use this assessment tool to assess existing protection, detection, response, and recovery capabilities and identify potential improvements.

    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    3. Threat Preparedness Workbook – Improve protection and detection capabilities.

    Use this threat preparedness workbook to evaluate the threats and tactics in the ransomware kill chain using the MITRE framework and device appropriate countermeasures.

    • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    4. Tabletop Planning Exercise and Example Results – Improve response and recovery capabilities with a tabletop exercise for your internal IT team.

    Adapt this tabletop planning session template to plan and practice the response of your internal IT team to a ransomware scenario.

    • Tabletop Exercise – Internal (Ransomware Template)
    • Ransomware Tabletop Planning Results – Example (Visio)
    • Ransomware Tabletop Planning Results – Example (PDF)

    5. Ransomware Response Runbook and Workflow – Document ransomware response steps and key stakeholders.

    Adapt these workflow and runbook templates to coordinate the actions of different stakeholders through each stage of the ransomware incident response process.

    • Ransomware Response Runbook Template
    • Ransomware Response Workflow Template (Visio)
    • Ransomware Response Workflow Template (PDF)

    6. Extended Tabletop Exercise and Leadership Guide – Run a tabletop test to plan and practice the response of your leadership team.

    Adapt this tabletop planning session template to plan leadership contributions to the ransomware response workflow. This second tabletop planning session will focus on communication strategy, business continuity plan, and deciding whether the organization should pay a ransom.

    • Tabletop Exercise – Extended (Ransomware Template)
    • Leadership Guide for Extended Ransomware

    7. Ransomware Resilience Summary Presentation – Summarize status and next steps in an executive presentation.

    Summarize your current state and present a prioritized project roadmap to improve ransomware resilience over time.

    • Ransomware Resilience Summary Presentation

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Ransomware Resilience

    The Purpose

    Set workshop goals, review ransomware trends and risk scenarios, and assess the organization’s resilience to ransomware attacks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a solid understanding of the likelihood and impact of a ransomware attack on your organization.

    Complete a current state assessment of key security controls in a ransomware context.

    Activities

    1.1 Review incidents, challenges, and project drivers.

    1.2 Diagram critical systems and dependencies and build risk scenario.

    1.3 Assess ransomware resilience.

    Outputs

    Workshop goals

    Ransomware Risk Scenario

    Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    2 Protect and Detect

    The Purpose

    Improve your capacity to protect your organization from ransomware and detect attacks along common vectors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify targeted countermeasures that improve protection and detection capabilities.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess ransomware threat preparedness.

    2.2 Determine the impact of ransomware techniques on your environment.

    2.3 Identify countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    Outputs

    Targeted ransomware countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    Targeted ransomware countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    Targeted ransomware countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    3 Respond and Recover

    The Purpose

    · Improve your organization’s capacity to respond to ransomware attacks and recover effectively.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build response and recovery capabilities that reduce the potential business disruption of successful ransomware attacks.

    Activities

    3.1 Review the workflow and runbook templates.

    3.2 Update/define your threat escalation protocol.

    3.3 Define scenarios for a range of incidents.

    3.4 Run a tabletop planning exercise (IT).

    3.5 Update your ransomware response runbook.

    Outputs

    Security Incident Response Plan Assessment.

    Tabletop Planning Session (IT)

    Ransomware Workflow and Runbook.

    4 Improve Ransomware Resilience.

    The Purpose

    Identify prioritized initiatives to improve ransomware resilience.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the role of leadership in ransomware response and recovery.

    Communicate workshop outcomes and recommend initiatives to improve ransomware resilience.

    Activities

    4.1 Run a tabletop planning exercise (Leadership).

    4.2 Identify initiatives to close gaps and improve resilience.

    4.3 Review broader strategies to improve your overall security program.

    4.4 Prioritize initiatives based on factors such as effort, cost, and risk.

    4.5 Review the dashboard to fine tune your roadmap.

    4.6 Summarize status and next steps in an executive presentation.

    Outputs

    Tabletop Planning Session (Leadership)

    Ransomware Resilience Roadmap and Metrics

    Ransomware Workflow and Runbook

    Further reading

    Build Ransomware Resilience

    Prevent ransomware incursions and defend against ransomware attacks

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Ransomware is a high-profile threat that demands immediate attention:

    • Sophisticated ransomware attacks are on the rise and evolving quickly.
    • Emerging strains can exfiltrate sensitive data, encrypt systems, and destroy backups in only a few hours, which makes recovery a grueling challenge.
    • Executives want reassurance but aren't ready to write a blank check. Improvements must be targeted and justified.

    Common Obstacles

    Ransomware is more complex than other security threats:

    • Malicious agents design progressive, disruptive attacks to pressure organizations to pay a ransom.
    • Organizations misunderstand ransomware risk scenarios, which obscures the likelihood and impact of an attack.
    • Conventional approaches focus on response and recovery, which do nothing to prevent an attack and are often ineffective against sophisticated attacks.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    To prevent a ransomware attack:

    • Conduct a through assessment of your current state, identify potential gaps, and assess the possible outcomes of an attack.
    • Analyze attack vectors and prioritize controls that prevent ransomware attacks, and implement ransomware protection and detection to reduce your attack surface.
    • Visualize, plan, and practice your response and recovery to reduce the potential impact of an attack.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Resilience is not a trampoline, where you're down one moment and up the next. It's more like climbing a mountain. It takes time, planning, and help from people around you to work through challenges. Focus on what is in your organization's control, and cultivate strengths that allow you to protect assets, detect incursions, respond effectively, and recovery quickly.

    Analyst Perspective

    Ransomware is an opportunity and a challenge.

    As I write, the frequency and impact of ransomware attacks continue to increase, with no end in sight. Most organizations will experience ransomware in the next 24 months, some more than once, and business leaders know it. You will never have a better chance to implement best practice security controls as you do now.

    The opportunity comes with important challenges. Hackers need to spend less time in discovery before they deploy an attack, which have become much more effective. You can't afford to rely solely on your ability to respond and recover. You need to build a resilient organization that can withstand a ransomware event and recover quickly.

    Resilient organizations are not impervious to attack, but they have tools to protect assets, detect incursions, and respond effectively. Resilience is not a trampoline, where you're down one moment and up the next. It's more like climbing a mountain. It takes time, planning, and help from people around you to overcome challenges and work through problems. But eventually you reach the top and look back at how far you've come.

    This is an image of Michael Hébert

    Michel Hébert
    Research Director, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Ransomware attacks are on the rise and evolving quickly.

    Three factors contribute to the threat:

    • The rise of ransomware-as-a-service, which facilitates attacks.
    • The rise of crypto-currency, which facilitates anonymous payment.
    • State sponsorship of cybercrime.

    Elementus maps ransomware payments made through bitcoin. Since 2019, victims made at least $2B in payments.

    A handful of criminal organizations, many of whom operate out of cybercrime hotbeds in Russia, are responsible for most of the damage. The numbers capture only the ransom paid, not the clean-up cost and economic fallout over attacks during this period.

    Total ransom money collected (2015 – 2021): USD 2,592,889,121

    This image contains a bubble plot graph showing the total ransom money collected between the years 2015 - 2021.

    The frequency and impact of ransomware attacks are increasing

    Emerging strains can exfiltrate sensitive data, encrypt systems and destroy backups in only a few hours, which makes recovery a grueling challenge.

    Sophos commissioned a vendor agnostic study of the real-world experience of 5,600 IT professionals in mid-sized organizations across 31 countries and 15 industries.

    The survey was conducted in Jan – Feb 2022 and asked about the experience of respondents over the previous year.

    66%
    Hit by ransomware in 2021
    (up from 37% in 2020)

    90%
    Ransomware attack affected their ability to operate

    $812,360 USD
    Average ransom payment

    $4.54M
    Average remediation cost (not including ransom)

    ONE MONTH
    Average recovery time

    Meanwhile, organizations continue to put their faith in ineffective ransomware defenses.

    Of the respondents whose organizations weren't hit by ransomware in 2021 and don't expect to be hit in the future, 72% cited either backups or cyberinsurance as reasons why they anticipated an attack.

    While these elements can help recover from an attack, they don't prevent it in the first place.

    Source: Sophos, State of Ransomware (2022)
    IBM, Cost of A Data Breach (2022)

    The 3-step ransomware attack playbook

    • Get in
    • Spread
    • Profit

    At each point of the playbook, malicious agents need to achieve something before they can move to the next step.

    Resilient organizations look for opportunities to:

    • Learn from incursions
    • Disrupt the playbook
    • Measure effectiveness

    Initial access

    Execution

    Privilege Escalation

    Credential Access

    Lateral Movement

    Collection

    Data Exfiltration

    Data encryption

    Deliver phishing email designed to avoid spam filter.

    Launch malware undetected.

    Identify user accounts.

    Target an admin account.

    Use brute force tactics to crack it.

    Move through the network and collect data.

    Infect as many critical systems and backups as possible to limit recovery options.

    Exfiltrate data to gain leverage.

    Encrypt data, which triggers alert.

    Deliver ransom note.

    Ransomware is more complex than other security threats

    Ransomware groups thrive through extortion tactics.

    • Traditionally, ransomware attacks focused on encrypting files as an incentive for organizations to pay up.
    • As organizations improved backup and recovery strategies, gangs began targeting, encrypting, and destroying back ups.
    • Since 2019, gangs have focused on a double-extortion strategy: exfiltrate sensitive or protected data before encrypting systems and threaten to publish them.

    Organizations misunderstand ransomware risk scenarios, which obscures the potential impact of an attack.

    Ransom is only a small part of the equation. Four process-related activities drive ransomware recovery costs:

    • Detection and Response – Activities that enable detection, containment, eradication and recovery.
    • Notification – Activities that enable reporting to data subjects, regulators, law enforcement, and third parties.
    • Lost Business – Activities that attempt to minimize the loss of customers, business disruption, and revenue.
    • Post Breach Response – Redress activities to victims and regulators, and the implementation of additional controls.

    Source: IBM, Cost of a Data Breach (2022)

    Disrupt the attack each stage of the attack workflow.

    An effective response with strong, available backups will reduce the operational impact of an attack, but it won't spare you from its reputational and regulatory impact.

    Put controls in place to disrupt each stage of the attack workflow to protect the organization from intrusion, enhance detection, respond quickly, and recover effectively.

    Shortening dwell time requires better protection and detection

    Ransomware dwell times and average encryption rates are improving dramatically.

    Hackers spend less time in your network before they attack, and their attacks are much more effective.

    Avg dwell time
    3-5 Days

    Avg encryption rate
    70 GB/h

    Avg detection time
    11 Days

    What is dwell time and why does it matter?

    Dwell time is the time between when a malicious agent gains access to your environment and when they are detected. In a ransomware attack, most organizations don't detect malicious agents until they deploy ransomware, encrypt their files, and lock them out until they pay the ransom.

    Effective time is a measure of the effectiveness of the encryption algorithm. Encryption rates vary by ransomware family. Lockbit has the fastest encryption rate, clocking in at 628 GB/h.

    Dwell times are dropping, and encryption rates are increasing.

    It's more critical than ever to build ransomware resilience. Most organizations do not detect ransomware incursions in time to prevent serious business disruption.

    References: Bleeping Computers (2022), VentureBeat, Dark Reading, ZDNet.

    Resilience depends in part on response and recovery capabilities

    This blueprint will focus on improving your ransomware resilience to:

    • Protect against ransomware.
    • Detect incursions.
    • Respond and recovery effectively.

    Response

    Recovery

    This image depicts the pathway for response and recovery from a ransomware event.

    For in-depth assistance with disaster recovery planning, refer to Info-Tech's Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery.

    Info-Tech's ransomware resilience framework

    Disrupt the playbooks of ransomware gangs. Put controls in place to protect, detect, respond and recover effectively.

    Prioritize protection

    Put controls in place to harden your environment, train savvy end users, and prevent incursions.

    Support recovery

    Build and test a backup strategy that meets business requirements to accelerate recovery and minimize disruption.

    Protect Detect Respond

    Recover

    Threat preparedness

    Review ransomware threat techniques and prioritize detective and mitigation measures for initial and credential access, privilege escalation, and data exfiltration.

    Awareness and training

    Develop security awareness content and provide cybersecurity and resilience training to employees, contractors and third parties.

    Perimeter security

    Identify and implement network security solutions including analytics, network and email traffic monitoring, and intrusion detection and prevention.

    Respond and recover

    Identify disruption scenarios and develop incident response, business continuity, and disaster recovery strategies.

    Access management

    Review the user access management program, policies and procedures to ensure they are ransomware-ready.

    Vulnerability management

    Develop proactive vulnerability and patch management programs that mitigate ransomware techniques and tactics.

    This image contains the thought map for Info-Tech's Blueprint: Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks.

    Info-Tech's ransomware resilience methodology

    Assess resilience Protect and detect Respond and recover Improve resilience
    Phase steps
    1. Build ransomware risk scenario
    2. Conduct resilience assessment
    1. Assess attack vectors
    2. Identify countermeasures
    1. Review Security Incident Management Plan
    2. Run Tabletop Test (IT)
    3. Document Workflow and Runbook
    1. Run Tabletop Test (Leadership)
    2. Prioritize Resilience Initiatives
    Phase outcomes
    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment
    • Risk Scenario
    • Targeted ransomware countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities
    • Security Incident Response Plan Assessment
    • Tabletop Test (IT)
    • Ransomware Workflow and Runbook
    • Tabletop Test (Leadership)
    • Ransomware Resilience Roadmap & Metrics

    Insight Summary

    Shift to a ransomware resilience model

    Resilience is not a trampoline, where you're down one moment and up the next. It's more like climbing a mountain. It takes time, planning, and help from people around you to work through challenges.

    Focus on what is in your organization's control, and cultivate strengths that allow you to protect assets, detect incursions, and respond and recover quickly

    Visualize challenges

    Build risk scenarios that describe how a ransomware attack would impact organizational goals.

    Understand possible outcomes to motivate initiatives, protect your organization, plan your response, and practice recovery.

    Prioritize protection

    Dwell times and effective times are dropping dramatically. Malicious agents spend less time in your network before they deploy an attack, and their attacks are much more effective. You can't afford to rely on your ability to respond and recover alone.

    Seize the moment

    The frequency and impact of ransomware attacks continue to increase, and business leaders know it. You will never have a better chance to implement best practice security controls than you do now.

    Measure ransomware resilience

    The anatomy of ransomware attack is relatively simple: malicious agents get in, spread, and profit. Deploy ransomware protection metrics to measure ransomware resilience at each stage.

    Key deliverable

    Ransomware resilience roadmap

    The resilience roadmap captures the key insights your work will generate, including:

    • An assessment of your current state and a list of initiatives you need to improve your ransomware resilience.
    • The lessons learned from building and testing the ransomware response workflow and runbook.
    • The controls you need to implement to measure and improve your ransomware resilience over time.

    Project deliverables

    Info-Tech supports project and workshop activities with deliverables to help you accomplish your goals and accelerate your success.

    Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    Measure ransomware resilience, identify gaps, and draft initiatives.

    Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Analyze common ransomware techniques and develop countermeasures.

    Ransomware Response Workflow & Runbook

    Capture key process steps for ransomware response and recovery.

    Ransomware Tabletop Tests

    Run tabletops for your IT team and your leadership team to gather lessons learned.

    Ransomware Resilience Roadmap

    Capture project insights and measure resilience over time.

    Plan now or pay later

    Organizations worldwide spent on average USD 4.62M in 2021 to rectify a ransomware attack. These costs include escalation, notification, lost business and response costs, but did not include the cost of the ransom. Malicious ransomware attacks that destroyed data in destructive wiper-style attacks cost an average of USD 4.69M.

    Building better now is less expensive than incurring the same costs in addition to the clean-up and regulatory and business disruption costs associated with successful ransomware attacks.

    After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research and advisory services helped them achieve.

    Source: IBM, Cost of a Data Breach (2022)

    See what members have to say about the ransomware resilience blueprint:

    • Overall Impact: 9.8 / 10
    • Average $ Saved: $98,796
    • Average Days Saved: 17

    "Our advisor was well-versed and very polished. While the blueprint alone was a good tool to give us direction, his guidance made it significantly faster and easier to accomplish than if we had tried to tackle it on our own."

    CIO, Global Manufacturing Organization

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    Business benefits

    • Provide a structured approach for your organization to identify gaps, quantify the risk, and communicate status to drive executive buy-in.
    • Create a practical ransomware incident response plan that combines a high-level workflow with a detailed runbook to coordinate response and recovery.
    • Present an executive-friendly project roadmap with resilience metrics that summarizes your plan to address gaps and improve your security posture.
    • Enable leadership to make risk-based, informed decisions on resourcing and investments to improve ransomware readiness.
    • Quantify the potential impact of a ransomware attack on your organization to drive risk awareness.
    • Identify existing gaps so they can be addressed, whether by policy, response plans, technology, or a combination of these.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Executive brief case study

    SOURCE: Interview with CIO of large enterprise

    Organizations who "build back better" after a ransomware attack often wish they had used relevant controls sooner.

    Challenge

    In February 2020, a large organization found a ransomware note on an admin's workstation. They had downloaded a local copy of the organization's identity management database for testing and left a port open on their workstation. Hackers exfiltrated it and encrypted the data on the workstation. They demanded a ransom payment to decrypt the data.

    Complication

    Because private information was breached, the organization informed the state-level regulator. With 250,000 accounts affected, plans were made to require password changes en masse. A public announcement was made two days after the breach to ensure that everyone affected could be reached.

    The organization decided not to pay the ransom because it had a copy on an unaffected server.

    Resolution

    The organization was praised for its timely and transparent response.

    The breach motivated the organization to put more protections in place, including:

    • The implementation of a deny-by-default network.
    • The elimination of remote desktop protocol and secure shell.
    • IT mandating MFA.
    • New endpoint-detection and response systems.

    Executive brief case study

    SOURCE: Info-Tech Workshop Results
    iNDUSTRY: Government

    Regional government runs an Info-Tech workshop to fast-track its ransomware incident response planning

    The organization was in the middle of developing its security program, rolling out security awareness training for end users, and investing in security solutions to protect the environment and detect incursions. Still, the staff knew they still had holes to fill. They had not yet fully configured and deployed security solutions, key security policies were missing, and they had didn't have a documented ransomware incident response plan.

    Workshop results

    Info-Tech advisors helped the organization conduct a systematic review of existing processes, policies, and technology, with an eye to identify key gaps in the organization's ransomware readiness. The impact analysis quantified the potential impact of a ransomware attack on critical systems to improve the organizational awareness ransomware risks and improve buy-in for investment in the security program.

    Info-Tech's tabletop planning exercise provided a foundation for the organization's actual response plan. The organization used the results to build a ransomware response workflow and the framework for a more detailed runbook. The workshop also helped staff identifies ways to improve the backup strategy and bridge further gaps in their ability to recover.

    The net result was a current-state response plan, appropriate capability targets aligned with business requirements, and a project roadmap to achieve the organization's desired state of ransomware readiness.

    Guided implementation

    What kind of analyst experiences do clients have when working through this blueprint?

    Scoping Call Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1:

    Discuss context, identify challenges, and scope project requirements.

    Identify ransomware resilience metrics.

    Call #2:

    Build ransomware risk scenario.

    Call #4:

    Review common ransomware attack vectors.

    Identify and assess mitigation controls.

    Call #5:

    Document ransomware workflow and runbook.

    Call #7:

    Run tabletop test with leadership.

    Call #3:

    Assess ransomware resilience.

    Call #6:

    Run tabletop test with IT.

    Call #8:

    Build ransomware roadmap.

    Measure ransomware resilience metrics.

    A guided implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 8 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities

    Assess ransomware resilience

    Protect and detect

    Respond and recover

    Improve ransomware resilience

    Wrap-up (offsite and offline)

    1.1 1 Review incidents, challenges, and project drivers.

    1.1.2 Diagram critical systems and dependencies.

    1.1.3 Build ransomware risk scenario.

    2.1 1. Assess ransomware threat preparedness.

    2.2 2. Determine the impact of ransomware techniques on your environment.

    2.3 3. Identify countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    3.1.1 Review the workflow and runbook templates.

    3.1.2 Update/define your threat escalation protocol.

    3.2.1 Define scenarios for a range of incidents.

    3.2.2 Run a tabletop planning exercise (IT).

    3.3.1 Update your ransomware response workflow.

    4.1.1 Run a tabletop planning exercise (leadership).

    4.1.2 Identify initiatives to close gaps and improve resilience.

    4.1.3 Review broader strategies to improve your overall security program.

    4.2.1 Prioritize initiatives based on factors such as effort, cost, and risk.

    4.2.2 Review the dashboard to fine tune your roadmap.

    4.3.1 Summarize status and next steps in an executive presentation.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    5.3 Revisit ransomware resilience metrics in three months.

    Deliverables
    1. Workshop goals
    2. Ransomware Risk Scenario
    3. Ransomware Resilience Assessment
    1. Targeted ransomware countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.
    1. Security Incident Response Plan Assessment
    2. Tabletop Planning Session (IT)
    3. Ransomware Workflow and Runbook
    1. Tabletop Planning Session (Leadership)
    2. Ransomware Resilience Roadmap and Metrics
    3. Ransomware Summary Presentation
    1. Completed Ransomware Resilience Roadmap
    2. Ransomware Resilience Assessment
    3. Ransomware Resilience Summary Presentation

    Phase 1

    Assess ransomware resilience

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    1.1 Build ransomware risk scenario

    1.2 Conduct resilience assessment

    2.1 Assess attack vectors

    2.2 Identify countermeasures

    3.1 Review Security Incident Management Plan

    3.2 Run Tabletop Test (IT)

    3.3 Document Workflow and Runbook

    4.1 Run Tabletop Test (Leadership)

    4.2 Prioritize resilience initiatives

    4.3 Measure resilience metrics

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Conducting a maturity assessment.
    • Reviewing selected systems and dependencies.
    • Assessing a ransomware risk scenario.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Build Ransomware Resilience

    Step 1.1

    Build ransomware risk scenario

    Activities

    1.1.1 Review incidents, challenges and project drivers

    1.1.2 Diagram critical systems and dependencies

    1.1.3 Build ransomware risk scenario

    Assess ransomware resilience

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Reviewing incidents, challenges, and drivers.
    • Diagraming critical systems and dependencies.
    • Building a ransomware risk scenario.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • Subject-Matter Experts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Establish a repeatable process to evaluate and improve ransomware readiness across your environment.
    • Build a ransomware risk scenario to assess the likelihood and impact of an attack.

    1.1.1 Review incidents, challenges, and project drivers

    1 hour

    Brainstorm the challenges you need to address in the project. Avoid producing solutions at this stage, but certainly record suggestions for later. Use the categories below to get the brainstorming session started.

    Past incidents and other drivers

    • Past incidents (be specific):
      • Past security incidents (ransomware and other)
      • Close calls (e.g. partial breach detected before damage done)
    • Audit findings
    • Events in the news
    • Other?

    Security challenges

    • Absent or weak policies
    • Lack of security awareness
    • Budget limitations
    • Other?

    Input

    • Understanding of existing security capability and past incidents.

    Output

    • Documentation of past incidents and challenges.
    • Level-setting across the team regarding challenges and drivers.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip chart (or a shared screen if staff are remote)

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    1.1.2 Diagram critical systems and dependencies (1)

    1 hour

    Brainstorm critical systems and their dependencies to build a ransomware risk scenario. The scenario will help you socialize ransomware risks with key stakeholders and discuss the importance of ransomware resilience.

    Focus on a few key critical systems.

    1. On a whiteboard or flip chart paper, make a list of systems to potentially include in scope. Consider:
      1. Key applications that support critical business operations.
      2. Databases that support multiple key applications.
      3. Systems that hold sensitive data (e.g. data with personally identifiable information [PII]).
    2. Select five to ten systems from the list.
      1. Select systems that support different business operations to provide a broader sampling of potential impacts and recovery challenges.
      2. Include one or two non-critical systems to show how the methodology addresses a range of criticality and context.

    Input

    • High-level understanding of critical business operations and data sets.

    Output

    • Clarify context, dependencies, and security and recovery challenges for some critical systems.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip chart (or a shared screen if staff are remote)

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System SMEs (if not covered by SIRT members)

    1.1.2 Diagram critical systems and dependencies (2)

    1 hour

    1. A high-level topology or architectural diagram is an effective way to identify dependencies and communicate risks to stakeholders.

    Start with a WAN diagram, then your production data center, and then each critical
    system. Use the next three slides as your guide.

    Notes:

    • If you have existing diagrams, you can review those instead. However, if they are too detailed, draw a higher-level diagram to provide context. Even a rough sketch is a useful reference tool for participants.
    • Keep the drawings tidy and high level. Visualize the final diagram before you start to draw on the whiteboard to help with spacing and placement.
    • Collaborate with relevant SMEs to identify dependencies.

    Input

    • High-level understanding of critical business operations and data sets.

    Output

    • Clarify context, dependencies, and security and recovery challenges for some critical systems.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip chart (or a shared screen if staff are remote)

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System SMEs (if not covered by SIRT members)

    For your WAN diagram, focus on data center and business locations

    Start with a high-level network diagram like this one, and then dig deeper (see following slides) to provide more context. Below is an example; of course, your sketched diagrams may be rougher.

    This image contains a nexample of a High level Network Diagram.

    Diagram your production data center to provide context for the systems in scope

    Creating a high-level diagram provides context across different IT disciplines involved in creating your DRP. If you have multiple production data centers, focus on the data center(s) relevant to the selected systems. Below is an example.

    This image contains a nexample of a high level diagram which focuses on the data centers relevent to the selected system.

    Diagram each selected system to identify specific dependencies and redundancies

    Diagram the "ecosystem" for each system, identifying server, storage, and network dependencies. There may be overlap with the production data center diagram – but aim to be specific here. Below is an example that illustrates front-end and back-end components.

    When you get to this level of detail, use this opportunity to level-set with the team. Consider the following:

    • Existing security (Are these systems protected by your existing security monitoring and threat detection tools?).
    • Security challenges (e.g. public-facing systems).
    • Recovery challenges (e.g. limited or infrequent backups).
    This is an example of a diagram of a system ecosystem.

    Note the limitations of your security, backup, and DR solutions

    Use the diagrams to assess limitations. Gaps you identify here will often apply to other aspects of your environment.

    1. Security limitations
    • Are there any known security vulnerabilities or risks, such as external access (e.g. for a customer portal)? If so, are those risks mitigated? Are existing security solutions being fully used?
  • Backup limitations
    • What steps are taken to ensure the integrity of your backups (e.g. through inline or post-backup scanning, or the use of immutable backups)? Are there multiple restore points to provide more granularity when determining how far back you need to go for a clean backup?
  • Disaster recovery limitations
    • Does your DR solution account for ransomware attacks or is it designed only for one-way failover (i.e. for a smoking hole scenario)?
  • We will review the gaps we identify through the project in phase 4.

    For now, make a note of these gaps and continue with the next step.

    Draft risk scenarios to illustrate ransomware risk

    Risk scenarios help decision-makers understand how adverse events affect business goals.

    • Risk-scenario building is the process of identifying the critical factors that contribute to an adverse event and crafting a narrative that describes the circumstances and consequences if it were to happen.
    • Risk scenarios set up the risk analysis stage of the risk assessment process. They are narratives that describe in detail:
      • The asset at risk.
      • The threat that can act against the asset.
      • Their intent or motivation.
      • The circumstances and threat actor model associated with the threat event.
      • The potential effect on the organization.
      • When or how often the event might occur.

    Risk scenarios are further distilled into a single sentence or risk statement that communicates the essential elements from the scenario.

    Risk identification → Risk scenario → Risk statement

    Well-crafted risk scenarios have four components

    The slides walk through how to build a ransomware risk scenario

    THREAT Exploits an ASSET Using a METHOD Creating an EFFECT.

    An actor capable of harming an asset

    Anything of value that can be affected and results in loss

    Technique an actor uses to affect an asset

    How loss materializes

    Examples: Malicious or untrained employees, cybercriminal groups, malicious state actors

    Examples: Systems, regulated data, intellectual property, people

    Examples: Credential compromise, privilege escalation, data exfiltration

    Examples: Loss of data confidentiality, integrity, or availability; impact on staff health and safety

    Risk scenarios are concise, four to six sentence narratives that describe the core elements of forecasted adverse events.

    Use them to engage stakeholders with the right questions and guide them to make informed decisions about how to address ransomware risks.

    1.1.3 Build ransomware risk scenario (1)

    2 hours

    In a ransomware risk scenario, the threat, their motivations, and their methods are known. Malicious agents are motivated to compromise critical systems, sabotage recovery, and exfiltrate data for financial gain.

    The purpose of building the risk scenario is to highlight the assets at risk and the potential effect of a ransomware attack.

    As a group, consider critical or mission-essential systems identified in step 1.1.2. On a whiteboard, brainstorm the potential adverse effect of a loss of system availability, confidentiality or integrity.

    Consider the impact on:

    • Information systems.
    • Sensitive or regulated data.
    • Staff health and safety.
    • Critical operations and objectives.
    • Organizational finances.
    • Reputation and brand loyalty.

    Input

    • Understanding of critical systems and dependencies.

    Output

    • Ransomware risk scenario to engage guide stakeholders to make informed decisions about addressing risks.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip chart (or a shared screen if staff are remote)

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    1.1.3 Build ransomware risk scenario (2)

    2 hours

    1. On a whiteboard, brainstorm how threat agents will exploit vulnerabilities in critical assets to reach their goal. Redefine attack vectors to capture what could result from a successful initial attack.
    2. Bring together the critical risk elements into a single risk scenario.
    3. Distill the risk scenario into a single risk statement that captures the threat, the asset it will exploit, the method it will use, and the impact it will have on the organization.
    4. You can find a sample risk scenario and risk statement on the next slide.

    THREAT Exploits an ASSET Using a METHOD Creating an EFFECT.

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Risk analysis

    Critical assets

    ERP, CRM, FMS, LMS

    Operational technology

    Sensitive or regulated data

    Threat agents

    Cybercriminals

    Methods

    Compromise end user devices through social engineering attacks,. Compromise networks through external exposures and software vulnerabilities.

    Identify and crack administrative account. Escalate privileges. Move laterally.

    Collect data, destroy backups, exfiltrate data for leverage, encrypt systems,.

    Threaten to publish exfiltrated data and demand ransom.

    Adverse effect

    Serious business disruption

    Financial damage

    Reputational damage

    Potential litigation

    Average downtime: 30 Days

    Average clean-up costs: USD 1.4M

    Sample ransomware risk scenario

    Likelihood: Medium
    Impact: High

    Risk scenario

    Cyber-criminals penetrate the network, exfiltrate critical or sensitive data, encrypt critical systems, and demand a ransom to restore access.

    They threaten to publish sensitive data online to pressure the organization to pay the ransom, and reach out to partners, staff, and students directly to increase the pressure on the organization.

    Network access likely occurs through a phishing attack, credential compromise, or remote desktop protocol session.

    Risk statement

    Cybercriminals penetrate the network, compromise backups, exfiltrate and encrypt data, and disrupt computer systems for financial gain.

    Threat Actor:

    • Cybercriminals

    Assets:

    • Critical systems (ERP, FMS, CRM, LMS)
    • HRIS and payroll
    • Data warehouse
    • Office 365 ecosystem (email, Teams)

    Effect:

    • Loss of system availability
    • Lost of data confidentiality

    Methods:

    • Phishing
    • Credential compromise
    • Compromised remote desktop protocol
    • Privilege escalation
    • Lateral movement
    • Data collection
    • Data exfiltration
    • Data encryption

    Step 1.2

    Conduct resilience assessment

    Activities

    1.2.1 Complete resilience assessment

    1.2.2 Establish resilience metrics

    This step will guide you through the following activities :

    • Completing a ransomware resilience assessment
    • Establishing baseline metrics to measure ransomware resilience.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • Subject-matter experts

    .Outcomes of this step

    • Current maturity, targets, and initial gap analysis

    Maturity levels in this blueprint draw on the CMMI framework

    The maturity levels are based on the Capability Maturity Model Integration framework. We outline our modifications below.

    CMMI Maturity Level – Default Descriptions:

    CMMI Maturity Level – Modified for This Assessment:

    • Level 1 – Initial: Unpredictable and reactive. Work gets completed but is often delayed and over budget.
    • Level 2 – Managed: Managed on the project level. Projects are planned, performed, measured, and controlled.
    • Level 3 – Defined: Proactive rather than reactive. Organization-wide standards provide guidance across projects, programs, and portfolios.
    • Level 4 – Quantitatively managed: Measured and controlled. Organization is data-driven, with quantitative performance improvement objectives that are predictable and align to meet the needs of internal and external stakeholders.
    • Level 5 – Optimizing: Stable and flexible. Organization is focused on continuous improvement and is built to pivot and respond to opportunity and change. The organization's stability provides a platform for agility and innovation.
    • Level 1 – Initial/ad hoc: Not well defined and ad hoc in nature.
    • Level 2 – Developing: Established but inconsistent and incomplete.
    • Level 3 – Defined: Formally established, documented, and repeatable.
    • Level 4 – Managed and measurable: Managed using qualitative and quantitative data to ensure alignment with business requirements.
    • Level 5 – Optimizing: Qualitative and quantitative data is used to continually improve.

    (Source: CMMI Institute, CMMI Levels of Capability and Performance)

    Info-Tech's ransomware resilience framework

    Disrupt the playbooks of ransomware gangs. Put controls in place to protect, detect, respond and recover effectively.

    Prioritize protection

    Put controls in place to harden your environment, train savvy end users, and prevent incursions.

    Support recovery

    Build and test a backup strategy that meets business requirements to accelerate recovery and minimize disruption.

    Protect Detect Respond

    Recover

    Threat preparedness

    Review ransomware threat techniques and prioritize detective and mitigation measures for initial and credential access, privilege escalation, and data exfiltration.

    Awareness and training

    Develop security awareness content and provide cybersecurity and resilience training to employees, contractors and third parties.

    Perimeter security

    Identify and implement network security solutions including analytics, network and email traffic monitoring, and intrusion detection and prevention.

    Respond and recover

    Identify disruption scenarios and develop incident response, business continuity, and disaster recovery strategies.

    Access management

    Review the user access management program, policies and procedures to ensure they are ransomware-ready.

    Vulnerability management

    Develop proactive vulnerability and patch management programs that mitigate ransomware techniques and tactics.

    1.2.1 Complete the resilience assessment

    2-3 hours

    Use the Ransomware Resilience Assessment Tool to assess maturity of existing controls, establish a target state, and identify an initial set of initiatives to improve ransomware resilience.

    Keep the assessment tool on hand to add gap closure initiatives as you proceed through the project.

    Download the Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    Outcomes:

    • Capture baseline resilience metrics to measure progress over time.
      • Low scores are common. Use them to make the case for security investment.
      • Clarify the breadth of security controls.
      • Security controls intersect with a number of key processes and technologies, each of which are critical to ransomware resilience.
    • Key gaps identified.
      • Allocate more time to subsections with lower scores.
      • Repeat the scorecard at least annually to clarify remaining areas to address.

    Input

    • Understanding of current security controls

    Output

    • Current maturity, targets, and gaps

    Materials

    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment Tool

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is an image of the Ransomeware Resilience Assessment Table from Info-Tech's Ransomware Resilience Assessment Blueprint.

    1.2.2 Establish resilience metrics

    Ransomware resilience metrics track your ability to disrupt a ransomware attack at each stage of its workflow.

    Measure metrics at the start of the project to establish a baseline, as the project nears completion to measure progress.

    Attack workflow Process Metric Target trend Current Goal
    GET IN Vulnerability Management % Critical patches applied Higher is better
    Vulnerability Management # of external exposures Fewer is better
    Security Awareness Training % of users tested for phishing Higher is better
    SPREAD Identity and Access Management Adm accounts / 1000 users Lower is better
    Identity and Access Management % of users enrolled for MFA Higher is better
    Security Incident Management Avg time to detect Lower is better
    PROFIT Security Incident Management Avg time to resolve Lower is better
    Backup and Disaster Recovery % critical assets with recovery test Higher is better
    Backup and Disaster Recovery % backup to immutable storage Higher is better

    Phase 2

    Improve protection and detection capabilities

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Build ransomware risk scenario

    1.2 Conduct resilience assessment

    2.1 Assess attack vectors

    2.2 Identify countermeasures

    3.1 Review Security Incident Management Plan

    3.2 Run Tabletop Test (IT)

    3.3 Document Workflow and Runbook

    4.1 Run Tabletop Test (Leadership)

    4.2 Prioritize resilience initiatives

    4.3 Measure resilience metrics

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assessing common ransomware attack vectors.
    • Identifying countermeasures to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Build Ransomware Resilience

    Step 2.1

    Assess attack vectors

    Activities

    2.1.1 Assess ransomware threat preparedness

    2.1.2 Determine the impact of ransomware techniques on your environment

    This step involves the following activities:

    • Assessing ransomware threat preparedness.
    • Configuring the threat preparedness tool.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Outcomes of this step

    Assess risks associated with common ransomware attack vectors.

    Improve protection and detection capabilities

    Use the MITRE attack framework to prepare

    This phase draws on MITRE to improve ransomware protection and detection capabilities

    • The activities in this phase provide guidance on how to use the MITRE attack framework to protect your organizations against common ransomware techniques and tactics, and detect incursions.
    • You will:
      • Review common ransomware tactics and techniques.
      • Assess their impact on your environment.
      • Identify relevant countermeasures.
    • The Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook included with the project blueprint will be set up to deal with common ransomware threats and tactics.

    Download the Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Review ransomware tactics and techniques

    Ransomware attack workflow

    Deliver phishing email designed to avoid spam filter.

    Launch malware undetected.

    Identify user accounts.

    Target an admin account.

    Use brute force tactics to crack it.

    Move through the network. Collect data.

    Infect critical systems and backups to limit recovery options.

    Exfiltrate data to gain leverage.

    Encrypt data, which triggers alert.

    Deliver ransom note.

    Associated MITRE tactics and techniques

    • Initial access
    • Execution
    • Privilege escalation
    • Credential access
    • Lateral movement
    • Collection
    • Data Exfiltration
    • Data encryption

    Most common ransomware attack vectors

    • Phishing and social engineering
    • Exploitation of software vulnerabilities
    • Unsecured external exposures
      • e.g. remote desktop protocols
    • Malware infections
      • Email attachments
      • Web pages
      • Pop-ups
      • Removable media

    2.1.1 Assess ransomware threat preparedness

    Estimated Time: 1-4 hours

    1. Read through the instructions in the Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook.
    2. Select ransomware attack tactics to analyze. Use the workbook to understand:
      1. Risks associated with each attack vector.
      2. Existing controls that can help you protect the organization and detect an incursion.
    3. This initial analysis is meant to help you understand your risk before you apply additional controls.

    Once you're comfortable, follow the instructions on the following pages to configure the MITRE ransomware analysis and identify how to improve your protection and detection capabilities.

    Download the Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Input

    • Knowledge about existing infrastructure.
    • Security protocols.
    • Information about ransomware attack tactics, techniques, and mitigation protocols.

    Output

    • Structured understanding of the risks facing the enterprise based on your current preparedness and security protocols.
    • Protective and detective measures to improve ransomware resilience.

    Materials

    • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    2.1.2 Determine the impact of techniques

    Estimated Time: 1-4 hours

    1. The Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook included with the project blueprint is set up to deal with common ransomware use cases.

    If you would like to change the set-up, go through the following steps.

    • Review the enterprise matrix. Select the right level of granularity for your analysis. If you are new to threat preparedness exercises, the Technique Level is a good starting point.
    • As you move through each tactic, align each sheet to your chosen technique domain to ensure the granularity of your analysis is consistent.
    • Read the tactics sheet from left to right. Determine the impact of the technique on your environment. For each control, indicate current mitigation levels using the dropdown list.

    The following slides walk you through the process with screenshots from the workbook.

    Download the Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Input

    • Knowledge about existing infrastructure.
    • Security protocols.
    • Information about ransomware attack tactics, techniques, and mitigation protocols.

    Output

    • Structured understanding of the risks facing the enterprise based on your current preparedness and security protocols.
    • Protective and detective measures to improve ransomware resilience.

    Materials

    • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Select the domain for the analysis

    • The Tactics Dashboard is a live feed of your overall preparedness for the potential attack vectors that your organization may face. These 14 tactics correspond to the Enterprise Matrix used by the MITRE ATT&CK® framework.
    • The technique domain on the right side of the sheet is split in two main groups:
    • The Technique Level
      • - High-level techniques that an attacker may use to gain entry to your network.
      • - The Technique Level is a great starting point if you are new to threat preparedness.
    • The Sub-Technique Level
      • - Individual sub-techniques found throughout the MITRE ATT&CK® Framework.
      • - More mature organizations will find the Sub-Technique Level generates a deeper and more precise understanding of their current preparedness.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Dwell times and effective times are dropping dramatically. Malicious agents spend less time in your network before they deploy an attack, and their attacks are much more effective. You can't afford to rely on your ability to respond and recover alone.

    This is the first screenshot from Info-Tech's Tactic Preparedness Assessment Dashboard.

    Keep an eye on the enterprise matrix

    As you fill out the Tactic tabs with your evaluation, the overall reading will display the average of your overall preparedness for that tactic.

    Choosing the Technique Domain level will increase the accuracy of the reporting at the cost of speed.

    The Technique level is faster but provides less specifics for each control and analyzes them as a group.

    The Sub-Technique level is much more granular, but each tactic and technique has several sub-techniques that you will need to account for.

    Check with the dashboard to see the associated risk level for each of the tactics based on the legend. Tactics that appear white have not yet been assessed or are rated as "N/A" (not applicable).

    This is the second screenshot from Info-Tech's Tactic Preparedness Assessment Dashboard.

    When you select your Technique Domain, you cannot change it again. Changing the domain mid-analysis will introduce inaccuracies in your security preparedness.

    Configure the tactics tabs

    • Each tactic has a corresponding tab at the bottom of the Excel workbook.
      Adjusting the Technique Domain level will change the number of controls shown.
    • Next, align the sheet to the domain you selected on Tab 2 before you continue. As shown in the example to the right,
      • Select "1" for Technique Level.
      • Select "2" for Sub-Technique Level.
    • This will collapse the controls to your chosen level of granularity.

    This is a screenshot showing how you can configure the tactics tab of the Ransomware Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Read tactic sheets from left to right

    This is a screenshot of the tactics tab of the Ransomware Threat Preparedness Workbook

    Technique:

    How an attacker will attempt to achieve their goals through a specific action.

    ID:

    The corresponding ID number on the MITRE ATT&CK® Matrix for quick reference.

    Impact of the Technique(s):

    If an attack of this type is successful on your network, how deep does the damage run?

    Current Mitigations:

    What security protocols do you have in place right now that can help prevent an attacker from successfully executing this attack technique? The rating is based on the CMMI scale.

    Determine the impact of the technique

    • For each control, indicate the current mitigation level using the dropdown list.
    • Only use "N/A" if you are confident that the control is not required in your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    We highly recommend that you write comments about your current-state security protocols. First, it's great to have documented your thought processes in the event of a threat modeling session. Second, you can speak to deficits clearly, when asked.

    This is the second screenshot from Info-Tech's Reconnaissance Tactic Analysis

    Review technique preparedness

    • If you have chosen the Technique level, the tool should resemble this image:
      • High-level controls are analyzed, and sub-controls hidden.
      • The sub-techniques under the broader technique show how a successful attack from this vector would impact your network.
    • Each sub-technique has a note for additional context:
      • Under Impact, select the overall impact for the listed controls to represent how damaging you believe the controls to be.
      • Next select your current preparedness maturity in terms of preparedness for the same techniques. Ask yourself "What do I have that contributes to blocking this technique?"

    This is the third screenshot from Info-Tech's Reconnaissance Tactic Analysis

    Info-Tech Insight

    You may discover that you have little to no mitigation actions in place to deal with one or many of these techniques. However, look at this discovery as a positive: You've learned more about the potential vectors and can actively work toward remediating them rather than hoping that a breach never happens through one of these avenues.

    Review sub-technique preparedness

    If you have chosen the Sub-Technique level, the tool should resemble this image.

    • The granular controls are being analyzed. However, the grouped controls will still appear. It is important to not fill the grouped sections, to make sure the calculations run properly.
    • The average of your sub-techniques will be calculated to show your overall preparedness level.
    • Look at the sub-techniques under the broader technique and consider how a successful attack from this vector would impact your network.

    Each sub-technique has a note for additional context and understanding about what the techniques are seeking to do and how they may impact your enterprise.

    • Because of the enhanced granularity, the final risk score is more representative of an enterprise's current mitigation capabilities.
    This is the fourth screenshot from Info-Tech's Reconnaissance Tactic Analysis

    Step 2.2

    Identify countermeasures

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify countermeasures

    This step involves the following activities:

    • Identifying countermeasures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Outcomes of this step

    Identification of countermeasures to common ransomware techniques, and tactics to improve protection and detection capabilities.

    Improve Protection and Detection Capabilities

    Review technique countermeasures

    As you work through the tool, your dashboard will prioritize your threat preparedness for each of the various attack techniques to give you an overall impression of your preparedness.

    For each action, the tool includes detection and remediation actions for you to consider either for implementation or as table stakes for your next threat modeling sessions.

    Note: Some sheets will have the same controls. However, the context of the attack technique may change your answers. Be sure to read the tactic and technique that you are on when responding to the controls.

    This is an image of the Privilege Escalation Tactic Analysis Table

    This is an image of the Defense Evasion Tactic Analysis Table

    Prioritize the analysis of ransomware tactics and sub-techniques identified on slide 45. If your initial analysis in Activity 2.2.1 determined that you have robust security protocols for some of the attack vectors, set these domains aside.

    2.2.1 Identify countermeasures

    Estimated Time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review the output of the Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook. Remediation efforts are on the right side of the sheet. These are categorized as either detection actions or mitigation actions.
      1. Detection actions:
      • What can you do before an attack occurs, and how can you block attacks? Detection actions may thwart an attack before it ever occurs.
    2. Mitigation actions:
      • If an attacker is successful through one of the attack methods, how do you lessen the impact of the technique? Mitigation actions address this function to slow and hinder the potential spread or damage of a successful attack.
  • Detection and mitigation measures are associated with each technique and sub-technique. Not all techniques will be able to be detected properly or mitigated. However, understanding their relationships can better prepare your defensive protocols.
  • Add relevant control actions to the initiative list in the Ransomware Resilience Assessment.
  • Input

    • Knowledge about existing infrastructure.
    • Security protocols.
    • Information about ransomware attack tactics, techniques, and mitigation protocols.
    • Outputs from the Threat Preparedness Workbook.

    Output

    • Structured understanding of the risks facing the enterprise based on your current preparedness and security protocols.
    • Protective and detective measures to improve ransomware resilience.

    Materials

    • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook
    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • System subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Phase 3

    Improve response and recovery capabilities

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Build ransomware risk scenario

    1.2 Conduct resilience assessment

    2.1 Assess attack vectors

    2.2 Identify countermeasures

    3.1 Review Security Incident Management Plan

    3.2 Run Tabletop Test (IT)

    3.3 Document Workflow and Runbook

    4.1 Run Tabletop Test (Leadership)

    4.2 Prioritize resilience initiatives

    4.3 Measure resilience metrics

    This phase will guide you through the following steps:

    • Documenting your threat escalation protocol.
    • Identify response steps and gaps.
    • Update your response workflow and runbook.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Build Ransomware Resilience

    Step 3.1

    Review security incident management plan

    Activities

    3.1.1 Review the workflow and runbook templates

    3.1.2 Update/define your threat escalation protocol

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Reviewing the example Workflow and Runbook
    • Updating and defining your threat escalation protocol.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Clear escalation path for critical incidents.
    • Common understanding of incident severity that will drive escalation.

    Improve response and recovery capabilities

    3.1.1 Review the workflow and runbook templates

    30 minutes

    This blueprint includes sample information in the Ransomware Response Workflow Template and Ransomware Response Runbook Template to use as a starting points for the steps in Phase 3, including documenting your threat escalation protocol.

    • The Ransomware Response Workflow Template contains an example of a high-level security incident management workflow for a ransomware attack. This provides a structure to follow for the tabletop planning exercise and a starting point for your ransomware response workflow.
      The Workflow is aimed at incident commanders and team leads. It provides an at-a-glance view of the high-level steps and interactions between stakeholders to help leaders coordinate response.
    • The Ransomware Response Runbook Template is an example of a security incident management runbook for a ransomware attack. This includes a section for a threat escalation protocol that you can use as a starting point.
      The Runbook is aimed at the teams executing the response. It provides more specific actions that need to be executed at each phase of the incident response.

    Download the Ransomware Response Workflow Template

    Download the Ransomware Response Runbook Template

    Input

    • No Input Required

    Output

    • Visualize the end goal

    Materials

    • Example workflow and runbook in this blueprint

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Two overlapping screenshots are depicted, including the table of contents from the Ransomware Response Runbook.

    3.1.2 Update/define your threat escalation protocol

    1-2 hours

    Document the Threat Escalation Protocol sections in the Ransomware Response Workflow Template or review/update your existing runbook. The threat escalation protocol defines which stakeholders to involve in the incident management process, depending on impact and scope. Specifically, you will need to define the following:

    Impact and scope criteria: Impact considers factors such as the criticality of the system/data, whether PII is at risk, and whether public notification is required. Scope considers how many systems or users are impacted.

    Severity assessment: Define the severity levels based on impact and scope criteria.

    Relevant stakeholders: Identify stakeholders to notify for each severity level, which can include external stakeholders.

    If you need additional guidance, see Info-Tech's Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program blueprint, which takes a broader look at security incidents.

    Input

    • Current escalation process (formal or informal).

    Output

    • Define criteria for severity levels and relevant stakeholders.

    Materials

    • Ransomware Response Workflow Template

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is an image of the Threat Escalation Protocol Criteria and Stakeholders.

    Step 3.2

    Run Tabletop Test (IT)

    Activities

    3.2.1 Define scenarios for a range of incidents

    3.2.2 Run a tabletop planning exercise

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Defining scenarios for a range of incidents.
    • Running a tabletop planning exercise.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)
    • Other stakeholders (as relevant)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current-state incident response workflow, including stakeholders, steps, timeline.
    • Process and technology gaps to be addressed.

    Improve response and recovery capabilities

    3.2.1 Define scenarios for a range of incidents

    30 minutes

    As a group, collaborate to define scenarios that enable you to develop incident response details for a wide range of potential incidents. Below are example scenarios:

    • Scenario 1: An isolated attack on one key system. The database for a critical application is compromised. Assume the attack was not detected until files were encrypted, but that you can carry out a repair-in-place by wiping the server and restoring from backups.
    • Scenario 2: A site-wide impact that warrants broader disaster recovery. Several critical systems are compromised. It would take too long to repair in-place, so you need to failover to your DR environment, in addition to executing security response steps. (Note: If you don't have a DRP, see Info-Tech's Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.)
    • Scenario 3: A critical outsourced service or cloud service is compromised. You need to work with the vendor to determine the scope of impact and execute a response. This includes determining if your on-prem systems were also compromised.
    • Scenario 4: One or multiple end-user devices are compromised. Your response to the above scenarios would include assessing end-user devices as a possible source or secondary attack, but this scenario would provide more focus on the containing an attack on end-user devices.

    Note: The above is too much to execute in one 30-minute session, so plan a series of exercises as outlined on the next slide.

    Input

    • No input required

    Output

    • Determine the scope of your tabletop planning exercises

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip chart (or a shared screen if staff are remote)

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Optimize the time spent by participants by running a series of focused exercises

    Not all stakeholders need to be present at every tabletop planning exercise. First, run an exercise with IT that focuses on the technical response. Run a second tabletop for non-IT stakeholders that focuses on the non-IT response, such as crisis communications, working with external stakeholders (e.g. law enforcement, cyberinsurance).

    Sample schedule:

    • Q1: Hold two sessions that run Scenarios 1 and 2 with relevant IT participants (see Activity 3.2.1). The focus for these sessions will be primarily on the technical response. For example, include notifying leadership and their role in decision making, but don't expand further on the details of their process. Similarly, don't invite non-IT participants to these sessions so you can focus first on understanding the IT response. Invite executives to the Q2 exercise, where they will have more opportunity to be involved.
    • Q2: Hold one session with the SIRT and non-IT stakeholders. Use the results of the Q1 exercises as a starting point and expand on the non-IT response steps (e.g. notifying external parties, executive decisions on response options).
    • Q3 and Q4: Run other sessions (e.g. for Scenarios 3 and 4) with relevant stakeholders. Ensure your ransomware incident response plan covers a wide range of possible scenarios.
    • Run ongoing exercises at least annually. Once you have a solid ransomware incident response plan, incorporate ransomware-based tabletop planning exercises into your overall security incident management testing and maintenance schedule.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Schedule these sessions well in advance to ensure appropriate resources are available. Document this in an annual test plan summary that outlines the scope, participants, and dates and times for the planned sessions.

    3.2.2 Run a tabletop planning exercise

    1-2 hours

    Remember that the goal is a deeper dive into how you would respond to an attack so you can clarify steps and gaps. This is not meant to just be a read-through of your plan. Follow the guidelines below:

    1. Select your scenario and invite relevant participants (see the previous slides).
    2. Guide participants through the incident and capture the steps and gaps along the way. Focus on one stakeholder at a time through each phase but be sure to get input from everyone. For example, focus on the Service Desk's steps for detection, then do the same as relevant to other stakeholders. Move on to analysis and do the same. (Tip: The distinction between phases is not always clear, and that's okay. Similarly, eradication and recovery might be the same set of steps. Focus on capturing the detail; you can clarify the relevant phase later.)
    3. Record the results (e.g. capture it in Visio) for reference purposes. (Tip: You can run the exercise directly in Visio. However, there's a risk that the tool may become a distraction. Enlist a scribe who is proficient with Visio so you don't need to wait for information to be captured and plan to save the detailed formatting and revising for later. )

    Refer to the Ransomware Tabletop Planning Results – Example as a guide for what to capture. Aim for more detail than found in your Ransomware Response Workflow (but not runbook-level detail).

    Download the Ransomware Tabletop Planning Results – Example

    Input

    • Baseline ransomware response workflow

    Output

    • Clarify your response workflow, capabilities, and gaps

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or sticky notes or index cards, or a shared screen

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is an example of a Ransomware Response Tabletop Planning Results Page.

    Step 3.3

    Document Workflow and Runbook

    Activities

    3.3.1 Update your ransomware response workflow

    3.3.2 Update your ransomware response runbook

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Updating your ransomware response workflow.
    • Updating your ransomware response runbook.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Outcomes of this step

    • An updated incident response workflow and runbook based on current capabilities.

    Improve response and recovery capabilities

    3.3.1 Update your ransomware response workflow

    1 hour

    Use the results from your tabletop planning exercises (Activity 3.2.2) to update and clarify your ransomware response workflow. For example:

    • Update stakeholder swim-lanes: Clarify which stakeholders need a swim lane (e.g. where interactions between groups needs to be clarified). For example, consider an SIRT swim-lane that combines the relevant technical response roles, but have separate swim-lanes for other groups that the SIRT interacts with (e.g. Service Desk, the Executive Team).
    • Update workflow steps: Use the detail from the tabletop exercises to clarify and/or add steps, as well as further define the interactions between swim-lanes.(Tip: Your workflow needs to account for a range of scenarios. It typically won't be as specific as the tabletop planning results, which focus on only one scenario.)
    • Clarify the overall the workflow: Look for and correct any remaining areas of confusion and clutter. For example, consider adding "Go To" connectors to minimize lines crossing each other, adding color-coding to highlight key related steps (e.g. any communication steps), and/or resizing swim-lanes to reduce the overall size of the workflow to make it easier to read.
    • Repeat the above after each exercise: Continue to refine the workflow as needed until you reach the stage where you just need to validate that your workflow is still accurate.

    Input

    • Results from tabletop planning exercises (Activity 3.2.2)

    Output

    • Clarify your response workflow

    Materials

    • Ransomware Response Workflow

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is a screenshot from the ransomeware response tabletop planning

    3.3.2 Update your ransomware response runbook

    1 hour

    Use the results from your tabletop planning exercises (Activity 3.2.2) to update your ransomware response runbook. For example:

    • Align stakeholder sections with the workflow: Each stakeholder swim-lane in the workflow needs its own section in the runbook.
    • Update incident response steps: Use the detail from the tabletop exercise to clarify instructions for each stakeholder. This can include outlining specific actions, defining which stakeholders to work with, and referencing relevant documentation (e.g. vendor documentation, step-by-step restore procedures). (Tip: As with the workflow, the runbook needs to account for a range of scenarios, so it will include a list of actions that might need to be taken depending on the incident, as illustrated in the example runbook.)
    • Review and update your threat escalation protocol: It's best to define your threat escalation protocol before the tabletop planning exercise to help identify participants and avoid confusion. Now use the exercise results to validate or update that documentation.
    • Repeat the above after each exercise. Continue to refine your runbook as needed until you reach the stage where you just need to validate that your runbook is still accurate.

    Input

    • Results from tabletop planning exercises (Activity 3.2.2)

    Output

    • Clarified response runbook

    Materials

    • Ransomware Response Workflow

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is a screenshot of the Ransomware Response Runbook

    Phase 4

    Improve ransomware resilience

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Build ransomware risk scenario

    1.2 Conduct resilience assessment

    2.1 Assess attack vectors

    2.2 Identify countermeasures

    3.1 Review Security Incident Management Plan

    3.2 Run Tabletop Test (IT)

    3.3 Document Workflow and Runbook

    4.1 Run Tabletop Test (Leadership)

    4.2 Prioritize resilience initiatives

    4.3 Measure resilience metrics

    This phase will guide you through the following steps:

    • Identifying initiatives to improve ransomware resilience.
    • Prioritizing initiatives in a project roadmap.
    • Communicating status and recommendations.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Build Ransomware Resilience

    Step 4.1

    Run Tabletop Test (leadership)

    Activities

    • 4.1.1 Identify initiatives to close gaps and improve resilience
    • 4.1.2 Review broader strategies to improve your overall security program

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identifying initiatives to close gaps and improve resilience.
    • Reviewing broader strategies to improve your overall security program.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specific potential initiatives based on a review of the gaps.
    • Broader potential initiatives to improve your overall security program.

    Improve ransomware resilience

    4.1.1 Identify initiatives to close gaps and improve resilience

    1 hour

    1. Use the results from the activities you have completed to identify initiatives to improve your ransomware readiness.
    2. Set up a blank spreadsheet with two columns and label them "Gaps" and "Initiatives." (It will be easier to copy the gaps and initiatives from this spreadsheet to you project roadmap, rather than use the Gap Initiative column in the Ransomware Readiness Maturity Assessment Tool.)
    3. Review your tabletop planning results:
      1. Summarize the gaps in the "Gaps" column in your spreadsheet created for this activity.
      2. For each gap, write down potential initiatives to address the gap.
      3. Where possible, combine similar gaps and initiatives. Similarly, the same initiative might address multiple gaps, so you don't need to identify a distinct initiative for every gap.
    4. Review the results of your maturity assessment completed in Phase 1 to identify additional gaps and initiatives in the spreadsheet created for this activity.

    Input

    • Tabletop planning results
    • Maturity assessment

    Output

    • Identify initiatives to improve ransomware readiness

    Materials

    • Blank spreadsheet

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    4.1.2 Review broader strategies to improve your overall security program

    1 hour

    1. Review the following considerations as outlined on the next few slides:
      • Implement core elements of an effective security program – strategy, operations, and policies. Leverage the work completed in this blueprint to provide context and address your immediate gaps while developing an overarching security strategy based on business requirements, risk tolerance, and overall security considerations. Security operations and policies are key to executing your overall security strategy and day to day incident management.
      • Update your backup strategy to account for ransomware attacks. Consider what your options would be today if your primary backups were infected? If those options aren't very good, your backup strategy needs a refresh.
      • Consider a zero-trust strategy. Zero trust reduces your reliance on perimeter security and moves controls to where the user accesses resources. However, it takes time to implement. Evaluate your readiness for this approach.
    2. As a team, discuss the merits of these strategies in your organization and identify potential initiatives. Depending on what you already have in place, the project may be to evaluate options (e.g. if you have not already initiated zero trust, assign a project to evaluate your options and readiness).

    Input

    • An understanding of your existing security practices and backup strategy.

    Output

    • Broader initiatives to improve ransomware readiness.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip chart (or a shared screen if staff are remote)

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Implement core elements of an effective security program

    There is no silver bullet. Ransomware readiness depends on foundational security best practices. Where budget allows, support that foundation with more advanced AI-based tools that identify abnormal behavior to detect an attack in progress.

    Leverage the following blueprints to implement the foundational elements of an effective security program:

    • Build an Information Security Strategy: Consider the full spectrum of information security, including people, processes, and technologies. Then base your security strategy on the risks facing your organization – not just on best practices – to ensure alignment with business goals and requirements.
    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy: Establish unified security operations that actively monitor security events and threat information, and turn that into appropriate security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes.
    • Develop and Deploy Security Policies: Improve cybersecurity through effective policies, from acceptable use policies aimed at your end users to system configuration management policies aimed at your IT operations.

    Supplement foundational best practices with AI-based tools to counteract more sophisticated security attacks:

    • The evolution of ransomware gangs and ransomware as a service means the most sophisticated tools designed to bypass perimeter security and endpoint protection are available to a growing number of hackers.
    • Rather than activate the ransomware virus immediately, attackers will traverse the network using legitimate commands to infect as many systems as possible and exfiltrate data without generating alerts, then finally encrypt infected systems.
    • AI-based tools learn what is normal behavior and therefore can recognize unusual traffic (which could be an attack in progress) before it's too late. For example, a "user" accessing a server they've never accessed before.
    • Engage an Info-Tech analyst or consult SoftwareReviews to review products that will add this extra layer of AI-based security.

    Update your backup strategy to account for ransomware attacks

    Apply a defense-in-depth strategy. A daily disk backup that goes offsite once a week isn't good enough.

    In addition to applying your existing security practices to your backup solution (e.g. anti-malware, restricted access), consider:

    • Creating multiple restore points. Your most recent backup might be infected. Frequent backups allow you to be more granular when determining how far you need to roll back.
    • Having offsite backups and using different storage media. Reduce the risk of infected backups by using different storage media (e.g. disk, NAS, tape) and backup locations (e.g. offsite). If you can make the attackers jump through more hoops, you have a greater chance of detecting the attack before all backups are infected.
    • Investing in immutable backups. Most leading backup solutions offer options to ensure backups are immutable (cannot be altered after they are written).
    • Using the BIA you completed in Phase 2 to help decide where to prioritize investments. All the above strategies add to your backup costs and might not be feasible for all data. Use your BIA results to decide which data sets require higher levels of protection.

    This example strategy combines multiple restore points, offsite backup, different storage media, and immutable backups.

    This is an example of a backup strategy to account for ransomware attacks.

    Refer to Info-Tech's Establish an Effective Data Protection Plan blueprint for additional guidance.

    Explore zero-trust initiatives

    Zero trust is a set of principles, not a set of controls.

    Reduces reliance on perimeter security.

    Zero trust is a strategy that reduces reliance on perimeter security and moves controls to where your user accesses resources. It often consolidates security solutions, reduces operating costs, and enables business mobility.

    Zero trust must benefit the business first.

    IT security needs to determine how zero trust initiatives will affect core business processes. It's not a one-size-fits-all approach to IT security. Zero trust is the goal – but some organizations can only get so close to that ideal.

    For more information, see Build a Zero-Trust Roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A successful zero-trust strategy should evolve. Use an iterative and repeatable process to assess available zero-trust technologies and principles and secure the most relevant protect surfaces. Collaborate with stakeholders to develop a roadmap with targeted solutions and enforceable policies.

    Step 4.2

    Prioritize resilience initiatives

    Activities

    • 4.2.1 Prioritize initiatives based on factors such as effort, cost, and risk
    • 4.2.2 Review the dashboard to fine tune your roadmap

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Prioritizing initiatives based on factors such as effort, cost, and risk.
    • Reviewing the dashboard to fine-tune your roadmap.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Outcomes of this step

    • An executive-friendly project roadmap dashboard summarizing your initiatives.
    • A visual representation of the priority, effort, and timeline required for suggested initiatives.

    Review the Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    Tabs 2 and 3 list initiatives relevant to your ransomware readiness improvement efforts.

    • At this point in the project, the Ransomware Resilience Assessment should contain a number of initiatives to improve ransomware resilience.
    • Tab 2 is prepopulated with examples of gap closure actions to consider, which are categorized into initiatives listed on Tab 3.
    • Follow the instructions in the Ransomware Resilience Assessment to:
      • Categorize gap control actions into initiatives.
      • Prioritize initiatives based on cost, effort, and benefit.
      • Construct a roadmap for consideration.

    Download the Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    4.2.1 Prioritize initiatives based on factors such as effort, cost, and risk

    1 hour

    Prioritize initiatives in the Ransomware Resilience Assessment.

    1. The initiatives listed on Tab 3 Initiative List will be copied automatically on Tab 5 Prioritization.
    2. On Tab 1 Setup:
      1. Review the weight you want to assign to the cost and effort criteria.
      2. Update the default values for FTE and Roadmap Start as needed.
    3. Go back to Tab 5 Prioritization:
      1. Fill in the cost, effort, and benefit evaluation criteria for each initiative. Hide optional columns you don't plan to use, to avoid confusion.
      2. Use the cost and benefit scores to prioritize waves and schedule initiatives on Tab 6 Gantt Chart.

    Input

    • Gaps and initiatives identified in Step 4.1

    Output

    • Project roadmap dashboard

    Materials

    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    4.2.2 Review the dashboard to fine-tune the roadmap

    1 hour

    Review and update the roadmap dashboard in your Ransomware Resilience Assessment.

    1. Review the Gantt chart to ensure:
      1. The timeline is realistic. Avoid scheduling many high-effort projects at the same time.
      2. Higher-priority items are scheduled sooner than low-priority items.
      3. Short-term projects include quick wins (e.g. high-priority, low-effort items).
      4. It supports the story you wish to communicate (e.g. a plan to address gaps, along with the required effort and timeline).
    2. Update the values on the 5 Prioritization and 6 Gantt Chart tabs based on your review.

    Input

    • Gaps and initiatives identified in Step 4.1

    Output

    • Project roadmap dashboard

    Materials

    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is an image of a sample roadmap for the years 2022-2023

    Step 4.3

    Measure resilience metrics

    Activities

    4.3.1 Summarize status and next steps in an executive presentation

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Summarizing status and next steps in an executive presentation.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Gain stakeholder buy-in by communicating the risk of the status quo and achievable next steps to improve your organization's ransomware readiness.

    Improve ransomware resilience

    4.3.1 Summarize status and next steps in an executive presentation

    1 hour

    Gain stakeholder buy-in by communicating the risk of the status quo and recommendations to reduce that risk. Specifically, capture and present the following from this blueprint:

    • Phase 1: Maturity assessment results, indicating your organization's overall readiness as well as specific areas that need to improve.
    • Phase 2: Business impact results, which objectively quantify the potential impact of downtime and data loss.
    • Phase 3: Current incident response capabilities including steps, timeline, and gaps.
    • Phase 4: Recommended projects to close specific gaps and improve overall ransomware readiness.

    Overall key findings and next steps.

    Download the Ransomware Readiness Summary Presentation Template

    Input

    • Results of all activities in Phases 1-4

    Output

    • Executive presentation

    Materials

    • Ransomware Readiness Summary Presentation Template

    Participants

    • Security Incident Response Team (SIRT)

    This is a screenshot of level 2 of the ransomware readiness maturity tool.

    Revisit metrics

    Ransomware resilience metrics track your ability to disrupt a ransomware attack at each stage of its workflow.

    Revisit metrics as the project nears completion and compare them against your baseline to measure progress.

    Attack workflow Process Metric Target trend Current Goal
    GET IN Vulnerability Management % Critical patches applied Higher is better
    Vulnerability Management # of external exposures Fewer is better
    Security Awareness Training % of users tested for phishing Higher is better
    SPREAD Identity and Access Management Adm accounts / 1000 users Lower is better
    Identity and Access Management % of users enrolled for MFA Higher is better
    Security Incident Management Avg time to detect Lower is better
    PROFIT Security Incident Management Avg time to resolve Lower is better
    Backup and Disaster Recovery % critical assets with recovery test Higher is better
    Backup and Disaster Recovery % backup to immutable storage Higher is better

    Summary of accomplishments

    Project overview

    Project deliverables

    This blueprint helped you create a ransomware incident response plan for your organization, as well as identify ransomware prevention strategies and ransomware prevention best practices.

    • Ransomware Resilience Assessment: Measure your current readiness, then identify people, policy, and technology gaps to address.
    • Ransomware Response Workflow: An at-a-glance summary of the key incident response steps across all relevant stakeholders through each phase of incident management.
    • Ransomware Response Runbook: Includes your threat escalation protocol and detailed response steps to be executed by each stakeholder.
    • Ransomware Tabletop Planning : This deep dive into a ransomware scenario will help you develop a more accurate incident management workflow and runbook, as well as identify gaps to address.
    • Ransomware Project Roadmap: This prioritized list of initiatives will address specific gaps and improve overall ransomware readiness.
    • Ransomware Readiness Summary Presentation: Your executive presentation will communicate the risk of the status quo, present recommended next steps, and drive stakeholder buy-in.

    Project phases

    Phase 1: Assess ransomware resilience

    Phase 2: Protect and detect

    Phase 3: Respond and recover

    Phase 4: Improve ransomware resilience

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Tab 3. Initiative List in the Ransomware Resilience Assessment identifies relevant Info-Tech Research to support common ransomware resilience initiatives.

    Related security blueprints:

    Related disaster recovery blueprints:

    Research Contributors and Experts

    This is an image of Jimmy Tom

    Jimmy Tom
    AVP of Information Technology and Infrastructure
    Financial Horizons

    This is an image of Dan Reisig

    Dan Reisig
    Vice President of Technology
    UV&S

    This is an image of Samuel Sutto

    Samuel Sutton
    Computer Scientist (Retired)
    FBI

    This is an image of Ali Dehghantanha

    Ali Dehghantanha
    Canada Research Chair in Cybersecurity and Threat Intelligence,
    University of Guelph

    This is an image of Gary Rietz

    Gary Rietz
    CIO
    Blommer Chocolate Company

    This is an image of Mark Roman

    Mark Roman
    CIO
    Simon Fraser University

    This is an image of Derrick Whalen

    Derrick Whalen
    Director, IT Services
    Halifax Port Authority

    This is an image of Stuart Gaslonde

    Stuart Gaslonde
    Director of IT & Digital Services
    Falmouth-Exeter Plus

    This is an image of Deborah Curtis

    Deborah Curtis
    CISO
    Placer County

    This is an image of Deuce Sapp

    Deuce Sapp
    VP of IT
    ISCO Industries

    This is an image of Trevor Ward

    Trevor Ward
    Information Security Assurance Manager
    Falmouth-Exeter Plus

    This is an image of Brian Murphy

    Brian Murphy
    IT Manager
    Placer County

    This is an image of Arturo Montalvo

    Arturo Montalvo
    CISO
    Texas General Land Office and Veterans Land Board

    No Image Available

    Mduduzi Dlamini
    IT Systems Manager
    Eswatini Railway

    No Image Available

    Mike Hare
    System Administrator
    18th Circuit Florida Courts

    No Image Available

    Linda Barratt
    Director of Enterprise architecture, IT Security, and Data Analytics, Toronto Community Housing Corporation

    This is an image of Josh Lazar

    Josh Lazar
    CIO
    18th Circuit Florida Courts

    This is an image of Douglas Williamson

    Douglas Williamson
    Director of IT
    Jamaica Civil Aviation Authority

    This is an image of Ira Goldstein

    Ira Goldstein
    Chief Operating Officer
    Herjavec Group

    This is an image of Celine Gravelines

    Celine Gravelines
    Senior Cybersecurity Analyst
    Encryptics

    This is an image of Dan Mathieson

    Dan Mathieson
    Mayor
    City of Stratford

    This is an image of Jacopo Fumagalli

    Jacopo Fumagalli
    CISO
    Omya

    This is an image of Matthew Parker

    Matthew Parker
    Program Manager
    Utah Transit Authority

    Two Additional Anonymous Contributors

    Bibliography

    2019-Data-Breach-Investigations-Report.-Verizon,-May-2019.
    2019-Midyear-Security-Roundup:-Evasive-Threats,-Persistent-Effects.-Trend-Micro,-2019.
    Abrams,-Lawrence.-"Ryuk-Ransomware-Uses-Wake-on-Lan-to-Encrypt-Offline-Devices."-Bleeping-Computer,-14-Jan.-2020.
    Abrams,-Lawrence.-"Sodinokibi-Ransomware-Publishes-Stolen-Data-for-the-First-Time."-Bleeping-Computer,-11-Jan.-2020.
    Canadian-Center-for-Cyber-Security,-"Ransomware-Playbook,"-30-November-2021.-Accessed-21-May-2022.-
    Carnegie-Endowment-for-International-Peace.-"Ransomware:-Prevention-and-Protection."-Accessed-May-2022.-
    Cawthra,-Jennifer,-Michael-Ekstrom,-Lauren-Lusty,-Julian-Sexton,-John-Sweetnam.-Special-Publication-1800-26-Data-Integrity:-Detecting-and-Responding-to-Ransomware-and-Other-Destructive-Events.-NIST,-Jan.-2020.
    Cawthra,-Jennifer,-Michael-Ekstrom,-Lauren-Lusty,-Julian-Sexton,-John-Sweetnam.-Special-Publication-1800-25-Data-Integrity:-Identifying-and-Protecting-Assets-Against-Ransomware-and-Other-Destructive-Events.-NIST,-Jan.-2020.-
    Cichonski,-P.,-T.-Millar,-T.-Grance,-and-K.-Scarfone.-"Computer-Security-Incident-Handling-Guide."-SP-800-61-Rev.-2.-NIST,-Aug.-2012.
    Cimpanu,-Catalin.-"Company-shuts-down-because-of-ransomware,-leaves-300-without-jobs-just-before-holidays."-ZDNet,-3-Jan.-2020.
    Cimpanu,-Catalin.-"Ransomware-attack-hits-major-US-data-center-provider."-ZDNet,-5-Dec.-2019.
    CISA,-"Stop-Ransomware,"-Accessed-12-May-2022.
    "CMMI-Levels-of-Capability-and-Performance."-CMMI-Institute.-Accessed-May-2022.-
    Connolly,-Lena-Yuryna,-"An-empirical-study-of-ransomware-attacks-on-organizations:-an-assessment-of-severity-and-salient-factors-affecting-vulnerability."-Journal-of-Cybersecurity,-2020,.-1-18.
    "Definitions:-Backup-vs.-Disaster-Recovery-vs.-High-Availability."-CVM-IT-&-Cloud-Services,-12-Jan.-2017.
    "Don't-Become-a-Ransomware-Target-–-Secure-Your-RDP-Access-Responsibly."-Coveware,-2019.-
    Elementus,-"Rise-of-the-Ransomware-Cartels-"(2022).-YouTube.-Accessed-May-2022.-
    Global-Security-Attitude-Survey.-CrowdStrike,-2019.
    Graham,-Andrew.-"September-Cyberattack-cost-Woodstock-nearly-$670,00:-report."-
    Global-News,-10-Dec.-2019.
    Harris,-K.-"California-2016-Data-Breach-Report."-California-Department-of-Justice,-Feb.-2016.
    Hiscox-Cyber-Readiness-Report-2019.-Hiscox-UK,-2019.
    Cost-of-A-Data-Breach-(2022).-IBM.-Accessed-June-2022.--
    Ikeda,-Scott.-"LifeLabs-Data-Breach,-the-Largest-Ever-in-Canada,-May-Cost-the-Company-Over-$1-Billion-in-Class-Action-Lawsuit."-CPO-Magazine,-2020.
    Kessem,-Limor-and-Mitch-Mayne.-"Definitive-Guide-to-Ransomware."-IBM,-May-2022.
    Krebs,-Brian.-"Ransomware-Gangs-Now-Outing-Victim-Businesses-That-Don't-Pay-Up."-Krebson-Security,-16-Dec.-2019.
    Jaquith,-Andrew-and-Barnaby-Clarke,-"Security-metrics-to-help-protect-against-ransomware."-Panaseer,-July-29,-2021,-Accessed-3-June-2022.
    "LifeLabs-pays-ransom-after-cyberattack-exposes-information-of-15-million-customers-in-B.C.-and-Ontario."-CBC-News,-17-Dec.-2019.
    Matthews,-Lee.-"Louisiana-Suffers-Another-Major-Ransomware-Attack."-Forbes,-20-Nov.-2019.
    NISTIR-8374,-"Ransomware-Risk-Management:-A-Cybersecurity-Framework-Profile."-NIST-Computer-Security-Resource-Center.-February-2022.-Accessed-May-2022.-
    "Ransomware-attack-hits-school-district-twice-in-4-months."-Associated-Press,-10-Sept.-2019.
    "Ransomware-Costs-Double-in-Q4-as-Ryuk,-Sodinokibi-Proliferate."-Coveware,-2019.
    Ransomware-Payments-Rise-as-Public-Sector-is-Targeted,-New-Variants-Enter-the-Market."-Coveware,-2019.
    Rector,-Kevin.-"Baltimore-to-purchase-$20M-in-cyber-insurance-as-it-pays-off-contractors-who-helped-city-recover-from-ransomware."-The-Baltimore-Sun,-16-Oct.-2019.
    "Report:-Average-time-to-detect-and-contain-a-breach-is-287-days."-VentureBeat,-May-25,-2022.-Accessed-June-2022.-
    "Five-Lessons-Learned-from-over-600-Ransomware-Attacks."-Riskrecon.-Mar-2022.-Accessed-May-2022.-
    Rosenberg,-Matthew,-Nicole-Perlroth,-and-David-E.-Sanger.-"-'Chaos-is-the-Point':-Russian-Hackers-and-Trolls-Grow-Stealthier-in-2020."-The-New-York-Times,-10-Jan.-2020.
    Rouse,-Margaret.-"Data-Archiving."-TechTarget,-2018.
    Siegel,-Rachel.-"Florida-city-will-pay-hackers-$600,000-to-get-its-computer-systems-back."-The-Washington-Post,-20-June-2019.
    Sheridan,-Kelly.-"Global-Dwell-Time-Drops-as-Ransomware-Attacks-Accelerate."-DarkReading,-13-April-2021.-Accessed-May-2022.-
    Smith,-Elliot.-"British-Banks-hit-by-hacking-of-foreign-exchange-firm-Travelex."-CNBC,-9-Jan.-2020.
    "The-State-of-Ransomware-2022."-Sophos.-Feb-2022.-Accessed-May-2022.-
    "The-State-of-Ransomware-in-the-U.S.:-2019-Report-for-Q1-to-Q3."-Emsisoft-Malware-Lab,-1-Oct.2019.
    "The-State-of-Ransomware-in-the-U.S.:-Report-and-Statistics-2019."-Emsisoft-Lab,-12-Dec.-2019.
    "The-State-of-Ransomware-in-2020."-Black-Fog,-Dec.-2020.
    Toulas,-Bill.-"Ten-notorious-ransomware-strains-put-to-the-encryption-speed-test."-Bleeping-Computers,-23-Mar-2022.-Accessed-May-2022.
    Tung,-Liam-"This-is-how-long-hackers-will-hide-in-your-network-before-deploying-ransomware-or-being-spotted."-zdnet.-May-19,-2021.-Accessed-June-2022.-

    Performance Measurement

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}24|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}24|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,436
    • member rating average days saved: 23
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Reinforce service orientation in your IT organization through IT metrics that make value-driven behavior happen..

    Security Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}42|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}42|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,431
    • member rating average days saved: 29
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk

    The challenge

    You may be experiencing one or more of the following:

    • You may not have sufficient security resources to handle all the challenges.
    • Security threats are prevalent. Yet many businesses struggle to embed systemic security thinking into their culture.
    • The need to move towards strategic planning of your security landscape is evident. How to get there is another matter.

    Our advice

    Insight

    To have a successful information security strategy, take these three factors into account:

    • Holistic: your view must include people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk awareness: Base your strategy on the actual risk profile of your company. And then add the appropriate best practices.
    • Business-aligned: When your strategic security plan demonstrates alignment with the business goals and supports it, embedding will go much more straightforward.

    Impact and results 

    • We have developed a highly effective approach to creating your security strategy. We tested and refined this for more than seven years with hundreds of different organizations.
    • We ensure alignment with business objectives.
    • We assess organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
    • We enable a comprehensive current state assessment.
    • And we prioritize initiatives and build out a right-sized security roadmap.

     

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get up to speed

    Read up on why you should build your customized information security strategy. Review our methodology and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Assess the security requirements

    It all starts with risk appetite, yes, but security is something you want to get right. Determine your organizations' security pressures and business goals, and then determine your security program's goals.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Requirements
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool (xls)
    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool (xls)

    Build your gap initiative

    Our best-of-breed security framework makes you perform a gap analysis between where you are and where you want to be (your target state). Once you know that, you can define your goals and duties.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 2: Assess Gaps
    • Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool (xls)

    Plan the implementation of your security strategy 

    With your design at this level, it is time to plan your roadmap.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap

    Let it run and continuously improve. 

    Learn to use our methodology to manage security initiatives as you go. Identify the resources you need to execute the evolving strategy successfully.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 4: Execute and Maintain
    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck (ppt)
    • Information Security Charter (doc)

     

    Get Started With FinOps

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}473|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Runaway cloud costs are wrecking the CIO’s budget, but cloud costs are hard to reign in because vendors are not always up front about the true costs, it’s easy to oversubscribe to services and quickly run up costs with pay-as-you-go service, and cloud bills are complex.
    • While IT isn’t the business owner for cloud services, they often carry the cost of overruns on their budget, and don’t have the skills or influence to more effectively manage cloud costs.
    • Truly optimizing cloud spend and maximizing business value from cloud requires insight and collaboration from IT/engineering, finance, and business owners, but those teams are often siloed and manage their cloud usage or spend differently.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The business units that need to collaborate to make FinOps work are often siloed, with different processes, data, metrics and cloud expertise. Coordinating their efforts to encourage shared responsibility can be a big obstacle to overcome.
    • FinOps requires a cultural shift to empower every cloud user to take accountability for cloud cost optimization.
    • To get started with FinOps, it’s essential to first break down those silos and get the multiple teams involved on the same page. Everyone must understand how FinOps is part of their responsibilities.

    Impact and Result

    • Implementing FinOps will lead to improved visibility and control over cloud spend, optimized resource allocation and reduced cloud waste, enhanced transparency, improved forecasting and budgeting, and increased accountability over cloud costs across business units.
    • This blueprint will help you get started with FinOps by identifying the roles involved in FinOps, defining the key activities that must be conducted, and assigning ownership to each task. This will help foster a shared responsibility for FinOps and encourage everyone to work toward common goals.

    Get Started With FinOps Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Get Started With FinOps Deck – A guide to defining and assigning the roles and activities involved in FinOps.

    This storyboard will help you define FinOps roles and structure of the FinOps and other teams, identify key activities, and assign ownership to each. It will also provide guidance on analyzing the results of the RACI chart.

    • Get Started With FinOps Storyboard

    2. FinOps RACI Chart – A tool to help you assess the current state of FinOps activities and assign ownership to each.

    This tool will help you assess the current state of FinOps activities and assign ownership to each activity. Use the outputs of the exercise to define how roles across the organization will be involved in FinOps and where to focus efforts in maturing in FinOps.

    • FinOps RACI Chart
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Get Started With FinOps

    FinOps goes beyond identifying cloud savings. It empowers every cloud user to maximize the value of their spend.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    The first step of FinOps is collectively realizing that maximizing value is every cloud user's responsibility.

    Natalie Sansone

    Natalie Sansone, PhD
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    As cloud adoption increases, and with it the complexity of cloud environments, managing and optimizing cloud spend has become both a top challenge and priority for IT organizations. In response, the practice of FinOps has emerged to help organizations maximize the value they get from the cloud. As its popularity surges, organizations are told they must do FinOps, but many feel their practice is not yet mature. One of their biggest obstacles is empowering engineers and other cloud users to work toward this shared goal with other teams.

    To grow and mature your FinOps practice, your first challenge is breaking down silos, encouraging collaboration across varying business units, and getting all cloud users to be accountable for their cloud usage and spend and to understand the shared goals of FinOps. Beyond finding ways to reduce cloud costs, FinOps is a cultural shift that enables better collaboration between distributed teams. It allows them to leverage data to identify opportunities to maximize business value from cloud investments.

    Whether you’re starting the FinOps journey or looking to mature your practice, this blueprint will help you organize by defining the required role and tasks. Then you can work through a collective exercise to ensure everyone understands who is involved and responsible for each activity. You’ll gain the information you need and be better positioned to continuously improve and mature your processes, but success begins with everyone understanding that FinOps is a shared responsibility.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Runaway cloud costs are wrecking the CIO’s budget, but these are hard to rein in because cloud vendors are not always upfront about the true costs. It’s easy to oversubscribe to services and quickly run up costs with pay-as-you-go service and complex bills.
    • While IT isn’t the business owner for cloud services, they often carry the cost of overruns on their budget, and don’t have the skills or influence to more effectively manage cloud costs.
    • Truly optimizing cloud spend and maximizing its business value requires insight and collaboration from IT/engineering, finance, and business owners, but those teams are often siloed and manage their cloud usage/spend differently.
    • IT leaders are instructed to implement a FinOps practice, but don’t truly understand what that is, who needs to be involved, or where to start.
    • Business units that must collaborate to make FinOps work are often siloed and have different processes, data, metrics, and cloud expertise. Coordinating efforts to encourage shared responsibility can be a challenge. FinOps requires a cultural shift to empower every cloud user to take accountability for cost optimization.
    • Lack of visibility into cloud usage, spending patterns, and cost drivers along with inadequate tools to get the required data to drive decision making. This leads to hindered progress.
    • Implementing FinOps will improve visibility and control over cloud spend, optimize resource allocation and reduce waste, enhance transparency, improve forecasting and budgeting, and improve cost accountability across business units.
    • To get started with FinOps, first it’s essential to break down those silos and coordinate the multiple teams involved. Everyone must understand how FinOps is part of their responsibilities.
    • This blueprint will help you identify the roles involved in FinOps, define the key activities that must be conducted, and assign ownership to each task. This will help foster a shared responsibility for FinOps and encourage everyone to work toward common goals.

    Info-Tech Insight

    FinOps is not just about driving cloud savings. It’s a cultural shift empowering every cloud user to maximize the value of their spend. The first step of FinOps is therefore to help everyone understand their share of responsibility.

    What is FinOps?

    Definition

    “FinOps is an evolving cloud financial management discipline and cultural practice that enables organizations to get maximum business value by helping engineering, finance, technology, and business teams to collaborate on data-driven spending decisions.”

    Definition Updated: November 2021 by the FinOps Foundation Technical Advisory Council

    The ultimate purpose of FinOps is to bring business value to your organization by reducing cloud waste.

    • FinOps is the people, processes, and tools you use to eliminate waste and ensure you get the most value from your cloud spend.
    • FinOps is the framework within which teams can operate to ensure they are optimizing their use of cloud resources.
    • FinOps brings financial accountability to cloud spend.
    • FinOps is a culture practice where everyone collaborates and takes ownership for their cloud usage while being supported and governed by a central group. It breaks down silos so teams that haven’t worked closely together in the past collaborate toward shared goals.
    • It brings financial accountability and cultural change to cloud spend by enabling distributed teams to better collaborate and leverage data to decide where/when to invest in cloud for maximum business value.
    • FinOps is not done by an individual or just one team. It’s a change in the way that many disparate teams work together, from engineering to finance to business teams.

    Common misconceptions about FinOps

    FinOps is not

    FinOps is

    • Only about saving money
    • Only focused on activities related to cost optimization
    • IT financial management, which involves tracking and analyzing all costs associated with IT services
    • An activity (or set of activities) done by one person or team
    • Short for financial operations
    • About maximizing value. FinOps is optimizing cloud costs to provide maximum business value and support scalability (sometimes this means investing more money in cloud)
    • FinOps also involves building a culture of accountability, visibility, and collaboration around cloud usage and cost
    • Focused specifically on managing/optimizing cloud costs
    • A cultural shift around how disparate teams work together, people from all areas of the organization can play a role
    • The term is a portmanteau (combination) of Finance and (Dev)Ops, emphasizing the collaboration between business and engineering teams1
    1 “What is FinOps?” FinOps Foundation, 2023

    FinOps’ popularity has exploded in recent years

    2012 - The practice of FinOps begins to emerge through early scalers in public cloud like Adobe and Intuit

    2017 - Many IT departments begin to use the cloud for limited use cases, but very few enterprises are all in the cloud

    2019 - Many companies begin moving to a cloud-first strategy, shifting IT spend from capital to operational expenditure (CapEx to OpEx), complicating cloud bills

    February 2019 - The FinOps Foundation is born out of Cloudability’s Customer Advisory Board meeting where many cloud practitioners discuss the need for a community of practitioners

    June 2020 - The FinOps Foundation merges with Linux Foundation and sets the standard for cloud financial management

    Sources: Carr, 2022; Linux Foundation, 2023, Storment & Fuller, 2023.

    The image contains a graph that demonstrates the increasing number of people listing FinOps as a skill.

    Where did the term come from?

    The term FinOps has risen in popularity over the last few years. Originally, organizations used the term cloud cost management, then cloud cost optimization, then more broadly, cloud financial management. The latter has now been largely replaced by FinOps.

    Why is FinOps so essential? (1/2)

    The shift from fixed to variable spend has changed the way organizations must manage and report on costs.

    In the traditional data center era:

    • The enterprise procured infrastructure through large capital refreshes of data center hardware.
    • Infrastructure teams tried their best to avoid running out of storage before the next hardware refresh. Equipment was intentionally oversized to accommodate unexpected growth.
    • IT teams would not worry about how much infrastructure resources they consumed, provided they stayed within planned capacity limits. If capacity ran low, resource usage would be adjusted.
    • The business might not like laying out large capital expenditures, but it had full visibility into the cost and got to approve spending in advance using financial controls.
    • Monthly costs were well-understood and monthly or infrequent reporting was acceptable because day-to-day costs did not vary.
    • Mature organizations might chargeback or showback costs to application teams based on number of virtual machines or other measures, but traditional on-premises chargeback wouldn't save money overall.

    Why is FinOps so essential? (2/2)

    The shift from fixed to variable spend has changed the way organizations must manage and report on costs.

    In the cloud era:

    • Infrastructure resources must no longer be provisioned in advance through spending capital budgets.
    • Capacity management isn’t a major concern. Spare capacity is always available, and savings can result from not paying for unnecessary capacity.
    • Cloud services often offer pay-as-you-go pricing models, allowing more control and flexibility to pay only for the resources you consume.
    • When services use more resources than they need, running costs increase. Cost reductions are realized through reducing the size of allocated resources.
    • The variable consumption model can reduce operating costs but can make budgeting and forecasting difficult. IT and the business can no longer predict what they will pay for infrastructure resources.
    • Billing is no longer straightforward and monthly. Resources are individually charged in micro amounts. Costs must be regularly reviewed as unexpected or forgotten resource usage can add up significantly.

    Managing cloud spend remains a challenge for many organizations

    Given the variable nature of cloud costs and complex pricing structures, it can be easy to overspend without mature FinOps processes in place. Indeed, 82% of organizations cite managing cloud spend as one of their top challenges.

    Respondents reported that public cloud spend was over budget by an average of 18%, up from 13% the previous year.

    Source: Flexera 2023 State of the Cloud Report, n=750

    Organization's top cloud challenges.

    While FinOps adoption has rapidly increased, maturity has not

    Most organizations understand the value of FinOps but are not mature in their practice.

    NetApp’s 2023 State of CloudOps Report found that:

    96% say FinOps is important to their cloud strategy

    9% have a mature FinOps practice

    92% report that they struggle with FinOps

    Source: NetApp, 2023 State of CloudOps Report, n=310 IT decision makers in the United States responsible for public cloud infrastructure investments.

    Flexera’s 2023 State of the Cloud report found that 72% of organizations have a dedicated FinOps team.

    Flexera’s annual report also found that year over year, cloud cost responsibilities are increasingly shifting away from Finance/Accounting and Vendor Management teams and over to FinOps teams as they emerge and mature.

    Source: Flexera, 2023 State of the Cloud Report, n=750 decision-makers and users around the world

    Cost Optimization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}14|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}14|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}14|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Financial Management
    • Parent Category Link: /financial-management
    Minimize the damage of IT cost cuts

    Implement Lean Management Practices That Work

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}116|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • Service delivery teams do not measure, or have difficulty demonstrating, the value they provide.
    • There is a lack of continuous improvement.
    • There is low morale within the IT teams leading to low productivity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Create a problem-solving culture. Frequent problem solving is the differentiator between sustaining Lean or falling back to old management methods.
    • Commit to employee growth. Empower teams to problem solve and multiply your organizational effectiveness.

    Impact and Result

    • Apply Lean management principles to IT to create alignment and transparency and drive continuous improvement and customer value.
    • Implement huddles and visual management.
    • Build team capabilities.
    • Focus on customer value.
    • Use metrics and data to make better decisions.
    • Systematically solve problems and improve performance.
    • Develop an operating rhythm to promote adherence to Lean.

    Implement Lean Management Practices That Work Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a Lean management system can help you increase transparency, demonstrate value, engage your teams and customers, continuously improve, and create alignment.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand Lean concepts

    Understand what a Lean management system is, review Lean philosophies, and examine simple Lean tools and activities.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 1: Understand Lean Concepts
    • Lean Management Education Deck

    2. Determine the scope of your implementation

    Understand the implications of the scope of your Lean management program.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 2: Determine the Scope of Your Implementation
    • Lean Management Scoping Tool

    3. Design huddle board

    Examine the sections and content to include in your huddle board design.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 3: Design Huddle Board
    • Lean Management Huddle Board Template

    4. Design Leader Standard Work and operating rhythm

    Determine the actions required by leaders and the operating rhythm.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 4: Design Leader Standard Work and Operating Rhythm
    • Leader Standard Work Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Lean Management Practices That Work

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Lean Concepts

    The Purpose

    Understand Lean management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a common understanding of Lean management, the Lean management thought model, Lean philosophies, huddles, visual management, team growth, and voice of customer.

    Activities

    1.1 Define Lean management in your organization.

    1.2 Create training materials.

    Outputs

    Lean management definition

    Customized training materials

    2 Understand Lean Concepts (Continued) and Determine Scope

    The Purpose

    Understand Lean management.

    Determine the scope of your program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand metrics and performance review.

    Understand problem identification and continuous improvement.

    Understand Kanban.

    Understand Leader Standard Work.

    Define the scope of the Lean management program.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop example operational metrics

    2.2 Simulate problem section.

    2.3 Simulate Kanban.

    2.4 Build scoping tool.

    Outputs

    Understand how to use operational metrics

    Understand problem identification

    Understand Kanban/daily tasks section

    Defined scope for your program

    3 Huddle Board Design and Huddle Facilitation Coaching

    The Purpose

    Design the sections and content for your huddle board.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Initial huddle board design.

    Activities

    3.1 Design and build each section in your huddle board.

    3.2 Simulate coaching conversations.

    Outputs

    Initial huddle board design

    Understanding of how to conduct a huddle

    4 Design and Build Leader Standard Work

    The Purpose

    Design your Leader Standard Work activities.

    Develop a schedule for executing Leader Standard Work.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standard activities identified and documented.

    Sample schedule developed.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify standard activities for leaders.

    4.2 Develop a schedule for executing Leader Standard Work.

    Outputs

    Leader Standard Work activities documented

    Initial schedule for Leader Standard Work activities

    Switching Software Vendors Overwhelmingly Drives Increased Satisfaction

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}612|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation

    Organizations risk being locked in a circular trap of inertia from auto-renewing their software. With inertia comes complacency, leading to a decrease in overall satisfaction. Indeed, organizations are uniformly choosing to renew their software – even if they don’t like the vendor!

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Renewal is an opportunity cost. Switching poorly performing software substantially drives increased satisfaction, and it potentially lowers vendor costs in the process. To realize maximum gains, it’s essential to have a repeatable process in place.

    Impact and Result

    Realize the benefits of switching by using Info-Tech’s five action steps to optimize your vendor switching processes:

    1. Identify switch opportunities.
    2. Evaluate your software.
    3. Build the business case.
    4. Optimize selection method.
    5. Plan implementation.

    Switching Software Vendors Overwhelmingly Drives Increased Satisfaction Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Why you should consider switching software vendors

    Use this outline of key statistics to help make the business case for switching poorly performing software.

    • Switching Existing Software Vendors Overwhelmingly Drives Increased Satisfaction Storyboard

    2. How to optimize your software vendor switching process

    Optimize your software vendor switching processes with five action steps.

    [infographic]

    Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}73|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,733 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
    • Unprecedented health and economic conditions are putting extreme pressure and controls on expense management.
    • IT needs to implement proactive measures to reduce costs with immediate results.
    • IT must sustain these reductions beyond the near term since no one knows how long the current conditions will last.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Proactively initiating a “War on Waste” (WoW) to reduce the expenses and costs in areas that do not impact operational capabilities of IT is an easy way to reduce IT expenditures.
    • This is accomplished by following the principle “Stop Doing Stupid Stuff” (SDSS), which many organizations deemphasize or overlook during times of growth and prosperity.
    • Initiating a WoW and SDSS program with passion, creativity, and urgency will deliver short-term cost reductions.

    Impact and Result

    • Pinpoint and implement tactical countermeasures and savings opportunities to reduce costs immediately (Reactive: <3 months).
    • Identify and deploy proven practices to capture and sustain expense reduction throughout the mid-term (Proactive: 3-12months).
    • Create a long-term strategy to improve flexibility, make changes more swiftly, and quickly generate cost-cutting opportunities (Strategic: >12 months).
    • Use Info-Tech’s 4 R’s Framework (Required, Removed, Rescheduled, and Reduced) and guiding principles to develop your cost-reduction roadmap.

    Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Storyboard

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how you can reduce your IT cost in the short term while establishing a foundation for long-term sustainment of IT cost containment.

    • Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors Storyboard
    • Cost-Cutting Classification and Prioritization Tool
    [infographic]

    Satisfy Customer Requirements for Information Security

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}259|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $247 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Your customers and potential customers are increasingly demanding assurance that you will meet their information security requirements.
    • Responding to these assurance demands requires ever more effort from the security team, which distracts them from their primary mission of protecting the organization.
    • Every customer seems to have their own custom security questionnaire they want you to complete, increasing the effort you have to expend to respond to them.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your security program can be a differentiator and help win and retain customers.
    • Value rank your customers to right-size the level of effort your security team dedicates to responding to questionnaires.
    • SOC 2 or ISO 27001 certification can be an important part of your security marketing, but only if you make the right business case.

    Impact and Result

    • CISOs need to develop a marketing strategy for their information security program.
    • Ensure that your security team dedicates the appropriate amount of effort to sales by value ranking your potential customers and aligning efforts to value.
    • Develop a business case for SOC 2 or ISO 27001 to determine if certification makes sense for your organization, and to gain support from key stakeholders.

    Satisfy Customer Requirements for Information Security Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should proactively satisfy customer requirements for information security, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage customer expectations for information security

    Identify your customers’ expectations for security and privacy, value rank your customers to right-size your efforts, and learn how to impress them with your information security program.

    • Satisfy Customer Requirements for Information Security – Phase 1: Manage Customer Expectations for Information Security

    2. Select a certification path

    Decide whether to obtain SOC 2 or ISO 27001 certification, and build a business case for certification.

    • Satisfy Customer Requirements for Information Security – Phase 2: Select a Certification Path
    • Security Certification Selection Tool
    • Security Certification Business Case Tool

    3. Obtain and maintain certification

    Develop your certification scope, prepare for the audit, and learn how to maintain your certification over time.

    • Satisfy Customer Requirements for Information Security – Phase 3: Obtain and Maintain Certification
    [infographic]

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}128|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $49,748 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • In respect to business intelligence (BI) matureness, you can’t expect the whole organization to be at the same place at the same time. Your BI strategy needs to recognize this and should strive to align rather than dictate.
    • Technology is just one aspect of your BI and analytics strategy and is not a quick solution or a guarantee for long-term success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The BI strategy drives data warehouse and integration strategies and the data needed to support business decisions.
    • The solution to better BI often lies in improving the BI practice, not acquiring the latest and greatest tool.

    Impact and Result

    • Align BI with corporate vision, mission, goals, and strategic direction.
    • Understand the needs of business partners.
    • BI & analytics informs data warehouse and integration layers for required content, latency, and quality.

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create or refresh the BI Strategy and review Info-Tech’s approach to developing a BI strategy that meets business needs.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the business context and BI landscape

    Lay the foundation for the BI strategy by detailing key business information and analyzing current BI usage.

    • Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy – Phase 1: Understand the Business Context and BI Landscape
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap Template
    • BI End-User Satisfaction Survey Framework

    2. Evaluate the current BI practice

    Assess the maturity level of the current BI practice and envision a future state.

    • Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy – Phase 2: Evaluate the Current BI Practice
    • BI Practice Assessment Tool

    3. Create a BI roadmap for continuous improvement

    Create BI-focused initiatives to build an improvement roadmap.

    • Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy – Phase 3: Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement
    • BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Business Vision and Understand the Current BI Landscape

    The Purpose

    Document overall business vision, mission, and key objectives; assemble project team.

    Collect in-depth information around current BI usage and BI user perception.

    Create requirements gathering principles and gather requirements for a BI platform.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased IT–business alignment by using the business context as the project starting point

    Identified project sponsor and project team

    Detailed understanding of trends in BI usage and BI perception of consumers

    Refreshed requirements for a BI solution

    Activities

    1.1 Gather key business information (overall mission, goals, objectives, drivers).

    1.2 Establish a high-level ROI.

    1.3 Identify ideal candidates for carrying out a BI project.

    1.4 Undertake BI usage analyses, BI user perception survey, and a BI artifact inventory.

    1.5 Develop requirements gathering principles and approaches.

    1.6 Gather and organize BI requirements

    Outputs

    Articulated business context that will guide BI strategy development

    ROI for refreshing the BI strategy

    BI project team

    Comprehensive summary of current BI usage that has quantitative and qualitative perspectives

    BI requirements are confirmed

    2 Evaluate Current BI Maturity and Identify the BI Patterns for the Future State

    The Purpose

    Define current maturity level of BI practice.

    Envision the future state of your BI practice and identify desired BI patterns.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Know the correct migration method for Exchange Online.

    Prepare user profiles for the rest of the Office 365 implementation.

    Activities

    2.1 Perform BI SWOT analyses.

    2.2 Assess current state of the BI practice and review results.

    2.3 Create guiding principles for the future BI practice.

    2.4 Identify desired BI patterns and the associated BI functionalities/requirements.

    2.5 Define the future state of the BI practice.

    2.6 Establish the critical success factors for the future BI, identify potential risks, and create a mitigation plan.

    Outputs

    Exchange migration strategy

    Current state of BI practice is documented from multiple perspectives

    Guiding principles for future BI practice are established, along with the desired BI patterns linked to functional requirements

    Future BI practice is defined

    Critical success factors, potential risks, and a risk mitigation plan are defined

    3 Build Improvement Initiatives and Create a BI Development Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build overall BI improvement initiatives and create a BI improvement roadmap.

    Identify supplementary initiatives for enhancing your BI program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined roadmap composed of robust improvement initiatives

    Activities

    3.1 Create BI improvement initiatives based on outputs from phase 1 and 2 activities. Build an improvement roadmap.

    3.2 Build an improvement roadmap.

    3.3 Create an Excel governance policy.

    3.4 Create a plan for a BI ambassador network.

    Outputs

    Comprehensive BI initiatives placed on an improvement roadmap

    Excel governance policy is created

    Internal BI ambassadors are identified

    Further reading

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Deliver actionable business insights by creating a business-aligned reporting and analytics strategy.

    Terminology

    As the reporting and analytics space matured over the last decade, software suppliers used different terminology to differentiate their products from others’. This caused a great deal of confusion within the business communities.

    Following are two definitions of the term Business Intelligence:

    Business intelligence (BI) leverages software and services to transform data into actionable insights that inform an organization’s strategic and tactical business decisions. BI tools access and analyze data sets and present analytical findings in reports, summaries, dashboards, graphs, charts, and maps to provide users with detailed intelligence about the state of the business.

    The term business intelligence often also refers to a range of tools that provide quick, easy-to-digest access to insights about an organization's current state, based on available data.

    CIO Magazine

    Business intelligence (BI) comprises the strategies and technologies used by enterprises for the data analysis of business information. BI technologies provide historical, current, and predictive views of business operations.

    Common functions of business intelligence technologies include reporting, online analytical processing, analytics, data mining, process mining, complex event processing, business performance management, benchmarking, text mining, predictive analytics, and prescriptive analytics.

    Wikipedia

    This blueprint will use the terms “BI,” “BI and Analytics,” and “Reporting and Analytics” interchangeably in different contexts, but always in compliance to the above definitions.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    A fresh analytics & reporting strategy enables new BI opportunities.

    We need data to inform the business of past and current performance and to support strategic decisions. But we can also drown in a flood of data. Without a clear strategy for business intelligence, a promising new solution will produce only noise.

    BI and Analytics teams must provide the right quantitative and qualitative insights for the business to base their decisions on.

    Your Business Intelligence and Analytics strategy must support the organization’s strategy. Your strategy for BI & Analytics provides direction and requirements for data warehousing and data integration, and further paves the way for predictive analytics, big data analytics, market/industry intelligence, and social network analytics.

    Dirk Coetsee,

    Director, Data and Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • A CIO or Business Unit (BU) Leader looking to improve reporting and analytics, reduce time to information, and embrace fact-based decision making with analytics, reporting, and business intelligence (BI).
    • Application Directors experiencing poor results from an initial BI tool deployment who are looking to improve the outcome.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Project Managers and Business Analysts assigned to a BI project team to collect and analyze requirements.
    • Business units that have their own BI platforms and would like to partner with IT to take their BI to an enterprise level.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Align your reporting and analytics strategy with the business’ strategic objectives before you rebuild or buy your Business Intelligence platform.
    • Identify reporting and analytics objectives to inform the data warehouse and integration requirements gathering process.
    • Avoid common pitfalls that derail BI and analytic deployments and lower their adoption.
    • Identify Business Intelligence gaps prior to deployment and incorporate remedies within your plans.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Recruit the right resources for the program.
    • Align BI with corporate vision, mission, goals, and strategic direction.
    • Understand the needs of business partners.
    • Assess BI maturity and plan for target state.
    • Develop a BI strategy and roadmap.
    • Track the success of the BI initiative.

    Executive summary

    Situation:

    BI drives a new reality. Uber is the world’s largest taxi company and they own no vehicles; Alibaba is the world’s most valuable retailer and they have no inventory; Airbnb is the world’s largest accommodation provider and they own no real estate. How did they disrupt their markets and get past business entry barriers? A deep understanding of their market through impeccable business intelligence!

    Complication:

    • In respect to BI matureness, you can’t expect the whole organization to be at the same place at the same time. Your BI strategy needs to recognize this and should strive to align rather than dictate.
    • Technology is just one aspect of your BI and Analytics strategy and is not a quick solution or a guarantee for long term success.

    Resolution:

    • Drive strategy development by establishing the business context upfront in order to align business intelligence providers with the most important needs of their BI consumers and the strategic priorities of the organization.
    • Revamp or create a BI strategy to update your BI program to make it fit for purpose.
    • Understand your existing BI baggage – e.g. your existing BI program, the artifacts generated from the program, and the users it supports. Those will inform the creation of the strategy and roadmap.
    • Assess current BI maturity and determine your future state BI maturity.
    • BI needs governance to ensure consistent planning, communication, and execution of the BI strategy.
    • Create a network of BI ambassadors across the organization to promote BI.
    • Plan for the future to ensure that required data will be available when the organization needs it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Put the “B” back in BI. Don’t have IT doing BI for IT’s sake; ensure the voice and needs of the business are the primary drivers of your strategy.
    2. The BI strategy drives data warehouse and integration strategies and the data needs to support business decisions.
    3. Go beyond the platform. The solution to better BI often lies in improving the BI practice, not acquiring the latest and greatest tool.

    Metrics to track BI & Analytical program progress

    Goals for BI:

    • Understand business context and needs. Identify business processes that can leverage BI.
    • Define the Reporting & Analytics Roadmap. Develop data initiatives, and create a strategy and roadmap for Business Intelligence.
    • Continuous improvements. Your BI program is evolving and improving over time. The program should allow you to have faster, better, and more comprehensive information.

    Info-Tech’s Suggested Metrics for Tracking the BI Program

    Practice Improvement Metrics Data Collection and Calculation Expected Improvement
    Program Level Metrics Efficiency
    • Time to information
    • Self-service penetration
    • Derive from the ticket management system
    • Derive from the BI platform
    • 10% reduction in time to information
    • Achieve 10-15% self-service penetration
    • Effectiveness
    • BI Usage
    • Data quality
    • Derive from the BI platform
    • Data quality perception
    • Majority of the users use BI on a daily basis
    • 15% increase in data quality perception
    Comprehensiveness
    • # of integrated datasets
    • # of strategic decisions made
    • Derive from the data integration platform
    • Decision-making perception
    • Onboard 2-3 new data domains per year
    • 20% increase in decision-making perception

    Intangible Metrics:

    Tap into the results of Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision diagnostic to monitor the changes in business-user satisfaction as you implement the initiatives in your BI improvement roadmap.

    Your Enterprise BI and Analytics Strategy is driven by your organization’s Vision and Corporate Strategy

    Formulating an Enterprise Reporting and Analytics Strategy requires the business vision and strategies to first be substantiated. Any optimization to the Data Warehouse, Integration and Source layer is in turn driven by the Enterprise Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Flow chart showing 'Business Vision Strategies'

    The current state of your Integration and Warehouse platforms determine what data can be utilized for BI and Analytics

    Where we are, and how we got here

    How we got here

    • In the beginning was BI 1.0. Business intelligence began as an IT-driven centralized solution that was highly governed. Business users were typically the consumers of reports and dashboards created by IT, an analytics-trained minority, upon request.
    • In the last five to ten years, we have seen a fundamental shift in the business intelligence and analytics market, moving away from such large-scale, centralized IT-driven solutions focused on basic reporting and administration, towards more advanced user-friendly data discovery and visualization platforms. This has come to be known as BI 2.0.
    • Many incumbent market leaders were disrupted by the demand for more user-friendly business intelligence solutions, allowing “pure-play” BI software vendors to carve out a niche and rapidly expand into more enterprise environments.
    • BI-on-the-cloud has established itself as a solid alternative to in-house implementation and operation.

    Where we are now

    • BI 3.0 has arrived. This involves the democratization of data and analytics and a predominantly app-centric approach to BI, identifiable by an anywhere, anytime, and device-or-platform-independent collaborative methodology. Social workgroups and self-guided content creation, delivery, analysis, and management is prominent.
    • Where the need for reporting and dashboards remains, we’re seeing data discovery platforms fulfilling the needs of non-technical business users by providing easy-to-use interactive solutions to increase adoption across enterprises.
    • With more end users demanding access to data and the tools to extract business insights, IT is looking to meet these needs while continuing to maintain governance and administration over a much larger base of users. The race for governed data discovery is heated and will be a market differentiator.
    • The next kid on the block is Artificial Intelligence that put further demands on data quality and availability.

    RICOH Canada used this methodology to develop their BI strategy in consultation with their business stakeholders

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing and Retail

    Source: RICOH

    Ricoh Canada transforms the way people work with breakthrough technologies that help businesses innovate and grow. Its focus has always been to envision what the future will look like so that it can help its customers prepare for success. Ricoh empowers digital workplaces with a broad portfolio of services, solutions, and technologies – helping customers remove obstacles to sustained growth by optimizing the flow of information and automating antiquated processes to increase workplace productivity. In their commitment towards a customer-centric approach, Ricoh Canada recognized that BI and analytics can be used to inform business leaders in making strategic decisions.

    Enterprise BI and analytics Initiative

    Ricoh Canada enrolled in the ITRG Reporting & Analytics strategy workshop with the aim to create a BI strategy that will allow the business to harvest it strengths and build for the future. The workshop acted as a forum for the different business units to communicate, share ideas, and hear from each other what their pains are and what should be done to provide a full customer 360 view.

    Results

    “This workshop allowed us to collectively identify the various stakeholders and their unique requirements. This is a key factor in the development of an effective BI Analytics tool.” David Farrar

    The Customer 360 Initiative included the following components

    The Customer 360 Initiative includes the components shown in the image

    Improve BI Adoption Rates

    Graph showing Product Adoption Rates

    Sisense

    Reasons for low BI adoption

    • Employees that never used BI tools are slow to adopt new technology.
    • Lack of trust in data leads to lack of trust in the insights.
    • Complex data structures deter usage due to long learning curves and contained nuances.
    • Difficult to translate business requirements into tool linguistics due to lack of training or technical ineptness.
    • Business has not taken ownership of data, which affects access to data.

    How to foster BI adoption

    • Senior management proclaim data as a strategic asset and involved in the promotion of BI
    • Role Requirement that any business decision should be backed up by analytics
    • Communication of internal BI use case studies and successes
    • Exceptional data lineage to act as proof for the numbers
    • A Business Data glossary with clearly defined business terms. Use the Business Data Glossary in conjunction with data lineage and semantic layers to ensure that businesses are clearly defined and traced to sources.
    • Training in business to take ownership of data from inception to analytics.

    Why bother with analytics?

    In today’s ever-changing and global environment, organizations of every size need to effectively leverage their data assets to facilitate three key business drivers: customer intimacy, product/service innovation, and operational excellence. Plus, they need to manage their operational risk efficiently.

    Investing in a comprehensive business intelligence strategy allows for a multidimensional view of your organization’s data assets that can be operationalized to create a competitive edge:

    Historical Data

    Without a BI strategy, creating meaningful reports for business users that highlight trends in past performance and draw relationships between different data sources becomes a more complex task. Also, the ever growing need to identify and assess risks in new ways is driving many companies to BI.

    Data Democracy

    The core purpose of BI is to provide the right data, to the right users, at the right time, and in a format that is easily consumable and actionable. In developing a BI strategy, remember the driver for managed cross-functional access to data assets and features such as interactive dashboards, mobile BI, and self-service BI.

    Predictive and Big Data Analytics

    As the volume, variety, and velocity of data increases rapidly, businesses will need a strategy to outline how they plan to consume the new data in a manner that does not overwhelm their current capabilities and aligns with their desired future state. This same strategy further provides a foundation upon which organizations can transition from ad hoc reporting to using data assets in a codified BI platform for decision support.

    Business intelligence serves as the layer that translates data, information, and organizational knowledge into insights

    As executive decision making shifts to more fact-based, data-driven thinking, there is an urgent need for data assets to be organized and presented in a manner that enables immediate action.

    Typically, business decisions are based on a mix of intuition, opinion, emotion, organizational culture, and data. Though business users may be aware of its potential value in driving operational change, data is often viewed as inaccessible.

    Business intelligence bridges the gap between an organization’s data assets and consumable information that facilitates insight generation and informed decision making.

    Most organizations realize that they need a BI strategy; it’s no longer a nice-to-have, it’s a must-have.

    – Albert Hui, Principal, Data Economist

    A triangle grapg depicting the layers of business itelligence

    Business intelligence and business analytics: what is the difference and should you care

    Ask 100 people and you will get 100 answers. We like the prevailing view that BI looks at today and backward for improving who we are, while BA is forward-looking to support change decisions.

    The image depicts a chart flowing from Time Past to Future. Business Intelligence joins with Business Analytics over the Present
    • Business intelligence is concerned with looking at present and historical data.
    • Use this data to create reports/dashboards to inform a wide variety of information consumers of the past and current state of affairs.
    • Almost all organizations, regardless of size and maturity, use some level of BI even if it’s just very basic reporting.
    • Business analytics, on the other hand, is a forward-facing use of data, concerned with the present to the future.
    • Analytics uses data to both describe the present, and more importantly, predict the future, enabling strategic business decisions.
    • Although adoption is rapidly increasing, many organizations still do not utilize any advanced analytics in their environment.

    However, establishing a strong business intelligence program is a necessary precursor to an organization’s development of its business analytics capabilities.

    Organizations that successfully grow their BI capabilities are reaping the rewards

    Evidence is piling up: if planned well, BI contributes to the organization’s bottom line.

    It’s expected that there will be nearly 45 billion connected devices and a 42% increase in data volume each year posing a high business opportunity for the BI market (BERoE, 2020).

    The global business intelligence market size to grow from US$23.1 billion in 2020 to US$33.3 billion by 2025, at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 7.6% (Global News Wire, 2020)

    In the coming years, 69% of companies plan on increasing their cloud business intelligence usage (BARC Research and Eckerson Group Study, 2017).

    Call to Action

    Small organizations of up to 100 employees had the highest rate of business intelligence penetration last year (Forbes, 2018).

    Graph depicting business value from 0 months to more than 24 months

    Source: IBM Business Value, 2015

    For the New England Patriots, establishing a greater level of customer intimacy was driven by a tactical analytics initiative

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Professional Sports

    Source Target Marketing

    Problem

    Despite continued success as a franchise with a loyal fan base, the New England Patriots experienced one of their lowest season ticket renewal rates in over a decade for the 2009 season. Given the numerous email addresses that potential and current season-ticket holders used to engage with the organization, it was difficult for Kraft Sports Group to define how to effectively reach customers.

    Turning to a Tactical Analytics Approach

    Kraft Sports Group turned to the customer data that it had been collecting since 2007 and chose to leverage analytics in order to glean insight into season ticket holder behavior. By monitoring and reporting on customer activity online and in attendance at games, Kraft Sports Group was able to establish that customer engagement improved when communication from the organization was specifically tailored to customer preferences and historical behavior.

    Results

    By operationalizing their data assets with the help of analytics, the Patriots were able to achieve a record 97% renewal rate for the 2010 season. KSG was able to take their customer engagement to the next level and proactively look for signs of attrition in season-ticket renewals.

    We're very analytically focused and I consider us to be the voice of the customer within the organization… Ultimately, we should know when renewal might not happen and be able to market and communicate to change that behavior.

    – Jessica Gelman,

    VP Customer Marketing and Strategy, Kraft Sports Group

    A large percentage of all BI projects fail to meet the organization’s needs; avoid falling victim to common pitfalls

    Tool Usage Pitfalls

    • Business units are overwhelmed with the amount and type of data presented.
    • Poor data quality erodes trust, resulting in a decline in usage.
    • Analysis performed for the sake of analysis and doesn’t focus on obtaining relevant business-driven insights.

    Selection Pitfalls

    • Inadequate requirements gathering.
    • No business involvement in the selection process.
    • User experience is not considered.
    • Focus is on license fees and not total cost.

    Implementation Pitfalls

    • Absence of upfront planning
    • Lack of change management to facilitate adoption of the new platform
    • No quick wins that establish the value of the project early on
    • Inadequate initial or ongoing training

    Strategic Pitfalls

    • Poor alignment of BI goals with organization goals
    • Absence of CSFs/KPIs that can measure the qualitative and quantitative success of the project
    • No executive support during or after the project

    BI pitfalls are lurking around every corner, but a comprehensive strategy drafted upfront can help your organization overcome these obstacles. Info-Tech’s approach to BI has involvement from the business units built right into the process from the start and it equips IT to interact with key stakeholders early and often.

    Only 62% of Big Data and AI projects in 2019 provided measurable results.

    Source: NewVantage Partners LLC

    Business and IT have different priorities for a BI tool

    Business executives look for:

    • Ease of use
    • Speed and agility
    • Clear and concise information
    • Sustainability

    IT professionals are concerned about:

    • Solid security
    • Access controls on data
    • Compliance with regulations
    • Ease of integration

    Info-Tech Insight

    Combining these priorities will lead to better tool selection and more synergy.

    Elizabeth Mazenko

    The top-down BI Opportunity Analysis is a tool for senior executives to discover where Business Intelligence can provide value

    The image is of a top-down BI Opportunity Analysis.

    Example: Uncover BI opportunities with an opportunity analysis

    Industry Drivers Private label Rising input prices Retail consolidation
    Company strategies Win at supply chain execution Win at customer service Expand gross margins
    Value disciplines Strategic cost management Operational excellence Customer service
    Core processes Purchasing Inbound logistics Sales, service & distribution
    Enterprise management: Planning, budgeting, control, process improvement, HR
    BI Opportunities Customer service analysis Cost and financial analysis Demand management

    Williams (2016)

    Bridge the gap between business drivers and business intelligence features with a three-tiered framework

    Info-Tech’s approach to formulating a fit-for-purpose BI strategy is focused on making the link between factors that are the most important to the business users and the ways that BI providers can enable those consumers.

    Drivers to Establish Competitive Advantage

    • Operational Excellence
    • Client Intimacy
    • Innovation

    BI and Analytics Spectrum

    • Strategic Analytics
    • Tactical Analytics
    • Operational Analytics

    Info-Tech’s BI Patterns

    • Delivery
    • User Experience
    • Deep Analytics
    • Supporting

    This is the content for Layout H3 Tag

    Though business intelligence is primarily thought of as enabling executives, a comprehensive BI strategy involves a spectrum of analytics that can provide data-driven insight to all levels of an organization.

    Recommended

    Strategic Analytics

    • Typically focused on predictive modeling
    • Leverages data integrated from multiple sources (structured through unstructured)
    • Assists in identifying trends that may shift organizational focus and direction
    • Sample objectives:
      • Drive market share growth
      • Identify new markets, products, services, locations, and acquisitions
      • Build wider and deeper customer relationships earning more wallet share and keeping more customers

    Tactical Analytics

    • Often considered Response Analytics and used to react to situations that arise, or opportunities at a department level.
    • Sample objectives:
      • Staff productivity or cost analysis
      • Heuristics/algorithms for better risk management
      • Product bundling and packaging
      • Customer satisfaction response techniques

    Operational Analytics

    • Analytics that drive business process improvement whether internal, with external partners, or customers.
    • Sample objectives:
      • Process step elimination
      • Best opportunities for automation

    Business Intelligence Terminology

    Styles of BI New age BI New age data Functional Analytics Tools
    Reporting Agile BI Social Media data Performance management analytics Scorecarding dashboarding
    Ad hoc query SaaS BI Unstructured data Financial analytics Query & reporting
    Parameterized queries Pervasive BI Mobile data Supply chain analytics Statistics & data mining
    OLAP Cognitive Business Big data Customer analytics OLAP cubes
    Advanced analytics Self service analytics Sensor data Operations analytics ETL
    Cognitive business techniques Real-time Analytics Machine data HR Analytics Master data management
    Scorecards & dashboards Mobile Reporting & Analytics “fill in the blanks” analytics Data Governance

    Williams (2016)

    "BI can be confusing and overwhelming…"

    – Dirk Coetsee,

    Research Director,

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Business intelligence lies in the Information Dimensions layer of Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework

    The interactions between the information dimensions and overlying data management enablers such as data governance, data architecture, and data quality underscore the importance of building a robust process surrounding the other data practices in order to fully leverage your BI platform.

    Within this framework BI and analytics are grouped as one lens through which data assets at the business information level can be viewed.

    The image is the Information Dimensions layer of Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework

    Use Info-Tech’s three-phase approach to a Reporting & Analytics strategy and roadmap development

    Project Insight

    A BI program is not a static project that is created once and remains unchanged. Your strategy must be treated as a living platform to be revisited and revitalized in order to effectively enable business decision making. Develop a reporting and analytics strategy that propels your organization by building it on business goals and objectives, as well as comprehensive assessments that quantitatively and qualitatively evaluate your current reporting and analytical capabilities.

    Phase 1: Understand the Business Context and BI Landscape Phase 2: Evaluate Your Current BI Practice Phase 3: Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement
    1.1 Establish the Business Context
    • Business Vision, Goals, Key Drivers
    • Business Case Presentation
    • High-Level ROI
    2.1 Assess Your Current BI Maturity
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • Summary of Current State
    3.1 Construct a BI Initiative Roadmap
    • BI Improvement Initiatives
    • RACI
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap
    1.2 Assess Existing BI Environment
    • BI Perception Survey Framework
    • Usage Analyses
    • BI Report Inventory
    2.2 Envision BI Future State
    • BI Style Requirements
    • BI Practice Assessment
    3.2 Plan for Continuous Improvement
    • Excel/Access Governance Policy
    • BI Ambassador Network Draft
    1.3 Develop BI Solution Requirements
    • Requirements Gathering Principles
    • Overall BI Requirements

    Stand on the shoulders of Information Management giants

    As part of our research process, we leveraged the frameworks of COBIT5, Mike 2.0, and DAMA DMBOK2. Contextualizing business intelligence within these frameworks clarifies its importance and role and ensures that our assessment tool is focused on key priority areas.

    The DMBOK2 Data Management framework by the Data Asset Management Association (DAMA) provided a starting point for our classification of the components in our IM framework.

    Mike 2.0 is a data management framework that helped guide the development of our framework through its core solutions and composite solutions.

    The Cobit 5 framework and its business enablers were used as a starting point for assessing the performance capabilities of the different components of information management, including business intelligence.

    Info-Tech has a series of deliverables to facilitate the evolution of your BI strategy

    BI Strategy Roadmap Template

    BI Practice Assessment Tool

    BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy – Project Overview

    1. Understand the Business Context and BI Landscape 2. Evaluate the Current BI Practice 3. Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Document overall business vision, mission, industry drivers, and key objectives; assemble a project team

    1.2 Collect in-depth information around current BI usage and BI user perception

    1.3 Create requirements gathering principles and gather requirements for a BI platform

    2.1 Define current maturity level of BI practice

    2.2 Envision the future state of your BI practice and identify desired BI patterns

    3.1 Build overall BI improvement initiatives and create a BI improvement roadmap

    3.2 Identify supplementary initiatives for enhancing your BI program

    Guided Implementations
    • Discuss Info-Tech’s approach for using business information to drive BI strategy formation
    • Review business context and discuss approaches for conducting BI usage and user analyses
    • Discuss strategies for BI requirements gathering
    • Discuss BI maturity model
    • Review practice capability gaps and discuss potential BI patterns for future state
    • Discuss initiative building
    • Review completed roadmap and next steps
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:

    Establish Business Vision and Understand the Current BI Landscape

    Module 2:

    Evaluate Current BI Maturity Identify the BI Patterns for the Future State

    Module 3:

    Build Improvement Initiatives and Create a BI Development Roadmap

    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Business context
    • Project team
    • BI usage information, user perception, and new BI requirements
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Current and future state assessment
    • Identified BI patterns
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • BI improvement strategy and initiative roadmap

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities

    Understand Business Context and Structure the Project

    1.1 Make the case for a BI strategy refresh.

    1.2 Understand business context.

    1.3 Determine high-level ROI.

    1.4 Structure the BI strategy refresh project.

    Understand Existing BI and Revisit Requirements

    2.1 Understand the usage of your existing BI.

    2.2 Gather perception of the current BI users.

    2.3 Document existing information artifacts.

    2.4 Develop a requirements gathering framework.

    2.5 Gather requirements.

    Revisit Requirements and Current Practice Assessment

    3.1 Gather requirements.

    3.2 Determine BI Maturity Level.

    3.3 Perform a SWOT for your existing BI program.

    3.4 Develop a current state summary.

    Roadmap Develop and Plan for Continuous Improvements

    5.1 Develop BI strategy.

    5.2 Develop a roadmap for the strategy.

    5.3 Plan for continuous improvement opportunities.

    5.4 Develop a re-strategy plan.

    Deliverables
    1. Business and BI Vision, Goals, Key Drivers
    2. Business Case Presentation
    3. High-Level ROI
    4. Project RACI
    1. BI Perception Survey
    2. BI Requirements Gathering Framework
    3. BI User Stories and Requirements
    1. BI User Stories and Requirements
    2. BI SWOT for your Current BI Program
    3. BI Maturity Level
    4. Current State Summary
    1. BI Strategy
    2. Roadmap accompanying the strategy with timeline
    3. A plan for improving BI
    4. Strategy plan

    Phase 2

    Understand the Business Context and BI Landscape

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Phase 1 overview

    Detailed Overview

    Step 1: Establish the business context in terms of business vision, mission, objectives, industry drivers, and business processes that can leverage Business Intelligence

    Step 2: Understand your BI Landscape

    Step 3: Understand business needs

    Outcomes

    • Clearly articulated high-level mission, vision, and key drivers from the business, as well as objectives related to business intelligence.
    • In-depth documentation regarding your organization’s BI usage, user perception, and outputs.
    • Consolidated list of requirements, existing and desired, that will direct the deployment of your BI solution.

    Benefits

    • Align business context and drivers with IT plans for BI and Analytics improvement.
    • Understand your current BI ecosystem’s performance.

    Understand your business context and BI landscape

    Phase 1 Overarching Insight

    The closer you align your new BI platform to real business interests, the stronger the buy-in, realized value, and groundswell of enthusiastic adoption will be. Get this phase right to realize a high ROI on your investment in the people, processes, and technology that will be your next generation BI platform.

    Understand the Business Context to Rationalize Your BI Landscape Evaluate Your Current BI Practice Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement
    Establish the Business Context
    • Business Vision, Goals, Key Drivers
    • Business Case Presentation
    • High-Level ROI
    Assess Your Current BI Maturity
    • SWOT Analysis
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • Summary of Current State
    Construct a BI Initiative Roadmap
    • BI Improvement Initiatives
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap
    Access Existing BI Environment
    • BI Perception Survey Framework
    • Usage Analyses
    • BI Report Inventory
    Envision BI Future State
    • BI Patterns
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • List of Functions
    Plan for Continuous Improvement
    • Excel Governance Policy
    • BI Ambassador Network Draft
    Undergo Requirements Gathering
    • Requirements Gathering Principles
    • Overall BI Requirements

    Track these metrics to measure your progress through Phase 1

    Goals for Phase 1:

    • Understand the business context. Determine if BI can be used to improve business outcomes by identifying benefits, costs, opportunities, and gaps.
    • Understand your existing BI. Plan your next generation BI based on a solid understanding of your existing BI.
    • Identify business needs. Determine the business processes that can leverage BI and Analytics.

    Info-Tech’s Suggested Metrics for Tracking Phase 1 Goals

    Practice Improvement Metrics Data Collection and Calculation Expected Improvement
    Monetary ROI
    • Quality of the ROI
    • # of user cases, benefits, and costs quantified
    Derive the number of the use cases, benefits, and costs in the scoping. Ask business SMEs to verify the quality. High-quality ROI studies are created for at least three use cases
    Response Rate of the BI Perception Survey Sourced from your survey delivery system Aim for 40% response rate
    # of BI Reworks Sourced from your project management system Reduction of 10% in BI reworks

    Intangible Metrics:

    1. Executives’ understanding of the BI program and what BI can do for the organization.
    2. Improved trust between IT and the business by re-opening the dialogue.
    3. Closer alignment with the organization strategy and business plan leading to higher value delivered.
    4. Increased business engagement and input into the Analytics strategy.

    Use advisory support to accelerate your completion of Phase 1 activities

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of two to three advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Understand the Business Context and BI Landscape

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks

    Step 1.0: Assemble Your Project Team

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss Info-Tech’s viewpoint and definitions of business intelligence.
    • Discuss the project sponsorship, ideal team members and compositions.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify a project sponsor and the project team members.

    Step 1.1: Understand Your Business Context

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss Info-Tech’s approach to BI strategy development around using business information as the key driver.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Detail the business context (vision, mission, goals, objectives, etc.).
    • Establish business–IT alignment for your BI strategy by detailing the business context.

    Step 1.2: Establish the Current BI Landscape

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the business context outputs from Step 1.1 activities.
    • Review Info-Tech’s approach for documenting your current BI landscape.
    • Review the findings of your BI landscape.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Gather information on current BI usage and perform a BI artifact inventory.
    • Construct and conduct a user perception survey.

    With these tools & templates:

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Step 1.0

    Assemble the Project Team

    Select a BI project sponsor

    Info-Tech recommends you select a senior executive with close ties to BI be the sponsor for this project (e.g. CDO, CFO or CMO). To maximize the chance of success, Info-Tech recommends you start with the CDO, CMO, CFO, or a business unit (BU) leader who represents strategic enterprise portfolios.

    Initial Sponsor

    CFO or Chief Risk Officer (CRO)

    • The CFO is responsible for key business metrics and cost control. BI is on the CFO’s radar as it can be used for both cost optimization and elimination of low-value activity costs.
    • The CRO is tasked with the need to identify, address, and when possible, exploit risk for business security and benefit.
    • Both of these roles are good initial sponsors but aren’t ideal for the long term.

    CDO or a Business Unit (BU) Leader

    • The CDO (Chief Data Officer) is responsible for enterprise-wide governance and utilization of information as an asset via data processing, analysis, data mining, information trading, and other means, and is the ideal sponsor.
    • BU leaders who represent a growth engine for a company look for ways to mine BI to help set direction.

    Ultimate Sponsor

    CEO

    • As a the primary driver of enterprise-wide strategy, the CEO is the ideal evangelist and project sponsor for your BI strategy.
    • Establishing a CEO–CIO partnership helps elevate IT to the level of a strategic partner, as opposed to the traditional view that IT’s only job is to “keep the lights on.”
    • An endorsement from the CEO may make other C-level executives more inclined to work with IT and have their business unit be the starting point for growing a BI program organically.

    "In the energy sector, achieving production KPIs are the key to financial success. The CFO is motivated to work with IT to create BI applications that drive higher revenue, identify operational bottlenecks, and maintain gross margin."

    – Yogi Schulz, Partner, Corvelle Consulting

    Select a BI project team

    Create a project team with the right skills, experience, and perspectives to develop a comprehensive strategy aligned to business needs.

    You may need to involve external experts as well as individuals within the organization who have the needed skills.

    A detailed understanding of what to look for in potential candidates is essential before moving forward with your BI project.

    Leverage several of Info-Tech’s Job Description Templates to aid in the process of selecting the right people to involve in constructing your BI strategy.

    Roles to Consider

    Business Stakeholders

    Business Intelligence Specialist

    Business Analyst

    Data Mining Specialist

    Data Warehouse Architect

    Enterprise Data Architect

    Data Steward

    "In developing the ideal BI team, your key person to have is a strong data architect, but you also need buy-in from the highest levels of the organization. Buy-in from different levels of the organization are indicators of success more than anything else."

    – Rob Anderson, Database Administrator and BI Manager, IT Research and Advisory Firm

    Create a RACI matrix to clearly define the roles and responsibilities for the parties involved

    A common project management pitfall for any endeavour is unclear definition of responsibilities amongst the individuals involved.

    As a business intelligence project requires a significant amount of back and forth between business and IT – bridged by the BI Steering Committee – clear guidelines at the project outset with a RACI chart provide a basic framework for assigning tasks and lines of communication for the later stages.

    Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed

    Obtaining Buy-in Project Charter Requirements Design Development Program Creation
    BI Steering Committee A C I I I C
    Project Sponsor - C I I I C
    Project Manager - R A I I C
    VP of BI R I I I I A
    CIO A I I I I R
    Business Analyst I I R C C C
    Solution Architect - - C A C C
    Data Architect - - C A C C
    BI Developer - - C C R C
    Data Steward - - C R C C
    Business SME C C C C C C

    Note: This RACI is an example of how role expectations would be broken down across the different steps of the project. Develop your own RACI based on project scope and participants.

    STEP 1.1

    Understand Your Business Context and Structure the Project

    Establish business–IT alignment for your BI strategy by detailing the business context

    Step Objectives

    • Engage the business units to find out where users need BI enablement.
    • Ideate preliminary points for improvement that will further business goals and calculate their value.

    Step Activities

    1.1.1 Craft the vision and mission statements for the Analytics program using the vision, mission, and strategies of your organization as basis.

    1.1.2 Articulate program goals and objectives

    1.1.3 Determine business differentiators and key drivers

    1.1.4 Brainstorm BI-specific constraints and improvement objectives

    Outcomes

    • Clearly articulated business context that will provide a starting point for formulating a BI strategy
    • High-level improvement objectives and ROI for the overall project
    • Vision, mission, and objectives of the analytics program

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Proposed Participants in this Step

    • Project Manager
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Business Stakeholders and Subject Matter Experts

    Transform the way the business makes decisions

    Your BI strategy should enable the business to make fast, effective, and comprehensive decisions.

    Fast Effective Comprehensive
    Reduce time spent on decision-making by designing a BI strategy around information needs of key decision makers. Make the right data available to key decision makers. Make strategic high-value, impactful decisions as well as operational decisions.

    "We can improve BI environments in several ways. First, we can improve the speed with which we create BI objects by insisting that the environments are designed with flexibility and adaptability in mind. Second, we can produce higher quality deliverables by ensuring that IT collaborate with the business on every deliverable. Finally, we can reduce the costs of BI by giving access to the environment to knowledgeable business users and encouraging a self-service function."

    – Claudia Imhoff, Founder, Boulder BI Brain Trust, Intelligent Solutions Inc.

    Assess needs of various stakeholders using personas

    User groups/user personas

    Different users have different consumption and usage patterns. Categorize users into user groups and visualize the usage patterns. The user groups are the connection between the BI capabilities and the users.

    User groups Mindset Usage Pattern Requirements
    Front-line workers Get my job done; perform my job quickly. Reports (standard reports, prompted reports, etc.) Examples:
    • Report bursting
    • Prompted reports
    Analysts I have some ideas; I need data to validate and support my ideas. Dashboards, self-service BI, forecasting/budgeting, collaboration Examples:
    • Self-service datasets
    • Data mashup capability
    Management I need a big-picture view and yet I need to play around with the data to find trends to drive my business. Dashboards, scorecards, mobile BI, forecasting/budgeting Examples:
    • Multi-tab dashboards
    • Scorecard capability
    Data scientists I need to combine existing data, as well as external or new, unexplored data sources and types to find nuggets in the data. Data mashup, connections to data sources Examples:
    • Connectivity to big data
    • Social media analyses

    The pains of inadequate BI are felt across the entire organization – and land squarely on the shoulders of the CIO

    Organization:

    • Insufficient information to make decisions.
    • Unable to measure internal performance.
    • Losses incurred from bad decisions or delayed decisions.
    • Canned reports fail to uncover key insights.
    • Multiple versions of information exist in silos.

    IT Department

    • End users are completely dependent on IT for reports.
    • Ad hoc BI requests take time away from core duties.
    • Spreadsheet-driven BI is overly manual.
    • Business losing trust in IT.

    CIO

    • Under great pressure and has a strong desire to improve BI.
    • Ad hoc BI requests are consuming IT resources and funds.
    • My organization finds value in using data and having decision support to make informed decisions.

    The overarching question that needs to be continually asked to create an effective BI strategy is:

    How do I create an environment that makes information accessible and consumable to users, and facilitates a collaborative dialogue between the business and IT?

    Pre-requisites for success

    Prerequisite #1: Secure Executive Sponsorship

    Sponsorship of BI that is outside of IT and at the highest levels of the organization is essential to the success of your BI strategy. Without it, there is a high chance that your BI program will fail. Note that it may not be an epic fail, but it is a subtle drying out in many cases.

    Prerequisite #2: Understand Business Context

    Providing the right tools for business decision making doesn’t need to be a guessing game if the business context is laid as the project foundation and the most pressing decisions serve as starting points. And business is engaged in formulating and executing the strategy.

    Prerequisite #3: Deliver insights that lead to action

    Start with understanding the business processes and where analytics can improve outcomes. “Think business backwards, not data forward.” (McKinsey)

    11 reasons BI projects fail

    Lack of Executive support

    Old Technology

    Lack of business support

    Too many KPIs

    No methodology for gathering requirements

    Overly long project timeframes

    Bad user experience

    Lack of user adoption

    Bad data

    Lack of proper human resources

    No upfront definition of true ROI

    Mico Yuk, 2019

    Make it clear to the business that IT is committed to building and supporting a BI platform that is intimately tied to enabling changing business objectives.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template to accelerate BI planning

    How to accelerate BI planning using the template

    1. Prepopulated text that you can use for your strategy formulation:
    2. Prepopulated text that can be used for your strategy formulation
    3. Sample bullet points that you can pick and choose from:
    4. Sample bullet points to pick and choose from

    Document the BI program planning in Info-Tech’s

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.

    Activity: Describe your organization’s vision and mission

    1.1.1

    30-40 minutes

    Compelling vision and mission statements will help guide your internal members toward your company’s target state. These will drive your business intelligence strategy.

    1. Your vision clearly represents where your organization aspires to be in the future and aligns the entire organization. Write down a future-looking, inspirational, and realizable vision in one concise statement. Consider:
    • “Five years from now, our business will be _______.”
    • What do we want to do tomorrow? For whom? What is the benefit?
  • Your mission tells why your organization currently exists and clearly expresses how it will achieve your vision for the future. Write down a mission statement in one clear and concise paragraph consisting of, at most, five sentences. Consider:
    • Why does the business exist? What problems does it solve? Who are its customers?
    • How does the business accomplish strategic tasks or reach its target?
  • Reconvene stakeholders to share ideas and develop one concise vision statement and mission statement. Focus on clarity and message over wording.
  • Input

    • Business vision and mission statements

    Output

    • Alignment and understanding on business vision

    Materials

    Participants

    • BI project lead
    • Executive business stakeholders

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adjust your statements until you feel that you can elicit a firm understanding of both your vision and mission in three minutes or less.

    Formulating an Enterprise BI and Analytics Strategy: Top-down BI Opportunity analysis

    Top-down BI Opportunity analysis

    Example of deriving BI opportunities using BI Opportunity Analysis

    Industry Drivers Private label Rising input prices Retail consolidation
    Company strategies Win at supply chain execution Win at customer service Expand gross margins
    Value disciplines Strategic cost management Operational excellence Customer service
    Core processes Purchasing Inbound logistics Sales, service & distribution
    Enterprise management: Planning, budgeting, control, process improvement, HR
    BI Opportunities Customer service analysis Cost and financial analysis Demand management

    Williams 2016

    Get your organization buzzing about BI – leverage Info-Tech’s Executive Brief as an internal marketing tool

    Two key tasks of a project sponsor are to:

    1. Evangelize the realizable benefits of investing in a business intelligence strategy.
    2. Help to shift the corporate culture to one that places emphasis on data-driven insight.

    Arm your project sponsor with our Executive Brief for this blueprint as a quick way to convey the value of this project to potential stakeholders.

    Bolster this presentation by adding use cases and metrics that are most relevant to your organization.

    Develop a business framework

    Identifying organizational goals and how data can support those goals is key to creating a successful BI & Analytical strategy. Rounding out the business model with technology drivers, environmental factors (as described in previous steps), and internal barriers and enablers creates a holistic view of Business Intelligence within the context of the organization as a whole.

    Through business engagement and contribution, the following holistic model can be created to understand the needs of the business.

    business framework holistic model

    Activity: Describe the Industry Drivers and Organization strategy to mitigate the risk

    1.1.2

    30-45 minutes

    Industry drivers are external influencers that has an effect on a business such as economic conditions, competitor actions, trade relations, climate etc. These drivers can differ significantly by industry and even organizations within the same industry.

    1. List the industry drivers that influences your organization:
    • Public sentiment in regards to energy source
    • Rising cost of raw materials due to increase demand
  • List the company strategies, goals, objectives to counteract the external influencers:
    • Change production process to become more energy efficient
    • Win at customer service
  • Identify the value disciplines :
    • Strategic cost management
    • Operational Excellence
  • List the core process that implements the value disciplines :
    • Purchasing
    • Sales
  • Identify the BI Opportunities:
    • Cost and financial analysis
    • Customer service analysis

    Input

    • Industry drivers

    Output

    • BI Opportunities that business can leverage

    Materials

    • Industry driver section in the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BI project lead
    • Executive business stakeholders

    Understand BI and analytics drivers and organizational objectives

    Environmental Factors Organizational Goals Business Needs Technology Drivers
    Definition External considerations are factors taking place outside the organization that are impacting the way business is conducted inside the organization. These are often outside the control of the business. Organizational drivers can be thought of as business-level metrics. These are tangible benefits the business can measure, such as customer retention, operation excellence, and/or financial performance. A requirement that specifies the behavior and the functions of a system. Technology drivers are technological changes that have created the need for a new BI solution. Many organizations turn to technology systems to help them obtain a competitive edge.
    Examples
    • Economy and politics
    • Laws and regulations
    • Competitive influencers
    • Time to market
    • Quality
    • Delivery reliability
    • Audit tracking
    • Authorization levels
    • Business rules
    • Deployment in the cloud
    • Integration
    • Reporting capabilities

    Activity: Discuss BI/Analytics drivers and organizational objectives

    1.1.3

    30-45 minutes

    1. Use the industry drivers and business goals identified in activity 1.1.2 as a starting point.
    2. Understand how the company runs today and what the organization’s future will look like. Try to identify the purpose for becoming an integrated organization. Use a whiteboard and markers to capture key findings.
    3. Take into account External Considerations, Organizational Drivers, Technology Drivers, and Key Functional Requirements.
    External Considerations Organizational Drivers Technology Considerations Functional Requirements
    • Funding Constraints
    • Regulations
    • Compliance
    • Scalability
    • Operational Efficiency
    • Data Accuracy
    • Data Quality
    • Better Reporting
    • Information Availability
    • Integration Between Systems
    • Secure Data

    Identify challenges and barriers to the BI project

    There are several factors that may stifle the success of a BI implementation. Scan the current environment to identify internal barriers and challenges to identify potential challenges so you can meet them head-on.

    Common Internal Barriers

    Management Support
    Organizational Culture
    Organizational Structure
    IT Readiness
    Definition The degree of management understanding and acceptance towards BI solutions. The collective shared values and beliefs. The functional relationships between people and departments in an organization. The degree to which the organization’s people and processes are prepared for a new BI solution.
    Questions
    • Is a BI project recognized as a top priority?
    • Will management commit time to the project?
    • Are employees resistant to change?
    • Is the organization highly individualized?
    • Is the organization centralized?
    • Is the organization highly formalized?
    • Is there strong technical expertise?
    • Is there strong infrastructure?
    Impact
    • Funding
    • Resources
    • Knowledge sharing
    • User acceptance
    • Flow of knowledge
    • Poor implementation
    • Reliance on consultants

    Activity: Discuss BI/Analytics challenges and pain points

    1.1.4

    30-45 minutes

    1. Identify challenges with the process identified in step 1.1.2.
    2. Brainstorm potential barriers to successful BI implementation and adoption. Use a whiteboard and marker to capture key findings.
    3. Consider Functional Gaps, Technical Gaps, Process Gaps, and Barriers to BI Success.
    Functional Gaps Technical Gaps Process Gaps Barriers to Success
    • No online purchase order requisition
    • Inconsistent reporting – data quality concerns
    • Duplication of data
    • Lack of system integration
    • Cultural mindset
    • Resistance to change
    • Lack of training
    • Funding

    Activity: Discuss opportunities and benefits

    1.1.5

    30-45 minutes

    1. Identify opportunities and benefits from an integrated system.
    2. Brainstorm potential enablers for successful BI implementation and adoption. Use a whiteboard and markers to capture key findings.
    3. Consider Business Benefits, IT Benefits, Organizational Benefits, and Enablers of BI success.
    Business Benefits IT Benefits Organizational Benefits Enablers of Success
    • Business-IT alignment
    • Compliance
    • Scalability
    • Operational Efficiency
    • Data Accuracy
    • Data Quality
    • Better Reporting
    • Change management
    • Training
    • Alignment to strategic objectives

    Your organization’s framework for Business Intelligence Strategy

    Blank organization framework for Business Intelligence Strategy

    Example: Business Framework for Data & Analytics Strategy

    The following diagram represents [Client]’s business model for BI and data. This holistic view of [Client]’s current environment serves as the basis for the generation of the business-aligned Data & Analytics Strategy.

    The image is an example of Business Framework for Data & Analytics Strategy.

    Info-Tech recommends balancing a top-down approach with bottom up for building your BI strateg

    Taking a top-down approach will ensure senior management’s involvement and support throughout the project. This ensures that the most critical decisions are supported by the right data/information, aligning the entire organization with the BI strategy. Furthermore, the gains from BI will be much more significant and visible to the rest of the organization.

    Two charts showing the top-down and bottom-up approach.

    Far too often, organizations taking a bottom-up approach to BI will fail to generate sufficient buy-in and awareness from senior management. Not only does a lack of senior involvement result in lower adoption from the tactical and operational levels, but more importantly, it also means that the strategic decision makers aren’t taking advantage of BI.

    Estimate the ROI of your BI and analytics strategy to secure executive support

    The value of creating a new strategy – or revamping an existing one – needs to be conveyed effectively to a high-level stakeholder, ideally a C-level executive. That executive buy-in is more likely to be acquired when effort has been made to determine the return on investment for the overall initiative.

    1. Business Impacts
      New revenue
      Cost savings
      Time to market
      Internal Benefits
      Productivity gain
      Process optimization
      Investment
      People – employees’ time, external resources
      Data – cost for new datasets
      Technology – cost for new technologies
    2. QuantifyCan you put a number or a percentage to the impacts and benefits? QuantifyCan you estimate the investments you need to put in?
    3. TranslateTranslate the quantities into dollar value
    4. The image depicts an equation for ROI estimate

    Example

    One percent increase in revenue; three more employees $225,000/yr, $150,000/yr 50%

    Activity: Establish a high-level ROI as part of an overall use case for developing a fit-for-purpose BI strategy

    1.1.6

    1.5 hours

    Communicating an ROI that is impactful and reasonable is essential for locking in executive-level support for any initiative. Use this activity as an initial touchpoint to bring business and IT perspectives as part of building a robust business case for developing your BI strategy.

    1. Revisit the business context detailed in the previous sections of this phase. Use priority objectives to identify use case(s), ideally where there are easily defined revenue generators/cost reductions (e.g. streamlining the process of mailing physical marketing materials to customers).
    2. Assign research tasks around establishing concrete numbers and dollar values.
    • Have a subject matter expert weigh in to validate your figures.
    • When calculating ROI, consider how you might leverage BI to create opportunities for upsell, cross-sell, or increased customer retention.
  • Reconvene the stakeholder group and discuss your findings.
    • This is the point where expectation management is important. Separate the need-to-haves from the nice-to-haves.

    Emphasize that ROI is not fully realized after the first implementation, but comes as the platform is built upon iteratively and in an integrated fashion to mature capabilities over time.

    Input

    • Vision statement
    • Mission statement

    Output

    • Business differentiators and key drivers

    Materials

    • Benefit Cost Analysis section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BI project lead
    • Executive IT & business stakeholders

    An effective BI strategy positions business intelligence in the larger data lifecycle

    In an effort to keep users satisfied, many organizations rush into implementing a BI platform and generating reports for their business users. BI is, first and foremost, a presentation layer; there are several stages in the data lifecycle where the data that BI visualizes can be compromised.

    Without paying the appropriate amount of attention to the underlying data architecture and application integration, even the most sophisticated BI platforms will fall short of providing business users with a holistic view of company information.

    Example

    In moving away from single application-level reporting, a strategy around data integration practices and technology is necessary before the resultant data can be passed to the BI platform for additional analyses and visualization.

    BI doesn’t exist in a vacuum – develop an awareness of other key data management practices

    As business intelligence is primarily a presentation layer that allows business users to visualize data and turn information into actionable decisions, there are a number of data management practices that precede BI in the flow of data.

    Data Warehousing

    The data warehouse structures source data in a manner that is more operationally focused. The Reporting & Analytics Strategy must inform the warehouse strategy on data needs and building a data warehouse to meet those needs.

    Data Integration, MDM & RDM

    The data warehouse is built from different sources that must be integrated and normalized to enable Business Intelligence. The Info-Tech integration and MDM blueprints will guide with their implementation.

    Data Quality

    A major roadblock to building an effective BI solution is a lack of accurate, timely, consistent, and relevant data. Use Info-Tech’s blueprint to refine your approach to data quality management.

    Data quality, poor integration/P2P integration, poor data architecture are the primary barriers to truly leveraging BI, and a lot of companies haven’t gotten better in these areas.

    – Shari Lava, Associate Vice-President, IT Research and Advisory Firm

    Building consensus around data definitions across business units is a critical step in carrying out a BI strategy

    Business intelligence is heavily reliant on the ability of an organization to mesh data from different sources together and create a holistic and accurate source of truth for users.

    Useful analytics cannot be conducted if your business units define key business terms differently.

    Example

    Finance may label customers as those who have transactional records with the organization, but Marketing includes leads who have not yet had any transactions as customers. Neglecting to note these seemingly small discrepancies in data definition will undermine efforts to combine data assets from traditionally siloed functional units.

    In the stages prior to implementing any kind of BI platform, a top priority should be establishing common definitions for key business terms (customers, products, accounts, prospects, contacts, product groups, etc.).

    As a preliminary step, document different definitions for the same business terms so that business users are aware of these differences before attempting to combine data to create custom reports.

    Self-Assessment

    Do you have common definitions of business terms?

    • If not, identify common business terms.
    • At the very least, document different definitions of the same business terms so the corporate can compare and contrast them.

    STEP 1.2

    Assess the Current BI Landscape

    Establish an in-depth understanding of your current BI landscape

    Step Objectives

    • Inventory and assess the state of your current BI landscape
    • Document the artifacts of your BI environment

    Step Activities

    1.2.1 Analyze the usage levels of your current BI programs/platform

    1.2.2 Perform a survey to gather user perception of your current BI environment

    1.2.3 Take an inventory of your current BI artifacts

    Outcomes

    • Summarize the qualitative and quantitative performance of your existing BI environment
    • Understand the outputs coming from your BI sources

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Project Manager

    Data Architect(s) or Enterprise Architect

    Project Team

    Understand your current BI landscape before you rationalize

    Relying too heavily on technology as the sole way to solve BI problems results in a more complex environment that will ultimately frustrate business users. Take the time to thoroughly assess the current state of your business intelligence landscape using a qualitative (user perception) and quantitative (usage statistics) approach. The insights and gaps identified in this step will serve as building blocks for strategy and roadmap development in later phases.

    Phase 1

    Current State Summary of BI Landscape

    1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4
    Usage Insights Perception Insights BI Inventory Insights Requirements Insights

    PHASE 2

    Strategy and Roadmap Formulation

    Gather usage insights to pinpoint the hot spots for BI usage amongst your users

    Usage data reflects the consumption patterns of end users. By reviewing usage data, you can identify aspects of your BI program that are popular and those that are underutilized. It may present some opportunities for trimming some of the underutilized content.

    Benefits of analyzing usage data:

    • Usage is a proxy for popularity and usability of the BI artifacts. The popular content should be kept and improved in your next generation BI.
    • Usage information provides insight on what, when, where, and how much users are consuming BI artifacts.
    • Unlike methods such as user interviews and focus groups, usage information is fact based and is not subject to peer pressure or “toning down.”

    Sample Sources of Usage Data:

    1. Usage reports from your BI platform Many BI platforms have out-of-the-box usage reports that log and summarize usage data. This is your ideal source for usage data.
    2. Administrator console in your BI platformBI platforms usually have an administrator console that allows BI administrators to configure settings and to monitor activities that include usage. You may obtain some usage data in the console. Note that the usage data is usually real-time in nature, and you may not have access to a historical view of the BI usage.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t forget some of the power users. They may perform analytics by accessing datasets directly or with the help of a query tool (even straight SQL statements). Their usage information is important. The next generation BI should provide consumption options for them.

    Accelerate the process of gathering user feedback with Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment (APA)

    In an environment where multiple BI tools are being used, discovering what works for users and what doesn’t is an important first step to rationalizing the BI landscape.

    Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment allows you to create a custom survey based on your current applications, generate a custom report that will help you visualize user satisfaction levels, and pinpoint areas for improvement.

    Activity: Review and analyze usage data

    1.2.1

    2 hours

    This activity helps you to locate usage data in your existing environment. It also helps you to review and analyze usage data to come up with a few findings.

    1. Get to the usage source. You may obtain usage data from one of the below options. Usage reports are your ideal choice, followed by some alternative options:
    2. a. Administrator console – limited to real-time or daily usage data. You may need to track usage data over for several days to identify patterns.

      b. Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment (APA).

      c. Other – be creative. Some may use an IT usage monitoring system or web analytics to track time users spent on the BI portal.

    3. Develop categories for classifying the different sources of usage data in your current BI environment. Use the following table as starting point for creating these groups:

    This is the content for Layout H4 Tag

    By Frequency Real Time Daily Weekly Yearly
    By Presentation Format Report Dashboard Alert Scorecard
    By Delivery Web portal Excel PDF Mobile application

    INPUT

    • Usage reports
    • Usage statistics

    OUTPUT

    • Insights pertaining to usage patterns

    Materials

    • Usage Insights of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA
    • BI Administrator
    • PM

    Activity: Review and analyze usage (cont.)

    1.2.1

    2 hours

    3. Sort your collection of BI artifacts by usage. Discuss some of the reasons why some content is popular whereas some has no usage at all.

    Popular BI Artifacts – Discuss improvements, opportunities and new artifacts

    Unpopular BI Artifacts – Discuss retirement, improvements, and realigning information needs

    4. Summarize your findings in the Usage Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.

    INPUT

    • Usage reports
    • Usage statistics

    OUTPUT

    • Insights pertaining to usage patterns

    Materials

    • Usage Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA
    • BI Administrator
    • PM

    Gather perception to understand the existing BI users

    In 1.2.1, we gathered the statistics for BI usage; it’s the hard data telling who uses what. However, it does not tell you the rationale, or the why, behind the usage. Gathering user perception and having conversations with your BI consumers is the key to bridging the gap.

    User Perception Survey

    Helps you to:

    1. Get general insights on user perception
    2. Narrow down to selected areas

    User Interviews

    Perception can be gathered by user interviews and surveys. Conducting user interviews takes time so it is a good practice to get some primary insights via survey before doing in-depth interviews in selected areas.

    – Shari Lava, Associate Vice-President, IT Research and Advisory Firm

    Define problem statements to create proof-of-concept initiatives

    Info-Tech’s Four Column Model of Data Flow

    Find a data-related problem or opportunity

    Ask open-ended discovery questions about stakeholder fears, hopes, and frustrations to identify a data-related problem that is clear, contained, and fixable. This is then to be written as a problem/opportunity statement.

    1. Fear: What is the number one risk you need to alleviate?
    2. Hope: What is the number one opportunity you wish to realize?
    3. Frustration: What is the number one annoying pet peeve you wish to scratch?
    4. Next, gather information to support a problem/opportunity statement:

    5. What are your challenges in performing the activity or process today?
    6. What does amazing look like if we solve this perfectly?
    7. What other business activities/processes will be impacted/improved if we solve this?
    8. What compliance/regulatory/policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
    9. What measures of success/change should we use to prove value of the effort (KPIs/ROI)?
    10. What are the steps in the process/activity?
    11. What are the applications/systems used at each step and from step to step?
    12. What data elements are created, used, and/or transformed at each step?

    Leverage Info-Tech’s BI survey framework to initiate a 360° perception survey

    Info-Tech has developed a BI survey framework to help existing BI practices gather user perception via survey. The framework is built upon best practices developed by McLean & Company.

    1. Communicate the survey
    2. Create a survey
    3. Conduct the survey
    4. Collect and clean survey data
    5. Analyze survey data
    6. Conduct follow-up interviews
    7. Identify and prioritize improvement initiatives

    The survey takes a comprehensive approach by examining your existing BI practices through the following lenses:

    360° Perception

    Demographics Who are the users? From which department?
    Usage How is the current BI being used?
    People Web portal
    Process How good is your BI team from a user perspective?
    Data How good is the BI data in terms of quality and usability?
    Technology How good are your existing BI/reporting tools?
    Textual Feedback The sky’s the limit. Tell us your comments and ideas via open-ended questions.

    Use Info-Tech’s BI End-User Satisfaction Survey Framework to develop a comprehensive BI survey tailored to your organization.

    Activity: Develop a plan to gather user perception of your current BI program

    1.2.2

    2 hours

    This activity helps you to plan for a BI perception survey and subsequent interviews.

    1. Proper communication while conducting surveys helps to boost response rate. The project team should have a meeting with business executives to decide:
    • The survey goals
    • Which areas to cover
    • Which trends and hypotheses you want to confirm
    • Which pre-, during, and post-survey communications should be sent out
  • Have the project team create the first draft of the survey for subsequent review by select business stakeholders. Several iterations may be needed before finalizing.
  • In planning for the conclusion of the survey, the project team should engage a data analyst to:
    1. Organize the data in a useful format
    2. Clean up the survey data when there are gaps
    3. Summarize the data into a presentable/distributable format

    Collectively, the project team and the BI consuming departments should review the presentation and discuss these items:

    Misalignment

    Opportunities

    Inefficiencies

    Trends

    Need detailed interviews?

    INPUT

    • Usage information and analyses

    OUTPUT

    • User-perception survey

    Materials

    • Perception Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA
    • BI Administrator
    • PM
    • Business SMEs

    Create a comprehensive inventory of your BI artifacts

    Taking an inventory of your BI artifacts allows you to understand what deliverables have been developed over the years. Inventory taking should go beyond the BI content. You may want to include additional information products such as Excel spreadsheets, reports that are coming out of an Access database, and reports that are generated from front-end applications (e.g. Salesforce).

    1. Existing Reports from BI platform

    2. If you are currently using a BI platform, you have some BI artifacts (reports, scorecards, dashboards) that are developed within the platform itself.

    • BI Usage Reports (refer to step 2.1) – if you are getting a comprehensive BI usage reports for all your BI artifacts, there is your inventory report too.
    • BI Inventory Reports – Your BI platform may provide out-of-the-box inventory reports. You can use them as your inventory.
    • If the above options are not feasible, you may need to manually create the BI inventory. You may build that from some of your existing BI documentations to save time.
  • Excel and Access

    • Work with the business units to identify if Excel and Access are used to generate reports.
  • Application Reports

    • Data applications such as Salesforce, CRM, and ERP often provide reports as an out-of-the-box feature.
    • Those reports only include data within their respective applications. However, this may present opportunities for integrating application data with additional data sources.

    Activity: Inventory your BI artifacts

    1.2.3

    2+ hours

    This activity helps you to inventory your BI information artifacts and other related information artifacts.

    1. Define the scope of your inventory. Work with the project sponsor and CIO to define which sources should be captured in the inventory process. Consider: BI inventory, Excel spreadsheets, Access reports, and application reporting.
    2. Define the depth of your inventory. Work with the project sponsor and CIO to define the level of granularity. In some settings, the artifact name and a short description may be sufficient. In other cases, you may need to document users and business logic of the artifacts.
    3. Review the inventory results. Discuss findings and opportunities around the following areas:

    Interpret your Inventory

    Duplicated reports/ dashboards Similar reports/ dashboards that may be able to merge Excel and Access reports that are using undocumented, unconventional business logics Application reports that need to be enhanced by additional data Classify artifacts by BI Type

    INPUT

    • Current BI artifacts and documents
    • BI Type classification

    OUTPUT

    • Summary of BI artifacts

    Materials

    • BI Inventory Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA
    • Data analyst
    • PM
    • Project sponsor

    Project sponsor

    1.2.4

    2+ hours

    This activity helps you to inventory your BI by report type.

    1. Classify BI artifacts by type. Use the BI Type tool to classify Work with the project sponsor and CIO to define which sources should be captured in the inventory process. Consider: BI inventory, Excel spreadsheets, Access reports, and application reporting.
    2. Define the depth of your inventory. Work with the project sponsor and CIO to define the level of granularity. In some settings, the artifact name and a short description may be sufficient. In other cases, you may need to document users and business logic of the artifacts.
    3. Review the inventory results. Discuss findings and opportunities around the following areas:

    Interpretation of your Inventory

    Duplicated reports/dashboards Similar reports/dashboards that may be able to merge Excel and Access reports that are using undocumented, unconventional business logics Application reports that need to be enhanced by additional data

    INPUT

    • The BI Type as used by different business units
    • Business BI requirements

    OUTPUT

    • Summary of BI type usage across the organization

    Materials

    • BI Inventory Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA
    • Data analyst
    • PM
    • Project sponsor

    STEP 1.3

    Undergo BI Requirements Gathering

    Perform requirements gathering for revamping your BI environment

    Step Objectives

    • Create principles that will direct effective requirements gathering
    • Create a list of existing and desired BI requirements

    Step Activities

    1.3.1 Create requirements gathering principles

    1.3.2 Gather appropriate requirements

    1.3.3 Organize and consolidate the outputs of requirements gathering activities

    Outcomes

    • Requirements gathering principles that are flexible and repeatable
    • List of BI requirements

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Proposed Participants in this Step

    Project Manager

    Data Architect(s) or Enterprise Architect

    Project Team

    Business Users

    Don’t let your new BI platform become a victim of poor requirements gathering

    The challenges in requirements management often have underlying causes; find and eliminate the root causes rather than focusing on the symptoms.

    Root Causes of Poor Requirements Gathering:

    • Requirements gathering procedures exist but aren’t followed.
    • There isn't enough time allocated to the requirements gathering phase.
    • There isn't enough involvement or investment secured from business partners.
    • There is no senior leadership involvement or mandate to fix requirements gathering.
    • There are inadequate efforts put towards obtaining and enforcing sign off.

    Outcomes of Poor Requirements Gathering:

    • Rework due to poor requirements leads to costly overruns.
    • Final deliverables are of poor quality and are implemented late.
    • Predicted gains from deployed applications are not realized.
    • There are low feature utilization rates by end users.
    • Teams are frustrated within IT and the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Requirements gathering is the number one failure point for most development or procurement projects that don’t deliver value. This has been, and continues to be, the case as most organizations still don't get requirements gathering right. Overcoming organizational cynicism can be a major obstacle to clear when it is time to optimize the requirements gathering process.

    Define the attributes of a good requirement to help shape your requirements gathering principles

    A good requirement has the following attributes:

    Verifiable It is stated in a way that can be tested.
    Unambiguous It is free of subjective terms and can only be interpreted in one way.
    Complete It contains all relevant information.
    Consistent It does not conflict with other requirements.
    Achievable It is possible to accomplish given the budgetary and technological constraints.
    Traceable It can be tracked from inception to testing.
    Unitary It addresses only one thing and cannot be deconstructed into multiple requirements.
    Accurate It is based on proven facts and correct information.

    Other Considerations

    Organizations can also track a requirement owner, rationale, priority level (must have vs. nice to have), and current status (approved, tested, etc.).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Requirements must be solution agnostic – they should focus on the underlying need rather than the technology required to satisfy the need.

    Activity: Define requirements gathering principles

    1.3.1

    1 hour

    1. Invite representatives from the project management office, project management team, and BA team, as well as some key business stakeholders.
    2. Use the sample categories and principles in the table below as starting points for creating your own requirements gathering principles.
    3. Document the requirements gathering principles in the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.
    4. Communicate the requirements gathering principles to the affected BI stakeholders.

    Sample Principles to Start With

    Effectiveness Face-to-face interviews are preferred over phone interviews.
    Alignment Clarify any misalignments, even the tiniest ones.
    Validation Rephrase requirements at the end to validate requirements.
    Ideation Use drawings and charts to explain ideas.
    Demonstration Make use of Joint Application Development (JAD) sessions.

    INPUT

    • Existing requirement principles (if any)

    OUTPUT

    • Requirements gathering principles that can be revisited and reused

    Materials

    • Requirements Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA Team
    • PM
    • Business stakeholders
    • PMO

    Info-Tech Insight

    Turn requirements gathering principles into house rules. The house rules should be available in every single requirements gathering session and the participants should revisit them when there are disagreements, confusion, or silence.

    Right-size your approach to BI requirements management

    Info-Tech suggests four requirements management approaches based on project complexity and business significance. BI projects usually require the Strategic Approach in requirements management.

    Requirements Management Process Explanations

    Approach Definition Recommended Strategy
    Strategic Approach High business significance and high project complexity merits a significant investment of time and resources in requirements gathering. Treat the requirements gathering phase as a project within a project. A large amount of time should be dedicated to elicitation, business process mapping, and solution design.
    Fundamental Approach High business significance and low project complexity merits a heavy emphasis on the elicitation phase to ensure that the project bases are covered and business value is realized. Look to achieve quick wins and try to survey a broad cross-section of stakeholders during elicitation and validation. The elicitation phase should be highly iterative. Do not over-complicate the analysis and validation of a straightforward project.
    Calculated Approach Low business significance and high project complexity merits a heavy emphasis on the analysis and validation phases to ensure that the solution meets the needs of users. Allocate a significant amount of time to business process modeling, requirements categorization, prioritization, and solution modeling.
    Elementary Approach Low business significance and low project complexity does not merit a high amount of rigor for requirements gathering. Do not rush or skip steps, but aim to be efficient. Focus on basic elicitation techniques (e.g. unstructured interviews, open-ended surveys) and consider capturing requirements as user stories. Focus on efficiency to prevent project delays and avoid squandering resources.

    Vary the modes used in eliciting requirements from your user base

    Requirements Gathering Modes

    Info-Tech has identified four effective requirements gathering modes. During the requirements gathering process, you may need to switch between the four gathering modes to establish a thorough understanding of the information needs.

    Dream Mode

    • Mentality: Let users’ imaginations go wild. The sky’s the limit.
    • How it works: Ask users to dream up the ideal future state and ask how analytics can support those dreams.
    • Limitations: Not all dreams can be fulfilled. A variety of constraints (budget, personnel, technical skills) may prevent the dreams from becoming reality.

    Pain Mode

    • Mentality: Users are currently experiencing pains related to information needs.
    • How it works: Vent the pains. Allow end users to share their information pains, ask them how their pains can be relieved, then convert those pains to requirements.
    • Limitations: Users are limited by the current situation and aren’t looking to innovate.

    Decode Mode

    • Mentality: Read the hidden messages from users. Speculate as to what the users really want.
    • How it works: Decode the underlying messages. Be innovative to develop hypotheses and then validate with the users.
    • Limitations: Speculations and hypothesis could be invalid. They may direct the users into some pre-determined directions.

    Profile Mode

    • Mentality: “I think you may want XYZ because you fall into that profile.”
    • How it works: The information user may fall into some existing user group profile or their information needs may be similar to some existing users.
    • Limitations: This mode doesn’t address very specific needs.

    Supplement BI requirements with user stories and prototyping to ensure BI is fit for purpose

    BI is a continually evolving program. BI artifacts that were developed in the past may not be relevant to the business anymore due to changes in the business and information usage. Revamping your BI program entails revisiting some of the BI requirements and/or gathering new BI requirements.

    Three-Step Process for Gathering Requirements

    Requirements User Stories Rapid Prototyping
    Gather requirements. Most importantly, understand the business needs and wants. Leverage user stories to organize and make sense of the requirements. Use a prototype to confirm requirements and show the initial draft to end users.

    Pain Mode: “I can’t access and manipulate data on my own...”

    Decode Mode: Dig deeper: could this hint at a self-service use case?

    Dream Mode: E.g. a sandbox area where I can play around with clean, integrated, well-represented data.

    Profile Mode: E.g. another marketing analyst is currently using something similar.

    ExampleMary has a spreadmart that keeps track of all campaigns. Maintaining and executing that spreadmart is time consuming.

    Mary is asking for a mash-up data set that she can pivot on her own…

    Upon reviewing the data and the prototype, Mary decided to use a heat map and included two more data points – tenure and lifetime value.

    Identify which BI styles best meet user requirements

    A spectrum of Business Intelligence solutions styles are available. Use Info-Tech’s BI Styles Tool to assess which business stakeholder will be best served by which style.

    Style Description Strategic Importance (1-5) Popularity (1-5) Effort (1-5)
    Standards Preformatted reports Standard, preformatted information for backward-looking analysis. 5 5 1
    User-defined analyses Pre-staged information where “pick lists” enable business users to filter (select) the information they wish to analyze, such as sales for a selected region during a selected previous timeframe. 5 4 2
    Ad-hoc analyses Power users write their own queries to extract self-selected pre-staged information and then use the information to perform a user-created analysis. 5 4 3
    Scorecards and dashboards Predefined business performance metrics about performance variables that are important to the organization, presented in a tabular or graphical format that enables business users to see at a glance how the organization is performing. 4 4 3
    Multidimensional analysis (OLAP) Multidimensional analysis (also known as on-line analytical processing): Flexible tool-based, user-defined analysis of business performance and the underlying drivers or root causes of that performance. 4 3 3
    Alerts Predefined analyses of key business performance variables, comparison to a performance standard or range, and communication to designated businesspeople when performance is outside the predefined performance standard or range. 4 3 3
    Advanced Analytics Application of long-established statistical and/or operations research methods to historical business information to look backward and characterize a relevant aspect of business performance, typically by using descriptive statistics. 5 3 4
    Predictive Analytics Application of long-established statistical and/or operations research methods and historical business information to predict, model, or simulate future business and/or economic performance and potentially prescribe a favored course of action for the future. 5 3 5

    Activity: Gather BI requirements

    1.3.2

    2-6 hours

    Using the approaches discussed on previous slides, start a dialogue with business users to confirm existing requirements and develop new ones.

    1. Invite business stakeholders to a requirements gathering session.
    2. For existing BI artifacts – Invite existing users of those artifacts.

      For new BI development – Invite stakeholders at the executive level to understand the business operation and their needs and wants. This is especially important if their department is new to BI.

    3. Discuss the business requirements. Systematically switch between the four requirements gathering modes to get a holistic view of the requirements.
    4. Once requirements are gathered, organize them to tell a story. A story usually has these components:
    The Setting The Characters The Venues The Activities The Future
    Example Customers are asking for a bundle discount. CMO and the marketing analysts want to… …the information should be available in the portal, mobile, and Excel. …information is then used in the bi-weekly pricing meeting to discuss… …bundle information should contain historical data in a graphical format to help executives.

    INPUT

    • Existing documentations on BI artifacts

    OUTPUT

    • Preliminary, uncategorized list of BI requirements

    Materials

    • Requirements Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA team
    • Business stakeholders
    • Business SMEs
    • BI developers

    Clarify consumer needs by categorizing BI requirements

    Requirements are too broad in some situations and too detailed in others. In the previous step we developed user stories to provide context. Now you need to define requirement categories and gather detailed requirements.

    Considerations for Requirement Categories

    Category Subcategory Sample Requirements
    Data Granularity Individual transaction
    Transformation Transform activation date to YYYY-MM format
    Selection Criteria Client type: consumer. Exclude SMB and business clients. US only. Recent three years
    Fields Required Consumer band, Region, Submarket…
    Functionality Filters Filters required on the dashboard: date range filter, region filter…
    Drill Down Path Drill down from a summary report to individual transactions
    Analysis Required Cross-tab, time series, pie chart
    Visual Requirements Mock-up See attached drawing
    Section The dashboard will be presented using three sections
    Conditional Formatting Below-average numbers are highlighted
    Security Mobile The dashboard needs to be accessed from mobile devices
    Role Regional managers will get a subset of the dashboard according to the region
    Users John, Mary, Tom, Bob, and Dave
    Export Dashboard data cannot be exported into PDF, text, or Excel formats
    Performance Speed A BI artifact must be loaded in three seconds
    Latency Two seconds response time when a filter is changed
    Capacity Be able to serve 50 concurrent users with the performance expected
    Control Governance Govern by the corporate BI standards
    Regulations Meet HIPPA requirements
    Compliance Meet ISO requirements

    Prioritize requirements to assist with solution modeling

    Prioritization ensures that the development team focuses on the right requirements.

    The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    Must Have Requirements that mustbe implemented for the solution to be considered successful.
    Should Have Requirements that are high priority and should be included in the solution if possible.
    Could Have Requirements that are desirable but not necessary and could be included if resources are available.
    Won't Have Requirements that won’t be in the next release but will be considered for the future releases.

    The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994.

    Prioritization is the process of ranking each requirement based on its importance to project success. Hold a separate meeting for the domain SMEs, implementation SMEs, project managers, and project sponsors to prioritize the requirements list. At the conclusion of the meeting, each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The implementation SMEs will use these priority levels to ensure that efforts are targeted towards the proper requirements and the plan features available on each release. Use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order requirements.

    Activity: Finalize the list of BI requirements

    1.3.3

    1-4 hours

    Requirement Category Framework

    Category Subcategory
    Data Granularity
    Transformation
    Selection Criteria
    Fields Required
    Functionality Filters
    Drill Down Path
    Analysis Required
    Visual Requirements Mock-up
    Section
    Conditional Formatting
    Security Mobile
    Role
    Users
    Export
    Performance Speed
    Latency
    Capacity
    Control Governance
    Regulations
    Compliance

    Create requirement buckets and classify requirements.

    1. Define requirement categories according to the framework.
    2. Review the user story and requirements you collected in Step 1.3.2. Classify the requirements within requirement categories.
    3. Review the preliminary list of categorized requirements and look for gaps in this detailed view. You may need to gather additional requirements to fill the gaps.
    4. Prioritize the requirements according to the MoSCoW framework.
    5. Document your final list of requirements in the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.

    INPUT

    • Existing requirements and new requirements from step 1.3.2

    OUTPUT

    • Prioritized and categorized requirements

    Materials

    • Requirements Insights section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BA
    • Business stakeholders
    • PMO

    Translate your findings and ideas into actions that will be integrated into the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    As you progress through each phase, document findings and ideas as they arise. At phase end, hold a brainstorming session with the project team focused on documenting findings and ideas and substantiating them into improvement actions.

    Translating findings and ideas into actions that will be integrated into the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Ask yourself how BI or analytics can be used to address the gaps and explore opportunities uncovered in each phase. For example, in Phase 1, how do current BI capabilities impede the realization of the business vision?

    Document and prioritize Phase 1 findings, ideas, and action items

    1.3.4

    1-2 hours

    1. Reconvene as a group to review findings, ideas, and actions harvested in Phase 1. Write the findings, ideas, and actions on sticky notes.
    2. Prioritize the sticky notes to yield those with high business value and low implementation effort. View some sample findings below:
    3. High Business Value, Low Effort High Business Value, High Effort
      Low Business Value, High Effort Low Business Value, High Effort

      Phase 1

      Sample Phase 1 Findings Found two business objectives that are not supported by BI/analytics
      Some executives still think BI is reporting
      Some confusion around operational reporting and BI
      Data quality plays a big role in BI
      Many executives are not sure about the BI ROI or asking for one
    4. Select the top findings and document them in the “Other Phase 1 Findings” section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template. The findings will be used again in Phase 3.

    INPUT

    • Phase 1 activities
    • Business context (vision, mission, goals, etc.

    OUTPUT

    • Other Phase 1 Findings section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Project manger
    • Project team
    • Business stakeholders

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1-1.1.5

    Establish the business context

    To begin the workshop, your project team will be taken through a series of activities to establish the overall business vision, mission, objectives, goals, and key drivers. This information will serve as the foundation for discerning how the revamped BI strategy needs to enable business users.

    1.2.1- 1.2.3

    Create a comprehensive documentation of your current BI environment

    Our analysts will take your project team through a series of activities that will facilitate an assessment of current BI usage and artifacts, and help you design an end-user interview survey to elicit context around BI usage patterns.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-tech analysts

    1.3.1-1.3.3

    Establish new BI requirements

    Our analysts will guide your project team through frameworks for eliciting and organizing requirements from business users, and then use those frameworks in exercises to gather some actual requirements from business stakeholders.

    Phase 2

    Evaluate Your Current BI Practice

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Revisit project metrics to track phase progress

    Goals for Phase 2:

    • Assess your current BI practice. Determine the maturity of your current BI practice from different viewpoints.
    • Develop your BI target state. Plan your next generation BI with Info-Tech’s BI patterns and best practices.
    • Safeguard your target state. Avoid BI pitfalls by proactively monitoring BI risks.

    Info-Tech’s Suggested Metrics for Tracking Phase 2 Goals

    Practice Improvement Metrics Data Collection and Calculation Expected Improvement
    # of groups participated in the current state assessment The number of groups joined the current assessment using Info-Tech’s BI Practice Assessment Tool Varies; the tool can accommodate up to five groups
    # of risks mitigated Derive from your risk register At least two to five risks will be identified and mitigated

    Intangible Metrics:

    • Prototyping approach allows the BI group to understand more about business requirements, and in the meantime, allows the business to understand how to partner with the BI group.
    • The BI group and the business have more confidence in the BI program as risks are monitored and mitigated on an ad hoc basis.

    Evaluate your current BI practice

    Phase 2 Overarching Insight

    BI success is not based solely on the technology it runs on; technology cannot mask gaps in capabilities. You must be capable in your environment, and data management, data quality, and related data practices must be strong. Otherwise, the usefulness of the intelligence suffers. The best BI solution does not only provide a technology platform, but also addresses the elements that surround the platform. Look beyond tools and holistically assess the maturity of your BI practice with input from both the BI consumer and provider perspectives.

    Understand the Business Context to Rationalize Your BI Landscape Evaluate Your Current BI Practice Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement
    Establish the Business Context
    • Business Vision, Goals, Key Drivers
    • Business Case Presentation
    • High-Level ROI
    Assess Your Current BI Maturity
    • SWOT Analysis
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • Summary of Current State
    Construct a BI Initiative Roadmap
    • BI Improvement Initiatives
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap
    Access Existing BI Environment
    • BI Perception Survey Framework
    • Usage Analyses
    • BI Report Inventory
    Envision BI Future State
    • BI Patterns
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • List of Functions
    Plan for Continuous Improvement
    • Excel Governance Policy
    • BI Ambassador Network Draft
    Undergo Requirements Gathering
    • Requirements Gathering Principles
    • Overall BI Requirements

    Phase 2 overview

    Detailed Overview

    Step 1: Assess Your Current BI Practice

    Step 2: Envision a Future State for Your BI Practice

    Outcomes

    • A comprehensive assessment of current BI practice maturity and capabilities.
    • Articulation of your future BI practice.
    • Improvement objectives and activities for developing your current BI program.

    Benefits

    • Identification of clear gaps in BI practice maturity.
    • A current state assessment that includes the perspectives of both BI providers and consumers to highlight alignment and/or discrepancies.
    • A future state is defined to provide a benchmark for your BI program.
    • Gaps between the future and current states are identified; recommendations for the gaps are defined.

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Evaluate Your Current BI Practice

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-2 weeks

    Step 2.1: Assess Your Current BI Practice

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Detail the benefits of conducting multidimensional assessments that involve BI providers as well as consumers.
    • Review Info-Tech’s BI Maturity Model.

    Then complete these activities…

    • SWOT analyses
    • Identification of BI maturity level through a current state assessment

    With these tools & templates:

    BI Practice Assessment Tool

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Step 2.2: Envision a Future State for Your BI Practice

    Review findings with an analyst:

    • Discuss overall maturity gaps and patterns in BI perception amongst different units of your organization.
    • Discuss how to translate activity findings into robust initiatives, defining critical success factors for BI development and risk mitigation.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify your desired BI patterns and functionalities.
    • Complete a target state assessment for your BI practice.
    • Review capability practice gaps and phase-level metrics.

    With these tools & templates:

    BI Practice Assessment Tool

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • A comprehensive assessment of the organization’s current BI practice capabilities and gaps
    • Visualization of BI perception from a variety of business users as well as IT
    • A list of tasks and initiatives for constructing a strategic BI improvement roadmap

    STEP 2.1

    Assess the Current State of Your BI Practice

    Assess your organization’s current BI capabilities

    Step Objectives

    • Understand the definitions and roles of each component of BI.
    • Contextualize BI components to your organization’s environment and current practices.

    Step Activities

    2.1.1 Perform multidimensional SWOT analyses

    2.1.2 Assess current BI and analytical capabilities, Document challenges, constraints, opportunities

    2.1.3 Review the results of your current state assessment

    Outcomes

    • Holistic perspective of current BI strengths and weaknesses according to BI users and providers
    • Current maturity in BI and related data management practices

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework
    • Info-Tech’s BI Practice Assessment Tool
    • Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Proposed Participants in this Step

    Project Manager

    Data Architect(s) or Enterprise Architect

    Project Team

    Gather multiple BI perspectives with comprehensive SWOT analyses

    SWOT analysis is an effective tool that helps establish a high-level context for where your practice stands, where it can improve, and the factors that will influence development.

    Strengths

    Best practices, what is working well

    Weaknesses

    Inefficiencies, errors, gaps, shortcomings

    Opportunities

    Review internal and external drivers

    Threats

    Market trends, disruptive forces

    While SWOT is not a new concept, you can add value to SWOT by:

    • Conducting a multi-dimensional SWOT to diversify perspectives – involve the existing BI team, BI management, business executives and other business users.
    • SWOT analyses traditionally provide a retrospective view of your environment. Add a future-looking element by creating improvement tasks/activities at the same time as you detail historical and current performance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider a SWOT with two formats: a private SWOT worksheet and a public SWOT session. Participants will be providing suggestions anonymously while solicited suggestions will be discussed in the public SWOT session to further the discussion.

    Activity: Perform a SWOT analysis in groups to get a holistic view

    2.1.1

    1-2 hours

    This activity will take your project team through a holistic SWOT analysis to gather a variety of stakeholder perception of the current BI practice.

    1. Identify individuals to involve in the SWOT activity. Aim for a diverse pool of participants that are part of the BI practice in different capacities and roles. Solution architects, application managers, business analysts, and business functional unit leaders are a good starting point.
    2. Review the findings summary from Phase 1. You may opt to facilitate this activity with insights from the business context. Each group will be performing the SWOT individually.
    3. The group results will be collected and consolidated to pinpoint common ideas and opinions. Individual group results should be represented by a different color. The core program team will be reviewing the consolidated result as a group.
    4. Document the results of these SWOT activities in the appropriate section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.

    SWOT

    Group 1 Provider Group E.g. The BI Team

    Group 2 Consumer Group E.g. Business End Users

    INPUT

    • IT and business stakeholder perception

    OUTPUT

    • Multi-faceted SWOT analyses
    • Potential BI improvement activities/objectives

    Materials

    • SWOT Analysis section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • Selected individuals in the enterprise (variable)

    Your organization’s BI maturity is determined by several factors and the degree of immersion into your enterprise

    BI Maturity Level

    A way to categorize your analytics maturity to understand where you are currently and what next steps would be best to increase your BI maturity.

    There are several factors used to determine BI maturity:

    Buy-in and Data Culture

    Determines if there is enterprise-wide buy-in for developing business intelligence and if a data-driven culture exists.

    Business–IT Alignment

    Examines if current BI and analytics operations are appropriately enabling the business objectives.

    Governance Structure

    Focuses on whether or not there is adequate governance in place to provide guidance and structure for BI activities.

    Organization Structure and Talent

    Pertains to how BI operations are distributed across the overall organizational structure and the capabilities of the individuals involved.

    Process

    Reviews analytics-related processes and policies and how they are created and enforced throughout the organization.

    Data

    Deals with analytical data in terms of the level of integration, data quality, and usability.

    Technology

    Explores the opportunities in building a fit-for-purpose analytics platform and consolidation opportunities.

    Evaluate Your Current BI Practice with the CMMI model

    To assess BI, Info-Tech uses the CMMI model for rating capabilities in each of the function areas on a scale of 1-5. (“0” and “0.5” values are used for non-existent or emerging capabilities.)

    The image shows an example of a CMMI model

    Use Info-Tech’s BI Maturity Model as a guide for identifying your current analytics competence

    Leverage a BI strategy to revamp your BI program to strive for a high analytics maturity level. In the future you should be doing more than just traditional BI. You will perform self-service BI, predictive analytics, and data science.

    Ad Hoc Developing Defined Managed Trend Setting
    Questions What’s wrong? What happened? What is happening? What happened, is happening, and will happen? What if? So what?
    Scope One business problem at a time One particular functional area Multiple functional areas Multiple functional areas in an integrated fashion Internal plus internet scale data
    Toolset Excel, Access, primitive query tools Reporting tools or BI BI BI, business analytics tools Plus predictive platforms, data science tools
    Delivery Model IT delivers ad hoc reports IT delivers BI reports IT delivers BI reports and some self-service BI Self-service BI and report creation at the business units Plus predictive models and data science projects
    Mindset Firefighting using data Manage using data Analyze using data; shared tooling Data is an asset, shared data Data driven
    BI Org. Structure Data analysts in IT BI BI program BI CoE Data Innovation CoE

    Leverage Info-Tech’s BI Practice Assessment Tool to define your BI current state

    BI Practice Assessment Tool

    1. Assess Current State
    • Eight BI practice areas to assess maturity.
    • Based on CMMI maturity scale.
  • Visualize Current State Results
    • Determine your BI maturity level.
    • Identify areas with outstanding maturity.
    • Uncover areas with low maturity.
    • Visualize the presence of misalignments.
  • Target State
    • Tackle target state from two views: business and IT.
    • Calculate gaps between target and current state.
  • Visualize Target State and Gaps
    • A heat map diagram to compare the target state and the current state.
    • Show both current and target maturity levels.
    • Detailed charts to show results for each area.
    • Detailed list of recommendations.

    Purposes:

    • Assess your BI maturity.
    • Visualize maturity assessment to quickly spot misalignments, gaps, and opportunities.
    • Provide right-sized recommendations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assessing current and target states is only the beginning. The real value comes from the interpretation and analysis of the results. Use visualizations of multiple viewpoints and discuss the results in groups to come up with the most effective ideas for your strategy and roadmap.

    Activity: Conduct a current state assessment of your BI practice maturity

    2.1.2

    2-3 hours

    Use the BI Practice Assessment Tool to establish a baseline for your current BI capabilities and maturity.

    1. Navigate to Tab 2. Current State Assessment in the BI Practice Assessment Tool and complete the current state assessment together or in small groups. If running a series of assessments, do not star or scratch every time. Use the previous group’s results to start the conversation with the users.
    2. Info-Tech suggests the following groups participate in the completion of the assessment to holistically assess BI and to uncover misalignment:

      Providers Consumers
      CIO & BI Management BI Work Groups (developers, analysts, modelers) Business Unit #1 Business Unit #2 Business Unit #3
    3. For each assessment question, answer the current level of maturity in terms of:
      1. Initial/Ad hoc – the starting point for use of a new or undocumented repeat process
      2. Developing – the process is documented such that it is repeatable
      3. Defined – the process is defined/confirmed as a standard business process
      4. Managed and Measurable – the process is quantitatively managed in accordance with agreed-upon metrics.
      5. Optimized – the process includes process optimization/improvement.

    INPUT

    • Observations of current maturity

    OUTPUT

    • Comprehensive current state assessment

    Materials

    • BI Practice Assessment Tool
    • Current State Assessment section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • Selected individuals as suggested by the assessment tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Discuss the rationale for your answers as a group. Document the comments and observations as they may be helpful in formulating the final strategy and roadmap.

    Activity: Review and analyze the results of the current state assessment

    2.1.3

    2-3 hours

    1. Navigate to Tab 3. Current State Results in the BI Practice Assessment Tool and review the findings:

    The tool provides a brief synopsis of your current BI state. Review the details of your maturity level and see where this description fits your organization and where there may be some discrepancies. Add additional comments to your current state summary in the BI Strategy and Roadmap Document.

    In addition to reviewing the attributes of your maturity level, consider the following:

    1. What are the knowns – The knowns confirm your understanding on the current landscape.
  • What are the unknowns – The unknowns show you the blind spots. They are very important to give you an alternative view of the your current state. The group should discuss those blind spots and determine what to do with them.
  • Activity: Review and analyze the results of the current state assessment (cont.)

    2.1.3

    2-3 hours

    2. Tab 3 will also visualize a breakdown of your maturity by BI practice dimension. Use this graphic as a preliminary method to identify where your organization is excelling and where it may need improvement.

    Better Practices

    Consider: What have you done in the areas where you perform well?

    Candidates for Improvement

    Consider: What can you do to improve these areas? What are potential barriers to improvement?

    STEP 2.2

    Envision a Future State for Your Organization’s BI Practice

    Detail the capabilities of your next generation BI practice

    Step Objectives

    • Create guiding principles that will shape your organization’s ideal BI program.
    • Pinpoint where your organization needs to improve across several BI practice dimensions.
    • Develop approaches to remedy current impediments to BI evolution.
    • Step Activities

      2.2.1 Define guiding principles for the future state

      2.2.2 Define the target state of your BI practice

      2.2.3 Confirm requirements for BI Styles by management group

      2.2.4 Analyze gaps in your BI practice and generate improvement activities and objectives

      2.2.5 Define the critical success factors for future BI

      2.2.6 Identify potential risks for your future state and create a mitigation plan

    Outcomes

    • Defined landscape for future BI capabilities, including desired BI functionalities.
    • Identification of crucial gaps and improvement points to include in a BI roadmap.
    • Updated BI Styles Usage sheet.

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework
    • Info-Tech’s BI Practice Assessment Tool
    • Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Proposed Participants in this Step

    Project Manager

    Data Architect(s) or Enterprise Architect

    Project Team

    Define guiding principles to drive your future state envisioning

    Envisioning a BI future state is essentially architecting the future for your BI program. It is very similar to enterprise architecture (EA). Guiding principles are widely used in enterprise architecture. This best practice should also be used in BI envisioning.

    Benefits of Guiding Principles in a BI Context

    • BI planning involves a number of business units. Defining high-level future state principles helps to establish a common ground for those different business units.
    • Ensure the next generation BI aligns with the corporate enterprise architecture and data architecture principles.
    • Provide high-level guidance without depicting detailed solutioning by leaving room for innovation.

    Sample Principles for BI Future State

    1. BI should be fit for purpose. BI is a business technology that helps business users.
    2. Business–IT collaboration should be encouraged to ensure deliverables are relevant to the business.
    3. Focus on continuous improvement on data quality.
    4. Explore opportunities to onboard and integrate new datasets to create a holistic view of your data.
    5. Organize and present data in an easy-to-consume, easy-to-digest fashion.
    6. BI should be accessible to everything, as soon as they have a business case.
    7. Do not train just on using the platform. Train on the underlying data and business model as well.
    8. Develop a training platform where trainees can play around with the data without worrying about messing it up.

    Activity: Define future state guiding principles for your BI practice

    2.2.1

    1-2 hours

    Guiding principles are broad statements that are fundamental to how your organization will go about its activities. Use this as an opportunity to gather relevant stakeholders and solidify how your BI practice should perform moving forward.

    1. To ensure holistic and comprehensive future state principles, invite participants from the business, the data management team, and the enterprise architecture team. If you do not have an enterprise architecture practice, invite people that are involved in building the enterprise architecture. Five to ten people is ideal.
    2. BI Future State

      Awareness Buy-in Business-IT Alignment Governance Org. Structure; People Process; Policies; Standards Data Technology
    3. Once the group has some high-level ideas on what the future state looks like, brainstorm guiding principles that will facilitate the achievement of the future state (see above).
    4. Document the future state principles in the Future State Principles for BI section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    INPUT

    • Existing enterprise architecture guiding principles
    • High-level concept of future state BI

    OUTPUT

    • Guiding principles for prospective BI practice

    Materials

    • Future State Principles section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • Business representatives
    • IT representatives
    • The EA group

    Leverage prototypes to facilitate a continuous dialogue with end users en route to creating the final deliverable

    At the end of the day, BI makes data and information available to the business communities. It has to be fit for purpose and relevant to the business. Prototypes are an effective way to ensure relevant deliverables are provided to the necessary users. Prototyping makes your future state a lot closer and a lot more business friendly.

    Simple Prototypes

    • Simple paper-based, whiteboard-based prototypes with same notes.
    • The most basic communication tool that facilitates the exchange of ideas.
    • Often used in Joint Application Development (JAD) sessions.
    • Improve business and IT collaboration.
    • Can be used to amend requirements documents.

    Discussion Possibilities

    • Initial ideation at the beginning
    • Align everyone on the same page
    • Explain complex ideas/layouts
    • Improve collaboration

    Elaborated Prototypes

    • Demonstrates the possibilities of BI in a risk-free environment.
    • Creates initial business value with your new BI platform.
    • Validates the benefits of BI to the organization.
    • Generates interest and support for BI from senior management.
    • Prepares BI team for the eventual enterprise-wide deployment.

    Discussion Possibilities

    • Validate and refine requirements
    • Fail fast, succeed fast
    • Acts as checkpoints
    • Proxy for the final working deliverable

    Leverage Info-Tech’s BI Practice Assessment Tool to define your BI target state and visualize capability gaps

    BI Practice Assessment Tool

    1. Assess Current State
    • Eight BI practice areas to assess maturity.
    • Based on CMMI maturity scale.
  • Visualize Current State Results
    • Determine your BI maturity level.
    • Identify areas with outstanding maturity.
    • Uncover areas with low maturity.
    • Visualize the presence of misalignments.
  • Target State
    • Tackle target state from two views: business and IT.
    • Calculate gaps between target and current state.
  • Visualize Target State and Gaps
    • A heat map diagram to compare the target state and the current state.
    • Show both current and target maturity levels.
    • Detailed charts to show results for each area.
    • Detailed list of recommendations.

    Purposes:

    • Assess your BI maturity.
    • Visualize maturity assessment to quickly spot misalignments, gaps, and opportunities.
    • Provide right-sized recommendations.

    Document essential findings in Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assessing current and target states is only the beginning. The real value comes from the interpretation and analyses of the results. Use visualizations of multiple viewpoints and discuss the results in groups to come up with the most effective ideas for your strategy and roadmap.

    Activity: Define the target state for your BI practice

    2.2.2

    2 hours

    This exercise takes your team through establishing the future maturity of your BI practice across several dimensions.

    1. Envisioning of the future state will involve input from the business side as well as the IT department.
    2. The business and IT groups should get together separately and determine the target state maturity of each of the BI practice components:

    The image is a screenshot of Tab 4: Target State Evaluation of the BI Practice Assessment Tool

    INPUT

    • Desired future practice capabilities

    OUTPUT

    • Target state assessment

    Materials

    • Tab 4 of the BI Practice Assessment Tool

    Participants

    • Business representatives
    • IT representatives

    Activity: Define the target state for your BI practice (cont.)

    2.2.2

    2 hours

    2. The target state levels from the two groups will be averaged in the column “Target State Level.” The assessment tool will automatically calculate the gaps between future state value and the current state maturity determined in Step 2.1. Significant gaps in practice maturity will be highlighted in red; smaller or non-existent gaps will appear green.

    The image is a screenshot of Tab 4: Target State Evaluation of the BI Practice Assessment Tool with Gap highlighted.

    INPUT

    • Desired future practice capabilities

    OUTPUT

    • Target state assessment

    Materials

    • Tab 4 of the BI Practice Assessment Tool

    Participants

    • Business representatives
    • IT representatives

    Activity: Revisit the BI Style Analysis sheet to define new report and analytical requirements by C-Level

    2.2.3

    1-2 hours

    The information needs for each executive is unique to their requirements and management style. During this exercise you will determine the reporting and analytical needs for an executive in regards to content, presentation and cadence and then select the BI style that suite them best.

    1. To ensure a holistic and comprehensive need assessment, invite participants from the business and BI team. Discuss what data the executive currently use to base decisions on and explore how the different BI styles may assist. Sample reports or mock-ups can be used for this purpose.
    2. Document the type of report and required content using the BI Style Tool.
    3. The BI Style Tool will then guide the BI team in the type of reporting to develop and the level of Self-Service BI that is required. The tool can also be used for product selection.

    INPUT

    • Information requirements for C-Level Executives

    OUTPUT

    • BI style(s) that are appropriate for an executive’s needs

    Materials

    • BI Style Usage sheet from BI Strategy and Roadmap Template
    • Sample Reports

    Participants

    • Business representatives
    • BI representatives

    Visualization tools facilitate a more comprehensive understanding of gaps in your existing BI practice

    Having completed both current and target state assessments, the BI Practice Assessment Tool allows you to compare the results from multiple angles.

    At a higher level, you can look at your maturity level:

    At a detailed level, you can drill down to the dimensional level and item level.

    The image is a screenshots from Tab 4: Target State Evaluation of the BI Practice Assessment Tool

    At a detailed level, you can drill down to the dimensional level and item level.

    Activity: Analyze gaps in BI practice capabilities and generate improvement objectives/activities

    2.2.4

    2 hours

    This interpretation exercise helps you to make sense of the BI practice assessment results to provide valuable inputs for subsequent strategy and roadmap formulation.

    1. IT management and the BI team should be involved in this exercise. Business SMEs should be consulted frequently to obtain clarifications on what their ideal future state entails.
    2. Begin this exercise by reviewing the heat map and identifying:

    • Areas with very large gaps
    • Areas with small gaps

    Areas with large gaps

    Consider: Is the target state feasible and achievable? What are ways we can improve incrementally in this area? What is the priority for addressing this gap?

    Areas with small/no gaps

    Consider: Can we learn from those areas? Are we setting the bar too low for our capabilities?

    INPUT

    • Current and target state visualizations

    OUTPUT

    • Gap analysis (Tab 5)

    Materials

    • Tab 5 of the BI Practice Assessment Tool
    • Future State Assessment Results section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • Business representatives
    • IT representatives

    Activity: Analyze gaps in BI practice capabilities and generate improvement objectives/activities (cont.)

    2.2.4

    2 hours

    2. Discuss the differences in the current and target state maturity level descriptions. Questions to ask include:

    • What are the prerequisites before we can begin to build the future state?
    • Is the organization ready for that future state? If not, how do we set expectations and vision for the future state?
    • Do we have the necessary competencies, time, and support to achieve our BI vision?

    INPUT

    • Current and target state visualizations

    OUTPUT

    • Gap analysis (Tab 5)

    Materials

    • Tab 5 of the BI Practice Assessment Tool
    • Future State Assessment Results section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • Business representatives
    • IT representatives

    Activity: Analyze gaps in BI practice capabilities and generate improvement objectives/activities (cont.)

    2.2.4

    2 hours

    3. Have the same group members reconvene and discuss the recommendations at the BI practice dimension level on Tab 5. of the BI Practice Assessment Tool. These recommendations can be used as improvement actions or translated into objectives for building your BI capabilities.

    Example

    The heat map displayed the largest gap between target state and current state in the technology dimension. The detailed drill-down chart will further illustrate which aspect(s) of the technology dimension is/are showing the most room for improvement in order to better direct your objective and initiative creation.

    The image is of an example and recommendations.

    Considerations:

    • What dimension parameters have the largest gaps? And why?
    • Is there a different set of expectations for the future state?

    Define critical success factors to direct your future state

    Critical success factors (CSFs) are the essential factors or elements required for ensuring the success of your BI program. They are used to inform organizations with things they should focus on to be successful.

    Common Provider (IT Department) CSFs

    • BI governance structure and organization is created.
    • Training is provided for the BI users and the BI team.
    • BI standards are in place.
    • BI artifacts rely on quality data.
    • Data is organized and presented in a usable fashion.
    • A hybrid BI delivery model is established.
    • BI on BI; a measuring plan has to be in place.

    Common Consumer (Business) CSFs

    • Measurable business results have been improved.
    • Business targets met/exceeded.
    • Growth plans accelerated.
    • World-class training to empower BI users.
    • Continuous promotion of a data-driven culture.
    • IT–business partnership is established.
    • Collaborative requirements gathering processes.
    • Different BI use cases are supported.

    …a data culture is essential to the success of analytics. Being involved in a lot of Bay Area start-ups has shown me that those entrepreneurs that are born with the data DNA, adopt the data culture and BI naturally. Other companies should learn from these start-ups and grow the data culture to ensure BI adoption.

    – Cameran Hetrick, Senior Director of Data Science & Analytics, thredUP

    Activity: Define provider and consumer critical success factors for your future BI capabilities

    2.2.5

    2 hours

    Create critical success factors that are important to both BI providers and BI consumers.

    1. Divide relevant stakeholders into two groups:
    2. BI Provider (aka IT) BI Consumer (aka Business)
    3. Write two headings on the board: Objective and Critical Success Factors. Write down each of the objectives created in Phase 1.
    4. Divide the group into small teams and assign each team an objective. For each objective, ask the following question:
    5. What needs to be put in place to ensure that this objective is achieved?

      The answer to the question is your candidate CSF. Write CSFs on sticky notes and stick them by the relevant objective.

    6. Rationalize and consolidate CSFs. Evaluate the list of candidate CSFs to find the essential elements for achieving success.
    7. For each CSF, identify at least one key performance indicator that will serve as an appropriate metric for tracking achievement.

    As you evaluate candidate CSFs, you may uncover new objectives for achieving your future state BI.

    INPUT

    • Business objectives

    OUTPUT

    • A list of critical success factors mapped to business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard and colored sticky notes
    • CSFs for the Future State section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • Business and IT representatives
    • CIO
    • Head of BI

    Round out your strategy for BI growth by evaluating risks and developing mitigation plans

    A risk matrix is a useful tool that allows you to track risks on two dimensions: probability and impact. Use this matrix to help organize and prioritize risk, as well as develop mitigation strategies and contingency plans appropriately.

    Example of a risk matrix using colour coding

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tackling risk mitigation is essentially purchasing insurance. You cannot insure everything – focus your investments on mitigating risks with a reasonably high impact and high probability.

    Be aware of some common barriers that arise in the process of implementing a BI strategy

    These are some of the most common BI risks based on Info-Tech’s research:

    Low Impact Medium Impact High Impact
    High Probability
    • Users revert back to Microsoft Excel to analyze data.
    • BI solution does not satisfy the business need.
    • BI tools become out of sync with new strategic direction.
    • Poor documentation creates confusion and reduces user adoption.
    • Fail to address data issues: quality, integration, definition.
    • Inadequate communication with stakeholders throughout the project.
    • Users find the BI tool interface too confusing.
    Medium Probability
    • Fail to define and monitor KPIs.
    • Poor training results in low user adoption.
    • Organization culture is resistant to the change.
    • Lack of support from the sponsors.
    • No governance over BI.
    • Poor training results in misinformed users.
    Low Probability
    • Business units independently invest in BI as silos.

    Activity: Identify potential risks for your future state and create a mitigation plan

    2.2.6

    1 hour

    As part of developing your improvement actions, use this activity to brainstorm some high-level plans for mitigating risks associated with those actions.

    Example:

    Users find the BI tool interface too confusing.

    1. Use the probability-impact matrix to identify risks systematically. Collectively vote on the probability and impact for each risk.
    2. Risk mitigation. Risk can be mitigated by three approaches:
    3. A. Reducing its probability

      B. Reducing its impact

      C. Reducing both

      Option A: Brainstorm ways to reduce risk probability

      E.g. The probability of the above risk may be reduced by user training. With training, the probability of confused end users will be reduced.

      Option B: Brainstorm ways to reduce risk impact

      E.g. The impact can be reduced by ensuring having two end users validate each other’s reports before making a major decision.

    4. Document your high-level mitigation strategies in the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template.

    INPUT

    • Step 2.2 outputs

    OUTPUT

    • High-level risk mitigation plans

    Materials

    • Risks and Mitigation section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BI sponsor
    • CIO
    • Head of BI

    Translate your findings and ideas into actions that will be integrated into the BI strategy and roadmap

    As you progress through each phase, document findings and ideas as they arise. By phase end, hold a brainstorming session with the project team focused on documenting findings and ideas and substantiating them into improvement actions.

    Translated findings and ideas into actions that will be integrated into the BI strategy and roadmap.

    Ask yourself how BI or analytics can be used to address the gaps and explore opportunities uncovered in each phase. For example, in Phase 1, how do current BI capabilities impede the realization of the business vision?

    Document and prioritize Phase 2 findings, ideas, and action items

    2.2.7

    1-2 hours

    1. Reconvene as a group to review the findings, ideas, and actions harvested in Phase 2. Write the findings, ideas, and actions on sticky notes.
    2. Prioritize the sticky notes to yield those with high business value and low implementation effort. View some sample findings below:
    3. High Business Value, Low Effort High Business Value, High Effort
      Low Business Value, High Effort Low Business Value, High Effort

      Phase 2

      Sample Phase 2 Findings Found a gap between the business expectation and the existing BI content they are getting.
      Our current maturity level is “Level 2 – Operational.” Almost everyone thinks we should be at least “Level 3 – Tactical” with some level 4 elements.
      Found an error in a sales report. A quick fix is identified.
      The current BI program is not able to keep up with the demand.
    4. Select the top items and document the findings in the BI Strategy Roadmap Template. The findings will be used to build a Roadmap in Phase 3.

    INPUT

    • Phase 2 activities

    OUTPUT

    • Other Phase 2 Findings section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Project manger
    • Project team
    • Business stakeholders

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.1

    Determine your current BI maturity level

    The analyst will take your project team through Info-Tech’s BI Practice Assessment Tool, which collects perspectives from BI consumer and provider groups on multiple facets of your BI practice in order to establish a current maturity level.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts

    2.2.1

    Define guiding principles for your target BI state

    Using enterprise architecture principles as a starting point, our analyst will facilitate exercises to help your team establish high-level standards for your future BI practice.

    2.2.2-2.2.3

    Establish your desired BI patterns and matching functionalities

    In developing your BI practice, your project team will have to decide what BI-specific capabilities are most important to your organization. Our analyst will take your team through several BI patterns that Info-Tech has identified and discuss how to bridge the gap between these patterns, linking them to specific functional requirements in a BI solution.

    2.2.4-2.2.5

    Analyze the gaps in your BI practice capabilities

    Our analyst will guide your project team through a number of visualizations and explanations produced by our assessment tool in order to pinpoint the problem areas and generate improvement ideas.

    Phase 3

    Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Create a BI roadmap for continuous improvement

    Phase 3 Overarching Insight

    The benefit of creating a comprehensive and actionable roadmap is twofold: not only does it keep BI providers accountable and focused on creating incremental improvement, but a roadmap helps to build momentum around the overall project, provides a continuous delivery of success stories, and garners grassroots-level support throughout the organization for BI as a key strategic imperative.

    Understand the Business Context to Rationalize Your BI Landscape Evaluate Your Current BI Practice Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement
    Establish the Business Context
    • Business Vision, Goals, Key Drivers
    • Business Case Presentation
    • High-Level ROI
    Assess Your Current BI Maturity
    • SWOT Analysis
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • Summary of Current State
    Construct a BI Initiative Roadmap
    • BI Improvement Initiatives
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap
    Access Existing BI Environment
    • BI Perception Survey Framework
    • Usage Analyses
    • BI Report Inventory
    Envision BI Future State
    • BI Patterns
    • BI Practice Assessment
    • List of Functions
    Plan for Continuous Improvement
    • Excel Governance Policy
    • BI Ambassador Network Draft
    Undergo Requirements Gathering
    • Requirements Gathering Principles
    • Overall BI Requirements

    Phase 3 overview

    Detailed Overview

    Step 1: Establish Your BI Initiative Roadmap

    Step 2: Identify Opportunities to Enhance Your BI Practice

    Step 3: Create Analytics Strategy

    Step 4: Define CSF and metrics to monitor success of BI and analytics

    Outcomes

    • Consolidate business intelligence improvement objectives into robust initiatives.
    • Prioritize improvement initiatives by cost, effort, and urgency.
    • Create a one-year, two-year, or three-year timeline for completion of your BI improvement initiatives.
    • Identify supplementary programs that will facilitate the smooth execution of road-mapped initiatives.

    Benefits

    • Clear characterization of comprehensive initiatives with a detailed timeline to keep team members accountable.

    Revisit project metrics to track phase progress

    Goals for Phase 3:

    • Put everything together. Findings and observations from Phase 1 and 2 are rationalized in this phase to develop data initiatives and create a strategy and roadmap for BI.
    • Continuous improvements. Your BI program is evolving and improving over time. The program should allow you to have faster, better, and more comprehensive information.

    Info-Tech’s Suggested Metrics for Tracking Phase 3 Goals

    Practice Improvement Metrics Data Collection and Calculation Expected Improvement
    Program Level Metrics Efficiency
    • Time to information
    • Self-service penetration
    • Derive from the ticket management system
    • Derive from the BI platform
    • 10% reduction in time to information
    • Achieve 10-15% self-service penetration
    • Effectiveness
    • BI Usage
    • Data quality
    • Derive from the BI platform
    • Data quality perception
    • Majority of the users use BI on a daily basis
    • 15% increase in data quality perception
    Comprehensiveness
    • # of integrated datasets
    • # of strategic decisions made
    • Derive from the data integration platform
    • Decision-making perception
    • Onboard 2-3 new data domains per year
    • 20% increase in decision-making perception

    Learn more about the CIO Business Vision program.

    Intangible Metrics:

    Tap into the results of Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision diagnostic to monitor the changes in business-user satisfaction as you implement the initiatives in your BI improvement roadmap.

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that helps you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-2 weeks

    Step 3.1: Construct a BI Improvement Initiative Roadmap

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Review findings and insights from completion of activities pertaining to current and future state assessments
    • Discuss challenges around consolidating activities into initiatives

    Then complete these activities…

    • Collect improvement objectives/tasks from previous phases
    • Develop comprehensive improvement initiatives
    • Leverage value-effort matrix activities to prioritize these initiatives and place them along an improvement roadmap

    With these tools & templates:

    BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Step 3.2: Continuous Improvement Opportunities for BI

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review completed BI improvement initiatives and roadmap
    • Discuss guidelines presenting a finalized improvement to the relevant committee or stakeholders
    • Discuss additional policies and programs that can serve to enhance your established BI improvement roadmap

    Then complete these activities…

    • Present BI improvement roadmap to relevant stakeholders
    • Develop Info-Tech’s recommended supplementary policies and programs for BI

    With these tools & templates:

    BI Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    • Comprehensive initiatives with associated tasks/activities consolidated and prioritized in an improvement roadmap

    STEP 3.1

    Construct a BI Improvement Initiative Roadmap

    Build an improvement initiative roadmap to solidify your revamped BI strategy

    Step Objectives

    • Bring together activities and objectives for BI improvement to form initiatives
    • Develop a fit-for-purpose roadmap aligned with your BI strategy

    Step Activities

    3.1.1 Characterize individual improvement objectives and activities ideated in previous phases.

    3.1.2 Synthesize and detail overall BI improvement initiatives.

    3.1.3 Create a plan of action by placing initiatives on a roadmap.

    Outcomes

    • Detailed BI improvement initiatives, prioritized by value and effort
    • Defined roadmap for completion of tasks associated with each initiative and accountability

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool

    Proposed Participants in this Step

    Project Manager

    Project Team

    Create detailed BI strategy initiatives by bringing together the objectives listed in the previous phases

    When developing initiatives, all components of the initiative need to be considered, from its objectives and goals to its benefits, risks, costs, effort required, and relevant stakeholders.

    Use outputs from previous project steps as inputs to the initiative and roadmap building:

    The image shows the previous project steps as inputs to the initiative and roadmap building, with arrow pointing from one to the next.

    Determining the dependencies that exist between objectives will enable the creation of unique initiatives with associated to-do items or tasks.

    • Group objectives into similar buckets with dependencies
    • Select one overarching initiative
    • Adapt remaining objectives into tasks of the main initiative
    • Add any additional tasks

    Leverage Info-Tech’s BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool to build a fit-for-purpose improvement roadmap

    BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool

    Overview

    Use the BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool to develop comprehensive improvement initiatives and add them to a BI strategy improvement roadmap.

    Recommended Participants

    • BI project team

    Tool Guideline

    Tab 1. Instructions Use this tab to get an understanding as to how the tool works.
    Tab 2. Inputs Use this tab to customize the inputs used in the tool.
    Tab 3. Activities Repository Use this tab to list and prioritize activities, to determine dependencies between them, and build comprehensive initiatives with them.
    Tab 4. Improvement Initiatives Use this tab to develop detailed improvement initiatives that will form the basis of the roadmap. Map these initiatives to activities from Tab 3.
    Tab 5. Improvement Roadmap Use this tab to create your BI strategy improvement roadmap, assigning timelines and accountability to initiatives and tasks, and to monitor your project performance over time.

    Activity: Consolidate BI activities into the tool and assign dependencies and priorities

    3.1.1

  • 2 hours
    1. Have one person from the BI project team populate Tab 3. Activities Repository with the BI strategy activities that were compiled in Phases 1 and 2. Use drop-downs to indicate in which phase the objective was originally ideated.
    2. With BI project team executives, discuss and assign dependencies between activities in the Dependencies columns. A dependency exists if:
    • An activity requires consideration of another activity.
    • An activity requires the completion of another activity.
    • Two activities should be part of the same initiative.
    • Two activities are very similar in nature.
  • Then discuss and assign priorities to each activity in the Priority column using input from previous Phases. For example, if an activity was previously indicated as critical to the business, if a similar activity appears multiple times, or if an activity has several dependencies, it should be higher priority.
  • Inputs

    • BI improvement activities created in Phases 1 and 2

    Output

    • Activities with dependencies and priorities

    Materials

    • BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool

    Participants

    • BI project team

    Activity: Consolidate BI activities into the tool and assign dependencies and priorities (cont’d.)

    3.1.1

    2 hours

    Screenshot of Tab 3. BI Activities Repository, with samples improvement activities, dependencies, statuses, and priorities

    The image is of a screenshot of Tab 3. BI Activities Repository, with samples improvement activities, dependencies, statuses, and priorities.

    Revisit the outputs of your current state assessment and note which activities have already been completed in the “Status” column, to avoid duplication of your efforts.

    When classifying the status of items in your activity repository, distinguish between broader activities (potential initiatives) and granular activities (tasks).

    Activity: Customize project inputs and build out detailed improvement initiatives

    3.1.2

    1.5 hours

    1. Follow instructions on Tab 2. Inputs to customize inputs you would like to use for your project.
    2. Review the activities repository and select up to 12 overarching initiatives based on the activities with extreme or highest priority and your own considerations.
    • Rewording where necessary, transfer the names of your initiatives in the banners provided on Tab 4. Improvement Initiatives.
    • On Tab 3, indicate these activities as “Selected (initiatives)” in the Status column.
  • In Tab 4, develop detailed improvement initiatives by indicating the owner, taxonomy, start and end periods, cost and effort estimates, goal, benefit/value, and risks of each initiative.
  • Use drop-downs to list “Related activities,” which will become tasks under each initiative.
    • activities with dependency to the initiative
    • activities that lead to the same goal or benefit/value of the main initiative

    Screenshot of the Improvement Initiative template, to be used for developing comprehensive initiatives

    <p data-verified=The image is a screenshot of the Improvement Initiative template, to be used for developing comprehensive initiatives.">

    Inputs

    • Tab 3. Activities Repository

    Output

    • Unique and detailed improvement initiatives

    Materials

    • BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool
    • BI Initiatives section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BI project team

    Visual representations of your initiative landscape can aid in prioritizing tasks and executing the roadmap

    Building a comprehensive BI program will be a gradual process involving a variety of stakeholders. Different initiatives in your roadmap will either be completed sequentially or in parallel to one another, given dependencies and available resources. The improvement roadmap should capture and represent this information.

    To determine the order in which main initiatives should be completed, exercises such as a value–effort map can be very useful.

    Example: Value–Effort Map for a BI Project

    Initiatives that are high value–low effort are found in the upper left quadrant and are bolded; These may be your four primary initiatives. In addition, initiative five is valuable to the business and critical to the project’s success, so it too is a priority despite requiring high effort. Note that you need to consider dependencies to prioritize these key initiatives.

    Value–Effort Map for a BI Project
    1. Data profiling techniques training
    2. Improve usage metrics
    3. Communication plan for BI
    4. Staff competency evaluation
    5. Formalize practice capabilities
    6. Competency improvement plan program
    7. Metadata architecture improvements
    8. EDW capability improvements
    9. Formalize oversight for data manipulation

    This exercise is best performed using a white board and sticky notes, and axes can be customized to fit your needs (E.g. cost, risk, time, etc.).

    Activity: Build an overall BI strategy improvement roadmap for the entire project

    3.1.3

    45 minutes

    The BI Strategy Improvement Roadmap (Tab 5 of the BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool) has been populated with your primary initiatives and related tasks. Read the instructions provided at the top of Tab 5.

    1. Use drop-downs to assign a Start Period and End Period to each initiative (already known) and each task (determined here). As you do so, the roadmap will automatically fill itself in. This is where the value–effort map or other prioritization exercises may help.
    2. Assign Task Owners reporting Managers.
    3. Update the Status and Notes columns on an ongoing basis. Hold meetings with task owners and managers about blocked or overdue items.
    • Updating status should also be an ongoing maintenance requirement for Tab 3 in order to stay up to date on which activities have been selected as initiatives or tasks, are completed, or are not yet acted upon.

    Screenshot of the BI Improvement Roadmap (Gantt chart) showing an example initiative with tasks, and assigned timeframes, owners, and status updates.

    INPUTS

    • Tab 3. Activities Repository
    • Tab 4. Improvement Initiatives

    OUTPUT

    • BI roadmap

    Materials

    • BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool
    • Roadmap section of the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Participants

    • BI project team

    Obtain approval for your BI strategy roadmap by organizing and presenting project findings

    Use a proprietary presentation template

    Recommended Participants

    • Project sponsor
    • Relevant IT & business executives
    • CIO
    • BI project team

    Materials & Requirements

    Develop your proprietary presentation template with:

    • Results from Phases 1 and 2 and Step 3.1
    • Information from:
      • Info-Tech’s Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy
    • Screen shots of outputs from the:
      • BI Practice Assessment Tool
      • BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool

    Next Steps

    Following the approval of your roadmap, begin to plan the implementation of your first initiatives.

    Overall Guidelines

    • Invite recommended participants to an approval meeting.
    • Present your project’s findings with the goal of gaining key stakeholder support for implementing the roadmap.
    1. Set the scene using BI vision & objectives.
    2. Present the results and roadmap next.
    3. Dig deeper into specific issues by touching on the important components of this blueprint to generate a succinct and cohesive presentation.
  • Make the necessary changes and updates stemming from discussion notes during this meeting.
  • Submit a formal summary of findings and roadmap to your governing body for review and approval (e.g. BI steering committee, BI CoE).
  • Info-Tech Insight

    At this point, it is likely that you already have the support to implement a data quality improvement roadmap. This meeting is about the specifics and the ROI.

    Maximize support by articulating the value of the data quality improvement strategy for the organization’s greater information management capabilities. Emphasize the business requirements and objectives that will be enhanced as a result of tackling the recommended initiatives, and note any additional ramifications of not doing so.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s presentation template to present your BI strategy to the executives

    Use the BI Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template to present your most important findings and brilliant ideas to the business executives and ensure your BI program is endorsed. Business executives can also learn about how the BI strategy empowers them and how they can help in the BI journey.

    Important Messages to Convey

    • Executive summary of the presentation
    • Current challenges faced by the business
    • BI benefits and associated opportunities
    • SWOT analyses of the current BI
    • BI end-user satisfaction survey
    • BI vision, mission, and goals
    • BI initiatives that take you to the future state
    • (Updated) Analytical Strategy
    • Roadmap that depicts the timeline

    STEP 3.2

    Continuous Improvement Opportunities for BI

    Create supplementary policies and programs to augment your BI strategy

    Step Objectives

    • Develop a plan for encouraging users to continue to use Excel, but in a way that does not compromise overall BI effectiveness.
    • Take steps to establish a positive organizational culture around BI.

    Step Activities

    3.2.1 Construct a concrete policy to integrate Excel use with your new BI strategy.

    3.2.2 Map out the foundation for a BI Ambassador network.

    Outcomes

    • Business user understanding of where Excel manipulation should and should not occur
    • Foundation for recognizing exceptional BI users and encouraging development of enterprise-wide business intelligence

    Research Support

    • Info-Tech’s BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool
    • Info-Tech’s BI Strategy and Roadmap Template

    Proposed Participants in this Step

    Project Manager

    Project Team

    Additional Business Users

    Establish Excel governance to better serve Excel users while making sure they comply with policies

    Excel is the number one BI tool

    • BI applications are developed to support information needs.
    • The reality is that you will never migrate all Excel users to BI. Some Excel users will continue to use it. The key is to support them while imposing governance.
    • The goal is to direct them to use the data in BI or in the data warehouse instead of extracting their own data from various source systems.

    The Tactic: Centralize data extraction and customize delivery

    • Excel users formerly extracted data directly from the production system, cleaned up the data, manipulated the data by including their own business logic, and presented the data in graphs and pivot tables.
    • With BI, the Excel users can still use Excel to look at the information. The only difference is that BI or data warehouse will be the data source of their Excel workbook.

    Top-Down Approach

    • An Excel policy should be created at the enterprise level to outline which Excel use cases are allowed, and which are not.
    • Excel use cases that involve extracting data from source systems and transforming that data using undisclosed business rules should be banned.
    • Excel should be a tool for manipulating, filtering, and presenting data, not a tool for extracting data and running business rules.

    Excel

    Bottom-Up Approach

    • Show empathy to your users. They just want information to get their work done.
    • A sub-optimal information landscape is the root cause, and they are the victims. Excel spreadmarts are the by-products.
    • Make the Excel users aware of the risks associated with Excel, train them in BI, and provide them with better information in the BI platform.

    Activity: Create an Excel governance policy

    3.2.1

    4 hours

    Construct a policy around Excel use to ensure that Excel documents are created and shared in a manner that does not compromise the integrity of your overall BI program.

    1. Review the information artifact list harvested from Step 2.1 and identify all existing Excel-related use cases.
    2. Categorize the Excel use cases into “allowed,” “not allowed,” and “not sure.” For each category define:
    3. Category To Do: Policy Context
      Allowed Discuss what makes these use cases ideal for BI. Document use cases, scenarios, examples, and reasons that allow Excel as an information artifact.
      Not Allowed Discuss why these cases should be avoided. Document forbidden use cases, scenarios, examples, and reasons that use Excel to generate information artifacts.
      Not Sure Discuss the confusions; clarify the gray area. Document clarifications and advise how end users can get help in those “gray area” cases.
    4. Document the findings in the BI Strategy and Roadmap Template in the Manage and Sustain BI Strategy section, or a proprietary template. You may also need to create a separate Excel policy to communicate the Dos and Don’ts.

    Inputs

    • Step 2.1 – A list of information artifacts

    Output

    • Excel-for-BI Use Policy

    Materials

    • BI Strategy Roadmap and Template, or proprietary document

    Participants

    • Business executives
    • CIO
    • Head of BI
    • BI team

    Build a network of ambassadors to promote BI and report to IT with end-user feedback and requests

    The Building of an Insider Network: The BI Ambassador Network

    BI ambassadors are influential individuals in the organization that may be proficient at using BI tools but are passionate about analytics. The network of ambassadors will be IT’s eyes, ears, and even mouth on the frontline with users. Ambassadors will promote BI, communicate any messages IT may have, and keep tabs on user satisfaction.

    Ideal candidate:

    • A good relationship with IT.
    • A large breadth of experience with BI, not just one dashboard.
    • Approachable and well-respected amongst peers.
    • Has a passion for driving organizational change using BI and continually looking for opportunities to innovate.

    Push

    • Key BI Messages
    • Best Practices
    • Training Materials

    Pull

    • Feedback
    • Complaints
    • Thoughts and New Ideas

    Motivate BI ambassadors with perks

    You need to motivate ambassadors to take on this additional responsibility. Make sure the BI ambassadors are recognized in their business units when they go above and beyond in promoting BI.

    Reward Approach Reward Type Description
    Privileges High Priority Requests Given their high usage and high visibility, ambassadors’ BI information requests should be given a higher priority.
    First Look at New BI Development Share the latest BI updates with ambassadors before introducing them to the organization. Ambassadors may even be excited to test out new functionality.
    Recognition Featured in Communications BI ambassadors’ use cases and testimonials can be featured in BI communications. Be sure to create a formal announcement introducing the ambassadors to the organization.
    BI Ambassador Certificate A certificate is a formal way to recognize their efforts. They can also publicly display the certificate in their workspace.
    Rewards Appointed by Senior Executives Have the initial request to be a BI ambassador come from a senior executive to flatter the ambassador and position the role as a reward or an opportunity for success.
    BI Ambassador Awards Award an outstanding BI ambassador for the year. The award should be given by the CEO in a major corporate event.

    Activity: Plan for a BI ambassador network

    3.2.2

    2 hours

    Identify individuals within your organization to act as ambassadors for BI and a bridge between IT and business users.

    1. Obtain a copy of your latest organizational chart. Review your most up-to-date organizational chart and identify key BI consumers across a variety of functional units. In selecting potential BI ambassadors, reflect on the following questions:
    • Does this individual have a good relationship with IT?
    • What is the depth of their experience with developing/consuming business intelligence?
    • Is this individual respected and influential amongst their respective business units?
    • Has this individual shown a passion for innovating within their role?
  • Create a mandate and collateral detailing the roles and responsibilities for the ambassador role, e.g.:
    • Promote BI to members of your group
    • Represent the “voice of the data consumers”
  • Approach the ambassador candidates and explain the responsibilities and perks of the role, with the goal of enlisting about 10-15 ambassadors
  • Inputs

    • An updated organizational chart
    • A list of BI users

    Output

    • Draft framework for BI ambassador network

    Materials

    • BI Strategy and Roadmap Template or proprietary document

    Participants

    • Business executives
    • CIO
    • Head of BI
    • BI team

    Keeping tabs on metadata is essential to creating a data democracy with BI

    A next generation BI not only provides a platform that mirrors business requirements, but also creates a flexible environment that empowers business users to explore data assets without having to go back and forth with IT to complete queries.

    Business users are generally not interested in the underlying architecture or the exact data lineages; they want access to the data that matters most for decision-making purposes.

    Metadata is data about data

    It comes in the form of structural metadata (information about the spaces that contain data) and descriptive metadata (information pertaining to the data elements themselves), in order to answer questions such as:

    • What is the intended purpose of this data?
    • How up-to-date is this information?
    • Who owns this data?
    • Where is this data coming from?
    • How have these data elements been transformed?

    By creating effective metadata, business users are able to make connections between and bring together data sources from multiple areas, creating the opportunity for holistic insight generation.

    Like BI, metadata lies in the Information Dimension layer of our data management framework.

    The metadata needs to be understood before building anything. You need to identify fundamentals of the data, who owns not only that data, but also its metadata. You need to understand where the consolidation is happening and who owns it. Metadata is the core driver and cost saver for building warehouses and requirements gathering.

    – Albert Hui, Principal, Data Economist

    Deliver timely, high quality, and affordable information to enable fast and effective business decisions

    In order to maximize your ROI on business intelligence, it needs to be treated less like a one-time endeavor and more like a practice to be continually improved upon.

    Though the BI strategy provides the overall direction, the BI operating model – which encompasses organization structure, processes, people, and application functionality – is the primary determinant of efficacy with respect to information delivery. The alterations made to the operating model occur in the short term to improve the final deliverables for business users.

    An optimal BI operating model satisfies three core requirements:

    Timeliness

    Effectiveness

  • Affordability
  • Bring tangible benefits of your revamped BI strategy to business users by critically assessing how your organization delivers business intelligence and identifying opportunities for increased operational efficiency.

    Assess and Optimize BI Operations

    Focus on delivering timely, quality, and affordable information to enable fast and effective business decisions

    Implement a fit-for-purpose BI and analytics solution to augment your next generation BI strategy

    Organizations new to business intelligence or with immature BI capabilities are under the impression that simply getting the latest-and-greatest tool will provide the insights business users are looking for.

    BI technology can only be as effective as the processes surrounding it and the people leveraging it. Organizations need to take the time to select and implement a BI suite that aligns with business goals and fosters end-user adoption.

    As an increasing number of companies turn to business intelligence technology, vendors are responding by providing BI and analytics platforms with more and more features.

    Our vendor landscape will simplify the process of selecting a BI and analytics solution by:

    Differentiating between the platforms and features vendors are offering.

    Detailing a robust framework for requirements gathering to pinpoint your organization’s needs.

    Developing a high-level plan for implementation.

    Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution

    Find the diamond in your data-rough using the right BI & Analytics solution

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1-3.1.3

    Construct a BI improvement initiative roadmap

    During these activities, your team will consolidate the list of BI initiatives generated from the assessments conducted in previous phases, assign timelines to each action, prioritize them using a value–effort matrix, and finally produce a roadmap for implementing your organization’s BI improvement strategy.

    3.2

    Identify continuous improvement opportunities for BI

    Our analyst team will work with your organization to ideate supplementary programs to support your BI strategy. Defining Excel use cases that are permitted and prohibited in conjunction with your BI strategy, as well as structuring an internal BI ambassador network, are a few extra initiatives that can enhance your BI improvement plans.

    Insight breakdown

    Your BI platform is not a one-and-done initiative.

    A BI program is not a static project that is created once and remains unchanged. Your strategy must be treated as a living platform to be revisited and revitalized in order to provide effective enablement of business decision making. Develop a BI strategy that propels your organization by building it on business goals and objectives, as well as comprehensive assessments that quantitatively and qualitatively evaluate your current BI capabilities.

    Put the “B” back in “BI.”

    The closer you align your new BI platform to real business interests, the stronger will be the buy-in, realized value, and groundswell of enthusiastic adoption. Ultimately, getting this phase right sets the stage to best realize a strong ROI for your investment in the people, processes, and technology that will be your next generation BI platform.

    Go beyond the platform.

    BI success is not based solely on the technology it runs on; technology cannot mask gaps in capabilities. You must be capable in your environment – data management, data quality, and related data practices must be strong, otherwise the usefulness of the intelligence suffers. The best BI solution does not only provide a technology platform, but also addresses the elements that surround the platform. Look beyond tools and holistically assess the maturity of your BI practice with input from both the BI consumer and provider perspectives.

    Appendix

    Detailed list of BI Types

    Style Description Strategic Importance (1-5) Popularity (1-5) Effort (1-5)
    Standards Preformatted reports Standard, preformatted information for backward-looking analysis. 5 5 1
    User-defined analyses Pre-staged information where “pick lists” enable business users to filter (select) the information they wish to analyze, such as sales for a selected region during a selected previous timeframe. 5 4 2
    Ad-hoc analyses Power users write their own queries to extract self-selected pre-staged information and then use the information to perform a user-created analysis. 5 4 3
    Scorecards and dashboards Predefined business performance metrics about performance variables that are important to the organization, presented in a tabular or graphical format that enables business users to see at a glance how the organization is performing. 4 4 3
    Multidimensional analysis (OLAP) Multidimensional analysis (also known as On-line analytical processing): Flexible tool-based user-defined analysis of business performance and the underlying drivers or root causes of that performance. 4 3 3
    Alerts Predefined analyses of key business performance variables, comparison to a performance standard or range, and communication to designated businesspeople when performance is outside the predefined performance standard or range. 4 3 3
    Advanced Analytics Application of long-established statistical and/or operations research methods to historical business information to look backward and characterize a relevant aspect of business performance, typically by using descriptive statistics 5 3 4
    Predictive Analytics Application of long-established statistical and/or operations research methods to historical business information to predict, model, or simulate future business and/or economic performance and potentially prescribe a favored course of action for the future 5 3 5

    Our BI strategy approach follows Info-Tech’s popular IT Strategy Framework

    A comprehensive BI strategy needs to be developed under the umbrella of an overall IT strategy. Specifically, creating a BI strategy is contributing to helping IT mature from a firefighter to a strategic partner that has close ties with business units.

    1. Determine mandate and scope 2. Assess drivers and constraints 3. Evaluate current state of IT 4. Develop a target state vision 5. Analyze gaps and define initiatives 6. Build a roadmap 8. Revamp 7. Execute
    Mandate Business drivers Holistic assessments Vision and mission Initiatives Business-driven priorities
    Scope External drivers Focus-area specific assessments Guiding principles Risks
    Project charter Opportunities to innovate Target state vision Execution schedule
    Implications Objectives and measures

    This BI strategy blueprint is rooted in our road-tested and proven IT strategy framework as a systematic method of tackling strategy development.

    Research contributors

    Internal Contributors

    • Andy Woyzbun, Executive Advisor
    • Natalia Nygren Modjeska, Director, Data & Analytics
    • Crystal Singh, Director, Data & Analytic
    • Andrea Malick, Director, Data & Analytics
    • Raj Parab, Director, Data & Analytics
    • Igor Ikonnikov, Director, Data & Analytics
    • Andy Neill, Practice Lead, Data & Analytics
    • Rob Anderson, Manager Sales Operations
    • Shari Lava, Associate Vice-President, Vendor Advisory Practice

    External Contributors

    • Albert Hui, Principal, DataEconomist
    • Cameran Hetrick, Senior Director of Data Science & Analytics, thredUP
    • David Farrar, Director – Marketing Planning & Operations, Ricoh Canada Inc
    • Emilie Harrington, Manager of Analytics Operations Development, Lowe’s
    • Sharon Blanton, VP and CIO, The College of New Jersey
    • Raul Vomisescu, Independent Consultant

    Research contributors and experts

    Albert Hui

    Consultant, Data Economist

    Albert Hui is a cofounder of Data Economist, a data-consulting firm based in Toronto, Canada. His current assignment is to redesign Scotiabank’s Asset Liability Management for its Basel III liquidity compliance using Big Data technology. Passionate about technology and problem solving, Albert is an entrepreneur and result-oriented IT technology leader with 18 years of experience in consulting and software industry. His area of focus is on data management, specializing in Big Data, business intelligence, and data warehousing. Beside his day job, he also contributes to the IT community by writing blogs and whitepapers, book editing, and speaking at technology conferences. His recent research and speaking engagement is on machine learning on Big Data.

    Albert holds an MBA from the University of Toronto and a master’s degree in Industrial Engineering. He has twin boys and enjoys camping and cycling with them in his spare time.

    Albert Hui Consultant, Data Economist

    Cameran Hetrick

    Senior Director of Analytics and Data Science, thredUP

    Cameran is the Senior Director of Analytics and Data Science at thredUP, a startup inspiring a new generation to think second hand first. There she helps drives top line growth through advanced and predictive analytics. Previously, she served as the Director of Data Science at VMware where she built and led the data team for End User Computing. Before moving to the tech industry, she spent five years at The Disneyland Resort setting ticket and hotel prices and building models to forecast attendance. Cameran holds an undergraduate degree in Economics/Mathematics from UC Santa Barbara and graduated with honors from UC Irvine's MBA program.

    Cameran Hetrick Senior Director of Analytics and Data Science, thredUP

    Bibliography

    Bange, Carsten and Wayne Eckerson. “BI and Data Management in the Cloud: Issues and Trends.” BARC and Eckerson Group, January 2017. Web.

    Business Intelligence: The Strategy Imperative for CIOs. Tech. Information Builders. 2007. Web. 1 Dec. 2015.

    COBIT 5: Enabling Information. Rolling Meadows, IL: ISACA, 2013. Web.

    Dag, Naslund, Emma Sikander, and Sofia Oberg. "Business Intelligence - a Maturity Model Covering Common Challenges." Lund University Publications. Lund University, 2014. Web. 23 Oct. 2015.

    “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK Guide).” First Edition. DAMA International. 2009. Digital. April 2014.

    Davenport, Thomas H. and Bean, Randy. “Big Data and AI Executive Survey 2019.” NewVantage Partners LLC. 2019. Web.

    "Debunking the Business of Analytics." Experian Data Quality. Sept. 2013. Web.

    Bibliography

    Drouin, Sue. "Value Chain." SAP Analytics. February 27, 2015.

    Farrar, David. “BI & Data analytics workshop feedback.” Ricoh Canada. Sept. 2019.

    Fletcher, Heather. "New England Patriots Use Analytics & Trigger Emails to Retain Season Ticket Holders." Target Marketing. 1 Dec. 2011. Web.

    Gonçalves, Alex. "Social Media Analytics Strategy - Using Data to Optimize Business Performance.” Apress. 2017.

    Imhoff, Claudia, and Colin White. "Self Service Business Intelligence: Empowering Users to Generate Insights." SAS Resource Page. The Data Warehouse Institute, 2011. Web.

    Khamassi, Ahmed. "Building An Analytical Roadmap : A Real Life Example." Wipro. 2014.

    Kuntz, Jerry, Pierre Haren, and Rebecca Shockley. IBM Insight 2015 Teleconference Series. Proc. of Analytics: The Upside of Disruption. IBM Institute for Business Value, 19 Oct. 2015. Web.

    Kwan, Anne , Maximillian Schroeck, Jon Kawamura. “Architecting and operating model, A platform for accelerating digital transformation.” Part of a Deliotte Series on Digital Industrial Transformation, 2019. Web.

    Bibliography

    Lebied, Mona. "11 Steps on Your BI Roadmap To Implement A Successful Business Intelligence Strategy." Business Intelligence. July 20, 2018. Web.

    Light, Rob. “Make Business Intelligence a Necessity: How to Drive User Adoption.” Sisense Blog. 30 July 2018.

    Mazenko, Elizabeth. “Avoid the Pitfalls: 3 Reasons 80% of BI Projects Fail.” BetterBuys. October 2015.

    Marr, Bernard. "Why Every Business Needs A Data And Analytics Strategy.” Bernard Marr & Co. 2019.

    Mohr, Niko and Hürtgen, Holger. “Achieving Business Impact with Data.” McKinsey. April 2018.

    MIT Sloan Management

    Quinn, Kevin R. "Worst Practices in Business Intelligence: Why BI Applications Succeed Where BI Tools Fail." (2007): 1-19. BeyeNetwork. Information Builders, 2007. Web. 1 Dec. 2015.

    Ringdal, Kristen. "Learning multilevel Analysis." European social Survey. 2019.

    Bibliography

    Schaefer, Dave, Ajay Chandramouly, Burt Carmak, and Kireeti Kesavamurthy. "Delivering Self-Service BI, Data Visualization, and Big Data Analytics." IT@Intel White Paper (2013): 1-11. June 2013. Web. 30 Nov. 2015.

    Schultz, Yogi. “About.” Corvelle Consulting. 2019.

    "The Current State of Analytics: Where Do We Go From Here?" SAS Resource Page. SAS & Bloomberg Businessweek, 2011. Web.

    "The Four Steps to Defining a Customer Analytics Strategy." CCG Analytics Solutions & Services. Nov 10,2017.

    Traore, Moulaye. "Without a strategic plan, your analytics initiatives are risky." Advisor. March 12, 2018. web.

    Wells, Dave. "Ten Mistakes to Avoid When Gathering BI Requirements." Engineering for Industry. The Data Warehouse Institute, 2008. Web.

    “What is a Business Intelligence Strategy and do you need one?” Hydra. Sept 2019. Web.

    Williams, Steve. “Business Intelligence Strategy and Big Data Analytics.” Morgan Kaufman. 2016.

    Wolpe, Toby. "Case Study: How One Firm Used BI Analytics to Track Staff Performance | ZDNet." ZDNet. 3 May 2013. Web.

    Yuk, Mico. “11 Reasons Why Most Business Intelligence Projects Fail.” Innovative enterprise Channels. May 2019.

    pricing

    • TymansGroupVideosExcerpt: BasicFor freelancers$19/ month 10 presentations/monthSupport at $25/hour1 campaign/month Choose plan StandardFor medium sized teams$29/ month 50 presentations/month5 hours of free support10 campaigns/month Choose plan EnterpriseFor large companies$79/ month Unlimited presentationsUnlimited supportUnlimited campaigns Choose plan

    Pricing

    Our pricing options will be available soon for simple download,

    In the meantime, please book a free discovery call. No cost, no sales pitch.

    Continue reading

    Optimize the IT Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}392|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $89,374 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /organizational-design
    • Organizations have to adapt to a growing number of trends, putting increased pressure on IT to move at the same speed as the business.
    • The business, seeing that IT is slower to react, looks to external solutions to address its challenges and capitalize on opportunities.
    • IT and business leaders don’t have a clear and unified understanding or definition of an operating model.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The IT operating model is not a static entity and should evolve according to changing business needs.
    • However, business needs are diverse, and the IT organization must recognize that the business includes groups that consume technology in different patterns. The IT operating model needs to support and enable multiple groups, while continuously adapting to changing business conditions.

    Impact and Result

    • Determine how each technology consumer group interacts with IT. Use consumer experience maps to determine what kind of services consumer groups use and if there are opportunities to improve the delivery of those services.
    • Identify how changing business conditions will affect the consumption of technology services. Classify your consumers based on business uncertainty and reliance on IT to plan for the future delivery of services.
    • Optimize the IT operating model. Create a target IT operating model based on the gathered information about technology service consumers. Select different implementations of common operating model elements: governance, sourcing, process, and structure.

    Optimize the IT Operating Model Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how implementing an IT operating model based on the needs of technology service consumers will improve the delivery of IT services and alignment with IT and business strategy.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Construct the IT services consumer experience maps

    Assess the current situation by identifying technology service consumers in the organization, their interfaces with IT, the level of service they require, and their sentiment toward IT.

    • Optimize the IT Operating Model – Phase 1: Construct the IT Services Consumer Experience Maps
    • Consumer Experience Map and Profiles

    2. Classify IT service consumers based on business needs

    Categorize the technology consumer groups into four business profiles based on their characteristics to identify implications based on technology consumption patterns for the target IT operating model.

    • Optimize the IT Operating Model – Phase 2: Classify IT Service Consumers Based on Business Needs

    3. Determine the target IT operating model

    Select implementation models for the four core elements of the IT operating model and optimize governance, sourcing, process, and organizational structure to create the target IT operating model.

    • Optimize the IT Operating Model – Phase 3: Determine the Target IT Operating Model
    • Target IT Operating Model

    4. Create a roadmap to develop the target IT operating model

    Create, assess, and prioritize initiatives to reach the target IT operating model. Construct a roadmap to show initiative execution.

    • Optimize the IT Operating Model – Phase 4: Create a Roadmap to Develop the Target IT Operating Model
    • IT Operating Model Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize the IT Operating Model

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Organizational Strategy and Technology Consumer Groups

    The Purpose

    Identify the IT and business strategies, so that the target IT operating model can be constructed to support them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the implications for the IT operating model and understand how to optimally construct it.

    Create consumer groups for consumer experience mapping and consumer profile classification.

    Activities

    1.1 Review business and IT strategies.

    1.2 Identify implications for the IT operating model.

    1.3 Identify internal technology consumer groups.

    1.4 Identify external technology consumer groups.

    Outputs

    Implications for the IT operating model

    List of internal and external technology service consumer groups

    2 Map the Consumer Experience and Identify Consumption Patterns (Consumer Group 1)

    The Purpose

    Identify the interfaces with IT for the consumer group, its level of technology service requirement, its sentiment toward IT, and its needs from IT.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Consumer group needs from IT and feelings toward IT are identified.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify interview candidates for the consumer groups.

    2.2 Complete consumer group questionnaire.

    2.3 Complete consumer experience map.

    2.4 Classify the consumer group into a business profile.

    Outputs

    Consumer experience map for first group

    Business profile classification

    3 Map the Consumer Experience and Identify Consumption Patterns (Consumer Group 2)

    The Purpose

    Continue mapping the experience of consumer groups and classify them into profiles based on their needs to draw implications for the target IT operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Consumption patterns from the consumer groups are defined and implications for the target IT operating model are drawn.

    Activities

    3.1 Continue interviews for consumer groups.

    3.2 Complete consumer experience map.

    3.3 Classify the consumer group into a business profile.

    3.4 Aggregate the consumption patterns for the business profile and document implications.

    Outputs

    Consumer experience map for second group

    Business profile classification

    Aggregated consumption patterns

    Implications for consumption patterns

    4 Create the Target IT Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Map the target operating model to show how each element of the IT operating model supports the delivery of IT services to the consumer groups.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify whether the current IT operating model is optimally supporting the delivery of IT services to consumer groups from the four core IT operating model elements.

    Activities

    4.1 Determine the approach to IT governance.

    4.2 Select the optimal mix of sourcing models.

    4.3 Customize the approach to process implementation.

    4.4 Identify the target organizational structure.

    Outputs

    Target IT operating model

    5 Build a Roadmap and Create Initiatives to Reach the Target

    The Purpose

    Create initiatives and communicate them with a roadmap to show how the organization will arrive at the target IT operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The steps to reach the IT operating model are created, assessed, and prioritized.

    Steps are ordered for presentation.

    Activities

    5.1 Identify initiatives to reach the target IT operating model.

    5.2 Create initiative profiles to assess initiative quality.

    5.3 Prioritize initiatives based on business conditions.

    5.4 Create a roadmap to communicate initiative execution.

    Outputs

    Initiative profiles

    Sunshine diagram

    Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}59|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $32,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Audit defense starts long before you get audited. Negotiating your vendors’ audit rights and maintaining a documented consolidated licensing position ensure that you are not blindsided by a sudden audit request.
    • Notification of an impending audit can cause panic. Don't panic. While the notification will be full of strong language, your best chance of success is to take control of the situation. Prepare a measured response that buys you enough time to get your house in order before you let the vendor in.
    • If a free software asset review sounds too good to be true, then it probably is. If a vendor or one of its partners offers up a free software asset management engagement, they aren’t doing so out of the goodness of their heart — they expect to recoup their costs (and then some) from identified license discrepancies.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The amount of business disruption depends on the scope of the audit, and the size and complexity of the organization coupled with the contractual audit clause in the contract.
    • These highly visible failures can be prevented through effective software asset management practices.
    • As complexity of licensing increases, so do penalties. If the environment is highly complex, prioritize effort by likelihood of audit and spend.
    • Ensure electronic records exist for license documentation to provide fast access for audit and information requests
    • Verify accuracy of discovered data. Ensure all devices on the network are being audited. Without a complete discovery process, data will always be inaccurate.

    Impact and Result

    • Being able to respond quickly with accurate data is critical. When deadlines are tight, and internal resources don’t exist, hire a third party as their experience will allow a faster response.
    • Negotiate terms of the audit such as deadlines, proof of license entitlement, and who will complete the audit.
    • Create a methodology to quickly and efficiently respond to audit requests.
    • Conduct annual internal audits.
    • Have a designated cross-functional IT audit team.
    • Prepare documentation in advance.
    • Manage audit logistics to minimize business disruption.
    • Dispute unwarranted findings.

    Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be prepared and ready to defend against a software audit, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prevent an audit

    Begin your proactive audit management journey and leverage value from your software asset management program.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit – Phase 1: Prevent an Audit
    • Audit Defense Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Effective Licensing Position Tool
    • Audit Defence RACI Template

    2. Prepare for an audit

    Prepare for an audit by effectively scoping and consolidating organizational response.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit – Phase 2: Prepare for an Audit
    • Software Audit Scoping Email Template
    • Audit Defense Readiness Assessment

    3. Conduct the audit

    Execute the audit in a way that preserves valuable relationships while accounting for vendor specific criteria.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit – Phase 3: Conduct an Audit
    • Software Audit Launch Email Template

    4. Manage post-audit activities

    Conduct negotiations, settle on remuneration, and close out the audit.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit - Phase 4: Manage Post-Audit Activities
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prevent an Audit

    The Purpose

    Kick off the project

    Identify challenges and red flags

    Determine maturity and outline internal audit

    Clarify stakeholder responsibilities

    Build and structure audit team

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Leverage value from your audit management program

    Begin your proactive audit management journey

    A documented consolidated licensing position, which ensures that you are not blindsided by a sudden audit request

    Activities

    1.1 Perform a maturity assessment of the current environment

    1.2 Classify licensing contracts/vendors

    1.3 Conduct a software inventory

    1.4 Meter application usage

    1.5 Manual checks

    1.6 Gather software licensing data

    1.7 Reconcile licenses

    1.8 Create your audit team and assign accountability

    Outputs

    Maturity assessment

    Effective license position/license reconciliation

    Audit team RACI chart

    2 Prepare for an Audit

    The Purpose

    Create a strategy for audit response

    Know the types of requests

    Scope the engagement

    Understand scheduling challenges

    Know roles and responsibilities

    Understand common audit pitfalls

    Define audit goals

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Take control of the situation and prepare a measured response

    A dedicated team responsible for all audit-related activities

    A formalized audit plan containing team responsibilities and audit conduct policies

    Activities

    2.1 Use Info-Tech’s readiness assessment template

    2.2 Define the scope of the audit

    Outputs

    Readiness assessment

    Audit scoping email template

    3 Conduct the Audit

    The Purpose

    Overview of process conducted

    Kick-off and self-assessment

    Identify documentation requirements

    Prepare required documentation

    Data validation process

    Provide resources to enable the auditor

    Tailor audit management to vendor compliance position

    Enforce best-practice audit behaviors

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A successful audit with minimal impact on IT resources

    Reduced severity of audit findings

    Activities

    3.1 Communicate audit commencement to staff

    Outputs

    Audit launch email template

    4 Manage Post-Audit Activities

    The Purpose

    Clarify auditor findings and recommendations

    Access severity of audit findings

    Develop a plan for refuting unwarranted findings

    Disclose findings to management

    Analyze opportunities for remediation

    Provide remediation options and present potential solutions

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure your audit was productive and beneficial

    Improve your ability to manage audits

    Come to a consensus on which findings truly necessitate organizational change

    Activities

    4.1 Don't accept the penalties; negotiate with vendors

    4.2 Close the audit and assess the financial impact

    Outputs

    A consensus on which findings truly necessitate organizational change

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}324|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    There are four key scenarios or entry points for IT as the selling/divesting organization in M&As:

    • IT can suggest a divestiture to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    • IT is brought in to strategy plan the sale/divestiture from both the business’ and IT’s perspectives.
    • IT participates in due diligence activities and complies with the purchasing organization’s asks.
    • IT needs to reactively prepare its environment to enable the separation.

    Consider the ideal scenario for your IT organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Divestitures are inevitable in modern business, and IT’s involvement in the process should be too. This progression is inspired by:

    • The growing trend for organizations to increase, decrease, or evolve through these types of transactions.
    • A maturing business perspective of IT, preventing the difficulty that IT is faced with when invited into the transaction process late.
    • Transactions that are driven by digital motivations, requiring IT’s expertise.
    • There never being such a thing as a true merger, making the majority of M&A activity either acquisitions or divestitures.

    Impact and Result

    Prepare for a sale/divestiture transaction by:

    • Recognizing the trend for organizations to engage in M&A activity and the increased likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will be involved in a transaction in your career.
    • Creating a standard strategy that will enable strong program management.
    • Properly considering all the critical components of the transaction and integration by prioritizing tasks that will reduce risk, deliver value, and meet stakeholder expectations.

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how your organization can excel its reduction strategy by engaging in M&A transactions. Review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Proactive Phase

    Be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition or divestiture.

    • One-Pager: M&A Proactive
    • Case Study: M&A Proactive
    • Information Asset Audit Tool
    • Data Valuation Tool
    • Enterprise Integration Process Mapping Tool
    • Risk Register Tool
    • Security M&A Due Diligence Tool
    • Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement Template

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    Create a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address divestitures or sales.

    • One-Pager: M&A Discovery & Strategy – Sell
    • Case Study: M&A Discovery & Strategy – Sell

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    Comply with due diligence, prepare the IT environment for carve-out possibilities, and establish the separation project plan.

    • One-Pager: M&A Due Diligence & Preparation – Sell
    • Case Study: M&A Due Diligence & Preparation – Sell
    • IT Due Diligence Charter
    • IT Culture Diagnostic
    • M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint)
    • SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide
    • M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel)

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    Deliver on the separation project plan successfully and communicate IT’s transaction value to the business.

    • One-Pager: M&A Execution & Value Realization – Sell
    • Case Study: M&A Execution & Value Realization – Sell

    Infographic

    Workshop: Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Pre-Transaction Discovery & Strategy

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for divesting or selling.

    Formalize the program plan.

    Create the valuation framework.

    Strategize the transaction and finalize the M&A strategy and approach.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Set up crucial elements to facilitate the success of the transaction.

    Have a repeatable transaction strategy that can be reused for multiple organizations.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct the CIO Business Vision and CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostics.

    1.2 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.

    1.3 Understand the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture or sale.

    1.4 Assess the IT/digital strategy.

    1.5 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale.

    1.6 Create the IT vision statement and mission statement and identify IT guiding principles and the transition team.

    1.7 Document the M&A governance.

    1.8 Establish program metrics.

    1.9 Create the valuation framework.

    1.10 Establish the separation strategy.

    1.11 Conduct a RACI.

    1.12 Create the communication plan.

    1.13 Prepare to assess target organizations.

    Outputs

    Business perspectives of IT

    Stakeholder network map for M&A transactions

    Business context implications for IT

    IT’s divestiture/sale strategic direction

    Governance structure

    M&A program metrics

    IT valuation framework

    Separation strategy

    RACI

    Communication plan

    Prepared to assess target organization(s)

    2 Mid-Transaction Due Diligence & Preparation

    The Purpose

    Establish the foundation.

    Discover the motivation for separation.

    Identify expectations and create the carve-out roadmap.

    Prepare and manage employees.

    Plan the separation roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Methodology identified to enable compliance during due diligence.

    Employees are set up for a smooth and successful transition.

    Separation activities are planned and assigned.

    Activities

    2.1 Gather and evaluate the stakeholders involved, M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.

    2.2 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.

    2.3 Establish the separation strategy.

    2.4 Create the due diligence charter.

    2.5 Create a list of IT artifacts to be reviewed in the data room.

    2.6 Create a carve-out roadmap.

    2.7 Create a service/technical transaction agreement.

    2.8 Measure staff engagement.

    2.9 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.

    2.10 Create employee transition and functional workplans.

    2.11 Establish the separation roadmap.

    2.12 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.

    2.13 Estimate integration costs.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder map

    IT strategy assessed

    IT operating model and IT governance structure defined

    Business context implications for IT

    Separation strategy

    Due diligence charter

    Data room artifacts

    Carve-out roadmap

    Service/technical transaction agreement

    Engagement assessment

    Culture assessment

    Employee transition and functional workplans

    Integration roadmap and associated resourcing

    3 Post-Transaction Execution & Value Realization

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for separation.

    Plan the separation roadmap.

    Prepare employees for the transition.

    Engage in separation.

    Assess the transaction outcomes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Separation activities are planned and assigned.

    Employees are set up for a smooth and successful transition.

    Separation strategy and roadmap are executed to benefit the organization.

    Review what went well and identify improvements to be made in future transactions.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.

    3.2 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.

    3.3 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.

    3.4 Establish the separation strategy.

    3.5 Prioritize separation tasks.

    3.6 Establish the separation roadmap.

    3.7 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.

    3.8 Estimate separation costs.

    3.9 Measure staff engagement.

    3.10 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.

    3.11 Create employee transition and functional workplans.

    3.12 Complete the separation by regularly updating the project plan.

    3.13 Assess the service/technical transaction agreement.

    3.14 Confirm separation costs.

    3.15 Review IT’s transaction value.

    3.16 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT.

    3.17 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions.

    Outputs

    M&A transaction team

    Stakeholder map

    IT strategy assessed

    IT operating model and IT governance structure defined

    Business context implications for IT

    Separation strategy

    Separation roadmap and associated resourcing

    Engagement assessment

    Culture assessment

    Employee transition and functional workplans

    Updated separation project plan

    Evaluated service/technical transaction agreement

    SWOT of transaction

    M&A Sell Playbook refined for future transactions

    Further reading

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint

    For IT leaders who want to have a role in the transaction process when their business is engaging in an M&A sale or divestiture.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t wait to be invited to the M&A table, make it.

    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Research Analyst, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Brittany Lutes
    Research Analyst,
    CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst,
    CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT has always been an afterthought in the M&A process, often brought in last minute once the deal is nearly, if not completely, solidified. This is a mistake. When IT is brought into the process late, the business misses opportunities to generate value related to the transaction and has less awareness of critical risks or inaccuracies.

    To prevent this mistake, IT leadership needs to develop strong business relationships and gain respect for their innovative suggestions. In fact, when it comes to modern M&A activity, IT should be the ones suggesting potential transactions to meet business needs, specifically when it comes to modernizing the business or adopting digital capabilities.

    IT needs to stop waiting to be invited to the acquisition or divestiture table. IT needs to suggest that the table be constructed and actively work toward achieving the strategic objectives of the business.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are four key scenarios or entry points for IT as the selling/divesting organization in M&As:

    • IT can suggest a divestiture to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    • IT is brought in to strategy plan the sale/divestiture from both the business’ and IT’s perspectives.
    • IT participates in due diligence activities and complies with the purchasing organization’s asks.
    • IT needs to reactively prepare its environment to enable the separation.

    Consider the ideal scenario for your IT organization.

    Common Obstacles

    Some of the obstacles IT faces include:

    • IT is often told about the transaction once the deal has already been solidified and is now forced to meet unrealistic business demands.
    • The business does not trust IT and therefore does not approach IT to define value or reduce risks to the transaction process.
    • The people and culture element is forgotten or not given adequate priority.

    These obstacles often arise when IT waits to be invited into the transaction process and misses critical opportunities.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare for a sale/divestiture transaction by:

    • Recognizing the trend for organizations to engage in M&A activity and the increased likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will be involved in a transaction in your career.
    • Creating a standard strategy that will enable strong program management.
    • Properly considering all the critical components of the transaction and integration by prioritizing tasks that will reduce risk, deliver value, and meet stakeholder expectations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As the number of merger, acquisition, and divestiture transactions continues to increase, so too does IT’s opportunity to leverage the growing digital nature of these transactions and get involved at the onset.

    The changing M&A landscape

    Businesses will embrace more digital M&A transactions in the post-pandemic world

    • When the pandemic occurred, businesses reacted by either pausing (61%) or completely cancelling (46%) deals that were in the mid-transaction state (Deloitte, 2020). The uncertainty made many organizations consider whether the risks would be worth the potential benefits.
    • However, many organizations quickly realized the pandemic is not a hindrance to M&A transactions but an opportunity. Over 16,000 American companies were involved in M&A transactions in the first six months of 2021 (The Economist). For reference, this had been averaging around 10,000 per six months from 2016 to 2020.
    • In addition to this transaction growth, organizations have increasingly been embracing digital. These trends increase the likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will engage in an M&A transaction. However, it is up to you when you get involved in the transactions.

    The total value of transactions in the year after the pandemic started was $1.3 billion – a 93% increase in value compared to before the pandemic. (Nasdaq)

    71% of technology companies anticipate that divestitures will take place as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic. (EY, 2020)

    Your challenge

    IT is often not involved in the M&A transaction process. When it is, it’s often too late.

    • The most important driver of an acquisition is the ability to access new technology (DLA Piper), and yet 50% of the time, IT isn’t involved in the M&A transaction at all (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Additionally, IT’s lack of involvement in the process negatively impacts the business:
      • Most organizations (60%) do not have a standardized approach to integration (Steeves and Associates), let alone separation.
      • Two-thirds of the time, the divesting organization and acquiring organization will either fail together or succeed together (McKinsey, 2015).
      • Less than half (47%) of organizations actually experience the positive results sought by the M&A transaction (Steeves and Associates).
    • Organizations pursuing M&A and not involving IT are setting themselves up for failure.

    Only half of M&A deals involve IT (Source: IMAA Institute, 2017)

    Common Obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT is rarely afforded the opportunity to participate in the transaction deal. When IT is invited, this often happens later in the process where separation will be critical to business continuity.
    • IT has not had the opportunity to demonstrate that it is a valuable business partner in other business initiatives.
    • One of the most critical elements that IT often doesn’t take the time or doesn’t have the time to focus on is the people and leadership component.
    • IT waits to be invited to the process rather then actively involving themselves and suggesting how value can be added to the process.

    In hindsight, it’s clear to see: Involving IT is just good business.

    47% of senior leaders wish they would have spent more time on IT due diligence to prevent value erosion. (Source: IMAA Institute, 2017)

    “Solutions exist that can save well above 50 percent on divestiture costs, while ensuring on-time delivery.” (Source: SNP)

    Info-Tech's approach

    Acquisitions & Divestitures Framework

    Acquisitions and divestitures are inevitable in modern business, and IT’s involvement in the process should be too. This progression is inspired by:

    1. The growing trend for organizations to increase, decrease, or evolve through these types of transactions.
    2. Transactions that are driven by digital motivations, requiring IT’s expertise.
    3. A maturing business perspective of IT, preventing the difficulty that IT is faced with when invited into the transaction process late.
    4. There never being such a thing as a true merger, making the majority of M&A activity either acquisitions or divestitures.
    A diagram highlighting the 'IT Executives' Role in Acquisitions and Divestitures' when they are integrated at different points in the 'Core Business Timeline'. There are four main entry points 'Proactive', 'Discovery and Strategy', 'Due Diligence and Preparation', and 'Execution and Value Realized'. It is highlighted that IT can and should start at 'Proactive', but most organizations start at 'Execution and Value Realized'. 'Proactive': suggest opportunities to evolve the organization; prove IT's value and engage in growth opportunities early. Innovators start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Proactive' are 'Organization strategies are defined' and 'M and A is considered to enable strategy'. After a buy or sell transaction is initiated is 'Discovery and Strategy': pre-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Establish IT's involvement and approach'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Prepare to engage in negotiations'. Business Partners start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Discovery and Strategy' are 'Searching criteria is set', 'Potential candidates are considered', and 'LOI is sent/received'. 'Due Diligence and Preparation': mid-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Identify potential transaction benefits and risks'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Comply, communicate, and collaborate in transaction'. Trusted Operators start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Due Diligence and Preparation' are 'Due diligence engagement occurs', 'Final agreement is reached', and 'Preparation for transaction execution occurs'. 'Execution and Value Realization': post-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Integrate the IT environments and achieve business value'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Separate the IT environment and deliver on transaction terms'. Firefighters start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Execution and Value Realization' are 'Staff and operations are addressed appropriately', 'Day 1 of implementation and integration activities occurs', '1st 100 days of new entity state occur' and 'Ongoing risk mitigating and value creating activities occur'.

    The business’ view of IT will impact how soon IT can get involved

    There are four key entry points for IT

    A colorful visualization of the four key entry points for IT and a fifth not-so-key entry point. Starting from the top: 'Innovator', Information and Technology as a Competitive Advantage, 90% Satisfaction; 'Business Partner', Effective Delivery of Strategic Business Projects, 80% Satisfaction; 'Trusted Operator', Enablement of Business Through Application and Work Orders, 70% Satisfaction; 'Firefighter', Reliable Infrastructure and IT Service Desk, 60% Satisfaction; and then 'Unstable', Inability to Consistently Deliver Basic Services, <60% Satisfaction.
    1. Innovator: IT suggests a sale or divestiture to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    2. Business Partner: IT is brought in to strategy plan the sale/divestiture from both the business’ and IT’s perspective.
    3. Trusted Operator: IT participates in due diligence activities and complies with the purchasing organization’s asks.
    4. Firefighter: IT needs to reactively prepare its environment in order to enable the separation.

    Merger, acquisition, and divestiture defined

    Merger

    A merger looks at the equal combination of two entities or organizations. Mergers are rare in the M&A space, as the organizations will combine assets and services in a completely equal 50/50 split. Two organizations may also choose to divest business entities and merge as a new company.

    Acquisition

    The most common transaction in the M&A space, where an organization will acquire or purchase another organization or entities of another organization. This type of transaction has a clear owner who will be able to make legal decisions regarding the acquired organization.

    Divestiture

    An organization may decide to sell partial elements of a business to an acquiring organization. They will separate this business entity from the rest of the organization and continue to operate the other components of the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A true merger does not exist, as there is always someone initiating the discussion. As a result, most M&A activity falls into acquisition or divestiture categories.

    Selling vs. buying

    The M&A process approach differs depending on whether you are the selling or buying organization

    This blueprint is only focused on the sell side:

    • Examples of sell-related scenarios include:
      • Your organization is selling to another organization with the intent of keeping its regular staff, operations, and location. This could mean minimal separation is required.
      • Your organization is selling to another organization with the intent of separating to be a part of the purchasing organization.
      • Your organization is engaging in a divestiture with the intent of:
        • Separating components to be part of the purchasing organization permanently.
        • Separating components to be part of a spinoff and establish a unit as a standalone new company.
    • As the selling organization, you could proactively seek out suitors to purchase all or components of your organization, or you could be approached by an organization.

    The buy side is focused on:

    • More than two organizations could be involved in a transaction.
    • Examples of buy-related scenarios include:
      • Your organization is buying another organization with the intent of having the purchased organization keep its regular staff, operations, and location. This could mean minimal integration is required.
      • Your organization is buying another organization in its entirety with the intent of integrating it into your original company.
      • Your organization is buying components of another organization with the intent of integrating them into your original company.
    • As the purchasing organization, you will probably be initiating the purchase and thus will be valuating the selling organization during due diligence and leading the execution plan.

    For more information on acquisitions or purchases, check out Info-Tech’s Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint.

    Core business timeline

    For IT to be valuable in M&As, you need to align your deliverables and your support to the key activities the business and investors are working on.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Selling Organizations in Mergers, Acquisitions, or Divestitures

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    Phase Steps

    1. Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    2. Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    3. Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    1. Establish the M&A Program Plan
    2. Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    1. Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    2. Prepare to Separate
    1. Execute the Transaction
    2. Reflection and Value Realization

    Phase Outcomes

    Be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition or divestiture.

    Create a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address divestitures or sales.

    Comply with due diligence, prepare the IT environment for carve-out possibilities, and establish the separation project plan.

    Deliver on the separation project plan successfully and communicate IT’s transaction value to the business.

    Metrics for each phase

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Valuation & Due Diligence

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    • % Share of business innovation spend from overall IT budget
    • % Critical processes with approved performance goals and metrics
    • % IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation defined in business case
    • % IT initiatives aligned with organizational strategic direction
    • % Satisfaction with IT's strategic decision-making abilities
    • $ Estimated business value added through IT-enabled innovation
    • % Overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT
    • % Percent of business leaders that view IT as an Innovator
    • % IT budget as a percent of revenue
    • % Assets that are not allocated
    • % Unallocated software licenses
    • # Obsolete assets
    • % IT spend that can be attributed to the business (chargeback or showback)
    • % Share of CapEx of overall IT budget
    • % Prospective organizations that meet the search criteria
    • $ Total IT cost of ownership (before and after M&A, before and after rationalization)
    • % Business leaders that view IT as a Business Partner
    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target
    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT separation
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    IT's role in the selling transaction

    And IT leaders have a greater likelihood than ever of needing to support a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.

    1. Reduced Risk

      IT can identify risks that may go unnoticed when IT is not involved.
    2. Increased Accuracy

      The business can make accurate predictions around the costs, timelines, and needs of IT.
    3. Faster Integration

      Faster integration means faster value realization for the business.
    4. Informed Decision Making

      IT leaders hold critical information that can support the business in moving the transaction forward.
    5. Innovation

      IT can suggest new opportunities to generate revenue, optimize processes, or reduce inefficiencies.

    The IT executive’s critical role is demonstrated by:

    • Reduced Risk

      47% of senior leaders wish they would have spent more time on IT due diligence to prevent value erosion (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Increased Accuracy

      Sellers often only provide 15 to 30 days for the acquiring organization to decide (Forbes, 2018), increasing the necessity of accurate pricing.
    • Faster Integration

      36% of CIOs have visibility into only business unit data, making the divestment a challenge (EY, 2021).
    • Informed Decision Making

      Only 38% of corporate and 22% of private equity firms include IT as a significant aspect in their transaction approach (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Innovation

      Successful CIOs involved in M&As can spend 70% of their time on aspects outside of IT and 30% of their time on technology and delivery (CIO).

    Playbook benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT will be seen as an innovative partner to the business, and its suggestions and involvement in the organization will lead to benefits, not hindrances.
    • Develop a streamlined method to prepare the IT environment for potential carve-out and separations, ensuring risk management concerns are brought to the business’ attention immediately.
    • Create a comprehensive list of items that IT needs to do during the separation that can be prioritized and actioned.

    Business Benefits

    • The business will get accurate and relevant information about its IT environment in order to sell or divest the company to the highest bidder for a true price.
    • Fewer business interruptions will happen, because IT can accurately plan for and execute the high-priority separation tasks.
    • The business can obtain a high-value offer for the components of IT being sold and can measure the ongoing value the sale will bring.

    Insight summary

    Overarching Insight

    IT controls if and when it gets invited to support the business through a purchasing growth transaction. Take control of the process, demonstrate the value of IT, and ensure that separation of IT environments does not lead to unnecessary and costly decisions.

    Proactive Insight

    CIOs on the forefront of digital transformation need to actively look for and suggest opportunities to acquire or partner on new digital capabilities to respond to rapidly changing business needs.

    Discovery & Strategy Insight

    IT organizations that have an effective M&A program plan are more prepared for the transaction, enabling a successful outcome. A structured strategy is particularly necessary for organizations expected to deliver M&As rapidly and frequently.

    Due Diligence & Preparation Insight

    IT often faces unnecessary separation challenges because of a lack of preparation. Secure the IT environment and establish how IT will retain employees early in the transaction process.

    Execution & Value Realization Insight

    IT needs to demonstrate value and cost savings within 100 days of the transaction. The most successful transactions are when IT continuously realizes synergies a year after the transaction and beyond.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Key Deliverable: M&A Sell Playbook

    The M&A Sell Playbook should be a reusable document that enables your IT organization to successfully deliver on any divestiture transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Sell Playbook' deliverable.

    M&A Sell One-Pager

    See a one-page overview of each phase of the transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Sell One-Pagers' deliverable.

    M&A Sell Case Studies

    Read a one-page case study for each phase of the transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Sell Case Studies' deliverable.

    M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint)

    Manage the separation process of the divestiture/sale using this SharePoint template.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint)' deliverable.

    M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel)

    Manage the separation process of the divestiture/sale using this Excel tool if you can’t or don’t want to use SharePoint.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel)' deliverable.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 10 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

      Proactive Phase

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    • Discovery & Strategy Phase

    • Call #2: Determine stakeholders and business perspectives on IT.
    • Call #3: Identify how M&A could support business strategy and how to communicate.
    • Due Diligence & Preparation Phase

    • Call #4: Establish a transaction team and divestiture/sale strategic direction.
    • Call #5: Create program metrics and identify a standard separation strategy.
    • Call #6: Prepare to carve out the IT environment.
    • Call #7: Identify the separation program plan.
    • Execution & Value Realization Phase

    • Call #8: Establish employee transitions to retain key staff.
    • Call #9: Assess IT’s ability to deliver on the divestiture/sale transaction.

    The Sell Blueprint

    Phase 1

    Proactive

    Phase 1

    Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic
    • Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • Group stakeholders into categories
    • Prioritize your stakeholders
    • Plan to communicate
    • Valuate IT
    • Assess the IT/digital strategy
    • Determine pain points and opportunities
    • Align goals to opportunities
    • Recommend reduction opportunities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT and business leadership

    What is the Proactive phase?

    Embracing the digital drivers

    As the number of merger, acquisition, or divestiture transactions driven by digital means continues to increase, IT has an opportunity to not just be involved in a transaction but actively seek out potential deals.

    In the Proactive phase, the business is not currently considering a transaction. However, the business could consider one to reach its strategic goals. IT organizations that have developed respected relationships with the business leaders can suggest these potential transactions.

    Understand the business’ perspective of IT, determine who the critical M&A stakeholders are, valuate the IT environment, and examine how it supports the business goals in order to suggest an M&A transaction.

    In doing so, IT isn’t waiting to be invited to the transaction table – it’s creating it.

    Goal: To support the organization in reaching its strategic goals by suggesting M&A activities that will enable the organization to reach its objectives faster and with greater-value outcomes.

    Proactive Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Proactive phase, you should have addressed the following:

    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures are.
    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures mean for the business.
    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures mean for IT.

    Review the Executive Brief for more information on mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures for selling organizations.

    Proactive

    Step 1.1

    Identify M&A Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT

    Activities

    • 1.1.1 Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic
    • 1.1.2 Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • 1.1.3 Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • 1.1.4 Group stakeholders into categories
    • 1.1.5 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 1.16 Plan to communicate

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical M&A stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    Understand how the business perceives IT and establish strong relationships with critical M&A stakeholders.

    Business executives' perspectives of IT

    Leverage diagnostics and gain alignment on IT’s role in the organization

    • To suggest or get involved with a merger, acquisition, or divestiture, the IT executive leader needs to be well respected by other members of the executive leadership team and the business.
    • Specifically, the Proactive phase relies on the IT organization being viewed as an Innovator within the business.
    • Identify how the CEO/business executive currently views IT and where they would like IT to move within the Maturity Ladder.
    • Additionally, understand how other critical department leaders view IT and how they view the partnership with IT.
    A colorful visualization titled 'Maturity Ladder' detailing levels of IT function that a business may choose from based on the business executives' perspectives of IT. Starting from the bottom: 'Struggle', Does not embarrass, Does not crash; 'Support', Keeps business happy, Keeps costs low; 'Optimize', Increases efficiency, Decreases costs; 'Expand', Extends into new business, Generates revenue; 'Transform', Creates new industry.

    Misalignment in target state requires further communication between the CIO and CEO to ensure IT is striving toward an agreed-upon direction.

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision (CIO BV) diagnostic measures a variety of high-value metrics to provide a well-rounded understanding of stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Sample of Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision diagnostic measuring percentages of high-value metrics like 'IT Satisfaction' and 'IT Value' regarding business leader satisfaction. A note for these two reads 'Evaluate business leader satisfaction with IT this year and last year'. A section titled 'Relationship' has metrics such as 'Understands Needs' and 'Trains Effectively'. A note for this section reads 'Examine relationship indicators between IT and the business'. A section titled 'Security Friction' has metrics such as 'Regulatory Compliance-Driven' and 'Office/Desktop Security'.

    Business Satisfaction and Importance for Core Services

    The core services of IT are important when determining what IT should focus on. The most important services with the lowest satisfaction offer the largest area of improvement for IT to drive business value.

    Sample of Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision diagnostic specifically comparing the business satisfaction of 12 core services with their importance. Services listed include 'Service Desk', 'IT Security', 'Requirements Gathering', 'Business Apps', 'Data Quality', and more. There is a short description of the services, a percentage for the business satisfaction with the service, a percentage comparing it to last year, and a numbered ranking of importance for each service. A note reads 'Assess satisfaction and importance across 12 core IT capabilities'.

    1.1.1 Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    2 weeks

    Input: IT organization expertise and the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook, CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    1. The CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic can be a powerful input. Speak with your Info-Tech account representative to conduct the diagnostic. Use the results to inform current IT capabilities.
    2. You may choose to debrief the results of your diagnostic with an Info-Tech analyst. We recommend this to help your team understand how to interpret and draw conclusions from the results.
    3. Examine the results of the survey and note where there might be specific capabilities that could be improved.
    4. Determine whether there are any areas of significant disagreement between the you and the CEO. Mark down those areas for further conversations. Additionally, take note of areas that could be leveraged to support transactions or support your rationale in recommending transactions.

    Download the sample report.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    1.1.2 Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    2 weeks

    Input: IT organization expertise, CIO BV diagnostic

    Output: An understanding of business stakeholder perception of certain IT capabilities and services

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook, CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Senior business leaders

    1. The CIO Business Vision (CIO BV) diagnostic can be a powerful tool for identifying IT capability focus areas. Speak with your account representative to conduct the CIO BV diagnostic. Use the results to inform current IT capabilities.
    2. You may choose to debrief the results of your diagnostic with an Info-Tech analyst. We recommend this to help your team understand how to interpret the results and draw conclusions from the diagnostic.
    3. Examine the results of the survey and take note of any IT services that have low scores.
    4. Read through the diagnostic comments and note any common themes. Especially note which stakeholders identified they have a favorable relationship with IT and which stakeholders identified they have an unfavorable relationship. For those who have an unfavorable relationship, identify if they will have a critical role in a growth transaction.

    Download the sample report.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Create a stakeholder network map for M&A transactions

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Example:

    Diagram of stakeholders and their relationships with other stakeholders, such as 'Board Members', 'CFO/Finance', 'Compliance', etc. with 'CIO/IT Leader' highlighted in the middle. There are unidirectional black arrows and bi-directional green arrows indicating each connection.

      Legend
    • Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
    • Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape that the M&A transaction will occur within. This will identify who holds various levels of accountability and decision-making authority when a transaction does take place.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantial relationships with your stakeholders.

    1.1.3 Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of M&A stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among M&A stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership

    1. The purpose of this activity is to list all the stakeholders within your organization that will have a direct or indirect impact on the M&A transaction.
    2. Determine the critical stakeholders, and then determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      • Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps IT leaders categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the merger, acquisition, or divestiture process.

    A prioritization map of stakeholder categories split into four quadrants. The vertical axis is 'Influence', from low on the bottom to high on top. The horizontal axis is 'Ownership/Interest', from low on the left to high on the right. 'Spectators' are low influence, low ownership/interest. 'Mediators' are high influence, low ownership/interest. 'Noisemakers' are low influence, high ownership/interest. 'Players' are high influence, high ownership/interest.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    1.1.4 Group stakeholders into categories

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder map, Stakeholder list

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Stakeholders

    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on the M&A process as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model to the right to determine each stakeholder’s category.

    Same prioritization map of stakeholder categories as before. This one has specific stakeholders mapped onto it. 'CFO' is mapped as low interest and middling influence, between 'Mediator' and 'Spectator'. 'CIO' is mapped as higher than average interest and high influence, a 'Player'. 'Board Member' is mapped as high interest and high influence, a 'Player'.

    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Level of Support

    Supporter

    Evangelist

    Neutral

    Blocker

    Stakeholder Category Player Critical High High Critical
    Mediator Medium Low Low Medium
    Noisemaker High Medium Medium High
    Spectator Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by answering the following question: How significant is that stakeholder to the M&A or divestiture process?

    These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention.

    1.1.5 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder matrix

    Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, M&A/divestiture stakeholders

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How significant is that stakeholder to the M&A transaction process?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.

    Stakeholder

    Category

    Level of Support

    Prioritization

    CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
    CIO Player Supporter Critical

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    A revisit to the map of stakeholder categories, but with strategies listed for each one, and arrows on the side instead of an axis. The vertical arrow is 'Authority', which increases upward, and the horizontal axis is Ownership/Interest which increases as it moves to the right. The strategy for 'Players' is 'Engage', for 'Mediators' is 'Satisfy', for 'Noisemakers' is 'Inform', and for 'Spectators' is 'Monitor'.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players High influence, high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying stakeholder groups, the IT executive leader can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers while ensuring the needs of Mediators and Players are met.

    1.1.6 Plan to communicate

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder priority, Stakeholder categorization, Stakeholder influence

    Output: Stakeholder communication plan

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, M&A/divestiture stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to make a communication plan for each of the stakeholders identified in the previous activities, especially those who will have a critical role in the M&A transaction process.

    1. In the M&A Sell Playbook, input the type of influence each stakeholder has on IT, how they would be categorized in the M&A process, and their level of priority. Use this information to create a communication plan.
    2. Determine the methods and frequency of communication to keep the necessary stakeholder satisfied and maintain or enhance IT’s profile within the organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Proactive

    Step 1.2

    Assess IT’s Current Value and Method to Achieve a Future State

    Activities

    • 1.2.1 Valuate IT
    • 1.2.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical stakeholders to M&A

    Outcomes of Step

    Identify critical opportunities to optimize IT and meet strategic business goals through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.

    How to valuate your IT environment

    And why it matters so much

    • Valuating your current organization’s IT environment is a critical step that all IT organizations should take, whether involved in an M&A or not, to fully understand what it might be worth.
    • The business investments in IT can be directly translated into a value amount. For every $1 invested in IT, the business might be gaining $100 in value back or possibly even loosing $100.
    • Determining, documenting, and communicating this information ensures that the business takes IT’s suggestions seriously and recognizes why investing in IT is so critical.
    • There are three ways a business or asset can be valuated:
      • Cost Approach: Look at the costs associated with building, purchasing, replacing, and maintaining a given aspect of the business.
      • Market Approach: Look at the relative value of a particular aspect of the business. Relative value can fluctuate and depends on what the markets and consequently society believe that particular element is worth.
      • Discounted Cash Flow Approach: Focus on what the potential value of the business could be or the intrinsic value anticipated due to future profitability.
    • (Source: “Valuation Methods,” Corporate Finance Institute)

    Four ways to create value through digital

    1. Reduced costs
    2. Improved customer experience
    3. New revenue sources
    4. Better decision making
    5. (Source: McKinsey & Company)

    1.2.1 Valuate IT

    1 day

    Input: Valuation of data, Valuation of applications, Valuation of infrastructure and operations, Valuation of security and risk

    Output: Valuation of IT

    Materials: Relevant templates/tools listed on the following slides, Capital budget, Operating budget, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to demonstrate that IT is not simply an operational functional area that diminishes business resources. Rather, IT contributes significant value to the business.

    1. Review each of the following slides to valuate IT’s data, applications, infrastructure and operations, and security and risk. These valuations consider several tangible and intangible factors and result in a final dollar amount.
    2. Input the financial amounts identified for each critical area into a summary slide. Use this information to determine where IT is delivering value to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consistency is key when valuating your IT organization as well as other IT organizations throughout the transaction process.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Data valuation

    Data valuation identifies how you monetize the information that your organization owns.

    Create a data value chain for your organization

    When valuating the information and data that exists in an organization, there are many things to consider.

    Info-Tech has two tools that can support this process:

    1. Information Asset Audit Tool: Use this tool first to take inventory of the different information assets that exist in your organization.
    2. Data Valuation Tool: Once information assets have been accounted for, valuate the data that exists within those information assets.

    Data Collection

    Insight Creation

    Value Creation

    Data Valuation

    01 Data Source
    02 Data Collection Method
    03 Data
    04 Data Analysis
    05 Insight
    06 Insight Delivery
    07 Consumer
    08 Value in Data
    09 Value Dimension
    10 Value Metrics Group
    11 Value Metrics
    Screenshots of Tab 2 of Info-Tech's Data Valuation Tool.

    Instructions

    1. Using the Data Valuation Tool, start gathering information based on the eight steps above to understand your organization’s journey from data to value.
    2. Identify the data value spectrum. (For example: customer sales service, citizen licensing service, etc.)
    3. Fill out the columns for data sources, data collection, and data first.
    4. Capture data analysis and related information.
    5. Then capture the value in data.
    6. Add value dimensions such as usage, quality, and economic dimensions.
      • Remember that economic value is not the only dimension, and usage/quality has a significant impact on economic value.
    7. Collect evidence to justify your data valuation calculator (market research, internal metrics, etc.).
    8. Finally, calculate the value that has a direct correlation with underlying value metrics.

    Application valuation

    Calculate the value of your IT applications

    When valuating the applications and their users in an organization, consider using a business process map. This shows how business is transacted in the company by identifying which IT applications support these processes and which business groups have access to them. Info-Tech has a business process mapping tool that can support this process:

    • Enterprise Integration Process Mapping Tool: Complete this tool first to map the different business processes to the supporting applications in your organization.

    Instructions

    1. Start by calculating user costs. This is the multiplication of: (# of users) × (% of time spent using IT) × (fully burdened salary).
    2. Identify the revenue per employee and divide that by the average cost per employee to calculate the derived productivity ratio (DPR).
    3. Once you have calculated the user costs and DPR, multiply those total values together to get the application value.
    4. User Costs

      Total User Costs

      Derived Productivity Ratio (DPR)

      Total DPR

      Application Value

      # of users % time spent using IT Fully burdened salary Multiply values from the 3 user costs columns Revenue per employee Average cost per employee (Revenue P.E) ÷ (Average cost P.E) (User costs) X (DPR)

    5. Once the total application value is established, calculate the combined IT and business costs of delivering that value. IT and business costs include inflexibility (application maintenance), unavailability (downtime costs, including disaster exposure), IT costs (common costs statistically allocated to applications), and fully loaded cost of active (full-time equivalent [FTE]) users.
    6. Calculate the net value of applications by subtracting the total IT and business costs from the total application value calculated in step 3.
    7. IT and Business Costs

      Total IT and Business Costs

      Net Value of Applications

      Application maintenance Downtime costs (include disaster exposure) Common costs allocated to applications Fully loaded costs of active (FTE) users Sum of values from the four IT and business costs columns (Application value) – (IT and business costs)

    (Source: CSO)

    Infrastructure valuation

    Assess the foundational elements of the business’ information technology

    The purpose of this exercise is to provide a high-level infrastructure valuation that will contribute to valuating your IT environment.

    Calculating the value of the infrastructure will require different methods depending on the environment. For example, a fully cloud-hosted organization will have different costs than a fully on-premises IT environment.

    Instructions:

    1. Start by listing all of the infrastructure-related items that are relevant to your organization.
    2. Once you have finalized your items column, identify the total costs/value of each item.
      • For example, total software costs would include servers and storage.
    3. Calculate the total cost/value of your IT infrastructure by adding all of values in the right column.

    Item

    Costs/Value

    Hardware Assets Total Value +$3.2 million
    Hardware Leased/Service Agreement -$
    Software Purchased +$
    Software Leased/Service Agreement -$
    Operational Tools
    Network
    Disaster Recovery
    Antivirus
    Data Centers
    Service Desk
    Other Licenses
    Total:

    For additional support, download the M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations.

    Risk and security

    Assess risk responses and calculate residual risk

    The purpose of this exercise is to provide a high-level risk assessment that will contribute to valuating your IT environment. For a more in-depth risk assessment, please refer to the Info-Tech tools below:

    1. Risk Register Tool
    2. Security M&A Due Diligence Tool

    Instructions

    1. Review the probability and impact scales below and ensure you have the appropriate criteria that align to your organization before you conduct a risk assessment.
    2. Identify the probability of occurrence and estimated financial impact for each risk category detail and fill out the table on the right. Customize the table as needed so it aligns to your organization.
    3. Probability of Risk Occurrence

      Occurrence Criteria
      (Classification; Probability of Risk Event Within One Year)

      Negligible Very Unlikely; ‹20%
      Very Low Unlikely; 20 to 40%
      Low Possible; 40 to 60%
      Moderately Low Likely; 60 to 80%
      Moderate Almost Certain; ›80%

    Note: If needed, you can customize this scale with the severity designations that you prefer. However, make sure you are always consistent with it when conducting a risk assessment.

    Financial & Reputational Impact

    Budgetary and Reputational Implications
    (Financial Impact; Reputational Impact)

    Negligible (‹$10,000; Internal IT stakeholders aware of risk event occurrence)
    Very Low ($10,000 to $25,000; Business customers aware of risk event occurrence)
    Low ($25,000 to $50,000; Board of directors aware of risk event occurrence)
    Moderately Low ($50,000 to $100,000; External customers aware of risk event occurrence)
    Moderate (›$100,000; Media coverage or regulatory body aware of risk event occurrence)

    Risk Category Details

    Probability of Occurrence

    Estimated Financial Impact

    Estimated Severity (Probability X Impact)

    Capacity Planning
    Enterprise Architecture
    Externally Originated Attack
    Hardware Configuration Errors
    Hardware Performance
    Internally Originated Attack
    IT Staffing
    Project Scoping
    Software Implementation Errors
    Technology Evaluation and Selection
    Physical Threats
    Resource Threats
    Personnel Threats
    Technical Threats
    Total:

    1.2.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy

    4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, Digital strategy, Business strategy

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT, Alignment of IT/digital strategy and overall organization strategy

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    The purpose of this activity is to review the business and IT strategies that exist to determine if there are critical capabilities that are not being supported.

    Ideally, the IT and digital strategies would have been created following development of the business strategy. However, sometimes the business strategy does not directly call out the capabilities it requires IT to support.

    1. On the left half of the corresponding slide in the M&A Sell Playbook, document the business goals, initiatives, and capabilities. Input this information from the business or digital strategies. (If more space for goals, initiatives, or capabilities is needed, duplicate the slide).
    2. On the other half of the slide, document the IT goals, initiatives, and capabilities. Input this information from the IT strategy and digital strategy.

    For additional support, see Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Proactive

    Step 1.3

    Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities

    Activities

    • 1.3.1 Determine pain points and opportunities
    • 1.3.2 Align goals with opportunities
    • 1.3.3 Recommend reduction opportunities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical M&A stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    Establish strong relationships with critical M&A stakeholders and position IT as an innovative business partner that can suggest reduction opportunities.

    1.3.1 Determine pain points and opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Valuation of IT environment, IT-business goals cascade

    Output: List of pain points or opportunities that IT can address

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the pain points and opportunities that exist for the organization. These can be external or internal to the organization.

    1. Identify what opportunities exist for your organization. Opportunities are the potential positives that the organization would want to leverage.
    2. Next, identify pain points, which are the potential negatives that the organization would want to alleviate.
    3. Spend time considering all the options that might exist, and keep in mind what has been identified previously.

    Opportunities and pain points can be trends, other departments’ initiatives, business perspectives of IT, etc.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    1.3.2 Align goals with opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Valuation of IT environment, IT-business goals cascade, List of pain points and opportunities

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT, Foundations for reduction strategy

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to determine whether a growth or separation strategy might be a good suggestion to the business in order to meet its business objectives.

    1. For the top three to five business goals, consider:
      1. Underlying drivers
      2. Digital opportunities
      3. Whether a growth or reduction strategy is the solution
    2. Just because a growth or reduction strategy is a solution for a business goal does not necessarily indicate M&A is the way to go. However, it is important to consider before you pursue suggesting M&A.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    1.3.3 Recommend reduction opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: Growth or separation strategy opportunities to support business goals, Stakeholder communication plan, Rationale for the suggestion

    Output: M&A transaction opportunities suggested

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    The purpose of this activity is to recommend a merger, acquisition, or divestiture to the business.

    1. Identify which of the business goals the transaction would help solve and why IT is the one to suggest such a goal.
    2. Leverage the stakeholder communication plan identified previously to give insight into stakeholders who would have a significant level of interest, influence, or support in the process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With technology and digital driving many transactions, leverage your organizations’ IT environment as an asset and reason why the divestiture or sale should happen, suggesting the opportunity yourself.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this Proactive phase, you should:

    Be prepared to suggest M&A opportunities to support your company’s goals through sale or divestiture transactions

    Key outcome from the Proactive phase

    Develop progressive relationships and strong communication with key stakeholders to suggest or be aware of transformational opportunities that can be achieved through sale or divestiture strategies.

    Key deliverables from the Proactive phase
    • Business perspective of IT examined
    • Key stakeholders identified and relationship to the M&A process outlined
    • Ability to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business
    • Assessment of the business, digital, and IT strategies and how M&As could support those strategies
    • Pain points and opportunities that could be alleviated or supported through an M&A transaction
    • Sale or divestiture recommendations

    The Sell Blueprint

    Phase 2

    Discovery & Strategy

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create the mission and vision
    • Identify the guiding principles
    • Create the future-state operating model
    • Determine the transition team
    • Document the M&A governance
    • Create program metrics
    • Establish the separation strategy
    • Conduct a RACI
    • Create the communication plan
    • Assess the potential organization(s)

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for Divesting or SellingFormalize the Program PlanCreate the Valuation FrameworkStrategize the TransactionNext Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Conduct the CIO Business Vision and CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostics
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process
    • 0.3 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture or sale
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale
    • 1.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy
    • 1.3 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale
    • 1.4 Create the IT vision statement, create the IT mission statement, and identify IT guiding principles
    • 2.1 Create the future-state operating model
    • 2.2 Determine the transition team
    • 2.3 Document the M&A governance
    • 2.4 Establish program metrics
    • 3.1 Valuate your data
    • 3.2 Valuate your applications
    • 3.3 Valuate your infrastructure
    • 3.4 Valuate your risk and security
    • 3.5 Combine individual valuations to make a single framework
    • 4.1 Establish the separation strategy
    • 4.2 Conduct a RACI
    • 4.3 Review best practices for assessing target organizations
    • 4.4 Create the communication plan
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Business perspectives of IT
    2. Stakeholder network map for M&A transactions
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. IT’s divestiture/sale strategic direction
    1. Operating model for future state
    2. Transition team
    3. Governance structure
    4. M&A program metrics
    1. IT valuation framework
    1. Separation strategy
    2. RACI
    3. Communication plan
    1. Completed M&A program plan and strategy
    2. Prepared to assess target organization(s)

    What is the Discovery & Strategy phase?

    Pre-transaction state

    The Discovery & Strategy phase during a sale or divestiture is a unique opportunity for many IT organizations. IT organizations that can participate in the transaction at this stage are likely considered a strategic partner of the business.

    For one-off sales/divestitures, IT being invited during this stage of the process is rare. However, for organizations that are preparing to engage in many divestitures over the coming years, this type of strategy will greatly benefit from IT involvement. Again, the likelihood of participating in an M&A transaction is increasing, making it a smart IT leadership decision to, at the very least, loosely prepare a program plan that can act as a strategic pillar throughout the transaction.

    During this phase of the pre-transaction state, IT may be asked to participate in ensuring that the IT environment is able to quickly and easily carve out components/business lines and deliver on service-level agreements (SLAs).

    Goal: To identify a repeatable program plan that IT can leverage when selling or divesting all or parts of the current IT environment, ensuring customer satisfaction and business continuity

    Discovery & Strategy Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Discovery & Strategy phase, you should have addressed the following:

    • Understand the business perspective of IT.
    • Know the key stakeholders and have outlined their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT's value to the business.
    • Understand the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a sale or divestiture and the opportunities or pain points the sale should address.

    Discovery & Strategy

    Step 2.1

    Establish the M&A Program Plan

    Activities

    • 2.1.1 Create the mission and vision
    • 2.1.2 Identify the guiding principles
    • 2.1.3 Create the future-state operating model
    • 2.1.4 Determine the transition team
    • 2.1.5 Document the M&A governance
    • 2.1.6 Create program metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Establish an M&A program plan that can be repeated across sales/divestitures.

    The vision and mission statements clearly articulate IT’s aspirations and purpose

    The IT vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization, whereas the IT mission statement portrays the organization’s reason for being. While each serves its own purpose, they should both be derived from the business context implications for IT.

    Vision Statements

    Mission Statements

    Characteristics

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Concise
    • Aspirational
    • Memorable
    • Articulate a reason for existence
    • Focus on how to achieve the vision
    • Concise
    • Easy to grasp
    • Sharply focused
    • Inspirational

    Samples

    To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged IT workforce. (Source: Business News Daily) IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset. (Source: Forbes, 2013)

    2.1.1 Create the mission and vision statements

    2 hours

    Input: Business objectives, IT capabilities, Rationale for the transaction

    Output: IT’s mission and vision statements for reduction strategies tied to mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create mission and vision statements that reflect IT’s intent and method to support the organization as it pursues a reduction strategy.

    1. Review the definitions and characteristics of mission and vision statements.
    2. Brainstorm different versions of the mission and vision statements.
    3. Edit the statements until you get to a single version of each that accurately reflects IT’s role in the reduction process.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Guiding principles provide a sense of direction

    IT guiding principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting IT investment portfolio management, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    A diagram illustrating the place of 'IT guiding principles' in the process of making 'Decisions on the use of IT'. There are four main items, connecting lines naming the type of process in getting from one step to the next, and a line underneath clarifying the questions asked at each step. On the far left, over the question 'What decisions should be made?', is 'Business context and IT implications'. This flows forward to 'IT guiding principles', and they are connected by 'Influence'. Next, over the question 'How should decisions be made?', is the main highlighted section. 'IT guiding principles' flows forward to 'Decisions on the use of IT', and they are connected by 'Guide and inform'. On the far right, over the question 'Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions?', is 'IT policies'. This flows back to 'Decisions on the use of IT', and they are connected by 'Direct and control'.

    IT principles must be carefully constructed to make sure they are adhered to and relevant

    Info-Tech has identified a set of characteristics that IT principles should possess. These characteristics ensure the IT principles are relevant and followed in the organization.

    Approach focused. IT principles should be focused on the approach – how the organization is built, transformed, and operated – as opposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.

    Business relevant. Create IT principles that are specific to the organization. Tie IT principles to the organization’s priorities and strategic aspirations.

    Long lasting. Build IT principles that will withstand the test of time.

    Prescriptive. Inform and direct decision making with actionable IT principles. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.

    Verifiable. If compliance can’t be verified, people are less likely to follow the principle.

    Easily Digestible. IT principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. IT principles aren’t a secret manuscript of the IT team. IT principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.

    Followed. Successful IT principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. IT principles must be continuously communicated to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, IT principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Consider the example principles below

    IT Principle Name

    IT Principle Statement

    1. Risk Management We will ensure that the organization’s IT Risk Management Register is properly updated to reflect all potential risks and that a plan of action against those risks has been identified.
    2. Transparent Communication We will ensure employees are spoken to with respect and transparency throughout the transaction process.
    3. Separation for Success We will create a carve-out strategy that enables the organization and clearly communicates the resources required to succeed.
    4. Managed Data We will handle data creation, modification, separation, and use across the enterprise in compliance with our data governance policy.
    5.Deliver Better Customer Service We will reduce the number of products offered by IT, enabling a stronger focus on specific products or elements to increase customer service delivery.
    6. Compliance With Laws and Regulations We will operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations for both our organization and the potentially purchasing organization.
    7. Defined Value We will create a plan of action that aligns with the organization’s defined value expectations.
    8. Network Readiness We will ensure that employees and customers have immediate access to the network with minimal or no outages.
    9. Value Generator We will leverage the current IT people, processes, and technology to turn the IT organization into a value generator by developing and selling our services to purchasing organizations.

    2.1.2 Identify the guiding principles

    2 hours

    Input: Business objectives, IT capabilities, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: IT’s guiding principles for reduction strategies tied to mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create the guiding principles that will direct the IT organization throughout the reduction strategy process.

    1. Review the role of guiding principles and the examples of guiding principles that organizations have used.
    2. Brainstorm different versions of the guiding principles. Each guiding principle should start with the phrase “We will…”
    3. Edit and consolidate the statements until you have a list of approximately eight to ten statements that accurately reflect IT’s role in the reduction process.
    4. Review the guiding principles every six months to ensure they continue to support the delivery of the business’ reduction strategy goals.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Create two IT teams to support the transaction

    IT M&A Transaction Team

    • The IT M&A Transaction Team should consist of the strongest members of the IT team who can be expected to deliver on unusual or additional tasks not asked of them in normal day-to-day operations.
    • The roles selected for this team will have very specific skills sets or deliver on critical separation capabilities, making their involvement in the combination of two or more IT environments paramount.
    • These individuals need to have a history of proving themselves very trustworthy, as they will likely be required to sign an NDA as well.
    • Expect to have to certain duplicate capabilities or roles across the M&A Team and Operational Team.

    IT Operational Team

    • This group is responsible for ensuring the business operations continue.
    • These employees might be those who are newer to the organization but can be counted on to deliver consistent IT services and products.
    • The roles of this team should ensure that end users or external customers remain satisfied.

    Key capabilities to support M&A

    Consider the following capabilities when looking at who should be a part of the IT Transaction Team.

    Employees who have a significant role in ensuring that these capabilities are being delivered will be a top priority.

    Infrastructure & Operations

    • System Separation
    • Data Management
    • Helpdesk/Desktop Support
    • Cloud/Server Management

    Business Focus

    • Service-Level Management
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Project Management

    Risk & Security

    • Privacy Management
    • Security Management
    • Risk & Compliance Management

    Build a lasting and scalable operating model

    An operating model is an abstract visualization, used like an architect’s blueprint, that depicts how structures and resources are aligned and integrated to deliver on the organization’s strategy.

    It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint before embarking on detailed organizational design.

    The visual should highlight which capabilities are critical to attaining strategic goals and clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization.

    As you assess the current operating model, consider the following:

    • Does the operating model contain all the necessary capabilities your IT organization requires to be successful?
    • What capabilities should be duplicated?
    • Are there individuals with the skill set to support those roles? If not, is there a plan to acquire or develop those skills?
    • A dedicated project team strictly focused on M&A is great. However, is it feasible for your organization? If not, what blockers exist?
    A diagram with 'Initiatives' and 'Solutions' on the left and right of an area chart, 'Customer' at the top, the area between them labelled 'Functional Area n', and six horizontal bars labelled 'IT Capability' stacked on top of each other. The 'IT Capability' bars are slightly skewed to the 'Solutions' side of the chart.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Investing time up-front getting the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and allowing your model to change as the business changes.

    2.1.3 Create the future-state operating model

    4 hours

    Input: Current operating model, IT strategy, IT capabilities, M&A-specific IT capabilities, Business objectives, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Future-state operating model for divesting organizations

    Materials: Operating model, Capability overlay, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to establish what the future-state operating model will be if your organization needs to adjust to support a divestiture transaction. If your organization plans to sell in its entirety, you may choose to skip this activity.

    1. Ensuring that all the IT capabilities are identified by the business and IT strategy, document your organization’s current operating model.
    2. Identify what core capabilities would be critical to the divesting transaction process and separation. Highlight and make copies of those capabilities in the M&A Sell Playbook. As a result of divesting, there may also be capabilities that will become irrelevant in your future state.
    3. Ensure the capabilities that will be decentralized are clearly identified. Decentralized capabilities do not exist within the central IT organization but rather in specific lines of businesses, products, or locations to better understand needs and deliver on the capability.

    An example operating model is included in the M&A Sell Playbook. This process benefits from strong reference architecture and capability mapping ahead of time.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    2.1.4 Determine the transition team

    3 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Future-state operating model, M&A-specific IT capabilities, Business objectives, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Transition team

    Materials: Reference architecture, Organizational structure, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a team that will support your IT organization throughout the transaction. Determining which capabilities and therefore which roles will be required ensures that the business will continue to get the operational support it needs.

    1. Based on the outcome of activity 2.1.3, review the capabilities that your organization will require on the transition team. Group capabilities into functional groups containing capabilities that are aligned well with one another because they have similar responsibilities and functionalities.
    2. Replace the capabilities with roles. For example, stakeholder management, requirements gathering, and project management might be one functional group. Project management and stakeholder management might combine to create a project manager role.
    3. Review the examples in the M&A Sell Playbook and identify which roles will be a part of the transition team.

    For more information, see Redesign Your Organizational Structure

    What is governance?

    And why does it matter so much to IT and the M&A process?

    • Governance is the method in which decisions get made, specifically as they impact various resources (time, money, and people).
    • Because M&A is such a highly governed transaction, it is important to document the governance bodies that exist in your organization.
    • This will give insight into what types of governing bodies there are, what decisions they make, and how that will impact IT.
    • For example, funds to support separation need to be discussed, approved, and supplied to IT from a governing body overseeing the acquisition.
    • A highly mature IT organization will have automated governance, while a seemingly non-existent governance process will be considered ad hoc.
    A pyramid with four levels representing the types of governing bodies that are available with differing levels of IT maturity. An arrow beside the pyramid points upward. The bottom of the arrow is labelled 'Traditional (People and document centric)' and the top is labelled 'Adaptive (Data centric)'. Starting at the bottom of the pyramid is level 1 'Ad Hoc Governance', 'Governance that is not well defined or understood within the organization. It occurs out of necessity but often not by the right people'. Level 2 is 'Controlled Governance', 'Governance focused on compliance and decisions driven by hierarchical authority. Levels of authority are defined and often driven by regulatory'. Level 3 is 'Agile Governance', 'Governance that is flexible to support different needs and quick response in the organization. Driven by principles and delegated throughout the company'. At the top of the pyramid is level 4 'Automated Governance', 'Governance that is entrenched and automated into organizational processes and product/service design. Empowered and fully delegated governance to maintain fit and drive organizational success and survival'.

    2.1.5 Document M&A governance

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of governing bodies, Governing body committee profiles, Governance structure

    Output: Documented method on how decisions are made as it relates to the M&A transaction

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the method in which decisions are made throughout the M&A transaction as it relates to IT. This will require understanding both governing bodies internal to IT and those external to IT.

    1. First, determine the other governance structures within the organization that will impact the decisions made about M&A. List out these bodies or committees.
    2. Create a profile for each committee that looks at the membership, purpose of the committee, decision areas (authority), and the process of inputs and outputs. Ensure IT committees that will have a role in this process are also documented. Consider the benefits realized, risks, and resources required for each.
    3. Organize the committees into a structure, identifying the committees that have a role in defining the strategy, designing and building, and running.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Current-state structure map – definitions of tiers

    Strategy: These groups will focus on decisions that directly connect to the strategic direction of the organization.

    Design & Build: The second tier of groups will oversee prioritization of a certain area of governance as well as design and build decisions that feed into strategic decisions.

    Run: The lowest level of governance will be oversight of more-specific initiatives and capabilities within IT.

    Expect tier overlap. Some committees will operate in areas that cover two or three of these governance tiers.

    Measure the IT program’s success in terms of its ability to support the business’ M&A goals

    Upper management will measure IT’s success based on your ability to support the underlying reasons for the M&A. Using business metrics will help assure business stakeholders that IT understands their needs and is working with the business to achieve them.

    Business-Specific Metrics

    • Revenue Growth: Increase in the top line as seen by market expansion, product expansion, etc. by percentage/time.
    • Synergy Extraction: Reduction in costs as determined by the ability to identify and eliminate redundancies over time.
    • Profit Margin Growth: Increase in the bottom line as a result of increased revenue growth and/or decreased costs over time.

    IT-Specific Metrics

    • IT operational savings and cost reductions due to synergies: Operating expenses, capital expenditures, licenses, contracts, applications, infrastructure over time.
    • Reduction in IT staff expense and headcount: Decreased budget allocated to IT staff, and ability to identify and remove redundancies in staff.
    • Meeting or improving on IT budget estimates: Delivering successful IT separation on a budget that is the same or lower than the budget estimated during due diligence.
    • Meeting or improving on IT time-to-separation estimates: Delivering successful IT carve-out on a timeline that is the same or shorter than the timeline estimated during due diligence.
    • Business capability support: Delivering the end state of IT that supports the expected business capabilities and growth.

    Establish your own metrics to gauge the success of IT

    Establish SMART M&A Success Metrics

    S pecific Make sure the objective is clear and detailed.
    M easurable Objectives are measurable if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective.
    A ctionable Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified.
    R ealistic Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources.
    T ime-Bound An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.
    • What should IT consider when looking to identify potential additions, deletions, or modifications that will either add value to the organization or reduce costs/risks?
    • Provide a definition of synergies.
    • IT operational savings and cost reductions due to synergies: Operating expenses, capital expenditures, licenses, contracts, applications, infrastructure.
    • Reduction in IT staff expense and headcount: Decreased budget allocated to IT staff, and ability to identify and remove redundancies in staff.
    • Meeting or improving on IT budget estimates: Delivering successful IT separation on a budget that is the same or lower than the budget estimated during due diligence.
    • Meeting or improving on IT time-to-separation estimates: Delivering successful IT carve-out on a timeline that is the same or shorter than the timeline estimated during due diligence.
    • Revenue growth: Increase in the top line as a result, as seen by market expansion, product expansion, etc., as a result of divesting lines of the business and selling service-level agreements to the purchasing organization.
    • Synergy extraction: Reduction in costs, as determined by the ability to identify and eliminate redundancies.
    • Profit margin growth: Increase in the bottom line as a result of increased revenue growth and/or decreased costs.

    Metrics for each phase

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Valuation & Due Diligence

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    • % Share of business innovation spend from overall IT budget
    • % Critical processes with approved performance goals and metrics
    • % IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation defined in business case
    • % IT initiatives aligned with organizational strategic direction
    • % Satisfaction with IT's strategic decision-making abilities
    • $ Estimated business value added through IT-enabled innovation
    • % Overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT
    • % Percent of business leaders that view IT as an Innovator
    • % IT budget as a percent of revenue
    • % Assets that are not allocated
    • % Unallocated software licenses
    • # Obsolete assets
    • % IT spend that can be attributed to the business (chargeback or showback)
    • % Share of CapEx of overall IT budget
    • % Prospective organizations that meet the search criteria
    • $ Total IT cost of ownership (before and after M&A, before and after rationalization)
    • % Business leaders that view IT as a Business Partner
    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target
    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT separation
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    2.1.6 Create program metrics

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Mission, vision, and guiding principles, Rationale for the acquisition

    Output: Program metrics to support IT throughout the M&A process

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine how IT’s success throughout a growth transaction will be measured and determined.

    1. Document a list of appropriate metrics on the whiteboard. Remember to include metrics that demonstrate the business impact. You can use the sample metrics listed on the previous slide as a starting point.
    2. Set a target and deadline for each metric. This will help the group determine when it is time to evaluate progression.
    3. Establish a baseline for each metric based on information collected within your organization.
    4. Assign an owner for tracking each metric as well as someone to be accountable for performance.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Discovery & Strategy

    Step 2.2

    Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale

    Activities

    • 2.2.1 Establish the separation strategy
    • 2.2.2 Conduct a RACI
    • 2.2.3 Create the communication plan
    • 2.2.4 Assess the potential organization(s)

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Identify IT’s plan of action when it comes to the separation/sale and align IT’s separation/sale strategy with the business’ M&A strategy.

    Separation strategies

    There are several IT separation strategies that will let you achieve your target technology environment.

    IT Separation Strategies
    • Divest. Carve out elements of the IT organization and sell them to a purchasing organization with or without a service-level agreement.
    • Sell. Sell the entire IT environment to a purchasing organization. The purchasing organization takes full responsibility in delivering and running the IT environment.
    • Spin-Off Joint Venture. Carve out elements of the IT organization and combine them with elements of a new or purchasing organization to create a new entity.

    The approach IT takes will depend on the business objectives for the M&A.

    • Generally speaking, the separation strategy is well understood and influenced by the frequency of and rationale for selling.
    • Based on the initiatives generated by each business process owner, you need to determine the IT separation strategy that will best support the desired target technology environment, especially if you are still operating or servicing elements of that IT environment.

    Key considerations when choosing an IT separation strategy include:

    • What are the main business objectives of the M&A?
    • What are the key synergies expected from the transaction?
    • What IT separation strategy best helps obtain these benefits?
    • What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable and long-term growth?

    Separation strategies in detail

    Review highlights and drawbacks of different separation strategies

    Divest
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses striving to reduce costs and potentially even generate revenue for the business through the delivery of SLAs.
    • Opportunity to reduce or scale back on lines of business or products that are not driving profits.
      Drawbacks
    • May be forced to give up critical staff that have been known to deliver high value.
    • The IT department is left to deliver services to the purchasing organization with little support or consideration from the business.
    • There can be increased risk and security concerns that need to be addressed.
    Sell
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to gain capital to exit the market profitably or to enter a new market with a large sum of capital.
    • The business will no longer exist, and as a result all operational costs, including IT, will become redundant.
      Drawbacks
    • IT is no longer needed as an operating or capital service for the organization.
    • Lost resources, including highly trained and critical staff.
    • May require packaging employees off and using the profit or capital generated to cover any closing costs.
    Spin-Off or Joint Venture
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to expand their market presence or acquire new products. Essentially aligning the two organizations in the same market.
    • Each side has a unique offering but complementing capabilities.
      Drawbacks
    • As much as the organization is going through a separation from the original company, it will be going through an integration with the new company.
    • There could be differences in culture.
    • This could require a large amount of investment without a guarantee of profit or success.

    2.2.1 Establish the separation strategy

    1-2 hours

    Input: Business separation strategy, Guiding principles, M&A governance

    Output: IT’s separation strategy

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine IT’s approach to separating or selling. This approach might differ slightly from transaction to transaction. However, the businesses approach to transactions should give insight into the general separation strategy IT should adopt.

    1. Make sure you have clearly articulated the business objectives for the M&A, the technology end state for IT, and the magnitude of the overall separation.
    2. Review and discuss the highlights and drawbacks of each type of separation.
    3. Use Info-Tech’s Separation Posture Selection Framework on the next slide to select the separation posture that will appropriately enable the business. Consider these questions during your discussion:
      1. What are the main business objectives of the M&A? What key IT capabilities will need to support business objectives?
      2. What key synergies are expected from the transaction? What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable growth?
      3. What IT separation best helps obtain these benefits?

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Separation Posture Selection Framework

    Business M&A Strategy

    Resultant Technology Strategy

    M&A Magnitude (% of Seller Assets, Income, or Market Value)

    IT Separation Posture

    A. Horizontal Adopt One Model ‹100% Divest
    ›99% Sell
    B. Vertical Create Links Between Critical Systems Any Divest
    C. Conglomerate Independent Model Any Joint Venture
    Divest
    D. Hybrid: Horizontal & Conglomerate Create Links Between Critical Systems Any Divest
    Joint Venture

    M&A separation strategy

    Business M&A Strategy Resultant Technology Strategy M&A Magnitude (% of Seller Assets, Income, or Market Value) IT Separation Posture

    You may need a hybrid separation posture to achieve the technology end state.

    M&A objectives may not affect all IT domains and business functions in the same way. Therefore, the separation requirements for each business function may differ. Organizations will often choose to select and implement a hybrid separation posture to realize the technology end state.

    Each business division may have specific IT domain and capability needs that require an alternative separation strategy.

    • Example: Even when conducting a joint venture by forming a new organization, some partners might view themselves as the dominant partner and want to influence the IT environment to a greater degree.
    • Example: Some purchasing organizations will expect service-level agreements to be available for a significant period of time following the divestiture, while others will be immediately independent.

    2.2.2 Conduct a RACI

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Transition team, Separation strategy

    Output: Completed RACI for Transition team

    Materials: Reference architecture, Organizational structure, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to identify the core accountabilities and responsibilities for the roles identified as critical to your transition team. While there might be slight variation from transaction to transaction, ideally each role should be performing certain tasks.

    1. First, identify a list of critical tasks that need to be completed to support the sale or separation. For example:
      • Communicate with the company M&A team.
      • Identify the key IT solutions that can and cannot be carved out.
      • Gather data room artifacts and provide them to acquiring organization.
    2. Next, identify at the activity level which role is accountable or responsible for each activity. Enter an A for accountable, R for responsible, or A/R for both.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Communication and change

    Prepare key stakeholders for the potential changes

    • Anytime you are starting a project or program that will depend on users and stakeholders to give up their old way of doing things, change will force people to become novices again, leading to lost productivity and added stress.
    • Change management can improve outcomes for any project where you need people to adopt new tools and procedures, comply with new policies, learn new skills and behaviors, or understand and support new processes.
    • M&As move very quickly, and it can be very difficult to keep track of which stakeholders you need to be communicating with and what you should be communicating.
    • Not all organizations embrace or resist change in the same ways. Base your change communications on your organization’s cultural appetite for change in general.
      • Organizations with a low appetite for change will require more direct, assertive communications.
      • Organizations with a high appetite for change are more suited to more open, participatory approaches.

    Three key dimensions determine the appetite for cultural change:

    • Power Distance. Refers to the acceptance that power is distributed unequally throughout the organization.
      In organizations with a high power distance, the unequal power distribution is accepted by the less powerful employees.
    • Individualism. Organizations that score high in individualism have employees who are more independent. Those who score low in individualism fall into the collectivism side, where employees are strongly tied to one another or their groups.
    • Uncertainty Avoidance. Describes the level of acceptance that an organization has toward uncertainty. Those who score high in this area find that their employees do not favor uncertain situations, while those that score low in this area find that their employees are comfortable with change and uncertainty.

    2.2.3 Create the communication plan

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT’s M&A mission, vision, and guiding principles, M&A transition team, IT separation strategy, RACI

    Output: IT’s M&A communication plan

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, RACI, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a communication plan that IT can leverage throughout the initiative.

    1. Create a structured communication plan that allows for continuous communication with the integration management office, senior management, and the business functional heads.
    2. Outline key topics of communication, with stakeholders, inputs, and outputs for each topic.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s example communication plan in the M&A Sell Playbook and update it with relevant information.
    4. Does this communication plan make sense for your organization? What doesn’t make sense? Adjust the communication guide to suit your organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Assessing potential organizations

    As soon as you have identified organizations to consider, it’s imperative to assess critical risks. Most IT leaders can attest that they will receive little to no notice when the business is pursuing a sale and IT has to assess the IT organization. As a result, having a standardized template to quickly assess the potential acquiring organization is important.

    Ways to Assess

    1. News: Assess what sort of news has been announced in relation to the organization. Have they had any risk incidents? Has a critical vendor announced working with them?
    2. LinkedIn: Scan through the LinkedIn profiles of employees. This will give you a sense of what platforms they have based on employees. It will also give insight into positive or negative employee experiences that could impact retention.
    3. Trends: Some industries will have specific solutions that are relevant and popular. Assess what the key players are (if you don’t already know) to determine the solution.
    4. Business Architecture: While this assessment won’t perfect, try to understand the business’ value streams and the critical business and IT capabilities that would be needed to support them. Will your organization or employee skills be required to support these long term?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assessing potential organizations is not just for the purchaser. The seller should also know what the purchasing organization’s history with M&As is and what potential risks could occur if remaining connected through ongoing SLAs.

    2.2.4 Assess the potential organization(s)

    1-2 hours

    Input: Publicized historical risk events, Solutions and vendor contracts likely in the works, Trends

    Output: IT’s valuation of the potential organization(s) for selling or divesting

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the organization(s) that your organization is considering selling or divesting to.

    1. Complete the Historical Valuation Worksheet in the M&A Sell Playbook to understand the type of IT organization that your company may support.
      • The business likely isn’t looking for in-depth details at this time. However, as the IT leader, it is your responsibility to ensure critical risks are identified and communicated to the business.
    2. Use the information identified to help the business narrow down which organizations could be the right organizations to sell or divest to.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this pre-transaction phase you should:

    Have a program plan for M&As and a repeatable M&A strategy for IT when engaging in reduction transactions

    Key outcomes from the Discovery & Strategy phase
    • Prepare the IT environment to support the potential sale or divestiture by identifying critical program plan elements and establishing a separation or carve-out strategy that will enable the business to reach its goals.
    • Create a M&A strategy that accounts for all the necessary elements of a transaction and ensures sufficient governance, capabilities, and metrics exist.
    Key deliverables from the Discovery & Strategy phase
    • Create vision and mission statements
    • Establish guiding principles
    • Create a future-state operating model
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team
    • Identify and communicate the M&A governance
    • Determine target metrics
    • Identify the M&A operating model
    • Select the separation strategy framework
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team
    • Document the communication plan

    M&A Sell Blueprint

    Phase 3

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Phase 1Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • Gather data room artifacts
    • Measure staff engagement
    • Assess culture
    • Create a carve-out roadmap
    • Prioritize separation tasks
    • Establish the separation roadmap
    • Identify the buyer’s IT expectations
    • Create a service/transaction agreement
    • Estimate separation costs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Create functional workplans for employees
    • Align project metrics with identified tasks

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team
    • Business leaders
    • Purchasing organization
    • Transition team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for SeparationIdentify Expectations and Create the Carve-Out RoadmapPrepare and Manage EmployeesPlan the Separation RoadmapNext Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture/sale.
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and determine the IT transaction team.
    • 0.3 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.2 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.3 Establish the separation strategy.
    • 1.4 Create the due diligence charter.
    • 2.1 Identify the buyer’s IT expectations.
    • 2.2 Create a list of IT artifacts to be reviewed in the data room.
    • 2.3 Create a carve-out roadmap.
    • 2.4 Create a service/technical transaction agreement.
    • 3.1 Measure staff engagement.
    • 3.2 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.
    • 3.3 Create an employee transition plan.
    • 3.4 Create functional workplans for employees.
    • 4.1 Prioritize separation tasks.
    • 4.2 Establish the separation roadmap.
    • 4.3 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.
    • 4.4 Estimate separation costs.
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. IT strategy
    2. IT operating model
    3. IT governance structure
    4. M&A transaction team
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. Separation strategy
    3. Due diligence charter
    1. Data room artifacts identified
    2. Carve-out roadmap
    3. Service/technical transaction agreement
    1. Engagement assessment
    2. Culture assessment
    3. Employee transition plans and workplans
    1. Separation roadmap and associated resourcing
    1. Divestiture separation strategy for IT

    What is the Due Diligence & Preparation phase?

    Mid-transaction state

    The Due Diligence & Preparation phase during a sale or divestiture is a critical time for IT. If IT fails to proactively participate in this phase, IT will have to merely react to separation expectations set by the business.

    If your organization is being sold in its entirety, staff will have major concerns about their future in the new organization. Making this transition as smooth as possible and being transparent could go a long way in ensuring their success in the new organization.

    In a divestiture, this is the time to determine where it’s possible for the organization to divide or separate from itself. A lack of IT involvement in these conversations could lead to an overcommitment by the business and under-delivery by IT.

    Goal: To ensure that, as the selling or divesting organization, you comply with regulations, prepare staff for potential changes, and identify a separation strategy if necessary

    Due Diligence Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Due Diligence & Preparation phase, you must have addressed the following:

    • Understand the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a sale or divestiture and what opportunities or pain points the sale should alleviate.
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team.
    • Identify the M&A governance.
    • Determine target metrics.
    • Select a separation strategy framework.
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team.

    Before coming into the Due Diligence & Preparation phase, we recommend addressing the following:

    • Create vision and mission statements.
    • Establish guiding principles.
    • Create a future-state operating model.
    • Identify the M&A operating model.
    • Document the communication plan.
    • Examine the business perspective of IT.
    • Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business.

    The Technology Value Trinity

    Delivery of Business Value & Strategic Needs

    • Digital & Technology Strategy
      The identification of objectives and initiatives necessary to achieve business goals.
    • IT Operating Model
      The model for how IT is organized to deliver on business needs and strategies.
    • Information & Technology Governance
      The governance to ensure the organization and its customers get maximum value from the use of information and technology.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work in harmony to deliver business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others need to change as well.

    • Digital and IT Strategy tells you what you need to achieve to be successful.
    • IT Operating Model and Organizational Design is the alignment of resources to deliver on your strategy and priorities.
    • Information & Technology Governance is the confirmation of IT’s goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy. It’s the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work to ensure that what is delivered is in line with the strategy. This oversight evaluates, directs, and monitors the delivery of outcomes to ensure that the use of resources results in the achieving the organization’s goals.

    Too often strategy, operating model and organizational design, and governance are considered separate practices. As a result, “strategic documents” end up being wish lists, and projects continue to be prioritized based on who shouts the loudest – not based on what is in the best interest of the organization.

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Step 3.1

    Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff

    Activities

    • 3.1.1 Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • 3.1.2 Gather data room artifacts
    • 3.1.3 Measure staff engagement
    • 3.1.4 Assess culture

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team
    • Business leaders
    • Prospective IT organization
    • Transition team

    Outcomes of Step

    This step of the process is when IT should prepare and support the business in due diligence and gather the necessary information about staff changes.

    3.1.1 Drive value with a due diligence charter

    1-2 hours

    Input: Key roles for the transaction team, M&A governance, Target metrics, Selected separation strategy framework, RACI of key transaction tasks for the transaction team

    Output: IT Due Diligence Charter

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a charter leveraging the items completed in the previous phase, as listed on the Due Diligence Prerequisite Checklist slide, to gain executive sign-off.

    1. In the IT Due Diligence Charter in the M&A Sell Playbook, complete the aspects of the charter that are relevant for you and your organization.
    2. We recommend including these items in the charter:
      • Communication plan
      • Transition team roles
      • Goals and metrics for the transaction
      • Separation strategy
      • Sale/divestiture RACI
    3. Once the charter has been completed, ensure that business executives agree to the charter and sign off on the plan of action.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    3.1.2 Gather data room artifacts

    4 hours

    Input: Future-state operating model, M&A governance, Target metrics, Selected separation strategy framework, RACI of key transaction tasks for the transaction team

    Output: List of items to acquire and verify can be provided to the purchasing organization while in the data room

    Materials: Critical domain lists on following slides, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team, Legal team, Compliance/privacy officers

    The purpose of this activity is to create a list of the key artifacts that you could be asked for during the due diligence process.

    1. Review the lists on the following pages as a starting point. Identify which domains, stakeholders, artifacts, and information should be requested for the data room.
    2. IT leadership may or may not be asked to enter the data room directly. The short notice for having to find these artifacts for the purchasing organization can leave your IT organization scrambling. Identify the critical items worth obtaining ahead of time.
    3. Once you have identified the artifacts, provide the list to the legal team or compliance/privacy officers and ensure they also agree those items can be provided. If changes to the documents need to be made, take the time to do so.
    4. Store all items in a safe and secure file or provide to the M&A team ahead of due diligence.

    **Note that if your organization is not leading/initiating the data room, then you can ignore this activity.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Critical domains

    Understand the key stakeholders and outputs for each domain

    Domain

    Stakeholders

    Key Artifacts

    Key Information to request

    Business
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Business Process Owners
    • Business capability map
    • Capability map (the M&A team should be taking care of this, but make sure it exists)
    • Business satisfaction with various IT systems and services
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • CIO
    • CTO
    • CISO
    • IT budgets
    • IT capital and operating budgets (from current year and previous year)
    Data & Analytics
    • Chief Data Officer
    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Master data domains, system of record for each
    • Unstructured data retention requirements
    • Data architecture
    • Master data domains, sources, and storage
    • Data retention requirements
    Applications
    • Applications Manager
    • Application Portfolio Manager
    • Application Architect
    • Applications map
    • Applications inventory
    • Applications architecture
    • Copy of all software license agreements
    • Copy of all software maintenance agreements
    Infrastructure
    • Head of Infrastructure
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Infrastructure map
    • Infrastructure inventory
    • Network architecture (including which data centers host which infrastructure and applications)
    • Inventory (including separation capabilities of vendors, versions, switches, and routers)
    • Copy of all hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Copy of all hardware maintenance agreements
    • Copy of all outsourcing/external service provider agreements
    • Copy of all service-level agreements for centrally provided, shared services and systems
    Products and Services
    • Product Manager
    • Head of Customer Interactions
    • Product lifecycle
    • Product inventory
    • Customer market strategy

    Critical domains (continued)

    Understand the key stakeholders and outputs for each domain

    Domain

    Stakeholders

    Key Artifacts

    Key Information to request

    Operations
    • Head of Operations
    • Service catalog
    • Service overview
    • Service owners
    • Access policies and procedures
    • Availability and service levels
    • Support policies and procedures
    • Costs and approvals (internal and customer costs)
    IT Processes
    • CIO
    • IT Management
    • VP of IT Governance
    • VP of IT Strategy
    • IT process flow diagram
    • Processes in place and productivity levels (capacity)
    • Critical processes/processes the organization feels they do particularly well
    IT People
    • CIO
    • VP of Human Resources
    • IT organizational chart
    • Competency & capacity assessment
    • IT organizational structure (including resources from external service providers such as contractors) with appropriate job descriptions or roles and responsibilities
    • IT headcount and location
    Security
    • CISO
    • Security Architect
    • Security posture
    • Information security staff
    • Information security service providers
    • Information security tools
    • In-flight information security projects
    Projects
    • Head of Projects
    • Project portfolio
    • List of all future, ongoing, and recently completed projects
    Vendors
    • Head of Vendor Management
    • License inventory
    • Inventory (including what will and will not be transitioning, vendors, versions, number of licenses)

    Retain top talent throughout the transition

    Focus on retention and engagement

    • People are such a critical component of this process, especially in the selling organization.
    • Retaining employees, especially the critical employees who hold specific skills or knowledge, will ensure the success and longevity of the divesting organization, purchasing organization, or the new company.
    • Giving employees a role in the organization and ensuring they do not see their capabilities as redundant will be critical to the process.
    • It is okay if employees need to change what they were doing temporarily or even long-term. However, being transparent about these changes and highlighting their value to the process and organization(s) will help.
    • The first step to moving forward with retention is to look at the baseline engagement and culture of employees and the organization. This will help determine where to focus and allow you to identify changes in engagement that resulted from the transaction.
    • Job engagement drivers are levers that influence the engagement of employees in their day-to-day roles.
    • Organizational engagement drivers are levers that influence an employee’s engagement with the broader organization.
    • Retention drivers are employment needs. They don’t necessarily drive engagement, but they must be met for engagement to be possible.

    3.1.3 Measure staff engagement

    3-4 hours

    Input: Engagement survey

    Output: Baseline engagement scores

    Materials: Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT employees of current organization

    The purpose of this activity is to measure current staff engagement to have a baseline to measure against in the future state. This is a good activity to complete if you will be divesting or selling in entirety.

    The results from the survey should act as a baseline to determine what the organization is doing well in terms of employee engagement and what drivers could be improved upon.

    1. Review Info-Tech’s Build an IT Employee Engagement Program research and select a survey that will best meet your needs.
    2. Conduct the survey and note which drivers employees are currently satisfied with. Likewise, note where there are opportunities.
    3. Document actions that should be taken to mitigate the negative engagement drivers throughout the transaction and enhance or maintain the positive engagement drivers.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Assess culture as a part of engagement

    Culture should not be overlooked, especially as it relates to the separation of IT environments

    • There are three types of culture that need to be considered.
    • Most importantly, this transition is an opportunity to change the culture that might exist in your organization’s IT environment.
    • Make a decision on which type of culture you’d like IT to have post transition.

    Target Organization's Culture. The culture that the target organization is currently embracing. Their established and undefined governance practices will lend insight into this.

    Your Organization’s Culture. The culture that your organization is currently embracing. Examine people’s attitudes and behaviors within IT toward their jobs and the organization.

    Ideal Culture. What will the future culture of the IT organization be once separation is complete? Are there aspects that your current organization and the target organization embrace that are worth considering?

    Culture categories

    Map the results of the IT Culture Diagnostic to an existing framework

    Competitive
    • Autonomy
    • Confront conflict directly
    • Decisive
    • Competitive
    • Achievement oriented
    • Results oriented
    • High performance expectations
    • Aggressive
    • High pay for good performance
    • Working long hours
    • Having a good reputation
    • Being distinctive/different
    Innovative
    • Adaptable
    • Innovative
    • Quick to take advantage of opportunities
    • Risk taking
    • Opportunities for professional growth
    • Not constrained by rules
    • Tolerant
    • Informal
    • Enthusiastic
    Traditional
    • Stability
    • Reflective
    • Rule oriented
    • Analytical
    • High attention to detail
    • Organized
    • Clear guiding philosophy
    • Security of employment
    • Emphasis on quality
    • Focus on safety
    Cooperative
    • Team oriented
    • Fair
    • Praise for good performance
    • Supportive
    • Calm
    • Developing friends at work
    • Socially responsible

    Culture Considerations

    • What culture category was dominant for each IT organization?
    • Do you share the same dominant category?
    • Is your current dominant culture category the most ideal to have post-separation?

    3.1.4 Assess Culture

    3-4 hours

    Input: Cultural assessments for current IT organization, Cultural assessment for target IT organization

    Output: Goal for IT culture

    Materials: IT Culture Diagnostic

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT employees of current organization, IT employees of target organization, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the different cultures that might exist within the IT environments of the organizations involved. By understanding the culture that exists in the purchasing organization, you can identify the fit and prepare impacted staff for potential changes.

    1. Complete this activity by leveraging the blueprint Fix Your IT Culture, specifically the IT Culture Diagnostic.
    2. Fill out the diagnostic for the IT department in your organization:
      1. Answer the 16 questions in tab 2, Diagnostic.
      2. Find out your dominant culture and review recommendations in tab 3, Results.
    3. Document the results from tab 3, Results, in the M&A Sell Playbook if you are trying to record all artifacts related to the transaction in one place.
    4. Repeat the activity for the purchasing organization.
    5. Leverage the information to determine what the goal for the culture of IT will be post-separation if it will differ from the current culture.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Step 3.2

    Prepare to Separate

    Activities

    • 3.2.1 Create a carve-out roadmap
    • 3.2.2 Prioritize separation tasks
    • 3.2.3 Establish the separation roadmap
    • 3.2.4 Identify the buyer’s IT expectations
    • 3.2.5 Create a service/transaction agreement
    • 3.2.6 Estimate separation costs
    • 3.2.7 Create an employee transition plan
    • 3.2.8 Create functional workplans for employees
    • 3.2.9 Align project metrics with identified tasks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Transition team
    • Company M&A team
    • Purchasing organization

    Outcomes of Step

    Have an established plan of action toward separation across all domains and a strategy toward resources.

    Don’t underestimate the importance of separation preparation

    Separation involves taking the IT organization and dividing it into two or more separate entities.

    Testing the carve capabilities of the IT organization often takes 3 months. (Source: Cognizant, 2014)

    Daimler-Benz lost nearly $19 billion following its purchase of Chrysler by failing to recognize the cultural differences that existed between the two car companies. (Source: Deal Room)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Separating the IT organization requires more time and effort than business leaders will know. Frequently communicate challenges and lost opportunities when carving the IT environment out.

    Separation needs

    Identify the business objectives of the sale to determine the IT strategy

    Set up a meeting with your IT due diligence team to:

    • Ensure there will be no gaps in the delivery of products and services in the future state.
    • Discuss the people and processes necessary to achieve the target technology environment and support M&A business objectives.

    Use this opportunity to:

    • Identify data and application complexities between the involved organizations.
    • Identify the IT people and process gaps, initiatives, and levels of support expected.
    • Determine your infrastructure needs to ensure effectiveness and delivery of services:
      • Does IT have the infrastructure to support the applications and business capabilities?
      • Identify any gaps between the current infrastructure in both organizations and the infrastructure required.
      • Identify any redundancies/gaps.
      • Determine the appropriate IT separation strategies.
    • Document your gaps, redundancies, initiatives, and assumptions to help you track and justify the initiatives that must be undertaken and help estimate the cost of separation.

    Separation strategies

    There are several IT separation strategies that will let you achieve your target technology environment.

    IT Separation Strategies
    • Divest. Carve out elements of the IT organization and sell them to a purchasing organization with or without a service-level agreement.
    • Sell. Sell the entire IT environment to a purchasing organization. The purchasing organization takes full responsibility in delivering and running the IT environment.
    • Spin-Off Joint Venture. Carve out elements of the IT organization and combine them with elements of a new or purchasing organization to create a new entity.

    The approach IT takes will depend on the business objectives for the M&A.

    • Generally speaking, the separation strategy is well understood and influenced by the frequency of and rationale for selling.
    • Based on the initiatives generated by each business process owner, you need to determine the IT separation strategy that will best support the desired target technology environment, especially if you are still operating or servicing elements of that IT environment.

    Key considerations when choosing an IT separation strategy include:

    • What are the main business objectives of the M&A?
    • What are the key synergies expected from the transaction?
    • What IT separation strategy best helps obtain these benefits?
    • What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable and long-term growth?

    Separation strategies in detail

    Review highlights and drawbacks of different separation strategies

    Divest
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses striving to reduce costs and potentially even generate revenue for the business through the delivery of SLAs.
    • Opportunity to reduce or scale back on lines of business or products that are not driving profits.
      Drawbacks
    • May be forced to give up critical staff that have been known to deliver high value.
    • The IT department is left to deliver services to the purchasing organization with little support or consideration from the business.
    • There can be increased risk and security concerns that need to be addressed.
    Sell
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to gain capital to exit the market profitably or to enter a new market with a large sum of capital.
    • The business will no longer exist, and as a result all operational costs, including IT, will become redundant.
      Drawbacks
    • IT is no longer needed as an operating or capital service for the organization.
    • Lost resources, including highly trained and critical staff.
    • May require packaging employees off and using the profit or capital generated to cover any closing costs.
    Spin-Off or Joint Venture
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to expand their market presence or acquire new products. Essentially aligning the two organizations in the same market.
    • Each side has a unique offering but complementing capabilities.
      Drawbacks
    • As much as the organization is going through a separation from the original company, it will be going through an integration with the new company.
    • There could be differences in culture.
    • This could require a large amount of investment without a guarantee of profit or success.

    Preparing the carve-out roadmap

    And why it matters so much

    • When carving out the IT environment in preparation for a divestiture, it’s important to understand the infrastructure, application, and data connections that might exist.
    • Much to the business’ surprise, carving out the IT environment is not easy, especially when considering the services and products that might depend on access to certain applications or data sets.
    • Once the business has indicated which elements they anticipate divesting, be prepared for testing the functionality and ability of this carve-out, either through automation or manually. There are benefits and drawbacks to both methods:
      • Automated requires a solution and a developer to code the tests.
      • Manual requires time to find the errors, possibly more time than automated testing.
    • Identify if there are dependencies that will make the carve-out difficult.
      • For example, the business is trying to divest Product X, but that product is integrated with Product Y, which is not being sold.
      • Consider all the processes and products that specific data might support as well.
      • Moreover, the data migration tool will need to enter the ERP system and identify not just the data but all supporting and historical elements that underlie the data.

    Critical components to consider:

    • Selecting manual or automated testing
    • Determining data dependencies
    • Data migration capabilities
    • Auditing approval
    • People and skills that support specific elements being carved out

    3.2.1 Create a carve-out roadmap

    6 hours

    Input: Items included in the carve-out, Dependencies, Whether testing is completed, If the carve-out will pass audit, If the carve-out item is prepared to be separated

    Output: Carve-out roadmap

    Materials: Business’ divestiture plan, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business leaders, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to prepare the IT environment by identifying a carve-out roadmap, specifically looking at data, infrastructure, and applications. Feel free to expand the roadmap to include other categories as your organization sees fit.

    1. In the Carve-Out Roadmap in the M&A Sell Playbook, identify the key elements of the carve-out in the first column.
    2. Note any dependencies the items might have. For example:
      • The business is selling Product X, which is linked to Data X and Data Y. The organization does not want to sell Data Y. Data X would be considered dependent on Data Y.
    3. Once the dependencies have been confirmed, begin automated or manual testing to examine the possibility of separating the data sets (or other dependencies) from one another.
    4. After identifying an acceptable method of separation, inform the auditing individual or body and confirm that there would be no repercussions for the planned process.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    3.2.2 Prioritize separation tasks

    2 hours

    Input: Separation tasks, Transition team, M&A RACI

    Output: Prioritized separation list

    Materials: Separation task checklist, Separation roadmap

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to prioritize the different separation tasks that your organization has identified as necessary to this transaction. Some tasks might not be relevant for this particular transaction, and others might be critical.

    1. Begin by downloading the SharePoint or Excel version of the M&A Separation Project Management Tool.
    2. Identify which separation tasks you want to have as part of your project plan. Alter or remove any tasks that are irrelevant to your organization. Add in tasks you think are missing.
    3. When deciding criticality of the task, consider the effect on stakeholders, those who are impacted or influenced in the process of the task, and dependencies (e.g. data strategy needs to be addressed first before you can tackle its dependencies, like data quality).
    4. Feel free to edit the way you measure criticality. The standard tool leverages a three-point scale. At the end, you should have a list of tasks in priority order based on criticality.

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Separation checklists

    Prerequisite Checklist
    • Build the project plan for separation and prioritize activities
      • Plan first day
      • Plan first 30/100 days
      • Plan first year
    • Create an organization-aligned IT strategy
    • Identify critical stakeholders
    • Create a communication strategy
    • Understand the rationale for the sale or divestiture
    • Develop IT's sale/divestiture strategy
      • Determine goal opportunities
      • Create the mission and vision statements
      • Create the guiding principles
      • Create program metrics
    • Consolidate reports from due diligence/data room
    • Conduct culture assessment
    • Create a transaction team
    • Establish a service/technical transaction agreement
    • Plan and communicate culture changes
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Assess baseline engagement
    Business
    • Design an enterprise architecture
    • Document your business architecture
    • Meet compliance and regulatory standards
    • Identify and assess all of IT's risks
    Applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
      • CRM
      • HRIS
      • Financial
      • Sales
      • Risk
      • Security
      • ERP
      • Email
    • Develop method of separating applications
    • Model critical applications that have dependencies on one another
    • Identify the infrastructure capacity required to support critical applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • Build an IT budget
    • Structure operating budget
    • Structure capital budget
    • Identify the workforce demand vs. capacity
    • Establish and monitor key metrics
    • Communicate value realized/cost savings
    Data
    • Confirm data strategy
    • Confirm data governance
    • Build a data architecture roadmap
    • Analyze data sources and domains
    • Evaluate data storage (on-premises vs. cloud)
    • Develop an enterprise content management strategy and roadmap
    • Ensure cleanliness/usability of data sets
    • Identify data sets that can remain operational if reduced/separated
    • Develop reporting and analytics capabilities
    • Confirm data strategy
    Operations
    • Manage sales access to customer data
    • Determine locations and hours of operation
    • Separate/terminate phone lists and extensions
    • Split email address books
    • Communicate helpdesk/service desk information

    Separation checklists (continued)

    Infrastructure
    • Manage organization domains
    • Consolidate data centers
    • Compile inventory of vendors, versions, switches, and routers
    • Review hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Review outsourcing/service provider agreements
    • Review service-level agreements
    • Assess connectivity linkages between locations
    • Plan to migrate to a single email system if necessary
    • Determine network access concerns
    Vendors
    • Establish a sustainable vendor management office
    • Review vendor landscape
    • Identify warranty options
    • Identify the licensing grant
    • Rationalize vendor services and solutions
    People
    • Design an IT operating model
    • Design your future IT organizational structure
    • Conduct a RACI for prioritized activities
    • Conduct a culture assessment and identify goal IT culture
    • Build an IT employee engagement program
    • Determine critical roles and systems/process/products they support
    • Define new job descriptions with meaningful roles and responsibilities
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans
    Projects
    • Identify projects to be on hold
    • Communicate project intake process
    • Reprioritize projects
    Products & Services
    • Redefine service catalog
    • Ensure customer interaction requirements are met
    • Select a solution for product lifecycle management
    • Plan service-level agreements
    Security
    • Conduct a security assessment
    • Develop accessibility prioritization and schedule
    • Establish an information security strategy
    • Develop a security awareness and training program
    • Develop and manage security governance, risk, and compliance
    • Identify security budget
    • Build a data privacy and classification program
    IT Processes
    • Evaluate current process models
    • Determine productivity/capacity levels of processes
    • Identify processes to be changed/terminated
    • Establish a communication plan
    • Develop a change management process
    • Establish/review IT policies
    • Evaluate current process models

    3.2.2 Establish the separation roadmap

    2 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Carve-out roadmap, Employee transition plan, Separation RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners

    Output: Separation roadmap

    Materials: M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (Excel), SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transition team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a roadmap to support IT throughout the separation process. Using the information gathered in previous activities, you can create a roadmap that will ensure a smooth separation.

    1. Use our Separation Project Management Tool to help track critical elements in relation to the separation project. There are a few options available:
      1. Follow the instructions on the next slide if you are looking to upload our SharePoint project template. Additional instructions are available in the SharePoint Template Step-by-Step Deployment Guide.
      2. If you cannot or do not want to use SharePoint as your project management solution, download our Excel version of the tool.
        **Remember that this your tool, so customize to your liking.
    2. Identify who will own or be accountable for each of the separation tasks and establish the time frame for when each project should begin and end. This will confirm which tasks should be prioritized.

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint Template)

    Follow these instructions to upload our template to your SharePoint environment

    1. Create or use an existing SP site.
    2. Download the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint) .wsp file from the Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint landing page.
    3. To import a template into your SharePoint environment, do the following:
      1. Open PowerShell.
      2. Connect-SPO Service (need to install PowerShell module).
      3. Enter in your tenant admin URL.
      4. Enter in your admin credentials.
      5. Set-SPO Site https://YourDomain.sharepoint.com/sites/YourSiteHe... -DenyAddAndCustomizePages 0
      OR
      1. Turn on both custom script features to allow users to run custom
    4. Screenshot of the 'Custom Script' option for importing a template into your SharePoint environment. Feature description reads 'Control whether users can run custom script on personal sites and self-service created sites. Note: changes to this setting might take up to 24 hours to take effect. For more information, see http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkIn=397546'. There are options to prevent or allow users from running custom script on personal/self-service created sites.
    5. Enable the SharePoint Server feature.
    6. Upload the .wsp file in Solutions Gallery.
    7. Deploy by creating a subsite and select from custom options.
      • Allow or prevent custom script
      • Security considerations of allowing custom script
      • Save, download, and upload a SharePoint site as a template
    8. Refer to Microsoft documentation to understand security considerations and what is and isn’t supported:

    For more information, check out the SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide.

    Supporting the transition and establishing service-level agreements

    The purpose of this part of the transition is to ensure both buyer and seller have a full understanding of expectations for after the transaction.

    • Once the organizations have decided to move forward with a deal, all parties need a clear level of agreement.
    • IT, since it is often seen as an operational division of an organization, is often expected to deliver certain services or products once the transaction has officially closed.
    • The purchasing organization or the new company might depend on IT to deliver these services until they are able to provide those services on their own.
    • Having a clear understanding of what the buyer’s expectations are and what your company, as the selling organization, can provide is important.
    • Have a conversation with the buyer and document those expectations in a signed service agreement.

    3.2.4 Identify the buyer's IT expectations

    3-4 hours

    Input: Carve-out roadmap, Separation roadmap, Up-to-date version of the agreement

    Output: Buyer’s IT expectations

    Materials: Questions for meeting

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Purchasing company M&A team, Purchasing company IT leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to determine if the buyer has specific service expectations for your IT organization. By identifying, documenting, and agreeing on what services your IT organization will be responsible for, you can obtain a final agreement to protect you as the selling organization.

    1. Buyers should not assume certain services will be provided. Organize a meeting with IT leaders and the company M&A teams to determine what services will be provided.
    2. The next slide has a series of questions that you can start from. Ensure you get detailed information about each of the services.
    3. Once you fully understand the buyer’s IT expectations, create an SLA in the next activity and obtain sign-off from both organizations.

    Questions to ask the buyer

    1. What services would you like my IT organization to provide?
    2. How long do you anticipate those services will be provided to you?
    3. How do you expect your staff/employees to communicate requests or questions to my staff/employees?
    4. Are there certain days or times that you expect these services to be delivered?
    5. How many staff do you expect should be available to support you?
    6. What should be the acceptable response time on given service requests?
    7. When it comes to the services you require, what level of support should we provide?
    8. If a service requires escalation to Level 2 or Level 3 support, are we still expected to support this service? Or are we only Level 1 support?
    9. What preventative security methods does your organization have to protect our environment during this agreement period?

    3.2.5 Create a service/ transaction agreement

    6 hours

    Input: Buyer's expectations, Separation roadmap

    Output: SLA for the purchasing organization

    Materials: Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement Template, M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (Excel)

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Purchasing company M&A team, Purchasing company IT leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to determine if the buyer has specific service expectations for your IT organization post-transaction that your IT organization is agreeing to provide.

    1. Document the expected services and the related details in a service-level agreement.
    2. Provide the SLA to the purchasing organization.
    3. Obtain sign-off from both organizations on the level of service that is expected of IT.
    4. Update the M&A Separation Project Management Tool Excel or SharePoint document to reflect any additional items that the purchasing organization identified.

    *For organizations being purchased in their entirety, this activity may not be relevant.

    Modify the Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement with the agreed-upon terms of the SLA.

    Importance of estimating separation costs

    Change is the key driver of separation costs

    Separation costs are dependent on the following:
    • Meeting synergy targets – whether that be cost saving or growth related.
      • Employee-related costs, licensing, and reconfiguration fees play a huge part in meeting synergy targets.
    • Adjustments related to compliance or regulations – especially if there are changes to legal entities, reporting requirements, or risk mitigation standards.
    • Governance or third party–related support required to ensure timelines are met and the separation is a success.
    Separation costs vary by industry type.
    • Certain industries may have separation costs made up of mostly one type, differing from other industries, due to the complexity and demands of the transaction. For example:
      • Healthcare separation costs are mostly driven by regulatory, safety, and quality standards, as well as consolidation of the research and development function.
      • Energy and Utilities tend to have the lowest separation costs due to most transactions occurring within the same sector rather than as cross-sector investments. For example, oil and gas transactions tend to be for oil fields and rigs (strategic fixed assets), which can easily be added to the buyer’s portfolio.

    Separation costs are more related to the degree of change required than the size of the transaction.

    3.2.6 Estimate separation costs

    3-4 hours

    Input: Separation tasks, Transition team, Valuation of current IT environment, Valuation of target IT environment, Outputs from data room, Technical debt, Employees

    Output: List of anticipated costs required to support IT separation

    Materials: Separation task checklist, Separation roadmap, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to estimate the costs that will be associated with the separation. Identify and communicate a realistic figure to the larger M&A team within your company as early in the process as possible. This ensures that the funding required for the transaction is secured and budgeted for in the overarching transaction.

    1. On the associated slide in the M&A Sell Playbook, input:
      • Task
      • Domain
      • Cost type
      • Total cost amount
      • Level of certainty around the cost
    2. Provide a copy of the estimated costs to the company’s M&A team. Also provide any additional information identified earlier to help them understand the importance of those costs.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Employee transition planning

    Considering employee impact will be a huge component to ensure successful separation

    • Meet With Leadership
    • Plan Individual and Department Redeployment
    • Plan Individual and Department Layoffs
    • Monitor and Manage Departmental Effectiveness
    • For employees, the transition could mean:
      • Changing from their current role to a new role to meet requirements and expectations throughout the transition.
      • Being laid off because the role they are currently occupying has been made redundant.
    • It is important to plan for what the M&A separation needs will be and what the IT operational needs will be.
    • A lack of foresight into this long-term plan could lead to undue costs and headaches trying to retain critical staff, rehiring positions that were already let go, and keeping redundant employees longer then necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Being transparent throughout the process is critical. Do not hesitate to tell employees the likelihood that their job may be made redundant. This will ensure a high level of trust and credibility for those who remain with the organization after the transaction.

    3.2.7 Create an employee transition plan

    3-4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, IT organizational design

    Output: Employee transition plans

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook, Whiteboard, Sticky notes, Markers

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a transition plan for employees.

    1. Transition planning can be done at specific individual levels or more broadly to reflect a single role. Consider these four items in the transition plan:
      • Understand the direction of the employee transitions.
      • Identify employees that will be involved in the transition (moved or laid off).
      • Prepare to meet with employees.
      • Meet with employees.
    2. For each employee that will be facing some sort of change in their regular role, permanent or temporary, create a transition plan.
    3. For additional information on transitioning employees, review the blueprint Streamline Your Workforce During a Pandemic.

    **Note that if someone’s future role is a layoff, then there is no need to record anything for skills needed or method for skill development.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    3.2.8 Create functional workplans for employees

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Employee transition plan, Separation RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners

    Output: Employee functional workplans

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook, Learning and development tools

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT management team, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a functional workplan for the different employees so that they know what their key role and responsibilities are once the transaction occurs.

    1. First complete the transition plan from the previous activity (3.2.7) and the separation roadmap. Have these documents ready to review throughout this process.
    2. Identify the employees who will be transitioning to a new role permanently or temporarily. Creating a functional workplan is especially important for these employees.
    3. Identify the skills these employees need to have to support the separation. Record this in the corresponding slide in the M&A Sell Playbook.
    4. For each employee, identify someone who will be a point of contact for them throughout the transition.

    It is recommended that each employee have a functional workplan. Leverage the IT managers to support this task.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Metrics for separation

    Valuation & Due Diligence

    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target

    Execution & Value Realization

    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT separation
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    3.2.9 Align project metrics with identified tasks

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Employee transition plan, Separation RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners, M&A goals

    Output: Separation-specific metrics to measure success

    Materials: Separation roadmap, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to understand how to measure the success of the separation project by aligning metrics to each identified task.

    1. Review the M&A goals identified by the business. Your metrics will need to tie back to those business goals.
    2. Identify metrics that align to identified tasks and measure achievement of those goals. For each metric you consider, ask the following questions:
      • What is the main goal or objective that this metric is trying to solve?
      • What does success look like?
      • Does the metric promote the right behavior?
      • Is the metric actionable? What is the story you are trying to tell with this metric?
      • How often will this get measured?
      • Are there any metrics it supports or is supported by?

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this mid-transaction phase you should:

    Have successfully evaluated your IT people, processes, and technology to determine a roadmap forward for separating or selling.

    Key outcomes from the Due Diligence & Preparation phase
    • Participate in due diligence activities to comply with regulatory and auditing standards and prepare employees for the transition.
    • Create a separation roadmap that considers the tasks that will need to be completed and the resources required to support separation.
    Key deliverables from the Due Diligence & Preparation phase
    • Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • Gather data room artifacts
    • Measure staff engagement
    • Assess culture
    • Create a carve-out roadmap
    • Prioritize separation tasks
    • Establish the separation roadmap
    • Identify the buyer’s IT expectations
    • Create a service/transaction agreement
    • Estimate separation costs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Create functional workplans for employees
    • Align project metrics with identified tasks

    M&A Sell Blueprint

    Phase 4

    Execution & Value Realization

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Phase 4

    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Monitor service agreements
    • Continually update the project plan
    • Confirm separation costs
    • Review IT’s transaction value
    • Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT
    • Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Vendor management team
    • IT transaction team
    • Company M&A team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Engage in Separation

    Day 4

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for IntegrationPlan the Separation RoadmapPrepare Employees for the TransitionEngage in SeparationAssess the Transaction Outcomes (Must be within 30 days of transaction date)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture/sale.
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and determine the IT transaction team.
    • 0.3 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.2 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.3 Establish the separation strategy.
    • 1.4 Create the due diligence charter.
    • 2.1 Prioritize separation tasks.
    • 2.2 Establish the separation roadmap.
    • 2.3 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.
    • 2.4 Estimate separation costs.
    • 3.1 Measure staff engagement
    • 3.2 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.
    • 3.3 Create an employee transition plan.
    • 3.4 Create functional workplans for employees.
    • S.1 Complete the separation by regularly updating the project plan.
    • S.2 Assess the service/technical transaction agreement.
    • 4.1 Confirm separation costs.
    • 4.2 Review IT’s transaction value.
    • 4.3 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT.
    • 4.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions.

    Deliverables

    1. IT strategy
    2. IT operating model
    3. IT governance structure
    4. M&A transaction team
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. Separation strategy
    3. Due diligence charter
    1. Separation roadmap and associated resourcing
    1. Engagement assessment
    2. Culture assessment
    3. Employee transition plans and workplans
    1. Evaluate service/technical transaction agreement
    2. Updated separation project plan
    1. SWOT of transaction
    2. M&A Sell Playbook refined for future transactions

    What is the Execution & Value Realization phase?

    Post-transaction state

    Once the transaction comes to a close, it’s time for IT to deliver on the critical separation tasks. As the selling organization in this transaction, you need to ensure you have a roadmap that properly enables the ongoing delivery of your IT environment while simultaneously delivering the necessary services to the purchasing organization.

    Throughout the separation transaction, some of the most common obstacles IT should prepare for include difficulty separating the IT environment, loss of key personnel, disengaged employees, and security/compliance issues.

    Post-transaction, the business needs to understands the value they received by engaging in the transaction and the ongoing revenue they might obtain as a result of the sale. You also need to ensure that the IT environment is functioning and mitigating any high-risk outcomes.

    Goal: To carry out the planned separation activities and deliver the intended value to the business.

    Execution Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Execution & Value Realization phase, you must have addressed the following:

    • Understand the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue a sale or divestiture and what opportunities or pain points the sale should alleviate.
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team.
    • Identify the M&A governance.
    • Determine target metrics.
    • Select a separation strategy framework.
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team.
    • Create a carve-out roadmap.
    • Prioritize separation tasks.
    • Establish the separation roadmap.
    • Create employee transition plans.

    Before coming into the Execution & Value Realization phase, we recommend addressing the following:

    • Create vision and mission statements.
    • Establish guiding principles.
    • Create a future-state operating model.
    • Identify the M&A operating model.
    • Document the communication plan.
    • Examine the business perspective of IT.
    • Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Establish a due diligence charter.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business.
    • Gather and present due diligence data room artifacts.
    • Measure staff engagement.
    • Assess and plan for culture.
    • Estimate separation costs.
    • Create functional workplans for employees.
    • Identify the buyer’s IT expectations.
    • Create a service/ transaction agreement.

    Separation checklists

    Prerequisite Checklist
    • Build the project plan for separation and prioritize activities
      • Plan first day
      • Plan first 30/100 days
      • Plan first year
    • Create an organization-aligned IT strategy
    • Identify critical stakeholders
    • Create a communication strategy
    • Understand the rationale for the sale or divestiture
    • Develop IT's sale/divestiture strategy
      • Determine goal opportunities
      • Create the mission and vision statements
      • Create the guiding principles
      • Create program metrics
    • Consolidate reports from due diligence/data room
    • Conduct culture assessment
    • Create a transaction team
    • Establish a service/technical transaction agreement
    • Plan and communicate culture changes
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Assess baseline engagement
    Business
    • Design an enterprise architecture
    • Document your business architecture
    • Meet compliance and regulatory standards
    • Identify and assess all of IT's risks
    Applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
      • CRM
      • HRIS
      • Financial
      • Sales
      • Risk
      • Security
      • ERP
      • Email
    • Develop method of separating applications
    • Model critical applications that have dependencies on one another
    • Identify the infrastructure capacity required to support critical applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • Build an IT budget
    • Structure operating budget
    • Structure capital budget
    • Identify the workforce demand vs. capacity
    • Establish and monitor key metrics
    • Communicate value realized/cost savings
    Data
    • Confirm data strategy
    • Confirm data governance
    • Build a data architecture roadmap
    • Analyze data sources and domains
    • Evaluate data storage (on-premises vs. cloud)
    • Develop an enterprise content management strategy and roadmap
    • Ensure cleanliness/usability of data sets
    • Identify data sets that can remain operational if reduced/separated
    • Develop reporting and analytics capabilities
    • Confirm data strategy
    Operations
    • Manage sales access to customer data
    • Determine locations and hours of operation
    • Separate/terminate phone lists and extensions
    • Split email address books
    • Communicate helpdesk/service desk information

    Separation checklists (continued)

    Infrastructure
    • Manage organization domains
    • Consolidate data centers
    • Compile inventory of vendors, versions, switches, and routers
    • Review hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Review outsourcing/service provider agreements
    • Review service-level agreements
    • Assess connectivity linkages between locations
    • Plan to migrate to a single email system if necessary
    • Determine network access concerns
    Vendors
    • Establish a sustainable vendor management office
    • Review vendor landscape
    • Identify warranty options
    • Identify the licensing grant
    • Rationalize vendor services and solutions
    People
    • Design an IT operating model
    • Design your future IT organizational structure
    • Conduct a RACI for prioritized activities
    • Conduct a culture assessment and identify goal IT culture
    • Build an IT employee engagement program
    • Determine critical roles and systems/process/products they support
    • Define new job descriptions with meaningful roles and responsibilities
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans
    Projects
    • Identify projects to be on hold
    • Communicate project intake process
    • Reprioritize projects
    Products & Services
    • Redefine service catalog
    • Ensure customer interaction requirements are met
    • Select a solution for product lifecycle management
    • Plan service-level agreements
    Security
    • Conduct a security assessment
    • Develop accessibility prioritization and schedule
    • Establish an information security strategy
    • Develop a security awareness and training program
    • Develop and manage security governance, risk, and compliance
    • Identify security budget
    • Build a data privacy and classification program
    IT Processes
    • Evaluate current process models
    • Determine productivity/capacity levels of processes
    • Identify processes to be changed/terminated
    • Establish a communication plan
    • Develop a change management process
    • Establish/review IT policies
    • Evaluate current process models

    Execution & Value Realization

    Step 4.1

    Execute the Transaction

    Activities

    • 4.1.1 Monitor service agreements
    • 4.1.2 Continually update the project plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Monitor service agreements
    • Continually update the project plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Vendor management team
    • IT transaction team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Successfully execute the separation of the IT environments and update the project plan, strategizing against any roadblocks as they come.

    Key concerns to monitor during separation

    If you are entering the transaction at this point, consider and monitor the following three items above all else.

    Your IT environment, reputation as an IT leader, and impact on key staff will depend on monitoring these aspects.

    • Risk & Security. Make sure that the channels of communication between the purchasing organization and your IT environment are properly determined and protected. This might include updating or removing employees’ access to certain programs.
    • Retaining Employees. Employees who do not see a path forward in the organization or who feel that their skills are being underused will be quick to move on. Make sure they are engaged before, during, and after the transaction to avoid losing employees.
    • IT Environment Dependencies. Testing the IT environment several times and obtaining sign-off from auditors that this has been completed correctly should be completed well before the transaction occurs. Have a strong architecture outlining technical dependencies.

    For more information, review:

    • Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk
    • Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure Operations Organization
    • Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    4.1.1 Monitor service agreements

    3-6 months

    Input: Original service agreement, Risk register

    Output: Service agreement confirmed

    Materials: Original service agreement

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, External organization IT senior leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to monitor the established service agreements on an ongoing basis. Your organization is most at risk during the initial months following the transaction.

    1. Ensure the right controls exist to prevent the organization from unnecessarily opening itself up to risks.
    2. Meet with the purchasing organization/subsidiary three months after the transaction to ensure that everyone is satisfied with the level of services provided.
    3. This is not a quick and completed activity, but one that requires ongoing monitoring. Repeatedly identify potential risks worth mitigating.

    For additional information and support for this activity, see the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program.

    4.1.2 Continually update the project plan

    Reoccurring basis following transition

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Separation RACI, Activity owners

    Output: Updated separation project plan

    Materials: M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (Excel)

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT transaction team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to ensure that the project plan is continuously updated as your transaction team continues to execute on the various components outlined in the project plan.

    1. Set a regular cadence for the transaction team to meet, update the project plan, review the status of the various separation task items, and strategize how to overcome any roadblocks.
    2. Employ governance best practices in these meetings to ensure decisions can be made effectively and resources allocated strategically.

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Execution & Value Realization

    Step 4.2

    Reflection and Value Realization

    Activities

    • 4.2.1 Confirm separation costs
    • 4.2.2 Review IT’s transaction value
    • 4.2.3 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT
    • 4.2.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Transition team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Review the value that IT was able to generate around the transaction and strategize about how to improve future selling or separating transactions.

    4.2.1 Confirm separation costs

    3-4 hours

    Input: Separation tasks, Carve-out roadmap, Transition team, Previous RACI, Estimated separation costs

    Output: Actual separation costs

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transaction team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to confirm the associated costs around separation. While the separation costs would have been estimated previously, it’s important to confirm the costs that were associated with the separation in order to provide an accurate and up-to-date report to the company’s M&A team.

    1. Taking all the original items identified previously in activity 3.2.6, identify if there were changes in the estimated costs. This can be an increase or a decrease.
    2. Ensure that each cost has a justification for why the cost changed from the original estimation.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Track cost savings and revenue generation

    Throughout the transaction, the business would have communicated its goals, rationales, and expectations for the transaction. Sometimes this is done explicitly, and other times the information is implicit. Either way, IT needs to ensure that metrics have been defined and are measuring the intended value that the business expects. Ensure that the benefits realized to the organization are being communicated regularly and frequently.

    1. Define Metrics: Select metrics to track synergies through the separation.
      1. You can track value by looking at percentages of improvement in process-level metrics depending on the savings or revenue being pursued.
      2. For example, if the value being pursued is decreasing costs, metrics could range from capacity to output, highlighting that the output remains high despite smaller IT environments.
    2. Prioritize Value-Driving Initiatives: Estimate the cost and benefit of each initiative's implementation to compare the amount of business value to the cost. The benefits and costs should be illustrated at a high level. Estimating the exact dollar value of fulfilling a synergy can be difficult and misleading.
        Steps
      • Determine the benefits that each initiative is expected to deliver.
      • Determine the high-level costs of implementation (capacity, time, resources, effort).
    3. Track Cost Savings and Revenue Generation: Develop a detailed workplan to resource the roadmap and track where costs are saved and revenue is generated as the initiatives are undertaken.

    4.2.2 Review IT’s transaction value

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Separation RACI, Activity owners, M&A company goals

    Output: Transaction value

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company's M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to track how your IT organization performed against the originally identified metrics.

    1. If your organization did not have the opportunity to identify metrics, determine from the company M&A what those metrics might be. Review activity 3.2.9 for more information on metrics.
    2. Identify whether the metric (which should support a goal) was at, below, or above the original target metric. This is a very critical task for IT to complete because it allows IT to confirm that they were successful in the transaction and that the business can count on them in future transactions.
    3. Be sure to record accurate and relevant information on why the outcomes (good or bad) are supporting the M&A goals set out by the business.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    4.2.3 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT

    2 hours

    Input: Separation costs, Retention rates, Value that IT contributed to the transaction

    Output: Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business transaction team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the positive and negative elements of the transaction.

    1. Consider the internal and external elements that could have impacted the outcome of the transaction.
      • Strengths. Internal characteristics that are favorable as they relate to your development environment.
      • Weaknesses Internal characteristics that are unfavorable or need improvement.
      • Opportunities External characteristics that you may use to your advantage.
      • Threats External characteristics that may be potential sources of failure or risk.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    M&A Sell Playbook review

    With an acquisition complete, your IT organization is now more prepared then ever to support the business through future M&As

    • Now that the transaction is more than 80% complete, take the opportunity to review the key elements that worked well and the opportunities for improvement.
    • Critically examine the M&A Sell Playbook your IT organization created and identify what worked well to help the transaction and where your organization could adjust to do better in future transactions.
    • If your organization were to engage in another sale or divestiture under your IT leadership, how would you go about the transaction to make sure the company meets its goals?

    4.2.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    4 hours

    Input: Transaction and separation SWOT

    Output: Refined M&A playbook

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO

    The purpose of this activity is to revise the playbook and ensure it is ready to go for future transactions.

    1. Using the outputs from the previous activity, 4.2.3, determine what strengths and opportunities there were that should be leveraged in the next transaction.
    2. Likewise, determine which threats and weaknesses could be avoided in the future transactions.
      Remember, this is your M&A Sell Playbook, and it should reflect the most successful outcome for you in your organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this post-transaction phase you should:

    Have completed the separation post-transaction and be fluidly delivering the critical value that the business expected of IT.

    Key outcomes from the Execution & Value Realization phase
    • Ensure the separation tasks are being completed and that any blockers related to the transaction are being removed.
    • Determine where IT was able to realize value for the business and demonstrate IT’s involvement in meeting target goals.
    Key deliverables from the Execution & Value Realization phase
    • Monitor service agreements
    • Continually update the project plan
    • Confirm separation costs
    • Review IT’s transaction value
    • Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT
    • Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Congratulations, you have completed the M&A Sell Blueprint!

    Rather than reacting to a transaction, you have been proactive in tackling this initiative. You now have a process to fall back on in which you can be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in a separation or sale transaction. You have:

    • Created a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address divestitures or sales.
    • Retained critical staff and complied with any regulations throughout the transaction.
    • Delivered on the separation project plan successfully and communicated IT’s transaction value to the business.

    Now that you have done all of this, reflect on what went well and what can be improved if you were to engage in a similar divestiture or sale again.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8899

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    John Annand
    Principal Research Director | Infrastructure
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Scott Bickley
    Principal Research Director | Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Cole Cioran
    Practice Lead | Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Dana Daher
    Research Analyst | Strategy & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Eric Dolinar
    Manager | M&A Consulting
    Deloitte Canada
    Christoph Egel
    Director, Solution Design & Deliver
    Cooper Tire & Rubber Company
    Nora Fisher
    Vice President | Executive Services Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Larry Fretz
    Vice President | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    David Glazer
    Vice President of Analytics
    Kroll
    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President | Workshops and Delivery
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President | Research & Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Jennifer Jones
    Research Director | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nancy McCuaig
    Senior Vice President | Chief Technology and Data Office
    IGM Financial Inc.
    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Kenneth McGee
    Research Fellow | Strategy & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nayma Naser
    Associate
    Deloitte
    Andy Neill
    Practice Lead | Data & Analytics, Enterprise Architecture
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Rick Pittman
    Vice President | Research
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Rocco Rao
    Research Director | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Mark Rosa
    Senior Vice President & Chief Information Officer
    Mohegan Gaming and Entertainment
    Tracy-Lynn Reid
    Research Lead | People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Jim Robson
    Senior Vice President | Shared Enterprise Services (retired)
    Great-West Life
    Steven Schmidt
    Senior Managing Partner Advisory | Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nikki Seventikidis
    Senior Manager | Finance Initiative & Continuous Improvement
    CST Consultants Inc.
    Allison Straker
    Research Director | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Justin Waelz
    Senior Network & Systems Administrator
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Sallie Wright
    Executive Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    “5 Ways for CIOs to Accelerate Value During Mergers and Acquisitions.” Okta, n.d. Web.

    Altintepe, Hakan. “Mergers and acquisitions speed up digital transformation.” CIO.com, 27 July 2018. Web.

    “America’s elite law firms are booming.” The Economist, 15 July 2021. Web.

    Barbaglia, Pamela, and Joshua Franklin. “Global M&A sets Q1 record as dealmakers shape post-COVID world.” Nasdaq, 1 April 2021. Web.

    Boyce, Paul. “Mergers and Acquisitions Definition: Types, Advantages, and Disadvantages.” BoyceWire, 8 Oct. 2020. Web.

    Bradt, George. “83% Of Mergers Fail -- Leverage A 100-Day Action Plan For Success Instead.” Forbes, 27 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Capgemini. “Mergers and Acquisitions: Get CIOs, IT Leaders Involved Early.” Channel e2e, 19 June 2020. Web.

    Chandra, Sumit, et al. “Make Or Break: The Critical Role Of IT In Post-Merger Integration.” IMAA Institute, 2016. Web.

    Deloitte. “How to Calculate Technical Debt.” The Wall Street Journal, 21 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Ernst & Young. “IT As A Driver Of M&A Success.” IMAA Institute, 2017. Web.

    Fernandes, Nuno. “M&As In 2021: How To Improve The Odds Of A Successful Deal.” Forbes, 23 March 2021. Web.

    “Five steps to a better 'technology fit' in mergers and acquisitions.” BCS, 7 Nov. 2019. Web.

    Fricke, Pierre. “The Biggest Opportunity You’re Missing During an M&Aamp; IT Integration.” Rackspace, 4 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Garrison, David W. “Most Mergers Fail Because People Aren't Boxes.” Forbes, 24 June 2019. Web.

    Harroch, Richard. “What You Need To Know About Mergers & Acquisitions: 12 Key Considerations When Selling Your Company.” Forbes, 27 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Hope, Michele. “M&A Integration: New Ways To Contain The IT Cost Of Mergers, Acquisitions And Migrations.” Iron Mountain, n.d. Web.

    “How Agile Project Management Principles Can Modernize M&A.” Business.com, 13 April 2020. Web.

    Hull, Patrick. “Answer 4 Questions to Get a Great Mission Statement.” Forbes, 10 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Kanter, Rosabeth Moss. “What We Can Learn About Unity from Hostile Takeovers.” Harvard Business Review, 12 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Koller, Tim, et al. “Valuation: Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies, 7th edition.” McKinsey & Company, 2020. Web.

    Labate, John. “M&A Alternatives Take Center Stage: Survey.” The Wall Street Journal, 30 Oct. 2020. Web.

    Lerner, Maya Ber. “How to Calculate ROI on Infrastructure Automation.” DevOps.com, 1 July 2020. Web.

    Loten, Angus. “Companies Without a Tech Plan in M&A Deals Face Higher IT Costs.” The Wall Street Journal, 18 June 2019. Web.

    Low, Jia Jen. “Tackling the tech integration challenge of mergers today” Tech HQ, 6 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Lucas, Suzanne. “5 Reasons Turnover Should Scare You.” Inc. 22 March 2013. Web.

    “M&A Trends Survey: The future of M&A. Deal trends in a changing world.” Deloitte, Oct. 2020. Web.

    Maheshwari, Adi, and Manish Dabas. “Six strategies tech companies are using for successful divesting.” EY, 1 Aug. 2020. Web.

    Majaski, Christina. “Mergers and Acquisitions: What's the Difference?” Investopedia, 30 Apr. 2021.

    “Mergers & Acquisitions: Top 5 Technology Considerations.” Teksetra, 21 Jul. 2020. Web.

    “Mergers Acquisitions M&A Process.” Corporate Finance Institute, n.d. Web.

    “Mergers and acquisitions: A means to gain technology and expertise.” DLA Piper, 2020. Web.

    Nash, Kim S. “CIOs Take Larger Role in Pre-IPO Prep Work.” The Wall Street Journal, 5 March 2015. Web.

    O'Connell, Sean, et al. “Divestitures: How to Invest for Success.” McKinsey, 1 Aug. 2015. Web

    Paszti, Laila. “Canada: Emerging Trends In Information Technology (IT) Mergers And Acquisitions.” Mondaq, 24 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Patel, Kiison. “The 8 Biggest M&A Failures of All Time” Deal Room, 9 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Peek, Sean, and Paula Fernandes. “What Is a Vision Statement?” Business News Daily, 7 May 2020. Web.

    Ravid, Barak. “How divestments can re-energize the technology growth story.” EY, 14 July 2021. Web.

    Ravid, Barak. “Tech execs focus on growth amid increasingly competitive M&A market.” EY, 28 April 2021. Web.

    Resch, Scott. “5 Questions with a Mergers & Acquisitions Expert.” CIO, 25 June 2019. Web.

    Salsberg, Brian. “Four tips for estimating one-time M&A integration costs.” EY, 17 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Samuels, Mark. “Mergers and acquisitions: Five ways tech can smooth the way.” ZDNet, 15 Aug. 2018. Web.

    “SAP Divestiture Projects: Options, Approach and Challenges.” Cognizant, May, 2014. Web.

    Steeves, Dave. “7 Rules for Surviving a Merger & Acquisition Technology Integration.” Steeves and Associates, 5 Feb. 2020. Web.

    Tanaszi, Margaret. “Calculating IT Value in Business Terms.” CSO, 27 May 2004. Web.

    “The CIO Playbook. Nine Steps CIOs Must Take For Successful Divestitures.” SNP, 2016. Web.

    “The Role of IT in Supporting Mergers and Acquisitions.” Cognizant, Feb. 2015. Web.

    Torres, Roberto. “M&A playbook: How to prepare for the cost, staff and tech hurdles.” CIO Dive, 14 Nov. 2019. Web.

    “Valuation Methods.” Corporate Finance Institute, n.d. Web.

    Weller, Joe. “The Ultimate Guide to the M&A Process for Buyers and Sellers.” Smartsheet, 16 May 2019. Web.

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}180|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $220,866 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 34 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Application delivery has modernized. There are increasing expectations on departments to deliver on organizational and product objectives with increasing velocity.
    • Application departments produce many diverse, divergent products, applications, and services with expectations of frequent updates and changes based on rapidly changing landscapes

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There is no such thing as a universal “applications department.” Unlike other domains of IT, there are no widely accepted frameworks that clearly outline universal best practices of application delivery and management.
    • Different software needs and delivery orientations demand a tailored structure and set of processes, especially when managing a mixed portfolio or multiple delivery methods.

    Impact and Result

    Understand what your department’s purpose is through articulating its strategy in three steps:

    • Determining your application department’s values, principles, and orientation.
    • Laying out the goals, objectives, metrics, and priorities of the department.
    • Building a communication plan to communicate your overall department strategy.

    Build an Application Department Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build an application department strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take stock of who you are

    Consider and record your department’s values, principles, orientation, and capabilities.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 1: Take Stock of Who You Are
    • Application Department Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Articulate your strategy

    Define your department’s strategy through your understanding of your department combined with everything that you do and are working to do.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 2: Articulate Your Strategy
    • Application Department Strategy Template

    3. Communicate your strategy

    Communicate your department’s strategy to your key stakeholders.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 3: Communicate Your Strategy

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an Application Department Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Take Stock of Who You Are

    The Purpose

    Understand what makes up your application department beyond the applications and services provided.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Articulating your guiding principles, values, capabilities, and orientation provides a foundation for expressing your department strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify your team’s values and guiding principles.

    1.2 Define your department’s orientation.

    Outputs

    A summary of your department’s values and guiding principles

    A clear view of your department’s orientation and supporting capabilities

    2 Articulate Your Strategy

    The Purpose

    Lay out all the details that make up your application department strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed application department strategy canvas containing everything you need to communicate your strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Write your application department vision statement.

    2.2 Define your application department goals and metrics.

    2.3 Specify your department capabilities and orientation.

    2.4 Prioritize what is most important to your department.

    Outputs

    Your department vision

    Your department’s goals and metrics that contribute to achieving your department’s vision

    Your department’s capabilities and orientation

    A prioritized roadmap for your department

    3 Communicate Your Strategy

    The Purpose

    Lay out your strategy’s communication plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Your application department strategy presentation ready to be presented to your stakeholders.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify your stakeholders.

    3.2 Develop a communication plan.

    3.3 Wrap-up and next steps

    Outputs

    List of prioritized stakeholders you want to communicate with

    A plan for what to communicate to each stakeholder

    Communication is only the first step – what comes next?

    Explore the Secrets of Oracle Cloud Licensing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}142|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Organizations are considering moving workloads to the cloud; however, they often struggle to understand Oracle's licensing and services models.
    • Complexity of licensing and high price tags can make the renewal process an overwhelming experience.
    • Oracle’s SaaS applications are the most mature, but Oracle’s on-premises E-Business Suite still has functionality gaps in comparison to Oracle’s cloud apps.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Understand the Oracle agenda. Oracle has established a unique approach to their cloud offerings – they want all of your workloads on the Red Stack.
    • Communicate effectively. Be aware that Oracle will reach out to members at your organization at various levels. Having your executives on the same page is critical to successfully managing Oracle.
    • Negotiate hard. Oracle needs the deal more than the customer. Oracle's top leaders are heavily incentivized to drive massive cloud adoption and increase Oracle's share price. Use this to your advantage.

    Impact and Result

    • Conducting business with Oracle is not typical compared to other vendors. To emerge successfully from a commercial transaction with Oracle, customers must learn the “Oracle way” of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, highly unique contracts, and license use policies coupled with a hyper-aggressive compliance function.
    • Leverage cloud spend to retire support on shelf-ware licenses, or gain virtualization rights for an on-premises environment.
    • Map out the process of how to negotiate from a position of strength, examining terms and conditions, discount percentages, and agreement pitfalls.
    • Carefully review key clauses in the Oracle Cloud Services Agreement to avoid additional spend and compliance risks.

    Explore the Secrets of Oracle Cloud Licensing Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should explore the secrets of Oracle Cloud licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evaluate licensing requirements

    Review current licensing options and models to determine which cloud products will most appropriately fit the organization's environment.

    • Oracle Cloud Services Agreement Terms and Conditions Evaluation Tool
    [infographic]

    Establish Effective Data Stewardship

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}133|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Data stewardship is a critical function in modern data governance. Every data-driven firm needs stewards who can tackle data issues and challenges rapidly. Data stewards help to reach agreement on data definition, quality, and usage. They direct efforts aimed at completing metadata, improving data quality, and ensuring regulatory compliance.
    • Stewards must also provide recommendations regarding data access, security, distribution, retention, archiving, and disposal.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • While the data steward role is crucial to establishing and sustaining effective governance of data, it is the role in the data governance operating structure that is often left ambiguous.
    • It is often perceived as requiring incremental IT skills and one with all new or unfamiliar functions.
    • In the ambition and haste to deliver on data governance, the various data governance role titles are communicated out to the wider organization, with data stewards especially left wondering: “Why am I being asked to be a data steward? What is expected of me? How will succeed in this role?”

    Impact and Result

    To establish effective and impactful data stewardship:

    • Clearly articulate the data stewardship value proposition.
    • Formally design and detail the data steward role, including functions, capabilities, etc.
    • Set up your data stewards for success: having a detailed role definition on paper is certainly not enough. Ensure you go the extra mile to deliver relevant training such as data stewardship onboarding, awareness program, etc.

    Establish Effective Data Stewardship Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish Effective Data Stewardship Storyboard – Research that provides a step-by-step approach to aid in the successful establishment of data steward role.

    Use this deck to establish a solid data governance foundation in your organization. Start by defining the value of data stewardship and data governance and demystifying the role.

    • Establish Effective Data Stewardship – Phases 1-3

    2. Data Governance Role Accelerator Kit – A brief deck that defines the clear functions for different roles in data governance.

    This brief guide outlines how to adapt a data governance organizational structure for your organization and defines the roles of data owner, data steward, and data custodian.

    • Data Governance Roles Accelerator Kit
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Establish Effective Data Stewardship

    Leverage your organization's business subject matter experts to drive impactful data use and handling.

    Analyst perspective

    Leverage your organization's business subject matter experts to drive impactful data use and handling.

    Data stewards bring valuable expertise and knowledge about their business areas: priorities, business capabilities and processes, and challenges and opportunities with respect to data. Because this knowledge cannot be easily replicated, going outside your organization to hire a data steward is not the most effective route.

    While it may seem difficult, organizing internally to harvest the already existing institutional knowledge of your business subject matter experts (SMEs) will give a better – and faster – return when setting up and formalizing data stewardship.

    The role must be well defined and communicated. We cannot expect SMEs to wear a hat without understanding the expectations for their role. They must be set up for success – they must be empowered, recognized, and rewarded.

    Crystal Singh, Director, Research and Advisory, Data and Analytics Practice

    Crystal Singh
    Director, Research and Advisory, Data and Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase breakdown

    Phase 1: Data Stewardship Value Proposition

    • Define the value of data stewardship and data governance, their importance, and the relationship between them.
    • Determine where data stewards fit in the bigger data governance operating structure. The data steward role will not be effective without the other data governance roles.
    • Highlight the gains of effective data stewardship: e.g. data quality management, data definition, data sharing, and the ethical use and handling of data.

    Phase breakdown

    Phase 2: Data Steward Role Design

    • Who makes a good data steward? Important knowledge and skills include subject area expertise, institutional knowledge, collaborative skills, interpersonal, and political skills, an understanding of your organization's culture, and the ability to build good partnerships across business functions and with data management.
    • Seek out SMEs from within your organization. This may require you to mold and shape individuals to step up and into the role. An external hire will give capacity but will be more difficult (and time consuming) to ramp up.
    • Consult internally in your organization. For example, consult and liaise with Human Resources (HR) to determine if job descriptions need to be updated, if there would be any impact to compensation, etc.
    • Determine if this role needs to be a full-time role.
    • Demystify the role. Clarify that this is not an IT role and therefore will not require IT skills.
    • Leverage Info-Tech data governance patterns:
      • Data Stewardship in Action – Sample Data Quality Issue Resolution Process Template and Business Term and Data Definitions
      • Sample Data Steward (and Data Owner) to Data Domain Mapping

    Phase breakdown

    Phase 3: Strategies for Data Stewardship Success

    • Establish a solid data governance foundation in your organization.
    • Develop data stewardship onboarding: e.g. literacy and training, and frequently asked questions (FAQs).
    • Gain support from data owners, the director general (DG) committee, data leadership, and executive leaders/champions.
    • Set up rewards and recognition for the role.
    • Establish a feedback loop/mechanism for data stewards so the stewardship program can be adjusted accordingly.
    • Establish communication and create awareness of the role.

    Establishing effective data stewardship

    Leverage your organization's business SMEs to drive impactful data use and handling.

    Unlock the value of data through people.

    Data Steward Value Proposition
    Clearly articulate the data stewardship value proposition. What's in it for the person, their line of business or mandate, and your organization as a whole.

    Data Steward Role Design
    Formally design and define the role of a data steward, including the functions and capabilities.

    Strategies for Success
    Set up your data stewards for success. Having a detailed role definition on paper is not enough. Ensure that you go the extra mile to deliver the relevant training, such as data stewardship onboarding and an awareness program.

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    Data stewardship is a critical function in modern data governance. Every data-driven firm needs stewards who can rapidly tackle data issues and challenges. Data stewards help to reach agreement on data definition, quality, and usage. They direct efforts aimed at completing metadata, improving data quality, and ensuring regulatory compliance.
    Stewards must also provide recommendations regarding data access, security, distribution, retention, archiving, and disposal.
    While the data steward role is crucial to establishing and sustaining the effective governance of data, it is the role in the data governance operating structure that is often left unclear, ambiguous, and open to misinterpretation.
    It is often perceived as requiring incremental IT skills and one with all new or unfamiliar functions.
    In the ambition and haste to deliver on data governance, the various data governance role titles are communicated to the wider organization, often leaving data stewards wondering why they are being asked to be a data steward, what is expected of them, and how they will succeed in this role.
    Info-Tech's approach to establish effective and impactful data stewardship:
    • Clearly articulate the data stewardship value proposition.
    • Formally design and define the role of data steward, including the functions and capabilities.
    • Set up your data stewards for success. Having a detailed role definition on paper is not enough. Ensure that you go the extra mile to deliver the relevant training, such as data stewardship onboarding and an awareness program.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Effective data governance requires a solid foundation. Data stewards provide the foundation for data governance. The time and effort to define this role properly will yield sound data governance return.

    Phase 1: Data Stewardship Value Proposition

    What is the VALUE of a DATA STEWARD?

    Value of a Data Steward

    Improved Data Quality Management

    Clear and Consistent Data Definition

    Increased Data Sharing and Collaboration

    Ethical Handling of Data

    Define the strategic value of data in your organization

    Harness the value of data to power intelligent and transformative organizational performance.

    Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders.

    Respond to industry disruption.

    Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs.

    Manage operations and mitigate risk.

    Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across an organization.

    Data governance is:

    • Executed according to agreed-upon models that describe who can take what actions with what information, when, and using what methods (CIO.com, 2021).
    • True business-IT collaboration that leads to increased consistency and confidence in data to support decision making

    If done correctly, data governance is not:

    • An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done
    • An inhibitor or impediment to using and sharing data

    Data governance is about putting guard rails in place to better support the use and handling of your organization's data.

    Is there a clear definition of data accountability and responsibility in your organization?

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}108|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $60,833 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • All organizations, of all sizes, have some amount of technical debt, but very few systematically track, manage, and communicate it.
    • Deferred project work is pushed over to operations, sometimes with little visibility or hand-off, where it gets deprioritized and lost.
    • IT doesn’t have the resources or authority to make needed changes to address the impact of tech debt and can’t make the case for improvement without good data on the problem.
    • Efforts to track technical debt get stuck in the weeds, don’t connect technical issues to business impact, and run out of steam.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Technical debt is a type of technical risk, which in turn is business risk. The business, not IT, must make the decision to accept or mitigate risk – but IT must help the business make an informed decision.
    • There are two ways to keep your technical debt at a manageable level – effectively, to mitigate risk: either stop introducing new debt or start paying back what you already have.

    Impact and Result

    • Define and identify your technical debt. Focus on tech debt you think you can actually fix.
    • Conduct a streamlined and targeted business impact analysis to prioritize tech debt based on its ongoing business impact.
    • Identify options to better manage technical debt and present your findings to business decision makers.

    Manage Your Technical Debt Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the business case to manage technical debt, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your technical debt

    Define, identify, and organize your technical debt in preparation for the technical debt impact analysis.

    • Technical Debt Business Impact Analysis Tool

    2. Measure your technical debt

    Conduct a technical debt business impact analysis.

    • Roadmap Tool

    3. Manage your technical debt

    Identify options to resolve technical debt and summarize the challenge and potential solutions for business decision makers.

    • Technical Debt Executive Summary Presentation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Manage Your Technical Debt

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define and Identify Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Create a working definition of technical debt and identify the technical debt in your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List your technical debt.

    Activities

    1.1 Develop a working definition for technical debt.

    1.2 Discuss your organization’s technical debt risk.

    1.3 Identify 5-10 high-impact technical debts to structure the impact analysis.

    Outputs

    Goals, opportunities, and constraints related to tech debt management

    A list of technical debt

    2 Measure Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Conduct a more-objective assessment of the business impact of technical debt.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the most-critical technical debt in your environment, in terms of business risk.

    Activities

    2.1 Review and modify business impact scoring scales.

    2.2 Identify reasonable scenarios to structure the impact analysis.

    2.3 Apply the scoring scale to identify the business impact of each technical debt.

    Outputs

    Business impact scoring scales

    Scenarios to support the impact analysis

    Technical debt impact analysis

    3 Build a Roadmap to Manage Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Leverage the technical debt impact analysis to identify, compare, and quantify projects that fix technical debt and projects that prevent it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create your plan to manage technical debt.

    Activities

    3.1 Brainstorm projects and action items to manage and pay back critical technical debt. Prioritize projects and action items to build a roadmap.

    3.2 Identify three possible courses of action to pay back each critical technical debt.

    3.3 Identify immediate next steps to manage remaining tech debt and limit the introduction of new tech debt.

    Outputs

    Technical debt management roadmap

    Technical debt executive summary

    Immediate next steps to manage technical debt

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}591|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $77,174 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Resource Planning
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-resource-planning
    • Enterprise application implementations are complex, and their success is critical to business operations.
    • Selecting the right software implementation partner is as important for the success of the ERP initiative as selecting the right software.
    • System implementation often thrusts the product into the spotlight, with the implementation partner being an afterthought, and all too often organizational needs are ignored altogether.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • ERP implementation is not a one-and-done exercise. Most often it is the start of a multi-year working relationship between the software vendor or systems integrator and your organization. Take the time to find the right fit to ensure success.
    • The conventional approach to ERP implementation partner selection puts the ERP vendor and systems integrators in the driver's seat with little regard to your specific needs as an organization. You need to take an eyes-wide-open approach to your organization’s strengths and weaknesses to properly select and manage the implementation partner relationship.
    • Self-assessment is the critical first step in a successful implementation. Every organization has a unique combination of critical success factors (CSFs) that will be required to unlock the potential of their ERP. You must find the right partner or partners whose strengths complement your weaknesses to ensure your success.
    • Before you start knocking on vendors’ doors, ensure you have a holistic request that encompasses the strategic, tactical, operational, and commodity factors required for the success of your ERP implementation.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s implementation partner selection process to find the right fit for your organization.
    • Understand the enterprise application CSFs and determine the unique requirements of your organization through this lens.
    • Define your implementation partner requirements separately from your software requirements and allow vendors to respond to those specifically.
    • Use our assessment tools to score and assess the CSFs required to select the right software implementation partners.

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should focus on selecting the right implementation partner, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your strategic needs

    Review the CSFs that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    • Select an ERP Implementation Partner Workbook

    2. Review your tactical, commodity, and operational needs

    Review the CSFs that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    3. Build your RFx and evaluate the responses

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    • Short-Form RFP Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Supplementary RFx Material
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Organizational Strategic Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    ERP strategy model defined

    Strategic needs identified

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Build your ERP strategy model.

    1.3 Assess your strategic needs.

    Outputs

    ERP strategy model

    ERP strategy model

    Strategic needs analysis

    2 Review Your Tactical, Commodity, and Operational Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tactical, commodity, and operational needs identified

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your tactical needs.

    2.2 Assess your commodity needs.

    2.3 Assess your operational needs.

    Outputs

    Tactical needs analysis

    Commodity needs analysis

    Operational needs analysis

    3 Build Your RFx

    The Purpose

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    Activities

    3.1 Decide on an RFI or RFP.

    3.2 Complete the RFx with the needs analysis.

    3.3 Build a list of targeted vendors

    Outputs

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    4 Evaluate Vendors

    The Purpose

    Build a scoring template for use in vendor evaluation to ensure consistent comparison criteria are used.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A consistent and efficient evaluation process

    Activities

    4.1 Assign weightings to the evaluation criteria.

    4.2 Run a vendor evaluation simulation to validate the process.

    Outputs

    Completed partner evaluation tool

    Application Maintenance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}30|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}30|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /applications

    The challenge

    • If you work with application maintenance or operations teams that handle the "run" of your applications, you may find that the sheer volume and variety of requests create large backlogs.
    • Your business and product owners may want scrum or DevOps teams to work on new functionality rather than spend effort on lifecycle management.
    • Increasing complexity and increasing reliance on technology may create unrealistic expectations for your maintenance teams. Business applications must be available around the clock, and new feature roadmaps cannot be side-tracked by maintenance.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Improving maintenance focus may mean doing less work but create more value. Your teams need to be realistic about what commitments they take—balance maintenance with business value and risk levels.
    • Treat maintenance the same as any other development practice. Use the same intake and prioritization practices. Uphold the same quality standards.

    Impact and results 

    • Justify the necessity of streamlined and regular maintenance. Understand each stakeholder's objectives and concerns, validate them against your staff's current state, processes, and technologies involved.
    • Maintenance and risk go hand in hand. And the business wants to move forward all the time as well. Strengthen your prioritization practice. Use a holistic view of the business and technical impacts, risks, urgencies across the maintenance needs and requests. That allows you to justify their respective positions in the overall development backlog. Identify opportunities to bring some requirements and features together.
    • Build a repeatable process with appropriate governance around it. Ensure that people know their roles and responsibilities and are held accountable.
    • Instill development best-practices into your maintenance processes.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand everyday struggles regarding application maintenance, the root causes, and our methodology to overcome these. We show you how we can support you.

    Understand your maintenance priorities

    Identify your stakeholders and understand their drivers.

    • Streamline Application Maintenance – Phase 1: Assess the Current Maintenance Landscape (ppt)
    • Application Maintenance Operating Model Template (doc)
    • Application Maintenance Resource Capacity Assessment (xls)
    • Application Maintenance Maturity Assessment (xls)

    Define and employ maintenance governance

    Identify the right level of governance appropriate to your company and business context for your application maintenance. That ensures that people uphold standards across maintenance practices.

    • Streamline Application Maintenance – Phase 2: Develop a Maintenance Release Schedule (ppt)

    Enhance your prioritization practices

    Most companies cannot do everything for all applications and systems. Build your maintenance triage and prioritization rules to safeguard your company, maximize business value generation and IT risks and requirements.

    • Streamline Application Maintenance – Phase 3: Optimize Maintenance Capabilities (ppt)

    Streamline your maintenance delivery

    Define quality standards in maintenance practices. Enforce these in alignment with the governance you have set up. Show a high degree of transparency and open discussions on development challenges.

    • Streamline Application Maintenance – Phase 4: Streamline Maintenance Delivery (ppt)
    • Application Maintenance Business Case Presentation Document (ppt)

     

     

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}212|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $108,234 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • All IT organizations are dependent on their vendors for technology products, services, and solutions to support critical business functions.
    • Measuring the impact of and establishing goals for the vendor management office (VMO) to maximize its effectiveness requires an objective and quantitative approach whenever possible.
    • Sharing the VMO’s impact internally is a balancing act between demonstrating value and self-promotion.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The return on investment (ROI) calculation for your VMO must be customized. The ROI components selected must match your VMO ROI maturity, resources, and roadmap. There is no one-size-fits-all approach to calculating VMO ROI.
    • ROI contributions come from many areas and sources. To maximize the VMO’s ROI, look outside the traditional framework of savings and cost avoidance to vendor-facing interactions and the impact the VMO has on internal departments.

    Impact and Result

    • Quantifying the contributions of the VMO takes the guess work out of whether the VMO is performing adequately.
    • Taking a comprehensive approach to measuring the value created by the VMO and the ROI associated with it will help the organization appreciate the importance of the VMO.
    • Establishing goals for the VMO with the help of the executives and key stakeholders ensures that the VMO is supporting the needs of the entire organization.

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should calculate and market internally your VMO’s ROI, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Get organized

    Begin the process by identifying your VMO’s ROI maturity level and which calculation components are most appropriate for your situation.

    • Capture and Market the ROI of the VMO – Phase 1: Get Organized
    • VMO ROI Maturity Assessment Tool
    • VMO ROI Calculator and Tracker
    • VMO ROI Data Source Inventory and Evaluation Tool
    • VMO ROI Summary Template

    2. Establish baseline

    Set measurement baselines and goals for the next measurement cycle.

    • Capture and Market the ROI of the VMO – Phase 2: Establish Baseline
    • VMO ROI Baseline and Goals Tool

    3. Measure and monitor results

    Measure the VMO's ROI and value created by the VMO’s efforts and the overall internal satisfaction with the VMO.

    • Capture and Market the ROI of the VMO – Phase 3: Measure and Monitor Results
    • RFP Cost Estimator
    • Improvements in Working Capital Estimator
    • Risk Estimator
    • General Process Cost Estimator and Delta Estimator
    • VMO Internal Client Satisfaction Survey
    • Vendor Security Questionnaire
    • Value Creation Worksheet
    • Deal Summary Report Template

    4. Report results

    Report the results to key stakeholders and executives in a way that demonstrates the value added by the VMO to the entire organization.

    • Capture and Market the ROI of the VMO – Phase 4: Report Results
    • Internal Business Review Agenda Template
    • IT Spend Analytics
    • VMO ROI Reporting Worksheet
    • VMO ROI Stakeholder Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Get Organized

    The Purpose

    Determine how you will measure the VMO’s ROI.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Focus your measurement on the appropriate activities.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine your VMO’s maturity level and identify applicable ROI measurement categories.

    1.2 Review and select the appropriate ROI formula components for each applicable measurement category.

    1.3 Compile a list of potential data sources, evaluate the viability of each data source selected, and assign data collection and analysis responsibilities.

    1.4 Communicate progress and proposed ROI formula components to executives and key stakeholders for feedback and/or approval/alignment.

    Outputs

    VMO ROI maturity level and first step of customizing the ROI formula components.

    Second and final step of customizing the ROI formula components…what will actually be measured.

    Viable data sources and assignments for team members.

    A progress report for key stakeholders and executives.

    2 Establish Baseline

    The Purpose

    Set baselines to measure created value against.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    ROI contributions cannot be objectively measured without baselines.

    Activities

    2.1 Gather baseline data.

    2.2 Calculate/set baselines.

    2.3 Set SMART goals.

    2.4 Communicate progress and proposed ROI formula components to executives and key stakeholders for feedback and/or approval/alignment.

    Outputs

    Data to use for calculating baselines.

    Baselines for measuring ROI contributions.

    Value creation goals for the next measurement cycle.

    An updated progress report for key stakeholders and executives.

    3 Measure and Monitor Results

    The Purpose

    Calculate the VMO’s ROI.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of whether the VMO is paying for itself.

    Activities

    3.1 Assemble the data and calculate the VMO’s ROI.

    3.2 Organize the data for the reporting step.

    Outputs

    The VMO’s ROI expressed in terms of how many times it pays for itself (e.g. 1X, 3X, 5X).

    Determine which supporting data will be reported.

    4 Report Results

    The Purpose

    Report results to stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholders understand the value of the VMO.

    Activities

    4.1 Create a reporting template.

    4.2 Determine reporting frequency.

    4.3 Decide how the reports will be distributed or presented.

    4.4 Send out a draft report and update based on feedback.

    Outputs

    A template for reporting ROI and supporting data.

    A decision about quarterly or annual reports.

    A decision regarding email, video, and in-person presentation of the ROI reports.

    Final ROI reports.

    Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}593|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Managers are responsible for driving the best performance out of their staff while still developing individuals professionally.
    • Micromanaging tasks is an ineffective, inefficient way to get things done and keep employees engaged at the same time.
    • Both managers and employees view goal setting as a cumbersome process that never materializes in day-to-day work.
    • Without a consistent and agile goal-setting environment that pervades every day, managers risk low productivity and disengaged employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Effective performance management occurs throughout the year, on a daily and weekly basis, not just at annual performance review time. Managers must embrace this reality and get into the habit of setting agile short-term goals to drive productivity.
    • Employee empowerment is one of the most significant contributors to employee engagement, which is a proven performance driver. Short-term goal setting, which is ultimately employee-owned, develops and nurtures a strong sense of employee empowerment.
    • Micromanaging employee tasks will get managers nowhere quickly. Putting in the effort to collaboratively define goals that benefit both the organization and the employee will pay off in the long run.
    • Goal setting should not be a cumbersome activity, but an agile, rolling habit that ensures employees are focused, supported, and given appropriate feedback to continue to drive performance.

    Impact and Result

    • Managers who have daily meetings to set goals are 17% more successful in terms of employee performance than managers who set goals annually.
    • Managers must be agile goal-setting role models, or risk over a third of their staff being confused about productivity expectations.
    • Managers that allow tracking of goals to be an inhibitor to goal setting are most likely to have a negative effect on employee performance success. In fact, tracking goals should not be a priority in the short-term.

    Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn the agile, short-term goal-setting process

    Implement agile goal setting with your team right away and drive performance.

    • Storyboard: Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance
    [infographic]

    Secrets of SAP S-4HANA Licensing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}231|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • With the relatively slow uptake of the S/4HANA platform, the pressure is immense for SAP to maintain revenue growth.
    • SAP’s definitions and licensing rules are complex and vague, making it extremely difficult to purchase with confidence while remaining compliant.
    • Aggressive audit tactics may be used to speed up the move to HANA.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mapping SAP products to HANA can be highly complex, leading to overspending and an inability to reduce future spend.
    • The deployment model chosen will directly impact commercial pathways forward.
    • Beware of digital (indirect) access licensing and compliance concerns.
    • Without having a holistic negotiation strategy, it is easy to hit a common obstacle and land into SAP’s playbook, requiring further spend.

    Impact and Result

    • Build a business case to evaluate S/4HANA.
    • Understand the S/4HANA roadmap and map current functionality to ensure compatibility.
    • Understand negotiating pricing and commercial terms.
    • Learn the “SAP way” of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, unique contracts, and license use policies combined with a hyper-aggressive compliance function.

    Secrets of SAP S/4HANA Licensing Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should explore the secrets of SAP S/4HANA licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish requirements

    Determining SAP’s fit within your organization is critical. Start off by building a business case to assess overarching drivers and justification for change, any net new business benefits and long-term sustainability. Oftentimes the ROI is negative, but the investment sets the stage for long-term growth.

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Your deployment model is more important than you think. Selecting a deployment model will dictate your licensing options followed by your contractual pathways forward.

    • SAP License Summary and Analysis Tool
    • SAP Digital Access Licensing Pricing Tool

    3. Negotiation and license management

    Know what’s in the contract. Each customer agreement is different and there may be existing terms that are beneficial. Depending on how much is spent, anything can be up for negation.

    • SAP S/4HANA Terms and Conditions Evaluator
    [infographic]

    We may not be able to show you this

    We may not be able to show you this just yet.
    Our deeper, more detailed content is reserved for Tymans Group clients. 

    If you are interested in retaining our services or would really like access, please contact us. 

    Optimize IT Change Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}409|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,585 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 27 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Infrastructure managers and change managers need to re-evaluate their change management processes due to slow change turnaround time, too many unauthorized changes, too many incidents and outages because of poorly managed changes, or difficulty evaluating and prioritizing changes.
    • IT system owners often resist change management because they see it as slow and bureaucratic.
    • Infrastructure changes are often seen as different from application changes, and two (or more) processes may exist.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • ITIL provides a usable framework for change management, but full process rigor is not appropriate for every change request.
    • You need to design a process that is flexible enough to meet the demand for change, and strict enough to protect the live environment from change-related incidents.
    • A mature change management process will minimize review and approval activity. Counterintuitively, with experience in implementing changes, risk levels decline to a point where most changes are “pre-approved.”

    Impact and Result

    • Create a unified change management process that reduces risk. The process should be balanced in its approach toward deploying changes while also maintaining throughput of innovation and enhancements.
    • Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
    • Establish and empower a change manager and change advisory board with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.
    • Integrate a configuration management database with the change management process to identify dependencies.

    Optimize IT Change Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize change management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Optimize IT Change Management – Phases 1-4

    1. Define change management

    Assess the maturity of your existing change management practice and define the scope of change management for your organization.

    • Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

    2. Establish roles and workflows

    Build your change management team and standardized process workflows for each change type.

    • Change Manager
    • Change Management Process Library – Visio
    • Change Management Process Library – PDF
    • Change Management Standard Operating Procedure

    3. Define the RFC and post-implementation activities

    Bookend your change management practice by standardizing change intake, implementation, and post-implementation activities.

    • Request for Change Form Template
    • Change Management Pre-Implementation Checklist
    • Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

    4. Measure, manage, and maintain

    Form an implementation plan for the project, including a metrics evaluation, change calendar inputs, communications plan, and roadmap.

    • Change Management Metrics Tool
    • Change Management Communications Plan
    • Change Management Roadmap Tool
    • Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template

    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize IT Change Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Change Management

    The Purpose

    Discuss the existing challenges and maturity of your change management practice.

    Build definitions of change categories and the scope of change management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the starting point and scope of change management.

    Understand the context of change request versus other requests such as service requests, projects, and operational tasks.

    Activities

    1.1 Outline strengths and challenges

    1.2 Conduct a maturity assessment

    1.3 Build a categorization scheme

    1.4 Build a risk assessment matrix

    Outputs

    Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

    2 Establish Roles and Workflows

    The Purpose

    Define roles and responsibilities for the change management team.

    Develop a standardized change management practice for approved changes, including process workflows.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Built the team to support your new change management practice.

    Develop a formalized and right-sized change management practice for each change category. This will ensure all changes follow the correct process and core activities to confirm changes are completed successfully.

    Activities

    2.1 Define the change manager role

    2.2 Outline the membership and protocol for the Change Advisory Board (CAB)

    2.3 Build workflows for normal, emergency, and pre-approved changes

    Outputs

    Change Manager Job Description

    Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)

    Change Management Process Library

    3 Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    The Purpose

    Create a new change intake process, including a new request for change (RFC) form.

    Develop post-implementation review activities to be completed for every IT change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Bookend your change management practice by standardizing change intake, implementation, and post-implementation activities.

    Activities

    3.1 Define the RFC template

    3.2 Determine post-implementation activities

    3.3 Build your change calendar protocol

    Outputs

    Request for Change Form Template

    Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

    Project Summary Template

    4 Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    The Purpose

    Develop a plan and project roadmap for reaching your target for your change management program maturity.

    Develop a communications plan to ensure the successful adoption of the new program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A plan and project roadmap for reaching target change management program maturity.

    A communications plan ready for implementation.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify metrics and reports

    4.2 Build a communications plan

    4.3 Build your implementation roadmap

    Outputs

    Change Management Metrics Tool

    Change Management Communications Plan

    Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Further reading

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Right-size IT change management practice to protect the live environment.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Balance risk and efficiency to optimize IT change management.

    Change management (change enablement, change control) is a balance of efficiency and risk. That is, pushing changes out in a timely manner while minimizing the risk of deployment. On the one hand, organizations can attempt to avoid all risk and drown the process in rubber stamps, red tape, and bureaucracy. On the other hand, organizations can ignore process and push out changes as quickly as possible, which will likely lead to change related incidents and debilitating outages.

    Right-sizing the process does not mean adopting every recommendation from best-practice frameworks. It means balancing the efficiency of change request fulfillment with minimizing risk to your organization. Furthermore, creating a process that encourages adherence is key to avoid change implementers from skirting your process altogether.

    Benedict Chang, Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Infrastructure and application change occurs constantly and is driven by changing business needs, requests for new functionality, operational releases and patches, and resolution of incidents or problems detected by the service desk.

    IT managers need to follow a standard change management process to ensure that rogue changes are never deployed while the organization remains responsive to demand.

    Common Obstacles

    IT system owners often resist change management because they see it as slow and bureaucratic.

    At the same time, an increasingly interlinked technical environment may cause issues to appear in unexpected places. Configuration management systems are often not kept up-to-date and do not catch the potential linkages.

    Infrastructure changes are often seen as “different” from application changes and two (or more) processes may exist.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach will help you:

    • Create a unified change management practice that balances risk and throughput of innovation.
    • Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
    • Establish and empower a Change Manager and Change Advisory Board (CAB) with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.

    Balance Risk and Efficiency to Optimize IT Change Management

    Two goals of change management are to protect the live environment and deploying changes in a timely manner. These two may seem to sometimes be at odds against each other, but assessing risk at multiple points of a change’s lifecycle can help you achieve both.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who need to:

    • Build a right-sized change management practice that encourages adherence and balances efficiency and risk.
    • Integrate the change management practice with project management, service desk processes, configuration management, and other areas of IT and the business.
    • Communicate the benefits and impact of change management to all the stakeholders affected by the process.

    Change management is heavily reliant on organizational culture

    Having a right-sized process is not enough. You need to build and communicate the process to gather adherence. The process is useless if stakeholders are not aware of it or do not follow it.

    Increase the Effectiveness of Change Management in Your Organization

    The image is a bar graph, with the segments labelled 1 and 2. The y-axis lists numbers 1-10. Segment 1 is at 6.2, and segment 2 is at 8.6.

    Of the eight infrastructure & operations processes measured in Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program, change management has the second largest gap between importance and effectiveness of these processes.

    Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT professionals from 620 organizations

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Gaining buy-in can be a challenge no matter how well the process is built.
    • The complexity of the IT environment and culture of tacit knowledge for configuration makes it difficult to assess cross-dependencies of changes.
    • Each silo or department may have their own change management workflows that they follow internally. This can make it difficult to create a unified process that works well for everyone.

    “Why should I fill out an RFC when it only takes five minutes to push through my change?”

    “We’ve been doing this for years. Why do we need more bureaucracy?”

    “We don’t need change management if we’re Agile.”

    “We don’t have the right tools to even start change management.”

    “Why do I have to attend a CAB meeting when I don’t care what other departments are doing?”

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Build change management by implementing assessments and stage gates around appropriate levels of the change lifecycle.

    The image is a circle, comprised of arrows, with each arrow pointing to the next, forming a cycle. Each arrow is labelled, as follows: Improve; Request; Assess; Plan; Approve; Implement

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Create a unified change management process that balances risk and throughput of innovation.
    2. Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
    3. Establish and empower a Change Manager and Change Advisory Board (CAB) with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.

    IT change is constant and is driven by:

    Change Management:

    1. Operations - Operational releases, maintenance, vendor-driven updates, and security updates can all be key drivers of change. Example: ITSM version update
      • Major Release
      • Maintenance Release
      • Security Patch
    2. Business - Business-driven changes may include requests from other business departments that require IT’s support. Examples: New ERP or HRIS implementation
      • New Application
      • New Version
    3. Service desk → Incident & Problem - Some incident and problem tickets require a change to facilitate resolution of the incident. Examples: Outage necessitating update of an app (emergency change), a user request for new functionality to be added to an existing app
      • Workaround
      • Fix
    4. Configuration Management Database (CMDB) ↔ Asset Management - In addition to software and hardware asset dependencies, a configuration management database (CMDB) is used to keep a record of changes and is queried to assess change requests.
      • Hardware
      • Software

    Insight summary

    “The scope of change management is defined by each organization…the purpose of change management is to maximize the number of successful service and product changes by ensuring that the risk have been properly assessed, authorizing changes to process, and managing the change schedule.” – ALEXOS Limited, ITIL 4

    Build a unified change management process balancing risk and change throughput.

    Building a unified process that oversees all changes to the technical environment doesn’t have to be burdensome to be effective. However, the process is a necessary starting point to identifying cross dependencies and avoiding change collisions and change-related incidents.

    Use an objective framework for estimating risk

    Simply asking, “What is the risk?” will result in subjective responses that will likely minimize the perceived risk. The level of due diligence should align to the criticality of the systems or departments potentially impacted by the proposed changes.

    Integrate your change process with your IT service management system

    Change management in isolation will provide some stability, but maturing the process through service integrations will enable data-driven decisions, decrease bureaucracy, and enable faster and more stable throughput.

    Change management and DevOps can work together effectively

    Change and DevOps tend to be at odds, but the framework does not have to change. Lower risk changes in DevOps are prime candidates for the pre-approved category. Much of the responsibility traditionally assigned to the CAB can be diffused throughout the software development lifecycle.

    Change management and DevOps can coexist

    Shift the responsibility and rigor to earlier in the process.

    • If you are implementing change management in a DevOps environment, ensure you have a strong DevOps lifecycle. You may wish to refer to Info-Tech’s research Implementing DevOps Practices That Work.
    • Consider starting in this blueprint by visiting Appendix II to frame your approach to change management. Follow the blueprint while paying attention to the DevOps Callouts.

    DEVOPS CALLOUTS

    Look for these DevOps callouts throughout this storyboard to guide you along the implementation.

    The image is a horizontal figure eight, with 7 arrows, each pointing into the next. They are labelled are follows: Plan; Create; Verify; Package; Release; Configure; Monitor. At the centre of the circles are the words Dev and Ops.

    Successful change management will provide benefits to both the business and IT

    Respond to business requests faster while reducing the number of change-related disruptions.

    IT Benefits

    • Fewer change-related incidents and outages
    • Faster change turnaround time
    • Higher rate of change success
    • Less change rework
    • Fewer service desk calls related to poorly communicated changes

    Business Benefits

    • Fewer service disruptions
    • Faster response to requests for new and enhanced functionalities
    • Higher rate of benefits realization when changes are implemented
    • Lower cost per change
    • Fewer “surprise” changes disrupting productivity

    IT satisfaction with change management will drive business satisfaction with IT. Once the process is working efficiently, staff will be more motivated to adhere to the process, reducing the number of unauthorized changes. As fewer changes bypass proper evaluation and testing, service disruptions will decrease and business satisfaction will increase.

    Change management improves core benefits to the business: the four Cs

    Most organizations have at least some form of change control in place, but formalizing change management leads to the four Cs of business benefits:

    Control

    Change management brings daily control over the IT environment, allowing you to review every relatively new change, eliminate changes that would have likely failed, and review all changes to improve the IT environment.

    Collaboration

    Change management planning brings increased communication and collaboration across groups by coordinating changes with business activities. The CAB brings a more formalized and centralized communication method for IT.

    Consistency

    Request for change templates and a structured process result in implementation, test, and backout plans being more consistent. Implementing processes for pre-approved changes also ensures these frequent changes are executed consistently and efficiently.

    Confidence

    Change management processes will give your organization more confidence through more accurate planning, improved execution of changes, less failure, and more control over the IT environment. This also leads to greater protection against audits.

    You likely need to improve change management more than any other infrastructure & operations process

    The image shows a vertical bar graph. Each segment of the graph is labelled for an infrastructure/operations process. Each segment has two bars one for effectiveness, and another for importance. The first segment, Change Management, is highlighted, with its Effectiveness at a 6.2 and Importance at 8.6

    Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT Professionals from 620 organizations

    Of the eight infrastructure and operations processes measured in Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program, change management consistently has the second largest gap between importance and effectiveness of these processes.

    Executives and directors recognize the importance of change management but feel theirs is currently ineffective

    Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program assesses the importance and effectiveness of core IT processes. Since its inception, the MGD has consistently identified change management as an area for immediate improvement.

    The image is a vertical bar graph, with four segments, each having 2 bars, one for Effectiveness and the other for Importance. The four segments are (with Effectiveness and Importance ratings in brackets, respectively): Frontline (6.5/8.6); Manager (6.6/8.9); Director (6.4/8.8); and Executive (6.1/8.8)

    Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT Professionals from 620 organizations

    Importance Scores

    No importance: 1.0-6.9

    Limited importance: 7.0-7.9

    Significant importance: 8.0-8.9

    Critical importance: 9.0-10.0

    Effectiveness Scores

    Not in place: n/a

    Not effective: 0.0-4.9

    Somewhat Ineffective: 5.0-5.9

    Somewhat effective: 6.0-6.9

    Very effective: 7.0-10.0

    There are several common misconceptions about change management

    Which of these have you heard in your organization?

     Reality
    “It’s just a small change; this will only take five minutes to do.” Even a small change can cause a business outage. That small fix could impact a large system connected to the one being fixed.
    “Ad hoc is faster; too many processes slow things down.” Ad hoc might be faster in some cases, but it carries far greater risk. Following defined processes keeps systems stable and risk-averse.
    “Change management is all about speed.” Change management is about managing risk. It gives the illusion of speed by reducing downtime and unplanned work.
    “Change management will limit our capacity to change.” Change management allows for a better alignment of process (release management) with governance (change management).

    Overcome perceived challenges to implementing change management to reap measurable reward

    Before: Informal Change Management

    Change Approval:

    • Changes do not pass through a formal review process before implementation.
    • 10% of released changes are approved.
    • Implementation challenge: Staff will resist having to submit formal change requests and assessments, frustrated at the prospect of having to wait longer to have changes approved.

    Change Prioritization

    • Changes are not prioritized according to urgency, risk, and impact.
    • 60% of changes are urgent.
    • Implementation challenge: Influential stakeholders accustomed to having changes approved and deployed might resist having to submit changes to a standard cost-benefit analysis.

    Change Deployment

    • Changes often negatively impact user productivity.
    • 25% of changes are realized as planned.
    • Implementation challenge: Engaging the business so that formal change freeze periods and regular maintenance windows can be established.

    After: Right-Sized Change Management

    Change Approval

    • All changes pass through a formal review process. Once a change is repeatable and well-tested, it can be pre-approved to save time. Almost no unauthorized changes are deployed.
    • 95% of changes are approved.
    • KPI: Decrease in change-related incidents

    Change Prioritization

    • The CAB prioritizes changes so that the business is satisfied with the speed of change deployment.
    • 35% of changes are urgent.
    • KPI: Decrease in change turnaround time.

    Change deployment

    • Users are always aware of impending changes and changes don’t interrupt critical business activities.
    • Over 80% of changes are realized as planned
    • KPI: Decrease in the number of failed deployments.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for change management optimization focuses on building standardized processes

     1. Define Change Management2. Establish Roles and Workflows3. Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities4. Measure, Manage, and Maintain
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

      Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) Change Management Project Summary Template
    Phase Deliverables
    • Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Change Management Risk Assessment Tool
    • Change Manager Job Description
    • Change Management Process Library
    • Request for Change (RFC) Form Template
    • Change Management Pre-Implementation Checklist
    • Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist
    • Change Management Metrics Tool
    • Change Management
    • Communications Plan
    • Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Change Management Process Library

    Document your normal, pre-approved, and emergency change lifecycles with the core process workflows .

    Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

    Test Drive your impact and likelihood assessment questionnaires with the Change Management Risk Assessment Tool.

    Project Summary Template

    Summarize your efforts in the Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template.

    Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Record your action items and roadmap your steps to a mature change management process.

    Key Deliverable:

    Change Management SOP

    Document and formalize your process starting with the change management standard operating procedure (SOP).

    These case studies illustrate the value of various phases of this project

    Define Change Management

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    A major technology company implemented change management to improve productivity by 40%. This case study illustrates the full scope of the project.

    A large technology firm experienced a critical outage due to poor change management practices. This case study illustrates the scope of change management definition and strategy.

    Ignorance of change management process led to a technology giant experiencing a critical cloud outage. This case study illustrates the scope of the process phase.

    A manufacturing company created a makeshift CMDB in the absence of a CMDB to implement change management. This case study illustrates the scope of change intake.

    A financial institution tracked and recorded metrics to aid in the success of their change management program. This case study illustrates the scope of the implementation phase.

    Working through this project with Info-Tech can save you time and money

    Engaging in a Guided Implementation doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

    Guided ImplementationMeasured Vale
    Phase 1: Define Change Management
    • We estimate Phase 1 activities will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).

    Phase 2: Establish Roles and Workflows

    • We estimate Phase 2 will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).
    Phase 3: Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities
    • We estimate Phase 3 will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).

    Phase 4: Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    • We estimate Phase 4 will take 2 FTEs 5 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $1,500 (2 FTEs * 2.5 days * $80,000/year).
    Total Savings $10,800

    Case Study

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Intel implemented a robust change management program and experienced a 40% improvement in change efficiency.

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    ITIL Change Management Implementation

    With close to 4,000 changes occurring each week, managing Intel’s environment is a formidable task. Before implementing change management within the organization, over 35% of all unscheduled downtime was due to errors resulting from change and release management. Processes were ad hoc or scattered across the organization and no standards were in place.

    Results

    After a robust implementation of change management, Intel experienced a number of improvements including automated approvals, the implementation of a formal change calendar, and an automated RFC form. As a result, Intel improved change productivity by 40% within the first year of the program’s implementation.

    Define Change Management

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Define Change Management

    • Call #1: Introduce change concepts.
    • Call #2: Assess current maturity.
    • Call #3: Identify target-state capabilities.

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    • Call #4: Review roles and responsibilities.
    • Call #5: Review core change processes.

    Define RFC and Post- Implementation Activities

    • Call #6: Define change intake process.
    • Call #7: Create pre-implementation and post-implementation checklists.

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    • Call #8: Review metrics.
    • Call #9: Create roadmap.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

     Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4Day 5
    Activities

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Outline Strengths and Challenges

    1.2 Conduct a Maturity Assessment

    1.3 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

    1.4 Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Define the Change Manager Role

    2.2 Outline CAB Protocol and membership

    2.3 Build Normal Change Process

    2.4 Build Emergency Change Process

    2.5 Build Pre-Approved Change Process

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Create an RFC Template

    3.2 Determine Post-Implementation Activities

    3.3 Build a Change Calendar Protocol

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Reports

    4.2 Create Communications Plan

    4.3 Build an Implementation Roadmap

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables
    1. Maturity Assessment
    2. Risk Assessment
    1. Change Manager Job Description
    2. Change Management Process Library
    1. Request for Change (RFC) Form Template
    2. Pre-Implementation Checklist
    3. Post-Implementation Checklist
    1. Metrics Tool
    2. Communications Plan
    3. Project Roadmap
    1. Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
    2. Workshop Summary Deck

    Phase 1

    Define Change Management

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following steps:

    • Assess Maturity
    • Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Step 1.1

    Assess Maturity

    Activities

    1.1.1 Outline the Organization’s Strengths and Challenges

    1.1.2 Complete a Maturity Assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of maturity change management processes and frameworks
    • Identification of existing change management challenges and potential causes
    • A framework for assessing change management maturity and an assessment of your existing change management processes

    Define Change Management

    Step 1.1: Assess Maturity → Step 1.2: Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Change management is often confused with release management, but they are distinct processes

    Change

    • Change management looks at software changes as well as hardware, database, integration, and network changes, with the focus on stability of the entire IT ecosystem for business continuity.
    • Change management provides a holistic view of the IT environment, including dependencies, to ensure nothing is negatively affected by changes.
    • Change documentation is more focused on process, ensuring dependencies are mapped, rollout plans exist, and the business is not at risk.

    Release

    • Release and deployment are the detailed plans that bundle patches, upgrades, and new features into deployment packages, with the intent to change them flawlessly into a production environment.
    • Release management is one of many actions performed under change management’s governance.
    • Release documentation includes technical specifications such as change schedule, package details, change checklist, configuration details, test plan, and rollout and rollback plans.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure the Release Manager is present as part of your CAB. They can explain any change content or dependencies, communicate business approval, and advise the service desk of any defects.

    Integrate change management with other IT processes

    As seen in the context diagram, change management interacts closely with many other IT processes including release management and configuration management (seen below). Ensure you delineate when these interactions occur (e.g. RFC updates and CMDB queries) and which process owns each task.

    The image is a chart mapping the interactions between Change Management and Configuration Management (CMDB).

    Avoid the challenges of poor change management

    1. Deployments
      • Too frequent: The need for frequent deployments results in reduced availability of critical business applications.
      • Failed deployments or rework is required: Deployments are not successful and have to be backed out of and then reworked to resolve issues with the installation.
      • High manual effort: A lack of automation results in high resource costs for deployments. Human error is likely, which adds to the risk of a failed deployment.
    2. Incidents
      • Too many unauthorized changes: If the process is perceived as cumbersome and ineffective, people will bypass it or abuse the emergency designation to get their changes deployed faster.
      • Changes cause incidents: When new releases are deployed, they create problems with related systems or applications.
    3. End Users
      • Low user satisfaction: Poor communication and training result in surprised and unhappy users and support staff.

    “With no controls in place, IT gets the blame for embarrassing outages. Too much control, and IT is seen as a roadblock to innovation.” – Anonymous, VP IT of a federal credit union

    1.1.1 Outline the Organization’s Strengths and Challenges

    Input

    • Current change documentation (workflows, SOP, change policy, etc.)
    • Organizational chart(s)

    Output

    • List of strengths and challenges for change management

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. As group, discuss and outline the change management challenges facing the organization. These may be challenges caused by poor change management processes or by a lack of process.
    2. Use the pain points found on the previous slide to help guide the discussion.
    3. As a group, also outline the strengths of change management and the strengths of the current organization. Use these strengths as a guide to know what practices to continue and what strengths you can leverage to improve the change management process.
    4. Record the activity results in the Project Summary Template.

    Download the Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template

    Assess current change management maturity to create a plan for improvement

     ChaosReactiveControlled

    Proactive

    Optimized
    Change Requests No defined processes for submitting changes Low process adherence and no RFC form RFC form is centralized and a point of contact for changes exists RFCs are reviewed for scope and completion RFCs trend analysis and proactive change exists
    Change Review Little to no change risk assessment Risk assessment exists for each RFC RFC form is centralized and a point of contact for changes exists Change calendar exists and is maintained System and component dependencies exist (CMDB)
    Change Approval No formal approval process exists Approval process exists but is not widely followed Unauthorized changes are minimal or nonexistent Change advisory board (CAB) is established and formalized Trend analysis exists increasing pre-approved changes
    Post-Deployment No post-deployment change review exists Process exists but is not widely followed Reduction of change-related incidents Stakeholder satisfaction is gathered and reviewed Lessons learned are propagated and actioned
    Process Governance Roles & responsibilities are ad hoc Roles, policies & procedures are defined & documented Roles, policies & procedures are defined & documented KPIs are tracked, reported on, and reviewed KPIs are proactively managed for improvement

    Info-Tech Insight

    Reaching an optimized level is not feasible for every organization. You may be able to run a very good change management process at the Proactive or even Controlled stage. Pay special attention to keeping your goals attainable.

    1.1.2 Complete a Maturity Assessment

    Input

    • Current change documentation (workflows, SOP, change policy, etc.)

    Output

    • Assessment of current maturity level and goals to improve change management

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Use Info-Tech’s Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool to assess the maturity and completeness of your change process.
    2. Significant gaps revealed in this assessment should be the focal points of your discussion when investigating root causes and brainstorming remediation activities:
      1. For each activity of each process area of change management, determine the degree of completeness of your current process.
      2. Review your maturity assessment results and discuss as a group potential reasons why you arrived at your maturity level. Identify areas where you should focus your initial attention for improvement.
      3. Regularly review the maturity of your change management practices by completing this maturity assessment tool periodically to identify other areas to optimize.

    Download the Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Case Study

    Even Google isn’t immune to change-related outages. Plan ahead and communicate to help avoid change-related incidents

    Industry: Technology

    Source: The Register

    As part of a routine maintenance procedure, Google engineers moved App Engine applications between data centers in the Central US to balance out traffic.

    Unfortunately, at the same time that applications were being rerouted, a software update was in progress on the traffic routers, which triggered a restart. This temporarily diminished router capacity, knocking out a sizeable portion of Google Cloud.

    The server drain resulted in a huge spike in startup requests, and the routers simply couldn’t handle the traffic.

    As a result, 21% of Google App Engine applications hosted in the Central US experienced error rates in excess of 10%, while an additional 16% of applications experienced latency, albeit at a lower rate.

    Solution

    Thankfully, engineers were actively monitoring the implementation of the change and were able to spring into action to halt the problem.

    The change was rolled back after 11 minutes, but the configuration error still needed to be fixed. After about two hours, the change failure was resolved and the Google Cloud was fully functional.

    One takeaway for the engineering team was to closely monitor how changes are scheduled. Ultimately, this was the result of miscommunication and a lack of transparency between change teams.

    Step 1.2

    Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define What Constitutes a Change

    1.2.2 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

    1.2.3 Build a Classification Scheme to Assess Impact

    1.2.4 Build a Classification Scheme to Define Likelihood

    1.2.5 Evaluate and Adjust Your Risk Assessment Scheme

    Define Change Management

    Step 1.1: Assess Maturity → Step 1.2: Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure/Applications Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear definition of what constitutes a change in your organization
    • A defined categorization scheme to classify types of changes
    • A risk assessment matrix and tool for evaluating and prioritizing change requests according to impact and likelihood of risk

    Change must be managed to mitigate risk to the infrastructure

    Change management is the gatekeeper protecting your live environment.

    Successfully managed changes will optimize risk exposure, severity of impact, and disruption. This will result in the bottom-line business benefits of removal of risk, early realization of benefits, and savings of money and time.

    • IT change is constant; change requests will be made both proactively and reactively to upgrade systems, acquire new functionality, and to prevent or resolve incidents.
    • Every change to the infrastructure must pass through the change management process before being deployed to ensure that it has been properly assessed and tested, and to check that a backout /rollback plan is in place.
    • It will be less expensive to invest in a rigorous change management process than to resolve incidents, service disruptions, and outages caused by the deployment of a bad change.
    • Change management is what gives you control and visibility regarding what is introduced to the live environment, preventing incidents that threaten business continuity.

    80%

    In organizations without formal change management processes, about 80% (The Visible Ops Handbook) of IT service outage problems are caused by updates and changes to systems, applications, and infrastructure. It’s crucial to track and systematically manage change to fully understand and predict the risks and potential impact of the change.

    Attributes of a change

    Differentiate changes from other IT requests

    Is this in the production environment of a business process?

    The core business of the enterprise or supporting functions may be affected.

    Does the task affect an enterprise managed system?

    If it’s for a local application, it’s a service request

    How many users are impacted?

    It should usually impact more than a single user (in most cases).

    Is there a configuration, or code, or workflow, or UI/UX change?

    Any impact on a business process is a change; adding a user or a recipient to a report or mailing list is not a change.

    Does the underlying service currently exist?

    If it’s a new service, then it’s better described as a project.

    Is this done/requested by IT?

    It needs to be within the scope of IT for the change management process to apply.

    Will this take longer than one week?

    As a general rule, if it takes longer than 40 hours of work to complete, it’s likely a project.

    Defining what constitutes a change

    Every change request will initiate the change management process; don’t waste time reviewing requests that are out of scope.

    ChangeService Request (User)Operational Task (Backend)
    • Fixing defects in code
    • Changing configuration of an enterprise system
    • Adding new software or hardware components
    • Switching an application to another VM
    • Standardized request
    • New PC
    • Permissions request
    • Change password
    • Add user
    • Purchases
    • Change the backup tape
    • Delete temporary files
    • Maintain database (one that is well defined, repeatable, and predictable)
    • Run utilities to repair a database

    Do not treat every IT request as a change!

    • Many organizations make the mistake of calling a standard service request or operational task a “change.”
    • Every change request will initiate the change management process; don’t waste time reviewing requests that are out of scope.
    • While the overuse of RFCs for out-of-scope requests is better than a lack of process, this will slow the process and delay the approval of more critical changes.
    • Requiring an RFC for something that should be considered day-to-day work will also discourage people from adhering to the process, because the RFC will be seen as meaningless paperwork.

     

    1.2.1 Define What Constitutes a Change

    Input

    • List of examples of each category of the chart

    Output

    • Definitions for each category to be used at change intake

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens
    • Change Management SOP

    Participants

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. As a group, brainstorm examples of changes, projects, service requests (user), operational tasks (backend), and releases. You may add additional categories as needed (e.g. incidents).
    2. Have each participant write the examples on sticky notes and populate the following chart on the whiteboard/flip chart.
    3. Use the examples to draw lines and define what defines each category.
      • What makes a change distinct from a project?
      • What makes a change distinct from a service request?
      • What makes a change distinct from an operational task?
      • When do the category workflows cross over with other categories? (For example, when does a project interact with change management?)
    4. Record the definitions of requests and results in section 2.3 of the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).
    ChangeProjectService Request (User)Operational Task (Backend)Release
    Changing Configuration ERP upgrade Add new user Delete temp files Software release

    Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

    Each RFC should define resources needed to effect the change

    In addition to assigning a category to each RFC based on risk assessment, each RFC should also be assigned a priority based on the impact of the change on the IT organization, in terms of the resources needed to effect the change.

    Categories include

    Normal

    Emergency

    Pre-Approved

    The majority of changes will be pre-approved or normal changes. Definitions of each category are provided on the next slide.

    Info-Tech uses the term pre-approved rather than the ITIL terminology of standard to more accurately define the type of change represented by this category.

    A potential fourth change category of expedited may be employed if you are having issues with process adherence or if you experience changes driven from outside change management’s control (e.g. from the CIO, director, judiciary, etc.) See Appendix I for more details.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Do not rush to designate changes as pre-approved. You may have a good idea of which changes may be considered pre-approved, but make sure they are in fact low-risk and well-documented before moving them over from the normal category.

    The category of the change determines the process it follows

     Pre-ApprovedNormalEmergency
    Definition
    • Tasks are well-known, documented, and proven
    • Budgetary approval is preordained or within control of change requester
    • Risk is low and understood
    • There’s a low probability of failure
    • All changes that are not pre-approved or emergency will be classified as normal
    • Further categorized by priority/risk
    • The change is being requested to resolve a current or imminent critical/severity-1 incident that threatens business continuity
    • Associated with a critical incident or problem ticket
    Trigger
    • The same change is built and changed repeatedly using the same install procedures and resulting in the same low-risk outcome
    • Upgrade or new functionality that will capture a business benefit
    • A fix to a current problem
    • A current or imminent critical incident that will impact business continuity
    • Urgency to implement the change must be established, as well as lack of any alternative or workaround
    Workflow
    • Pre-established
    • Repeatable with same sequence of actions, with minimal judgment or decision points
    • Dependent on the change
    • Different workflows depending on prioritization
    • Dependent on the change
    Approval
    • Change Manager (does not need to be reviewed by CAB)
    • CAB
    • Approval from the Emergency Change Advisory Board (E-CAB) is sufficient to proceed with the change
    • A retroactive RFC must be created and approved by the CAB

    Pay close attention to defining your pre-approved changes. They are going to be critical for running a smooth change management practice in a DevOps Environment

    1.2.2 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

    Input

    • List of examples of each change category

    Output

    • Definitions for each change category

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Change Management SOP

    Participants

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Discuss the change categories on the previous slide and modify the types of descriptions to suit your organization.
    2. Once the change categories or types are defined, identify several examples of change requests that would fall under each category.
    3. Types of normal changes will be further defined in the next activity and can be left blank for now.
    4. Examples are provided below. Capture your definitions in section 4 of your Change Management SOP.
    Pre-Approved (AKA Standard)NormalEmergency
    • Microsoft patch management/deployment
    • Windows update
    • Minor form changes
    • Service pack updates on non-critical systems
    • Advance label status on orders
    • Change log retention period/storage
    • Change backup frequency

    Major

    • Active directory server upgrade
    • New ERP

    Medium

    • Network upgrade
    • High availability implementation

    Minor

    • Ticket system go-live
    • UPS replacement
    • Cognos update
    • Any change other than a pre-approved change
    • Needed to resolve a major outage in a Tier 1 system

    Assess the risk for each normal change based on impact (severity) and likelihood (probability)

    Create a change assessment risk matrix to standardize risk assessment for new changes. Formalizing this assessment should be one of the first priorities of change management.

    The following slides guide you through the steps of formalizing a risk assessment according to impact and likelihood:

    1. Define a risk matrix: Risk matrices can either be a 3x3 matrix (Minor, Medium, or High Risk as shown on the next slide) or a 4x4 matrix (Minor, Medium, High, or Critical Risk).
    2. Build an impact assessment: Enable consistent measurement of impact for each change by incorporating a standardized questionnaire for each RFC.
    3. Build a likelihood assessment: Enable the consistent measurement of impact for each change by incorporating a standardized questionnaire for each RFC.
    4. Test drive your risk assessment and make necessary adjustments: Measure your newly formed risk assessment questionnaires against historical changes to test its accuracy.

    Consider risk

    1. Risk should be the primary consideration in classifying a normal change as Low, Medium, High. The extent of governance required, as well as minimum timeline to implement the change, will follow from the risk assessment.
    2. The business benefit often matches the impact level of the risk – a change that will provide a significant benefit to a large number of users may likely carry an equally major downside if deviations occur.

    Info-Tech Insight

    All changes entail an additional level of risk. Risk is a function of impact and likelihood. Risk may be reduced, accepted, or neutralized through following best practices around training, testing, backout planning, redundancy, timing and sequencing of changes, etc.

    Create a risk matrix to assign a risk rating to each RFC

    Every normal RFC should be assigned a risk rating.

    How is risk rating determined?

    • Priority should be based on the business consequences of implementing or denying the change.
    • Risk rating is assigned using the impact of the risk and likelihood/probability that the event may occur.

    Who determines priority?

    • Priority should be decided with the change requester and with the CAB, if necessary.
    • Don’t let the change requester decide priority alone, as they will usually assign it a higher priority than is justified. Use a repeatable, standardized framework to assess each request.

    How is risk rating used?

    • Risk rating is used to determine which changes should be discussed and assessed first.
    • Time frames and escalation processes should be defined for each risk level.

    RFCs need to clearly identify the risk level of the proposed change. This can be done through statement of impact and likelihood (low/medium/high) or through pertinent questions linked with business rules to assess the risk.

    Risk always has a negative impact, but the size of the impact can vary considerably in terms of cost, number of people or sites affected, and severity of the impact. Impact questions tend to be more objective and quantifiable than likelihood questions.

    Risk Matrix

    Risk Matrix. Impact vs. Likelihood. Low impact, Low Likelihood and Medium Impact, Medium Likelihood are minor risks. High Likelihood, Low Impact; Medium Likelihood, Medium Impact; and Low Likelihood, High Impact are Medium Risk. High Impact, High Likelihood; High Impact, Medium Likelihood; and Medium Impact, High Likelihood are Major risk.

    1.2.3 Build a Classification Scheme to Assess Impact

    Input

    • Current risk assessment (if available)

    Output

    • Tailored impact assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Define a set of questions to measure risk impact.
    2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
    3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk as high, medium, or low.
    4. Capture your results in section 4.3.1 of your Change Management SOP.
    Impact
    Weight Question High Medium Low
    15% # of people affected 36+ 11-35 <10
    20% # of sites affected 4+ 2-3 1
    15% Duration of recovery (minutes of business time) 180+ 30-18 <3
    20% Systems affected Mission critical Important Informational
    30% External customer impact Loss of customer Service interruption None

    1.2.4 Build a Classification Scheme to Define Likelihood

    Input

    • Current risk assessment (if available)

    Output

    • Tailored likelihood assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Define a set of questions to measure risk likelihood.
    2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
    3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk as high, medium, or low.
    4. Capture your results in section 4.3.2 of your Change Management SOP.
    LIKELIHOOD
    Weight Question High Medium Low
    25% Has this change been tested? No   Yes
    10% Have all the relevant groups (companies, departments, executives) vetted the change? No Partial Yes
    5% Has this change been documented? No   Yes
    15% How long is the change window? When can we implement? Specified day/time Partial Per IT choice
    20% Do we have trained and experienced staff available to implement this change? If only external consultants are available, the rating will be “medium” at best. No   Yes
    25% Has an implementation plan been developed? No   Yes

    1.2.5 Evaluate and Adjust Your Risk Assessment Scheme

    Input

    • Impact and likelihood assessments from previous two activities

    Output

    • Vetted risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Draw your risk matrix on a whiteboard or flip chart.
    2. As a group, identify up to 10 examples of requests for changes that would apply within your organization. Depending on the number of people participating, each person could identify one or two changes and write them on sticky notes.
    3. Take turns bringing your sticky notes up to the risk matrix and placing each where it belongs, according to the assessment criteria you defined.
    4. After each participant has taken a turn, discuss each change as a group and adjust the placement of any changes, if needed. Update the risk assessment weightings or questions, if needed.

    Download the Change Management Rick Assessment Tool.

    #

    Change Example

    Impact

    Likelihood

    Risk

    1

    ERP change

    High

    Medium

    Major

    2

    Ticket system go-live

    Medium

    Low

    Minor

    3

    UPS replacement

    Medium

    Low

    Minor

    4

    Network upgrade

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    5

    AD upgrade

    Medium

    Low

    Minor

    6

    High availability implementation

    Low

    Medium

    Minor

    7

    Key-card implementation

    Low

    High

    Medium

    8

    Anti-virus update

    Low

    Low

    Minor

    9

    Website

    Low

    Medium

    Minor

     

    Case Study

    A CMDB is not a prerequisite of change management. Don’t let the absence of a configuration management database (CMDB) prevent you from implementing change management.

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: Anonymous Info-Tech member

    Challenge

    The company was planning to implement a CMDB; however, full implementation was still one year away and subject to budget constraints.

    Without a CMDB, it would be difficult to understand the interdependencies between systems and therefore be able to provide notifications to potentially affected user groups prior to implementing technical changes.

    This could have derailed the change management project.

    Solution

    An Excel template was set up as a stopgap measure until the full implementation of the CMDB. The template included all identified dependencies between systems, along with a “dependency tier” for each IT service.

    Tier 1: The dependent system would not operate if the upstream system change resulted in an outage.

    Tier 2: The dependent system would suffer severe degradation of performance and/or features.

    Tier 3: The dependent system would see minor performance degradation or minor feature unavailability.

    Results

    As a stopgap measure, the solution worked well. When changes ran the risk of degrading downstream dependent systems, the impacted business system owner’s authorization was sought and end users were informed in advance.

    The primary takeaway was that a system to manage configuration linkages and system dependencies was key.

    While a CMDB is ideal for this use case, IT organizations shouldn’t let the lack of such a system stop progress on change management.

    Case Study (part 1 of 4)

    Intel used a maturity assessment to kick-start its new change management program.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    Due to the sheer volume of change management activities present at Intel, over 35% of unscheduled outages were the result of changes.

    Ineffective change management was identified as the top contributor of incidents with unscheduled downtime.

    One of the major issues highlighted was a lack of process ownership. The change management process at Intel was very fragmented, and that needed to change.

    Results

    Daniel Grove, Senior Release & Change Manager at Intel, identified that clarifying tasks for the Change Manager and the CAB would improve process efficiency by reducing decision lag time. Roles and responsibilities were reworked and clarified.

    Intel conducted a maturity assessment of the overall change management process to identify key areas for improvement.

    Phase 2

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    For running change management in DevOps environment, see Appendix II.

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following steps:

    • Determine Roles and Responsibilities
    • Build Core Workflows

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Step 2.1

    Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    Activities

    2.1.1 Capture Roles and Responsibilities Using a RACI Chart

    2.1.2 Determine Your Change Manager’s Responsibilities

    2.1.3 Define the Authority and Responsibilities of Your CAB

    2.1.4 Determine an E-CAB Protocol for Your Organization

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Step 2.1: Determine Roles and Responsibilities → Step 2.2: Build Core Workflows

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • Clearly defined responsibilities to form the job description for a Change Manager
    • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the change management team, including the business system owner, technical SME, and CAB members
    • Defined responsibilities and authority of the CAB
    • Protocol for an emergency CAB (E-CAB) meeting

    Identify roles and responsibilities for your change management team

    Business System Owner

    • Provides downtime window(s)
    • Advises on need for change (prior to creation of RFC)
    • Validates change (through UAT or other validation as necessary)
    • Provides approval for expedited changes (needs to be at executive level)

    Technical Subject Matter Expert (SME)

    • Advises on proposed changes prior to RFC submission
    • Reviews draft RFC for technical soundness
    • Assesses backout/rollback plan
    • Checks if knowledgebase has been consulted for prior lessons learned
    • Participates in the PIR, if necessary
    • Ensures that the service desk is trained on the change

    CAB

    • Approves/rejects RFCs for normal changes
    • Reviews lessons learned from PIRs
    • Decides on the scope of change management
    • Reviews metrics and decides on remedial actions
    • Considers changes to be added to list of pre-approved changes
    • Communicates to organization about upcoming changes

    Change Manager

    • Reviews RFCs for completeness
    • Ensures RFCs brought to the CAB have a high chance of approval
    • Chairs CAB meetings, including scheduling, agenda preparation, reporting, and follow-ups
    • Manages post-implementation reviews and reporting
    • Organizes internal communications (within IT)

    2.1.1 Capture Roles and Responsibilities Using a RACI Chart

    Input

    • Current SOP

    Output

    • Documented roles and responsibilities in change management in a RACI chart

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. As a group, work through developing a RACI chart to determine the roles and responsibilities of individuals involved in the change management practice based on the following criteria:
      • Responsible (performs the work)
      • Accountable (ensures the work is done)
      • Consulted (two-way communication)
      • Informed (one-way communication)
    2. Record your results in slide 14 of the Project Summary Template and section 3.1 of your Change Management SOP.
    Change Management TasksOriginatorSystem OwnerChange ManagerCAB MemberTechnical SMEService DeskCIO/ VP ITE-CAB Member
    Review the RFC C C A C R C R  
    Validate changes C C A C R C R  
    Assess test plan A C R R C   I  
    Approve the RFC I C A R C   I  
    Create communications plan R I A     I I  
    Deploy communications plan I I A I   R    
    Review metrics   C A R   C I  
    Perform a post implementation review   C R A     I  
    Review lessons learned from PIR activities     R A   C    

    Designate a Change Manager to own the process, change templates, and tools

    The Change Manager will be the point of contact for all process questions related to change management.

    • The Change Manager needs the authority to reject change requests, regardless of the seniority of the requester.
    • The Change Manager needs the authority to enforce compliance to a standard process.
    • The Change Manager needs enough cross-functional subject-matter expertise to accurately evaluate the impact of change from both an IT and business perspective.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Some organizations will not be able to assign a dedicated Change Manager, but they must still task an individual with change review authority and with ownership of the risk assessment and other key parts of the process.

    Responsibilities

    1. The Change Manager is your first stop for change approval. Both the change management and release and deployment management processes rely on the Change Manager to function.
    2. Every single change that is applied to the live environment, from a single patch to a major change, must originate with a request for change (RFC), which is then approved by the Change Manager to proceed to the CAB for full approval.
    3. Change templates and tools, such as the change calendar, list of preapproved changes, and risk assessment template are controlled by the Change Manager.
    4. The Change Manager also needs to have ownership over gathering metrics and reports surrounding deployed changes. A skilled Change Manager needs to have an aptitude for applying metrics for continual improvement activities.

    2.1.2 Document Your Change Manager’s Responsibilities

    Input

    • Current Change Manager job description (if available)

    Output

    • Change Manager job description and list of responsibilities

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Markers/pens
    • Info-Tech’s Change Manager Job Description
    • Change Management SOP

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    1.Using the previous slide, Info-Tech’s Change Manager Job Description, and the examples below, brainstorm responsibilities for the Change Manager.

    2.Record the responsibilities in Section 3.2 of your Change Management SOP.

    Example:

    Change Manager: James Corey

    Responsibilities

    1. Own the process, tools, and templates.
    2. Control the Change Management SOP.
    3. Provide standard RFC forms.
    4. Distribute RFCs for CAB review.
    5. Receive all initial RFCs and check them for completion.
    6. Approve initial RFCs.
    7. Approve pre-approved changes.
    8. Approve the conversion of normal changes to pre-approved changes.
    9. Assemble the Emergency CAB (E-CAB) when emergency change requests are received.
    10. Approve submission of RFCs for CAB review.
    11. Chair the CAB:
      • Set the CAB agenda and distribute it at least 24 hours before the meeting.
      • Ensure the agenda is adhered to.
      • Make the final approval/prioritization decision regarding a change if the CAB is deadlocked and cannot come to an agreement.
      • Distribute CAB meeting minutes to all members and relevant stakeholders.

    Download the Change Manager Job Description

    Create a Change Advisory Board (CAB) to provide process governance

    The primary functions of the CAB are to:

    1. Protect the live environment from poorly assessed, tested, and implemented changes.
      • CAB approval is required for all normal and emergency changes.
      • If a change results in an incident or outage, the CAB is effectively responsible; it’s the responsibility of the CAB to assess and accept the potential impact of every change.
    2. Prioritize changes in a way that fairly reflects change impact and urgency.
      • Change requests will originate from multiple stakeholders, some of whom have competing interests.
      • It’s up to the CAB to prioritize these requests effectively so that business need is balanced with any potential risk to the infrastructure.
      • The CAB should seek to reduce the number of emergency/expedited changes.
    3. Schedule deployments in a way that minimizes conflict and disruption.
      • The CAB uses a change calendar populated with project work, upcoming organizational initiatives, and change freeze periods. They will schedule changes around these blocks to avoid disrupting user productivity.
      • The CAB should work closely with the release and deployment management teams to coordinate change/release scheduling.

    See what responsibilities in the CAB’s process are already performed by the DevOps lifecycle (e.g. authorization, deconfliction etc.). Do not duplicate efforts.

    Use diverse representation from the business to form an effective CAB

    The CAB needs insight into all areas of the business to avoid approving a high-risk change.

    Based on the core responsibilities you have defined, the CAB needs to be composed of a diverse set of individuals who provide quality:

    • Change need assessments – identifying the value and purpose of a proposed change.
    • Change risk assessments – confirmation of the technical impact and likelihood assessments that lead to a risk score, based on the inputs in RFC.
    • Change scheduling – offer a variety of perspectives and responsibilities and will be able to identify potential scheduling conflicts.
     CAB RepresentationValue Added
    Business Members
    • CIO
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Analyst
    • Identify change blackout periods, change impact, and business urgency.
    • Assess impact on fiduciary, legal, and/or audit requirements.
    • Determine acceptable business risk.
    IT Operations Members
    • Managers representing all IT functions
    • IT Directors
    • Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Identify dependencies and downstream impacts.
    • Identify possible conflicts with pre-existing OLAs and SLAs.
    CAB Attendees
    • Specific SMEs, tech specialists, and business and vendor reps relevant to a particular change
    • Only attend meetings when invited by the Change Manager
    • Provide detailed information and expertise related to their particular subject areas.
    • Speak to requirements, change impact, and cost.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Form a core CAB (members attend every week) and an optional CAB (members who attend only when a change impacts them or when they can provide value in discussions about a change). This way, members can have their voice heard without spending every week in a meeting where they do not contribute.

    2.1.3 Define the Authority and Responsibilities of Your CAB

    Input

    • Current SOP or CAB charter (if available)

    Output

    • Documented list of CAB authorities and responsibilities

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    1.Using the previous slide and the examples below, list the authorities and responsibilities of your CAB.

    2.Record the responsibilities in section 3.3.2 of your Change Management SOP and the Project Summary Template.

    Example:

    CAP AuthorityCAP Responsibilities
    • Final authority over the deployment of all normal and emergency changes.
    • Authority to absorb the risk of a change.
    • Authority to set the change calendar:
      • Maintenance windows.
      • Change freeze periods.
      • Project work.
      • Authority to delay changes.
    • Evaluate all normal and emergency changes.
    • Verify all normal change test, backout, and implementation plans.
    • Verify all normal change test results.
    • Approve all normal and emergency changes.
    • Prioritize all normal changes.
    • Schedule all normal and emergency changes.
    • Review failed change deployments.

    Establish an emergency CAB (E-CAB) protocol

    • When an emergency change request is received, you will not be able to wait until the regularly scheduled CAB meeting.
    • As a group, decide who will sit on the E-CAB and what their protocol will be when assessing and approving emergency changes.

    Change owner conferences with E-CAB (best efforts to reach them) through email or messaging.

    E-CAB members and business system owners are provided with change details. No decision is made without feedback from at least one E-CAB member.

    If business continuity is being affected, the Change Manager has authority to approve change.

    Full documentation of the change (a retroactive RFC) is done after the change and is then reviewed by the CAB.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Members of the E-CAB should be a subset of the CAB who are typically quick to respond to their messages, even at odd hours of the night.

    2.1.4 Determine an E-CAB Protocol for Your Organization

    Input

    • Current SOP or CAB charter (if available)

    Output

    • E-CAB protocol

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather the members of the E-CAB and other necessary representatives from the change management team.
    2. Determine the order of operations for the E-CAB in the event that an emergency change is needed.
    3. Consult the example emergency protocol below. Determine what roles and responsibilities are involved at each stage of the emergency change’s implementation.
    4. Document the E-CAB protocol in section 3.4 of your Change Management SOP.

    Example

    Assemble E-CAB

    Assess Change

    Test (if Applicable)

    Deploy Change

    Create Retroactive RFC

    Review With CAB

    Step 2.2

    Build Core Workflows

    Activities

    2.2.1 Build a CMDB-lite as a Reference for Requested Changes

    2.2.2 Create a Normal Change Process

    2.2.3 Create a Pre-Approved Change Process

    2.2.4 Create an Emergency Change Process

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Step 2.1: Determine Roles and Responsibilities → Step 2.2: Build Core Workflows

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • Emergency change workflow
    • Normal process workflow
    • Pre-approved change workflow

    Establishing Workflows: Change Management Lifecycle

    Improve

    • A post-implementation review assesses the value of the actual change measured against the proposed change in terms of benefits, costs, and impact.
    • Results recorded in the change log.
    • Accountability: Change Manager Change Implementer

    Request

    • A change request (RFC) can be submitted via paper form, phone, email, or web portal.
    • Accountability: Change requester/Initiator

    Assess

    • The request is screened to ensure it meets an agreed-upon set of business criteria.
    • Changes are assessed on:
      • Impact of change
      • Risks or interdependencies
      • Resourcing and costs
    • Accountability: Change Manager

    Plan

    • Tasks are assigned, planned, and executed.
    • Change schedule is consulted and necessary resources are identified.
    • Accountability: Change Manager

    Approve

    • Approved requests are sent to the most efficient channel based on risk, urgency, and complexity.
    • Change is sent to CAB members for final review and approval
    • Accountability: Change Manager
      • Change Advisory Board

    Implement

    • Approved changes are deployed.
    • A rollback plan is created to mitigate risk.
    • Accountability: Change Manager Change Implementer

    Establishing workflows: employ a SIPOC model for process definition

    A good SIPOC (supplier, input, process, output, customer) model helps establish the boundaries of each process step and provides a concise definition of the expected outcomes and required inputs. It’s a useful and recommended next step for every workflow diagram.

    For change management, employ a SIPOC model to outline your CAB process:

    Supplier

    • Who or what organization provides the inputs to the process? The supplier can be internal or external.

    Input

    • What goes into the process step? This can be a document, data, information, or a decision.

    Process

    • Activities that occur in the process step that’s being analyzed.

    Output

    • What does the process step produce? This can be a document, data, information, or a decision.

    Customer

    • Who or what organization(s) takes the output of the process? The customer can be internal or external.

    Optional Fields

    Metrics

    • Top-level indicators that usually relate to the input and output, e.g. turnaround time, risk matrix completeness.

    Controls

    • Checkpoints to ensure process step quality.

    Dependencies

    • Other process steps that require the output.

    RACI

    • Those who are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, or Informed (RACI) about the input, output, and/or process.

    Establish change workflows: assess requested changes to identify impact and dependencies

    An effective change assessment workflow is a holistic process that leaves no stone unturned in an effort to mitigate risk before any change reaches the approval stage. The four crucial areas of risk in a change workflow are:

    Dependencies

    Identify all components of the change.

    Ask how changes will affect:

    • Services on the same infrastructure?
    • Applications?
    • Infrastructure/app architecture?
    • Security?
    • Ability to support critical systems?

    Business Impact

    Frame the change from a business point of view to identify potential disruptions to business activities.

    Your assessment should cover:

    • Business processes
    • User productivity
    • Customer service
    • BCPs

    SLA Impact

    Each new change can impact the level of service available.

    Examine the impact on:

    • Availability of critical systems
    • Infrastructure and app performance
    • Infrastructure and app capacity
    • Existing disaster recovery plans and procedures

    Required Resources

    Once risk has been assessed, resources need to be identified to ensure the change can be executed.

    These include:

    • People (SMEs, tech support, work effort/duration)
    • System time for scheduled implementation
    • Hardware or software (new or existing, as well as tools)

    Establishing workflows: pinpoint dependencies to identify the need for additional changes

    An assessment of each change and a query of the CMDB needs to be performed as part of the change planning process to mitigate outage risk.

    • A version upgrade on one piece of software may require another component to be upgraded as well. For example, an upgrade to the database management system requires that an application that uses the database be upgraded or modified.
    • The sequence of the release must also be determined, as certain components may need to be upgraded before others. For example, if you upgrade the Exchange Server, a Windows update must be installed prior to the Exchange upgrade.
    • If you do not have a CMDB, consider building a CMDB-lite, which consists of a listing of systems, primary users, SMEs, business owners, and system dependencies (see next slide).

    Services Impacted

    • Have affected services been identified?
    • Have supporting services been identified?
    • Has someone checked the CMDB to ensure all dependencies have been accounted for?
    • Have we referenced the service catalog so the business approves what they’re authorizing?

    Technical Teams Impacted

    • Who will support the change throughout testing and implementation?
    • Will additional support be needed?
    • Do we need outside support from eternal suppliers?
    • Has someone checked the contract to ensure any additional costs have been approved?

    Build a dependency matrix to avoid change related collisions (optional)

    A CMDB-lite does not replace a CMDB but can be a valuable tool to leverage when requesting changes if you do not currently have configuration management. Consider the following inputs when building your own CMDB-lite.

    • System
      • To build a CMDB-lite, start with the top 10 systems in your environment that experience changes. This list can always be populated iteratively.
    • Primary Users
      • Listing the primary users will give a change requester a first glance at the impact of the change.
      • You can also use this information when looking at the change communication and training after the change is implemented.
    • SME/Backup
      • These are the staff that will likely build and implement the change. The backup is listed in case the primary is on holiday.
    • Business System Owner
      • The owner of the system is one of the people needed to sign off on the change. Having their support from the beginning of a change is necessary to build and implement it successfully.
    • Tier 1 Dependency
      • If the primary system experiences and outage, Tier 1 dependency functionality is also lost. To request a change, include the business system owner signoffs of the Tier 1 dependencies of the primary system.
    • Tier 2 Dependency
      • If the primary system experiences an outage, Tier 2 dependency functionality is lost, but there is an available workaround. As with Tier 1, this information can help you build a backout plan in case there is a change-related collision.
    • Tier 3 Dependency
      • Tier 3 functionality is not lost if the primary system experiences an outage, but nice-to-haves such as aesthetics are affected.

    2.2.1 Build a CMDB-lite as a Reference for Requested Changes

    Input

    • Current system ownership documentation

    Output

    • Documented reference for change requests (CMDB-lite)

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Start with a list of your top 10-15 systems/services with the highest volume of changes.
    2. Using a whiteboard, flip chart, or shared screen, complete the table below by filling the corresponding Primary Users, SMEs, Business System Owner, and Dependencies as shown below. It may help to use sticky notes.
    3. Iteratively populate the table as you notice gaps with incoming changes.
    SystemPrimary UsersSMEBackup SME(s)Business System OwnerTier 1 Dependency (system functionality is down)Tier 2 (impaired functionality/ workaround available)Tier 3 Dependency (nice to have)
    Email Enterprise Naomi Amos James
    • ITSMs
    • Scan-to-email
    • Reporting
     
    • Lots
    Conferencing Tool Enterprise Alex Shed James
    • Videoconferencing
    • Conference rooms (can use Facebook messenger instead in worst case scenario)
    • IM
    ITSM (Service Now) Enterprise (Intl.) Anderson TBD Mike
    • Work orders
    • Dashboards
    • Purchasing
     
    ITSM (Manage Engine) North America Bobbie Joseph Mike
    • Work orders
    • Dashboards
    • Purchasing
     

    Establishing workflows: create standards for change approvals to improve efficiency

    • Not all changes are created equal, and not all changes require the same degree of approval. As part of the change management process, it’s important to define who is the authority for each type of change.
    • Failure to do so can create bureaucratic bottlenecks if each change is held to an unnecessary high level of scrutiny, or unplanned outages may occur due to changes circumventing the formal approval process.
    • A balance must be met and defined to ensure the process is not bypassed or bottlenecked.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Define a list pre-approved changes and automate them (if possible) using your ITSM solution. This will save valuable time for more important changes in the queue.

    Example:

    Change CategoryChange Authority
    Pre-approved change Department head/manager
    Emergency change E-CAB
    Normal change – low and medium risk CAB
    Normal change – high risk CAB and CIO (for visibility)

    Example process: Normal Change – Change Initiation

    Change initiation allows for assurance that the request is in scope for change management and acts as a filter for out-of-scope changes to be redirected to the proper workflow. Initiation also assesses who may be assigned to the change and the proper category of the change, and results in an RFC to be populated before the change reaches the build and test phase.

    The image is a horizontal flow chart, depicting an example of a change process.

    The change trigger assessment is critical in the DevOps lifecycle. This can take a more formal role of a technical review board (TRB) or, with enough maturity, may be automated. Responsibilities such as deconfliction, dependency identification, calendar query, and authorization identification can be done early in the lifecycle to decrease or eliminate the burden on CAB.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Example process: Normal Change – Technical Build and Test

    The technical build and test stage includes all technical prerequisites and testing needed for a change to pass before proceeding to approval and implementation. In addition to a technical review, a solution consisting of the implementation, rollback, communications, and training plan are also built and included in the RFC before passing it to the CAB.

    The image is a flowchart, showing the process for change during the technical build and test stage.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Example process: Normal Change – Change Approval (CAB)

    Change approval can start with the Change Manager reviewing all incoming RFCs to filter them for completeness and check them for red flags before passing them to the CAB. This saves the CAB from discussing incomplete changes and allows the Change Manager to set a CAB agenda before the CAB meeting. If need be, change approval can also set vendor communications necessary for changes, as well as the final implementation date of the change. The CAB and Change Manager may follow up with the appropriate parties notifying them of the approval decision (accepted, rescheduled, or rejected).

    The image shows a flowchart illustrating the process for change approval.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Example process: Normal Change – Change Implementation

    Changes should not end at implementation. Ensure you define post-implementation activities (documentation, communication, training etc.) and a post-implementation review in case the change does not go according to plan.

    The image is a flowchart, illustrating the work process for change implementation and post-implementation review.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    2.2.2 Create a Normal Change Process

    Input

    • Current SOP/workflow library

    Output

    • Normal change process

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for a normal change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
      1. Request
      2. Assessment
      3. Plan
      4. Approve
      5. Implementation and Post-Implementation Activities
    3. Optionally, you may create variations of the workflow for minor, medium, and major changes (e.g. there will be fewer authorizations for minor changes).
    4. For further documentation, you may choose to run the SIPOC activity for your CAB as outlined on this slide.
    5. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and section 11 of your Change Management SOP.

    Download the Change Management Process Library.

    Identify and convert low-risk normal changes to pre-approved once the process is established

    As your process matures, begin creating a list of normal changes that might qualify for pre-approval. The most potential for value in gains from change management comes from re-engineering and automating of high-volume changes. Pre-approved changes should save you time without threatening the live environment.

    IT should flag changes they would like pre-approved:

    • Once your change management process is firmly established, hold a meeting with all staff that make change requests and build changes.
    • Run a training session detailing the traits of pre-approved changes and ask these individuals to identify changes that might qualify.
    • These changes should be submitted to the Change Manager and reviewed, with the help of the CAB, to decide whether or not they qualify for pre-approval.

    Pre-approved changes are not exempt from due diligence:

    • Once a change is designated as pre-approved, the deployment team should create and compile all relevant documentation:
      • An RFC detailing the change, dependencies, risk, and impact.
      • Detailed procedures and required resources.
      • Implementation and backout plan.
      • Test results.
    • When templating the RFC for pre-approved changes, aim to write the documentation as if another SME were to implement it. This reduces confusion, especially if there’s staff turnover.
    • The CAB must approve, sign off, and keep a record of all documents.
    • Pre-approved changes must still be documented and recorded in the CMDB and change log after each deployment.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    At the beginning of a change management process, there should be few active pre-approved changes. However, prior to launch, you may have IT flag changes for conversion.

    Example process: Pre-Approved Change Process

    The image shows two horizontal flow charts, the first labelled Pre-Approval of Recurring RFC, and the second labelled Implementation of Child RFC.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Review the pre-approved change list regularly to ensure the list of changes are still low-risk and repeatable.

    IT environments change. Don’t be caught by surprise.

    • Changes which were once low-risk and repeatable may cause unforeseen incidents if they are not reviewed regularly.
    • Dependencies change as the IT environment changes. Ensure that the changes on the pre-approved change list are still low-risk and repeatable, and that the documentation is up to date.
    • If dependencies have changed, then move the change back to the normal category for reassessment. It may be redesignated as a pre-approved change once the documentation is updated.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Other reasons for moving a pre-approved change back to the normal category is if the change led to an incident during implementation or if there was an issue during implementation.

    Seek new pre-approved change submissions. → Re-evaluate the pre-approved change list every 4-6 months.

    The image shows a horizontal flow chart, depicting the process for a pre-approved change list review.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    2.2.3 Create a Pre-Approved Change Process

    Input

    • Current SOP/workflow library

    Output

    • Pre-approved change process

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for a pre-approved change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
      1. Request
      2. Assessment
      3. Plan
      4. Approve
    3. Document the process of a converting a normal change to pre-approved. Include the steps from flagging a low-risk change to creating the related RFC template.
    4. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and sections 4.2 and 13 of your Change Management SOP.

    Reserve the emergency designation for real emergencies

    • Emergency changes have one of the following triggers:
      • A critical incident is impacting user productivity.
      • An imminent critical incident will impact user productivity.
    • Unless a critical incident is being resolved or prevented, the change should be categorized as normal.
    • An emergency change differs from a normal change in the following key aspects:
      • An emergency change is required to recover from a major outage – there must be a validated service desk critical incident ticket.
      • An urgent business requirement is not an “emergency.”
      • An RFC is created after the change is implemented and the outage is over.
      • A review by the full CAB occurs after the change is implemented.
      • The first responder and/or the person implementing the change may not be the subject matter expert for that system.
    • In all cases, an RFC must be created and the change must be reviewed by the full CAB. The review should occur within two business days of the event.
    Sample ChangeQuick CheckEmergency?
    Install the latest critical patches from the vendor. Are the patches required to resolve or prevent an imminent critical incident? No
    A virus or worm invades the network and a patch is needed to eliminate the threat. Is the patch required to resolve or prevent an imminent critical incident? Yes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Change requesters should be made aware that senior management will be informed if an emergency RFC is submitted inappropriately. Emergency requests trigger urgent CAB meetings, are riskier to deploy, and delay other changes waiting in the queue.

    Example process: Emergency Change Process

    The image is a flowchart depicting the process for an emergency change process

    When building your emergency change process, have your E-CAB protocol from activity 2.1.4 handy.

    • Focus on the following requirements for an emergency process:
      • E-CAB protocol and scope: Does the SME need authorization first before working on the change or can the SME proceed if no E-CAB members respond?
      • Documentation and communication to stakeholders and CAB after the emergency change is completed.
      • Input from incident management.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    2.2.4 Create an Emergency Change Process

    Input

    • Current SOP/workflow library

    Output

    • Emergency change process

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for an emergency change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
      1. Request
      2. Assessment
      3. Plan
      4. Approve
    3. Ensure that the E-CAB protocol from activity 2.1.4 is considered when building your process.
    4. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and section 12 of your Change Management SOP.

    Case Study (part 2 of 4)

    Intel implemented a robust change management process.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    Intel identified 37 different change processes and 25 change management systems of record with little integration.

    Software and infrastructure groups were also very siloed, and this no doubt contributed to the high number of changes that caused outages.

    The task was simple: standards needed to be put in place and communication had to improve.

    Results

    Once process ownership was assigned and the role of the Change Manager and CAB clarified, it was a simple task to streamline and simplify processes among groups.

    Intel designed a new, unified change management workflow that all groups would adopt.

    Automation was also brought into play to improve how RFCs were generated and submitted.

    Phase 3

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Design the RFC
    • Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Step 3.1

    Design the RFC

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate Your Existing RFC Process

    3.1.2 Build the RFC Form

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Step 3.1: Design the RFC

    Step 3.2: Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • A full RFC template and process that compliments the workflows for the three change categories

    A request for change (RFC) should be submitted for every non-standard change

    An RFC should be submitted through the formal change management practice for every change that is not a standard, pre-approved change (a change which does not require submission to the change management practice).

    • The RFC should contain all the information required to approve a change. Some information will be recorded when the change request is first initiated, but not everything will be known at that time.
    • Further information can be added as the change progresses through its lifecycle.
    • The level of detail that goes into the RFC will vary depending on the type of change, the size, and the likely impact of the change.
    • Other details of the change may be recorded in other documents and referenced in the RFC.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep the RFC form simple, especially when first implementing change management, to encourage the adoption of and compliance with the process.

    RFCs should contain the following information, at a minimum:

    1. Contact information for requester
    2. Description of change
    3. References to external documentation
    4. Items to be changed, reason for the change, and impact of both implementing and not implementing the change
    5. Change type and category
    6. Priority and risk assessment
    7. Predicted time frame, resources, and cost
    8. Backout or remediation plan
    9. Proposed approvers
    10. Scheduled implementation time
    11. Communications plan and post-implementation review

    3.1.1 Evaluate Your Existing RFC Process

    Input

    • Current RFC form or stock ITSM RFC
    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of changes to the current RFC form and RFC process

    Materials

    Participants

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. If the organization is already using an RFC form, review it as a group now and discuss its contents:
      • Does this RFC provide adequate information for the Change Manager and/or CAB to review?
      • Should any additional fields be added?
    2. Show the participants Info-Tech’s Request for Change Form Template and compare it to the one the organization is currently using.
    3. As a group, finalize an RFC table of contents that will be used to formalize a new or improved RFC.
    4. Decide which fields should be filled out by the requester before the initial RFC is submitted to the Change Manager:
      • Many sections of the RFC are relevant for change assessment and review. What information does the Change Manager need when they first receive a request?
      • The Change Manager needs enough information to ensure that the change is in scope and has been properly categorized.
    5. Decide how the RFC form should be submitted and reviewed; this can be documented in section 5 of your Change Management SOP.

    Download the Request for Change Form Template.

    Design the RFC to encourage process buy-in

    • When building the RFC, split the form up into sections that follow the normal workflow (e.g. Intake, Assessment and Build, Approval, Implementation/PIR). This way the form walks the requester through what needs to be filled and when.
    • Revisit the form periodically and solicit feedback to continually improve the user experience. If there’s information missing on the RFC that the CAB would like to know, add the fields. If there are sections that are not used or not needed for documentation, remove them.
    • Make sure the user experience surrounding your RFC form is a top priority – make it accessible, otherwise change requesters simply will not use it.
    • Take advantage of your ITSM’s dropdown lists, automated notifications, CMDB integrations, and auto-generated fields to ease the process of filling the RFC

    Draft:

    • Change requester
    • Requested date of deployment
    • Change risk: low/medium/high
    • Risk assessment
    • Description of change
    • Reason for change
    • Change components

    Technical Build:

    • Assess change:
      • Dependencies
      • Business impact
      • SLA impact
      • Required resources
      • Query the CMS
    • Plan and test changes:
      • Test plan
      • Test results
      • Implementation plan
      • Backout plan
      • Backout plan test results

    CAB:

    • Approve and schedule changes:
      • Final CAB review
      • Communications plan

    Complete:

    • Deploy changes:
      • Post-implementation review

    Designing your RFC: RFC draft

    • Change requester – link your change module to the active directory to pull the change requester’s contact information automatically to save time.
    • A requested date of deployment gives approvers information on timeline and can be used to query the change calendar for possible conflicts
    • Information about risk assessment based on impact and likelihood questionnaires are quick to fill out but provide a lot of information to the CAB. The risk assessment may not be complete at the draft stage but can be updated as the change is built. Ensure this field is up-to- date before it reaches CAB.
    • If you have a technical review stage where changes are directed to the proper workflow and resourcing is assessed, the description, reason, and change components are high-level descriptors of the change that will aid in discovery and lining the change up with the business vision (viability from both a technical and business standpoint).
    • Change requester
    • Requested date of deployment
    • Change Risk: low/medium/high
    • Risk assessment
    • Description of change
    • Reason for change
    • Change components

    Use the RFC to point to documentation already gathered in the DevOps lifecycle to cut down on unnecessary manual work while maintaining compliance.

    Designing your RFC: technical build

    • Dependencies and CMDB query, along with the proposed implementation date, are included to aid in calendar deconfliction and change scheduling. If there’s a conflict, it’s easier to reschedule the proposed change early in the lifecycle.
    • Business, SLA impact, and required resources can be tracked to provide the CAB with information on the business resources required. This can also be used to prioritize the change if conflicts arise.
    • Implementation, test, and backout plans must be included and assessed to increase the probability that a change will be implemented without failure. It’s also useful in the case of PIRs to determine root causes of change-related incidents.
    • Assess change:
      • Dependencies
      • Business impact
      • SLA impact
      • Required resources
      • Query the CMS
    • Plan and test changes:
      • Test plan
      • Test results
      • Implementation plan
      • Backout plan
      • Backout plan test results

    Designing your RFC: approval and deployment

    • Documenting approval, rejection, and rescheduling gives the change requester the go-ahead to proceed with the change, rationale on why it was prioritized lower than another change (rescheduled), or rationale on rejection.
    • Communications plans for appropriate stakeholders can also be modified and forwarded to the communications team (e.g. service desk or business system owners) before deployment.
    • Post-implementation activities and reviews can be conducted if need be before a change is closed. The PIR, if filled out, should then be appended to any subsequent changes of the same nature to avoid making the same mistake twice.
    • Approve and schedule changes:
      • Final CAB review
      • Communications plan
    • Deploy changes:
      • Post-implementation review

    Standardize the request for change protocol

    1. Submission Standards
      • Electronic submission will make it easier for CAB members to review the documentation.
      • As the change goes through the assessment, plan, and test phase, new documentation (assessments, backout plans, test results, etc.) can be attached to the digital RFC for review by CAB members prior to the CAB meeting.
      • Change management software won’t be necessary to facilitate the RFC submission and review; a content repository system, such as SharePoint, will suffice.
    2. Designate the first control point
      • All RFCs should be submitted to a single point of contact.
      • Ideally, the Change Manager or Technical Review Board should fill this role.
      • Whoever is tasked with this role needs the subject matter expertise to ensure that the change has been categorized correctly, to reject out-of-scope requests, or to ask that missing information be provided before the RFC moves through the full change management practice.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Technical and SME contacts should be noted in each RFC so they can be easily consulted during the RFC review.

    3.1.2 Build the RFC Form

    Input

    • Current RFC form or stock ITSM RFC
    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of changes to the current RFC and RFC process

    Materials

    Participants

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Use Info-Tech’s Request for Change Form Template as a basis for your RFC form.
    2. Use this template to standardize your change request process and ensure that the appropriate information is documented effectively each time a request is made. The change requester and Change Manager should consolidate all information associated with a given change request in this form. This form will be submitted by the change requester and reviewed by the Change Manager.

    Case Study (part 3 of 4)

    Intel implemented automated RFC form generation.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    One of the crucial factors that was impacting Intel’s change management efficiency was a cumbersome RFC process.

    A lack of RFC usage was contributing to increased ad hoc changes being put through the CAB, and rescheduled changes were quite high.

    Additionally, ad hoc changes were also contributing heavily to unscheduled downtime within the organization.

    Results

    Intel designed and implemented an automated RFC form generator to encourage end users to increase RFC usage.

    As we’ve seen with RFC form design, the UX/UI of the form needs to be top notch, otherwise end users will simply circumvent the process. This will contribute to the problems you are seeking to correct.

    Thanks to increased RFC usage, Intel decreased emergency changes by 50% and reduced change-caused unscheduled downtime by 82%.

    Step 3.2

    Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Activities

    3.2.1 Determine When the CAB Would Reject Tested Changes

    3.2.2 Create a Post-Implementation Activity Checklist

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Step 3.1: Design RFC

    Step 3.2: Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized post-implementation process for continual improvement

    Why would the CAB reject a change that has been properly assessed and tested?

    Possible reasons the CAB would reject a change include:

    • The product being changed is approaching its end of life.
    • The change is too costly.
    • The timing of the change conflicts with other changes.
    • There could be compliance issues.
    • The change is actually a project.
    • The risk is too high.
    • There could be regulatory issues.
    • The peripherals (test, backout, communication, and training plans) are incomplete.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Many reasons for rejection (listed above) can be caught early on in the process during the technical review or change build portion of the change. The earlier you catch these reasons for rejection, the less wasted effort there will be per change.

    Sample RFCReason for CAP Rejection
    There was a request for an update to a system that a legacy application depends on and only a specific area of the business was aware of the dependency. The CAB rejects it due to the downstream impact.
    There was a request for an update to a non-supported application, and the vendor was asking for a premium support contract that is very costly. It’s too expensive to implement, despite the need for it. The CAB will wait for an upgrade to a new application.
    There was a request to update application functionality to a beta release. The risk outweighs the business benefits.

    Determine When the CAB Would Reject Tested Changes

    Input

    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of reasons to reject tested changes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Projector
    • Markers/pens
    • Laptop with ITSM admin access
    • Project Summary Template

    Participants

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Avoid hand-offs to ensure a smooth implementation process

    The implementation phase is the final checkpoint before releasing the new change into your live environment. Once the final checks have been made to the change, it’s paramount that teams work together to transition the change effectively rather than doing an abrupt hand-off. This could cause a potential outage.

    1.

    • Deployment resources identified, allocated, and scheduled
    • Documentation complete
    • Support team trained
    • Users trained
    • Business sign-off
    • Target systems identified and ready to receive changes
    • Target systems available for installation maintenance window scheduled
    • Technical checks:
      • Disk space available
      • Pre-requisites met
      • Components/Services to be updated are stopped
      • All users disconnected
    • Download Info-Tech’sChange Management Pre-Implementation Checklist

    Implement change →

    2.

    1. Verification – once the change has been implemented, verify that all requirements are fulfilled.
    2. Review – ensure that all affected systems and applications are operating as predicted. Update change log.
    3. Transition – a crucial phase of implementation that’s often overlooked. Once the change implementation is complete from a technical point of view, it’s imperative that the team involved with the change inform and train the group responsible for managing the new change.

    Create a backout plan to reduce the risk of a failed change

    Every change process needs to plan for the potential for failure and how to address it effectively. Change management’s solution to this problem is a backout plan.

    A backout plan needs to contain a record of the steps that need to be taken to restore the live environment back to its previous state and maintain business continuity. A good backout plan asks the following questions:

    1. How will failure be determined? Who will make the determination to back out of a change be made and when?
    2. Do we fix on fail or do we rollback to the previous configuration?
    3. Is the service desk aware of the impending change? Do they have proper training?

    Notify the Service Desk

    • Notify the Service Desk about backout plan initiation.

    Disable Access

    • Disable user access to affected system(s).

    Conduct Checks

    • Conduct checks to all affected components.

    Enable User Access

    • Enable user access to affected systems.

    Notify the Service Desk

    • Notify the service desk that the backout plan was successful.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    As part of the backout plan, consider the turnback point in the change window. That is, the point within the change window where you still have time to fully back out of the change.

    Ensure the following post-implementation review activities are completed

    Service Catalog

    Update the service catalog with new information as a result of the implemented change.

    CMDB

    Update new dependencies present as a result of the new change.

    Asset DB

    Add notes about any assets newly affected by changes.

    Architecture Map

    Update your map based on the new change.

    Technical Documentation

    Update your technical documentation to reflect the changes present because of the new change.

    Training Documentation

    Update your training documentation to reflect any information about how users interact with the change.

    Use a post-implementation review process to promote continual improvement

    The post-implementation review (PIR) is the most neglected change management activity.

    • All changes should be reviewed to understand the reason behind them, appropriateness, and recommendations for next steps.
    • The Change Manager manages the completion of information PIRs and invites RFC originators to present their findings and document the lessons learned.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Review PIR reports at CAB meetings to highlight the root causes of issues, action items to close identified gaps, and back-up documentation required. Attach the PIR report to the relevant RFC to prevent similar changes from facing the same issues in the future.

    1. Why do a post-implementation review?
      • Changes that don’t fail but don’t perform well are rarely reviewed.
      • Changes may fail subtly and still need review.
      • Changes that cause serious failures (i.e. unplanned downtime) receive analysis that is unnecessarily in-depth.
    2. What are the benefits?
      • A proactive, post-implementation review actually uses less resources than reactionary change reviews.
      • Root-cause analysis of failed changes, no matter what the impact.
      • Insight into changes that took longer than projected.
      • Identification of previously unidentified risks affecting changes.

    Determine the strategy for your PIR to establish a standardized process

    Capture the details of your PIR process in a table similar to the one below.

    Frequency Part of weekly review (IT team meeting)
    Participants
    • Change Manager
    • Originator
    • SME/supervisor/impacted team(s)

    Categories under review

    Current deviations and action items from previous PIR:

    • Complete
    • Partially complete
    • Complete, late
    • Change failed, rollback succeeded
    • Change failed, rollback failed
    • Major deviation from implementation plan
    Output
    • Root cause or failure or deviation
    • External factors
    • Remediation focus areas
    • Remediation timeline (follow-up at appropriate time)
    Controls
    • Reviewed at next CAB meeting
    • RFC close is dependent on completion of PIR
    • Share with the rest of the technical team
    • Lessons learned stored in the knowledgebase and attached to RFC for easy search of past issues.

    3.2.2 Create a Post-Implementation Activity Checklist

    Input

    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of reasons to reject tested changes

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Brainstorm duties to perform following the deployment of a change. Below is a sample list:
      • Example:
        • Was the deployment successful?
          • If no, was the backout plan executed successfully?
        • List change-related incidents
        • Change assessment
          • Missed dependencies
          • Inaccurate business impact
          • Incorrect SLA impact
          • Inaccurate resources
            • Time
            • Staff
            • Hardware
        • System testing
        • Integration testing
        • User acceptance testing
        • No backout plan
        • Backout plan failure
        • Deployment issues
    3. Record your results in the Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist.

    Download the Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

    Case Study

    Microsoft used post-implementation review activities to mitigate the risk of a critical Azure outage.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Jason Zander, Microsoft

    Challenge

    In November 2014, Microsoft deployed a change intended to improve Azure storage performance by reducing CPU footprint of the Azure Table Front-Ends.

    The deployment method was an incremental approach called “flighting,” where software and configuration deployments are deployed incrementally to Azure infrastructure in small batches.

    Unfortunately, this software deployment caused a service interruption in multiple regions.

    Solution

    Before the software was deployed, Microsoft engineers followed proper protocol by testing the proposed update. All test results pointed to a successful implementation.

    Unfortunately, engineers pushed the change out to the entire infrastructure instead of adhering to the traditional flighting protocol.

    Additionally, the configuration switch was incorrectly enabled for the Azure Blob storage Front-Ends.

    A combination of the two mistakes exposed a bug that caused the outage.

    Results

    Thankfully, Microsoft had a backout plan. Within 30 minutes, the change was rolled back on a global scale.

    It was determined that policy enforcement was not integrated across the deployment system. An update to the system shifted the process of policy enforcement from human-based decisions and protocol to automation via the deployment platform.

    Defined PIR activities enabled Microsoft to take swift action against the outage and mitigate the risk of a serious outage.

    Phase 4

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design RFC

    3.2 Establish post-implementation activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar
    • Implement the Project

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager

    Step 4.1

    Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    Activities

    4.1.1 Create an Outline for Your Change Calendar

    4.1.2 Determine Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

    4.1.3 Track and Record Metrics Using the Change Management Metrics Tool

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Step 4.1: Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    Step 4.2: Implement the Project

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Clear definitions of change calendar content
    • Guidelines for change calendar scheduling
    • Defined metrics to measure the success of change management with associated reports, KPIs, and CSFs

    Enforce a standard method of prioritizing and scheduling changes

    The impact of not deploying the change and the benefit of deploying it should determine its priority.

    Risk of Not Deploying

    • What is the urgency of the change?
    • What is the risk to the organization if the change is not deployed right away?
    • Will there be any lost productivity, service disruptions, or missed critical business opportunities?
      • Timing
        • Does the proposed timing work with the approved changes already on the change schedule?
        • Has the change been clash checked so there are no potential conflicts over services or resources?
      • Once prioritized, a final deployment date should be set by the CAB. Check the change calendar first to avoid conflicts.

    Positive Impact of Deployment

    • What benefits will be realized once the change is deployed?
    • How significant is the opportunity that triggered the change?
    • Will the change lead to a positive business outcome (e.g. increased sales)?

    “The one who has more clout or authority is usually the one who gets changes scheduled in the time frame they desire, but you should really be evaluating the impact to the organization. We looked at the risk to the business of not doing the change, and that’s a good way of determining the criticality and urgency of that change.” – Joseph Sgandurra, Director, Service Delivery, Navantis

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid a culture where powerful stakeholders are able to push change deployment on an ad hoc basis. Give the CAB the full authority to make approval decisions based on urgency, impact, cost, and availability of resources.

    Develop a change schedule to formalize the planning process

    A change calendar will help the CAB schedule changes more effectively and increase visibility into upcoming changes across the organization.

    1. Establish change windows in a consistent change schedule:
      • Compile a list of business units that would benefit from a change.
      • Look for conflicts in the change schedule.
      • Avoid scheduling two or more major business units in a day.
      • Consider clients when building your change windows and change schedule.
    2. Gain commitments from key participants:
      • These individuals can confirm if there are any unusual or cyclical business requirements that will impact the schedule.
    3. Properly control your change calendar to improve change efficiency:
      • Look at the proposed start and end times: Are they sensible? Does the implementation window leave time for anything going wrong or needing to roll back the change?
      • Special considerations: Are there special circumstances that need to be considered? Ask the business if you don’t know.
      • The key principle is to have a sufficient window available for implementing changes so you only need to set up calendar freezes for sound business or technical reasons.

    Our mantra is to put it on the calendar. Even if it’s a preapproved change and doesn’t need a vote, having it on the calendar helps with visibility. The calendar is the one-stop shop for scheduling and identifying change dependencies.“ – Wil Clark, Director of Service and Performance Management, University of North Texas Systems

    Provide clear definitions of what goes on the change calendar and who’s responsible

    Roles

    • The Change Manager will be responsible for creating and maintaining a change calendar.
    • Only the Change Manager can physically alter the calendar by adding a new change after the CAB has agreed upon a deployment date.
    • All other CAB members, IT support staff, and other impacted stakeholders should have access to the calendar on a read-only basis to prevent people from making unauthorized changes to deployment dates.

    Inputs

    • Freeze periods for individual business departments/applications (e.g. finance month-end periods, HR payroll cycle, etc. – all to be investigated).
    • Maintenance windows and planned outage periods.
    • Project schedules, and upcoming major/medium changes.
    • Holidays.
    • Business hours (some departments work 9-5, others work different hours or in different time zones, and user acceptance testing may require business users to be available).

    Guidelines

    • Business-defined freeze periods are the top priority.
    • No major or medium normal changes should occur during the week between Christmas and New Year’s Day.
    • Vendor SLA support hours are the preferred time for implementing changes.
    • The vacation calendar for IT will be considered for major changes.
    • Change priority: High > Medium > Low.
    • Minor changes and preapproved changes have the same priority and will be decided on a case-by-case basis.

    The change calendar is a critical pre-requisite to change management in DevOps. Use the calendar to be proactive with proposed implementation dates and deconfliction before the change is finished.

    4.1.1 Create Guidelines for Your Change Calendar

    Input

    • Current change calendar guidelines

    Output

    • Change calendar inputs and schedule checklist

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
      • Example:
        • The change calendar/schedule includes:
          • Approved and scheduled normal changes.
          • Scheduled project work.
          • Scheduled maintenance windows.
          • Change freeze periods with affected users noted:
            • Daily/weekly freeze periods.
            • Monthly freeze periods.
            • Annual freeze periods.
            • Other critical business events.
    2. Create a checklist to run through before each change is scheduled:
      • Check the schedule and assess resource availability:
        • Will user productivity be impacted?
        • Are there available resources (people and systems) to implement the change?
        • Is the vendor available? Is there a significant cost attached to pushing change deployment before the regularly scheduled refresh?
        • Are there dependencies? Does the deployment of one change depend on the earlier deployment of another?
    3. Record your results in your Project Summary Template.

    Start measuring the success of your change management project using three key metrics

    Number of change-related incidents that occur each month

    • Each month, record the number of incidents that can be directly linked to a change. This can be done using an ITSM tool or manually by service desk staff.
    • This is a key success metric: if you are not tracking change-related incidents yet, start doing so as soon as possible. This is the metric that the CIO and business stakeholders will be most interested in because it impacts users directly.

    Number of unauthorized changes applied each month

    • Each month, record the number of changes applied without approval. This is the best way to measure adherence to the process.
    • If this number decreases, it demonstrates a reduction in risk, as more changes are formally assessed and approved before being deployed.

    Percentage of emergency changes

    • Each month, compare the number of emergency change requests to the total number of change requests.
    • Change requesters often designate changes as emergencies as a way of bypassing the process.
    • A reduction in emergency changes demonstrates that your process is operating smoothly and reduces the risk of deploying changes that have not been properly tested.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Start simple. Metrics can be difficult to tackle if you’re starting from scratch. While implementing your change management practice, use these three metrics as a starting point, since they correlate well with the success of change management overall. The following few slides provide more insight into creating metrics for your change process.

    If you want more insight into your change process, measure the progress of each step in change management with metrics

    Improve

    • Number of repeat failures (i.e. making the same mistake twice)
    • Number of changes converted to pre-approved
    • Number of changes converted from pre-approved back to normal

    Request

    • What percentage of change requests have errors or lack appropriate support?
    • What percentage of change requests are actually projects, service requests, or operational tasks?
    • What percentage of changes have been requested before (i.e. documented)?

    Assess

    • What percentage of change requests are out of scope?
    • What percentage of changes have been requested before (i.e. documented)?
    • What are the percentages of changes by category (normal, pre-approved, emergency)?

    Plan

    • What percentage of change requests are reviewed by the CAB that should have been pre-approved or emergency (i.e. what percentage of changes are in the wrong category)?

    Approve

    • Number of changes broken down by department (business unit/IT department to be used in making core/optional CAB membership more efficient)
    • Number of workflows that can be automated

    Implement

    • Number of changes completed on schedule
    • Number of changes rolled back
    • What percentage of changes caused an incident?

    Use metrics to inform project KPIs and CSFs

    Leverage the metrics from the last slide and convert them to data communicable to IT, management, and leadership

    • To provide value, metrics and measurements must be actionable. What actions can be taken as a result of the data being presented?
    • If the metrics are not actionable, there is no value and you should question the use of the metric.
    • Data points in isolation are mostly meaningless to inform action. Observe trends in your metrics to inform your decisions.
    • Using a framework to develop measurements and metrics provides a defined methodology that enables a mapping of base measurements through CSFs.
    • Establishing the relationship increases the value that measurements provide.

    Purposely use SDLC and change lifecycle metrics to find bottlenecks and automation candidates.

    Metrics:

    Metrics are easily measured datapoints that can be pulled from your change management tool. Examples: Number of changes implemented, number of changes without incident.

    KPIs:

    Key Performance Indicators are metrics presented in a way that is easily digestible by stakeholders in IT. Examples: Change efficiency, quality of changes.

    CSFs:

    Critical Success Factors are measures of the business success of change management taken by correlating the CSF with multiple KPIs. Examples: consistent and efficient change management process, a change process mapped to business needs

    List in-scope metrics and reports and align them to benefits

    Metric/Report (by team)Benefit
    Total number of RFCs and percentages by category (pre-approved, normal, emergency, escalated support, expedited)
    • Understand change management activity
    • Tracking maturity growth
    • Identifying “hot spots”
    Pre-approved change list (and additions/removals from the list) Workload and process streamlining (i.e. reduce “red tape” wherever possible)
    Average time between RFC lifecycle stages (by service/application) Advance planning for proposed changes
    Number of changes by service/application/hardware class
    • Identifying weaknesses in the architecture
    • Vendor-specific TCO calculations
    Change triggers Business- vs. IT-initiated change
    Number of RFCs by lifecycle stage Workload planning
    List of incidents related to changes Visible failures of the CM process
    Percentage of RFCs with a tested backout/validation plan Completeness of change planning
    List of expedited changes Spotlighting poor planning and reducing the need for this category going forward (“The Hall of Shame”)
    CAB approval rate Change coordinator alignment with CAB priorities – low approval rate indicates need to tighten gatekeeping by the change coordinator
    Calendar of changes Planning

    4.1.2 Determine Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

    Input

    • Current metrics

    Output

    • List of trackable metrics, KPIs and CSFs

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Draw three tables for metrics, KPIs, and CSFs.
    2. Starting with the CSF table, fill in all relevant CSFs that your group wishes to track and measure.
    3. Next, work to determine relevant KPIs correlated with the CSFs and metrics needed to measure the KPIs. Use the tables included below (taken from section 14 of the Change Management SOP) to guide the process.
    4. Record the results in the tables in section 14 of your Change Management SOP.
    5. Decide on where and when to review the metrics to discuss your change management strategy. Designate and owner and record in the RACI and Communications section of your Change Management SOP.
    Ref #Metric

    M1

    Number of changes implemented for a time period
    M2 Number of changes successfully implemented for a time period
    M3 Number of changes implemented causing incidents
    M4 Number of accepted known errors when change is implemented
    M5 Total days for a change build (specific to each change)
    M6 Number of changes rescheduled
    M7 Number of training questions received following a change
    Ref#KPIProduct
    K1 Successful changes for a period of time (approach 100%) M2 / M1 x 100%
    K2 Changes causing incidents (approach 0%) M3 / M1 x 100%
    K3 Average days to implement a change ΣM5 / M1
    K4 Change efficiency (approach 100%) [1 - (M6 / M1)] x 100%
    K5 Quality of changes being implemented (approach 100%) [1 - (M4 / M1)] x 100%
    K6 Change training efficiency (approach 100%) [1 - (M7 / M1)] x 100%
    Ref#CSFIndicator
    C1 Successful change management process producing quality changes K1, K5
    C2 Consistent efficient change process K4, K6
    C3 Change process maps to business needs K5, K6

    Measure changes in selected metrics to evaluate success

    Once you have implemented a standardized change management practice, your team’s goal should be to improve the process, year over year.

    • After a process change has been implemented, it’s important to regularly monitor and evaluate the CSFs, KPIs, and metrics you chose to evaluate. Examine whether the process change you implemented has actually resolved the issue or achieved the goal of the critical success factor.
    • Establish a schedule for regularly reviewing the key metrics. Assess changes in those metrics and determine progress toward reaching objectives.
    • In addition to reviewing CSFs, KPIs, and metrics, check in with the release management team and end users to measure their perceptions of the change management process once an appropriate amount of time has passed.
    • Ensure that metrics are telling the whole story and that reporting is honest in order to be informative.

    Outcomes of standardizing change management should include:

    1. Improved efficiency, effectiveness, and quality of changes.
    2. Changes and processes are more aligned with the business needs and strategy.
    3. Improved maturity of change processes.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make sure you’re measuring the right things and considering all sources of information. It’s very easy to put yourself in a position where you’re congratulating yourselves for improving on a specific metric such as number of releases per month, but satisfaction remains low.

    4.1.3 Track and Record Metrics Using the Change Management Metrics Tool

    Input

    • Current metrics

    Output

    • List of trackable metrics, KPIs and CSFs to be observed over the length of a year

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Tracking the progress of metrics is paramount to the success of any change management process. Use Info-Tech’s Change Management Metrics Tool to record metrics and track your progress. This tool is intended to be a substitute for organizations who do not have the capability to track change-related metrics in their ITSM tool.

    1. Input metrics from the previous activity to track over the course of a year.
    2. To record your metrics, open the tool and go to tab 2. The tool is currently primed to record and track five metrics. If you need more than that, you can edit the list in the hidden calculations tab.
    3. To see the progress of your metrics, move to tab 3 to view a dashboard of all metrics in the tool.

    Download the Change Management Metrics Tool

    Case Study

    A federal credit union was able to track maturity growth through the proper use of metrics.

    Industry: Federal Credit Union (anonymous)

    Source: Info-Tech Workshop

    Challenge

    At this federal credit union, the VP of IT wanted a tight set of metrics to engage with the business, communicate within IT, enable performance management of staff, and provide visibility into workload demands, among other requirements.

    The organization was suffering from “metrics fatigue,” with multiple reports being generated from all groups within IT, to the point that weekly/monthly reports were being seen as spam.

    Solution

    Stakeholders were provided with an overview of change management benefits and were asked to identify one key attribute that would be useful to their specific needs.

    Metrics were designed around the stakeholder needs, piloted with each stakeholder group, fine-tuned, and rolled out.

    Some metrics could not be automated off-the-shelf and were rolled out in a manual fashion. These metrics were subsequently automated and finally made available through a dashboard.

    Results

    The business received clear guidance regarding estimated times to implement changes across different elements of the environment.

    The IT managers were able to plan team workloads with visibility into upstream change activity.

    Architects were able to identify vendors and systems that were the leading source of instability.

    The VP of IT was able to track the maturity growth of the change management process and proactively engage with the business on identified hot spots.

    Step 4.2

    Implement the Project

    Activities

    4.2.1 Use a Communications Plan to Gain End User Buy-In

    4.2.2 Create a Project Roadmap to Track Your Implementation Progress

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Step 4.1: Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    Step 3.2: Implement the Project

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • A communications plan for key messages to communicate to relevant stakeholders and audiences
    • A roadmap with assigned action items to implement change management

    Success of the new process will depend on introducing change and gaining acceptance

    Change management provides value by promptly evaluating and delivering changes required by the business and by minimizing disruption and rework caused by failed changes. Communication of your new change management process is key. If people do not understand the what and why, it will fail to provide the desired value.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Gather feedback from end users about the new process: if the process is too bureaucratic, end users are more likely to circumvent it.

    Main Challenges with Communication

    • Many people fail before they even start because they are buried in a mess created before they arrived – either because of a failed attempt to get change management implemented or due to a complicated system that has always existed.
    • Many systems are maintained because “that’s the way it’s always been done.”
    • Organizations don’t know where to start; they think change management is too complex a process.
    • Each group needs to follow the same procedure – groups often have their own processes, but if they don’t agree with one another, this could cause an outage.

    Educate affected stakeholders to prepare for organizational change

    An organizational change management plan should be part of your change management project.

    • Educate stakeholders about:
      • The process change (describe it in a way that the user can understand and is clear and concise).
        • IT changes will be handled in a standardized and repeatable fashion to minimize change-related incidents.
      • Who is impacted?
        • All users.
      • How are they impacted?
        • All change requests will be made using a standard form and will not be deployed until formal approval is received.
      • Change messaging.
        • How to communicate the change (benefits).
      • Learning and development – training your users on the change.
        • Develop and deliver training session on the Change Management SOP to familiarize users with this new method of handling IT change.

    Host a lunch-and-learn session

    • For the initial deployment, host a lunch-and-learn session to educate the business on the change management practice. Relevant stakeholders of affected departments should host it and cover the following topics:
    • What is change management (change management/change control)?
    • The value of change management.
    • What the Change Management SOP looks like.
    • Who is involved in the change management process (the CAB, etc.)?
    • What constitutes a pre-approved change and an emergency change?
    • An overview of the process, including how to avoid unauthorized changes.
    • Who should they contact in case of questions?

    Communicate the new process to all affected stakeholders

    Do not surprise users or support staff with changes. This will result in lost productivity and low satisfaction with IT services.

    • User groups and the business need to be given sufficient notice of an impending change.
    • This will allow them to make appropriate plans to accept the change, minimizing the impact of the change on productivity.
    • A communications plan will be documented in the RFC while the release is being built and tested.
    • It’s the responsibility of the change team to execute on the communications plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The success of change communication can be measured by monitoring the number of service desk tickets related to a change that was not communicated to users.

    Communication is crucial to the integration and overall implementation of your change management initiative. An effective communications plan will:

    • Gain support from management at the project proposal phase.
    • Create end-user buy-in once the program is set to launch.
    • Maintain the presence of the program throughout the business.
    • Instill ownership throughout the business from top-level management to new hires.

    Create your communications plan to anticipate challenges, remove obstacles, and ensure buy-in

    Management

    Technicians

    Business Stakeholders

    Provide separate communications to key stakeholder groups

    Why? What problems are you trying to solve?

    What? What processes will it affect (that will affect me)?

    Who? Who will be affected? Who do I go to if I have issues with the new process?

    When? When will this be happening? When will it affect me?

    How? How will these changes manifest themselves?

    Goal? What is the final goal? How will it benefit me?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Pay close attention to the medium of communication. For example, stakeholders on their feet all day would not be as receptive to an email communication compared to those who primarily work in front of a computer. Put yourself into various stakeholders’ shoes to craft a tailored communication of change management.

    4.2.1 Use a Communications Plan to Gain End User Buy-In

    Input

    • List of stakeholder groups for change management

    Output

    • Tailored communications plans for various stakeholder groups

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Using Info-Tech’s Change Management Communications Plan, identify key audiences or stakeholder groups that will be affected by the new change management practice.
    2. For each group requiring a communications plan, identify the following:
      • The benefits for that group of individuals.
      • The impact the change will have on them.
      • The best communication method(s) for them.
      • The time frame of the communication.
    3. Complete this information in a table like the one below:
    GroupBenefitsImpactMethodTimeline
    IT Standardized change process All changes must be reviewed and approved Poster campaign 6 months
    End Users Decreased wait time for changes Formal process for RFCs Lunch-and-learn sessions 3 months
    Business Reduced outages Increased involvement in planning and approvals Monthly reports 1 year
    1. Discuss the communications plan:
      • Will this plan ensure that users are given adequate opportunities to accept the changes being deployed?
      • Is the message appropriate for each audience? Is the format appropriate for each audience?
      • Does the communication include training where necessary to help users adopt any new functions/workflows being introduced?

    Download the Change Management Communications Plan

    Present your SOP to key stakeholders and obtain their approval

    Now that you have completed your Change Management SOP, the final step is to get sign-off from senior management to begin the rollout process.

    Know your audience:

    • Determine the service management stakeholders who will be included in the audience for your presentation.
    • You want your presentation to be succinct and hard hitting. Management’s time is tight and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
    • Briefly speak about the need for more formal change management and emphasize the benefits of implementing a more formal process with a SOP.
    • Present your current state assessment results to provide context before presenting the SOP itself.
    • As with any other foundational activity, be prepared with some quick wins to gain executive attention.
    • Be prepared to review with both technical and less technical stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The support of senior executive stakeholders is critical to the success of your SOP rollout. Try to wow them with project benefits and make sure they know about the risks/pain points.

    Download the Change Management Project Summary Template

    4.2.2 Create a Project Roadmap to Track Your Implementation Progress

    Input

    • List of implementation tasks

    Output

    • Roadmap and timeline for change management implementation

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Info-Tech’s Change Management Roadmap Tool helps you identify and prioritize tasks that need to be completed for the change management implementation project.
    2. Use this tool to identify each action item that will need to be completed as part of the change management initiative. Chart each action item, assign an owner, define the duration, and set a completion date.
    3. Use the resulting rocket diagram as a guide to task completion as you work toward your future state.

    Download the Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Case Study (part 4 of 4)

    Intel implemented a robust change management process.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    Intel had its new change management program in place and the early milestones planned, but one key challenge with any new project is communication.

    The company also needed to navigate the simplification of a previously complex process; end users could be familiar with any of the 37 different change processes or 25 different change management systems of record.

    Top-level buy-in was another concern.

    Results

    Intel first communicated the process changes by publishing the vision and strategy for the project with top management sponsorship.

    The CIO published all of the new change policies, which were supported by the Change Governance Council.

    Intel cited the reason for success as the designation of a Policy and Guidance Council – a group designed to own communication and enforcement of the new policies and processes put in place.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You now have an outline of your new change management process. The hard work starts now for an effective implementation. Make use of the communications plan to socialize the new process with stakeholders and the roadmap to stay on track.

    Remember as you are starting your implementation to keep your documents flexible and treat them as “living documents.” You will likely need to tweak and refine the processware and templates several times to continually improve the process. Furthermore, don’t shy away from seeking feedback from your stakeholders to gain buy-in.

    Lastly, keep an eye on your progress with objective, data-driven metrics. Leverage the trends in your data to drive your decisions. Be sure to revisit the maturity assessment not only to measure and visualize your progress, but to gain insight into your next steps.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic office in Toronto, Ontario, Canada to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.2 Complete a Change Management Maturity Assessment

    Run through the change management maturity assessment with tailored commentary for each action item outlining context and best practices.

    2.2.1 Plot the Process for a Normal Change

    Build a normal change process using Info-Tech’s Change Management Process Library template with an analyst helping you to right size the process for your organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Stabilize Release and Deployment Management

    Maintain both speed and control while improving the quality of deployments and releases within the infrastructure team.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Don’t let persistent problems govern your department.

    Select Bibliography

    AXELOS Limited. ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4th edition. TSO, 2019, pp. 118–120.

    Behr, Kevin and George Spafford. The Visible Ops Handbook: Implementing ITIL in 4 Practical and Auditable Steps. IT Revolution Press. 2013.

    BMC. “ITIL Change Management.” BMC Software Canada, 22 December 2016.

    Brown, Vance. “Change Management: The Greatest ROI of ITIL.” Cherwell Service Management.

    Cisco. “Change Management: Best Practices.” Cisco, 10 March 2008.

    Grove, Daniel. “Case Study ITIL Change Management Intel Corporation.” PowerShow, 2005.

    ISACA. “COBIT 5: Enabling Processes.” ISACA, 2012.

    Jantti, M. and M. Kainulainen. “Exploring an IT Service Change Management Process: A Case Study.” ICDS 2011: The Fifth International Conference on Digital Society, 23 Feb. 2011.

    Murphy, Vawns. “How to Assess Changes.” The ITSM Review, 29 Jan. 2016.

    Nyo, Isabel. “Best Practices for Change Management in the Age of DevOps.” Atlassian Engineering, 12 May 2021.

    Phillips, Katherine W., Katie A. Liljenquist, and Margaret A. Neale. “Better Decisions Through Diversity.” Kellogg Insight, 1 Oct. 2010.

    Pink Elephant. “Best Practices for Change Management.” Pink Elephant, 2005.

    Sharwood, Simon. “Google broke its own cloud by doing two updates at once.” The Register, 24 Aug. 2016.

    SolarWinds. “How to Eliminate the No: 1 Cause of Network Downtime.” SolarWinds Tech Tips, 25 Apr. 2014.

    The Stationery Office. “ITIL Service Transition: 2011.” The Stationary Office, 29 July 2011.

    UCISA. “ITIL – A Guide to Change Management.” UCISA.

    Zander, Jason. “Final Root Cause Analysis and Improvement Areas: Nov 18 Azure Storage Service Interruption.” Microsoft Azure: Blog and Updates, 17 Dec. 2014.

    Appendix I: Expedited Changes

    Employ the expedited change to promote process adherence

    In many organizations, there are changes which may not fit into the three prescribed categories. The reason behind why the expedited category may be needed generally falls between two possibilities:

    1. External drivers dictate changes via mandates which may not fall within the normal change cycle. A CIO, judge, state/provincial mandate, or request from shared services pushes a change that does not fall within a normal change cycle. However, there is no imminent outage (therefore it is not an emergency). In this case, an expedited change can proceed. Communicate to the change requester that IT and the change build team will still do their best to implement the change without issue, but any extra risk of implementing this expedited change (compared to an normal change) will be absorbed by the change requester.
    2. The change requester did not prepare for the change adequately. This is common if a new change process is being established (and stakeholders are still adapting to the process). Change requesters or the change build team may request the change to be done by a certain date that does not fall within the normal change cycle, or they simply did not give the CAB enough time to vet the change. In this case, you may use the expedited category as a metric (or a “Hall of Shame” example). If you identify a department or individual that frequently request expedited changes, use the expedited category as a means to educate them about the normal change to discourage the behavior moving forward.

    Two possible ways to build an expedited change category”

    1. Build the category similar to an emergency change. In this case, one difference would be the time allotted to fully obtain authorization of the change from the E-CAB and business owner before implementing the change (as opposed to the emergency change workflow).
    2. Have the expedited change reflect the normal change workflow. In this case, all the same steps of the normal change workflow are followed except for expedited timelines between processes. This may include holding an impromptu CAB meeting to authorize the change.

    Example process: Expedited Change Process

    The image is a flowchart, showing the process for Expedited Change.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Appendix II: Optimize IT Change Management in a DevOps Environment

    Change Management cannot be ignored because you are DevOps or Agile

    But it can be right-sized.

    The core tenets of change management still apply no matter the type of development environment an organization has. Changes in any environment carry risk of degrading functionality, and must therefore be vetted. However, the amount of work and rigor put into different stages of the change life cycle can be altered depending on the maturity of the development workflows. The following are several stage gates for change management that MUST be considered if you are a DevOps or Agile shop:

    • Intake assessment (separation of changes from projects, service requests, operational tasks)
      • Within a DevOps or Agile environment, many of the application changes will come directly from the SDLC and projects going live. It does not mean a change must go through CAB, but leveraging the pre-approved category allows for an organization to stick to development lifecycles without being heavily bogged down by change bureaucracy.
    • Technical review
      • Leveraging automation, release contingencies, and the current SDLC documentation to decrease change risk allows for various changes to be designated as pre-approved.
    • Authorization
      • Define the authorization and dependencies of a change early in the lifecycle to gain authorization and necessary signoffs.
    • Documentation/communication
      • Documentation and communication are post-implementation activities that cannot be ignored. If documentation is required throughout the SDLC, then design the RFC to point to the correct documentation instead of duplicating information.

    "Understand that process is hard and finding a solution that fits every need can be tricky. With this change management process we do not try to solve every corner case so much as create a framework by which best judgement can be used to ensure maximum availability of our platforms and services while still complying with our regulatory requirements and making positive changes that will delight our customers.“ -IT Director, Information Cybersecurity Organization

    Five principals for implementing change in DevOps

    Follow these best practices to make sure your requirements are solid:

    People

    The core differences between an Agile or DevOps transition and a traditional approach are the restructuring and the team behind it. As a result, the stakeholders of change management must be onboard for the process to work. This is the most difficult problem to solve if it’s an issue, but open avenues of feedback for a process build is a start.

    DevOps Lifecycles

    • Plan the dev lifecycle so people can’t skirt it. Ensure the process has automated checks so that it’s more work to skirt the system than it is to follow it. Make the right process the process of least resistance.
    • Plan changes from the start to ensure that cross-dependencies are identified early and that the proposed implementation date is deconflicted and visible to other change requesters and change stakeholders.

    Automation

    Automation comes in many forms and is well documented in many development workflows. Having automated signoffs for QA/security checks and stakeholders/cross dependency owner sign offs may not fully replace the CAB but can ease the burden on discussions before implementation.

    Contingencies

    Canary releases, phased releases, dark releases, and toggles are all options you can employ to reduce risk during a release. Furthermore, building in contingencies to the test/rollback plan decreases the risk of the change by decreasing the factor of likelihood.

    Continually Improve

    Building change from the ground up doesn’t meant the process has to be fully fledged before launch. Iterative improvements are possible before achieving an optimal state. Having the proper metrics on the pain points and bottlenecks in the process can identify areas for automation and improvement.

    Increasing the proportion of pre-approved changes

    Leverage the traditional change infrastructure to deploy changes quickly while keeping your risk low.

    • To designate a change as a pre-approved change it must have a low risk rating (based on impact and likelihood). Fortunately, many of the changes within the Agile framework are designed to be small and lower risk (at least within application development). Putting in the work ahead of time to document these changes, template RFCs, and document the dependencies for various changes allows for a shift in the proportion of pre-approved changes.
    • The designation of pre-approved changes is an ongoing process. This is not an overnight initiative. Measure the proportion of changes by category as a metric, setting goals and interim goals to shift the change proportion to a desired ratio.

    The image is a bar graph, with each bar having 3 colour-coded sections: Emergency, Normal, and Pre-Approved. The first bar is before, where the largest change category is Normal. The second bar is after, and the largest change category is Pre-Approved.

    Turn your CAB into a virtual one

    • The CAB does not have to fully disappear in a DevOps environment. If the SDLC is built in a way that authorizes changes through peer reviews and automated checks, by the time it’s deployed, the job of the CAB should have already been completed. Then the authorization stage-gate (traditionally, the CAB) shifts to earlier in the process, reducing the need for an actual CAB meeting. However, the change must still be communicated and documented, even if it’s a pre-approved change.
    • As the proportion of changes shifts from a high degree of normal changes to a high degree of pre-approved changes, the need for CAB meetings should decrease even further. As an end-state, you may reserve actual CAB meetings for high-profile changes (as defined by risk).
    • Lastly, change management does not disappear as a process. Periodic reviews of change management metrics and the pre-approved change list must still be completed.

    Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}304|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $102,414 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Microsoft licensing is complicated. Often, the same software can be licensed a number of ways. It’s difficult to know which edition and licensing model is best.
    • Licensing and features often change with the release of new software versions, compounding the problem by making it difficult to stay current.
    • In tough economic times, IT is asked to reduce capital and operating expenses wherever possible. As one of the top five expense items in most enterprise software budgets, Microsoft licensing is a primary target for cost reduction.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough needs assessment and document the results. Well-documented needs will be your best asset in navigating Microsoft licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Beware the bundle. Be aware when purchasing the M365 suite that there is no way out. Negotiating a low price is critical, as all leverage swings to Microsoft once it is on your agreement.
    • If the cloud doesn’t fit, be ready to pay up or start making room. Microsoft has drastically reduced discounting for on-premises products, support has been reduced, and product rights have been limited. If you are planning to remain on premises, be prepared to pay up.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand what your organization needs and what your business requirements are. It’s always easier to purchase more later than try to reduce your spend.
    • Complete cost calculations carefully, as the cloud might end up costing significantly more for the desired feature set. However, in some scenarios, it may be more cost efficient for organizations to license in the cloud.
    • If there are significant barriers to cloud adoption, discuss and document them. You’ll need this documentation in three years when it’s time to renew your agreement.

    Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing Deck – A deck to help you build a strategy for your Microsoft licensing renewal.

    This storyboard will help you build a strategy for your Microsoft licensing renewal from conducting a thorough needs assessment to examining your licensing position, evaluating Microsoft's licensing options, and negotiations.

    • Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era – Phases 1-4

    2. Microsoft Cloud Products Cost Modeler – A tool to model estimated costs for Microsoft's cloud products.

    The Microsoft Cloud Products Cost Modeler will provide a rough estimate of what you can expect to pay for Office 365 or Dynamics CRM licensing, before you enter into negotiations. This is not your final cost, but it will give you an idea.

    • Microsoft Cloud Products Cost Modeler

    3. Microsoft Licensing Purchase Reference Guide - A template to capture licensing stakeholder information, proposed changes to licensing, and negotiation items.

    The Microsoft Licensing Purchase Reference Guide can be used throughout the process of licensing review: from initial meetings to discuss compliance state and planned purchases, to negotiation meetings with resellers. Use it in conjunction with Info-Tech's Microsoft Licensing Effective License Position Template.

    • Microsoft Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    4. Negotiation Timeline for Microsoft – A template to navigate your negotiations with Microsoft.

    This tool will help you plot out your negotiation timeline, depending on where you are in your contract negotiation process.

  • 6-12 months
  • Less than 3 months
    • Negotiation Timeline for Microsoft – Visio
    • Negotiation Timeline for Microsoft – PDF

    5. Effective Licensing Position Tool – A template to help you create an effective licensing position and determine your compliance position.

    This template helps organizations to determine the difference between the number of software licenses they own and the number of software copies deployed. This is known as the organization’s effective license position (ELP).

    • Effective Licensing Position Tool
    [infographic]

    Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}363|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,110 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • Statistics show that the top priority of 85% of CIOs is insight and intelligence. Yet an appetite for intelligence does not mean that business intelligence initiatives will be an automatic success. In fact, many industry studies found that only 30% to 50% of organizations considered their BI initiative to be a complete success. It is, therefore, imperative that organizations take the time to select and implement a BI suite that aligns with business goals and fosters end-user adoption.
    • The multitude of BI offerings creates a busy and sometimes overwhelming vendor landscape. When selecting a solution, you have to make sense of the many offerings and bridge the gap between what is out there and what your organization needs.
    • BI is more than software. A BI solution has to effectively address business needs and demonstrate value through content and delivery once the platform is implemented.
    • Another dimension of the success of BI is the quality and validity of the reports and insights. The overall success of the BI solution is only as good as the quality of data fueling them.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Business intelligence starts with data management. Without data management, including governance and data quality capabilities, your BI users will not be able to get the insights they need due to inaccurate and unavailable data.
    • When selecting a BI tool, it is crucial to ensure that the tool is fit for the purpose of the organization. Ensure alignment between the business drivers and the tool capabilities.
    • Self-serve BI requires a measured approach. Self-serve BI is meant to empower users to make more informed and faster decisions. But uncontrolled self-serve BI will lead to report chaos and prevent users from getting the most out of the tool. You must govern self-serve before it gets out of hand.

    Impact and Result

    • Evaluate your organization and land yourself into one of our three BI use cases. Find a BI suite that best suits the use case and, therefore, your organization.
    • Understand the ever-changing BI market. Get to know the established vendors as well as the emerging players.
    • Define BI requirements comprehensively through the lens of business, data, architecture, and user groups. Evaluate requirements to ensure they align with the strategic goals of the business.

    Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should select and implement a business intelligence and analytics solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch a BI selection project

    Promote and get approval for the BI selection and implementation project.

    • Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution – Phase 1: Launch a BI Selection Project
    • BI Score Calculator
    • BI Project Charter

    2. Select a BI solution

    Select the most suitable BI platform.

    • Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution – Phase 2: Select a BI Solution
    • BI Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool
    • BI Planning and Scoring Tool
    • BI Vendor Demo Script
    • BI Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • BI Request for Proposal Template

    3. Implement the BI solution

    Build a sustainable BI program.

    • Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution – Phase 3: Implement the BI Solution
    • BI Test Plan Template
    • BI Implementation Planning Tool
    • BI Implementation Work Breakdown Structure Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch a BI Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Identify the scope and objectives of the workshop.

    Discuss the benefits and opportunities related to a BI investment.

    Gain a high-level understanding of BI and the BI market definitions and details.

    Outline a project plan and identify the resourcing requirements for the project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine workshop scope.

    Identify the business drivers and benefits behind a BI investment.

    Outline the project plan for the organization’s BI selection project.

    Determine project resourcing.

    Identify and perform the steps to launch the organization’s selection project.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify business drivers for investing in process automation technology.

    1.2 Identify the organization’s fit for a BI investment.

    1.3 Create a project plan.

    1.4 Identify project resourcing.

    1.5 Outline the project’s timeline.

    1.6 Determine key metrics.

    1.7 Determine project oversight.

    1.8 Complete a project charter.

    Outputs

    Completion of a project charter

    Launched BI selection project

    2 Analyze BI Requirements and Shortlist Vendors

    The Purpose

    Identify functional requirements for the organization’s BI suite.

    Determine technical requirements for the organization’s BI suite.

    Identify the organization’s alignment to the Vendor Landscape’s use-case scenarios.

    Shortlist BI vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented functional requirements.

    Documented technical requirements.

    Identified use-case scenarios for the future BI solution.

    Activities

    2.1 Interview business stakeholders.

    2.2 Interview IT staff.

    2.3 Consolidate interview findings.

    2.4 Build the solution’s requirements package.

    2.5 Identify use-case scenario alignment.

    2.6 Review Info-Tech’s BI Vendor Landscape results.

    2.7 Create custom shortlist.

    Outputs

    Documented requirements for the future solution.

    Identification of the organization’s BI functional use-case scenarios.

    Shortlist of BI vendors.

    3 Plan the Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Identify the steps for the organization’s implementation process.

    Select the right BI environment.

    Run a pilot project.

    Measure the value of your implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Install a BI solution and prepare the BI solution in a way that allows intuitive and interactive uses.

    Keep track of and quantify BI success.

    Activities

    3.1 Select the right environment for the BI platform.

    3.2 Configure the BI implementation.

    3.3 Conduct a pilot to get started with BI and to demonstrate BI possibilities.

    3.4 Promote BI development in production.

    Outputs

    A successful BI implementation.

    BI is architected with the right availability.

    BI ROI is captured and quantified.

    Terms and Conditions for consulting to businesses

    By signing an agreement with Gert Taeymans bvba, Client declares that he agrees with the Terms and Conditions referred to hereafter. Terms and conditions on Client's order form or any other similar document shall not be binding upon Gert Taeymans bvba.

    The prices, quantities and delivery time stated in any quotation are not binding upon Gert Taeymans bvba. They are commercial estimates only which Gert Taeymans bvba will make reasonable efforts to achieve. Prices quoted in final offers will be valid only for 30 days. All prices are VAT excluded and do not cover expenses, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Gert Taeymans bvba reserves the right to increase a quoted fee in the event that Client requests a variation to the work agreed.

    The delivery times stated in any quotation are of an indicative nature and not binding upon Gert Taeymans bvba, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Delivery times will be formulated in working days. In no event shall any delay in delivery be neither cause for cancellation of an order nor entitle Client to any damages.

    Amendments or variations of the initial agreement between Client and Gert Taeymans bvba will only be valid when accepted by both parties in writing.

    Any complaints concerning the performance of services must be addressed to Gert Taeymans bvba in writing and by registered mail within 7 working days of the date of the performance of the services.

    In no event shall any complaint be just cause for non-payment or deferred payment of invoices. Any invoice and the services described therein will be deemed irrevocably accepted by Client if no official protest of non-payment has been sent by Client within 7 working days from the date of the mailing of the invoice.

    Client shall pay all invoices of Gert Taeymans bvba within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of invoice unless otherwise agreed in writing by Gert Taeymans bvba. In the event of late payment, Gert Taeymans bvba may charge a monthly interest on the amount outstanding at the rate of two (2) percent with no prior notice of default being required, in which case each commenced month will count as a full month. Any late payment will entitle Gert Taeymans bvba to charge Client a fixed handling fee of 300 EUR. All costs related to the legal enforcement of the payment obligation, including lawyer fees, will be charged to Client.

    In no event will Gert Taeymans bvba be liable for damages of any kind, including without limitation, direct, incidental or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, damages for lost profits, business interruption and loss of programs or information) arising out of the use of Gert Taeymans bvba services.

    Gert Taeymans bvba collects personal data from Client for the performance of its services and the execution of its contracts. Such personal data can also be used for direct marketing, allowing Gert Taeymans bvba to inform Client of its activities on a regular basis. If Client objects to the employment of its personal data for direct marketing, Client must inform Gert Taeymans bvba on the following address: gert@gerttaeymans.consulting.

    Client can consult, correct or amend its personal data by addressing such request to Gert Taeymans bvba by registered mail. Personal data shall in no event be sold, rented or made available to other firms or third parties where not needed for the execution of the contract. Gert Taeymans bvba reserves the right to update and amend its privacy policy from time to time to remain consistent with applicable privacy legislation.

    The logo of the Client will be displayed on the Gert Taeymans bvba website, together with a short description of the project/services.

    Any changes to Client’s contact information such as addresses, phone numbers or e-mail addresses must be communicated to Gert Taeymans bvba as soon as possible during the project.

    Both parties shall maintain strict confidence and shall not disclose to any third party any information or material relating to the other or the other's business, which comes into that party's possession and shall not use such information and material. This provision shall not, however, apply to information or material, which is or becomes public knowledge other than by breach by a party of this clause.

    Gert Taeymans bvba has the right at any time to change or modify these terms and conditions at any time without notice.

    The agreement shall be exclusively governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Belgium. The competent courts of Antwerp, Belgium will finally settle any dispute about the validity, the interpretation or the execution of this agreement.

    These Terms and Conditions are the only terms and conditions applicable to both parties.

    If any provision or provisions of these Terms and Conditions shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, such provision shall be enforced to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, and the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby.